For Reference Not to be taken from this room Northeastern University Basic College Bulletin 1985-1986 College of Arts and Sciences Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions College of Business Administration College of Computer Science College of Criminal Justice College of Engineering School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) College of Nursing College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions University College (Alternative Freshman-Year Program) The New England Association of Schools and Colleges accredits schools and colleges in the six New England states. Membership in one of the six regional accrediting associations in the United States indicates that the school or college has been carefully evaluated and found to meet standards agreed upon by qualified educators. Colleges support the efforts of public school and commu- nity officials to have their secondary schools meet the standards of membership. Northeastern University supports the efforts of secondary school officials and governing bodies to have their schools achieve regional accredited status to provide reliable assurance of the quality of the educational preparation of its applicants for admission. The Northeastern University Bulletin (USPS 989-040) is published by Northeast- ern University at 360 Huntington Avenue, Boston, Massachusetts 021 15, six times a year; once in January, twice in August, once in September, and twice in October. Second-Class Postage Paid at Boston, Massachusetts, and at addi- tional mailing offices. Volume XIII, Number 3, August 30, 1985. POSTMASTER: send address changes to Northeastern University, 360 Hunting- ton Avenue, Boston, Massachusetts 021 15. Delivery of Services The University assumes no liability, and hereby expressly negates the same, for failure to provide or delay in providing educational or related services or facili- ties or for any other failure or delay in performance arising out of or due to causes beyond the reasonable control of the University, which causes include, without limitation, power failure, fire, stnkes by University employees or others, damage by the elements and acts of public authorities. The University will, how- ever, exert reasonable efforts, when in its judgment it is appropriate to do so, to provide comparable or substantially equivalent services, facilities or perfor- mance, but its inability or failure to do so shall not subject it to liability. The Northeastern University Bulletin contains current information regarding the University calendar, admissions, degree requirements, fees, and regulations, and such information is not intended to be and should not be relied upon as a statement of the University's contractual undertakings. Northeastern University reserves the right in its sole judgment to promulgate and change rules and regulations and to make changes of any nature in its program, calendar, admissions policies, procedures and standards, degree re- quirements, fees, and academic schedule whenever it is deemed necessary or desirable, including, without limitation, changes in course content, the resched- uling of classes, cancelling of scheduled classes and other academic activities and requiring or affording alternatives for scheduled classes or other academic activities, in any such case giving such notice as is reasonably practicable un- der the circumstances. Northeastern University will do its best to make available to you the finest education, the most stimulating atmosphere and the most congenial conditions it can provide. But the quality and the rate of progress of your academic career is in large measure dependent upon your own abilities, commitment, and effort. This is equally true with respect to professional advancement upon completion of the degree or program in which you are enrolled. The University cannot guar- antee that you will obtain or succeed at any particular job; that will depend upon your own skills, achievement, presentation, and other factors such as market conditions at that time. Similarly, in many professions and occupations there are increasing requirements imposed by federal and state statutes and regulatory agencies for certification or entry into a particular field. These may change dur- ing the period of time when you are at Northeastern and they may vary from state to state and from country to country. While the University stands ready to help you find out about these requirements and changes, it is your responsibility to initiate the inquiry because the University has no other way of knowing what your expectations and understandings are. In brief, the University is there to offer you educational opportunities and choices and to assist you in finding the direction in which you want to steer your educational experience. But you are a partner in this venture with an obligation and responsibility to yourself. Northeastern University Publications 11.9.4a Tuition and Regulations Tuition rates, all fees, rules and regulations, courses, and course content are subject to revision by the President and the Board of Trustees at any time. Northeastern University is committed to a policy of equal opportunity for all stu- dents, employees, and applicants for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, sexual preference, age, national origin, or handicap or veteran status. The University prohibits discrimination in all matters involving admission, registration, and all official relationships with students, including evaluation of academic performance. Northeastern also prohibits discrimination against any employee regarding up- grading, demotion or transfer, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training. In addition. Northeastern adheres to Affirmative Action guidelines in all recruitment endeavors. Further, Northeastern will not condone any form -of sexual harassment, which is defined as the use of unwelcome sexual advances, requests for favors, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature, as an explicit or implicit condition of employment, as the basis for employment decisions, or to interfere with an individual's work performance by creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment. Inquiries concerning our equal opportunity policies may be referred to the Uni- versity Title IX Coordinator/Compliance Officer for Section 504 of The Rehabilita- tion Act of 1973, Affirmative Action Office, 175 Richards Hall, 437-2133. Northeastern's efforts to comply with the Title IX Education Amendments of 1972 and Section 504 of The Rehabilitation Act of 1973 are coordinated by the Dean and Director of Affirmative Action. Department of Undergraduate Admissions Northeastern University 360 Huntington Avenue Boston, Massachusetts 02115 Telephone: 617-437-2200 Contents A Message from the President ix Cooperative Education The Department of Cooperative Education 2 The Urban University Campus Highlights 8 Boston, the "Extended Campus" 11 Visitor Information Center 13 Academic Programs Undergraduate Programs 17 College of Arts and Sciences 21 Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions 97 College of Business Administration _ 125 College of Computer Science 145 College of CriminalJustice 151 College of Engineering 1 55 School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) 1 81 College of Nursing 191 College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions 195 Basic College Compensatory Programs 21 5 University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program 21 7 Other Schools and Colleges of the University 221 Academic Research 229 Undergraduate Admissions Department of Undergraduate Admissions 234 General Requirements for Entrance 235 Applying for Admission and Plans of Admission 238 Admission of Transfer Students 243 Required Deposits from Freshmen and Transfer Students 246 General and Special Health Requirements 246 College Expenses Tuition and Fees 250 Expenses for the Freshman Year 250 Expenses for Upperclassmen 251 Required Fees for All Students 251 Other Fees Refunds 252 253 Housing 255 Financial Assistance Financial Aid 260 State Assistance Programs 262 Federal Programs 262 University Scholarships 264 Other Scholarships 284 288 Honor Societies and Awards student Support Services and Resources University Libraries Freshman Orientation Programs Office of Freshman Affairs Academic Assistance Center Preprofessional Advising Department of Education Services The Counseling and Testing Center Academic Computer Services The Center for Instructional Technology Office of Minority Student Affairs Office of Multicultural Student Affairs The International Student Office International Student Information English Language Center University Health Services Office of Services for the Handicapped Department of Career Development and Placement Office of Parents' Services HELP Legal Service Student Activities Student Organizations Fraternities Sororities Sports Professional Societies Men's Athletics Women's Athletics Religious Life General Information Brief History Academic Policy Policy on International Programs and Services Alumni Association Gifts and Bequests ROTC Center for Cooperative Education Academic Calendar Governing Boards and Officers University Map Boston Access Map A Message from the President We find ourselves in the midst of a cultural revolution with effects as profound as those of the industrial revolution. At an ever-increasing pace, we are being propelled into an information age that is shaping our world. The challenge facing colleges and universities is to adapt their value systems to the sweeping impact of information technology. We must find a way to move forward while holding fast to the wisdom of the past. Northeastern University is a model for the modern university. We are constantly evolving to reflect the changes in our society. We recognize education as the preparation for life and the intelligent appreciation of life. The common theme of our programs is the combination of the quest for knowledge with the forging of a productive career path. The Cooperative Plan of Education, the cornerstone of Northeastern's na- tional and international reputation for the last seventy-five years, is our way of effectively coupling these objectives. By integrating learning with the demands of living, cooperative education enables students to understand the importance of continued learning throughout their lives. At Northeastern, a practical approach to higher education does not diminish our emphasis on academic life. We offer a broad spectrum of programs spanning professional fields and the liberal arts. Our distin- guished faculty have traditionally emphasized excellence in teaching as a professional goal. They are dedicated to pursuing innovative scholarship and generating new knowledge through research in areas as diverse as cancer detection, artificial intelligence, laser technology, and language and cognition. As an urban university located in the heart of Boston, one of Ameri- ca's richest cultural environments, Northeastern University is a dynamic and exciting place at which to study. The entire city is part of our "ex- tended campus." By taking advantage of the University's many and diverse programs, the Cooperative Education Plan, and the resources of our surroundings, Northeastern students have a unique opportunity to achieve well-rounded intellectual, cultural and social development. Kenneth G. Ryder President Cooperative Education Cooperative Education: An Education that Works Cooperative Education is based on the principle that what students learn in the workplace is just as valuable as what they learn in the classroom. By combining work and study, students gain greater insight into each. At Northeastern University, cooperative education is given such a high priority that it is considered a degree requirement for most programs. The University makes every effort to plan and carefully structure student work assignments. It also attempts whenever possible to integrate stu- dents' work experiences into their academic work. But the University cannot do it alone. A student's interest and enthusiasm play a crucial role in determining the quality of co-op experiences. The success of co- op, then, depends upon the cooperation of educators, students, and outside agencies to produce an integrated and relevant program. Studies have shown that the reinforcement of classroom learning by,' job responsibilities increases a student's motivation and self-confidence as well. Greater interest in academic work develops when students see the relation between co-op work and the principles they study in the classroom. Not only are co-op students able to evaluate career deci sions early in their college years, they gain meaningful work experience: before graduation and establish professional contacts and references. Finally, the salaries students earn on co-op assignments help defray tuition, room and board, books, and other expenses. The Department of Cooperative Education Paul M. Pratt, M.Ed., Dean Richard E. Sprague, M.B.A., M.Ed., C.A.G.S., Assistant Dean Kathy Sharkey-Jordan, M.Ed., Assistant to ttie Dean Professors Nancy J. Caruso, M.Ed. Charles F. Field, M.Ed. George K. Howe, M.Ed. Robert W. Miller, M.Ed. Associate Professors Boreslaw P. Berestecky, M.Ed. Betsey W. Blackmer, R.P.T., M.Ed. Richard L. Canale, M.Ed., C.A.G.S. Elizabeth A. Chilvers, M.Ed. Mark I. Conley, Jr., Ed.D. Robert D. Deterge, R.Ph., D.Ph. Philip W. Dunphy, M.Ed. Mary R. Flynn, R.N., M.Ed. Kenneth R. Hancock, Jr., B.S. Stephen M. Kane, Ed.D. Gerard J. Lavoie, M.P.A. Homer C. Littlefield, B.S. Judith A. Moll, M.S. Anthony R. Rotondi, M.Ed. ; WillieSmith, Jr., M.Ed. i Roderic W. Sommers, M.Ed Hugh J. Talbot, M.P.A. Leonard Zion, M.A. Assistant Professors Michael A. Ablove, M.Ed. Mary M. Doolan, B.A. Donald L. Eastridge, M.Div, Jean F. Egan, M.Ed. Kathleen L. Finn, R.N., M.Ed. Theresa A. Harrigan, M.Ed. JohnC. Mulhall, M.S. Ann C. Noonan, R.P.T., M.Ed. Veronica Leona Porter, M.Ed. Melvin W. Simms, Ed.D. William A. Sloane, M.B.A. Robert R. Tillman, M.Ed. instructors Joyce K. Fletcher, M.Ed. Louis v. Gaglini, B.A. Peter J. Mollo, M.Ed. 4 / Cooperative Education The Department of Cooperative Education administers the cooperative education programs for all undergraduate education' programs in the Basic Colleges and the graduate programs in Engineering. Participation in the Cooperative Plan of Education is required of all students in the Basic Colleges except those in the College of Arts and Sciences. Although most Arts and Sciences students choose to take advantage of co-op, the college offers a full-time program in which eight quarters of upperclass study may be completed in three years. Cooperative Education curricula leading to the baccalaureate degree require five years at Northeastern University. Programs consist of a freshman year of three consecutive quarters of full-time study followed by four upperclass years in which students alternate periods of class- room attendance with Cooperative Education assignments. Students are assigned a faculty coordinator-counselor team which is responsible for all phases of their cooperative program and which as- sists them in deriving greater value from their education at Northeastern. Personal interviews provide the basis for referral to specific opportunities that help students realize career objectives. The Department of Coop- erative Education keeps abreast of activities in specific areas in order to provide counseling on opportunities and trends. In general, co-op as- signments become increasingly professional as the students' education and abilities grow. Students may wish to participate in an activity other than paid employ- ment during a cooperative period. They may wish to travel abroad, to volunteer their services, or to take specialized courses at another insti- tution. Students may arrange time for these special activities with their coordinators. "^ k Cooperative Education / 5 Further details on the cooperative program are available in a booklet entitled Co-opportunities, which the Department of Undergraduate Ad- missions will be happy to send you on request. Life/Career Planning Program Joseph E. Barbeau, Ed.D., Director The fundamental mission of the Life/Career Planning Program is to offer students a variety of career-related services. Those who may be unde- cided about their academic major or career direction or who want to explore career options and formulate postgraduation plans may elect any of several courses which are open to all undergraduate majors. Students needing assistance with resumes, interviewing, cover letters or job survival techniques may attend regularly scheduled workshops or may use the drop-in resume critique service of the Career Resource Center, Also available in the Center is an "open-shelf collection of print materials and a computer terminal for obtaining information on jobs and careers, financial aid, and graduate and professional schools. International Cooperative Education Robert E. Vozzella, M.A., C.A.G.S., Director The International Cooperative Education Office offers a wide variety of services to domestic as well as international students. Through the Inter- national Exchange Program, qualified undergraduates are afforded the opportunity to be placed abroad for their cooperative work experience. Placements are currently available in the United Kingdom, Ireland, France, Germany, Sweden, Canada, and Israel for students whose ac- ademic, linguistic, and professional experience makes them appropriate candidates for positions abroad. International students may receive assistance on matters relating to their co-op employment, such as social security and tax information, as well as issues involving the verification of their immigration and co-op status. The course "Working in the United States" which has been expressly created to meet the needs of underclass international students is taught by the staff of the International Cooperative Education Office. It is de- signed to assist such students to compete more effectively for domestic cooperative education positions and to facilitate their adjustment into the American work force. New co-op programs currently are being developed in the home countries of international students where the economic and social con- ditions render such undertakings possible. Limited opportunities with various American Multinational Corporations are available for students majoring in engineering, computer science and business administration. ?i;ii :4 'i/*, The Urban University Campus Highlights Located on Huntington Avenue in the Back Bay section of Boston, the main campus of Northeastern University occupies fifty-five acres, includ- ing the same land on which the Boston Americans and the Pittsburgh Nationals played the first World Series baseball game in 1903. Today, the University still provides ready access to baseball games; it is located close to the Fenway section and Fenway Park, as well as to cultural landmarks such as Symphony Hall, the Museum of Fine Arts, and the Boston Public Library, among others. The "front door" to the campus is the Yard, or Quadrangle, facing Huntington Avenue, which is accessible to public transportation. The remaining sides of the Quadrangle are formed by Richards Hall, the Ell Student Center, and the Dodge Library. These three buildings were erected following an architectural design contest held in the early 1930s. Their white brick facades and clean lines form the nucleus of an archi- tectural unit that is maintained throughout much of the campus. The campus also reflects the fact that Northeastern is an urban uni- versity. Many University buildings bear the architectural design that characterizes the buildings surrounding the Quadrangle; other buildings have been acquired over the years and refurbished or recycled for the University's use. Many of these buildings were constructed before Northeastern selected its traditional architectural theme and reflect the more traditional warmth of old Boston. The campus itself has been planned to provide freedom of movement within the central academic area of classroom and laboratory buildings. During the ten-minute break between classes, students and faculty are able to reach their next classrooms along the walkways and secondary streets that provide ready access to all centrally located buildings. In addition, a network of underground corridors connects many of the buildings on campus, providing routes that are especially convenient during periods of inclement weather. Dunng the early 1960s, large dormitory facilities were added diago- nally across Huntington Avenue from the Quadrangle. In fact, Huntington Avenue currently forms an approximate divider between the education ■ buildings on the south and the dormitories to the north. Two blocks and a right turn away from the main quadrangle on cam- pus is the oldest indoor ice-hockey arena in the United States and one of the focal points for amateur athletics in the Boston area. Today, the Matthews Arena is primarily devoted to hockey and collegiate sports, but has expanded its university athletic focus to include all men's bas- ketball contests and many women's varsity contests. With more than million and a half dollars already invested in the Matthews Arena, the building is an architectural jewel and a credit to the community. As long as Northeastern owns the Matthews Arena, it will continue to meet the needs of the surrounding community as a superior recreational facility. As the University continues to expand, parking and recreational areas are periodically relocated on the edge of campus as new buildings are Campus Highlights/ 9 added to the central academic area. At present, the University is plan- ning construction around a second and new "front door" on the south- west border of the campus. In that area, a transit line will be relocated on the site of an old railroad line, and the station at Ruggles Street will 10 /Campus Highlights also coordinate local bus routes and a suburban commuter rail line. This area is also the location of the newest housing facility on campus, West Hall, a ten-story apartment-dormitory. Plans for the future of the University include the construction of some new buildings as well as upgrading of the old. Among the high- lights of the campus is its newest structure, the Snell Engineering Center. This five-story building accommodates the departments of Industrial En- gineering and Information Systems, Civil Engineering, Chemical Engi- neering, and Mechanical Engineering and the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College). The Snell Center adjoins the Dana Research Center, home of the departments of Physics and Electri- cal and Computer Engineering, creating an impressive academic com- plex. Cullinane Hall, which houses the College of Computer Science, is a fine example of renovation. The structure was the University's oldest and has been totally refurbished to meet the ever increasing needs of Northeastern's newest college. The Snell Center and a planned new library will not only provide more classrooms and research and study facilities, but will also physically form a quadrangle, the key design element of spatial organization at the University. The quadrangle will be an integral part of the new "front door" to the campus. A building constructed recently is the architecturally dramatic addition to the Law School. This one-story structure is half below grade, opening into a sunken garden, and has a landscaped plaza on its roof. Over a block long, this plaza is a focal point and gathering spot for the west campus area. Adjacent to this site, a semicircular classroom building has also been recently constructed. An ongoing renovation program is also providing more accessibility for the handicapped. Existing facilities throughout the University are being updated constantly to provide more efficient classroom, research, and office facilities while still retaining their traditional charm. 11 Boston, the "Extended Campus" It IS no accident that one out of every five Massachusetts students chooses Northeastern University for his or her college education. In addition to its innovative system of Cooperative Education, Northeast- ern's "extended campus" of Boston attracts students who want to take advantage of the many opportunities this world-class city offers. Located throughout metropolitan Boston, many of America's leading corporations and institutions provide Northeastern students with mean- ingful co-op assignments. Their offices and laboratories become class- rooms for students who want to participate in the world of work first- hand. Co-op employers help them gain the knowledge and judgment for a head start in launching their careers and the foundation on which to build them. For those who want to see the eclectic blend of historic and contem- porary Boston, there are the exciting shops and restaurants of Boston's nationally famous Quincy Market and the new Copley Place. Alongside the bustle of Haymarket in the North End, the ancient tradition of China- town, and the grace of the Public Garden is the strikingly bold architec- ture of Government Center, Copley Plaza, the State House, and the Christian Science Center. The John Hancock Observatory and the Pru- dential Skywalk offer excellent views of Boston, old and new. Among the hundreds of cultural attractions in Boston are the Museum of Fine Arts and Symphony Hall, both adjacent to the Northeastern cam- pus. The former provides free admission to its permanent collections and special international exhibitions for more than 16,000 Northeastern undergraduates. Also neighbors of Northeastern are the Isabella Stewart Gardner Museum, the Institute of Contemporary Art, the New England Conservatory of Music, the Christian Science Center, and the Boston Public Library. A short ride on mass transit brings students to the Mu- seum of Science, Hayden Planetarium, and the Theatre District. The home of more than sixty colleges and universities, greater Boston offers an ever-changing kaleidoscope of academic enrichment. Within walking distance of Northeastern are Massachusetts Institute of Tech- nology. Boston University, Simmons College, Emmanuel College, Mas- sachusetts College of Art, and Harvard Medical School. Also close by are Boston's world-renowned hospitals and their affiliated research fa- cilities. Best known as the birthplace of the American Revolution, Boston at- tracts thousands to the historical landmarks of its Freedom Trail every year. Among them are Paul Revere's House, the U.S.S. Constitution ("Old Ironsides"), Faneuil Hall, Beacon Hill, and the Boston Common. In recent years, a Harborwalk has introduced thousands more to the excit- ing sights on the Boston Waterfront, including the Boston Tea Party Ship and Museum. Boston revels in the competition of its professional sports teams— the Red Sox, Celtics, Bruins, and Patriots— and Northeastern students join in the excitement at Fenway Park, Boston Garden, and Sullivan Stadium. Each spring, runners from all over the world come to Boston to partici- pate in the Boston Marathon— the granddaddy of them all. In addition, the Charles River and the slopes of northern New England tempt North- eastern students with some of the best crewing and skiing in the country. 12 /Campus Highlights The list of professional, historical, cultural, educational and recrea- tional opportunities in Boston goes on and on. Although many of them are within walking distance of Northeastern, many others are easily ac- cessible by mass transit, which stops directly in front of the University. Northeastern, in partnership with many of the city's most prestigious institutions, encourages students to explore these opportunities to the fullest. 13 Visitor Information Center Christopher Mackey, B.A., Director The Visitor Information Center, located in 115 Richards Hall, provides information to visitors to the University Campus. The University map, A Guide to Northeastern University; All Roads Lead To Northeastern Uni- versity; The Northeastern Alunnni Magazine; The Northeastern Edition; and other Northeastern catalogs, pamphlets, and brochures are all available at this convenient, central location. Staff members are ready to personally answer questions, give directions, and provide friendly and accurate advice about the University and its programs to visitors, stu- dents, staff, and faculty. Visitors may request a University Visitor Pass which will entitle them to a number of special services and premiums, including a special information kit, discounts at the University Bookstore and University events, complimentary posters, and free passes to the Museum of Fine Arts. With a 24-hour notice, visitors or their sponsors may request parking reservations by writing or calling the Visitor Infor- mation Center's main telephone number, 61 7-437-2736. The Center also produces The Northeastern University Events Line, an up-to-the-minute recorded listing of University activities and happenings of interest to the general public and the University community. To find out today's events, call 61 7-437-3281. Academic Programs Quarter-Hour Credits Northeastern University operates on a quarter-system calendar. All courses are evaluated in terms of quarter-hour credit. A quarter-hour credit is equal to three-fourths of a semester-hour credit. Classes at Northeastern are scheduled In different modules. In assessing quarter-hour weights for courses, the following statement applies: One quarter hour of credit Is equal to fifty minutes of Instruction per week, plus two hours of preparation. Undergraduate Programs / 1 7 Undergraduate Programs College of Arts and Sciences Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science African-American Studies Art, including a concentration in Architecture Biology Chemistry Economics English Geology History * Human Services Journalism Linguistics Mathematics Modern Languages (French, German, Italian, Russian, Spanish) Music Philosophy Physics Applied Physics ** Political Science (including a concentration in Public Administration) Psychology Sociology/Anthropology Speech Communication Theatre and Dance Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Bachelor of Science in Education Early Childhood Education Elementary Education with a minor in Special Education, or one of these emphases: Humanities Reading-Language Science and Mathematics Social Sciences English as a Second Language Human Services Physical Education with emphases in: Athletic Training Cardiovascular Health and Exercise Dance Education Elementary School Secondary School School and Community Health Education Bachelor of Science in Physical Therapy Bachelor of Science in Recreation and Leisure Studies with concentrations in: Outdoor Recreation Recreation Management Therapeutic Recreation * Bachelor of Arts only ** Bachelor of Science only 18 / Undergraduate Programs College of Business Administration Bachelor of Science in Business Administration Accounting Entrepreneurship and New Venture Management Finance and Insurance Human Resources Management International Business Management Marketing Transportation and Physical Distribution Management College of Computer Science Bachelor of Science in Computer Science Emphasis tracks in: Artificial Intelligence Data Base Management Data Structures and Computer Architecture Discrete/Continuous Mathematical Foundations Microcomputer and Time-Sharing Computer Use Programming Languages Software Design College of Criminal Justice Bachelor of Science in Criminal Justice Emphasis tracks in: Corrections Law Enforcement Legal Studies Security and Crime Prevention College of Engineering Bachelor of Science Chemical Engineering * Civil Engineering (Environmental option available) * Electrical Engineering (Computer Engineering and Power Systems options available) Industrial Engineering * Mechanical Engineering Unspecified-general Engineering Program Bachelor of Science/Master of Science Five-year Cooperative Program Degrees in: Electrical Engineering Industrial Engineering Mechanical Engineering School of Engineeering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) Bachelor of Engineering Technology Five-Year Day Cooperative Programs Computer Technology i Electncal Engineering Technology Mechanical Engineering Technology ; Transfer, Day Cooperative Program ! Aerospace Maintenance Engineering Technology ! Also offered as part-time evening program* Undergraduate Programs/ 19 College of Nursing Bachelor of Science in Nursing Five-year Day Cooperative Education Program Transfer Program (for registered nurses who want to earn their Bachelor of Science in Nursing) College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Bachelor of Science Health Record Administration Medical Laboratory Science (Medical Technology) Pharmacy Respiratory Therapy Toxicology Associate in Science Medical Laboratory Science Respiratory Therapy Open-Option: freshman-year program for undeclared health majors University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program Degree requirements: 1 72-222 quarter hours (requirements vary by pro- gram). mtf(^ College of Arts and Sciences Richard Astro, Ph.D., Dean J. Edward Neighbor, Ph.D., Associate Dean and Director of Graduate School Timothy P. Perkins, M.A., Assistant Dean and Director of tlie Division of Special Programs Ruthann T. Stiles, M.A., Assistant Dean (Financial Affairs) Deborah H. Stein, M.Ed., Assistant Dean (Graduate and Undergraduate Student Affairs) Gail F. Leclerc, M.Ed., Assistant to the Dean (Undergraduate Student Affairs) Suzanne E. Marchand, M.A., Assistant to tfie Dean (Graduate Student Affairs) Mary Mello, M.A., Special Assistant to the Dean (Administrative and Curriculum Affairs) Suzanne L. Robblee, M.A., Assistant to the Dean (Special Programs) Paula L. Sossen, M.Ed., Assistant to the Dean (Undergraduate Student Affairs) Program Alms Studies in a broad distribution of disciplines in Arts and Sciences are universally regarded as the core of higher education. For this reason, nearly all students in the University— no matter what disciplines they choose for their career training— devote a substantial portion of their studies to the arts and sciences. The College of Arts and Sciences comprises a wide variety of pro- grams spanning an enormous range of human knowledge and activity. These programs are grouped informally into divisions as follows: (1 ) Fine Arts, (2) Humanities, (3) Natural Sciences, including Mathematics, and (4) Social Sciences. The College as a whole emphasizes the general education of students; within each division, the disciplines tend to offer a common preprofessional orientation and emphasis. In addition, the College offers a large number of interdisciplinary pro- grams as well as extradisciplinary opportunities for the ennchment of learning. These are grouped into a division of Special Programs. The division includes exchange programs with other institutions, both nation- ally and internationally, for employment and/or study; programs for ex- tended studies in field settings at sea and abroad; and cultural programs involving affiliations with professional performing arts organizations — to name a few. At present the division comprises over thirty different spe- cial programs of various types. These programs are described at the end of the Arts and Sciences section of this Bulletin. Graduates of the College find they are prepared for a multitude of employment opportunities in all walks of life. Many choose to accept employment directly, following receipt of the bachelor's degree. Others choose to continue their training by going on to graduate-level studies, for example, in business, law, or medicine. Others decide to pursue advanced study in an area closely related to their undergraduate field. Four- and Five-Year Programs in all programs, students of the Col- lege have the option of choosing a four-year, full-time track or the five- year Cooperative Plan. The five-year plan offers opportunities for regular "real world" employment and income in an area often related to the 22 / College of Arts and Sciences chosen area of academic work. Students are normally eligible to partic- ipate in [he Cooperative Plan when they achieve sophomore status. Major Programs Entering students are invited to express a "major preference" for one of the major programs, and this, together with the core requirements of the College, determines the course of studies in the first and second years. There is considerable flexibility, however, and students often change their preferences during this period. Formal certification of the major choice, accomplished by submission and approval of a petition, nor- mally takes place at the beginning of the third year, when the transition to the "upper division" of the College occurs. Students entering the lower division of the College may wish to petition later for transfer to the upper division of the College of Business or the College of Computer Science. Arts and Sciences freshmen with this intention should indicate "Business" or "Computer Science" as the initial major preference on the application. Students in the College may earn a Bachelor of Arts degree in all major programs or a Bachelor of Science degree in most major pro- grams. Honors Program The Honors Program of the College exists to meet the needs of highly motivated and especially successful students. It is an optional program providing an assortment of special courses and activities for students who are invited to participate. The Honors Program sponsors, through the efforts of an advisory council of students in the program and a faculty honors committee, a number of cultural, recreational, and social events, as well as a speaker series. Some of these events are made available by the program for the benefit of the entire University community. Others afford honors students alone the opportunity to associate with peers in circumstances less for- mal than the classroom, where they can get better acquainted and par- ticipate in the casual discussions that make up such an important part of a university education. The Honors Curriculum consists of (1) some of the courses required for all, or elected by many, students; (2) interdisciplinary and survey seminars as honors alternatives for elective courses; (3) one-credit-hour "mini-courses" on a wide variety of subjects; and (4) the opportunity for students to undertake a special Honors Project under the supervision of a faculty adviser in the junior and senior years. The Honors Program is designed to be consistent with participation in the other programs of the College, including a major in any of the de- partments. The Honors Program makes some extra demands, but be- cause the courses are limited in size, aim for greater than usual breadth and depth of inquiry, and promote close interaction between faculty and students, the program offers especially stimulating educational oppor- tunities. A student's participation in any honors course is noted clearly on his or her transcript— something that may be useful when students apply for employment or admission to graduate school. Students who participate in the Honors Program may be eligible for Honors Program Distinction at graduation. The requirement for this no- tation on the student's transcnpt is that a student completes at least College of Arts and Sciences / 23 twenty-four quarter hours of course work in tfie program, including at least one survey seminar and not more tfian eighit quarter hours of credit for a junior/senior honors project. Since the fall of 1983, eligible students from other colleges in the University have been invited to participate in the Honors Program courses and activities. Advising and Placement Upon acceptance to the College, students are placed into freshmen and sophomore courses designed to suit their abilities, needs, and prospec- tive major affiliations. The placement process involves close consultation between students and faculty advisers from the major programs. The particular studies advised for freshmen fall into several placement categories, as follows: (1) honors, (2) regular, (3) regular with modifica- tion, and (4) special. The latter two categories may require that students undertake studies in skill development to improve their chances of suc- cess in college. These placements are determined by faculty, subject to review by consultation during Orientation Week, before classes start in the fall quarter. Continued monitoring and mentoring by faculty and/or staff advisers aids students in appropriately preparing to enter their major fields of study. As in the freshman year, faculty guidance is available to upper-class students for maintaining satisfactory academic standing and gaining entry by petition to a major field of specialization. After the major choice is certified, students are formally affiliated with their department, its fac- ulty, and other students in the same major field. The Arts and Sciences Dean's Office, located in 403 Meserve Hall, is the central administrative office for all students majoring in Arts and Sciences programs. In addition to the academic counselors located in the various departments, the Dean's Office staff is available to all stu- dents for academic assistance. The counselors in the Dean's Office work closely with departmental advisers to help the student work out a pro- gram of study and take care of any problems that may ahse relating to administrative procedures. The Dean's Office is open from 8:30 to 4:30, Monday through Friday, during the fall, winter, and spring quarters, and from 8:00 to 5:30, Monday through Thursday, during the summer. Stu- dents are encouraged to make appointments with counselors at any of these times. The phone number is 437-3980. Student Services Cahners Hall Math/Writing Center All mathematics and English re- medial courses are taught in classrooms in Cahners Hall, the Math/ Writing Center. The facility includes a Writing Center and a Math Work- shop, where students may receive individual tutoring. In addition, Cah- ners Hall has five computer terminals and a printer which are used to teach problem-solving strategies in the remedial math courses. Preprofessional Advising The Pre-Health Professions Advisory Com- mittee, a University-wide group, offers preprofessional counseling for students interested in a career in medicine, dentistry, or related profes- sional medical fields. The Committee members are available to discuss the various medical fields, minimum admissions requirements, and ap- plication processes. For students preparing for a career in law, there are also a number of faculty members who can serve as advisers and resource personnel on related curricular and admissions questions. 24 / College of Arts and Sciences In addition, the Department of Career Development and Placement provides information and advice on procedures for admission, prepara- tion of applications, and the scheduling of appropriate admissions tests. For further information regarding the above, students should contact a counselor in the Arts and Sciences Dean's Office. Program Descriptions and Regulations The following pages briefly describe each major in the College of Arts and Sciences. Within each division of the College, the majors are listed in alphabetical order. Summaries of the divisions can be found on the following pages: Fine Arts, page 25; Humanities, page 32; Natural Sci- ences and Mathematics, page 43; Social Sciences, page 58. A summary of the Special Programs in the College can be found on page 80. Following this is a brief description of each of these programs, listed in alphabetical order. Finally, a summary of general College conduct can be found on page 94. A more complete account of the regulations can be obtained from the Dean's Office of Arts and Sciences. A complete listing of individual courses offered by the College, includ- ing a short description of contents for each course, is given in the Basic Day Colleges Course Descriptions and Curriculum Guide, obtainable from the Registrar's Office. 25 Fine Arts To try to define the boundaries of an academic discipline is to invite controversy. This is nowhere more true than in the field of the arts. However, one can say that the term "arts," used without qualification (as in "Arts and Sciences"), refers to such disciplines as languages, litera- ture, and philosophy that are presumed to develop general intellectual ability and judgment and provide information of general cultural con- cern. Education in the arts is thus distinguishable from education in the sciences — which emphasizes knowledge of objective facts and laws — and especially from narrowly practical training, as for a particular profes- sion such as law or medicine. The term "Fine Arts" refers specifically to those disciplines concerned primarily with works produced or intended for beauty rather than mere utility. Thus, the term includes (but is not limited to) activities such as sculpture, painting and drawing, and, often, architecture, drama, music, and the dance. in the College of Arts and Sciences, the major disciplines comprising the Fine Arts division are as follows: Art and Architecture page 26 Music page 28 Theatre and Dance page 30 26 Art and Architecture Peter Serenyi, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professor Robert L. Wells, M.A., M.F.A. Associate Professors Samuel S. Bishop, M.A., M.F.A. Wheaton A. Holden, Ph.D. Assistant Professor T. Neal Rantoul, M.F.A. Professional Preparation Aims The visual arts, our oldest form of artistic expression, offer a deeper understanding of humanity and the cultural forces that have affected us historically. Moreover, as visual communication becomes more widespread in the contemporary world, the use and understanding of visual language must be seen as a necessary part of the educational process. In view of this, the aim of the Department is threefold: (1) to introduce art and architecture both as history and as creative activity in the context of a broad liberal arts education; (2) to offer a more focused study of the visual arts through a critical examination of both the language and con- tent of art and architecture in the context of a particular historical period, or through the hands-on experience of a studio setting; and (3) to pro- vide an opportunity for a solid academic foundation to those who wish to pursue a career in art and architecture, or related fields. One of the main resources of the Department is Boston itself, whose architecture spans three hundred years, whose museums are world fa- mous, whose galleries and cinemas offer the latest in their respective areas, and whose public library is one of the best of its kind. Learning to use these resources systematically is an all-embracing aim of the De- partment. Description of the Major The Department offers three concentrations within the major; (1) history of art and architecture, (2) studio art, and (3) architecture. Courses in the history of art and architecture cover the major periods of the Western World from Ancient to Modern, with a focus on nineteenth- and twentieth-century Europe and America. The studio concentration includes painting, drawing, printmaking, ar- chitecture, film, and photography. Studio courses are complemented by courses offered in the theory and criticism of these art forms. The best work created in the studio courses is exhibited in the annual student show at the University Art Gallery. The architecture concentration consists of courses in the history and theory of architecture and architectural design. Except for Introduction to Architectural Design, all design courses are to be taken at the Boston Architectural Center at 320 Newbury Street, Boston. A View of the Major The Department offers both a Bachelor of Arts degree and a Bachelor of Science degree program. In both programs the requirements for the major are the two-part survey course in art history, twelve electives in art and/or architecture, plus one elective each, in music and philosophy and two in history. With prior approval, art Art and Architecture / 27 courses not offered by the Department may be taken in one of the neighboring art schools or universities. Majors may pursue either a four-year full-time program or a five-year cooperative plan of study, Transfer from one to the other is possible, and registration in either can be reversed. Cooperative work assignments include positions in museums, libranes, histoncal collections, archives, and the Northeastern University Art Gallery. A View of the Minor The Department offers a minor program for stu- dents majoring in other fields of study. The program consists of a general minor and the following four concentrations: history of painting, architec- ture, film and photography, and studio art. The number of courses re- quired for the minor does not exceed seven. Students interested in the minor program should consult the Department. Special Programs See Center for Asian Studies, Boston Architectural Center Affiliation, Division of Fine Arts, Humanities Center, Independent Major, Insh Stud- ies, Media Studies Minor, Urban Studies Minor, International Co-op, and New England Conservatory affiliation, in the Special Programs section, page 80. 28 Music Joshua R. Jacobson, D.M.A., Associate Professor and Chairman Professor Roland L. Nadeau, M.M Lecturers Barbara Barry, Ph.D. Associate Professors Robert Ceely, M.A. Reginald Hache, A.D. Douglas Durant, M.F.A. Robin Hendrich, Ed.D. Anne C. Ewers, M.M. David Sonnenschein, D.M.A. George F. Litterst, M.M. Charles Mokotoff, M.M. Assistant Professors Edmond J. Moussally, MM. Kenneth P. Ayoob, D.M.A. j^g^en L Pokross, Ed.M. Ernest D. Brown, Ph.D. Julia A. Griffin, Ph.D. Dennis H. Miller, D.M.A. Professional Preparation Alms Music speaks directly to the soul. The experience of the nnaster- works of the musical art is one of the cornerstones of a humanistic education. The primary aim of the Department of Music is to foster the aesthetic appreciation of music by giving students the opportunity to gain the knowledge and skills necessary to understand and intelligently evaluate a musical composition. Courses are offered in the areas of general appreciation, music theory, the history of music (both Western and non-Western), applied music lessons, and aspects of the music industry. Performing ensembles di- rected by full-time music faculty provide the opportunity for students to experience first-hand the music which they have studied in the class- room. Furthermore, an extensive concert series offers a varied program of performances on campus by faculty, students, and guest artists. Description of the Major The Music Department offers a variety of options for the prospective musician. While the core of the program is the study of music, students can concentrate in a vahety of sub-special- ties such as World Music, African-American Music, Music and Technol- ogy, the Music Industry, Music Therapy, and Performance. The Music major is divided into two areas. In the first area, the histori- cal development of the great music literature of Western civilization is traced. The second area is comprised of a series of theory courses encompassing ear-training, keyboard skills, and analytic techniques. Students have use of Northeastern's modern facilities, which include a piano laboratory and a fully-equipped listening center. A View of the Major For the B.A. degree program in music, students must complete four courses in music theory, five courses in music his- tory, one course in keyboard proficiency, and two courses in musical analysis. Students must take a minimum of three electives in music, as well as three courses in Western Civilization, Art, and Drama. The re- mainder of the student's course work is selected from a broad base of electives in the College Core Curriculum. Music/ 29 A View of the Minor The Department offers a minor in Music for stu- dents majoring in other fields of study. The program consists of three courses in music theory, two courses in music history, one course in keyboard proficiency, and one elective in music. Special Programs See New England Conservatory, Boston Lyric Opera, Division of Fine Arts, Humanities Center, Independent Major, League of Composers — International Society for Contemporary Music, and International Co-op in the Special Programs section, page 80. 30 Theatre and Dance Mort S. Kaplan, M.A., Chairman Professor Eugene J. Blackman, M.A. Associate Professors Janet L. Bobcean, M.F.A. Jerrold A. Phillips, Ph.D. Assistant Professors James J. Moran, M.F.A. Ingrid H. Sonnichsen, M.A. Professional Preparation Aims Theatre, one of the most ancient of all art forms, is still a moving force in our society because it uniquely involves both the performer and the spectator to a degree unmatched by most creative and communi- cative arts. At Northeastern, students in the Theatre and Dance Department have the opportunity to enroll in a program of study that provides a balance betv\/een theory/history/literature courses and studio rehearsal and per- formance vuork. The curricula provide the student with the opportunity to obtain the background for advanced study on a graduate level or for a career in the professional theatre. Description of the IVIajor The undergraduate theatre major will be introduced to the total theatre experience. A diverse core program, con- sisting of twelve courses, is designed to develop understanding of the essentials necessary as a foundation upon which to elect one of the following seven concentrations: Acting, Sce'^.ic Design, Costume De- sign, Lighting Design, Literature/Cnticism, Dance, or Generalist Concen- tration. The classroom and stages are viewed as laboratories where theory is tested in rehearsal and performance. To enrich the means of perfor- mance, the facilities and faculty of other art departments — Music and Art and Architecture — are drawn upon. Theatre majors are encouraged to express individual creative and interpretative impulses, and with the support of a faculty adviser are often able to perform a variety of projects of their own initiation in areas of acting, directing, playwriting, design, or performance art. A View of the IVIajor The difference between the B.A. degree and the B.S. degree is one of flexibility and concentration. The B.S. degree al- lows the substitution of specialized field courses for certain of the Col- lege's general and language requirements. Besides completing the required courses offered by the College of Arts and Sciences toward a degree program, and before focusing on further course work within any particular concentration, all majors in all concentrations except Dance must complete forty-eight quarter hours of the departmental core, which includes such courses as Introduction to Acting, Concepts of Directing, Stagecraft, Introduction to Theatre De- sign, and Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music. Theatre majors with a Dance Concentration, before focusing on further course work within this Concentration, must complete a core of forty-seven quarter hours. In addition to various technique classes in Ballet, Jazz Dance, Modern Theatre and Dance/ 31 Dance, and Choreography, the following are just some of the courses in the core of the Dance Concentration: Dance in the Twentieth Century, Anatomy/Physiology, Kinesiology, and Dance in Cultural Perspective. The theatre represents the major public laboratory to the major, a place where theory is put into practice. All majors are expected to work in production each quarter in residence and fulfill a variety of crew assignments in construction, painting, sound, lighting, costuming, and box office work, as well as crew assignments for the running of a show. Whenever possible, majors are expected to serve as stage managers and assistant stage managers. Appearing in a production is not a sub- stitute for crew work and, when reasonably possible, all those concen- trating in a performance aspect should also participate in crew activities. It is also recommended that Theatre majors take a Physical Education skill course during each of the quarters in residence. The following courses, when available, are recommended: Modern Dance, Ballet, Jazz Dance, Tumbling, Gymnastics, Fencing, and Physical Condition- ing. Description of the Minor Students majoring in other departments may choose a minor in Theatre to complement their academic majors or to assist them in developing career goals by taking eight courses (thirty- two quarter hours). Closely supervised by a departmental faculty ad- viser, students may follow programs of study that offer a generalized or a specialized program. Specialized areas are in Acting, Scenic Design, Costume Design, Lighting Design, and Literature and Criticism. Accreditation Basic course work offered by this department adheres to the suggested minimum requirements for a Theatre degree as put forth by the American Theatre Association and enables the diligent stu- dent to prepare for the Graduate Placement Examination in Theatre. Special Programs See The Division of Fine Arts, Humanities Center, Sports and Leisure Studies, Film Studies, Irish Studies, Asian Studies, American Sign Lan- guage, and International Co-op in the Special Programs section, page 80. 32 Humanities The Humanities are those disciplines concerned with human beings and their cultures — especially subjective aspects of cultures, which invest life with meaning and value. Examples are the disciplines of languages and literature, and philosophy and religion. The Humanities are distinguished from the Social Sciences, which tend to focus on objective aspects of societies and on individual rela- tionships in, and to, society. This distinction, however, is helpful only if used with reservations. Most humanistic disciplines do not neatly con- form to one simple description or the other. In the broadest terms, of course, the Humanities can be viewed as encompassing the Fine Arts. This is because a sense of aesthetics is among the most basic of human values. As a result, all cultures are centrally concerned with issues of form and beauty. In the College of Arts and Sciences, the major disciplines comprising the Humanities division are as follows: English page 33 Journalism page 35 Modern Languages page 37 Philosophy and Religion page 39 Speech Communication page 41 33 English Kinley E. Roby, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Samuel J. Bernstein, Ph.D. Robert J. Blanch, Ph.D. Francis C. Blessington, Ph.D. Irene Fairley, Ph.D. Gary Goshgarian, Ph.D. Earl N. Harbert, Ph.D. Victor E. Howes, Ph.D. M. X. Lesser, Ph.D. James E. Nagel, Ph.D. Jane A. Nelson, Ph.D. Guy Rotella, Ph.D. Herbert L. Sussman, Ph.D. Arthur J. Weitzman, Ph.D. Paul C. Wermuth, Ph.D. Joseph E. Westlund, Ph.D. Associate Professors Timothy R. Donovan, Ph.D. Gerald R. Griffin, Ph.D. Ann Harleman-Stewart, Ph.D. Stuarts. Peterfreund, Ph.D. Lloyd A. Skiffington, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Richard Bullock, Ph.D. Michael Goodman, Ph.D. Janet Randall, Ph.D. Michael Ryan, Ph.D. Kristin Woolever, Ph.D. Lecturers Joseph deRoche, M.F.A. David lutein, M.A. Continuing Lecturers Beth I. Bennett, M.A. Vicki Casana, M.A. Faye F. Firnhaber-Cudmore, M.A. Paul Gallagher, M.Ed. Susan Goldwitz, M.A. Joseph L. lacovella, M.A. Constance Leigh, M.A. Ronald MacKay, M.A. RobinMcCormack, M.A. Eileen P. Nam, M.A. Virginia C. Parsons, M.A. James E. Poulos, M.A. Carolyn Sirois-Zuch, M.A. Instructor Mary Blitzer-Field, M.A. Assistant to the Coordinator of Introductory Writing Programs and Clinical Instructor of English Jennifer G. Hicks, M.A. Director of the Writing Center and Clinical Instructor of English Maureen Daly, M.A. Coordinator of English Studies and Clinical Instructor of English Jean S. Mullen-Smith, M.A. Professional Preparation Aims The English Department curriculum is diverse in its aims and flexible in its design. For the general University community, the curricu- lum offers possibilities in creative, expository, and technical writing; lin- guistics; and American, British, and foreign literature. For the preprofessional student — in law, medicine, business, engineering, or computer science — it offers a broad intellectual and cultural frame for specialist concerns. For the minor in English, it offers the possibility of concentration in literature, writing, or technical writing to supplement the major concerns of other disciplines. For the major in English, it offers the opportunity to prepare for careers in teaching and research, advertising and publishing, radio and television — indeed, any field in which com- munication and judgment go hand in hand. At a time when the price of imprecision in language is more than simple misunderstanding, and the cost of changing values more than 34 / College of Arts and Sciences personal uncertainty, the study of literature provides "a monnentary stay against confusion." It deals with the hard edge of being, an insight into the ways of men and women, at once clear and complex. In fact, the very structure of literature gives shape and meaning to the often formless experiences of life. And it does so with grace and force. Put another way, literature "tells it like it is," not statistically, not abstractly, but with the details of fully realized people in accessible worlds, in "imaginary gardens with real toads in them." Description of the Major There is flexibility enough in the curriculum requirements and its details to accommodate the pace and interest of a wide range of students. Members of the Department are available throughout the year to help and advise students, but the critical choices rest essentially with the student. The American literature requirement, for example, may be met by successfully completing courses from among such recent offerings as Major American Novels, The New England Re- naissance, American Realism, and American Romanticism. To this area, as to others, the Department regularly adds new courses and, hence, even more options. A View of the IWajor The curriculum for the major in English allows the student to take a wide vanety of courses while maintaining a strong background in the history of British and American literature. After com- pleting the freshman requirement, the English major takes survey courses, area courses (in language or writing, British literature, Ameri- can literature, major figure, genre), other electives, and, finally, a Junior- Senior Seminar as the culmination of study. A student has the opportu- nity to study science fiction, Kurt Vonnegut, topics in film, or children's literature, as well as Shakespeare, early American literature. Romantic poetry, and topics in literary criticism. In an effort to be responsive to the individual interests and academic needs of a particular student, inde- pendent study also may be arranged with an English instructor. A View of the IVIinor Students who would like to minor in English may choose the minor in literature or in writing, either expository or creative. There is also a minor in technical communication which is described in the Special Programs section of this publication. Within each minor, the i student may select an individual course of study with the help of an English Department adviser. Special Programs See American Sign Language, Exchange Program-American College in Greece, Humanities Center, Independent Major, Irish Studies, Linguis- tics Minor, Media Studies Minor, Romanticism Past and Present, Studies in Amehcan Fiction, Technical Communication Minor, and International Co-op in the Special Programs section, page 80. 35 Journalism LaRue W. Gilleland, M.A.J. , Professor and Chairman Associate Professors Patricia Hastings, Ph.D. William Kirtz, M.S. Assistant Professors Jane Bick, M.A. Louis Conrad, M.S. William James Willis, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Alms The Department of Journalism offers students the opportunity to prepare themselves for productive careers in print and broadcast news media, advertising, and public relations. It emphasizes professional skills in information gathering, writing, editing, photography, and design and graphics that may be applied to numerous fields. The Department also seeks to contribute to the existing body of knowl- edge in journalism/mass communications, especially knowledge which will help news media practitioners and educators perform their jobs with increasing effectiveness. Career Opportunities Journalism offers many exciting, rewarding ca- reer opportunities. Northeastern University journalism graduates work for daily and weekly newspapers, news departments of radio and tele- vision stations, wire services, general and specialized magazines, pub- lic relations departments, and advertising agencies. A View of the l\/lajor A journalist should have a broad background of liberal arts courses on the undergraduate level, a need that most univer- sity journalism programs have long recognized. The student should have professional courses but not to the point of overspecialization. The generally accepted formula for the bachelor's degree in journal- ism is a combination of 75 percent arts and sciences courses and 25 percent professional courses. The ideal schedule is one or two journal- ism courses each quarter, with additional work in the humanities, social sciences, physical sciences, and economics. Because journalism skills can be better expanded and understood with the aid of a laboratory, upperclass journalism majors are encour- aged to participate in the Cooperative Plan of Education. Co-op assign- ments with newspapers, radio and television stations, news bureaus, advertising agencies, and public relations offices provide a practical laboratory experience important in helping students prepare themselves for careers in mass communications. In addition, such experience offers the student an advantage if he or she decides to seek admission to a graduate program. All majors in this department complete a journalism core program that includes History of Journalism, Journalism Ethics, Newswriting, Editing, Law of the Press, and Photojournalism. In addition, each major takes courses in one of four concentrations — Newspaper/Print Media, Radio- Television News, Advertising, or Public Relations — according to his or her career objective. 36 / College of Arts and Sciences Special Programs See Center for Asian Studies, American Sign Language, Exchange Pro- gram-American College in Greece, London Journalism/Mass Communi- cations Internship, Independent Major, Media Studies Minor, Russian Studies, The Center for the Study of Sport in Society, Technical Com- munication Minor, Urban Studies Minor, Women's Studies Minor, and International Co-op in the Special Programs section, page 80. 37 Modern Languages Holbrook C. Robinson, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Chairman Robert B. Modee, M.A., Assistant Professor and Executive Officer Professors Assistant Professors Samuel Jaramillo, Ph.D. Ross D. Hall, Ph.D. Constance H. Rose, Ph.D. Inez Hedges, Ph.D. . ■ . r. X Neil A. Larsen, Ph.D. Associate Professors ., c.^- , . - . I , A /M . r^i. r^ John Spiegel, M. A. Israel A. Aluf, Ph.D. ^ ^ Lillian Bulwa, Ph.D. Instructors Benedetto Fabrizi, D.M.L. Daniel C. Barker, M.A. Walter M. Gershuny, Ph.D. Rita Soracco, M.A. Juliette M. Gilnnan, Ph.D. Bonnie S. McSorley, Ph.D. Stephen A. Sadow, Ph.D. Philip H. Stephan, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Alms The study of Modern Languages can be of value to all students, regardless of their major fields of interest. In the complex and rapid pace of modern life, there is a need for increased communication between varied and often divergent cultures, even those within the narrow con- fines of one's own community. To better understand and appreciate these cultures, it is very important to know the ways in which the mem- bers of the culture think. As the principal means of communication, language frequently offers the key to understanding. Thus, language may serve to help one achieve a more cosmopolitan, open-minded, and sensitive view of the world. The Department offers opportunities for background preparation for students interested in elementary, secondary school, or college teach- ing; international business relations; high-tech; government service; journalism; library science; world affairs; travel; and community service (especially in Spanish-speaking areas). Those who wish to teach in col- lege must plan on graduate study. Description of the Major Available in French, German, Italian, Rus- sian, or Spanish, the major in Modern Languages normally requires advanced courses in two languages. The freshman year usually is con- sidered a year to establish the basic foundation upon which the major will be formed. It should be utilized to fulfill as many general require- ments as possible so that during the upperclass years more time can be devoted to the major discipline. Normally the study of a second (minor) language begins in the second year. However, in exceptional cases, this pattern may be altered to per- mit students to begin their second language in the freshman year or, perhaps, postpone it to a later year. The Modern Language major should plan to take at least two language electives per quarter from the begin- ning of the second year. Again, of course, this pattern may be varied to fit the needs of the individual student. It should be noted that the requirements indicated here for the major and minor languages are mininnum requirements. When at all possible, a student is strongly encouraged to go beyond them, and even, per- haps, to pursue a third language. 38 / College of Arts and Sciences The Department is currently designing a one-language major. Stu- dents are urged to consult their departmental advisers for further infor- mation concerning this program and other possible curriculum changes. A View of the Major The Department offers a choice of either a Bach- elor of Arts or a Bachelor of Science degree. For either degree, the student must select a major as well as a minor language from French, German, Italian, Russian, or Spanish. Both degrees require Freshman English. The B.A. is, of course, the traditional degree of this discipline. Candi- dates for the B.A. must satisfy the College requirements for graduation and, in addition, must meet the departmental requirements in their major. These requirements are sixteen quarter hours in history (any history courses relevant to the major are acceptable), eight quarter hours of Survey of English Literature, a minimum of thirty-two quarter hours of advanced work in the major language, and eight quarter hours of ad- vanced work in the minor language. Advanced work may be defined as any course beyond the intermediate level of the language. The Bachelor of Science degree in Modern Languages differs from the B.A. primarily in its emphasis. Whereas the B.A. requires that the student satisfy the full general requirements of the College of Arts and Sciences, the B.S. waives certain of these requirements in favor of a more concentrated program in the major area. In addition, the candidate for the B.S. degree must complete eight quarter hours of composition and conversation in the major language and eight quarter hours of composition and conversation in the minor language. Candidates then must complete forty additional quarter hours of advanced work in the major language and sixteen additional quarter credits of advanced work in the minor. Description of the Minor For students interested in acquiring profi- ciency in one foreign language as an adjunct to their major, the Depart- ment offers a minor in f\/!odern Languages, open to students of all colleges. The details of the requirements for a minor vary slightly from language to language, but, in all cases, the student is required to take a total of six courses. Generally, two composition and conversation courses, a civilization course, and an introductory course in literature are required. The remaining courses are free electives drawn from ad- vanced courses offered by the Department. Students are urged to consult the Department adviser for further infor- mation about the minor. Additional Information In the basic language courses, attendance in the language laboratory is required for two half-hour sessions per week. The facilities of the language laboratory are also available on an optional basis for advanced work. The Department lounge is available to Modern Language students. See page 81 for information on courses in Amencan Sign Language. Special Programs See Center for Asian Studies, American Sign Language, Exchange Pro- gram-American College in Greece, French for Business and Economics, Business German, Humanities Center, Independent Major, International Co-op, Irish Studies, Russian Studies, and Elementary Spanish for Crim- inal Justice and Human Services in the Special Programs section, page 80. 39 Philosophy and Religion Michael R. Lipton, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Chairman Professors Walter L. Fogg, Ph.D. Pavel Kovaly, Ph.D., C.Sc. Associate Professors William J. DeAngelis, Ph.D. Bart K. Gruzalski, Ph.D. Edward A. Hacker, Ph.D. Stephen L. Nathanson, Ph.D. Gordon E. Pruett, Ph.D. Susan M. Setta, Ph.D. Joseph H. Wellbank, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims Philosophy deals with a wide range of questions and issues generated by various aspects of human experience, by the beliefs and theories people hold, and by the practical problems human beings con- front. Philosophy includes both questions and theories related to art, religion, morality, society, and natural and social sciences. Because of the breadth of its concerns, the study of philosophy provides a unique opportunity for students to examine their beliefs in many areas through critical reflection. Through readings, discussion, and writing, philosophy students can encounter and examine questions concerning the nature and validity of religious beliefs, moral judgments, and scientific theories, as well as questions of values and social policy in such areas as law, medicine, and technology. In all these areas, analysis of issues and evaluation of arguments provide an opportunity to understand diverse claims to knowledge and areas of controversy. The program includes courses that may help strengthen the student's work in other areas and provide an understanding of the methods and traditions of philosophical and religious thought. A major in Philosophy may also help a student to acquire a broad background in the humani- ties and to sharpen his or her critical abilities in preparation for graduate or professional study in many areas. Indeed, former Philosophy majors can be found in the most diverse of professional careers. For students majoring in another discipline, the Department offers a minor program, which can be a valuable supplement to most fields. The program in Religion offers students the opportunity to acquire an understanding of religious experience, both as an individual response and within its social, historical, literary, and political context. Specific religions (Christian, Jewish, Hindu, etc.) are studied as well as the myth- ical and mystical dimensions of religious experience in general. The program strives to clarify the relation between the religious experience and other facets of human life that are the concern of both the liberal arts and the professions. Although a major is not offered in Religion, the program attempts to provide a basic introduction to religious studies. Both introductory and intermediate-level courses are offered. 40 / College of Arts and Sciences Description of the Major Northeastern's program for a Philosophy major is designed to offer students a balanced understanding of the nature of philosophy and particular philosophical problems that arise in the various arts and sciences. A maximum number of electives has been provided so that students may choose in accordance with their own backgrounds and interests. Students may pursue either a five-year co- operative or a four-year full-time course of study. All degree candidates in Philosophy must take at least eight quarter hours in English and fifty-two quarter hours in the Department and must meet the following specific requirements; 1 . Classical Greek Philosophy and Modern Philosophy 2. Introduction to Logic or Symbolic Logic (The Department emphat- ically recommends that students contemplating graduate studies in Philosophy take Symbolic Logic.) 3. Theory of Knowledge or Metaphysics or Moral Philosophy and 4. At least one seminar 5. Thirty-two quarter hours of Philosophy electives, to be selected after consultation with the student's departmental adviser. Description of the Minor To attempt to meet the needs of students who are majoring in other areas but have a special interest in Philosophy, the Department offers a minor in Philosophy. The program contains an essential core of courses, as well as a great range of electives to accom- modate individual interests. Specific requirements: 1 . An introduction to philosophy course; 2. Either Classical Greek Philosophy or Modern Philosophy; 3. Either Introductory Logic or Symbolic Logic; 4. Either Moral Philosophy or Theory of Knowledge or Metaphysics or Philosophy of Mind; 5. Three electives in Philosophy to bring the total number of quarter hours in Philosophy to twenty-eight. Special Programs See Center for Asian Studies, Exchange Program-American College in Greece, Humanities Center, Independent Major, Women's Studies Minor,' and International Co-op in the Special Programs section, page 80. 41 Speech Communication Carl W. Eastman, M.A., Associate Professor and Chairman Associate Professors Lecturers Michael L. Woodnick, M.S. Wesley Horner, B.M. Alan J. Zaremba, Ph.D. Kimberley H. Tetrev, M.A. Assistant Professors Joan F. Drexelius, Ph.D. Roberta L. Kosberg, Ph.D. Joseph D. Warren, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims The Department of Speech Communication seeks to help stim- ulate the personal and professional growth of the student through a study of the pnnciples and methods of communication. Courses are designed to aid students in understanding the commu- nication process and the roles of communication in society. The Speech Communication program also helps students to increase their self- awareness and heighten personal development by offering theoretical and experiential learning opportunities. More than twenty-five courses in such areas as persuasion, group discussion and conference techniques, interpersonal communication, mass media, broadcasting, communication theory, and public address are designed to meet the needs of students, whether majoring or minor- ing in Speech Communication or selecting courses for personal devel- opment to supplement professional training in other fields. Description of the IVIajor The objectives of the Speech Communica- tion major are threefold: 1 . To stimulate the student's personal growth and development in perception and self-expression through the study of historical, contemporary, and artistic aspects of speech and communication, and to provide organized knowledge and critical insight; 2. To help prepare the student for professions that require both a theoretical and a technical knowledge of communication, such as broadcasting, the law, government service, public relations, ad- vertising, social service, industrial communication, and similar fields; 3. To help prepare the student for advanced graduate study in com- munication and other professional fields. A View of the IVIajor Students may receive either a B.A. or B.S. degree through concentrations related to mass communication, interpersonal communication, organizational communication, communication re- search, communication theory, advocacy, and public address. Through selection of the appropriate concentration within the Department and complementary elective courses in other departments, students are af- forded considerable flexibility in tailoring their programs to satisfy their personal and professional needs. To further provide for the unique needs of students with specialized interests or professional goals, the Department offers directed-study and internship programs. Virtually every Speech Communication major com- pletes one or more projects in each of these programs. 42 / College of Arts and Sciences In directed study, the student works closely with a chosen faculty adviser while connpleting a student-selected research or performance project. Generally commensurate with the workload of a one-quarter course, directed-study projects deal with such areas as surveying and interpreting communicative behavior, studies of the rhetoric of political campaigns, or the effects of the media on society. The internship program offers students the opportunity for profes- sional development through field experiences designed to complement or implement their classroom training. Distinct from the Co-op Plan, the internship program provides academic credit for unpaid, part-time, on- site activities, during the student's academic quarters. Internships, care- fully selected by the student and faculty advisers with an understanding based on the student's goals, often result in the student's placement in active roles in commercial broadcasting studios, advertising firms, and governmental agencies. Description of the l\/linor Students majoring in such fields as Political Science, Business, and Human or Social Services or Education may develop a minor that complements their academic major by selecting appropriate courses with the aid of a Speech Communication faculty adviser. Basic theoretical competence and personal skills in the areas of intra- personal, interpersonal, group, organizational, and public communica- tion may be acquired by taking the following four core courses required of all minors: Introduction to Communication Theory, Business and Professional Speaking, Interpersonal Communication I, and Group Dis- cussion. Individual needs and specific goals may be satisfied by selecting three additional electives with the approval of the Speech Communica- tion faculty. Recommended elective groupings have been developed for students concentrating in Management, Marketing, Elementary or Sec- ondary Education, Human or Social Services, Political Science, Sociol- ogy, Psychology, and Journalism. Special Programs See American Sign Language, Center for Asian Studies, Exchange Pro- gram-American College in Greece, Humanities Center, London Journal- ism/Mass Communication Internship, Technical Communication Minor, Independent Major, and International Co-op in the Special Programs section, page 80. 43 Natural Sciences and Mathematics The natural sciences are disciplines based chiefly on objective, quanti- tative hypotheses that can be confirmed or refuted by experimentation involving numerical measurements. These disciplines are sometimes referred to as the "exact sciences." However, that may be somewhat misleading, since controlled approximations are more characteristic of them than exactness. The older term used for the natural sciences (in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries) was "natural philosophy." This embraced the physical and life sciences as well as mathematics. The great treatise of Isaac Newton, which altered completely the understanding of the phys- ical universe, was titled Philosophiae naturalis prlncipia mathematica (Latin for Mathematical Principles of Natural Philosophy). Although mathematics is not confined to the study of nature as such — having more basic roots in subjective thought than in objective reality — it is nearly always grouped with the natural sciences. Indeed, mathe- matics is sometimes referred to as the "queen and servant of the sci- ences." In the College of Arts and Sciences, the major disciplines comprising the Natural Sciences and Mathematics Division are as follows: Biology page 44 Chemistry page 47 Earth Sciences page 50 Mathematics page 52 Physics page 54 44 Biology David C. Wharton, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Francis D. Crisley, Ph.D. JanisZ. Gabliks, Ph.D. Charles A. M. Meszoely, Ph.D. M. Patricia Morse, Ph.D. Nathan W. Riser, Ph.D. Fred A. Rosenberg, Ph.D. Ernest Ruber, Ph.D. Phyllis R. Strauss, Ph.D. Associate Professors Joseph L. Ayers, Ph.D. Kostia Bergman, Ph.D. Charles H. Ellis, Jr., Ph.D. Gwilym S. Jones, Ph.D. Helen H. Lambert, Ph.D. Joseph V. Pearincott, Ph.D. Daniel C. Scheirer, Ph.D. Henry 0. Werntz, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Donald P. Cheney, Ph.D. Richard L. Marsh, Ph.D. Jacqueline M. Piret, Ph.D. Susan Powers-Lee, Ph.D. Cristina Reyero, Ph.D. Adjunct Professor Bruce B. Collette, Ph.D. Adjunct Assistant Professor Barbara Thorne, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Alms The Biology major offers students the opportunity to develop a basic understanding of the organization and the processes of life, from the level of molecules and cells through the level of organs and organ systems to the level of populations, species, ecosystems, and evolution. The major also offers the mathematical, chemical, and physical back- ground necessary to understand biology and to help train students in practical scientific skills associated with each of these areas of study. Finally, it allows students to begin to specialize in a subdiscipline of biology. Description of the Major The major consists of ten biology courses in addition to those required in chemistry, physics, and mathematics. Six of the biology courses constitute the required "Biocore": Principles of Biology I, II, and III; Environmental and Population Biology; Genetics and Developmental Biology; and Cell Physiology and Biochemistry. The other four biology courses for the major may be chosen from a variety of upperclass biology electives which require some or all of the "Biocore" as prerequisites. It is usually possible to follow the prescribed sequence if a student has decided on the major in the freshman or sophomore year. For students who may enter the major in the middler year, it is often possible to complete the major in the normal time by taking some of the electives concurrently with the latter, "Biocore" courses. To graduate with a major in Biology, a student must have a cumulative Quality Point Average (QPA) of 2.0 for all science and mathematics courses required for the major. There are two programs within the Biol- ogy major, one leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree and the other to the Bachelor of Science degree. Both the B.A. and the B.S. degrees require a modern language. The B.S. program is more rigorous and Biology / 45 extensive in its mathematics and science requirements and thus may offer better preparation for some areas of postgraduate study. The dif- ference is mainly one of emphasis, however. After completing the "Biocore," students interested in independent research may arrange with individual faculty to undertake Directed Study; if eligible, they may be invited to undertake a more extensive Honors Program involving up to four quarters of research. The Department publishes a booklet, The Biology Undergraduate Ad- visory Book, which explains the required and recommended courses and the QPA standards in science for Biology majors. The Advisory Book is available in the Biology Office, Room 403, Richards Hall. Students intending to major in Biology should obtain a copy as early as possible after their enrollment at Northeastern. Biology majors wishing to pursue a minor in another field should see their biology adviser as early in their program as possible, for coordination of major and minor requirements. A View of the Major The Biology major provides an opportunity for excellent preparation in a wide variety of careers or professions in the life sciences, including medical, dental, and other health-related profes- sions. Graduate study leading to a master's or doctoral degree can open careers in upper-level teaching and/or research in one of the specialized areas of biology, such as zoology, botany, microbiology, physiology, ecology, marine biology, cell biology, or biochemistry. Biology majors may also pursue postgraduate training in such health-related areas as nutrition, public health, or medical technology. Biology majors not wishing to enter professional or graduate schools may find employment on technical levels in federal, state, industrial, hospital, or university laboratories doing research, survey, or quality con- trol in a biological area. After graduation they may also be able to enter directly into positions in industries involved in the manufacture and dis- tribution of pharmaceuticals, biological products, food, or scientific equipment. Many biologists are employed at all levels in fisheries, for- estry services, county agencies, museums, aquariums, research ves- sels, and marine stations. Preprofessional students (for example, premedical or predental) are urged to consult with the preprofessional advisory committee early in their careers at Northeastern. Students are cautioned that the successful completion of the required preprofessional courses by no means en- sures admission to a professional school since other factors are also Involved. Description of the Minor A minor in Biology consists of any six biology courses for which the student has the prerequisites, plus two more courses which may be biology courses or courses from other depart- ments that serve as prerequisites for Biology courses. At least five of the total eight courses must include laboratory, and a student may not count toward the Biology minor more than one course, or course sequence, that covers substantially the same material. To accommodate the needs of students majoring in many different fields, the Biology minor requirements have been phrased in a very general and flexible way. To ensure that course selection is sound and appropriate to the student's background, each student's Biology minor 46 /College of Arts and Sciences ■ program must receive the signed approval of the Biology minors' ad- viser. The student should obtain this required approval of his/her pro- gram before the start or, at the latest, by the end of the first biology course. Failure to do so may result in courses' not being counted for a minor, if the adviser finds them to have been inappropriate selections. The academic standards for a minor in Biology are the same as those for a Biology major; namely, a QPA of 2.0 must be achieved for those courses used to satisfy the minor requirements. Courses taken on a pass/fail basis are not acceptable for minor credit. Suggested course groupings for a Biology minor have been devel- oped for students with different backgrounds in college mathematics and science. The "core" minor for students with considerable course work in mathematics, chemistry, or physics provides the basic founda- tion on which a Biology major is built, without advanced specialization. For students with less or no college mathematics/science background, three other minor options provide the opportunity for first-level exposure to the basic pnnciples of Biology, plus an opportunity to achieve some advanced specialization in plant and/or animal studies or to explore human biology, molecular biology, biochemistry, and the problems of the environment. For further information, consult with the Biology minors' adviser. Laboratories The Biology Department has specially equipped teaching laboratories for general biology, botany, anatomy, microbiology, microscopy, physi- ology, zoology, and cell biology. Equipment for field work, museum specimens, models, charts, and closed-circuit television are employed in laboratory instruction. Additional facilities include aquarium and ani- mal rooms, stockrooms, preparation rooms, research areas, a vertebrate museum, and a large suburban greenhouse and woodlot. The Depart- ment has close association with the University's Marine Science and Maritime Studies Center in Nahant and with the University's Electron Microscopy Center. Special Programs See School for Field Studies, Independent Major, Instrumentation for Science Minor (see Physics Section), International Co-op, Marine Stud- ies Minor, Combined Program with Preprofessional Schools and East/ West Marine Biology Program in the Special Programs section, page 80. 47 Chemistry Philip W. Le Quesne, Ph.D., D.Sci., Professor and Chairman Professors Geoffrey Davies, Ph.D. Bill C. Giessen, Dr.Sc.Nat. Arthur M. Halpern, Ph.D. Barry L. Karger, Ph.D. William M. Reiff, Ph.D. John L. Roebber, Ph.D. Robert A. Shepard. Ph.D. Alfred Viola, Ph.D. PaulVouros, Ph.D. Professors Jointly Appointed John L. Neumeyer, Ph.D. Robert F. Raffauf, Ph.D. Associate Professors David A. Forsyth, Ph.D. Thomas R. Gilbert, Ph.D. David M. Howell, Ph.D. Conrad M. Jankowski, Ph.D. Elmer E. Jones, Ph.D. Kay D. Onan, Ph.D. Robert N. Wiener, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Lee A. Flippin, Ph.D. Michael E. Kellman, Ph.D. Mary J. Ondrechen, Ph.D. John Wronka, Ph.D. Lawrence D. Ziegler, Ph.D. instructors James F. Hall, Jr., M.S. Bernard J. Lemire, B.S., Supervisor of Laboratories Professional Preparation Alms The educational objectives of the Chemistry Department are to give students the opportunity to (1) experience the intellectual stimula- tion of studying a physical science; (2) grasp the basic pnnciples and techniques that are central to a variety of chemistry-related careers; and (3) prepare for graduate study in chemistry or related fields. These ob- jectives are implemented by the Department's highly research-oriented faculty, including leaders in various fields of the science. Description of the Major Chemistry is concerned with the structure and properties of substances and with the transformations they undergo. The undergraduate program leads to either a B.A. or a B.S. degree in Chemistry. It is relatively small, having a combined total of about sixty undergraduates throughout all levels. Class sizes, too, are not large. For example, the typical size of the freshman Chemistry course given to chemistry and other science majors is about forty students. The upper- class chemistry major courses are generally smaller. All of the courses are taught by full-time chemistry faculty members, and there is consid- erable opportunity for direct interaction between faculty and students. Both the chemistry curriculum and the departmental facilities are ap- proved by the American Chemical Society (A.C.S.); thus, the B.S. de- gree which we award is A.C.S. certified and therefore carnes national recognition for quality. Modern chemistry is the cornerstone for a large number of professions and industries. Challenging career opportunities exist in almost all tech- nical fields in which functions such as research, development, produc- tion, sales, market analysis, quality control, and management are involved. Tfie Chemistry major programs offer the students an excellent opportunity for preparation In the study of medicine, dentistry, and for advanced study in many fields of science. For students who choose to 48 / College of Arts and Sciences participate in the Cooperative Plan of Education there can be additional professional benefits. The practical experience gained on a job can place chemistry in a more realistic perspective than academic training alone and may help students to prepare themselves for better employ- ment prospects upon graduation. The Department publishes an informational booklet, Chemistry at Northeastern, which describes the Chemistry major curriculum and re- quirements in detail. Interested students may obtain a copy of this book- let in the main office of the Chemistry Department, Room 1 02, Hurtig Hall or from the Department of Admissions, 150 Richards Hall. A View of the Major The Department offers two major programs that lead to the B.S. or B.A. degree. Both are based normally on the five-year cooperative-study plan, but academically equivalent four-year study op- tions are available. The two degree curricula differ mainly in their arts and sciences content and advanced science course requirements. De- partmental advisers are ready to provide assistance and counseling to all Chemistry majors in relation to course selections and other profes- sional matters. The Chemistry major programs at Northeastern are based on a career- oriented concept. The basic core of courses in chemistry, mathematics, and physics may be supplemented with selected courses in other areas. Thus, the program offers the student an opportunity to prepare for any one of a wide variety of careers. Alumni have pursued careers in many areas, such as: — The health professions (medicine, dentistry) — Professional and technical employment in industry — Chemical sales and management — Teaching and research via graduate study — Clinical chemistry, medicinal chemistry, and pharmaceutical chemistry — Geochemistry, mineralogy, and environmental chemistry — Forensic chemistry Departmental advisers suggest various course options for students interested in preparing for any of the above careers. The vanety of careers open to persons with strong backgrounds in chemistry is exten- sive, and other options can be constructed from the large number of courses offered at the University. A large part of the curriculum is common to all options. It consists of courses in English, calculus, physics, and basic chemistry, which are taken in the freshman year. Students may be exempted from the General Chemistry courses by passing equivalency tests; in this case other courses are substituted. In the upperclass years, students take courses in organic, inorganic, physical, and analytical chemistry. For the B.S. degree, some additional advanced mathematics and science courses are required. German or Russian is strongly recommended for students who plan to pursue graduate study in the sciences. Qualified students are encouraged to undertake a research project under the supervision of a faculty member. An honors program is open to especially able students. Description of the Minor A minor program in Chemistry is available for students majoring in other fields. It consists of courses in general, analytical, organic, and physical chemistry. Further information may be obtained from the Chemistry Department Office, Room 102, Hurtig Hall. Chemistry / 49 Accreditation The Chemistry programs at Northeastern are approved by the Americari Chemical Society. The B.S. degree meets the Society's requirements for certification, which means that a certified graduate is eligible for full membership in the A.C.S. after two years of experience. Facilities and Research The mam facilities of the Chemistry Department are housed in Hurtig Hall, a modern, air-conditioned, five-story building that contains equip- ment for up-to-date teaching and research. Faculty offices are located there, as is the James Flack Norris Room, which serves as a lounge for undergraduate Chemistry majors. Additional research facilities are lo- cated in the Forsyth Building and in the Institute of Chemical Analysis, Applications, and Forensic Science. The Department's major research equipment includes electron microscopes, mass spectrometers, lasers. X-ray diffractometers, nuclear magnetic-resonance and electron spin- resonance spectrometers, Gouy and Faraday magnetic balances, Mossbauer spectrometers, and a variety of ultraviolet and infrared spec- trometers. Undergraduate students taking advanced courses or working on research projects may utilize certain of these instruments. Active research programs are under way in synthetic and mechanistic organic chemistry, natural products chemistry, inorganic chemistry, chemical oceanography, photochemistry, and spectroscopy, theoretical chemistry, analytical chemistry, separation science, and solid-state chemistry. Special Programs See Combined Program with Pre-professional Schools, School of Field Studies, Independent Major, International Co-op, Instrumentation for Sci- ence Minor (see Physics Section), Marine Studies Minor, and East/West Marine Biology Program in the Special Programs section, page 80. 50 Earth Sciences Richard H. Bailey, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Chairman Associate Professors Assistant Professor Bernard L. Gordon, M.S. Malcolm D. Hill, Ph.D. Richards. Naylor, Ph.D. William A. Newman, Ph.D. Peter S. Rosen, Ph.D. Martin E. Ross, Ph.D. David L. Wilmarth, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims The Department of Earth Sciences offers a degree program in geology as an in-depth study of a major area of the earth sciences, as well as courses in geology, oceanography, and astronomy, which are available to all students. Description of the Geology Major Geology is a broad-based science that deals with the study of the physical features, composition, history, and processes of the earth. The study of geology, however, also de- mands an understanding of the application of scientific knowledge to current problems and concerns. For example, the manufacture of an enormous number of products composed of metals and petroleum de- rivatives is a primary basis of the economy of our society. Understanding the origins of these natural resources and the ways in which to ensure their continued supply is, therefore, one of the major roles of today's geologists. Only a small portion of the earth has been studied in detail, leaving many unexplored frontiers for each new graduate in the field. A View of the Major Since the study of geology utilizes principles of other physical sciences, students should complete basic courses in chemistry, physics, and mathematics along with Physical and Historical Geology during their first two years. After completing the introductory geology courses and one year of chemistry, every Geology major takes a three-course sequence — Descriptive Mineralogy, Optical Crystallog- raphy, and Optical Mineralogy — since a knowledge of minerals is fun- damental to geological understanding. In addition to the required introductory and mineralogy courses, the student chooses a minimum of six (for the B.A. degree) or eight (for the B.S. degree) additional geology courses. There are also electives required in the areas of the humanities and social sciences. Each student is assigned to an adviser in the Department. The adviser assists students in making appropriate course selections as their knowl- edge increases and special interests develop. Though not required, courses in petrology, structural geology, and paleontology are usually among the electives chosen by undergraduates. During the junior and senior years, students may select undergradu- ate research as one of their elective courses. Under the supervision of a faculty member, a problem is selected, defined, and researched. These projects offer undergraduates the opportunity to go much more deeply into some aspect of geology that holds particular interest for them. Stu- dents who meet the college requirements for the honors program may also be invited to carry out an undergraduate research project. In addition to its major curriculum the Earth Sciences Department also offers a minor program in Geology. Earth Sciences / 51 Special Information Field Trips Though much geology can be learned from textbooks and in the laboratory, a sound geological education must also include first- hand experience in the field and direct observation of geological phe- nomena. Whenever it is appropriate, field work on an individual or group basis will be part of courses. Special Programs See School for Field Studies, Independent Major, International Co-op, Instrumentation for Science Minor (see Physics Section), Marine Studies Minor, and EastA/Vest Marine Biology Program in the Special Programs section, page 80. 52 Mathematics Maurice E. Gilmore, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors SamuelJ. Blank, Ph.D. Bohumil CenkI, Sc.D. David I. Epstein, Ph.D. Holland C. Filgo, Ph.D. Alberto R. Galmarino, Ph.D. Arshag B. Hajian, Ph.D. Evelyn F. Keller. Ph.D. Nancy Kopell, Ph.D. JayantShah, Ph.D. Gabriel Stolzenberg, Ph.D. JackWarga, Ph.D. Associate Professors Shirley A. Blackett, M.Ed. MarkBndger. Ph.D. Gail Carpenter, Ph.D. Bruce Claflin, M.S. Margaret B. Cozzens, Ph.D. Ron Donagi, Ph.D. John Frampton, Ph.D. Terence Gaffney, Ph.D. R. MarkGoresky, Ph.D. Eugene Gover, Ph.D. Samuel Gutmann, Ph.D. Anthony larrobino, Ph.D. Solonnon M. Jekel, Ph.D. Nishan Krikorian, Ph.D. Roberto. McOwen, Ph.D. Richard Porter, Ph.D. Mark Ramras, Ph.D. Thomas 0. Sherman, Ph.D. Chuu-Lian Terng, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Margaret Bayer, Ph.D. David Bernstein, Ph.D. Robert W. Case, Ph.D. Mo-sukChow, Ph.D. Stanley J. Eigen, Ph.D. Leonore Feigenbaum, Ph.D. Laurences. Gillick, Ph.D. Donald R. King, Ph.D. Marc Levine, Ph.D. ZakharG. Maymin, Ph.D. CarlaB. Oblas, M.S. M. Inez Platzeck, Ph.D. Prabhakar A. Rao, Ph.D. Catherine M. Roche, Ph.D. Martin Schv^/arz, Ph.D. Nevin P. Scrimshaw, Ph.D. Joel A. Stein, Ph.D. Barbara Tabak, Ph.D. Gordana G. Todorov, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims The Department offers interested students the opportunity to de- velop and expand their abilities in this exact science, one of the oldest and most basic of all the sciences. Description of the Major The Department offers two programs of study in mathematics. One of the programs in mathematics leads to a Bachelor of Arts degree and requires a minimum of thirteen mathematics courses. Students in the Bachelor of Arts program also must complete a foreign language requirement. Because mathematics-related material is more often written in French, German, Italian, or Russian, one of these languages is recommended. The Department also offers a Bachelor of Science degree program, which requires a minimum of sixteen mathe- matics courses but does not require the study of a foreign language. A View of the Major All students must take a basic sequence of math- ematics courses, which, as a rule, should be completed by the end of the sophomore year. The sequence offers students the opportunity to Mathe.Tiatics / 53 acquire a working knowledge of the calculus of one and several varia- bles, differential equations, some linear algebra, and numerical meth- ods. With respect to the latter, although a computer programming course is not required, students will be encouraged and eventually expected to learn the basic programming skills necessary for numerical solutions of complex problems. A transition from the basic sequence to more advanced parts of the curriculum is provided by Analysis l-ll and Advanced Linear Algebra I. These courses are prerequisites for many advanced courses in applied analysis, complex analysis, topology, and foundations. As a rule, students planning to take a substantial number of mathe- matics courses (e.g.. two per quarter) should take Analysis l-ll and Ad- vanced Linear Algebra I in the middler year. Students may wish to take a prerequisite for more advanced courses in algebra and/or one that includes linear, nonlinear, and dynamic programming. Courses in prob- ability, statistics, and numerical analysis may also be taken directly after the basic sequence. Double Majors It is possible for mathematics majors to follow pro- grams leading to a double major in mathematics and another discipline from the College of Arts and Sciences or the College of Computer Sci- ence. Special Programs See Independent Major, International Co-op, Instrumentation for Science Minor (see Physics Section). 54 Physics Robert P. Lowndes, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Ronald Aaron, Ph.D. Petros N. Argyres, Ph.D. Richard L. Arnowitt, Ph.D. Alan H. Cromer, Ph.D. Williann L. Faissler, Ph.D. Marvin H. Friednnan, Ph.D. David A. Garelick, Ph.D. Marvin W. Gettner, Ph.D. Michael J. Glaubman, Ph.D. Hyman Goldberg, Ph.D. Walter Hauser, Ph.D. Giovanni Lanza, Ph.D. Bertram J. Malenka, Ph.D. Pran Nath, Ph.D. Olive H. Perry, Ph.D. Stephen Reucroft, Ph.D. Eugene J. Saletan, Ph.D. Carl A. Shiftman, Ph.D. Jeffrey B. Sokoloff, Ph.D. Yogendra N. Srivastava, Ph.D. Michael T. Vaughn, Ph.D. Eberhard von Goeler, Ph.D. Allan Widom, Ph.D. FaYuehWu, Ph.D. Associate Professors Arun Bansil, Ph.D. Paul M. Champion, Ph.D. Jorge v. Jose, Ph.D. Marie E. Machacek, Ph.D. Robert S. Markiewicz, Ph.D. Assistant Professors George 0. Alverson, Ph. D. Narenda Jaggi, Ph.D. Jacqueline Krim, Ph.D. Mark Novotny, Ph.D. Robert Polvado, Ph.D. Lou Reinisch, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims Physics is concerned with the fundamental principles that gov- ern natural phenomena, ranging in scale from collisions of subatomic particles, through the behavior of solids and liquids, to exploding stars and colliding galaxies. Understanding these principles can help us unravel, explore, and predict the basic phenomena and processes of not only physics, but also of biology, chemistry, and the earth and space sciences. Such an understanding will also help with the creation, development, and oper- ation of a broad spectrum of micro and macro devices ranging from the silicon chip electronic systems and lasers of today's high technology to the more conventional mechanical and electrical instruments and ma- chinery currently used in research and industrial organizations. The educational objectives of the Physics undergraduate programs are to provide students with the opportunity to 1 . experience the intellectual stimulation of studying science and, specifically, physics and astrophysics; 2. experience, by association, the excitement of the front-line research programs ongoing in the Department; 3. achieve an understanding of the basic principles and techniques that are central to the broad array of physics-related careers; 4. prepare for graduate study in physics or related fields. Physics / 55 To this end the Physics Department offers undergraduate courses at four levels: 1 . descriptive courses intended primarily for nonscience majors with limited mathematical backgrounds; 2. general survey courses intended for students in scientific and en- gineering fields; 3. advanced courses focusing on particular areas of physics and intended mainly, but not exclusively, for Physics majors; and 4. highly advanced courses intended mainly, but not exclusively, for prospective graduate students in Physics. Description of the Major Students who major in Physics are offered the opportunity to prepare for a wide variety of careers. In addition to work in industrial, government, and high-technology laboratories in areas of applied physics, students who have mastered the fundamental principles emphasized in a physics education may find opportunities in allied fields, such as biophysics, computer sciences, geophysics, med- ical and radiation physics, and various branches of engineering. Addi- tionally, many students majoring in Physics go on to pursue advanced degrees in physics and related fields. A student majoring in Physics may follow either a four-year full-time program or a five-year co-op program. The latter program allows stu- dents to alternate between the classroom and off-campus work experi- ences in research and professional organizations located not only in the important high-technology centers in and around Boston, but elsewhere in the United States. The co-op program enhances and complements the educational process, and helps provide financial assistance and the development of valuable career contacts with employers. In a number of cases, students in the Physics major work on co-op with a high- technology company, and then return to school and work with a related aspect of one of the research programs of the Department either for credit or as work-study. A View of the IVIajor Physics majors may obtain one of three degrees, the Bachelor of Arts in Physics, the Bachelor of Science in Physics, or the Bachelor of Science in Applied Physics. The first-year program for all Physics majors includes a three-quarter physics sequence common to all science and mathematics majors, and a three-quarter calculus sequence. The remaining courses in each quar- ter of the freshman year can be chosen from a wide range of electives, but generally students are advised to meet some of the core curnculum requirements and perhaps to learn to use the computer. Beyond the basic first year survey courses in physics and mathemat- ics, B.A. students are required to pass the two second-year intermediate physics courses, three upper-division lecture courses, three upper- division laboratory courses, as well as one upper-division mathematics elective. In addition, the College requirements must also be satisfied. This program is extremely flexible and allows the B.A. Physics major to pursue other interests in depth. Candidates for either of the B.S. Physics degrees must complete the two intermediate physics courses, the second year of the calculus se- quence, and a year of differential equations. In addition, the B.S. candi- dates must satisfy the appropriate college requirements. 56 / College of Arts and Sciences Candidates for the B.S. in Physics must also complete seven upper- division physics lecture courses, three upper-division physics laboratory courses, and five additional technical electives (courses from the sci- ences, mathematics, or engineering departments). The B.S. in Physics program is most appropriate for those students who wish to pursue graduate study in physics. In addition to the common intermediate level courses described above, candidates for the B.S. in Applied Physics degree must complete three upper-division physics lecture courses, five upper-division physics laboratory courses, three computer science courses, and four additional technical electives. The B.S. in Applied Physics program is most appro- priate for those students who expect to proceed directly to work after the B.S. degree, or for those who expect to go to graduate school in related fields. The upper-division lecture courses offered by the Department include Mechanics, Wave Motion and Optics, Thermodynamics, Electromag- netic Theory, Quantum Mechanics, Mathematical Physics, Nuclear Physics, Solid State Physics, Plasma Physics, and Astrophysics. The upper-division laboratories include Wave Motion, two quarters of Elec- tronics, a laboratory devoted to microcomputer programming and inter- facing, and a special project laboratory in which the student designs and carries out a complete project involving either some aspect of in- strumentation or some aspect of computational physics. The courses are all taught by active researchers in physics who have a strong com- mitment to teaching. The upper-division courses are generally small (ten to fifteen students). There are regular lectures and colloquia in the Department, many of which may be of interest to undergraduate students. In addition, there are reading courses on special topics in physics. Students interested in majoring in Physics should consult with one of the Department advisers as early as possible in their college careers to plan their programs. Description of the Minors The Physics Department offers two minor programs for students majoring in other fields: the Physics Minor and the Instrumentation for Science Minor. The Physics Minor program is designed to accommodate a wide va- riety of interests while still providing a study of the fundamentals. To fulfill the requirements of this minor, a student must take five intermediate and/or advanced courses after completing introductory physics. The Instrumentation for Science Minor is designed to provide a stu- dent with experience in the use of common laboratory instruments, the taking and the analysis of data, and elementary skills in electronics. A major goal of the minor is to prepare the student to design and construct relatively small scale special purpose measurement instrumentation. To fulfill the requirements of the minor a student must take four intermediate and/or advanced laboratory courses after completing introductory physics. Further information on the Minor Programs may be obtained from the Physics Department Office, Room 112, Dana Research Center. Physics / 57 Honors Program and Undergraduate Research Students invited into the Honors Program may take graduate courses, reading courses, and special topics courses, by petition, in the various research fields of the Department. Such work occasionally leads to pre- sentation of papers at professional meetings and to publication in professional journals. Facilities and Research The Physics Department is housed in the Dana Research Center, a modern, air-conditioned building which includes its own library, research laboratories. Department and student machine shops, electronics shop, conference and seminar rooms, and faculty and graduate and under- graduate student offices. The Department has its own computer facility, housing a VAX 11/750 computer, as well as.PDP 11/24 and LSI 11/23 computers dedicated to physics research programs. In addition, a De- partmental terminal cluster providing access to three VAX 11/780 units of the University Computer Center is located in the Dana Center. In addition to the research facilities on campus, faculty and graduate students currently pursue their research at a variety of off-campus na- tional and international facilities: astrophysics experiments at the NASA Infrared Telescope Facility, Mauna Kea, Hawaii, at Kitt Peak National Observatory, Tucson, Arizona, and at NRAO Very Large Array, Socorro, New Mexico; high-energy physics experiments at the Stanford Linear Accelerator Center (SLAC), Palo Alto, California, at CERN, Geneva, Swit- zerland, and at the Fermi National Accelerator Laboratory (Fermilab), Batavia, Illinois; high-magnetic field experiments at the National Magnet Laboratory, Cambridge, Massachusetts; inelastic neutron scattering ex- periments at the Brookhaven National Laboratory, New York, at the Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Oak Ridge, Tennessee and at the Laue- Langevin Institute, Grenoble, France. The Department's full-time faculty are involved in a broad spectrum of front-line experimental and theoretical programs in astrophysics, atomic, and molecular physics, biophysics, elementary particle physics, and solid state and low temperature physics. A full deschption of these pro- grams may be obtained upon request to the Chairman of the Depart- ment. Special Programs See Independent Major and International Co-op, Marine Studies Minor in the Special Programs section, page 80. 58 Social Sciences The Social Sciences are disciplines involving the study of society as such, as well as the social behavior of individuals and groups. In con- trast to the approach used in the Humanities, the Social Sciences tend to focus on objective aspects of societies. Measurement and testing, and the statistical treatment of data, play a larger role in the Social Sciences. On the other hand, as mentioned before, this distinction is helpful only if used with caution. In the final analysis, human beings and human institutions cannot be studied without due attention to both subjective and objective factors. For this reason, the dividing line between Human- ities and Social Sciences cannot be drawn sharply. In the College of Arts and Sciences, the major disciplines comprising the Social Sciences are as follows: African-American Studies page 59 Economics page 61 History page 63 Human Services* page 65 Linguistics page 67 Political Science page 70 Psychology page 72 Sociology/Anthropology page 75 * The Human Services major is offered jointly by the College of Arts and Sciences and the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions. 59 African-American Studies Ozzie L. Edwards, Ph.D., Coordinator Associate Professor Holly M. Carter, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Ernest D. Brown, Ph.D. Jordan Gebre-Medhin, Ph.D. Patrick Manning, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims African-American Studies at Northeastern University offers an interdisciplinary study of the black experience with two central pur- poses: (1) to provide academically rigorous and exciting courses for all students interested in the field; and (2) to contribute to the students' ability to develop analytical skills and to apply this learning, whatever their disciplines or career objectives. By presenting fresh perspectives while remaining firmly grounded in traditional academic standards, the courses in African-American Studies may aid the student to develop the skill of critical thinking, provide the opportunity to gain a meaningful, liberal arts education, and help to form a strong basis for professional or graduate work. Students from other disciplines should find that the courses in African- Amencan Studies are designed to complement and enrich their chosen concentrations or majors. Description of the Major A major in African-American studies offers students the opportunity to prepare themselves for a wide range of professions calling for an understanding of intergroup relations and the minority experience. Students may go on to graduate study in such areas as social work, sociology, education, law, business, history, or the humanities. A View of the l\/lajor Students majoring in African-American Studies may earn either the Bachelor of Arts (B.A.) or Bachelor of Science (B.S.) degree. All majors are required to take the following set of courses: — Economic Issues in Minority Communities — Directed Study for Senior Thesis — Africa Today — African-American Literature I — Contemporary Issues in Black Society — Black Psychological Identity — African-American History I — Research Seminar — Survey of Black Political Movements — Race Relations in America Faculty advisers work with students to help them select electives within their chosen areas of concentration to fulfill their distnbution and lan- guage requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Arts, or career pack- age programs for the degree of Bachelor of Science. 60 / College of Arts and Sciences Description of the IVIinor A minor in African-American Studies is de- signed to meet the needs of students who major in other areas but have a special interest in African-American Studies. To qualify for a minor in African-American Studies, a student must earn twenty-eight quarter hours in the field, twelve of which are from the set of courses required of majors. The remaining courses will be a "concentration cluster" that is arranged in consultation with the student's faculty adviser. Concentration Clusters A concentration cluster is comprised of a set of four courses which focus on a given aspect of African-American Stud- ies. A cluster might focus on sociology-psychology, history, humanities, human services, research, or other areas related to the student's edu- cational or career needs. Concentration clusters are arranged in con- sultation between the student and a faculty adviser. Special Programs See Center for Asian Studies, Exchange Program-American College in Greece, Independent Major, International Co-op, Urban Studies Minor, and Women's Studies Minor in the Special Programs section, page 80. 61 Economics Morns A. Horowitz, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Conrad P. Caligahs, Ph.D. Harold M. Goldstein, Ph.D. Daryl A. Hellman, Ph.D. Irwin L. Herrnstadt, Ph.D. Sungwoo Kim, Ph.D. Gustav Schachter, Ph.D. Associate Professors NeilO. Alper, Ph.D. Bruce Bolnick, Ph.D. Steven A. Mornson, Ph.D. Pawan K. Sawhney, Ph.D. Andrew M. Sum, M.A. Gregory Wassail, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Anthony Becker, M.A. Oscar Brookins, Ph.D. Kamran N. Dadkhah, Ph.D. Alan Dyer, Ph.D. Barbara M. Fraumeni, Ph.D. Jeanne K. Henn, Ph.D. Gary B. Stone, M.A. Lecturers Mana N. DaCosta, M.A. Meenakshi N. Dalai, M.A. Herbert Eskot, M.A. Paul Harrington, M.A. Rajen Mookerjee, M.A. Manijeh Sabi, M.A. Frank Tortora, M.A. Professional Preparation Aims The Economics program offers students the opportunity to ob- tain a better understanding of how our economy and other economies function, to prepare themselves for graduate study in economics, and to develop specialties that may qualify them to work as economists. Description of the Major Economics is the study of ways in which scarce resources, including human resources, are deployed to satisfy the material wants of individuals and society. Economists analyze the factors that determine the success or failure of this process. Macroeconomics, concerned with the overall economy, deals with such problems as inflation, unemployment, growth and instability, and government monetary, fiscal, and regulatory policies. Microeconomics is concerned with the economic behavior of individuals, households, firms, and industries. It assesses the economic effects of racism, sexism, pollution, and environmental damage and analyzes the economic as- pects of natural resources, poverty, health, income distribution, trade unions, and collective bargaining. Graduates may be employed by businesses in such activities as in- dustrial relations, planning and forecasting, determining plant locations, and making financial studies. They may become expert in analyzing consumer demand and developing and marketing new products. They may conduct research, teach, or provide specialized consulting ser- vices. In addition, federal, state, local governments, and trade unions are important sources of jobs for economists. 62 / College of Arts and Sciences A baccalaureate economics degree, or graduation with a number of advanced economics courses, offers students an excellent opportunity to prepare themselves for graduate programs in economics as well as for entry into schools of law and business. A View of the Major There is considerable flexibility in the Economics program to enable students to concentrate in areas of personal interest. A student expecting to major in the field should take the problem- oriented Principles of Economics in the freshman or sophomore year to discover the range of insights economics can offer in analyzing and solving a variety of problems. Upper-division courses apply theory to an in-depth study of a specific area of the field. Other courses for the major include two quarters each of fundamentals of mathematics, economic statistics, and economic theory. In addition, the Department offers electives in all areas of economics, honors courses, reading courses, and a senior seminar. The courses listed above are required for either the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science degree. However, the B.A. follows the liberal arts tradition in its distribution and language requirements — the Department of Economics requires other social science courses as well, plus six economics electives. The B.S. is a professional degree. In addition to social science electives, it requires ten economics electives and one course in quantitative methods. The Department courses offer training in economic theory, money and banking, public finance, international trade, growth and development, industrial organization, comparative economic systems, economic his- tory, environmental economics, economics of crime, urban problems, labor markets, collective bargaining, human resources, poverty and dis- crimination, and medical economics. In addition, tool courses, such as statistics, mathematical economics, econometrics, and quantitative methods are available. Other electives and reading courses permit stu- dents to study an area in-depth. Description of the Minor The Department also offers a minor consist- ing of four required courses and four electives, which are selected in consultation with a faculty adviser. Any course taken outside the Depart- ment of Economics to satisfy these minor elective requirements must be approved by a faculty adviser in the Department. Special Programs See London Political Internship Programme, Economic Planning and Policy M.S., Exchange Program-American College in Greece, French for Business and Economics, Business German, Independent Major, Inter- national Co-op, Irish Studies, London Business/Economics Internship Programme, Oxford Study Semester, Russian Studies, Trent Polytechnic Institute, Urban Studies, and Washington Internship Program, in the Spe- cial Programs section, page 80. 63 History Raymond H. Robinson, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Assistant Professors Philip N. Backstrom, Ph.D. Laura L. Frader, Ph.D. Ballard C. Campbell, Ph.D. Ruth-Ann M. Harns, Ph.D. William M. Fowler, Jr., Ph.D. Gerald H. Herman, M.A. Donald M. Jacobs, Ph.D. Patnck Manning, Ph.D. John D. Post, Ph.D. Martin R. Ring, Ph.D. Associate Professors Charmane J. Blaisdell, Ph.D. NorbertL. Fullington, Ph.D. LaVerne J. Kuhnke, Ph.D. Clay McShane, Ph.D. Stanley R. Stembridge, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims History's concern with the diverse and complex past of humanity provides an excellent opportunity for the development of greater under- standing and appreciation of today's culture and civilization. Tradition- ally, history has been a major of great appeal to men and women desiring a broad base before they embark on careers in business, law, journalism, and government. Other majors know that they want to work more directly in history. Some want to teach in public schools. They may elect education courses that may lead to state certification. (Those desiring jobs in private sec- ondary schools need not be certified by state authorities.) Teaching positions in colleges and universities require master's, and increasingly doctor's, degrees. An undergraduate major in History facilitates en- trance to graduate programs in the field. Ordinarily, college and univer- sity history teachers spend part of their time in research and writing. Not all professional historians teach and write. Many find pleasure and profit working in public archives, private historical societies, museums, and restoration projects. The careers serve not only other professional historians but a larger public as well. Description of the Major For majors of such diverse interests and ambitions, curricula must combine sensible structure with flexibility. Ma- jors in History at Northeastern may qualify for either a Bachelor of Arts or a Bachelor of Science degree. Since the B.A. requires a foreign language, it appeals to prospective candidates for graduate school where reading knowledge of foreign languages is often necessary; the B.S. is designed for students desiring greater specialization in history and a social science orientation. Candidates for both degrees are required to take the surveys in West- ern Civilization and American History, and The Historian's Craft, which focuses on methods, problems, and philosophies of historians. A later course. Approaches to History, requires students to undertake a major historical project. Elective courses cover the political, economic, social, and cultural history of man in diverse times and places. 64 / College of Arts and Sciences A View of the Major To ensure a broad program of study, the College of Arts and Sciences requires that students choose courses offered by departments outside the area of the major. The history requirements are broken into groups: Group A (Ancient, Medieval, and Early Modern Europe); Group B (Modern Europe); Group C (British North American Colonies and the United States); and Group D (Other Areas or Regions). A minimum of two courses (eight quarter hours) must be elected from each group. Majors are also urged to avoid overspecialization at the undergradu- ate level. Though there are no maximum limits on the amount of history that may be taken, the Department advises broad course selection as the best policy for its majors. All majors are assigned to departmental advisers v^ho offer counsel about the program. Students are urged to seek advice about history electives, about other electives, and about the honors program. All qualified History majors are urged to consider the honors program in History. Those accepted write honors theses under the direction of members of the Department. Students ordinarily register the honors courses in their last three quarters of enrollment, except for the summer quarter when honors courses are not usually offered. Description of the Minor Students interested in a minor in history should consult the History Department for information. Special Programs See Center for Asian Studies, Exchange Program-American College in Greece, London Political Internship Programme, Independent Major, In- ternational Co-op, Irish Studies, New England Quarterly, Oxford Study Semester, Russian Studies, Center for the Study of Sport in Society, Trent Polytechnic Institute, Urban Studies, Washington Internship Program, and Women's Studies in the Special Programs section, page 80. 65 Human Services An interdisciplinary major involving the College of Arts and Sciences and the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Wilfred E. Holton, Ph.D., Sociology/Anthropology, Director and Associate Professor Advisory Committee Eva Havas, Ph.D., Sociology/ Anthropology John D. Herzog, Ph.D., Department of Education Ronald J. McAllister, Ph.D., Sociology/ Anthropology Barbara Schram, Ed.D., Department of Education Harold S. Zamansky, Ph.D., Psychology Fieldworl( Supervisor Natalie H. Riffin, M.Ed., O.T.R. Professional Preparation Aims This major offers students the opportunity to prepare themselves for possible careers in one of the areas broadly defined as "human services." The program is interdisciplinary. The Human Services curric- ulum allows students the opportunity to obtain fundamental attitudes, knowledge, and skills that may lead to meaningful careers in the helping professions as well as to graduate education in a variety of fields. Students who major in Human Services through the College of Arts and Sciences may prepare themselves to perform a variety of functions in public and private agencies. Through course work, two quarters of fieldwork experience, and possible co-op jobs, students have the op- portunity to explore such areas as casework services in social service and welfare agencies; therapeutic treatment programs in mental health settings; supportive counseling in community health centers; rehabilita- tion counseling services; sheltered workshops; parole counseling; court liaison in programs for delinquent youth; staff work in halfway houses, penal institutions, and drug treatment centers; supportive counseling for the mentally retarded; community organizing; services for the aging; administration in human services agencies; and social program re- search and evaluation. Description of the IVIajor The Human Services program offers a con- tinuing advisory system to help students make the best use of their early course selections and to guide them to appropriate upper-level courses. College Requirements. Degree requirements differ for each partici- pating college. Refer to pages 94 to 95 for requirements in the College of Arts and Sciences and to page 98 for requirements in the Boston- Bouve College of Human Development Professions. Students in Arts and Sciences may take a five-year Cooperative Education Program or a four- year full-time program. There are five basic aspects to the program as follows: 1 . Prerequisite Courses. Prescribed courses in sociology, psychol- ogy, government, economics, and human services are required, for a total of six courses. 2. Core Courses. Nine courses in such areas as statistics, research methods, group process, organizations, personality, intervention strategies, and a senior seminar are required. 66 / College of Arts and Sciences 3. Specified Electives. Three courses in the areas of African- American Studies, special education, and/or poverty must be se- lected from a list of recommended options. 4. Specialization. Each student must take a five-course specializa- tion developed in conjunction with an adviser. Typically, these specializations are in one of three areas: administrative, commu- nity, and clinical. Specific course choices are designed to com- plement the individual's interests and goals. "Deaf Studies" and other structured specializations are being developed. 5. Fieldwork. Human Services students are required to fulfill two fieldwork placements during the last two years of their program. Each placement consists of 150 hours on site. The type of place- ment varies according to the student's interest. In the past, stu- dents have found placements in community programs, nursing homes, vocational workshops, state and federal agencies, and recreational facilities. These experiences are supervised by Uni- versity staff to maximize the student's learning opportunity. A View of the Major The Human Services major offers students the opportunity to obtain useful values and basic knowledge relating to var- ious human services fields. Courses introducing some basic skills can help them to understand and work with a variety of helping services. Human Services students at Northeastern have been very active in their major and helpful to each other. The Human Services Student Or- ganization combines social and career-related activities, which in the past have included open houses, day-long conferences, and weekend retreats. A quarterly Human Services Newsletter is published by stu- dents and faculty. For specific details on degree requirements, students should consult their Human Services advisers or the Program Coordinator in 125 Holmes Hall, 437-2624. Special Programs See American Sign Language, Exchange Program-American College in Greece, London Political Internship Programme, Independent Major, In- ternational Co-op, Personality and Social Psychology Concentration, El- ementary Spanish for Criminal Justice and Human Services, Trent Polytechnic Institute, Urban Studies Minor, and Women's Studies Minor in the Special Programs section, page 80. 67 Linguistics An interdepartmental major Frangois Grosjean, Ph.D. and Doctoral d'Etat, Professor and Coordinator, Psychology Professors Harlan Lane, Ph.D. and Doctoral d'Etat, Psychology Joanne Miller, Ph.D., Psychology Associate Professors Irene Fairley, Ph.D., English Michael Lipton, Ph.D., Philosophy and Religion Assistant Professors John Carroll, Ph.D., Psychology Ross Hall, Ph.D., Modern Languages Janet Randall, Ph.D., English Judy Shepard-Kegl, M.A., Psychology Professional Preparation Aims Linguistics is the science of language and is concerned with such issues as how children learn to speak, how we understand and produce language, how language barriers keep people apart and how language ties bring them together, how language is structured and how it is represented in the brain, why some people are better at acquiring a second language than others, and how sign languages are different from spoken languages. Combined with other appropriate courses, a major in linguistics may be a useful first step in becoming, for instance, a linguist, an expert on child language, a teacher of a foreign language or of English as a second language, an interpreter, or even an expert in artificial intelligence. But above all, specializing in linguistics allows the student an opportunity to have an insight into language itself — a highly complex aspect of our everyday life that we take for granted far too readily. Description of the IVIajor The major in linguistics is an interdepart- mental enterprise. Five departments (English, Modern Languages, Philosophy and Religion, Psychology, and Sociology/Anthropology) col- laborate to offer a comprehensive program that makes use of the vast resources and talent that exist at Northeastern University in the field of linguistics. The major reflects the current research of such diverse peo- ple as linguists, sociologists, psychologists, language educators, and teachers of second languages. It is administered by a coordinator who is a member of the Psychology Department. The major offers students a systematic introduction to modern linguis- tics and is broad enough to meet the needs of students interested in: — general linguistics (phonetics and phonology, semantics, syntax, bi- lingualism, historical linguistics, philosophy of language, language and culture, Amencan Sign Language); 68 / College of Arts and Sciences — experimental linguistics (language and cognition, child language, neurolinguistics, psycholinguistics); and — linguistics applied to language-related work (language teaching, lan- guage testing, language teaching materials, interpreting, literary analysis). A View of the Major Students enrolled in the major can obtain either a Bachelor of Arts or a Bachelor of Science degree. These two degrees are in every way identical except that the second language requirement can be met with American Sign Language in the B.S. degree but not in the B.A. degree. Besides the general college requirements, the requirements of the major include six basic courses from the main areas of linguistics; gen- eral linguistics, psycholinguistics, sociolinguistics, and symbolic logic. Students also take five additional courses in the area of their choice. These courses include, among others, Bilingualism, Child Language, Philosophy of Language, Linguistics of American Sign Language, Neu- rolinguistics, Transformational Grammar, Body Language, Animal Com- munication, Introduction to Semantics, and Applied Linguistics. All students also take a laboratory course in which they are introduced to language research in a laboratory environment. Two advanced semi- nars are required, as is a practicum that can take the form of fieldwork, interpreting, language teaching, or a directed study. The practicum is supervised by a faculty member who advises the student and monitors his/her progress. Advanced knowledge of a second language — spoken or sign — is required, by either taking appropriate courses or demonstrat- ing proficiency in that language. Combined with other appropnate courses, the program is suitable for those students interested in teaching American Sign Language. They may wish to concentrate on the applied linguistics of sign language while working on their bachelor's degree. This concentration enables students to acquire the background and the skills necessary to become professional teachers of sign language, and helps them prepare for the sign language instructor certification. Throughout the course of study, students meet regularly with an ad- viser who helps them plan their course work and advises them on all aspects of the major. Research The students enrolled in a directed-study course and in the laboratory course will take advantage of the Psychology Department's four language laboratories, which contain audio and video recording facilities and computers for stimulus preparation, data gathering, and statistical analysis. They will work with graduate students, research as- sistants, and faculty on ongoing projects related to the perception and production of spoken and sign languages. A brochure describing the linguistics major, as well as additional in- formation, can be obtained from Professor F. Grosjean, Department of Psychology, 282 Nightingale Hall. Description of the Minor In addition to the major, the linguistics pro- gram offers students specializing in other disciplines a minor in linguis- tics. This minor is designed to give students the opportunity to broaden their field of study and to enhance their career opportunities. The minor Linguistics / 69 consists of six courses, two required courses with the remainder se- lected from a large set of courses offered by the program. Students minoring in linguistics are assigned a faculty adviser to help them select the courses that best suit their needs. A brochure describing the linguistics minor, as well as additional in- formation, can be obtained from Professor F. Grosjean, Department of Psychology, 282 Nightingale Hall. Special Programs See American Sign Language, English Minor, Exchange Program-Amer- ican College in Greece, Oxford Study Semester, Psychology Minor, In- ternational Co-op, and Washington Internship Program in the Special Programs section, page 80. 70 Political Science Robert E. Gilbert, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Duane L. Grimes, M.A. Robert L. Cord, Ph.D. Margaret E. Leahy, Ph.D. David E. Schmitt, Ph.D. William F. S. Miles, Ph.D. Stewart Reiser, Ph.D. Associate Professors David A. Rochefort, Ph.D. L. Gerald Bursey, Ph.D. ^arry Wessell, Ph.D. Minton F. Goldman, Ph.D. Eileen L. McDonagh, Ph.D. Instructor Suzanne Ogden, Ph.D. Bradley J. Miller, M.P.A. Assistant Professors Christopher J. Bosso, Ph.D. Stephen F. Coleman, Ph.D. ^ Malcolm Cross, Ph.D. David A. Dickson, Ph.D. Phyllis S. Click, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims Political science is concerned with the study of political institu- tions, the social and economic forces that shape them, the cultural con- text within which they operate, and human behavior in political matters. The Department of Political Science at Northeastern University has three objectives; (1) to offer students the opportunity to obtain an edu- cation within the framework of the best liberal arts tradition; (2) to help heighten students' awareness of political forces in the environment and to sharpen their perception of their role as citizens in a democratic society; and (3) to provide the opportunity for acquiring a solid academic foundation to those who elect political science, law, or public administra- tion as a professional career or who choose a career for which a political science background is relevant or helpful. Description of the Major The study of political science can be the gateway to a liberal education with its benefits of broadened interests, sharpened sensibilities, and a quickened sense of civic responsibility. If you have a special interest in public affairs, studies in this field can help you prepare for government service, the study of law, the teaching of government and related subjects, or a career in politics or public man- agement. For the student who wishes to pursue professional studies at the grad- uate level, concentration in Political Science and/or Public Administra- tion may help lead to many attractive opportunities. As in many fields, competition for positions is keen, so the student's success will depend upon such factors as academic record, experience, and personal initia- tive. There are some career opportunities in public management at the federal, state, and local levels of government, while positions in research are often available in government and university research bureaus. Teaching offers further career possibilities, as do specialized agencies in international bodies like the United Nations, which call for the skills of the political scientist. Individuals with specialized training in political science can compete for positions in less obvious areas; in the public- service programming of educational and commercial television, in jour- nalism, in legislative and lobbying work, in public relations activities with private associations, and in profit and non-profit corporations. Political Science/ 71 A View of the Major Students may select either the Bachelor of Arts or the Bachelor of Science degree program. Students in the B.A. pro- gram have to meet foreign language and other requirements of the College. 'Both degree programs (B.A. and B.S.) require four quarter hours in each of the following: Introduction to Political Science, Introduc- tion to American Government, Introduction to Foreign Governments, In- troduction to International Relations, Public Administration, and Political Theory, as well as twenty-four to twenty-eight quarter hours of electives in political science and six electives (twenty-four quarter hours) in the social sciences, with at least one course in at least three of the following: African-American studies, anthropology, economics, history, psychol- ogy, or sociology. The B.S. student is required to take eight hours of research methods. Courses in basic math, and FORTRAN and FORGO are also recommended for B.S. students. Public Administration The Bachelor of Science program with a concentration in Public Admin- istration provides a third option for the student. This program requires the completion of forty hours of such courses as Introductory Political Science, American Government, Public Adminstration, Policy Analysis, Public Personnel Administration, Public Budgeting, Organizational The- ory, and other courses relevant to the field. Students must also complete at least sixteen quarter hours of Public Administration electives. In ad- dition, they must complete twenty-four hours of electives in the social sciences, at least eight of which should be in economics. Interested students may undertake a directed-study project based on an internship experience in a government agency, for academic credit. Description of the l\/linors A minor in Political Science is also available to interested students. It entails successfully completing seven political science courses, at least two of which must be from the following: Intro- duction to Politics, Introduction to American Government, Introduction to International Relations, Introduction to Foreign Governments, or Public Administration. A minor in International Politics is also available. It requires successful completion of seven courses in International and/or Comparative Politics including "Introduction to International Relations" and "Introduction to Foreign Governments and Societies." Special Programs See Exchange Program-American College in Greece, London Political Internship Programme, Center for Asian Studies, Independent Major, International Co-op, Irish Studies, Russian Studies, Trent Polytechnic Institute, Urban Studies Minor, and Women's Studies Minor in the Special Programs section, page 80. 72 Psychology Alexander A. Skavenski, Ph.D., Professor and Acting Chairman Professors Assistant Professors John C. Armington, Ph.D. John Carroll, M.A. Frangois Grosjean, Ph.D., Doc. Adam Reeves, Ph.D. es Lettres Judy Shepard-Kegl, M.A. Harlan L. Lane, PhD., Doc. es Lettres Clinical Associate Professor Helen S. Mahut, Ph.D. ^^^^^^ Gould, Ph.D. Joanne Miller, Ph D Adjunct Associate Professor Bertram Scharf, Ph.D. Lawrence Stoddard, Ph.D. Harold S. Zamansky, Ph.D. Associate Professors Edward A. Arees, Ph.D. Martin L. Block, Ph.D. Roger Brightbill, Ph.D. Perrin S. Cohen, Ph.D. Stephen Harkins, Ph.D. Charles Karis, Ph.D. Harry Mackay. Ph.D. Professional Preparation Alms Modern psychology may be broadly defined as a science that examines what people and other organisms do as well as how and why they behave as they do. Psychology is also an interdisciplinary science that depends heavily on the methods and much of the knowledge de- rived from the other sciences. With these considerations in mind, the undergraduate curriculum offers students the opportunity to develop a sound foundation in the scientific underpinnings of modern psychology to prepare them for a diversity of careers in teaching, research, public service, and professional practice. Description of the Major Our courses offer students the opportunity for preparation to enter a variety of work settings in which in-service specialty training is ordinarily offered (e.g., community mental health centers, vocational rehabilitation offices, and correctional programs) or to enter advanced training in such graduate programs as psychology, life science, or any of the health professions and medical specialties. The Psychology curriculum explores many topics, such as the function of the brain in determining behavior; how we see, hear, and learn; what behavioral science can offer in the problem areas of mental retardation, personality problems, infancy, and old age; and how we might suggest social changes based on laboratory data to increase men's and wom- en's accomplishments and satisfactions in the modern world. In addition the curriculum offers opportunities for laboratory practice and experi- mentation, field experiences in behavior technology, and small-group seminars to encourage critical and creative evaluation of psychology's accomplishments and its future. A View of the Major The Department offers both a Bachelor of Arts and a Bachelor of Science degree. The B.S. degree is usually recom- mended for students with a strong scientific or professional interest who ultimately may consider applying to graduate schools in psychology or Psychology / 73 environmental science. In addition, the Departnnent offers a special B.S. program for Psychology majors who wish to prepare for application to health professions schools. Since modern psychology is multidiscipli- nary, the B.A. and B.S. programs both include distribution requirements in allied sciences to fulfill the need for wide exposure to varying tech- niques of scientific practice and interpretation. With the science courses and elementary psychology courses as foundations, students in the B.A. and B.S. programs may pursue a gen- eral course of study that explores four major areas of psychology; Lan- guage and Cognition, Learning Motivation and Behavioral Analysis, Personality and Social Psychology, or Sensory and Neuropsychology. Alternately, students may choose to concentrate in only one of these areas. The curricula for the areas of concentration have been structured so that the student often takes courses not only in psychology, but also in related disciplines. For example, a student concentrating in Person- ality and Social Psychology takes courses in sociology, anthropology, and speech/drama. The student's final choice of concentration should be made only after personal consultation with his or her Psychology Department adviser. Within each of the four concentrations, the student is expected to progress through a sequence of specialty courses, laboratory courses, and a seminar. The student is thus afforded the opportunity to explore a given area of psychology in depth, as well as to acquire an overview of the broader issues in psychology. Furthermore, all B.S. students and qualified B.A. students participate in the Department's Directed Studies Program, in which, under the direction of a faculty member, they engage in research projects in various laboratories in the Department. In this way, classroom learning is complemented by laboratory research, where the student may learn by doing. Description of the l\/linor Each student is required to take ten psy- chology courses, including the introductory psychology sequence, in- termediate specialty courses, and at least one laboratory course. The minor program itself is quite flexible, designed for students with a broad range of interests and career goals. Students may choose either to distribute the ten psychology courses over a broad range of areas or to focus on one of the four areas corresponding to the major concentra- tions: Language and Cognition, Learning Motivation and Behaviorial Analysis, Personality and Social Psychology, and Sensory and Neuro- psychology. Students are assigned faculty advisers in the Department to help them select the minor program that best suits their needs. Topics in Psychology Series (TIPS) As well as offering courses designed primarily for psychology majors, the Department also offers a variety of courses without prerequisites that are addressed to specific topics of broad current interest. Examples include Psychological Testing, Marriage and the Family, Body Lan- guage, Sexual Behavior, Psychology and the Law, Animal Communica- tion, Man in Isolation, and Memory and Remembering. 74 / College of Arts and Sciences Research Laboratories The student who enrolls in laboratory courses and directed-study courses will take advantage of the Department's resources for research, which include: (a) in the field of learning, behavior laboratories for re- search with humans, rats, and pigeons; and, in collaboration with the Walter E. Fernald State School, an instructional setting for research and training in behavior modification with retarded children and adults; (b) in neuropsychology and ethology, primate and rodent surgeries in neu- roanatomical and histological laboratories, with apparatus for stimulating and recording activities of the brain; (c) in the psychology of vision and hearing, specialized enclosures and equipment for presenting visual and auditory stimuli and for measuring responses of the eye and the ear, including on-line computers; (d) in language and cognition, audio and video recording facilities and a computer for control of stimulus and response variables; and (e) in the field of personality, darkrooms, tach- istoscopes, and an eye-movement camera. Special Programs See American Sign Language, Exchange Program-American College in Greece, Independent Major, International Co-op, Linguistics Minor, Per- sonality and Social Psychology Concentration, Combined Program with Professional Schools, The Center for the Study of Sport in Society, and Women's Studies Minor in the Special Programs section, page 80. For additional information regarding degree requirements, laboratory research opportunities, special academic programs and career oppor- tunities for psychology majors, go to room 282 Nightingale or call 437- 3076. 75 Sociology/Anthropology Carol A. Owen, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Chair Professors Assistant Professors Morns Freilich, Ph.D. Winifred Breines, Ph.D. Elliott A. Krause, Ph.D. Paul C. Creelan, Ph.D. Jack Levin, Ph.D. Christine Gailey, Ph.D. Morton Rubin, Ph.D. (Emeritus) Herman S. Gray, Ph.D. Earl Rubington, Ph.D. Eva C. Havas, Ph.D. Associate Professors Arnold Arluke, Ph.D. Richard Bourne, Ph.D. M. Patricia Golden, Ph.D. Wilfred E. Holton, Ph.D. Debra R. Kaufman, Ph.D. Thomas H. Koenig, Ph.D. Ronald J. McAllister, Ph.D. Thomas M. Shapiro, Ph.D. Maureen Kelleher, Ph.D. AlanM. Klein, Ph.D. Bruce K. MacMurray, Ph.D. Judith Perrolle, Ph.D. Michael Rustad, Ph.D. Carmen J. Sirianni, Ph.D. Karen Watson-Gegeo, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims The disciplines of sociology and anthropology apply a critical perspective to the study of social arrangements in which human beings live and die. Systematic research methods and theory are brought to bear on how societies function and change, and on how individuals, groups, and institutions interact. Applications are made to such areas as social policy, criminology, medical and mental health issues, and business issues. Description of the Major A major in this Department offers back- ground preparation and preprofessional training for a wide spectrum of careers in public or private service and research. Students may wish to pursue graduate study in sociology, anthropology, or social psychology. For those pursuing graduate, professional training (e.g. law, social work, and public administration), sociology and anthropology also provide a good background. Students may concentrate in sociology or anthropology or both. Stu- dents who wish to study both must design their own programs, with the help of an adviser. Those enrolled in premedical, prelegal, paramedical, or a variety of other preprofessional programs should find that sociology and anthropology courses can offer a useful background. A View of the IVIajor Majors may follow either a four-year full-time program or a five-year cooperative course of study. Cooperative work assignments vary from placement in mental hospitals and social agen- cies to placement in university, government, and other research and policy-making settings. Transfer between the five-year co-op program and the four-year full-time program is possible, and registration in either is not an irreversible decision. The Department offers both a Bachelor of Arts and a Bachelor of Science degree. The requirements for each degree, both in sociology and in anthropology, are outlined below. A student with specific goals may, of course, take more departmental electives than are required. B.A. students may wish to look at the concentration requirements for B.S. students and consult their advisers for assistance in planning programs with specialized goals. 76 / College of Arts and Sciences The Department offers a B.S. witfi concentrations in anthropology or sociology. Students selecting this option must fulfill all the major require- ments set by the Department for the B.A. degree and must take a co- herent program involving additional course work as outlined below. Specializations are interdisciplinary and involve more intensive study within a concentration. Description of the Minor in Sociology In addition to the major pro- gram, the Department also offers students majoring in other disciplines the opportunity to take a minor in Sociology. The minor program consists of the following: A. SOC 1 1 00 Introduction to Sociology B. Two courses from among SOC 1321 Research Methods I SOC 1322 Research Methods II SOC 1300 Classical Social Thought SOC 1301 Current Social Thought C. Any three-course specialization in sociology arranged between the student and the adviser. Description of the l\/linor in Anthropology In addition to its major program, the Department also offers students majoring in other disci- plines the opportunity to take a minor in Anthropology. The minor pro- gram consists of the following: A. SOA 1 1 00 Introduction to Social Anthropology B. SOA 1135 Language and Culture SOA 1 155 Individual and Culture SOA 1 160 Sex, Sex Roles, and Family C. Any two-course specialization in Anthropology arranged between the student and adviser. For other minors see Special Programs, page 80. Anthropology B.A. students in Anthropology must take at least forty-eight quarter hours in departmental courses, including forty in anthropology and eight in sociology. The exact distribution can be arranged. Minimum require- ments are as follows: A. Preparatory — Introduction to Anthropology and Introduction to Sociology. (Prospective majors with equivalent background may be exempted. Students should consult a departmental adviser.) B. Core Requirements — at least three of the following, as available: Language and Culture; Individual and Culture; Human Origins; Anthropology of Religion; Sex, Sex Roles, and Family; and Ar- chaeology. C. Electives — Students must take at least six additional electives in anthropology and at least one additional elective in sociology. Qualified students are encouraged to take relevant graduate courses with the consent of the instructor. Majors should freely consult their advisers since courses elsewhere in the University may round out a special interest or focus. D. Nondepartmental Requirements— Six courses from the following social sciences: African-American studies, economics, history, political science, and psychology. Sociology/Anthropology / 11 B.S. students in Anthropology take the same basic core of courses and, in addition, an individually designed specialization in an area of interest consisting of at least five courses. Students must confer with an adviser who will help develop such a program, place it on record, and supervise it. Interdepartmental and interdisciplinary specializations can be arranged in such areas as linguistics, Native American studies, bio- logical anthropology, psychological anthropology, or area studies focus- ing on Latin America, Africa, Asia, or the Middle East. Sociology B.A. students in Sociology must take at least fifty-two quarter hours in departmental courses, including forty-four in sociology and eight in an- thropology, and must meet the following minimum requirements: A. Preparatory— Introduction to Anthropology and Introduction to Sociology. (Prospective majors with equivalent background may be exempted. Students must check with the Department.) B. Core Requirements— Statistical Analysis; Research Methods I; Research Methods II; Classical Social Thought; Current Social Thought; Class, Power, and Social Change. C. Electives — The following are minimum requirements: two interme- diate courses, (at 200 level, excluding "Introduction to Sociol- ogy"); two advanced courses, (courses at 300 level or above); and one intermediate or advanced anthropology course. With the adviser's consent, qualified students are encouraged to take cer- tain graduate and directed-study courses and/or the Senior Ma- jors Seminar. D. Nondepartmental Requirements— Six courses from the following social sciences: African-Amencan studies, economics, history, political science, and psychology. B.S. students in sociology take the same basic core of courses and, in addition, an individually designed specialization in an area of interest consisting of at least six courses, some from within and some from offerings outside the Department. Students must confer with an adviser who will help develop such a program, place it on record, and supervise it. It is possible to arrange specializations focusing on social welfare, health services, political studies, urban studies, education and society, ethnic studies, and organizational studies. There are, of course, many other areas of specialization and possible combinations of courses. The following offer a few examples (courses in the Department of Sociology/Anthropology are indicated by an asterisk): Social Welfare 'Sociology of Poverty 'Social Policy and Social Intervention 'Sociology of Human Service Organization 'Private and Public Assistance The Welfare System in America Income Inequalities and Discrimination Politics of Poverty * Departmental Course 78 / College of Arts and Sciences 1 Health Services *Medical Sociology *Death and Dying *Health Care as a Social Issue *Culture and Mental Illness *Aging and Society *Sociology of Mental Health Medicine, Religion, and the Healer's Art Medical Economics Community Medicine and Health-Care Delivery Human Services Administration Urban Studies (Contact the College of Arts and Sciences for informa- tion on the Urban Studies interdisciplinary minor.) *Cities and Society Community Analysis *Suburb and Metropolis *Seminar in Urban Studies Urban Politics Urban Economics The Economics of Urban Poverty American Urban History Architecture and the City Law and Society *Law, Crime, and Social Justice *Sociological Theories of Crime *Social Policy and Social Intervention Civil Liberties Law and Society The Economics of Crime The Politics of the Criminal Justice System Occupations and Professions *Occupations and Professions *Sociology of Work *Social Roles in the Business World *Medical Sociology Labor Market Economics History of the Professions Sex Roles and Family *Sex, Sex Roles, and Family *Sociology of the Family *Kinship and Society *Sex-Gender Roles in a Changing Society *\/iolence in the Family Sex Roles in American Politics Women in Modern Europe The Black Family 'Departmental Course College of Arts and Sciences / 79 Organizational Studies *Sociology of Business and Industry *Sociology of Work *Administration and Formal Organization *Social Policy and Social Intervention *Social Roles in the Business World *Human Services Organization Organization Theory People in Organizations Deviance *Social Deviance *Drugs and Society *Sociology of Alcoholism *Juvenile Delinquency *Sociological Theories of Crime The Disordered Mind Abnormal Psychology I, 11 The Female Offender Social Psychology 'Social Psychology (Sociology, Psychology Departments) 'Anthropology of Aggression 'Group Behavior I, II 'Seminar Soc. Psych. Personality Psychology Lab. Soc. Psych. Psychology Lab. Personality Popular Culture and Mass Communication 'Mass Communication and Public Opinion 'Collective Behavior 'Leisure, Sport, and Society 'The Sociology of Everyday Life History of Media in America The Automobile in America Survey of African-American Music Popular Culture 'Departmental Course These are samples of approaches to particular areas; there are many other possible combinations of courses as well as many other areas of specialization. Special Programs See Center for Asian Studies, Exchange Program-American College in Greece, International Co-op Experience, Personality and Social Psy- chology, Russian Studies, Trent Polytechnic Exchange Program, Urban Studies Minor, Women's Studies in the Special Programs section, page 80. 80 Special Programs in the College of Arts and Sciences Reflecting the awareness that ideas, fields of study, and interests do not always fall into traditional, neatly compartmentalized units, the College of Arts and Sciences makes a wide variety of special programs available to its students. Field-study programs, international work/study opportu- nities, interdisciplinary majors and minors, involvement with profession- als— all are among the options available to students who meet the program eligibility requirements. Students who participate in these pro- grams should find their educational experience at Northeastern greatly enhanced. Detailed information about these programs is available from involved departments and the Dean's Office. Availability of all special programs is contingent upon minimum enroll- ment requirements and, when an outside institution is involved, contin- ued affiliation of that institution with the University. Minors The College of Arts and Sciences offers to all upperclass students in the College of Arts and Sciences, as well as in other colleges in the Univer- sity several choices of minors. Below is a list of all those minors. Descrip- tions of those that are offered through one department are found in the section of this publication for that department; descriptions of interdis- ciplinary minors, those indicated with an asterisk, are found in this Spe- cial Programs section. African-American Studies Asian Studies Anthropology Art Biology Business* Chemistry Economics English (with options in Literature, Expository and Creative Writing, and Technical Communication) Geology History Instrumentation for Science Linguistics* Marine Studies* Media Studies* Modern Language (with options in French, Spanish, German, Russian, and Italian) Music Philosophy Physics Political Science (and International Politics) Psychology (with options in General, Language and Cognition, Learning and Behavior Modification, Personality and Social, Sensory and Neuropsychology) Special Programs / 81 Russian Studies* Sociology Speech Communication Technical Communication* Theatre Urban Studies* Women's Studies* American Sign Language American Sign Language (ASL) is the primary language used by the Deaf community in the United States and parts of Canada. A language expressed through gesture and perceived visually, ASL is not patterned after, nor denved from, English or any other spoken language — it is entirely different. Having its own means of expression, wit, poetry, and rich folklore, ASL reflects the thoughts, cultural values, and experiences of Deaf people. A knowledge of ASL is one prerequisite for acceptance into the Deaf community; it is essential for those who have a personal or professional interest in interacting with Deaf individuals. The Northeastern University Sign Language Programs, affiliated with the Department of Modern Languages, offers both day and evening courses in ASL conversation and interpretation. Courses in the structure of ASL, Deaf culture, Deaf history, and sign language teaching are aiso among the programs offered. The content of the conversation courses is designed to include features typically found in second-language cur- ncula: vocabulary, grammatical structure, and the culture of the target language group. A segment of each course provides an opportunity for students to interact directly with Deaf people, observe ASL in use, and practice their signing skills. The program also makes use of instructional media for individualized practice on receptive skills and vocabulary review. Through the interpreting courses and programs offered, students may prepare themselves for certification through the National Registry of In- terpreters for the Deaf. Interpreter Training During the summer. Sign Language Programs offers intensive training opportunities for beginning sign language inter- preters. The Summer Program for the Training of Sign Language Inter- preters is a rigorous introduction to the field of inter-cultural com- munication between Deaf and hearing people. Among the theoretical and practical content areas addressed in the course are consecutive and simultaneous interpretation, ethics and interpreter role, public speaking, and interpretation for special populations and in special set- tings. Applicants must provide evidence of proficiency in English and ASL, as well as extensive experience in the Deaf community. Sign Language Teacher Training As the New England regional train- ing program under the National Association of the Deaf National Con- sortium of Programs for the Training of Sign Language Instructors, Northeastern University offers programs to train teachers of ASL. The Summer Program for the Training of Sign Language Instructors offers an intensive introduction to the professional teaching of ASL as a second language. It is designed for current and prospective teachers who are already fluent in ASL. 82 / College of Arts and Sciences Visiting Students Program Northeastern also offers programs at both the undergraduate and graduate levels for students who wish to visit the University and become involved in an intensive exposure to ASL linguistics. These students have the opportunity to take courses in lin- guistics and ASL, as well as participate in directed studies through which they may take part in ongoing ASL research projects in the Language and Cognition Laboratory of the Psychology Department. Boston Architectural Center Affiliation Northeastern University students wishing to take courses at the Boston Architectural Center (BAG) may do so through the affiliation between the BAC and the University's Department of Art and Architecture. The BAC is one of the country's oldest and most respected architec- tural schools. It is a nationally recognized leader in providing full-time concurrent work-study opportunities for those interested in careers as practicing architects. Besides being an independent fully accredited degree-granting institution, it is the home of the Boston Society of Ar- chitects. As such, it serves as a principal focus for a variety of profes- sional activities in the New England area. The BAC is conveniently located within a short walking distance of the University's Huntington Avenue campus. The NU/BAC affiliation pro- vides choices of courses at either location, with day classroom courses mainly at the University and evening classroom and studio courses at the Center. For studio courses, the Art and Architecture Department's course 27.205, Introduction to Architectural Design (or equivalent) is a prerequisite. Interested individuals should contact the program coordinator in the Department of Art and Architecture, Professor Peter Serenyi, 401 Bug- gies Hall. Boston Lyric Opera The Boston Lyric Opera is a professional opera company dedicated to providing performance opportunities for New England singers, directors, and designers. The company performs an annual season of fully staged opera productions. The Boston Lyric Opera presents all its perfor- mances at the University's Alumni Auditorium. The Company's director brings his knowledge and experience in the opera world as an adjunct lecturer in the Fine Arts Division. Business German This course taught in English is designed for students of business and economics seeking to develop competence in the reading and under- standing of texts produced by the German business community and trade media. Course goals include 1. a working knowledge of grammatical structures and terminolo- gies used in business writings; 2. development of effective comprehension procedures used by professionals for efficient reading; 3. introduction to the Federal Republic of Germany, its industrial geography, trade relations with the United States, and its role as a major partner in international commerce. Special Programs / 83 Readings from English-language trade publications assure a steady influx of outside information and serve as tfie basis for weekly summary assignments designed to upgrade student's writing skills. Students may use this course as a pre-stage to the conversation- based German offerings if speaking competence is needed for a busi- ness-oriented co-op in Germany (see International Cooperative Edu- cation) as part of Northeastern's exchange program. Additional information may be obtained from Ross Hall in the Modern Languages Department. Business Minor The College of Business Administration, in collaboration with the College of Arts and Sciences, offers a minor in Business for all students outside the College of Business Administration. This minor may be valuable to students seeking jobs both before and after graduation, in either the public or the private sector. The courses in the minor cover substantially the areas of business required by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business as part of the relevant "common body of knowledge." The business courses included (with one exception, Accounting) are the same as those taken by all students in the College of Business Administration. Thus, the minor should encourage a cross-fertilization of ideas that will be beneficial to both CBA and non-CBA students. For details, including full requirements and program admission stan- dards, interested persons should consult the Dean's Office of the Col- lege of Arts and Sciences or the Undergraduate Programs Office of the College of Business Administration. The Center for Asian Studies The Center for Asian Studies was established to encourage, develop, and promote teaching and research on Asian life, and educational and cultural exchange of students and scholars. Tho Center develops and supports multidisciplinary academic programs, courses, and research that focus on individual Asian countries, the region as a whole, or specific issues applicable to Asian life, such as Asian political processes or family life in Japan. The Center's goal is to foster a deeper under- standing of Asian societies and cultures through (1 ) support for scholarly research, faculty, and visiting scholars; (2) the development and teach- ing of graduate and undergraduate courses to develop academic and professional interest; and (3) the acquisition, publication, and dissemi- nation of research findings on topics selected to advance scholarship and knowledge about Asia. The Center also encourages and sponsors seminars, symposia, and conferences on related issues. The Asian Studies Minor will draw to- gether studies in the departments of Art, History, Modern Languages, Philosophy/Religion, Political Science, and Sociology/Anthropology. Course offerings include history, language, philosophy and religion, political science, sociology, and anthropology. Center for Humanities The Center for the Humanities at Northeastern University supports teaching and research activities in cross-disciplinary areas that connect the traditional humanities with science and mathematics, and with such professional curricula as engineering, business, criminal justice, and allied health. Though it offers no courses, the Center promotes the application of human-values perspectives and problem-solving tech- niques to the professions in various conferences, workshops, and pres- entations. The Center is located in 443 Meserve Hall. 84 / College of Arts and Sciences The Center for the Study of Sport in Society The Center for the Study of Sport in Society, the first of its kind in the nation, was established to address the abuses of athletes' education and rights. Still in its formative stages, the Center has already estab- lished a University Degree Connpletion Progrann for current or former professional athletes and has formal agreements with the players as- sociation in the NBA, NFL, USFL, NHL, and the two soccer leagues. The Center will be the hub of a national consortium of universities for the UDCP. The Center has also established a North American Faculty Affiliates network of eighty of the nation's top sports scholars who ad- dress and research the various academic areas of sport studies. The Center sponsors seminars; it sponsors a broad-based curriculum in sport and social issues; it gives annual awards for excellence in sports journalism, both in print and audiovisual media; and it promotes cam- pus-wide lectures, forums, and news conferences. Two journals are also published through the Center: The Journal of Sport and Social Issues and the ARENA Review. The director of the program is Dr. Richard Lapchick, author, scholar, and civil rights activist. Thomas "Satch" Sanders, former Boston Celtics player and coach of Harvard's basketball team, is the associate director. Robert Lipsyte, a veteran sports reporter and columnist now with CBS television news, is the senior fellow. Combined Program with Professional Schools Students who have completed at least three-fourths of the course work required for a baccalaureate degree in the College of Arts and Sciences and are accepted into an approved professional school of dentistry, law, medicine, optometry, osteopathy, or veterinary medicine will be eligible for the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science degree at the end of their second year in professional school. At least two-thirds of work for the baccalaureate degree must be earned in residence at Northeastern, and all other College of Arts and Sciences requirements must be fulfilled, the residence requirement having been completed prior to entrance into the professional school. Under this program, a preprofessional student may reduce by one year the time normally required for obtaining both the undergraduate and professional de- grees. Division of Fine Arts The Division of Fine Arts coordinates the University's academic and performing arts activities. Comprising the departments of Art and Archi- tecture, Theatre and Dance, and Music, the Division was established in 1981 to enrich and expand the role of the arts at Northeastern. The Division develops arts curricula through the support of existing pro- grams, creates interdisciplinary courses to provide a forum for intellec- tual stimulation and professional development, and generates programming in both traditional and experimental art forms. As the producer of professional arts events at Northeastern, the Divi- sion offers a broad range of programs in film, music, dance, literary arts, visual arts, theatre, and performance art. A year-round schedule of events for both University and Boston audiences includes gallery shows, dance performances, artistic residencies, concert series, and theatrical presentations. Special Programs / 85 To fulfill Its role as an arts service organization, the Division adrDinis- ters an on-campus professional box office, a corridor art gallery, and an arts publications program. Tfie Central Box Office in 105 Ell Building provides tickets to all University-sponsored arts events as well as passes and discount tickets to area museums, theatres, and arts organizations. The Division's publications include the NuArts Calendar, a quarterly pre- view of events; NEW MUSIC-BOSTON, a contemporary music listing for the Boston area; and numerous programs, brochures, and catalogs. A new arts magazine will begin publication in 1985 with features on the activities and accomplishments of the Division and its constituent departments. Affiliations with local and national arts groups enable the Division to expand and strengthen the scope of arts activities at Northeastern. The Boston Lyric Opera, the Boston Theater of the Deaf, and the Boston chapter of the League of Composers-International Society For Contem- porary Music work through the Division's auspices to produce full sea- sons of performances. To ensure that the arts remain an important and vital part of the Uni- versity and its community, the Northeastern University Division of Fine Arts encourages both academic excellence and professional achieve- ment. By sponsoring new works commissioning programs, by present- ing important emerging artists, and by incorporating contemporary notions of the role of the artist in society, the Division of Fine Arts main- tains an important position in the cultural and educational life of this modern urban university. East/West Marine Biology Program The East/West Marine Biology Program is a joint project of Northeastern University and the University of Oregon, which allows students of biology to spend an exciting year of field study in three very different marine environments: coastal Oregon, Jamaica, and New England. The program begins in the fall on the coast of Oregon, well noted for its large algae, stunning marine invertebrates, and numerous fish, birds, and marine mammals. While living at the Oregon Institute of Manne Biology, students study basic marine botany and invertebrate and ver- tebrate zoology. These courses offer students the opportunity to build a foundation for a better understanding of the comparative courses in tropical and east coast marine biology that follow. In January, students move to Jamaica to study tropical biology at a small marine laboratory on the north coast of the island, near the town of Ochos Rios. The lab is located on the beach within walking and swim- ming distance of rich coral reefs and sandy bays interspersed with beds of turtle grass. Courses focus on the tropical environment while building on the comparative aspects of field biology by reminding students of their work in Oregon. Visits to the interior of the island and lectures on its terrestrial aspects are an important part of the program. Students who have lived and worked together in Oregon and Jamaica travel for a third and final phase of the program to Northeastern Univer- sity. Students live in University housing but spend most of their time at the Marine Science and Maritime Studies Center at East Point, Nahant, just north of Boston. The laboratory is located on several acres of open space at the end of a rocky point extending into the Atlantic Ocean. Courses here focus on the marine plants and animals of New England while emphasizing advanced and comparative aspects of biology. 86 / College of Arts and Sciences Economic Planning and Policy in Italy, M.S. The Department of Economics and the College of Arts and Sciences at Northeastern have joined the Consiglio Nazionale delle Ricerche (CNR), the national research council in Italy, to offer graduate courses in eco- nomics in Italy. Of particular interest to undergraduates is the summer-abroad portion of this program (taught in English) that is run in Northern Italy and is open to juniors and seniors majoring in Business or Economics. Students take up to five applied economics courses in intensive two-week work- shops. The departments of Economics and Graduate Business Administra- tion and the College of Arts and Sciences also collaborate with the National Research Council of France to offer economics and business courses in Paris during summer term. Graduate and undergraduate sec- tions are conducted in English by European and American professors. Students take courses in intensive two-week modules and may combine their European course work by enrolling in both programs. Elementary Spanish for Criminal Justice and Human Service Majors This course is intended for students majoring in Criminal Justice or Hu- man Services who will need to use Spanish in police work and in social service settings. The grammar taught is the same as in other elementary Spanish courses. The vocabulary is adapted in particular needs and interests of the students. Role-play is used extensively and students practice "intake interviews" in the course. Exchange Program American College in Greece Northeastern enjoys a sister school relationship with Deree College, the American College in Greece, which allows students of both institutions to take advantage of a formal exchange agreement. Students at North- eastern may study at Deree for a term of a year while maintaining aca- demic status at Northeastern. In addition, a program is currently being developed which will offer students graduate and undergraduate eco- nomics and business courses in Athens during summer term. French for Business and Economics Students Elementary French for Business and Economics students is designed for students who wish to study French with the intent of enhancing their career opportunities. The program is particularly aimed for students in- terested in international business. It offers, along with a thorough study of grammar and insights into the French way of life, some specialized vocabulary related to the business world and an immediate introduction to French business texts. The course serves as a preliminary step for the student wishing to gain co-op placement in France. Additional infor- mation may be obtained from Juliette Gilman in 362 Holmes Hall. Independent Major After their second quarter, students may petition the Dean of the College that they meet the requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree as independent rather than departmental majors. The independent major must center on a discipline or combination of disciplines in the arts and/ or sciences. Special Programs / 87 A faculty member acting as the student's academic adviser initially reviews the program, which must meet all College requirements. The program is then submitted to the appropriate committee for final ap- proval. Requirements and procedures for the major should be discussed in advance with an academic adviser in the dean's office. International Cooperative Experience Northeastern extends its unique program of Cooperative Education to the international scene by offering qualified upperclass students the opportunity for suitable international placement. This program operates on an exchange basis in cooperation with overseas institutions and sponsoring agencies. Students whose academic, linguistic, and profes- sional expenence make them attractive candidates for overseas posi- tions may work in Great Britain, Sweden, Ireland, Canada and the French and German-speaking countries of Europe. By creating a mutually ben- eficial situation for students and employers, the program helps to meet an increasing need for qualified professionals who possess international expertise and language proficiency necessary to assist companies in expanding their overseas markets. Students may obtain detailed infor- mation about the program from the Department of Modern Languages or the International Cooperative Education Office, 502 Stearns Center. Irish Studies The Irish Studies Program promotes Irish Studies at Northeastern Uni- versity through expansion of the curriculum, cultural programs on Ireland and Irish-Americans, and co-operative exchanges of Irish and American students for work and study. The Distinguished Speakers Series pre- sents opportunities for University faculty and staff to develop mutually beneficial relationships with Irish counterparts in all disciplines. The committee encourages cooperation with all departments of the Univer- sity. Through International Co-op, students are placed in various busi- nesses and agencies in the Republic of Ireland and in Northern Ireland. The Working Papers in Irish Studies Series provides an opportunity to disseminate manuscripts of current interest. Cultural efforts include a film series, development of a library collection, and art exhibitions, as well as student activities in the Ihsh Student Club. Plans to develop an Interdisciplinary Minor are underway. Dr. Ruth-Ann Harris, Department of History, is the Director of Irish Studies. League of Composers- International Society for Contemporary Music Northeastern University is the home of the Boston chapter of the League of Composers-International Society for Contemporary Music, one of the oldest and most prestigious international organizations dedicated to the promulgation of new music. With chapters in more than forty countries and with a membership that has included Schdnberg, Stravinsky, Bartok, and Ravel, the League-ISCM has introduced to the public, works of some of the most important composers of the twentieth century. Under the direction of Professor Dennis Miller of the Northeastern Music De- partment and through the auspices of the Division of Fine Arts, the League's activities at Northeastern include the presentation of an annual concert series featuring the finest interpreters of the contemporary id- iom, sponsorship of a new-works commissioning program, production 88 / College of Arts and Sciences B of NEW MUSIC-BOSTON, a calendar listing of Boston new music activ- ities, and publication of a series of nnonographs by noted contemporary composers and scholars of new music. Linguistics Minor In collaboration with four other departments— English, Modern Lan- guages, Philosophy and Religion, and Sociology/Anthropology— the Psychology Department offers the Linguistics Minor, which reflects the current research of such diverse people as linguists, sociologists, psy- chologists, language educators, speech pathologists, neurologists, and teachers of second languages. The minor in Linguistics complements the study of any other language-related area such as computer science, anthropology, brain physiology, or language teaching. Specialized con- centrations within linguistics include psycholinguistics, stylistics, lan- guage and culture, second language teaching and applied linguistics, theoretical linguistics, and American Sign Language linguistics. Many research opportunities exist through directed work study. London Business/Economics Internship Programme The Department of Economics and the College of Business Administra- tion have joined with the London Internship Consort to offer a new pro- gram of Business/Economics Study and Internship in London. The Programme combines upper-level coursework in European Economic Development, a case-based Seminar in International Business Studies, and a working Internship for a total of 16 quarter hours credit. The internship will be in the Marketing, Communications, or Finance depart- ments of major international corporations, or in Marketing Consultancies and Advertising Agencies. Application and eligibility information is avail- able through the Division of Special Programs, College of Arts and Sci- ences. London Journalism/Mass Communications Internship Programme This program offers students the opportunity to work for British newspa- pers, magazines, television and radio stations, and for advertising and public relations firms on a ten-week internship. Students also take a cluster of upper-level courses including: British Media, Culture, and So- ciety; Advertising and Public Relations Practices in Britain; and The Foreign Correspondent: Covering London. Students live in centrally-lo- cated Kensington in shared apartments and take their classes on-site. London Political Internship Programme The Political Science Department and the London Internship Consort have joined together to offer American university students the opportu- nity to learn and gain working experience at the very heart of British politics as part of their Study Abroad program. The London Political Internship Programme combines two lecture courses in British Government, a special Seminar in International Rela- tions, and an Internship for a total of 1 6 quarter hours. The Internship will be with a Member of Parliament, a parliamentary candidate, or with a campaign manager, known in England as a Constituency Agent. Intern- ship assignments vary from term to term, but have included assignments Special Programs / 89 with major party leaders and current and former Prime Ministers. One half-price scholarship is available to a Northeastern University student each year. Application and eligibility information is available from the Division of Special Programs, College of Arts and Sciences. Marine Studies l\/linor The Marine Studies minor reflects the educational resources and mari- time heritage of New England and offers the undergraduate student the opportunity for an unusual focus in a liberal arts education. Study of the oceans, like approaches to other intellectual frontiers, demands an in- tegrated interdisciplinary approach. The Marine Studies minor is struc- tured to allow a primary, although not exclusive, emphasis on either the scientific or the social science/humanistic study of the oceans. Some physical interaction with the sea is required through demonstrated achievement in a specific marine-related skill such as scuba diving, sailing, or piloting/navigation. The minor is notthe principal preparation for employment in marine related positions but rather an opportunity to enrich a liberal education. Full information is available from the Director of the Center for Marine Science and Maritime Studies. Massachusetts Bay Marine Studies Consortium Northeastern University is a member of the Massachusetts Bay Marine Studies Consortium. The Consortium serves the students and faculty of 22 Boston-area colleges and universities. The courses are interdiscipli- nary and seek to bridge the gap between academic disciplines and to address current concerns in the marine world. The Consortium catalog includes a fall course, A History of Seafaring, a look at cultures and societies of the past as reflected in their maritime activities; and three winter courses— Water, Water, an interdisciplinary survey of water-re- lated problems in their cultural, political, economic, technological, and scientific complexity: Into the Ocean World, an interdisciplinary introduc- tion to marine studies; and Marine Mammals, taught at the New England Aquarium. For further information contact the University's Consortium represen- tative. Media Studies We live in a media-oriented society in which political outcomes and social values are affected, if not determined, by the mass media. Stu- dents who pursue the Media Studies Minor examine the media from a number of perspectives. Media Studies courses are selected from the departments of Political Science, Music, Speech Communication, Jour- nalism, Art, Drama, History, and English. Each student satisfies require- ments in the background and theory of Mass Media and then completes the program by selecting courses in the areas of Media Production and Media Application. The program is considered a strong complement to majors in a variety of fields given the impact of mass mediated mes- sages on contemporary organizations and society in general. New England Conservatory Affiliation According to a reciprocal agreement between Northeastern and the New England Conservatory, a limited number of qualified Arts and Sci- ences students may take courses at the New England Conservatory as part of the regular course load and tuition fee at Northeastern. This 90 / College of Arts and Sciences arrangement provides for Northeastern students who qualify the oppor- tunity to enhance their cultural life by taking part in the richness of music education that is the hallmark of the Conservatory. Northeastern students who participate in this program, as well as any student who declares music as his or her major, are also given full library privileges to the Conservatory. Students interested in this program should contact Professor Joshua Jacobson, Chairman of the Music Department at Northeastern, 437- 2440, to make the appropriate arrangements. Oxford Study Semester Students from Northeastern University will join students from throughout the U.S. to study under Oxford University professors. The major empha- sis of the program will be international relations, with lecture courses in British History and British Government supplemented by tutorial semi- nars in such subjects as International Economic Policy, and Develop- ment of the European Economic Community. Personality and Social Psychology The Departments of Psychology and Sociology/Anthropology have com- bined their resources to offer students a new interdisciplinary speciali- zation that can be pursued for a degree in either of these academic departments. The specialization in Personality and Social Psychology offers stu dents the opportunity to acquire a systematic understanding of various life processes, such as childrearing, aggression, anxiety, prejudice, at- titude formation and change, moral development, and psychopathology It includes studies of attraction and love, conformity, formation of identity, helping behavior, morality, and other related topics. Students pursuing an interdisciplinary specialization take courses in both the Psychology and Sociology/Anthropology Departments. How- ever, the student may select the department in which the specialization will be pursued. In making this selection, the student should consider how each de partment differs in methods and level of analysis. These differences as well as various course offerings are outlined in a brochure titled A New Specialization: Personality and Social Psychology, which can be ob- tained by writing to the Department of Psychology (234 Nightingale Hall) or the Department of Sociology/Anthropology (500 Holmes Hall). Also, prospective students should discuss their potential department affilia- tions with Professors Golden or Levin (Sociology/Anthropology) and Pro- fessors Harkins or Zamansky (Psychology). (This is an interdisciplinary program that is separate from the Social Psychology specialization-out- lined on page 80.) Russian Studies Minor The Russian Studies Minor is an interdisciplinary program which pro- vides students with an opportunity to develop a broad understanding of an important area by studying its language, society, history, economy culture, and behavior. The program attempts to help students become knowledgeable about an important culture that generally receives quite limited treatment in secondary schools. The minor may help to prepare students for further graduate study in specialized areas such as govern- Special Programs / 91 ment, teaching, journalism, and business, and may provide the begin- nings of such specialized knowledge that will enhance students' career opportunities in the absence of graduate study in the aforementioned employment fields. School for Field Studies The College of Arts and Sciences is affiliated with the School for Field Studies (SFS), a nonprofit educational organization that offers one- and two-month field study expeditions throughout the world. Semester pro- grams on Wildlife Management, Athi Plains, Kenya, and on Coral Reef Ecology, St. John, U.S. Virgin Islands are offered yearly. Programs com- bine applied academics with training in field research methods and teamwork— an exciting hands-on approach to science. Credit is granted for the coursework. Students of all levels and disciplines are eligible, but participation of Northeastern University students is limited proportionate to the total number of outside participants in the SFS program. Additional information may be obtained in the Arts and Sciences Dean's Office. Technical Communication Minor Technical Communication combines written, oral, and graphics skills with a background in science or technology. The minor in Technical Communication helps students prepare for careers as technical writers, or for careers in which technical communication is a significant part of their jobs. Students in English or other liberal arts studies may elect the minor, as may students from a variety of technological or scientific fields. Trent Polytechnic Exchange Program The Trent program presents an opportunity for upperclass Northeastern students to study theory and practice of social and human services in the United Kingdom. Students participate in an academic term at Trent Polytechnic in Nottingham, England, and an additional six-month coop- erative experience in appropriate institutions and organizations. Students study the development of contemporary British social struc- ture, its institutions and strategies to deal with modern social problems. Their assignment to a specific institution offers a chance for firsthand observations of a particular social or human service. Trent is the largest practitioner of cooperative education in the United Kingdom. Community Service Volunteers (CSV), an organization com- parable to our VISTA, places students for the cooperative period. CSV is an educational charity which involves young people in full-time commu- nity service work throughout Great Bntain (for example, diagnostic cen- ters, schools for emotionally disturbed children, or social service departments in local communities). These two organizations provide a unique and challenging program for Northeastern students who qualify academically. The program can accommodate twenty to thirty students. Interested students should con- tact the Department of Sociology and Anthropology or the International Cooperative Education Office. Urban Studies Minor The Urban Studies minor offers courses with an urban orientation in four main areas: (1) urban problems and policies; (2) urban form and design; (3) African-American studies; and (4) urban humanities. The minor may be useful for the student who majors in one of the social sciences (his- tory, economics, political science) as well as the student with a career 92 / College of Arts and Sciences orientation towards political science or business administration in urban areas. The minor presents the opportunity to study. the approach of different disciplines to solve the same set of urban problems. Studying the viewpoint of artists, minorities, economists, and others, the student is given the chance to develop a broader perspective on the identity of urban areas. Like an art appreciation course, the minor provides back- ground information and criteria for appreciation of the urban environ- ment. Students may contact any one of the participating departments or the Dean's Office for additional information. Washington internship Program Students study U.S. Foreign Policy and International Relations, do spe- cialized research in a field such as Central America, Arms Control, or U.S. -European Relations, and serve an internship in Congress or a gov- ernment agency or department. Frequent guest lectures by influential government experts will supplement the academic program. Women's Studies iVIinor Women's Studies offers students the opportunity to broaden their knowl- edge and understanding of human experience by approaching various disciplines from a non-traditional perspective — that of women. In the courses offered as part of Northeastern University's interdisciplinary Women's Studies minor, students will examine traditional stereotypes and roles, learn about women's contribution to our history and culture, and consider the changing situation of women in the 1980s. Dr. Debra Kaufman, Department of Sociology and Anthropology, may be con- tacted for further information. Journais New England Quarterly The New England Quarterly, published with- out interruption since 1928, is America's leading historical review of New England life and letters. Each book-length issue presents major articles in the fields of literature, history, and culture; a special feature of brief memoranda and recently discovered documents; and a substantial book review section. Romanticism Past and Present Romanticism Past and Present pub- lishes articles and reviews of books dealing with a Romantic sense of the past. After changing its title from Milton and the Romantics in 1981, the journal shifted direction to make it responsive to a broadening con- ception of Romanticism and Romantic studies. Presently, Romanticism Past and Present publishes articles, notes, and reviews. Seeking to de- velop a comparatist and interdisciplinary orientation, the journal brings interdisciplinary and international concerns to bear on the study of En- glish Romantic literature. The Scriblerian The Scriblerian, founded in 1969, is published in the autumn and spring at the Departments of English, Temple University, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania; Northeastern University, Boston, Massachu- setts; and Goldsmith's College, University of London, Great Britain. Its Northeastern editor is Dr. Arthur T. Weitzman. Journal of Sport and Social Issues and ARENA Review The Journal of Sport and Social Issues and the ARENA Review, both published through the Center for the Study of Sport in Society, are two scholarly publications dedicated to the study of sport and society. The Journal of Sport and Social Issues carries scholarly articles and book reviews on a wide range of topics. The ARENA Review is thematic, each issue focus- ing on a specific topic in sports. Special Programs / 93 Studies in American Fiction Studies in American Fiction publishes articles, notes, and reviews on all aspects of prose fiction of the United States. Readership and contributors represent an international commu- nity of scholars of American literature. The journal's broad professional purpose is to publish new discoveries, new documents, and new inter- pretations of important works of American fiction. The publication of Volume 13 in 1985 marked thirteen years of Northeastern's sponsorship of Studies in American Fiction, the first scholarly journal to be published at the University. 94 General Regulations for the College of Arts and Sciences Graduation Requirements Quantitative Candidates for either the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science degree who entered in or after the fall quarter of 1984 must successfully complete 176 quarter hours of credit, of which thirty-two quarter hours may be taken outside the College of Arts and Sciences. In addition, only four quarter hours of Physical Education credits and no ROTC credits may be used to meet degree requirements. Residency Candidates must complete either 75 percent of the degree credit at Northeastern or the last three full quarters (a minimum of twelve full courses) at Northeastern. Qualitative Candidates must achieve a minimum cumulative average of 2.0 (grade of C). Freshman English All degree candidates must complete one quarter of Freshman Composition and one quarter of Introduction to Literature. Normally, this will be done by completing courses ENG 1110 and ENG 1111 at Northeastern. Major Candidates must complete successfully the courses specified as major requirements. A complete listing of these required courses is published in the Basic Day College Course Descriptions and Curriculum Guide. Core Curriculum Students entering the college as freshmen in the fall of 1984 and all new students entering in the fall of 1985 or thereafter must complete several "core requirements" for graduation; these re- place the previous college "distribution requirements." The Core Curric- ulum requires that courses be taken in the following areas: basic skills, both communicative and quantitative; methods of inquiry; alternative cultures and societies; Western cultural heritage; theoretical perspec- tives and changes; and current issues in perspective. Full details are provided to students at entry, and are also available from academic advisers in the Dean's Office. For all students who entered prior to the fall of 1984, and for upper- class students who entered in the fall of 1984, the previous "distribution requirements" must be satisfied, as described in earlier editions of this Bulletin. Again, full details are available from academic advisers in the Dean's Office. Foreign Language All candidates for the Bachelor of Arts degree must attain a level of proficiency in a modern foreign language indicated by passing grades in intermediate-level college courses or by meeting a comparable criterion that has been approved by the Modern Lan- guages Department. General Regulations / 95 A conditional exemption fronn this requirement may be granted in the following situations: 1) students who earned an average grade of C or better in a full, four- year language sequence in secondary school 2) students who earned an average grade of A in a three-year language sequence in secondary school. A conditional exemption must be confirmed by taking a proficiency examination during the first quarter at the University. A sufficiently high score will verify the exemption; otherwise the student will be advised of the appropriate language course to take in the following quarter. An absolute exemption will be granted to students: 1) for whom English is a foreign language 2) who receive a score of 550 or better in the Language Achievement Examinations. For students who have not met the foreign language requirement at the time of entrance, the entry level into foreign language study depends upon the scope and level of prior study. The normal sequence for stu- dents with no prior preparation is two quarters of elementary-level lan- guage and two quarters of intermediate-level language. The Modern Languages Department will determine an appropriate entry point at which students who have partial language preparation may begin com- pleting the requirement. Graduation with Honors Candidates who have achieved superior grades in their academic work will be graduated cum laude. Upon special vote of the faculty, a limited number of this group may be graduated magna cum laude or summa cum laude. Students must have been in attendance at the University for at least six academic quarters before they become eligible for honors at graduation. Commencement Exercises The College of Arts and Sciences holds commencement exercises each June and September. Accreditation All programs in the College of Arts and Sciences are fully accredited by the New England Association of College and Secondary Schools. 97 Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Paul M. Lepley, Ed.D., Dean Humberto F. Goncalves, B.S., Associate Dean oi Administration and Planning Arlene T. Greenstein, Ph.D., Associate Dean for Academic Affairs Janice Walker, A.B., Assistant Dean and Director of tine Graduate School Program Aims Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions offers under- graduate majors in tfiree departments: Education; Healthi, Sport, and Leisure Studies; and Physical Therapy. An undergraduate program in Human Services is also available. The College has graduate programs in Counseling Psychology, Curriculum and Instruction, Educational Ad- ministration, Foundations of Education, Rehabilitation Administration, Special Education, Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, Physi- cal Education, Physical Therapy, and Recreation and Leisure Studies, with the Master of Education, Master of Science, CAGS, and Doctor of Education degrees conferred. The primary goal of the College is to provide the finest education for every student. To meet demands for fully qualified personnel, the Col- lege strives to develop the independent, self-reliant individual. A View of the Five- Year Program Professional preparation is based in the liberal arts and sciences, with orientation to each profession be- ginning in the freshman year. There is a concentration on specific com- petencies spaced throughout the programs and on professional theory and practice in the last two years. In the junior or senior year, all students have the opportunity to synthesize knowledge and skills through super- vised experiences in clinical practice, student teaching, field experi- ence, or internships. Each curriculum is enriched by cooperative education experiences that, for the most part, are related to a student's area of specialization. At times, these experiences are professionally unrelated, but are always concerned with people, thus providing an opportunity of inestimable value in any career. Facilities The facilities of the College are quite diversified. Dockser Hall houses administrative and faculty offices, classrooms, a gymnasium, dance stu- dio, computer laboratories, physiology of exercise laboratory, and locker and shower facilities, as well as seminar rooms, and a motor-learning laboratory. The swimming pool, weight room, handball/racquetball courts, offices, and shower and dressing facilities are located in the Barletta Natatonum complex. The Cabot Building, attached to Barletta, contains one very large gymnasium and another well equipped for gym- nastics, as well as wrestling, exercise, and weight training rooms, an athletic training laboratory, an indoor track and activity area, offices, and extensive locker room space. The Department of Education administratively houses three resources for Boston-Bouve College: The Reading Clinic, The F. Andre Favat Learning and Resources Center and Library of Children's Literature, and the Russell J. Call Children's Center. The Reading Clinic, in 1 Holmes 98 / Boston-Bouve College Hall, provides corrective instruction for area school children while stu- dents enrolled in the Departnnent's reading courses receive clinical ex- perience. The F. Andre Favat Center, in 1 Nightingale Hall, contains a collection of children's literature and related learning resources includ- ing books, tests, professional journals and manipulative materials. The Russell J. Call Children's Center, located in the Forsyth Building, pro- vides day care for children ranging in age from two years and nine months to five years whose parents are faculty, staff, or students of Northeastern University. Forsyth Building is the location for a Speech- Language-Hearing Clinic and Laboratory, where students may observe, through one-way glass or television monitors, the actual delivery of clin- ical services. The Human Services Program office is in room 127, Mes- erve Hall. The Physical Therapy Department is located in Mary Gass Robinson Hall. On the third and fourth floors are the physical therapy faculty of- fices, the Lupean Professional Library, classrooms, and three laborato- ries. The laboratories are designed and equipped specifically for the practice of clinical procedures and research. The library's reading room supplements the University library, maintaining an up-to-date collection of physical therapy and medical books for use by students and faculty in the program and the College. The Warren Center serves as a practical laboratory for the College. Its athletic fields and tennis courts, ropes course, cross-country ski trails, natural setting of lake, woods, fields, streams, winterized cottages, and Hayden Lodge provide year-round opportunities for outdoor learning twenty-five miles from the Boston campus. Courses, conferences, sem- inars, and workshops are conducted at the Center throughout the year and thus serve University and community needs. Admission See page 234 for information concerning admission. In the third year, prior to the first supervised clinical education expehence. Physical Ther- apy students must be examined either by physicians in the University Health Services, at a moderate fee, or by a personal physician. Students majoring in programs offered by the Department of Education and the Department of Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies must submit evidence that they are free of tuberculosis before engaging in student teaching. Graduation Requirements Degrees Students graduating in Early Childhood Education, Elemen- tary Education, English as a Second Language, Human Services, School and Community Health Education, and Physical Education, earn the degree of Bachelor of Science in Education; those completing the Rec- reation and Leisure Studies program are awarded the Bachelor of Sci- ence in Recreation and Leisure Studies degree; and students graduating in Physical Therapy receive the degree of Bachelor of Sci- ence in Physical Therapy. These degrees are awarded to qualified can- didates who have completed the prescribed curricula. Student teaching, field experience, or clinical practice is an integral part of the curriculum and is required for graduation. All programs require demonstration of computer literacy prior to graduation. Boston-Bouve College / 99 Qualifications Quantitative The quarter hours required in each curriculum differ. Q.H. Early Childhood Education 181 Elementary Education 181 English as a Second Language 181 School and Community Health Education 1 78 Human Services 176 Physical Education Athletic Training 180 Athletic Training Teacher Certification 184 Cardiovascular Health and Exercise 177 Dance Teacher Certification 180 Physical Education Teacher Certification 180 Physical Therapy • 170 Recreation and Leisure Studies 1 72 Students must satisfy the requirements of the Department of Cooper- ative Education to become eligible for their degrees. Senior-year course work and required experiences must be com- pleted in full-time residence at Northeastern University or in an educa- tional setting approved by the College. Qualitative The overall cumulative quality-point averages required to enter each class level are explicitly stated in the Student Handbook. Throughout the professional sequence, students must maintain required averages and must demonstrate a high level of personal and profes- sional maturity to continue field practice and be approved for gradua- tion. Because of accreditation recommendations and differences in curricula, variations in qualitative requirements may occur. Transfer students in any curriculum may be accepted into the College at upperclass levels except in physical therapy, if there are available spaces. Each transcript is individually assessed for qualification, place- ment, and program design. Graduation with Honor Candidates who have attained superior grades in their academic work will be graduated cum laude. Upon special vote of the faculty, a number of this group may be graduated magna cum laude or summa cum laude. Students must have been in attendance at the University for at least six quarters before they become eligible for honors at graduation. Program Accreditation The curriculum in Physical Therapy is accredited by the American Phys- ical Therapy Association. Programs in Early Childhood, Elementary Ed- ucation, School Health Education, and Physical Education are state- approved under the Interstate Certification Compact (I.CC). Licensure/Registration All fifty states have laws governing the practice of physical therapy. In order to be eligible for employment to practice physical therapy, gradu- ates must meet the specific legal requirements of the state in which they wish to work. In most states the requirements include graduation from an accredited school of physical therapy and a satisfactory grade on a written examination. Graduates are responsible for finding out what the specific legal requirements are to practice in the state in which they seek employment. 100 / Boston-Bouve College Certification Upon successful completion of the progranns in Early Childhood, Ele- mentary Education, School Health Education, and Physical Education, students are eligible to apply for certification by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Certification is required for public school teaching, but does not guarantee a position. Reciprocal certification is available in many states of the United States, for those who complete I.C.C. ap- proved programs. Graduates are responsible for determining the re- quirements of the states in which they are interested. Focus on the Student There is a uniqueness about this College. Perhaps it is the personal touch, a keen interest in every man and woman, expressed in individ- ualized advice and counsel. The College has its own professional clubs and Dance Theatre. Its social clubs and assemblies contrast with study rooms, seminars, and places for research. There is skiing in winter, camping in summer, and year-round sports. Community service is stressed in every department — service to those with special needs: the physically handicapped, inner-city youth, and the aging. 101 Department of Education Paul H. Tedesco, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Assistant Professors E. Vaughn Guloyan, Ed.D. Thomas H. Clark, M.A. John D. Herzog, Ph.D. Carlton B. Lehmkuhl, Ph.D. Melvin Howards, Ph.D. John F. Maguire, M.Ed. Mervin D. Lynch, Ph.D. Sandra M. Parker, Ed.D. Associate Professors Ronald E. Baptiste, Ed.D. Nicholas J. Buffone, Ph.D. Leslie A. Burg, Ed.D. Eugene DuBois, Ed.D. Charles F. Haley, M.Ed. Thomas F. Henstock, Ed.D. Mary J. Lee, M.Ed. Joseph Meier, Ed.D. Harold A. Miner, Ed.D. Irene A. Nichols, Ed.D. G. Stanley Patey, Ed.D. Barbara A. Schram, Ed.D. The Department of Education offers basic and advanced courses in the humanities and behavioral sciences for students in education, human services, and other human development professions. The aims of these courses are to promote understanding of the processes of intentional socialization and deliberate intervention in people's lives and to familiar- ize students with the body of knowledge dealing with the principles of human development and well-being. The courses are open to students across the University provided they can meet the prerequisites listed in the Basic Day Colleges Course Descriptions and Curriculum Guide. Education and Social Science Human Development and Learning I Human Development and Learning II Creative Expression in Children Educational Applications of Social Psychology Mental Health in Teaching Cross-Cultural Studies of Child Rearing and Education Language and Cognition: Educational Implications Seminar in Adolescent Psychology Seminar in Human Learning and Motivation Seminar in Early Childhood Development Measurement and Evaluation Introduction to Educational Statistics Comparative Education Philosophy of Education Current Issues in American Education Seminar in Group Process Day-Care and Nursery Schools: Social and Cultural Origins 102 / Boston-Bouve College Schools as Social Systems Class and Ethnic Relations in Education Beginning Computer Use The Human Services Professions Educational and Psychosocial Development Directed Study The Department of Education also provides teacher preparation pro- grams in a variety of fields and levels. To assist students enrolled in these programs, the Department utilizes three support units; the Read- ing Clinic, the F. Andre Favat Learning Resources Center, and the Rus- sell J. Call Children's Center. The aim of the Department is to make it possible for students to gain certification in a teaching major and/or level and to acquire the compe- tencies necessary for success in teaching. Teacher Preparation Early Childhood Education (K-3)* Students in the Early Childhood Education program pursue studies in the College of Arts and Sciences and in other basic colleges of the University, as well as in the Boston- Bouve College. This broad academic background, combined with ex- periences in the Cooperative Education Program, permits the develop- ment of a cohesive professional base. The Russell J. Call Children's Center provides experiences in fieldwork for students in the Early Child- hood Education program. Pre-student teaching experiences in appro- priate field settings are an integral part of several required courses. Elementary Education (Grades 1-6)* Elementary Education majors acquire a broad academic base by enrolling in courses chosen from various colleges of the University. Acquiring the necessary teaching competencies is the result of the course experiences, the work experi- ences in the Cooperative Education Program, and the pre-student teaching field activities. In addition to courses required of all Elementary Education majors, students choose an area of emphasis from the follow- ing: Humanities, Language-Reading, Science-Mathematics, or Social Science. Emphases usually consist of 40 quarter hours. Each emphasis has been designed to help focus the studies, but does not lead to certifica- tion in that specific area. It may, however, serve as a catalyst for further study in a graduate program. Special Education Minor Students majoring in elementary education may complete a minor in special education which will permit them to apply for certification to teach children with moderate special needs in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Secondary Education (Grades 9-12) Programs of preparation to teach Biology, Chemistry, Earth Science, English, French, History, Math- ematics, Physics, or Spanish in the schools of Massachusetts are pro- vided for students in the College of Arts and Sciences who are majoring in those respective fields. Additionally, students majoring in Economics, *These programs are designed to meet the requirements for certification in ttie Commonwealtti of t[/lassactiusetts and in certain other states. Details may be obtained from the department chairman. Department of Education / 1 03 Philosophy, Political Science, or Sociology may pursue state certification in the teaching of Social Studies. Specified competencies established for certification in Massachusetts may be acquired through cooperative education experiences, designated courses, and a quarter of full-time student teaching, arranged by the University's Department of Education. English As A Second Language The English as a Second Language Program provides preparation for teaching at the elementary, secon- dary, and adult levels in the United States and abroad. The program includes courses in foreign language, English, cultural and cross cultural studies, methods and materials for teaching English, and international aspects of teaching and learning. This broad academic background combined with practical experiences in cooperative education, offers a strong professional foundation for those interested in this teaching spe- cialization. Student Teaching Student teaching is a full-time experience for a complete academic quarter during the senior year. It follows planned experiences that are designed to help the student toward a rewarding quarter of student teaching. A University professor and a cooperating classroom teacher have shared responsibility in the supervision of each student teacher. Teacher Certification Inasmuch as public education is a state responsibility, each state pre- scribes the conditions under which persons may be licensed to teach in its public schools. The requirements for obtaining a certificate for teach- ing, therefore, vary among the different states. 104 Department of Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies Carl S. Christensen, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Marilyn A. Cairns, Sc.D. Peter J. Graham, Ed.D. Patncia M. Fetter, Ph.D. Richard C. Zobel, Ed.D. John W. Shank, Ed.D. Sara A. Umberger, M.A. Associate Professors Ly^n m. Waishwell, Ph.D. Robert S. Curtin, Ed.D. ynda B. Zaichowsky, Ph.D. Elaine G. Eliopoulos, Ed.D. William J. Gillespie, Ed.D. Instructors Dorett M. Hope, Ed.D. Michael G. Gaudiano, M.S. Kerkor Kassabian, M.Ed. Janet E. Guilfoyle, M.S. Richard B. Morrison, Ed.D. George B. Ransom, Ed.D. Lecturers Cornelia B. McCaskill, M.A. Judith G. Wolcott, Ph.D. Mary P. Nicholson, M.S. Judith A. Noblitt, M.Ed. Frank M. Robinson, M.Ed., C.A.G.S. Assistant Professors George R. Atkinson, Ed.D. Glenn A. Boden, M.Ed. Aims The department provides programs and services, conducts re- search, and disseminates knowledge concerned with improving the quality of life with respect to health, sport, and leisure. Faculty are com- mitted to pre- and in-service preparation of practitioners to serve people of all ages and also to the scholarly investigation related to the eight programs represented within the department. Programs Professional preparation is provided in three programs: Physical Education, School and Community Health Education, and Rec- reation and Leisure Studies. Physical Education students may select a concentration in Athletic Training, Athletic Training Teacher Certification, Cardiovascular Health and Exercise, Dance Teacher Certification, or Physical Education Teacher Certification. Recreation and Leisure stu- dents may choose to concentrate in Outdoor Recreation, Recreation Management, or Therapeutic Recreation. With appropriate use of electives, students may combine concentra- tions, for example: Health/Athletic Training, Athletic Training/Cardiovas- cular Health and Exercise, Physical Education/Athletic Training, or Health/Cardiovascular Health and Exercise. In some cases, these com- bined programs may extend the date of graduation. Admissions Requirements Students desiring admission to degree programs must meet the entrance requirements of the University. In addition to transcripts showing successful completion of a secondary school college preparatory program, applicants must submit scores from the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) and three College Board Achievement Tests, preferably in areas related to their intended fields of study. Although not required, a personal interview with an admissions counselor is recommended. 105 Physical Education/Athletic Training Aims The athletic trainer plays an important role not just in professional sports, but also in the organized and recreational activities of sportsmen and women from all walks of life. A necessary link between the athlete, the coach, and the physician, the athletic trainer provides important services in preventing, treating, and rehabilitating sports injuries. The trainer's duties include advising on proper conditioning techniques to help reduce injury, assessing the se- verity of injuries that do occur and administering basic first aid, and supervising post-injury rehabilitation programs. In general, athletic trainers work in organized sports — either for sec- ondary school or college athletic teams or for professional teams en- in a variety of sports. Description of the Program The Health,. Sport, and Leisure Studies Department at Northeastern University's Boston-Bouve College of Hu- man Development Professions offers a bachelor of science program designed specifically for students interested in careers as athletic train- ers. The program can be integrated with the Health and Physical Edu- cation Teacher Certification programs. These combinations of study can be especially valuable since, for example, many schools hire a single individual to be both physical education or health education teacher and athletic trainer. Students interested in the Athletic Training program must be accepted into Northeastern's undergraduate program in Physical Education, Health Education, or Cardiovascular Health and Exercise. At the com- pletion of their first year of study, they may petition for acceptance into the Athletic Training program. To be accepted into the program, stu- dents must have earned at least a 1.85 quality-point average during their first year. They must continue to meet specified requirements to remain in the program. Certification Those who have completed the Athletic Training area of emphasis with the Physical Education Teacher Certification curriculum are eligible to apply to the National Athletic Trainers Association to take the certification examination and are eligible to apply for certification as teachers of physical education under I.C.C. approval. Certification in Physical Education and/or Athletic Training does not guarantee a posi- tion. Accreditation The professional program in Athletic Training is accred- ited by the National Athletic Trainers Association. 106 / Boston-Bouve College Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements for Freshnnen (Year One) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. English 1 & II 8 Issues in Health 4 Biology 1 4 Group Dynamics 3 Chemistry 1 5 Life/Career Planning 3 Math 4 History/Philosophy of Social Science 1 4 Physical Education 3 Human Movement 3 Swimming 1 Human Development 4 Physical Conditioning 1 Basketball 1 Gymnastics 1 & II 2 Track and Field 1 First Aid 2 II. Upperclass Requirements Course Q Anatomy/Physiology I & II Computer Use Motor Development Human Development II Physics Basic Athletic Training Basic Athletic Training Lab Critical Teaching Skills Clinical Athletic Training Measurement and Evaluation 2 Teaching, Analysis, and Coaching Courses Exercise Physiology Advanced Athletic Training Physical Conditioning Programming 4 Electives Senior Seminar Physical Education Skill Elective H. Course Q.H, 8 Secondary School 4 Activities 3 4 Therapeutic Modalities 4 4 Tennis 1 4 Weight Training 1 3 Kinesiology 4 1 Statistics 4 4 Badminton 1 2 Foundations of Psychology 4, 4 Therapeutic Reconditioning 4 4 Motor Learning 4 4 Curriculum Development 3 Theory of Coaching 2 4 Nutrition 4 Volleyball 1 2 Psychology of Sport 2 16 Overview of Disabilities 4 4 Supervised Student Teaching 6 1 Athletic Training Internsh P 6 Graduation Requirement— 184 Quarter Hours Athletic Training/Teaclier Certifi- cation Graduation Requirement— 180 Quarter Hours Athletic Training Specialization 107 Physical Education/Cardiovascular Health and Exercise Description of the Program Students interested in careers as preven- tive/rehabilitative exercise technologists and specialists or health and fitness counselors in private and public agencies, comnnercial health and fitness centers, hospitals and out-patient clinics, or business and corporations may obtain a Bachelor of Science degree in the program of Cardiovascular Health and Exercise. The program of study is focused on the health and exercise sciences as they relate to physical fitness, health promotion, and primary and secondary prevention of cardiovas- cular disease. In addition to the applied science base, students also take courses designed to help them acquire the knowledge and skills necessary for physical and health assessment, exercise prescription, and program development and supervision for adults in preventive and rehabilitative health and exercise programs.' Certification This degree prepares the student to apply for certifica- tion as a Preventive/Rehabilitative Exercise Technologist or Specialist granted by the American College of Sports Medicine. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements for Freshmen (Year One) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Biology 1 & II 8 Mathematics 4 English 1 & II 8 Current Health Issues 4 Human Development 1 & II 8 First Aid 1 2 Social Science 4 Guided Skills Electives 3 Human Movement 3 Swimming 1 Life Career Planning 3 Physical Conditioning 1 II. Upperclass Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Anatomy/Physiology 1 & II 8 Introduction to Counseling 4 Motor Development 4 Measurement & Evaluation 4 Chemistry 1 & II 10 Exercise Physiology 4 Basic Athletic Training 3 Commercial Recreation Basic Athletic Training Lab 1 Mgt. 4 Computer Use 4 Budget Analysis 4 Psychology 1 4 Exercise Testing Communicable/ Prescription 3 Degenerative Diseases 4 Resistive Exercise Training 1 Health Counseling 4 Electrocardiography 4 Electives 24 Physical Conditioning Community Health 4 Programming 2 Special Problems 4 Nutntion 4 Kinesiology 4 Supervised Field Statistics 4 Experience 12 Minimum Graduation Requirement— 177 Quarter Hours 108 / Boston-Bouve College Physical Education/Dance Teacher Certification Description of the Program The Department of Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies offers the Bachelor of Science degree in education with a concentration in dance education. Students in this concentration com- plete 180 quarter hours of course work of which 61 are in dance. The dance offerings at Northeastern University are supplemented and en- riched by a continuing program of professional dance residencies con- ducted on campus. Activities range from dance workshops, lecture- demonstrations, and master classes to fully-staged professional perfor- mances. Graduates of the dance education concentration often find employ- ment not only in public and private schools, but also in dance studios, community recreation agencies, and in some cases with dance compa- nies. Students wishing to pursue advanced academic study may apply for admission to dance related graduate programs. Certification Students who successfully complete the dance program are eligible for Massachusetts Certification as a teacher of dance. P^ Physical Education/ 109 1. General Requirements for Freshmen (Year One) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. English 1 & II 8 Human Development 4 Social Science 4 Life/Career Planning 3 Introduction to Theatre Mathematics 4 Arts 4 First Aid 2 Aspects of Dance 3 Modern Dance 1 & II 2 Group Dynamics 3 Jazz Dance 1 1 Electives 8 Movement Fundamentals 1 Ballet 1 1 Improvisation 1 II. Upperclass Requirements (Years Two-Fiye) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Anatomy/Physiology 1 4 Motor Development 4 Creative Dance for Dance in Culture 4 Elementary or Human Development II 4 Secondary School* 2 Dance Composition II 3 Dance Composition 1 3 Directed Teaching 1* Rhythmic Analysis 1 Modern Dance III Ballet II 1 Ballet III Jazz Dance II 1 Modern Dance IV Kinesiology 4 Folk and Square Dance Foundations of Motor Learning Psychology 4 Measurement and Critical Teaching Skills* 4 Evaluation Laban Movement Analys s 2 Jazz Dance III Rehearsal and Curriculum Development 3 Performance 1 Teaching Folk, Square, Adapted Physical and Ballroom Dance* 3 Education 4 Special Problems 3 Basic Athletic Training 3 Electives 36 Dance in 20th Century 4 Student Teaching 12 Directed Teaching 11* 1 Ballroom Dance 1 Dance Technique Electives 2 Computer Use 4 Minimum Graduation Requirement— 180 Quarter IHours *lndicates a pre-practicum course witli field experience. Note: Ttie above program is designed to assist tlie student to prepare for either secondary (5-12) or elementary (K-9) school dance teacher certification. 110 Physical Education Teacher Certification Description of the Program The Teacher Certification program in Physical Education is designed to offer students the opportunity to pre- pare themselves as professionals capable of developing the materials and methods appropriate to teaching physical education in public and private schools at all levels — elementary, secondary, and college. Its graduates may qualify as athletic coaches, as trainers, supervisors of physical education, or leaders in YMCAs, YWCAs, health clubs, other youth organizations, or as exercise specialists in industry and business. In addition to a strong background in general education, applied sci- ence, and pedagogy, each student is expected to demonstrate a com- petent level of knowledge and proficiency in physical skills courses such as swimming, gymnastics, track, badminton, tennis, volleyball, and bas- ketball. Skill may be demonstrated through competency testing or by taking the appropriate courses. Major students are assigned supervised student teaching or field experiences in schools or agencies throughout the Greater Boston area as appropriate to their areas of concentration. In addition, students have the opportunity to increase their experience with children or adults through cooperative work assignments and in pre-practicum courses. Physical Education majors are expected to maintain a specific grade average at each class level (see the current Student Handbook). Fees may be assessed in courses requihng highly specialized equipment, supplies, or off-campus facilities. Accreditation The professional program in Physical Education is ap- proved under the Interstate Certification Compact (I.C.C). Certification Upon successful completion of the Physical Education requirements for graduation, students are eligible to apply for Certifica- tion to teach in Massachusetts public schools. Certification in Physical Education does not guarantee a position. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements for Freshmen (Year One) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Biology 1 4 Biology II, Chemistry 1 or English 1 & II 8 Physics 4 Human Movement 3 Social Science 4 Physical Conditioning 1 Swimming 1 Gymnastics 1 & II 2 Life/Career Planning 3 Human Development 1 4 Basketball 1 Health Issues 4 Mathematics 4 First Aid 2 Group Dynamics 3 Track and Field 1 History & Philosophy of Physical Education 3 Physical Education / 111 II. Upperclass Requirements (Years Two-Five) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Anatomy/Physiology 8 Computer Use 4 Motor Development 4 Human Development II 4 Elementary School Tennis 1 Activities* or 4 Kinesiology 4 Secondary School 4 Teaching, Analysis, and Activities* 3 Coaching Courses 8 Statistics 4 Curriculum Development 3 Critical Teaching Skills* 4 Theory of Coaching/Play 2 Exercise Physiology 4 Volleyball 1 Overview of Disabilities* 4 Supervised Student Basic Athletic Training 3 Teaching 12 Administration of Physical Electives (General Education 4 "studies) 34 4 Activity Skill Electives 4 Badminton 1 Measurement and Foundations of Evaluation 4 Psychology 4 Motor Learning 4 Minimum Graduation Requirement— 180 Quarter l-iours "Indicates a pre-practicum course with field experience. Note: The physical education program is designed to assist the student in pre- paring for either secondary of elementary school physical education teacher certification. The curriculum may be altered because of changes in state certifi- cation regulations. Combining the teaching certification program with other con- centrations may result in an extended graduation date. 112 Recreation and Leisure Studies/Outdoor Recreation Description of the Program The Outdoor Recreation option is de- signed to help students understand the relationship between natural physical environments and social environments, and the interaction be- tween the two that creates the recreation place. This concentration is structured in accordance with three basic goals: (1) to provide students with an opportunity to acquire an understanding of elements of biology, geology, ecology, facilities planning, and admin- istration as they relate to leisure in an outdoor setting; (2) to help stu- dents develop a variety of skills and methodologies to coordinate the relationships among social, ecological, and economic elements of out- door recreation areas: and (3) to introduce students to the political real- ities of the environment and outdoor recreation issues. A variety of experiential education opportunities supplementing regu- lar course offerings are available at the Warren Center of Northeastern University, a unique teaching-learning laboratory within easy commuting distance of Boston, and through the summer wilderness program. Stu- dents are scheduled for their one-week resident camp experience at the close of the freshman year at the Warren Center in Ashland, approxi- mately twenty-five miles west of the Boston Campus. The lab fee for this experience is approximately $165 per student. The flexibility of their program enables graduates of the Outdoor Rec- reation option to qualify for positions of leadership in a variety of recre- ation areas. For example, graduates may become conservationists, working in state or federal agencies. They may also work as camp coun- selors and administrators, as activity coordinators or program planners at parks and resorts, or in a variety of social-science centers. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements for Freshmen (Year One) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Biology 1 & II 8 Speech Fundamentals 3 English 1 & II 8 Foundations of Leadership Social Science 4 and Leisure Services 4 Life/Career Planning 4 Computer Use 4 Health Issues 4 Education Elective 4 Leisure Awareness 2 Professional Skills 4 II. Upperclass Requirements (Years Two-Five) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Human Development 1 & II 8 Research Methods 4 Anatomy/Physiology 1 & II 8 Elements of Outdoor Introduction to Recreation Recreation Planning 4 and Leisure Services 3 Rec. Man. Elective 3 Earth Science Electives 8 Research Applications 4 Group Dynamics 3 Program Planning 4 Internship Seminar 1 Interpretation of Ecological Internship in Outdoor Rec. 12 and Social History 4 Environmental Education 4 Senior Seminar 4 Seminar in Environmental Program Electives 13 Issues and Legislation 4 Guided Electives 32 Minimum Graduation Requirement— 172^ Quarter IHours 113 Recreation and Leisure Studies/Recreation Management Description of the Program Students in recreation management have academic and work experiences which combine to give them an oppor- tunity to develop strong general education and marketable job skills. The academic work emphasizes the behavioral sciences as they ap- ply in leisure and managerial settings. At the end of the freshman year, students take an intensive, in-residence program in leadership and hu- man relations at the University's Warren Center, 25 miles west of Boston. Equally heavy emphasis is placed on developing a working knowl- edge of marketing, budgeting, planning, evaluation, and computer ap- plications as they apply to the leisure industry. The case method of teaching is widely used to help students identify and solve practical problems facing recreation organizations in the commercial and non- profit sectors. The cooperative education plan provides opportunities for profes- sional work experiences in health clubs, racquet clubs, resorts, tourism agencies, government, and nonprofit agencies. Further, a three month internship exposes the student to professional experience which is not usually possible in cooperative education jobs. The academic and work experiences in recreation management are designed to help the student to develop those skills most necessary to obtain entry level management positions in commercial, government, and nonprofit recreation. Students wishing to continue their education appropriately seek admission to Master's of Business Administration (M.B.A.) or Master's of Public Administration (M.P.A.) degree programs. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements for Freshmen (Year One) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Biology 1 & II 8 Speech Fundamentals 3 English l&ll 8 Foundations of Leadershi ip Social Science 4 and Leisure Services 4 Life/Career Planning 4 Computer Use 4 Health Issues 4 Education Elective 4 Leisure Awareness 2 Professional Skills 4 II. Upperclass Requirements (Years Two-Five) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Human Development 1 & II 8 Research Methods 4 Anatomy/Physiology l&ll 8 Leisure Counseling 4 Earth Science Electives 8 Research Applications 4 introduction to Recreation Program Planning 4 and Leisure Services 3 Group Dynamics 3 Internship Seminar 1 Overview of Physical Internship 12 Disabilities 4 Senior Seminar 4 Social and Psychological Guided Electives 32 Impacts of Disabilities 4 Foundations of Psychiatric Program Electives 16 Services Minimum Graduation Requirement — 172 Quarter Hours 114 Recreation and Leisure Studies/Therapeutic Recreation Description of the Program The unique problems of special needs groups in our society have recently become the focus of intense study. As our understanding of their needs increases, so too does our appre- ciation of the therapeutic values associated with participation in recrea- tion activities. Such advances in knowledge have helped establish further career opportunities for students interested in Recreation and Leisure Studies. Therapeutic Recreation specialists may be members of health care teams in clinical and residential treatment centers, or they may serve as advocates for disabled persons who live in the community and wish to pursue leisure activities independently. Therapeutic Recreation students take courses in behavioral and social sciences, counseling techniques, and program planning for various special needs populations. The Ther- apeutic Recreation concentration is designed to help equip students with the professional job skills that are essential to work with disabled people in institutions and community-based settings, including hospi- tals, rehabilitation facilities, nursing homes, schools, and residential cen- ters as well as day-care vocational/avocational centers in therapy collaboratives. A variety of experiential education opportunities supple- menting regular course offerings are available through ECHO, Inc., (a private camp affiliated with Northeastern University serving disabled children and their nondisabled peers). Basic Course Requirements I. General Requirements for Freshmen (Year One) Course Q.H. Biology I& II 8 English 1 & II 8 Social Science 4 Life/Career Planning 4 Health Issues 4 Leisure Awareness 2 Course Q.H. Speech Fundamentals 3 Foundations of Leadership and Leisure Services 4 Computer Use 4 Education Elective 4 Professional Skills 4 Upperclass Requirements (Years Two-Five) Course Q.H. Human Development I & II 8 Anatomy/Physiology I & II 8 Earth Science Electives 8 Introduction to Recreation and Leisure Services 3 Internship Seminar 1 Internship 12 Senior Seminar 4 Guided Electives 32 Foundations of Psychiatric Services 4 Course Research Methods Leisure Counseling Research Applications Program Planning Group Dynamics Overview of Physical Disabilities Social and Psychological Impacts of Disabilities Program Electives Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Minimum Graduation Requirement— 172 Quarter IHours Note: Students are scheduled for a one-week resident camp experience at the close of the freshman year at the Warren Center in Ashland, approximately twenty-five miles west of the Boston Campus. Lab fee: $165. 115 School and Community Health Education Description of the Program Health Education is a relatively new profession concerned with the improved status of individual and com- munity health through educational activities. While working in a variety of settings such as volunteer health agencies, public health clinics, ele- mentary and secondary schools, or health-planning organizations, the health educator facilitates health-promoting behavior changes as a means to enriching the quality of life. The health educator uses tech- niques and information from both medical and educational fields in order to assist individuals and communities dealing with emotional, physical, or social aspects of health. Since health has psychological, physical, and social components, the program of study is organized to help students develop an understand- ing of each of these, as well as their interaction. Courses during the first part of the program emphasize the foundations of health education in the social and life sciences. Practical experience in health education is included throughout the program to provide the student with an oppor- tunity to apply theory and techniques with Boston area groups. Major courses on contemporary health issues help prepare the student to understand the details and complexities of several important health top- ics. Educational issues and approaches are included in courses to help students understand the role of education in improving health. Overall, the program of study is intended to produce graduates with the competence to assess the health education needs of groups and to develop, organize, and evaluate effective educational activities. Throughout the program of study, the concepts of prevention, health promotion, wellness, and holistic health serve as common threads in professional preparation. The development of specific competencies for health education roles is an objective of the program. Certification Upon successful completion of the requirements for graduation in School Health Education, students are eligible to apply for Certification to teach in the public schools of Massachusetts. Certifica- tion is also readily obtained in other states having certification reciprocity agreements with the Massachusetts Department of Education. There are no certification criteria for students in Community Health Education. However, all students must satisfy departmental requirements before being approved for graduation in School and/or Community Health Ed- ucation. Accreditation The professional program in School Health Education is accredited by the Interstate Certification Compact. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements for Freshmen (Year One) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Chemistry 1 & II 8 First Aid 2 Biology 1 & II 8 Social Science II 4 English 1 & II 8 Foundations of Health 2 Social Science 1 4 Introduction to Safety 2 Health Issues 4 Instructional Resources 2 Mathematics 4 Computer Use 4 1 Activity Physical Education Skill 1 116/ Boston-Bouve College II. Upperclass Requirements (Years Two-Five) Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Psychology 1 & II 8 Nutrition 4 Human Development 1 & II 8 Microbiology 4 Anatomy/Physiology 1 & II 8 Analysis of Instruction* 4 Health Concerns of Youth* 4 Mental Health 4 Measurement and Introduction to Special Evaluation 4 Educ. 4 Drug Use/Abuse 4 Teaching Procedures/ Communicable/ Curriculum in School/ Degenerative Disease 4 Community Health* 4 Longevity and Aging 4 Human Sexuality 4 Community Health 4 Organization/ Seminar 1 & II 4 Administration of Health Education Electives 4 Education 4 General Studies Electives 20 Health Counseling 4 Practicum 12 Physical Education Activity Electives 1 Minimum Graduation Requirement — 1 78 Quarter IHours *A pre-practicum course witli field experience. Note: Students selecting an emphasis in School Health Education must meet state certification requirements for field experiences in pre-practica and the prac- ticum in a secondary school setting (grades 5-12). Those selecting Community Health receive field experiences with community agencies, hospitals, and local or state health departments. 117 Department Services All-University Electives in Health Education The program in School and Connmunity Health Education is interested in the health status of the University comnnunity. In an attempt to meet the health needs of students, several elective courses are offered regularly on selected health issues of potential personal and professional interest to any University student. Courses on topics such as stress and health, nutrition, sexuality, mental health, consumer health, drug use/abuse, and aging are designed to provide current information and concepts related to wellness and health promotion. Instruction is organized into lectures, discussion groups, and demonstrations to provide students with the opportunity to understand the significance and application of recent health-related research findings in their own lives. All-University Elective Courses in Physical Education A broad selection of electives in dance, sports, games, aquatics, and gymnastics is offered for all University students. All classes are open to men or to women with instructional modifications where appropriate. The elective program places focus on the lifetime use of sports, dance, and aquatics for recreational satisfaction and participation. Classes are subject to cancellation if enrollments are too low. Dance Theatre The Northeastern University Dance Theatre offers students interested in dance as a performing art the opportunity to choreograph and/or per- form in concert. In addition to an annual University concert production, this group presents several lecture-demonstrations and/or community concerts each year. Admission to the dance group is by audition. Intramural and Extramural Sports Students are provided the opportunity to participate in a comprehensive program of intramural and extramural sports through clubs, leagues, and individual participation. Separate leagues are organized for com- muting, dormitory, and fraternity students. Intramural sports are orga- nized separately for men and women and, for certain activities, on a coeducational basis. Throughout the year, intramural and sports club participation may be possible in badminton, fencing, football, golf, gym- nastics, aerobic dance, swimming, volleyball, water polo, and other sports. A "drop-in" program for individual leisure physical activity is also provided. Fenway Project Since 1973, students in Recreation and Leisure Studies have been com- mitted to the Fenway Project, providing meaningful recreation services and activities to youth and adults living in the Fenway area, including disabled adult residents at Symphony Towers. Students participate as activity planners and leaders, conducting programs in arts and crafts, coordinating outings and social events, as well as Big Brother/Big Sister programs and the annual spring festival. Northeastern students are en- couraged to participate in all Fenway Project activities. 118/ Boston-Bouve College Recreation Club Organized by Recreation and Leisure Studies nnajors, the Recreation Club participates in projects of student interest which relate to depart- mental and professional concerns or issues. A newsletter, issued to students several times a year, informs them of upcoming events in the department and in professional organizations. The club also plans for guest speakers, student workshops, information exchange, orientation programs for new students, and a volunteer service for local programs. 119 Physical Therapy Department Jane L. Toot, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Chairperson Professor Clinical Supervisors/ Elizabeth J. Fellows, M.A. Clinical Assistant Professors Associate Professor Ruth P. Hall, B.S. Meredith E. Drench, M.Ed. Dolores A. Price, M.Ed. Clinical Supervisor/ Assistant Professors clinical Instructor Nancy C. Gilberti, M.S. Catherine M. Certo, M.S Janet L. Costa, M.S David A. Lake, Ph.D. Lecturers Ruth Rose-Jacobs, M.S. Mollis H. Herman, M.S. Rose-Marie Rine, M.S. Professional Preparation Alms The Department of Physical Therapy is dedicated to the prepa- ration of therapists who can provide services of the highest quality in a time of changing concepts, new trends, and new challenges. Students will have the opportunities to acquire the skill to help patients gain func- tional independence and to learn to recognize and assist with emotional and socioeconomic problems that affect recovery. Description of the Major Physical Therapy is one of the health profes- sions contributing to the delivery of comprehensive health care. The physical therapist is highly skilled in evaluation procedures and in the planning and execution of treatment programs appropriate to a patient's condition or disabilities. Additional responsibilities may include health- care planning and community service. Physical therapists are employed in institutions such as general hos- pitals, children's hospitals, university hospitals, rehabilitation centers, schools or centers for crippled children, nursing homes, extended-care facilities, and community, state, and federal agencies. Private practice is another option chosen by physical therapists. In addition, there are increasing opportunities in teaching and research in physical therapy. A View of the Five- Year Major The five-year program in Physical Ther- apy, based on the cooperative plan, is unique in physical therapy edu- cation. The program of study integrates liberal arts and sciences and profes- sional courses, with major emphasis on liberal arts in the first two years of the program and on professional preparation in the last three years. The professional courses include such subjects as anatomy, kinesiology, pathology, clinical medicine, neurology, orthopedics, physiology, physi- cal therapy procedures, and administration, as well as clinical experi- ence in various hospitals and clinics. Lecturers from Tufts University School of Medicine and the New Eng- land Medical Center Hospitals, as well as from medical and social agen- cies in the Boston area, augment the professional staff in the Physical Therapy program. Supervised clinical education is a strong component of the curriculum and a requirement for graduation. Clinical experience provides the stu- dent with opportunities to practice various phases of physical therapy under supervision in preparation for qualifying as a physical therapist. 120 / Boston-Bouve College Assignments in clinical education are not confined to the Boston area. They may include physical therapy departments throughout the country, particularly in many states along the eastern seaboard. Students admitted to the Department of Physical Therapy must main- tain acceptable standards of scholarship and performance in the pre- scribed program. They must also demonstrate good health, verbal fluency, essential motor skills, and emotional maturity; they must com- plete all required courses and have favorable evaluations from clinical education and co-op experience. To continue in the program, students are required to maintain a grade of C or better in all professional courses, and in all Basic Science prerequisite courses listed in the Ac- ademic Policy Statement of the Department of Physical Therapy. All students interested in majoring in physical therapy should contact the Department of Physical Therapy for information regarding depart- mental academic policies and procedures. Clinical Education Students on clinical education assignments should plan on additional expenses, including travel. Sample Freshman-Year Program of Studies In Physical Therapy First Quarter Foundations of Psychology I Fundamentals of Mathematics Basic Animal Biology Health Education First Aid Third Quarter General Chemistry Basic Animal Biology English Second Quarter Fundamentals of Mathematics I General Chemistry i English k Introduction to Physical Therapy " In addition to ttie above courses, students may elect to take Basic ROTC. - Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Fundamentals of Basic Physicst 9 Mathematics* 8 Human Physiologyt 8 Basic Animal Biology* 8 Human Anatomyt 4 English* 8 Foundations of General Chemistry* 10 Psychology 1* 4 Current Issues in Health* 4 4 General Electives 16 First Aid 2 Foundations of Psychology llf 4 *These courses are usually taken in the freshman year. -fThese courses are usually taken in the sophomore year. Note: Computer Literacy must be demonstrated prior to graduation. Physical Therapy/ 121 II. Professional Requirements Course Introduction to Physical Therapy* Introduction to Physical Therapyt Perceptual and Motor Learningt Clinical Gross Anatomy Physiology for Physical Therapists Massage Clinical Medicine I, II, III Clinical Psychiatry Clinical Kinesiology Basic Therapeutic Exercise Evaluation Procedures Prosthetics/Orthotics and Functional Activities Management of Medical/Surgical Respiratory Disorders Q.H. 3 6 4 2 10 2 4 4 3 Course Advanced Therapeutic Exercise Neuroanatomy Integration of Therapeutic Exercise Electrical Testing and Treatment Procedures Research Design Psychosocial Aspects of Illness Physical Therapy in the Health-Care System Supervised Clinical Education Clinical Seminar Administration Investigative Studies Graduation Requirement Q.H. 4 4 5 2 3 6 170 * These courses are usually taken In the freshman year, f These courses are usually taken in the sophomore year 122 Human Services An interdisciplinary major involving the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions and thie College of Arts and Sciences Wilfred E. Holton, Ph.D., Sociology/ Anthropology, Director and Associate Professor Advisory Committee Eva Havas, Ph.D., Sociology/ Anthropology John D. Herzog, Ph.D., Department of Education Ronald J. McAllister, Ph.D., Sociology/Anthropology Barbara Schram, Ed.D., Department of Education Harold S. Zamansky, Ph.D., Psychology Fieldwork Supervisor Natalie H. Riffin, M.Ed., O.T.R. Professional Preparation Aims This major offers students the opportunity to prepare themselves for possible careers in one of the areas broadly defined as "human services." The program is interdisciplinary. The Human Services curric- ulum allows students to obtain the fundamental attitudes, knowledge, and skills that can lead to a meaningful career in the helping professions as well as to a graduate education in a variety of fields. Students who major in Human Services prepare themselves to per- form a variety of functions in public and private agencies. Through course work, two quarters of fieldwork experience, and possible co-op jobs, students have the opportunity to explore such areas as casework services in social service and welfare agencies; therapeutic treatment programs in mental health settings; supportive counseling in community health centers; rehabilitation counseling services; sheltered workshops; parole counseling; court liaison in programs for delinquent youth; staff work in halfway houses, penal institutions, and drug treatment centers; supportive counseling for the mentally retarded; community organizing; services for the aging; administration in human services agencies; and social program research and evaluation. Description of the l\/lajor The five basic aspects of this program be- yond the college requirements are: I. Prerequisite Courses — Courses in the areas of sociology, psychology, economics, government, and human services. II. Core Courses — Courses in the areas of statistics, research methods, personality, abnormal psychology, personality and social structure, group process, human services organizations, intervention strategies, and a senior seminar. III. Specified Electives — Three courses in poverty, minority affairs, and/ or special needs. IV. Specializations — Five courses that focus on a student's area of inter- est, selected in consultation with an adviser. "Deaf Studies" and other structured specializations are being developed. V. Supervised Field Experience — During the junior and senior years, stu- dents spend 300 hours in supervised placement in public or private agencies, usually in separate experiences of 150 hours each. Note: Computer Literacy must be demonstrated prior to graduation. 1 Human Services / 123 A View of the Five- Year l\1ajor The Human Services major offers stu- dents the opportunity to obtain useful values and basic knowledge relat- ing to various human services fields. Courses introducing some basic skills can help them to understand and work with a variety of helping services. Human Services students at Northeastern have been very active in their major and helpful to each other. The Human Services Student Or- ganization combines social and career-related activities, which in the past have included open houses, day-long conferences, and weekend retreats. A quarterly Human Services Newsletter is published by stu- dents and faculty. 125 College of Business Administration Philip R. McDonald, D.B.A.. Dean Roger M. Atherton, Jr., Ph.D. Associate Dean Thomas E. Moore, Ph.D., Associate Dean Jay A. Halfond. Ph.D.. Assistant Dean Maryann G. Billington. M.B.A., Associate Dean (Graduate School) Dennis Ramsier, M.B.A., Assistant Dean (Undergraduate Program) Christine A. Chevoor, A.B.. Director of External Relations Kitty J. Meijer, B.A., External Relations Assistant Young In Arnowitt, M.S.. Coordinator, Academic and Administrative Services Accounting Group Professors Ronald M. Copeland. Ph.D., Lillian L. and Harry A. Cowan Research Professor of Accounting Joseph R. Curran. Ph.D. Paul A. Janeli. Ph.D., Joseph M. Golemme Professor of Accounting Russell W. Olive, D.B.A. Associate Professors Richard Lindhe °n.D. Sharon M. McKinnon. Ph.D. H. David Shernnan. D.B.A. Assistant Professors Hassanali Espahbodi. Ph.D. Thomas W. Oliver. Ph.D. Roberto. Ruland. Ph.D. James F. Volkert. Ph.D. Lecturers Alvin M. Black. M.B.A.. C.P.A. Michael D. Cottnll. M.S.. C.P.A. Hugh Crossland, L.L.M. Ralph M. Grieco. M.B.A. James F. McDermott. M.B.A.. C.P.A. Peggy L OKelly. M.B.A., C.P.A. Finance and Insurance Group Professors Elliott L. Atamian. D.B.A. Wesley W Ma^o'e D.B.A. Associate Professors Joseph W. Meador. Ph.D. Jonathan B. Welch. Ph.D. Assistant Professors Swaminatnan Baarmatn. Ph.D. Duncan Kretovich. M.B.A. David N. Leggett. Ph.D. Donald G. Margotta, Ph.D. Susan E. Moeller, Ph.D. Ramaswami Murali, Ph.D. Coleen C. Pantalone. Ph.D. Harlan D. Piatt, Ph.D. Edward M. Saunders. Ph.D. Lecturers Paul J. Bolster. M.B.A. Peggy L. Fletcher. M.B.A. Venkatesan Srinivasan. M.B.A. 126 / College of Business Administration General Management Group Professors Geoffrey P. E. Clarkson, Ph.D. Robert C. Lieb, D.B.A. Daniel J. McCarthy, D.B.A. Associate Professors Stanley R. Berkowitz, J.D. Jonathan L. S. Byrnes, D.B.A. Sangit Chatterjee, Ph.D. Laic. Chugh, Ph.D. John Diffenbach, D.B.A. Angelo J. Fiumara, J.D. Robert H. Ketchum, Ph.D. Raymond M. Kinnunen, D.B.A. James F. Molloy, Jr., Ph.D. Heidi Vernon-Wortzel, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Deborah J. Bickford, Ph.D. William F. Crittenden, Ph.D. All R. Malekzadeh, Ph.D. Ravi Ramamurti, Ph.D. Ravi Sarathy, Ph.D. William TigaTita, Ph.D. Sandra Waddock, D.B.A. Lecturers Joseph W. Chevarley, Jr., M.P.A. Mary E. Costello, J.D. Human Resources Group Professors Richard B. Higgins, Ph.D. Ralph Katz, Ph.D. Associate Professors Thomas M. Begley, Ph.D. David P. Boyd, Ph.D. Christine L. Hobart, D.B.A. Edward F. McDonough, III, Ph.D. Andre P. Priem, M.A. Francis C. Spital, Ph.D. Edward G. Wertheim, Ph.D. Management Science Group Professor Michael J. Maggard, Ph.D. Associate Professors R. Balachandra, Ph.D. Victor B. Godin, D.B.A. Robert A. Millen, Ph.D. Carl W. Nelson, Ph.D. Robert A. Parsons, M.B.A. Mustafa R. Yilmaz, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Peter J. Billington, Ph.D. Edward G. Cale, Jr., D.B.A. Kathleen Foley Curley, D.B.A. Nancy Jo Klein Delaney, Ph.D. Allen G. Greenwood, Ph.D. Katherine Taylor Halvorsen, D.Sc. Stephen K. Kwan, Ph.D. Allen S. Lee, Ph.D. Fanny L. O'Bnen, Ph.D. Marjone Piatt, Ph.D. Marius M. Solomon, Ph.D. Eriand V. Sorensen, Ph.D. Lecturer MarkM. Davis, M.B.A. Assistant Professors Rae Andre, Ph.D. Brendan D. Bannister, Ph.D. Mark P. Kriger, D.B.A. PauletteA. McCarty, Ph.D. Afsaneh Nahavandi, Ph.D. William C. Ronco, Ph.D. Bert A. Specter, Ph.D. College of Business Administration / 1 27 Marketing Group Lecturers Linda Jamieson, M.S. Keith B. Murray, M.B.A. John A. Sims, Jr., M.B.A. Professors Gerrit DeVos, Ph.D. Robert J. Minichiello, D.B.A. Frederick Wiseman, Ph.D. /^ » . .. Center for Management Associate Professors Development Dan T. Dunn, D.B.A. Richard J. Santos, M.S., Edward T. Popper, D.B.A. Associate Dean and Director Samuel Rabino, Ph.D. John J. Leary, Jr., M.B.A., Robert F. Young, D.B.A. Associate Director Barbara Couturier, B.A. Assistant Professors Program Manager Deirdre M. Bird, Ph.D. Kristina Cannon-Bonventre, Ph.D. Jerry Kirkpatrick, M.B.A. Nancy E. Lambert, Ph.D. Anil M. Pandya, Ph.D. Professional Preparation The College of Business Administration offers concentrations in the prin- cipal fields of business: Accounting, Entrepreneurship and New Venture Management (Small Business Management), Finance and Insurance, Human Resources Management, International Business, Management, Marketing, and Transportation and Physical Distribution Management. There is also a provision for those students who wish to design their own concentrations. These programs are designed for men and women seeking to prepare themselves for managerial responsibility in business, government, and other organizations with the goal of developing the ability to recognize and solve problems and to understand the role of the business firm in the community, the nation, and the world. In developing these skills, the students have the opportunity to gain not only a broad understanding of business and organizational problems through specialized courses, but also firsthand knowledge of effective solutions. Forty to sixty percent of the course work in the College of Business Administration concentrations is centered outside business to ensure a liberal education. All concentrations are offered only on the five-year Cooperative Plan, providing most students with substantial practical experience, usually in the fields for which they are preparing. Aims In keeping with the current trends in collegiate education, the College has adopted the following educational aims: 1 . To develop attitudes and ideals that are ethically sound and so- cially desirable; 2. To cultivate an awareness of the social, political, and economic developments to which the business firm must adapt; 3. To develop the habits of accurate thinking that are essential to sound judgment and the habits of accurate expression that are essential to effective communication; 4. To provide an opportunity for students to develop a specialization in business in accordance with their interests and talents. 128 / College of Business Administration A View of the Five- Year Program The College of Business Adminis- tration offers a Bachelor of Science in Business Administration degree and has concentrations of courses in several areas. The College com- bines its business curriculum with courses from the sciences, humani- ties, and social sciences. Students must take courses in these areas to ensure the well-rounded background that is so valuable in the business world. All students in the College are required to complete, in addition to their academic courses, the program of cooperative education. This program gives the student the opportunity to challenge and reinforce in the work place the theories and techniques learned in the classroom. In a similar way, the "well, that's the way they do it in my co-op company" attitudes can be and are questioned in the classroom. This double- faceted approach enhances the whole education process and generally produces graduates with a more realistic understanding of the work place. Cooperative work assignments generally are paid, full-time, professional positions with organizations both in the profit and not-for- profit private sector and in government. Work assignments are for six months of each year above the freshman level. After the foundation-laying and tools-oriented course work (combined with a large number of nonbusiness courses) of the first two years, the final three years emphasize the various functional areas of business and require students to concentrate their studies in specific areas. (Detailed descriptions of these areas follow this section.) In most of these upper- division courses the traditional lecture-and-recitation format is supple- mented by problem-solving and case-study methods. Using these, stu- dents analyze actual businesses and business problems and present recommendations for possible solutions. Students are encouraged to develop the ability to think independently, to support ideas with fact and logic, and to analyze and challenge propositions. The added experience of co-op work assignments, when combined with course work, offers each student practical exposure to the responsibilities of various admin- istrative positions as well as help in determining the kind of organization in which he or she would like to work. Special classrooms have been designed for the College to facilitate the case method of instruction. During the 1980s, the outlook for exciting careers in Business Admin- istration is optimistic. The challenges that business faces from the ef- fects of foreign policy, high technology, affirmative-action regulations, and new economic policies tend to create a demand for highly trained individuals equipped to analyze the complex problems of our modern- day economy. Upon completion of the Bachelor of Science in Business Administra- tion degree, the graduate may choose to enter the work force (many former students have assumed full-time positions with former co-op em- ployers) or go on to pursue higher degrees. In general, students find that graduate schools view a B.S. degree in Business as solid preparation for graduate work, not only in business but also in public administration, health-care administration, and edu- cation administration. Law schools look favorably on the prelegal back- ground obtained in business school. Although the Association of American Law Schools does not recommend particular courses or cur- ricula for prelegal students, it does advise undergraduates to develop College of Business Administration / 1 29 critical understanding of the institutions and values witti which the law deals. Many careers in law are directly involved in the business world, either in large corporations or in private practice. The College's curriculum offers students the opportunity to develop a broad understanding of the business environment, as well as to acquire the specific skills necessary to manage organizations in today's complex social and legal environment. Honors Program A place in the Honors Program of the College is extended to juniors and seniors who, at the end of the first quarter of their middler year, rank in the top ten percent of the class. These students are given preference in obtaining entrance to any of the College's honors seminars. They may also participate in a Senior Honors Thesis Project, an independent re- search project under the careful supervision and direction of a faculty member. The Honors Program was incorporated to: — provide opportunities to bring together the best students and faculty in stimulating courses and other academic activities; — increase the knowledge and professional skills of outstanding stu- dents; — enhance the employment or further educational objectives of gifted students; — develop increased respect in academic and professional communi- ties for the College's students and programs; and — facilitate course and curriculum experimentation into new and un- charted areas. Any Honors Program student who completes twelve quarter hours of honors-level work at a B average or higher will receive special recogni- tion of this achievement on the transcript. Business Administration as a Minor Course of Study The College of Business Administration faculty, realizing that many stu- dents may have an interest in business yet major in other disciplines, offers a Minor in Business Administration. The College of Arts and Sci- ences, which teaches some of the courses, collaborated in the design of the minor. The program has been designed so that students who complete the minor will gain a background in disciplines that serve as foundation courses for the study of business and as an exposure to its various functional areas. In addition there is an exploration of the relationship between business and society and the obligations of each to the other. Students of the Basic Colleges other than Business Administration may find the minor particularly attractive if they are considering a career in business and/or are contemplating enrolling in an MBA program, but are not sure what is involved in the study of business. Qualified students who have completed the five background and methodology courses apply for formal admission to the minor after they have accumulated eighty or more quarter hours of credit. 130 / College of Business Administration Program Components Background and Methodology: completed prior to formal entry into thie Course Q.H. College Algebra 4 Macroeconomics 4 Microeconomics 4 Descriptive Statistics 4 Inferential Statistics 4 20 Business Functions Course Q.H. Introduction to Business 4 Introduction to Accounting 4 Organizational Behavior 4 Introduction to Finance 4 Introduction to Marketing 4 Operations Management 4 24 Business and Its Environment Course Q.H. One course from the approved list 4 After a student has completed all program components, the College of Business Administration will so notify the student's Basic College so that appropriate recognition can be made. Graduation Requirements Candidates for the Bachelor of Science degree must complete all of the prescribed work of the curriculum in which they seek to qualify. This presently totals 176 quarter hours of credit. The degree conferred not only represents the formal completion of selected courses of study, but also indicates professional study in the designated area of concentra- tion. An overall average grade of C and a C average in required courses are necessary for graduation. Students must be enrolled in a full program of studies in the College of Business Administration during the final three quarters immediately preceding graduation. Graduation with [Honors Candidates who have achieved superior grades in their academic work will be graduated cum laude. Upon spe- cial vote of the faculty, a limited number of this group may be graduated magna cum laude or summa cum laude. Students must have been in full-time attendance in the Basic Colleges of the University at least six quarters before they can become eligible for honors at graduation. Colleoe of Business Administration / 131 Accreditation Curriculum Tlie undergraduate program of the College of Business Administration is fully accredited by thie American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business, indicating that the program meets the accrediting agency's standards for faculty and student quality, curriculum design, and overall University support. I The following sample freshman-year program and the basic course re- quirements for the College of Business Administration are the same for all concentration areas. Sample Freshman-Year Program of Studies in the College of Business Administration First Quarter Introduction to Business Fundamentals of Math Non-Business Elective Economics (Macro) Second Quarter Accounting I English Composition Two Non-Business Electives Third Quarter Accounting II English Literature Non-Business Elective Economics (Micro) Students who will complete the Reserve Officers' Training Corps pro- gram are permitted to drop one elective each quarter of their senior year. Individual ROTC courses carry no credit toward graduation. The College of Business Administration has no physical education re- quirement. Students wishing to take courses in physical education may take a maximum of eight quarter hours as elective credits. Basic Course Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Fundamentals of Math 4 Statistics 1 & II 8 Quantitative Models in Introduction to Data Business 4 Processing 4 English* 8 Organizational Behavior 4 Introduction to Business 4 Complex Organizations 4 Accounting 1 & II 8 Operations Management 4 Economics (Macro) 4 Business and Society 4 Economics (Micro) 4 Business Policy 4 Introduction to Finance 4 Non-Business Electives** 44 Introduction to Marketing 4 Open Electives 32 *ln addition, all students must complete the upper division writing requirement. "For International Business majors. 8 Q.H. of this total must be from the interna- tional list. For all other students, 4 Q.H. must be from the international list. 132 Accounting Concentration Professional Preparation Alms If you are anticipating a career in accounting, your interests probably lie within one of its two nnajor areas: industrial accounting or public accounting. To enable you to obtain sonne of the professional background necessary to enter these fields, the College of Business Administration offers a variety of financial accounting and nnanagerial accounting courses. Preparation for a career in accounting encompasses a broad range of activities. These include all phases of record keeping, internal and external reporting, financial planning, cost control, the design and in- stallation of systems and procedures, the application of electronic and other modern business methods to these activites, and managerial de- cision making. Accounting is a fast-growing and cntical area of business. It is an exacting field that requires men and women who enjoy dealing with facts and figures as well as with people. It requires accuracy and an ability to reason and to interpret business data. A View of the Five-Year Concentration During your first two years, you will have the opportunity to develop communicative and analytical abilities, to gain an understanding of the nature of accounting, and to survey business as a dynamic institution in an economic setting. Another important activity will be consultation with your coordinator from the Department of Cooperative Education about future work assignments. Subjects in your third year will include courses in the various functional areas of business (marketing, finance, operations, personnel), statistical analyses, and economic activity. Whether your choice of employment is in the industrial accounting or public accounting area, you will have the opportunity to prepare through specialized courses in your third and subsequent years. Subjects will include cost accounting, accounting theory, planning and control, audit- ing, and taxes. In addition to the sample freshman-year program and basic course requirements listed on page 131, students who concentrate in account- ing are required to take the following courses: II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Intermediate Accounting I, II, & III 12 Cost Accounting I & II 8 Accounting Theory and Practice or Accounting Planning and Control 4 133 Entrepreneurship and New Venture Management Concentration Professional Preparation Aims The concentration in Entrepreneurship and New Venture Man- agement (Small Business Management) offers students who plan to op- erate their own businesses an opportunity to develop skills necessary for the effective management of small enterprises. Description of the Concentration Have you ever thought about start- ing, acquiring, and operating your own business? Will you be faced with an opportunity to join a family business upon graduation? Have your views of or experience with large corporations made you think about life in a smaller organization? Or do you think you would get a real kick out of working for a small company and wish to learn more about opportu- nities with smaller firms? Are you considering a career in sales management, banking, public accounting, management consulting, or other areas that may involve you directly with owners and managers of new and small companies? For example, a bank loan officer, sales manager, or CPA would often have many entrepreneurs and small-company officers as clients. If your answer to any of these questions is yes, then you are probably a member of a unique and growing portion of Northeastern students and young people everywhere whose career definition of "doing your own thing" encompasses self-employment or work in a small company or other organization. A concentration in this field offers you a thorough "start-to-finish" per- spective. The concentration provides courses that deal with each of these key questions: 1 . What are the characteristics of people who start their own compa- nies, and what does it take to start and build a new business? 2. What are some key sources of business opportunities, and how does one assess the feasibility of a particular venture? 3. What sources exist for raising seed capital, and how does one acquire it? 4. What are the critical problems and opportunities in successfully managing a smaller company, and what are the appropriate man- agerial methods? 5. What are the key issues in financing and managing an ongoing, growing venture, and how can these be applied to small ven- tures? A View of the Five- Year Concentration Courses in this concentration benefit students in several ways. They offer the opportunity to develop an ability to assess personal aptitude and potential for small business, to find and evaluate business opportunities, to secure adequate funding, and to organize and manage the various facets of the small business- marketing, finance, control, and personnel. Entrepreneurship and New Venture Management presents students with the opportunity to prepare for a career in which they can be involved in the management of a business while maintaining a significant degree of autonomy and independence. Some students will enter this career at graduation or sometimes even before. However, many find that thev obtain their first experience through cooperative work and postgraduate employment prior to establishing their own enterprises. 1 34 / College of Business Administration I The freshman-year program of studies and the basic course require- ments for the College of Business Administration are the same for all the concentration areas. See page 131 . II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. New Venture Creation 4 Management of Smaller Opportunity Analysis & Enterprises 4 Venture Capital 4 Small Business Institute Small Business Finance 4 Field Project 8 Finance and Insurance Concentration Professional Preparation Aims The objective of the Finance and Insurance concentration is to train students for the financial management of businesses, nonprofit organizations, and governmental units. Preparation is twofold: students are offered information about current practices, theories, and concepts of financial management and have the opportunity to gain experience in analyzing situations that require financial decisions. Description of the Concentration Almost every phase of economic activity involves aspects of financial management — of cash or other funds and of economic resources available to the individual, the busi- ness, or other economic unit. Perhaps you can visualize your future career in one of the many areas of funds management: security analysis, estate planning, corporate fi- nance and control, financial planning, security or insurance brokerage, underwriting, credit management, and banking. If so, you should con- sider the Finance and Insurance Concentration. There are also career possibilities in specific financial institutions that perform indispensable services for present-day business and industry. Among these are banks, insurance companies, investment houses, credit concerns, financial service institutions, mortgage companies, and national and local real estate brokerage firms and appraisers. Career openings can be sought in all areas of business, industry, and government, where financial planning and operation are vital. A View of the Five-Year Concentration As a middler, you will take i Introduction to Finance and beginning courses in other business fields. Following the introductory course, your required courses are Managerial Finance, Investment Management, and Money and Business Activity. Besides these required courses, many electives are available, including Securities Markets, Small Business Finance, Management of Financial Institutions, and Insurance. In addition, an independent study often may be an appropriate elective. Specialization occurs in your upperclass years as you take advanced ' courses in insurance, investments, security markets, and basic business finance. To provide you with a well-rounded education, other courses are available, particularly in the broad area of economics. All courses offered by the Department of Finance and Insurance are , open to students in any concentration provided they have taken the |l| prerequisite subjects. Instructors may waive prerequisite courses in 'i special circumstances. Finance and Insurance / 135 Subfields Managerial Finance The two objectives of the finance function in the contemporary corporation or business entity include: 1 , Providing needed funds on terms that are the most favorable in view of current planning; 2. Regulating the flow of funds to maximize the realization of objec- tives. The key concerns of financial management are the capital structure of the business and the optimal manner in which its assets should be held. With only minor differences, these same broad objectives apply to the finance function of nonprofit organizations, including those in the public sector (units of government). Management of Financial Institutions This area of specialization is broadly based within the subject area and is applicable to a variety of financial institutions and positions within them. The three major topics of consideration in this area of specialization are: 1 . The institutional structure of the financial system and the relation between it and the surplus and deficit units of the whole economy; 2. Asset, liability, and capital management problems of financial in- termediaries; 3. Investment analysis and portfolio management policies appropri- ate to different financial intermediaries. Investment and Management Analysis Two benefits result from studying this concentration. First, students can gain a general under- standing, which may help them manage their own affairs. Second, those seeking professional careers in organizations where the investment function is paramount (industrial and utility corporations, real estate de- velopments, financial institutions, and many governmental agencies are a few examples) will find this subfield of great assistance. The concentration offers preparation in the specialized skills and prin- ciples that can benefit students who are interested in careers as invest- ment managers or security analysts in the following organizations; 1. Stock exchanges, investment advisory firms, brokers-dealers, un- derwriters, mutual funds, and other investment companies that are a part of the securities markets; 2. Insurance companies, commercial banks, savings and loan asso- ciations, trust companies, mutual savings associations, and orga- nizations involved in the activities of the securities markets; or 3. Federal and state governmental agencies such as the SEC, FDIC, Treasury Department, IRS, and others having regulatory responsi- bilities regarding the securities markets and their participants. Insurance and Risk Management Risk management is the process of identifying, measuring, evaluating, and treating important risks. It is a relatively new, but growing, part of the management function in business as well as in government and other nonprofit organizations. Insurance is an important method of risk financing in all organizations, including the family unit. Some individuals may study one or a few courses in insur- ance and risk management to broaden their understanding of this area 136 / College of Business Administration in order to better manage their personal affairs or to familiarize them- selves with this area as part of their general management preparation. Others may wish to specialize in this area and seek careers in the risk management function in business as managers of corporate employee benefits programs; or as managers, adjusters, or underwriters in life insurance companies, property and liability insurance companies, insur- ance brokerage firms, insurance agencies, independent adjusting firms; or in a number of other careers in this vast field. The freshman-year program of studies and the basic course require- ments for the College of Business Administration are the same for all the concentration areas. See page 131. II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Managerial Finance 4 Investment Management 4 Money and Business Finance Electives 12 Activity 4 Human Resources Management Concentration Professional Preparation Alms Human resources management, which focuses on the effective utilization of people at work, is an extension of personnel and labor relations but includes more than the traditional areas of recruitment, selection, compensation, and training. A human resources manager also must be knowledgeable about manpower planning, equal employment opportunity laws and affirmative action procedures, organizational de- velopment, career planning, job design and motivation, leadership, and communications. The ultimate goal of human resources managers is to provide an organization with the people who will be most effective in their jobs. Description of the Concentration In recent years there has been a growing interest in the quality of the employee's work life and its relation to the efficient production of goods and services. Companies such as Proctor and Gamble, AT&T, General Motors, and Burlington Mills, as well as a growing number of organizations in the public sector, are paying more and more attention to the quality of human performance at work and the level of human contributions to output. At a time when financial resources and investment capital are becoming scarcer, many organi- zations are beginning to take a closer look at the management of their people, their most precious resource. In recognition of this growing in- terest. Northeastern University's College of Business Administration offers an undergraduate concentration in Human Resources Management. The effective management of human resources calls for a joint part- nership among such organizational specialists as personnel administra- tors, labor relations negotiators, wage and salary analysts, and operating line managers in the various functional areas (marketing, fi- nance, production) of the company. As the traditional role of personnel administration is expanded to include affirmative action programs, job International Business / 137 enrichnnent, and organizational development activities, career opportu- nities in the fields of labor relations and personnel administration are likely to expand in both the public and private sectors. For the student whose career aspirations lie in fields other than per- sonnel and labor relations, one important point should be made; human resources management is not a specialized activity confined to the per- sonnel department. Whether you start your career as a work-flow analyst in manufacturing, a customer service assistant in marketing, a field au- ditor in the accounting department, or a hospital unit manager, you will be required to demonstrate skills in working with individuals and groups to achieve desired results. A View of the Five-Year Concentration Human resources manage- ment IS practiced not only by specialists in the area of personnel and labor relations, but also by line managers and specialists in many other business areas. The Human Resources Management concentration is structured to expose students to all major functions of personnel admin- istration and labor relations. II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Introduction to Human Reward Systems 4 Resources Management 4 Human Resources Selection and Assessment 4 Management Electives 8 Contemporary Labor Issues 4 International Business Concentration Professional Preparation Aims In recent years, several factors have contributed to a rapidly increasing need for qualified people in the field of international business. The growth of multinational firms, international trade, and regional inter- national trading blocs has created a shortage of skilled managers who are equipped to analyze the complexities of international business prob- lems. The International Business concentration offers students the opportu- nity to prepare themselves to meet these management needs. It offers the opportunity to develop an understanding of problems involved in operating business enterprises across national boundaries and to de- velop the ability to analyze the operations of businesses in multinational environments. The curriculum consists of a broad education provided by course requirements in arts and sciences, a basic business education provided by business administration core requirements, and a specialized edu- cation in International Business. Description of the Concentration The International Business concen- tration consists of six courses. Two of them are required: Introduction to International Business and Seminar in International Business. There are also four electives: two from the International Business curriculum and two Business Electives. In addition, two of the Non-Business Electives must be chosen from the International List (see page 139). 138 / College of Business Administration When you enroll in the International Business concentration, you will find that its structure is flexible, permitting you to have a dual concentra- tion. For example, you may concentrate in International Business and use open electives to fulfill the requirement of a second concentration. The dual concentration has advantages for those seeking employment opportunities in traditional functional areas (e.g., production, marketing, finance), which also take place in an international setting. All College of Business Administration courses that are offered as part of the Interna- tional Business Administration concentration are available to students in other concentrations during their middler, junior, and senior years. A View of the Five- Year Concentration Careers in international busi- ness are best pursued in companies that carry on trade or manufactur- ing operations in foreign countries. An increasing number of multinational firms require that candidates for their top management positions have prior experience in international operations. In addition, large banks and insurance companies want their managers to under- stand international business. Other types of organizations — government, trade associations, large unions — require international business knowl- edge. The opportunity for foreign travel in any of these capacities is frequently available. Students who choose this concentration have the opportunity to gain an understanding of the economic, political, and social constraints on international business and to develop skills in analyzing the financial, marketing, and operational strategies of the multinational firm. Arts and Sciences electives such as modern languages, political sci- ence, international economics, geography, and cultural anthropology — all appropriate to the understanding of international relations — are highly recommended to complement this concentration. The freshman-year program of studies and the basic course require- ments for the College of Business Administration are the same for all the concentration areas. See page 131 . II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Introduction to Business Administration International Business 4 Electives (International Seminar in International List) 8 Business 4 Business Electives 8 International Electives Business List* Introduction to International Business Seminar in International Business International Marketing International Finance Comparative International Management Environmental Pressures and Corporations International Transportation 'These courses are not offered every year. Students are advised to consult pre- reglstration matenai Management / 139 Non-Business List (Note: This is a representative listing; other Liberal Arts courses may be taken upon approval of the Area Coordinator for the International Busi- ness concentration.) Africa Today Economics of World Energy European Economic Development Economic History of Less Developed Countries Development Economics International Economics Modern Western Economic History Social Change and Economic Development Peoples and Culture of China Contemporary Japanese Society and Culture Introduction to International Relations • Introduction to Foreign Governments European Political Parties Arab-Israeli Conflict World Politics Euro-Communism American Foreign Policy Soviet Government Soviet Foreign Policy Communism in Eastern Europe International Organization International Law Government and Politics of China China's Foreign Relations The Politics-Policies of Developing Nations Government and Politics of Latin America Government and Politics of Japan Government and Politics in the Middle East Business German I Business German II Business French Business Spanish Management Concentration Professional Preparation Aims Do your career interests lie in the broad area of administration rather than in specialized fields? The Management concentration offers you the opportunity to prepare yourself for a wide variety of administra- tive careers in business, government, and nonprofit institutions. Description of the Concentration As a Management student you must have a basic understanding of all organization functions: account- ing, marketing, finance, and operations. Your courses in these areas offer you an overview of these areas, including their interrelation and the ways they can be used as management tools. For example, your study of accounting can be used as a helpful tool in the decision-making process, rather than as a specialty in itself. A similar approach is used in courses in other areas. 140 / College of Business Administration Since management is the process of getting things done through people, your professors pay significant attention to "people problems" to stress the importance of developing an effective work force. The courses in the Management concentration vary considerably in content and method of instruction because they vary in their objectives. In most, students are heavily involved in the conducting of classes and are required to work on group assignments. The purpose of this partici- patory approach is to help prepare you for the demands of management in the business community. A View of the Five- Year Concentration The curriculum and teaching methods center around the development of basic skills and knowledge appropriate to administration, rather than upon specialized functional techniques. Although the case method of study is used extensively, a variety of teaching methods consistent with particular course objectives are employed. The basic objectives of the concentration are to confront the student with appropriate learning expenences, to help increase stu- dents' skills and knowledge in basic disciplines underlying administra- tive practice, and to help students develop judgment and skills in organizational problem analysis and decision making. The freshman-year program of studies and the basic course require- ments for the College of Business Administration are the same for all the concentration areas. See page 180. II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Cost Accounting for Legal Aspects of Business 4 Management 4 Business Electives 12 Introduction to Human Resources Management 4 Marketing Concentration Professional Preparation Aims A business organization not only designs and manufactures products, but also markets and sells them to manufacturers, whole- salers, retailers, and consumers. This is what a concentration in market- ing is all about. Description of the Concentration All the business activities that di- rect the flow of goods and services from producer to consumer are classified as marketing concerns. The marketing process begins by determining the needs and wants of customers. Once these wants and needs are established, the organization's first objective is to produce goods or services to satisfy a particular consumer. Essential in all types of business are such activities as product design, research, pricing, packaging, transportation, advertising, selling, and servicing. The over- all responsibility for these functions rests with the marketing manager. Marketing / 141 The Marketing Concentration offers a wide variety of courses, taught by lecture and class discussion. Included are such courses as Market- ing Management, Advertising, Sales Management, Consumer Behavior, and Competitive Strategy. A View of the Five-Year Concentration Outside the classroom, stu dents may attend weekly meetings of the American Marketing Associa- tion Student Chapter, through which they may further their interests by discussing issues with leaders in the field. Without successful marketing and advertising, industhal products re- main unsold. More and more companies are finding that today's tempo of progress and high levels of production require up-to-date marketing techniques to generate a higher sales volume. As members of the management policy group, marketing executives take a broad view of all aspects of business management and policy. They also serve effectively as trained specialists in their own areas. Success in the market is vital to every company, whatever its size. Therefore, the need for adaptable and informed marketing management exists in all types of business and industry. The freshman-year program of studies and the basic course require- ments for the College of Business Administration are the same for all the concentration areas. See page 131 . II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Marketing Management 4 Competitive Strategy 4 Marketing Research 4 Marketing Electives 12 Transportation and Physical Distribution Management Concentration Professional Preparation Aims Transportation is an integral part of national and international distribution systems. It is a determining factor in the availability and prices of goods and services in our economy. In corporate distribution, transportation specialists operate within a complex organizational framework in which goods are stored and moved. Effective management of this distnbution process involves un- derstanding inventory control, warehousing, transportation options, and the interaction of these activities with other functional operations. Growing concern with the economic and service conditions of the transportation industry has also created career positions with govern- ment agencies engaged in transportation policy development and ad- ministration. Other career possibilities are to be sought with carriers such as airlines, railroads, and trucking companies, which actively seek people who are familiar with the operational and regulatory aspects of their business. 142 / College of Business Administration The Transportation and Physical Distribution Management concentra- tion offers students opportunities to prepare for these diverse career opportunities. Description of the Concentration The concentration offers the stu- dent a balanced background in Transportation and Physical Distribution Management. Courses consider not only the viewpoint of the corporate shipper and carriers, but also those of public officials, in addition to consumer interests. Courses have a strong contemporary orientation and promote frequent interaction with practitioners from business and government. A View of the Five- Year Concentration Course offerings in Transpor- tation and Physical Distribution Management are sequential so that stu- dents who desire only an introductory exposure may take one or several courses as part of a broader business background. An undergraduate concentration in the area consists of six courses. Four are required courses, with the balance of the concentration composed of eiectives. The freshman-year program of studies and the basic course require- ments for the College of Business Administration are the same for all the concentration areas. See page 131. Professional Requirements Course Principles of Transportation Physical Distribution Management Current Issues in Transportation Policy Q.H. Course Q.H. Seminar in Transportation 4 4 Transportation Eiectives 8 143 Non-Concentration (Self-Designed) Professional Preparation Aims Because innovation and relevance are key words in the College of Business Administration, the Non-Concentration curriculum is adapt- able to each student's needs. Meeting with an academic adviser, you tailor your academic program to meet your own career goals. Description of the Concentration Students will be required to select a total of at least six business electives beyond the basic course require- ments. The freshman-year program of studies and the basic course require- ments for the College of Business Administration are the same for all the concentration areas. See page 131 . 145 College of Computer Science Paul M, Kalaghan, Ph.D., Dean Mitchell Wand, Ph.D., Associate Dean and Director of Graduate Studies Helen B. Howard, B.S., Assistant to the Dean Professors Assistant Professors Harriet J. Fell, Ph.D. Frank R. Campagnoni, Ph.D. Richard A. Rasala, Ph.D. Harpal S. Dhama, M.A. Raoul N. Smith, Ph.D. Andrew M. Klapper. Ph.D. Mitchell Wand, Ph.D. Deborah J. Mayhew. Ph.D. Pathck S. P. Wang, Ph.D. W. David Shambroom, Ph.D. Associate Professors Lecturers Kenneth P. Baclawski, Ph.D. Philip F. Carrigan, M.A. Cynthia A. Brown, Ph.D. Pedro J. de Rezende. M.Sc. John Casey, B.A. Terry M. Smith, M.S. Agnes H. Chan, Ph.D. Larry A. Finkelstein, Ph.D. Robert P. Futrelle, Ph.D. Stephen I. Gallant, Ph.D. Carole D. Hafner, Ph.D. Vijaya K. Konangi, Ph.D. VieraK. Proulx, Ph.D. Betty J. Salzberg, Ph.D. Joint Associate Professor (Matliematics) R. MarkGoresky, Ph.D. Professional Preparation The College of Computer Science offers students the opportunity to concentrate in the broad field of computer science. The program is designed for men and women who are seeking to prepare themselves for productive careers in industry, government, or other organizations that design, develop, market, or utilize computing systems. A fundamen- tal goal of the College is to help students develop the ability to recognize and solve problems arising in the use of modern digital computers in business and engineering as well as in educational and research envi- ronments. In developing the skills necessary to achieve this goal, the student has the opportunity to assimilate ideas and concepts from theoretical studies; in-depth, hands-on programming of both large time-sharing systems and single-user microcomputers; and practical insight gained from the cooperative education experience. The concentration in Computer Science is offered primarily on the five- year Cooperative Plan because of the inherent value of experience gained in an actual computer-oriented working environment. Aims Recognizing that the advance of technological innovation casts the computer in ever-widening roles and brings the concept of the "in- formation society" closer to reality, the College has adopted the following aims: 146 / College of Computer Science 1 . To understand the scientific principles that serve as the founda- tion of computer science; 2. To develop the habits of accurate thinking that are essential to the description and efficient analysis of computer-related problems; 3. To cultivate an awareness of the common features and mathemat- ical bases of a wide variety of computational issues arising in ap- parently unrelated information-processing applications; 4. To communicate ideas and approaches in a clear and concise manner in a style appropriate to the audience; 5. To maintain an adequate awareness of the pace of information technology in order to lead innovation rather than follow it. A View of the Five- Year Program Although students of computer sci- ence concern themselves, on the surface, with the languages used in writing computer programs, their involvement in the study of software design goes much deeper. Students have the opportunity to study the application of computers to many fields and to consider various ap- proaches to storing maximal amounts of information in a system's stor- age devices while minimizing the time it takes to retrieve that information. How to select the best computer system for a particular application is of concern. Since errors can accumulate in computer calculations, com- puter science students are also expected to study ways in which such errors can be detected and minimized. A newly emerging topic is the methodology of program structure and design — a concern directed at determining the best approach to organizing large problems so that the chance for error, the difficulty of detecting an error, and the cost of correcting an error are minimized. The Computer Science Program is designed in accordance with the recommendations of two large, national professional societies — the As- sociation for Computing Machinery and the Mathematics Association of America. It offers a well-rounded and flexible program in which students are expected to fulfill certain minimum course requirements but are pro- vided an unusually wide selection of electives from which to choose. In this way, students have the chance to plan a program of study according to the particular fields of computer applications most interesting to them. On balance, the program offers a strong foundation in mathematics and a variety of program design and analysis courses. The requirement for seven quarters of social science/humanities electives provides op- portunity for students to broaden their horizons and to obtain a cultural context in which to imbed the technical concepts of computer science. I College of Computer Science / 147 Specimen Program for Bachelor of Science in Computer Science Applicable to students graduating on or before June 1987. First Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Calculus 1 4 Calculus II 4 'Physics 1 4 'Physics II 4 Comp. Sci. 1 (Pascal) 4 Comp. Sci. II (Pascal) 4 English 1 4 English II 4 Quarter 3 Calculus III 4 *Physics III 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 Appl. Prog. (COBOL) 4 Prog. Lang. Lab. 1 (FORTRAN) 1 Second Year Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Calculus IV 4 Discrete Math. 4 Assembly Lang. 1 4 Assembly Lang. II 4 Data Structures 4 Comp. Org. & Des. 1 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 Prog. Lang. Lab. II (LISP) 1 Prog. Lang. Lab. Ill (DCL) 1 Third Year Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Linear Algebra 4 "Probability 4 File Processing 4 Operating Systems 4 Comp. Org. & Des. II 4 Coordinated Study 4 Coordinated Study 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 Fourth Year Quarter 8 Quarter 9 '^Statistics 1 4 Compiler Design 1 4 Analysis of Prog. Lang. 4 Analysis of Algorithms 4 Automata & Formal Lang. 4 Coordinated Study 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 Fifth Year Quarter 10 Quarter 1 1 tComp. Sci. Elective 4 Coordinated Study 4 Coordinated Study 4 Coordinated Study 4 Coordinated Study 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 Comp, Sci. Project 4 Comp. Sci. Seminar 4 'Students with a very strong interest in life science nnay be allowed to substitute General Chennistry I, General Chemistry II, and The Chennical Elements or Gen- eral Biology, Animal Biology and Plant Biology if schedule permits fulfillment of the prerequisites for Introduction to Digital Computers I: Design and Organization. •'Students interested in the theoretical aspects of computer science should substi- tute Probability I and Mathematical Statistics. tArtificial Intelligence. Computer Graphics, Data Base Management, or Interactive Systems Design. 148 / College of Computer Science Specimen Program for Bachelor of Science in Computer Science Applicable to students graduating on or after June 1988. First Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Comp, Science 1 4 Comp. Sci. II 4 Calculus 1 4 Calculus II 4 Fresh. Writing 4 Discrete Math 1 4 Western Civilization 1 4 Western Civ. II 4 COBOL Lab 1 Quarter 3 Data Structures 4 Calculus III 4 Physics 1 4 Intro. Literature 4 FORTRAN Lab 1 Second Year Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Physics II 4 Physics III 4 Assembly Lang. 1 4 Assembly Lang. II 4 LISP 4 Discrete Math II 4 Calculus IV 4 Software Design 4 DCL Lab or 1 CLab 1 149 Third Year Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Comp. Org. & Des. 1 Linear Algebra Comp. Sci. Elective (1) Elective/Subarea (1) 4 4 4 4 Comp. Org. & Des. II Probability Comp. Sci. Elective (2) Tech. Writing 4 4 4 4 Fourth Year Quarter 8 Quarter 9 Comp. Sci. Elective (3) Comp. Sci. Elective (4) Elective/Subarea (2) Elective/Subarea (3) 4 4 4 4 Comp. Sci. Elective (5) Comp. Sci. Elective (6) Elective/Subarea (4) Computers & Soc. 4 4 4 4 Fifth Year Quarter 10 Quartern Comp. Sci. Elective (7) Elective/Subarea (5) Elective/Subarea (6) Elective/Subarea (7) 4 4 4 4 Comp. Sci. Elective (8) Comp. Sci. Seminar Elective/Subarea (8) Elective/Subarea (9) Elective/Subarea (10) 4 1 4 4 4 Note: Three of the Computer Science Electives must form a complete track. Database Track: File Structures, Database Mgmt. 1, Database Mgmt. 2 Systems Track: Systems Prog., Operating Syst. 1, Operating Syst. 2 Language Track: Automata, Compiler Des. 1, Compiler Des. 2 Awarding of Degree The Bachelor of Science in Computer Science degree is conferred by the College of Computer Science. ^m 151 College of Criminal Justice Norman Rosenblatt, Ph.D., Dean Robert D. Croatti, A.B., Associate Dean Robert E. Fuller, M.A., Assistant Dean Lester W. McCullough, Jr., B.A., Assistant Dean Kathleen M. Higgins, M.S., Coordinator of Educational Services in Forensic Science Laurie A. Mulcahy, M.S., Assistant to the Dean for Graduate Programs Professors Associate Professors Rominer Deming, Ph.D. James A. Fox, Ph.D. Edith E. Flynn, Ph.D. Nicole F. Rafter, Ph.D. George L. Kelling, Ph.D. John H. Laub, Ph.D. Robert Sheehan, M.A., D.Jur. (Honorary) Assistant Professors Norman D. Bates, D.Jur. Frank A. Schubert, D.Jur. Wallace W. Sherwood, LL.M, Paul E. Tracy, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims Established in 1966 under a grant from the Ford Foundation, the College of Criminal Justice offers its students the opportunity to prepare for professional careers in the fields of criminal justice and private se- curity; through its prelegal studies concentration, many students also prepare for entry to law school. The curriculum has been designed to offer students a broad academic foundation upon which to base a professional concentration of courses that introduce students to specific career areas. Legal studies, law enforcement, private security, correc- tions, probation and parole, and forensic science are some of the areas of interest pursued by students. It is also expected that a number of graduates will choose advanced study in academic fields such as crim- inology, forensic science, social work, public administration, private se- curity, and law, as well as in the entire area of criminal justice. The College was founded to help prepare students to enter profes- sions that deal with some of the most important social issues of our times. To deal with these issues and to help prepare graduates for careers that are rewarding and beneficial, innovative methods and ideas, as well as the most advanced thinking, are utilized by the College of Criminal Justice. As a reflection of its significant role in higher educa- tion, the College has received substantial grants from the Department of Justice and was designated both as a training center in criminal justice and as a center of education and innovation in the field of criminal justice and forensic science. A View of the Five-Year Program The College of Criminal Justice offers a five-year academic program on the Cooperative Plan of Educa- tion, which allows a candidate for the baccalaureate degree to under- take a specialized program of study. It is anticipated that co-op assignments may include work in Parole or Probation Offices, law firms, police departments, private security agencies, public or private institu- tions, social agencies, prisons, planning and evaluation units, or other areas related to the criminal justice program. 152 / College of Criminal Justice Students are offered a broad educational background for future roles in criminal justice, private security, or law. Because students are prepar- ing for careers involving the social problems of people from all walks of life, course work in the social sciences, behavioral sciences, and the humanities is integrated with professional courses. The liberal content of the curriculum is highly desirable not only for its value as a foundation upon which general intellectual development may be based, but also as an indispensable educational requirement for professional develop- ment. Graduates must be prepared to judge objectively the many socioeco- nomic problems inherent in the administration of justice in contemporary American society. The College of Criminal Justice helps to prepare stu- dents for careers that will be not only personally productive and reward- ing, but intellectually stimulating as well. Graduation Requirements Candidates for the Bachelor of Science degree must complete ail the prescribed work of the curriculum, a total of 1 72 quarter hours of credit. Students who undertake the Cooperative Education Program must meet the requirements of the Department of Cooperative Education be- fore they become eligible for their degrees. No student transferring from another college or university is eligible to receive a degree until at least one year of academic work immediately preceding graduation has been completed at Northeastern. Graduation with Honors Candidates who have achieved superior grades in their academic work will be graduated cum laude. Upon special vote of the faculty, a limited number of this group may be graduated magna cum laude or summa cum laude. Students must have been in attendance at the University for at least six academic quarters before they become eligible for honors at graduation. Sample Freshman-Year Program of Studies in the College of Criminal Justice First Quarter Third Quarter English Economics Economics Foundations of Psychology Introduction to Sociology Introduction to American Introduction to Law and the Government Legal Process Administration of Criminal _ Justice Second Quarter English Foundations of Psychology Introduction to Politics Criticial Issues in Criminal Justice and Criminology In addition to the above courses, students may elect to take Basic ROTC. i College of Criminal Justice / 153 Basic Course Requirements I. General Requirements Course Q.H. Principles and Problems of Economics* 8 Introduction to Politics* 4 Introduction to American Government* 4 Foundations of Psychology I & II* 8 Course Q.H. Introduction to Sociology* 4 Freshman English I* 4 Freshman English H* 4 State and Local Government! 4 Western Civilization 8 Science or Mathf 8 Non-CJEIectives(13) 52 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Administration of Criminal Justice* 4 Critical Issues in Criminal Justice and Criminology* 4 Introduction to Law and the Legal Process* 4 Criminologyt 4 Introduction to Cnminal Lawt 4 Course Q.H. Criminal Due Process 4 Criminal Justice Research 4 Criminal Justice Electives (9) 36 'Courses are usually taken in the freshman year. tCourses are usually taken in the sophomore year 155 College of Engineering Elisabeth M. Drake, Sc.D,, Acting Dean Richard J. Murphy, Ph.D., Associate Dean David R. Freeman, Ph.D., Associate Dean and Director of the Graduate School Arlene F. Becella, M.B.A., Assistant Dean David C. Blackman, M.S., Assistant Dean and Director of Minority Affairs Paula G. Leventman, Ph.D., Assistant Dean and Director, Women in Engineering Ralph S. Blanchard, M.S., Director Part-Time B.S. Program Professional Preparation The College of Engineering prepares students to participate construc- tively in a technologically changing world, thus contributing as profes- sional engineers to the accumulation and application of new knowledge. Fundamentals are emphasized, thus offering students the opportunity to obtain the basic technical knowledge necessary to practice in a variety of positions. At the same time, study of the social sciences and human- ities provides an awareness of the social, economic, political, aesthetic, and philosophical influences that are part of the context in which stu- dents will practice their professions. Aims The concept of education as a continuing, lifelong process nec- essary for effective work in an environment of constantly new facts, ideas, and scientific principles underlies the structure of the engineering curriculum. Engineering education is directed toward assisting students to: 1 . Understand the scientific principles and knowledge of the particu- lar branch of engineering selected; 2. Comprehend and develop competence in the engineering method and its application; 3. Communicate effectively and succinctly the important results of any technical study both verbally and graphically; 4. Acquire the motivation for continuing professional growth. A View of the Five- Year Program The College of Engineering offers five-year cooperative programs in Chemical, Civil, Electrical, Industrial, and Mechanical Engineering lead- ing to the degree of Bachelor of Science with specification according to the engineering department in which the student qualifies. The College also offers a General Engineering Program, which leads to the awarding of an unspecified Bachelor of Science degree, through which students have the opportunity to design a curriculum suited to their objectives. The various curricula offer students the opportunity to prepare effectively for employment in industry or postgraduate study. The undergraduate program begins with three quarters of full-time study. Course work during the first year helps to build students' under- standing of mathematics and the physical sciences and to improve their ability to communicate ideas both verbally and graphically. The freshman courses act as a foundation for upperclass studies. They assist students in developing a basic understanding of concepts in the engineering sciences and introduce them to the engineering method and its application. About four-fifths of the upperclass program 156 / College of Engineering is devoted to scientific and technological study, and about one-fifth to humanistic-social courses, with the aim of balancing the students' grow- ing technical proficency with an appreciation of the nontechnical as- pects of society and culture. Cooperative work in the chosen branch of engineering begins upon completion of the freshman year and continues throughout the remaining upperclass years. The work assignments during this time may be most valuable in helping to integrate the important elements of both an engi- neering and a liberal arts education. They can also be instrumental in teaching the value of teamwork and, at the same time, helping the stu- dent to acquire insight into the problems of actual engineering practice. Five- Year B.S.-M.S. Programs Several departments (Electrical and Computer, Industrial Engineering and Information Systems, and Mechanical) offer programs leading to both the Bachelor's and Master's degrees in five years. Students with outstanding academic records (3.0 or better) may carry extra courses and in the senior year, forego one cooperative work quarter to complete the course requirements for both degrees. Part-Time Program Offered During Evening Hours The College of Engineering also offers a six-year, part-time curriculum leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Civil, Electrical, or Me- chanical Engineering . Classes are held in the evening. Admission and course requirements are the same as for the five-year cooperative de- gree programs. For further information, consult the evening bulletin of the College of Engineering, or call the College's Office of Student Ser- vices at 437-2154. Computer Facilities The College provides students with ample computer facilities to support coursework and research activities. These facilities include a Digital VAX 11/785 system with 32 student terminals; a Data General MV/8000 with 30 student terminals; a Computervision Computer-Aided Design and Manufacturing (CAD/CAM) system with eight advanced workstations; and 33 IBM XTs in a local area network to support computer graphics and design courses. In addition, the university computer center provides 60 terminals for two VAX 1 1 /780s and 40 networked IBM PCs for student use. The departments provide a variety of mini- and micro-computer facili- ties to support special coursework and research. Graduation Requirements Degrees The College awards the Bachelor of Science degree in Chemical, Civil, Electrical, Industrial, and Mechanical Engineering, as well as the Bachelor of Science degree without specification. Qualification for Degrees Candidates for the Bachelor of Science degree must complete all of the prescribed work of the curriculum in which they seek to qualify with no academic deficiencies. Students who undertake cooperative work assignments must complete a minimum of four quarters of cooperative work experience approved by the Depart- ment of Cooperative Education. Students transferring from another college or university are not eligible to receive the Bachelor of Science degree until they have completed at least one academic year at Northeastern immediately preceding their graduation. ^ College of Engineering / 157 Graduation with Honors Candidates who have attained superior grades in their academic work will be graduated cum laude. Upon special vote of the faculty, a limited number of this group may be graduated magna cum laude or summa cum laude. Students must have been in attendance at the University at least six quarters before they may become eligible for honors at gradu- ation. Accreditation All undergraduate day programs with specification, offered solely by the College of Engineering, as well as the part-time evening programs in Civil, Electncal, and Mechanical Engineering are accredited by the En- gineering Accreditation Commission of the Accreditation Board for En- gineering and Technology (ABET) (formerly the Engineer's Council for Professional Development). Women in Engineering More women are entering the field of engineering each year as career opportunities expand. Industry and government, now aware of the largely untapped pool of qualified women are eager to provide positions for competent women engineers. Any woman with scientific or technical interests should consider the many possibilities offered in engineering. Approximately 500 undergraduate women are currently enrolled in the college. The Women in Engineering Program Office maintains an inter- active data base for academic support and networking. An active chap- ter of the Society of Women Engineers offers a full schedule of technical and professional programs. Minorities in Engineering Through the Northeastern University Progress in Minorities in Engineer- ing (NUPRIME) program, the College seeks to expand educational op- portunities for qualified blacks, Puerto Ricans, Mexican-Amencans, and Native Americans. It provides scholarships based on merit or need. Every effort is made to provide enough aid so that outside work is not necessary during the freshman year. Advising and tutorial services are among the support services provided by the program. For more details, contact David C. Blackman, Assistant Dean, and Director of NUPRIME; Rm. 225SN, Northeastern University, Boston, Mas- sachusetts 02115. Sample Freshman-Year Program of Studies in Engineering The freshman-year program of studies in the College of Engineering is the same for all designated majors in the College. First Quarter Third Quarter FORTRAN Programming Calculus Calculus Physics Physics General Chemistry English English Second Quarter Graphics and Design Calculus Physics General Chemistry The first-year pattern of two-term courses may vary according to as- signed section. In addition to tlie above courses, students may elect to take Basic ROTC. 158 ^ Chemical Engineering John A. Williams, Ph.D., Professor and Acting Chairman Associate Professors Assistant Professors Ralph A. Buonopane, Ph.D. Francis C. Brown, Ph.D. Bernard M. Goodwin, Sc.D. Ronald J. Willey, Ph.D. Richard R. Stewart, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims Chemical engineering involves the design, construction, opera- tion, and management of processes in which materials essential to so- ciety are produced. The goal of the chemical engineer is to develop processes which use resources most efficiently, economically, and safely in an environmentally sound manner. Since the field of chemical engineering is so varied, the program of study has been designed to offer students broad training in which fun- damental principles are stressed, providing them with the strong back- ground needed to acclimate themselves readily to graduate school or to an industry of their choice. The basic scientific and engineering knowl- edge in the program provides the graduate with the skills needed to respond to rapidly changing technologies in the future. Description of Chemical Engineering The chemical engineer has been defined as a "professional experienced in the design, construction, and operation of plants in which materials undergo chemical and phys- ical change." It is the task of the chemical engineer to reduce the costs, increase the production, improve the quality of existing products, and develop new products. Chemical engineering has grown out of discov- eries in chemical laboratories which have served as a foundation for a great many new industries whose production processes involve chemi- cal as well as physical changes. The petrochemical, biomedical, pharmaceutical, agricultural chemi- cals, food processing, plastics and synthetic fibers, energy and syn- thetic fuels, and waste management areas require men and women trained in chemistry as well as in engineering. Many older industries such as pulp and paper, metals and glass production, paints and coat- ings, textiles and electroplating are also employing chemical engineers. Computerized process controls are being designed to improve the effi- ciency of older plants and computer-aided design of new plants is be- coming increasingly common. A View of the Five-Year Program The essential background for chemical engineers is derived from the fundamental courses in chemis- try, mathematics, and physics, required of all engineering students. Stu- dents then go on to advanced courses which apply these fundamentals to the solution of engineering problems. These upperclass courses skill- fully blend the latest mathematical and theoretical analyses with the practical aspects of the profession. Chemical engineering is a rapidly broadening field. Tremendous growth in research and development is occurring in a wide variety of areas. Students are provided the opportunity to pursue specialized ca- reer interests through minors, such as a minor in biology, and through technical electives. Chemical Engineering / 159 Laboratories Selected courses in the curriculum contain laboratory sessions that sup- plement the presentation of material in lectures. These sessions are devoted to practice in problem formulation and solution including the use of computers and standard software packages. The senior course in process design is largely taught in laboratory sessions, with major emphasis on computer-aided design and simulation The research laboratories are designed to acquaint the student with the experimental approach to the solution of engineering problems and to develop research interests. Graduate research may be conducted in such areas as energy, pollution control, catalysis, polymers, process control, mathematical modeling, and computer applications. Students are first exposed to the basic measurements in engineering in experimental methods laboratories, with emphasis on temperature, pressure, and flow rate. Following this, they are given problems involving such areas as transport properties, kinetics', thermodynamics, and pro- cess dynamics, which they must solve experimentally. They are required to design and conduct the experiment, reduce the data using comput- ers, and write a final report. Students use pilot-scale chemical engineer- ing equipment in the experiment, when applicable. Basic Course Requirements** 1. General Requirements Course Q.H, Course Q.H. English* 8 Physicsf 4 General Chemistry* 8 Physics Labt 2 Physics* 12 Calculust 8 Calculus* 12 Mathematical Analysis 8 Engineering Graphics* 4 Economics 8 Computers for Social Science/Humanities Engineering* 4 Electives(4) 16 11. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Organic Chemistryt 8 Physical Chemistry 8 Chemical Engineering Calculationst 8 Polymer Science and Engineeringt 4 Transport Phenomena 8 Chemical Engineering 8 Course Q.H. Experimental Methods 8 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics 4 Chemical Engineering Kinetics 4 Process Design or Research Project 12 Chemical Engineering Electives (4) 16 "'These courses are usually taken in the freshman year. fThese courses are usually taken in the sophomore year. ""A curriculum revision is being made as this catalog goes to press. Changes in course sequence and some rearrangement of material may be implemented soon. The freshman-year program of studies in the College of Engineering is the same for all majors in the College. Chemical engineering majors also are required to take a general chemistry lab course along with the required general chemistry course. See page 157. 160 Civil Engineering Mishac K. Yegian, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Chairman Professors Assistant Professors Reginald L. Amory, Ph.D. Peter G. Furth, Ph.D. Frederic C. Blanc, Ph.D. Fadi A. Karaa, Ph.D. John J. Cochrane, Ph.D. Eugene A. Marciano, Ph.D. Constantine J. Gregory, Ph.D. Due T. Nguyen, Ph.D. Kenneth M. Leet, Sc.D. Spiro N. Poilalis, Ph.D. Stanley W. Zagajeski, Ph.D. Associate Professors Leroy M Cahoon, MS Clinical Assistant Professor Menashi D. Cohen, Ph.D. George H. Brattin, M.S. Walter E. Jaworski, Ph.D. Michael Kupferman, Ph.D. Robert L. Meserve, M.S. Saul Namyet, B.S. James C. O'Shaughnessy, Ph.D. Hormoz Pazwash, Ph.D. John G. Schoon, Ph.D. Richard J. Scranton, M.S. Irvine W. Wei, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims A major aim of the Civil Engineering Department is to provide students with the opportunity to acquire a fundamental, flexible, yet rig- orous engineering education so that, in view of inevitable change within the field, graduates will be in a position to build continuously on their basic knowledge. A wide range of electives in the humanities, social sciences, and basic sciences encourages students to investigate areas outside their specific technical focus and to extend their personal inter- ests and involvements. Description of Civil Engineering Civil Engineering is the profession in which a knowledge of the mathematical and physical sciences gained by study, experience, and practice is applied with judgment to develop ways to utilize, economically, the materials and forces of nature for the progressive well-being of mankind. Civil engineers improve and protect the environment; provide facilities for community living, industry, and transportation; and provide structures for the use of mankind. The build- ings people live and work in, transportation systems, city and town ser- vices, water supply — all reflect creative planning and application of engineering principles on the part of civil engineers. Civil engineers measure and map the earth's surface and utilize these maps to locate their projects. They design and supervise the construc- tion of bridges, tunnels, buildings, dams, and aqueducts. They build supporting foundations for these and other structures. Civil engineers plan, design, construct, and maintain highways, railroads, canals, and \ airports. They regulate rivers and control floods; build docks, pipelines, sea walls; develop harbors; design and build plants and systems to bring pure water to homes and factories; design and build systems for sewage and refuse disposal; drain swamps and irrigate arid areas i Civil Engineering/ 161 A View of the Five-Year Program The five-year study curriculum is divided into eleven quarters of school and eight quarters of cooperative work assignments. The work phase is designed to allow the student to gain insight into all types of activity normally confronted by the civil engineer. Thus, the well-motivated student can determine from these work experiences what further course work preparation will be required to become successful as a practicing civil engineer. The work expen- ence also may be valuable in stimulating a certain amount of self-sup- port and independence. The first years of the curriculum are, for the most part, devoted to the fundamentals of math, basic sciences, and engineering that comprise the foundation for later professional studies. The final years are devoted to a range of professional subjects, both required and elective. Guid- ance from a faculty adviser is available throughout the academic pro- gram. The curriculum is thus intended to offer a'firm educational background for students preparing for a career in the planning, design, and con- struction of structures, transportation systems, and environmental sys- tems as civil engineers. Upon completion of the requirements for the Bachelor of Science in Civil Engineering degree, the graduate may choose to enter the engi- neering profession or to go on to graduate school for advanced training. The beginning civil engineer will probably find that graduate course work is a prerequisite for advancement. During the first period of employment as a graduate, the civil engineer may expect to spend some time in the field or the office in work involving design computations, layout work and supervision of construction, or obtaining and analyzing information for studies and reports. With in- creased experience, the graduate will be better prepared to take on greater challenges and more responsibilities. Graduates normally seek employment in municipal, state, and federal agencies as well as in private consulting practice, general construction, and industry. Environmental Option This option is designed for engineering stu- dents intending to work in the field of environmental protection and improvement. Topics included at the undergraduate level are water sup- ply, treatment and wastewater disposal, solid waste disposal, and air pollution. The cooperative program, leading to a bachelor's degree in civil engineering in five years, offers students the opportunity to imme- diately enter a professional practice in government agencies, industry, or private consulting firms, depending on the job market as well as their own industry and abilities. Part-Time Program The Civil Engineering Program is also available on a part-time basis. The classes are scheduled during the evening hours, usually two evenings per week. The curriculum can be completed in a minimum of six years. Student Professional Society Our Student Chapter of the American Society of Civil Engineers is a very active and professional organization and participation in its activities has proven to be a unique complement to Northeastern's traditional class- room and co-op experience. In addition to traditional activities, which include sponsoring a weekly professional lecture series and occasional 162 / College of Engineering field trips to civil engineering construction sites and constructed facili- ties, mennbers have successfully completed several significant commu- nity-service projects valued at approximately a quarter of a million dollars. The students have developed and designed innovative and educa- tional outdoor play exhibits illustrating both natural and man-made phe- nomena for the Children's Museum of Boston. They have worked with staff members of the Joseph P. Kennedy, Jr., Memorial Hospital for Chil- dren in the planning, design, financing, and construction of a special playground for handicapped children. They have designed and con- structed an outdoor amphitheater for the Salvation Army's Camp Won- derland, and performed an investigation of fire evacuation procedures and building modifications for the Cotting School for the Handicapped. The students have designed and constructed a play-therapy center for Boston Children's Services Association and a unique play area for the Language and Cognitive Development Center. They financed, de- signed, and constructed a children's group therapy facility with indoor and outdoor components for the Brookline Mental Health Clinic. Last year. Student Chapter members financed, designed, and constructed a new wing for Waltham Hospital's Early Intervention Program facility. Each year, at least one such community-service project is undertaken. In recognition of these unusual efforts, our Student Chapter has been designated as the "single most outstanding" chapter in the nation and consequently has received the Robert Ridgway Award of the American Society of Civil Engineers for an unprecedented seven out of eight years Computer Facilities The Civil Engineering Department uses a vanety of computer facilities to complement course work and research. The department has two mini- computers (a Hewlett-Packard System 45 with interactive graphics and a Digital LSI-11) for laboratory data acquisition. In addition, Civil Engi- neering also has a microcomputer facility consisting of IBM personal computers, Apple lis and MAC 8s. All systems are supported with so- phisticated software packages with applications to all disciplines of civil engineering. Laboratories The Civil Engineering Department is located in a new, modern building providing expanded and enhanced laboratory facilities. Soil Mechanics Laboratory The soils laboratory is equipped to per- form the full spectrum of soil tests, as well as to conduct model studies. A wide variety of laboratory equipment permits students to perform tests ranging from those related to soil classification to sophisticated triaxial tests to evaluate the stress-strain properties of a soil specimen. The triaxial tests can be of strain-controlled loading, stress-controlled loading, or a combination thereof. Pore-pressure measurements are made either electronically with pressure transducers or manually with null-pressure indicators. Consolidation-test equipment of various load ranges and types is available. Consolidation tests applying loads up to 50 tsf on the sample are possible. The laboratory is equipped with a wide range of electronic devices, including pressure transducers, load cells, and accelerometers to expedite data collection. Civil Engineering / 163 Research with the aid of models can be conducted to study the prob- lems associated with the design and construction of earth dams, open- braced cuts, and other similar structures. In addition, model studies on the behavior of footings or piles are possible for both static and cyclical loading conditions. Materials Laboratory The materials laboratory provides for both re- search and teaching needs. Capabilities are in the experimental deter- mination of the physico-chemical properties of materials. These include destructive and nondestructive strength determinations as well as microstructural and chemical analyses. Water-Quality Laboratory Capabilities include analyses of both water and wastewater samples in physical, chemical, and biological regimes. Laboratory and supporting equipment enable complete studies in the following areas: water analysis, wastewater analysis, trace-metal and organic analysis, stream and estuary studies, waste-treatability studies, unit operations, bioassay techniques, pilot plant studies, tracer studies, and complete instrument analysis. Instrument analysis capabilities include atomic absorption, total car- bon, organic carbon, specific ions, gas chromatography, spectrophoto- metric, and gravimetric analyses. Special areas are available for unit operation studies in water and wastewater treatment. A well-equipped machine shop has been estab- lished so that special equipment can be designed and built for model- prototype studies. Air Pollution Laboratory Equipment is available to sample ambient air and gaseous and particulate pollutants and to evaluate the physical, chemical, and biological characteristics of atmospheric pollutants. Con- tinuous air samples may be established in any area in Metropolitan Boston and the samples analyzed by ultraviolet-visible, fluorescence, and atomic spectrophotometry, as well as gas chromatography and infrared techniques. A portable carbon-monoxide analyzer with pnntout equipment is available for measurement studies and research work. Recent equipment additions also make it possible to conduct studies in noise pollution. Basic Course Requirements The following curriculum has been adopted by the Civil Engineering Department and affects students with expected graduation dates of 1987 and later. 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course QH. English 8 Economics 4 Calculus 20 Math 4 Basic Engineering 8 Communication Skills 4 Physics 16 Social Science/Humanities Chemistry 8 Electives(3) 12 Physics Lab 2 General Elective 4 164 / College of Engineering II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H, Computer Applications Electrical Engineering 4 in Civil Engineering 4 Applied Probability Theory 4 Structural Mechanics 8 Steel Design 1 4 Fluid Mechanics 4 Dynamics 4 Engineering Economy 4 Materials (w/ lab) 6 Structural Analysis (w/ lab) 6 Concrete Design 1 4 Environmental Engineering Engineering 1 4 Measurements (w/ lab) 6 Soil Mechanics (w/ lab) 6 Professional Electives— 7 required Thermodynamics 4 Legal Aspects of Hydraulic Engineering 4 Civil Engineering 4 Structural Mechanics III 4 C.E. Systems 4 Structural Analysis II & III 8 Transportation Analysis 4 Concrete Design II 4 Construction Engineering 4 Geotechnology 4 Steel Design II 4 Environmental Engineering Foundation Engineering 4 II 4 Environmental Design 4 Environmental & Air Pollution 4 Hydraulics Lab 4 Highway Engineering 4 The freshman-year program for the College of Engineering is the same for all majors in the College. See page 157. 165 Electrical and Computer Engineering John G. Proakis, Ph.D., Professor and Chairman, William Lincoln Smith Chair Professors Arunabha Bagchi, Ph.D. Ladislav Dolansky, Ph.D. James M. Feldman, Ph.D. Kenneth I. Golden, Ph.D., George A. Snell Professor Robert A. Gonsalves, Ph.D. Arvin Grabel, Sc.D. Richard E. Grojean, M.S. Martin E. Kaliski, Ph.D. SarmaS. Mulukutla, Ph.D. Harold R. Raemer, Ph.D. Wilfred Remillard, Ph.D. J. Spencer Rochefort, M.S. Sheldon S. Sandler, Ph.D. Martin E. Schetzen, Sc.D. Walter C. Schwab, Ph.D. Philip E. Seraphim, Sc.D. Michael B. Silevitch, Ph.D. Robert D. Stuart, Ph.D. Carmine Vittona, Ph.D. Associate Professors Marcello J. Carrabes, M.S. John R. Deller, Jr., Ph.D. J. Duncan Glover, Ph.D. Wayne G. Kellner, Sc.D. Walter H. Lob, M.S. Robert N. Martin, M.S. Louis Nardone, M.S. Sheila Prasad, Ph.D. Charles T. Retter, Ph.D. Assistant Professors Elizabeth E. Ames, Ph.D. Chung Chan, Ph.D. AmirFarhat, Ph.D. Vinaykumar Ingle, Ph.D. Francis Kai, Ph.D. John W. Ketchum, Ph.D. Dimitris Manolakis, Ph.D. Kaveh Pahlavan, Ph.D. Ramachandran Raghavan, Ph.D. Bahram Shafai, Sc.D. Chai-Chi Tsui, Ph.D. Mahmoud Wagdy, Ph.D. Lecturers Robert Angus, M.S. Chi-Kin Chow, M.S. Bell Cogbill, Ph.D. Prawat Nagvajara, M.S. Fred Nohmer, M.S. Kevin Paul, M.S. TaSiu, M.S. Professional Preparation Aims Among their many achievements, electrical engineers have been primarily responsible for the development of the computer, inte- grated circuits, the pacemaker, satellite communication, space naviga- tion, microprocessors, television, and the means of providing the energy needed to run our cities and our industries. At present, electrical engi- neers are working to help find solutions to the problems of information transfer and management, industrial productivity, energy conservation and alternative energy sources, transportation, and health care. This is just a small sample of the growing wealth of evidence that indicates that electrical engineering has impact on all facets of our cul- ture. As with all branches of technology, the societal functions and aims of electrical engineering are to maintain and improve the quality of life. Description of Electrical Engineering Despite the diversity of its ap- plication, electrical engineering may be conveniently divided into two broad, general areas of information sciences and energy resources. The area of information sciences is concerned primarily with systems whose function is computation, communication, or control. Included in this area 166 / College of Engineering are the circuits and devices that comprise the systems and the appli- cation of the systems and engineering techniques to other disciplines. Energy resources deal with problems related to the sources, generation, and distribution of large quantities of electrical energy. It should be noted, however, that no rigid boundary exists between the two areas, and many of the technical specialties within electrical engineering are applicable to both areas. Many electrical engineers are involved with the more traditional activ- ities of system design and development, such as the information sci- ences or energy resources areas. Other electrical engineers apply the knowledge gained in their professional education to such disciplines as ocean exploration, meteorology, experimental psychology, electronic music, health-care systems, bioelectronics, and educational devices for the disadvantaged. The optimistic outlook for electrical engineering is based on the breadth of the technical activity described above. We are constantly reminded that among the pressing problems in our society are improve- ment of industrial productivity, the energy crisis, data communication and management, urban transportation, health care, and the plight of the socially and physically disadvantaged. No one has yet been able to forecast how these problems will be solved without the use of technological resources. Readily available electrical energy, data processing, electronic instrumentation and con- trol, and communication are among the crucial resources needed. A View of the Five-Year Program The purpose of the curriculum is to offer the student an education that has the breadth and depth necessary for professional practice. Breadth is needed to give the student an awareness of all that electrical engineering encompasses and to provide the necessary background for independent study, a major criterion for professional success. Individual career objectives and initial profes- sional achievement can result, in part, from learning a subject area in some depth. To achieve the balance between depth and breadth, the curriculum is divided into the core program and elective courses. The core program includes those courses with content applicable to all specialties in electrical engineering and offers students a basic back- ground for future learning. Subject areas covered in the core program include: 1. Circuits and systems 2. Electronic devices and circuits 3. Digital computer design 4. Electromagnetic theory 5. Electromechanical dynamics (energy conversion) 6. Electrical measurements (laboratories) The elective courses are designed to permit students to develop their own interests. Many students use this part of the program to learn a particular subject in depth and to better prepare for graduate studies. A broad range of courses is offered, including Digital Computer Architec- ture, Software Engineering, Robotics, Communication Systems, Control Systems, Advanced Electronics, Solid-state Devices, Power Systems, Wave Propagation and Distributed Circuits, Network Theory, and Math- ematical Techniques. In addition, students who wish to conduct individual projects or learn about a subject area not offered in an elective course may enroll in the Electrical and Computer Engineering / 167 senior project course and work with an interested faculty adviser on a one-to-one basis. Electrical engineering graduates of Northeastern who have attended graduate schools have done well. Those who have entered industry find they compare favorably with graduates of other institutions and many have risen to positions of leadership in their professions. B.S.-M.S. Program Honor students may elect the five-year B.S.-M.S. program. By taking some course overloads and forgoing one senior co-op term, a student may complete requirements for both the B.S.E.E. and M.S.E.E. degrees in five years. Option in Power Systems Engineering The Power Systems Engineering Program in Electrical Engineering is a special option for those who wish to specialize in energy resources. This program is conducted in cooperation with the electric power companies in New England and other eastern states. The Master's degree can be obtained in six years of cooperative education or through the five-year B.S.-M.S. program described above. For further information about this program, students are advised to contact Prof. Sarma Mulukutla, Elec- trical Engineering, 306 Dana. Option in Computer Engineering The option in Computer Engineering is provided for those who wish to specialize in the design of digital computers and their integration within larger systems for communications, resource management, and auto- matic control. In the design of a digital processing system, hardware and software must be considered as an integrated entity — software cannot be sepa- rated from hardware considerations. Thus, the computer engineer must be both a capable programmer and a capable hardware designer. The collective demands of computer engineering plus traditional electrical engineering encompass more knowledge than can be included in a single, highly structured degree program. The solution at Northeastern, as at many other schools, was to adopt a new undergraduate option within Electrical Engineering. The objective of this option is to provide the student with a basic and comprehensive knowledge of the principles that underlie the organization, design, and applications of digital pro- cessing systems. It encompasses both the hardware and software de- sign aspects of the system and offers students the opportunity to acquire an understanding of the important relationships and "trade-offs" be- tween the hardware and software components of a digital system. This understanding is necessary in order to create computer systems that satisfy the users' needs at prices they can afford. The Computer Engineering option follows curriculum recommenda- tions in the report "An Undergraduate Computer Engineering Option for Electrical Engineering" by the Cosine Committee of the Commission on Education, National Academy of Engineering, Washington, D.C. 20418 (January 1970). An important feature of this option is that it leads to a Bachelor of Science degree with specification— a degree in Electrical Engineering accredited nationally by the Engineering Accreditation Commission of the Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology (ABET). 168 / College of Engineering Part-Time Program The Electrical Engineering Program is available on a part-time basis. The classes are scheduled during the evening hours, usually two eve- nings per week. The curriculum can be completed in a minimum of six years. Laboratories The seven laboratory courses included in the program are an integral part of the educational process. Their purpose is both to supplement concepts developed in core courses and to introduce the student to design and experimental techniques. To provide this facet of the educational experience, the Department has laboratory equipment in excess of $1.5 million. In addition to stan- dard professional laboratory equipment, several specialized laboratory facilities are maintained. These include several small digital computers (such as a PDP-11 or LSI-11), personal computers, a number of CRT terminals, and a variety of microprocessors. Programming courses and research programs also use the large computer system of the College of Engineering and the University. The freshman-year program of studies in the College of Engineering is the same for all majors in the College. See page 157. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Calculus Physics General Chemistry English Basic Engineering Q.H. 12 12 8 8 8 Course Q.H. Calculus and Math Analyses 8 Physics 4 Physics Lab 2 Social Science/Humanities Electives 24 II. Professional Requirements Course ( D.H. Course Q.H. Circuits and Systems ,11, Electronics 1 & II 8 III, & IV 16 Electronic Design 1 & II 8 Discrete and Continuous Field Theory 1 & II 8 Systems 8 Communication Systems 4 Thermodynamics or Technical Electives (4) 16 Material Science 4 Computer Engineering 12 Mechanics 4 Electrical Engineering Lab 8 The Electrical and Computer Engineering Department offers a wide va- riety of technical electives. These enable students to coordinate elective choices to satisfy their personal objectives of breadth or depth. To aid in selection, the elective courses are grouped by discipline. Electrical and Computer Engineering / 169 Technical Electives Electronic Circuits and Systems Theory & Tech, of Semicond. Devices I Theory & Tech. of Semicond. Devices II Senior Project Labs Control Systems Communication Theory Numerical Methods & Computer Applications Digital Techniques Electromagnetic Theory Wave Transmission & Reception Advanced Topics in E & M Numerical Methods & Computer Applications Theory & Tech. of Semicond. Devices I & II Senior Project Labs Computer Engineering Numerical Methods & Computer Applications Digital Techniques Introduction to Digital Computers I & II Communication Theory Control Systems Applied Discrete Analysis Machine & Assembly Language Programming Programming Systems Microcomputer-based Design Sen-ior Project Labs Systems Theory Control Systems Communication Theory Numerical Methods & Computer Applications Digital Techniques Power Systems I & II Wave Transmission & Reception Senior Project Labs 1 70 / College of Engineering Power Systems Option Leading to B.S. Degree— 5 years Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Calculus Physics General Chemistry English Physics Basic Engineering Q.H. 12 12 8 8 4 8 Course Q.H. Calculus and Math Analyses 8 Physics Lab 2 Social Science/Humanities Electives (6) 24 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Circuits and E.E. Power Lab. Systems 1 & II 8 Electronic Design Circuits and Computer Engineering Systems III & IV 8 Discrete and Continuous Thermodynamics 8 Systems Electrical Engineering Lab 5 Electronics 1 & II 8 Field Theory 1 & II 8 Transients in Power Systems 4 Mechanics 4 Electric Machines 8 Electric Power Systems 8 Q.H. Computer Engineering Option Leading to B.S. Degree— 5 Years Basic Course Requirements I. General Requirements Same as general E.E. II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Circuits & Systems E.E. Lab 8 1, II, III, &IV 16 Computer Eng. I-VI 24 Discrete & Field Theory 1 & II 8 Continuous Systems 8 Communication Systems 4 Electronics 1 & II 8 Physical Electronics 4 Electronic Design 1 & II 8 Thermodynamics or Material Science 4 Mechanics 4 171 Industrial Engineering and Information Systems Robert S. Lang, M.S., Associate Professor and Acting Chairman Professors Assistant Professors David R. Freeman, Ph.D. Martin Gardiner, Ph.D. Lewis H. Geyer, Ph.D. David S. Goldman, M.S. Ronald R. Mourant, Ph.D. Henry H. K. Kung, Ph.D. Wilfred P. Rule, M.S. Yang B. Park, M.S. David Rumpf, Ph.D. Gerald Voland, M.S. Associate Professors Franklyn K. Brown, M.S. Thomas P. Cullinane, Ph.D. Surendra M. Gupta, Ph.D. Carolyn D. Heising, Ph.D. Stewart V. Hoover, Ph.D. Thomas E. Hulbert, M.S. Mieczyslaw M. Kokar, Ph.D. Emanuel S. Melachrinoudis, Ph.D. Ronald F. Perry, Ph.D. Kenneth S. Woodard, M.S. Professional Preparation Aims Industrial engineers are problem solvers. They formulate strate- gies and make decisions that involve the utilization of individuals, mate- nals, equipment, and energy to achieve the goals of an organization. Management needs factual information that defines the consequences of alternative decisions. The industrial engineer collects this information and evaluates alternatives to make the decision that best achieves a particular organizational goal. The scope of decisions may involve the entire organization or some portion of it associated with a given product or service. Traditionally, industrial engineers have been most widely employed in manufacturing organizations, but increasingly they are finding employ- ment in service industries, such as airlines, banks, hospitals, and local and federal government agencies. Courses in the curriculum reflect the industrial engineer's interest in society's changing attitudes about com- puters, population growth, pollution, and the quality of life. Another responsibility of the Department of Industrial Engineering and Information Systems is to provide a comprehensive view of engineering. Students are confronted with several problems similar to those they may encounter in professional careers. Methods of problem solving and graphic representation of solutions are emphasized so that students have the opportunity to learn some of the ways engineers communicate through drawings and sketches. The role of an engineer as a creative designer is described by relatively large case studies that show the step-by-step solution to specially chosen problems cutting across sev- eral engineering disciplines. Description of Industrial Engineering In performing problem analy ses, the industrial engineer is concerned with complex, integrated man- machine systems. To treat the machine elements of the system, the 172 /College of Engineering industrial engineer requires knowledge of engineering fundamentals. Also necessary is some background in the behavioral sciences to un- derstand how the human elements of the system operate and how they relate to each other and the machines. A View of the Five- Year Program The program is designed to include extensive course work in mathematics, physics, science, and the engi- neering sciences. The first two years provide the student with the oppor- tunity to build a strong foundation for use in later course offerings. The required program affords students an opportunity to develop a strong base in probability, statistics, operations research, and computer systems. Courses in work design, personnel and organizational behav- ior, and engineering economy provide an exposure to the problems frequently encountered in industrial engineering. Elective offerings in the last few years provide an opportunity for students to familiarize them- selves with other areas of industrial engineering, such as plant layout, quality control, simulation, management information systems, production and inventory control, and material-handling systems design. The Computer The computer is of particular importance to the indus- trial engineer since many complicated problems, such as assembly-line balancing, mathematical modeling, and industrial simulations, require a computer solution. B.S.-M.S. Program An accelerated program is available for honor students, allowing com- pletion of the requirements for both B.S. and M.S. degrees in five years through course overloads and the elimination of the senior co-op term. Laboratories Integrated Laboratory The new Industrial Engineering Laboratory is an integrated lab used for a variety of different courses. Directly associ- ated with the lab classroom are the computer console room, utilized in a variety of courses; the copying equipment for use in the plant layout courses; and the machine-tool lab for use in work design. Students work as individuals or in groups, depending upon the scope and complexity of the project. Extensive laboratory project work is also conducted on real problems in outside industrial plants and service organizations. Stu- dents can view actual operations on occasional plant visits. Human Factors Laboratory Equipped primarily for experimentation in perception, the facility is used for demonstration and student projects. Computer Laboratory Numerous microcomputers and minicompu- ters provide an opportunity for students to gain experience in operating computers and utilizing them for application to actual engineering prob- lems. The department has a large collection of industrial engineering software. l\/licroprocessor and Manufacturing Systems Laboratory A labora- tory with microprocessors is available for hands-on programming expe- rience in the use of microprocessors in engineering applications. Students may also develop small experimental situations in the use of microprocessors and minicomputers in a manufacturing environment. Robotics experience and study are offered. Industrial Engineering and Infornnation Systems/ 173 Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Calculus* 12 Physics Labt 2 Physics* 12 Economics 1 & lit 8 General Chemistry* 8 Math Analysis^: 4 English* 8 Effective Speaking 3 Calculust 8 Social Science/Humanities Eng. Graph, and Design* 4 Electives 8 Computers for Engineers* 4 Behavioral Science Physicst 4 Electives 8 Open Elective 4 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Work Designf 4 People and Organizations 4 Mechanics 1 4 Principles of Computation Electrical Engineering 1 4 and Programming 1 4 Probabilistic Analysist 4 Engineering Economy and Statistics 1 & II 8 Statistical Decision Production and Inventory Theory 4 Control 4 Engineering Science Operations Research 8 Electives** 8 Systems Analysis 4 Technical Electives (4)*** 16 Simulation 4 Design Project 4 The freshman-year program of studies in the College is the same for all majors in the College. See page 157. ''Usually taken in the freshman year. t Usually taken in the sophomore year. tDifferential equations "Engineering science electives may be selected from: Mechanics II or 111 Materials Science Themnodynamics Fluid Dynamics Electrical Engineering II "Four technical electives are required. At least two must be selected from: Reliability and Quality Control Microcomputer Programming Microprocessor Applications Human Considerations in Engineering Design Human Factors At least one must be selected from: Management Information Systems Facilities Design Matenal Handling System Design 74 Mechanical Engineering Charles A. Berg, Sc.D., Professor and Chairman Professors Assistant Professors John W. Cipolla. Jr., Ph.D. Hamid Nayeb Hashemi, Ph.D. John F. Dunn, Sc.D. Robert L. Sullivan, Jr., M.S. Arthur R. Foster, M.Engr. Mohammad E. Taslim, Ph.D. Alexander M. Gorlov, Ph.D. Wego Wang, Sc.D. Richard J. Murphy, Ph.D. Welville B. Nowak, Ph.D., Lecturers D. Smith Professor of Jonathan Maher, M.S. Engineering Luis Paz. M.S. John N. Rossettos, Ph.D. Seyyed Seyyedi, M.S. Mohammad Shishesaz, M.S. Mansour Zenouzi, M.S. John Zotos, Met. Engr. Associate Professors George G. Adams, Ph.D. Ralphs. Blanchard, M.S. Gregory J. Kowalski, Ph.D. Bertram S. Long, M.Engr, Mohamad Metghalchi, Ph.D. Ernest E. Mills, M.S. Uichiro Narusawa, Ph.D. Yaman Yener, Ph.D. Alvin J. Yorra, M.S. Ibrahim Zeid, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims Mechanical Engineering is the branch of science broadly con- cerned with energy, including its transformation from one form to an- other, its transmission, and its utilization. Mechanical engineers conceive, plan, design, and direct the manufacture, distribution, and operation of a wide variety of devices, machines, and systems — includ- ing complex man-machine systems — for energy conversion, environ- mental control, materials processing, transportation, materials handling, and other purposes. Mechanical engineers are engaged in all the engineering functions, including creative design, applied research, development, production, and management. The field of mechanical engineering is broad, provid- ing an excellent professional base for career choice and interdisciplinary activities. Description of Mechanical Engineering Mechanical engineers are concerned with the development, design, manufacture, and operation of a wide variety of devices, machines, and systems used in energy conversion, environmental control, materials processing, transportation, prosthetics, manufacturing, and the field of consumer products. The rapid technological advances of the past four decades have con- siderably expanded the mechanical engineer's sphere of inquiry and influence. These new areas of inquiry have placed the mechanical en- gineer in contact with such diverse disciplines as nuclear and solid-state physics, quantum mechanics, plasma physics, chemical kinetics, mag- neto-hydrodynamics, and rarefied gas dynamics, to name a few I Mechanical Engineering / 175 A View of the Five-Year Program In the first three years, students have the opportunity to learn the basic sciences (mathematics, physics, and chemistry), the engineering sciences (mechanics, thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and material science), and the humanities. As upper- classmen, they may choose to concentrate their studies in the areas of thermofluid engineering, mechanics and design, or materials science and engineering. Thermofluid engineering is concerned with the properties and char- acteristics of the working fluid of machines. For example, the ability of an aircraft to fly depends upon the manner in which air flows over its lifting surfaces. The energy to run a turbine is extracted from the steam or combustion gases that pass through it. The engineer must understand and have a knowledge of the concepts of thermodynamics. The effi- ciency of a cooling tower depends upon the mechanisms by which fluids transfer heat to surfaces, so the engineer must have a firm grasp of the principles of heat transfer. IVlechanics and design are based upon the fundamental scientific and mathematical tools utilized in the analysis of mechanical configurations as they evolve in the design of machines and power-producing devices. For example, the engineer in the area of mechanics and design may analyze and design structural components for power plants and deep- sea oceanographic vessels or develop new methods for evaluating fila- mentary composite structures. In the modern machine-tool industry, engineers may be concerned with computer control of machine tools; in the engine industry, they may analyze stresses in components such as turbine blades. To prepare for such challenges, upperclass students have the opportunity to expand their basic knowledge by selecting courses such as Intermediate Strength of Materials, Vibrations, Systems Analysis and Control, Engineering Analysis, Design Fundamentals, and Computer-Aided Design. Materials science and engineering is concerned with relationships among the structure, composition, properties, and functions of materials and with control of the structure and composition to achieve desired properties. Only recently have engineers come to realize that an under- standing of the principles of materials science enables them to design more creatively and with greater freedom than the traditional reference to handbooks. Examples of areas in which mechanical engineers find materials properties a part of the basic design function include: manu- facturing techniques, structures (vehicles, buildings), energy conver- sion, electronic devices (including computers), packaging, and prosthetic devices. Advanced courses are available for those mechani- cal engineers who desire further knowledge in the materials field. B.S.-M.S. Program Honor students may elect an accelerated program allowing completion of the requirements for both B.S. and M.S. degrees in five years through course overloads and the elimination of the senior co-op term. Part-Time Program The Mechanical Engineering Program is available on a part-time basis. The classes are scheduled during the evening hours, usually two eve- nings per week. The curriculum can be completed in a minimum of six years. 1 76 / College of Engineering Laboratories Mechanical Engineering Laboratories The laboratories in Mechani- cal Engineering contain equipment ranging from an electron microscope and ultrasonic measuring devices to pumps and weirs. Students working on thermofluids projects may use a turbine, various types of engines, thermoelectric coolers and generators, and a supersonic wind tunnel, to name a few. A material science laboratory provides research micro- scopes, various furnaces, a fluid-to-fluid extrusion press. X-ray diffrac- tion equipment, electron microscope, and other related equipment. For the mechanics and design areas, vibrations, experimental stress analy- sis, and materials testing facilities are provided. A continuous effort is made by the Department to update and replace laboratory equipment. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. English* 8 Physicst 4 General Chemistry* 8 Physics Labt 2 Basic Engineering* 8 Math. Analysis 8 Calculus* 12 Social Science/Humanities Physics* 12 Elective 4 Calculusf 8 Economicst 4 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Mechanics 1 & lit 8 Measurement & Analysis 4 Thermodynamics It 4 Fluid Mechanics 4 Thermodynamics II 4 Materials Science 9 Mechanics III & IV 8 Design 12 Heat Transfer 4 Electrical Engineering 4 Dynamics 4 Research Report 1 Heat Design 4 'Usually taken in the freshman year. fUsually taken in the sophomore year. The freshman-year program of studies in the College of Engineering is the same for all majors in the College. See page 157. Junior and Senior Years Six additional technical courses are taken by juniors and seniors plus four social science/humanities electives. Elective offerings are subject to some departmental restrictions. Students should obtain the latest de- partmental booklet describing these restrictions and current course of- ferings. 177 Biomedical Engineering Samuel Fine, S.M., M.D., Professor and Chairman Associate Professor H. Frederick Bowman, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims Biomedical engineering is concerned with the scientific princi- ples underlying the physical and biological sciences and their applica- tion to problems of biological and medical significance. Biomedical engineers are engaged in both theoretical and experimen- tal studies either as independent investigators or as members of a re- search or development group. They may characterize and determine the mechanism of action of natural and synthetic macromolecules, ana- lyze the properties of blood, and/or investigate the structure and function of such organ systems as the nervous system, the respiratory system, the cardiovascular system, or the endocrine system. They may design, develop, market and apply transducers, cardiac pacemakers and de- fibrillators, heart-assist systems, artificial kidneys and limbs, or diagnos- tic and therapeutic X-ray equipment. They are important members of the hospital health team. Description of Biomedical Engineering There is no special curricu- lum in Biomedical Engineering. Several of the engineering disciplines discussed in this catalog help provide the engineer with a background in the physical sciences. The purpose of the Biomedical Engineering Department is to assist the engineering student, from the freshman year through the senior year, to choose courses in the biological sciences that will complement those in the physical sciences and humanities taken in the standard engineering curriculum. Courses may be chosen without prejudicing the students' obtaining degrees in their field of engineering specialization. In some cases, courses in the biological sciences can be taken as additional work dur- ing the student's career at the University. In other cases, courses in the biological sciences can be taken as electives in the standard engineer- ing curriculum. The opportunity to take these courses is dependent on the student's interests, capabilities, and academic record. It is, of course, limited by possible schedule conflicts. Students who wish to take an engineering program that includes bio- logical sciences must contact the Biomedical Engineering Department on their arrival as freshmen at the University. This is important since biology is substituted for graphics in the first year. Education in a program involving the physical and biological sciences offers a sound foundation for future work toward a doctorate in medicine or dentistry, a career in biomedical engineering, or a career as an engi- neer in a hospital or a government agency such as the Department of Health and Human Services, depending upon such factors as the state of the economy and the student's own industry and overall ability. Indus- trial organizations, particularly those in the health-care industry, may be seeking individuals with a strong background in engineenng supple- mented by a biological science education. Other career opportunities may include public health, the psychological sciences, and the marine sciences. 178 General Engineering Program Advisory Committee for 1985-1986 Richard J. Murphy, Ph.D., Associate Dean, Chairman Arvin Grabel, Sc.D., Electrical Engineering Saul Namyet, B.S., Civil Engineering Richard R. Stewart, Ph.D., Chemical Engineering Alvin Yorra, M.S., Mechanical Engineering Ronald F. Perry, Ph.D., Industrial Engineering Professional Preparation Aims Engineering and technology influence virtually all areas of en- deavor and have a profound effect on the lifestyle and institutions of society. The impact is both cultural and scientific and is manifested by the awareness that solutions to society's problems are, in part, techno- logical. The major purpose of the General Engineering program is to provide flexible, interdisciplinary educational opportunities based on fundamental engineering concepts. The interdisciplinary nature of the program allows the student to develop other areas of interest in which an engineering background is professionally useful. Description of General Engineering The program is designed for students whose interests are in engineering-related professions rather than in the traditional profession of engineering. It is expected that the work performed by graduates of this program will encompass the entire spectrum of professional activity, including such typical areas as com- puters, urban technology, social systems, and health care. The General Engineenng program is highly elective and gives stu- dents the opportunity to develop, in conjunction with their adviser, a program designed to meet their own career objectives. To achieve this goal, the student is exposed to the fundamental engineering areas through courses in electric circuits, systems, mechanics, thermodynam- ics, and materials. These courses are based on principles developed in early courses in mathematics and physics. In addition, because the computer is a basic tool in any technological environment, each student is required to learn the elements of computer programming. Students completing the adviser-approved program receive an unspecified B.S. degree from the College of Engineering. Graduate education and continuing education are increasingly impor- tant in professional life. By appropriately planning their programs, stu- dents will be able to satisfy the course requirements necessary for admission to various graduate and professional schools, including law, medicine, public health, and social sciences, as well as engineering. A View of the Five-Year Program Each student in the program is required to satisfy the following minimum requirements beyond the freshman year: 8 quarter hours in mathematics 6 quarter hours in physics (including laboratory) 4 quarter hours in circuit theory 4 quarter hours in materials 4 quarter hours in systems 4 quarter hours in thermodynamics 16 quarter hours in social sciences (consisting of at least two se- quences of two courses each from the areas of sociology, eco- nomics, political science, and psychology) I General Engineering / 179 8 quarter hours in the humanities, consisting of at least two courses fronn the areas of art, history, language and literature (not includ- ing grammar), music, philosophy, and drama (not including pub- lic speaking) The remaining portion of the program is completely elective but must be designed to fit the student's career objectives. At least 24 quarter hours of course work must be taken in the professional departments of the College of Engineering (Chemical, Civil, Electrical and Computer, Industrial and Information Systems, and Mechanical Engineering). Beyond the freshman year, students, in conjunction with a faculty adviser, plan their programs. Basically, the elective program permits each student to plan a distinctive and highly individual curriculum. Although each student is enrolled in a "different program," the goals of each are the same: the breadth of an engineering-based liberal edu- cation in combination with the development of professional skills. fi^#!.v f i-mm 181 School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) Thomas E. Hulbert, M.S., P.E., Director, Associate Dean of Engineering Jane E. DeVoe, M.A., Assistant Director Rasma Galins, Assistant Director Richard D. Mansfield, B.S., Assistant Director Professors Assistant Professors Israel Katz, M.S., Engineering Enc W. Hansberry, M.S., Design Teclinology Grapliics Ronald E. Scott, ScD., Visiting Nonna K. Lehmkuhl, M.S., Professor Computer Teclinology Leszek Reiss, M.S., Computer Technology Associate Professors Ernest E. Mills, M.S., P.E., Mechanical Engineering Technology Louis J. Nardone, M.S., P.E., Electrical Engineering Technology Thomas E. Phalen, M.S., P.E., Mechanical Engineering Technology Professional Preparation Aims The School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln Col- lege) offers programs in engineering technology. Although these pro- grams are concerned with the same general fields of engineering specialization, they concentrate on the applications of technology rather than its development. Emphasis is placed on the rational processes involved in converting theories and ideas into practical techniques, procedures, and products. The engineering technologist works with the professional engineer, sci- entist, medical doctor, supervisor, and craftsman in converting scientific knowledge and craftsmanship into products and techniques. Funda- mentals are related to current practice, providing a supportive "why" for the practical "how." At the same time, study of the humanities and social sciences gives students an opportunity to develop an awareness of the social, economic, and political influences that are part of the real world. The structure of the Engineering Technology curriculum is based upon the dual need for relevant technical skills and a foundation for future growth. Engineering technology education can assist students to: 1 . Understand the scientific principles that govern the current tech- nology of the particular branch of engineering that they select; 2. Develop competence in the application of technology to problem solving; 3. Communicate effectively the important implications of technologi- cal advancements; 4. Acquire the motivation for continued development of technical skills. A View of the Five- Year Program The School offers five-year coop- erative programs in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Technology, 182 / School of Engineering Technology I and Computer Technology leading to the degree of Bachelor of Engi- neering Technology. Since the first year of study is similar for electrical and mechanical engineering technology students, a firm choice of major may be delayed until the spring. At this time, the choice of cooperative work assignments makes a decision mandatory. Due to the unique program designed for computer technology, students must decide on this major during the first quarter of their freshman year. Freshman courses act as a foundation for upperclass studies. About four-fifths of the upperclass program is de- voted to scientific and technological study and about one-fifth to human- istic-social courses, with the aim of balancing technical proficiency with an appreciation for the nontechnical aspects of society and culture. Cooperative work assignments during the upperclass years are most valuable in helping students to integrate the important elements of both a technical and a liberal education. Transfer Aerospace Co-op Program The School is offering, for trans- fer students, a three-year Bachelor of Engineering Technology degree program with a major in Aerospace Maintenance Engineering Technol- ogy. This BET program, in cooperation with East Coast Aero Technical School, is designed for students who have successfully completed an Aircraft and Power Plant Mechanics or similar technician programs. Dur- ing their three years of study at Northeastern University these students will participate in the Cooperative Education system thereby enhancing the technical classroom education received. Part-Time Program Offered During Evening Hours The School also offers six- and seven-year, part-time curncula leading to the degree of Bachelor of Engineering Technology in the following areas; Civil Engineenng Technology Mechanical Engineering Technology Mechanical-Structural Engineering Technology Electrical Engineering Technology Computer Technology Aerospace Maintenance Engineering Technology (transfer) Classes are held in the evenings and generally meet two times per week. For further information on admission to these programs, contact the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) office at 120 Snell Engineering Center. Graduation Requirements Candidates for the Bachelor of Engineering Technology degree must complete all of the prescribed work of the curriculum in which they seek to qualify. A total of approximately 180 quarter hours is required for the degree. Students who undertake the cooperative education program must meet the requirements of the Department of Cooperative Education before they become eligible for their degrees. Students transferring from another college or university are not eligible to receive the degree until they have completed at least one academic year at Northeastern immediately preceding their graduation. Graduation with Honors Baccalaureate candidates who have attained superior grades in their academic work will be graduated cum laude. Upon special vote of th faculty, a limited number of this group may be graduated magna cum laude or summa cum laude. Students must have been in attendance at the University at least six academic quarters and have earned a mini- 1 School of Engineering Technology / 1 83 mum of 72 quarter hours of credit before they may become eligible for honors at graduation. Accreditation Both the Electrical and Mechanical Engineering Technology baccalau- reate day programs, as well as the evening part-time baccalaureate programs in Mechanical, Mechanical-Structural, Civil, and Electncal En- gineering Technology, are accredited by the Technology Accreditation Commission of the Accreditation Board for Engineering and Technology (ABET), formerly the Engineer's Council for Professional Development. Facilities Electrical The electrical engineering technology laboratories are de- signed to familiarize the student with the experimental approach to solv- ing engineering problems. Boasting a wide variety of modern testing and measuring equipment, the laboratories are an excellent adjunct to the classroom. Here the students may perform experiments, simulate or fabricate systems that have been studied in their lecture courses. From light machinery and power equipment to microwave precision systems, students plan and pursue their experiments and projects in the laboratory. LSI-11 Digital Equipment computers are available for direct programming or use in other laboratory experimentation. VAX terminals are available in the laboratory for direct access to the University's Digital Equipment VAX mainframe computer. The College of Engineering has recently acquired new Data General and VAX 785 mainframe computers for use in general programming courses. In addition, a number of per- sonal computers are available for student use. Mechanical The mechanical engineering technology laboratories con- tain equipment ranging from an electron microscope and ultrasonic measuring devices to pumps and weirs. Students working on thermo- fluids projects may use a turbine and various types of engines. A mate- rial science laboratory provides research microscopes, various furnaces, a fluid-to-fluid extrusion press. X-ray diffraction equipment, electron microscope, and other related equipment. For the mechanics and design areas, vibrations, experimental stress analysis, and materi- als testing facilities are provided. Computer facilities available to the mechanical engineering technol- ogy student include various microcomputers for in-laboratory analysis. For general programming purposes, students have direct access to the new College of Engineering Data General and Digital Equipment 1 1/785 computers as well as the University-wide Digital Equipment VAX com- puters. A Computervision CAD/CAM system and the IBM Fastdraft com- puter-aided drafting system have been installed to allow students hands-on experience in this rapidly emerging technology. A new state- of-the-art Computervision CDS 4001 CAD/CAM system supporting five work stations was recently acquired. Academic Computer Services Academic Computer Services is the support arm for the many computer- oriented curricula of the various departments throughout the University. Equipment has been updated with the installation of a third powerful Digital Equipment VAX series system with time-sharing capability. Re- cently acquired computation equipment include a Data General MV/ 8000 mainframe computer supporting forty terminals, a Computervision Designer V computer-aided design system with three work stations and the IBM Fastdraft computer-aided drafting system supporting two work stations and an IBM PC. In addition to this equipment the Engineering 184 / School of Engineering Technology Center has acquired a new Computervision CDS 4001 CAD/CAM sys- tem, supporting three high resolution color work stations and two mono- chronne work stations. A new Digital Equipment Corporation VAX 1 1/785 supporting 32 terminals has been installed in the Engineering Center to further enhance the computing capabilities of the College of Engineering faculty and students. These systems, along with continued development of microcomputer clusters, are designed for both student and faculty use. As the prime computation center necessary to meet curriculum requirements, Academic Computer Services is used by the students in the Electrical Engineering Technology, the Mechanical Engineering Technology, the Aerospace Maintenance Engineering Technology, and the Computer Technology programs. Women in Engineering Technology Many women enter the technology field each year. Both government and industry provide positions of responsibility for women technologists. Any woman with technical or scientific interests should consider engineering technology as a career. Freshman-Year Program The freshman-year program of studies in School of Engineering Tech- nology (formerly Lincoln College) is similar for all majors in the School. Sample Freshman-Year Program of Studies in Engineering Technology First Quarter Third Quarter Algebra and Trigonometry I Calculus I Physics I Physics III English/Writing English/Tech. Writing Engineering Design Graphics I Physics Lab II Engineering Design Graphics II* Second Quarter Algebra and Trigonometry II Physics II English/Literature Computer Programming for Engineering Technology* Physics Lab I 'Computer Technology students take Introduction to Programming, Basic Com- puter Organization In addition to the above courses, students may elect to take Basic ROTC. 185 Computer Technology Nonna K. Lehmkuhl, M.S., Coordinator for Computer Technology. Professional Preparation Aims The Computer Technology program is designed to supply a por- tion of the manpower needs for the complex computer industry. Gradu- ates of this program may become an integral part of the engineering support team which develops techniques to implement the engineering design project. In this capacity, they become a research and production team which maintains a close cooperation and communication with the engineers. The program is designed to provide students with both academic and technical learning experience using a basic core curriculum which pro- vides courses in theoretical and technical areas. Students also choose technical electives in their area of interest. Theory courses are offered at the higher levels of the technology spectrum. These higher level theory courses provide the means for students to continue their educational and professional development beyond the baccalaureate level. Some students may be prepared to pursue the Master of Technology degree or, through supplemental course work, the more theoretical Bachelor of Science degree. Description of the Major Computer technology deals with the design and application of equipment and systems related to the hardware and software aspects of computers. Its major functions include: 1 . Interfacing the computer with process plants or machinery; 2. Programming the computer for engineering, scientific, and busi- ness applications; 3. Designing, engineering, and testing computers; 4. Interfacing computers to various types of equipment for automatic drafting, data collection, design, and display. A View of the Five- Year Major The present-day high-speed comput- ers have been realized through the application of technology developed in the electrical and the electronic fields. Because of this interdepend- ence, the program of study for Computer Technology begins, as in Elec- trical Engineering Technology, with the basic courses in mathematics and physics. An introduction to computer programming and the study of basic computer organization provide an early contact with the major field of study. In addition, the freshman year includes literature and engineering graphics to aid students in developing the skills to express themselves. In the upperclass years the balance of hardware and software courses, combined with hands-on laboratory experience, provides the student with the opportunity to develop skills for interfacing the computer with various systems or to design computers and the related systems of programs. Current practice is stressed. The senior year technical electives are offered to ensure that students acquire both depth and specialization. 186 / School of Engineering Technology The freshman-year program of studies in the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College)'s Computer Technology major is similar to that of the Electrical or Mechanical Engineering Technology, with the exception of courses CT 1105 Introduction to Programming and CT 1341 Basic Computer Organization. These courses are taken in place of courses GET 1100 Computer Programming for Engineering Technology and GET 1 1 71 Engineering Design Graphics II. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Algebra and Physics Lab. 1 & 11* 2 Trigonometry 1 & IT 8 Engineering Design Calculus r 4 Graphics 1* 4 Calculus A &Bt 8 Introduction to English* 12 Programming* 4 Principles of Economicst 4 Basic Computer Physics 1, II, III* 12 Organization* 4 Social Science/Humanit es Electives 16 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Circuit Analysis I& II 8 Advanced Computer FORTRAN 4 Organization 4 Semiconductor Logic 4 CPU Hardware Electronics 1 4 Architecture 4 Modern Programming Non-Numerical Algorithms 4 | Techniques 4 Micro-Peripheral Computer Logic 4 Hardware 4 COBOL 4 Numerical Algorithms 4 Assembly Language 4 Data Communications Introduction to CPU Methods 4 Hardware 4 Industrial Software 4 Technical Electives 16 Industrial Hardware Computer Peripheral 4 Hardware 4 'Usually taken in the freshman year. -[Usually taken in the sophomore year. 187 Electrical Engineering Technology Louis J. Nardone, M.S., Coordinator for Electrical Engineering Technology Professional Preparation Aims The Electrical Engineering Technology progrann is directed to- ward supplying some of the manpower needs of the industrial complex and high technology industries. Because of the nature of high technol- ogy industries, close communication and cooperation is required be- tween the technologist and the engineer in forming a viable working team. Students through their cooperative work assignments in industry bear evidence of this need. In an effort to implement these objectives, the program is designed to provide the student with a broad education through the use of a basic core curriculum. Courses are offered at a high level of theory at the upper end of the technology spectrum. Technical electives are offered to accommodate the student's area of interest. The higher theoretical level provided in the program also prepares students to continue their education beyond the Bachelor of Technology degree. These continued studies could be toward a Master of Technol- ogy degree or, through supplemental course work, could prepare them for more theoretical engineering science subject areas. Description of the Major Electrical engineering technology deals with the design and operation of equipment and systems related to power, communications, data processing, and electrical control. Its major func- tions include: 1. The generation, transmission, and distribution of electrical energy for light and power purposes; 2. The development and production of equipment for telephone, ra- dio, television, radar, and communication; 3. The design and construction of data-processing systems and an- alog or digital computers; 4. The application of electrical and electronic devices in the control of processes and manufacture. A View of the Five- Year IVIajor Since electrical engineering technol- ogy derives many of its fundamentals from developments in the pure sciences, the program of study begins with basic courses in mathemat- ics and physics. In addition, the freshman year includes literature and engineering graphics to aid students in developing the skills with which to express themselves. In the upperclass years, courses are divided into four related se- quences: circuits and systems, including feedback control; microwave devices; energy conversion, emphasizing electromagnetic devices; and laboratory work associated with all of the aforementioned. Current prac- tice is stressed. In the senior year, electives are offered to ensure that students acquire both depth and specialization. The freshman-year program of studies in the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) is similar for Electrical and Me- chanical Engineering Technology. See page 184. 188 / School of Engineering Technology Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Algebra and Computer Programming Trigonometry 1 & II* 8 for Engineering Calculus r 4 Technology* 4 Calculus A &Bt 8 Physics 1, II, III* 12 English* 12 Physics Lab 1 & II* 4 Principles of Economics 4 Social Science/Humaniti BS Engineering Design Electives 20 Graphics 1 & II* 8 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H, Course Q.H. Circuit Analysis 1 & lit 8 Digital Computers 1 & II 8 Circuit Analysis III & IV 8 Distnbuted Systems 4 Electronics 1, II, III 12 Circuits Lab It 2 Control Engineering 1 & II 8 Circuits Lab II 2 Engineering Analysis 1 4 Electronics Lab 2 Energy Conversions 4 Advanced Electronics Electrical Measurements 4 Labi, II, III 6 Mechanics 4 Pulse and Digital 1 4 Technical Electives 16 *Courses are taken in the frestiman year. tCourses are taken in the sophomore year. Mechanical Engineering Technology Ernest E. Mills, M.S., Coordinator for Mechanical Engineering Technology Professional Preparation Aims The objectives of the program are to prepare the graduate for technical support activities as a technologist in the broad field of Me- chanical Engineering Technology. The student who has learned the principles of science and mathemat- ics as applied to his or her field will be able to convert theories into practical techniques and processes. The student will be shown how to effectively communicate this tech- nical information so that he or she may become an integral component of the engineer-technologist-technician design and operations team. Description of the IVlajor Mechanical engineering technology deals with the use of machinery to harness power resources and perform useful work. In contrast to civil engineering, which deals primarily with static forces and structures, mechanical engineering technology is more concerned with the motion and kinetics of devices activated by hy- draulic, electrical, mechanical, or thermodynamic forces. Major func- tions of the mechanical engineering technologist include: Mechanical Engineering Technology / 189 1 . Design and installation of all kinds of machinery, from pocket watches to the largest steel boring mills; 2. Development and production of engines and transport equipment, as in automobiles, aircraft, ships, or railway cars; 3. Construction and operation of furnaces and boilers, as well as heating and air-conditioning equipment, for the control of atmos- pheric and environmental conditions. A View of the Five- Year Major Since machinery is the predominant concern of the mechanical engineering technologist, the program of study is designed to offer considerable training in the principles under- lying the design and operation of engines, power transmission devices, machine tools, and other machinery. This, of course, implies a thorough study of the physical laws concerning motion and transfer of energy. Applied mechanics, thermodynamics, and study of materials will occupy prominent places in the program. These studies help provide the student with a broad foundation in those fundamental subjects essential to the understanding of current practice. In the senior year, students have elective choice and opportu- nity for specialization. The freshman-year program of studies in the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) is similar for Electrical and Me- chanical Engineering Technology. See page 184. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Algebra and Physics Lab 1 & 11* 4 Trigonometry 1 & 11* 8 Engineering Design Calculus r 4 Graphics 1 & II 8 Calculus A &Bt 8 Computer Programming English* 12 for Engineenng Phnciples of Economics 4 Technology 4 Physics 1, II, III* 12 Social Science/Humanities Engineering Economy 4 Electives 20 II. Professional Requirements Course Mechanics A & Bf Mechanics C Stress Analysis Af Stress Analysis B Matenals A Engineering Design Electricity and Electronics I Measurement and Analysis Lab A Q.H. 8 4 4 4 4 4 Course Q.H. Mechanical Design A & B 8 Thermodynamics A & B 8 Fluid Mechanics A& B 8 Technical Labs A, B, C, D, E 10 4 4 4 12 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Heat Transfer Machine Shop Technical Electives ""Usually taken In the freshman year, -f Usually taken in the sophomore year. J k m 191 College of Nursing Juanita 0, Long, R.N., M.S.N., Ed.D., Dean Joan Grindley, R.N., M.S.N., Ed.D., Associate Dean Diane W. Porter, R.N., M.S.N. , Assistant Dean Angelo J. Logiudice, M.Ed., C.A.G.S., Assistant to the Dean Associate Professors Jane Aroian, R.N., M.S.N. Olivia M. Breton, R.N., M.Ed. Elaine Capozzoli, R.N., M.A. Janet Carroll, R.N.. M.S. Teresa Chopoorian, R.N., Ed.D. Ellen T. Daly, R.N., M.S.N. Flora M. DeScenza, R.N., M.S. Margaret S. Edmands, R.N., Ed.D. M. Paula Fellows, R.N., M.S. Jean P. Gilbert, R.N., M.S. Lee Ann Hoff, R.N., Ph.D. MaryC. Keaney, R.N., M.S.N., C.A.G.S. M. Marcia Lynch, R.N., M.S. Susan C. Marchessault, R.N., M.S. Geraldine A. Medici, R.N., M.S. Manlyn M. Smith, R.N., M.S., M.B.A. Joyce E. Tingle, R.N., M.S. Nancy Walden, R.N., M.S.N. Mary E. Wilcox, R.N., M.S. M. Delaine Williamson, R.D., M.S. Assistant Professors Nancy N. Carr, R.N,, M.S. Lael T. Cutler, R.D., M.P.H. D. Jeanne Otto, R.N., M.S., M.Ed. Janice B. Meisenhelder, R.N., D.N. Sc. Mary Ann L. Ringquist, R.N., Ed.D. Instructors Charlotte Carneiro, R.N., M.S. Katherine F. Ciganovic, R.N., M.S.N. Cathenne Deering, R.N., M.S.N. Maureen A. McMullen, R.N., M.S. Knsten K. Schmidt, R.N., M.S.N. Professional Preparation Aims The College of Nursing is committed to preparing professional nurses capable of practicing in a variety of settings. To accomplish this aim, students are provided with a broadly based educational experience which is supportive of both personal and professional growth and pro- vides a foundation for graduate study in nursing. The College of Nursing also provides opportunities for individuals from diversified backgrounds and/or with changing career goals to pursue professional nursing edu- cation. Opportunities for Registered Nurses The College of Nursing ac- cepts Registered Nurses who wish to complete requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree in Nursing. The length of the program varies depending upon the individual's previous educational experience and ability to achieve advance placement through selected testing methods. A View of the Nursing Program The College of Nursing was estab- lished at Northeastern University in 1964. In keeping with its commitment to professional nursing education, the College offers a course of study which emphasizes nursing theory and nursing research, the humanities, 192 /College of Nursing and the biological, physical, and social sciences. The study of nursing begins in the freshman year. Clinical experience in health care settings is introduced in the second year of the program. Approximately thirty outstanding hospitals and health-related agencies provide facilities for clinical laboratories. The College of Nursing was the first in the nation to operate on a cooperative education plan. Beginning in the sophomore year, students alternate periods of academic study with cooperative work experiences. During periods of employment, students have the opportunity to gain experience in nursing settings. The salary earned during the cooperative work placement accrues totally to the student. Placements are arranged by a nursing coordinator in accordance with agreements made by the University with health care agencies. Cooperative work experiences are available not only in the Greater Boston area but also in selected sites across the country. Students are admitted in September and January. A summer program is provided for transfer students. Graduation Requirements Degrees An overall minimum scholastic average of C in both nursing and general studies is required for graduation. The program is five years in length and leads to the degree of Bach- elor of Science in Nursing. Accreditation The program of the College of Nursing is fully accredited by the National League for Nursing and approved by the Board of Registration in Nurs- ing of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. Licensure The program is designed to prepare graduates to qualify to take the professional examination for practice as a registered nurse. Transfer Credit Students may be allowed to transfer credits earned in courses at other institutions if a grade of C or better has been obtained and if the courses are comparable to courses required at Northeastern University. It is unusual for specific nursing courses to be transferable. Special Requirements Health Clearance Every student must have a complete physical ex- amination, including a tuberculin test, prior to registering for first quarter classes. Similarly, proof of immunization against German measles is required unless a satisfactory antibody titre against German measles is demonstrated. All students must carry malpractice insurance. Arrangements for this insurance are made by the University. Students in the College of Nursing are required to wear the school uniform in clinical laboratory areas dur- ing academic quarters. A modification of the uniform is worn during cooperative work periods. College of Nursing/ 193 Sample Freshman- Year Program of Studies in the Nursing Program First Quarter Biology Western Civilization English Nursing Second Quarter General Chemistry Biology English Nursing Third Quarter General Chennistry Anatomy Western Civilization Human Nutrition NOTE: Current requirements are now being revised. Information concerning new requirements may be obtained from the Office of ttie College of Nursing, 102 Robinson Hall. Basic Course Requirements: Baccalaureate Degree 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Biology 8 Fundamentals of Western Civilization 8 Psychology 1 & II 8 English 8 Social Anthropology 4 General Chemistry 10 Principles of Sociology 4 Anatomy 4 Social Psychology 4 Microbiology 4 Electives (6) 24 Physiology 8 (includes 8 Q.H, of Growth and Development 1 Humanities) &II 8 Pharmacology 3 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Nursing 8 Maternal-Child Nursing 9 Human Nutrition 4 Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing 12 Nursing 7 Nursing 7 Community Health Nursing 9 Medical-Surgical Nursing 9 Issues in Contemporary Nursing 5 Introduction to Nursing Research 4 195 College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Gerald E. Schumacher, Pharm. D., Ph.D., Dean and Director, Graduate School of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Judith T. Barr, M.Ed., Associate Dean Joseph F. Palumbo, M.S., Assistant to the Dean for Student Affairs Anne M. Ahem, M.Ed., Director, Academic Support Services Kathleen T. Foley, A.S., Assistant to the Dean Professional Preparation Aims Northeastern University recognizes the increased demand for well-educated pharmacists and allied health professionals. The College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions has pledged to meet this need through a unique combination: the Cooperative Plan of Education and a highly innovative academic program designed to offer students the opportunity to prepare themselves to become effective professional practitioners, to enter graduate schools, and to obtain employment in the many areas responsible for the delivery of health care. A View of the Five-Year Program Fundamental to the College's ap- proach to health-care education are: 1 . A curriculum of highly relevant and closely integrated courses in the physical, biological, behavioral, and administrative sciences comprising the basis of modern professional practice; 2. A meaningful involvement in the clinical aspects of patient care via affiliations with teaching hospitals and related institutions; 3. A cooperative work program, including an externship-internship period, and a clinical component offenng students the opportunity to acquire the skills and actual experience integral to the total program; 4. A commitment to the search for and advancement of new and progressive concepts, ideas, and philosophies of education and professional practice. Facilities The College occupies the Mugar Life Sciences Building on the main campus of the University. Completed in 1963, this multimillion-dollar facility offers proximity to all the academic and extracurricular activities of the University. The building and the Amelia Peabody Health Professions Center ad- dition, with its well-equipped laboratories and classrooms for both un- dergraduate and graduate programs, are designed to anticipate the physical needs of a growing and progressive College. In addition to faculty and administrative offices, a Drug Information and Resource Center, a data-processing area, and the graduate school, there are laboratories for radioisotopes, clinical chemistry, medicinal chemistry, drug analysis, prescription pharmacy, hematology, immunology, phar- macology, respiratory therapy, medical record science, and clinical mi- crobiology. Animal rooms and audiovisual capabilities for all programs 196 / College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions are also featured in this five-story structure. Research facilities are available for upperclass students who participate in original research projects. Transfers with Advanced Standing The College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions may accept qualified transfer students who have successfully completed one or more years of preprofessional course work in an accredited college or university. Degrees Granted The degrees of Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science in Pharmacy, Bachelor of Science in Respiratory Therapy, Bachelor of Science in Tox- icology, Bachelor of Dental Hygiene, Associate in Science, and Associ- ate in Science in Dental Hygiene are awarded to qualified candidates. Accreditation Each of the programs offered by the College is accredited by the appro- priate professional group. The College holds memberships in both the American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy and the American Soci- ety of Allied Health Professions. Health-Care Curriculum Open Option Students interested in pursuing a career in the health-care professions who are undecided as to which profession is right for them should ex- plore the Open Option offered by Northeastern's College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions. Aims The Open Option program offers freshmen a core of courses designed to provide the basic scientific background required for each of the professional programs in the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions. Students are also introduced to the basic principles of health-care delivery, health-care agencies and services, and atti- tudes, behavioral aspects, and policies that may influence health-care systems. The Open Option is especially valuable to students who need assis- tance in determining an area of interest within the health-care field. By examining various professions, and thus gaining an overview of the discipline, students can refine their health-care career goals. They may also familiarize themselves with what is expected of them in vahous health-care professions. Subsequent selection of a professional pro- gram may proceed more smoothly, an advantage that may help students gain more confidence and certainty in pursuing a degree. Even though in the Open Option students consider various health professions, they still complete some prerequisite courses required of all the professional programs and so do not lose valuable time prior to selecting a major. A View of the Plan In the Open Option Plan, students may complete the core courses in the first-year curriculum without selecting a profes- sion in which to major and without loss of valuable time. Upon satisfac- tory completion of the first year of courses, students select a professional Dental Hygiene/ 197 area in which to major. Professions in the college include pharmacy, health record administration, medical laboratory science, respiratory therapy, and toxicology. The courses offered in the first-year Open Option include: — Functions and Basic Calculus — General Chemistry I and II — General Biology — Animal Biology — Freshman Writing — Introduction to Literature — Professional Dynamics in the Health-Care Delivery System Satisfactory completion of the eight courses in the Open Option core curriculum, as well as other courses completed during the freshman year, is necessary for admission to one of the professional programs of the college. The Open Option Plan does not apply to the Dental Hygiene program. Dental Hygiene Associate in Science Degree Professional Preparation Aims The Forsyth School of Dental Hygienists conducts a program of dental hygiene education in cooperation with Northeastern University. Students in this two-year program attend classes at both the Forsyth Dental Center and Northeastern. The dental hygienist is licensed to ren- der preventive services to a patient under the supervision of a dentist, including administering dental prophylactic treatment, preparing dental radiographs, and teaching prescribed methods of maintaining dental health. A View of the Program The first year includes courses in anatomy and physiology, chemistry, microbiology, histology, nutrition, dental ma- lenals, radiology, periodontology, dental hygiene, and clinical dental hygiene instruction. In the second year, students take general courses, such as English, sociology, and psychology, and professional courses in pathology, public health, pharmacology, dental hygiene, and head and neck anatomy; they also continue to receive clinical dental hygiene instruction. Degree Students satisfactorily completing the program will receive the Certificate in Dental Hygiene from Forsyth and may elect to receive the Associate in Science degree in Dental Hygiene from Northeastern Uni- versity. Graduates are required to fulfill the Dental Hygiene licensure requirements in the state in which they intend to practice. Accreditation This program is accredited by the Commission on Dental Accreditation of the American Dental Association. Admissions Students are admitted directly to the Forsyth School for Dental Hygien- ists and should contact Forsyth for catalogs and applications by writing to 140 The Fenway, Boston, f\/lassachusetts 021 15. 198 / College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Sample Freshman- Year Program of Studies in Dental Hygiene for the Associate Degree First Quarter Third Quarter Human Anatomy and Physiology Microbiology Chemistry Dental Materials Dental Anatomy Periodontology II Radiology Nutrition Dental Hygiene Dental Hygiene Clinical Dental Hygiene Clinical Dental Hygiene Second Quarter Human Anatomy and Physiology Chemistry Histology Periodontology 1 Dental Hygiene Clinical Dental Hygiene Basic Course Requirements for the Associate Degree 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. English Composition and Foundations of English Literaturef 8 Psychology If 4 Chemistry* 8 Sociologyt 4 Microbiology* 4 Human Anatomy and Physiology* 10 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Dental Anatomy* 2 Pathologyt 4 Radiology* 2 Periodontology* 4 Dental Hygiene** 12 Public Healtht 2 Clinical Dental Hygiene** 23 Pharmacologyt 2 Nutrition* 2 Head and Neck Anatomyt 2 Histology* 2 Dental Matenals* 2 Independent Studyf 2 * These courses are usually taken in the first year. ■[These courses are usually taken in the second year. **These courses are usually taken in both the first and second years. Bachelor of Dental Hygiene Degree Program Professional Preparation Aims This program is a two year post-certificate or post Associate degree course of study which is designed to prepare leaders for the challenging world of dental health. Options for majoring in dental re- search or education are offered to prepare hygienists for advanced positions in administration, community service and industry, as well as research and education. Dental Hygiene/ 199 A View of the Program The curriculum provides liberal arts, science and technical courses, as well as supervised practical experience in each area of specialization. This program consists of six quarters of study over two academic years with both Forsyth and Northeastern Uni- versity offering the following core courses common to the concentration in either research or education. Core Courses for the Bachelor of Dental Hygiene Degree Advances in Oral Microbiology Advanced Periodontology I and II Advances in Dental Pharmacotherapeutics Advances in Cariology Oral Immunology Dental Public Health Dental Seminars Periodontology Clinic Expanded Functions Clinic Fundamentals of Mathematics Human Development and Learning Caring for Patients: Psychosocial Aspects of Illness Introduction to Data Processing for Health Professionals Applied Health Statistics Professional Dynamics in the Health Care Delivery System The concentration in research will require work on a research problem, while students concentrating on education will study curriculum devel- opment, teaching procedures, measurement and evaluation. Students in both specializations will have an opportunity for electives. Degree Students satisfactorily completing the program will receive a Certificate in Advanced Dental Hygiene from Forsyth and the Bachelor of Dental Hygiene degree from Northeastern University. Admissions Admission is limited to applicants who have graduated from an accredited dental hygiene program and earned a Certificate or an Associate degree. Students may apply for admission dunng the sec- ond year of a two-year dental hygiene program provided they complete the course prior to starting the bachelor's degree program. Applicants for admission to this post-certificate program are evaluated on past academic record, leadership potential, related dental hygiene work experience, and letters of recommendation. An applicant must have successfully completed the National Board Dental Hygiene Exam- ination and be licensed as a dental hygienist in the United States at the time of matriculation. Bachelor of Science Degree Programs in Health Science or Education Graduates of the Associate in Science degree program for dental hy- gienists may apply to University College of Northeastern University, which offers part-time day and evening courses leading to a Bachelor of Science degree in Health Science. Graduates interested in health education may apply to transfer into the third year of the Bachelor of Science degree program in Education offered by Northeastern University's Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions. 200 Health Record Administration Judith Weilerstein, M.P.H., Associate Professor and Director Assistant Professor Leslie A. Blide, M.A. Professional Preparation Aims A health record administrator organizes, operates, and manages medical record services. Northeastern's program offers students the opportunity to develop the capability to design manual and automated health information and retrieval systems; to plan, organize, and direct medical record services; to develop, analyze, and evaluate medical records and indexes; to work with medical and administrative staffs in developing methods for evaluation of patient care; and to participate in research projects utilizing health-care information. A View of the Five-Year ly/lajor In the first two years, the student will concentrate on liberal arts and sciences, including the required human anatomy and physiology courses and an overview of microbiology. Courses in health-care science are offered to help the student prepare for a role in health administration and health-care delivery. The program offers the opportunity for preparation in administration, in departmental and hospital management and organization, and in electronic data processing. The professional courses in medical record science, medical terminology, and hospital law are complemented by directed applied study in medical record science at an affiliated health facility. Degree The Health Record Administration program is offered on the cooperative plan. Successful completion of the prescribed curriculum, including directed study at an affiliated health center, will permit the award of a Bachelor of Science degree. Usually, graduates are eligible to take the registration examination given by the American Medical Rec- ord Association. Certificate Program The one-year Health Record Administration Cer- tificate program is designed for candidates holding a baccalaureate or master's degree who desire to enter a new career. The four-quarter curriculum is designed to offer students who have demonstrated lead- ership potential and self-direction the opportunity to participate in an accelerated program that includes an integrated clinical practice expe- rience. This clinical practice begins in the second quarter and totals more than 300 hours, including a four-week management experience at the conclusion of the last quarter. Accreditation The Health Record Administration Program is accredited by the Com- mittee on Allied Health Education and Accreditation (CAHEA) of the American Medical Association in cooperation with the Council on Edu- cation of the American Medical Record Association (COE-AMRA). Special Information Students interested in this profession should arrange for an interview with the program director. Health Record Administration / 201 Sample Freshman- Year Program of Studies in Health Record Administration First Quarter English Connposition Biology Math Psychology Orientation to Health Records I Second Quarter Biology Math Liberal Arts Elective Professional Dynamics in the Health-Care Delivery System Third Quarter Psychology Liberal Arts Elective Microbiology English Literature In addition to the above courses, students may choose to take ROTC. Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. English Composition and Organizational Behavior 4 English Literature* 8 Introduction to Computer Mathematics* 8 Science 4 Communications 4 Psychology* 8 Biology (General Sociology or and Animal)* 8 Anthropologyt 4 Microbiology* 3 Liberal Arts Electives 32 II. Professional Requirements Course O.H. Course < Q.H. Orientation to Health Health Science Education 2 Records 2 Directed Practice 9 Health Records Application of Medical Science l-IV 16 Computers 4 Medical Terminology 4 Quality Assurance 4 Foundations of Independent Study 4 Medical Science 6 Special Topics** 4 Hospital Law 2 Health Record Management of Health Professional 2 Record Services 12 Professional Dynamics Applied Health in the Health-Care Statistics 4 Delivery System* 4 Clinical Seminar 2 Anatomy and Physiologyt 10 Seminar in Medical Systems Analysis 4 Records 2 Statistics 4 'These courses are usually taken In the freshman year tThese courses are usually taken in the sophomore year "Assigned per Program Director. 202 Medical Laboratory Science (IVIedical Technology) Gerald L. Davis, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Director Professor Assistant Professors James J. Gozzo, Ph.D. Robert F. Martin, Ph.D. Elizabeth G. Szymczak, M.S. Associate Professors Judith T. Barr, M.Ed. Britta L. Karlsson, M.S. Professional Preparation Aims Medical technology involves the application of principles of nat- ural, physical, and biological sciences to the performance of laboratory determinations used in the diagnosis and treatment of disease and the maintenance of health. It is projected that the demand for properly edu- cated and certified medical technologists and medical laboratory tech- nicians will increase as a result of greater emphasis on the quantity, quality, and efficiency of health-care delivery. With educational oppor- tunities available in hematology, immunohematology, clinical chemistry, and clinical microbiology, students have the opportunity to prepare themselves for positions not only in a hospital laboratory but also in research, industrial, and governmental institutions. Related co-op work experience in hospitals, clinics, research, and industry helps prepare the graduates for a variety of positions in the working world. Since 1976, opportunities for six months of co-op work experiences in foreign coun- tries have been available to interested students. These have been an enriching experience for the participants. For qualified graduates, additional opportunities may be found in lab- oratory administration, education, and graduate programs. A View of the Five- Year Major Students enter the College in the Med- ical Laboratory Science program (medical technology). The College of- fers a five-year modified cooperative course of study leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science. Upon satisfactory completion of the baccalaureate degree, the student should be eligible to take national certification examinations in medical technology and clinical laboratory science. Some states may require additional licensure examinations. During the junior and senior years, qualified students are assigned to the hospital components of the medical technology program. To qualify for entrance into the hospital component of the program, students must have an acceptable grade point average; have successfully completed all University course requirements, including those in biology, chemistry, mathematics, and medical laboratory science; and have met other cri- teria established by the Clinical Studies Admission Committee. The professional courses in hematology, pathogenic microbiology, serology, mycology, parasitology, clinical chemistry, instrumentation, and blood banking are included in both the University and the hospital components of the program. Students in the five-year major who decide not to complete their course of study may transfer into the three-year Associate degree pro- gram. In addition, through the Graduate School of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions, programs leading to the Master of Science and Doc- tor of Philosophy degrees are offered. Accreditation Medical Laboratory Science (Medical Technology) / 203 Degree The degree granted is the Bachelor of Science. A View of the Three- Year IVIajor Students enter the College of Phar- macy and Allied Health Professions as Medical Laboratory Science (Medical Laboratory Technician) majors. This three-year modified co-op program leads to an Associate degree. The first two years of academic study parallel the baccalaureate pro- gram. During the third year students alternate related co-op work expe- rience with clinical applied studies at affiliated hospitals. During the middler (third) year, qualified students are assigned to the hospital components of the Medical Laboratory Technician program. To qualify for entrance into the hospital component of the program, students must have an acceptable grade point average; have successfully com- pleted all other requirements of the program; and have met the criteria as defined by the program. Upon completion of the professional component of the program, stu- dents are eligible to write national certification examinations for medical and clinical laboratory technician. Degree The degree granted is the Associate of Science degree. I The Associate in Science and the Bachelor of Science degree programs are accredited by the Committee on Allied Health Education and Ac- creditation of the American Medical Association. Sample Freshman- Year Program in Medical Laboratory Science First Quarter Second Quarter Math or Calculus Math or Calculus General Chemistry General Chemistry General Biology Animal Biology English Composition Professional Dynamics in Medical Laboratory Science the Health-Care Orientation 1 Delivery System Medical Laboratory Science Orientation II Third Quarter Electives English Literature Basic MLS Urinalysis Analytical Chemistry Basic Course Requirements for the Baccalaureate Degree 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course ' Q.H. English and English Genetics and Literature* 8 Developmental Biology 4 Biology— General Physics 10 and Animal* 8 Microbiology 3 Math or Calculus* 8 Humanities Electives 12 General Chemistry* 10 Social Science Electives 8 Organic Chemistryt 10 General Electives 12 Analytical Chemistry* 4 Computer Science or Physiologyt 8 Statistics Elective 4 Cell Biology 4 204 /College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Medical Laboratory Clinical Chemistry II, III, IV 6 Science Orientation 1 & Clinical Microbiology II, II* 2 III, IV 6 Basic M.L.S. Urinalysis 3 Applied Study Basic M.L.S. (at hospital) 21 Hematology It 3 Laboratory Management 2 Basic M.L.S. Health Science Education 2 Hematology lit 3 Parasitology 3 Basic M.L.S. Mycology 3 Immunology, Senior Seminar 2 Immunohematology, Special Topics 2 and Serologyt 6 Professional Dynamics Basic M.L.S. Chemistry in the Health-Care and Instrumentationt 5 Delivery System* 4 Basic M.L.S. Clinical Microbiologyt 6 Hematology III 3 Immunohematology 11 2 Hematology IV 2 Basic Course Requirements for the Associate Degree 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. English and English Analytical Chemistry* 4 Literature* 8 Physiologyt 8 Biology — General and Humanities Elective 4 Animal* 8 Computer Science or Math or Calculus* 8 Statistics 4 General Chemistry* 10 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Medical Laboratory Basic M.L.S. Clinical Science Onentation Microbiologyt 6 i&ir 2 Basic M.L.S. M.L.S. Urinalysis 3 Immunohematology and Basic M.L.S. Hematology Serologyt 6 it 3 Basic M.L.S. Clinical Basic M.L.S. Hematology Chemistry and lit 3 Instrumentationt 5 Professional Dynamics in Applied Study (at the Health Care Delivery hospital) 12 System 4 * These courses are usually taken in the freshman year, t These courses are usually taken in the sophomore year. 205 Pharmacy Richard C. Deth, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Director Medicinal Chemistry Section Robert N. Hanson, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Section Leader Professors Roger W. Giese, Ph.D. John L. Neumeyer, Ph.D. Robert F. Raffauf, Ph.D. Pharmaceutics Section Mehdi Boroujerdi, Ph.D. Assistant Professor and Section Leader Assistant Professor Harry Suryakusuma, Ph.D. Pharmacology Section Norman R. Boisse, Ph.D., Associate Professor and Section Leader Professors O. James Inashima, Ph.D. Elliot Spector, Ph.D. Assistant Professor Barbara L. Waszczak, Ph.D. Pharmacy Practice Section Larry N. Swanson, Pharm.D., Associate Professor and Section Leader Professors Arnold S. Goldstein, L.L.M. Gerald E. Schumacher, Pharm.D., Ph.D. Associate Professor Samuel J. Matthews, Pharm. D. Assistant Professors Barbara Ameer, Pharm.D. Barry A. Bleidt, Ph.D. Robert J. Cersosimo, Pharm.D. Michael Montagne, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims The need for well-qualified pharmacists is likely to continue in direct response to the greater emphasis on health care and, in particular, to the newer and more diversified utilization of those now in practice in this country. The majority of pharmacists are associated with community practice, and some of these are self-employed. Hospital pharmacy and institutional practice have attracted a large number of practitioners and represent the fastest-growing areas of the profession. The increased use of the pharmacist as a drug consultant to the medical and nursing staffs of these institutions has broadened the scope of professional opportu- nity and given practitioners even greater involvement as part of the health team. Pharmacy also offers careers in research, manufacturing, govern- ment, law enforcement, and education. A considerable number of our graduates have entered leading graduate and professional schools. An- other significant trend is found in the increasing number of women en- tering the profession. Approximately 60 percent of the entering class is now composed of women. A View of the Five- Year Major The College offers a five-year curricu- lum that leads to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Pharmacy. The curriculum offers instruction in each of three natural divisions; (1) arts and sciences courses in general education (the humanities and social 206 / College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions sciences); (2) mathennatics and the basic physical and biological sci- ences; and (3) courses in the areas of professional instruction — medici- nal chemistry, pharmacology, pharmaceutics, pharmacy administration, pharmacy practice, and clinical pharmacy. The curriculum offers a well-balanced blend of academic classroom and cooperative education work experiences. Students completing the five-year baccalaureate pharmacy degree at Northeastern complete up to 3,000 hours of combined co-op and clinical clerkship experiences. We believe these experiences enable our students to easily make the transition into pharmacy practice upon graduation. The classroom ex- perience is well-structured and allows for the integration of the students' cooperative learning experiences. As is the case with other pharmacy programs across the country, the curriculum is five years in length, but with a much greater practical experience base. The pharmacy program maintains close affiliations with many of the leading hospitals in the surrounding Boston area. In addition, through the Graduate School of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions, programs leading to the Master of Science and Mas- ter of Health Professions degrees are offered as well as the Doctor of Philosophy degree in Biomedical Science. The Doctor of Pharmacy (Pharm.D.) degree is also available for a limited number of qualified baccalaureate graduates. Graduation Requirements Degree Candidates for the Bachelor of Science in Pharmacy degree must complete all prescribed work of the curriculum and meet the re- quirements of the Department of Cooperative Education before they become eligible for their degrees. No student transferring from another college or university is eligible to receive a degree until the last three years of academic work immediately preceding graduation have been completed at Northeastern. Excep- tions to this requirement may be made for students transferhng from another college of pharmacy. Graduation with Honors Candidates who have attained superior grades in their academic work will be graduated cum laude. Upon special vote of the faculty, a limited number of this group may be graduated magna cum laude or summa cum laude. Students must have been in attendance at the University for at least six quarters before they become eligible for honors at gradua- tion. Accreditation The undergraduate pharmacy program offered by the College of Phar- macy and Allied Health Professions subscribes to the standards estab- lished by the American Council on Pharmaceutical Education and the American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy, of which it is a member. Licensure — Pliarmacy Pharmacists must meet certain requirements to obtain a license from the state in which they wish to practice. These requirements ordinarily in- clude graduating from an accredited college of pharmacy, passing an examination given by a State Board of Pharmacy, and completing an "internship," or apprenticeship. Pharmacy/ 207 The internship is a period of supervised practical experience in a preceptor pharnnacy. This is generally satisfied during the cooperative work periods connmencing at the end of the student's second academic year. The salary earned during these periods of full-time employment may be used to help defray educational expenses. Students may apply up to 400 hours of the required academic clinical clerkship experience to their internship requirements. In addition, a college-directed extern- ship adds to the total practice-oriented portion of the curriculum. Sample Freshman-Year Program of Studies in Pharmacy First Quarter Third Quarter Basic Calculus* Biology General Chemistry English Arts and Sciences Electives General Chemistry Arts-and Sciences Elective Second Quarter Calculus Professional Dynamics in the Health-Care Delivery System Biology English ^Students who are not adequately prepared may need to take other math courses. In addition to the above courses, students may choose to take Basic ROTC. 208 / College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Basic Calculus* Calculus* General Chemistry* English* Biology* Physicst Q.H. 4 4 10 8 8 8 Course Organic Chemistryf Anatomy-Physiology Biochemistry Arts and Sciences Electives (7) Q.H. 10 10 5 28 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H Basic Pharmacyt 3 Professional Electives (2) £ Pharmaceutics 1 & II, Professional Practice including Laboratories 12 Lab 1 Medicinal Chemistry/ Clinical Pharmaco- Pharmacology 1,11.111 16 therapeutics ^ Pharmaceutical Analysis Pharmacokinetic and Quality Control 4 Principles in Drug Drug Information & Therapy A Evaluation 3 Pharmacy Management A Pathology 4 Anti-lnfectives t Toxicology 4 Parapharmaceuticals 2 Biopharmaceutics/ Non-Prescription Pharmacokinetics 4 Medication A Pharmacology Lab 2 Interpersonal Skills for Jurisprudence 4 Health Professionals A Pharmacy Administration 4 Pharmacy Externship A Clinical Pharmacy Social Pharmacology A Clerkship 15 Computer Applications in Professional Dynamics Pharmacy Z in the Health-Care Delivery System* 4 *These courses are usually taken in the freshman year. tThese courses are usually taken in the sophomore year. 209 Respiratory Therapy Thomas A. Barnes, Ed.D., Associate Professor and Director Associate Professors Instructor Patrick F. Plunkett, Ed.D. Margaret A. Stewart, B.S. Mary E. Watson, Ed.D. Professional Preparation Aims Respiratory therapy is an allied-health specialty, instrumental in the diagnosis, treatment, management, and preventive care of patients with cardiopulmonary problems. These patients may be found in new- born nurseries, surgical and medical wards, emergency rooms, out- patient departments, and intensive care units of hospitals. They may be suffering from a variety of acute and chronic conditions that are either life threatening or disabling. Patients suffering a multiplicity of disorders may require supportive mechanical ventilation. With the assistance of sophisticated ventilatory and monitoring equipment designed specifically for artificial ventilation, respiratory therapists become an essential part of the critical-care team. Through proper respiratory care and management, many patients who would not have survived are now being returned to an active life. In essence, the respiratory therapist is a life-support specialist. In the hospital, "Code Blue, Code 99, Dr. Heart, Dr. Pacemaker" are all calls that may signify a life-and-death situation of cardiac and/or pulmonary arrest. The calls alert respiratory therapists to respond as members of an emergency cardiopulmonary arrest team, working along- side physicians and nurses. Respiratory therapists become responsible for life support of the patient through airway management, artificial ven- tilation, external cardiac massage, and many other sophisticated emer- gency support measures. While intensive respiratory care is essential, routine patient care is equally important. Working under physician's orders, respiratory thera- pists carry out specific therapeutic measures to assist respiratory-dis- tressed patients. Respiratory therapists must be experts in providing and recommending specialized and selective therapeutic respiratory care. They must be competent in such areas as medical gas administra- tion, including oxygen; humidification, aerosols, and intermittent positive pressure breathing (IPPB); chest physiotherapy, cardiopulmonary re- suscitation, mechanical ventilation, airway management, and pulmonary function studies; blood gas analysis; and physiologic monitoring. Be- cause respiratory therapy procedures may alter the patient's physiologic status, astute patient care and observation by educated respiratory ther- apists are essential. Respiratory therapists are involved in the treatment of cardiac and pulmonary ailments such as cardiac failure, asthma, pulmonary edema, emphysema, cerebral thrombosis, drowning, hemorrhage, and shock. Medications are delivered as aerosols through mechanical devices. These medications are then administered through the airways so that they may act on local areas within the lungs, as well as be diffused into the body's circulatory system. Respiratory therapists make use of a variety of testing techniques to assist in medical research and diagnosis of disorders. One example is the use of radioactive gases or aerosols which are safely administered to the patient through the respiratory system. Various portions of the lung 210 / College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions may be screened and evaluated for obstructions, restrictions, and other abnormalities. The most common diagnostic examinations are the mea- surement of lung volumes and capacities, and flow patterns and pres- sures. Today, the field of respiratory technology is expanding rapidly to keep pace with the demand for new techniques to cope with environmentally related problems such as smoking and air pollution. New techniques also have been developed for use in the treatment of respiratory failure following open heart and other types of major surgery. A View of the Major Students enter the College as majors in the Res- piratory Therapy program. Mathematics, chemistry, and the physical, biological, medical, and health sciences offer the bases for professional instruction in Respiratory Therapy. English, psychology, and elective courses in the humanities and social sciences offer a liberal arts back- ground. Clinical study at the affiliated hospitals provides the opportunity for direct patient care and the immediate application of highly special- ized techniques. Degree The curriculum leads to the Bachelor of Science degree in Respiratory Therapy and includes academic quarters at the University, a structured clinical program, and assigned co-op quarters. Successful completion of the first three years of the program makes students eligible for the first part of the examinations administered by the National Board for Respiratory Care. Two accelerated programs in Respiratory Therapy and Cardiovascu- lar Perfusion Technology are available for professionals with a baccalau- reate or master's degree who are interested in a new career. Students who meet the admissions requirements will have the science back- ground needed to master professional courses in the curriculum. The curriculum allows students to integrate didactic, laboratory, and clinical practice courses over a twelve- to fifteen-month period of time. Gradu- ates of the Certificate Programs are eligible to take the National Board Examination for Registered Respiratory Therapists or Certified Cardio- vascular Perfusionists. Accreditation Both the degree and accelerated programs are accredited by the Com- mittee on Allied Health Education and Accreditation sponsored by the American Medical Association. Sample Freshman- Year Program of Studies in Respiratory Therapy First Quarter Third Quarter Freshman Writing Microbiology General Chemistry General Chemistry Basic Animal Biology Respiratory Therapy Seminar III Respiratory Therapy Seminar I Elective Mathematics Introduction to Literature Second Quarter Mathematics Respiratory Therapy Seminar II Basic Animal Biology Physics Professional Dynamics in the Health-Care j Delivery System Respiratory Therapy / 21 1 Basic Course Requirements 1. General Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Biology 8 Pharmacology 4 Anatomy and Physiology 10 English Composition and Microbiology 4 Literature 8 General Chemistry 10 Arts and Sciences Organic Chemistry* 10 electives 16 Physics 4 Arts and Sciences Mathematics 8 electives* 12 II. Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Respiratory Therapy Respiratory Care for the Seminars 3 Critical Patient 4 Clinical Seminars 2 Introduction to Pediatric Advanced Clinical Respiratory Care 2 Seminars, 1, II, 111, IV* 4 Cardiopulmonary Lab Professional Practice Technology 3 Labs 1, II, III, IV 4 Cardiopulmonary Lab Cardiopulmonary Practice 1 Physiology 4 Clinical Practice 1 6 Advanced Clinical Clinical Practice II 6 Physiology* 4 Advanced Life Support Pathology 4 Systems 1* 4 Introduction to Advanced Medical Patient Care 4 Monitoring* 4 Introduction to Respiratory Care for the Respiratory Care 4 Neonatal Patient* 4 Respiratory Care for the Practicum in Critical Med-Surgical Patient 4 Care 1 & II* 8 Moral Problems in Directed Study 1 & II* 4 Medicine 4 Professional Dynamics in the Health-Care Delivery System 4 Professional Elective* 4 Additional requirements for i ftie Baclielor of Science degree in Respiratory Tlierapy. 212 Toxicology David R. Brown, Sc.D., Associate Professor and Director Associate Professor Robert A. Schatz, Ph.D. Professional Preparation Aims Toxicology can be defined as the branch of science dealing with poisons, but toxicology is not restricted to this narrow definition. Toxicol- ogists do much more than simply work with poisons. In its broadest sense, toxicology involves all aspects of adverse effects of chemicals on biologic systems. This includes their mechanisms of harmful effects and the conditions under which these harmful effects occur as well as socioeconomic considerations and legal ramifications. The activities and contributions of toxicologists are many and varied. The profession's subdivisions of materials, radiation, and veterinary tox- icology illustrate the diversity of investigations in which toxicologists may participate. The toxicologist working in the biomedical area is concerned with intoxications by drugs and other chemicals as well as the demon- stration of drug safety or danger prior to release on the market. Clinical toxicologists may be involved with: 1 . antidotal treatment of poisoning 2. drug abuse, addiction, and detoxification 3. drug monitoring and drug interactions 4. teratogenesis (drug-induced birth defects) and other toxicity- screening procedures Industrial or environmental toxicologists are concerned with the rec- ognition, identification, and quantitation of relative hazard from occupa- tional or public exposure to toxicants. This concern is closely related to private and government responsibilities to ensure the safety of workers and the general public in contact with industrial and commercial prod- ucts. Industrial or environmental toxicologists may be involved with; 1. chemical carcinogens 2. pesticides or other "economic poisons" 3. air, soil, and water pollution 4. food additives Forensic toxicology is a hybrid of analytical chemistry and fundamen- tal toxicological principles, and is concerned with the medicolegal as- pects of the harmful effects of chemicals. Forensic toxicologists may be concerned with: 1 . the cause of death in postmortem investigations 2. isolation and detection of toxicants in biologic material 3. drug-abuse monitoring programs 4. medicolegal aspects of poisoning The faculty of Northeastern University's College of Pharmacy and Al- lied Health Professions feels that increased concern over the safety of drugs, chemicals, and cosmetics in the human population and in the, environment, as well as new legislation regarding toxic substances, ere-' ates a high demand for toxicologists at the Bachelor of Science level. Toxicology / 213 One of the College's principal goals is to help train qualified profession- als who will stnve to meet the health-care needs of society. The concept of an undergraduate degree in toxicology is brought about by the de- mands of an increasingly complex chemical environment. Currently, few institutions offer B.S. degrees in toxicology, although more schools are planning such programs. Yet there is an estimated need for 5,000- 10,000 people with bachelor's degrees to act as technical support staff for Ph.D. -level toxicologists. Northeastern University has created an innovative program in which its diverse academic resources offer training to this new breed of toxi- cologist. The core curhculum is enhanced by contributions from the University's Institute of Chemical Analysis, Applications, and Forensic Sciences, the Northeastern University Marine Science Institute in Na- hant, and the Environmental Engineering faculty. Recent manpower studies sponsored by private and federal agencies predict a great demand for toxicologists. Although a need for toxicolo- gists existed prior to 1970, the introduction of numerous federal and local laws aimed at protecting the environment, safeguarding employ- ees in their workplace, and protecting consumers against hazardous household products has created a critical shortage of toxicologists. Em- ployment opportunities are being created in industry (chemical, cos- metic, and pharmaceutical firms) and government (for example, Environmental Protection Agency, Food and Drug Administration, Na- tional Institute of Occupational Safety and Health) as well as in police departments and various clinical settings. Students may also consider entering graduate programs in toxicology. A View of the Five- Year Major The Toxicology program leads to the Bachelor of Science degree in five years under the cooperative plan. The curriculum is a combination of liberal arts, science, and professional courses that offer students the opportunity to prepare themselves to practice toxicology in a variety of settings. Required and elective profes- sional courses may be selected from Medical Laboratory Science, Chemistry, Biology, Sociology, Criminal Justice, Computer Program- ming, Mathematics, and Earth Sciences. Toxicology students begin their cooperative experience in the sopho- more year. Degree The degree granted will be the Bachelor of Science in Toxicol- ogy. Sample Freshman-Year Program of Studies in Toxicology First Quarter Elective Mathematics Professional Dynamics in the Elective Health-Care Delivery System &'°sh Third Quarter ^ Calculus Second Quarter English Calculus Arts and Sciences Elective General Chemistry General Chemistry Biology In addition to the above courses, students may choose to take Basic ROTC. 214 / College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Basic Course Requirements 1, General Requirements Course Q.H, Course Q.H. Math* 4 Anatomy-Physiologyt 10 Calculus* 8 General Biochemistry 5 General Chemistry* 10 Microbiology 4 English* 8 Biostatistics and Biology* 8 Computerst 4 Physicst 8 Identification of Organic Organic Chemistryf 10 Compounds 3 Environmental Problemsi 4 Instrumental Analysis 5 Electives 44 II, Professional Requirements Course Q.H. Course Q.H. Drug Analysis 5 Drug Interactions 4 Medicinal Chemistry/ Public Health 4 Pharmacology 1, II, III 16 Epidemiology 4 Pathology 4 Medical Laboratory Toxicology 1, II, III, IV 16 Science 5 Pharmacology Professional Dynamics in Laboratory 1 & II 2 the Health-Care Toxicology Laboratory 3 Delivery System* 4 "These courses are usually taken in the freshman year. -fThese courses are usually taken in the sophomore year. 215 Basic College Compensatory Programs The Basic College Compensatory Education Program continues gener- ally to encompass five courses, each bearing four quarter hours of credit, which are to be offered in the sequences indicated below. Certain freshmen may be assigned to any one of these course sequences as applicable on the basis of evaluations conducted before and during Orientation Week, Fall* Winter* C MTH 1 000 Mathematical C MTH 101 0 Mathematical Preliminaries I Preliminanes II C ENG 1 01 3 Fundamentals of E ENG 1 01 4 Fundamentals of English I " English II E ED 1003 Reading/Study Skills Specifically, C MTH 1000 and C MTH 1010 are to precede both the C MTH 1106, C MTH 1107, and C MTH 1108 (nonbusiness math) se- quence and the C MTH 1113, and C MTH 1114 (business math) se- quence; C ENG 1013 and C ENG 1014 collectively replace C ENG 1110 (standard Freshman English I) and are to precede C ENG 1111 (standard Freshman English II), the C ENG 1111- C ENG 1113 sequence for Engineers, and, in the case of the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College), the C ENG 1110- C ENG 1 1 1 1-C ENG 1114 sequence. *The same sequence is offered Winter/Spring for freshmen wfio enter in January. 216 / Basic College Compensatory Programs Schedule for Continuation of Compensatory Programming in the Basic Colleges These courses are approved/disapproved for credit, except where noted, by the faculties of the individual colleges and are, therefore, subject to change. CENG1013* English I CENG1014 English II CMTH1000* Math Prelim. I CMTH 1010* Math Prelim. II E ED 1003 Read. Study Skills Arts and Sciences accepted accepted accepted accepted accepted Bouve Physical Therapy accepted accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted Bouve Physical Education accepted accepted accepted accepted accepted Bouve Rec. and Leis. Stud. accepted accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted Bouve Health Education accepted accepted accepted accepted accepted Bouve Teacher Prep. accepted accepted accepted accepted accepted Business Adnninistration accepted accepted accepted accepted not accepted Computer Sciencef accepted accepted not applicable not applicable not applicable Criminal Justice accepted accepted accepted" accepted" accepted Engineeringt not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable School of Engineering Technology accepted accepted not applicable not applicable not accepted Nursing accepted accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions accepted*" w/o credit accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted *Graded pass-fail and therefore not included in the student's quality-point aver- age. **Freshmen in the College of Criminal Justice are not required to take a nnathemat- ics course in the freshman year. However, if need for compensatory mathematics is substantiated by a diagnostic examination, students can elect to take C MTH 1000 or C MTH 1010 to prepare themselves for C MTH 1106 Fundamen- tals of Mathematics as upperclassmen. ** Although the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions does allow C ENG 1013 to appear on the permanent record, it will only allow C ENG 1014 for credit. Students completing the C ENG 1013-C ENG 1014 sequence will have to make up the four-credit elective that was displaced by C ENG 1013. iAIthough the Colleges of Engineering and Computer Science do not allow CMTH 1000 or CMTH 1010 to be taken for academic credit, they do offer a special course sequence in college calculus with algebra and trigonometry (C MTH 1120 and C MTH 1121) for engineering freshmen judged to have defi- ciencies in mathematics. The courses involve students in extra hours of work in algebra and trigonometry, but cover the same material as do the regular freshman calculus sequences in the Colleges of Engineering and Computer Science. 217 University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program Program Goals Students in the Alternative Freshman-Year Program are considered reg- ular students and are degree candidates with an undeclared major. The Alternative Freshman-Year Program is specifically designed to help students strengthen their basic academic skills in writing as well as mathematics. While helping them gain confidence in their ability to do college-level work, the program also offers them an opportunity to con- sider several different areas of study before committing themselves to a specific major. Through the combination of a carefully prescribed curric- ulum and the attention of professional counselors, each student is helped to establish a program suited to his or her individual needs. These same counselors are normally available on a continuing basis throughout the student's entire freshman year. Developed in collaboration with University College, a division of North- eastern University serving students who seek a flexible college program, the Alternative Freshman-Year Program has a proven record of success in assisting students to develop their full potential. Program Structure Students in the Alternative Freshman-Year Program begin with 10-15 quarter hours of credit in their first academic quarter. In their second and third quarters, students accelerate their schedules of course work to take, respectively, 1 4-1 6 and 1 6-1 7 quarter hours of credit. Students in the health sciences track complete the Alternative Freshman-Year Program with a fourth quarter of 12 quarter hours of credit. After completing the prescribed Alternative Freshman-Year Program, and achieving both a cumulative quality-point average of 1 .400 or better and specific program requirements as noted, students may generally continue their degree programs within University College, or transfer, with sophomore status, to the College of Business Administration, the College of Cnminal Justice, the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions, selected programs of the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions or the College of Arts and Sciences. In addi- tion to the cumulative quality-point average of 1.400 or better, the Col- lege of Business Administration requires a 1.800 average in five key courses, namely, MTH 4113, ENG 4009, ENG 4010, ECN 4601 , and MGT 4105. Additional program requirements for students desiring to be ad- mitted to sophomore status in the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions are listed in the Student Handbook for Basic Colleges. Faculty and Resources The University has carefully selected for the Alternative Freshman-Year Program faculty members who are aware of individual student goals as well as the needs of students working to adjust to a college program. Faculty and students meet in small classes, usually of not more than twenty-five students. 218 / University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program As members of the program, students are considered regular North- eastern University day students even though they have unique sched- ules and a distinctively tailored curriculum. Therefore, they generally have access to all counseling services, physical education facilities, dormitory arrangements, and extracurricular programs at the Univer- sity's main campus in Boston. Alternative Freshman-Year students are encouraged to make exten- sive use of the up-to-date programmed learning resources available for self-instruction through Northeastern's Learning Resources Center on the Boston campus. For additional assistance. Alternative Freshmen are also frequently referred to the Academic Assistance Center and/or the Math/Writing Center on the Boston campus. A third and very important resource, the Counseling and Testing Center, is also available to stu- dents on both the Boston and Burlington campuses for personal and academic counseling, as well as for vocational testing and counseling. University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program Sample One- Year Program: Business Track Quarter 1 Quarter 2 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. MTH 1000 Math, r 4 MTH 1010 Math. II* 4 ENG4013 Fund, of English 1 4 ENG 4014 Fund, of English II 4 CI 4001 Int. Language CI 4002 Int. Language Skills Dev. 1 2 SkillsDev.il 2 Directed Elective** 4 HST 4110 Hist. Civ. A or Directed Elective** 4 Total Quarter Hours 1 0-1 4 Total Quarter Hours 14 Quarter 3 No. Course Q.H. MTH 1113 HST 4111 MGT4110 ECN 4601 Math, for Bus. Hist, of Civ. B Survey of Bus. Economics I or Directed Elective Total Quarter Hours 16 'Mathematics courses will vary depending on placement tests. * Eligible students may take HST 4110 (Q1) followed by ECN 4601 (Q2). University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program /219 Sample One- Year Program: Criminal Justice, Education, or Arts and Sciences Track Quarter 1 Quarter 2 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. MTH 1000 Math, r 4 SOC4010 Sociology 1 4 ENG4013 Fund, of English 1 4 ENG 4014 Fund, of English II 4 CI 4001 Int. Language CI 4002 Int. Language Skills Dev. 1 2 Skills Dev. II 2 Directed Elective** 4 HST 4110 Hist. Civ. A or Directed Elective** 4 Total Quarter Hours 1 0-1 4 Total Quarter Hours 14 Quarter 3 No. Course Q.H. SOC4011 Sociology II 4 HST 4111 Hist, of Civ. B. 4 PQL 4106 Intro, to Politics 4 Elective 4 Total Quarter Hours 16 'Mathematics courses will vary depending on placement tests. 'Eligible students may take HST 4110 (Q1) followed by an elective (Q2). Sample One- Year Program: Health Sciences Track Quarter 1 Quarter 2 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. MTH 1010 ENG 4013 CHM1110 CI 4001 Math. II 4 Fund, of English 1 4 Pre-Chemistry 5 Int. Language Skills Dev. 1 2 MTH 1106 CHM1111 CI 4002 ENG 4014 Fund, of Math. Gen. Chem. 1 Int. Language Skills Dev. II Fund, of English II 4 5 2 4 Total Quarter Hours 15 Total Quarter Hours 15 220 / University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program Quarter 3 Quarter 4 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. BIO 1140 Basic Animal BIO 1141 Basic Animal Bio. I 4 Bio. II 4 CHM1112 GeneralChem.il 5 MTH1107 Functions and Directed Elective 4 Calculus 4 Directed Elective 4 Directed Elective 4 Total Quarter Hours 17 Total Quarter Hours 12 Tuition and Fees Application Procedures All students in the Alternative Freshman-Year Program pay the standard Basic Colleges freshman tuition rate (see page 250 for details). Alterna- tive Freshman-Year students following the curriculum tracks specified for arts and sciences, business, criminal justice, or education pay the standard tuition for each of their first three academic quarters of resi- dence. Students in these tracks who complete the forty programmed credits required are entitled to an eight-quarter-hour tuition adjustment at the regular freshman rate. Students taking the curriculum specified for the health sciences pay the standard tuition for each of their first three quarters of residence, even though the academic work required in this curriculum is distributed over four consecutive quarters. Alternative Freshman-Year students in the health sciences curriculum are not charged additional tuition for their fourth quarter in residence and do not receive a tuition adjustment. For further information on the Alternative Freshman-Year Program, or to request an application, please write or call: Department of Undergraduate Admissions Northeastern University 360 Huntington Avenue Boston, Massachusetts 021 15 Telephone; 617-437-2200 221 Other Schools and Colleges of the University University College Part-Time Evening Programs University College is committed to the education of mature adult stu- dents who wish to live effectively in today's complex society. Programs are specifically designed to satisfy their changing professional, cultural, and social needs and interests. Degree programs have been developed in 34 major fields of study in business administration, health professions and sciences, law enforce- ment, and liberal arts. Flexible curricula are offered on a part-time basis Monday through Saturday during day and evening hours convenient to adult students. Students may select single courses, pursue a certificate program, or enroll in degree programs leading to the Associate in Sci- ence or the Bachelor's degree. Classes are scheduled in locations ac- cessible to the urban and suburban communities. Students may attend classes at the Huntington Avenue Campus in Boston or the Suburban Campuses in Burlington and Dedham, Massachusetts, as well as at twelve other locations north, south, and west of Boston. Academic advisers are available by appointment day and evening in the University College Office of Academic and Student Affairs. They offer students assistance in planning a program suitable to their general ed- ucational and career objectives and answer questions related to degree requirements, course sequence, and proper scheduling of courses. Ap- pointments may be arranged by calling the University College Office, 617-437-2400, or by coming in person to 102 Churchill Hall. There is no charge for this service. Academic advisers are also available during registration at ail registration sites. No appointment is necessary. University College also offers a variety of career and other support services to its students, including a career-development course, job- search seminars, and counseling, testing, and placement services. For a copy of the current University College Bulletin, please write or call: University College, Northeastern University, 360 Huntington Ave- nue, Boston, Massachusetts 02115, telephone 617-437-2400. Full-Time Day Programs In addition to offering a variety of part-time undergraduate programs, University College also offers two full-time day programs in allied health— the Radiologic (X-ray) Technology Program and the Dental As- sistant Program. The admission procedures for these programs differ from those of other programs in University College. Therefore, individu- als interested in these programs are advised to call or write for further information to the program offices listed on pages 222 and 224. 222 Radiologic (X-ray) Technology Program Professional Preparation Aims The radiologic technologist is an important member of any health care team. Combining a technical background with extensive training and skills, the radiologic technologist is trained to use X-rays to produce a clear picture or radiograph of a patient's tissue, bone, or organ struc- ture for evaluation and interpretation by a physician. Northeastern Uni- versity's Radiologic (X-ray) Technology Program is designed to offer students the opportunity to prepare for entry-level employment oppor- tunities as radiologic technologists. A View of the Program The Radiologic (X-ray) Technology Program at Northeastern offers a combination of academic preparation and clini- cal experience. Enrolling a new class of students in September of each year, the program consists of lecture and laboratory sessions held at Northeastern and periods of clinical training at selected radiology de- partments in Massachusetts hospitals. The program requires twenty- nine months of continuous study. A two-week orientation period is held prior to the beginning of classes each September. Degree Upon satisfactory completion of the program, students are eligible for an Associate in Science degree and to sit for the National Registry Examination for certification as radiologic technologists. Certified graduates may, if they wish, seek career opportunities in the diagnostic and therapeutic environments of clinics and hospitals. How- ever, they may also explore opportunities for employment in production, quality control, and facilities inspection at industrial firms. Certified grad- uates may also decide to consider a program in radiation therapy, nuclear medicine, or ultrasound technology, or may choose to continue their education by applying for acceptance to a bachelor's degree pro- gram in health science or health management. Accreditation This program is accredited by the Committee on Allied Health Education and Accreditation of the American Medical Association and by the American Registry of Radiologic Technologists. Application For further information regarding the Radiologic (X-ray) Technology Pro- gram, or to request an application for admission, please contact: Radiologic (X-ray) Technology Program Northeastern University 244 Forsyth Building 360 Huntington Avenue Boston, Massachusetts 0211 5 Telephone: 617-437-2818 Dental Assistant Program Professional Preparation Aims New knowledge, techniques, equipment and materials in the health sciences require an ever-increasing number of trained techni- cians and assistants to support the professional health practitioner. This Dental Assistant Program / 223 is especially true in the field of dentistry, as many dentists find tfiey can increase their effectiveness by employing a certified dental assistant to work with them. Under the supervision of the dentist, dental assistants help provide direct patient care. Such work offers a number of rewards. The dental assistant has an opportunity to participate in a variety of interesting activities in a stimulating work environment and is often responsible for diverse tasks, including development of the interpersonal skills required in relating to patients and in caring for their special needs during office visits. Employment opportunities for dental assistants are highly varied. Be- cause dentistry is a multiservice profession, the dental assistant may decide to work in general dentistry or in a specialty such as oral surgery, a field requiring the assistant to work with a surgeon in a manner similar to that of a nurse in a hospital. Other individuals may prefer to work with an orthodontist, whose diagnostic treatment and laboratory procedures are directed toward the prevention and correction of irregularly aligned teeth and related facial structures. Further career opportunities may be available in the fields of pedodontics, i.e., dentistry for children; endo- dontics, which involves treating the inner structure of teeth; and perio- dontics, which is concerned with the tissues surrounding and supporting the teeth. General dentistry and dental specialties may be available in private and group practices, public health and hospital dentistry, dental school clinics. Veterans Administration and armed forces hospitals, and federal, state, and community clinics. Other opportunities for employ- ment include dental supply companies, insurance companies, and, for individuals with experience and further education, dental assistant edu- cation programs. A View of the Program Northeastern University offers the Dental As- sistant Program in collaboration with Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and other local clinical facilities. The program consists of thirty- seven weeks of full-time day instruction including lectures and laboratory sessions offered through University College, one of the ten colleges which together comprise Northeastern University. The clinical segment of the program is based at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and at other teaching clinical facilities in the Boston area. Credit The Dental Assistant Program includes the following noncredit professional courses: Dental Anatomy, Biology, Clinical Assisting, Ra- diology Theory and Practicum, Nutrition, Dental Specialties, Medical Emergency, Dental Laboratory, Microbiology, Histopathology, Pharma- cology, Prevention and Plaque Control, and Practice Management. Ad- ditional courses, which do carry college credit, are required in English and Clinical Behavior. An elective course in Word Processing also car- ries college credit. Students who successfully complete the Dental Assistant Program and pass the certification examination may petition to receive up to twenty-four elective credits to be applied toward the Bachelor of Science degree program in Health Science offered by University College. Stu- dents who successfully complete the program and pass the certification examination may also petition to receive up to thirty-three credits toward a Bachelor of Science in Education degree in the School and Community Health Education Program offered by the Boston-Bouve College of Hu- man Development Professions at Northeastern. 224 / Other Schools and Colleges Accreditation The Dental Assistant Program is accredited by the Commission on Den- tal Accreditation of the American Dental Association. The program is designed to offer students the opportunity to prepare for the certification examination conducted by the Dental Assisting National Board, Inc. Massachusetts now requires that dental assistants be certified in order to perform certain intra-oral procedures. Application For further information regarding the Dental Assistant Program, or to request an application for admission, please contact: Dental Assistant Program Northeastern University 244 Forsyth Building 360 Huntington Avenue Boston, Massachusetts 0211 5 Telephone: 617-437-2829 School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) In addition to full-time curricula described earlier in this bulletin, the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) offers in- terdisciplinary programs providing technological and professional de- velopment opportunities to meet special needs of the part-time student. These programs provide educational opportunities for students who must pursue full-time employment but who desire to initiate or continue their academic work. The part-time evening program includes pretechnology preparatory courses and degree programs leading to the Associate in Engineering (A.E.), the Associate in Science (A.S.), and the Bachelor of Engineering Technology (B.E.T.). The A.E. degree may be earned in Computer Tech- nology and Architectural, Environmental, Structural, Surveying and Highway, Electrical, and Mechanical Engineering Technology. The A.S. degree may be earned in Telecommunications and Energy Systems. Those students seeking further education may earn the B.E.T. degree in Computer Technology and Mechanical, Electrical, Mechanical-Struc- tural, and Civil Engineering Technology. Graduate and Professional Schools The following graduate and professional schools of the University offer day and evening degree programs. Arts and Sciences The Master of Arts degree may be earned in Economics, English, His- tory, Journalism, Political Science, Psychology, Sociology, and Social Anthropology. The Master of Science degree is available in Biology, Chemistry, Economic Policy and Planning, Mathematics, and Physics. The Master of Science in Health Science, the Master of Journalism in Graduate and Professional Schools /225 News Media Management, the Master of Public Adnninistration, and the Master of Technical and Professional Writing degrees are also offered. In addition students may earn the Certificate of Advanced Graduate Study in the Program of Advanced Literary Study. The Doctor of Philos- ophy degree is available in Biology, Chemistry, Economics, Mathemat- ics, Physics, Psychology, and Sociology. Several degree options are offered in the interdisciplinary areas of law, policy, and society and clin- ical chemistry. Two non-degree options are also available: Certificate in Economics of Manpower and Development Planning; and Certificate for Technical Writing Internship Training program. Most programs may be completed through either full- or part-time study. Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions The Master of Science degree may be -earned, with specialization in Counseling Psychology, Physical Education, Physical Therapy, Speech- Language Pathology and Audiology, or Recreation Management. Pro- grams may be completed through full- and part-time study. The Master of Education degree may be earned with specialization in Curriculum and Instruction, Educational Administration, Educational Re- search, Human Development, Industrial and Career Counseling, Reha- bilitation, Special Education, and School and College Student Personnel Counseling. The Certificate of Advanced Graduate Study is offered in Counseling, Educational Administration, Language Acquisition and Lan- guage Disorders, and Rehabilitation. The Doctor of Education degree may be earned in Leadership: Administration and Supervision with spe- cialization in the Practice of Counseling Psychology, Counselor Educa- tion, Educational Administration, or Rehabilitation. Business Administration A Master of Business Administration degree may be earned. The Grad- uate School of Business Administration offers a variety of programs to meet the needs and schedules of graduate business students. Two full- time program alternatives are offered: a twenty-one-month Cooperative Education M.B.A. Program, which includes a six-month, paid profes- sional work assignment; or a two-year traditional full-time program, which may include administrative or teaching assistantship opportuni- ties. Individuals who wish to continue their full-time job responsibilities while earning an M.B.A. degree may consider the evening part-time program of study, the eighteen-month Executive M.B.A. Program for upper-level managers, or the accelerated part-time High Technology M.B.A. for qualified technical specialists. The Master of Science degree in professional accounting is an inten- sive, full-time program specifically designed for liberal arts and other nonaccounting majors. In addition, there is a nondegree program for advanced study in busi- ness administration leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study in Busi- ness Administration. Also within the College of Business Administration, the Center for Man- agement Development offers several intensive, graduate-level programs designed to provide professional growth and to improve the overall per- formance of expenenced managers. Based on a modification of the 226 / Other Schools and Colleges Northeastern University cooperative education format, these programs permit company-sponsored participants to maintain their job responsi- bilities during periods of classroom instruction. The Center's program offerings include: the Management Develop- ment Program, The Management Workshops, and the Smaller-Business Management Development Program. (See the Center for Management Development for program details, p. 227.) Computer Science The College of Computer Science offers both full- and part-time pro- grams leading to a master of science degree in computer science. Students may specialize in theory systems, software, data bases, artifi- cial intelligence, communications and networks, or interactive systems design. Criminal Justice The College of Criminal Justice offers both full- and part-time programs leading to a Master of Science degree in Criminal Justice. Students enrolled in the Master of Science program in Criminal Justice may choose from among several areas of specialization: administration and planning; criminology and research; security administration; and a multi- disciplinary concentration developed with a faculty member to suit the individual's needs. Engineering The Master of Science degree may be earned, with specification in the field of Chemical Engineering, Civil Engineering, Electrical Engineering, Industrial Engineering, Engineering Management, Information Systems, or Mechanical Engineering. A six-year program in Power Systems Engi- neering leading to both bachelor's and master's degrees in Electrical Engineering is offered and a special five-year honors program in Me- chanical, Industrial, or Electrical Engineering leading to both bachelor's and master's degrees; the Professional Engineer degree in Mechanical, Industrial, or Electrical Engineering; the Doctor of Engineering degree in Chemical Engineering; and the Ph.D. degree in Chemical, Civil, Electri- cal, Industrial, or Mechanical Engineering. A special interdisciplinary program leading to the Master of Science in Transportation is also of- fered. Law The School of Law offers a full-time program of professional instruction, leading to the degree of Juris Doctor ( J.D.). It is fully accredited by the American Bar Association and is a member of the Association of Ameri- can Law Schools. There are no courses for part-time or evening stu- dents. Unique among American law schools, Northeastern's School of Law features cooperative legal education. Under this plan, each student works full-time at law for participating employers for four calendar quar- ters during his or her second and third years, alternating with equal periods of full-time course work. This blending of academic study and practical legal work experience, after a traditional first year of intensive academic study, is designed to offer the best possible preparation for the actual practice of law. Cooperating employers include large and small private firms, government agencies, legal assistance and public defender organizations, judges, unions, corporate law departments and virtually every type of legal practitioner. Employers are located nation- wide. Graduate and Professional Schools / 227 Because the school operates twelve months a year, students com- plete the program on the same schedule as more traditional schools. Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions The Master of Science degree is offered on a part-time and full-time basis in Biomedical Science, Clinical Chemistry, Hospital Pharmacy, Medical Laboratory Science, Medicinal Chemistry, Pharmacology, and Radiopharmaceutical Science. The Master of Health Professions is also offered with the following options: General, Health Policy, Physician As- sistant, and Regulatory Toxicology. The Ph.D. degree is offered in Biomedical Science with specialization in Medical Laboratory Science, Medicinal Chemistry, Pharmaceutical Science, Pharmacology, and Tox- icology. An interdisciplinary doctoral degree is available in Forensic Tox- icology. The clinically onented Doctor of Pharmacy (Pharm.D.) degree is offered as a full-time program to graduates of accredited colleges of pharmacy. Professional Accounting The Master of Science degree in Professional Accounting is a full-time, highly concentrated 15-month program, designed for arts and sciences and other nonaccounting majors who are interested in careers in profes- sional accounting. The five-quarter course includes a three-month in- ternship with a leading CPA firm in the middle or winter quarter, thus providing both practical experience and financial support. New classes start in mid-June of every year. Some of these programs are offered on the cooperative plan; others provide teaching and research fellowships for able candidates. The Center for Management Development Sponsored by the College of Business Administration, the Center for Management Development offers programs designed to provide oppor- tunities for professional growth for middle and senior managers. The programs scheduled throughout the academic year, include the Man- agement Development Program, the Management Workshops, and the Smaller-Business Management Development Program. Participants are sponsored by their employers. The Management Development Program is a graduate-level course in business for managers who have had responsibility for a major task, function, department, division, or independent enterprise. Six weeks of in-residence instruction are extended over a period of several months (October to February, January to May, or March to June). All sessions are scheduled at Phillips Academy in Andover, Massachusetts. The Management Workshops offer middle-level managers compre- hensive study in major areas of business through three different pro- grams of graduate-level content. Scheduled at Northeastern's executive education facility in Dedham, Massachusetts, The Management Work- shop I, The Management Workshop II, and The Management Workshop- High Tech are each held one day per week (Fridays or Mondays) for either ten or twelve consecutive weeks during the September-to-June period. The Smaller-Business Management Development Program focuses on particular areas of interest to senior executives of the smaller firm. Held at Phillips Academy in Andover, MA, the Program is scheduled once each year for two in-residence sessions, one month apart. 228 / Other Schools and Colleges The Center also designs and conducts special programs for a wide range of business organizations, either for in-house implementation or at a Northeastern executive education facility. The Center for Manage- ment Development can be reached at 61 7-437-3272. The Center for Continuing Education Northeastern University's Center for Continuing Education, located in Dedham, Massachusetts, serves the educational needs of the commu- nity through workshops, conferences, special programs, and public of- ferings. Programs include Building Technology, Supervisory Management, Emergency Medical Technician, Paramedic, Nursing, Insurance, Graphic Arts, Paralegal, Auto Damage Appraisal, and Urban Mass Transportation Management Seminars. The Center awards nationally recognized Continuing Education Units (CEUs) to students who satisfactorily complete the programs. For further information, call 617-329-8000. Insurance and Financial Service Institute The Insurance and Financial Service Institute was established to foster excellence in the insurance, employee benefit, and financial service industries in the Boston area. It offers a number of noncredit courses in preparation for the Chartered Life Underwriter and Chartered Property- Casualty Underwriter designations, as well as for the General Insurance, Insurance Adjuster, and Risk Management Certificates. Telephone: 617- 329-8000. State- of- the- Art Engineering (SOA) The State-of-the-Art Engineering Program provides continuing education and professional development programs to practicing engineers, sci- entists, managers, and others employed in the high technology industry. Established in 1963, the program is now one of the nation's most com- prehensive centers for technology transfer. With regional facilities lo- cated both along Route 128 serving the New England area and in California's Silicon Valley, the program offers over 150 courses and sem- inars in computer engineering, telecommunications, microelectronics, and technical management. In addition, many State-of-the-Art courses are broadcast live over Network Northeastern or conducted on-site at industrial locations. Network Northeastern (NNU) Network Northeastern (NNU) represents the University's entry into the age of education by telecommunications. The Network utilizes the micro- wave-based Instructional Television Fixed Service (ITFS) system, whereby services are delivered directly to company sites within a forty- mile radius of the Boston campus. Live classroom instruction is telecast in color to remote sites, where it is viewed in reception rooms equipped with TV monitors and a talkback system. A courier service is also pro- vided. Network Northeastern offers courses in graduate engineering, undergraduate engineering technology, and selected arts and sciences topics. 229 Academic Research Research, whether performed in the laboratory, library, or in the field, is vital to a college education. It stimulates all participants and ensures a thnving academic atmosphere. Through research, faculty members as well as students stay abreast of the most recent developments in their particular fields. Faculty who disseminate this knowledge, through pub- lishing, speaking, and teaching, help assure a university education of the first order. At Northeastern, research and scholarly endeavors are taken very seriously and are actively encouraged. Each year, the faculty receive funding for an ever-increasing number of research projects. Sponsor- ship comes from a variety of sources. Federal agencies, private industry and foundations, and the University itself all contribute to Northeastern's growing research emphasis. While much of this research is carried out by the faculty members, their graduate students, and post-doctoral research associates, ample opportunities also exist for undergraduate students. Research partici- pation can be included as part of regular academic programs, as spe- cially designed independent studies, or through cooperative work assignments. Research activities are encouraged, and are limited only by the student's own motivation and curiosity. Northeastern University has numerous distinguished faculty members, many of whom have received prestigious awards, including Sloan Schol- arships, Guggenheim Fellowships, and National Institutes of Health Re- search Career Awards. Faculty members lecture the world over — from just across the Charles River in Cambridge, Massachusetts, to across the Pacific Ocean in Sydney, Australia. Additionally, many faculty serve as United States government consul- tants and participate on a variety of national and international commit- tees. But, because Northeastern considers education its primary mission, students will always find an enthusiastic and accessible faculty to answer questions, solve problems, and stimulate enquiring minds. Current research spans almost every academic and professional field and is not limited to laboratory investigations or the "hard" sciences. Every department of every college at Northeastern carries out some basic or applied research projects. A brief summary of some of the topics presently under investigation by the faculty and students follows. Perhaps something here will spark hidden interests that students never realized they had. Students desinng to explore the opportunities for research participation should inquire at the appropriate departmental offices. Arts and Sciences In the College of Arts and Sciences research projects reflect the diversity of its eighteen departments. Research in the humanities and the natural and social sciences includes studies in 19th-century Boston architec- ture, the Off Off Broadway theatre, biochemistry, quantum field theory, and infrared spectroscopy. As part of the College's interdisciplinary in- terest in marine sciences, the Marine Science and Maritime Studies Center has been established. At its Nahant field station and laboratory, faculty and graduate students carry on research in marine chemistry, biology, and botany. 230 / Other Schools and Colleges Engineering Research in the College of Engineering enconnpasses some of today's most important technological subjects. Robotics, telecommunications, signal processing, and the theoretical aspects of computer engineering graphics are some of the major fields of interest within the College. But not all studies are high technology oriented. Indeed, some faculty pur- sue projects dealing with the electrical properties of human blood ves- sels, while others investigate the mechanical characteristics of cement. These seemingly diverse research areas do have one thing in common, however: they deal with the improvement of our quality of life. Computer Science Northeastern University's new College of Computer Science represents one of today's most active technological fields. The research interests of the computer science faculty span network control algorithms, numerical applications interactive graphics development, design of data base sys- tems, artificial intelligence, and the software aspects of VLSI design systems. Criminal Justice The College of Criminal Justice is one of the few institutions of its kind in the United States to study crime and law in an interdisciplinary fashion. Lawyers, social and forensic scientists, and system specialists collabo- rate with Criminal Justice faculty in research activities focusing on both crime detection and prevention. Some research directions currently pur- sued by faculty include industrial espionage, private security systems, and contemporary terrorism. Law The School of Law's research activities concentrate on the legal system from perspectives encompassing the past, present, and future. Topics include a historical and contemporary view of dispute resolution mech- anisms, and the ramifications of a landmark court case on the mental health profession. Law school curricula also come under investigative scrutiny. Boston-Bouve The nature of research in Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions is broad in range and diverse in approach. Changes in human development and the roles of the teacher and clinician in facili- tating such changes are topics of lively interest. Some of the current research interests of the College include the communication abilities of normal and hearing-impaired individuals, the role of exercise in cardio- vascular health and disease, the relationship between age change and the development of motor and cognitive skills in children, the evaluation of clinical practice in physical therapy and educational practices in the schools, and the examination of barriers to the employment of the dis- abled in leisure services. Nursing Research interests in the College of Nursing are being directed toward both its student population and the community at large. A longitudinal study is now under way to examine predictors of success in the nursing program. Other areas of interest include the learning experiences in cooperative education, issues affecting women, and development of leadership skills in nurses who are employed in middle management positions. Research / 231 Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Research objectives in the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions have important ramifications for the nation's health. Studies include new ways to analyze antidepressant and anticonvulsant drugs, improving methods to diagnose bladder cancer, and clinical applica- tions in respiratory therapy. The National Institutes of Health, the Office of Naval Research, and the Union Carbide Company are among the sponsors of the College's work. Business Administration Research in the College of Business Administration is partitioned be- tween the theoretical and practical aspects of management, human re- sources, and marketing. New approaches in corporate practice and academic theory are being realized through conclusions reached by a faculty examining such topics as high technology management, small business entrepreneurship, and foreign investment in developing coun- tries. Other studies concentrate on transportation problems in the United States, government regulation in industry, and technological forecasting in the high technology industry. Significant work is also being done by the marketing faculty in the area of survey research. Research Centers and Institutes The Cooperative Education Research Center was established to ad- dress the need for research in cooperative education and to respond to the information needs of the co-op community across the country. To fulfill these objectives, the Research Center conducts and reports a variety of research studies and maintains a large data base of current information about co-op programs and a clearinghouse of articles and reports on co-op. The Research Center has been a department of Northeastern Univer- sity's Division of Cooperative Education since 1972. Its creation was a direct outgrowth of the University establishing, in 1968, an endowed chair in cooperative education, and the strong national interest in coop- erative education that emerged during the late 1960s. It is currently staffed by two full-time researchers and a department assistant. Northeastern also has several interdisciplinary centers and institutes which do not grant degrees, but they perform a variety of interesting and relevant research. The Barnett Institute of Chemical Analysis and Mate- rials Science has as its goal basic research in the fields of analytical chemistry and material science and its application to problems of social relevance. The Institute has developed an international reputation in the fields of chromatography, mass spectrometry, amorphous metals, and solar-energy storage devices. The Center for Electron f\/licroscopy is a self-contained research unit that utilizes the latest scientific equipment for training and research in cellular and subcellular structures. The Cen- ter for Applied Social Research is a University-wide institute that deals with issues of public policy and social research. Projects are presently under way in the fields of criminal justice, public safety, mental health, social welfare, and education. Support services for research are provided by the University's Office of Sponsored Programs, the Academic Computer Services, and the Di- vision of Laboratory Animal Medicine. Undergraduate Admissions Undergraduate Admissions 234 Department of Undergraduate Admissions 139 Richards Hall Tel: 617-437-2200 Philip R. McCabe, M.Ed., Dean Mary A. Zammitti, M.Ed., Associate Dean and Director Assistant Directors Admissions Counselors Steven B. Bissell, B.S, Jennifer G. Kilson, B.A. Michael F. Clifford, B.S. Michael C. Perry, M.Ed. Robert D. Hunter, B.S. Eleanor W. Lannbert, M.B.A. Admissions Fellow Cornelius B. O'Leary, B.A W. Peter Schuiz, B.A. To find a college or university that will suit personal needs and inter- ests— a place where a student can learn to feel at home and make sound preparation for a future career — is a goal of all students who plan to continue their education beyond secondary school. The goal can be achieved in a number of ways: by talking with enrolled students, faculty, and alumni; by reading catalogs; and by visiting college campuses. In fact, a college campus visit should be high on a prospective student's list of priorities. Northeastern's Committee on Admissions extends a cor- dial welcome to all prospective freshman and transfer students and has planned a series of on-campus experiences to make a visit as worth- while as possible. The Admissions Conference Students have many questions about Northeastern — its programs of study, its services to students, and the Cooperative Plan of Education. For this reason, the Committee on Admissions sponsors a series of Orientation Conferences for students. Offered at 10:00 a.m. and 2:00 p.m. on Mondays and Fridays from October 1 through May 1 (except for legal holidays), these conferences have been most successful in helping students become better acquainted with the University. They include comments by an admissions counselor, an informal question-and-an- swer penod, and a multimedia presentation. Special sessions are also held in the summer between July 1 and September 1 . Further information about these summer conferences may be obtained from the Admissions Department. Guided Tours Student-guided tours of the campus are usually held daily, Monday through Friday, at 1 1 :00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. The admissions conference and the tour should both be scheduled in advance by writing or calling the Undergraduate Admissions Office (617-437-2211). The opportunity to visit the University's facilities and to observe student life on campus is one important way to learn about Northeastern. Commuting students who wish to visit the University's Suburban Campus in Burlington are encouraged to do so. This will appeal especially to those whose home communities are located north or northwest of Boston. Undergraduate Admissions / 235 The Interview Although it is not required, a personal interview is generally regarded as an appropriate opportunity for students with special questions to meet with an admissions counselor. In studying the secondary school record, the counselor may discover some factor that ments further explanation. In this event, the applicant may be asked to arrange a visit to the Admis- sions Office. The interview may be held at the request of the student or the counselor. Contacts with Admissions personnel will be more benefi- cial if the Northeastern University Bulletin has been carefully read before the personal interview. Special Note Northeastern does not hold Saturday classes for students in the Basic Colleges; for that reason, guided tours cannot be provided at that time. A weekday visit to the University is recommended. However, special Saturday appointments may be arranged on a limited basis. General Requirements for Entrance An applicant for admission to Northeastern University has, ideally, com- pleted a challenging secondary school program— a program that in- cludes courses in English, foreign language, mathematics, laboratory science, and history. Proficiency in a foreign language is especially important for students entering the College of Arts and Sciences. But the overall school record has importance in itself, both as an indication of achievement in subjects critical to university study and as a reflection of a wise choice of electives. The high school transcript should provide clear evidence of sound study habits so vital to success in higher edu- cation. Candidates are also encouraged to broaden their reading out- side of class. The student who can communicate ideas, understand the meaning of words, and write effectively is at a distinct advantage. Today's high school students have had the advantage of many inno- vations that have greatly enriched their experience — independent study, small group seminars, research projects, and off-campus experiences related to community service or future vocations. Northeastern is under- standably interested in the growth of the work/study concept in many secondary schools, and the Committee on Admissions looks favorably upon the variety of these worthwhile experiences. Preparation for Study in Engineering, Computer Science, Science and Mathematics, and Allied Health Professions It IS only natural that evidence of special aptitude and the highest pos- sible level of preparation in the sciences and mathematics should be required for entrance to certain programs of study offered by the Uni- versity. Such programs include: 236 / Undergraduate Admissions College of Arts and Sciences* College of Engineering Biology, Chemistry, Geology, All programs Mathematics, Physics, Applied Physics School of Engineering Technology (formerly Boston-Bouve College of Lincoln College) Human Development Bachelor of Engineering Professions* Technology program Physical Education Physical Therapy College of Nursing School and Community Bachelor of Science program Health Education College of Pharmacy and College of Computer Science Allied Health Professions Bachelor of Science program ^" Programs Applicants are encouraged to complete a full sequence of science and mathematics courses if possible. In science, this would usually include a full academic year of study and laboratory work in biology, chemistry, and physics; and, in mathematics, geometry, algebra 1 and 2, and a fourth year of trigonometry and/or analysis. Experience has shown that applicants to programs emphasizing mathematics and sci- ence also need courses in the social sciences and humanities to be fully prepared for advanced study. Preparation for Study in Business Administration Candidates for admission must have successfully completed a strong preparatory program in high school, including courses in geometry, algebra 1 , and algebra 2. While mathematics plays an important role in the total program, strong emphasis is also placed on liberal studies to effect an intellectual balance with liberal and appreciative courses. Preparation for Study in the Social Sciences, Teaching, and Criminal Justice Many candidates for admission have enjoyed their greatest success in areas other than mathematics-science. Their interests lie, quite naturally, in the study of the humanities and social sciences. Thus, such a student may choose to apply for admission to one of the following programs: College of Arts and Sciences* In addition to the science programs, the College offers programs in Arts and Humanities with majors in Art, Theatre and Dance, English, Journalism, Modern Languages, Music, Philosophy, and Speech Communication; and in Social Sciences with majors in African-American Studies, Economics, History, Human Ser- vices, Linguistics, Political Science (including a concentration in Public Administration), Psychology, and Sociology/Anthropology. Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions* A strong liberal arts background is recommended since graduates will be working in professions requiring an understanding of the behavioral and social implications of human interaction. *See page 17 for additional majors offered by these Colleges. Undergraduate Admissions / 237 College of Criminal Justice By its very nature, the program in Crimi- nal Justice requires a strong base of liberal arts study before profes- sional courses are introduced. Applicants for admission should therefore demonstrate the ability to succeed in their study of the behavioral, social, and human services. Entrance Examinations (Freshmen) Research clearly indicates that the best single predictor of college aca- demic success is achievement in secondary school. This factor, together with recommendations from the school counselor, weighs most heavily in the evaluation process. Although the Scholastic Aptitude Test and three Achievement Tests of the College Board are required, the Com- mittee on Admissions recognizes that these test results do not measure such qualities as determination, imagination., and leadership. English composition has to be one of the three required Achievement Tests. Students can choose the other two tests in subjects in which they feel most confident. Students whose native tongue is not English may substitute the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) for the English Composition Test. No single schedule of testing is recom- mended, but applicants are advised to take subject matter tests while they are currently studying those subjects. For full information about College Board Examinations, consult a school guidance counselor or write directly to: The College Board P.O. Box 592 Princeton, New Jersey 08540 or P.O. Box 1025 Berkeley. California 94701 The American College Testing Program may be substituted for the College Board Testing Program. For full information, write to: American College Testing Program P.O. Box 168 Iowa City, Iowa 52243 Admissions counselors also will be glad to answer questions about these testing programs. Advanced Placement The University grants advanced placement credit to those students with a score of 3 or better in their Advanced Placement Examinations. Stu- dents may take the examinations in the following subjects: American history, art (history of art, studio art), biology, chemistry, classics (Virgil, lyric), computer science, English (composition, literature), European his- tory, French (language, literature), German language, mathematics (cal- culus AB, calculus BC), music, physics (physics B, physics C- mechanics, physics C-electricity and magnetism), and Spanish (lan- guage, literature). Applicants are required to take the Advanced Placement Tests of the College Board in May. 238 / Undergraduate Admissions College-Level Examination Program The University cooperates with the College Board in its CLEP Program. CLEP provides a national program of five General Examinations and forty-two Subject Examinations to evaluate nontraditional college-level education. Qualified students are encouraged to take the general and/ or subject matter examinations of CLEP, so that college credit may be allowed upon entrance. In general, the Committee on Admissions ac- cepts the score range recommendations of the College Board. North- eastern University has been designated a CLEP Testing Center. Inquiries may be addressed to the Counseling and Testing Center, Room 302, Ell Student Center. Applying for Admission and Plans of Admission Entry Dates Northeastern University admits qualified freshman students to all pro- grams in September. The University also has a January entrance date for most of its programs. Entrance dates for transfer students vary by program; many admit students at the beginning of each of the four quarters. The application should be filled out properly, signed, and forwarded to the Dean of Admissions, Northeastern University, Boston, Massachu- setts 02115, together with a nonrefundable $25.00 application fee. Checks should be made payable to Northeastern University. This fee may be waived in cases of extreme hardship as endorsed by the can- didate's secondary school counselor or social worker. It is to the stu- dent's advantage to submit the application for admission promptly. Students are also responsible for making sure that their transcripts and College Board scores are submitted to the University. Program Selection Many students have difficulty in selecting a program of studies. For this reason, the University has introduced flexibility into its programs so that students may explore alternative fields or tailor their programs to per- sonal goals. Freshman candidates have to indicate a choice of college and, in some cases, a major. In Arts and Sciences, Business Administra- tion, Computer Science, Criminal Justice, Engineering, Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions, and the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College), students do not have to make a definite choice of major concentration or emphasis until the end of the freshman year and in some programs until the end of the sophomore year. There is also flexibility in choosing a major in the teacher preparation program offered by Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions. Rolling Admission Plan Under Northeastern's Rolling Admission Plan, decisions on admission are made as soon as all of the required credentials (including first mark- ing period senior grades and College Board test scores) have been submitted and reviewed. In all cases of acceptance, candidates are to successfully complete their senior year of high school. Students should note that enrollments are limited in some programs where the number of applications is expected to exceed campus re- sources. Undergraduate Admissions / 239 Deferred Admission Plan Accepted students who wish to participate in the Deferred Admission Plan will be asked to describe the activities they plan for the year pre- ceding enrollment. Students may choose this plan for a variety of rea- sons that may include travel, health problems, or work. Information on the plan is available from the Department of Undergraduate Admissions. Early Admission — Juniors, Second-Semester Seniors In certain cases, students may enroll at Northeastern prior to high school graduation. Such students may enroll either in September or January, thereby reducing the time to complete degree requirements by one year. A special form provided by the Admissions Committee requires the en- dorsement of the school principal or guidance counselor for early ad- mission. Write to the Department of Undergraduate Admissions for further details. Carl S. Ell Scholars Program The University's Carl S. Ell Scholar award provides recognition to stu- dents for their high academic achievement Each year twenty-five freshman students are selected for this aca- demic achievement award. The scholars are awarded full freshman-year tuition scholarships, and those who maintain a superior scholastic aver- age during their years at Northeastern are awarded one-half tuition grants for each subsequent year. In addition to receiving financial assis- tance, the scholars are invited to join the Ell Scholars Association in their freshman year. The association endeavors to build a community of scholars within the University by providing a forum for intellectual ex- change. Students are usually notified of their selection before Feb- ruary 1 . B.A. or B.S./Juris Doctor (J. D.) Degree Program The University will admit a limited number of highly qualified freshmen to the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science Degree/Juris Doctor ( J.D.) degree program. Freshman students accepted to this program have to complete their undergraduate program, graduate in the top 1 5% of their class, and score in the top 20% on the Law School Aptitude Test (LSAT) before they can begin the Law School studies. Students who are ac- cepted as freshmen to this program and meet the above criteria will be eligible to continue their studies in Northeastern University's School of Law. For more information about this program, please contact the Dean of Admissions. Community Financial-Aid Grant Programs To supplement student earnings from cooperative education experi- ences, and the University's regular student financial aid program, the University has established a number of special community grant pro- grams for disadvantaged students. In all cases, students have to be accepted for admission and complete the University's application pro- cedure for financial aid (see p. 255 for complete details) to qualify for one of the special community grant programs. For additional information, write to the Department of Undergraduate Admissions. 240 / Undergraduate Admissions Five- Year Bachelor's/Master's Degree Cooperative Education Program Qualified high school students committed to reaching a high level of success in engineering can now accelerate their progress by entering directly into the College of Engineering's Five-Year Bachelor's/Master's Degree Program. This full-time program allows honor students to earn both degrees in five years — and at the same time gain extensive on-the- job experience. The BS/MS program is offered by three departments: Electrical and Computer Engineering, Industrial Engineering and Information Systems, and Mechanical Engineering. The program incorporates cooperative education, enabling students to alternate periods of academic work with paid employment in their chosen career field. Students generally take five courses per quarter and must maintain a 3.2 quality point average to continue in the program. All students begin with a basic curriculum that includes calculus, physics and labs, com- puter programming, and chemistry. At the same time, study of the social sciences and humanities broadens their awareness and understanding of the spheres in which they will practice their professions. For additional information, students should contact the Department of Undergraduate Admissions. College of Arts and Sciences Students accepted for entrance to the College of Arts and Sciences should refer to page 21 for the description of the four tracks students are placed in by the College before beginning their freshman studies. Alternative Freshman- Year Program The Alternative Freshman-Year Program was developed in collaboration with University College, a division of Northeastern serving students who seek a flexible course schedule. This degree-track program may be ideal for those students who feel that their high school grades and/or test scores do not reflect their true abilities. This program is specifically structured to assist students in making the academic and social adjustments necessary for success in college. Working with a counselor, students follow a prescribed curriculum de- signed to meet their individual needs and to help them sharpen basic academic skills in writing, mathematics, and reading comprehension, while gaining confidence in their ability to do college-level work. In ad- dition, the program also permits students to sample different areas of study before committing themselves to a specific major. The full range of counseling services, physical education facilities, dormitory arrangements, and extracurricular programs is generally available to students enrolled in this program. For further information about the Alternative Freshman-Year Program, see page 21 7. Programs for Minority Students Northeastern University is committed to expanding educational oppor- tunities for minority students of high academic promise and to enrolling a student body reflective of the diverse ethnic and social composition of our society. To ensure that minority students have the greatest opportunity for success, the University's African-American Institute provides tutorial and counseling services as well as programmed instruction. Undergraduate Admissions / 241 Project Ujima Project Ujima is an intensive academic support program for students whose earlier education did not prepare them adequately for the college program of their choice. It provides Project Ujima participants with a variety of supportive ser- vices aimed at developing academic skills and a positive attitude to- wards learning throughout their tenure at the University. Special counseling, tutorials, and educational workshops comprise supportive activities of the Project. Project Ujima is an academic component of the African-American Institute. Open Campus Courses Under Northeastern University's Open Campus Plan, qualified high school students who can gam release from their schools are invited to take full-credit courses at Northeastern while they are still enrolled in secondary school. In this way, students are able to gain a better idea of the collegiate environment while they work toward college credit. For further information, write to the Department of Undergraduate Admis- sions. Cooperative Freshman-Year Program College of Engineering Summer Quarter Each June, the College of Engineering enrolls a limited number of qualified students in all pro- grams under a special summer Cooperative Freshman-Year Program. Students may enter Northeastern University in the June following com- pletion of the senior or junior secondary-school year and complete the first quarter of their college freshman year from June to September. Graduating high school seniors then continue their freshman aca- demic programs or undertake cooperative work assignments. The first cooperative work assignment normally occurs either in the winter quarter (January to March) or in the spring quarter (April to June). Under special circumstances, and at the discretion of the faculty coordinator, freshmen may be placed in September, following completion of their first aca- demic quarter. After this work assignment, the student will return to Northeastern and complete the freshman year. The exact schedule will be based upon the professional judgment of the Cooperative Education Department and the academic progress of the student. By extending the freshman year, enrollees have the opportunity to defray a portion of their first-year expenses. Following the summer term, juniors have the option of returning to their secondary schools with credits earned toward college degrees or stay- ing on at Northeastern, with the permission of their secondary schools, as members of the freshman class. Students who choose to remain at Northeastern then have the opportunity either in the fall or winter quarter, to participate in cooperative work assignments similar to those held by graduating seniors. For additional information, write to the Department of Undergraduate Admissions. Orientation and Registration The orientation and registration program officially launches your aca- demic career at Northeastern. The administration, faculty, and many upper-division students have planned several days of programs, faculty seminars, meetings, and spe- 242 / Undergraduate Admissions cial events designed to help you adapt to college life in general and Northeastern University in particular. In addition to participating in regular registration operations, receiving class schedules, and purchasing books, you will meet with the dean and faculty members of your college, who will provide information concern- ing your planned academic major, courses, and career goals. You will have the opportunity to attend "how to" study seminars, i.e., study successfully, be assertive, make friends, etc., as well as peer- counseling sessions, and many other informative events. The Depart- ment of Cooperative Education, for example, has planned meetings regarding job opportunities and school-work experiences. You will be introduced to members of more than 150 student organi- zations, some of which you might choose to join. Guided tours of Bos- ton's historical and cultural centers will also be available. Skill and Competency Development Responding to a growing national concern for the improvement of basic writing, numerical, and reading/study skills, the University extends to freshman in several of its participating Colleges the opportunity to en- hance the likelihood of academic success as freshmen through enroll- ment in compensatory (i.e., development) courses. Selection for such course work is based upon the correlation of com- petency data, derived from specifically prepared testing procedures administered on campus along with pre-freshman academic creden- tials. The freshman writing sequence, the mathematics sequence, and the reading/study skills course each bears full credit in participating colleges. (See page 216.) Instructors, freshman advisers, and the Freshman Affairs Staff of the Dean of Students' Office are ready to assist involved freshmen in achiev- ing success in their endeavors. Special Students A limited number of special students may be admitted to the Basic Colleges. Special students are not degree candidates and must meet criteria set by the college to which they are admitted. Those admitted as special students usually have completed some college-level work. The following are among the applicants who may be considered: — a college or university graduate who needs additional course work to prepare or qualify for a graduate program; — individuals, recommended by deans or program directors, who need particular formal course work to meet professional requirements for certification; — students who need several courses to complete degree requirements at another college or university, provided they have written approval from the appropriate college dean; others who are recommended by deans of the colleges to take courses leading to regular admission. In such cases, special-student enrollment should be limited to one academic quarter. All special students will be charged a nonrefundable application fee of $25. Before obtaining and paying for an application, the potential ' special student should consult a counselor in the office of the dean of Undergraduate Admissions / 243 the college offering the course(s) desired. Tuition will be at the quarter- hour rate in effect at the time and must be paid before registration is valid. Special students will be admitted to classes only when there is space available. All special students must obtain approval from the office of the dean of the Basic College in which they wish to enroll prior to each quarter's registration, but will be required to pay the application fee only once. International Students International students are required to complete and file the regular un- dergraduate application at least six months before registration. They must meet all admission requirements, including the standardized tests administered by the College Board. All academic credentials should be translated into English before being forwarded to the Department of Admissions. After notification of acceptance, students must pay the re- quired deposits and fully complete the University's Declaration and Cer- tification of Finances Form by the date specified on the acceptance certificate before a Certificate of Eligibility (1-20 Form or IAP-66 Form) can be forwarded. All international students participate in the University's five-year co- operative education program. Only students in the College of Arts and Sciences may petition to complete their degree program in four years. Northeastern University is authorized under Federal law to enroll non- immigrant alien students. Students may obtain a copy of the international student admissions booklet, IVIany Tongues, One Language, by writing to the Department of Undergraduate Admissions. English as a Second Language Proficiency Requirement Before being considered for admission, students whose native language is not English are required to demonstrate some English language pro- ficiency. This can be done by submitting the results of the College Board's Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), by successfully completing an approved English language course of study, or by being currently enrolled in such a course. Before being allowed to enroll in any university classes, all interna- tional students, along with any other student whose first language is not English, are required to take the English Proficiency Test administered by the University's English Language Center. This requirement applies to all nonnative speakers regardless of the length of time they have been in the United States or their previous study of English. The results of this test will be used to assign students to their English courses. Students with minimal English language skills will be assigned to the noncredit Intensive English Course. The level of course work re- quired in English will determine the student's academic schedule. Admission of Transfer Students Students wishing to transfer to Northeastern University may request ad- vanced standing credit as upperclassmen on the basis of acceptable credits earned in an accredited two- or four-year institution or a technical 244 / Undergraduate Admissions institute. In addition, Northeastern University participates in the Ad- vanced Placennent Program (APR) as administered by the College En- trance Examination Board. The University will grant college credit for such courses in which a score of 3 or better has been attained. Students may also receive advanced standing credit for satisfactory performance through both the General and Subject Examinations of the College Level Examination Program (CLEP). A score of 500 or better (general exami- nations) and a score of 50 or better (subject examinations) are required on any CLEP test to receive credit at Northeastern University. Basic Requirements 1 . Transfer students will be admitted to Northeastern University when they have achieved a satisfactory college record at another insti- tution; that is, a satisfactory record appropriate to the course of study they wish to pursue. 2. Credit will generally be granted toward a Northeastern degree for any reasonably equivalent course completed with a passing grade at another accredited institution. 3. Candidates must be in good standing and must be eligible to continue in the institution they are currently attending. Undergraduate Admissions / 245 Application Procedure 1 . Connpiete an application for admission form and forward it with a non-refundable fee of $25.00 to the Department of Undergraduate Admissions. All transfer students are required to indicate their choice of college and major on the application. 2. Submit an official transcript of their high school record. 3. Request that an official transcript from each college attended be sent to the Office of Undergraduate Admissions directly from the Registrar's Office of the respective colleges. A listing of courses in progress for the current academic year (including course number, course title, and number of credits to be earned in each course) should also be fonwarded. NOTE: Transfer students are not required to complete entrance exami- nations. Deadline dates for completion of all applications for each of the four quarters are as follows: Winter Quarter November 1 Spnng Quarter February 1 Summer Quarter May 1 Fall Quarter July 1 The Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) is required for students whose native language is not English. International students must obtain authorization from the Immigration and Naturalization Ser- vice to transfer from one school to another. Please refer to page 243 for complete information for International Students. Orientation and Registration All transfer students are required to participate in an orientation and registration program scheduled immediately before the beginning of classes. This one- to five-day program provides transfer students with the opportunity to meet with their faculty advisers and plan their course schedules. They will also meet with members of the Student Affairs Office and the Cooperative Education Department. Students should bring a copy of their official Certificate of Acceptance to the Orientation and Registration program. In most cases, the certifi- cate will list each course (and its credit value) for which the transfer student has received credit. The total number of credits being received will also be listed on the certificate. Students will only receive full transfer credit for courses that are listed on the certificate of acceptance and for which a grade has been re- corded on an official transcnpt from their former college(s). Transfer credit from other institutions is not computed into the North- eastern University quality point average. Northeastern University uses the quarter calendar and awards quarter hours of credit for courses that are successfully completed. Each quarter hour of credit is equivalent to three quarters (3/4) of one semester hour. 246 / Undergraduate Admissioris Most Northeastern courses are equivalent to three (3) sennester hours of credit or four (4) quarter hours. In general, students who successfully complete 48 quarter hours will usually qualify for sophonnore standing, 80 for middler, 112 for junior, and 148 for senior. All upperclass course selection for transfer students is planned with their faculty advisors. Additional information about transfer policies and procedures may be obtained from the Department of Admissions. Required Deposits from Freshmen and Transfer Students If the Committee on Admissions makes a favorable decision on a stu- dent's application, the student will be asked to submit a nonrefundable tuition deposit of $100 by May 1 . This deposit serves as an indication of intent to enroll and is applied to the first-quarter tuition account. Students applying for entrance dates other than September should carefully read their certificates of acceptance, which will indicate the required deposit dates. General and Special Health Requirements Prior to registration at Northeastern the Lane Health Center's Pre-en- trance Physical Examination Form is sent to each student following ac- ceptance. It is mandatory that each accepted applicant return this completed form, which includes the medical history. This examination requires a tuberculin test within six months of the registration date. A rubella titre test is also required for all students. All students are required to have physician-documented proof of having been immunized against measles, mumps, rubella, tetanus, and diphtheria. The rubella vaccine may be waived if a satisfactory antibody titre against rubella is demon- strated. This information must be forwarded to the University physician for review. Proper health clearance is considered a condition of admis- sion. Except in the most extreme instances, neither physical nor emotional problems are considered a bar to admission. In fact, we actively en- courage handicapped students to become part of the University com- munity. With pertinent information, we usually can make the adjustments to college life smoother and supply special aids when needed. Sound health and physical fitness are especially important for stu- dents in the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions and the College of Nursing and are required by their nonuniversity affili- ations. Candidates for admission to the College of Nursing are required to receive special health clearance prior to enrollment. A repeat health 247 examination by the Lane Health Center is given in the third year for physical therapy students in the Boston-Bouve College of Human De- velopment Professions. Students in Medical Laboratory Science, Radiology, Pharmacy, Nurs- ing, and Physical Therapy are required to have a recent tuberculin test prior to entenng clinical affiliations. A tuberculin test is also required of all students prior to entering their period of student teaching. ' ii niiiiiiiii^ „. . .^....J A -m^,.**. '*"""* n . -grygj College Expenses 250 Tuition and Fees Students are advised that tuition rates, room-and-board charges, and fees are subject to revision by the Board of Trustees at any time. They should also note that the freshman year consists of three quarters of full- time study. The Cooperative Plan, whereby students may be gainfully employed, does not begin until the sophomore year. The primary purpose of the Cooperative Plan is to provide invaluable on-the-job training, but it also can help make education possible without the accumulation of a large personal debt. Because of the Plan — and the University's determination to keep basic expenses as low as possi- ble— many deserving students who might not otherwise be able to afford an education have attended Northeastern. Expenses for the Freshman Year (Three Quarters) Tuition for the freshman year, for those who enroll in September, is pay- able in three installments at the beginning of the fall, winter, and spring quarters. For those who enroll in January, payments are due at the beginning of the winter, spring, and summer quarters. Board-and-room expenses for those living in University-sponsored residence facilities vary slightly according to the dormitory to which a student may be assigned. These costs are computed on the basis of a seven-day-a-week arrangement and are also paid in three installments at the beginning of each quarter. Total Freshman Expenses Application Fee $ 25.00 Tuition (Engineering, School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College), Business Administration, Computer Science) 7,050.00 Tuition, Boston-Bouve Physical Therapy 6,675.00 Tuition (all other colleges) 6,450.00 Board (based on the 21 -meal plan) 2, 1 90.00t Room* 2,430.00t Student Center Fee 37.50t Student Activities Fee 21 .00 Infirmary Fee (if applicable) 75.00t Health Services Fee 300.00 Laboratory Deposit (if applicable; 35.00 $10.00 charge for extra cards) The above list excludes personal expenses and expenses for books and supplies. *This scale is for Speare and Stetson Halls. Rates for other residence halls may' vary. Students occupying single rooms will be charged an additional $25 per\ quarter. See Housing section, page 292. tPayable in three installments at the beginning of each freshman quarter: Septem ber 23. 1985; January 6, 1986; and April 7, 1986. For students who enroll irw January, the dates would be January 6, 1986: April 7, 1986: and June 30. 1986. Tuition and Fees / 251 Special Note A nonrefundable deposit of $1 00 for tuition is payable not later than May 1. An additional nonrefundable deposit of $400 will be required from those who request housing. These deposits are applied to the first- quarter costs. (See also page 255.) Expenses for Upperclassmen Tuition for Arts and Sci- Tuition for Engineering, ences, Boston-Bouve,* School of Engineering Criminal Justice, Nurs- Technology (formerly ing, Pharmacy and Allied Lincoln College), Com- Health Professions puter Science, and Bus ness Administration Division A September 23, 1985 $2,975.00 $3,300.00 April/, 1986 2,975.00 3,300.00 Division B January 6, 1986 2,975.00 3,300.00 June 30, 1986 2,975.00 3,300.00 Division C** September 23, 1985 2,975.00 3,300.00 January 6, 1986 2,975.00 3,300.00 April 7, 1986 2.975.00 3,300.00 'Physical Therapy Program = $3,075 per academic quarter. 'Division C is the term used to denote the classification of students who are temporarily or permanently on a noncooperative academic year. Certain students in the College of Arts and Sciences may select a noncooperative four-year pro- gram. In other colleges, this program is temporary, sometimes required of transfer students to phase into the Cooperative Plan. Required Fees for All Students Application Fee A fee of $25 is required when the application for admission is filed. This fee is nonrefundable. •Accident and Sickness Insurance Student Center Fee Graduation Fee The University provides an excellent hospital insurance and student health program. All students will pay a nonrefundable University Health Service fee of $300 per year. This fee will cover the group Blue Cross- Blue Shield program and the medical services provided to students by the University Health Service. All students in the Basic Colleges on the Huntington Avenue campus are charged a fee of $12.50 per quarter for the services available in the Student Center building. The University requires a $35 graduation fee from all candidates for a degree. This fee must be paid before the end of the fifth week of the last scholastic quarter in the senior year. Candidates in the College of Nurs- ing are also required to pay a charge of about $10 for their graduation pins. 252 /College Expenses College of Nursing Uniforms Students in the baccalaureate degree program of the College of Nursing purchase uniforms in the fall quarter of the sophomore year. College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Uniforms Students in Respiratory Therapy purchase uniforms in the spring quarter of the sophomore year. Students in Dental Hygiene purchase uniforms in the fall quarter of the freshman year. Students in Radiologic Technology purchase uniforms in the fall quar- ter of the freshman year. Students in the Medical Laboratory Science programs purchase lab- oratory coats in the spring quarter of the freshman year. Co-op assign- ments to hospitals usually will require uniform purchases in the spring or summer quarter of the sophomore year. Student Activities Fee 1 A fee of $7.00 per quarter for all students to fund student clubs, activi- ties, etc. Photo-Identification Operation All full-time students, staff, and faculty are required to have an officially approved and properly validated photo-identification card. All students are required to show their I.D. card at the Library, athletic events, student elections, Health Services, and the Bursar's or Registrar's Office. An official I.D. card will be issued to new students at their orientation and registration periods. Replacements for lost cards can be obtained by going FIRST to the Bursar's Office, 248 Rl, and then, for the photo, to 251 Ell Center between the hours of 11:30 a.m.-2:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. A charge of $2 is levied for the initial ID. card; $5 for a replacement. Other Fees i International Student Fee There is a one-time fee of $200 charged to new, undergraduate interna- tional students, payable upon their acceptance at Northeastern. Liability Insurance Freshmen majoring in the Colleges of Nursing (Bachelor Degree Pro- gram and Special Program for R.N.s) and Allied Health (Respiratory Therapy), as well as all upperclass students in Nursing, Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions (excluding Health Records), and medical or health-related programs in Boston-Bouve College of Human Develop- ment Professions, are required to carry liability insurance. A fee of $18 is charged per year. Payment of Tuition All payments should be made at the Cashier's Office, 248 Richards Hall, or by mail. Checks should be made payable to Northeastern University. Beginning with the second week of any quarter, students are not eligible to attend classes unless their tuition has been paid, or specific arrange- ments have been made with the Bursar for a plan of deferred payment. Tuition and Fees / 253 It IS the student's responsibility to ensure that all tuition and dormitory charges and fees are paid when due. If a bill has not been received prior to the start of classes each quarter, it is necessary that the student come in person to the Bursar's Office where a bill will be processed. Any discrepancies in billing should be immediately brought to the attention of the Bursar's Office. If there is a billing problem, the undis- puted portion of the bill should be paid on time to avoid any additional late fees. Failure to receive a bill through the mail or to pay the undis- puted portion of the bill are not justification for late payment of amounts actually owed. Deferred Payment Deferred payment of tuition entails a fee of $10, which is levied on all accounts not paid by the end of the second week of classes. To arrange for a deferred payment plan, students must contact the Bursar's Office before the start of the second week of classes. Late Payment Fee A fee of $100 will be assessed for failure to arrange for, and make, payments in accordance with the prescribed regulations. Laboratory Deposits Students taking laboratory courses should be prepared to purchase laboratory deposit cards from the Bursar as directed by the department offering the course. These deposits will be charged with deductions for breakage and destruction of apparatus in the laboratory. A charge of $1 0 each is made for extra cards. Reserve Officers' Training Corps Uniform Deposit Freshmen enrolling in ROTO make a deposit of $35 to cover loss of, or damage to, ROTO uniforms and equipment. Any loss or damage ex- ceeding the deposit will be charged to the student. General Students in the College of Nursing may expect to be assessed fees for clinical laboratory experiences. Physical Education majors pay a room- and-board charge for a resident program at the Warren Center in the spring quarter. Recreation and Leisure Studies students pay a fee for a one-week term of camping at the Warren Center. A one-week session in winter sports is optional for Recreation and Leisure Studies majors in their junior or senior year (at a cost of $1 75). Refunds The University provides all instruction on an academic-quarter basis, for which students pay at the beginning of each quarter. Tuition refunds in all schools and colleges may be granted through the first four weeks of a quarter only when specific conditions are met and on the basis of the date appearing on the official withdrawal application. (Nonattendance does not constitute official withdrawal.) Questions regarding refunds should be discussed with the Dean of Students' Office. When approved, refunds are made as follows: 254 / College Expenses Tuition Refund Official Withdrawal Percentage of Filed Within Tuition Refunded 1st week of Quarter 100 2nd week of Quarter 75 3rd week of Quarter 50 4th week of Quarter 25 Room and Board (New Freshman and Transfer Students) Rental charges for rooms in University accommodations are refunda- ble only in cases of withdrawal prior to the start of a quarter (except in special circumstances so adjudged by the University). The $400 deposit is not refundable. Board charges may be refunded for all unused por- tions when the food identification card is surrendered to the Office of the Dean of Students for Housing. Overloads Tuition covers the cost of each student's required courses for a quarter. In addition, a course worth one quarter hour of credit may be taken without added charge. However, any other additional courses will be billed as overloads to the students taking them. 255 Housing Northeastern University's location, in one of the most central and exciting sections of Boston, offers the student an opportunity to participate in many cultural and educational activities. With residence halls on the Back Bay campus, between the Museum of Fine Arts and Symphony Hall, the city is at your doorstep. Northeastern's library, student center, and athletic facilities are nearby. Most of the residence halls have lounge areas and recreation rooms, including color television. Pnvacy and a quiet study environment are encouraged, but students must recognize that residence hall living can- not provide the privacy and quiet they may enjoy in their own homes. However, the benefits, as well as the occasional inconveniences of living in a community, may contribute to personal growth. A natural advantage of residence living may be the increased involve- ment in social and educational activities. Students are encouraged to join the committees that make decisions about student life. Full- or part-time residence hall staff reside in each residence facility. Housing Application and Contract All students requesting University housing on their application for admis- sion to Northeastern will receive a housing application. The completed application must be returned with the $400 deposit according to the instructions provided. Assignments, which are made on a first-come, first-served basis, are mailed as long as the deposit is returned by the established deadline. Fall housing assignments are processed and mailed during the month of August. This non-refundable deposit will be credited to the student's first quarter residence charges. The freshman contract is for three full quarters; upperclass transfer students must file applications on a quarterly basis as their contract is valid for only one quarter at a time. The upperclass deposit is $250. Contracts for summer-quarter freshmen are handled on an individual basis in accordance with the student's academic schedule. l\/larried Student Housing No University housing is available for married students. However, the University does maintain listings of off-campus rooms and apartments. These are available at the Housing Office, 104-106 Ell Building. Al- though the Housing Office has agreed to make this listing available, we do not inspect or endorse the advertised property or space. The Selection The choice of housing is an important consideration for the first year, and freshmen are encouraged to visit Northeastern before making a decision. Tours of residence halls are available by advance arrange- ment with the Department of Admissions. Upperclass and transfer students may live in residence halls or apart- ments. Freshmen are usually assigned to residence halls unless avail- able space exists only in apartments. Most rooms are designed to accommodate two students; however, some three- and four-person rooms are available in certain of these facilities. Some residence halls feature "group areas" that house from three to six students in a two- or three-room area. 256 /College Expenses The University maintains some apartment units for men and women. These apartments accommodate up to four students. Assignments are made based on the date of receipt of the housing deposit and applica- tion. Each unit is fully furnished, and the rental charge includes utilities. Off-Campus Housing Arrangements for off-campus housing are the responsibility of the stu- dent and the students family Though the Housing Office, 104-106 Ell, has agreed to make a listing of off-campus housing available, we do not inspect or endorse the advertised property or space. Fraternity Housing Certain fraternities provide opportunities for room and board for men at reasonable rates. Information regarding these housing facilities may be obtained from the Housing Office, 104-106 Ell, Northeastern University, Boston, Massachusetts 021 1 5. Cars Freshmen living in residence halls are not allowed to have cars or other powered vehicles on campus. Upperclass students are strongly discouraged from bringing cars with them, as the University does not permit overnight parking, and there is a severe shortage of public parking spaces near the Univer- sity. Costs for Room Per Quarter* Women's Residence Halls Kerr Hall (upperclass students only) $685 1 57 Hemenway Street $81 0 Coec' Residence Halls Smith Hall (upperclass students only) $685 SpeareHall $810 Stetson Hall West $810 Stetson Hall East $810 White Hall $685 White Hall (renovated area) $810 YMCA (includes cost of single room) $710 115 Hemenway Street $810 1 1 9 Hemenway Street $81 0 400 The Fenway $685 Men's Residence Halls Melvin Hall $685 Light Hall $685 1 53 Hemenway Street $810 1 63 Hemenway Street $81 0 Housing / 257 Apartments 1 06-1 22 St. Stephen Street $885 Fairwood Apartments — 319 and 337 Huntington Avenue $810 Museum Villa— 454, 458, 460 Huntington Avenue $885 407 Huntington Avenue $810 Rubenstein Hall— 464 Huntington Avenue $885 West Apartments— 50 Leon Street $950 1 42-1 48 Hemenway Street $885 With the exception of the YMCA, all single rooms are charged at an additional rate of $25 per quarter. An infirmary fee of $25 dollars per quarter is charged to resident students. 'Costs and types of residence halls (coed, men, women) are subject to change. University Food Service All students who live in University residence halls are required to partic- ipate in the University Food Plan. Three different meal plans are avail- able. Meals per Week Cost per Quarter 21 $730 15 $660 1 0 $600 Students living in University apartments are not required to be on the Food Plan; however, they may choose one of the meal plans if they wish. When conditions warrant, such as during weekends and slow periods, the University may close or consolidate certain dining facilities. Security Security for the residence facilities is provided by trained University police officers. In addition, residents are required to show appropriate identification to the security proctor when entering the residence hall. Guests, both male and female, must sign in with the proctor. The University police provide escort service for students who wish to go from one section of the campus to another late at night. Financial Assistance 260 Financial Aid Charles M. Devlin, M.Ed., Dean of Student Financial Services Financial assistance in the form of loans, grants, and work-study is avail- able on an annual basis to qualified students. Undergraduate financial aid funds are administered in accordance with a nationally established policy and philosophy of financial aid for students pursuing a degree in higher education. It is a basic premise of this policy that parents have an obligation to pay for the education of their children to the extent that they are able to do so. In addition, students are expected to contribute to their educational cost from summer and co-op earnings, outside agency awards, their own assets, and other resources they may have. Financial aid is available only for meeting the difference between the total family contnbution (parents' and student's contribution) and the annual educational costs. The parents' contribution is determined by an objective analysis of the family's financial state; net income, number of dependents, allowable expenses, indebtedness, and assets. Criteria established by the College Scholarship Service are used in making the evaluation. The University does not award any form of financial assistance to students who are not citizens or eligible permanent residents of the United States. Application Procedure Initial Year (Freshman and Transfer Students) Applicants seeking financial assistance are required to complete and mail a Financial Aid Form (FAF) to the College Scholarship Service by February 15 for Sum- mer or Fall entrance and by October 15 for Winter or Spring entrance. Transfer applicants must also complete an institutional "Upperclass Ap- plication for Financial Aid" and have completed Financial Aid Transcripts from all previously attended post-secondary schools. These two docu- ments must be submilted by April 15 for summer or fall entrance and by October 15 for Winter or Spring entrance. On the FAF you must indicate Northeastern University (code 3667), the Pell Grant Program, and your state scholarship program (if applica- ble) as recipients of the FAF. The FAF is available from secondary school guidance offices or the Financial Aid Office. Awards are made on a first-applied, first-aided basis and are contin- gent on continued funding. The typical award takes the form of a pack- age combining a grant, a loan, and/or part-time employment. Awards may be adjusted at any time upon receipt of other funds or changes in status. All initial year recipients of financial aid are required to submit a copy of their parents' prior year tax return before their financial aid award is final. Upperclass (Sophomore-Senior) Upperclass applicants are required to submit a Financial Aid Form to the College Scholarship Service and a Northeastern University "Upperclass Application for Financial Assis- tance" each year for which they desire assistance. On the FAF you must indicate Northeastern University (code 3667), the Pell Grant Program, Financial Aid / 261 and your state scholarship program (if applicable) as recipients of the FAF. The FAF must be filed by February 15 for all upperclass aid appli- cants. The "Upperclass Application" is due by April 15 for students in school Fall and Spring quarters and August 15 for students in school Winter and Summer quarters. Financial aid awards are made for the entire academic year. Graduate and Law Students All Graduate and Law School applicants must file the Graduate and Professional School Financial Aid Services (GAPSFAS) form, a Northeastern University "Application for Financial Assistance," and a Financial Aid Transcript from each post-secondary school attended. Parents' financial information is required on the GAPS- FAS form from all applicants. Application deadlines are as follows: Law students February 15 All other graduate students April 15 Eligibility and Selection In order to be eligible to participate in the financial aid program at Northeastern University, all students must a) apply for financial aid, com- pleting the proper application forms and submitting them in a timely fashion; b) have documented financial need; c) be in attendance at Northeastern University, pursuing a first bachelor's degree on at least a half-time basis in an eligible program; d) be making normal academic progress as determined by the college in which the student is enrolled; e) meet any other eligibility requirements of the individual aid programs. Due to limited funding. Northeastern University is not always able to meet the full financial need of all applicants. Priorities in awarding aid will be based on highest financial need, meeting application deadlines, and the potential for academic achievement. All financial aid is contin- gent on the availability of funds. Most students who attend Northeastern University move along with their class. On request, information about retention and attrition can be obtained from the Office of the Dean of Students. Mail inquiries to: Northeastern University Office of Financial Aid P.O. Box 75 Boston, Massachusetts 02117 Office Hours 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday-Friday Telephone Numbers General Information (Financial Aid) 61 7-437-31 90 Pell Grant Information 617-437-3804 Help/GSL/Parent Loans 617-437-3386 Initial-year Information 617-437-3907 Student Employment Center 61 7-437-3200 262/ State Assistance Programs The Office of Financial Aid strongly advises applicants for aid to apply to state scholarship programs at the same time that they apply for aid from the University. State Grants and Scholarships The Commonwealth of Massachusetts provides scholarship aid to Mas- sachusetts students pursuing full-time programs of study in an accred- ited college or university. Application is made by completing the Massachusetts version of the Financial Aid Form. Awards are made in the summer of each year, and applications for entering freshmen are available through their high school guidance offices. Out-of-state stu- dents should investigate aid programs in their respective states. Sub- stantial state aid is offered by Connecticut, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, Vermont, and Maine. Application is by the Financial Aid Form (FAF). The Commonwealth of Massachusetts also provides assistance through the Gilbert Matching Grant Program and four pilot programs which include a work, loan, and two grant programs. Application for these programs is based on a completed Financial Aid Form. Funds are awarded by the Financial Aid Office based on guidelines published by the state. Massachusetts Family Education Loans The Massachusetts College Student Loan Authority, in cooperation with Northeastern University, offers a program of Family Education Loans under which parents can borrow to pay the cost of education and repay in low monthly payments over fifteen years. Neither students nor parents need to be Massachusetts residents. A credit-worthy spouse may also qualify to borrow under the program. To participate, a student must be enrolled at least half-time. Families can borrow up to three-quarters of the yearly cost of attendance. There is a $2,000 minimum loan amount. Applications may be requested from the Office of Financial Aid. Federal Programs Note: All Federal financial aid programs are subject to change, depending upon adequate and continuing Federal support. Pell Grant This is a program of direct federal grants to undergraduate students only. Eligible students can receive as much as $2,100 per year toward the cost of their edu- cation. Pell Grants are generally available to all students who have not previously received a bachelor's degree, who are not in this country on a student visa, and who are attending college on at least a half-time basis (minimum 6 quarter hours). Students must be enrolled in an eligible program for the purpose of obtaining a degree or certificate. To utilize this program to the fullest, all students applying for financial aid must file for a Pell Grant. Applications for a Pell Grant can be made on the Financial Aid Form (FAF), which is available from local high schools, or by calling the Pell Grant unit of the Financial Aid Office at 617-437-3804. Financial Aid / 263 College Work-Study Program This is a need-based program of part-time employment under the sponsorship of the federal government. It is designed to help full-time students meet their edu- cational expenses. Students generally work part-time while attending classes. Eligible students may work for the University or for public or private nonprofit off- campus agencies. The Office of Financial Aid has the responsibility of placing qualified students in their job assignments. Supplementary Educational Opportunity Grant Supplementary Grants are direct awards provided by the federal government. They are available to a limited number of full-time undergraduate students who present evidence of needing financial assistance. Eligible students who are ac- cepted for entrance may receive Supplementary Educational Opportunity Grants ranging from $200 to $2,000 for each year of their undergraduate education. Health Professions Loan This program is available to full-time undergraduate students who have been accepted for a course of study leading to a Bachelor of Science degree in Pharmacy. A student who evidences financial need and academic promise may borrow as much as $2,500 per academic year. Repayment of principal and inter- est does not begin until one year after the student ceases to pursue a full-time course of study. Repayment of principal may be extended over a ten-year period with interest at the rate of 9 percent per annum. Guaranteed Student Loan Program Under this program, students who are enrolled for at least one-half the normal academic work load may borrow from a participating bank or other financial institution. Terms and conditions vary from state to state, but the law allows dependent undergraduates to borrow a maximum of $2,500 per year, up to a total of $12,500, for undergraduate study. The federal government pays the inter- est while the student is in school. The student must begin repaying the pnncipal of the loan plus interest shortly after the student drops below half-time enrollment. Applications for the loan itself are available from local banks or the Education Office of your state government. Additional information and necessary application forms for first-time borrowers are available from the Financial Aid Office. Parent Loans for Undergraduate Students Under the Parent Loan Program (PLUS), parents of dependent undergraduate students may borrow up to $3,000 per year for each child enrolled in an approved educational institution. These loans are also offered by banks and other financial institutions, although terms and availability vary from state to state. Unlike the Guaranteed Student Loans, the PLUS loans require parents to begin repayment of the loan (with 12 percent interest) within 60 days of receiving the loan. Repay- ment may be stretched out over ten years, as long as the minimum monthly payment of $30 is maintained. Applications and more information can be ob- tained from local lending institutions. National Direct Student Loan , ^ *„or,^ioi Direct Loans are available to students who present evidence of needing tinanciai assistance. Undergraduate students may borrow up to a maximum of $3,000 for the first two years, or a total of $6,000 for their entire undergraduate education. Students are allowed a total maximum of $12,000 through their undergraduate and graduate education. Repayment and interest on Direct Loans are not re- quired until 6 months after a student graduates or withdraws from the institution. Repayment of principal may be extended over a ten-year period, with the interest rate at 5 percent per annum. Repayment may be deferred up to three years if the student is pursuing at least a half-time course of study or serving in the Peace Corps, VISTA, or the armed forces. 264 / Financial Assistance Nursing Student Loan This program is designed for full-time undergraduate students who have been accepted for a course of study leading to an Associate or Bachelor of Science degree in Nursing. Provided financial need is evident, students may borrow as much as $2,500 each year up to a maximum amount of $10,000 for their entire undergraduate education. Repayment and interest on these loans do not begin until nine months after the student ceases to pursue a full-time course of study. The repayment of the principal may be extended over a ten-year period with the interest at the rate of 6 percent per annum. Reserve Officers' Training Corps Scholarship Program (Refer to section on Reserve Officers' Training Corps. ^ University Scholarships The following scholarships are awarded through the Office of Financial Aid. Because we award specific scholarships to the students who qual- ify, you should not apply for any specific scholarship. If you feel you are a potential recipient for any of these listed awards, you may bring that fact to our attention. The Vivian B. Allen Scholarships Nursing The Vivian B. Allen Foundation Endowment for nursing scholarships was estab- lished in 1968 through the generosity of the Vivian B. Allen Foundation, Inc. The income from a $500,000 endowment fund is to be used to provide scholarship assistance for students entering or enrolled in the College of Nursing of North- eastern University. The application procedures and qualifications for selection are the same as those for all other scholarships. Alumni Scholarships All Colleges Scholarship aid is available to entering freshmen who are relatives of alumni. Applications must show evidence of scholastic achievement and financial need. Class of 1967 Alumni Scholarship Day College Students The Northeastern University Class of 1967 Alumni Scholarship was established in 1967 and endowed in 1982 by the Class of 1967. Income from the fund is to be awarded each year based on financial need, campus activities, and scholastic achievement. Priority will be given to children, other relatives, and friends of the Class of 1967. Irving Aronson Scholarship Engineering The Irving Aronson Scholarship for Electrical Engineering students was estab- lished through the generosity of the family of Irving Aronson as a living memorial to a man who shared his life with many people and who cared so much for the educational process. Income from this fund will be awarded or loaned to electrical engineering students who demonstrate financial need and academic responsi- bility, George L. Barnes Scholarship All Colleges This fund was established in 1969 by Miriam P. Poole, daughter of George L. Barnes, in memory of her father, a distinguished member of the Northeastern University Corporation and Board of Trustees from 1937 until his death in 1965. Financial Aid / 265 The income from this fund will annually provide a full scholarship to a deserving student from Weymouth, Massachusetts. The award is made on the basis of need and character. Some additional assistance may be given in the upperclass years. The Barry Scholarship Engineering The Barry Scholarship, established in 1973 by the Barry Division of Barry Wright Corporation, is available to students in the College of Engineering. Preference will be given to mechanical engineering majors and sons and daughters of Barry employees, based upon demonstrable financial need and academic achieve- ment. The Mr. and Mrs. Emil Matthew Bauer Fund All Colleges The interest from the fund, established in 1954, is used for scholarships or other financial assistance to students of German birth or of German extraction studying at Northeastern University. The scholarships are available to either men or women students enrolled in any year at the University. The Alvah K. Borman Memorial Scholarship Gamma Phi Kappa Fraternity Undergraduates This scholarship was established in 1976 through the generous contributions of Gamma Phi Kappa Fraternity alumni. In 1979, the Gamma Phi Kappa Fraternity Alumni Association, Incorporated, voted to name the scholarship in memory of Alvah K. Borman, Northeastern University's Dean of Graduate Placement. Dean Borman was an active member of the GPK fraternity for over forty-six years, serving as an undergraduate brother (class of 1936), faculty advisor from 1953 to 1965, an active alumnus until his untimely death in 1979. Awards from this fund are made annually to undergraduate members of the Gamma Phi Kappa Fraternity who have demonstrated good academic standing. Recipients of this award must have been members in good standing of the Gamma Phi Kappa Fraternity for at least six months prior to the time of award. Boston Housing Authority Scholarships All Colleges As an expression of Northeastern's commitment to the city of Boston, the Univer- sity has established 100 full-time undergraduate scholarships for residents of housing developments run by the Boston Housing Authority (BHA). Applicants for the scholarships, which will be offered for the first time in September 1984, must meet the requirements for admission to Northeastern and be residents of BHA housing. Martin Brown Scholarship Fund Engineering This scholarship was established in 1961 by Mr. Martin Brown, an engineering alumnus of the Class of 1921 . Its purpose is to assist qualified students enrolled in the College of Engineering who have need and have demonstrated above- average scholastic ability. Wellington Burnham Fund All Colleges This fund provides financial assistance to worthy students of limited means with- out discrimination as to race, creed, color, or scholastic attainment, it was estab- lished in 1961 under the provisions of the will of George A. Burnham. 266 / Financial Assistance The Godfrey L. Cabot Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund was established by Dr. Cabot in 1 954 to help meet the college expenses of employees or children of employees of Godfrey L. Cabot, Inc., and its subsid- iary and associated companies. To be eligible, the employee must have com- pleted at least five years of service with the company prior to the time the student enters the University. The University shall determine the number and amount of these scholarships, which are not limited to outstanding students and which are available to evening as well as day students. Students interested in applying for scholarship aid from this fund should communicate with the Cabot Personnel Office or the Office of Financial Aid at Northeastern University. Cameron and Colby Ellis H. Carson Scholarship Fund Business Administration This fund was established in 1983 by Cameron and Colby Company, Inc., in honor of Mr. Carson, former president of its Treaty Reinsurance Activity, known as NERCO. The income from this fund is used to assist a freshman student in the College of Business Administration who demonstrates not only financial need but also academic promise deemed consistent with the high standards of foresight and acumen that characterized the career of Ellis H. Carson, Camp Dresser & McKee, Inc. Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship was established in 1973 by Camp Dresser & f\/IcKee, Inc., and is available to students in all colleges. Preference for awards will be based upon demonstrable financial need and academic achievement. Louis S. Cashman Memorial Scholarship Fund Business Administration This fund was established by the Massachusetts Credit Union Association (CUNA) and friends of Mr. Cashman in recognition of his outstanding service to the credit union movement in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. This scholarship is awarded annually to students in the College of Business Administration who have need, with particular preference given to those enrolled in Banking and Finance. The Gardner A. Caverly Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship was established in 1957 through the generosity of Mr. Gardner A. Caverly, an alumnus of the College of Business Administration and a member of the Class of 1 934. Its purpose is to provide financial assistance and encourage qualified students from the New England area to attend Northeastern University. In selecting worthy students for these scholarship awards, preference is given to graduates of the Rutland, Vermont, and Laconia, New Hampshire, high schools. Carl W. Christiansen Scholarship Business Administration The Carl W. Christiansen Scholarship Fund was established in 1976 by Mr. Carl W. Christiansen, a graduate of the School of Commerce and Finance, Providence Division of Northeastern University, Class of 1923. Early in his career, Mr. Chris- tiansen was an accounting instructor and associate dean in the Providence Divi- sion. In 1927, the accounting firm of Christiansen, Murphy and Company was founded, which in 1940 became known as Christiansen and Company— Certified Public Accountants. The income from this fund is to be awarded annually to an entering freshman in the day College of Business Administration who has dem- onstrated the necessity for financial aid. Preference will be given to students from the state of Rhode Island who are interested in pursuing a career in accounting. Financial Aid / 267 Ruby H. Cole Scholarship Fund All Colleges The Ruby H. Cole Scholarship Fund was established in 1973 under the will of Mrs. Cole, late of Boston, Massachusetts. The income from the fund is awarded annually to one or more female students enrolled in or admitted to undergraduate programs of the Basic College of the University and who are graduates of Rox- bury High School, Roxbury, Massachusetts. Recipients must demonstrate finan- cial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. Commercial Union Insurance Companies Scholarship Criminal Justice The income from this fund, established in 1982 by the Commercial Union Insur- ance Companies, will be used to provide a scholarship to an entering freshman who demonstrates need and shows promise of success in the law enforcement field. Community Scholarships All Colleges The Community Scholarships were established by President Asa S. Knowles during the period 1963-1973. These scholarships stipulate that Northeastern will ensure that full freshman tuition be met in the form of scholarships and grants for qualified students. In order to qualify for consideration, a student must apply for financial assis- tance through the normal application procedure and demonstrate need. The following Massachusetts communities are designated under this scholar- ship; Boston, Ashland, Burlington, Brookline, Belmont, Brockton, Framingham, Marshfield, Milford, Nonwood, Reading, Revere, Sandwich, Westwood, Weston, and Weymouth. The Compugraphic Corporation Scholarship Fund All Colleges The Compugraphic Corporation Scholarship Fund has been established and endowed at the University with a generous gift from an individual. The income from the scholarship fund is to be used annually as financial assistance for per- sons who are admitted to or enrolled in full-time undergraduate programs of the Basic Colleges of the University and who demonstrate financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. Scholarships are tuition grants and are awarded to persons who are otherwise eligible and who are, at the time of the grant, children of current employees of Compugraphic Corporation. Arnold L. Cormier Memorial Scholarship Criminal Justice The Arnold L. Cormier Memorial Scholarship Fund was established in 1980 by Joseph L. and Ruth E. Cormier in memory of their son, Arnold, a student in the College of Criminal Justice, Class of 1981. Arnold was a good student with ex- cellent grades and was an active participant in classroom discussions and col- lege activities His untimely death in an automobile accident, while on a weekend tnp with two of his classmates, was a tragic loss to his parents and friends. To perpetuate the memory of Arnold Cormier and the spirit of good fellowship for which he stood, this scholarship is awarded annually to a senior in the College of Criminal Justice. The Salvatore J. and Corinne Danca Scholarship All Colleges The Salvatore J. and Connne Danca Scholarship, established in 1974 by Salva- tore J. Danca, a graduate of Northeastern University, Class of 1934, is to be awarded annually to a student enrolled as a sophomore. Selection will be made by the Committee on Scholarships, using academic excellence and financial need as the criteria for selection. 268 / Financial Assistance Elizabeth A. Davey Scholarship for Physical Therapy Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions The Elizabeth A. Davey Scholarship for Physical Therapy students was estab- lished through the generosity of the family and friends at Choate Memorial Hos- pital on behalf of Elizabeth A. Davey, as a living memorial to a woman who shared her life with so many people. Income from this fund will be awarded or loaned to a Physical Therapy senior who demonstrates superior academic achievement and financial need. Charles M. Devlin Scholarship All Colleges This fund was established in 1976 by the members of the Class of 1970 "in honor of our dedicated adviser," Charles M. Devlin. The income from the fund will be awarded annually to upperclassmen with proven ability and demonstrable finan- cial need. Preference will be given to children of members of the Class of 1970. The William O. DiPietro Scholarship Engineering This scholarship was established in 1967 through the generosity of Mr. William 0. DiPietro, a distinguished alumnus of the College of Engineering and a member of the Class of 1942. The scholarship is awarded to one or more deserving freshmen who demonstrate a high caliber of achievement and a desire to fulfill the limits of their abililty in both academic and cooperative periods of study. In considering recipients for this scholarship, preference is given to freshmen enrolled in the College of Engineering who have a desire to major in Chemical Engineering. It is intended that those students receiving awards from this scholarship might some- day contribute to this or other scholarships themselves, thereby perpetuating growing funds that will help other deserving individuals. The Diamond Anniversary Development Program Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship has been established to commemorate the successful conclu- sion of the Diamond Anniversary Development Program. This scholarship fund recognizes the loyalty and generosity of the thousands of alumni and friends, corporations, foundations, and organizations whose significant contributions of time and resources have brought Northeastern University to "that greatness which is its destiny." Three $1,000 scholarships are awarded annually, as follows: to one or more full-time students enrolled in a cooperative education program within a basic college of the University, to one or more part-time students enrolled in a basic college of the University, and to one or more full-time students enrolled in the graduate division or a professional school of the University. Consideration will be based upon financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. The Harry Doehia Memorial Scholarship All Colleges The Harry Doehia Memorial Scholarship was established in 1974 in memory of Mr. Harry Doehia, founder and president of Doehia Greeting Cards, Inc. During his lifetime Mr. Doehia provided much financial assistance to young people of limited means to help them in furthering their educational goals. The awards from this fund are available to undergraduate day students, with preference being given to graduates of Fitchburg High School, Fitchburg, Mas- sachusetts, and Nashua High School, Nashua, New Hampshire. Additional con- sideration will be given to children of employees of Doehia Greeting Cards, Inc. Financial Aid / 269 The Cpl. James B. Downey USMC Scholarship Fund All Colleges This scholarship was established in 1970 through the generosity of Mr. William J. Downey, a graduate of the College of Liberal Arts, Class of 1952, in memory of his brother, Cpl. James B. Downey, USMC. The scholarship is to be awarded annually to an upperclassman in the day colleges who has demonstrated the necessity for financial aid Agnes F. Driscoil Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund will provide scholarship assistance to students in their upperclass years who have demonstrated financial need and scholastic attainment. John Elfers Memorial Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship was established in 1983 by William and Ann Rice Elfers in memory of Mr. Elfers' brother. The income from "the fund is awarded annually to undergraduate students who demonstrate financial need, academic promise, and soundness of character. Carl Stephens Ell Alumni Scholarships All Colleges To honor Dr. Carl Stephens Ell, the second president of Northeastern University, the Alumni Association established these scholarships in 1958. Either freshmen or upperclassmen enrolled at the University are eligible. Awards will be made to worthy students on the basis of scholastic ability and need. The scholarships are to be distributed as equitably as possible among students in the Basic Colleges and University College. Preference shall be given to sons and daughters of North- eastern Alumni. Elmer H. and Daisy M. Everett Memorial Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship was established through a bequest of Elmer H. and Daisy M. Everett, both alumni of Northeastern University. Mr. Everett graduated from the College of Engineering, and Mrs. Everett graduated from the School of Business. They are both members of the Class of 1934. Mr. and Mrs. Everett had a strong commitment to help young people wanting to further their education. The fund will be administered by the Office of Financial Aid. Michael T. Federico Memorial Fund All Colleges The Michael T. Federico Memorial Fund was established in 1982 by the Rhode Island Alumni Club, fellow alumni, and friends of Michael T. Federico, a graduate of the class of 1940 and a life-long resident of the State of Rhode Island. Income from the fund is to be awarded annually to one or more students from Rhode Island who are in their sophomore year, have attained a Q.P.A. of 3.0 or better, and have demonstrated financial need. The George Raymond Fennell Memorial Scholarships Business Administration Two full-tuition scholarships are awarded each year to first-year students enrolled in the College of Business Administration. The scholarships are awarded in mem- ory of George Raymond Fennell, formerly Assistant Director of Admissions and Director of the Northeastern Student Union. 270 / Financial Assistance Clara and Joseph F. Ford Scholarship Fund All Colleges A fund established by Clara and Joseph F. Ford to provide tuition scholarships for worthy, needy, and well-qualified students who have demonstrated a denno- cratic and tolerant spirit and who are well disposed toward people of all creeds and races. The Gamma Phi Kappa Fraternity Scholarship All Colleges The Gamnna Phi Kappa Fraternity Scholarship was established in 1972 by the Gannnia Phi Kappa Fraternity Alumni Association, Incorporated, and was en- dowed in 1976 through the generous contributions of Gamma Phi Kappa Frater- nity alumni and undergraduates. Awards are made annually from interest on the endowment to undergraduate students enrolled in the basic day colleges of Northeastern University who demonstrate good academic standing and financial need. Undergraduate members of the Gamma Phi Kappa Fraternity are ineligible to apply for this award. The Herbert W. and Geraldine E. Gallagher Athletic Scholarship Fund All Colleges This scholarship was established by Wendy L. Gallagher, a Northeastern Univer- sity graduate in the Class of 1975, as a tribute and expression of her love for her parents on their Golden Wedding Anniversary. Herbert W. Gallagher, Class of 1935 was an outstanding athlete as an under- graduate and was elected to the Northeastern University Athletic Hall of Fame in 1975. He served the University with dedication for over forty years as a successful coach in hockey and baseball and as its athletic director. This scholarship is to be awarded annually to a deserving male hockey player who demonstrates financial need, academic ability, and the soundness of char- acter that best exemplifies the Northeastern University athlete. The Nathan Gerber Memorial Scholarship All Colleges The Nathan Gerber Memorial Scholarship was established in 1974 by Albert Gerber, E'52, and Robert Gerber, E'60, in memory of their father, Nathan, a mem- ber of the Class of 1925. The scholarship is to be awarded annually to a student or students enrolled in the freshman class with a demonstrable financial need. Selection is made by the Committee on Scholarships. John and Ethel Goldberg Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund was established in 1984 through a bequest by Ethel Goldberg. The income from this fund is to be used by the University for the tuition of those students the University deems deserving based upon demonstrable financial need and academic achievement. These awards are available to undergraduate day college students. Financial Aid / 271 The Foster Grant Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship, established in 1974 by the Foster Grant Co., Inc., of Leonninster, Massachusetts, is available to students in any of the full-time undergraduate colleges. Preference will be given to children of employees of Foster Grant Co., Inc. Basis for the award will be demonstrable financial need and above-average academic achievement. Clifton W. Gregg Memorial Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship was established through a bequest of Clifton W. Gregg, a 1915 graduate of the School of Commerce and Finance of Northeastern University. It was Mr. Gregg's request that "the income for this fund be used for the assistance of financially needy students." The award may be made annually. Recipients will be determined by the Committee on Scholarships. Rabbi Myer O. Grunberg Scholarship All Colleges Established in 1953 by Mrs. Myer 0. and Miss Rose Grunberg, this annual award is available to a senior student in any college of the University. The award is made to students who have evidenced in personal business, and student relations those characteristics of leadership and human relations that make for a better social order. There is no restriction as to race, creed, color, or sex. James F. Haley Scholarship Fund Engineering This fund was established in 1 984 through the generosity of Haley & Aldrich, Inc., a leading consulting engineering firm, and the family of Mr. James F. Haley, a distinguished civil engineering graduate and a member of the Class of 1939. The income from the fund is to be used to assist deserving students majoring in civil engineering who display soundness of character, a stable academic record, and financial need. Priscilla E. Hargreaves Scholarship Electrical Engineering The Priscilla E. Hargreaves Scholarship for Electrical Engineenng Students was established by husband William Hargreaves, E'28, as a loving tribute to a wife whose love and devotion meant so much to him. Income from this fund will be awarded to electrical engineering students who have reached their second year and who show a need and have demonstrated reasonable academic responsi- bility. Charles W. Havice Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship was established by the members of the Student Union upon the retirement of the former Dean of Chapel, Charles W. Havice. The income from the fund is awarded annually to upperclass students who are active in the Student Union. Students should demonstrate a financial need. Charles Hayden Memorial Scholarships All Colleges The Charles Hayden Foundation, created by the will of the late Charles Hayden, an alumnus of the Boston English High School, offers annual memorial scholar- ships to freshmen at Northeastern University. The scholarships are awarded to "deserving boys" whose parents are unable to finance the entire cost of their education. 272 / Financial Assistance Kathryn S. Horbal Scholarship Chemical Engineering The Kathryn S. Horbal Scholarship for female chemical engineering students was established by Kathryn's family as a loving tribute to a daughter whose short lifetime meant so much to so many. Income from this fund will be awarded to female chemical engineering students who have reached at least their middler year and who have demonstrated academic responsibility. Richard Melvin Horwitz Memorial Award for Excellence in Electrical Engineering Engineering The Richard Melvin Honwitz Memorial Award for Excellence in Electrical Engi- neering was established in 1967 by Leonard J. Horwitz in memory of his brother, Richard Melvin Horwitz. a member of the Class of 1945 in the College of Engi- neering who died in action during World War II, The award recognizes academic achievement and excellence and is presented annually to an outstanding under- graduate senior majoring in Electrical Engineering. The Walter F. Howe Memorial Scholarship Business Administration This fund was established in memory of Walter F. Howe, Class of 1968, who, within one week after graduation, was fatally wounded while pursuing thieves who had stolen his landlord's car. The scholarship was established through the generosity of Walter's friends and relatives in memory of his ideals of good citi- zenship and civic responsibility. It is awarded annually to a student in the College of Business Administration who demonstrates not only financial need but good citizenship and civic responsibility. The scholarship is open-ended so that addi- tional sums can be added to it in future years and will be awarded by the Univer- sity without restrictions as to race, color, geographic origin, or scholastic attainment. The Edward L. Hurtig Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship was established in 1968 through the generosity of the Hurtig family in memory of Edward L. Hurtig, an alumnus of the College of Engineering, Class of 1946. The scholarship is awarded annually to an entering freshman in the day colleges who has demonstrated the necessity for financial aid. Prefer- ences will be given to recipients of the Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants Scholarship Program of the United States Office of Education. The Maurice A. and Nellie L. Idelson Award All Colleges This award, established in 1968, is given annually to an entering freshman in the day colleges who has demonstrated the need for financial aid. Preference will be given to graduates of the Boston English High School. Should there be no quali- fied candidate from this source, the award will then be given to any worthy student. The Jamaican Associates, Inc., Scholarship All Colleges The Jamaican Associates, Inc., Scholarship, established in 1981 by the Jamaican Associates, Inc., is awarded annually to a student who is a citizen of Jamaica and who intends to return to Jamaica upon graduation or to a student who is of Jamaican descent. Preference will be given to a second-year student with de- monstrable financial need and proven academic performance. Financial Aid / 273 Joseph Anthony Johnson Scholarships Engineering Established in 1968 by the will of the late Joseph Anthony ( Johansen) Johnson of the Class of 1928, the income provides scholarship aid for students enrolled in the Department of Mechanical Engineering, with preference given to students of Scandinavian origin. Ralph P. Johnson Scholarship Fund Electrical Engineering and Computer Science Administered by the Office of Financial Aid and awarded to a Computer Science or Electrical Engineering major, this fund was established in 1980 by David R. Johnson, an alumnus of the Class of 1970, in honor of his father. It is the donor's desire that recipients of this fund assume the moral obligation to reimburse the fund in future years as they may be able in order to make additional financial aid available for other students. Dr. LeRoy C. Keagle Memorial Scholarship Fund Pharmacy The Dr. LeRoy C. Keagle Memorial Scholarship Fund was established in 1975 through the generosity of family and friends of Dr. LeRoy C. Keagle, a man of high integrity and commitment to the profession of pharmacy who, at the time of his death on December 15, 1974, was Dean of the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions at Northeastern University. The income from this schol- arship fund IS awarded annually to a student in the undergraduate Pharmacy Program who is entering the junior or senior class. Recipients must demonstrate financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. Robert G. Keene Memorial Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund was established in 1979 in memory of Robert G. Keene, a graduate of Lincoln College, Class of 1972. The endowment funds were provided by the friends and associates of Robert G. Keene and by the Polaroid Corporation, where he served as an Engineering Manager. The income from the fund will be awarded annually to an undergraduate student who demonstrates financial need as well as strong character and initiative. Primary consideration will be given to children of Polaroid employees. The Martin Luther King, Jr., Scholarship The Martin Luther King, Jr., Scholarship is granted annually to incoming freshman, graduate, and transfer minority students who have demonstrated the philosophy of peaceful coexistence and change through nonviolent means espoused by Dr. King and who have an above-average scholastic record. The scholarship, in the amount of $500, requires a minimum quality point average. Financial aid based on need is available to supplement the scholarship. Andrew C. Knudsen Memorial Scholarship The Andrew C. Knudsen Memorial Scholarship was established in 1982 by Jo- hanna M. Knudsen in memory of her beloved brother, Andrew C. Knudsen, Lr52, B'55, who passed away on April 14, 1978. The scholarship award is to be made annually to two students, preferably one in the College of Engineering and one in the Alternative Freshman Year program who have demonstrated leadership qual- ities, proven worthy, and are of good character with a financial need. The awards are to be made annually from the income of the fund. 274 / Financial Assistance ■ Vena Morse Lamson Scholarships All Colleges These scholarships are provided through the income of a fund established in 1963 by Horatio W. Lamson in memory of his beloved wife. They are awarded annually to needy and worthy students who are enrolled in any of the Basic Colleges of the University. The scholarships are granted by the Committee on Financial Aid of the University without regard to national origin, sex, race, or creed. George M. and Irene M. Lane Scholarship Fund All Colleges This scholarship fund was established in 1979 by the family of Dr. George M. Lane to honor his memory. Dr. Lane's faithful and dedicated service to Northeast- ern University extended from 1943 to 1975, at which time he retired as Director of University Health Services. The income from the George M. and Irene M. Lane Scholarship Fund is awarded annually to an upperclass member of the Univer- sity's varsity football or hockey team who demonstrates financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. Additional family gifts as well as contribu- tions from friends and associates may be added to the scholarship's endowment. The Irving Landfield Scholarship All Colleges This fund was established in 1972 through the generosity of Irving Landfield, a graduate of the School of Commerce and Finance of Northeastern University, Class of 1923. The income from the fund is to be awarded annually to help deserving and needy students who demonstrate a desire to fulfill the limits of their ability in academic and cooperative periods of study. The income from this fund will be administered and awarded by the University without restriction to race, color, creed, geographic origin, or scholastic attainment. It is Mr. Landfield's desire that recipients of the scholarship assume a moral obligation to contribute to the principal of this fund as they may be able, in order to make additional financial aid available for other students in later years. Avrom Aaron Leve Memorial Scholarship Psychology This scholarship fund was established in 1957 in memory of Dr. Avrom Aaron Leve, former Assistant Professor of Psychology. The interest is used annually to provide scholarships for upperclass students majoring in Psychology. The award is made on the basis of academic achievement, financial need, and character. The Austin T. and June Rockwell Levy Scholarship All Colleges This Fund was established in 1984 through the generosity of the June Rockwell Levy Foundation to assist deserving Rhode Island undergraduate students with tuition and living expenses. The fund memorializes the concern for the welfare of Rhode Island residents that was shared by Austin T. Levy, an innovator in busi- ness and philanthropy, and his wife, June Rockwell Levy. William F. Linskey Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund was established in March 1980 by alumni and fnends of William F. Linskey, an athletic trainer long associated with young athletes in and around the Greater Boston area. A former head trainer for the Northeastern University football team and head hockey coach during the 1942-43 season, Linskey has served the City of Cambridge School Department as head athletic trainer and physical therapist for more than thirty years. The income from the fund will be awarded to worthy students pursuing courses leading to a Bachelor of Science in Education with a specialization in athletic training. Financial Aid / 275 Russell T. Lowe Memorial Scholarship Fund College of Engineering This fund was established in 1976 in memory of Russell T. Lowe, a graduate of the College of Engineering, Class of 1953. The endowment funds were provided by the friends and associates of Russell Lowe and by the Barry Wright Corpora- tion, where he served as a member of the Board of Directors and as president of the Industrial and Aero Products Group. The income from the fund will be awarded annually to one or more upperclass students enrolled in the College of Engineering. Preference will be given to Mechanical Engineering majors based upon demonstrable financial need and above-average scholastic achievement. Edward J. Lynn Scholarship College of Business Administration — Accounting This fund was established in 1984 in honor of Edward J. Lynn upon his retirement by friends and associates and by The Continental Group where he served as controller. Mr. Lynn was responsible for estabiisJiing the extensive cooperative education relationships between Northeastern University and his company. The income from the fund will be awarded annually to an upperclass student enrolled in the accounting program of the College of Business Administration. Preference will be given to students who demonstrate financial need and above-average scholastic achievement. Gilbert G. MacDonald Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship was established in 1981 by the family of Gilbert G. MacDonald, former Vice President for Student Affairs and Dean of Students, and the members of the Student Union. The income from the fund will be awarded annually to upperclass students of proven ability and demonstrable financial need. Prefer- ence will be given to students who actively participate in the Student Union. Dr. Reuben J. Margolin Memorial Scholarship Fund Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions The Dr. Reuben J. Margolin Memorial Scholarship Fund was established in 1973 through the generosity of family and friends of Dr. Reuben J. Margolin, an out- standing and dedicated individual and friend who, at the time of his death on April 6, 1972, was Chairman of the Department of Rehabilitation and Special Education at Northeastern University, The income from the Dr. Reuben J. Margolin Memorial Scholarship Fund is awarded annually to a deserving student admitted to or enrolled in the Graduate School of Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions and major- ing in Rehabilitation and/or Special Education. Recipients must demonstrate fi- nancial need as well as the personal and professional qualities exemplified by Dr. Margolin. George T. Marvin Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund was established in 1961 under the provisions of the will of George T. Marvin, a graduate of the Northeastern University School of Law, Class of 1918. Mr. Marvin designated that the income of this fund should be used to provide financial assistance to worthy and needy students to assist them in furthering their education at Northeastern University. George T. Marvin Scholarships may be awarded to new students seeking ad- mission to Northeastern and to students enrolled as freshmen and upperclass- men. Applicants must have satisfactory records of scholarships as of the time of making application and must demonstrate genuine need and good citizenship. 276 / Financial Assistance Merchants Tire Company Scholarship Fund Business Administration This scholarsliip was established in 1972 by Merchants Tire Company in honor of Max Katz, a Class of 1 91 7 alumnus of Northeastern and founder and chairman of the board of Merchants Tire Company. The scholarship is awarded annually with selection preference given to a son or a daughter of a current employee of Merchants Tire Company enrolled as a freshman within the College of Business Administration, who demonstrates financial need, soundness of character, and academic stability. Dean Constantine N. Meriano Memorial Scholarship College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions This scholarship, established by the Class of 1950 of the New England College of Pharmacy and subsequently supported by all Classes of the New England College of Pharmacy and the Northeastern University College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions, is named to honor the memory of Constantine N. Meri- ano, who was the founder. Dean and Chief Executive Officer of the New England College of Pharmacy until his retirement in 1957. In 1962 the New England Col- lege of Pharmacy merged with Northeastern University and is now known as the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions. The scholarship is to be awarded annually to one or more students of the College. Selection will be made by the Committee on Scholarships and will be based on financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. George H. Meserve, Jr., Scholarship Fund College of Arts and Sciences This scholarship was established in 1979 through the generosity of Robert W. Meserve in honor of his brother. Professor George H. Meserve, Jr., an alumnus of the Class of 1925. Professor Meserve served Northeastern faithfully and with distinction for forty-two years, retiring in 1968 as Professor and Chairman of the Department of Art. Announced at the ceremony dedicating George H. Meserve Hall on the Boston campus, this scholarship benefits worthy undergraduate stu- dents who are majoring in Art. Recipients should demonstrate financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. Harash Mitroo Memorial Athletic J Scholarship ^ All Colleges This scholarship was established in 1983 through the generosity of the Mitroo family of New Delhi, India, in memory of Mr. and Mrs. Mitroo's son, Harash, a student in the College of Business Administration who was killed in an automobile accident in 1978. A talented artist and outstanding athlete, Harash received numerous awards for his paintings and for his athletic abilities, including a medal for his performance in an international cricket match against Ceylon. This schol- arship is awarded annually, with preference given to international students, to a member of the varsity men's intercollegiate team in either basketball, football, hockey, or track, who demonstrates financial need, soundness of character, and a spirit of good sportsmanship and fellowship. A trophy, designated as the Har- ash Mitroo Memorial Trophy in Athletics and inscribed with the names of schol- arship recipients will be on permanent display at the University. The Clyde W. Morrison Scholarship Fund All Colleges The Clyde W. Morrison Scholarship was established in 1974 by Clyde W, Morri- son, a member of the class of 1942. The scholarship is to be awarded annually to a Braintree resident enrolled as a freshman, with a demonstrable financial need. Selection is made by the Committee on Scholarships. Financial Aid / 277 Morse Shoe, Inc. Scholarship Fund College of Arts and Sciences This fund was establishied in 1984 by Morse Shoe, Inc. Endowment income is to be used to provide scholarship assistance for an undergraduate who demon- strates financial need, academic stability and soundness of character. Preference will be given to students from Massachusetts. Frederick W. Muckenhoupt Scholarship All Colleges This award was established in 1961 by Dr. and Mrs. Carl F. Muckenhoupt in memory of their son, Frederick W. Muckenhoupt, Class of 1959 of the College of Engineering. The award is to be made annually to a student in good standing on the basis of need. Preference is given to a student enrolled in the Department of Electrical Engineering. Elizabeth A. Neilson Scholarship Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions The Elizabeth A. Neilson Scholarship Fund was established in 1976 in memory of William H. and Anastasia Neilson, exemplars of the profession of health education during their lifetimes. The income from the scholarship fund is awarded annually to a student(s) with the highest scholastic record majoring in Health Education, who has completed eight quarters of academic study with at least four quarters having been taken at Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions. The student(s) must typify the philosophy of the health education profession. Thomas Anthony Pappas Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund was established in 1980 by the Thomas Anthony Pappas Charitable Foundation. Endowment income is to be used to provide scholarship assistance to needy students with high scholastic records. Power Systems Engineering Grants-in-Aid Electrical Engineering A number of public utilities and power equipment manufacturing companies in the northeastern part of the United States have made available grants-in-aid ranging from $1,000 to $5,000 to assist able freshmen who are interested in pursuing careers in power systems engineering through study programs leading to the Bachelor of Science or Master of Science in Electrical Engineering degrees. These awards are made on the basis of academic achievement in high school and aptitude for, and interest in, the field of power systems engineering, without regard to financial need. Candidates for such grants-in-aid should apply to the Dean of Admissions at Northeastern University not later than March 1 of the year in which they wish to enter the College of Engineering. Lawrence Harlow Pratt Athletic Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund was established in 1979 by the Northeastern University Varsity Club in conjunction wth the Athletic Development Program Fund Drive to honor and rec- ognize Lawrence Harlow Pratt. For more than four decades, Larry was the spirit of Northeastern athletics. His greatest joys were the young men he persuaded to 278 / Financial Assistance attend college. He encouraged them, cajoled thenn, sometimes scolded them, but always inspired them to complete their intercollegiate careers and go on to become outstanding members of the community. The income from the fund will be awarded annually to financially deserving varsity athlete(s). Charles Protaps Endowment Fund All Colleges This fund was transferred to Northeastern University in 1983. It was established through the will of Charles Protaps, a Lithuanian immigrant, who became a com- mon laborer in this country. The purpose of the Fund is to aid men and women of Lithuanian extraction to get a higher education. The income of this fund will be used to provide low interest loans of up to $500 to needy and gifted students of Lithuanian extraction, who are pursuing a degree program at Northeastern University. Interest of 5 per cent will begin to accrue when the student either withdraws or graduates from Northeastern. The Gay Miller Reese Memorial Scholarship Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions The Gay Miller Reese Memorial Scholarship was established in 1971 by Everett Reese, in memory of his wife, and by members of the Class of 1921 at their 50th reunion in honor of their classmate and class president, Gay Miller Reese. This scholarship is to be awarded annually to help a well-qualified upperclassman in Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions acquire the education that could not otherwise be possible. The recipient of this award will be selected by the Committee on Scholarships. Regional Scholarships All Colleges Secondary school students who reside in rural areas of New England, who have demonstrated superior achievement in their studies, and who are strongly en- dorsed by their principals and guidance counselors may qualify for a Regional Scholarship. Scholarships range from $200-$1 ,400. The Myer Riesman Scholarship Nursing This fund, established in 1969 in memory of Myer Riesman, is used to provide financial assistance to deserving students in the College of Nursing. Preference is given to those students whose clinical experience is at Beth Israel Hospital. Edward T. Rigney Scholarship All Colleges A fund was established in 1978 by a grant from the Trans-Sonics Foundation in memory of Edward T. Rigney, member of the Class of 1941 and co-founder of Trans-Sonics, Inc. Income is awarded annually to a student showing financial need and promise of success in his/her chosen field and who is enrolled in engineering, science, or science-related studies. The scholarship may be granted to a freshman or upperclassman and may be renewed in succeeding years. Isedore Rosenthal Fund College of Business-Administration The Isedore Rosenthal Fund was established in 1981 by Mrs. Isedore Rosenthal and friends in memory of her husband, a distinguished graduate of the School of Commerce and Finance (1925) and the School of Law (1931). Income from the ^ Financial Aid / 279 fund is to be awarded each year, based on financial need, to freshman account- ing majors for the purchase of books and materials. It is the donor's desire that recipients assume the responsibility in future years to contribute to the principal of this fund as they may be able, in order to make additional resources available for other students in later years. Frank B. Sanborn Scholarship Fund Engineering The Frank B. Sanborn Scholarship Fund was established in 1958 to provide a scholarship or scholarships of not more than $500 to worthy and needy students selected by the University, without restrictions as to race, creed, or geographic origin, but with preference being given to students majoring in Electrical, Me- chanical, Civil, or Industrial Engineering, in the order stated. Recipients must be willing to assume a moral obligation to reimburse the fund as they may be able, to make similar financial aid available for other students in later years. There shall be no interest charged and no time specified for reim- bursement. Clinton H. Scovell Scholarships Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Scholarships are made available to men and women students in Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions through a fund provided by the will of Clinton H. Scovell. Joseph M. Segel Scholarship All Colleges This scholarship fund was established January 9, 1981, by Martin F. Walsh, '52, and his wife, Pauline, to honor Joseph M. Segel on the occasion of his birthday. In 1964 Mr. Segel founded The Franklin Mint, which today is the nation's largest privately-owned mint. The entrepreneurial ethic of Mr. Segel is much the same as that demonstrated by many Northeastern alumni. It therefore is Mr. Segel's desire that recipients of this award demonstrate this quality and also show financial need. The Sidney L. Sholley Memorial Scholarship All Colleges The Sidney L. Sholley Memorial Scholarship has been established in memory of the founder and first president of Keystone Custodian Funds, Inc. Each year the trustees of the Sholley Foundation, Inc., provide a scholarship of $3,500 to be awarded by the University to an outstanding incoming freshman student. The recipient is known as the Sidney L. Sholley Scholar. George A. and Lorraine C. Snell Scholarship All Colleges This fund was established in 1973 by Mr. George A. Snell, a graduate of the College of Engineering, Class of 1941, and a member of the Northeastern Uni- versity Corporation and Board of Trustees, and his wife, Lorraine C. Snell. The income from the fund is to be awarded annually to one or more students enrolled in the basic colleges of Northeastern University, Selection will be made by the Committee on Scholarships based upon those candidates who demon- strate financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. John Stuart Sousa, Jr., Memorial Scholarship Fund Pharmacy This scholarship was established in 1968 in memory of John S. Sousa, Jr., of Fall River, Massachusetts, a student in the College of Pharmacy, Class of 1969, by his family and friends. The scholarship is awarded annually with selection pref- 280 / Financial Assistance erence given to a male or female student entering his/her senior year in the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions who has obtained a cumula- tive quality point average of 2.3, demonstrates financial need, participates in extracurricular activities, and is, preferably, a member of a fraternity or sorority. Southeastern Massachusetts Pharmaceutical Association Scholarship Fund Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions This scholarship was established in 1980 by the Southeastern Massachusetts Pharmaceutical Association. The income from the fund is awarded annually to one or more middler, junior, or senior students enrolled in the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions who are residents of the area covered by the Southeastern Massachusetts Pharmaceutical Association (Greater Fall River, Greater New Bedford, and the Cape Cod areas). Recipients must be Pharmacy majors and must demonstrate financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. Lillian M. Spelman Memorial Scholarship Nursing This scholarship was established in 1979 by a bequest from Lillian M. Spelman, a resident of Boston who, as a public health nurse, dedicated her life to helping others. Her career began in the West End of Boston in the early 1 900s. She served her country unselfishly as a Red Cross nurse in Europe during the First World War. Through this scholarship she continues to help others. Scholarship recipi- ents must exhibit financial need as well as academic stability and soundness of character. Spofford Scholarship Fund All Colleges The Spofford Scholarship is awarded annually to an American Negro, American Indian, or multiracial freshman who demonstrates severe financial need. The Stop & Shop Companies, Inc., Student Loan Fund All Colleges Established in 1974 by The Stop & Shop Companies, Inc., the Student Loan Fund is a combination endowment and revolving fund to be funded by $100,000. This generous gift recognizes the contribution, in human terms, made through the years by Northeastern to Stop & Shop, which at the time the Loan Fund was established counted more than 120 Northeastern men and women in its executive ranks, seven of them vice presidents. The Loan Fund will assist students who have a substantial investment in their education but are in need of some financial stimulus to aid them in completing their work. Student Loan Fund- Health Professions Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions, Nursing, and Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions In 1 974, a foundation established a perpetual loan fund at Northeastern University to benefit full-time students enrolled as middlers, juniors, and seniors in Boston- Bouve College of Human Development Professions, the College of Nursing, and the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions. This loan fund will aid those students who have a substantial investment in and commitment to the health professions and who require some financial help to complete their prepa- ration. Financial Aid / 281 Ruth Page Sweet Scholarship Fund Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Thiis fund was estabiisfied in 1959 by members of tfie Class of 1919 and alumnae of thie Boston-Bouve Schiool in fionor of their classmate, Miss Rutfi Page Sweet, Dean of Women in the School from 1929 to 1946, Administrative Director from 1946 to 1948, and Director from 1948 to 1958. The scholarship is presented to a junior or senior who has demonstrated a high level of professional promise indi- cated by academic record and extracurricular activities. Alice Taylor Scholarship All Colleges Northeastern University recognizes that Alice Taylor, who passed away in 1982, is remembered as a positive force by the Mission Hill community and even more by the tenants of the Mission Hill Extension housing development. Because of Ms. Taylor's contributions, the University has made available to five freshmen who are residents of Mission Hill Extension, full tuition Alice Taylor Scholarships for the freshman year. A. Gilbert Tenney Scholarship Fund Engineering This fund is in memory of A. Gilbert Tenney, who served as a captain in the Air Force during the Korean War and was killed while in active service. The income from the fund will be awarded to a needy student or students in the field of electrical engineering studying under the Cooperative Plan of Education. The Earl H. Thomson Memorial Scholarship All Colleges This fund was established in 1971 to honor the memory of Earl H. Thomson, a distinguished alumnus of the Class of 1925. Mr. Thomson became an internation- ally known trademark attorney as senior partner in the firm of Thomson and Thomson. A member of the Northeastern Corporation since 1958 and a Trustee of the University since 1960, he was also a Director of The National Council, former President of the Northeastern Alumni Association, and a member of the Board of Directors of Nu Epsilon Zeta fraternity. This scholarship is awarded annually to one or more deserving and needy students enrolled as freshmen and/or upperclassmen who demonstrate a desire to fulfill the limits of their ability in academic and cooperative periods of study. The scholarship is open-ended so that additional sums can be added to it in future years and will be administered and awarded by the University without restrictions as to race, creed, geographic origin, or scholastic attainment. It would be Mr. Thomson's desire that scholarship recipients assume a moral obligation to reimburse this or other scholarship funds as they may be able, in order to make additional financial aid available for other students in later years. The Eliot F. Tozer Memorial Scholarship Business Administration and Engineering This fund was established in 1972 through the generosity of the members of the Class of 1931 in memory of their faculty adviser, Eliot F Tozer. The scholarship of $750 is awarded annually to students of proven need in the middler, junior, or senior classes of the day colleges of Engineering or Business Administration. The scholarship is open-ended so that additional sums can be added to it in future years, and will be administered and awarded by the University without restnctions as to race or creed. 282 / Financial Assistance Charles Irwin Traveili Scholarships All Colleges Numerous scholarships have been given yearly since 1932 -to students demon- strating financial need, high academic achievement, and an active interest in University life as shown by participation in one or more major activities. Students are usually honored as recipients of Traveili Scholarships at the completion of their freshman year. Under normal circumstances, these awards will continue through the senior year. Trustee Scholarships All Colleges Established in 1928 by the Board of Trustees of Northeastern University, these full- and partial-tuition scholarships are granted in the Basic Colleges each year to entering freshmen who have demonstrated superior scholastic attainment throughout their preparatory or high school courses. Robert E. Turner Memorial Scholarship Fund Business Administration This scholarship fund was established in 1978 through the generosity of family, friends, and colleagues in memory of Robert E. Turner, a 1952 graduate of North- eastern's College of Business Administration who was associated with the Uni- versity for eighteen years. The income from this fund is awarded annually to assist a College of Business Administration undergraduate student majoring in account- ing who demonstrates financial need, academic stability, and soundness of char- acter. Samuel Ulman Scholarship Fund All Colleges This fund was established in 1960 by Mrs. Samuel Ulman in memory of Samuel Ulman, a student at Northeastern University from 1912 to 1915. The purpose of the fund is to provide scholarship assistance to students in good academic standing who have financial need. University Scholarships All Colleges Northeastern University has for many years maintained a scholarship fund for deserving qualified students. These scholarships are awarded on the basis of need, scholastic standing, and campus citizenship. The recipient of a Northeast- ern scholarship must be willing to assume a moral obligation to repay the Univer- sity at some future date. The UPS Foundation Scholarship Fund Business Administration This endowed fund was established in 1982 by the UPS Foundation, the spon- sored foundation of United Parcel Services, Inc. The income from this fund is awarded annually to undergraduate students enrolled in the College of Business Administration who demonstrate financial need, academic stability, and sound- ness of character. In providing scholarships, preference is given to students majoring in the transportation concentration or planning to enter the transportation industry. Sabestino Voipe Scholarship Fund Engineering The Sabestino VoIpe Scholarship Fund was established in 1972 through the gen- erosity of Mr. Sabestino VoIpe, a distinguished alumnus of the College of Engi- neering and a member of the Class of 1 928. The income from the fund is awarded annually as a scholarship to an upperclass student enrolled in the day Civil Engineering degree program within the College of Engineering. Recipients must demonstrate financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. Financial Aid / 283 Henry Ellis Warren Scholarship Fund All Colleges This endowed fund was established in 1981 by the Warren Benevolent Fund, Inc., to honor the memory of Henry Ellis Warren of Ashland, Massachusetts. The in- come from this fund is awarded annually to undergraduate students who dem- onstrate financial need, academic stability, and soundness of character. In providing scholarships, preference is given to students from Ashland or contig- uous communities. The Jacob Wasserman Scholarship Pharmacy Established in 1966 by his friends in memory of Jacob Wasserman, this fund is to provide scholarship aid to a senior student in the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions. The award will be made annually on the basis of financial need, academic performance, and personal qualities. WCVB Boston Scholarship for a Minority Student in Broadcast Communication College of Arts and Science This scholarship was established in 1984 by WCVB-TV Boston. The income from the fund is awarded annually to a junior, senior, or graduate minority student in broadcast communication, with preference given to a Black, Spanish Surname, Oriental, or American Indian who is economically disadvantaged and to individ- uals who are residents of the New England states. The recipient must be an American citizen and taking courses in newswriting and/or T.V. news production, and other required journalism courses. The scholarship is administered by the Department of Journalism in conjunction with the Office of Financial Aid. Robert W. Yesucevitz Memorial Scholarship Criminal Justice This scholarship fund was established in 1983 in memory of Robert W. Yesucev- itz, a federal police officer employed by the United States Federal Protective Service. Officer Yesucevitz was killed in the line of duty while serving at the John F. Kennedy Presidential Library, and this memorial was created by his family and friends, including many police officers. The income from the fund is awarded annually to a first-year student in the College of Criminal Justice who demon- strates academic promise and financial need. Joseph P. Zabilski Athletic Scholarship Fund All Basic Colleges This fund was established by the Northeastern University Varsity Club in recog- nition of Joseph P. Zabilski's thirty-five years of service to Northeastern University. Mr. Zabilski served with high distinction as teacher, varsity athletic coach, and athletic director. His dedication, enthusiasm, and loyalty to the Northeastern stu- dent athlete provided a model for all to emulate. It is with great pride that the Varsity Club membership provides this award in his name. 284 Other Scholarships The following scholarships are funded by outside sources. Traditionally, Northeastern University students have been awarded these funds. Recommendation for the specific award is made by one of the several college scholarship committees or the departments concerned, in con- junction with the Office of Financial Aid. If you feel you are a potential recipient for any of these awards, notify your financial aid counselor in writing. Dr. Martin E. Adamo Scholarship Pharmacy This scholarship of $100 is given annually by the Boston Association of Retail Druggists in memory of Dr. Martin E. Adamo, the second president of the New England College of Pharmacy. American Foundation for Pharmaceutical Education Scholarships Pharmacy The Board of Grants of the American Foundation for Pharmaceutical Education provides $600 to be drawn upon to aid qualified students in the upper three years who are in the upper quarter of their class and who maintain a "B" or higher grade average. It is understood that the students have received or are eligible to receive assistance in an amount at least equal to the grant provided by the Foundation from other University sources in payment of required college expenses. The use of the grant is restricted to the payment of tuition or other required college fees. The recipients are identified as "Scholars of the American Foundation for Phar- maceutical Education." The Boston Paper Trades Association, Inc., Scholarship Business Administration Established in 1966 by the Boston Paper Trades Association, Inc., this is an annual scholarship awarded to a junior or senior who has demonstrated, by cooperative work achievement and extracurricular activities, an interest and po- tential in the field of sales. The recipient must be of high character, have a good academic record, and be able to demonstrate financial need. Boston Society of Civil Engineers Scholarship In Memory of Desmond FitzGerald Civil Engineering In 1931 , the Boston Society of Civil Engineers established a scholarship in mem- ory of Desmond FitzGerald, a former president of the Society and eminent hy- draulic engineer with a distinguished record of service. It has been awarded annually since 1931 to an outstanding Northeastern Uni- versity senior or junior student in the Department of Civil Engineering of the College of Engineering. The presentation is made by the president of the Boston Society of Civil Engineers at the Society's annual meeting in the spring. Burroughs Wellcome Revolving Loan Fund Pharmacy A revolving loan fund was established by the Burroughs Wellcome Pharmacy Education Program to assist deserving pharmacy students in the completion of their education. This fund is established through the assistance of Richard M. Walent, Sheldon Rubin, Fred Matula, Daniel Venuti, and James Harb, members of the National Association of Retail Druggists. Financial Aid / 285 The William M. Cavanaugh Memorial Scholarship All Colleges This award, established by the members of the Publicity Club of Boston, is open to men and women of the junior and senior classes who demonstrate talent in the field of communications. The scholarship of $100 bears the name of the second president of the Publicity Club (1950-1951), who was an able and successful newspaperman. Civil Engineering Department Award Civil Engineering The Civil Engineering Department Award was established by members of that Department to recognize achievement and give financial assistance to a student who has selected a major in the field of Civil Engineering. This award, in the amount of $100, is financed by gifts from members of the Civil Engineering Department and is awarded to the recipient at the beginning of the sophomore year. Consumer Value Stores Scholarship Pharmacy Preference will be given to a student entering the senior year who will be seeking a career in community pharmacy practice. Students who are working or have worked for Consumer Value Stores will be given added consideration. The final selection will be made on the basis of demonstrated financial need, personal qualifications, and a sound academic record. Two $500 scholarships are offered each year. Electrical Manufacturers Representatives Club of New England, Inc., Scholarship Electrical Engineering Established m 1958, this scholarship of $475 is granted to a student or students majoring in Electrical Engineering, without regard to race, creed, or color. To qualify, students must have real financial need and excellent scholastic standing. Frissora Family Scholarship Award Engineering (Science majors) This award was established by the Frissora family in 1972. Awards are made to freshmen entering Northeastern University, based upon their high school scholas- tic record and financial need. Preference is given to students of Italian-American extraction who are pursuing an education in a technically oriented curriculum such as engineering, science, mathematics, premedicine, or nursing. Application for this scholarship award must be made through the Grand Lodge of Massachusetts, Order Sons of Italy in America, 126 Cambndge Street, Boston, f\/lassachusetts. Students selected will receive a grant of $300 per year for four years. Funds will be paid directly to Northeastern University. Gillman Brothers, Inc., Scholarship Pharmacy This scholarship of $250 is given annually by Gillman Brothers, Inc., to help students further their education in pharmacy. 286 / Financial Assistance Massachusetts State Pharmaceutical Association Scholarship Pharmacy This scholarship of $200, established by the Massachusetts State Pharmaceutical Association, is awarded annually. The recipient must be a resident of Massachu- setts. The Massachusetts State Pharmaceutical Association also awards a number of scholarships of $100. Applications for those scholarships may be secured from the office of the Association at 1 1 Beacon Street, Boston. McKesson and Robbins, Inc., Scholarship Award Pharmacy This award of $200, given annually by McKesson & Robbins, Inc., is awarded to a worthy student who is in financial need. The award recipient is determined by the College of Pharmacy Scholarship Committee and the Office of Financial Aid. The New England Paper Merchants, Inc., Scholarship All Colleges Established in 1959 by the New England Paper Merchants Association, Inc., this is an annual scholarship awarded to a junior or senior who has demonstrated by cooperative work achievement and extracurricular activities an interest and po- tential in the field of sales. The recipient must be of high character, be able to demonstrate financial need, and have a good academic record. Norfolk County Pharmaceutical Association Scholarship Pharmacy This scholarship of $50 is awarded annually to a student who meets the require- ments both financially and scholastically and is a resident of one of the member towns covered by the Norfolk County Pharmaceutical Association (Norwood, Dedham, Canton, Walpole, Millis, Needham, Westwood, and Islington, in Massa- chusetts). Connecticut Alumni Rudolf O. Oberg Scholarships All Colleges Each year the Connecticut Alumni Club awards scholarships to students from Connecticut who have achieved a high academic average in their freshman year and have demonstrated financial need. The scholarships are to be used toward the tuition expense of the sophomore year These scholarships were established in 1958 to promote Northeastern University among the preparatory schools of Connecticut and, in 1971, were named to honor Rudolf O. Oberg, the former Director of Alumni Relations. The Phi Kappa Phi Scholarship All Colleges Established in 1982 by the University's Chapter of Phi Kappa Phi, the national interdisciplinary honor society, the scholarship is available to a student transfer- ring from Roxbury Community College. The nomination is made by the President of Roxbury Community College in accordance with criteria established by the University's chapter. South Middlesex Pharmaceutical Association Pharmacy This tuition scholarship of $100 established in 1960 is awarded annually to a pharmacy student enrolled in the third, fourth, or fifth year who is in good scho- lastic standing and in financial need, and living in the area covered by the South Middlesex Pharmaceutical Association (Arlington, Belmont, Lexington, and Watertown, Massachusetts). The recipient will be selected by the Scholarship Committee. Financial Aid / 287 South Shore Pharmaceutical Association Scholarship Pharmacy In June of each year, the Scholarship Committee of the Association will select a freshman living in the area covered by the South Shore Pharmaceutical Associa- tion (Quincy, Braintree, Weymouth, Hull, Randolph, Hingham, Holbrook, and Co- hasset, Massachusetts), who will be awarded a $100 scholarship to be applied to the tuition of the first semester of the sophomore year. Ernest L. Spencer Scholarship Award Civil Engineering Established in 1975 by the family and friends of Ernest L. Spencer as a memorial, this award is administered by Ci Epsilon, honor society for civil engineers. Profes- sor Spencer, chairman of the Civil Engineering Department from 1963 until his death in 1975, was a member of the Northeastern University faculty for 36 years. At the present time income from the endowment provides an annual award of $500. Nominees are selected from the senior class of Civil Engineering students by the department scholarship committee. Criteria on which the award is based include high academic achievement, active participation in student affairs, and evidence of superior professional promise as demonstrated by high evaluations on cooperative work assignments. Springfield Druggists' Association Scholarship Pharmacy A scholarship of $100 is offered by the Springfield Druggists' Association. This is to be awarded to a sophomore or junior who maintains the highest average in the Department of Pharmacy and who is worthy and in need of financial assistance. The Springfield Druggists' Association Scholarship Fund was established in 1956. 288 Honor Societies and Awards The University encourages the achievement of excellence in scholarship by nnaking monetary awards and chartering honor societies in the var- ious academic disciplines. Honor Societies The following honor societies are chartered in the Colleges: The Academy— in the College of Arts and Sciences Alpha Kappa Delta— in the College of Arts and Sciences, Departnnent of Sociol- ogy and Anthropology Alpha Phi Sigma— in the College of Criminal Justice Alpha Pi Mu— in the College of Engineering, Department of Industrial Engineering and Information Systems Beta Alpha Psi — in the College of Business Administration, Accounting concen- tration Beta Gamma Sigma — in the College of Business Administration (Massachusetts Delta Chapter) Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Honor Society— in the College, all Departments Chi Epsilon— in the College of Engineering, Department of Civil Engineering Delta Phi Alpha — national German honor society Eta Kappa Nu — in the College of Engineering, Department of Electrical Engineer- ing (Gamma Beta Chapter) Kappa Delta Pi— in the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Profes- sions Omega Chi Epsilon— in the College of Engineering, Department of Chemical Engineering Phi Alpha Theta— in the College of Arts and Sciences, Department of History (Northeastern Zeta Tau Chapter) Phi Kappa Phi— national interdisciplinary honor society Phi Sigma— in the College of Arts and Sciences, Department of Biology Phi Sigma lota— in the College of Arts and Sciences, Romance Languages (lota Zeta Chapter) Pi Sigma Alpha — in the College of Arts and Sciences, Department of Political Science (Northeastern Delta Gamma Chapter) Pi Tau Sigma — in the College of Engineering, Department of Mechanical Engi- neering (Northeastern Tau Chapter) Rho Chi Society— in the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions (Beta Tau Chapter) Sigma Epsilon Rho — in University College Sigma Theta Tau— in the College of Nursing Sigma Xi — Scientific Research Society of North America Tau Alpha Pi — in Lincoln College (national engineering technology honor society) Tau Beta Pi — in the College of Engineering (Massachusetts Epsilon Chapter) Election to the college honor societies is based primarily upon schol- arship, but, before a man or woman is privileged to wear the honor society insignia, there must be evidence of an integrity of character and an interest in the extracurricular life of the University. The societies have memberships consisting of the outstanding men and women in the col- leges. Election to an honor society is the highest honor that can be conferred upon an undergraduate. Honor Societies and Awards ' 289 Awards for Upperclassmen University awards are determined by scholastic and citizenship achieve- ment. They are presented by appropriate committees headed by the Dean of Students. The Academy Award Arts and Sciences The Academy, the honor society of the College of Arts and Sciences, offers an annual award of $100 to the sophomore in the College of Arts and Sciences who, during the previous year as a freshman, achieved the highest scholastic record. William Jefferson Alcott, Jr., Award All Colleges This award of $200 was established in 1934 by members of the faculty and other friends to perpetuate the memory of William Jefferson Alcott, Jr., a brilliant mem- ber of the Northeastern Department of Mathematics from 1924 until his death in 1933. The annual award to a senior is made from the income of the fund "for outstanding performance, either in the way of unusual excellence in routine work or in connection with some intellectual activity outside or beyond the requirements of the curriculum." Alumni Awards for Professional Promise All Colleges Established in 1947 by the Alumni Association, these awards are presented an- nually at an Alumni Association meeting in the spring of the year. The awards are made to the outstanding seniors in each of the Basic Colleges and in University and Lincoln Colleges who have demonstrated unusual professional promise through their character traits, scholastic achievement, and cooperative work per- formance. The Beta Gamma Sigma Society Award Business Administration "The purpose of this society shall be to encourage and reward scholarship and accomplishment among students of business administration, to promote the ad- vancement of education in the art and science of business, and to foster integrity in the conduct of business operators." Election to membership in Beta Gamma Sigma is the highest scholastic honor open to a student in business administration. The Massachusetts Delta Chapter of Beta Gamma Sigma, the national honor society of colleges of business administration, offers an annual scholarship of $100 to the sophomore in the College of Business Administration who, during the previous year as a freshman, achieved the highest scholastic record. Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Honor Society Awards Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions The Society offers an annual award of $100 to the sophomore in Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions who, during the previous year as a freshman in the College, achieved the highest scholastic record. Each student voted into the Society receives an engraved certificate at a special Honors As- sembly. 290 / Financial Assistance Cooperative Education Awards All Colleges These awards are presented to seniors in the Basic Colleges in recognition of outstanding performance in the Cooperative Education Program, through which they have personified the objectives and ideals of the University. The awards are presented at the Annual Awards Luncheon, Sears B. Condit Honor Awards All Colleges These awards were established in 1940 through the generosity of Sears B. Con- dit. On Honors Day, Sears B. Condit Honor Awards are presented annually to outstanding students in the senior class. Each award carries a stipend as well as a certificate of achievement. Joseph Arthur Coolidge Achievement Awards Physical Sciences Established in 1977 with funds provided by the will of Joseph A. Coolidge, a distinguished member of the Northeastern University faculty from 1911 to 1954 and Chairman of the Department of Physics from 1912 to 1935, three awards of $500 each are granted annually to the outstanding sophomore, middler, and junior physical sciences students. These awards are based primarily on distin- guished academic achievement, with additional consideration given to sound- ness of character, participation in extracurricular activities on and off campus, and qualities of leadership. Preference will be given to students majoring in physics, mathematics, or other physical sciences. Richard Cardinal Cushing Scholarship All Colleges The Richard Cardinal Cushing Scholarship was established in 1978 through the generosity of the Massachusetts Committee of Catholics, Protestants, and Jews. The income from the scholarship's endowment will be awarded annually to a Catholic, a Protestant, and a Jewish student who embody the principles of brotherhood and justice and who, through their work on campus, have become positive forces for religious understanding. Director's Award The Director's Award of $100 is made annually by the Director of the African- American Institute to the individual judged by the Director to be the most out- standing black senior. The award is based on involvement in African-American Institute programs and scholarship, as well as interaction with the community at large. The award is presented at the Awards and Unity Banquet in June. Alfred J. Ferretti Award Engineering Tau Kappa Chapter of Pi Tau Sigma, the Mechanical Engineering national honor fraternity, sponsors an annual award to the sophomore mechanical engineering student at Northeastern having the highest scholastic standing. The award is named in honor of Professor Ferretti, who retired June 30, 1961, after forty-three years of service to the University. Alfred J. and Laura M. Ferretti Scholarship Engineering This scholarship was established in 1978 by Professor Alfred J. Ferretti, who retired in 1961 after forty-three years of service to Northeastern University. It honors the memory of Mrs. Ferretti and is to benefit worthy undergraduate stu- dents who are majoring in Mechanical Engineering. Recipients should demon- strate high academic achievement by maintaining a minimum average of 3.0 and should be of sound character. Honor Societies and Awards / 291 Luis de Flores Endowment Fund All Colleges This fund was established in 1964 to provide yearly awards to students in recog- nition of superior ingenuity, irrespective of general academic standing. Clara and Joseph F. Ford Awards All Colleges The Ford Awards are made to students who have shown a democratic and tolerant spirit and who are well disposed toward people of all creeds and races. They are chosen from the senior class and judged on the basis of their contribu- tions through participation or leadership and their extracurricular organizations. Students must have demonstrated by their actions that they are particularly tol- erant and willing to work with and for other people. The Harold D. Hodgkinson Achievement Awards All Colleges Established in 1954, the Harold D. Hodgkinson Achievement Awards of $1,000 each are granted annually to a senior student in Division A and Division B. The winners of the awards are known as the Hodgkinson Scholars for the year in which they are chosen. The award is based primarily upon distinguished scholastic achievement with due consideration of character, personality, qualities of leadership, cooperative work experience, military record (if any), and service in voluntary organizations and activities. Student leadership accomplishments and professional potential are evaluated in connection with these criteria. The Hodgkinson Scholars are chosen by a committee of administrative mem- bers of the faculty. An appropriate certificate is presented to each recipient as a permanent record of his/her selection. Kappa Delta Pi Award Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Kappa Delta Pi honor society offers an annual award of $100 to the sophomore who, during the freshman year, achieved the highest scholastic record. Robert D. Klein Memorial Scholarship Arts and Sciences This scholarship was established in 1 981 through the generosity of family, friends, and colleagues of Professor Klein, who joined the Northeastern University faculty in 1957, served as acting chairman of the Department of Mathematics between 1969 and 1970 and, from 1977 until his death in 1978, was a professor of math- ematics. The scholarship is awarded annually to a freshman student enrolled in the College of Arts and Sciences who demonstrates consistent effort and aca- demic achievement in remedial mathematics, the educational program to which Professor Klein contributed so significantly. Joseph C. Lawler Memorial Scholarship Civil Engineering This scholarship was established in 1982 by family, fnends, and colleagues in memory of Joseph C. Lawler, an alumnus of the College of Engineering, Class of 1943 and a recipient of a University Honorary Degree in 1972. Mr. Lawler was a member of Northeastern's Corporation and Board of Trustees. He was chairman and chief executive officer of Camp Dresser & McKee, Inc., the firm where he 292 /Financial Assistance began his employment as a co-op student ot Northeastern. A $2,000 award will be made annually to an upperclass (middler, junior, or senior) full-time undergrad- uate civil engineering day student who demonstrates exceptional professional promise. Criteria include academic performance, cooperative employer recom- mendations, demonstrated leadership abilities and/or community service activi- ties. The Lilly Achievement Award Pharmacy The Lilly Achievement Award is given to a graduating senior for superior scholas- tic and professional achievement. Leadership qualities, professional attitudes, and academic performance will be considered in the selection of the individual for this award. McKesson & Robbins, Inc., Scholarship Pharmacy This scholarship of $200, given annually by McKesson & Robbins, Inc., is awarded to a worthy student in financial need. Susan L. Orchard Memorial Fund All Colleges In 1978, the Susan L. Orchard fVlemorial Fund was established at Northeastern in memory of Susan L. Orchard, a former University student. Reflecting Susan's interest in improving the quality of life and opportunities for women, the annual income of this fund will be awarded to mothers pursuing their studies at North- eastern who require financial assistance in order for their children to make use of the University's Day Care Center. Recipients will be selected by the Center's Director and Advisory Committee. The Phi Sigma Society Award Arts and Sciences Phi Sigma, honor society in the Department of Biology, offers an annual award of $50 to the junior or senior mapring in biology or a related science who demon- strates the greatest research potential. To qualify for the award, the student must be a member of Phi Sigma. Roland Guyer Porter Memorial Fund Electrical Engineering This fund was established in 1953 by colleagues and friends of the late Professor Roland G. Porter, for many years the head of the Department of Electrical Engi- neering. Interest from the fund provides an annual award to a student in the Department of Electrical Engineering who best exemplifies the qualities of mind and character that Professor Porter did so much to develop in his lifetime. President's Awards All Colleges On the annual Honors Day, six awards of $500 each, known as the President's Awards, are presented to the students with the highest records in both divisions of the sophomore, middler, and junior classes. The William Rand Award Engineering The Massachusetts Epsilon Chapter of Tau Beta Pi annually offers an award to the outstanding middler in the College of Engineering. The award is based upon outstanding scholarship, breadth of interest, and contribution to the University. All middlers with a 3.5 average or above are eligible; the winner is chosen after careful screening and interviews with members of the chapter. Honor Societies and Awards / 293 The Mildred A. Reardon Scholarship Award All Colleges Delta Pi Alpha Sorority sponsors an annual award of $100 to a deserving female student in [he Basic Colleges. Selection is made by the Dean of Students on the basis of academic standing and other considerations. The award is given in honor of an outstanding alumna of Northeastern and Delta Pi Alpha, whose academic excellence, strength of character, and qualities of leadership have typified the ideal for which the sorority strives. ROTC Awards ROTC Awards totaling $1 ,000 are available to ROTC cadets each year. The University offers ten $50 awards annually— four to sophomores, four to middlers, and two to juniors. Scabbard and Blade (the cadet officers' honor society) offers one award an- nually to middlers. The Pershing Rifles (the basic-course honor society) offers a $50 award to a sophomore Pershing Rifles cadet. Academic Achievement Awards are won by each cadet in the top 10 percent of ROTC classes. This award, a wreath, is worn above the right breast pocket of the uniform during the year immediately following the year it is earned. Leadership Achievement Awards, consisting of letters of commendation, are awarded to each cadet in the top 10 percent in leadership potential. Many medals and trophies are also awarded by other organizations to ROTC cadets for achievements in diverse fields. Nguzo Saba Award Two Nguzo Saba Awards are presented each year by the African-American Insti- tute to the black male and female who have proved themselves of invaluable service to the black community of Northeastern University and Boston. The award is in the amount of $100 and is presented at the Awards and Unity Banquet. Sigma Theta Nursing Sigma Theta, the honor society in the College of Nursing, annually offers an award of $100 to the sophomore in the College of Nursing who, during the previous year as a freshman, achieved the highest scholastic record. Professor Joseph Spear Fund for Excellence in Student Activities This fund was established by the College of Engineering Class of 1923 in recog- nition of Professor Spear, class adviser and mentor. It was through Professor Spear's devotion and concern for the well-being of the students that he devel- oped and promoted student activities at Northeastern University. Professor Spear has been referred to as the "Father of Student Activities." The purpose of this fund is to provide a source of income that can be awarded annually to juniors and seniors who have made outstanding contributions to student activities. Max Starr Award Business Administration The Max Starr Award in Public Accounting was established in 1968 by the Max Starr Foundation to recognize every other year an outstanding member of the junior class in the College of Business Administration preparing for a career in public accounting. The recipient is chosen on the basis of both academic and cooperative work records as well as personal qualities. The student receives awards of $250 in both the junior and senior years. The Dr. Ruth E. Sullivan Memorial Scholarship Fund Arts and Sciences This fund was established at Northeastern University in 1976 through the gener- osity of family, friends, and colleagues of Dr. Sullivan, who was a member of the Department of English from 1968 until her death in 1976. One scholarship is 294 / Financial Assistance awarded annually to an undergraduate senior who dennonstrates academic achievennent and excellence in interdisciplinary studies in the liberal arts, such as literature and psychology, the fields to which Dr. Sullivan contributed so signif- icantly. Tau Beta Pi Award Engineering Massachusetts Epsilon Chapter of Tau Beta Pi Association, national honor society in engineering, annually offers a scholarship of $100 to the sophomore in the College of Engineering who, during the previous year as a freshman, made the highest scholastic record. student Support Services and Resources 296 University Libraries Alan R. Benenfeld, B.Met.E., M.L.S., M.S., Dean and Director Together, the collections, services, staff, and facilities of the Northeast- ern University Libraries provide access to information, and an under- standing of the organization of the literature and other information resources of the academic disciplines. In so doing, the Library is integral to the academic and research processes, whether these occur in a formal classroom, seminar, or laboratory setting or through individual study and enrichment. Libraries The University Libraries include seven facilities of which Dodge, on the Boston campus, is the main library. Dodge houses the materials that support the University's programs in the humanities, social sciences, fine arts, education, engineering, criminal justice, nursing, business, and at the undergraduate level, in the sciences. Also located on the Boston campus are three libraries which house graduate-level collections in physics and electrical engineering, in math- ematics and psychology, and in chemistry, biology, pharmacy, and allied health. In addition, there are three libraries that support the academic programs at the Burlington and Dedham campuses and at the Marine Science Institute in Nahant. The University is presently planning a new central library for the Bos- ton campus. It will more than double the amount of space available to house and use the library's collections and services and for study. This new facility is being designed to incorporate the latest online, telecom- munications and media technologies into all library services. Collections The total holdings of the University Libraries include the equivalent of more than one million volumes in print and in microform, and current subscriptions to approximately 4,000 periodical and newspaper titles. The Library also collects other types of materials such as scores, tech- nical reports, government documents, and audiovisual resources. The collections are especially strong in the sciences, engineering, business, criminal justice, and nursing. Among the many special series available in microformat are important collections in anthropology, edu- cation, government, history, literature, and business. In addition to a large reference collection in Dodge, there are specialized reference collections in each of the libranes. Dodge Library is a federal depository and actively maintains over 250,000 documents, reports, and other publications made available through the U.S. Government Pnnting Office. Strengths of the docu- ments collection include Congressional hearings and reports, census materials, and publications issued by the Departments of Commerce, Justice, Health and Human Services, and Housing and Urban Develop- ment. Language and music listening laboratories are made available in the Learning Resources Center. The Center provides a wide range of self- paced media and computer-related resources including programmed texts, filmstrips, audiotapes, videotapes, cassettes, recordings, and mi- crocomputers. Student Support Services and Resources / 297 A special collection on international aspects of higher education is housed in the Center for International Higher Education Documen- tation (CIHED). The CIHED collection is unique to the Boston area. The University Archives serves as a depository for the historical records of the University. Faculty publications as well as student year- books, newspapers, and Northeastern dissertations are also housed in the Archives. Services Library staff are available in all service areas to assist students in both retrieving and using the resources in the University Libraries. Computer printouts located at various service areas may be consulted to determine if a book is checked out, on order, on reserve, or in storage. The circu- lation staff provide a search service for students who are unable to locate a book on the shelf. A series of publications are prepared by the library staff to acquaint students with the collections in the University Libraries and to help stu- dents with their research. These include short guides to types of re- sources, such as encyclopedias and periodicals, to resources in particular disciplines, such as economics and nursing, or in specific subjects, such as science fiction and Caribbean music. In each unit of the University Libraries, librarians provide reference assistance. In addition, librarians provide instruction to groups and to individuals on the bibliographic research process and on strategies for locating and using library resources. Each quarter, a series of tutorials is offered giving students further opportunities to meet with a librarian to discuss particular or specialized research needs. Peer tutoring in academic subjects, such as physics is coordinated by the staff in the Learning Resources Center. Computer-assisted in- struction and tutoring, particularly in the areas of chemistry and mathe- matics, is available through the Center's Assessment Tutoring and Enrichment Resources program. All tutoring services arranged through the University Libraries are provided at no cost to the student. Online retrieval of bibliographic citations using commercial databases is provided, for a fee, through the Library's Computer Search Services. Citations to information in the databases typically cover journal articles, dissertations, technical reports, and symposia. A variety of finding aids, such as union lists of serials, are available in each library for consultation should needed materials not be in the col- lections of the University Libraries. Assistance in using such aids is available from staff; in addition, Interlibrary Loan staff may also conduct a computenzed location search. Subject to certain conditions, Interli- brary Loan staff may be able to borrow material from another library. Boston Library Consortium Northeastern University is a member of the Boston Library Consortium, a cooperative arrangement among the following academic and research institutions: Boston College, Boston Public Library, Boston University, Brandeis, MIT, the State Library of Massachusetts, Tufts University, the University of Massachusetts (Amherst, Boston, and Worcester cam- puses), and Wellesley College. The University's membership in the Bos- ton Library Consortium generally allows for on-site use by, but does not grant borrowing privileges to, students at Northeastern. Some of the Consortium libraries and many of the other libraries in the Boston area require that a visiting student present a special pass or letter of introduc- tion. A reference librarian can advise about such student visitor policies. 298 Freshman Orientation Programs Except for the visits students will make to the Admissions Office, the first opportunity to learn about Northeastern and to meet classmates, admin- istrators, faculty members, and advisers will come during the freshman orientation period. The program for orientation is planned and supervised by the Director of Orientation who will see to it that students are introduced to the cus- toms and people that make up the University. At that time, registration, class schedules, and other procedures and details necessary for enroll- ment will be completed. During the orientation period, in accordance with a long-standing tra- dition, students will be welcomed by the President at a special convo- cation. They also will be able to meet with deans and others who will have important roles in their college careers. Upperclass students generously volunteer their time to assist in set- ting up and running programs that provide opportunities for relaxation, recreation, and cultural enrichment. Members of the Dean of Students' staff are available during the orientation period and throughout the year to answer questions and provide assistance. Office of Freshman Affairs Anthony J. Bajdek, M.A., Associate Dean and Director The Office of Freshman Affairs bears particular responsibility for moni- toring and facilitating the academic progress of freshmen by providing academic and personal counseling and appropriate administrative ac- tion. Freshman Affairs applies academic policy, authorizes changes of major (both within and between colleges), and prepares special course schedules for students who change their majors, as well as for those with advanced placement or advanced standing credit. In addition, the Office of Freshman Affairs surveys the academic status of all freshmen. The staff identifies freshmen with deficient academic records for aca- demic probation, authorizes summer corrective work, and reenters eli- gible students at the freshman level. Midway through each academic quarter, a computer-based Interim Academic Status Report system, in- volving progress reports prepared by instructors of freshmen, provides detailed evaluations for use by students and the 180 faculty who serve as their advisers. This evaluation is a preventive measure, designed to help detect and correct potentially failing freshmen. To support the academic progress of freshmen, the Office of Fresh- man Affairs manages the freshman advisory system, and conducts ap- propriate research to measure the success of specific academic support activities. When students complete the three academic quarters of the freshman year, the Office of Freshman Affairs reviews their academic records to determine eligibility for sophomore status. 299 Academic Assistance Center Maurice Kaufman, Ph.D., Director The Academic Assistance Center is located at 151 Cahners Hall. The Center offers a variety of services for students who wish to improve their academic performance and develop their reading and study skills. It also provides services for students having difficulty with coursework and for students with severe learning problems. The staff of the Center di- agnose academic problems, provide instruction, and make referrals when appropriate. The Center provides the opportunity for peer tutoring in subject areas, individual and small group instruction in mathematics, intensive reading and study skills workshops, and preparatory and review workshops in mathematics and other selected subjects. Students are encouraged to attend pertinent workshops which are announced each quarter. Through its Reading Lab, the Center helps students to develop read- ing comprehension, study habits, vocabulary, and related skills. At the Reading Lab, instruction is supplemented by supervised practice ses- sions. Students should contact the Center to receive help in diagnosing academic problems, to improve reading and study skills, and to arrange for group instruction or individual tutoring in specific subject areas. The Center will refer students to other services available at Northeastern when that is appropriate. The Academic Assistance Center can be reached at 61 7-437-4300. Preprofessional Advising The Pre-Health Professions Advisory Committee, a University-wide group, offers preprofessional counseling for students interested in a career in medicine, dentistry, or related professional medical fields. The Committee members are available to discuss the various medical fields, minimum admissions requirements, and the application process. For students preparing for a career in law, there are also a number of faculty members who can serve as advisers and resource personnel on related curricular and admissions questions. In addition, the Department of Graduate Placement Services provides information and advice on procedures for admission, preparation of ap- plications, and the scheduling of appropriate admissions tests. For further information regarding the above, students should contact Gail Leclerc in 400 Meserve Hall. Department of Education Services The F. Andre Favat Center The Center houses an extensive library of children's literature, books, journals, tests, and other materials designed primarily to support academic programs of the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions, but is open to all University students. 300 / Student Support Services and Resources The Reading Clinic The Clinic offers a wide range of diagnostic and corrective services for a variety of reading and language problems. It is open to persons of all ages, including University students. With video- taping and viewing facilities, it occupies a suite of fourteen private rooms in Holmes Hall. Faculty members are also qualified to administer such tests as the WAIS, WISC, BINET, ITPA, Bender, and most standardized instruments. Speed Reading The department offers a noncredit course designed to improve skills in rapid critical and pleasure reading. Offered each academic quarter, the course is available at a reduced tuition rate to students, staff, and alumni of the University. The Counseling and Testing Center Philip W. Pendleton, Ph.D., Director The purpose of the Counseling and Testing Center is to offer assistance to students in a wide variety of areas such as career planning, personal and life adjustment problems, study skills, anxiety, choice of major, im- proving academic progress, and interpersonal relationships. At the Cen- ter, students are encouraged to discuss their concerns with a counselor. Following this they may decide to continue individual counseling, take psychological tests to increase their knowledge of themselves, join a group of students with whom they can share concerns, use self-help tapes, or make use of the Center's extensive file of information about careers and services. Academic Computer Services Robert J. Fitzpatrick, B.S., Acting Director Over the past few years the use of computers in scientific, business, and educational environments has been changing dramatically. First, punched cards were widely replaced by interactive video terminals; then personal computers vastly increased the number of people who have access to, and routinely use, computers. Of late, these personal com- puters have become more and more powerful at an ever decreasing cost. Academic Computer Services, located in the basement of Richards Hall (telephone: 437-2334), supports the research activities of faculty, research personnel, and graduate students, as well as teaching and learning activities at both the graduate and undergraduate levels. The computational capability of this facility includes 200 IBM personal com- puters, linked in local area networks at the Boston, Burlington, and Ded- ham campuses. A wide area network also provides both students and faculty with time-sharing access to five large computers through video and hard-copy terminals arranged in clusters at all three campuses. The wide area network connects three Digital Equipment Corporation VAX- 11/780 systems in Richards Hall plus an additional VAX 11/785 and a Data General MV/8000 in the Engineering Computer Center. This net- work also provides access through a number of dial-in telephone lines, primarily for faculty use, to all five computers. Student Support Services and Resources / 301 Effective utilization of all facilities is promoted by the availability of programming assistance at all three campuses. A variety of graphics and output devices are also available. Electronic spreadsheet and word processing packages are available, as well as numerous software li- braries for numerical, statistical, and financial applications. The primary languages supported for those who choose to do their own program- ming are FORTRAN, COBOL, BASIC, PASCAL, LISP, PU1, C, and As- sembler. The Center for Instructional Technology Mina B. Ghattas, Ph.D., Director The Center for Instructional Technology (CIT) is a multi-service unit whose mission is to support and enhance teaching and learning activi- ties at the University. CIT is comprised of the following three divisions that provide faculty and students with a comprehensive range of instruc- tional support services. Office of Instructional Development and Evaluation The Office of Instructional Development and Evaluation (O.I.D.E.) assists individual faculty and departments in designing, developing, and eval- uating instructional processes or products. It provides course/teaching evaluation and teaching improvement services through the Teacher/ Course Evaluation Project (TCEP). It provides workshops and seminars on teaching/learning issues for faculty and assists other offices in the development of training activities for the University community. This di- vision also provides consultation on, and coordination of, the production of instructional materials and media of all kinds; and offers consultation and assistance in matenals, course, curriculum, program, and other types of evaluation. Instructional Media Production, Training, and Utilization Services Instructional Media Production, Training, and Utilization Services pro- vides training and assists faculty, staff, and students in the production of presentational media materials, e.g., graphics, 35mm slides, slide/ tapes, overhead projectuals, portable video, etc.; provides professional graphics and photography services; and identifies, previews, acquires, and maintains 16mm films, videocassettes, filmstrips, slides, multi-me- dia units, and other technology-based instructional matenals. It coor- dinates rental of 16mm films and videotapes from outside sources; maintains a preview facility for individual or small-group use; and offers orientations, media demonstrations, and training workshops to Univer- sity groups. Campus Media Services Campus Media Services makes available all types of audiovisual equip- ment and instructional media materials for the support of classroom instruction on a prescheduled basis. Items include film, filmstrip, slide, opaque, and overhead projectors, audio and videotape recorders, video cameras, monitors and projectors, portable public address systems, telelecture equipment, record players, and projection screens. This di- vision also distributes instructional materials from the collection owned 302 / Student Support Services and Resources by the University, such as 16mnn films, videotapes, filmstrips, film loops, slides, and audio cassettes. Certain equipment is reserved for student use, and students may borrow instructional materials with faculty ap- proval. A catalog of Northeastern owned instructional materials is avail- able at no charge. Office of Minority Student Affairs Keith Motley, M.S. Ed., Director The Office of Minority Student Affairs was created in 1968 to respond to the special needs of minority students in the Northeastern community. Contact with minority students is established prior to registration, contin- ues throughout the first academic year at Northeastern, and thereafter is maintained and encouraged as long as the student wishes. The staff of the Office of Minority Student Affairs provides assistance and guidance in academic matters such as registration, scheduling of courses, choosing an academic program, and developing academic assistance, as well as financial, social, and career counseling. The Of- fice is also a link between minority students and other departments within the University and assists in the resolution of problems that arise with faculty, staff, or administrators. In this context, the Office helps to make the students' personal and academic environment conducive to educational growth. The academic performance of all Black freshmen is monitored within the Office of Minority Student Affairs and the determination is made as to whether or not a student is in good academic standing, to be placed on probation, or dismissed from the University. For more information about the Office of Minority Student Affairs, call 617-437-2787. Office of IVIulticultural Student Affairs Roland E. Latham, C.A.G.S., Dean The Office of Multicultural Student Affairs has been created for the pur- pose of more efficiently meeting the needs of Third World students. The Office oversees the coordination and implementation of support services provided by the English Language Center and the International Student Office. Moreover, the Office of Multicultural Student Affairs provides ad- vocacy representation at the upper level of University administration, thereby insuring that Third World students' needs are being comprehen- sively addressed. 303 The International Student Office Sally M. Heym, B.A., Director The International Student Office provides a wide variety of services for the more than 2,000 foreign undergraduates, graduates, and faculty at Northeastern. Specific services range from counseling international stu- dents regarding immigration regulations and academic, financial, and personal concerns, to issuing forms and official documents which stu- dents use to transfer funds from home and travel outside the United States. The ISO is also a center for international student activities and spon- sors such events as ski trips, dinners, tours, picnics, and an International Week in the Spring. It also publishes a quarterly newsletter. The ISO strives to promote cultural understanding among international students and Americans by presenting cross-cultural communication workshops, orientation programs, and activities. The ISO also acts as a liaison between the various departments and colleges and the many different public and private agencies which have concern for the affairs of foreign nationals in the academic community. International Student Information The University welcomes qualified students from foreign lands who are adequately prepared to benefit from the educational, cultural, and social opportunities it has to offer. Currently, over 2,000 international students from 106 different countries attend Northeastern. Northeastern University is authorized under federal law to enroll non- immigrant aliens as full-time students in degree-granting programs of its basic undergraduate colleges and graduate schools. Part-time and spe- cial students are not included in this authorization. Because of problems of adjustment experienced by many students from foreign countries, the University makes a special effort to carefully evaluate the educational and financial qualifications of prospective stu- dents. The University has an international student adviser and staff to administer to the special needs of these students. International students who have never attended an institution of higher learning or who have already attended college or a university and want to transfer to Northeastern should write to the Department of Undergrad- uate Admissions for information and applications. Applicants who have already received a degree or diploma from a university or college and seek information concerning graduate schools at Northeastern should write to the specific graduate school in which they are interested in matriculating. University admissions policies for international students are found on page 243. The University does not award financial aid to international students at the undergraduate level. 304 English Language Center Paul C. Krueger, C.A.G.S,, Director The English Language Center provides an important resource for inter- national students at Northeastern. Its goal is to ensure that students who speak English as a second language are proficient enough to carry on full-time studies in a degree program without language-related prob- lems. The Center administers the Intensive English Program, which of- fers three levels of intensive, noncredit courses in English as a second language — beginning, intermediate, and advanced. Intensive English classes are open to undergraduate and graduate students, as well as to students who come to Northeastern to study English only. Those stu- dents also admitted to a degree program in the University may take, with the approval of the Director of the English Language Center, courses for credit while studying Intensive English at the advanced level. The Intensive English Program offers twenty hours of classroom in- struction per week, as well as a number of special services. The weekly program includes classes in English structure, reading, writing, listening, and speaking skills, as well as small group tutorials, practice in a lan- guage laboratory and in a writing laboratory, and help from a pronunci- ation specialist as needed. English Language Center staff work closely with staff from the International Student Office, other offices in Student Affairs, the academic departments, and other University services. In addition to serving students, the English Language Center provides advice and consultation to the Northeastern community at large. Center staff are available to answer questions from teachers, administrators, and students and are able to design special programs for special needs at short notice. For more information about the English Language Center call 617-437-2455. University Health Services Lane Health Center Job E. Fuchs, M.D., Director A comprehensive program of medical care is provided to all full-time registered students in the Basic Colleges, both graduate and under- graduate. The University maintains a Health Services Clinic in the For- syth Building, Room 135, which is open for emergencies at all times and is equipped to deal promptly with any medical condition that may arise. All entering students must submit a pre-entrance physical examination form provided by the Lane Health Center prior to registration. Failure to fulfill this requirement can delay registration and result in a penalty fee and an additional fee for a physical examination. Regular clinic hours for the student body are held by staff physicians from 9:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday. Health Services can be reached at all times by telephoning 617-437-2772. Student Support Services and Resources / 305 Specialty clinics in surgery, orthopedic surgery, gynecology, and fer- tility control and planning are scheduled at specified hours. Please check times with the Health Services office. Pregnancy testing and ve- nereal disease diagnosis and treatment services are always available during clinic hours. Allergy testing and treatment for students with al- lergic problems are done at the Lane Health Center at no cost except for a nominal fee for the cost of the extracts. Allergic desensitization injections using extract provided by the student's own physician will be given at no cost provided the extract is received in good condition, properly labeled, and with a dosage schedule. Consultation with the various medical and surgical specialists who are not physically present in the clinic will be arranged when deemed necessary by a Health Ser- vices physician. The cost of the first visit will be borne by the Health Services. Special X-ray and laboratory procedures that are unavailable in the Health Services but are deemed necessary- by a staff physician will be provided. A full spectrum of mental health services is available. A mental health specialist is present daily, and students are urged to use this service even for minor emotional upsets. All full-time graduate and undergraduate students are covered by a special Blue Cross and Blue Shield policy, which remains in effect con- tinuously from the day of initial registration until the first of the month following withdrawal, dismissal, or graduation. Married students are urged to go to the Finance Office (249 Richards Hall) to purchase sup- plementary coverage for dependents. An infirmary is also maintained in the Forsyth Building for the care of students living in University dormitories and apartment houses. The re- quired infirmary fee entitles students to twenty days' care in the infirmary at no additional charge. Students are urged to come to the clinic during regular clinic hours in order to take advantage of all of our facilities. Office of Services for the Handicapped Ruth K. Bork, M.Ed., Director Very often, the degree of physical accessibility and types of available support services play an important part in a disabled student's selection of a college. An examination of Northeastern University's campus map shows the buildings to be located within relatively close proximity to one another. Nearly all buildings have elevators that are open to use by all. A special advantage at Northeastern is the existence of a tunnel system, constructed prior to 1965, that links most buildings; in the harsh New England winters and during inclement weather, this proves to be a wel- come feature to all. Any student who has a disability-related special need — no matter how small or individual — can receive ready support services from the Office of Services for the Handicapped (OSH). Frequently, students are uncer- tain about how they may be aided by this office, and in these situations a discussion of possible alternatives can be quite helpful. OSH provides a wide range of support services to eliminate the competitive disadvan- tages that a disability may create. Services are individually tailored to meet the needs of each student. 306 / Student Support Services and Resources If you have a disability, you are strongly urged to meet with the staff in OSH early on in your consideration of Northeastern. Together, you can discuss the types of service that would best meet your needs, and you will have an opportunity to see the campus firsthand. If a visit is not possible, contact the OSH Director by phone or by mail to avoid the unnecessary delays and confusion that may arise with last-minute ad- justments; telephone; 617-437-2675 (voice) or 617-437-2730 (TTY). The following types of assistance are available from the Office of Services for the Handicapped; Orientation — Tailored to the needs of specific disability groups, orienta- tion utilizes tactile maps for vision-impaired students, interpreters for hearing-impaired students, and accessible routes of travel for mobility- impaired students. Registration and Preregistration — Assistance to help ensure class ac- cessibility and course adaptation. Counseling — Personal, academic, and referral services. l-lousing — Necessary modification in residence halls. For tlie Visually-Impaired Students— OSh assists in securing taped and braille textbooks and materials; readers; campus orientation; tactile maps; and auxiliary aids such as brailler, Visualtek reader, raised-line drawing kits, large-print typewriter, talking-book machine, magnifiers, talking calculators, variable-speed tape recorders, and Kurzweil Read- ing Machine. For the Hearing-Impaired Student— OSH offers services including oral and sign language interpreters; note takers; TTY; audiometric testing, hearing-aid evaluation, fitting, and orientation; instruction in sign lan- guage and speech reading; speech therapy. Sign language interpreting and oral interpreting services will be provided to deaf and hearing- impaired students only after they have been denied such services by their Division of Vocational Rehabilitation, provided the Office of Services for the Handicapped has received information documenting the reason for such denial. For the Learning Disabled Student— OSH assists in securing taped text- books and materials; readers; untimed testing; asistance in securing course and program modification. Services will be provided only upon receipt of diagnostic testing, documentation, and prescriptive write-ups. Students without this material can be referred to appropriate agencies for testing. For the Wheelchair User/Mobility-Impaired Student— OSH offers infor- mation on appropriate routes of travel, assistance in relocating classes, adaptive physical education, and physical therapy. General Assistance Services — Includes scribes; advocacy liaison with instructors and other University staff; HP parking; corrective tutoring in English writing, reading, and language problems; special examination situations. Information Clearinghouse— Oi^e^s articles, periodicals, books, and other literature for, about, and by disabled individuals. The Office of Services for the Handicapped is also the gathering place for the Disabled Student Organization of Northeastern University, which works cooperatively with OSH to plan programs and improve accessi- bility of services for handicapped persons at Northeastern. 307 Department of Career Development and Placement Sidney F. Austin, M.Ed., Dean and Director The Department of Career Development and Placement offers a wide range of counseling and placement assistance to all seniors and alumni of Nortfieastern University seeking employment; to undergraduates seeking admission to graduate or professional school; and to students interested in participating in nonpaid, part-time internships in private or public nonprofit agencies for which they may receive academic credit. Through this department, representatives of hundreds of employers are scheduled to visit the campus each year to interview seniors and graduate students for full-time employment after graduation. A job bank of currently available positions is maintained for seniors or alumni who are seeking opportunities for which they miay be qualified. Credential service is provided for students and alumni seeking positions in fields that require them and for applicants to graduate and professional schools. Regularly scheduled seminars are conducted for seniors and alumni on career development, job-finding techniques, resume prepa- ration, and effective interviewing. Individual career counseling is avail- able for seniors and alumni of all University programs. Office of Parents' Services Virginia A. Stephanos, M.S.Ed., Director The Office of Parents' Services provides a central counseling and re- sources operation for parents of undergraduate and graduate students at Northeastern, facilitating the resolution of problems and the exchange of information. The Office maintains contact with the various academic deans' offices, with Cooperative Education, Dean of Students, Financial Aid, Housing, Registrar's Office, Bursar, and other administrative de- partments that may relate to parents' concerns. In addition, the Office also offers parents social and cultural programs to promote a better understanding of Northeastern's diversified academic and administra- tive departments. HELP Legal Service HELP Legal Service Plan offers low-cost legal service to undergraduate students at greatly reduced rates. The annual membership fee is $15. Complete confidentiality is assured. Service is available Monday-Friday, 10 a.m.-4 p.m.. Room 264, Ell Center, telephone 437-2636. m student Activities 310 Student Activities at Northeastern The University regards student activities as an integral part of education and provides for a range of activities to spark your interest and satisfy your inclinations: you are given the opportunity to play intramural sports on a wide variety of teams; write for the Northeastern News; broadcast over WRBB, the student-operated radio station; act, dance, sing, play music, or become involved with student government. The University encourages relaxation and socializing: you can meet new friends by joining any of the more than 150 campus clubs and organizations, attend a lecture, a film, or a play, or go skiing or camping in the mountains. Once you begin to take advantage of what is available on campus, there's no telling what you will learn or whom you might meet. If you are a commuter student, it is likely that a good portion of your between-class time will be spent in the Carl S. Ell Student Center. The dominant feature of the main level of this "student building" is the mag- nificent main lounge. Five stories in height, the lounge will comfortably seat 800 students — a good place for quiet conversation or contempla- tion. Below the lounge are a cafeteria and the Rathskeller, where the sounds are much more audible. In addition, the Center has a ballroom, a piano practice room, a large gameroom with billiards and table tennis equipment, study rooms, a typing room, a computer room, and many meeting and function rooms. The Information Booth staff can help with any questions and also offers printing and photocopying services. The Student Center is that part of Northeastern University where you can relax and really feel comfortable and at home. Each Monday and Thursday, the hours between 11:30 a.m. and 1:30 p.m. are reserved for student activities. No classes are held during these times, to allow students an uninterrupted period of time for themselves. Student clubs, intramural sports, cultural events, and many other activi- ties are scheduled to provide opportunities to make spontaneous or planned use of your time. You have the chance to become involved in campus activities, whether you reside in the residence halls or are a commuter, without interfering with your academic commitments. Student Organizations All-University Activities Council for University Programs Concert Committee Council for Alternative Programs Lecture Committee Publicity Committee Special Events Committee Interresidence Council NU Freshman Orientation Staff Student Alumni Association Student Government Association Budget Review Committee Student Affairs Committee Student Center Committee Student Court Student Activities / 311 Artistic and {Musical Organizations Band Choral Society Dance Theatre Early Music Players Orchestra Silver Masque Departmental and Academic Organizations Association for Connputing Machinery Beta Biological Society Black Business Student Association Black Engineehng Student Society Business Student Advisory Committee College of Nursing Student Organization Council Co-op Student Advisory Committee Criminal Justice Advisory Council Criminal Justice Student Security Organization Economics Club English Club Finance Club Human Resource Management Club Human Services Student Organization Marketing Club Medical Laboratory Science Club Organization of Forensic Students Physical Education Majors Club Physical Therapy Club Physical Therapy Yearbook Physics Club Political Science Student Advisory Committee Recreation Majors Club Respiratory Therapy Club The Script (Physical Therapy Yearbook) Society for the Advancement of Communication Studies Sociology/Anthropology Students Association Speech and Hearing Club Student Athletic Trainers Association Student-Faculty Biology Relations Committee Political and Social Action Organizations Students Against Nuclear Warfare Students for Environmental Awareness Students for Life Students for Safe Energy Young Republicans Media Cauldron Northeastern News Onyx Spectrum WRBB-FM 312 /Student Activities Special Interest Clubs Amateur Radio Club Association of the U.S. Army Brothers of Apple Social Interest Group Camera Club Cheerleaders Chess Club Disabled Students Organization Downhill Skiers and Sports Club Flying Club Groove Phi Groove Social Fellowship Hus-Skiers and Outing Club (NUHOC) Karate Club Northeastern University Organization for Alternative Lifestyles (NUAL) Pershing Rifles Sailing Club Semper Fidelis (Marines) Club Tactical Society Terra Society Underwater Society Women's Center Religious Organizations Campus Crusade for Christ Chi Alpha Christian Fellowship Christian Science Organization Christian Student Association Hillei Islamic Society Maranatha Ministries Navigators NIchiren Shoshu of America Seekers Christian Fellowship Ethnic and Cultural Clubs Arab Heritage Cultural Club Armenian Club Association of Students from the Indian Sub-Continent Caribbean Student Organization Chinese Student Club General Union of Lebanese Students General Union of Palestinian Students Haitian Student Unity Hellenic Club International Students Forum Iranian Student Organization Irish Club Korean Student Organization Latin-American Student Union Lebanese Student Association National Black Student Associa- tion Persian Student Society Turkish Students Organization Vietnamese Students Organization New Horizons This program, sponsored by the Student Activities Department, is de- signed to provide enjoyment as well as the opportunity to engage in a unique learning experience. The New Horizons series of noncredit mini-courses is conducted by qualified persons in special areas of interest. There are no grades, no transcripts, and no examinations. In a few courses, textbooks are re- quired; in areas such as the performing arts, field trips, crafts, or media, a material fee may be required. Enrollment in courses is determined on a priority basis with first op- portunities for registration to full-time undergraduate and graduate stu- dents, and on a space-available basis to other members of the Northeastern community. student Activities/ 31 3 For questions, brochures, or applications to teach a nnini-course, call or visit the Office of Student Activities, Room 255 Ell Center; telephone: 61 7-437-2642. Fraternities Alpha Epsilon Pi 6-8 Capen St. Medford, MA 02155 395-9458 Alpha Kappa Sigma 29 Greenough Ave. Jamaica Plain, MA 02130 524-9869 Beta Gamma Epsilon 234 Commonwealth Ave. Boston, MA 021 16 262-1639 Gamma Phi Kappa 1 1 Vancouver St. Boston, MA 021 15 427-8774 lota Phi Theta 255 Ell Center Kappa Alpha Psi 255 Ell Center Nu Epsilon Zeta 255 St. Paul St. Brookline, MA 02146 566-9804 Phi Beta Sigma 255 Ell Center (Colony) Phi Gamma Pi 241 Kent St. Brookline, MA 02146 566-8970 Phi Sigma Kappa 37 Greenough Ave. Jamaica Plain, MA 02130 524-9893 Tau Kappa Epsilon P.O. Box 834 Allston, MA 02134 254-3431 Zeta Beta Tau 42 Chestnut Square Jamaica Plain, MA 02130 522-5162 Sororities The recognized sororities and colonies for women play an important role in the extracurricular life of the University. Although none has a separate house, they can all be reached through the Office of Student Activities, Room 255 EC, at the University. The names of the sororities follow: Alpha Kappa Alpha Delta Phi Epsilon Delta Sigma Theta Sigma Beta Epsilon Sigma Gamma Rho Zeta Phi Beta 314 Sports The University provides opportunities for participation in athletic pro- grams that correspond to the abilities and inclinations of most students. We especially wish to provide each of you with the chance to develop skills and competence for lifelong athletic pursuits. Along with many casual, drop-in opportunities, you can participate as a member of intra- mural teams. Examples of intramural sports include touch football, bas- ketball, volleyball, soccer, ice hockey, wrestling, softball, and track. Professional Societies Students will benefit in many ways by joining the student chapter of a professional society in an area of study of particular interest to them. They have the opportunity to keep up with the latest developments by listening to authorities in that field, to exchange ideas with students from other colleges and universities as well as from Northeastern, and to learn more about professional standards. If students take an active part by attending regular meetings and social affairs, they may become officers or members of a delegation to meetings outside the University. Such participation may prove invaluable in shaping a career. The following professional societies, the majority of which are national organizations, are open to upperclassmen in their respective profes- sional fields: American Chemical Society American Institute of Chemical Engineers American Institute of Industrial Engineers American Society of Civil Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers Engineers Council Institute of Electronic & Electrical Engineers Public Relations Student Society Society of Professional Journalists Society of Women Engineers Student American Pharmaceutical Association i\/len's Athletics Whether it be on the SuperTurf at Parsons Field in the fall, the ice or hardwood of the Matthews Arena in the winter, or the waters of the picturesque Charles River in the spring, a Northeastern athletic team is a familiar sight, either training or competing, nearly twelve months of the year in the Greater Boston area. Husky varsity entries have touched down on some prestigious athletic real estate, such as Henley-on-the-Thames, England; Madison Square Garden, New York; and Fenway Park, which is part of Northeastern's Back Bay neighborhood. In fact, one could include the Montreal Olympic Village in the summer of 1976, and the most recent sumer Olympiad in Los Angeles, when an alumnus oarsman stroked his way to a silver medal for the United States. All students are urged to participate in the University's athletic pro- gram, which recently added soccer to its list of varsity sports. The Uni- Student Activities/ 31 5 versity fields teams in baseball, crew, swimming, cross-country, track and field, football, hockey, basketball, and golf. On the intramural and club levels, students may also participate in such sports as sailing, water polo, volleyball, lacrosse, gymnastics, softball, handball, and fencing. Facilities include the spacious Cabot Physical Education Center, Ed- ward S. Parsons Field, the Matthews Arena and the recently completed outdoor track and field facility in Dedham. The Cabot Gymnasium con- tains four basketball courts, a gymnastics lyceum, a wrestling and aero- bics room, a cage for indoor track and soccer, and six modern racquetball courts. Parsons Field, home of the Huskies' football team, with its new SuperTurf surface, also features the Northeastern baseball diamond. The Dedham track has an eight lane, Action Trak 200 running surface, and an expansive area for concurrent jumping and field events. The new outdoor facility is ready to host dual and championship meet competi- tion, and is a permanent site for Northeastern track athletes. The hockey and basketball teams play their home games in the his- toric "Boston Arena"— now the Matthews Arena, named for University benefactors George and Hope M. Matthews. The Arena is located near the main quadrangle of the campus. It provides a portable floor for the Husky basketball team and daily free public skating. Matthews Arena is the oldest ice hockey rink in the world, and features a seating capacity of 6,000 and some of the finest sight lines of any rink in the country. Within the past three years, both the men's basketball and hockey teams surged to NCAA Championship play under the roof of the Matthews Arena. Northeastern annually fields one of the most competitive Division l-AA football teams in New England, and as an Independent has always played a demanding schedule. A partial list of the Huskies' most recent opponents includes New Hampshire, Massachusetts, Lehigh, Rich- mond, and Youngstown State. The University's hockey team skates in the brand new Hockey East Association, the eastern college hockey alignment which includes three Boston based teams and a total of seven teams from New England. Along with city rivals Boston College, Boston University, and Harvard, the Huskies spend the first two Monday nights in February playing in the prestigious Beanpot Hockey Tournament before a packed Boston Gar- den house. In 1985 the Huskies became the first team to win back-to- back Beanpots since 1979. Northeastern's basketball Huskies wage their roundball wars in the tough ECAC North Atlantic Conference of the NCAA. They play the local powers such as Boston College and Boston University, and recent tour- nament soirees have included games with national powers such as West Texas State, Ohio State, and Montana. Even against the cream of the East, Northeastern has had eighteen winning seasons in the last 22 years. To discuss track and cross country in New England is to talk about Northeastern track and cross country. The Huskies, who defended their Greater Boston Championship last January, have been the flagship pro- gram on the New England track and field scene for the last decade and a half; in that stretch, the Huskies have captured seven New England indoor titles and six outdoor championships. Each year. Northeastern is represented by alumni running for national and international honors as members of top track and field clubs. Northeastern also fields a strong golf team which competes in all the major Eastern tournaments. 31 6 /Student Activities The most amazing Husky sports story, however, is that of varsity crew. In 1965, its first season, the NU crew won four of five regattas and the small college rowing championships, and became the first NU team to compete internationally when it rowed in the Henley Royal Regatta. The next year, the Huskies moved into the major college rowing league. They culminated their swift rise by winning the Eastern Spnnts in 1972 and 1973 and rowed in the finals of the Grand Challenge Cup of the Henley Royal Regatta, in 1973, they were considered the finest eight in the country. In 1978, the freshman crew won the Eastern Sprints and was invited to row the Thames Challenge Cup race at Henley. Northeastern has buttressed its physical fitness facilities campus-wide and accommodates the daily influx of undergraduates, graduates, staff, and faculty at Cabot Gymnasium and the Matthews Arena. One of the most popular accoutrements is the six-year-old Nautilus weight-training room, equipped with Nautilus apparatus and traditional free weights. Women's Athletics From a very small program with very few resources, the Northeastern University women's intercollegiate athletic program has grown rapidly, reflecting the tremendous growth in women's athletics at all levels. The program now encompasses twelve activities: basketball, crew, cross- country, field hockey, gymnastics, ice hockey, lacrosse, swimming and diving, tennis, track and field (indoor and outdoor), and volleyball. As members of the NCAA, Northeastern University subscribes to all policies and regulations of the Association. Athletic scholarships are available to women student athletes in all programs. Northeastern's goal is to provide an excellent program of intercolle- giate athletics for all women students who qualify. The programs are in the mainstream of the exciting growth in women's athletics throughout the country. The field hockey and lacrosse teams, using the astroturf at Edward S. Parson's Field in Brookline as their home field, have long been regarded as among the strongest in New England. The basketball and volleyball programs, working out of Dockser Hall and Cabot Gymnasium on the Boston campus, have appeared in state and regional championships, and are moving rapidly toward NCAA qualification. The tennis team, with recent steady improvement, is well respected in the region. The gym- nastics team, with a vastly upgraded schedule, is striving to reach a high level of regionally competitive scoring. Two of our younger programs — crew, and swimming and diving — have shown rapid improvement. Members of crew have been selected for participation in Olympic Development Camps, have been gold medal winners at the National Sports Festival and at the NWRA National Cham- pionship. The three newest teams— cross-country, ice hockey, and track and field — have moved out of "rookie" status. The ice hockey team, which makes its home in the beautifully renovated Matthews Arena, has be- come one of the strongest in the country, in addition to winning the local Beanpot Tournament in 1979, 1980, and 1984. Track continues its de- velopment. Moving toward excellence in all programs. Women's Athletics looks forward to an exciting year. Specific policies and guidelines relating to Student Activities/ 31 7 academic eligibility for athletics will be distributed in writing to all student athletes. Religious Life Northeastern has genuine concern for the religious and moral develop- ment of students of all faiths. A Religious Advisory Board, consisting of administrators and faculty, as well as full-time guest chaplains, seeks to articulate the needs in this area and facilitate the work of various reli- gious groups on campus. A Chaplains' Association, consisting of the full-time guest chaplains, works cooperatively to emphasize the interfaith dimensions of campus life. The chaplains also deal with students on a denominational basis at various centers near the campus: Episcopal College Work Center in Brookline; Hillel House on Parker Street; Lutheran Center, 84 The Fen- way; and St. Ann's Roman Catholic Parish on St. Stephen Street. In addition, there are numerous religious student organizations on campus, recognized by the Student Affairs Committee and listed under "Student Organizations." Interfaith chapel services are held in the Bacon Memorial Chapel, located in the Ell Student Center. These voluntary religious services are planned to commemorate special days and events and will be an- nounced sufficiently ahead of time. The Chapel is also used for denom- inational worship services and special lectures on religion. It is open daily for prayer and meditation and is a frequent setting for weddings of students and alumni. N v"^ R THE ^ STE R N f \' I \ E R ^ I T^ General Information 320 History Founded in 1898, Northeastern University is incorporated as a privately endowed nonsectarian institution of higher learning under the General Laws of Massachusetts. By special enactment, the state legislature has given the University general degree-granting powers. The University is governed by a Board of Trustees who are elected by and from the Northeastern University Corporation, which is composed of almost 200 distinguished business and professional men and women. The Board of Overseers, chosen from the membership of the Corporation, based on their exceptional interest in and support of the University, is also a partic- ipant in the affairs of the institution. From its beginning. Northeastern University's dominant purpose has been the discovery of community educational needs and distinctive and serviceable ways of meeting them. The University has not duplicated the programs of other institutions, but has sought to pioneer new areas of educational service. A distinctive feature of Northeastern University is its Cooperative Plan of Education, initiated by the College of Engineering in 1909 and sub- sequently adopted by the Colleges of Business Administration (1922), Arts and Sciences (1935), Education (1953), Pharmacy (1962), Nursing (1964), Boston-Bouve College (1964), the College of Criminal Justice (1967), the School of Engineering Technology's (formerly Lincoln Col- lege) daytime Bachelor of Engineering Technology Program (1971), the College of Computer Science (1982), and by University College in a special pilot program (1980). This educational method offers students the opportunity to gain valuable practical experience as an integral part of their college programs and also provides the means by which they may contribute substantially to the financing of their education. The plan has been extended to the graduate level in criminal justice, engineering, rehabilitation administration, professional accounting, business admin- istration, and law. In the field of adult education, the University offers graduate and un- dergraduate degree programs and noncredit programs that are specif- ically designed to meet the needs and interests of adults who wish to further their education on a part-time basis. All formal courses of study leading to degrees in the Graduate Divi- sion, the School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College), and University College are approved by the undergraduate faculties concerned and are governed by the same qualitative and quantitative standards as the regular day curricula. Courses are scheduled in the day and evening at the Boston Campus, Suburban Campus in Burling- ton, the Dedham Campus, and at other off-campus locations near Bos- ton. Academic Policy Policy on Changes of Program The University reserves the right to withdraw, modify, augment, or change the order or content of courses in any curriculum. It further reserves the right to change tuition, and fees charged, and other regulations. Any changes which may be made from time to time pursuant to the above policy shall be applicable to all students in the school, college, or department concerned, including former students who may re-enroll. Academic Policy / 321 Textbooks and Supplies The Northeastern University Bookstore, located on the ground floor of the Ell Student Center, is a department of the University and is operated for the convenience of the student body. All books and supplies that are required by the students for their work in the University may be pur- chased at the Bookstore. The Academic Year Northeastern University operates on a quarter-system calendar. Quarter-Hour Credits All courses are evaluated in terms of quarter-hour credit. A quarter-hour credit is equal to three-fourths of a semester-hour credit. Grades and Examinations Examinations covering the work of the quarter usually are held at the close of each quarter. Exceptions may be made in certain courses where, in the opinion of the instructor and with the approval of the dean of the college concerned, final examinations are not necessary. Pass-Fail System Students may register for a limited number of courses on a pass-fail basis. Each college has its own rules governing this system. Common to all colleges, however, is the grading system. Pass-fail grades are not included in the calculation of the quality point average. Only pass grades earn credits toward degree requirements. (Pass-fail guidelines are also stated in the Student Handbook.) Grades A student's grade is officially recorded by letter. Introduced in Septem- ber 1980, the following grades, listed below with their numerical equiv- alents, are in effect: A 4.000 A- 3.667 B-l- 3.333 B 3.000 B- 2.667 C+ 2.333 C 2.000 0- 1.667 D+ 1.333 D 1 .000 D- .667 F 0 A general average of C- is not acceptable and will not allow a student to continue at Northeastern University. Freshman students who are taking a full academic program and who have a weighted average for the year below 1 .4 will not be permitted to register for advanced work. Upperclass students should consult the Student Handbook to ascertain the level of continuing achievement re- quired of them by the faculty of their college. An I, or X (Incomplete), grade is used to show that the student has not completed the course requirements. An official University grade report is mailed to each student at the end of each quarter. 322 / General Information Transcripts Applications for transcripts of record are made at the Registrar's Office (120 HA). A charge of $2.00 is made for each transcript request. Writing Requirement All Basic Day College freshmen must successfully complete an all-Uni- versity writing requirement in order to fulfill their graduation require- ments. The requirement also applies to all transfer students matriculating at the University beginning in the Fall Quarter of 1985. As a requirement for graduation with a bachelor's degree, each stu- dent must successfully complete two quarters of basic composition and literature (or equivalent) and satisfy the upper division writing require- ment. The upper division writing requirement may not begin until the student has successfully completed at least eighty quarter-hours of academic work (including transfer credit). The upper division writing requirement may be fulfilled by passing one upper division writing course (four quarter-hour course with a C or bet- ter) or by passing a course, Writing Lab (one credit course). Upperclass students should consult their advisor or the English Department for fur- ther details on fulfillment of the writing requirement. The Basic Day Colleges Course Description and Curriculum Guide and The Student Handbook specify the details of the writing requirement for both 1985 entering freshmen and transfer students. Dean's List An Honors or Dean's List is issued at the end of each quarter containing the names of students who have a 3.0 quality-point average or higher, with no "I" grade or grade below C-. A student who is on any form of probation, enrolled in a course on a pass-fail basis (except where there is no alternative or where required by the program), or not carrying a full load as determined by his or her Basic College will not be eligible. With few exceptions, as approved by the respective Colleges, a full load is normally considered to be four courses or sixteen quarter-hours. Dean's List Cum Laude 3.000-3.490 Dean's List Magna Cum Laude 3.500-3.740 Dean's List Summa Cum Laude 3.750-4.000 Beginning with the Class of 1990 and all future classes, the minimum quality-point average to achieve Dean's List status will be 3.25. Dean's List Cum Laude 3.250-3.490 Dean's List Magna Cum Laude 3.500-3.740 Dean's List Summa Cum Laude 3.750-4.000 Reports on Scholastic Standing Reports for all students are issued at the end of each grading period. Questions about grades are to be discussed with the student's faculty adviser. At the end of the academic year, juniors will receive, in addition to their term reports, a complete cumulative copy of their permanent rec- ords. Students should contact the dean of their college, if discrepancies are found. Students are constantly encouraged to maintain an acceptable quality of college work. Parents and students are always welcomed by the college officers and faculty advisers for a conference upon such mat- ters. Academic Policy / 323 Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act In accordance with the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, Northeastern University permits its students to inspect their rec- ords wherever appropriate and to challenge specific parts of them when they feel it necessary to do so. Specific details of the law as it applies to Northeastern are printed in the Student Handbook, which is distributed annually at registrations. It is the policy of Northeastern University to deal with the student in all academic and adminstrative matters. If parents require any information regarding the progress of their son or daughter, they may contact the Dean of Students' Office. General Conduct It is assumed that students come to the University for a serious purpose. The University community expects each student to respect the rights and privileges of others and to adhere to acceptable standards of per- sonal conduct. Students should exercise their freedom with maturity and responsibility. They are expected to obey University regulations and follow the instructions of and pay due respect to University officials. Conduct inconsistent with the general order of the University may result in disciplinary action. Damage to any building or to any of the furniture, apparatus, or other property of the University will be charged to students involved. Any form of academic dishonesty is regarded as a most serious of- fense and renders the offender liable to disciplinary action. Aiding and abetting a student in any dishonesty is also held to be a grave breach of discipline. The University administers discipline with a high standard of integrity and a scrupulous regard for truth. Attendance Students are expected to attend all meetings of their classes. Absence from regularly scheduled classes may seriously affect the standing of the student and result in the University's dropping the subject or sub- jects from his or her schedule. Laboratory work can be made up only during hours of regularly scheduled instruction. Emergency Closing of the University Northeastern University has made arrangements to notify students, fac- ulty, and staff by radio when it becomes necessary to cancel classes because of extremely inclement weather. AM radio stations WBZ (1030), WEEI (590), WHDH (850), WRKO (680), and FM stations WBCN (104.1), WZOU (94.5), WROR (98.5) are the stations authorized to announce the University's decision to close. Since instructional television courses orig- inate from live or broadcast facilities at the University, neither the classes nor the courier service operate when the University is closed. 324 Policy on International Programs and Services I Northeastern University, a world leader in cooperative education, ac- knowledges the increasing interdependence among nations, and, there- fore, identifies its mission as preparing its graduates to live and work in an interdependent world. The University deems it essential that its stu- dents, both in the professions as well as in the humanities, develop a greater awareness and understanding of those social, political and eco- nomic issues that transcend national boundaries. So interconnected are these issues that a recognition of them coupled with an appreciation of the diverse cultures which gave rise to them is necessary for the devel- opment of productive and responsible citizens of the world community. To accomplish this goal. Northeastern University actively seeks quali- fied students from abroad to enroll in its undergraduate and graduate programs in such numbers and with such geographic origins so as to create and foster a truly global exchange of ideas and values among students, faculty, and staff. The University also encourages all colleges to continually develop and expand course offerings to include international issues and cross-cul- tural aspects and supports faculty to teach and conduct research in the interrelationships among nations and peoples. The University promotes international understanding and the sharing of ideas with institutions throughout the world by virtue of its faculty and staff exchanges and its study and work abroad programs for students. Finally, the University recognizes that it has a special responsibility to share its expertise and to cooperate with international organizations, the local community, its alumni, and diverse segments of the public in an effort to promote greater awareness of global issues and events. Alumni Association More than 100,000 alumni are united within the Alumni Association, cre- ated to establish a mutually beneficial relationship between Northeastern and its graduates. The Association is governed by an Executive Com- mittee elected from the alumni community. Membership in the Associa- tion is automatic upon graduation. The Association is headquartered in the Office of Alumni Relations in 125 Richards Hall; telephone 617-437-3186. Addresses of alumni are maintained in the Office of Alumni Records; telephone 61 7-437-2792. Activities of the Association include the Homecoming celebration, presentation of the Outstanding Alumni Awards, and the annual pres- entation of Professional Promise Awards to outstanding seniors in each of the Colleges. Alumni officers, in conjunction with the Office of Alumni Relations, have established a series of enrichment/education programs to meet the contemporary vocational and avocational needs of North- eastern's graduates. The Alumni Association has also initiated a suc- cessful group travel program to provide the alumni of Northeastern with interesting and economical opportunities for foreign travel, and sponsors group term life insurance for members of the alumni community. Notice of all activities is provided in the Northeastern Alumni Magazine and in special publications. General Information / 325 Regional alumni clubs have been established from coast to coast. All alumni are eligible to become members of these organizations. The clubs meet periodically with varied programs, often in conjunction with professional and athletic events, faculty visits, and service projects. Ad- ditionally, alumni class organizations conduct reunions for their respec- tive classes every five years, and Golden Graduates' Day, for senior alumni, has become an annual event. The Association sponsors and assists constituent organizations that focus on common professional and avocational interests and college affiliations. These groups have their own officers and conduct various programs throughout the year. Regional alumni clubs provide a valuable service to the University by sponsoring admissions conferences for high school students and the parents of students who are interested in attending college. In addition, alumni volunteers in many metropolitan areas across the nation repre- sent the Admissions Office on a continuing basis at high schools and community colleges. Gifts and Bequests to Northeastern University Northeastern University welcomes gifts and bequests to further its edu- cational purposes. It is recommended that those contemplating gifts or bequests confer with the President of the University regarding the needs of the University. A member of Northeastern University's staff will be happy to consult with those considering a gift or bequest. Planned gifts to the University can often be combined with personal financial goals to produce maxi- mum financial security, as well as significant tax savings for an individual or family. The legal name of the University is "Northeastern University." In mak- ing a gift or bequest, it is recommended the following wording be used: "Northeastern University, an educational institution incorporated under the laws of Massachusetts and located in Boston, Massachusetts." ROTC, IViilitary Officers Education Program Army Thomas J. Gnffin, III, LTC, U.S.A.; M.B.A., Professor and Chairman General Objectives The Department of Military Science administers Northeastern's ROTC Program. Regarded by the University as an integral part of its education program, ROTC is available on a voluntary basis to all full-time students. The program's mission is to develop officers— leaders. It offers courses of instruction designed to lead to a commission as an Army second lieutenant. The ROTC staff consists of active Army officers and NCOs, assigned by the Department of the Army. 326 / General Information Courses of Study The program consists of the Basic Course (freshman and sophomore years) and the Advanced Course (middler, junior, and senior years) and complements the co-op program by tailoring the courses to the student's schedule. Enrollment in the Basic Course is voluntary and is open to all full-time students who qualify. Students do not incur a military obligation by par- ticipating in the Basic Course. The Advanced Course is open to all qualified students who meet these prerequisites: (1) completion of Basic Course or approved equivalent, or prior honorable military service; (2) physical aptitude and medical requirements; and (3) age requirements. Students accepted for the Ad- vanced Course execute a written contract that obligates the newly com- missioned second lieutenant to a period of military service. Advanced Course students receive a $100/month stipend up to $1,000 per year. They are also paid for the six-week advanced camp normally attended between their junior and senior year. ROTC Scholarships The Army ROTC scholarship provides full tuition, fees, textbooks, and $100 per month to the recipient. Selected four-year scholarship winners may also qualify for full room-and-board during their freshman year. Scholarships are available in varying lengths and cover the cadet's re- maining academic years. Noncadets may apply for scholarships cover- ing their last four or three academic years. These scholarships are merit- based scholarships, and a student's earnings during cooperative work periods do not reduce scholarship payments. Veterans and Transfer Students Honorably discharged veterans (enlisted) are a vital part of our cadet corps and will receive special consideration for ROTC entry. Transfer students, whether or not previously enrolled in ROTC, are also welcome to join our program. They should contact the Department of Military Science concerning their options for program entry. Uniforms and Equipment Uniforms are issued without cost to ROTC cadets. A $35 deposit is required to ensure the return of the loaned property in good condition. Loss or damage to Army equipment, exceeding the deposit, will be charged to the student. Academic Credits Regulations of the individual Basic Colleges prevail for ROTC graduation credit. However, students may individually petition their academic de- partment for acceptance of certain courses for graduation credit. Air Force Thomas J. Meyer, Lt. Col., USAF; M.A. Professor and Chairman, Department of Aerospace Studies, Boston Uni- versity The Air Force Reserve Officer Training Corps (AFROTC) program offers students an opportunity to earn a commission in the United States Air Force. The student is commissioned as a second lieutenant upon com- General Information / 327 pletion of both the Aerospace Studies (AS) curriculum and the require- ments for an undergraduate or graduate degree. Northeastern University students may enter the AFROTC program as members of either a four-year or a two-year program. Participation in AFROTC by nonscholarship students during the first two years of the four-year pro- gram carries no commitment to serve in the Air Force. The AFROTC program is administered by AFROTC Detachment 355, 156 Bay State Road, at Boston University 617-353-4705, AFROTC classes are conducted at the B.U. campus. Four- Year Program Undergraduates may join the four-year AFROTC program by registering for the appropriate Aerospace Studies classes. Students from all aca- demic disciplines, including five-year co-op, may register. Preferred en- try is the first semester, freshman year, although students may enter as late as the first semester, sophomore year. Freshman classes focus on the functions, organizations, and hard- ware of the Air Force. Sophomore classes concentrate on the history of aerospace power. Complementing the academic classes is a weekly leadership laboratory, during which students are introduced to Air Force customs, courtesies, drill, ceremonies, and lifestyles. The Air Force uniform and AFROTC books are provided to the student free of charge except for a refundable uniform deposit. Continuation beyond the sophomore year is not guaranteed. Factors considered include leadership potential, academic performance, field training evaluations, and results of a physical examination. The non-flying commissioned graduate incurs a four-year active duty service commitment. Navigators incur a five-year, post-training commit- ment, and pilots incur a six-year, post-training commitment. Two- Year Program Students unable to participate in the four-year AFROTC program are eligible for the two-year program. Prerequisites for entry into the two- year program include: (1) at least six remaining academic quarters of undergraduate or graduate study; {?.) meeting Air Force physical stan- dards; (3) good moral character; and (4) successful completion of six weeks of field training. Applications for the two-year program require several months for processing. Prospective two-year program members should contact the University AFROTC detachment at least six months prior to proposed entry. Scholarships Academic scholarships are available for those who qualify. The College Scholarship Program pays for tuition, textbooks, required fees, and a $100-per-month, tax-free subsistence allowance. Most scholarships are awarded for four years starting with the freshman year. Application is made while the student is a senior in high school. Application forms should be available in the guidance counselor's office or by writing to the Four-Year Scholarship Branch, Air Force ROTO, Maxwell AFB, AL 36112. Scholarships are also available for students already in college. Students may apply for a three-and-a-half, three, two-and-a-half, or two- year scholarship. Call 617-353-4705 for further details. 328 Navy Northeastern University has a crosstown Navy ROTC program. Both scholarship and nonscholarship programs are available. For further in- formation, please contact Dr. Thomas Moore, Room 202, Hayden Hall, Northeastern University, 360 Huntington Avenue, Boston, MA 02115. The Center for Cooperative Education Paul E. Dube, M.A., M.Ed., Director Educational institutions and other organizations that are interested in exploring the concept of cooperative education, implementing new pro- grams, or expanding and improving already existing ones can utilize the services offered by the Center for Cooperative Education. In addition to providing technical assistance, the Center will conduct evaluations of cooperative education programs for both educational institutions and employers. The Center staff is made up of qualified professionals who are familiar with all aspects of cooperative education. Throughout the year, short- term training programs for both new and experienced coordinators of cooperative programs are offered. The Labor Market Analyst at the Center establishes a network of con- tracts and generates information on employment changes affecting em- ployers in business, high tech, and the health industries. The collected data is analyzed and interpreted for use by the entire co-op department. The Center, to help Northeastern better serve its international students and the countries from which they originate, is currently working on a project to develop home country placements for these students. Em- ployment is being sought and international students recruited in those regions of the world in which economies are strong enough to provide at-home placements for the students during their cooperative education employment periods. 329 Academic Calendar 1985-1986 September 1985 2 Monday 3-6 Tuesday- Friday 9-16 Monday- Monday 12 Thursday 16 Monday 17 Tuesday 18-20 Wednesday- Friday 20 Friday 23 Monday October 1985 14 Monday November 1985 11 Monday 28-30 Thursday- Saturday December 1985 9-13 Monday- Friday 16-January3 Monday- Friday January 1986 1 Wednesday 6 Monday 7 Tuesday 8 Wednesday 20 Monday February 1986 17 Monday Labor Day. University closed. Final examinations for Basic Colleges. Division A vacation. Fall Commencement. Freshman and Transfer students orientation and University registration. Upperclass registration (Division A) 9 a.m. Continuation of course advising, course registration, course drop/add periods, orientation for college day programs. Burlington Campus orientation and course registration. Classes begin in Basic Colleges for Fall Quarter; 8 a.m. Columbus Day. University closed. Veterans Day observed. University closed. Thanksgiving Day recess Final examinations for Basic Colleges. Christmas vacation. New Year's Day. University closed. Orientation and registration for new Freshmen and Transfers; registration for continuing September Freshmen and returning Upperclass students. Registration, orientation, and course drop/add continues until 12 noon. Classes begin in Basic Colleges for Winter Quarter; 8:00 a.m. Martin Luther King, Jr.'s Birthday observed University closed Presidents' Day. University closed. 330 Monday- Final examinations for Basic Colleges. Friday Monday- Division B vacation. Saturday Monday Orientation and registration for Transfers and continuing Fresfinnen and returning Upperclass students. Tuesday Registration, orientation, and course drop/add continues until 12 noon. Wednesday Classes begin in Basic Colleges for Spring Quarter; 8 a.m. Monday Patriots' Day observed. University closed. Monday Memorial Day observed. University closed. Monday- Friday Monday- Saturday Sunday Monday Final examinations for Basic Colleges (nondegree candidates). Division A vacation. Commencement. Registration for Divisions B and D and January fresfnmen (Quarter Three). Beginning of Summer Quarter. Beginning of Division A work period. 1 Tuesday 4 Friday September 1986 1 Monday 8-12 Monday- Friday 18 Thursday 15-22 Monday- Monday Monday Monday Basic College classes begin for Summer Quarter; 8 a.m. Independence Day. University closed. Labor Day. University closed. Final examinations for Basic Colleges. Fall Commencement. Division B vacation. Beginning of 1986-87 academic year. New student orientation week. Registration and advising week for all returning upperclass students and all new students. Classes begin for Basic Colleges for Fall Quarter; 8 a.m. Calendar dates are subject to change. The University community will be notified if such changes are necessary. 331 The Governing Boards and Officers of the University Corporators Class of 1985 Julius Abrams Yousef A. As'ad fDiana J. Auger Allen G. Barry Lincoln C. Bateson 4:Roy H. Beaton tE. Gregg Bemis Beverly Ann Bendekgey Robert P. Berkowitz Alfred M. Bertocchi Gerald W. Blakeley, Jr. Stuart Marshall Bloch S. Whitney Bradley Melvin B. Bradshaw Rexford A. Bristol Edward W. Brooke William L. Brown William H. Bruce, Jr. John L. Burns Victor C. Bynoe *Norman L. Cahners James F. Carlin :t:Richard P. Chapman Richard P. Chapman, Jr. Robert F. Chick Vessarios G. Chigas Logan Clarke, Jr. Livingstone N, Coakley Abram T. Collier T. Paul Connolly James J. Costello Edward Creiger H. James Crossan, Jr. Roger C. Damon J. H. Dow Davis Melanie C. Dean Virginia S. Devine William O. DiPietro Alfred di Scipio Estelle Dockser Dorothy Dodge fWilliam R. Driver, Jr. *James V. Fetchero *Ernest Henderson III *D. Brainerd Holmes *Carl R. Hurtig *Harvey C. Krentzman *John P. LaWare *George J. Matthews •Ruth B. Stuart *James L. Waters Class Of 1986 •William F. Allen, Jr. •Frederick L. Brown William S. Edgerly William Elfers liByron K. Elliott iwilliam P. Ellison Robert Erickson •Frank L. Farwell Joseph D. Feaster, Jr. Phil David Fine Neal F. Finnegan Albert S. Frager Brenda J, Furlong Murray J. Gart Paul W. Glennon •Lloyd S. Glidden, Jr. John L. Grandin fDonald B. Guy •Allan M. Hale Edmund Blair Hawley Michael E. Haynes James S. Hekimian William Hellman James S. Herbert Colby Hewitt, Jr. Richard D. Hill Thomas Hollis, Jr. Robert W. Holmes Hartwell G. Howe John S. Howe Howard M. Hubbard Richard P. Johnson 4:Henry C. Jones Walter B. Kelley ^Frances C. Kenerson Edward M. Kennedy Fenton G. Keyes Calvin A. King tAsa S. Knowles Evelyn M. Lane Maurice Lazarus Allyn Levy Elma Lewis Edward A. Loring George M. Lovejoy, Jr. Peter E. Madden Maurice Mann •Kathryn M. Nicholson •George A. Snell •D. Thomas Tngg •Martin F. Walsh •Member of the Board of Trustees tHonorary Trustee ^Lifetime Trustee, Emeritus 332 / General Information Class of 1987 *Vincent Barletta *Louis W. Cabot *John J. Cullinane *Arnold S. Hiatt *Kenneth A. Loftman *John Lowell •Roderick M. MacDougall Robert C. Marini Evelyn A. Marran fLawrence H. Martin M. Dorothy Massey Walter E. Mattson Peter H. McCormick William J. McCune, Jr John G. McElwee *Katherine S. McHugh John A. McNeice, Jr. Dominic Meo, Jr. Don G. Mitchell Donald H. Moore Frank E. Morris James A. Morris E. James Morton N. Laurence Nagle William H. Nichols, Jr. Bernard J. O'Keefe Stanley C. Olsen James H. Orr Edward O. Owens Ara Oztemel Edward S. Parsons Theodore R. Peary Lawrence T. Perera Nicholas V. Petrou Edward E. Phillips fThomas L. Phillips Edward D. Phinney Rudolph F. Pierce Jerome M. Powell Albert Pratt John F. Prendiville George Putnam Blanche M. Quaid ^Francis J. Quirico William H. Raye, Jr. Kathleen M. Rice D. Paul Rich Robert Riesman Daniel J. Roberts •Charlotte B. Smith *An Wang Class of 1988 Louis H. Barnett *Thomas E. Cargill, Jr. Gary L. Countryman Michael J. Cronin Carl E. Dantas 'Kenneth G. Fisher •Joseph E. Heney Edward C. Johnson 3d •Robert L. Johnson •George S. Kariotis •Diane H. Lupean Peter F. O'Connell William J. Pruyn fDwight P. Robinson, Jr. Ralph B. Rogers Ronald L. Rossetti Ernest J. Sargeant Donald W. Seager Sydney Shaftman James L. Shanahan Robert E. Siegfried •Dorothy M. Simon Phillip A. Singleton Paul D. Slater tDonald W. Smith ^Farnham W. Smith O. Phillip Snowden • Bernard Solomon Robert C. Sprague Milton Stern David B. Stone Galen Luther Stone Stephen J. Sweeney H. Patricia Taylor Lawrence I. Templeman Charles H. Tenney II Almore I. Thompson Milton A. Thompson W. Nicholas Thorndike Alan D. Tobin Paul E. Tsongas Joseph F. Turley tChaplin Tyler Samuel Wakeman Lloyd B. Waring David T. Wendell Donald F. Whiston William C. White •Robert H. Willis Richard W. Young fAlvin C. Zises •Member of the Board of Trustees tHonorary Trustee ijiLifetime Trustee, Emeritus General Information / 333 Officers of the Corporation and Board of Trustees Robert H. Willis, Chairman Norman L. Cahiners, Vice Chairman Frank L. Farwell, Vice Chairman D. Thiomas Trigg, Vice Chairman, Finance Barbara F. Burke, Secretary Vincent J. Lembo, Assistant Secretary Byron K. Elliott, Lifetime Chairman Emeritus William R. Driver, Jr., Honorary Vice Chairman Dwight P. Robinson, Jr., Honorary Vice Chairman Farnham W. Smith, Honorary Vice Chairman Class of 1985 Norman L. Cahners James V. Fetchero Ernest Henderson III D. Brainerd Holmes Carl R. Hurtig Harvey C. Krentzman John P. LaWare George J. Matthew/s Ruth S. Stuart James L. Waters Class Of 1988 Thomas E. Cargill, Jr. Kenneth G. Fisher Joseph E. Heney Robert L. Johnson Gfeorge S. Kariotis Diane H. Lupean William J. Pruyn Dorothy M. Simon Bernard Solomon Robert H. Willis Class of 1986 William R Allen, Jr. Frederick L. Brown Frank L. Farw/ell Lloyd S. Glidden, Jr. Allan M. Hale Kathryn M. Nicholson George A. Snell D. Thomas Trigg Martin F. Walsh Class Of 1987 Vincent Barletta Louis W. Cabot John J. Cullinane Arnold S. Hiatt Kenneth A. Loftman John Lowell Roderick M. MacDougal Katherine S. McHugh Charlotte B. Smith An Wang Ex Officio ttKenneth G. Ryder Honorary Trustees Diana J. Auger William R. Driver, Jr. Donald B. Guy Lawrence H. Martin Thomas L. Phillips Donald W. Smith Alvin C. Zises Lifetime Trustees, Emeriti Roy H. Beaton F. Gregg Bemis Richard P. Chapman Byron K. Elliott William P. Ellison Henry C. Jones Frances C. Kenerson Asa S. Knowles Francis J. Quirico Dwight P. Robinson, Jr. Farnham W. Smith Chaplin Tyler ttPresident of the University 334 / General Information Board of Overseers Class of 1 986 Class of 1 988 William Elfers H. Patricia Taylor Ptiil David Fine W. Nictiolas Thorndike Neal F. Finnegan Alan D. Tobin Albert S. Frager Brenda J Furlong Class of 1989 James S. Hekimian Peter E. Madden Richard P. Ctiapman, Jr. Vessarios G. Chigas T. Paul Connolly Class Of 1987 Robert C. Marini Edward 0. Owens Robert Riesman Administrative Organization Officers of the University Philip T. Crotty, A.B., A.M., M.B.A., Ed.D., Vice President for Academic Operations and Vice Provost John A. Curry, A.B., Ed.M., Ed.D., Executive Vice President Edmund L. Deltano, B.A., Vice President for Finance Christopher F. Kennedy, A.B., Ed.M., Vice President for Administration James B. King, B.A., LL.D. (hon.). Senior Vice President for Public Affairs Asa S. Knowles, A.B., A.M., LL.D., Litt.D., Sc.D., D.B.A., Sc.D. in Bus. Ed. (hon.), Cliancellor Philip LaTorre, B.S., M.S., Vice President for l-luman Resources Management John A. Martin, B.S., M.B.A., Wee President for Business John D. O'Bryant, B.S., M.Ed., Vice President for Student Affairs ; Anthony N. Penna, B.S., M.A., D.A., Senior Vice President for Academic ; Affairs and Provost Eugene M. Reppucci, Jr., B.S., M.Ed., Senior Vice President for ; University Development \ Daniel J. Roberts, B.S., M.B.A., Ed.M., Senior Vice President-Treasurer \ Kenneth G. Ryder, A.B., M.A., L.H.D., Litt.D. (hon.), President ' Royal K, Toebes, B.S., M.B.A., Wee President for Alumni Development Karl Weiss, B.S., Ph.D., Wee President for Researcti and Vice Provost Roy L. Wooldridge, B.S., Ed.M.; T.L.D., L.H.D. (hon.); Wee President for Cooperative Education Academic Deans, Directors of Schools, and General Administrative Officers Richard Astro, B.A., M.A., Ph.D., Dean of tfie College of Arts and Sciences Alan R. Benenfeld, B.Met.E., M.L.S., M.S., Dean and Director of University Libraries ■ Maryann G. Billington, A.B., M.B.A., Associate Dean and Director of the \ Graduate School of Business Administration General Information / 335 Irwin M. Cohen, B.S., M.S., Director of Men's Athletics Martin J. Damian, B.S., Bursar Charles Devlin, B.S., M.Ed., Dean of Student Financial Services Elisabeth M. Drake, B.S., Sc.D., Dean of the College of Engineering (Acting) Clifford J. Fralen, B.S., M.S.E., MB. A., Director of the Physical Plant David R. Freeman, B.Mgt.E., M.S., Ph.D.; Associate Dean of Engineering and Director of the Graduate School of Engineering William A. Frohlich, B.A., Dean of University Publishing and Director of University Press Job E. Fuchs, M.D., Director of Health Services Daniel J. Givelber, A.B., LL.B., Dean of the School of Law Thomas E. Hulbert, B.Mgt.E., M.S., Director of the School of Engineering Technology and Associate Dean of Engineering Ellen S.Jackson, B.A., Ed.M., C.A.G.S., D.H., D.H.L. (hon.). Dean and Director of Affirmative Action John W. Jordan, B.S., M.Ed., Dean of University College Paul M. Kalaghan, A.B., M.S., Ph.D., Dean of the College of Computer Science Paul M. Lepley, B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D., Dean of Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Juanita O. Long, B.S.N. , M.S.N., C.A.G.S., Ed.D., Dean of the College of Nursing Kathryn Luttgens, B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Associate Provost Philip R. McCabe, B.A., M.Ed., Dean of Admissions Philip R. McDonald, B.A., M.B.A., D.B.A., Dean of the College of Business Administration Edmund J. Mullen, B.A., M.Ed., University Registrar J. Edward Neighbor, B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Associate Dean of the College of Arts and Sciences and Director of the Graduate School Paul M. Pratt, B.S., M.Ed., Dean of the Department of Cooperative Education Edward W. Robinson, B.S., Ed.M., Dean of Students Norman Rosenblatt, A.B., Ph.D., Dean of the College of CriminalJustice and Director of the Graduate School Jeanne L. Rowlands, B.A., B.S., M.A., Director of Women's Athletics Phyllis M. Schaen, B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D., Dean of Administration Gerald E. Schumacher, Pharm.D., M.Sc, Ph.D., Dean of the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions and Director of the Graduate School Arthur D. Smith, B.S., M.A., Ph.D., Associate Provost Janice Walker, A.B., Assistant Dean of Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions and Director of the Graduate School Mitchell Wand, SB., Ph.D., Associate Dean and Director of Graduate Studies of the College of Computer Science 336 General University Committees University Council, 1985-1986 Kenneth G. Ryder, Chairman John A. Curry, Vice Cliairman Anthony N. Penna, Wee Chairman Barbara F. Burke, Secretary Richard Astro Alan R. Benenfeld Charles W. Coffin Philip T. Crotty Ednnund L. Deltano Elisabeth M. Drake Clifford J. Fralen Maurice E. Gilmore Daniel J. Givelber Charles L. Hallenborg Ellen S. Jackson John W. Jordan Paul M. Kalaghan Christopher F, Kennedy James B. King Roland E. Latham Philip LaTorre Vincent J. Lembo Paul M. Lepley Juanita 0. Long Kathryn Luttgens John A. Martin Philip R. McCabe Philip R. McDonald Christopher Mosher John D. O'Bryant Donald G. Porter Paul M. Pratt Gordon E. Pruett Eugene M. Reppucc Daniel J. Roberts Edward W. Robinson Norman Rosenblatt Phyllis M. Schaen Gerald E. Schumacher Arthur D. Smith Michael J. Tighe Royal K. Toebes Joy W. Viola Karl Weiss Raymond R. Williams Roy L. Wooldridge Jr. The Faculty Senate 1985-1986 *Antliony N. Penna, Presiding Officer Rae Andre 'Richard Astro *Alan R. Benenfeld Ralph S. Blanchard, Jr. Bruce Bolnick Franklyn K. Brown Leslie Burg Marilyn A. Cairns *John A. Curry "Elisabeth M. Drake Carl W. Eastman William L. Faissler Barbara Fraumeni Marvin H. Friedman Maurice E. Gilmore Robert A. Gonsalves Richard E. Grojean Donald M. Jacobs *Paul M. Kalaghan Israel Katz David N. Leggett *Paul M. Lepley M. X. Lesser All Malekzadeh Bertram J. Malenka Ronald J. McAllister Joseph Meier Mary Jo Ondrechen Stuart S. Peterfreund Thomas E. Phalen, Jr. Harlan D Piatt *Paul Pratt Gordon E, Pruett *Norman Rosenblatt Betty Salzburg Robert A. Schatz 'Gerald Schumacher Robert Sheehan M. Delaine Williamson 'Appointed by the President fORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY African-American Institute (AF) Barletta Natatorium (BN) Boston YMCA (BY) Cabot Physical Education Building (CB) Cahners Hall (CA) CargillHall(CG) Churchill Hall (CH) 716 Columbus Avenue Cullinane Hail (Botolph) (CN) CushingHalKCU) Dana Research Center (DA) DockserHall(DK) Dodge Library (DG) Ell Student Building (Auditorium) (EL) Ell Student Center (Student Lounge) (EC Forsyth Building (FR) Forsyth Building Annex (FA) HaydenHall(HA) Hillel-Frager Holmes Hall (HO) 236 Huntington Avenue 271 Huntington Plaza (HN) HurtigHall(HT) Kariotis Hall (KA) Kerr Hall (Faculty Center) Knowles Center (Gryzmish Hall) (KG) Knowles Center (Voipe Hall) (KV) Lake Hall (LA) 334 Massachusetts Avenue Manhews Arena (MA) Matthews Arena Annex (ARENX) MeserveHalKME) Mugar Life Science Building (Peabody Health Professions Center) (MU) Newman Center Nightingale Hall (Nl) Parker Building (PA) Peabody Center Richards Hall (RI) Robinson Hall (RB) Ruggles (11 Leon Street) (UO) Snell Engineering Center (SN) 122 St. Stephen Street Stearns Center (ST) 26 Tavern Road (TA) Handicapped Parking Handicapped Routes Parking Areas Public Buildings Public Parks Street Direction Underground Tunnel Maps are provided by the Visitor Infonnation Center 1 15 Richards Hall, extension 2736. Some buildings on this map are used but not owned by Northeastern University. NUP 6.1.5 Maps are provided by the Visitor Information Center, 115 Richards Hall, extension 2736. Index Absence, 323 Academic Assistance Center, 299 Academic calendar, 321, 329-30 Academic Computer Services, 156, 183,300-301 Academic counseling, 299 in Arts and Sciences, 23 for freshmen, 298 Academic policy, 320-23 Accounting graduate programs, 225, 227 undergraduate programs, 132 Admissions advanced placement, 237-38 applying for, 238 deferred, 239 Department of, 234 early, 239 entrance examinations for, 237 general requirements, 235-38 health requirements, 246-47 of international students, 243 orientation prior to. 234-35 plans of, 238-43 rolling, 238 as special students, 242-43 of transfer students, 243-46 Advanced placement, 237, 243-44 Advising: see Counseling Aerospace Maintenance Engineering Technology, 181-82 Aerospace Studies, 327 African-American Institute, 240, 241 African-American Studies, 59-60 Allied Health Professions: see Phar- macy and Allied Health Profes- sions, College of Alternative Freshman-Year Program. 217-20,240 Alumni Association, 324-25 American Sign Language (ASL), 81- 82 Anthropology, 75-77 Application fee, 238, 251 Applied Social Research, Center for, 231 Architectural Center, affiliation with, 82 Architecture, 26-27 Archives, 297 Arena, 8, 315 Art, 26-27 Arts and Sciences, College of administration, 21, 23 admission to, 236 advising and placement in, 23 Core Curriculum in, 93 graduate programs, 224-25 graduation from, 94 Honors Program, 22-23 independent major, 86-87 major programs, 22 minors, 80-81 program aims. 21-22 research, 229 special programs. 21, 80-92 student services, 23-24 undergraduate programs, 17, 25- 79 Asian Studies, Center for. 83 ASL, 81-82 Assessment Tutoring ana Enrich- ment Resources program. 297 Astronomy, 50-51 Athletic Training program, 105-106 Attendance, 323 Audiovisual aids, 301-302 Awards, 284-89 Barletta Natatorium, 97 Barnett Institute of Chemical Analysis and Materials Science, 231 Bequests, 325 Biology, 44-46 Biomedical Engineering, 177 Black studies, 59-60 Bookstore, 321 Boston campus, 8-10 city of. 11-12 Boston Architectural Center (BAC), 82 Boston-Bouve College of Human De- velopment Professions accreditation, 99 admission to, 236 certification in, 100 facilities, 97-98 graduate programs, 225 graduation from, 98 health clearance, 98, 246-47 liability insurance in, 252 licensure'registration in, 99 program aims, 97 research, 230 special programs, 117-18 undergraduate programs, 17. 101-25 Boston Library Consortium, 297 Boston Lyric Opera, 82 Box office, 85 Business Administration, College of accreditation, 131 administration of, 125 admission to, 236 basic course requirements, 131 faculty, 125-27 French for, 86 German for, 82-83 graduate programs, 225-26 graduation from, 130 honors program, 129 London internship in, 88 minor, 83, 129-30 non-concentration, 143 professional preparation, 127-29 research. 231 sample curriculum. 131 transfer to, 22 undergraduate programs, 18, 132-43 Cabot Center, 97, 315 Cahners Hall Math/Writing Center, 23 Calendar, 321. 329-30 Call Children's Center. 98 Campus, 8-10 maps, 13, 337 tour, 234 Campus Media Services. 301-302 Cancellation, of classes, 323 Cardiovascular Health and Exercise program, 107 Career counseling, 5, 300, 307 Career Development and Placement, Department of, 24, 307 Career Planning Program, 5 Career Resource Center, 5 Cars, 291 Center for International Higher Edu- cation Documentation (CIHED), 297 Center for the Study of Sport in Soci- ety, 84 Certification, 100 in athletic training, 105 in dance education, 108 in education, 103 in exercise technology. 107 in health education, 115 in physical education, 105, 110 Chemical Engineering, 158-59 Chemistry, 47-49 Children's Center, 98 CIHED, 297 Civil Engineering, 160-64 Clubs, 310-12 College-Level Examination Program (CLEP), 238. 244 Communication Mass, 79, 88 Speech, 41-42 Technical, 91 Community Health Education. 115- 16 Compensatory programs at Academic Assistance Center, 299 at Cahners Hall MathA/Vnting Cen- ter, 23 freshmen courses, 215-16, 242 at Reading Clinic, 97-98, 300 Computer Engineering, 167. 169, 170 Computer Science, College of administration and faculty, 145 admission to, 236 graduate programs, 226 research, 230 transfer to, 22 undergraduate programs, 18, 145-149 Computer Search Services, 297 Computer Services, 156, 183, 300- 301 Computer Technology, 185-86 Conduct, 323 Continuing Education, Center for, 228 Cooperative education (co-op), 3-5 Center for, 328 Department of. 4 freshman year in Engineenng, 241 history of, 320 international, 5. 86-89, 91 Research Center, 231 Core Curriculum, in Arts and Sci- ences, 94 Counseling academic, 299 Counseling (cont'd.) in Arts and Sciences, 23-24 career, 5, 300, 307 freshmen, 298 of international students, 303 for parents, 307 personal, 300 preprofessional, 23-24. 299, 307 Counseling and Testing Center, 300 Course evaluations, 301 Credential service, 307 Credits, quarter-hour, 16, 321 Criminal Justice, College of administration and faculty, 151 admission to, 237 graduate programs, 226 graduation from, 152 research, 230 Spanish for, 86 undergraduate programs, 18, 151-53 CullinaneHall, 10 Dana Research Center, 10 Dance, 30-31 Dance teacher certification, 108-109 Dance Theatre, 1 17 Day care, 98 Dean's List, 322 Deferred Admission Plan, 239 Dental Assistant Program, 222-24 Dental Hygiene, 197-99 Deposits for housing, 251, 290 laboratory, 253 for room assignment, 290 for ROTC uniform, 253, 326 for tuition, 246, 251 Deviance, 79 Disabled Student Organization, 306 Disciplinary action, 323 Distribution Management, 141-42 Dockser Hall, 97 Dodge Library, 296 Dormitones, 290-92 deposits for, 251, 290 fees for, 250, 292 Drama, 30-31 Earth Sciences, 50-51 East/West Marine Biology Program, 85 Economics in France, 86 French for, 86 German for, 82-83 in Italy, 86 London internship in, 88 undergraduate programs, 61-62 Education, Department of, 97-98, 101-103 Education Services, Department of, 299-300 Electrical Engineering, 165-70 Electrical Engineering Technology, 182-83, 187-88 Electron Microscopy, Center for, 231 Ell Scholars Program, 239 EllStudent Center, 310 fee for, 251 Emergency closing, 323 Engineering, College of accreditation, 157 administration, 155 admission to, 235-36 BS/MS programs, 156 computer facilities, 156 Cooperative Freshman-Year Pro- gram, 241 General Engineering program, 1 78-79 graduate programs, 226 graduation from, 156-57 part-time programs, 156 professional preparation, 155 Progress in Minorities in Engineer- ing program, 157 research, 230 sample freshman-year program, 157 undergraduate programs, 18, 155-79 Women in Engineering program, 157 Engineering Technology, School of accreditation, 182 admission to, 235-36 BS/MS program, 240 computer services, 183 facilities, 182-83 graduation from, 182 part-time programs, 182, 224 professional preparation, 181-82 sample freshman-year program, 184 undergraduate programs, 18, 185-89 Women in Engineering Technology program, 183 England economics programs in, 88, 90 journalism program in, 88 political science program In, 88- 89 social and human services pro- gram in, 91 English compensatory programs, 23, 215- 16, 242,299 for international students, 243, 304 as a Second Language teaching, 103 undergraduate programs, 33-34 English Proficiency Test, 243 Entrance examinations, 237 Entrepreneurship, 133-34 Environmental option, 161 Escort service, 293 Events line, 13 Examinations advanced placement, 237. 244 CLEP, 238, 244 English Proficiency Test, 243 entrance, 237 final, 321 TOEFL, 237, 243. 245 Exchange program in Greece, 86 Trent Polytechnic, 91 Exercise Technology, 107 Expenses: see also Fees; Financial Aid for freshman year, 250-251 for room and board, 292 for upperclassmen, 251 Extracurricular activities, 310-17 Family, Sex Roles and, 78 Family Educational Rights and Pri- vacy Act, 323 Favat Center, 98, 299 Fees: see also Deposits; FInanciar Aid application. 238, 251 for deferred payment, 253 food service, 292-93 freshman year, 250-51 graduation, 252 health services, 251 housing, 292 for international students, 252 for late payment, 253 liability Insurance, 252 for overloads, 254 refund of, 253-54 for special students, 242 student activities, 252 student center, 251 transcripts, 322 for transfer students, 245 tuition. 250-51 uniforms, 252 for upperclassmen, 251 Warren Center. 253 vi/inter sports, 253 Fenway Project, 117 : Field Studies, School for (SFS). 91 ] Final examinations, 321 Finance concentration, 134-36 Financial aid application for, 260-61 community grants. 239, 267 eligibility for, 261 federal programs, 262-64 honors awards, 289-94 other scholarships. 284-87 state assistance programs, 262 University scholarships, 264-83 Financial Service Institute, 228 Fine Arts special programs, 84-85 undergraduate programs, 25-31 Food services, 292-93 Foreign languages: see Modern lan- guages France, economics courses in, 86 Fraternities, 313 housing at, 291 French, 37-38 for business and economics, 86 Freshman Affairs, Office of, 298 Freshman year Alternative Program, 217-20, 240 compensatory courses. 215-16, 242 Cooperative Program. 241 counseling, 298 expenses, 250-51 financial aid, 255 orientation, 241-42, 298 3eology, 50-51 3erman, 37-38 business, 82-83 Gifts, to Northeastern University, 325 Grades, 321,322 Graduate schools information on, 299 at Northeastern, 224-27 3raduation fee, 251 3raduation requirements in Arts and Sciences, 94-95 in Boston-Bouve College, 98-99 : in Business Administration, 130 in Criminal Justice, 152 in Engineering, 156 in Engineering Technology, 182 in Nursing, 192 quarter hours, 19 writing requirement, 322 3raduation with honors in Arts and Sciences, 94 in Boston-Bouve College, 99 in Business Administration, 130 in Criminal Justice, 152 in Engineering, 157 in Engineering Technology, 182 Grants community, 239 federal. 257, 258 state. 257 Greece, exchange program in, 86 Gymnasium, 97, 315 Handicapped, Office of Services for, 305-306 Hayden Lodge, 98 Health-Care Curriculum Open Op- tion, 196-97 Health and Exercise Technology, 107 Health Education for dental hygienists, 199 electives, 117 major, 115-16 Health insurance, 251, 305 Health Record Administration, 200- 201 Health Science, 199 Health Services fee for, 251 program in, 78 University, 304-305 Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies, Department of, 104-18 Hearing Clinic, 98 HELP Legal Service Plan, 307 High school courses taken during, 241 early admission from, 239 History, 63-64 Holidays, 329-30 Honor societies, 288 Honors List, 322 Honors Program in Arts and Sciences, 22-23 in Business Administration, 129 Housing, 255-57 deposits, 251, 255 expenses, 250, 257-58 Human Resources Management, 136-37 Human Services in England, 91 Spanish for, 86 undergraduate program, 65-66, 122-23 Humanities Center for, 83 programs, 32-42 I.D. card, 314 Incomplete, 321 Independent major, in Arts and Sci- ences, 86-87 Industrial Engineering, 171-73 Infirmary, 305 Information Booth, 310 Information Center, 13, 337 Information Systems, 171-73 Instructional Development and Eval- uation, Office of, 301 Instructional Media Production, Training, and Utilization Ser- vices, 301 Instructional Technology, Center for, 301-302 Insurance accident and sickness, 251 , 305 concentration in, 134-36 liability, 192,252 Insurance and Financial Service In- stitute, 228 Interim Academic Status Report, 298 International Business, 137-39 International students admission of, 243 English for, 243, 304 entrance examinations for, 237 fee for, 252 policy on, 324 support services for, 302-303 Internships, 307 in pharmacy, 206-207 in London, 88-89 in Washington, D.C., 92 Interview, preadmission, 235 Investment Analysis, 135 Irish Studies Program, 87 Italian, 37-38 Italy, economics courses in, 86 Job bank, 307 Job counseling, 5. 300, 307 Journalism London internship, 88 undergraduate programs, 35-36 Laboratory deposits, 253 Lane Health Center, 304-305 Language Clinic, 98 Language laboratories, 296 Languages: see Modern languages Law, School of admission as freshman to, 239 degree program, 226-27 research, 230 Law and Society, 78 League of Composers-International Society for Contemporary Music, 87-88 Learning Resources Center, 296, 297 Legal service, 307 Leisure Studies, 112-15 Liability insurance, 192, 252 Liberal Arts: see Arts and Sciences, College of Libraries, 296-97 Licensure in nursing, 192 in pharmacy, 206-207 in physical therapy, 99 Life/Career Planning Program, 5 Lincoln College: see Engineering Technology, School of Linguistics major, 67-68 minor, 68-69, 88 Loans federal, 258-59 state, 257 University, 275, 279 London, internship programs in, 88- 89 Majors in Arts and Sciences, 22 independent, 86-87 undergraduate, 17-19 Malpractice insurance. 192, 252 Management concentration, 139-40: see also Business Administra- tion, College of Management Development, Center for. 225-26, 227-28 Maps, 13,337 Marine Science and Maritime Studies Center, 85, 229 Marine Studies Consortium, 89 major, 85 minor, 89 Marketing, 140-41 Mass Communication London internship, 88 specialization, 79 Massachusetts Bay Marine Studies Consortium, 89 Math Workshop, 23 Mathematics compensatory programs, 23, 215- 16,242,299 undergraduate programs, 43, 52- 53 Math/Writing Center, 23 Matthews Arena, 8, 315 Meals, 292-93 Mechanical Engineering, 174-76 Mechanical Engineering Technology, 183, 188-89 Media Services, 301-302 Media Studies, 89 Medical care, 304-305 Medical insurance, 251, 305 Medical Laboratory Science, 202- 204 Medical Record Administration, 200- 201 Medical Technology, 202-204 Milton and the Romantics, 92 Mini-courses, 312-13 Minority students in Engineering Progrann, 157 support services for, 241-42, 302 Modern languages business German, 82-83 French for business and econom- ics, 86 graduation requirements, 94-95 Spanish for criminal justice and hu- man services, 86 undergraduate programs, 37-38 Multicultural Student Affairs, Office of, 302 Music Boston Lyric Opera, 82 League of Composers-Interna- tional Society for Contemporary Music, 87-88 New England Conservatory affilia- tion, 89-90 organizations, 31 1 undergraduate programs, 28-29 Natural Sciences, 43-51, 54-57 Network Northeastern (NNU), 228 New England Conservatory, affiliation with, 89-90 New England Quarterly, 92 New Horizons, 312-13 New Venture Management, 133-34 Newspapers, student, 311 No school announcement, 323 Northeastern University administration, 331-36 campus, 8-10 history, 320 maps, 13, 337 Northeastern University Progress in Minorities in Engineering (NU- PRIME), 157 Nursing, College of accreditation, 192 administration and faculty, 191 admission to, 236 graduation from, 192 health clearance, 192, 246 laboratory fee, 253 licensure, 192 malpractice insurance, 192 research, 230 transfer credits, 192 undergraduate programs, 19, 191-93 uniform, 192, 252 Occupations and Professions pro- gram, 78 Oceanography, 50-51 Open Campus Plan, 241 Open Option program, 196-97 Opera, Boston Lyric, 82 Organizational Studies, 79 Orientation freshmen, 234-35, 241-42, 298 preadmission, 234 transfer students, 245 Overloads, 254 Oxford University, 90 Parent Loan Program (PLUS), 258 Parents' Services, Office of, 307 Parking, 291 Parson's Field, 315 Pass-fail system, 321 Pell Grant Program, 257 Personality and Social Psychology, 90 Personnel Management, 136-37 Pharmacy and Allied Health Profes- sions, College of accreditation, 196 administration, 195 admission to, 236 degrees in, 196 facilities, 195-96 graduate programs, 227 Open Option, 196-97 professional preparation, 195 research, 231 transfer with advanced standing to, 196 undergraduate programs, 19, 196-214 uniform fee, 252 Pharmacy programs, 205-208 Philosophy, 39-40 Photocopying service, 310 Photo-identification card, 252 Physical Distribution Management, 141-42 Physical Education: see also Sports electives, 117 majors, 105-1 1 Physical examination, 246-47, 304 for Nursing, 192 for Physical Therapy, 98 Physical Therapy Department of, 98 licensure, 99 physical examination for, 98, 246 undergraduate program, 119-21 Physics, 54-57 Placement, in Arts and Sciences, 23 Placement counseling, 307 PLUS, 258 Political organizations, 31 1 Political Science London internship, 88-89 undergraduate programs, 70-71 Washington internship, 92 Popular Culture and Mass Commu- nication, 79 Power Systems, 167, 170 Pre-Health Professions Advisory Committee, 23, 299 Professional schools advising on, 23-24, 299, 307 combined program with, 84 at Northeastern, 224-27 Professional societies, 312, 314 Program changes, 320 Project Ujima, 241 Psychology, 72-74 Personality, 90 Social, 79, 90 Public Administration, 71 Quarter-hour credits. 16, 321 Radiologic Technology Program, 222 Reading Clinic, 97-98, 300 " Reading Lab, 299 Reading skills | compensatory programs, 215-16' 242, 299, 300 speed, 300 Records, inspection of, 323 Recreation and Leisure Studies, 112-15 Recreation Club, 118 Refunds, 253-54 Registration, 241-42 for transfer students, 245-46 Religion, 39-40 Religious organizations, 312 Religious services, 317 Remedial courses; see Compensa- tory programs Research, 229-31 Reserve Officers' Training Corps (ROTC). 325-28 scholarships, 288, 326, 327 uniform deposit, 253, 326 Residence halls, 290-92 deposits for, 251, 290 fees for, 250, 292 Residency requirement, in Arts and Sciences, 93 Respiratory Therapy, 209-1 1 Risk Management, 135-36 Rolling Admission Plan, 238 Romanticism Past and Present, 92 Room and board cost for, 250, 292-^3 deposits for, 251, 290 refund of, 254 residence halls, 290-92 ROTC, 325-28 scholarships, 288, 326, 327 uniform deposit, 253, 326 Russian, 37-38 Russian Studies, 90-91 Schedule, 321,329-30 Scholarships Community, 239, 262 Ell Scholars Program, 239 honors, 286-89 by outside sources, 279-82 ROTC, 288. 326, 327 state, 257 University. 259-78 School Health Education, 115-16 Sciences marine, 85, 89 natural. 43-51, 54-57 social, 58-79 Security, 293 Sex Roles and Family, 78 SFS, 91 Sign language, 81-82 Small Business Management, 133- 34 Snell Engineering Center, 10 Snow emergency, 323 Social Psychology, 79, 90 Social Sciences, 58-79 Social services program, in England, 91 Social Welfare, 77 Sociology, 75-76, 77-79 Sororities, 313 vSpanish, 37-38 ) for criminal justice and tnuman ser- vices, 86 'special students, 242-43 Speech Communication, 41-42 Speech-Language-Hearing Clinic and Laboratory, 98 Speed reading, 300 Sports: see also Physical Education arena, 8, 315 Cabot Center, 97, 315 Center for Study of Sport in Soci- ety, 84 intramural, 1 17, 314 men's varsity, 315-16 Parson's Field, 315 swimming pool, 97 at Warren Center, 98, 112 women's varsity, 316-17 State of the Art Engineering, 228 Student activities, 310-17 fee for, 252 Student Center, 310 fee for, 251 Student I. D., 314 Studies in American Fiction, 92 Studyskills, 215-16, 242, 299 ■Swimming pool, 97 Teacher certification in dance education, 108 in education, 102-103 in health education, 1 15 in physical education, 105, 110 Teacher preparation in education, 102-103 in health education, 104 in physical education, 104 Teacher/Course Evaluation Project (TCEP), 301 Technical Communication, 91 Telecommunications program, 328 Test of English as a Foreign Lan- guage (TOEFL), 237, 243, 245 Tests: see Examinations Theatre organizations, 311 undergraduate program, 30-31 Therapeutic Recreation, 114-15 Third World students, 302 Ticket sales, 85 TOEFL, 237, 243, 245 Topics in Psychology Series (TIPS), 73 Tour, of campus, 234 Toxicology, 212-14 Transcripts, 322 Transfer students admission of, 243-46 to Business Administration, 22 to Computer Science, 22 to Nursing, 192 to Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions, 196 to ROTO, 326 Transportation Management, 141-42 Trent Polytechnic exchange pro- gram, 91 Tuition, 250-51 for course overloads, 254 deposit for, 245, 251 payment of, 252-53 refund of. 253-54 Tutonng, 27, 297, 299; see also Com- pensatory programs Undergraduate programs, 17-19 Uniforms for Nursing, 192, 252 for Pharmacy and Allied Health, 252 for ROTC, 253, 326 University College Alternative Freshman-Year Pro- gram, 217-20, 240 full-time day programs, 221 part-time evening programs, 221 Urban Studies minor, 91-92 specialization, 78 Veterans, 326 Visitor Information Center, 13, 337 Warren Center, 98, 112 fees for, 253 Washington, DC, internship in, 92 Withdrawal, and tuition refund, 253- 54 Women in Engineering, 157 in Engineering Technology, 183 Women's Studies, 92 Work-study program, 258; see also Cooperative education (co-op) Writing compensatory programs, 23, 242 graduation requirement in, 322 Writing Center, 23 X-ray Technology Program, 222 ^Ut^Sttliyi Universil^€qlteggi: m University College Bulletin Part-Time Programs 1985-1986 Northeastern University Part-time day and evening undergraduate programs in: Business Administration Health Professions and Sciences Law Enforcement Liberal Arts Delivery of Services The University assumes no lia- bility, and hereby expressly negates the same, for fail- ure to provide or delay in providing educational or related services or facilities or for any other failure or delay in performance arising out of or due to causes beyond the reasonable control of the University, which causes include, without limitation, power failure, fire, strikes by University employees or others, damage by the elements, and acts of public authorities. The Uni- versity will, however, exert reasonable efforts, when in its judgment it is appropriate to do so, to provide com- parable or substantially equivalent services, facilities, or performance, but its inability or failure to do so shall not subject it to liability. The Northeastern University catalog contains current information regarding the University calendar, admis- sions, degree requirements, fees, and regulations, and such information is not intended to be and should not be relied upon as a statement of the University's con- tractual undertakings. Northeastern University reserves the nght in its sole judgment to promulgate and change rules and regula- tions and to make changes of any nature in its program, calendar, admissions policies, procedures and stan- dards, degree requirements, fees, and academic schedule whenever it is deemed necessary or desir- able, including, without limitation, changes in course content, the rescheduling of classes, cancelling of scheduled classes and other academic activities, and requiring or affording alternatives for scheduled classes or other academic activities, in any such case giving such notice as is reasonably practicable under the cir- cumstances. Northeastern will do its best to make available to you the finest education, the most stimulating atmosphere, and the most congenial conditions it can provide. But the quality and the rate of progress of your academic career is in large measure dependent upon your own abilities, commitment, and effort. This is equally true with respect to professional advancement upon com- pletion of the degree or program in which you are en- rolled. The University cannot guarantee that you will obtain or succeed at any particular job; that will depend upon your own skills, achievement, presentation, and other factors such as market conditions at that time. Similarly, in many professions and occupations there are increasing requirements imposed by federal and state statutes and regulatory agencies for certification or entry into a particular field. These may change during the period of time when you are at Northeastern, and they may vary from state to state and from country to country. While the University stands ready to help you find out about these requirements and changes, it is your responsibility to initiate the inquiry because the University has no other way of knowing what your ex- pectations and understandings are. In brief, the University is there to offer you educational opportunities and to assist you in finding the direction in which you want to steer your educational experience. But you are a partner in this venture with an obligation and responsibility to yourself. Antidiscrimination Policy Northeastern University is committed to a policy of equal opportunity to all stu- dents and employees without regard to race, color, re- ligion, sex, sexual preference, national origin, or handicap or veteran status. The University prohibits dis- crimination in all matters involving admission, registra- tion, and all official relationships with students, including evaluation of academic performance. Equal Opportunity Employment Policy Northeastern University is an equal opportunity em- ployer. It is institutional policy that there shall be no discrimination against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, age, national origin, or handicap or veteran status. Northeastern also prohibits discrimination against any employee regarding upgrading, demotion or transfer, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of com- pensation, and selection for training. In addition, the University adheres to Affirmative Action guidelines in all recruitment endeavors. Further, Northeastern will not condone any form of sexual harassment, defined as the use of unwelcome sexual advances, requests for favors, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature as an explicit or implicit condition of employment, as the basis for em- ployment decisions, or when such conduct interferes with an individual's work performance by creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment. Inquiries concerning our equal opportunity policies may be referred to the University Title IX Coordinator/ Compliance Officer for Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Affirmative Action Office, 175 Richards Hall, 617-437-2133. Office of Services for the Handicapped The Office of Senyices for the Handicapped (OSH) provides a va- riety of support services and general assistance to all of Northeastern's disabled students and employees. The University's efforts to comply with the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 are coordinated by Ruth Bork, OSH director, 5 Ell Center, 617-437-2675. Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act In accordance with the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, Northeastern University permits its students to inspect their records wherever appropriate and to challenge specific parts of them when they feel it necessary to do so. Specific details of the law as it applies to Northeastern are printed in the Student Hand- book and are distributed annually at registrations of the University College and graduate schools. Emergency Closing of the University Northeastern University has made arrangements to no- tify students, faculty, and staff by radio when it becomes necessary to cancel classes because of extremely in- clement weather. Radio stations WBZ, WEEI, WHDH, WRKO, WBCN, WZOU, and WROR are authonzed to announce school cancellations. Since ITFS-based in- struction originates from live or broadcast facilities at the University, neither the classes nor the courier ser- vice operate when the University is closed. Disclaimer Tuition rates, all fees, rules and regula- tions, and courses and course content are subject to revision by the President and the Board of Trustees at any time. Accreditation Northeastern University is accredited by the New England Association of Schools and Col- leges, Inc., which accredits schools and colleges in the six New England states. Accreditation by the Associa- tion indicates that the institution has been carefully eval- uated and found to meet standards agreed upon by qualified educators. Contents iv Boston Campus Map V University College Offices vi Academic Calendar 1 The University 7 Buildings and Facilities 11 University College 15 Office of Academic and Student Affairs 16 Academic Policies 25 Career and Academic Counseling Services 28 Tuition and Fees 30 Scholarships and Financial Aid 34 Student Activities 37 Programs of Study 39 Business Administration 61 Health Professions and Sciences 91 Law Enforcement 105 Liberal Arts 131 Certificate Programs 142 Alternative Freshman Year Program 146 Computer Systems Specialist Program 147 Program Consultants and Coordinators 151 Course Descriptions 223 Faculty 241 University Governing Boards and Officers 246 Maps 259 Index NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY Massachusetts r^ 71 Academic and Service Buildings Key African-American Institute Barletta Natatorium Boston YMCA Cabot Physical Education Building Cahners Hall Cargill Hall Churchill Hall 716 Columbus Avenue Cullmane Hall (Botolph) Cushing Hall Dana Research Center Dockser Hall Dodge Library Ell Student Building (Auditorium) Ell Student Center (Student Lounge) Forsyth Building Forsyth Building Annex Hayden Hall Hillel-Frager Holmes Hall 236 Huntmgton Avenue HurtigHall Kariotis Hall Kerr Hall (Faculty Center) Knowles Center (Gryzmish Hall) Knowles Center (Volpe Hall) Lake Hall 334 Massachusetts Avenue Matthews Arena Matthews Arena Annex Meserve Hall Mugar Life Science Building (Peabody Health Professio Newman Center Nightingale Hall Parker Building Peabody Center Richards Hall Robinson Hall Ruggles ( 1 1 Leon Street) Snell Engineering Center 122 St. Stephen Street Stearns Center 26 Tavern Road Center) Academic, Residential, and Service Buildings \' "" j Handicapped Parking i & 6 ix 1 Handicapped Routes 1 Parking Areas 1 Public Buildings ! 1 Public Parks Street Direction \=] Underground Tunnel Maps are provided by the Visitor Information Center, U5 Richards Hall. ( Some buildings on this not owned by Northea* NUP 6.11.4 University College Offices General Information 437-2400 Office of the Registrar 437-2300 Belmont Campus 484-4418 Brockton Campus 584-2444 Burlington Suburban Campus 272-5500 Burlington High School 273-1870 Chelmsford Campus 251-8792 Dedham Campus 329-8000 Framingham Campus 877-2333 Lynnfield Campus 334-6027 Marlboro Campus 485-4122 Marshfield Campus 837-1835 Milford Campus 473-2565 Revere Campus 289-8113 Westwood Campus 329-3030 Weymouth Campus 335-9112 Regular Office Hours Boston 102 Churchill Hall Monday-Friday 8:30 a.m -8:30 p.m. (General Information) Saturday 8:30 a.m.-1:00 p.m. 120 Hayden Hall Monday-Thursday 8:30 a.m.-8:00 p.m. (Office of the Registrar) Friday 8:30 a.m.-4:30 p.m. Belmont High School Tuesday and Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Brockton High School Monday and Wednesday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Burlington Suburban Campus Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m.-10:00 p.m Saturday 8:00 a.m.-1:00 p.m. Burlington High School Monday-Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Chelmsford High School Tuesday and Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Dedham Campus Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m.-10:00 p.m Saturday 8:00 a.m.-1:00 p.m. Framingham North High School Monday-Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Lynnfield Middle School Tuesday and Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Marlboro High School Monday and Wednesday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Marshfield High School Tuesday and Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Milford High School Tuesday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Revere (Abraham Lincoln Tuesday and Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. School) Westwood High School Monday-Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Weymouth North High School Monday-Thursday 5:30-10:00 p.m. Summer Office Hours Boston 102 Churchill Hall Monday-Thursday 8:30 a.m.-8:30 p.m. Friday and Saturday Closed 120 Hayden Hall Monday-Thursday 8:30 a.m.-8:00 p.m. Friday and Saturday Closed Burlington Suburban Campus Monday-Thursday 8:00 a.m.-10:00 p.m Friday and Saturday Closed Dedham Campus Framingham North High School Weymouth North High School Monday-Thursday Friday Saturday Monday and Wednesday Tuesday and Thursday 8:30 a.m.-l 0:00 p.m. 8:30 a.m.-4:30 p.m. Closed 5:30-10:00 p.m. 5:30-10:00 p.m. 1985-1986 Academic Calendar Fall Quarter 1985 Classes begin Monday, September 23, 1985 Fall Registration Dates Boston Belmont High School Brockton High School Burlington Suburban Campus Chelmsford High School Dedham Campus Framingham North High School Lynnfield Middle School Marlboro High School Marshfield High School Milford High School Revere (Abraham Lincoln School) Westwood High School Weymouth North High School Fall quarter classes begin Columbus Day observed Veterans' Day observed Thanksgiving recess 5:00-7:30 p.m. 9:00-12:00 noon 5:00-7:30 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 12:00-3:00 p.m. and 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. No classes No classes No classes Tuesday-Friday, September 3-6 Saturday, September 7 Monday-Wednesday, September 9-1 1 Thursday, September 5 and Tuesday, September 10 Wednesday, September 4 and Monday, September 9 Monday and Wednesday, September 9 and 11 Tuesday, September 10 Thursday, September 5 and Tuesday, September 10 Thursday, September 5 and Tuesday, September 10 Tuesday, September 3 and Monday, September 9 Thursday, September 5 and Tuesday, September 10 Wednesday, September 4 and Monday, September 9 Thursday, September 5 and Tuesday, September 10 Tuesday, September 3 and Tuesday, September 10 Thursday, September 5 and Tuesday, September 10 Thursday, September 5 and Tuesday, September 10 Wednesday, September 4 and Monday, September 9 Monday, September 23 Monday, October 14 Monday, November 1 1 Thursday-Saturday, November 28-30 Final examination period for fall quarter Christmas vacation Winter Quarter 1986 No classes Monday-Saturday, December 9-14 Monday-Wednesday, December 16-January 1 Classes begin Monday, January 6, 1986 Winter Registration Dates Boston 5:00-7:30 p.m. Belmont High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Brockton High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Burlington Suburban Campus 5:30-8:00 p.m. Chelmsford High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Dedham Campus 5:30-8:00 p.m. Framingham North High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Lynnfield Middle School Marlboro High School Marshfield High School Milford High School Revere (Abraham Lincoln School) Westwood High School Weymouth North High School Winter quarter classes begin Martin Luther King Jr.'s Birthday Presidents' Day Final examination period for winter quarter Spring recess (or make-up period for lost snow days) Spring Quarter 1986 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. No classes No classes Monday-Thursday, December 2-5 Tuesday, December 3 Monday, December 2 Monday-Thursday, December 2-5 Tuesday, December 3 Monday, December 2 and Tuesday, December 3 Monday, December 2 and Tuesday, December 3 Tuesday, December 3 Monday, December 2 Tuesday, December 3 Tuesday, December 3 Tuesday, December 3 Tuesday, December 3 Tuesday, December 3 and Wednesday, December 4 Monday, January 6 Monday, January 20 Monday, February 17 Monday-Saturday, March 24-29 Monday-Saturday, March 31 -April 5 Classes begin Monday, April 7. 1986 Spring Registration Dates Boston 5:00-7:30 p.m. Belmont High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Brockton High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Burlington Suburban Campus 5:30-8:00 p.m. Chelmsford High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Dedham Campus 5:30-8:00 p.m. Framingham North High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Lynnfield Middle School Marlboro High School Marshfield High School Milford High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. 5:30-8:00 p.m. Monday-Thursday, March 17-20 Tuesday, March 18 Wednesday, March 19 Monday-Thursday, March 17-20 Tuesday, March 18 Monday, March 17 and Wednesday, March 19 Monday, March 17 and Tuesday, March 18 Tuesday, March 18 Monday, March 17 Tuesday, March 18 Tuesday, March 18 Revere (Abraham Lincoln 5:30-8:00 p.m. School) Westwood High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Weymouth North High School 5:30-8:00 p.m. Spring quarter classes begin Patriots' Day observed No classes Memorial Day observed No classes Final examination penod for spring quarter Commencement Summer Quarter 1986 Tuesday, March 18 Tuesday, March 18 Monday, March 17 and Wednesday, March 19 Monday, April 7 Monday, April 21 Monday, May 26 Monday-Saturday, June 16-21 Sunday, June 22 Classes begin Monday, June 23, 1986 Registration for entire summer quarter Boston 5:00-7:30 p.m. Burlington Suburban Campus 5:30-8:00 p.m. Summer quarter classes begin Registration for second five-week term 5:30-8:00 p.m. Boston Burlington Suburban Campus 5:30-8:00 p.m. Monday-Thursday, June 2-5 Tuesday, June 3 and Wednesday, June 4 Monday, June 23 Monday, July 14 and Tuesday, July 15 Monday, July 14 Independence Day observed No classes Friday, July 4 Labor Day observed No classes Monday, September 1 Final examination period for Held during last class session of summer quarter each term Calendar changes may be made. The University community will be notified if such changes are necessary. The University Founded in 1898, Northeastern University is in- corporated as a privately endowed nonsectarian institution of higher learning under the General Laws of Massachusetts. By special enactment, the State Legislature has given the University general degree-granting powers. The University is governed by a Board of Trustees elected by and from the Northeastern University Corporation, a body of nearly 200 distinguished business and professional men and women. From its beginning. Northeastern University's dominant purpose has been to identify commu- nity educational needs and to meet these needs in distinctive and serviceable ways. The Univer- sity has not duplicated the programs of other institutions, but has pioneered new areas of ed- ucational service. A distinctive feature of Northeastern University is its cooperative plan of education, under which students alternate periods of work and study. This time-tested method of education offers students the opportunity to gain valuable practical expe- rience as an integral part of their college pro- grams and to contribute to the financing of their education. All Northeastern's undergraduate day colleges operate on the cooperative plan, which requires five years for the student to earn a de- gree. The College of Arts and Sciences also offers a four-year noncooperative option. Several of Northeastern's graduate schools have structured their programs to include the features of coop- erative education. In the field of adult education, programs of study have been developed to meet a variety of needs. University College offers evening courses — offered by the University since 1906 — and adult day courses leading to associate and bachelor's degrees, as well as certificates. In ad- dition to offering day undergraduate programs in computer technology, and electrical engineering and mechanical engineering technology, the School of Engineering Technology offers evening/ part-time certificate, associate, and bachelor's degree programs in technological areas. All for- mal courses of study leading to degrees through part-time programs are approved by the Basic College faculties concerned and are governed by the same qualitative and quantitative stan- dards as the regular day curricula. Courses are scheduled in the day and evening at Northeast- ern's campuses in Boston, Burlington, and Ded- ham. Evening courses are also scheduled in Belmont, Brockton, Chelmsford, Framingham, Lynnfield, Marlboro, Marshfield, Milford, Revere, Westwood, and Weymouth. For more information about the undergraduate colleges, their programs, or the cooperative plan of education, contact the Admissions Office, Northeastern University, 360 Huntington Avenue, Boston, MA 02115, tel. 617-437-2200. Undergraduate Colleges 617-437-2200 College of Arts and Sciences The College of Arts and Sciences offers majors in the arts, hu- manities, social sciences, and mathematics/sci- ences leading to the Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Science degrees. Curricula are nor- mally four years in length on a full-time plan or five years in length on the cooperative plan. Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions offers programs of study leading to the following degrees: Bachelor of Science in Education in the fields of early child- hood education, elementary education (with a mi- nor in special education), human services, physical education, school and community health education, secondary education, and speech and hearing; Bachelor of Science in Recreation and Leisure Studies; and Bachelor of Science in Physical Therapy. College of Business Administration The Col lege of Business Administration offers a five-year program of academic study and cooperative ed- ucation leading to the Bachelor of Science de- gree in Business Administration. Students must complete a six-course concentration in account- ing, human resources management, marketing, finance and insurance, management, interna- tional business administration, entrepreneurship and new venture management, transportation and physical distribution management, or a self- designed concentration. College of Computer Science The College of Computer Science offers a five-year cooperative education curriculum in computer science lead- ing to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Com- puter Science. Subareas of concentration within the program include tracks in artificial intelli- 2 The University gence, data bases, languages, and systems. The College's facilities provide students with hands- on experience in the use of modern time-sharing and microcomputer systems. College of Criminal Justice The College of Criminal Justice offers a full-time day curriculum on the cooperative plan leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science. College of Engineering The College of Engi- neering offers five-year cooperative education curricula in civil, mechanical, electrical (including a power systems option and a computer engi- neering option), chemical, and industrial engi- neering leading to the degree of Bachelor of Science with specification according to the engineering department in which the student qualifies. A more general program without spec- ification leading to the Bachelor of Science de- gree is offered in which students design their curricula around a core of science, engineering science, and engineering courses. For highly qualified students, the electrical and computer engineering, mechanical engineering, and indus- trial engineering and information systems depart- ments offer five-year programs leading to both a bachelor's and a master's degree; students carry course overloads beginning in the third year. The College also offers part-time programs during evening hours leading to Bachelor of Science degrees in Civil, Mechanical, and Electrical En- gineering, extending over six years and meeting the same qualitative and quantitative standards of scholarship as the day curricula. School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College) is a division of the College of Engineering offering engineering technology pro- grams leading to the degrees of Associate in Engineering, Associate in Science, and Bachelor of Engineering Technology. Programs include: (a) A full-time day curriculum on the cooperative plan leading to the degree of Bachelor of Engi- neering Technology (BET) in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Technology, and in Com- puter Technology and Aerospace Maintenance Engineering Technology. (b) A part-time evening program including pre- technology preparatory courses and degree pro- grams leading to the Associate in Engineering (AE) and the Bachelor of Engineering Technology (BET) in Civil, Mechanical, and Electrical Engi- neering Technology, Computer Technology, and Aerospace Maintenance Engineering Technol- ogy. The Associate in Science degree may be earned in telecommunications and energy sys- tems. The day BET program is often useful for the high school graduate or the student transferring from a community college or technical institute who desires a full-time day curriculum on the Northeastern University cooperative plan. In addition to its traditional curricula, the School of Engineering Technology offers technological and professional development opportunities to meet special needs of the part-time student. For more information, call 617-437-2500 or refer to the 1984-86 Lincoln College Bulletin. College of Nursing The College of Nursing baccalaureate nursing program, accredited by the National League for Nursing, operates on the cooperative plan and is five years in length. Suc- cessful completion of the program leads to the Bachelor of Science degree in Nursing. Registered nurses may complete requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree in Nursing full time during the day or part time in the evening. The College of Nursing collaborates with Univer- sity College in offering the evening section for registered nurses. College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Profes- sions The College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions offers five-year cooperative curricula leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Science in Pharmacy, Bachelor of Science in Res- piratory Therapy, and Bachelor of Science in Tox- icology, and to the Bachelor of Science degree with majors in medical laboratory science and health record administration. Associate degree programs are offered in medical laboratory sci- ence, respiratory therapy, and dental hygiene. In cooperation with the medical schools and teach- ing hospitals in the Boston area, the College of- fers a post-baccalaureate program for physician assistants. The College also offers the open op- tion, a common freshman-year health track avail- able for undeclared majors. University College University College, so called because it draws upon the resources of the other colleges of the University, offers part- time day and evening programs in business ad- ministration, health professions and sciences, law enforcement, and liberal arts, leading to the As- sociate in Science, Bachelor of Arts, and Bach- elor of Science degrees. It does not duplicate the offerings of the day colleges, but provides curri- The University 3 cula that cut across traditional subject-matter areas to meet the particular needs of adult stu- dents. Students may pursue a degree or simply take courses based on needs and interests, up to a total of 18 quarter hours of credit per quarter. Courses are offered in Boston as well as Belmont, Burlington, Brockton, Chelmsford, Dedham, Fra- mingham, Lynnfield, Marlboro, Marshfield, Mil- ford, Revere, Westwood, and Weymouth. Graduate Schools For more information about the graduate schools and their programs, call 617-437-2000 and ask for the number for the individual school. Arts and Sciences The Master of Arts degree may be earned in economics, English, history, journalism, political science, psychology, sociol- ogy, and social anthropology. The Master of Sci- ence degree is available in biology; chemistry; clinical chemistry; forensic chemistry; economics policy and planning; law, policy, and society; mathematics; and physics. The Master of Tech- nical and Professional Writing, the Master of Sci- ence in Health Science, the Master of Journalism in News Media Management, and the Master of Public Administration degrees are also offered. In addition, there is an advanced literary study pro- gram leading to the Certificate of Advanced Graduate Study, and programs leading to the Doctor of Philosophy degree in biology; chemis- try; forensic chemistry; economics; law, policy, and society; mathematics; physics; psychology; and sociology. There are also certificate pro- grams in economics of manpower and develop- ment planning and in technical writing. Most programs may be completed through either full- er part-time study. Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions The Master of Science degree may be earned with specialization in counseling psy- chology, physical education, physical therapy, recreation management, or speech-language pa- thology and audiology. Programs may be com- pleted through full- and part-time study. The Master of Education degree may be earned with specialization in career and industrial counseling, college student personnel work and counseling, curriculum and instruction, educa- tional research, human development, rehabilita- tion, school counseling, or special education. The Certificate of Advanced Graduate Study is offered in counseling, educational administration, and re- habilitation. The Doctor of Education degree may be earned in leadership: administration and su- pervision with specialization in counseling, ed- ucational administration, or rehabilitation admin- istration. Business Administration A Master of Business Administration degree may be earned. The Grad- uate School of Business Administration offers a variety of programs to meet the needs and sched- ules of graduate business students. Two full-time program alternatives are offered: a 21 -month management intern program, which includes a six-month, paid professional internship; and a two-year traditional full-time program, which may include administrative or teaching assistantship opportunities. Individuals who wish to continue their full-time job responsibilities while earning an MBA degree may consider the evening part-time program of study, the 18-month executive MBA Program for upper-level managers, or the accel- erated part-time high-technology MBA for quali- fied technical specialists. The Master of Science degree in professional accounting is an intensive, full-time program spe- cifically designed for liberal arts and other non- accounting majors. In addition, there is a nondegree program for advanced study in business administration lead- ing to the Certificate of Advanced Study in Busi- ness Administration. The Center for Management Development of- fers several intensive, graduate-level programs within the College of Business Administration. They are designed to provide professional growth and to improve the overall performance of expe- rienced managers. Based on a modified North- eastern cooperative format, these programs permit company-sponsored participants to main- tain their job responsibilities while attending classes. The Management Development Program (MDP) spaces six weeks of in-residence instruc- tion over four or five months, depending on the choice of session. The MDP is designed for mid- career executives who have been responsible for a major organizational task, department, division, or independent enterprise. Sessions begin in Oc- tober, January, and March on the Phillips Andover Academy campus in Andover, Massachusetts. The Smaller Business Management Develop- ment Program (SBMDP) is a two-session program totaling seven days of intensive, personalized management courses designed for small busi- ness executives. The residential character of the 4 The University program encourages close interaction between business peers and faculty nnembers. The SBMDP is held during March and April, also on the Phillips Andover Academy campus. The Management Workshops are scheduled one day each for 10 or 12 consecutive weeks. The three workshops focus on core functional areas, management in high-technology organi- zations, and advanced management concepts, respectively. These graduate-level programs pro- vide an opportunity for an exchange of ideas and for problem solving among peers from diverse industries and organizations. Sessions begin in September, January, and March at Northeastern's Dedham campus. College of Computer Science The Master of Science in Computer Sciences is the first grad- uate degree to be offered by the College of Com- puter Science. The program concentrates on six areas: artificial intelligence, communications and networks, data bases, interactive systems design, systems software, and theory. It is a 48-quarter- hour program, with most courses being taught in the late afternoon and early evening. Full- and part-time programs are offered. The full-time pro- gram may be completed in one year (four aca- demic quarters). Criminal Justice The College of Criminal Jus- tice offers both full- and part-time programs lead- ing to a Master of Science degree in Criminal Justice and a Master of Science degree in Foren- sic Chemistry. Students enrolled in the master of science program in criminal justice may choose from several areas of specialization: administra- tion and planning, criminology and research, and security administration. The Master of Science program in forensic chemistry provides an inte- grated study of forensic chemistry as utilized in criminalistics laboratories and related profes- sional fields. An interdisciplinary Ph.D. program in forensic chemistry is offered through the Col- lege of Arts and Sciences in conjunction with the College of Criminal Justice, with specialization in forensic materials science or forensic analytical chemistry. A further specialization in forensic tox- icology is offered through the College of Phar- macy and Allied Health Professions in conjunction with the College of Criminal Justice. Students in all programs usually attend classes during late afternoon and evening hours. Engineering Master of Science degrees are of- fered with course specifications in the fields of civil engineering, chemical engineering, electrical and computer engineering, engineering manage- ment, industrial engineering, information systems, mechanical engineering, and transportation. A five-year program leading to both a bachelor's and master's degree is offered in electrical en- gineering, industrial engineering, and mechanical engineering, and a six-year program leading to both a bachelor's and master's degree is offered in power systems. Professional Engineers' de- grees are offered in civil, chemical, electrical, in- dustrial, and mechanical engineering. A Doctor of Engineering degree in Chemical Engineering is offered in addition to the Ph.D. A women in engineering program and a women in information systems program are also available. Law The School of Law offers a full-time pro- gram of professional instruction leading to the degree of Juris Doctor. The three-year curriculum includes 12 months of experience in law offices, governmental agencies, or other law-related em- ployment. There are no courses for part-time or evening students. Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions The Master of Science degree is offered in biomedical science, clinical chemistry, hospital pharmacy, medical laboratory science, medicinal chemistry, and pharmacology. The Master of Health Profes- sions degree is offered with four options: general, health policy, physician assistant, and regulatory toxicology. The Ph.D. degree is offered in biomedical science with specialization in medifcal laboratory science, medicinal chemistry, phar- maceutical science, pharmacology, or toxicology. An interdisciplinary doctoral degree is available in forensic toxicology as well as a graduate pro- gram in clinical pharmacy, leading to the degree Doctor of Pharmacy. Professional Accounting The Graduate School of Professional Accounting is designed specifi- cally for arts and sciences majors. The distinctive feature of the 15-month, full-time Master of Sci- ence degree program is a three-month paid in- ternship with a public accounting firm. Classes begin in June of each year. Insurance and Financial Service Institute The Insurance and Financial Service Institute was established to foster excellence in the insurance, employee benefit, and financial service industries in the Boston area. It offers a number of noncredit The University 5 courses in preparation for the chartered life un- derwriter and chartered property-casualty under- writer designations as well as for the general insurance, insurance adjuster, and risk manage- ment certificates. Center for Continuing Education The Center for Continuing Education was estab- lished to connect the University with various ed- ucational needs of its urban community. Its purpose is to assist both individuals and organi- zations who wish to keep pace with a society in the process of accelerated social and economic change. The Center offers a wide range of work- shops, conferences, institutes, forums, and spe- cial training programs in areas that include business, building technology, insurance, graphic arts, paralegal training, health, nursing, emergency medical training, and management. For more information, write or call the Northeast- ern University Center for Continuing Education, 370 Common Street, Dedham, MA 02026, 617- 329-8000. Northeastern University has numerous distin- guished faculty members, many of whom have received prestigious awards, including Sloan Scholarships, Guggenheim Fellowships, and Na- tional Institutes of Health Research Awards. Fac- ulty members lecture the world over — from just across the Charles River in Cambridge to clear across the Pacific Ocean in Sydney, Australia. In addition, many faculty serve as United States government consultants and participate on a va- riety of national and international committees. But because Northeastern considers education its primary mission students will always find an en- thusiastic and accessible faculty to answer ques- tions, solve problems, and stimulate enquiring minds. Current research spans almost every academic and professional field and is not limited to labo- ratory investigations or the "hard" sciences. Every department of every college at Northeastern car- ries out some basic or applied research projects. Research Research, whether performed in the laboratory, the library, or in the field, is vital to the University's operation. It stimulates all participants and en- sures a thriving academic atmosphere. Through research, faculty members as well as students stay abreast of the most recent developments in their particular fields. Faculty who disseminate this knowledge through publishing, speaking, and teaching help ensure a university education of the first order. At Northeastern University, research and schol- arly endeavors are taken very seriously and are actively encouraged. Each year the faculty re- ceive funding for an ever-increasing number of research projects. Sponsorship comes from a va- riety of sources. Federal agencies, private indus- try and foundations, and the University itself all contribute to Northeastern's growing research emphasis. While much of this research is carried out by the faculty members, their graduate students, and post-doctoral research associates, ample oppor- tunities also exist for undergraduate students. Re- search participation can take place as part of regular academic programs, as specially de- signed independent studies, or through cooper- ative work assignments. Research activities are encouraged and are limited only by the student's own motivation and curiosity. Buildings and Facilities In 1910, Northeastern University began construc- tion of the first piece of property acquired at its present site on 360 Huntington Avenue. Since those early days, the central Boston campus has grown to occupy over fifty acres of land located in close proximity to such cultural landmarks as Symphony Hall, the Museum of Fine Arts, the Isabella Stewart Gardner Museum, Horticultural Hall, and the Boston Public Library. The University is within walking distance of the Fenway, a large park that includes a beautiful rose garden and extensive jogging paths. Copley Place, the Back Bay shopping district, and a number of renowned hospitals, including Brigham and Harvard teach- ing hospitals, are also minutes away. Major transportation facilities serving the Bos- ton area are Logan International Airport, two rail terminals, bus terminals serving inter- and intra- state lines, and MBTA subway-bus service within the metropolitan-suburban area. There is a sub- way stop directly in front of the campus. For mo- torists coming from the west, the best routes to the campus are the Massachusetts Turnpike (Exit 22) and Route 9, of which Huntington Avenue is the intown section. From the north, motorists may take Routes 93 or 95 to the Southeast Expressway (Route 3) to Massachusetts Avenue, which inter- sects Huntington Avenue. Visitors driving from the south should take the Southeast Expressway and the Massachusetts Avenue exit. The Boston campus is divided by Huntington Avenue, with academic and administrative build- ings on one side and most dormitories on the other. Many of the educational buildings are in- terconnected by underground passageways, which are especially convenient during inclement weather. In addition to several off-campus athletic facil- ities and University College's 14 branch locations. Northeastern University maintains a variety of af- filiations that provide its students access to spe- cialized equipment and facilities at other institutions and organizations. Carl S. Ell Student Center The Carl S. Ell Student Center provides facilities for student recreation and extracurricular activi- ties. The Alumni Auditorium, with a seating ca- pacity of 1,300, is part of the Center. Also included are special drama facilities, a ballroom, a main lounge, a fine arts exhibition area, student offices, conference rooms, and a dining area seating more than 1,000 persons. University Libraries There are seven libraries in the University Librar- ies System. The main library is Dodge Library, located on the Boston campus. Dodge houses the materials that support the University's pro- grams in humanities, social sciences, fine arts, education, engineering, chminal justice, nursing, business, and the undergraduate-level sciences. Three facilities support the academic programs at the Burlington and Dedham campuses and at the Marine Science Institute in Nahant. Also located on the Boston campus are three libraries housing graduate-level collections in physics and electrical engineering, mathematics and psychology, and chemistry, biology, phar- macy, and allied health. Collections The total holdings of the University Libraries include the equivalent of more than one million volumes in print and microform as well as subscriptions to approximately 4,000 periodicals and newspapers. The Libraries all collect other types of materials such as scores, technical re- ports, government documents, and audiovisual resources. Dodge Library is a federal depository and ac- tively maintains over 300,000 documents, reports, and other publications made available through the U.S. Government Printing Office. The Center for International Higher Education Documentation (CIHED) houses a special collec- tion unique to the Boston area. The University Archives serves as a depository for the historical records of the University, includ- ing faculty publications, student yearbooks, newspapers, and Northeastern dissertations. Services Library staff are available in all areas to assist in retrieving and using library resources. Evening and weekend hours may vary among the libraries, but in general, libraries provide services until 10 p.m. Dodge Library remains open for study most nights until midnight. Call 617-437- 4976 for library hours. A series of publications are prepared by library staff to acquaint students with the collections and 8 Buildings and Facilities to help with research. Librarians also provide ref- erence assistance and instruction on strategies for bibliographic research. A series of tutorials is offered each quarter for students interested in discussing particular research needs. Language and music listening laboratories are available in the Learning Resources Center. The Center provides a wide range of self-paced nne- dia and computer related resources including programmed texts, filmstrips, audiotapes, video- tapes, cassettes, recordings, and microcompu- ters. The Center's staff also coordinate peer tutoring in individual academic subjects. Com- puter-assisted instruction and tutoring, particu- larly in chemistry and mathematics, is available through the Center's Assessment Tutoring and Enrichment Resources program. All tutoring ser- vices arranged through the University Libraries are free. Online retrieval of bibliographic citations using commercial databases is provided for a fee through the Libraries' Computer Search Services. These citations typically cover journal articles, dissertations, technical reports, and symposia. A variety of other aids, such as union lists of serials, are available in each library if the nec- essary materials are not in the University collec- tions. Under certain conditions, students may be able to borrow material through Interlibrary Loan. Boston Library Consortium Northeastern Uni- versity is one of 1 1 institutional members of the Boston Library Consortium. Northeastern refer- ence librarians can advise students on which li- braries are members of the consortium and on the policies and other conditions governing on- site access to their collections. Office of Learning Resources The primary objective of the Office of Learning Resources is to help support the instructional and communications needs of the University. A variety of services is available to students and faculty. The Office of Instructional Development and Evaluation, 416 Dodge Library, provides assis- tance in the design of learning and instructional systems and materials and in the creation, test- ing, implementation, and analysis of instructional evaluation instruments. In addition, it offers a va- riety of orientation and training workshops. Instructional Media Training and Utilization Services, 413 and 416 Dodge Library, pro- vides professional consultation and assistance in graphics, photography, and multimedia produc- tion. It also acquires and maintains the collection of Northeastern-owned instructional materials and provides a rental service for 16mm. films and videotapes obtained from outside sources. Campus Media Services makes available, on a prescheduled basis, audiovisual and video equipment and instructional materials for the classroom. Items include films, filmstrips, slides, opaque and overhead projectors, audio and vi- deotape recorders, TV cameras and monitors, portable public address systems, telelecture equip- ment, record players, and projection screens. This office is located in 2 Ell Building. Visitor Information Center The Visitor Information Center, located in 115 Richards Hall, provides general information and assistance to students and faculty as well as to visitors to the University. The Center's staff is pre- pared to answer questions, give directions, pro- vide telephone numbers, and distribute publications related to the University's depart- ments, functions, and services. The Center also provides the services of a public notary and a 24- hour recorded "events" telephone line, 617-437- 3281. Open Monday through Friday from 8 a.m. to 8:30 p.m., the Center also offers its services over the telephone. Please call 617-437-2736. Counseling and Testing Center Counseling and testing to aid a student or pro- spective student with career, educational, or per- sonal concerns are available days and certain weekday evenings until 8:30 p.m. Information and appointments may be obtained by calling 617- 437-2142 or by visiting the Counseling and Test- ing Center, 302 Ell Building. Academic Computer Services Academic Computer Services offer students and faculty access to DEC VAX 1 1/780 computers in a time-sharing environment through video and hard-copy terminals arranged in student and fac- ulty clusters at the Boston, Burlington, and Ded- ham campuses. For information on available hours, please call 617-437-2335. Office of Services for the Handicapped Students with special needs can receive assis- tance by visiting or calling the Office of Services for the Handicapped (OSH). The office is open most evenings until 10 p.m. Services provided include sign language interpreters, readers, HP Buildings and Facilities 9 parking, and alternative testing. For further infor- mation, call 617-437-2675 (voice) or 617-437- 3934 (TTY). The office is in 4 Ell Building. Cabot Physical Education Center The Godfrey Lowell Cabot Physical Education Center contains four basketball courts, an athletic cage, a small gymnasium, and administrative of- fices for the Department of Athletics and for the Physical Education Department of Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions. The Barletta Natatorium houses a 105-foot swimming pool, a practice tank for the crew, handball/racquetball courts, and shower and dressing facilities. Dockser Hall Charles and Estelle Dockser Hall houses a large gymnasium, dance studio, motor performance laboratory, community recreation laboratory, folk arts center, dark room, recreation resources area, locker rooms, offices, classrooms, conference room and lounge, storage facilities, and a cardi- ovascular health and exercise laboratory. Burlington Suburban Campus Northeastern University's Burlington campus was established in 1964 because businesses and in- dustries in the Route 128 area expressed a need for educational programs that their employees could utilize. The campus is located near the junction of Routes 128 and 3 in Burlington, Mas- sachusetts. Programs offered at Burlington encompass un- dergraduate, graduate, and continuing education courses. Full- and part-time degree programs, as well as nondegree certificate programs, are avail- able. Dedham Campus The 20-acre Dedham campus is located on Route 135 just north of Route 128. The facility contains several classrooms, two executive amphitheaters, a dining area, a computer terminal room tied to several of the University's mainframe computers, a new IBM-PC microcomputer laboratory, and a library. It also houses several University depart- ments, including University College's Center for Continuing Education, the state-of-the-art engi- neering program, and areas for the executive MBA, high technology MBA, and management workshop programs. A more recent development at the campus was the construction of an im- pressive outdoor track and field facility. Henderson House The University's conference center, Henderson House, is located in Weston, Massachusetts, 12 miles from the Boston campus. Henderson House provides a gracious setting for both large and small conferences and meetings, and its facilities include a dining service and some overnight ac- commodatiorTs. For more information about Hen- derson House, call 617-329-8000, ext. 13. Warren Center The Warren Center is located on 165 acres in Ashland, Massachusetts, 30 miles west of Boston. Although it serves as a practical laboratory for students in Boston-Bouve College of Human De- velopment Professions, the Warren Center invites Northeastern's staff, faculty, alumni, and students to use its facilities and welcomes other educa- tional groups seeking enrichment in an outdoor setting. Woods, fields, streams, winterized cot- tages, and Hayden Lodge provide year-round opportunities for outdoor learning. The Center also has an archery range, an outdoor pavilion, heated cabins, a health lodge, and conference accommodations. Marine Science and Maritime Studies Center The Marine Science and Maritime Studies Center, located in Nafiant, Massachusetts, is a research and instructional facility primarily engaged in the study of marine biology and oceanography. Many of the courses at the Institute are applicable to- ward an advanced degree in biology or health science. The Institute, located about 20 miles northeast of Boston, is in operation all year. The George and Hope Matthews Arena Two blocks and a right turn from the main quad- rangle of Northeastern University's Boston cam- pus is the oldest indoor ice hockey arena in the United States and one of the focal points for am- ateur athletics in the Boston area. The building is used primarily for collegiate sports, especially men's and women's basketball and hockey con- tests, and for recreational activities. Northeastern also makes the Arena available to the community for certain events. 10 Buildings and Facilities Network Northeastern University (NNU) Network Northeastern University represents the University's entry into the age of education by telecommunications. The Network's main mode of operation utilizes the microwave-based In- structional Television Fixed Service (ITFS) system whereby educational services are delivered di- rectly to company sites and other remote loca- tions within a 30-mile radius of Northeastern's Boston campus. With this service, live classroom instruction is telecast in color to remote sites, where it is viewed in reception rooms equipped with tv monitors and a telephone-based talkback system. During presentations, off-campus stu- dents are able to participate in the instruction as fully as students on campus. A courier service collects and delivers homework assignments and serves as the off-campus student's link to the bookstore, registrar, and other campus services. Network Northeastern University currently of- fers engineering technology courses and gradu- ate courses in engineering. These offerings will be expanded in the near future to include courses in state-of-the-art engineering topics, manage- ment, mathematics, technical writing, and com- puter science. It also provides television production services and duplication and distri- bution services for videotaped courses. 11 University College John W. Jordan, Dean Robert W. O'Connor, Associate Dean for Academic Programs Ralph T. Vernile, Jr., Associate Dean for Administration The Programs University College is committed to the education of mature adult students who wish to live effec- tively in today's complex society. The programs in the College are specifically designed to satisfy the changing professional, cultural, and social needs and interests of adults. They are constantly evaluated and updated to keep pace with stu- dents and community. Degree programs have been developed in 34 major fields of study in the areas of business administration, health professions and sciences, law enforcement, and liberal arts. Courses are offered on a part-time basis Monday through Sat- urday during day and evening hours convenient for adults. Students may elect single courses, pursue a certificate program, or enroll in full-de- gree programs leading to the Associate in Sci- ence or the Bachelor's degree. Short-term seminars are also offered for credit. Classes are scheduled in several locations that are accessible to the urban and the suburban community. The Faculty Approximately 1,500 men and women constitute the part-time teaching staff of University College. Included are members of the full-time faculty of Northeastern University and other educational in- stitutions in New England, as well as outstanding New England business and professional leaders with training and experience in specialized areas. The faculty are selected because they are highly successful in their fields and are well qualified to provide sound methods of teaching for adults in an interesting, inspiring, and effective manner. 12 University College The Student Body The student body of University College repre- Many University College students have full-time sents the diversity of interests that is one of the commitments to their jobs or families or have basic strengths in adult education. Approximately other responsibilities. They may enroll in a single 16,000 students range in age from 18 years to course or in a full-degree curriculum, depending beyond retirement. Some enroll immediately after on whether their goals are career-related or for high school graduation. Others may have grad- personal enrichment, uated several years ago. University College Administrative Officers John W. Jordan, B.S., M.Ed., Dean of University College Gretchen T. Ayoub, B.A., M.Ed., Director, Academic and Student Affairs Elaine R. Bauer, B.A., Ed.M., Assistant Director, Academic and Student Affairs Stanley A. Bozen, A.R.R.T., Director of the Radiologic Technology Program Richard J. Comings, A.B., M.A., M.P.A., Assistant Dean and Director of Special Programs Paula J. Cotter, Administrative Assistant, Academic and Student Affairs Marcia C. DePace, R.N., M.S., Academic Coordinator, Nursing Janet Fisher Doyle, B.A., M.Ed., Assistant Director, University College Placement Michael S. Dvorchak, B.A., M.A., Associate Dean and Director of Suburban Campus William T. Edgett, A.B., M.A., Assistant Dean and Assistant Director, Academic and Student Affairs Audrey G. Emmer, B.S., M.Ed., Assistant to the Director, Business Administration Programs Carol L. Fulton, B.A., B.S., Assistant Director, Academic and Student Affairs Susanne E. Gatie, B.S., Assistant Registrar, Graduate Schools and Part-time Programs Marilyn P. Gross, B.A., Programmer-Analyst Kathleen H. Hayes, A.B., Ed.M., Director of Adult and Special Programs, Office of Career Development and Placement Marilyn L. Jackson, B.A., Publicity Coordinator David R. Kane, B.S., Graduate Schools and Part-time Programs Mary M. Kiley, B.S., Administrative Assistant Valerie A. Lamb, A.S., R.T., Assistant Director, Radiologic Technology Program Madge J. Lewis, B.S., M.Ed, Associate Registrar, Graduate Schools and Part-time Programs Holly W. Matisis, B.A., Assistant Director, Academic and Student Affairs John J. McKenna, B.S., M.A., Assistant Director, Administrative Services JoAnne McNeill, B.S., Acting Director, Dental Assistant Program Lana B. Melnik, B.S., Assistant to the Director, Health Professions and Science Programs Robert W. O'Connor, A.B., Ed.M., Ed.D., Associate Dean for Academic Programs Dorothy M. Oppenheim, B.A., M.B.A., Assistant Dean and Director of Business Administration Programs Jacqueline Piatt, B.S., M.Ed., Assistant Director, Suburban Campus, and Director of Counseling, Burlington John H. Robbins, Jr., B.A., M.Ed., Associate Dean, Director, Center for Continuing Education Clarissa L. Sawyer, B.A., Ed.M., Assistant Director, Academic and Student Affairs Kenneth C. Solano, A.B., M.Ed., Associate Dean, Associate Director, Center for Continuing Education Edward L. Sousa, B.S., M.Ed., Director of Administrative Services Deborah A. Starr, B.A., Publications Coordinator Judith Stoessel, A.B., M.A,, Assistant to the Director, Liberal Arts Programs Ralph T. Vernile, Jr., B.S., Associate Dean for Administration Paula M. Vosburgh, B.S., M.S., Director, Health Professions and Science Programs Marilyn S. Wiener, A.B., M.A., Associate Dean and Director of Liberal Arts Programs Richard L. Wilson, B.A., B.S., M.Div., Ed.M., Coordinator, Alternative Freshman-Year Program University College 13 Executive Committee John W. Jordan, Chairperson Gretchen T. Ayoub Richard J. Comings Robert W, O'Connor Dorothy M. Oppenheim John H. Robbins, Jr. Edward L. Sousa Ralph T. Vernile, Jr. Paula M. Vosburgh Marilyn S. Wiener Committee on Academic Standing William T. Edgett, Chairperson Gretchen T. Ayoub Robert W. O'Connor Dorothy M. Oppenheim Paula M. Vosburgh Marilyn S. Wiener John W. Jordan, Ex Officio Business Administration Curriculum Committee Dorothy M. Oppenheim, Chairperson W. Arthur Gagne Victor B. Godin Paul A. Janell Robert W. O'Connor Robert A. Parsons Joel M. Rosenfeld Jonathan B. Welch Two Student Representatives John W. Jordan, Ex Officio Health Professions Curriculum Committee Paula M. Vosburgh, Chairperson Theodore Blank Stanley A. Bozen Annalee Collins Gerald L. Davis Robert W. O'Connor Judith Weilerstein Two Student Representatives Two Faculty Representatives John W. Jordan, Ex Officio Law Enforcement Curriculum Committee Richard DeBoer, Jr. Francis R. Hankard Robert F. Johnson Joseph M. Jordan Robert W. O'Connor Carmen S. Pizzuto Daniel A. Welch Three Student Representatives John W. Jordan, Ex Officio Liberal Arts Curriculum Committee Marilyn S. Wiener, Chairperson Samuel S. Bishop Robert L. Cord Neil F. Duane Larue W. Gilleland Harold M. Goldstein Edward A. Hacker Wilfred Holton Joshua R. Jacobson Charles Karis Marvin X. Lesser Robert W. O'Connor Holbrook C. Robinson . Raymond H. Robinson Sergei P. Tschernisch Michael L. Woodnick Two Student Representatives Two Part-Time Faculty Representatives John W. Jordan, Ex Officio Library Committee Richard J. Comings, Chairperson Marvin X. Lesser Robert W. O'Connor Dorothy M. Oppenheim John W. Jordan, Ex Officio Science Programs Curriculum Committee Paula M. Vosburgh, Chairperson Philip W. Lequesne Robert W. O'Connor Fred A. Rosenberg David L. Wilmarth One Student Representative One Part-Time Faculty Representative John W. Jordan, Ex Officio Therapeutic Recreation Curriculum Committee Paula M. Vosburgh, Chairperson Jacalyn S. Hamada Robert W. O'Connor Frank M. Robinson, Jr. Two Student Representatives John W. Jordan, Ex Officio mm ^t ^yjf fif^ m 15 Office of Academic and Student Affairs Gretchen T. Ayoub, Director, Academic and Student Affairs Elaine R. Bauer, Career Counselor, Assistant Director William T. Edgett, Academic Adviser, Assistant Director Carol L. Fulton, Academic Adviser, Assistant Director Holly W. Matisis, Academic Adviser, Assistant Director Jacqueline Piatt, Academic Adviser, Assistant Director, Burlington Suburban campus Clarissa L. Sawyer, Career Counselor, Assistant Director Kathleen H. Hayes, Director, Adult and Special Programs Janet F. Doyle, Assistant Director Academic Policies Admission and Registration Degree Candidacy Admission Graduation Requirements Transfer Credit Policy Grading System Attendance, Homework, and Examinations Miscellaneous Policies See pages 16-23 for further information or call 617-437-2400 Career and Academic Counseling Services Open House Programs Academic Advisers Tutorial Services Career Counseling Self-Assessment and Career Development Job-Search Seminars Professional Experience Program Core Career Courses for Women Counseling and Testing Services Placement Services See pages 25-27 for further information or call 617-437-2400 16 Academic Policies Admission and Registration Open Admission University College has an open admission policy that allows students to en- roll in most courses simply by registering for the course. It is not necessary to submit a formal application for admission, nor are entrance ex- aminations or College Board Examination scores required. The open admission. policy applies equally to nondegree and undergraduate degree students at University College. Many students enroll in courses at the College for personal enrichment or to gain specific career-related skills. Credits earned for these courses may be applied to a degree program. In some cases, nondegree stu- dents already have an undergraduate degree and are interested in specific courses for their continuing education. Nondegree students are considered members of the University College community and are entitled to the student support services offered by the College. Students who decide to pursue a degree program at University College will eventually need to declare a major. See page 17 for further information. Special re- quirements apply to students entering the Bach- elor of Science in Business Administration degree program. For detailed information about the ad- missions process for this program, please see pages 42-43. Registration Students may register for courses by reporting to any of the College's 14 campuses during the registration periods that are scheduled each quarter. It is not necessary to register at the campus where a particular course actually meets; students may register at any campus for a course scheduled at any other campus. All students must complete a registration form before attending class; attendance at class, even with the instruc- tor's permission, does not constitute registration. No academic credit will be awarded to students who are not properly registered. See the Aca- demic Calendar on pages vi-viii for a complete registration schedule. Not all the courses listed in this Bulletin are offered each quarter. A complete list of the courses offered in any particular quarter is con- tained in the University College Schedule Guide for that quarter. A Schedule Guide is distributed for the fall, winter, spnng, and summer quarters at all campuses or by mail upon request (tele- phone 617-437-2400). Quarter-Hour Credit Northeastern University operates on a quarter-hour credit system. A quar- ter-hour credit is the equivalent of three-quarters of a semester hour. Students who wish to take courses at Northeastern and to transfer these credits to another school are urged to receive permission from their adviser prior to registering. Help with Course Selection Academic advis- ers (see page 25) are available at all campuses throughout the year by appointment to help stu- dents plan their academic programs and select courses. Students who have earned credits from other schools are urged to have their transcripts evaluated prior to the registration period to avoid duplicating course work completed at other ed- ucational institutions. Advisers are also available without an appointment to answer general ques- tions during the official registration periods at all campuses. Before registering for a course, students should read the course description in this Bulletin to de- termine if it is necessary to have taken a prereq- uisite course. In order to ensure academic success, students are strongly advised to adhere to course prerequisites. Placement Tests Students registering for math- ematics courses offered by Lincoln College must take a mathematics placement test given during registration. Students registering for Mathematics 1 (MTH 41 10) must take a placement test on the first night of class. Some students may be re- quested to register for Basic Mathematics 1 (MTH 4001), a three-quarter-hour course offering ad- ditional preparation in math. Students registering Academic Policies 17 for College Algebra 1 (MTH 4107), however, must have taken the placement test during registration to be admitted to class. Students who have taken Introductory Mathematics courses MTH 4081 and MTH 4082, or MTH 4001 and MTH 4002, must have evidence of successful completion to reg- ister. Students enrolling in ENG 4110 Critical Writing 1 . ENG 4380 Business Writing and Reports 1 , and TCC 4101 Technical Writing 1 will be asked to complete a brief writing sample at their first class meeting. Based on this sample, their instructor may refer them to a more basic course in English composition, such as ENG 401 1 Elements of Writ- ing or ENG 4005 English for International Stu- dents 1. International Students Northeastern University is authorized under federal law to enroll nonim- migrant alien students. For information regarding eligibility to enroll in University College, come to 102 Churchill Hall, 617-437-2400, or visit the In- ternational Student Office in 270 Holmes Hall, telephone 617-437-2310. Maximum Course Load New students may elect up to 12 quarter hours per quarter without special permission from the appropriate Program Director. Former students who are not on the Dean's List may also elect up to 12 quarter hours per quarter without special permission. Students who are on the Dean's List may elect a maximum of 18 quarter hours per quarter without special permission. Class Changes University College reserves the right to cancel, divide, or combine classes when necessary. While this policy ensures that students will almost never be excluded from a class be- cause it is oversubscribed, it also means that a course may occasionally be canceled because of inadequate enrollments. Cancellations are more likely to occur among upper-level or ad- vanced courses than among introductory courses. To avoid course cancellations, students are urged to register early. Pass/Fall Courses Students may register for one elective course per quarter on a pass/fail basis. To be eligible for pass/fail status in a course, the student must be in good academic standing (not on academic probation) and must have completed 39 quarter hours of academic work. Thereafter, the student may register for one pass/fail course for each 15 quarter hours of suc- cessfully completed work. The student must also meet all prerequisites for the courses. To be graded on the basis of pass/fail, the student must obtain a Pass/Fail Permission Card signed by the Program Director for his or her program of study. This card must then be brought to the instructor of the course. In addition, the Registrar must be notified in writing by the student of the student's intention to take the course on a pass/fail basis prior to the fourth meeting of the course. Auditing Policy Students are permitted to audit courses, but they must complete the usual reg- istration forms and pay regular tuition fees. There is no reduction in fees for auditing. An auditor may participate in class discussion, complete pa- pers and projects, and take tests and examina- tions for informal evaluation. However, regardless of the amount or quality of work completed, no academic credit will be granted at any time for audited courses. The student's decision to audit a course must be communicated in writing to the Registrar prior to the fourth meeting of the course. No exception to this procedure can be approved without au- thorization by the Academic Standing Committee of the College. Withdrawal Policy A student who wishes to withdraw from a course must complete a Course Drop form in the Registrar's Office or notify the Registrar in writing of his or her intention to with- draw prior to the week in which final examinations are given. The forms are available at all campus locations. If, after the first class meeting, a student misses three consecutive class meetings of a course, he or she will automatically be withdrawn from the course by the Registrar. Students who withdraw or are withdrawn from a course will have no record of the withdrawal on their transcripts. (See page 28 for information on tuition refunds.) Degree Candidacy Admission Students who wish to be admitted to University College as a degree candidate must follow one of the following procedures. 18 Academic Policies Open Admissions Procedure Under this pro- cedure, students must complete the following re- quirements: 1. Complete at least 18 quarter hours of credit, including English courses ENG 4101, ENG 4102, ENG 4103. 2. A minimum grade point average of at least 2.0 (C) at University College. 3. High school graduation or a high school equiv- alency certificate (GED). Students who meet these requirements must file a Petition for Admission in the Office of Aca- demic and Student Affairs or at any branch cam- pus. Admission petitions may also be submitted by mail. Please call 617-437-2400. Students will then be notified by mail of their acceptance. Transfer students who meet the above require- ments may petition for admission as soon as all of their transfer credits have been evaluated. Note: Students who wish to be admitted to the Bachelor of Science in Business Administration program must meet additional requirements, as listed on page 41. Regular Admissions Procedure Under this procedure, students must follow the following steps: 1. Complete an application for admission. Appli- cations are available in the Office of Academic and Student Affairs and at all branch campus locations. The deadlines for receipt of these applications are: Fall quarter - September 9, 1985 Winter quarter - December 16, 1985 Spring quarter - March 17, 1986 Summer quarter - June 2, 1986 2. Submit the completed application for admis- sion and a copy of high school transcript or GED certificate to the Office of Academic and Student Affairs. 3. Arrange an admissions appointment with an academic adviser. Day, evening, or branch- campus appointments may be arranged by calling 617-437-2400. Students with less than 18 quarter hours of transfer credit (including the required English courses) who wish to be immediately eligible to apply for financial aid must follow the regular ad- missions procedure. Declaring a Major Students who have been admitted to University College may declare a ma- jor by completing a General Petition. General Pe- titions are available at all campus locations. Students who wish to have a General Petition mailed to them should call (617) 437-2400. Graduation Requirements Except for certain health professions programs, the requirement for graduation from University College is 174 quarter hours for a bachelor's de- gree and 96 quarter hours for an associate's de- gree, with attainment of a quality point average of 2.0 (an average grade of C). Although the credits allowed for acceptable work completed elsewhere by transfer students count toward ful- fillment of quantitative graduation requirements, neither the credits nor the grades earned in such courses are included in the quality point com- putations for graduation. Course requirements for each degree are different and are outlined in this Bulletin. Course Substitutions and Waivers Students may request to have a required course in an academic program waived and to substitute an- other course in place of the required course. Such requests are not encouraged, although the Uni- versity recognizes that students may occasionally have very good reasons for requesting such waiv- ers. To request that a required course be waived, students must complete a Petition for Course Substitutions and Waivers and submit the petition to the Office of Academic and Student Affairs. Course petition forms are available in 102 Churchill Hall and at all branch campus locations. All petitions for course substitutions and waivers are routinely forwarded to the Director of the ac- ademic program in which the student is enrolled. The Program Director in turn makes a recommen- dation concerning the request for the waiver to the University College Committee on Academic Standing. All required course substitutions and waivers of program requirements must be ap- proved by the Committee on Academic Standing. Graduation with Honor Bachelor's degree candidates who have achieved distinctly superior attainment in their academic work will be gradu- ated with honor, high honor, or with highest honor, depending on the final quality point average ob- tained. To be considered for graduation with honor, a student must have completed a minimum of 72 quarter hours of work at University College. Courses transferred from other educational insti- Academic Policies 19 tutions will not be considered in determining honor graduates. Residence Requirement Every candidate for the bachelor's or associate's degree must fulfill the minimum residence requirement. The resi- dence requirement is defined as the satisfactory completion of at least 45 quarter hours of course work in University College immediately preceding graduation. At least 12 of the 45 quarter hours must be in the candidate's major field of study. Since the University College residence require- ment prescribes the completion of at least 45 quarter hours of credit in residence immediately preceding graduation, a student who intends to graduate in any academic year may not use courses at any other institution for the purpose of transferring credit. A student whose enrollment in a degree pro- gram is interrupted for a period of one year or more will be reinstated in the program at the time of re-entry into University College. in Absentia Status If a student moves beyond a reasonable commuting distance from University College or its branch campuses but has com- pleted 135 or more quarter hours of credit (in- cluding a maximum of 60 quarter hours of transfer credit), the Committee on Academic Standing will consider a petition to allow the student to com- plete his or her requirements for a University Col- lege degree at another approved college. The courses remaining must be completed within two years from the date of official approval of the student's in absentia status. Senior Status Procedure All potential gradu- ates will be polled during the fall quarter to de- termine their intention to graduate during the current academic year. To be considered for graduation in June, a student must return a Com- mencement Data Card prior to the start of the winter quarter of the academic year in which he or she expects to graduate. September gradu- ates will be polled during the month of June. Throughout the academic year, the Office of Academic and Student Affairs issues Senior Sta- tus Reports on request to potential graduates in order to assist them with the selection of courses required for program completion. Seniors are en- couraged to request a Senior Status Report dur- ing the summer prior to the academic year in which they plan to graduate. Petition forms for status reports are available in 102 Churchill Hall on the Boston campus and at the main office of each branch campus. Credit by Examination During ttie Senior Year CLEP or PEP examinations (see below) may be taken by students during their final year of study provided they have met the 45-quarter-hour res- idence requirement for graduation (this page). Because of the time required for CLEP and PEP exams to be graded and scores returned to the University, students requesting June graduation must take their CLEP and PEP exams no later than the winter quarter of their senior year. Transfer Credit Policy Transfer Credit from Another Institution Stu- dents may transfer credit from accredited insti- tutions of higher education when courses completed are applicable to the student's pro- gram in University College. The minimum course grade acceptable for transfer credit is C, or 2.0 on a four-point scale. An accredited institution of higher education is an institution having recog- nition and membership in one of the six regional accrediting associations recognized by the Council on Post-secondary Accreditation. Transfer Credit Procedure A student who wishes to obtain a tentative evaluation of credits earned from another institution must file a Transfer Credit Petition with the Office of Academic and Student Affairs. The student must then write to the registrar of the institution previously attended and request that an official transcript (one bearing that institution's seal) be fonwarded to the Office of Academic and Student Affairs, 102 Churchill Hall, Northeastern University, 360 Huntington Avenue, Boston, MA 02115. The transcripts should indi- cate courses completed, credits, and grades earned. Upon receipt of official transcripts, the Office of Academic and Student Affairs will issue a tentative evaluation of all credits as they apply to the student's program in University College. Official awarding of credit will be recorded on the student's University College transcript when ad- mission is approved. Validation of Required Upper-Level Business Courses for Transfer Credit Students entering the Bachelor of Science in Business Administra- tion degree program may be required to validate required upper-level business courses that they have taken outside the framework of the program. "Validation" is the set of procedures that tests whether an upper-level course completed at the lower division of a baccalaureate program should be accepted for transfer credit in the upper divi- sion of a baccalaureate program recognized and 20 Academic Policies approved by the American Assembly of Colle- giate Schools of Business. The Bachelor of Sci- ence in Business Administration program offered by University College conforms with all standards established by the American Assembly of Colle- giate Schools of Business (AACSB). AACSB has been recognized by the Council for Post-second- ary Accreditation and by the United States Office of Education as the sole accrediting organization for university baccalaureate and master's degree programs in business administration. The rationale for validation is based on the dis- tinction between lower-level and upper-level courses. The content and focus of most upper- level courses presupposes a certain amount of prior academic work and general knowledge. Often, students who complete an upper-level course without first having been exposed to the bodies of knowledge presupposed by that course are unable to benefit fully from the upper-level course and therefore fail to develop as much as they should in their understanding of the subject matter. In recognition of this problem, University College has adopted specific validation proce- dures. Their purpose is to ensure that the knowl- edge a student has acquired in an upper-level business course completed at the lower division closely approximates in focus and content the knowledge that University College feels is ac- ceptable for a particular upper-level course in a specific area of study. Generally, students will be able to validate pre- viously earned course credits by taking a se- quential course in a reserved section, a department-approved examination, or a CLEP (College Level Examination Program) or PEP (Proficiency Examination Program) examination. For further information about course validation, please see page 40. Students should also talk with a University College academic adviser for further information about the validation of upper- level business courses for transfer credit. Evaluation of International Educational Cre- dentials Students requesting an evaluation of international educational credentials for transfer credit in University College will be assessed a fee of $30. The evaluation will be issued by the Office of Academic and Student Affairs upon receipt of a Transfer Credit Petition, a completed Educa- tional Chronology Form, official copies of all tran- scripts translated into English, and a check in the amount of $30, payable to Northeastern Univer- sity. The official assessment of international edu- cational credentials will be made in accordance with current standards for awarding advanced standing credit at University College or as rec- ommended by the Center for International Higher Education Documentation. The $30 fee will be waived for any University College student who has enrolled in a degree program pnor to re- questing the evaluation. Course(s) at Another College or University A student who is enrolled in a degree program at University College and who wishes to complete one or more courses at another institution for transfer purposes must first file a petition to enroll in such courses with the Office of Academic and Student Affairs. Courses taken at other institutions may be disallowed unless a petition has been submitted and approved. Seniors (students in their final year of study at University College) should refer to information about the residence requirement (see page 19 for further clarification of this policy). Credit by Examination University College will award credit by examination provided the ex- amination does not represent a duplication of other previously earned academic credit. Credit is granted for successful completion of exami- nations currently available through the College Level Examination Program (CLEP) of the College Entrance Examination Board and through the Pro- ficiency Examination Program (PEP) of the Amer- ican College Testing Program. Both programs have been designed to assist students in acquir- ing college-level credit for knowledge acquired through nontraditional means, such as on-the-job training, educational television, correspondence and extension study, and independent study. In- formation about these programs is available in the Office of Academic and Student Affairs at University College and at the Northeastern Uni- versity Counseling and Testing Center. Modern Language Proficiency Examination Students may be eligible to receive credit for pro- ficiency in a modern language. Examinations are currently offered in French, Spanish, German, and Italian. Students should contact the Modern Language Department, 360 Holmes Building, 617-437-2234, for information concerning these examinations. Noncollegiate Experience Credit Law enforce- ment students may be granted up to 18 hours of credit in their program by successfully complet- ing one or more of the noncollegiate credit ex- aminations that have been made available Academic Policies 21 through their program director's office. Examina- tions are periodically scheduled by the Counsel- ing and Testing Center. Some liberal arts students may petition for non- collegiate experience credit. See page 91 (law enforcement) and page 108 (liberal arts) for more details on opportunities for noncollegiate experi- ence credit. Noncollegiate experience credit is not available to business students, except as available through CLEP or PEP examinations. (See "Credit by Ex- amination," page 20.) Credit cannot be awarded through noncolle- giate experience petitions or examinations when an appropriate examination is available through CLEP or PEP. Credit for Extrainstitutional Learning Extra institutional learning is that which takes place out- side the sponsorship of legally authorized and accredited postsecondary educational institu- tions. The term applies to learning acquired from formal courses sponsored by associations, gov- ernments, business, and industry. In awarding credit for extrainstitutional learning. University College utilizes the National Guide to Credit Recommendations for Noncollegiate Courses, published annually by the American Council on Education. Students applying for credit for extrainstitu- tional learning must submit a Transfer Credit Pe- tition and provide official credentials from the sponsoring noneducational organization to the Office of Academic and Student Affairs at Uni- versity College. The credit may be applied toward degree requirements at University College if rec- ommended in the National Guide, provided credit is not otherwise obtainable through CLEP, PEP, or noncollegiate experience credit programs at University College. Grading System A student's work in each course is evaluated by the instructor, who awards a letter grade at the end of the quarter. This grade is officially re- corded by the Registrar's Office. The grades and symbols used are given below, together with the numerical equivalents used for computing quality point averages: A (4.000) A- (3.667) B + (3.333) B (3.000) B- (2.667) C + (2.333) C (2.000) c- (1.667) D+ (1.333) D (1.000) D- (.667) F (0) 1 Incomplete L Audit (No Credit) S Satisfactory (Pass/Fail Grade) U Unsatisfactory (Pass/Fail Grade) X Incomplete (Pass/Fail Grade) * Grade not received Grade Reports and Transcripts All efforts will be made to mail grades prior to the beginning of the following quarter. A supplementary grade re- port will be issued when a missing grade or a grade change is received. University regulations prohibit issuing grades by telephone. Grade re- ports of degree candidates indicate both their quarterly quality point average and their cumu- lative quality point average. Students may obtain a transcript of their grades by making a request in writing to the Registrar's Office, 120 Hayden Hall, Northeastern University, 360 Huntington Avenue, Boston, MA 02115. Un- 22 Academic Policies official transcripts are issued free of charge; of- ficial transcripts that bear the University seal cost $2. Quality Point Average The method of figuring the quality point average is as follows: the nu- merical equivalent of each grade received is mul- tiplied by the credit hours earned; the quality points are added together, then divided by the student's total quarter hours. An example follows: Grade Numerical Credit Quality Achieved Equivalent Hours Points A 4.000 3 12.0 B- 2.667 3 8.0 C 2.000 6 12.0 F 0.000 3 Total Quality Points (32.0) 0.0 Quality Point Average = Total Credit = 2.13 Hours (15) Pass/Fail grades (S, U, and X), Incompletes (I), and Audits (L) are not included in the quality point average. Similarly, transfer credits are not in- cluded in quality point averages. The total earned hours appearing on the student's transcript, how- ever, include both transfer credits and S grades. A cumulative grade point average below 2.0 is unacceptable and will not allow a student to con- tinue in University College or to receive a degree from Northeastern University. The F grade is a failure and requires repetition of the course in its entirety. Academic Monitoring Degree candidates with 45 quarter hours of credit will be monitored quar- terly. Those whose QPAs fall below 2.0 will be contacted and offered all possible assistance by the Office of Academic and Student Affairs. They will continue to be monitored until their QPA is 2.0 or better. Students who feel they would benefit from academic assistance are encouraged to call the Qffice at 61 7-437-2400 to arrange an appoint- ment. The I Grade The I grade, or Incomplete, may be given only when the student fails to take the final examination for a course. An instructor may decide that a student has done so poorly in the course that even a perfect grade in a make-up final examination could not raise the grade from F; in this case F is the proper grade, regardless of the missed final examination. If the student fails to complete some other ma- jor portion of the course work (examination, quizzes, major paper, etc.) a letter grade is as- signed. This grade can be changed when the deficiency that led to the assigned letter grade is made up to the satisfaction of, and in the manner prescribed by, the instructor. All deficiencies must be made up in the pre- scribed manner no later than 12 months following the recording of the grade. Students requesting an exception to this policy must petition the Ac- ademic Standing Committee of University College in writing. A student may also elect to repeat the course at his or her expense. Pass/Fail Grades Satisfactory completion of work in all courses taken on a pass/fail basis will be designated on the transcript by the letter "S." Unsatisfactory work will be designated on the transcript by the letter "U." Any unsatisfactory grade must be handled according to the existing policy of University College but may never be cleared by enrolling in the same course on the basis of the pass/fail system of grading. An Incomplete in a course taken on a pass/fail basis will be designated by the letter "X" on the transcript and will be treated according to the normal procedure for grades of Incomplete. Dean's List All degree candidates who have taken a minimum of 27 quarter hours in three consecutive quarters (for example, fall, winter, spnng) and who have completed all their courses with a quality point average of 3.0 or better shall be placed on the Dean's List. These students receive certificates of commendation from the Dean of University College. See page 18 for in- formation about graduation with honor. Attendance, Homework, and Examinations Students are expected to attend all meetings of the classes in which they are registered unless excused in advance. Absence from regularly scheduled classes will seriously affect the stu- dent's academic standing. A student who is con- sistently absent from class will be withdrawn from the course by the Registrar. Absence Because of Illness All students who are absent from school because of extended ill- ness and who do not wish to be withdrawn should inform the Registrar's Office in writing. Homework The specific work required for each course in University College is determined by the instructor. In general, it is expected that University College students will spend an average of six to eight hours per week outside of class on assign- Academic Policies 23 merits for each course. Students who are absent are responsible for obtaining their homework as- signments from their instructors or other students in their classes. Homework assignments are not available in the Office of Academic and Student Affairs. Examinations Tests are scheduled throughout each quarter at the option of the instructor and are regarded as part of the term's course work. A final examination is held at the end of each quarter in each course unless an announcement is made to the contrary. Missed Final Examinations A student who misses a final examination will be given a grade of I (Incomplete). A student does not automati- cally have the right to make up a missed final examination. Students must petition for this priv- ilege and must pay a fee of $30 for each makeup examination. Petitions are available in 102 Churchill Hall and at all suburban administrative offices. Petitions are available for four weeks after the term has ended. Students will be notified prior to the date of the make-up exam whether or not their petition has been approved. Students who make up a missed final exam will have a letter or pass/fail grade substituted as appropriate for the I grade on their transcripts. l\/liscellaneous Policies Students' Rights and Responsibilities The University subscribes to the view that all students have certain rights and freedoms. For these rea- sons, the University has adopted and published specific policies and procedures governing the following matters: students' rights and freedoms, general conduct, student discipline, disclosure of information from students' records, and University judicial procedures. Judicial procedures are re- lated to issues of discipline and conduct, the right of students to appeal judgments of their aca- demic performance, grievances based on the fact that a student is handicapped, and allega- tions of sexual harassment. All policies and pro- cedures governing the above matters may be found in the University College/Lincoln College Student Handbook. Copies are available in 102 Churchill Hall at the Boston campus, 617-437- 2400. Copies are also generally available at each of the University's branch campus locations. Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act In accordance with the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, Northeastern University permits students to inspect their records when- ever appropriate and to challenge specific parts of them when they feel it necessary. Specific de- tails of the law as it applies to Northeastern are available in the University College/Lincoln Col- lege Student Handbook. Disciplinary Action The Committee on Regu- lations and Discipline has the authority to dismiss from the College, place on probation, or remove from the list of degree candidates any student who, because of disruptive or illegal conduct or poor character, is considered an unsuitable mem- ber of the College community. The Committee on Regulations and Discipline is an ad hoc subcom- mittee of the University College Committee on Academic Standing, It is convened at the request of the Committee on Academic Standing. Change of Address Change of address and/or name should be reported in writing immediately to the Registrar's Office, 120 Hayden Hall, North- eastern University, 360 Huntington Avenue, Bos- ton, MA 021 15. Attendance at Commencement Attendance at commencement for all University College degree candidates is optional. Degree candidates will be polled regarding their intention to attend com- mencement by the Northeastern University Com- mencement Committee during the spring quarter. Changes In Requirements The continuing de- velopment of University College requires frequent revisions of the curricula. When no undue and unusual hardship is imposed on students be- cause of these changes, students are expected to meet the requirements of the most current Bul- letin. If a particular student finds it impossible to meet those requirements, the Bulletin for the year in which he or she declared a major is binding. Note: Students who are planning to pursue a bachelor's degree in business and who obtained fewer than 88 quarter hours of credit by Septem- ber 1983 are required to pursue the new Bachelor of Science in Business Administration degree program. Academic programs, course content, and rules and regulations are subject to change without notice. 25 Career and Academic Counseling Services Through a wide variety of career and academic counseling services, University College is pre- pared to assist students in making both educa- tional and career decisions. The College does this by providing academic advisers and career counselors, by offering credit and noncredit ca- reer-planning workshops and special programs, and by serving as a link to other student support services offered by Northeastern University. The services, courses, and programs outlined on the following pages have been designed with specific educational and/or career-planning is- sues in mind. Students are urged to read this section carefully. Open House Programs Individuals who are thinking about enrolling in University College for the first time are encour- aged to attend an Open House. Open Houses introduce potential students to the many Univer- sity College programs and services designed to meet the educational, job-related, and personal needs of adult part-time students. They also orient new students to the University as a whole and address concerns that many students have about: • choosing courses and registering • securing financial aid • obtaining career or personal counseling • managing work, school, and family responsibil- ities. Persons interested in a degree program will have an opportunity to speak with advisers about de- gree requirements, transfer of credit from other colleges, and additional procedures for becom- ing a student at University College. Students cur- rently enrolled in University College are also invited to attend an Open House. Open Houses are ordinarily scheduled each quarter at selected campus sites at or about the same time that registration takes place. Since space is limited, students are urged to express their interest in attending an Open House prior to any given registration period. (See the Academic Calendar on pages vi-viii for a complete regis- tration schedule.) Persons who wish to attend an Open House should notify the Office of Academic and Student Affairs by telephoning 61 7-437-2400. Academic Advisers Academic advisers are available day and eve- ning by appointment in the Office of Academic and Student Affairs and at branch-campus loca- tions. They are competent to assist students in planning a program suitable to their educational and career objectives. Advisers can also answer questions relating to degree requirements, course sequences, and proper scheduling of courses. Appointments may be arranged by tele- phoning the Office of Academic and Student Af- fairs at 617-437-2400 or by coming in person to 102 Churchill Hall at the Boston campus. There is no charge for this service. Academic advisers are also available without appointment to answer general questions during registration periods at all campuses. Throughout the year, academic advisers are available by ap- pointment at branch campuses. Appointments at the Burlington Suburban Campus may be ar- ranged by calling 617-272-5500. Appointments at all other campuses are arranged through the Office of Academic and Student Affairs at the Boston campus, 617-437-2400. Lincoln College students may arrange appointments by calling 617-437-2500. Tutorial Services Through the Office of Academic and Student Af- fairs, University College offers tutorial assistance in several subjects. Tutoring, which is on a one- to-one basis, provides an opportunity for student and tutor to focus on specific problems that might not have been covered during class time. Stu- dents may request tutorial information from the Office of Academic and Student Affairs, 102 Churchill Hall, 617-437-2400. A flyer describing tutorial services is also available in 102 Churchill Hall and at all branch locations. Career Counseling Students in need of career counseling may tele- phone 61 7-437-2400 to arrange an appointment with a career counselor. This service is designed 26 Career and Academic Counseling Services for students who need help in choosing a career or in developing effective job-hunting strategies. A career counselor will also help students utilize additional services and programs offered by Uni- versity College and by other offices at Northeast- ern University. Self-Assessment and Career Development One of the strongest motivations for continuing education is the desire for career advancement or change. In order to help students develop ca- reer and educational planning skills, University College offers a three-credit course in career de- velopment. Self-Assessment and Career Devel- opment (INT 4110) is designed for persons who feel undecided about a career choice and who need help in defining career and educational ob- jectives for themselves. For a complete descrip- tion, see page 182. Job-Search Seminars Each quarter the Placement Office and the Office of Academic and Student Affairs offer a series of two-hour, evening, job-search seminars. The seminars are specifically designed for students who have identified the field or career area in which they would like to work. Students planning to participate should currently be looking for a job or be anticipating a job change in the near future. These seminars are intended to help students assess their skills, define their immediate career direction, develop effective job-search strategies, write resumes, and prepare for job interviews. Seminar schedules are announced in the Student Newsletter and in classes two weeks prior to each seminar series. Students who wish to participate in the job-search seminars must reserve a place by calling the University College Placement Office at 617-437-2428. Professional Experience Program In conjunction with Northeastern's Department of Career Development and Placement, University College has developed a new program to assist selected students in gaining entry into profes- sional positions. The program begins operation in the fall quarter, 1985. The Professional Experience Program provides students with an opportunity to work in paid po- sitions related to their major, usually for periods of six months. Students in the program may earn three to 12 academic credits for documented learning that takes place during their professional placement. The amount of credit earned will be related to the learning activities and outcomes identified in their learning contracts. Interested students may obtain an information packet from the Office of Academic and Student Affairs, 102 Churchill Hall, on the Boston campus. The packet includes a full description of the pro- gram, a list of admission criteria, placement pro- cedures, and an application form. Students who wish to discuss the program in the context of their particular career needs should schedule an appointment with a University College career counselor. Call 617-437-2400 to arrange an ap- pointment. Core Career Courses for Women University College offers a special group of per- sonal assessment and career development courses for women interested in a business ca- reer. Through core career courses, women learn to match their skills and competencies to those needed in specific career areas in business. This process, in turn, helps a woman determine which specific jobs in business she is most suited to pursue. The core career courses are also de- signed to acquaint women with the organizational dynamics of business settings and to help them develop a basic understanding of the quantitative and technical skills needed for various career areas in business. A complete list of these courses may be found on page 182. They are open to any interested student. Counseling and Testing Services Philip W. Pendleton, Director of the Counseling and Testing Center Location: 302 Ell Building Telephone: 617-437-2142 Hours: Monday-Friday, 8:30 a.m.-4:30 p.m. Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, 5:30 p.m.-8:30 p.m., Oct.-May The Counseling and Testing Center at North- eastern provides a wide variety of services free of charge to all part-time students. Services for University College students include: Personal Counseling This involves discussing with a counselor such concerns as adjusting to being a student (again or for the first time), getting along with people, feeling anxious or depressed, as well as problems centered around family, sex, drugs, or alcohol. Career and Academic Counseling Services 27 Educational-Vocational Counseling This in- volves assisting students in making decisions about choice of major and/or career. It typically involves an in-depth look at one's self, including strengths, aspirations, and values. Tests are often helpful in the process of self-understanding. The kinds of tests available include interest, ability, personality, and aptitude. This kind of planning is usually done individually with a counselor, al- though small groups may be organized if this approach seems more appropriate. The goals of the Center's educational-voca- tional planning service are complementary to those of the University College career-planning courses. Therefore, interested persons are en- couraged to explore both options for career ex- ploration and planning and then choose the service that seems best suited to their needs. Study Skills Workshops (Available during the day only) Workshops are offered periodically to assist students in becoming more effective in or- ganizing their time, in note taking, in preparing for and taking exams, and in other areas related to effective academic performance. Career and Graduate School Information The Center maintains a reference room with informa- tion on a wide variety of careers and graduate and professional schools. tage of corporate on-campus recruiting during the fall and winter quarters and a credential ser- vice for persons applying to graduate school. The Placement Office is open one evening a week; additional evening hours may be arranged by appointment. Placement counselors also travel to the Burlington Suburban and Dedham cam- puses to see students by appointment. For further information students should call the University College Placement Office at 617-437-2428. Placement Services Kathleen H. Hayes, Director of Adult and Special Programs Location: 133 Nightingale Hall Telephone: 617-437-2428 Hours: Monday-Friday, 8:30 a.m.-4:30 p.m. Tuesday, 8:30 a.m.-8 p.m., Oct.-May The Office of Adult and Special Programs within Northeastern's Department of Career Develop- ment and Placement provides a number of free career placement services to all University Col- lege students. Among the services provided are evening job-search seminars, a reference library with company files and employee contacts, a job bank of employment opportunities, and panel presentations on careers of interest. Students who are enrolled in a degree program are eligible for additional career services such as job placement counseling, nonpaid internships, placement registration, and resume referral to employers. In addition, seniors may take advan- 28 Tuition and Fees Tuition and fees are refundable only as stated under "Refund of Tuition." Cfiecks and drafts for all cfiarges are to be made to the order of North- eastern University. Tuition for Courses in Other Departments or Colleges of the University University College students assigned to courses in other departments or colleges of the University are charged the tuition fees effective in the de- partments or colleges in which they are enrolled. initial Registration Fee A nonrefundable $10 registration fee for first-time students is billed with tuition fees. Tuition Tuition for all credit courses is $80 per quarter hour of credit. Charges for registration and tuition for special courses are at the rate specified for each course. There is no reduction in fees in auditing courses. Noncredit courses are charged at quarter-hour rates comparable to those of credit courses meet- ing on an equivalent contact-hour schedule. Students are not permitted to attend class ses- sions or take any examination or test until they have paid their tuition fees or have made satis- factory arrangements for payment. It is the student's responsibility to ensure that all tuition charges and fees are paid when due. If a bill has not been received prior to the start of classes each quarter, the student should come in person to the Bursar's Office, where a bill will be processed. Any discrepancies in billing should be imme- diately brought to the attention of the Bursar's Office. If there is a billing problem, the undisputed portion of the bill should be paid on time to avoid any additional late fees. Failure to receive a bill through the mail or to pay the undisputed portion of the bill are not justification for late payment of amounts actually owed. Students will not be advanced in class standing or permitted to reenroll in the University nor will degrees be conferred until all financial obligations to the University have been met. Tuition Budget Payment Plans Occasionally situations develop— usually beyond the control of the student — that make it difficult to meet the pay- ments in the manner outlined above. Under such circumstances the student is advised to contact the Bursar's Office, where a deferred payment agreement may be worked out. The only deferred payment plan offered is as follows and applies only to the amount owed for the current quarter: 1st payment Va due 1st week of quarter 2nd payment Vs due approx. 4th week of quarter , Balance Vs due approx. 8th week of quarter Such arrangements should be made before the end of the first week of the quarter or within one week of the date of registration if the student ■ enters late. Deferred payment of tuition entails a i fee of $10, which is levied on all accounts not 1 paid by the end of the second week of classes. 1 Failure to take immediate action will result in a ( late payment fee of $50. j Tuition Underwritten by Employers An in- creasing number of companies are underwriting part or all of the cost of tuition of students in their employ. In cases where payment is to be made directly by the employer to the University, the student should furnish the Bursar's Office with a purchase order covering registration or a state- ment from an officer of the company certifying that the company is underwriting the tuition. In cases where students are being reimbursed by their employer, tuition must be paid by the student according to the prescribed regulations to avoid late payment charges. Veterans' Benefits Any veteran covered by Public Law 89-358 should report to 116 Hayden Hall to fill out the proper enrollment forms. Late Payment Fee Bills for tuition and fees are payable in accordance with the due date shown. A late payment fee of $50 will be charged for failure to make payments in accordance with the prescribed regulations. Refund of Tuition The general policy in all schools and colleges of the University with re- spect to refunds of tuition is as follows: Tuition and Fees 29 The University provides all instruction on an academic quarter basis for which students pay at the beginning of each quarter. Tuition refunds will be granted through the first four weeks of a quarter only when specific conditions are met. Questions regarding refunds should be dis- cussed with the Bursar. Tuition refunds will be granted only on the basis of the date appearing on the official withdrawal application when filed with the Registrar in 120 Hayden Hall. Nonattendance does not constitute official withdrawal. Refunds will be granted in accordance with the following schedule: Official withdrawal filed within 1st week of quarter 2nd week of quarter 3rd week of quarter 4th week of quarter Percentage of tuition 100% 75% 50% 25% Graduation Fee The University graduation fee, charged to those who are candidates for the bac- calaureate or associate degree, is $35, payable on or before May 1 of the year in which the stu- dent expects to graduate. Missed Final Examination Fee Students ab- sent from the regularly scheduled final examina- tion at the end of a course may petition for a "Missed Final Examination." The fee for each ex- amination requested by the student is $35. The fee must be paid when the petition is filed in the Office of Academic and Student Affairs, 102 Churchill Hall. Transcripts Students may request official transcripts of their grades at the Registrar's Office. There is a charge of $2 per copy, payable in advance. Unofficial transcripts are issued free of charge. Fees Student Center Fee All students in University College on the Huntington Avenue campus are charged $.75 each quarter for the services avail- able in the Student Center. Laboratory Fees Students enrolled in courses that carry a laboratory fee must purchase a Lab- oratory Fee and Deposit Card from the Bursar's Office ($15 for extra cards). A fee of $35 is charged for biology courses and for those health professions courses that include a laboratory. For chemistry courses the cards cost $35 per quarter with the possibility of a $5 refund at the end of the quarter, depending on breakage. Upon completion of the course or withdrawal dur- ing the quarter, the student must check his or her status with the laboratory attendant. The Bursar's Office will then refund any unused balance shown on the card. A laboratory fee of $35 is charged for film and photography courses, for some art studio courses, for arts and crafts courses, and for law enforcement students who enroll in forensic lab- oratory. A $40 fee is charged for the food prep- aration course in the hotel and restaurant management program. Music students enrolled in an instrument tutorial pay a special rate. For details contact Charles Mokotoff, University College Music Coordinator, 307 Ell Building, 617-437-2440 or -2442. 30 Scholarships and Financial Aid Scholarships The following University College and Lincoln Col- lege scholarships and awards are available to students who have been accepted as degree candidates and are in good academic standing. Scholarships are awarded once a year by the Scholarship Committee. Final selection of schol- arship recipients is usually made in late May, fol- lowed by the awarding of the scholarships in late June or early July. Funds are usually applied to tuition expenses for the following academic year. Awards range in amount from $250 to $700. Application Procedure In January, a mailing list of students who have requested applications is prepared, and applications are mailed out with the stipulation that they be completed and re- turned to the Office of the Dean by March 31. A student may be placed on the January mailing list by calling 617-437-2400 and leaving his or her name, address, and student ID number with the receptionist. Professor Joseph A. Mullen Scholarships The Massachusetts Chapter of the American So- ciety for Training and Development has estab- lished a fund to provide annual scholarship awards to deserving part-time students upon the recommendation of the Dean of University Col- lege. Martin Luther King, Jr. Scholarships Estab- lished in 1969 in memory of the late Rev. Martin Luther King, Jr. Awards are made, as openings occur, to a limited number of adults from minority groups who would otherwise be unable to con- tinue their education. Stipends can cover tuition expenses not to exceed six quarter hours in any academic quarter (excluding summer quarter). Northeastern University's Office of Financial Aid, located in 254 Richards Hall, administers these scholarships. Kappa Tau Phi Scholarships The Kappa Tau Phi Sorority Scholarship Fund annually makes scholarship awards available. They are granted to women students in the science, business, en- gineering, and liberal arts programs who rank highest at the end of the upper-middle year. In the event that the chosen student is eligible for an award of greater monetary value, the award will be made to the next highest-ranking woman student. To be eligible for this scholarship, the | student must be enrolled in a program of at least I two evenings per week and must be a candidate | for a bachelor's degree. In determining the recip- ient, grades of all courses completed in prior years shall be considered. Harry Olins Memorial Scholarship The Harry Olins Memorial Scholarship Fund was established as an expression of firm belief in University Col- lege students and "what they stand for." The fund, presented by Mrs. Harry Olins in recognition of her husband's long service on the business fac- ulty, makes available an annual tuition award to students who, in terms of scholastic achievement, character, and personal need, best typify the spirit of Northeastern University. To be eligible for this award, the student must be a business ad- ministration degree candidate and carry a full academic load during the school year. William J. McGovern Memorial Scholarship The William J. McGovern Memorial Scholarship was established in 1978 by an anonymous donor to honor the memory of William J. McGovern. The donor wishes to assist others in realizing their potential through higher education. The income from this scholarship will benefit worthy under- graduate students actively pursuing studies in University College or Lincoln College. Recipients must have declared a major, demonstrate finan- cial need and academic achievement, and exhibit a high level of professional promise. Eva Needle Memorial Scholarship The Eva Needle Memorial Scholarship Fund was estab- lished in 1965 with the aid of the Norman Knight Charitable Foundation and is maintained through the generosity of the friends of Bob and Ted Nee- dle in memory of their mother. The income from j the Scholarship Fund is awarded annually to a deserving student in the accounting program who H demonstrates superior academic achievement. The recipient is selected jointly by Ted Needle, a long-standing member of University College's ac- counting faculty, and the Scholarship Committee. Scholarships and Financial Aid 31 H. Patricia Taylor Scholarship Fund The H Patricia Taylor Scholarship Fund was established in 1974 by H. Patricia Taylor, a graduate of Uni- versity College, and her husband, Harry C. Taylor, a graduate of the School of Business. The schol- arship expresses their appreciation for financial assistance made available to Mrs. Taylor while obtaining her degree and is an attempt to provide similar funds to assist others in realizing their po- tential through higher education. The income from the scholarship fund will be awarded annually to a student enrolled in University College or Lincoln College who demonstrates financial need and ac- ademic stability and who meets certain other con- ditions of eligibility. University and Lincoln College Faculty Society Memorial Scholarship Awards The Faculty So- ciety of University and Lincoln Colleges, North- eastern University, offers two awards annually, primarily for excellence in studies, to bachelor's degree candidates in University and Lincoln Col- leges who have carried and are currently carrying a minimum of 24 quarter hours annually. Appli- cations, available during the winter quarter, must be returned before the spring quarter. These awards are given in commemoration of the Fac- ulty Society's deceased members. U.S. Navy Field Training Supervisors Associ- ation Memorial Scholarship A scholarship fund has been established through the generosity of the United States Navy Field Training Super- visors Association, in commemoration of the As- sociation's deceased members. The scholarship is awarded annually to a deserving student, se- lected by the Scholarship Committee, who is a management major working toward a Bachelor of Science degree in the evening program at Uni- versity College. Roberta Macycove Wasserman Memorial Scholarship This scholarship was established in 1976 through the generosity of family members and friends of Roberta Macycove Wasserman, who, at the time of her death in 1975, was pur- suing arts and sciences studies within University College. The income from the Memorial Scholar- ship Fund is awarded annually to a deserving female student who is a homemaker with family responsibilities and who is pursuing part-time studies within University College. The recipient shall demonstrate financial need, soundness of character, and academic stability. Sigma Epsilon Rho Honor Society Scholarship Award The Sigma Epsilon Rho Honor Society Scholarship Award, established in 1974 by the membership of the Society, is awarded annually to undergraduate students of University or Lincoln College at Northeastern University. Eligible stu- dents must have a cumulative quality point av- erage of 3.0 or better after completing 75 percent or more of their required studies. Transportation Club of New England Scholar- ship The Transportation Club of New England provides approximately eight scholarships an- nually for persons employed in transportation and industry traffic departments. The scholarships are applicable toward tuition, books, and incidental expenses involved in transportation management courses. The purpose of the plan is to afford a limited number of people an opportunity to ex- pand and improve their education by systema- tized study in courses in the field of transportation and distribution management. The scholarships are administered cooperatively with the Scholar- ship Committee of the Transportation Club of New England. Applications may be secured from and filed with Mr. Frank Smith, Secretary, Transpor- tation Club of New England, Post Office Box 121, Reading, MA 01867. Each applicant must be sponsored by a member of the Transportation Club. Electronics Industries Personnel Association Scholarship This scholarship was established in 1980 through the generosity of the Electronics Industries Personnel Association. The income is awarded annually to one or more students whose studies, to a significant extent, are in the field of human resources management in University Col- lege. Recipients shall demonstrate financial need, soundness of character, and academic stability. Awards John W. Robbins Prize The John W. Robbins Prize was established in 1984 under the terms of the will of the late Lena C. Robbins, in memory of her husband, John W. Robbins, an alumnus of Northeastern University. The income from this me- morial gift will be awarded annually to the out- standing student (Class Marshall) of the graduating class of University College. Financial Aid The Office of Financial Aid, located in 254 Rich- ards Hall, offers several types of assistance to 32 Scholarships and Financial Aid part-time students. All awards are based on fi- nancial need. Aid granted from programs spon- sored by the federal government is dependent upon the amount of funding allocated to North- eastern University. The University does not award financial assistance in any form to students who are not citizens or permanent residents of the United States. All part-time students who wish to apply for financial aid and who have not declared a major must submit a Certification of Intention to Complete a Degree form, available at the Univer- sity College office, 102 Churchill Hall. Satisfactory Academic Progress for Financial Aid Recipients Recipients of financial aid are required to make satisfactory academic progress in order to continue their eligibility for aid. Uni- versity College defines "satisfactory academic progress" as: • a minimum course load of six credit hours per quarter • a minimum average of C, or 2.0, in these courses • a cumulative academic record in any given ac- ademic year (September through June) that re- flects that the financial aid recipient has registered for a minimum of 18 quarter hours of credit and satisfactorily completed at least 12 quarter hours of credit with an overall quality point average of 2.0 or better. If at the end of any given academic year a student receiving financial aid has failed to make satis- factory academic progress toward his or her de- gree, the Office of Financial Aid will be notified by University College. Pell Grant The Pell Grant Program is a federal aid program designed to provide financial assis- tance to degree candidates who need it to attend post-high school educational institutions. Pell Grants are intended to be the "floor" of a financial aid package and may be combined with other forms of aid in order to meet the full costs of education. The Pell Grant is an award and, unlike a loan, does not have to be repaid. Half-time students taking at least six credit hours each quarter may now apply for awards ranging up to one-half the maximum allowable by law, contin- gent upon the total cost of education. Applica- tions are available in the Office of Financial Aid, 275 Richards Hall, or by writing to the Pell Grant Program, Post Office Box 84, Washington, DC 20044. Massachusetts State Scholarship Massachu- setts residents enrolled as full-time students (i.e., 12 credit hours per quarter for fall, winter, and spring) may be eligible for a Massachusetts State Scholarship. To apply, students must submit a Massachusetts Financial Aid Form (MFAF) for res- idents of Massachusetts. The deadline date for applications is March 1. Massachusetts State Scholarships are awarded based on need as de- termined by the Massachusetts Financial Aid Form. Adult Learners Program The Massachusetts Board of Regents of Higher Education has estab- lished the Massachusetts Adult Learners Program as a need-based, state-funded, financial aid pro- gram designed primarily to assist Aid for Depen- dent Children (AFDC) recipients in obtaining a college education. The amount of each award varies depending on the applicant's demon- strated need, but it will not exceed $1 ,320 per year. To be considered for the program, applicants must be full- or part-time undergraduate students at Northeastern, taking at least one three-credit- hour course. They must also have been perma- nent, legal residents of Massachusetts for one year prior to receiving the award. Awards are presented according to state-established priori- ties. Female AFDC recipients with children be- tween the ages of 14 and 18 have highest priority; the next highest level of candidate includes all other AFDC recipients, followed by candidates who meet the basic residency, academic, and need requirements. Awards are made on a first- come, first-served basis. Applications are avail- able at the Office of Financial Aid. Guaranteed Student Loan Program The Guar- anteed Student Loan Program enables a student to borrow a maximum of $2,500 per academic year directly from a bank, credit union, or other participating lender in the student's home com- munity. The loan is guaranteed by a state or pri- vate nonprofit agency and is insured by the federal government. The interest on the loan will be subsidized by the federal government while the student is in school. The loan must be re- paid. Students whose families have an adjusted gross income below $30,000 will be eligible for a loan if they are enrolled or have been accepted for enrollment at least half-time in an institution of | Scholarships and Financial Aid 33 higher education and are citizens or nationals of the United States. Students whose families ex- ceed this income ceiling may be eligible if they can show financial need in accordance with US Department of Education guidelines. All students are eligible for federal interest benefits. Under these benefits, the federal government will pay the interest until the student begins repaying the loan. The legal maximum loan borrowed through the Guaranteed Student Loan Program for any single academic year is $2,500. The maximum loan for an entire undergraduate program is $12,500. The maximum loan amount in one academic year may never exceed the cost of education, less other financial aid received. In practice, how- ever, the Guarantee Agency in the state where the loan is written may set loan limits less than these maximums. In the final analysis, the lender decides the amount of the loan. Repayment of a Guaranteed Loan usually be- gins six months after a student withdraws or grad- uates from an educational institution or ceases to carry at least a half-time course load. The repay- ment period may be as long as ten years. The amount of the payments depends upon the size of the debt and the student's ability to pay; in most cases, the borrower must pay at least $600 per year. During the repayment period, the loan carries a simple interest rate of nine percent per annum, which is paid by the borrower. Note: For students who have previously partic- ipated in the Guaranteed Student Loan Program and who have outstanding loans at seven per- cent, the interest rate on subsequent loans will continue to be seven percent. Repayment on loans may be deferred if the borrower returns to at least half-time study at an eligible educational institution. Deferment of re- payment is also allowed for up to three years of service in the armed forces, Peace Corps, or full- time programs conducted by ACTION. In most cases, the actual repayment schedule will be es- tablished by the lender shortly after the borrower leaves school. Students who borrow funds through the Guar- anteed Student Loan Program are subject to the legal responsibilities listed below: 1. Students must report any of the following changes to the lending institution: a. withdrawal from school b. transfer to another school c. reduction of course load to less than half- time d. change of address or parents' address e. change of name. 2. Students are liable for any false information that they report on the application. 3. Students must use the loan funds for educa- tional purposes only. 4. If a student fails to repay the loan as agreed under the Federally Insured Loan Program Regulations, legal action can result. Failure to comply with any of the above respon- sibilities could make a student ineligible for any future loans from the program. Additional information about financial aid is available from the Office of Financial Aid, 254 Richards Hall, 617-437-3190. All federal financial aid programs are subject to change depending on adequate and con- tinuing federal support. 34 Student Activities Student activities for part-time students are planned, organized, and operated by the student body, with the assistance of the Director of Uni- versity-Lincoln College Student Activities. The programs are designed to keep pace with the changing needs of adult students and to provide maximum opportunity for student participation. All part-time students in University College and Lin- coln College are welcome to participate. The program is flexible in nature and pioneer- ing in spirit to meet the needs of adult students. The Office of University-Lincoln College Student Activities is particularly interested in developing new clubs that will benefit students professionally and educationally. If students wish to start clubs related to their professions, this office will help them plan and organize clubs on the local and national levels. The program is dedicated to as- sisting the adult student in the development of his or her fullest potential. The University-Lincoln College Student Activities Office is located in 102 Churchill Hall, 617-437-2400. Purpose The purposes of part-time student activities are to provide opportunities for the development and pursuit of cultural interests and professional ob- jectives; to encourage the development of lead- ership activities and skills; to enable the student to identify more closely with the University; and to include the family as an important and vital motivating force in the part-time student's edu- cational career. Sigma Epsilon Rho Honor Society Sigma Epsilon Rho is the honor society of Uni- versity College. Its purposes are to promote ac- quaintance and good fellowship among those students who have attained highest scholastic standing in the College; to stimulate the student body to higher scholastic accomplishment through the bearing, influence, and work of these selected men and women; to develop methods of mutual improvement and advancement among members; and to support high moral, profes- sional, and scholastic ideals. Only honor graduates or seniors with honor standing at the end of the junior year are eligible for admission to the society. Admission is by in- vitation after nomination by the society. An outstanding book is awarded each year by Sigma Epsilon Rho Society to the highest-ranking student at the conclusion of the junior year. Stu- dents will receive the award only in the event that they enroll for the subsequent year. Lambda Alpha Epsilon Lambda Alpha Epsilon is a national law enforce- ment fraternity founded in 1957. The Northeastern Chapter, Kappa Phi Beta, is open to part-time and day students enrolled in law enforcement, secu- rity, and correctional practices programs, and to professional men in the fields of law enforcement and security. The fraternity is dedicated to the furtherance of professional standards in law en- forcement. Gymnasium Facilities Part-time students may utilize the gymnasium fa- cilities from 4 to 9:30 p.m. Monday through Friday, and during all open hours on Saturday, Sunday, and holidays. A valid Northeastern student iden- tification card and a photo identification card must be presented to gain access to the facilities. Specific schedules for use of the pool. Nautilus and Universal weight rooms, indoor track and cage, gymnasium, gymnastics room, and wres- tling room are available at the beginning of each quarter in the Intramural Sports Office, 1 10 Cabot. Alumni Association More than 93,000 alumni are united within an Alumni Association, created to establish a mu- tually beneficial relationship between Northeast- ern and its graduates. The Association is governed by an Executive Committee elected from the alumni community. Membership in the Association is automatic upon graduation. The Association is headquartered in the Office of Alumni Relations in 125 Richards Hall. The official records and addresses of alumni are maintained in the Office of Alumni Records, 236 Huntington Avenue. Activities of the Association include the Home- coming celebration, presentation of the Outstand- Student Activities 35 ing Alumni Awards, and the annual presentation of Professional Promise Awards to outstanding seniors in each of the Colleges. The Alumni Office also is involved in establishing diverse enrich- ment and education programs to meet the con- temporary vocational and avocational needs of Northeastern's graduates. The Alumni Associa- tion has also initiated a successful group travel program to provide the alumni of Northeastern with interesting, economical opportunities in for- eign travel. Notice of all activities is provided in the Northeastern alumni magazine and in special publications. Regional alumni clubs have been established from coast to coast. All alumni are eligible to become members of these organizations. The clubs meet periodically with a varied program, often in conjunction with professional and athletic events, faculty visits, and service projects. Alumni class organizations conduct reunions for their re- spective classes every five years. The Association sponsors and assists constit- uent organizations that focus on common profes- sional and avocational interests and college affiliations. These groups have their own officers and conduct various programs throughout the year. In addition, alumni volunteers in many metro- politan areas across the nation represent the Ad- missions Office at high schools and community colleges. '^., Programs of Study 37 University College conducts part-time educa- tional programs at the undergraduate level during day and evening hours. The programs are de- signed to help meet the varying needs and inter- ests of adult students who may enroll as students pursuing degree programs or as nondegree stu- dents taking single courses or special programs. University College programs leading to the Bachelor of Science, Bachelor of Science in Busi- ness Administration, and Bachelor of Arts de- grees help provide opportunities for cultural and professional development equivalent in quality and scope to those offered in the conventional four-year college enrolling full-time students. The bachelor's degree requires approximately 174 quarter hours of credit. Programs leading to the Associate in Science degree help provide students with a background in fundamental areas in business administration, health professions and sciences, law enforce- ment, and liberal arts. The associate degree re- quires 96 quarter hours of credit and is equivalent to the conventional two-year, or junior, college in scope and quality. Certificate programs in a va- riety of disciplines are also offered. Degree curricula and certificate programs are offered in the following areas: Business Administration Program Accounting Associate in Science Bachelor of Science in Business Administration Certificate Business Administration Associate in Science Compensation and Benefits Management Certificate Computer Programming and Systems Analysis Certificate Computer Systems Specialist Program Certificate Finance Associate in Science Certificate Page 44 57 132 45 132 132 146 46 132 Hotel and Restaurant Management Associate in Science 48 Certificate 133 Human Resources Management Associate in Science 49 Certificate 133 Industrial Management Associate in Science 50 Industrial Technology Bachelor of Science . 56 Management Bachelor of Science in Business Administration 58 Management Information Systems Associate in Science 51 Bachelor of Science in Business Administration 59 Marketing Associate in Science 52 Certificate 133 Operations Management Certificate 133 Purchasing Associate in Science 53 Certificate 134 Real Estate Associate in Science 54 Certificate 134 Transportation and Physical Distribution Management Associate in Science 55 Certificate 134 Health Professions and Sciences Program Chemical Biological Technology Associate in Science Bachelor of Science Dental Assistant Certificate Health Management Bachelor of Science Option in Long-Term Care Administration Option in Community Health Management Page 63 64 66 67 69 69 38 Programs of Study Health Record Administration American Sign Language Bachelor of Science 70 Certificate Certificate 72 American Studies Health Science Certificate Bachelor of Science in Health Science 73 Arts and Sciences Medical Laboratory Science Associate in Science Associate in Science 77 Economics Medical Technology Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science 78 Bachelor of Science Hematology English Bachelor of Science 79 Bachelor of Arts Nursing Bachelor of Science Bachelor of Science in Nursing (in Fine Arts affiliation with the College of Bachelor of Arts Nursing) 82 Bachelor of Science Radiologic (X-Ray) Technology Gerontology Associate in Science 83 Certificate Therapeutic Recreation Services Graphic Design and Communication Associate in Science 86 Certificate Certificate 88 History Bachelor of Arts Law Enforcement Bachelor of Science Program Page Liberal Studies Correctional Practices Bachelor of Arts Associate in Science 93 Music Bachelor of Science 95 Bachelor of Arts Certificate 135 Bachelor of Science Criminal Justice Political Science Certificate 135 Bachelor of Arts Forensic Science Bachelor of Science Certificate 135 Psychology Law Enforcement Bachelor of Arts Associate in Science 97 Bachelor of Science Bachelor of Science 99 Public Administration Certificate 136 Certificate Law Enforcement Administration Sociology-Anthropology Certificate 136 Bachelor of Arts Law, Policy, and Society Bachelor of Science Certificate 136 Software Technical Writing Legal Concepts in Law Enforcement Certificate Certificate 136 Song Writing Loss Prevention and Security Certificate Administration Speech Communication Certificate 137 Certificate Security Technical Communications Associate in Science 101 Bachelor of Science Bachelor of Science 103 Writing Social Problems and Law Enforcement Certificate Certificate 137 Course descriptions are listed in alph Liberal Arts der beginning on page 151. Program Page Advertising and Public Relations Certificate 138 Business Administration 39 Dorothy M, Oppenheim, Assistant Dean Director, Business Administration Programs Audrey G. Emmer, Assistant to the Director, Busi- ness Administration Programs 203 Churchill Hall, 617-437-2418. Purpose University College recognizes that adult students seek educational opportunities in business to sat- isfy many different professional needs. To help meet these needs, the College offers a wide se- lection of business and business-related courses, as well as structured academic programs. Among the available options are 1 1 certificate programs, 1 1 associate degree programs, and four bacca- laureate degree programs. All certificate and de- gree programs have the common objective of offering students an opportunity to achieve professional competence in a formal set of busi- ness subjects while laying the foundation for fur- ther professional growth. The Programs Certificates in Business University College of- fers 1 1 different certificate programs for individ- uals seeking to build or advance a marketable specialization in business. The professional areas covered by the certificate programs include ac- counting; compensation and benefits manage- ment; computer programming and systems analysis; finance; hotel and restaurant manage- ment; human resources management; marketing; operations management; purchasing; real estate; and transportation and physical distribution man- agement. The University College certificate programs in business are designed for: • students who plan to complete an associate's degree and possibly a bachelor's degree but who first want to acquire the marketable skills offered in the certificate program • individuals seeking an intensive course of study in a business discipline but who do not wish to acquire a degree • individuals already holding a degree who wish to acquire specialized knowledge for career change or professional development. The certificate programs are designed so that transfer into a related degree program is possi- ble. Certificates can be earned based on aca- demic work completed within the last five years. Detailed information on these certificate pro- grams, together with a recommended course se- quence for completing them, appears in the section on certificate programs, pages 131-141. Associate in Science Degree Northeastern of- fers part-time students a choice of 1 1 business programs leading to the Associate in Science degree: accounting, business administration, fi- nance, hotel and restaurant management, human resources management, industrial management, management information systems, marketing, purchasing, real estate, and transportation and physical distribution management. These programs provide breadth of perspec- tive through exposure to a well-balanced se- quence of liberal arts courses. Specialized knowledge for future managerial growth may be acquired through the study of a core of profes- sional business courses and a major or concen- tration in a business discipline. Students who have completed a certificate program may enroll in an associate degree program. While the credits earned in a certificate program may be applied toward this degree, completion of a certificate program is not required for the associate degree. To be awarded the associate degree, a student must successfully complete the 96 quarter hours of course credit detailed on the following pages. Baciielor of Science in Business Administra- tion Degree The Bachelor of Science in Busi- ness Administration degree is offered in accounting, management, and management in- formation systems. Students who have clearly de- cided to pursue a baccalaureate degree in business should enroll in the courses detailed on pages 42-43 prior to petitioning for admission to the Bachelor of Science in Business Administra- tion degree program. These courses will provide students with the broad educational foundation needed for the study of professional-level courses in business administration. Students who wish to earn one of the Associate in Science degrees in business prior to entry into '&■-/>■. ■.^yim Business Administration 41 ! the Bachelor of Science in Business Administra- i tion degree program are advised that the Univer- I sity College Bachelor of Science in Business Administration degree program includes a vali- dation requirement for upper-level business courses taken while pursuing the associate de- gree. (See details below.) Admission to the Bachelor of Science in Busi- ness Administration degree program is restricted to students who have maintained a 2.0 cumulative grade-point average and completed a minimum of 80 quarter hours (60 semester hours) of credit, including certain basic courses in required sub- jects, either in University College or at another accredited institution. There is a special appli- cation form for admission to this program. The Bachelor of Science in Business Adminis- tration degree program conforms with all stan- dards established by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business (AACSB), which has been recognized by the Council for Post- secondary Accreditation and by the United States Office of Education as the sole accrediting or- ganization for university bachelor's and master's degree programs in business administration. While there are more than 2,000 college and uni- versity business programs in the United States, fewer than 10 percent of these institutions offer business programs that are fully accredited by AACSB. Northeastern University is unique in the New England region in that both its full-time and part-time baccalaureate degree business pro- grams are accredited. Validation Requirement "Validation" is the term used to describe a set of procedures that tests whether an upper-level course completed at the lower division of a bac- calaureate program should be accepted for transfer credit in the upper division of an AACSB- approved baccalaureate degree program. There are three approved validation methods. 1. Sequential Course. Students who enroll in the Bachelor of Science in Business Administration degree program can validate a course taken at University College or elsewhere by successfully completing a course that is sequential to the course already completed. The sequential course must be taken in a reserved section. For example, successful completion of Cost Accounting 2 in a reserved section can validate Cost Accounting 1, regardless of where the student completed Cost Accounting 1. Similarly, by successfully complet- ing Marl-\ ^ V \ .y^ >" BedtorO RO \ Burlington High /^ School AL s V3 Marshall V Simmonds A Middle \^' ▼ J ^fH BURLINGTON W . 0^\ \ \ ^^^rO*" I.IARBIO \/ \ s^^ ^^^ ¥\ ▲ N ■> \ BUSLINGTON ^^ ^ y n Campus — ^ eas rsit gto \ South Bedtord Rd. b^r" North Unive Burlin LEXINGTON t\ WOBURN Northeastern ^^ *\ University ^ \ Botanical Research \ Station \ 1 249 Chelmsford High School 200 Richardson Road 250 Dedham Campus Common Street \ NEEDHAM V^ ^.^--' yr*^ ^— — ~>f_ ^ --\ '"'*'''*"''''"'''© CHARLES RIVER 1 / rtEEDHAM \^ GOLF ClUB > . ¥ 4 ^ ^^^'^^-yt- s^s^^^^N. «^ ^ Necdham St •^ \ ^^^^^^ CHARLE / / ^ \rt \ K r J / POLO FIE1.D / / Dedham \ / / Campus DEDHAM C^^Sj^^^ POND X ^^>^ A i r \ \ WELD X X POND ^S. WESTWOOD x^^^^ \ if r 1 \ 251 Framingham North High School A Street J- ^^A ^^OV/ COCHITUAnE J"* >^ %\ S# 7 / ^^^ /\f^^'^° / J- Framingham ^mh J North ^•/"' ^- High School I ^^ i f ^M^S^i^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^ / .^^'^^ y^ y^*^ I ^^ / ^— V A py^ ^A,^*^©^ \ y/f V^ ^^ ^^^ %j% FRAMINGHAM ^ ^^^ f /'LX^" A >^ N / TOWN .^ ^X>4 FRAM1NK3HAM ^^X/\ SHOPPERS NATICK H SHOPPING ■ \^^'^^«>^W ^ ^ / l\ WOK.D CENTER ■ X > ^ ^ / r \ /-N ■ ^"^ X. ^ SHCRWOOO ■ ^V. a. !>LAZA ■ 1 \ji 1 \\ 1 (J26) I iEA(»«; Z- NATICK B / 1 252 Lynnfield Middle School 505 Main Street 253 Marlboro High School Bolton Street 254 Marshfield High School Forest Street 255 Milford High School 31 West Fountain Street 256 Revere (Abraham Lincoln r School) 68 Tuckerman Street 257 Westwood High School 200 Nahatan Street 258 Weymouth North High School 1051 Commercial Street 259 Index Absence due to illness, 22 and withdrawal policy, 17 Academic advisers, 16, 25 Academic and Student Affairs, Office of, 15 Academic calendar, vi-viii Academic Computer Services, 8 Academic counseling, 15, 25-27 Academic monitoring, 22 Academic policies, 15, 16-23 Accounting certificate program in, 132 course descriptions, 151-52 degree programs in, 44, 57 Graduate School of Profes- sional, 4 Address change, 23 Administrative officers, 12-13, 245-46 Admission, 16 for degree candidacy, 17-18 of international students, 17 Admissions Office, 1 Adult and Special Programs, Office of, 27 Adult education, 1 Adult Learners Program, 32 Advertising certificate program in, 138 course descriptions, 183, 197, 198 Advisers, 16, 25 Affirmative Action policy, ii Allied Health Professions: see Health Professions and Sci- ences Alternative Freshman-Year Pro- gram, 142-45 Alumni association, 34-35 American Sign Language (ASL) certificate program in, 138 course descriptions, 156-57 American studies, certificate pro- gram in, 138 Anatomy, courses in, 158, 212 Anthropology course descriptions, 215-216 degree programs in, 126-28 Antidiscrimination policy, ii Arabic, courses in, 191 Architecture, courses in, 156 Archives, 7 Arena, 9 Art course descriptions, 152-56 degree programs in, 113-14 Arts and Sciences: see also Liberal Arts College of, 1 Graduate School of, 3 major in, 110 track, in Alternative Freshman- Year Program, 144 transfer credit to, 109 ASL certificate program in, 138 course descriptions, 156-57 Assessment Tutoring and Enrich- ment Resources program, 8 Astronomy, courses in, 170, 171 Attendance, 22 at commencement, 23 and withdrawal policy, 17 Auditing fees for, 28 policy for, 1 7 Awards financial aid, 31, 32 Outstanding Alumni, 34-35 Professional Promise, 35 Barletta Natatorium, 9 Belmont High School, 247 Benefits management, certificate program in, 132 Biological technology, degree pro- grams in, 63-65 Biology, courses in. 158-59 Boston campus directions, 7 map, iv office hours, v-vi Boston Library Consortium, 8 Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions graduate programs, 3 undergraduate programs, 1 Brockton High School, 247 Buildings and facilities, 7-10 Burlington campus, 9, 248 Bursar's Office, 28 Business Administration: see also Management certificate programs in, 37, 39, 132-34 College of, 1 degree programs in, 37, 39-55 Graduate School of, 3-4 major in, 45 minor in, 43, 107 program consultants in, 147 reserved and open sections in, 40 track, in Alternative Freshman- Year Program, 143 transfer credit in, 19-20, 40, 41 validation requirements for, 19- 20, 40 Cabot Physical Education Center, 9, 34 Calendar, vi-viii Campuses facilities, 7-10 maps, iv, 247-53 office hours, v-vi phone numbers, v Cancellation, of classes due to inadequate enrollment, 17 due to inclement weather, ii Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) course, 162 Cardiovascular health and exer- cise course, 204 Career counseling, 15, 25-27 Career development course, 26, 182 Center for International Higher Ed- ucation Documentation, 7 Certification of Intention to Com- plete a Degree form, 32 Certificate programs, 37-38. 131-41 in business administration, 39, 132-34 Computer Systems Specialist Program, 146 Dental Assistant Program, 66 in health record administration, 72 in law enforcement, 135-37 in liberal arts, 138-41 in therapeutic recreation. 86-87 Chelmsford High School. 248 Chemical-biological technology, degree programs in, 63-65 Chemistry, courses in, 160-61 Cinema, courses in, 155, 162, 168 CLEP examinations, 19, 20. 40 Clinical assignments, 61 Clubs, 34 College-Level Examination Pro- gram (CLEP), 19, 20, 40 Commencement: see Graduation Communication: see also Writing graphic, 139, 154, 156 for health care personnel, 173 speech. 140, 218-195 technical, 129-30, 140, 219-21 Community education, 1 Community health management concentration in, 69 course descriptions. 173, 174 Compensation and benefits man- agement, certificate program in, 132 Computer programming and sys- tems analysis: see also Tech- nical communications certificate program in, 132 course descriptions, 194-97 Computer Science, College of graduate programs, 4 undergraduate programs. 1-2 Computer Services, 8 Computer Systems Specialist Pro- gram, 146 260 Index Computer technology, courses in, 220-21 Consultants and coordinators, 147-50 Contemporary studies seminar, 182-83 Continuing Education, Center tor, 5 Cooperative (co-op) plan, 1 Core career courses, 26, 182 Correctional practices certificate program in, 135 degree programs in, 93-96 Counseling career and academic, 15, 25-27 personal, 26 and Testing Center, 8, 26-27 Courses auditing of, 17 cancellation of, 17 changes in, 17, 23 current listings, 16 descriptions of, 151-222 evening, 1 help in selecting, 16 intensive, 92, 189-90 maximum number of, 17 noncollegiate, 20-21, 91, 108 at other institutions, 19-20 part-time, 1 pass/fail, 17, 22 prerequisite, 16 registration for, 16 at remote locations, 10 repeating, 22 required, changes in, 23 substitution of, 18, 131 waivers for, 18, 131 withdrav\/al from, 17 CPR course, 162 Creative process, course in, 182 Credit by examination, 19, 20, 40 for extra-institutional learning, 21 for noncollegiate experience, 20-21, 91, 108 quarter-hour, 16 transfer of, 19-20, 131 Criminal justice certificate program in, 135 graduate programs, 4 track, in Alternative Freshman- Year Program, 144 undergraduate programs, 2 Cultural heritage seminar, 182 Cumulative grade point average, 22 Curricula: see Programs of study Curriculum committees, 13 u Dean's List, 22 Dedham campus, 9, 249 Degree candidacy, 17-18 Degree programs, 37-38 in business administration, 39- 40 credit toward, 16 in health professions, 61-90 in law enforcement, 91-104 in liberal arts, 105-30 Dental Assistant Program, 66 course descriptions, 162-63 Dental school, requirements for, 62 Design, graphic certificate program in, 139 course descriptions, 154, 156 Directed study in law enforcement, 91 in liberal arts, 108 Directions, to Northeastern University, 7 Disciplinary action, 23 Discrimination, policy against, ii Distribution management certificate program in, 134 course descriptions, 221-22 degree program in, 55 Dockser Hall, 9 Dodge Library, 7 Earth sciences, courses in, 170-71 Ecology, courses in, 158, 171 Economics course descriptions, 163-66 degree program in, 110 with finance certificate, 1 1 1 Education track, in Alternative Freshman-Year Program, 144 Ell Student Center, 7 fee for, 29 Emergency closing, ii Employer, payment of tuition by, 28 Engineering, College of graduate programs, 4 undergraduate programs, 2 Engineering technology, 2 English course descriptions, 166-70 degree programs in, 112-13 required, 108 writing sample for, 17 Enrollment inadequate, 17 of international students, 17 Epidemiology, courses in, 198 Equal opportunity employment policy, ii Evening courses, 1 "Events" telephone line, 8 Examinations CLEP, 19, 20, 40 course, 23 credit by, 19, 20, 40 final, vii-viii, 23, 29 makeup, 23, 29 PEP, 19, 20, 40 placement, 16-17 for validation, 20, 40 Exercise, course in, 204 Extra-institutional learning, credit tor, 21 Facilities, 7-10 Faculty, 1 1 , 223-40 Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, ii, 23 Fees, 28-29 Field work courses: see also Internships in health professions, 61 in law enforcement, 92 in liberal arts, 108 Film, courses in, 155, 162, 168 Final examinations dates for, vii-viii missed, 23, 29 Finance certificate programs in, 111, 132 course descriptions, 171-72 degree program in, 46 Financial aid, 31-33 Fine arts course descriptions, 152-56 degree programs in, 113-14 Food service management certificate program in, 133 course descriptions, 180-81 degree programs in, 47-48 Foreign languages course descriptions, 191-93 proficiency examination for, 20 Foreign students English for, 166 enrollment of, 17 speaking skills for, 218-19 transfer credit for, 20 Forensic science, certificate pro- gram in, 135 Framingham North High School, 249 Fraternities, 34 French, courses in, 191 Freshman-Year Program, Alterna- tive, 142-45 General Petition, 41 Genetics, courses in, 158-59 Geology, courses in, 1 70 German, courses in, 191 Gerontology, certificate program in, 139 Government course descriptions, 206-209 degree programs in, 121-23 Grade point average, 22 Grade reports, 21-22 Grading system, 21-22 Graduate schools information on, 27 programs in, 3-4 Index 261 Graduation attendance at, 23 Commencement Data Card, 19 date of, viii fee for, 29 with honor, 18-19 requirements for, 18 Grants, 32 Graphic design and communica- tion certificate program in, 139 course descriptions, 154, 156 Guaranteed Student Loan Pro- gram, 32-33 Gymnasium, 9, 34 H Handicapped, Office of Services for, ii, 8-9 Hayden Lodge, 9 Health management course descriptions, 172-74 degree program in, 67-69 Health Professions and Sciences certificate programs in, 37-38, 66, 72, 85-86 clinical assignments in, 61 degree programs in, 37-38, 61- 90 distribution requirements in, 61 graduate programs, 4 preprofessional courses in, 61- 62 program directors and coordi- nators, 62-63, 147-49 undergraduate programs, 2 Health record administration certificate program in, 72 course descriptions, 174 degree program in, 70-71 Health science course descriptions, 173, 176- 77 degree programs in, 73-75 track, in Alternative Freshman- Year Program, 145 Hebrew, courses in, 191-92 Hematology course descriptions, 198 degree program in, 79-80 Henderson House, 9 Histology, courses in, 159 History course descriptions, 177-80 degree program in, 115-17 Holidays, vi-viii Homework, 22-23 Honor Dean's List, 22 graduation with, 18-19 Honor society, 34 Honors programs in law enforcement, 91 in liberal arts, 108 Hospital management course descriptions, 172-74 degree program in, 67-69 Hotel management certificate program in, 133 course descriptions, 180-81 degree program in, 48 Human resources management certificate program in, 133 course descriptions, 174-76 degree program in, 49 Human services concentration, 128 Humanities, see Liberal Arts I Illness, 22 Immunology, course in, 159 In absentia status, 19 Incomplete, 22 Independent study in law enforcement, 91 in liberal arts, 108 industrial management course descriptions, 181-82, 198-99 degree program in, 50 Industrial technology, degree pro- gram in, 56 Information Center, 8 Instructional Development and Evaluation, Office of, 8 Instructional Media Training and Utilization Services, 8 Insurance and Financial Service Institute, 4-5 International Higher Education Documentation, Center for, 7 International students English for, 166 enrollment of, 17 speaking skills for, 218-19 transfer credit for, 20 Internships: see also Field work courses in cooperative plan, 1 in management, 3 nonpaid, 27 Italian, courses in, 192 Japanese, courses in, 192 Job counseling, 15, 25-27 Jobs co-op, 1 after graduation, 27 Job-search seminars, 26 Journalism, courses in, 183 Kappa Phi Beta, 34 Laboratory fees, 29 Laboratory science, medical courses in, 198 degree programs in, 76-77, 79-80 Lambda Alpha Epsilon, 34 Languages see also English foreign, 20, 191-93 sign, 138, 156-57 Latin, courses in, 192 Law courses in, 159-60 School of, 4 Law Enforcement certificate programs in, 38, 135-37 course descriptions, 183-90 degree programs in, 38, 91-104 field work courses in, 92 intensive courses in, 92, 189-90 Learning Resources Center, 8 Learning Resources, Office of, 8 Liberal Arts: see also Arts and Sciences certificate programs in, 38, 107, 138-41 degree programs in, 38, 105- 130 directed study in, 108 distribution requirements in, 107 English requirement for, 108 field work courses in, 108 honors program in, 108 noncollegiate experience credit in, 108 professional concentrations in, 107 program consultants and coor- dinators in, 149-50 transfer credit from, 109 Liberal studies, degree program in, 105, 118-19 Libraries, 7-8 Boston Library Consortium, 8 collections, 7 services, 7-8 Library science, courses in, 190-91 Lincoln College, see School of En- gineering Technology, 2 Literature concentration in, 112 course descriptions, 166-70 Loans, 32-33 Long-term care administration concentrations in, 68-69 course descriptions, 173-74 Loss prevention, certificate pro- gram in, 137 Lynnfield Middle School, 250 M Major, declaration of, 18 Makeups, 23, 29 Management: see also Business Administration course descriptions, 181-82, 193-94, 198-99 degree program in, 58 Management Development Pro- gram, 3-4 262 Index Management Information Systems (MIS) course descriptions, 194-97 degree programs in, 51, 59 Management Intern Program, 3 Management Workshops, 4 Maps of Boston campus, iv of suburban campuses, 247-53 Marine Science and Maritime Studies Center, 9 Marketing certificate program in, 133 course descriptions, 197-98 degree program in, 52 Marlboro High School, 250 Marshfield High School, 251 Massachusetts Financial Aid Form (MFAF), 32 Mathematics course descriptions, 199-200 placement test in, 16-17 Matthews Arena, 9 MBA program, 3 Media Services, Campus, 8 Medical laboratory science course descriptions, 198 degree programs in, 76-78, 80-81 Medical record administration certificate program in, 72 course descriptions, 174 degree program in, 70-71 Medical school, requirements for, 62 Medical technology, degree pro- grams in, 76-78 Meteorology, courses in, 170 MFAF, 32 Milford High School, 251 Minorities, scholarships for, 30 MIS course descriptions, 194-97 degree programs in, 51, 59 Modern languages course descriptions, 191-93 proficiency examinations for, 20 Monitoring, 22 Music certificate program in song writing, 140 course descriptions, 200-203 degree programs in, 120 fee for instrument tutorials, 29 N Name change, 23 Network Northeastern University (NNU), 10 Noncollegiate experience credit (NCE), 20-21 in law enforcement, 91 in liberal arts, 108 Nondegree students, 16; see also Auditing; Certificate programs Northeastern University accreditation of, ii directions to, 7 facilities of, 7-10 governing boards and officers of, 241-46 liabilities of, ii maps of, iv, 247-53 schools at, 1-5 Notary public, 8 Nursing College of, 2 degree program in, 81-82 course descriptions, 203-204 Nutrition, courses in, 176 Oceanology, courses in, 170, 171 Office hours, v-vi Open House, for new students, 25 Open section, 40 Operations management certificate program in, 133 course descriptions, 181, 182 Organology, courses in, 159 Part-time programs, 1 Pass/fail courses, 17, 22 Pell Grant, 32 PEP examinations, 19, 20, 40 Penodontology, courses in, 176 Personnel management certificate program in, 132, 133 course descriptions, 174-76 degree program in, 49 Pharmacology, courses in, 176 Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions graduate programs, 4 undergraduate programs, 2 Philosophy, courses in, 204-206 Photography, courses in, 154-55, 156, 183 Physical distribution management certificate program in, 134 course descriptions, 221-22 degree program in, 55 Physical Education Center, 9, 34 Physics, courses in, 206 Physiology, courses in, 158, 159, 212 Placement services, 17 Placement tests, 16-17; see also PEP examinations Policies, 15, 16-23 Political science course descriptions, 206-209 degree programs in, 121-23 Prerequisites, 16 Probation, 23 Professional Experience Program, 26 Professional Promise Awards, 35 Proficiency Examination Program (PEP), 19, 20. 40 Program consultants and coordi- nators, 147-50 Programs of study Alternative Freshman-Year, 142-45 in business administration, 39- 59, 132^4 certificate programs, 37-38, 131-41 changes in, 23 in computer systems, 146 degree programs, 37-38 in health professions, 61-90 in law enforcement, 91-104, 135-<37 in liberal arts, 105-30, 138-41 Psychology course descriptions, 209-11 degree programs in, 124-25 Public administration certificate program in, 139 concentration in, 123 course descriptions, 207 Public notary, 8 Public relations certificate program in, 138 course descriptions, 183, 197-98 Purchasing certificate program in, 134 course descriptions, 211 degree program in, 53 Quality control, courses in, 198, 199 Quality-point average, 22 Quarter-hour credit, 16 Radiologic technology course descriptions, 211-12 degree programs in, 83-84 Real estate certificate program in, 134 course descriptions, 212-13 degree program in, 54 Records, inspection of, ii, 23 Recruiting, 27 Refunds, 28-29 Registration dates for, vi-viii fee for, 28 procedure for, 16 Regulations and Discipline, Committee on, 23 Rehabilitation: see Therapeutic recreation services Religion, courses in, 205-206, 216 Requirements changes in, 23 waiver of, 18 Research courses in, 190, 218 at University, 5 Reserved section, 40 Residence requirements, 19 Index 263 Restaurant management certificate program in, 133 course descriptions, 180-81 degree program in, 48 Revere campus. 252 Robbins Prize, 31 S Sales, courses in, 197, 198 Schedule, changes in, 16, 17 Scholarships, 30-31, 32 School of Engineering Technology (formerly Lincoln College), 2 Sciences, program consultants and coordinators in, 150 Security certificate program in, 137 degree programs in, 101-104 Self-assessment, course, 26, 182 Senior status, 19 Sexual harassment, li Sickness, 22 Sigma Epsilon Rho Honor Society, 34 Sign language certificate program in, 138 course descriptions, 156-57 Smaller Business Management Development Program (SBf\^DP), 3-4 Snow emergency, ii Social problems, certificate pro- gram in, 137 Social sciences: see Liberal Arts Sociology course descriptions, 216-18 degree programs in, 126-28 Software technical writing certificate program in, 140 course descriptions, 219, 220 degree program in, 129-30 Songwriting, certificate program in, 140 Spanish, courses in, 192-93 Special Programs, Office of, 27 Speech communication certificate program in, 140 course descriptions, 219 Sports arena, 9 gymnasium, 9. 34 Statistics, courses in, 163, 164, 199-200 for health sciences, 173 for psychology, 209 Student activities, 34-35 Student Affairs, Office of, 15 Student body, 12 Student Center, 7 fee for, 29 Student Handbook, 23 Student loans, 32-33 Student rights and responsibilities, 23 Study skills workshop, 27 Suburban campuses facilities, 9 maps, 247-53 office hours, v-vi phone numbers, v Swedish, courses in, 192 Swimming pool, 9, 34 Systems analysis certificate program in, 132 course descriptions, 195-96 Technical communications certificate program in, 140 course descriptions, 219-21 degree program in, 129-30 Tests: see Examinations Theatre arts, courses in, 162 Therapeutic recreation services certificate program in, 88-89 course descriptions, 213-15 degree program in, 85-87 Transcripts fee for, 29 obtaining, 21-22 for transfer credit, 19 Transfer credit, 19-20 in business administration, 19-20, 40, 41 from certificate program, 131 in liberal arts, 109 Transfer students, admission of, 18 Transportation, to Boston campus, 7 Transportation management certificate program in, 134 course descriptions, 221-22 degree program in, 55 Trustees, 242-43 Tuition, 28-29 for Alternative Freshman-Year Program, 142 financial aid for, 31-33 scholarships for, 30-31, 32 Tutoring, 8, 25 Undergraduate colleges, 1-3 University College administrative officers, 12-13, 245-46 faculty, 1 1 , 223-40 offices, v-vi programs in, 2-3, 1 1 , 37-38 student body, 12 Validation, of required courses, 19-20, 40 Veterans' benefits, 28 Visitor Information Center, 8 Vocational counseling, 15, 25-27 W Waivers, 18; see also Validation, of required courses in certificate programs, 131 Warren Center, 9 Westwood High School, 252 Weymouth North High School, 253 Withdrawal absence and, 17, 22 procedure for, 17 and tuition refund, 29 Women core career courses for, 26, 182 in engineering and information systems, 4 scholarships for, 30, 31 Work-study program, 1 Writing: see also Communication business, 168-69 certificate program in, 141 concentration in, 112 courses in, 166, 168-69, 183 creative, 168 critical, 166 expository, 168 news, 183 sample of, 17 song, 140 technical, 129-30, 140, 219-20 Northeastern University 1985-86 Basic Day Colleges Course Descriptions and Curriculum Guide College of Arts and Sciences Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions College of Business Administration College of Computer Science College of Criminal Justice College of Engineering School of Engineering Technology College of Nursing College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program Northeastern University charges tuition for all courses taken above the normal academic load. The University reserves the right to make changes in the regulations and courses announced in this bulletin. Northeastern University Publications 3.5.5 Contents Curriculum Guide 1985-86 College of Arts and Sciences 1 (MTH) Mathematics 138 Boston-Bouve College of Human (MUS) Music 144 Development Professions 22 (PHL) Philosophy and Religion 148 College of Business Administration 34 (PHY) Physics 153 College of Computer Science 37 (POL) Political Science 157 College of Criminal Justice 40 (PSY) Psychology 163 College of Engineering 40 (SOA) Anthropology 167 School of Engineering Technology 49 (SOC) Sociology 170 College of Nursing 52 (SPC) Speech Communication 176 College of Pharmacy and (DRA) Theatre and Dance 179 Allied Health Professions 54 (ACC) Accounting 183 University College Alternative (ENT) Entrepreneurship 185 Freshman-Year Program 60 (FIN) Rnance and Insurance 185 The Writing Center 61 (HRM) Human Resources Basic College Compensatory Management 188 Programs 62 (INB) International Business Course Descriptions Administration (MGT) Management 190 191 (MKT) Marketing 193 (CHE) Chemical Engineering 65 (MSC) Management Science 194 (CIV) Civil Engineering 66 (TRN) Transportation 196 (ECE) Electrical Engineering 69 (CRS) Counseling Psychology, (GE) General Engineering 75 Rehabilitation and Special (IIS) Industrial Engineering 76 Education 197 (ME) Mechanical Engineering 78 (ED) Department of Education 198 (COM) Computer Science 81 (HSL) Health, Sport, and Leisure 202 (CHT) Chemical Engineering Studies Technology 84 (PTH), (PCL),(PCT), (PHP), (PMC) (CT) Computer Technology 84 Physical Therapy 214 (EET) Electrical Engineering (SLA) Speech-Language Technology 86 Pathology and Audiology 215 (GET) General Engineering (PAH) Pharmacy 217 Technology 88 (TOX) Toxicology 221 (MET) Mechanical Engineering (HRA) Health Professions 221 Technology 89 (MLS) Medical Laboratory Science 222 (APR) African-American Studies 91 (HRA) Health Record ' (ASL) American Sign Language 96 Administration 224 (ART) Art and Architecture 97 (RTH) Respiratory Therapy 226 (BIO) Biology 100 (NUR) Nursing 229 (CHM) Chemistry 105 (CJ) Criminal Justice 230 (GEO) Earth Sciences 108 (AIR), (ARM), (NAV) Military (ECN) Economics 110 Science 233 (ENG) English 114 (COP) Cooperative Education 236 (HST) History 120 (INT) Interdisciplinary Courses 237 (JRN) Journalism 127 Alternative Freshman-Year Linguistics 128 Program 240 (LN), (LNC), (LNF), (LNS), (LNL), (LNG), (LNR), (LNI) Modern Languages Academic Calendar 242 129 Delivery of Services The University assumes no liability, and hereby expressly negates the same, for failure to provide or delay in providing educational or related services or facilities or for any other failure or delay in performance arising out of or due to causes beyond the reasonable control of the University, w/hich causes include, without limitation, power failure, fire, strikes by University employees or others, damage by the elements and acts of public authorities. The University will, however, exert reasonable efforts, when in its judgment it is appropriate to do so, to provide comparable or substantially equivalent services, facilities or performance, but its inability or failure to do so shall not subject it to liability. The Northeastern University catalog contains current information regarding the University calendar, admis- sions, degree requirements, fees, and regulations, and such information is not intended to be and should not be relied upon as a statement of the University's contractual undertakings. Northeastern University reserves the right in its sole judgment to promulgate and change rules and regulations and to make changes of any nature in its program, calendar, admissions policies, procedures and standards, degree requirements, fees, and academic schedule whenever it is deemed necessary or desirable, including, without limitation, changes in course content, the rescheduling of classes, cancelling of scheduled classes and other academic activities and requiring or affording alternatives for scheduled classes or other academic activities, in any such case giving such notice as is reasonably practicable under the circumstances. Northeastern will do its best to make available to you the finest education, the most stimulating atmosphere and the most congenial conditions it can provide. But the quality and the rate of progress of your academic career is in large measure dependent upon your own abilities, commitment, and effort. This is equally true with respect to professional advancement upon completion of the degree or program in which you are enrolled. The University cannot guarantee that you will obtain or succeed at any particular job; that will depend upon your own skills, achievement, presentation, and other factors such as market conditions at that time. Similarly in many professions and occupations there are increasing requirements imposed by federal and state statutes and regulatory agencies for certification or entry into a particular field. These may change during the period of time when you are at Northeastern and they may vary from state to state and from country to country. While the University stands ready to help you find out about these requirements and changes, it is your responsibility to initiate the inquiry because the University has no other way of knowing what your expectations and understand- ings are. In brief, the University is there to offer you educational opportunities and choices and to assist you in finding the direction in which you want to steer your educational experience. But you are a partner in this venture with an obligation and responsibility to yourself. Antidiscrimination Policy Northeastern University is committed to a policy of equal opportunity for all students and employees without regard to race, color, religion, sex, sexual preference, national origin, or handicap or veteran status. The University prohibits discrimination in all matters involving admission, registration, and all official relationships with students, including evaluation of academic performance. Equal Opportunity Employment Policy Northeastern University is an equal opportunity employer It is institutional policy that there shall be no discrimination against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, age, national origin, or handicap or veteran status. Northeastern also prohibits discrimination against any employee regarding upgrading, demotion or transfer, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training. In addition. Northeastern adheres to Affirmative Action guidelines in all recruitment endeavors. Further, Northeastern will not condone any forms of sexual harassment which is defined as the use of unwelcome sexual advances, requests for favors, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature: as an explicit or implicit condition of employment, as the basis for employment decisions or to interfere with an individual's work performance by creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment. Inquiries concerning our equal opportunity policies may be referred to the University Title IX Coordinator/ Compliance Officer for Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Affirmative Action Office, Richards Hail. Telephone 617-437-2133. Accreditation Statement Northeastern University is accredited by the New England Association of Schools and Colleges, Inc., which accredits schools and colleges in the six New England states. Accreditation by the Association indicates that the institution has been carefully evaluated and found to meet standards agreed upon by qualified educators. Children's Center Northeastern University operates a Children's Center in 123 Forsyth Building. The Center is academically housed in the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions' Department of Curriculum and Instruction. Children from age 2 years and 9 months to 6 years are eligible. For further information, phone 617-437-3929. I College of Arts and Sciences / 1 College of Arts and Sciences The College of Arts and Sciences offers students programs leading to two degrees in most majors: the Bachelor of Arts and the Bachelor of Science. Degree requirements for the options in each major are listed on the following pages. In addition to these requirements specified by the major department, the college has estab- lished certain minimum graduation requirements for its students. They are as follows: Quantitative: Candidates for either the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science degree who entered in or after the fall quarter of 1 974 must successfully complete 1 76 quarter hours of credit, of which 32 quarter hours may be taken outside the College of Arts and Sciences. In addition, only four quarter hours of Physical Education and no ROTC credits may be used to meet this requirement. Residency: Candidates must complete either 75 percent of the degree credit or the last three full quarters (a minimum of twelve full courses) at Northeastern. Qualitative: Candidates must achieve a minimum cumulative average of 2.0 (grade of C). Other Degree Requirements Modern Foreign Language All candidates for the Bachelor of Arts degree must attain the level of proficiency in a modern language indicated by either a passing grade at the intermediate level of a college language course or by meeting a comparable criterion approved by the Modern Languages Department. Please note American Sign Language does not fulfill this requirement. A conditional exemption from this requirement may be granted to: 1) Students who earned an average grade of C or better in a full, four-year language sequence in secondary school or 2) Students who earned an average grade of A in a three-year language sequence in secondary school. A conditional exemption must be confirmed by taking a proficiency examination during the student's first quarter at the University. A sufficiently high score will verify the exemption; otherwise the student will be advised to enroll in an appropriate language course in the following quarter An absolute exemption will be granted to students: 1) For whom English is a foreign language; 2) Who receive a score of 550 or better in a CEEB language achievement examination. Students who have not met the foreign language requirement at the time of entrance will register for courses appropriate to the scope and level of prior study The normal sequence for students with no prior preparation is two quarters of elementary-level language and two quarters of intermediate-level language. The Modern Languages Department will determine an appropriate entry point at which students who have partial language preparation may begin completing the requiement. The following requirements are effective for all students who entered prior to the Fall of 1 984 and upperclass transfer students who entered prior to the Fall of 1985: The Distribution Requirement: The Distribution Requirement is required of Bachelor of Arts candidates in all programs. Very generally, it involves taking ten courses (or forty quarter hours) of courses outside of the major area. For full details on this requirement, consult the Arts and Sciences Student Guidebook, which is available in the Dean's Office, 400 Meserve Hall. Freshman English: All degree candidates must successfully complete one or two quarters of Freshman Composition (depending on test placement results) and one quarter of Introduction to Literature. The following requirements are effective for all freshmen who entered in or after the Fall of 1984 and all other students who enter in the Fall of 1 985 or after: The Core Curriculum: This requirement replaces the former Freshman English and Distribution described above. Depending upon whether a student is a candidate for a Bachelor of Arts or a Bachelor of Science, a certain number of courses must be taken in each of the following categories. I) Basic Skills (Quantitative and Communicative) II) Methods of Inquiry III) The Western Cultural Heritage IV) Alternative Cultures and Societies 2 / College of Arts and Sciences V) Theoretical Perspectives and Changes VI) Current Issues in Perspective Please note that courses which count in the above categories have the appropriate roman numeral at the end of their course descriptions in the follow/ing pages. African-American Studies Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Minor in African-American Studies A major in African-American Studies offers background for a wide range of professions calling for understanding of intergroup relations and the minority experience. Students may go on to graduate study in such areas as social work, sociology education, law, business, history, or the humanities. Students majoring in African-American Studies may earn either the Bachelor of Arts (B.A.) or Bachelor of Science (B.S.) degree. All majors are required to take the following set of courses. AFR 1 1 61 Economic Issues in Minority Communities APR 1280 Black Psychological Identity AFR 1 353 Research AFR 1 300 Directed Study AFR 1121 African-American Literature AFR 1240 Contemporary Issues in Black Society AFR 1 1 93 Africa Today AFR 1 131 African-American History AFR 1 1 71 Survey of Black Political Movements AFR 1248 Race Relations in America Faculty advisers work with students to help them select one or more "concentra- tion clusters" (as described below) in African-American Studies to fulfill the distribution requirements for the Bachelor of Arts degree or the career-package program for the Bachelor of Science degree. A minor in African-American Studies is designed to meet the needs of students who major in other areas but have special interest in African-American Studies. To qualify for a minor, a student must earn 28 quarter-hour credits in the field, 1 2 of which must be from the set of courses required for majors. The remaining credits will be a concentration cluster arranged in consultation with a student's faculty adviser A concentration cluster is a set of four courses that focuses on a given aspect of African-American Studies. A cluster might focus on sociology-psychology history, humanities, human service, research, or other areas related to the student's educational or career needs. Concentration clusters are arranged in consulta- tions between the student and a faculty adviser Art and Architecture Bachelor of Arts Major in Art: ART 1 1 00, History of Art to 1 400, and ART 1101, History of Art since Bachelor of Science 1 400; twelve art electives; INT 1 1 00, Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music; one music elective, one theatre and dance elective; and one elective from history psychology or philosophy. Studio Art Concentration. Same requirements as for the art major, except for the art electives, for which are substituted: ten studio courses (ART 1124, Basic Drawing; ART 1 1 27, Basic Painting; ART 1 1 30, Foundations of Visual Design; ART 1 132, Graphic Design I; ART 1 138, Introduction to Printmaking; ART 1 160, Basic Photography I; ART 1170, Filmmaking Workshop; ART 1250, Color Theory and Practice; ART 1254, Intermediate Drawing; and ART 1261, Basic Photography II), College of Arts and Sciences / 3 Minors in Art and four art history courses (ART 1213, Modern Painting; ART 1230, History of Photography; or ART 1233, Contemporary Directions in Photography; ART 1235, History of Rim; or ART 1 236, The American Rim; and ART 1 240, History of Graphic Design). History of Art and Architecture Coricentration. Same requirements as for the art major, except for the art electives, for which are substituted: eight history of art and architecture courses (ART 1 200, Ancient Art and Architecture; or ART 1 203, Medieval Art and Architecture; ART 1 204, Renaissance Art and Architecture; ART 1210, French Painting; ART 1213, Modern Painting; ART 1220, American Sculp- ture and Painting; or ART 1 223, American Architecture; ART 1 228, Contemporary Architecture and the City; ART 1230, History of Photography; or ART 1233, Contemporary Directions in Photography; and ART 1235, History of Rim; or ART 1 236, The American Rim; or ART 1 237, Contemporary Directions in Cinema), and six studio courses (ART 1124, Basic Drawing; ART 1127, Basic Painting; ART 1130, Foundations of Visual Design; ART 1150, Introduction to Architectural Design; ART 1 1 60, Basic Photography I; and ART 1 250, Color Theory and Practice). Architecture Concentration. In collaboration with the Boston Architectural Center and leading to a Bachelor of Science degree. Same requirements as for the art major, except for the art electives for which are substituted: six architectural history courses (ART 1111, Introduction to Architecture; ART 1200, Ancient Art and Architecture; or ART 1 203, Medieval Art and Architecture; ART 1 204, Renais- sance Art and Architecture; ART 1223, American Architecture; ART 1225, Tech- nology Architecture, and the City; and ART 1 228, Contemporary Architecture and the City); three studio courses (ART 1 150, Introduction to Architectural Design; ART 1 1 24, Basic Drawing; and one art elective); five math/science courses (MTH 1123. Calculus; MTH 1124, Calculus; PHY 1221, Physics for Engineers I; PHY 1 222, Physics for Engineers II; and one computer science elective); and six studio and four technical courses offered at the Boston Architectural Center History of Architecture: ART 1111, History of Architecture; ART 1 1 50, Introduction to Architectural Design; ART 1113, Architecture and the City; ART 1 223, American Architecture; ART 1225, Technology Architecture, and the City; and ART 1228, Contemporary Architecture and the City. History of Art: ART 1 200, Ancient Art and Architecture; ART 1 203, Medieval Art and Architecture; ART 1204, Renaissance Art and Architecture; ART 1210, French Painting; ART 1213, Modern Painting; and ART 1220, American Sculpture and Painting. Film and Photography: ART 1 1 70, RImmaking Workshop; ART 1 236, The American Rim; ART 1 237, Contemporary Directions in Cinema; ART 1 1 60, Basic Photogra- phy I; ART 1 261 , Basic Photography II; and ART 1 233, Contemporary Directions in Photography. General Minor: Selection of any six courses from the departmental curriculum. Biology Bachelor of Arts BIO 1103, Principles of Biology I; BIO 1104, Principles of Biology II; BIO 1105, Principles of Biology III; BIO 1211, Environmental and Population Biology; BIO 1260, Genetics and Developmental Biology; BIO 1261, Cell Physiology and Bio- chemistry; four advanced biology electives approved by department Advisory Committee. MTH 1 1 06, MTH 1 1 07, or Calculus (one year); PHY 1 201 , PHY 1 202, Physics for the Life Sciences I and II; PHY 1501, PHY 1502, Physics Laboratory for the Life Sciences I and II; or PHY 1231, Physics for Science Majors 1; and PHY 1232, Physics for Science Majors II, or PHY 1233, Physics for Science Majors III; PHY 1 531 , PHY 1 533, or PHY 1 532, Physics Laboratory for Science Majors I and II or III; CHM 1111, General Chemistry; CHM 1122, General Chemistry II; CHM 1221, Analytical Chemistry; CHM 1264, CHM 1265, Organic Chemistry I and II. 4 / College of Arts and Sciences Bachelor of Science BIO 1 1 03, Principles of Biology I; BIO 11 04, Principles of Biology II; BIO 1 1 05, Principles of Biology III; BIO 1211, Environmental and Population Biology; BIO 1260, Genetics and Developmental Biology; BIO 1261, Cell Physiology and Bio- chemistry; BIO 1 490, Senior Seminar; four advanced biology electives approved by department Advisory Committee. Calculus (one year); PHY 1 231 , PHY 1 232, PHY 1 233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III; PHY 1 531 , PHY 1 532, Physics Laboratory for Science Majors I and II; or PHY 1 533, Physics Laboratory for Science Majors III; CHM 1111, General Chemis- try; CHM 1122, General Chemistry II; CHM 1221, Analytical Chemistry; CHM 1264, CHM 1265, Organic Chemistry I and II; two additional advanced science electives approved by the Departmental Advisory Committee. Foreign language requirement. Chemistry Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Minor in Chemistry CHM 1151, CHM 1152, General Chemistry I and II; CHM 1153, The Chemical Elements; CHM 1231, Analytical Chemistry; CHM 1271, CHM 1272, CHM 1273, Organic Chemistry I, II, and III; CHM 1391, CHM 1392, CHM 1393, Physical Chemistry I, II, and 111; CHM 1 431 , Instrumental Analysis. MTH 1 1 43, MTH 1 1 44, MTH 1 1 45, Calculus I, II, and III; PHY 1 231 , PHY 1 232, PHY 1233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III; PHY 1532, PHY 1533, Physics Laboratory for Science Majors II and III. CHM 1151, CHM 1152, General Chemistry I and II; CHM 1153, The Chemical Elements; CHM 1231, Analytical Chemistry; CHM 1271, CHM 1272, CHM 1273, Organic Chemistry I, II, and III; CHM 1391, CHM 1392, CHM 1393, Physical Chemistry I, II, and III; CHM 1431, Instrumental Analysis; CHM 1441, Inorganic Chemistry; CHM 1 461 , Identification of Organic Compounds; two advanced science or mathematics electives; one advanced laboratory; MTH 1243, Calculus and Linear Methods I; or MTH 1223, Calculus. MTH 1143. MTH 1144, MTH 1145, Calculus I, II, and III; MTH 1245, Differential Equations and Linear Methods I; or MTH 1 225, Mathematical Analysis; PHY 1 231 , PHY 1 232, PHY 1 233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III; PHY 1 532, PHY 1 533, Physics Laboratory for Science Majors II and III. After a general chemistry sequence, CHM 1 231 , Analytical Chemistry; CHM 1 271 , CHM 1 272, CHM 1 273, Organic Chemistry I, II, III; CHM 1 391 , CHM 1 382, Physical Chemistry I, II. Economics Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science ECN 1115, ECN 1116, Principles and Problems of Economics I and II; ECN 1 250, ECN 1251, Statistics I and II; ECN 1216, Microeconomic Theory; ECN 1215, Macroeconomic Theory; six economics electives. MTH 1 1 06, MTH 1 1 07, Fundamentals of Mathematics I and II; four social science electives other than economics. ECN 1115, ECN 1116, Principles and Problems of Economics I and II; ECN 1 250, ECN 1251, Statistics I and II; ECN 1216, Microeconomic Theory; ECN 1215, Macroeconomic Theory; ECN 1350, Introduction to Econometrics; or ECN 1351, Problems in Economic Research; ten economics electives. MTH 1 1 06, MTH 1 1 07, Fundamentals of Mathematics I and II; four social science electives other than economics. College of Arts and Sciences / 5 Minor In Economics ECN 1115, ECN 1116, Principles and Problems of Economics I and II; ECN 1216, Microeconomic Theory; ECN 1215, Macroeconomic Theory; four electives in economics. Electives to be selected with the advice of a department adviser. Any course taken outside the Department of Economics to satisfy these economics elective requirements must be approved by a faculty adviser in the Department. English Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Minor in Literature Minor in Writing Minor in Linguistics Minor in Technical Communications ENG 1126, Backgrounds to English and American Literature; ENG 1307, Approaches to Literature; ENG 1 1 20, ENG 1121, Survey of American Literature I and II; two period courses; one figure course; one language and writing course; one junior-senior seminar; three English electives in literary studies or periods or language and writing. ENG 1126, Backgrounds to English and American Literature; ENG 1307, Approaches to Literature; ENG 1 1 20, ENG 1121, Survey of American Literature I and II; two period courses; one figure course, one language and writing course; one junior-senior seminar; three English electives in literary studies or periods or language and writing. Distribution requirements as required for the Bachelor of Arts program. Six courses required. Two survey courses required from the following: ENG 1 120, Survey of English Literature I; ENG 1121, Survey of English Literature II; ENG 1 1 23, Survey of American Literature I; ENG 1124, Survey of American Literature II. One course from each of the following categories: (a) periods; (b) major figures; and (c) language and writing. One elective from (a), (b), (c), or literary studies. Six courses required. Two courses from: ENG 1350, Intermediate Writing; ENG 1351, Creative Writing; ENG 1125, Technical Writing I. Four courses from: ENG 1370, Technical Writing II; ENG 1371, Writing for the Computer Industry; ENG 1380, Writing for the Professions: Health Services; ENG 1 352, Advanced Writing; ENG 1381, Writing for the Professions: Business Administration; ENG 1382, Writing for the Professions: Criminal Justice; ENG 1357, Poetry Workshop; ENG 1358, notion Workshop; ENG 1362, Publication Arts; ENG 1359, Nonfiction Workshop; ENG 1 361 , The Writing Process; ENG 1 360, Topics in Writing: Reading and Wnting Nonfiction. See Interdisciplinary Minors. See Interdisciplinary Minors. Geology Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science GEO 1212, Physical Geology; GEO 1213, Physical Geology Laboratory; GEO 1222, Historical Geology; GEO 1223, Historical Geology Laboratory; GEO 1310, Descriptive Mineralogy; GEO 131 1, Optical Crystallography; GEO 1312, Petrog- raphy; GEO 1418, Structural Geology; six geology electives. MTH 1 1 06, MTH 1 1 07, Fundamentals of Mathematics I and II; or MTH 1 1 07, MTH 1108, Calculus I and II; PHY 1231, Physics for Science Majors; or PHY 1201, Physics for the Life Sciences I; CHM 1111, General Chemistry I; CHM 1122, General Chemistry II. GEO 1212, Physical Geology; GEO 1213, Physical Geology Laboratory; GEO 1222, Historical Geology; GEO 1223, Historical Geology Laboratory; GEO 1305, Rock Identification Laboratory; GEO 1310, Descriptive Mineralogy; GEO 1311, Optical Crystallography; GEO 1312, Petrography 6 / College of Arts and Sciences Minor in Geology MTH 1107, MTH 1108, Calculus I and II, or MTH 1123, MTH 1124, MTH 1125, Calculus I, II, and III; PHY 1 231 , PHY 1 232, PHY 1 233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III; CHM 1111, CHM 1 1 22; or CHM 1151, CHM 1 1 52, General Chemistry I and II; CHM 1231 or CHM 1221, Analytical Chemistry; or CHM 1391, Physical Chemistry; or GEO 1412, Geochemistry; two approved additional science elec- tives; six courses in the humanities and/or social sciences; GEO 1 41 8, Structural Geology; eight geology electives. GEO 1212, Physical Geology; GE0 1 222. Historical Geology GEO 1310, Descrip- tive Mineralogy; plus two of the following one-credit laboratories; GEO 1213, Physical Geology Laboratory; GEO 1223, Historical Geology Laboratory; GEO 1305, Rock Identification Laboratory; plus four geology electives (GEO 1412 or higher number) chosen with the approval of the Earth Science Department. History Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Honors Program HST 1 101 and HST 1 102, Western Civilization I and II; HST 1 201 and HST 1202, United States to 1877 and United States since 1877; HST 1241, The Historian's Craft; HST 1805, Approaches to History; nine history electives distributed as follows: two courses in Group A (ancient, medieval, early modern Europe); two courses in Group B (modern Europe); two courses in Group C (America); two courses in Group D (other regions); one course in any of the above groups. Recommended: Courses in the related social sciences. HST 1101 and HST 1102, Western Civilization I and II; HST 1201 and HST 1202, United States to 1877 and United States since 1877; HST 1241, The Historian's Craft; HST 1 251 , Social Science Methodology; HST 1 805, Approaches to History; eleven history electives distributed as follows: two courses in Group A (ancient, medieval, and early modern Europe); two courses in Group B (modern Europe); two courses in Group C (America); two courses in Group D (other regions); three courses in any of the above groups. Either a social science minor that requires some theoretical or methodological courses; or a social science minor without theoretical or methodological courses (in which case students must take either PSY 121 1, SOC 1320, or ECN 1250 or another acceptable statistics course); or a coherent program in science and/or social science composed of six courses (in which case students should consult with their departmental adviser and have the approval of the Undergraduate Committee in the Department of History) ; or a recognized minor in another college of the University (e.g., Business Administration). A computer course approved by the departmental adviser The Arts and Sciences Honors Program runs "honors" sections of some standard required or elective courses, as well as some interdisciplinary honors seminars and minicourses. Of the honors courses listed below, those with departmental numbers are generally described in that department's section in the pages which follow, and those with "INT" numbers (seminars or minicourses) are described at the end of the Arts and Sciences section. The courses listed are those which will be offered this year For more detailed information on courses, how to qualify to take an honors course, and other aspects of the program, contact the Honors Office at 437-2333 or drop by 215 Lake Hall. Fall: CHM 1151, General Chemistry; ECN 1115, Principles of Macroeconomics; ENG 1 800, Honors English I; HST 1113, Honors Western Civilization I; JRN 1 250, Interpreting the Day's News; MTH 1 843, Calculus I; INT 1 843, Literature, Science and Policy (honors seminar). Winter: ENG 1801, Honors English II; HST 1114, Honors Western Civilization II; MTH 1844, Calculus II; PHL 1 100, Introduction to Philosophy; SOC 1 100, Intro- duction to Sociology; INT 1824, The Art and Science of Bell Ringing (honors seminar); SOC 1819, Drinking in College (honors minicourse). Human Services College of Arts and Sciences / 7 Spring: MTH 1845, Calculus III; PHL 1110, Introduction to Religion; PHY 1111, Introduction to Astronomy; PSY 1110, Perspectives in Psychology; ENG 1 308, Myth and Archetype in Literature (honors seminar); INT 1825, The Brain (honors seminar). Bachelor of Arts Specialization in Deaf Studies Prerequisite Courses (six): SOC 1100, Introduction to Sociology; or ED 1100, Education and Social Science; ED 1302, The Human Services Professions; PSY 1 1 1 1 and PSY 1112, Foundations of Psychology I and II; or ED 1 1 02 and ED 1 1 03, Human Development and Learning I and II; POL 1111, Introduction to American Government; ECN 1 1 1 5 or ECN 1116, Principles and Problems of Economics; or equivalent. Core Courses (nine): PSY 1211, Statistics in Behavioral Science I; or SOC 1 320, Introduction to Statistical Analysis or ED 1 307, Introduction to Educational Statis- tics; PSY 1511, Experimental Design in Psychology; or SOC 1321, Research Methods I, or SOC 1 324, Human Services Research and Evaluation, or POL 1 300, Conceptual Foundations of Contemporary Political Analysis; SOC 1240, Sociol- ogy of Human Services Organizations; PSY 1 272, Personality I; PSY 1 373, Abnormal Psychology I; ED 1300, Education and Psychosocial Development; SPC 1338, Group Discussion; or ED 1 301 , Educational Applications of Social Psychology; or ED 1317, Seminar in Group Process; CRS 1310, Intervention Strategies; INT 1333, Senior Seminar. Specified Electives (any three courses): SOC 1245, Sociology of Poverty; SOC 1250, The Sociology of Private and Public Assistance; SOC 1535, Seminar in Social Welfare; POL 1 308, The Politics of Poverty; ECN 1315, Income Inequalities and Discrimination; AFR 1 240, Contemporary Issues in Black Society; AFR 1 1 50, Black Cultural Development in the United States; AFR 1243, Minorities, Ethnicity, and Human Rights; ED 1 31 0, Class and Ethnic Relations in Education; CRS 1 200, Introduction to Special Education. Specializations (five courses in any one specialization): Specializations are indi- vidually constructed by the student and his/her adviser Alternatives are grouped in three broad clusters: Clinical, Community, and Administration. Reldwork: INT 1330, Human Services Reldwork I; INT 1331, Human Services Reldwork II. Prerequisite Courses, Core Courses, and Fieldwork Courses follow the standard Human Services major Ttiree Specified Electives selected from the list above, including the following alternatives: PSY 1271 or SOC 1135, Social Psychology; SOA 1135, Language and Culture; SOA 1 101, Culture, Meaning, and Everyday Experience; ENG 1118, Introduction to Language; PSY 1263, Body Language; SOC 1 140, Sociology of Prejudice; SPC 1 232, Male and Female Communications; CRS 1313, Introduction to Counseling. Deaf Studies Specialization: ASL 1101, American Sign Language I; ASL 1102, American Sign Language II; ASL 1201, Intermediate American Sign Language I; ASL 1202, Intermediate American Sign Language II; and five courses selected from: ASL 1 21 1 , Deaf Culture; ASL 1 21 2, Deaf History; PSY 1 363, American Sign Language Linguistics; PSY 1 261 , Bilingualism; SLA 1101, Introduction to Speech and Hearing; ASL 1401, American Sign Language Literature. 8 / College of Arts and Sciences Interdisciplinary Independent Major Minor in Asian Studies Minor in Marine Studies Minor in Media Studies Minor in Technical Communication An eligible student may petition the College Curriculum Committee to meet requirements for the B.A. degree in an Independent major Eligibility, procedures, and requirements must be discussed in advance with an adviser in the Dean's Office. No student may be considered an Independent major until a curriculum proposal has been submitted to, and approved by, the Curriculum Committee. The minor program allows students the choice of concentration in Middle East Studies or East Asian Studies (China, Japan, Korea). In each concentration there are three core courses and four electives. Middle Eastern Studies Concentration: Core courses: HST 1612, The Modern Middle East; POL 1345, Government and Politics in the Middle East; and PHL 1280, Islam. Choose four of the following electives: SOC, Social Change; POL 1384, Arab-Israeli Conflict; HST 1652, Islam Resurgent; HST 1613, Contempo- rary Middle East; HST 1614, The Middle East Today in Fact, Fiction, Film; MUS 1 1 82, Music of the Middle East; ECN 1 332, Economic History of Less Developed Countries. East Asian Studies Concentration: SOC 1 432, People and Culture of China; POL 1332, Government and Politics of Japan; PHL 1215, Eastern Religions. Choose four electives: SOC 1104, Contemporary Japanese Culture and Society; POL 1371, Government and Politics of China; POL 1372, China's Foreign Relations; HST 1641, Recent Leaders of Asia; HST 1633, China Since 1850; HST 1637, Japan Since 1850; HST 1634, Communist China; PHL 1255, Indian Philosophy; PHL 1250, Chinese Philosophy; PHL 1130, Ethics: East and West; PHL 1293, Mysticism: East and West; HST 1 670, Introduction to Third World History For both concentrations, it is strongly recommended that students pursue language training to gain proficiency in an Asian language. Chinese courses are currently taught in the Basic College program. Revised requirements are available at the Marine Science and Maritime Studies Center To qualify for a minor in Media Studies, the student must complete a minimum of eight courses as follows; three required courses: SPC 1 250, Introduction to Mass Communication; HST 1 575, History of Media in America; and SPC 1 300, Introduc- tion to Communication Theory or SPC 1317, Theories of Audience Behavior; or INT 1320, Exploring Humanities through Rim; and five elective courses from the two categories Media Production and Media Application (at least two electives in each category). Individual student programs will be developed in consultation with faculty advisers. Interested students should contact Dr Zaremba (Depart- ment of Speech Communication) for information on program development and elective choices. Technical communication combines written, oral, and graphics skills with a back- ground in science or technology The minor in Technical Communication gives students the opportunity to prepare themselves for careers as technical writers, or for careers in which technical communication is a significant part of their jobs. Students in English or other liberal arts studies may elect the minor, as may students from a variety of technological or scientific fields. A student does not have to be enrolled in the College of Arts and Sciences to declare the minor Eight courses are required. Students must choose courses from the following areas: Writing Courses ENG 1 125 Technical Writing II (Required) Choose two of the following: ENG 1 370 Technical Writing II ENG 1371 Writing for the Computer Industry ENG 1380 Writing for the Professions: Health Services ENG 1 352 Advanced Writing ENG 1381 Writing for the Professions: Business Administration College of Arts and Sciences / 9 One of these courses must be ENG 1370 or 1371. Speech Communication Courses Choose one: SPC 1116 Business and Professional Speaking SRC 1331 Interpersonal Communication II Graphic Arts Courses JRN 1440 Design and Graphics You may take an equivalent in another department or college. Minor in Urban Studies Minor in Women's Studies Computer F'ogramming COM 1 1 01 Introduction to Computers I (Required) Computer Science and Science Courses Choose two courses. We strongly recommend a sequence of two in the same area. IIS 1 1 25 COBOL Programming I GE 1 1 06 FORTRAN Programming BIO 11 30 General Biology BIO 1131 Animal Biology CHM1111 General Chemistry CHM1112 General Chemistry GE0 1 2 1 2 Physical Geology GE0 1213 Historical Geology PHY 1 231 Physics for Science Majors I PHY 1 232 Physics for Science Majors II PHY 1 233 Physics for Science Majors III Students must take 28 quarter hours (seven courses) as follows: Required Courses (three): SOC 1 147, Urban Society; POL 1324, Urban Politics; ECN 1320, Urban Economics. One course from each of the following four areas: Urban Problems and Policies (SOC 1346, Suburb and Metropolis; POL 1318, State and Local Government; ECN 1 321 , Urban Economic Problems and Policies), Urban Humani- ties (HST 1391, European Urban History to 1850; HST 1543, American Urban History; ENG 1608, The City in Literature), Urban Form and Design (ART 1113, Architecture and the City; ART 1 225, Technology, Architecture, and the City; ART 1 1 50, Introduction to Architectural Design), African-American Studies (APR 1 261 , Economics of Urban Poverty; APR 1 275, Urban Political Issues; APR 1 475, Public Policy Analysis). To obtain credit for the minor, students must file a petition form with the College of Arts and Sciences at the time of senior clearance. Petition forms may be obtained at the College office or from advisers for the program. Interested students should confer with an adviser as soon as possible. Advisers are: Professor Robert Gilbert, Political Science (303 ME, ext. 2796); Professor Ronald McAllister, Soc./Anthro (500 HO, ext. 2868); Professor Clay McShane, History (203 ME, ext. 2660); Professor Peter Serenyl, Art (401 UO, ext. 2346); Professor Gregory Wassell, Economics (317 LA, ext. 2196). Students take nine of the following courses, including four required interdiscipli- nary courses, and five electives. Required Interdisciplinary Courses: INT 1 1 50, Introduction to Women's Studies; SOC 1302, Feminist Perspectives on Society; INT 1850, Seminar in Research I; INT 1851, Seminar in Research II. Elective Courses: SOA 1 1 60, Sex, Sex Roles, and the Family; SOC 1 1 02, Evolution and Society; SOC 1 1 60, Sex and Gender Roles; SOC 1 1 77, Social Roles in Business; SOC 1 1 78, Women Working; SOC 31 55, The Family; SOC 31 60. Men, Women, and Social Change; HST 1472, Family in European History; HST 1392, Women in European History; HST 1473, Women in Modern Europe; HST 1554, The American Women; HST 1553, Family in American History; HST 3399, Approaches to Women's History; AFR 1241, The Black Family; AFR 1480, Black Women/Black Men; BIO 1187, Biology of Human Reproduction; PHL 1295, 1 0 / College of Arts and Sciences Minors in Rim Studies, Sport and Society Medicine, Religion, and the Healer's Art; DRA 1 128, Women in Western Drama; DRA 1129, Sexuality in Drama; ENG 1551, Sex Roles in Literature; MUS 1106, Women in Music; POL 1 327, Sex Roles in American Politics; POL 1 328, Women in Public Management; POL 1316, Contemporary Revolutionary Politics; POL 3665, Women in Public Management; POL 3667, Equal Opportunity in Public Adminis- tration; POL 3668, Legal Issues in Personnel Administration; CJ 1 61 6, Women and Criminal Justice, LNS 1510, Saints and Sinners: The Vision of Women in the Middle Ages and the Renaissance. These courses represent the most current listing. New courses are continually being developed and added to the program. For more information about courses and the Women's Studies Program contact Professor Debra Kaufman (ext. 2686). The College of Arts and Sciences is in the process of developing minors in Film Studies and Sport and Society. Interested students should check with Inez Hedges in 447ME for Rim Studies and the Dean's Office for Sport and Society. Journalism Bachelor of Arts Each major will complete the journalism core and one of four concentrations- Bachelor of Science Newspaper/Print, Radio-Television News, Advertising, or Public Relations-to cor- respond with his/her career objective. Journalism Core: JRN 1 501 , History of Journalism; JRN 1 51 2, Journalism, Ethics and Issues; JRN 1 1 03, Newswriting I; JRN 1 1 04, Newswriting II; JRN 1 206, Editing; JRN 1 508, Law of the Press; JRN 1 301 , Photojournalism. Newspaper/ Print Concentration: JRN 1 305, Techniques of Journalism; JRN 1 432, Local Government Reporting; JRN 1440, Design and Graphics; JRN 1575, Publi- cation Production and Management; one journalism elective. Radio-Television News Concentration: JRN 1320, Radio News Gathering and Writing; JRN 1421, Television Newswriting; JRN 1422, Television News Produc- tion; JRN 1894, Directed Study; one journalism elective. Public Relations Concentration: JRN 1 336, Public Relations Principles; JRN 1 440, Design and Graphics; JRN 1460, Public Relations Problems; JRN 1561, Public Relations Practice; one journalism elective. Advertising Concentration: JRN 1440, Design and Graphics; JRN 1350, Advertis- ing Principles; JRN 1 451 , Advertising Copy Writing; JRN 1 552, Advertising Practice; one journalism elective. Each major will complete the following related requirements: ENG 1 275, Grammar for Journalists; ENG 1110, Freshman English I; ENG 1111, English II; ENG 1 1 20, Survey of English Literature I; and two courses from this list: ENG 1 121, Survey of English Literature II; ENG 1 123, Survey of American Literature I; ENG 1 124, Survey of American Literature II. POL 1111, Introduction to American Government; POL 1318, State and Local Government; HST 1201, United States to 1877; HST 1202, United States since 1 877; ECN 1115, Principles of Economics; and one additional course in econom- ics or business; MTH 1 1 52 Statistical Thinking; PHL 1 200, Introduction to Logic I; PHL 1 140, Social and Political Philosophy; HST 1 101, Western Civilization I; HST 1 1 02, Western Civilization II; COP 1 1 35, Professional Development for Journalists. Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music or one course from each of the following categories-(a): ART 1 1 06, Introduction to Art; ART 1 220, American Sculpture and Painting; (b): MUS 1100, Music I; MUS 1101, Music as a Listening Experience. College of Arts and Sciences / 1 1 Bachelor of Arts In addition to the journalism and related requirements above, candidates for the Bachelor of Arts degree will complete four courses in science and/or math. Bachelor of Science In addition to the journalism and related requirements above, candidates for the Bachelor of Science degree will complete six courses in science and/or math. Linguistics Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Freshman Requirements: ENG 1110, Freshman English I; ENG 1111, English II; mathematics course; two courses from the humanities; two from the sciences; and two from the social sciences. General Requirements: ENG 1118, Introduction to Language and Linguistics; PSY 1262, Language and Cognition; PSY 1361, Introduction to Phonetics; SOA 1 135, Language and Culture; ENG 1401, Introduction to Syntax; PHL 1215, Symbolic Logic. Language Proficiency: Two advanced courses in a spol^en second language (see Bachelor of Sciences for proficiency in American Sign Language). Additional Courses: Rve courses from the following: PSY 1 261 , Bilingualism; PSY 1362, Child Language; PSY 1363, Linguistics of American Sign Language; PSY 1364, Cognition; PSY 1365, Language and the Brain; PSY 1264, Animal Commu- nication; PSY 1263, Body Language; PHL 1440, Philosophy of Language; ENG 1119, Foundations of the English Language; ENG 1402, Grammars of English; ENG 1 407, Introduction to Semantics; ENG 1 408, Topics in Linguistics; LNL 1 235, Applied Linguistics; LNG 1236, Advanced Applied Linguistics. Laboratory Cotyrse.- PSY 1 562, Laboratory in the Psychology of Language. Seminars: Two of the following: PSY 1 661 , Seminar in Psycholinguistics; ENG 1 690, Seminar in Stylistics. Practicum: One course: fieldwork, directed study sign language teaching, or interpreting. Same requirement as the Bachelor of Arts, except that American Sign Language can count toward the second-language proficiency requirement. Mathematics Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science MTH 1143, MTH 1144, MTH 1145, Calculus I, II, and III; MTH 1243, MTH 1244, Calculus and Linear Methods I and II; MTH 1 245, MTH 1 246, Differential Equations and Linear Methods I and II; MTH 1 301 , Linear Algebra; MTH 1311, Analysis I; four approved mathematics electives selected in consultation with an adviser. PHY 1231, PHY 1232, PHY 1233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III. MTH 1143, MTH 1144, MTH 1145, Calculus I, II, and III; MTH 1243, MTH 1244, Calculus and Linear Methods I and II; MTH 1 245, MTH 1 246, Differential Equations and Linear Methods I and II; MTH 1301, Linear Algebra; MTH 1311, Analysis I; seven approved mathematics electives selected in consultation with an adviser. PHY 1231, PHY 1232, PHY 1233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III; two non-science courses. 12 / College of Arts and Sciences Modern Languages Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Minor in Modern Language Eight advanced electives in the major language,* two advanced electives in the minor language.* ENG 1 120, ENG 1 121, Survey of English Literature I and II; four history electives. Twelve advanced electives in the major language, including two conversation and composition courses; six advanced electives in the minor language,* including two conversation and composition courses; two history electives. The Department of Modern Languages also offers a minor program for students whose major lies in other disciplines. The general requirement is six advanced courses (beyond the 1104 level) in the language. Interested students should consult with Professor Modee (ext. 2237) about specific course requirements. Music Bachelor of Arts Minor in Music MUS 1 201 , MUS 1 202, MUS 1 203, MUS 1 204, Theory I, II, III, and IV; MUS 1 301 , 1302, Masterworks Analysis I and II; MUS 1241, Piano I; MUS 1120, Survey of Music History; MUS 1121, Medieval and Renaissance Music; MUS 1 1 22, Music of the Baroque Era; MUS 1 1 23, Music of the Classical Era; MUS 1 1 24, Music of the Romantic Era; MUS 1 1 25, Music of the Twentieth Century; three approved music electives; eight quarter hours of ensemble credits (MUS 1 230, 1 23 1 , 1 232, and/or 1233). HST 1 1 02, Western Civilization II; INT 1 1 00, Introduction to Art, Music, and Drama; ART 1 1 06, Introduction to Art; or DRA 1101, Theatre Appreciation; or DRA 1112, Drama Theory MUS 1 201 , MUS 1 202, MUS 1 203, Theory I, II, and III; MUS 1 241 , Piano Class I; MUS 1 1 20, Survey of Music History; one approved music elective; any one of the following courses: MUS 1121, Medieval and Renaissance Music; MUS 1122, Music of the Baroque Era; MUS 1123, Music of the Classical Era; MUS 1124, Music of the Romantic Era; MUS 1 1 25, Music of the Twentieth Century. Philosophy Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Minor in Philosophy PHL 1225, Ancient Philosophy; PHL 1230, Modern Philosophy; PHL 1200, Intro- duction to Logic I ; or PHL 1 21 5, Symbolic Logic; PHL 1 400, Theory of Knowledge; or PHL 1405, Metaphysics; or PHL 1335, Moral Philosophy; one philosophy seminar; eight philosophy electives. PHL 1225, Ancient Philosophy; PHL 1230, Modern Philosophy; PHL 1200, Intro- duction to Logic I; or PHL 1215, Symbolic Logic; PHL 1 400, Theory of Knowledge; or PHL 1405, Metaphysics; or PHL 1335, Moral Philosophy; one philosophy seminar; eight philosophy electives. To qualify for a minor in Philosophy a student must take twenty-eight quarter hours in philosophy to be distributed as follows: Introductory courses: PHL 1 1 00, Introduction to Philosophy I; or PHL 1 1 05, Intro- duction to Scientific Method; History of Philosophy: PHL 1225,' Ancient Philoso- Courses beyond the intermediate level. College of Arts and Sciences / 1 3 phy; or PHL 1 230, Modern Philosophy. Logic Requirement: PHL 1 200, Introduction to Logic I; or PHL 1 21 5, Symbolic Logic. At least one of the following courses: PHL 1 1 42, Philosophy of Mind; PHL 1 400, Theory of Knowledge; PHL 1 405, Metaphys- ics; PHL 1335, Moral Philosophy Electives: Three electives; three electives in Philosophy Physics Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Bachelor of Science in Applied Physics Minor in Physics Instrumentation for Science Minor PHY 1 231 , PHY 1 232, PHY 1 233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III, and their associated laboratories-PHY 1 531 , PHY 1 532, PHY 1 533; PHY 1 301 , Intermedi- ate Mechanics; PHY 1 302, Electric and Magnetic Relds; three upper-level physics lecture courses, three upper-level laboratory courses. MTH 1143, MTH 1144, MTH 1145, Calculus I, II, and III; MTH 1243, MTH 1244, Calculus and Linear Methods I and II; one advanced mathematics elective. PHY 1 231 , PHY 1 232, PHY 1 233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III, and their associated laboratories-PHY 1 531 , PHY 1 532, PHY 1 533; PHY 1 301 , Intermedi- ate Mechanics; PHY 1302, Electric and Magnetic Fields; PHY 1303, Modern Physics; PHY 1304, Mathematical Physics; PHY 1305, Thermodynamics and Kinetic Theory; PHY 1 401 , Classical Mechanics; PHY 1 402, PHY 1 403, Electricity and Magnetism I and II; PHY 1404, Wave Motion and Optics; three upper-level laboratory courses. MTH 1143, MTH 1144, MTH 1145, Calculus I, II, and III; MTH 1243, MTH 1244, Calculus and Linear Methods I and II; MTH 1 245, MTH 1 246, Differential Equations and Linear Methods I and II; five additional electives from those approved for majors in the following fields: physics, mathematics, chemistry, engineering, biology and geology PHY 1 231 , PHY 1 232, PHY 1 233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III, and their associated laboratories-PHY 1 531 , PHY 1 532, PHY 1 533; PHY 1 301 , Intermedi- ate Mechanics; PHY 1302, Electric and Magnetic Fields; PHY 1303, Modern Physics; PHY 1 305, Thermodynamics and Kinetic Theory; PHY 1 404, Wave Motion and Optics; PHY 1 551 and PHY 1 552, Electronics for Scientists I and II; PHY 1 555, Wave Laboratory; PHY 1 557, Advanced Laboratory; PHY 1 561 , Project Laboratory. MTH 1143, MTH 1144, MTH 1145, Calculus I, II, and III; MTH 1243, MTH 1244, Calculus and Linear Methods i and II; MTH 1245, MTH 1246, Differential Equa- tions I and II. COM 1 100, COM 1 101, Pascal I and II; COM 1201, Data Structures. Four addi- tional electives from those approved for majors in the following fields: physics, mathematics, chemistry, computer science, engineering, biology and geology PHY 1231, PHY 1232, PHY 1233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III or PHY 1 221 , PHY 1 222, PHY 1 223, PHY 1 224, Physics for Engineering Students I, II, III, and IV; and three upper-level lecture or laboratory courses from the following list: PHY 1 301 , PHY 1 302, PHY 1 303, PHY 1 304, PHY 1 305, PHY 1 401 , PHY 1 402, PHY 1403, PHY 1404, PHY 1411, PHY 1412, PHY 1413, PHY 1414, PHY 1415, PHY 1416, PHY 1551, PHY 1552, PHY 1555. PHY 1231, PHY 1232, PHY 1233, Physics for Science Majors I, II, and III; or PHY 1221, PHY 1222, PHY 1223, Physics for Engineering Students I, II, and III. PHY 1 555, Wave Laboratory; PHY 1 551 , PHY 1 552, Electronics for Scientists I and II; PHY 1557, Advanced Laboratory. 1 4 / College of Arts and Sciences Political Science Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Science Minor in International Politics POL 1110, Introduction to Politics; POL 1111, Introduction to American Govern- ment; POL 1112, Introduction to International Relations; POL 1113, Introduction to Foreign Governments and Societies (formerly Introduction to Comparative Politics); POL 1261, Public Administration; one political theory/ thougfit course selected from the following: POL 1370, POL 1373, POL 1374; seven political science electives. Six social science electives selected from at least three of the following areas: African-American studies, anthropology economics, history psychology and sociology POL 1110, Introduction to Politics; POL 1111, Introduction to American Govern- ment; POL 1112, Introduction to International Relations; POL 1113, Introduction to Foreign Governments and Societies (formerly Introduction to Comparative Politics); •POL 1301, Research Methods I; *POL 1302, Research Methods II; POL 1261, Public Administration; and one political theory/thought course selected from the following: POL 1370, POL 1373, POL 1374; six political science electives. Six social science electives selected from at least three of the following areas: African-American studies, anthropology economics, history psychology and sociology Any two of the following courses: POL 1110, Introduction to Politics; POL 1111, Introduction to American Government; POL 1112, Introduction to International Relations; POL 1113, Introduction to Foreign Governments and Societies; POL 1261, Public Administration. Any five additional courses offered by the Depart- ment of Political Science for Political Science majors, including courses listed above that have not been selected to fulfill the above requirement. POL 1112, Introduction to International Relations; POL 1113, Introduction to Foreign Governments and Societies; any five additional courses in international politics and/or comparative politics offered by the Department of Political Science. Concentration in Public Administration Bachelor of Science POL 1110, Introduction to Politics; POL 1111, Introduction to American Govern- ment; POL 1 301 , Research Methods I; POL 1 302, Research Methods II; POL 1 260, Public Policy Analysis; POL 1261, Public Administration; POL 1266, Public Per- sonnel Administration; POL 1267, Public Budgeting; POL 1262, Organization Theory; and one political theory/thought course selected from the following: POL 1370, POL 1373, POL 1374; four public administration electives. Six social science electives selected from at least three of the following areas: African-American studies, anthropology economics, history, psychology and sociology Psychology Bachelor of Arts Psychology Courses. Basic Courses: PSY 1110, Perspectives in Psychology; and PSY 1112, Foundations of Psychology II; PSY 121 1 and PSY 1212, Statistics in Behavioral Sciences I and II. Specialty Courses: PSY 1 271 , Social Psychology or PCY 1272, Personality I; PSY 1381, Sensation; or PSY 1382, Perception; PSY 1262. Language and Cognition; PSY 1231, Learning and Motivation I; and PSY 1351 ; Neuropsychology I. College of Arts and Sciences / 1 5 Students choose either General Psychology or one of four areas of concentration: Language and Cognition; Learning, fvlotivation, and Behavior Analysis; Personality and Social Psychology; or Sensory and Neuropsychology The additional courses required for each concentration follow: General Program: four psychology electives, excluding TIPS* courses; three psy- chology laboratories; and one psychology seminar Language and Cognition Electives: Two from the following courses: Bilingualism, PSY 1261 ; Intro, to Phonetics, PSY 1361 ; Child Language, PSY 1362; Linguistics of ASL, PSY 1 363; Cognition, PSY 1 364; Language and the Brain. 1 365. Also any two additional psychology courses, excluding Topics in Psychology (TIPS) courses. Laboratories: Psycholinguistics, PSY 1562; Cognition, PSY 1564; Directed Study in Language and Cognition, PSY 1 890. Seminar: Psycholinguistics, PSY 1661, or Cognition, PSY 1662. Learning, Motivation, and Behavior Analysis Electives: Learning and Motivation II, PSY 1331 ; Programmed Learning, PSY 1 332; Behavior Therapies, PSY 1431 ; and one of the following: Seminar in Behavior Theory, PSY 1631, or Seminar in Behavior Modification, PSY 1 632. Laboratories: Learning and Motivation, PSY 1531; Behavior Modification, PSY 1 532; Directed Study in Learning and Motivation, PSY 1 890. Seminar: Behavior Theory PSY 1 631 , or Behavior Modification, PSY 1 632 (select whichever one was not used to fulfill the psychology elective requirement above). Personality and Social Psychology Electives: Social Psychology PSY 1271, or Personality I, PSY 1272 (Select whichever course was not taken to fulfill basic psychology course requirements), Personality II, PSY 1 273. Also, Social Psychol- ogy SOC 1 135, and two courses from the following list: Aggression, SOA 1 185; Sex, Sex Roles, and Family SOA 1 1 60; Sociology of Prejudice, SOC 1 1 40; and Theories of Persuasion, SPC 1315. Credit for all courses taken outside of the Psychology Department will be counted toward the psychology major require- ments only if the entire concentration is completed. If you change concentration or enroll in the general psychology track, such courses will be considered free electives. Laboratories: Social Psychology PSY 1571, or Personality, PSY 1572, and two additional psychology laboratory courses. Seminar: One of the following-Social Psychology PSY 1 671 , Clinical Psychology and Personality, PSY 1672; or Social Psychology SOC 1337. Sensory and Neuropsychology Electives: Sensation, PSY 1 381 , or Perception, PSY 1 382 (whichever course was not used to fulfill the specialty course requirements), and two courses from the following: Neuropsychology II, PSY 1352; Comparative Psychology and Ethology PSY 1353; Functional Neuroanatomy PSY 1354. Also, one course from the following: Seminar in Neuropsychology PSY 1 6b1 ; Seminar in Sensory Physiology PSY 1652; Seminar in Sensation and Perception PSY 1681. Laboratories: Neuropsychology PSY 1 551 ; Sensation and Perception, PSY 1 581 ; and one additional psychology laboratory course. Sem/nar One of the following-Neuropsychology PSY 1651 ; Sensory Physiology, PSY 1 652; Sensation and Perception, PSY 1 681 . (Select one of the two seminars that was not used to fulfill the psychology elective requirement described above.) Bachelor of Science General Requirements. Five mathematics, science or computer science courses beyond the Core Curriculum requirements. Recommended courses include: BIO 1106,BIO1107, PHY 1201 -1531, PHY 1202-1 532, CHM 1111, CHM 1151, MTH 1106, MTH 1107, MTH 1160. Also, one humanities course beyond the Core Curriculum requirements. Psychology Courses. Basic Courses: PSY 1110, Perspectives in Psychology; and PSY 1112, Foundations of Psychology II; PSY 121 1 and PSY 1212, Statistics in *TIPS means Topics in Psychology Courses. 16 / College of Arts and Sciences Behavioral Sciences I and II. Specialty Courses: PSY 1 271 , Social Psychology, or PSY 1 272, Personality I; PSY 1381, Sensation, or PSY 1382, Perception; PSY 1262, Language and Cognition; PSY 1231, Learning and Motivation I; and PSY 1351, Physiological Bases of Psychology. Students choose either General Psychology or one of four areas of concentration: Language and Cognition; Learning, Motivation and Behavior Analysis; Personality and Social Psychology; or Sensory and Neuropsychology The additional courses required for each concentration follow: General Program: six psychology electives, excluding TIPS courses; four psy- chology laboratories; one psychology seminar; and one Directed Study of Honors Research, from PSY 1890 to PSY 1899. Directed Study and Honors research provide students with the opportunity to conduct research in a faculty member's laboratory. See your adviser early in the preceding quarter for assistance in selecting a potential sponsor for your research project. Make arrangements with your sponsor well in advance of registration. Language and Cognition Electives: Two from the following courses: Bilingualism, PSY 1261 ; Intro, to Phonetics, PSY 1361 ; Child Language, PSY 1362; Linguistics of ASL, PSY 1 363; Cognition, PSY 1 364; Language and the Brain, PSY 1 365. Also, Introduction to Language and Linguistics, ENG 1118, and any two additional psychology courses, excluding TIPS courses. Laboratories: Psycholinguistics, PSY 1562; Cognition, PSY 1564; Directed Study in Language and Cognition, PSY 1 890; and one additional psychology laboratory course. Seminar: Psycholinguistics, PSY 1661, or Cognition, PSY 1662. Directed Study or Honors Research: One course from PSY 1 890 to 1 899. Directed Study and Honors research provide students with the opportunity to conduct research in a faculty member's laboratory. See your adviser early in the preceding quarter for assistance in selecting a potential sponsor for your research project. Make arrangements with your sponsor well in advance of registration. Learning, Motivation, and Behavior Analysis Electives: Learning and Motivation II, PSY 1 331 ; Programmed Learning, PSY 1 332; Behavior Therapies, PSY 1 431 ; and one of the following: Seminar in Behavior Theory, PSY 1 631 ; Seminar in Behavior Modification, PSY 1 632. Also, two additional psychology elective courses, exclud- ing Topics in Psychology (TIPS) courses. Laboratories: Learning and Motivation, PSY 1531; Behavior Modification, PSY 1 532; Directed Study in Learning and Motivation, PSY 1 890. Also, one additional psychology laboratory course. Seminar: Behavior Theory, PSY 1 631 , or Behavior Modification, PSY 1 632. (Select whichever one was not used to fulfill the psychology elective requirement described above.) Directed Study or Honors Research: One course from PSY 1890 to PSY 1899. Directed Study and Honors research provide students with the opportunity to conduct research in a faculty member's laboratory See your adviser early in the preceding quarter for assistance in selecting a potential sponsor for your research project. Make arrangements with your sponsor well in advance of registration. Personality and Social Psychology Electives: Social Psychology, PSY 1271, or Personality I, PSY 1272 (select whichever course was not taken to fulfill basic psychology course requirements). Personality II, PSY 1 273. Also, Social Psychol- ogy, SOC 1 135, and two courses from the following list: Aggression, SOA 1 185; Sex, Sex Roles, and Family, SOA 1 160; Sociology of Prejudice, SOC 1 140; and Theories of Persuasion, SPC 1315. Credit for all courses taken outside of the Psychology Department will be counted toward the psychology major require- ments only if the entire concentration is completed. If you change concentration or enroll in the general psychology track, such courses will be considered free electives. , Laboratories: Social Psychology, PSY 1571, or Personality, PSY 1572; and three additional psychology laboratory courses. College of Arts and Sciences / 1 7 Seminar: One of the following: Social Psychology, PSY 1 671 ; Clinical Psychology and Personality, PSY 1672; or Social Psychology, SOC 1337. Directed Study or Honors Research: One course from PSY 1890 to PSY 1899. Directed Study and Honors research provide students with the opportunity to conduct research in a faculty member's laboratory. See your adviser early in the preceding quarter for assistance in selecting a potential sponsor for your research project. Make arrangements with your sponsor well in advance of registration. Sensory and Neuropsychology Electives: Sensation, PSY 1 381 ; or Perception, PSY 1 382 (whichever one was not used to fulfill the specialty course requirement); and two from the following-Neuropsychology II, PSY 1352; Comparative Psychology and Ethology PSY 1353; Functional Neuroanatomy PSY 1354. Also, two addi- tional psychology courses, excluding the Topics in Psychology (TIPS) courses. Laboratories: Neuropsychology PSY 1 551 ; Sensation and Perception, PSY 1 581 ; and two additional psychology laboratory courses. Seminar: One of the following: Neuropsychology PSY 1 651 ; Sensory Physiology PSY 1 652; Sensation and Perception, PSY 1 681 . (Select one of the two seminars that was not used to fulfill the psychology elective requirement described above.) Directed Study and Honors Research: One course from PSY 1 890 to PSY 1 899. Directed Study and Honors research provide students with the opportunity to conduct research in a faculty member's laboratory. See your adviser early in the preceding quarter for assistance in selecting a potential sponsor for your research project. Make arrangements with your sponsor well in advance of registration. Minor in Psychology Psychology Courses: Basic Courses: PSY 1111, Foundations of Psychology I; PSY 1112, Foundations of Psychology II; PSY 1211, Statistics in Behavioral Science I; and PSY 1212, Statistics in Behavioral Science II. Students choose either General Psychology or one of four areas of concentration : Language and Cognition; Learning, Motivation, and Behavior Analysis; Personality and Social Psychology; or Sensory and Neuropsychology The additional courses required for each concentration follow: General Program: PSY 1271, Social Psychology I; or PSY 1272, Personality; PSY 1381, Sensation, or PSY 1382, Perception; PSY 1262, Language and Cognition; PSY 1231, Learning and Motivation I; PSY 1351, Neuropsychology; and one psychology laboratory. Language and Cognition: PSY 1 262, Language and Cognition. Select four of the following: PSY 1261, Bilingualism; PSY 1361, Introduction to Phonetics; PSY 1362, PSY 1363, Linguistics of ASL; Child Language; PSY 1364, Cognition; PSY 1365, Language and the Brain. Also, PSY 1562, Psycholinguistics; or PSY 1564, Cognition. Learning, Motivation, and Behavior Analysis: PSY 1241, Human Behavioral Devel- opment I; PSY 1231, Learning and Motivation I; PSY 1331, Learning and Motiva- tion II; PSY 1381, Sensation; PSY 1431, Behavior Change in Institutions; and PSY 1531, Learning and Motivation Laboratory. Personality and Social Psychology: PSY 1271, Social Psychology; PSY 1272, Personality I; PSY 1273, Personality II; PSY 1373, Abnormal Psychology I; PSY 1 373, Abnormal Psychology I; PSY 1 374, Abnormal Psychology II; and PSY 1 571 , Laboratory in Social Psychology; or PSY 1 572, Laboratory in Personality. Sensory and /Veufopsyc/7o/ogy.- PSY 1381, Sensation; PSY 1382, Perception; PSY 1351, Physiological Bases of Psychology I. Two of the following: PSY 1352, Physiological Bases of Psychology II; PSY 1353, Comparative Psychology and Ethology; or PSY 1 354, Functional Neuroanatomy Also, PSY 1 581 , Sensation and Perception; or PSY 1551, Neuropsychology. 18 / College of Arts and Sciences Sociology-Anthropology Concentration in Sociology Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Minor in Sociology Preparatory Requirements: SOC 1 1 00, Introduction to Sociology; and SOA 1 1 00, Introduction to Anthropology. Core Requirements: SOC 1320, Introduction to Statistical Analysis; SOC 1 321 , SOC 1 322, Research Methods I and II; SOC 1 300, Classical Social Thought; SOC 1 301 , Current Social Thought; SOC 1 31 0, Class, Power, and Social Change (preferably in senior year). Elective Requirements: two intermediate courses (100 or 200 level); two advanced courses (300 or above); one anthropology course beyond SOA 1 100. Six electives in the social sciences other than sociology-anthropology Preparatory Requirements: SOC 1 100, Introduction to Sociology and SOA 1 100, Introduction to Anthropology Core Requirements: SOC 1320, Introduction to Statistical Analysis; SOC 1 321 , SOC 1 322, Research Methods I and II; SOC 1 300, Classical Social Thought; SOC 1 301 , Current Social Thought; SOC 1 31 0, Class, Power, and Social Change (preferably in senior year). Elective Requirements: two intermediate courses (100 or 200 level); two advanced courses (300 or above); one anthropology course beyond SOA 1 100. , Six electives in the social sciences other than sociology-anthropology. Approved six-course specialization. Requirements: SOC 1 1 00, Introduction to Sociology; any two courses from among the following: SOC 1321, Research Methods I; SOC 1322, Research Methods II; SOC 1 300, Classical Social Thought; SOC 1 301 , Current Social Thought; and any three-course specialization in sociology arranged between the student and adviser Concentration in Anthropology Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Minor in Anthropology Preparatory Requirements: SOA 1100, Introduction to Anthropology; and SOC 1 100, Introduction to Sociology Core flequ/remente.atleastthreeofthe following: SOA 1 1 35, Language and Culture; SOA 1 1 55, Individual and Culture; SOA 1 301 , Human Origins; SOA 1160, Sex, Sex Roles, and Family; SOA 1103, Culture in Transition; SOA 1425, Tribal Society and Cultures; SOA 1 146, Peasant Society and Culture; SOA 1470, Myth and Religion. Elective Requirements: at least six additional anthropology courses; one sociology elective beyond SOC 1 100. Six electives in the social sciences other than sociology-anthropology Preparatory Requirements: SOA 1100, Introduction to Anthropology; and SOC 1 1 00, Introduction to Sociology Core Requirements: at least three of the following: SOA 1 1 35, Language and Culture; SOA 1 1 55, Individual and Culture; SOA 1 301 , Human Origins; SOA 1160, Sex, Sex Roles, and Family; SOA 1103, Culture in Transition; SOA 1425, Tribal Society and Cultures; SOA 1146, Peasant Society and Culture; SOA 1470, Myth and Religion. Elective Requirements: at least six additional anthropology courses; one sociology elective beyond SOC 1 100. Six electives in the social sciences other than sociology-anthropology Approved five-course specialization. Requirements: SOA 1100, Introduction to Social Anthropology; SOA 1135, Language and Culture; SOA 1 155, Individual and Culture; SOA 1160, Sex, Sex Roles, and Family; and any two-course specialization in anthropology arranged between the student and adviser College of Arts and Sciences/ 19 Speech Communication Concentration in Group and Public Communication Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Required Courses: SPC 1115, Introduction to Communication Skills; SPC 1300, Introduction to Communication Theory; SPC 1 239, Argumentation and Debate, or SPC 1338, Group Discussion; SPC 1330, Interpersonal Communication I; SPC 1315, Theories of Persuasion, or SPC 1410, Contemporary Public Address; eight speech communication electives; POL 1110, Introduction to Politics, or POL 1111, Introduction to American Government; PSY 1112, Foundations of Psychology II, or SOC 1 1 00, Introduction to Sociology; PSY 1 271 , Social Psychology or SOC 1 1 35, Social Psychology Required Courses: SPC 1115, Introduction to Communication Skills; SPC 1 300, Introduction to Communication Theory; SPC 1 330, Interpersonal Communication I; SPC 1338, Group Discussion; SPC 1315, Theories of Persuasion; SPC 1415, Persuasive Techniques; SPC 1 600, Introduction to Communication Research; six speech communication electives to be chosen from the follov\/ing: SPC 1239, Argumentation and Debate; SPC 1116, Business and Professional Speaking; SPC 1250, The Mass and the Media; SPC 1410, Contemporary Public Address; SPC 1317, Theories of Audience Behavior; SPC 1437, Consultation Skills; SPC 1 331 , Interpersonal Communication II; SPC 1 232, Female/Male Communication; ENG 1118, Introduction to Linguistics; ENG 1 407, Introduction to Semantics; PHL 1200, Introduction to Logic I. Also, eight social science credits beyond the introductory level, selected in consultation with the student's adviser and based upon their value to the student's post-graduate activities. College of Arts and Sciences distribution requirements; no language requirement. Concentration in Personal Performance Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Minor in Theatre Required Courses: SPC 1115, Introduction to Communication Skills; SPC 1110, Voice and Articulation; SPC 1111, Oral Interpretation; SPC 1116, Business and Professional Speaking; SPC 1239, Argumentation and Debate; SPC 1210, Advanced Vocal Techniques, or SPC 1211, Advanced Oral Interpretation; SPC 1890, Directed Study; six speech communication electives. College of Arts and Sciences distribution and foreign language requirements. Required Courses: SPC 1115, Introduction to Communication Skills; SPC 1300, Introduction to Communication Theory; SPC 1110, Voice and Articulation; SPC 1111, Oral Interpretation; SPC 1890, Directed Study; eight speech communica- tion electives selected from the follow/ing; SPC 1 239, Argumentation and Debate; SPC 1116, Business and Professional Speaking; SPC 1210, Advanced Vocal Techniques; SPC 1211, Advanced Oral Interpretation; SPC 1315, Theories of Persuasion; SPC 1415, Persuasive Techniques; SPC 1338, Group Discussion; SPC 1318, Communication in Education; SPC 1250, The Mass and the Media; SPC 1410, Contemporary Public Address; SPC 1317, Theories of Audience Behavior; SPC 1437, Consultation Skills; SPC 1330, Interpersonal Communica- tion I; SPC 1 331 , Interpersonal Communication II; SPC 1 232, Female/Male Com- munication; SPC 1600, Introduction to Communication Research; ENG 1118, Introduction to Linguistics; ENG 1407, Introduction to Semantics; PHL 1200, Introduction to Logic I. In addition, the student must complete not less than four courses taught outside the Department, selected in consultation v*/ith his/her adviser on the basis of their value to the student's proposed post-graduate activities and approved by Speech Communication Curriculum Committee. College of Arts and Sciences distribution requirements; no language requirement. All students minoring in Theatre are required to complete the following courses (for thirty-two quarter hours): 20 / College of Arts and Sciences DRA 1 1 50, Introduction to Acting; DRA 1 200, Stagecraft; DRA 1212, Introduction to Theatrical Design; DRA 1 1 06, DRA 1 1 07, DRA 1 1 08, Theatre History I, II, and III; DRA 1 180, Concepts of Direction; and INT 1 100, Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music. Laboratory practice in technical theatre, scene building, and painting as well as performing backstage functions, are required parts of the Minor, in conjunction with the course requirements. Theatre and Dance Bachelor of Arts Theatre majors have the opportunity of selecting one of seven concentrations: acting, scenic design, lighting design; costume design; literature/criticism; dance performance; and a generalist specialization. It is recommended that all theatre majors except those in the dance performance concentration select the following courses in their Freshman year: DRA 1 1 50, Introduction to Acting; DRA 1 200, Stage- craft; DRA 1212, Introduction to Theatre Design; INT 1100, Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music. It is recommended that those selecting the dance perfor- mance concentration select the following courses in their Freshman year: HSL 1 1 53, Modern Dance I; HSL 1 1 54, Modern Dance II; HSL 1 1 56, Ballet I; HSL 1 1 59, Jazz Dance; HSL 1 1 65, Improvisation; HSL 1 31 4, Movement Fundamentals; HSL 1630, Aspects of Dance; INT 1 100, Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music. The following department core courses are required of all theatre majors in all concentrations except dance performance: DRA 1106, DRA 1107, DRA 1108, Theatre History I, II, and III; DRA 1112, Drama Theory/Criticism; DRA 1 1 50, Intro- duction to Acting; DRA 1180, Concepts of Direction; DRA 1200, Stagecraft; DRA 1 21 2, Introduction to Theatre Design; DRA 1 800, DRA 1 801 , DRA 1 802, DRA 1803, Practicum in Play Production; ENG 1279, The Modern Novel; ENG 1658. Introduction to Shakespeare; and INT 1 1 00, Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music. Theatre majors with a dance performance concentration are required to complete these department core courses: DRA 1112, Drama Theory/Criticism; DRA 1 1 50, Introduction to Acting; DRA 1 180, Concepts of Direction; DRA 1200, Stagecraft; DRA 1 21 2, Introduction to Theatre Design; DRA 1 800, DRA 1 801 . DRA 1 802, DRA 1 803, Practicum in Play Production; HSL 1 261 . Anatomy/Physiology I; HSL 1 262, Kinesiology I; HSL 1621, Dance in Cultural Perspective; HSL 1630, Aspects of Dance; HSL 1 632, Dance in the Twentieth Century; and INT 1 1 00, Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music. These courses are offered in the Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions. The following lists the specific requirements for each concentration: Acting: DRA 1 280, Stage Makeup; DRA 1 300, Acting II, DRA 1 301 , Acting III; DRA 1 370, Rehearsal and Performance; SPC 1110, Voice and Articulation. Eight quarter hours in Physical Education from the following: Modern Dance, Ballet, Jazz Dance, Gymnastics, Fencing and Physical Conditioning. Also, eight quarter hours of dramatic literature elective courses offered by the department and two work- shops in voice and movement training. Costume Design: ART 1 1 01 , Art History Since 1 400; ART 1 1 24, Creative Drawing; ART 1254, Intermediate Drawing; DRA 1209, Theatrical Drafting; DRA 1210, Scene Design I; DRA 1 226, Lighting Design I; DRA 1 261 , Costuming I; DRA 1 265, Pattern Drafting and Costume Construction; DRA 1280, Stage Makeup; DRA 1400, Costuming II; and DRA 1410, Technical Production. Dance Performance: HSL 1153, Modern Dance I; HSL 1154, Modern Dance II; HSL 1 1 55, Modern Dance III; HSL 1 1 56. Ballet I; HSL 1 1 57, Ballet II, HSL 1 1 58, Ballet III; HSL 1 1 59, Jazz Dance I; HSL 1 1 60, Jazz Dance II; HSL 1161, Jazz Dance III; HSL 1 162, Rhythmic Analysis; HSL 1 165, Dance Improvisation/Composition; HSL 1 252, Dance Composition I; HSL Dance Composition II; HSL 1314, Movement College of Arts and Sciences / 21 Bachelor of Science Minor in Theatre Fundamentals; HSL 1 321 , Modern Dance IV; HSL 1 322, Ballet IV; HSL 1 324, Jazz Dance IV; HSL 1325, HSL 1326, HSL 1327, Dance Rehearsal and Performance I, II, and 111; HSL 1634, Laban Movement and Analysis; HSL 1864, HSL 1865, and HSL 1866, Special Problems: Dance I, II, and III. Lighting Design: ART 1 1 01 , Art History Since 1 400; DRA 1 209, Theatrical Drafting; DRA 1210, Scene Design I; DRA 1 225, Scene Painting; DRA 1 226, Lighting Design I; DRA 1246, Sound for the Theatre; DRA 1261, Costuming I; DRA 1280, Stage Makeup; DRA 1410, Technical Production; DRA 1420, Advanced Drafting and Construction; and DRA 1430, Lighting Design II. Literature/ Criticism: ART 1 100, Art History to 1400; ART 1 101, Art History Since 1400; DRA 1 122, Twentieth Century European Theatre; DRA 1 140, Playv/riting I; MUS 1120, Survey of Music History; PHL 1340, Aesthetics; plus eight quarter hours in Special Topics in drama criticism offered by the department and eight quarter hours of dramatic literature elective courses offered by the department. Scenic Design: ART 1 1 01 , Art History Since 1 400; DRA 1 209, Theatrical Drafting; DRA 1210, Scene Design I; DRA 1213, Scene Design II; DRA 1214, Scene Design III; DRA 1 225, Scene Painting; DRA 1 226, Lighting Design I; DRA 1 261 , Costuming I; DRA 1410, Technical Production; and DRA 1420, Advance Drafting and Construction. Generaiist: Completion of departmental core courses plus the completion of forty quarter hours of departmental electives. Also required for all Theatre majors in the Bachelor of Arts Program are the foreign language and core/distribution requirements w/ithin the College of Arts and Sciences. Requirements for the Bachelor of Science in Theatre are the same as require- ments for the Bachelor of Arts in Theatre with the following exceptions; students are not required to complete the foreign language or the core/distribution requirements of the College of Arts and Sciences. All students minoring in Theatre are required to complete the following courses (for thirty-two quarter hours): DRA 1 106, Theatre History I; DRA 1 107, Theatre History II; DRA 1 108, Theatre History III; DRA 1 150, Introduction to Acting; DRA 1180, Concepts of Direction; DRA 1200, Stagecraft; DRA 1212, Introduction to Theatrical Design; INT 1100, Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music. Laboratory practice in technical theatre, scene building, and painting, as well as performing backstage functions, is a required part of the minor, in conjunction with the course requirements. 22 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Specimen Program in Health Education nrstYear CHM 1101 Gen. Chem. 3 ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. 1 4 ED 1100 Ed. & Soc. Sci. 4 HSL 1281 Current Iss. HIth. 4 HSL1101 Int. Swim. HSL 1133 Phy. Cond. 3 2 2 Second Year CHM 1102 Chem. II 3 3 4 MTH 1106 Fund. Math. 4 4 BIO 1140 Bas. AnI. Bio. 1 3 3 4 BIO 1141 Bas. AnI. Bio. II 3 4 HSL 1280 Fnd. HIth. Ed. 2 2 ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II 4 4 HSL 1284 Instrct. Res. 2 2 ED 1102 Hum. Dev. 4 4 HSL 1283 Intro. Safety 2 2 HSL 1254 First Aid 1 2 2 Ed. Soc. Elective 4 Third Year Fourth Year Fifth Year No. Course No. Course HSL 1605 Basic Ath. Train. 2 PHY 1201 Physics 4 HSL 1463 Ov. Phys. Dis. 4 HSL 1261 Anat.-Phys. 3 PSY 1 1 1 2 Psych. II 4 4 ED 1103 Human Devel. II 4 4 HSL 1610 Anat.-Phys. 3 2 4 HSL 1286 Nutrition 4 4 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course a. L ttH. BIO 1121 Microbio. 3 4 4 ED 1306 Meas. & Eval. 4 4 ED 1104 Analysis of Teh. 4 4 HSL 1516 Drug Use/Abuse 4 4 HSL 1500 Mental HIth. 4 4 HSL 1502 Comm./Degen. 4 4 Require. Elect. 4 4 Gen. Stud. 4 Bectlve 4 CRS 1200 Intro. Spec. Ed. 4 4 HSL 1504 Logvty. & Aging 4 4 HSL 1585 Teach. Proced. 4 4 HSL 1 506 Comm. HIth. 4 4 HSL 1 503 Hum. Sexuality 4 4 HSL 1 507 Seminar 2 2 Gen. Stud. Elective 4 4 Gen. Stud. Elective 8 8 No. Course HSL 1520 Student Teach. 12 HSL 1521 Field Exp. 12 HSL 1509 Org./ Admin. HIth. Ed 4 4 HSL 1510 Health Counseling 4 4 HSL 1508 Seminar 2 2 Fnd. Ed. Elective 4 4 Specimen Program in School and Community Health Education First Year No. Course a L Q.H. No. Course a. L aH. No. Course a L aH. CHM 1101 Gen. Chem. 3 3 4 CHM 1102 Gen. Chem. 3 3 MTH 1106 Fund. Math. 4 4 ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. 1 4 4 BIO 1140 Bas. Ani. Bio. 1 3 3 BIO 1141 Bas. Ani. Bio. II 3 4 4 ED 1100 Ed. & Soc. Sci. 4 4 HSL 1280 Fnd. HIth. Ed. 2 ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II 4 4 HSL 1281 Current Iss. HIth. 4 4 HSL 1 284 Instrct. Res. 2 INT 1100 Computer 4 4 HSL 1254 RrstAid 2 1 2 Ed. Soc. Elective PE Elective 2 PE Elective 1 HSL 1283 Intro. Safety 2 Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions / 23 Second Year Third Year Rxirth Year Rfth Year No. Course a. L aH. No. Course a L an. PSY 1 1 1 1 ED 1102 HSL 1261 HSL 1285 Psych. 1 Hum. Devel. 1 Anat.-Phys. HIth. Concerns Yth. Skill Elective 4 4 3 4 1 2- 4 4 4 4 1 PSY 1 1 1 2 ED 1103 HSL 1610 HSL 1286 Psych. II Human Devel. II Anat.-Phys. Nutrition 4 4 3 4 2 4 4 4 4 Quarter 6 Quarter/ No. Course CI. L aH. No. Course a. L an. BIO 1121 ED 1104 HSL 1500 MIcrobio. Analysis of Teh. Pre-Practicum 1 Mental HIth. Require. Elect. 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 ED 1306 HSL 1516 HSL 1502 Meas. & Eval. Drug Use/ Abuse Comm./Degen. Diseases Gen. Stud. Elective 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Quarters Quarters No. Course CI. aH. No. Course a an. CRS 1200 HSL 1585 Intro. Spec. Ed. Teach. Proced. 4 4 4 4 HSL 1504 HSL 1506 Logvty. & Aging Comm. HIth. 4 4 4 4 HSL 1 503 Hum. Sexuality 4 Gen. Stud. Elective 4 HSL 1 507 Seminar 2 Gen. Stud. Elective 8 HSL 1520 Student Teach. or HSL 1521 Practicum 12 HSL 1509 Org./Admin. HIth. Ed. 4 4 12 HSL 1510 Health Counseling 4 4 HSL 1508 Seminar 2 2 Fnd. Ed. Elective 4 4 Specimen Program in Human Services Quarter 1 POL 1111, Introduction to American Government; ENG 1110, Freshman English I; ED 1 1 00, Education and Social Science; designated elective. Quarter 2 ENG 1111, Freshman English II; ED 1302, The Human Services Professions; ED 1317, Seminar in Group Process; designated elective. Quarter 3 ECN 1116, Principles and Problems of Economics; designated electives. Bachelor of Required Courses: ENG 1110, Freshman English I; ENG 1111, Freshman English II; ED Science 1102, Human Development I; ED 1103, Human Development and Learning II; ED 1100, Education and Social Science; POL 1111, Introduction to American Government; ECN 1116, Principles of Microeconomics; ED 1 302, The Human Services Professions; ED 1307, Introduction to Educational Statistics. Course Courses: Either PSY 1272, Personality I, PSY 1273, Personality II, and PSY 1373, Abnormal Psychology, or PSY 1272, Personality I, PSY 1373, Abnormal Psychology I, and PSY 1374, Abnormal Psychology II; ED 1300, Psychosocial Development; ED 1317, Seminar in Group Process; ED 1301, Educational Applications of Social Psychology; SOC 1 240, Sociology of Human Service Organizations; CRS 1 306, Introduction to Reha- bilitation; CRS 3434, Principles of Medical Rehabilitation; one of the following: SOC 1 147, Cities and Society, or SOC 1347, Community Analysis, or CRS 3437, Community Planning in Rehabilitation; one of the following: CRS 3439, Social Welfare and Rehabilita- tion, or SOC 1250, Sociology of Private and Public Assistance, or SOC 1535, Seminar in Social Welfare; CRS 3503, Counseling Theory and Process. Approved four-course concentration; two supervised field placements. Courses in the areas of drama/speech and education humanities. Distribution requirements. 24 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Specimen Program in Physical Education Rrst Year No. Course No. Course Course BIO 1 1 40 Bio. I ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. ED 1100 Soc. Sci. HSL 1255 Hum. Movt.' HSL 1101 Swimming HSL 1133 Phy. Cond. HSL 1256 Life/Career Plan.* BIO 1141 Bio. II or OHM 1111 Chem. or PHY 1201 Physics ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II ED 1 1 02 Hum. Dev. I HSL 1 1 09 Gymnastics I HSL 1140 Basketball MTH 1 1 06 Math. HSL 1254 First Aid' HSL 1281 HIth. Issues HSL 1 253 Grp. Dynamics* HSL 1257 Hist./Phil. PE* HSL1110/ Gym II 12 Second Year Third Year No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. HSL 1261 Anat.-Physlology r 4 INT1 100 Computer HSL 1 260 Motor Dev. 4 ED 1 103 Hum. Devel. II HSL 1258 Elem. School Act. or HSL 1116 Tennis HSL 1 259 Sec. School Act. 3 Skill Elective Skill Elective 1 Elective Elective 4 Elective No. Course No. Course Q.H. HSL 1610 Anat.-Physiology 11* 4 HSL 1606 Motor Learn.* 4 HSL 1607 Meas. and Eval. 4 Elective 2 TAG 2 HSL Skill Elective 1 HSL 1611 Kinesiology II ED 1307 Ed. Stat. PSY 1381, Psych. Elective PSY 1 1 1 1 Found, of Psych. HSL 1615 Critical Teaching TAG HSL 1114 Badminton Fourth Year No. HSL 1612 Exer. Physiology I HSL 1 463 Overview of Dis. HSL TAG HSL TAG HSL Skill Elective Elective 4 HSL 1616 Curriculum Devel. 3 4 HSL 1 605 Bas. Athletic Trng. 3 2 Elective 4 2 Elective 4 1 HSL 1602 Thry. Goach or 2 4 HSL 1 603 Thry. Play HSL 1142 Volleyball 2 1 Note: For an area of concentration or option within the Physical Education Dept., other courses will be required as replacements for some courses listed above. *Required Physical Education regardless of concentration. Fifth Year Course HSL 1623 Supervised Stud. Teaching HSL 1617 Admin, of PE Elective Elective Elective 180 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement for Physical Education 185 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement for Athletic Training Minimum of 24 Q.H. General Studies electives Minimum of 9 Q.H. Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions electives Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions / 25 Specimen Program in Sport Communication (Nonteaching) Rrst Year BIO 1140 Bio. 1 4 HSL 1256 Ufe/Career Ran. ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. 1 4 BIO 1141 Bio. II or ED 1100 Soc. Sci. 4 OHM 1111 Ghem. or HSL 1255 Hum. Movt. 3 PHY 1201 Physics HSL 1101 Swimming 1 ENG 1 1 1 1 Fresh. Eng. II HSL 1133 Ptiy. Cond. 1 ED 1102 HSL 1140 HSL 1 1 09 Hum. Dev. 1 Basketball Gymnastics 1 MTH 1106 Math. HSL 1254 Rrst Aid HSL 1281 Current Iss. HIth. HSL 1253 Grp. Dynamics HSL 1257 Hist./Phil. PE HSL 1 1 73 Track & Reld HSL 1110 Gym. II /1 2 Second Year Third Year No. Course HSL 1261 Anat.-Physiology I HSL 1260 Motor Dev. JRN 1103 Newswrit. I SPG 1315 Theories Persuasion HSL Team Skill Elective Course HSL 1262 Kinesiology I ED 1 1 03 Hum. Devel. II JRN 1 1 04 Nevifsw/rit. II HSL Ind. or Dual Skill Elective Elective Fourth Year No. Course O.H. No. Course aH. HSL 1611 ED 1307 PSY 1381 JRN 1305 Quarter 8 Kinesiology II Ed. Stat. 150, 156, 157, or 165 or 1 64 Psych. Electives Tech. Journalism 4 4 4 4 HSL 1610 HSL 1606 JRN 1206 Quarters Anat.-Physiology II Motor Learn. Tech. Journalism Elective 4 4 4 4 No. Course aH. No. Course aH. HSL 1612 Exer. Physiology 4 HSL 1 264 Adapted PE I 4 HSL Coach/Offidate Elective 2 Elective 4 HSL 1605 Basic Athletic Trng. 3 HSL 1 603 Theory of Play 2 HSL 1 602 Theory of Coaching 2 Comm. Elective 4 Electives 6 Fifth No. Course HSL 1622 Practicum HSL 1617 Admin, of PE HSL 1600 Psych, of Sport HSL 1254 Soc. of Sport Elective Elective 1 80 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement for Physical Education Sport Communication 20 Q.H. = General Studies electives 9 Q.H. = Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions electives Preregistration is essential for courses outside of the Physical Education Department. 26 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Specimen Program in Recreation and Leisure Studies First Year Second Year Thirxl Year Fourth Year Fifth Year No. Course a OH. No. Course a. Q.H. SPC 1106 ENG 1110 ED 1100 HSL 1220 Quarters Fund, of Speech Fresh. Eng. 1 Ed. Soc. Sci. Found, of Lead. 3 4 4 3 4 4 4 ENG 1 1 1 1 BIO 1140 ED HSL 1223 INT 1100 Fresh. Eng. II Ani. Bio. 1 Soc. Sci. Elec. Ufe/Career P\. Computer 4(3)4 No. Course a. Q.H. No. Course a. aH. HSL 1281 BIO 1141 ED REC HSL 1222 Issues in Health Ani. Bio. II Soc. Sci. Elect. Prof. Skill Cluster Leisure Aw. 4 4 4(3)4 4 4 4 4 2 Quarters - No. Course a. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L aH. ED 1102 HSL 1261 GEO HSL 1221 Quarters Hum. Dev. & Lrn. 1 Anat. Physio. 1 Earth Sci. Elect. Intro, to Rec. Leis. 14 3 4 3 2 4 4 4 3 ED 1103 HSL 1610 GEO Quarter/ Hum. Dev. & Lrn. II Anat. Physio. II Earth Sci. Elec. Guided. Elective 4 3 4 4 2 4 4 4 No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course CI. Q.H. HSL 1408 Intro, to Research 4 4 HSL 1409 Research Seminar 4 REC Area of 4 4 HSL 1401 Prog. Planning 4 REC Area of 4 REC Dept. Elective 4 4 Concentration Course Guided Elective 3 4 REC Guided Elective No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course a. aH. HSL 1400 Grp. Dynamics HSL 1406 Intern. Seminar REC Area of Concen. Course REC Area of Concen. Course 3 1 4 4 3 1 4 4 HSL 1407 Intern. Rec. Leis. Serv. 12 Quarter 10 Quarter 11 No. Course a. aH. No. Course CI. aH. REC Area of Concen. Course 4 4 HSL- 1410 Sr. Seminar Area of Concen. 4 4 REC Dept. Elective 3 3 Course Guided Elective 4 REC Guided Elective Guided Elective 4 REC Guided Elective Specimen Program in Community Health Education/Cardiovascular Health and Exercise Specialist (Nonteaching Certification) First Year Course BIO 1140 Bio. I ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. ED 1100 Soc. Sci. HSL 1255 Hum. Movt. HSL 1101 Sw/imming HSL 1133 Phy. Cond. HSL 1256 Ufe/Career Plan. 3 MTH 1106 Math. 4 BIO 1141 Bio. II 4 HSL 1254 First Aid 2 ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. 11 4 HSL 1281 Current Iss. HIth. 4 ED 1102 Hum. Dev. 1 4 ED 1103 Hum. Dev. 4 HSL Guided Skill Elect. 1 HSL Guided Skill Elect. 1 Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions / 27 Second Year No. Course HSL 1261 Anat.-Physiology I HSL 1260 Motor Dev. HSL 1 605 Bas. Athletic Trng. CHM 1111 Ctiem. I HSL 1268 Basic A.T. Lab INT 1 1 00 Computer PSY 1 1 1 1 Found Psych. CHM 1112 Chem. II Third Year RHJrth Year Rfth Year No. Course Q.H. No. Course QH. HSL 1611 ED 1307 CRS 1313 Quarters Kinesiology Ed. Stat. Intro. Counseling Elective 4 4 4 4 HSL 1610 HSL 1607 Quarter 9 Anat.-Physiology II Meas. & Eval. Elective Elective 4 4 4 4 No. Course Q.H. No. Course aa HSL 1612 HSL 1423 HSL 1426 Exer. Physiology Comm. Rec. Mgmt. Budg.Syst. Analysis Elective 4 4 4 4 HSL 1613 HSL 1614 HSL 1286 HSL 1506 Exer. Testing/Presc. Electrocardiography Nutrition Comm. HIth. 3 2 4 4 HSL 1266 Ptiys. Cond. Prog. HSL 1622 Super. Field Experience 12 HSL 1866 Spec. Prog. 4 HSL 1502 Comm. and Degen. 4 HSL 1510 Health Couns. Elective Specimen Program in School and Community Health Education/Athletic Training Rrst Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarters No. Course Q.H. No. Course aH. No. Course Q.H. CHM 1101 Chem. 1 ENG 1110 English ED 1100 Social Sci. HSL 1281 Curr. HIth. HSL 1101 Int. Swim. HSL 1133 Phy. Cond. 4 4 4 4 1 1 CHM 1 1 02 Chem. II BIO 1140 Biol HSL HIth Prob.mh. HSL 1280 Fnd. HIth. HSL 1283 Intr. Saf. HSL 1284 Inst. Res. 4 4 4 2 2 2 MTH 1106 Math BIO 1141 Bio. II ENG 1111 English ED 1102 Hum. Dev HSL 1254 First Aid 4 4 4 4 2 Second Year (Co-op starts) No. Course HSL 1605 Basic Ath. Trng. PHY 1201 Physics HSL 1261 Anat./Phys. I HSL 1463 Ov Phys. Dis, HSL 1268 Basic A.t Lab INT 1101 Computer ED 1103 Human Dev. II ED 1306 Meas. & Eval. HSL 1627 Ther. Modalities HSL 1132 Wt. Trng. Third Year No. Course No. Course BIO 1 1 90 Microbiology ED 1104 Anal. Inst. Proc. HSL 1 500 Mental Health HSL 1611 Kinesiology HSL 1610 Anat./Phy II HSL 1 626 Ther. Recond. HSL 1 502 Comm./Degen. Dis. HSL 1 504 Longevity/Aging 28 / Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions Fourth Year Quarter 8 No. Course Course HSL 1612 Ex. Phys. 4 HSL1585 HIth. Ed. SchYComm. 4 HSL 1 503 Human Sexuality 4 HSL 1423 Advanced A.T. 4 HSL 1 5 1 6 Drug Use/ Abuse HSL 1506 Comm. Health HSL 1 507 Seminar I HSL 1 286 Nutrition HSL 1266 Ptiy. Cond. Prg. Fifth Year No. Course HSL 1521 Practicum HSL 1624 A.T. Internship HSL 1509 Org./Ad. HIth. Ed. HSL 1510 Health Couns. HSL 1508 Seminar II HSL 1625 Senior Seminar 180 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement for Physical Education 1 85 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement for Athletic Training 20 Q.H. = General Studies electives 10 Q.H. = Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Specimen Program in Physical Therapy Rrst Year Quarter 1 Course 5 4 PSY 1 1 1 1 Fnd. of Psych. I MTH 1106 Fund. Math. BIO 1140 Bas. Ani. Bio. I HSL 1281 Curr. Iss. in HIth. MTH 1107 Fund. Math. OHM 1111 Chem. 1 ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. I CHM 1112 Chem. II BIO 1141 Bas. Ani. Bio. ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II Quarter 1, 2, or : HSL 1254 Rrst Aid PTH 1114 Intro, to Phys. Thrpy. I Second Year Third Year PHY 1201 4 PHY 1202 Bas. Physics II PHY 1501 Physics Lab 1 1 BIO 1254 Hum. Physiology II BIO 1253 Hum. Physiology 1 4 BIO 1255 Hum. Anat. HSL 1260 Percep. Motor Devel. 3 PSY 1 1 1 2 Fnd. Psych. II PTH 1114 Intro, to Phys. Thrpy. 1 Elective 2 4 PTH 1115 Intro, to Phys. Thrpy. II Course No. Course PTH 1310 Clin. Gross Anat. 6 PTH 1315 Physiol, for Phys. Thrpsts. 3 PTH 1 320 Phys. Thrpy. I 2 PTH 1325 Clin. Medicine I 4 PTH 1330 Clin. Kinesiology PTH 1335 Phys. Thrpy. II PTH 1340 Phys. Thrpy. Ill PTH 1345 Clin. Medicine II PTH 1350 Clin. Psychiatry Rxirth Year No. Course No. Course Q.H. 2 5 3 2 PTH 1355 Phys. Thrpy. IV PTH 1360 Phys. Thrpy. V PTH 1365 Neuroanat. PTH 1370 Clin. Seminar PTH 1 375 Phys. Thrpy. VII PTH 1 380 Super. Clin. Educ. PTH 1 385 Clinc. Medicine III PTH 1390 Phys. Thrpy. VI PTH 1 395 Phys. Thrpy. V cont. Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions / 29 Rfth Year No. Course aH. No. Course Ol PTH 1400 Admin. 3 FTH 1420 Phys. Thrpy. In HIth. 3 PTH 1 405 Research for Phys. Thrpy. 4 Care Syst. PTH 1410 Phys. Thrpy. VIII 2 PTH 1425 Psychosoc. Asp. of Illness 3 PTH 1415 Clinic Educ. 2 FTH 1450 Invest. Studies 6 Electives 8 Elective 4 Department of Recreation and Leisure Studies Areas of Concentration Required Courses Quarter Offered 1. Therapeutic Recreation HSL 1460 Process of Aging 6-8-10 HSL 1463 Overview of Physical Disabilities 6-8-10 HSL 1467 Psychological Aspects of Disabilities 8-10 HSL 1464 Program Planning in Therapeutic Recreation 8-10 HSL 1 466 Foundations of Psychological Services In Therapeutic Recreation 1 0-1 1 Plus thirteen quarter hours of guided department electives 2. Recreation Management HSL 1426 Budget Analysis 6-8-10 HSL 1446 Elements of Outdoor Recreation Planning 6-8-10 HSL 1421 Administration of Recreation and Parks 6-8-10 HSL 1 422 Program Evaluation 7-1 1 Plus sixteen quarter hours of guided department electives 3. Outdoor Recreation/Environment Education HSL 1427 Survey of Facilities ' 7-11 HSL 1 443 Interpretations of Economic Social History 6-8-1 0 HSL 1 444 Environmental Education 7-8-1 1 HSL 1445 Seminar on Environmental Issues and Legislation 6-8-10 HSL 1446 Elements of Outdoor Recreation Planning 6-8-10 Plus thirteen quarter hours of guided department electives Specimen Programs in Teacher Preparation General Requirements: Students must complete the following requirements to earn a Bachelor of Science degree in Education: 1 . Distribution requirements with a minimum of sixteen quarter hours in each one of these areas: humanities, mathematics/sciences, and social sciences. 2. fvlajor course requirements are listed on pages 28-32. (In addition to those courses required of all Elementary Education majors, students in this major must take designated courses in one area of emphasis chosen from the following: humanities, early childhood education, social sciences, mathematics/sciences, language/reading, and special education.) 3. Designated electives offered by the College of Arts and Sciences and the Boston Bouve College of Human Development Professions. These electives, which depend on the particular program of study, are in the areas of English, history, drama/speech, political science, economics, earth science, and the foundations of edu- cation. There is no language requirement. As early as possible students should discuss their curriculum questions and academic needs with a rep- resentative of the Dean's Office or a faculty adviser. 30 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Specimen Program in Early Childhood Education (K-3) Freshman Year (48 Q.H.) HST 1 1 01 Western Civ. 1 ENG 1110 Freshman English I ED 1 1 00 Education and Social Science ED 1 101 Education for the Future GEO Earth Science (Elective) HST 1 1 02 Western Civ. II ECN 1115 Economics GEO Earth Science (Elective) POI Political Science (Elective) ED 1 1 05 Day Care and Nursery Schools ENG 1111 Freshman English II ENG English (Elective) Middler Year (35 Q.H.) ED 1 400 Fundamentals of Reading I ED 1 408 Math/Science I ED 1 405 Literature and Learning Material ED 1 409 Math/Science II ED 1 402 Fundamentals of Reading II (6 Q.H.) ED Educational Humanities Elective POI Political Science Elective HST History Elective Sophomore Year (30 Q.H.) ED 1 1 04 Analysis of the Instructional Process ED 1102 Human Development and LRN. I CRS 1200 Introduction to Special Education HSL 1 260 Motor Skills Development (2 Q.H.) SLA 1101 Introduction to Speech and Hearing ED 1 1 06 Creative Expression in Children ENG English Elective Humanities Elective Junior Year (36 Q.H.) ED 1 406 Elementary Education Curriculum I ED 1403 Remedial Reading ED 1 407 Elementary Education Curriculum II ED 1 306 Measurement and Evaluation COP 1353 Professional Development (1 Q.H.) EDI 304 Language and Cognition ED 1318 Seminar in Early Childhood ED 1416 Field Placement (2 Q.H.) DRA Drama or SPC Speech Math/Science Elective Senior Year (32 Q.H.) ED 1 404 Linguistics and Reading SLA 1 300 Semantics and Syntax ED 1417 Student Teaching (8 Q.H.) HST History Elective Math/Science Elective Elective Elective 182 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement Specimen Program in Elementary Education (Humanities Emphasis) Freshman Year (48 Q.H.) HST 1101 Western Civ. I ENG 1110 Freshman English I ED 1 1 00 Education and Social Science ED 1 101 Education for the Future GEO Earth Science (Elective) HST 1 1 02 Western Civ. II ECN 1115 Economics GEO Earth Science (Elective) POI Political Science (Elective) ENG 1111 Freshman English II ENG English (Elective) ED .Educational Sociology Elective Sophomore Year (32 Q.H.) ED 1104 Analysis of the Instructional Process ED 1 1 02 Human Development I CRS 1200 Introduction to Special Education ED 1 1 03 Human Development I ENG English (Elective) Humanities (Elective) HST History Elective Elective Middler Year (34 Q.H.) Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions/ 31 Junior Year (33 Q.H.) ED 1400 Fundamentals of Reading 1 ED 1406 Elementary Education Curriculum 1 ED 1408 Math/Science 1 ED 1407 Elementary Education Curriculum II ED 1405 Literature and Learning Materials ED 1306 Measurement and Evaluation ED 1409 Math/Science II COP 1353 Professional Development (1 Q.H.) ED 1402 Fundamentals of Reading II (6 Q.H.) HST History Elective ED Educational Humanities Elective DRA Drama or POL Political Science Elective Humanities Elective SPC Speech Math/Science Elective Humanities Elective Senior Year (32 Q.H.) Humanities Elective ED 1417 Student Teaching (8 Q.H) Math/Science Elective Humanities Elective Humanities Elective Humanities Elective Elective Elective 182 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement Specimen Program in Elementary Education (Language/Reading Emphasis) Freshman Year (48 Q.H.) HST 1101 Western Civ 1 ENG 1110 Freshman English 1 ED 1100 Education and Social Science ED 1101 Education for the Future GEO Earth Science Elective HST 1102 Western Civ II ECN 1 1 1 5 Economics GEO Earth Science Elective POL Political Science Elective ENG 1111 Freshman English II ENG English Elective ED Educational Sociology Elective Middler Year (35 Q.H.) ED 1400 Fundamentals of Reading 1 ED 1408 Math/Science 1 ED 1405 Literature and Learning Materials ED 1409 Math/Science II ED 1402 Fundamentals of Reading II (6 Q.H.) ED Educational Humanities Elective POL Political Science Elective Elective Senior Year (32 Q.H.) ED 1417 Student Teaching (8 Q.H) Language/Reading Language/Reading Math/Science Elective Elective Elective Sophomore Year (33 Q.H.) ED 1 1 04 Analysis of the Instructional Process ED 1 1 02 Human Development I CRS 1 200 Introduction to Special Education ED 1103 Human Development II ENG English Elective Humanities Elective HST History Elective Elective Junior Year (34 Q.H.) ED 1 406 Elementary Education Curriculum I ED 1407 Elementary Education Curriculum II ED 1 306 Measurement and Evaluation COP 1353 Professional Development (1 Q.H.) HST History Elective DRA Drama or SPC Speech ED 1403 Remedial Reading ED 1 404 Linguistics and Reading Math/Science Elective 182 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement 32 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Specimen Program in Elementary Education (Social Sciences Emphasis) Freshman Year (48 Q.H.) Sophomore Year (33 Q.H.) HST 1101 Western Civ. 1 ED 1104 Analysis of the Instructional Process ENG 1110 Freshman English 1 ED 1102 Human Development 1 ED 1100 Education and Social Science CRS 1200 Introduction to Special Education ED 1101 Education for the Future ED 1103 Human Development II GEO Earth Science Elective ENG English Elective HST 1 1 02 Western Civ. II Humanities Elective ECN 1115 Economics HST History Elective GEO Earth Science Elective Elective POL Political Science Elective ENG 1 1 1 1 Freshman English II Junior Year (34 Q.H.) ENG English Elective ED 1406 Elementary Education Curriculum 1 ED Educational Sociology Elective £D 1407 Elementary Education Curriculum II ED 1306 Measurement and Evaluation Middler Year (35 Q.H.) COP 1353 Professional Development (1 Q.H.) ED 1400 Fundamentals of Reading 1 HST History Elective ED 1408 Math/Science 1 DRA Drama or ED 1405 Literature and Learning Materials SPC Speech ED 1409 Math/Science II Math/Science Elective ED 1402 Fundamentals of Reading II (6 Q.H.) Social Science Elective ED Educational Humanities Elective Social Science Elective POL Political Science Elective Social Science Elective Senior Year (32 Q.H.) MED 1417 Student Teaching (8 Q.H) Math/Science Elective Social Science Elective Elective Elective Elective /' 1 82 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement Specimen Program in Elementary Education (Special Education Emphasis) Freshman Year (48 Q.H.) HST 1101 Western Civ. I ENG 1110 Freshman English I ED 1 1 00 Education and Social Science ED 1101 Education for the Future GEO Earth Science Elective HST 1 1 02 Western Civ. II ECN 1115 Economics GEO. Earth Science Elective POI Political Science Elective ENG 1 1 1 1 Freshman English II ENG English Elective ED Educational Sociology Elective Sophmore Year (33 Q.H.) ED 1 104 Analysis of the Instructional Process ED 1102 Human Development I CRS 1 200 Introduction to Special Education ED 1 1 03 Human Development II ENG English Elective SLA 1101 Introduction Speech and Hearing Humanities Elective HST History Elective I Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions / 33 Middler Year (35 Q.H.) ED 1 400 Fundamentals of Reading I ED 1408 Math/Science I ED 1405 Literature and Learning Material ED 1 409 Math/Science II ED 1 402 Fundamentals of Reading II (6 Q.H.) ED Educational Humanities Elective POL Political Science Elective PSY 1 373 Psychology of Abnormal Behavior Senior Year (32 Q.H.) ED 1417 Student Teaching (8 Q.H.) ' CRS 1 306 Introduction to Rehabilitation CRS 1301 Diagnostics in Special Education CRS 1 304 Socio-Psycho Dynamics of Family Life CRS 1 302 Methods and Materials of Special Education Math/Science Elective Math/Science Elective Junior Year (34 Q.H.) ED 1406 Elementary Education Curriculum I ED 1407 Elementary Education Curriculum II ED 1 306 Measurement and Evaluation COP 1 353 Professional Development (1 Q.H.) HST History Elective DRA Theatre or SPC Speech CRS 1300 Introduction to Learning Disabilities CRS 1 305 Psychology of the Mentally Retarded CRS 1030 Introduction to the Emotionally Disturbed 182 Q.H. = {Minimum graduation requirement Specimen Program in Speech and Hearing First Year Quarter 1 ENG 1110 ED 1100 BIO 1181 Fresh. English 1 Ed. & Soc. Sci. Hum. Orgnsm. Elective* Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Second Year Quarter 4 ED 1307 SLA 1200 CRS 1200 Intro. Ed. Stat. Hearing Sci. Intro. Spec. Ed. Elective* Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Quarter 2 ENG 1 1 1 1 SLA 1100 Fresh. English II Bs. Man. Comm. Elective* Elective* Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Quarter 5 ED 1102 SLA 1201 Hum. Dev. 1 Anat. Voc. Mech. Elective* Elective* Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Quarter 3 SLA 1101 Intro. Speech Elective* Elective* Elective* Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Third Year Fourth Year Quarter 6 SLA 1301 PSY 1272 SLA 1300 Dev. Phonology Personality 1 Dev. Semantics Elective* Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Quarter 8 SLA 1400 ED 1400 SLA 1401 COP 1353 Speech Sci. Fund. Read. 1 Fluency Dis. Prof. Dev. Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Quarter 7 PSY 1273 SLA 1302 SLA 1303 Personality II Phonemic Dis. Intro. Audiology Elective* Q.H. 4 4 4 4 Quarter 9 SLA 1402 SLA 1403 SLA 1404 Q.H. Diagnostic Tech. 4 Orient. Clin. Prac. 4 Intro. Psychoacoustics 1 Elective* 4 34 / College of Business Administration Fifth Year Quarter 10 Q.H. PSY 1373 Abn. Psych. 1 4 SLA 1500 Psychoacoustics Lab. 4 Elective* 4 Quarter 10a Q.H. SLA 1501 Clin. Prac. 8 Quarter 1 1 Q.H. PSY 1374 Abn. Psych. 11 4 Elective' 4 •Electives must include: 8 Q.H. in Ed. Soc; 4 Q.H. in Ed. Psych.; 16 Q.H. in Lib. Arts Humanities; 4 Q.H. in Lib. Arts Soc. Sci.; 4 Q.H. in Ed.; and 8 Q.H. in Lib. Arts Math/Sci. 177 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement. College of Business Administration Specimen Program for First Three Quarters The courses taken in the first three quarters are the same for all concentrations. Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 No. Course Q.H. No. Course O.H. No. Course Q.H. ACC 1111 MTH 1113 MTH 1114 ECN 1105 ENG 1110 Acct. Prin. 1 4 Math. Busnes. or 4 Fund. Math. 4 Econ. Princ. 4 Fresh. Eng. 1 4 Lib. Elective 4 ACC 1112 MTH 1113 MTH 1114 ECN 1106 ENG 1 1 1 1 Acct. Prin. II or Math. Busnes. or Fund. Math. Lib. Elective Econ. Prin. Fresh. Eng. II MGT1415 Intro. Busn. Lib. Electives Bus. Elective 4 8 4 During the five-year program at least one elective must be taken from the approved International elective list. Accounting Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Quarter 8 Quarter 9 Quarter 10 Quarter 11 MSC 1200, Business Statistics 1 ; MSC 1226, introductton to Data Processing; tw/o nonbusiness electives. MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; three nonbusiness electives. ACC 1331, Intermediate Accounting 1; HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; MKT 1435, Introduction to Marketing; MSC 1433, Business Modeling. ACC 1332, Intermediate Accounting 2; ACC 1339, Cost Accounting 1; 1432, Organizational Behavior; FIN 1438, Introduction to Finance. ACC 1340, Cost Accounting 2; ACC 1343, Intermediate Accounting 3; business elective; open elective. MGT 1446, Business and Society; ACC 1348, Accounting Theory and Practice, or ACC 1349, Accounting Planning and Control; MSC 1441, Operations Man- agement; open elective. MGT 1 450, Business Policy; three open electives. Three open electives; nonbusiness elective. HRM non- Entrepreneurship and New Venture Management Quarter 4 MSC 1200, Business Statistics 1 , MSC 1226, Introduction to Data Processing; two nonbusiness electives. Quarter 5 MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; three nonbusiness electives. College of Business Administration / 35 Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter 10 11 HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; ENT 1350, Small Business Management; MKT 1435, Introduction to Marketing; MSC 1433, Business Modeling. HRM 1432, Organizational Behavior; FIN 1438, Introduction to Finance; two open electives. ENT 1344, Operations Analysis and Venture Capital; two nonbusiness electives; open elective. FIN 1770, Small Business Rnance; MGT 1446, Business and Society; MSC 144'f, Operations Management; open elective. MGT 1450, Business Policy; ENT 1352, New Venture Creation; nonbusiness elective; open elective. ENT 1 358, Small Business Institute Reld Project; two open electives. Rnance and Insurance Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Quarter 8 Quarter 9 Quarter 10 Quarter 11 Nonconcentration Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Quarter 8 Quarter 9 Quarter 10 Quarter 11 MSC 1200, Business Statistics 1 ; MSC 1226, Introduction to Data Processing; two nonbusiness electives. MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; three nonbusiness electives. FIN 1438, Introduction to Rnance; FIN 1333, Money and Business Activity; HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; nonbusiness elective. FIN 1335, Managerial Finance; MKT 1435, Introduction to Marketing; HRM 1432, Organizational Behavior; MSC 1433, Business Modeling. FIN 1346, Investment Management; Finance elective; MSC 1441, Operations Management; open elective. MGT 1446, Business and Society; Rnance elective; nonbusiness elective; open elective. MGT 1 450, Business Policy; Rnance elective; two open electives. Four open electives. MSC 1200, Business Statistics 1; three nonbusiness electives. MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; MSC 1226, Introduction to Data Processing; two nonbusiness electives. HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; FIN 1438, Introduction to Rnance; MSC 1433, Business Modeling; open elective. HRM 1432, Organizational Behavior; MKT 1435, Introduction to Marketing; business elective; open elective. MSC 1441, Operations Management; two business electives; open elective. MGT 1 446, Business and Society; business elective; nonbusiness elective; open elective. MGT 1450, Business Policy; business elective; nonbusiness elective; open elective. Business elective; three open electives. Human Resources Management Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Quarter Quarter 9 Quarter 10 MSC 1200, Business Statistics 1; MSC 1226, Introductbn to Data Processing; two nonbusiness electives. MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; three nonbusiness electives. HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; MKT 1435, Introduction to Marketing; MSC 1433, Business Modeling; open elective. HRM 1 332, People and Productivity; HRM 1 432, Organizational Behavior; RN 1438, Introduction to Rnance; open elective. HRM 1 348, Reward Systems; HRM 1 439, Assessment of Prospective Employ- ees; nonbusiness elective; open elective. MGT 1446, Business and Society; MSC 1441, Operations Management; Human Resources Management elective; open elective. HRM 1345, Contemporary Labor Issues; MGT 1450, Business Policy; Human Resources Management elective; open elective. 36 / College of Buiness Administration International Business Administration Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Quarter 8 Quarter 9 Quarter 10 Quarter 11 Management Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Quarter 8 Quarter 9 Quarter 10 Quarter 1 1 Marketing Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 Quarter 8 Quarter Quarter 10 Quarter 1 1 MSC 1 200, Business Statistics 1 ; three nonbusiness electives. MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; two nonbusiness electives. HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; INB 1338, Introduction to International Business; FIN 1438, Introduction to Finance; open elective. HRM 1432, Organizational Behavior; MKT 1435, Introduction to Marketing; MSC 1433, Business Modeling; open elective. MSC 1441, Operations Management; business elective; International nonbusi- ness elective; open elective. MGT 1 446, Business and Society; International nonbusiness elective; two open electives. MGT 1450, Business Policy; International nonbusiness elective; two open elec- tives. INB 1352; Seminar in International Business; International business elective; two open electives. MSC 1 200, Business Statistics 1 ; three nonbusiness electives. MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; MSC 1226, Introduction to Data Processing; two nonbusiness electives. FIN 1438, Introduction to Rnance; HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; MSC 1433, Business Modeling; open elective. MKT 1435, Introduction to Marketing; HRM 1432, Organizational Behavior; ACC 1330, Cost Accounting; HRM 1332, People and Productivity. MGT 1345, Legal Aspects of Business; MSC 1441, Operations Management; business elective; open elective. MGT 1446, Business and Society; business elective; nonbusiness elective; open elective. MGT 1 450, Business Policy; nonbusiness elective; two open electives. Business elective; three open electives. MSC 1200, Business Statistics 1; MSC 1226, Introductbn to Data Processing; two nonbusiness electives. MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; three nonbusiness electives. MKT 1435, Introduction to Marketing; HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; nonbusiness elective; open elective. FIN 1438, Introduction to Rnance; HRM 1432, Organizational Behavior; MKT 1331, Marketing Management; MSC 1433, Business Modeling. MKT 1341, Marketing Research; Marketing elective; nonbusiness elective; open elective. MGT 1446, Business and Society; MSC 1441, Operations Management; Mar- keting elective; open elective. MKT 1351, Competitive Strategies; MGT 1450, Business Policy; two open electives. Marketing elective; three open electives. Transportation and Physical Distribution Management Quarter 4 Quarter 5 Quarter 6 Quarter 7 MSC 1 200, Business Statistics 1 ; three nonbusiness electives. MSC 1201, Business Statistics 2; MSC 1226, Introduction to Data Processing; two nonbusiness electives. HRM 1431, Complex Organizations; FIN 1438, Introduction to Rnance; TRN 1333, Introduction to Transportation; open elective. HRM 1 432, Organizational Behavior; Transportation elective; MKT 1 435, Intro- duction to Marketing; TRN 1335, Current Issues in Transportation Policy; MSC 1433, Business Modeling. College of Computer Science / 37 Quarter 8 Quarter 9 Quarter 10 Quarter 1 1 MSC 1 441 , Operations Management; Transportation elective; nonbusiness elec- tive; open elective. MGT 1446, Business and Society; TRN 1344, Physical Distribution Manage- ment; nonbusiness elective; open elective. MGT 1 450, Business Policy; Transportation elective; two open electives. TRN 1353, Seminar in Transportation; three open electives. College of Computer Science specimen Program in Computer Science Rrst Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Course COM 1100 PASCAL I MTH 1 1 23 Calculus I ENG 1110 Fresh. Engl. I HST 1101 Western Civ. COM 1101 PASCAL II MTH 1125 Calculus III MTH 1 1 24 Calculus II PHY 1241 Physics 1 MTH 1409 Discr. Math. 1 COM 1 201 Data Struc. HST 1102 Western Civ. ENG 1111 Fresh. Engl. II COM 1113 COBOL Lab COM 1110 FORTRAN Lab Second Year Third Year Fourth Year rto. Course Q.H. No. Course aH. PHY 1 242 Physics II COM 1130 Assembly Lang. 1 MTH 1223 Calculus IV COM 1111 DCL Lab or COM 1 1 1 4 C Lab COM 1102 LISP Quarters 4 4 4 1 4 PHY 1243 Physics III COM 1131 Assembly Lang. II MTH 1237 Discrete Math II COM 1205 Software Design Quarter 7 4 4 4 4 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. ECE 1191 MTH 1301 COM Quarter 8 Comp. Org. 8 Des. 1 Linear Algebra C.S Elective (1) Elective/Subarea (1) 4 4 4 4 ECE 1192 MTH 1387 COM ENG 1125 Quarter 9 Comp. Org. & Des. II Probability C.S. Elective (2) Tech. Writing 4 4 4 4 r4o. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. COM COM C.S. Elective (3) C.S. Elective (4) Elective/Subarea (2) Elective/Subarea (3) COM C.S. Elective (5) COM C.S. Elective (6) SOC 1 485 Computers & Soc. Elective/Subarea (4) Rfth Year Course Course COM C.S. Elective (7) 4 Elective/Subarea (5) 4 Elective/Subarea (6) 4 Elective/Subarea (7) 4 Note: Three of the Computer Science electives COM C.S. Elective (8) COM 1 620 C.S. Seminar Elective/Subarea (8) Elective/Subarea (9) Elective/Subarea (10) must form a complete track. 38 / College of Computer Science Computer Science Major Requirements Checklist Computer Science No. Course COM 1 1 00 COM 1101 COM 1102 COM 1110 COM 1111 COM 1113 COM 1114 COM 1201 COM 1205 COM 1130 COM 1131 PASCAL I PASCAL II LISP FOFITRAN Lab DCL Lab COBOL Lab C Lab Data Structures Software Design Assembly Language Assembly Language Level II (select eight courses, Including at least one complete track) Course Data Base Track COM 1310 RIe Structures COM 1315 Data Base Mngmt. I COM 1316 Data Base Mngmt. II Systems Track COM 1 330 Systems Prgrmmg. COM 1335 Operating Systems I COM 1336 Operating Systems II Languages Track COM 1 350 Automata & Form. Lan. COM 1 355 Compiler Design I COM 1 356 Compiler Design II Mathematics Electives COM 1358 Anal, of Prog. Lang. 4 COM 1370 Computer Graptiics 4 COM 1 390 Analysis of Algorithms 4 COM 1410 Artificial Intelligence 4 COM 1 420 Interactive Systems 4 Seminar (To be taken during senior year) COM 1 620 Computer Sci. Sem. 1 No. Course MTH 1 1 23 Calculus I MTH 1124 Calculus II MTH 1125 Calculus III MTH 1223 Calculus IV MTH 1137 Discrete Math. MTH 1237 Discrete Math. MTH 1387 Probability MTH 1301 Linear Algebra Physics Electrical Engineering Other Subject Areas PHY 1241 Physics I PHY 1242 Physics II PHY 1243 Physics III ECE 1191 Computer Org. and Des. ECE1192 Computer Org. and Des. No. Course ENG 1110 Freshman English I ENG 1111 Freshman English II ENG 1125 Technical Writing HST1101 Western Civilization I HST1102 Western Civlization II SOC 1 485 Computers and Society Electives (total 20 Q.H.) (total 20 Q.H.) College of Computer Science / 39 Computer Science Requirements Requirements for Computer Science Majors Computer Science Courses Mathematics Courses Physics Courses Electrical Engineering Courses Other Subject Areas Computer Science courses fall into one of two levels. Level I consists of Courses: COM 1100, COM 1101, COM 1102, COM 1130, COM 1131, COM 1201, COM 1205; Labs: COM 1110, COM 1113, and COM llllor COM 1114. All Level I courses and labs are required for the major. The rest of the computer science courses are in Level II. Majors must take eight Level II courses; three of these must form one of the follov/ing tracks: Data Base Track COM 1310, COM 1315, COM 1316; Systems Track COM 1330, COM 1335, COM 1336; Languages Track COM 1 350, COM 1 355, COM 1 356. Rnally, majors must take the one-credit seminar COM 1 620 during their senior year. Major must take the following eight mathematics courses; Level I Calculus MTH 1123, MTH 1124, MTH 1125, and MTH 1223; Discrete Mathematics MTH 1137, MTH 1237. Level II Probability MTH 1387; Linear Algebra MTH 1301. Majors must take the following three physics courses: Physics PHY 1241, PHY 1242, and PHY 1243. Majors must take the following two electrical engineering courses: Digital Com- puters ECE 1191 and ECE 1192. Majors must take the following six courses: English ENG 1 1 10 and ENG 1111; Technical Writing ENG 1125; Computers and Society SOC 1485; Western Civilization HST 1101 and HST 1102. In addition, majors must take at least five courses in a selected subarea of humanities, science, social science, business, education, or engineering. The College of Computer Science will provide lists of suitable courses in a variety of subareas. Majors have five free electives. However, at least two courses among the total ten (five in the subarea and five electives) must be in social sciences or humanities. NOTES: I.The total number of credit hours required for graduation is 179. 2. During the first two years, students should take all Level I computer science and mathematics courses, physics, English, Western Civilization, and one other course. The three computer science track courses should be taken in the third and fourth year. See the Specimen Program for details on program arrangement. Requirements for Computer Science Minors In addition to fulfilling the requirements of their major department, students who wish to minor in computer science must take the following four courses: COM 1 1 00, COM 1101, COM 1 1 30, COM 1 201 . They must also take three additional four-quarter-hour courses with the COM prefix. 40 / College of Criminal Justice College of Criminal Justice Specimen Program in Criminal Justice Rrst Year Course No. Course Course CJ 1101 Admin. Grim. Just. ECN 1115 Prin,/Prob. Econ. POL 1110 Intro. Politics PSY 1111 Fnd. Psych I CJ 1151 Law& Legl. Pro. ECN 1116 Prin./Prob. Econ. POL 1111 Intro, Amer. Gov. ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. I CJ 1 1 1 2 ISSCJ Admins. SOC 1100 Intro. Soc. PSY 1112 Fnd.Psych.il ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II CJ 1 1 1 3 Crit. Issues in Grim. Jus. Admin. Second Year 4 POL 1318 State & Loc. Gov. 4 Math/Sci. Require. CJ 1251 Grim. La\N 4 Non-Crim. Jus. Elective CJ 1201 Criminology 4 CJ Grim. Jus. Elective Math/Sci. Require. 4 CJ 1252 Constitutional Prob. Third Year Fourth Year Rfth Year Quarter 6 Quarter 7 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. CJ Grim. Jus. Elective 4 CJ Grim. Jus. Elective 4 Non-Grim. Justice Elective CJ 1451 Grim. Jus. Research HST1101 Western Civ. I Non-Grim. Jus. Elective Non-Grim. Jus. Elective 102 Western Civ. II Grim. Jus. Electives Non-Crim. Jus. Electives 36 College of Engineering Specimen Program in Chemical Engineering All courses in Chemical Engineering must be taken in sequence shown. First Year MTH 1 1 23 Calculus 1 4 MTH 1124 Calculus II 4 MTH 1125 Calculus III 4 PHY 1221 Physics lor 4 PHY 1 222 Physics II 4 PHY 1 223 Physics III 4 PHY 1251 Physics Rev. 6 GE 1110 Eng. Graph, and 4 CHM 1 1 32 Gen. Chem. 4 GE 1 1 00 Gomp. for Eng. 4 Des. ENG 1 1 1 3 Gr. Th. Lit. 4 ENG 1111 Intro. Lit. or 4 CHM 1131 Gen. Chem. 4 CHM 1138 Chem. Lab 1 ENG 1005 Engl. Intl. 1 4 BIO 1 1 30 Plants in Hum. Affairs 4 Rrst-year pattern of tvwo-term courses may vary according to assigned section. Quarters 4, 6. 8, and 1 0 offered Fall and Winter. Quarters 5, 7, and 9 offered Spring and Summer. Second Year College of Engineering / 41 No. Course Ho. Course MTH 1223 Calculus IV PHY 1224 Physics IV CHE 1201 Chem. Engr. Cal. CHM 1261 Organic Chem I PHY 1521 Physics Lab I MTH 1224 Calculus V CHE 1202 Chem. Engr. Cal. CHM 1262 Organic Chem. II PHY 1522 Physics Lab II CHE 1420 Chem. Thermo Third Year Course Fourth Year MTH 1225 Math. Analysis I CHE 1301 Chem. Engr. I CHM 1391 Phys. Chem. I ECN 1115 Economics I Quarter 8 No. Course No. Course CHE 1401 Trans. Phen. I CHE 1410 Exp. Methods I CHE 1420 Chem. Engr. Therm. Soc. Sci./Hum. Electii MTH 1 226 Math. Analysis CHE 1302 Chem. Engr. II CHM 1392 Phys. Chem. II ECN 1116 Economics II Quarter 9 Course 4 CHE 1402 Trans. Phen. II CHE 1411 Exp. Methods II CHE 1421 Chem. Engr. Kinet. Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective* 4 4 Rfth Year No. Course No. Course CHE 1501 Proc. Des. I CHE 1 503 Projects I CHE Chem. Engr. Elective CHE Chem. Engr. Elective Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective* 6 CHE 1 502 Proc. Des. II 6 CHE 1 504 Projects II 4 CHE Chem. Engr. Elective 4 CHE Chem. Engr. Elective 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective* Specimen Program in Civil Engineering Rrst Year GE 11 GO Comp. for Engr. MTH 1123 Calculus I PHY 1221 Physics I ENG 1111 Fresh. Engl. II 3 4 GE 1 1 1 0 Engr. Graph. Des. and3 4 3 4 3 4 MTH 1 1 24 Calculus II 3 4 3 4 PHY 1222 Physics II 3 4 CHM 1131 Gen. Chem. 3 4 MTH 1125 Calculus III 3 4 PHY 1 223 Physics III 3 4 CHM 1132 Gen. Chem. 3 4 ENG 1111 Gr. Th. Lit. 3 . 4 The elective courses completed must have a combined total of at least eleven engineering science credits according to the department's list of elective courses. **Quarters 1 0 and 1 1 must be approved by department adviser. Second Year No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course CI. Q.Y PHY 1521 Physics Lab 1 0(3)1 PHY 1 522 Physics Lab II 0(3)1 MTH 1223 Calculus IV 3 4 MTH 1224 Calculus V 3 4 CIV 1620 Engr. Meas. 3 4 ECN 1116 Economics II 3 4 CIV 1621 Engr. Meas. Lab. 0(3)2 CIV 1211 Struct. Mech. 2 3 4 CIV 1210 Struct. Mech. 1 3 4 CIV 1620 Engr. Meas. 3 4 CIV 1610 Comp. Appl. in CE 3 4 CIV 1621 Engr. Meas. Lab 0(3)2 CIV 1510 Materials 3 4 CIV 1510 Materials 3 4 CIV 1511 Materials Lab 0(3)2 CIV 1511 Materials Lab 0(3)2 CIV 1620, CIV 1621 offered Fall and Summer quarters. CIV 1510, CIV 151 1 offered Winter and Sprin g quarters. 42 / College of Engineering Third Year No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course CI. Q.h MTH 1225 Math. Anal. 1 3 4 IIS 1366 Eng. Economy 4 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 3 4 ME 1320 Dynamics 4 4 CIV 1310 Fluid Mech. 4 4 CIV 1340 Environ. Eng. 4 4 CIV 1220 Struc. Anal. 1 4 4 SPC 1115 Intro. Comm. Skill CIV 1226 Struc. Anal. & Des. 4 4 Fourth Year ECE 1171 Elec. Engr. 1 3 4 CIV 1340 Environ. Engr. 1 3 4 CIV 1410 Soil Mech.* 3 4 CIV 1240 Concrete Des. 1* 3 4 CIV 1411 Soil Mech. Lab* 0(3)2 or or CIV 1410 Soil Mech. 3 4 CIV 1240 Concrete Des. 1 * 3 4 CIV 1411 Soil Mech. Lab (3) 2 Tech. Elective 3 4 Tech. Elective 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. Soc. Sci. Hum. Elective 4 Rfth Year 1 250 Struct. Des. 3 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 3 4 Tech. Elective 3 4 Tech. Elective 3 4 Gen. Electivet 3 4 Tech. Elective 3 4 Tech. Elective 3 4 Tech. Elective 3 4 "In Quarter 8 one-half of the class takes CIV 1 240, the other CIV 1410 and CIV 1411; in Quarter 9 the sections are reversed. tThis may be a technical or arts and sciences elective or any other course given at the University. The general elective may be interchanged v/Wh an arts and sciences elective in another quarter, with the approval of the Civil Engineering Department. Technical Electives Quarters 8 & 10 Spring Quarters 9 4 11 No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course CI. Q.^ CIV 1820 Special Topics CIV 1820 Special Topics CIV 1810 Special Topics CIV 1810 Special Topics CIV 1320 Hydraulic Eng* CIV 1630 C.E. Engr. Sys. CIV 1212 Struct. Mech. lilt CIV 1550 Constr. Engr. CIV 1241 Concrete Des. lit CIV 1540 Highway Engr. CIV 1430 Geotechnology CIV 1251 Struct. Des. lit CIV 1341 Environ. Engr. II* CIV 1420 Found. Engr.t CIV 1640 App. Probabilityt CIV 1360 Environ. Des* CIV 1222 Struct. Analysist CIV 1 660 Tech. Assess. IIS 1346 Bas. Engr. Statistics CIV 1650 Legal Aspects IIS 1366 Engr. Economyt CIV 1530 Transp. Engr. CIV 1350 Envl. & Hydraulics CIV 1224 Struct. Analysis lilt Lab* CIV 1370 Air Pollution* IIS 1346 Engr. Statistics IIS 1366 Engr. Economy *Required for Environmental Concentration tRecommended for Structures Concentration Note: During the summer the Civil Engineering Department offers a limited number of technical electives. Students should check with the Department for specific information. Technical electives from other engineering departments may be elected with the approval of the Civil Engineering Department Curriculum Committee. College of Engineering / 43 Specimen Program in Civil Engineering Approved for progressive implementation beginning with second year for class of 1 989. First Year Same as current program Second Year No. Course CI. aH. No. Course CI. Q.^ MTH 1223 Calc. IV 4 4 MTH 1224 Calc. V. 4 4 CIV 1210 Struc. Mech. 1 4 4 ECN 1116 Econ. II 4 4 CIV 1610 Comb. App. CE 4 4 CIV 1211 Struc. Mech. II 4 4 CIV 1620 Engr. Meas. 4 4 CIV 1510 Materials 4 4 CIV 1621 Engr. Meas. Lab (0)3 2 CIV 1511 Mat. Lab (0)3 2 PHY 1521 Phys. Lab 1 (0)3 1 PHY 1522 Ptiys. Ub II (0)31 CIV 1510. CIV 151 1 offered Winter and Spring Quarters. CIV 1620, CIV 1621 offered Fall and Summer Quarters. Third Year MTH 1 225 Matfi. Anal. CIV 1220 CIV 1226 Fluid Mecfi. Lib. Arts Elective Des. & Struc. Anal. Struc. Anal. & Des. Lab SPC 1115 Intro. Commun. Skills 4 4 CIV 1 340 Env. Engr. i 4 4 IIS 1366 Eng. Econ. 4 4 ME 1 320 Struct. Anal. 1 4 4 Fourth Year Fifth Year No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course CI. aH. CIV 1410 Soil Mecti. and 4 4 ECE 1171 Elec. Engr. 1 4 4 CIV 1411 Soils Lab or 0(3)2 Tech. Elective 4 4 CIV 1240 Concrete 1 4 4 Soc. Sci. Elect, 4 4 PHY 1224 Physics 4 4 4 CIV 1410 Soil Mech. and 4 4 Tech. Elective 4 4 CIV 1411 Soil Mech. Lab or 0(3)4 Soc./Hum. Elective 4 4 CIV 1 240 Concrete 1 4 4 Course Tech. Elective Tech. Elective CIV 1 250 Steel Des. I Liberal Arts Elective Gen. Elective Tech. Elective Tech. Elective The technical elective courses completed must have a combined elective courses. of at least eleven design credits according to the department's list of Specimen Program in Electrical and Computer Engineering Rrst Year Course CI. Course GE 1 1 00 Comp. for Engr. 4 .MTH 1123 Calculus I 4 PHY 1221 Physics I 4 ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II 4 GE 1110 Engr. Graph, and Des. 4 4 PHY 1222 Physics II 4 4 MTH 1 1 24 Calculus II 4 4 CHM 1131 Gen. Chem. 4 4 MTH 1128 Calc. 3 4 PHY 1223 Physics II 4 4 CHM 11 32 Gen. Chem. 4 4 ENG 1 1 1 3 Gr. Th. Lit. 4 4 Second Year No. Course No. Course MTH 1 225 Math Anal. 1 4 4 PHY 1224 Physics 4 4 ECE 1215 Cir. & Sys. I 4 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 4 PHY 1521 Physics Lab 0(3)1 ECE 1101 Elec. Engr. Lab 1-A 0(4)1 MTH 1224 Calculus V ME 1321 Mech. ECE 1216 Cir. & Sys. 2 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. PHY 1 522 Physics Lab ECE 1102 Elec. Engr. Lab 1-B 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0(3)1 0(4)1 44 / College of Engineering Third Year Course ECE 1217 Cir. & Sys. 3 ECE 1 332 Discrete Syst. ECE 1 346 Electron. I ME 1340 Therm. I or ME 1386 Mat. Sci. ECE 1301 Elec. Engr. Lab I 0(4)1 ECE 1218 Cir. & Sys. 4 ECE 1333 Cont. Sys. ECE 1347 Electron. II ECE 1302 E.E. Lab2-B Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective Fourth Year Course ECE 1 349 Electron. Des. 1 ECE 1363 E.M. Field Th. 1 ECE 1381 Comp. Eng. 1 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. ECE 1304 Elec. Engr. Lab lll-A ECE 1350 Electron. Des. 2 4 4 ECE 1364 EM. Field Tti. 2 4 4 ECE 1382 Comp. Eng. 2 4 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. 4 4 Elective ECE 1305 Elec. Engr. Lab lll-b 0(4)1 Rfth Year Course CI. Q.H. No. Course ECE 1 383 Comp. Eng. 3 4 4 ECE 1 420 Control Systems or ECE 1454 Comm. Syst. 4 4 ECE 1408 Physical Elect. 4 4 ECE 1465 Wave Tr. & Recep. or 4 4 ECE 1375 Electromech. Dy. or ECE 1307 Elec. Engr. Lab IV 0(4)2 Optional Tech. Elective Tech. Elective Note: Seven arts and sciences electives (in either social sciences or humanities) are required for graduation. Tw/o of these may be taken on a pass/fail basis in SEPARATE quarters. Also, four technical electives are required for graduation. 383 Comp. Eng. 3 454 Comm. Syst. Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. Tech. Elec. 307 Elec. Engr. Lab IV Specimen Program in Power Systems Rrst Year Quarter 1 No. Course No. Course Course MTH1123 Calculus I PHY 1221 Physics I GE 1 1 00 Comp. for Engr. ENG 1 1 1 1 Fresh. Eng. II MTH 1 1 24 Calculus II PHY 1 222 Physics II GE 1110 Engr. Graph. Des. CHM 1131 Gen. Chem. I MTH 1128 Calc. Ill PHY 1223 Physics III CHM 1132 Gen. Chem. ENG 1113 Gr. Th. Lit. Second Year Course No. Course MTH 1225 Math. Anal. 1 PHY 1 224 Physics IV ECE 1215 Cir. & Sys. 1 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective ECE 1101 Elec. Engr. Lab 1-A PHY 1521 Physics Lab I MTH 1224 Calculus V ME 1321 Mech. ECE 1216 Cir. & Sys. 2 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective PHY 1 522 Phys. Lab 2 ECE 1 1 02 Elec. Engr. Lab l-B PHY 1522 Physics Lab II Third Year Quarters 4 and 6 offered Fall and Winter. Quarters 5 and 7 offered Spring and Winter. Course ECE 1217 Cir. & Sys. 3 ME 1340 Therm. I or ME 1 386 Mat. Sci. ECE 1 332 Discrete Sys. ECE 1346 Electron. 1 ECE 1301 Elec. Engr. Lab Course ECE 1218 Cir. & Sys. 4 4 ECE 1333 Cont. Sys. 4 ECE 1347 Electron. 2 4 Soc. Sci/Hum. Elective 4 ECE 1302 Elec. Engr. Lab ll-B 1 College of Engineering / 45 Fourth Year Quarter 8 (Fall Only) Course ECE 1349 Electron. Des. 1 ECE 1 363 E.M. Reld Th, 1 ECE 1381 Comp. Eng. 1 SS/H ECE 1 304 Elec. Engr Lab lll-A Quarter 9 (Spring Only) Cotyse ECE 1350 Electron. Des. 2 ECE 1364 E.M. Reld. Th. 2 ECE 1 305 Comp. Eng. 2 SS/H Soc. Scl./Hum. Elective Fifth Year Quarter 10 (Winter Only) Quarter 1 1 (Spring Only) No. Course No. Course ECE 1471 Elec. Pow. Sys. 1 4 ECE 1371 Elect. Mach. 1 4 ME 1341 Thermo. 2 4 ECE 1431 Elect. Pow. Ub. 1 1 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective 4 ECE 1472 Elect. Pow. Sys. 2 ECE 1372 Elect. Mach. 2 ECE 1379 Trans. E. Pow. Sys. ECE 1 434 Elect. Pow. Lab 2 The elective courses completed must have a combined total of at least two design credits according to the departmenf s list of elective courses. *ln Quarter 1 1 , only one technical elective is required tor graduation. Specimen Program in General Engineering RrstYear Quarter 1 Course Course MTH1123 Calculus I PHY 1221 Physics I GE 1 1 00 Comp. for Engr. ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II MTH 1 1 24 Calculus II PHY 1222 Physics II GE 1110 Engr. Graph. Des. Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective MTH 1125 PHY 1223 ENG 1113 Calculus III Physics III Gr. Th. Lit. Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective Second Year No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. MTH 1223 Calculus IV 4 MTH 1224 Calculus V 4 PHY 1 224 Physics IV 4 Engr. Sci. Elective 4 Engr. Sci. Elective 4 Coord. Study Elec- 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. 4 tive Elective Soc. Sci./Hum. 4 PHY 1521 Physics Lab 1 1 Elective PHY 1522 Physics Lab II 1 Third Year Course Engr. Sci. Elective Coord. Study Elec- Coord. Study Elec- Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective Engr. Sci. Elective Engr. Sci. Elective Coord. Study Elec- tive Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective 46 / College of Engineering Fourth Year Course Course Engr. Sci. Elective Engr. Sci. Elective Coord. Study Elec- tive" Coord. Study Elec- Engr. Sci. Elective Engr. Sci. Elective Coord. Study Elec- tive Coord. Study Elec- tive Rfth Year Course Course Engr. Sci. Elective Engr. Sci. Elective Coord. Study Elec- tive Coord. Study Elec- Engr. Sci. Elective Coord. Study Elec- tive Coord. Study Elec- tive Coord. Study Elec- tive Note: Quarters 4, 6, 8, and 10 offered Fall and Winter; quarters 5, 7, and 9 offered Spring and Summer. •Coordinated Study electives are courses chosen to meet the student's career objectives; these courses will be selected in conjunction with the student's adviser and are subject to the adviser's approval. Specimen Program in Industrial Engineering Rrst Year Quarter 1 No. Course No. Course No. Course MTH 1123 Calculus I PHY 1221 Physics I GE 1100 Comp. for Engr. ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II MTH 1124 Calculus II PHY 1 222 Physics II GE 1110 Engr. Graph, and Des. CHM 1131 Gen. Chem. MTH 1 1 25 Calculus III PHY 1223 Physics III CHM 1132 Gen. Chem. ENG 1113 Gr. Th. Ut. Second Year Course Course IIS 1200 Work Des. MTH 1 223 Calculus IV PHY 1224 Physics IV ECN 1115 Economics I PHY 1521 Physics Lab I 3(3)4 4 4 0(3) IIS 1300 Probabilistic Analysis 4 4 ME 1301 Mech. 4 4 MTH 1224 Calculus V 4 4 ECN 1116 Economics II 4 4 PHY 1522 Physics Lab II 0(3)1 Third Year No. Course Course IIS 1330 Prin. of Comp. and Prog. I ECE 1171 Elec. Engr. I Math Elective IIS 1310 Statistics I Elective IIS 1320 IIS 1340 Statistics II Operations Res. Engr. Sci. Elect. Eng. Sci. El. or Math Elective Fourth Year Course IIS 1400 Systems 1 IIS 1350 Dig. Sim. Tech. IIS 1341 Operations Res. Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective SPC 1102 Effective Spkg. Engr. Econ. and Dec.4 4 Thry. Engr. Sci. Elect. 4 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. 4 4 Elective Prod. Inv. CI. 4 4 Rfth Year College of Engineering / 47 Course Course People in Organi- zations Tech. Elective Tech. Elective Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective Tech. Elective Tech. Elective Open Elective Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective The elective courses completed must have a combined total of at least twelve engineering science credits and two design credita Specimen Program in Mechanical Engineering Rrst Year 1 Course CI. Course Course GE 1 1 00 Comp. for Engr* 4 MTH 1123 Calculus I 4 PHY 1221 Physical 4 ENG 1 1 1 1 Fresh. Engl. II* 4 GE 1110 Engr. Graph, and I IvITH 1 1 24 Calculus II PHY 1 222 Physics II OHM 1131 Gen. Chem.* MTH 1125 Calculus III PHY 1223 Physics III ENG 1113 Gr. Th. Lit.* CHM 1131 Gen. Chem.' •Rrst-year pattern of two-term courses may vary according to assigned section. Second Year No. No. ME 1311 Statics 4 4 MTH 1223 Calculus IV 4 4 PHY 1 224 Physics IV 4 4 PHY 1521 Physics Lab I 0(3)1 ECN 1115 Prin. and Prob. of 4 4 Econ. ME 1312 Dynamics I ME 1340 Therm. II MTH 1224 Calculus V PHY 1 522 Physics Lab II Soc Sci./Hum. Elective 4 4 0(3)1 4 4 Third Year *Given in Quarters 6 and 7. Fourth Year No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course CI. Q.y ME 1341 Therm. II 4 4 ME 1370 Ruid Mech. 1 4 4 ME 1390 Meas. and Analysis* 0(3)4 ME 1380 Materials Sci. or 4(3)5 or ME 1390 Meas. & Anal. 2(3)4 ME 1380 Mat. Science 5 ME 1226 Math. Analysis II 4 4 MTH 1225 Math. Anal. 1 4 4 ME 1314 Strgthmat II 4 4 No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course CI. Q.Y Tech. Elective 4 4 ME 1345 Heat Transfer 1 4 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. Elec. 4 4 Tech. Elective 4 4 ME 1330 Design Fund 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. 4 4 ECE 1171 Elect. Eng. 4 Elective ME 1395 Research RP 1 ME 1315 Dynamics II 4 4 48 / College of Engineering Fifth Year Course Course Tech. Elective ME 1331 ME Design ME 1 332 Ht. & Ms. Trans. Soc. Sci./ Hum. Bee. Tech. Elective 4 Tech. Elective 4 Tech. Elective 4 Soc. Scl./Hum. Elective4 Elective requirements for the junior and senior years (B.S. in M.E.) Juniors and seniors will select ten (10) technical and four (4) arts and sciences electives, subject to the following Department restrictions: A. Arts and Sciences electives (four): Must be selected from a Department-approved list of humanities and/or social science courses, which Is available during prereglstration. B. Required technical electives: 1. ECE 1171 Electrical Engineering 1 (Fall, Winter) 2. ME 1480 Mechanical Behavior of Materials (Fall, Winter) or ME 1 483 Materials Processing (Spring, Summer) 3a. ME 1331 Mechanical Engineering Design (Prereq. ME 1330) (Fall, Winter) or ME1439 Engineering Design (Classes of 1983 and 1984) 3b. ME 1331 Mechanical Engineering Design (FYereq. ME 1330) and ME 1 332 Heat and Mass Transfer Design (Prereq. ME 1 345) (Starts with class of 1 985) C. Additional technical electives: The remaining technical electives should be chosen after consideration of your professional career objectives and must be approved by your adviser during prereglstration in the Department. The major of these courses must be selected from the Mechanical Engineering elective course offerings. The student's area of concentration determines the recommended courses from which he or she is to choose electives. Specimen B.S./M.S. Program in Mechanical Engineering During the first two years of study, students enrolled in the B.S./M.E. Program in Mechanical Engineering pursue a curriculum similar to that of the regular M.E. Program. Third Year Fourth Year No. Course a. aH. No. Course Q. Q.h ME 1341 ME 1302 ME 1390 ME 1380 MTH 1225 Therm. II Mech. Ill Meas. and Analysis Mat. Science Math Analysis Soc. SciTHum. Elective 4 4 4 4 or 2(3)4 4 5 4 4 4 4 ME 1370 ME 1380 ME 1304 MTH 1226 Ruid Mech. 4 Mats. Science 4 Mech. IV 4 Math Analysis 4 Soc. SciVHum. Elective4 Quarter 8 Quarters No. Course a. aH. No. Course O. a^ ME 3101 Tech. Elective Tech. Elective Tech. Elective Soc. Sci./Hum. Elective Grad. Elective Math Methods 1 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 ME 1345 ME 1305 ME 3102 Heat Transfer 1 4 Dynamics 4 Tech. Elective 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. 4 Elective Grad. Elective 2 Math Methods II 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 Fifth Year Quarter 10 Course Grad. Elective Tech. Elective Tech. Elective Grad. Elective Grad. Elective Seminar Tech. Elective Thesis6 Tech. Elective Seminar Note: Technical elective requirements are the same as those for the regular Mechanical Engineering program. The elective courses completed must have a combined total of at least four design credits and four and one-half engineering science credits. School of Engineering Technology / 49 Specimen Program in Computer Science Third Year Fourth Year No. Course Q.H. No. Course aH. MTH 1301 Lin. Algebra COM 1310 RIe Structures ECE 1 192 Comp. Org. & Des. Coordin. Study Quarters 4 4 4 4 IIS 1300 Probabilityt or MTH 1387 Probability COM 1 335 Operating Sys. Coordinated Study Soc. Sci./Hum. Quarter 9 No. Course Q.H. No. Course aH. IIS 1310 Statistics It 4 COM 1358 Analysis of Prog. Ung. 4 COM 1 350 Automata and Format Lang. 4 Soc Sci./Hum. 4 Quarter 10 COM 1355 Compiler Des. 1 COM 1390 Anal, of Algorithms Coordinated Study Soc. Sci./Hum. Quartern 4 4 4 4 No. Course Q.H. No. . Course Q.H. Comp. Sci. Elect.* 4 Coordinated Study 4 Coordin. Study 4 Coordinated Study 4 Coordin. Study 4 Soc. Sci./Hum. 4 COM 1600 Comp. Sci. Proj. 4 COM 1 620 Comp. Sci. Sem. 4 Fifth Year tStudents interested in the theoretical aspects of computer science should substitute MTH 1387 and t^lTH 1390. tCOM 1410 Artificial Intelligence, COM 1370 Computer Graphics, or COM 1315 Data Base Management I. School of Engineering Technology Specimen Program in Aerospace Maintenance Rrst Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarters No. Course a. Q.H. No. Course a. Q.H. No. Course CI. aH. MTH 1191 Col. Alg. and Trig. 1 or 4 MTH 1189 Prob. Sotv. Calc. PHY 1191 Physics 1 4 ENG 1110 Fresh. Engl. 1 4 GET 1170 Graphics 1 4 MTH 1192 Col. Alg. and Trig. PHY 1192 Physics II ENG 1111 Fresh. Engl. II GET 1 1 00 Comp Prog. PHY 1 1 94 Physics Lab I CT1105 Intro. Prog. PHY 1 1 93 Physics III ENG 1114 Prof. Writing GET 1171 Graphics II PHY 1 1 95 Physics Lab II CT 1341 Basic Comp. Org. MTH 1 1 94 Calculus A Second Year No. Course Course MET 1301 Mechanics A EET 1 320 Elec. & Elec. I MET 1 340 Thermo. A EON 1115 Econ. Prin, MET 1 302 Mechanics B MET 1314 Strss. Anal. A MET 1 380 Materials A SS/HST Elective Third Year MET 1481 Materials B 4 4 MET 1370 Ruid Mech. A 4 4 MET 1 390 Meas. & Ana. Lab 3 4 MET 1391 Tech. Lab A 2 MET 1315 Strss. Anal. B 4 4 MET 1393 Tech. Lab C 2 Tech. Elective Tech. Elective 4 SS/HST Elective SS/HST Elective 4 50 / School of Engineering Technology Specimen Program in Electrical Engineering Technology First Year No. Course Course MTH 1191 Col. Alg. and Trig. I or 4 MTH 1 1 89 Prob. Solv. Calc. PHY 1191 Physics I 4 ENG 1110 Fresh. Engl. I 4 GET 1 1 70 Graphics I 4 MTH 1192 Col. Alg. and Trig. II 4 PHY 1192 Physics It 4 ENG 1 1 1 1 Fresh. Engl. II 4 GET 1100 Comp. Prog. 4 PHY 1194 Physics Lab 1 2 CT 1105 Intro. Prog. 4 PHY 1193 Physics III ENG 1114 Prof. Writing GET 1171 Graphics II PHY 1 1 95 Physics Lab II CT 1341 Basic Comp. Org. MTH 1 1 94 Calculus A Second Year Third Year MTH 1194 Calculus A 4 4 MTH 1195 Calculus B EET1151 Circ. Analysis II 4 4 EET1152 Circ. Analysis II ECN 1 1 1 5 Economics 4 4 MET 1319 Mechanics CT1310 FORTRAN 4 4 Soc. Sci. EET 1324 Cir. Ub. 1 No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course EET 1 360 Eng. Analysis I EET 1353 Circ. Analysis I EET 1311 Electronics I EET 1325 Circ. Lab II EET 1354 Circ. Analysis IV 4 4 EET 1312 Electronics II 4 4 EET 1310 Electrical Meas. 4 4 EET 1 323 Electronic Lab 4 4 Fourth Year No. Course Course EET 1313 Electronics III 4 EET 1327 Adv. Electronic Lab I 2 Tech. Elective 4 Soc. Sci. 4 EET 1 330 Energy Conv. 4 EET 1328 Adv. Electronic Lab II 2 2 Tech. Elective 4 4 EET 1314 Pulse & Dig. I 4 4 Soc. Sci. 4 4 EET 1337 Dist. Syst. 4 4 Rfth Year No. Course Course EET 1329 Adv. Electronic Lab II 2 Tech. Elective EET 1377 Cont. Sys. I EET 1370 Dig. Comp. I Tech. Elective EET 1378 Cont. Sys. II EET 1371 Dig. Comp. II Soc. Sci. IIS 1 360 Stat. Ec. Thy. Technical Elective Sequences (A) Power Systems Sequence No. Course EET 1362 Bas. Pvirr. Sys. I EET 1363 Bas. Pwr. Sys. II EET 1364 Bas. Pwr. Sys. Ill Tech. Elective (B) Communications Engineering Sequence No. Course Q.H. EET 1317 Prin. of Com. Sys. I 4 EET 1318 Prin. of Com. Sys. II 4 EET 1319 Prin. of Com. Sys. Ill 4 Tech. Elective 4 School of Engineering Technology / 51 Specimen Program in Mechanical Engineering Technology First Year Course MTH 1191 Col. Alg. and Trig. MTH 1 1 89 Prob. Solv. Gale. ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. 1 lor 4 5 4 4 6 4 MTH ENG GET 1192 1111 1100 Col. Alg. and Trig. II Fresh. Eng. II Prin. of Comp. Prog. GET 1 1 70 Engineering Graphics 1 or GET 1100 Prin. of Comp. Prog. 1 4 4 4 4 GET 1170 Engineering Graphics 1 Second Year MTH 1194 Calculus A ENG 1114 Lit. of Engineering GET 1171 Engineering Graphics II Fourth Year No. Course No. Course MTH 1 1 94 Calculus A MET 1301 Mechanics A EET 1320 Electricity & Elec- tronics CT 1 364 Eng. Des. Gr. MTH 1 1 95 Calculus B MET 1302 Mechanics B MET 1314 Stress Anal. A. & S. Elective Third Year No. Course Course MET 1315 Stress Anal. B 4 MET 1390 Meas. & Anal. Lab 2 MET 1340 Thermodynamics A 4 MET 1 303 Mechanics C 4 ECN 1115 Econ. Prin. & Probs. 4 MET 1380 Materials A MET 1391 Technol. Lab A MET 1341 Thermodynamics I MET 1370 Ruid Mech. A 4 4 2 2 No. Course No. Course MET 1330 Mech. Design A 4 MET 1392 Tech. Lab B 2 MET 1371 Fluid Mechanics B 4 MET 1396 Machine Shop (Indus. 4 Engr. Elec. on petition with experience) 4 A. & S. Elec. 4 MET 1331 Mech. Design B MET 1393 Tech Lab C MET 1342 Refrig. & Air Cond. A. & S. Elective I 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 Rfth Year No. Course CI. O.H. No. Course a. O.H. MET 1394 Tech. Lab. D MET 1395 Tech. Lab E 2 2 GET 1 356 Engr. Economy MET 1343 Heat Transfer 4 4 A. & S. Elec. 1 Tech. Elec. 1 4 4 MET 1416 Stress Anal. C A. & S. Elec. 1 . 4 4 MET 1414 Mech. Vibrtn. MET 1444 Power Gen. 4 4 No. Course CI. Q.H. No. Course a. Q.H. Technical electives must be chosen from the following list: MET 1416 Stress Analysis C 4 MET 1415 Exp. Stress Analysis 4 MET 1414 Mech. Vibrations 4 MET 1481 Materials B 4 MET 1482 App. Metallurgy 4 MET 1444 Power Gen. 4 MTH 1196 Differential Equations 4 EET 1321 Electricity and 4 Electronics EET 1 390 Optical Instrumen- 4 tation CHT1381 Nuclear Technology 4 52 / College of Nursing Specimen Program in Computer Technology Rrst Year Quarter 1 Course No. Course No. Course MTH 1191 Alg. & Trig. I PHY 1191 Physics I ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. I GET 1 1 70 Eng. Graph. MTH 1192 Alg. & Trig. II PHY 1192 Physics II ENG 1 1 1 1 Fresh. Eng. II CT1105 Intro, to Prog. PHY 1194 Physics Lab I 4 MTH 1 1 93 Calculus I 4 4 PHY 1 1 93 Physics III 4 4 ENG 1114 Lit. of Engineering 4 4 CT 1341 Basic Comp. Organ. 4 2 PHY 1 1 95 Physics Lab II 2 Second Year Third Year Fourth Year No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. MTH 1 1 94 EET 1151 ECN 1 1 1 5 CT 1310 Quarter 6 Calculus A Circuits Anal. 1 Economics 1 FORTRAN 4 4 4 4 MTH 1195 EET 11 52 Quarter? Calculus B Circuits Anal. II SS/Hum SS/Hum 4 4 4 4 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. EET 1311 CT 1340 CT 1369 CT 1 320 Quarter 8 Electronics 1 Mod Prog. Tech. Computer Logic COBOL 4 4 4 4 CT 1345 CT1374 CT1342 CT1368 Quarter 9 Assembly Lang. Intro, to CPU Hdwre. Adv. Comp. Organ. Semiconductor Logic 4 4 4 4 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. CT 1375 CPU Hdwre. Arch. CT 1 330 Non-num. Algo. CT 1355 Micro-Perl. Hdwre. CT 1335 Num. Algorithms CT 1 380 Data Comm. Methods Fifth Year CT 1360 Ind. Software CT 4365 CT 4356 Ind. Hdwre. Comp. Peri. Hdwre. College of Nursing Specimen Program for Baccalaureate Degree in Nursing First Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarters No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course a. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. BIO 1140 Bas. Ani. Bio. 1 HST1101 Western Civ. ENG 1 1 1 0 Fresh. Eng. 1 NUR 1100 Nursing 3 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 CHM 1 1 1 1 BIO 1141 ENG 1111 NUR 1101 Gen. Chem. Bas. Ani. Bio. II Fresh. Eng. II Nursing 4 3 5 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 CHM 1112 Gen. Chem. BIO 1 255 Hum. Anat. HST 1102 Western Civ. II NUR 1102 Nursing 4 3 5 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 Second Year Course Course CI. L Q.H. BIO 1 1 20 Bas. Microbio. 3 4 4 PSY 1 1 1 1 Fnd. Psych. 4 4 NUR 1200 Nursing 4 6 6 BIO 1253 Hum. Physiol. I 3 3 4 BIO 1254 Hum.Physiol.il 3 3 4 PSY 1 1 1 2 Fnd. Psych. I 4 4 SOA 1100 Soc. Anthro. 4 4 NUR 1201 Nursing 3 6 6 College of Nursing / 53 Third Year No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. PSY 1241 PSY 1271 NUR 1301 Section 1 G and D 1 Soc. Psych. Psych. Nursing 4 4 4 « 4 4 7 Section 1 PSY 1242 Gand D 11 SOC 1100 Sociology PCL 1 305 Pharmac. NUR 1300 Nursing 4 4 3 3 6 4 4 3 7 No. Course CI. L aH. No. Course CI. L Q.H. PSY 1241 PCL 1305 SOC 1100 NUR 1300 NUR 1302 Section II G and D 1 Pharmacol. Sociology Nursing Nurs. Trans. 4 4 5 5 6 12 4 3 4 7 9 Section II PSY 1242 GandDII PSY 1271 Soc. Psych. NUR 1301 Psych. Nurs. 4 4 4 9 4 4 7 Fourth Year No. Course NUR 1400 Mat. Child. Nur.* 4 Hum. Elective 4 Gen. Elective 4 NUR 1401 Med. Surg. Nursing* Hum. Elective Gen. Elective CI. L Q.H. NUR 1 500 Com. HIth. Nur. 4 12 9 NUR 1501 Contemp. Nur. 4 3 5 Elective 4 4 Elective (4) (4) Elective 4 4 (If desired) NUR 1 502 Intro. Nur. Res. 4 4 Rfth Year * Each of these courses is offered In Quarters 8 and 9, but only one is to be taken per quarter. 179 Q.H. = Minimum graduation requirement. Degrees The College of Nursing offers a five-year program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree in Nursing, and Registered Nurse day and evening programs leading to the Bachelor of Science degree in Nursing. The length of these programs varies, depending on the individual's interest and ability to achieve advanced placement. Quantitative Requirements Candidates for the Bachelor of Science degree must successfully complete all of the prescribed courses in the applicable curriculum. For the Bachelor of Science degree this totals 1 79 quarter hours. The prescribed periods of cooperative work at health agencies associated with the University are not required of the Bachelor of Science Programs for Registered Nurses. 54 / College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Specimen Program in Pharmacy (Rve-Year Cooperative) First Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. Electives 8 BIO 1106 Gen. Bio. 3 4 4 CHM 1 1 22 Gen. Chem.t 4 3 5 MTH 1106 Fund. Math.* 4 4 MTH 1107 Funct. and Bas. 4 4 BIO 1107 Ani. Bio. 3 4 4 MTH 1107 Funct. and Bas. 4 4 Cal.* or ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II 4 4 Cal.* MTH 1108 Calculus* 4 4 Elective 4 4 CHM 1111 Gen. Chem. 4 3 5 ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. 1 PAH 1135 Prof. Dynamics in Health Care Deliv. Sys. 4 4 4 4 •Minimum math requirement: MTH 1 1 08. tCHM 1151, CHM 1152, General Chemistry, may be taken in place of CHM 1122, but one year of high school calculus is recommended. Second Year Quarter 4 (Entire Class) (Sept-Dec.) Quarter 4A (Entire Class) (Jan.-March) Quarter 5 (April-June & June-Sept) No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. PHY 1201 Physics I CHM 1 264 Organic Chem. A. & S. Elective PCT 1230 Basic Pharm. Elective 4 4 PHY 1203 Physics III 4 4 4 (3) 5 CHM 1 265 Organic Chem. 4 (3) 5 4 A. & S. Electives 3 3 PCT 1230 Basic Pharm. 3 3 PAH 1202 Anaf. & Physi- ology I PAH 1 280 Bio. Chem. A. & S. Electives 4 (3) 5 5 5 Third Year No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. PCT 1 340 Pharmaceutics 4 4 PCT 1350 Pharmaceutics 5 5 PMC 1420 Anti-infectives 5 5 PCL1410 Pathology 4 4 Struc. & Action PCL 1450 Pharmacol. Lab. 1 0 (3) 1 PAH 1 204 Anat. & Phys. II 4 (3) 5 PCT 1320 Pharmaceu. L 1 (3) 2 PMC 1418 Med. Chem./ 4 4 PCL 1420 Pharmacol. 6 6 Pharmacol. 1 Med./Chem. II Fourth Year Quarter 9 (Entire Class) (April-June) No. Course No. Course PCL 1422 Pharmacol. Med./ 6 Chem. Ill PCT 1440 Bioph./P'i^in. 4 PCL 1452 Pharmacol. Lab. II 0 PCL 1320 Drug Analysis 4 PHP 1303 Interper. Skills for HIth. Professnis. (3) 1 (3) 5 4 TOX 1300 Toxicology 4 PHP 1601 Non-Prescription 4 Medication PHP 1602 Clin Pharmaco. 5 therapeutics PCT 1441 Pharmacokinetic 4 Prin. in Drug Therapy College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions / 55 Fifth Year Quarter 10 (Summer) Qtiarter 11 (Fall) No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. PHP 1502 Clin. Pharm. Clerkship 15 PHP 1 502 Clin. Pharm. Clerkship 15 PHP 1501 Pharm. Externship 4 PHP 1501 Pharm. Externship 4 PHP 1402 Parapharmaceuti- cals 2 PHP 1306 Community Pharm. Mgt. 4 PHP 1503 Prof. Practice Lab 1 or PHP 1302 Pharm. Admin. 4 PHP 1305 Hospital Pharm. 4 PHP 1303 Interper. Skills for 4 Mgmt. Health Profession- PHP 1304 Caring for Patients: 4 als Psychosocial PHP 1401 Drug Info, and Eval. 3 Aspects of Illness Prof. Elective 4 Prof. Elective 4 Quarter 12 Quarter 13 (Winter) (Spring) ?*). Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. PHP 1501 PHP 1402 PHP 1503 PHP 1302 PHP 1303 Clin. Pharm. Clerkship Pharm. Externship Parapharmaceuti- cals Prof. Practice Lab Pharm. Admin. Interper. Skills for Health Profession- als Drug Info, and Eval. Prof. Elective PHP PHP PHP i; PHP M Clin. Pharm. Clerkship Pharm. Externship Pharm. Jurispru- dence Community Pharm. Mgt. or Hospital Pharm. Mgt. Caring for Patients; Psychosocial Aspects of Illness Prof. Elective NOTES: About one quarter of the class wil be in PHP1502, one quarter in PHP1501, and one half in the classroom for each quarter. Students must take a total of 8 credits for professional electives. All 8 credits may be taken in one quarter or as outlined above. Specimen Program in Dental Hygiene* Rrst Year Quarter 1 CHM 1101 Gen. Chem. BIO 1 1 50 Anat. and Phys. Prof. Courses CHM 1102 Gen. Chem. BIO 1 1 76 Marine Biology Prof. Courses BIO 1 1 20 Microbio. Prof. Courses (4) 4 (4) Second Year Quarter 4 ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. I Prof. Courses 1 1 1 Fnd. Psych. I Prof. Courses SOC 1100 Intro. Soc. ENG 1 1 1 1 Fresh. Eng. II Prof. Courses •Students are admitted directly to the Forsyth School for Dental Hygienists and should contact the School for catalogs, applications, and complete program information t)y wrriting to: Forsyth School for Dental Hygienists 140 The Fenway Boston, Massachusetts 021 1 5 56 / College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Specimen Program in Medical Laboratory Science (Five- Year Cooperative) Rrst Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Qua Course CI. L Q.H. CI. L Q.H. MTH 1106 Fund. Math, or MTH 1107 Func. Calculus 4 CHM 1111 Gen. Chem. I 4 BIO 1106 Gen. Bio. 3 ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. I 4 MLS 1101 Med. Lab. Orien. 1 MTH 1107 Func. Calculus or ENG 1 11 1 Fresh. Eng. II 4 4 MTH 1108 Calculus 4 4 MLS 1 1 1 1 BS Urinalys. 3 3 4 CHM 1122 Gen. Chem. II 4 (3) 5 CHM 1221 Analyt. Chem. 3 (3) 4 BIO 1107 Anim. Bio. 3 4 Elective 4 4 PAH 1135 Prof. Dyn. 4 4 Elective 4 4 MLS 1102 MLS Orient. Second Year Quarter 4 Entire Class* Quarter ' Entire Class* No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. CHM 1 264 Org. Chem. I BIO 1253 Humn. Physio. MLS 1141 Microbiology Elective (3) 5 MLS 1265 Clinimmungy (3) 4 MLS 1121 Hematology I (6) 6 MLS 1122 Hematology I 4 MLS 1131 Immunohem. Elective •Depending on group assignment, this is *MLT applies for Clinical. "Regular co-op sequence starts here, a sample of the second year. 1 (2) 3 MLS 1642 Med. Parasit. 2 2 3 2 (3) 3 MLS 1 643 Med. Mycology 2 2 3 2 (3) 3 BIO 1 254 Humn. Physgy. II 3 3 4 2 (3) 3 MLS 1151 BSCL Chem. 4 3 5 4 4 Elective 4 4 Third Year No^ Course CL BIO 1260 Genet. & Devel. 3 PHY 1201 Physics I 4 PHY 1501 Physics Lab Elective 4 L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q. (4) 4 PHY 1 202 Physics II 4 4 4 BIO 1261 Cell Phys. Bio. 3 (4) 4 (3) 1 BIO 1221 Gen. Micro. 3 3 4 MLS 1 643 Med. Mycology PHY 1 502 Physics Lab 2 (3) (3) 3 1 Elective 4 4 *M.T. applies for Clinical. Rxirth Year No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. MLS 1645 Adv. CI. Micro. 1 2 2 MLS 1523 Hematology AS (20)4 MLS 1651 Adv CI. Chem. 1 2 2 and MLS 1621 Adv. Hem. 1 3 3 MLS 1532 Immunohem AS or (12)3 MLS 1646 Adv. Hem. 1 2 2 MLS 1544 Clin. Micro. AS ( or (32)7 MLS 1652 Adv.CI.Chem.il 2 2 MLS 1552 Clin. Chem. AS (32)7 MLS 1631 Adv Immun. Hem. 2 2 MLS 1622 Hematology IV 2 2 MLS 1523 Hem. Mt. Apst. (20)4 MLS 1647 Clin. Micro. Ill 2 2 and MLS 1653 Clin. Chem. Ill 2 2 MLS 1 532 Immunohem. AS or (12)3 MLS 1680 MLS Special 2 2 MLS 1 544 Clin. Micro. AS or (32)7 Topics MLS 1552 Clin. Chem. AS (32)7 Fifth Year College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions / 57 No. Course MLS 1 523 Hematology AS and MLS 1532 Immunohem. AS MLS MLS MLS MLS or 544 Clin, Micro. AS or 552 Clin. Chem. AS 646 Clin. Micro. Ill 2 and 631 Immunohematol. 2 and 652 Clin. Chem. Ill or 2 645 Clin. Micro. II and 2 651 Clin. Chem. II and 2 3 (32)7 (32)7 2 MLS MLS MLS MLS 1621 Hematology Elective Distribution Requirements 12 QH of Humanities. 8 QH of Social Sciences and 4 QH of Professional Dynamics; or 1 2 QH Social Sciences. 14-16 QH of other electives including at least one Profiessional Elective. MLS 1681 MLS Sen. Sem. 2 2 MLS 1665 Med. Lab. Mgmt 2 2 MLS 1661 MLS Ed. 2 2 Prof. Elective 2-4 2- Stats/Comp 4 Specimen Program in Health Record Administration (Five- Year Cooperative) Rrst Year Quarter 1 Course Course MTH BIO 1 PSY 1 ENG 1101 Bas. Math 106 Gen. Bio. 1 1 1 Fnd. Psych. I Fresh. Eng. I 1110 Fresh. Eng. I HRA 1100 Orient. Med. Rec. I 3 (3) 4 MTH BIO 1 PAH 1 103 Bas. Math 107 Anim. Bio. 135 Dynam. of HIth. Care LA Elective BIO 1 121 Intro. Microbio. 3 3 PSY 1 1 1 2 Fnd. Psych. II 4 4 ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II 4 4 LA Elective 4 4 Second Year No. Course Course CI. L. Q.H. SOC 1 1 00 Intro. Socio. HRA 1101 Orient. Med. Rec. II Elective BIO 1 1 75 Marine Bio. Elective MTH 1 1 50 Prob. Stat. & Computer BIO 1151 Func. Hum. Anat ECN 1116 Prin. & Prob. Econ. or HRM 1432 OBI (3) 5 Third Year Course Course HRA 1310 Hosp. Law 2 2 HRA 1 320 Med. Term. 4 4 HRA 1330 Fnd. Med. Sci. I 3 3 HRA 1410 HIth. Rec. Sci. I 3 (3) 4 SPC 1115 Intro. Commun. 4 4 HRA 1 340 Fnd. Med. Sci. II 3 HRA 1420 HIth. Rec. Sci. II 3 HRA 1610 Intro. DP for HIth. 4 Sci. 58 /College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Fourth Year No. Course Course HRA 1 430 HIth, Rec. Sci. II HRA 1630 Appl. HIth. Stat. HRA 1480 Clin. Bern. (15 days) HRA 1 450 Appl. Hlfh. Rec. Dir. Pract. I HRA 1510 Org. & Mngt. Med. Rec. Dp. I 3 (3) 4 HRA 1440 HIth. Rec. Scl. IV 3 (3) 4 4 HRA 1 540 Qual. Assur. 4 2 2 HRA 1630 App. HIth. Stat. 4 HRA 1460 Appl. HIth. Rec. 2 3 3 Dir. Pract. II (7 days) 4 4 HRA 1520 Org. & Mngt. Med. 4 Rec. Dp. II Rfth Year Course HRA 1640 Med. Comp. Appl. 4 HRA 1530 Org. & Mngt. Med. 4 Rec. Dp. Ill MLS 1661 HIth. Sci. Ed. 2 Elective 4 HRA 1 560 Sem. HIth. Rec. 2 2 HRA 1570 HIth. Rec. Prof. 2 2 HRA 1800 Indep. Study 4 4 HRA 1470 Appl. HIth. Rec. Sci. Ill 4 4 HRA 1820 Spec. Topics II- 2 * Assigned by Program Director Specimen Program in Respiratory Therapy B.S. (Five-Year Cooperative) First Year Quarter 1 No. Course Course Course MTH 1106 Fund. Math. CHM 1111 Gen. Chem. BIO 1140 Bas. Ani. Bio. ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. II RTH 111 Resp. Ther. Sem. I 4 (3) 5 (3) 4 MTH 1 1 07 Func. and Bas. Gale. BIO 1141 Bas.Ani.Bio.il PHY 1209 Bas. Physics RTH 1112 Resp. Ther. Sem. II PAH 1 1 35 Prof. Dynamics in the HIth. Care Delivery Sys. ENG 1111 Fresh. Eng. II 4 4 BIO 1 1 20 Microbio. 3 (4) 4 CHM 1122 Gen. Chem. 4 (3) 5 RTH 1113 Resp. Ther. Sem. 1 1 III A. & S. Elective 4 Second Year Quarter 4 No. Course No. Course No. Course PAH 1 202 Anat. Physiol. I 4 RTH 1301 Prof. Prac. Lab I RTH 1320 Cardio. Pul. Phys. 4 RTH 1 550 Patient Care Psych./Soc. Elective PCL 1 309 Pharmacol./Resp. 4 Care PAH 1204 Anat. Physiol. II RTH 1 302 Prof. Prac. Lab. II RTH 1 332 Intro. Resp. Care 4 RTH 1321 Cardio.-Pul. Dis. 4 RTH 1403 Prof. Prac. Lab. Ill (3) 1 RTH 1414 Clin. Sem. I 1 1 RTH 1433 Resp. Care/Med. 4 4 Surg. PCL 1410 Pathology 4 4 RTH 1411 Clin. Prac. (24)6 Third Year No. Course No. Course RTH 1 404 Prof. Prac. Lab. IV (3) 1 RTH 1412 Clin. Prac. II (24)6 RTH 1415 Clin. Sem. II 1 1 RTH 1 434 Resp. Care/Crif. 4 4 Patient PHL 1165 Moral Med. 4 4 RTH 1505 Cardio.-Pul. Lab. (3) 1 Prac. RTH 1435 Pediatrics 2 2 A. & S. Electives 8 RTH 1 573 Card.-Pul. Lab (3) 1 Fourth Year College of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions / 59 No. Course No. Course OHM 1 264 Organic Chem. I RTH 1516 Adv. Resp. Thrpy. Sem. I RTH 1571 Adv. Life Sup. Sys. I RTH 1 578 Adv. Med. Monit. A. & S. Elective OHM 1265 Organic Chem. II 4 (3) 5 RTH 1517 Adv. Clin. Sem. II 1 1 Prof. Elective 4 RTH 1572 Perfusion 4 4 Fifth Year Course No. Course RTH 1518 Adv. Clin. Sem. Ill 1 1 RTH 1576 Neonatology 4 4 RTH 1801 Dir. Study 2 RTH 1511 Practicum (16)4 Prof. Elective 4 4 RTH 1519 Adv. Clin. Sem. IV 1 1 RTH 1512 Practicum (16)4 A. & S. Electives 4 RTH 1802 Dir. Study 2 Prof. Elective 4 4 Specimen Program in Toxicology (Five-Year Cooperative) RrstYear Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. MTH 1 1 06 Matti Elective BIO 1106 Gen. Bio. 1 ENG 1110 Fresh. Eng. 1 4 4 2 4 (4) 4 4 4 4 MTH 1107 Math OHM 1111 Gen. Chem. BIO 1 1 07 Anim. Bio. TOX 1100 Tox. Orien. PAH 1135 Prof. Dynamics in HIth. Care Delivery System 4 4 3 1 4 (3) (4) 4 5 4 1 4 MTH 1108 ENG 1111 OHM 1122 Calculus Fresh. Eng. II Elective Gen. Chem. 4 4 4 4 (3) 4 4 4 5 Second Year Quarter 4 Quarter 4A (entire class) Quarter 5 No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. No. Course CI. L Q.H. PHY 1201 Physics OHM 1264 Org. Chem. PAH 1 202 Anat. & Phys. 1 Elective 4 4 4 4 (3) (3) 4 5 5 4 PHY 1203 Physics OHM 1265 Org. Chem. PAH 1 204 Anat. & Phys. II 4 4 5 (3) (3) 4 5 5 PAH 1280 MTH 1 1 50 MLS 1151 Gen. Biochem. Prob. Stat. BS CI. Chem. Elective 5 4 4 4 (3) 5 4 5 4 Third Year No. Course No. Course BIO 1120 Microbio. 3 PMC 1418 Med. Chem. 4 Pharmacol. I CIV 1 390 Survey Env. Prob. 4 or Elective PCL 1 420 Pharmacol. Med. Chem. II CHM 1461 Id. Org. Comp. TOX 1 300 Toxicology I PCL 1450 Pharmacol. Lab TOX 1321 Biochem. Tox. (6) 3 (3) 1 (6) 3 Fourth Year No. Course PCL 1422 Pharmacol. Med. 6 Chem. Ill PCL 1452 Pharmacol. Lab. II 0 TOX 1 305 Tox II 4 TOX 1321 Biochem. Tox. 1 PCL 1 422 Med. Chem. Pool. 3 6 TOX 1801 Special Topics 4 TOX 1 300 Tox. 1 or Elective 4 (3) 1 PCL 1410 Pathology 4 (3) 5 (6) 3 6 6 60 / Alternative Freshman-Year Program Fifth Year No. Course TOX 1302 Tox. Ill PCT 1 440 Bio. Pharm./ Pharm. CHM 1431 Inst. Analysis Elective HSL 1506 Comm. Health Elective 4-8 Tox. Colloq. AFR 1115 Epidemiology PCL 1505 Drug Intrac. University College Alternative Freshman-Year Program Business Track: One-Year Program Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. MTH 1000 Math 1* 4 MTH 1010 Math 11* 4 MTH 1113 Ccl. Math. Busi- 4 ENG4013 Fund, of Eng. 1* 4 HST4110 Hist, of Civ. A 4 ness. CI 4001 Integ. Lang. Skills 2 ENG 4014 Fund, of Eng. 11* 4 HST4111 Hist, of Civ. B 4 Devel. r CI 4002 Integ. Lang. Skills 2 ECN 4601 Economics 1 4 Directed Elective" 4 GOP 4010 Devel. II* (or) Directed Elect.** Self-Aware (op- tional) 2-4 2 MGT4105 Mgt. and Org. (Int.) (or) Directed Elect.** 4 4 Criminal Justice, Education, or Arts and Sciences Tracic One-Year Quarter 1 Quarter 2 No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. No. Course Q.H. HST4110 Hist, of Civ. A 4 SOC4010 Prin. Soc. 1 4 SOC 401 1 Prin. Soc. II 4 ENG 4013 Fund, of Eng. 1* 4 ENG 4014 Fund, of Eng. II* 4 HST 41 1 1 Hist, of Civ. B 4 CI 4001 Integ. Lang. Skills Devel. 1* 2 CI 4002 Integ. Lang. Skills Devel. II* 2 POL 4102 Elective** Intro. Pol. Sci. II . 4 Directed Elective** 4 (or) Directed 2-4 POL 4101 Intro. Pol. Sci. 1 4 MTH 1000 Math. Prelim. 1 or 4 Elect.** MTH 1010 Math. Prelim. II 4 GOP 4010 Self-Aware (op- tional) 2 "Compensatory course "'Eligible students choose Directed Electives in consultation with faculty advisers. Health Science Track MTH 1010 Math. II 4 CHM 4110 Pre-Chemistry 5 MTH 4106 Fund, of Math 4 ENG 4013 Fund, of Eng. 1* 4 BIO 4103 Biology A 4 CHM 4111 General Chem. 1 5 CI 4001 Integ. Lang. Skills Devel. 1* 2 ENG 4014 CI 4002 GOP 4010 Fund, of Eng. II* Integ. Lang. Skills Devel. 11* Self-Aware 4 2 2 Directed Elective 4 •English, Mathematics and Integrated Language Skills courses will vary depending on placement tests. The Writing Center/ 61 The Writing Center Telephones: 437-2328 437-3086 The Writing Center offers one-to-one tutorial help in writing to all students and staff at Northeastern University. It will help students find a topic, organize and develop ideas, learn how to edit and proofread for problems in grammar, punctuation, and spelling. The Writing Center is open Monday through Friday from 9.00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. To get help at the Writing Center, stop by room 1 02 Cahners to make an appointment. SPECIAL NOTE Classes at Northeastern University are scheduled in different modules. In assessing quarter weights for courses, the following statement applies: One quarter-hour of credit is equal to 50 minutes of instruction per weel<, plus two hours of preparation. The Scheduling Office (126 HA) maintains all quarter-hour weights for courses. In the event of error in any publication, the academic record will reflect the correct quarter hours applicable to any degree requirement. Some course titles may change, but the course number remains the same. Be sure you do not register for a course you may have already taken. 62 / Basic College Compensatory Programs for 1 985-1 986 Basic College Compensatory Programs for 1 985-1 986 The Basic College Compensatory Education Program continues generally to encompass five courses, each bearing four quarter hours of credit, which are to be offered in the sequences indicated below. Certain freshmen may be assigned to any one of these course sequences based on evaluations conducted prior to and during orientation week. Fall MTH1000 Mathematical Preliminaries I ENG 1013 Fundamentals of Writing I EDI 003 Reading/Study Skills Winter MTH1010 Mathematical Preliminaries II ENG 1014 Fundamentals of Writing II Specifically, MTH1000 and MTH1010 are to precede both the MTH1106, MTH1107, and MTH1108 (non- business math) sequence and the MTH1 1 1 3, MTH1 1 1 4, and MSC1 1 99 (business math) sequence; ENG1 01 3 and ENG1014 collectively replace ENG1110 (standard Freshman Writing) and are to precede ENG1111 (standard Introduction to Literature) and, in the case of Lincoln College, the ENG1 1 1 1-ENG1381 (Literature of Engineering) sequence. Schedule for Continuation of Compensatory Programming in the Basic Colleges for 1985-1986 These courses are approved or disapproved for credit, except where noted, by the faculties of the individual colleges and are, therefore, subject to change. ENG1013* ENG1014* MTH1000* MTH1010* EDI 003 Read. Writing 1 Writing II Math Prelim. 1 Math Prelim. II Study Skills Arts and Sciences accepted accepted accepted accepted accepted B-B Phys. Ther. not accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted Phys. Educ. accepted accepted accepted accepted accepted Rec. and Leis. Stud. accepted accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted Health Educ. accepted accepted accepted accepted accepted Bus. Admin. accepted accepted accepted accepted not accepted Crim. Justice accepted accepted accepted! accepted! accepted Education accepted accepted accepted accepted accepted Engineering:}: not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable Engineering accepted accepted not applicable not applicable not accepted Technology Nursing B. S. accepted accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted Pharmacy and accepted§ accepted not accepted not accepted not accepted Allied Health Prof. w/o credit Computer Science not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable not applicable Basic College Compensatory Programs for 1985-1986 / 63 * Graded pass/fail and therefore not included in the student's quality-point average. t Freshmen in the College of Criminal Justice are not required to take a mathematics course in the fresh- man year. They canceled, however, to take MTH1000 or MTH1010 to prepare themselves for Fundamen- tals of Mathematics* MTH1 106 as upperclassmen. $ Although the Colleges of Engineering and Computer Science do not allow MTH1000 or MTH1010 to be taken for academic credit, they do offer a special course sequence in college calculus with algebra and trigonometry (MTH1120 and MTH1121) for engineering freshmen judged to have deficiencies in mathematics. The courses involve extra hours of work but cover the same material as the regular fresh- man calculus sequence in the College of Engineering. § Although the College of Pharmacy and Allied Health professions does allow ENG1013 to appear on the permanent record, it will only allow ENG1014 for credit. Students completing the ENG1013-ENG1014 sequence will have to make up the four-credit elective which was displaced by ENG1013. Chemical Engineering / 65 Chemical Engineering __^__ The course descriptions listed under Chemical Engineering are intended to show the general scope of the subject that will be covered. Since courses are continuously updated, specific topics or methods of approach may vary from term to term. In addition to meeting course prerequisites, students are expected to take each chemical engineering course in the sequence shown on the specimen program sheet. The department is presently reorganizing and updating its curriculum. However, the basic content of the program, as represented by the present courses, will be retained. CHE 1201 Chemical Engineering Calculations I 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1 1 32 and CHM 1 1 38) This course examines application of fundamental laws of mass and energy conservation to chemical and physical processes. In this course the primary em- phasis is on material balances. A computational labo- ratory is included to aid students in improving facility in handling problems typical of the course. CHE 1202 Chemical Engineering Calculations II 4Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1201) Emphasis in this course is on energy balances and the simultaneous application of mass and energy conservation laws. Problems selected from those typical of the chemical processing industries are considered. CHE 1203 Polymer Science and Engineering 4Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1261) This course provides instruction in the nature of pol- ymeric materials and their importance to the chemical industries and everyday life. Topics include polymer classification, composition, structure, physical prop- erties, chemical properties, and methods of polymer synthesis. CHE 1301 Chemical Engineering! 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1202) The important unit operations of chemical engineer- ing-fluid mechanics, heat transfer, and evaporation- are examined. CHE 1302 Chemical Engineering 11 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1301) This course is a continuation of CHE 1 301 to include mass transfer unit operations: distillation and gas absorption. CHE 1401 Transport Phenomena I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1301) The mechanisms of momentum transport in fluid-flow phenomena are described. Velocity distributions for Nevirtonian fluids in the laminar and turbulent flow regimes are derived and utilized in the analysis of elementary fluid-flow problems. CHE 1402 Transport Phenomena II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1401 and CHE 1302) Mass and heat transport by the mechanisms of molecular and bulk motion are described. A variety of elementary physical and chemical transport problems are analyzed in terms of these mechanisms. CHE 1410 Experimental Methods I 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHE 1302) Experimental approach to solving chemical engi- neering problems and preparing reports to detail the results and their interpretations. Experiments illustrat- ing the fundamental unit operations are performed. CHE 1 41 1 Experimental Methods II 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHE 1410) A continuation of CHE 1410, requiring more advanced experimentation and more sophisticated reports. CHE 1420 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics 4Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1202) Topics include the first law and its application to ba|ch and flow systems, heat effects in chemical and physical processes, thermodynamic properties; the second law, entropy physical and chemical equilibria; empha- sis on the fundamental principles and mathematical relations and their application to the analysis and solution of a variety of engineering problems. CHE 1421 Chemical Engineering Kinetics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1420) Topics include fundamental theories of the rate of chemical change in homogeneous reacting systems; integral and differential analysis of kinetic data; design of batch and continuous-flow chemical reactors; intro- duction to heterogeneous reactions and reactor design. CHE 1 501 Process Design I 6 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHE 1402 and CHE 1420) Process design of a chemical plant. Topics include process selection, material and energy balances, equipment selection and/or design, elements of instrumentation, flowsheets, and cost estimates. CHE 1 502 Process Design II 6 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHE 1501) This course is a continuation of CHE 1501. A more complex design is required. Additional elements of process design are studied. CHE 1 503 Projects I 6 Q.H.* (Prereq. Senior standing and consent of Dept.) This course offers individual research related to some phase of chemical engineering. Open only to students selected by the department head on the basis of scholarship and proven ability CHE 1 504 Projects II 6 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHE 1503) The course offers a continuation of the research work undertaken in CHE 1503. Lab fee required. 66 /Civil Engineering CHE 1510 Principles of Nuclear Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) The course offers an introduction to the principles of nuclear engineering. Elements of nuclear physics, reactor physics, and radiation safety are presented, together with engineering techniques specific to the nuclear industry CHE 1 51 1 Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) The course examines formulation and solution of problems taken from chemical and engineering stud- ies that require advanced mathematical methods. Emphasis is placed primarily on the formulation step, although numeric and analytic solution tech- niques for solving sets of algebraic equations and for solving ordinary and partial differential equations are discussed. CHE 1 51 2 Chemical Process Control 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) The course focuses on principles of automatic control with applications to chemical processing systems. Topics such as process modeling and control system design are included. CHE 1513 Introduction to Optimization 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) Elementary optimization techniques, such as gradient methods, pattern search, linear programming, and dy- namic programming, are described and applied to a variety of elementary physical and chemical problems. CHE 1 51 4 Special Topics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) Chemical engineering topics of interest to the staff member conducting the class are presented for study CHE 1515 Chemical Energy Economics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) Rnancial decision-making techniques are introduced and applied to the problems of production, transpor- tation, and utilization of chemical energy resources such as petroleum, natural gas, coal, and shale oil. CHE 1516 Mass Transfer Operations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) Course focuses on calculation and design methods used in processes involving mass transfer Topics covered include vapor-liquid equilibria for binary and multicomponent systems, multicomponent distillation, absorption, and extraction. CHE 1517 Analysis of Chemical Processes 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1420, CHE 1421, and senior standing) Course focuses on methods and reactions used for making chemical products on a large scale. Topics covered include types of physical and chemical equi- libria, flow-sheet patterns, energy management, and catalytic and noncatalytic rate problems. A number of situations involving simultaneous application of the above topics in process analyses are studied. CHE 1518 Management in the Chemical Industries 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing in engineering) The course focuses on principles of management as applied to the chemical process industries. Case stu- dies are used to supplement lectures and discussion. CHE 1519 Kinetics of Polymerization Process 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHE 1421, OHM 1262, and senior standing) The course focuses on the mechanisms by which polymeric materials are assembled via chemical reaction. Reaction-rate models based on these mech- anisms are utilized to investigate the effect of reaction parameters on the chemical and physical structure of the polymeric product. The specific polymerization processes considered are free radical addition, con- densation, and ionic. CHE 1520 Pollution Control In Chemical Industries 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) Students are instructed in fundamental operations for handling environmental problems in the chemical process industries. Water quality requirements and industrial waste characteristics are discussed. CHE 1521 Chemical Process Development 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) The course offers a study of the manner in which a chemical process evolves from the research laboratory to full-scale production. Typical processes are used as illustrations. Topics covered include economic factors, safety factors, batch vs. continuous opera- tion, process evaluation, developing the flow sheet, and scale-up considerations. CHE 1522 Corrosion Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) The course covers the fundamentals of corrosion engineering: theories of corrosion, corrosion testing, corrosion protection, and selected relevant topics. Civil Engineering The course descriptions listed under Civil Engineering are intended to show the general scope of the subject that will be covered. Since courses are continuously updated, specific topics or methods of approach may vary from term to term. CIV 1 21 0 Structural Mechanics i 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PHY 1222; MTH 1223 concurrently) Topics normally include statics of particles and rigid bodies in two and three dimensions; analysis of internal forces in trusses and beams; centroids and centers of gravity of lines, area, and volumes; moments of inertia of areas and masses. CIV 1 21 1 Structural Mechanics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1210) Course material includes analysis of stress and strain; mechanical properties of materials; elastic analysis of stresses and deformations of members subject to axial load, torsion, shear, and moment; introduction to column behavior. Civil Engineering / 67 CIV 1 21 2 Structural Mechanics III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1211) Continuation of CIV 1211. Topics include torsion, general bending, curved members, shear flow, shear center, combined stresses including elastic and plastic behavior, continuation of column buckling, and intro- duction to yield and fracture criteria. CIV 1 220 Structural Analysis I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1211) Topics normally include review of reactions, shear and bending moment diagrams, bar forces in trusses, deflections by virtual work and moment area methods; and analysis of indeterminate structures by consis- tent deformations, slope deflection, and moment distribution. CIV 1 222 Structural Analysis I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1 220) This course concentrates on matrix analysis of inde- terminate structures using both flexibility and stiffness approaches; computer applications to analysis of framed structures. CIV 1 224 Structural Analysis III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1220) This course is a continuation of CIV 1220. Topics normally include slope deflection; moment distribution; effects of axial loads; symmetry; antisymmetry; non- prismatic members; influence lines for determinate and indeterminate structures, approximate methods of lateral load analysis and shear wall action. CIV 1226 Structural Analysis & Design Lab 2 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1220 taken concurrently) Course material includes lectures, experimental stud- ies, computation laboratories, and computer projects to develop student's knowledge of structural behavior and understanding of the design and analysis of structures. CIV 1240 Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1220) Course material includes review of mechanical prop- erties of steel and concrete; behavior and design of reinforced concrete beams for shear, moment, and bond; design of stocky columns for axial load and moment. Emphasis of course is on strength design. CIV 1241 Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1240) Topics normally include design of slender columns, foundations, multistory buildings with one-way and two-way floor systems. CIV 1 250 Design of Steel Structures I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1220) The course focuses on design of steel members subject to tension, compression, bending, and com- binations of loading; design of connections, braced frames, and rigid frames. CIV 1251 Design of Steel Structures II (Prereq. CIV 1250) composite construction in bridges and buildings, plastic analysis and design, and the design of high- rise buildings subject to lateral loads. CIV 1 31 0 Fluid Mechanics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1210; MTH 1225 concurrently) The course gives an introduction to both the statics and dynamics of fluid mechanics. Topics include properties of fluids; pressure variation in water and air; pressure force on surfaces and submerged bodies, continuity, momentum and energy principles; dimen- sional analysis and hydraulic similitude; flow in closed conduits, frictional and local losses in pipes; and simple pipe problems. CIV 1320 Hydraulic Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1310) The course covers a variety of topics including: pipe networks; water hammer; pumps, pump selection; pipe-pump combination; flow in open channels, uniform flow formula, gradually varied flow calcula- tions, hydraulic jump; drag forces on bodies; princi- ples of hydrology unit hydrograph, and rainfall-runoff relationships. CIV 1340 Environmental Engineering I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 132 and CIV 1310) The course focuses on engineering approaches to protection and management of the environment. Topics include assessment of environmental quality; intro- duction to water and wastewater technology air pollu- tion control, and solid waste management. CIV 1341 Environmental Engineering II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1340) The course concentrates on development of fun- damental physical, chemical, and biological phe- nomena of water and wastewater systems with engin- eering applications in water technology from source to ultimate disposal. CIV 1350 Environmental and Hydraulics Lab 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1340; CIV 1320 concurrently) The course includes lectures, laboratory and field experiments in environmental and hydraulic engi- neering areas. Experiments in hydraulics area will cover: fluid properties, hydrostatics, drag forces, flow in pipes and channels as well as pumps and turbines. Experiments in the environmental area will include physical, chemical, and biological analyses normally used by environmental engineers. Held experiments will be coordinated to allow students to collect environmental and hydraulic data concurrently. CIV 1360 Environmental Design 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1320, CIV 1341, CIV 1350) The course consists of several individual design projects in environmental engineering affording the student an opportunity to develop a sound engineering approach to water and wastewater management at the municipal level. Projects are given careful cri- tique. There is one group project requiring an oral presentation. 4Q.H. CIV 1370 Air Pollution /n,«««.., o : 1. .\ 4Q.H. ;/ Civil Engineering engineering management of air resources; micro- climate and dispersion of pollutants; atmospheric chemistry; air pollution instrumentation; control of gaseous and particulate emissions; design of air pol- lution control systems; biological and chemical as- pects of air pollution with emphasis on the toxicological aspects of the environment; physiological effects of aerosols; analysis of organic and inorganic constitu- ents of the atmosphere; and rationale for establish- ment of air quality criteria and standards. CIV 1390 Survey of Environmental Problems 4Q.H. (Prereq. Nonengineersonly; permission of instructor) A survey of problems associated with man's use of the environment. Course material includes interrelation of the air-water-land complex, with emphasis on eco- logical stresses produced, and methodologies for assessing and controlling man's environmental impact. CIV 1 41 0 Soil Mechanics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1 21 1 and CIV 1310) Course material includes soil classification, soil-water phase relations, ground water seepage, consolidation theory strength properties of soils, stress distribu- tions in soils due to surface loads, slope stability CIV 1 41 1 Soil Mechanics Lab 2 Q.H.* (Taken concurrently with CIV 1410) Thecoursefocuseson laboratory exercises, including soil classification, seepage, shear strength, consoli- dation, and triaxial testing. CIV 1420 Foundation Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1410) Topics normally include subsurface explorations, determination of soil-bearing capacity design of shallow foundations, pile and caisson foundations, design of retaining walls, anchored bulkheads and braced sheeting, and other selected topics on foun- dation design and construction. CIV 1 430 Geotechnology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Juniors and seniors only) An introduction to the geological sciences as they apply to civil engineering practice, the course focuses on the effects of significant geological features on location, design, construction, operation, and main- tenance of engineering projects. CIV 1510 Materials 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1132) The course focuses on the structural, chemical, and mechanical properties of materials of importance to civil engineers; fundamental nature of matter; signifi- cance of phase transformations; control of micro- structure; mechanisms of failure of materials. CIV 1 51 1 Materials Laboratory 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Taken concurrently with CIV 1510) A laboratory in which standard tests and equipment are used to determine structural and mechanical properties of materials common to civil engineering practice: concrete, aggregates, steel, wood, asphalt, glass, etc. CIV 1530 Transportation Analysis and Planning 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Juniors and seniors only) Course material includes establishment of planning framework; demand modeling from regional economy to transportation network assignments; mode selec- tion; technical and economic evaluation; and current issues including environmental assessment, transpor- tation systems management, citizen participation, and planning in developing countries. CIV 1 540 Highway Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1620 and CIV 1410) A general approach to highway engineering, topics normally include administration, economic factors, planning, environmental impacts, geometric design, drainage, and the design of flexible pavements. CIV 1550 Construction Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Sertiors only) An overall perspective of the construction industry and tasks that must be addressed by construction management, including resource allocation, con- struction environment, organization, contracts, funding, cash flow, productivity, labor relations, network plan- ning and scheduling, and project control and safety. CIV 1610 Computer Applications in Civil Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GE 1100) Introduction to problem solving methods in civil engi- neering, especially those requiring a data processing machine. Examples of civil engineering problems are introduced and methods of solution discussed. Students are assigned several projects in implement- ing solution techniques on computers. Proficiency in computing, problem solving, documentation, and presentation is acquired by critiquing and classroom discussion. CIV 1620 Engineering Measurements 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 124 and PHY 1222) The mathematics and instrumentation used in land surveying for obtaining measurements of distance, elevation, and direction, and the methodology applied for traverses, areas, coordinate systems, horizontal and vertical curves, earthwork, and topographic mapping. CIV 1621 Engineering Measurements Laboratory 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. GE 1100) Taken simultaneously with CIV 1 620, the course con- sists of field problems illustrating and applying the lecture material in CIV 1620, with computer applications. CIV 1 630 Civil Engineering Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1223) The course covers application of system synthesis and optimization techniques for civil engineering students; calculus method, linear programming, net- work analysis, and dynamic programming. *Lab fee required. Electrical Engineering / ( CIV 1640 Applied Probability Theory for Civil Engineers 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 223) Topics normally include applications of probability theory to civil engineering problems, probabilities of events, random variables and distributions, derived distributions, expectation, common protjability models, and an introduction to statistics. CIV 1650 Legal Aspects of Civil Engineering 4Q.H. (Prereq. Seniors only) Business law for the engineering organizations, in- cluding description and evaluation of various types of contracts for engineering services and construction, procedures for submitting bids, procedures for claims and legal steps to minimize risk exposure, both in U.S. and international business. CIV 1810 Special Topic In Civil Engineering 4Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) This is a special course \N\ih\n the field of civil engi- neering initiated by the appropriate discipline com- mittee and approved by the department. CIV 1820 Special Project in Civil Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Outstanding academic performance) The course offers individual study in an area within the field of civil engineering, selected by the student and his or her instructor with approval by the appropriate discipline committee, resulting in a definitive report and an oral presentation. Electrical Engineering The course descriptions listed under Electrical Engineering are intended to show the general scope of the subject that will be covered. Since courses are continuously updated, specific topics or methods of approach may vary from term to term. ECE 1101 E.E. Lab 1-A Circuits and Systems I Laboratory 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. PHY 1223) Design and confirmation testing of elementary cir- cuits containing both LTI circuit elements and other components which are either nontime invariant or nonlinear Measurement techniques are developed to meet specific design problems. ECE 1102 E.E. Lab 1-B Electronics I Laboratory 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1101) Design and confirmation testing of elementary dig- ital circuits. Included are designs of gates them- selves as well as the assembly of simple functional blocks such as decoders, registers, and flip-flops. ECE 1103 E.E. Laboratory l-Measurements 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1211) The course covers basic electrical measurements; report writing, use of standard laboratory instru- ments, including digital voltmeters, oscilloscopes, and bridges. ECE 1 1 71 Electrical Engineering I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 1 28; not open to electrical engineering majors) Introductory course to electric circuit theory cov- ers Kirchhoff's laws, loop and nodal analysis, Thev- enin's theorem, power and energy exponential ex- citation and the system function. ECE 1 1 72 Electrical Engineering II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1 1 71 ; not open to electrical engineering majors) Prooerties and analysis of electronic devices, cir- cuits, and systems; elements of control systems; principles of energy conversion. Emphasis on each topic determined according to major discipline. ECE 1 1 73 Power Systems and Controls 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1171) Basic concepts of electromechanical energy con- version stressing the terminal characteristics and operation of d-c and a-c machines, elements of power distribution systems, and concepts of feedback con- trol, with application to power systems and plant control. ECE 1 1 74 Basic Electrical Instrumentation 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1171) Basic electrical measurement devices, including ammeters, voltmeters, oscilloscopes, and bridges; instrumentation techniques such as direct measure- ment, comparative measurement, and analog methods. Application to nonelectrical disciplines is included. ECE 1 1 75 Modelling Techniques 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1171 and ECE 1172; also FORTRAN IV programming) Introduction to the concept of modelling techniques to represent physical, biological, and social systems; electrical analogs and use of analog computers; intro- duction to digital modelling and the use of digital computation. ECE 1191 Introduction to Digital Computers I: Design and Organization 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PHY 1223 and MTH 1 128) Introduction to the basic components of digital sys- tems and methods for their analysis and design: logic gates and flipflops, Boolean algebra, and com- binational and sequential circuits. Integrated circuit logic families and functional building blocks: registers, 70 / Electrical Engineering counters, decoders, multiplexers, and memories. Data representation and coding techniques. Register- transfer language for specification of instruction sets, processor organization, and logic design. Case study of a specific central processor instruction set imple- mentation. Assembly language programming tech- niques and introduction to system software. ECE 1192 Introduction to Digital Computers II: Fundamentals of Computation Structures 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1191) Central processor alternatives: instruction formats, addressing modes, bus structures, arithmetic units, timing analysis, and stacks. Algorithms for arithmetic operations with various data representations. Input- output and memory organization. Introduction to microprocessors. This course, like its predecessor ECE 1 1 91 , is oriented toward the design, not just the comprehension, of digital systems likely to be encoun- tered by the electrical engineer ECE 1 21 1 Circuits and Systems I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 128 and PHY 1223) The course covers circuit elements (linear, non-linear, time-invariant, and time-varying), sources (independ- ent and controlled), Kirchhoff's laws, Tellegen's theorem, Thevenin's theorem, network topology, mesh and nodal analysis. ECE 1212 Circuits and Systems II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1211) Topics include linearity and time-invariance, system function, forced and force-free response of networks and LTI systems, singularity response, partial fraction expansion, "pre-box" concept, and convolution. ECE 1213 Circuits and Systems III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1212) Topics include Thevenin's theorem revisited, magnitude and phase plots, resonance, two-port networks, energy and power and convolution. ECE 1 21 4 Circuits and Systems IV 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1213) The course focuses on basic concepts and tech- niques of linear system theory. Review of system theory in terms of the convolution integral; waveform representation in terms of the Fourier series, Fourier Integral, and the bilateral Laplace transform; system concepts in terms of the function and their application to filters and feedback systems. ECE 1215 Circuits and Systems 1 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 127, PHY 1223) Topics include electric circuit elements, sources, Kirchhoff's laws, Tellegen's theorem, Thevenin's theorem, mesh and node equations, power and energy linearity and time invariance, response to exponential excitations, system function. ECE 1216 Circuits and Systems 2 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1215) Topics include forced and force-free response of networks, singularity response, "pre-box" concept, classical a-c response, application of Laplace trans- form to circuit problems and determination of initial ECE 1 21 7 Circuits and Systems 3 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1228, ECE 1216) Power and energy reciprocity, magnitude and phase plots, n-port network theory Frequency domain analysis of circuits, stability considerations. The concept of state variables for networks, natural fre- quencies, and eigenvalues. ECE 1 21 8 Circuits and Systems 4 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1217, ECE 1332) Continuation of state variables for active and passive networks, noise considerations and linear filters. Nonlinear, and time-varying linear systems. Introduc- tion to distributed systems. ECE 1 21 9 Circuits and Systems A 6 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 128 and PHY 1223) Includes the material covered in course ECE 1211, Circuits and Systems I, plus half of the material in course ECE 1212, Circuits and Systems II. ECE 1 220 Circuits and Systems B 6 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1219) Completes the material in ECE 1212, Circuits and Systems II, plus the material in course ECE 1213, Circuits and Systems III. ECE 130\E.E. Lab 2-A Circuits and Systems III Laboratory 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1102) Design and testing of simple systems for the analysis and modification of analog signals. The emphasis is on discrete methodologies whose implementation is achieved as a computer program. Included are designs of filters with specific characteristics and the spectral analysis through DFT's and the like. This laboratory's central purpose is to develop the understanding of the relationship between a filter as represented by a transfer function and that same filter as represented by the system which implements the transfer function. ECE 1302 E.E. Lab 2-B Electronics III Laboratory 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1301) Design and confirmation testing of some of the basic building blocks of analog integrated circuits. Varia- tions on the Widlar current mirrors will be designed and explored and then used in the design of differen- tial amplifiers employing integrated matched transis- tor pairs. One of the objectives of this laboratory is to explore the design advantages that arise from the inherent component matching of integrated circuits. ECE 1303 E.E. Laboratory ll-Circuits and Systems 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1212) The course includes experiments relevant to the Circuits and Systems courses, together with more work in measurements. ECE 1304 E.E. Lab 3-A Electronics IV Laboratory 1 Q.H.* Design and confirmation testing of amplifier circuits employing discrete elements and packaged op-amps. The emphasis is on the stabilization and the control of the performance characteristics of such amplifiers through feedback. The student will be expected to design circuits using manufacturer's specifications and to demonstrate finished designs which will work if the active devices are anywhere within the manufac- turer's tolerances. ECE 1305 E.E. Lab 3-B EM Field Theory II Laboratory 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1304) Design and confirmation testing of linear antennas and arrays for specific directivity. Transmission line impedance matching and resonator section designs. Applications of Faraday's and Ampere's laws through CAD design of inductors, RF and power transformers, or electromechanical actuators. ECE 1306 E.E. Laboratory Ill-Devices 2 Q.H.* The course includes introduction to the digital com- puter, electro-optics, terminal characteristics of active devices. ECE 1307 Senior Design Laboratory 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1361) In this laboratory, small teams of students carry through an engineering development product from proposal through paper and CAD to construction and testing. Economic factors, component tolerances, production design, and acceptance testing are intrinsic compo- nents of successful projects. Many teams will work on the same project and the designs will be judged competitively A typical project might be an addressable A/D converter properly interfaced to a particular microcomputer ECE 1331 Discrete Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GE 1100) Topics include historical review and future perspectives of discrete systems; representation of digital signals, quantization; introduction to digital filters, moving average filters; Z-transforms, inverse Z-transforms; recursive digital filters, stability considerations, steady- state and transient response; introduction to non- recursive techniques, the discrete Fourier transform, the fast Fourier transform; applications to computa- tion of systems transfer functions. ECE 1 332 Discrete Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GE 1100, ECE 1216) Topics include historical review and future perspectives of discrete systems; representation of digital signals, sampling, quantization, introduction to digital filters, moving average filters; Z-transforms, inverse Z-trans- forms; recursive digital filters, stability considerations, steady-state and transient response; introduction to nonrecursive techniques, the discrete Fourier trans- form, the fast Fourier transform; applications to com- putation of systems transfer functions. ECE 1 333 Continuous Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1217, ECE 1332) The course focuses on basic concepts and tech- niques of continuous linear system theory Topics include system theory in terms of the convolution integral; waveform representation in terms of the Fourier series, Fourier integral, and the bilateral Laplace transform; system concepts in terms of the Electrical Engineering / 71 system function and their application to filters and feedback systems. ECE 1 346 Electronics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1216) This first course in electronics stresses the use of solid-state active devices in digital circuits. The first part of this course introduces binary values, logic operations, flip-flops and registers from the view- point of symbolic logic gates. Boolean algebra and Karnaugh maps. The latter part of this course deals with solid-state devices for the realization of logic functions. Concepts of diodes are introduced followed by BJT and field-effect characteristics leading to the use of such devices in implementing Inveters, NAND and NOR gates for T2L, CMOS and NMOS logic families. ECE 1 347 Electronics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1346, ECE 1216; Coreq. ECE 1332) This second course in electronics stresses the use of transistors, with emphasis on integrated devices in the design of analog circuits. Topics covered include biasing, linearized incremental model characteristics such as gain and impedance levels, Early effect, use of signal flowgraphs and frequency response for single and compound stages followed by an introduction to operational amplifiers. ECE 1349 Electronic Design I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1347) This third course in electronics continues the design^ of analog circuits with emphasis on operational ampli- fiers. Topics include concepts of feedback, open- and closed-loop gain, effect of feedback on impedance levels, frequency response, stability and compensa- tion in feedback systems. ECL is introduced from the viewpoint of feedback, followed by an analog/digital design example. ECE 1 350 Electronic Design II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1349, ECE 1333) This fourth course in electronic design is a continuation of the third course. It stresses the design of systems involving analog, digital and analog/digital approaches to signal acquisition and processing. ECE 1361 Electromagnetic Field Theory I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 225) The course focuses on definition and representation of scalar and vector fields. Coordinate systems; elements vector calculus; definition of the concepts of gradient, divergence, curl, and the "del" operator, free-space electrostatics; definition of the electric field intensity; the scalar potential; solution to Poisson and Laplace equations; macroscopic model of dielec- tric materials; the electric polarization and the electric flux density vector; boundary conditions; Lorentz force; free space magnetostatics; magnetic vector potential and solution to the "vector" Poisson equation; macro- scopic model of magnetic materials; magnetization and magnetic field intensity; boundary conditions. ECE 1 362 Electromagnetic Reld Theory II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1361) Topics include generalization of the Maxwell equa- 72 / Electrical Engineering tions to the case of time-varying fields; Faraday induc- tion law; wave equations and the plane wave solution; Poynting theorem and the concept of energy stored by the fields; reflection and refraction of plane waves; time-harmonic wave equations for the scalar and vector potentials; time-harmonic form of retarded potentials; radiation from dipole; motion of charged particles in fields; magnetoionic media; elementary discussion of plasma physics and M.H.D. ECE 1 363 Electromagnetic Field Theory I 4 Q.H. (Prereq.ECE 1218, PHY 1223) Starting with Maxwell's equations, the major areas of statics, dynamics, quasistatics, and material media are studied as special cases. Statics covers the study of the electrostatic and magnetostatic fields, includ- ing the scalar electric potential and vector magnetic potential. In dynamics, Faraday's law and Ampere's law are presented for time-varying electromagnetic fields. Quasi-statics introduces the concept of elec- tromechanical coupling with applications to elemen- tary energy conversion, both electric and magnetic devices. Material media covers the macroscopic model of dielectric materials, the electric polarization and the electric flux density vector; macroscopic model of magnetic materials, magnetization, and magnetic field intensity; and boundary conditions. ECE 1 364 Electromagnetic Field Theory II 4 Q.H. (Prereq.ECE 1363) This course offers an introduction to the applications of electromagnetic field theory. From Maxwell's equa- tions for time-varying fields, the following areas are developed: The concepts of waves and energy are explored, including plan wave propagation, wave- guides and Poynting's theorem. Radiation is studied with emphasis on spherical waves and elementary scattering and application to antenna design. Distri- buted systems are treated in terms of waveguide circuit concepts, transmission lines and Smith chart techniques. Other applications in the optics and acoustics areas will be presented. ECE 1371 Electrical Machines I 4 Q.H. (Prereq.ECE 1364, ECE 1333) Review of electromagnetic field theory as applied to electromechanics; magnetic circuits, transformers and their circuit representations; principles of electrome- chanical energy conversion (state-variable formula- tion of electromechanical coupling, singly and multiply excited magnetic-field systems, elementary concepts of rotating machines including transformer emf, speed emf, and torque production); steady-state theory and performance of basic rotating machines such as induction, synchronous, and d-c commutator machines through cirucit-model concepts. ECE 1372 Electrical Machines II 4 Q.H. (Prereq.ECE 1371) Dynamic behavior of electromechanical devices; tran- sient performance of synchronous machines; syn- chronous and induction-machine dynamics; d-c machine dynamics. ECE 1375 Electromechanical Dynamics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1363, ECE 1364) The approximate form of Maxwell's equations for quasi-static electromagnetic fields is presented. The concept of the generalized inductance and capaci- tance is developed, followed by the definition of electric and magnetic field systems. Force and energy relations are introduced, followed by rotational and translational mechanical systems. The complete electromechanical system is presented in terms of a circuit model with a discussion of energy conversion. Applications include the electrodynamic loudspeaker, reluctance motors, a-c rotating machines with single or multiple excita- tion. The dynamic equations of motion are solved by linearization methods. ECE 1376 Machines and Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq.ECE 1375) The course offers a detailed investigation of the oper- ating principles of synchronous machines, synchro- nous motor and generator power-angle characteristics, machine dynamics, machine and power system stability. ECE 1377 Introduction to Electric Machinery 4Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1361) Topics include review of magnetic field, energy and energy conversion concepts. Transformers and their circuit representations; application of energy con- version concepts to basic rotating machines and exploration of the Theory of Induction, synchronous, and d-c machines. Limitations in actual machines will be discussed. ECE 1378 Transients in Electric Power Systems 4 Q.H. Introduction to the response of various elements of a power network to the transients caused by lightning, switching, and faults. Some of the equipment to be considered in terms of transient response include the transmission line, lightning arresters, fuses, transform- ers, and circuit breakers. ECE 1379 Transients in Electric Power Systems 4Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1333) Introduction to transient response in electrical power systems. Topics include lightning; switching; faults; protection against transient overvoltages. Some of the equipment to be considered in terms of transient response include transmission lines, transformers, circuit breakers, surge arresters, and fuses. ECE 1381 Computer Engineering I: Digital Computer Architecture 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1346) Introduction to the structure of programmable digital systems. Sequential circuits and functional building blocks such as registers, counters, decoders, multi- plexers, and memories. Data representation. Register transfer language specification of instruction sets and processor organization. Case study of a specific central Electrical Engineering / 73 processor instruction set implementation. Input- output and memory organization, bus structures and arithmetic units. Students complete a design project involving the assembly language programming of a microprocessor ECE 1382 Computer Engineering II: Software Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1381, GE 1100 or equivalent) Basic issues of systems software, from the point-of- view of structured software design, are considered. Topics covered include the modular design of assem- blers, linkers, and macroprocessors. Basic techniques of software engineering are explored, including such concepts as error handling, program verification, unit testing, and documentation. A team project is assigned, with student groups of two or three implementing individual modules in a larger program. A student manager group is used as well. Projects are carried out on either large mainframes or laboratory micro- computer systems. ECE 1383 Computer Engineering III: Integrated Microcomputer-based Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1382) The course focuses upon understanding the operation of systems which contain a microcomputer as a key element. An important issue is the way in which the computer software is synchronized with the hardware components of the system to achieve coherent opera- tion. A discussion of these interfacing techniques comprises the first half of the course. The rest of the course focuses on several specific applications. A typical example may be the design of a modern vehicle where the computer may control functions such as fuel regulation, optimization of engine speed, etc. A project is associated with the course that requires the student to design a device using the methodology discussed in class. ECE 1384 Computer Engineering iV: Computer-aided Design Methods in Electrical Engineering 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1382, ECE 1364, ECE 1350, ECE 1218) Use of packaged software and graphics facilities to implement realistic designs in electrical engineering. Applications include the design of antennae, wave guides, transmission lines, electric circuits, digital filters, and VLSI methods. Students are required to develop their own specialized software using availa- ble CAD tools. ECE 1385 Computer Engineering V: Introduction to Robotics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1382, ECE 1383, ECE 1333) Studies of intelligent interactions between machines and their environment with emphasis on sensory (vision)-driven locomotion and manipulation. Integra- tion of sensors, manipulators and computers into intelligent robotic systems. Vision, touch, force, posi- tion, proximity, and torque sensors and their role in adaptive control of robot movements. Computational needs of sensory data processing. VLSI implementa- tion of data-driven architectures for low-leveh vision. Image processing and understanding as a means to developing symbolic models of the visual (sensory) world. Manipulator kinematics and dynamics. VLSI controllers for multicoordinate robotic systems. Robotic software tools, including high level language and decision-making functions. Real-time micro- processor networks and control hierarchies within the robot. ECE 1386 Computer Engineering VI: Structure of Large-scale Computer Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1384) Study of large-scale computer systems with applica- tions to robotics, communications, artificial intelligence, and interactive computer design. The course consists of two major topics: 1) A global overview of distributed and parallel computing systems for problem solving, planning, massive data processing, etc., and 2) Examination of special purpose processors which constitute such complex systems including parallel hardware for image processing, industrial data acquisition and control systems, array proces- sors, and knowledge-based systems. ECE 1 390 Senior Project Laboratory I 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1347 and ECE 1362) In this course, students work with a faculty adviser on some term project, either experimental or theoretical. ECE 1391 Senior Project Laboratory II 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1347 and ECE 1362) This course may be a continuation of the project started in ECE 1 390 or it may be a new project. Again, the student works closely with a faculty adviser. ECE 1 400 Special Topics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of department) Topics covered vary from term to term depending on the interests of the department and the students. ECE 1401 Selected Topics In Electronics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1347) This course concerns (1 ) the description and applica- tion of those electronic devices (thyristors, photo- diodes, etc.) not covered in depth in the regular electronics sequence; (2) electronic subsystems (AFC, shift registers, etc.); (3) systems (navigation systems, telephone switching systems, etc.). Most of the pre- sentations are made by students on topics of their choice, but there are also lectures by invited speakers as well as by the instructor. ECE 1404 Theory and Technology of Semiconductor Devices I 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. ME 1386) This course comprises a closely coupled lecture and laboratory series. Topics covered include technology and physics of the planar diffusion process, elec- tronic properties of homogeneous semiconductors, inhomogeneities and junctions (Fermi potential dia- grams, equilibrium at an abrupt discontinuity, and the behavior of a junction under applied bias), and the junction transistor 74 / Electrical Engineering ECE 1405 Theory and Technology of Semiconductor Devices II 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1404) This course is a continuation of ECE 1404. Material covered includes introduction to unipolar transistor action, introduction to surface effects, tire MOS-FET and a discussion of noise problems encountered in semiconductor devices. ECE 1 408 Physical Electronics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1350, ECE 1362, CHM 1132) Elements of solid-state theory including wave me- chanics, crystalline and amorphous solids, statistical mechanics, and electron transport theory are de- veloped to provide a proper background for the central objective of the course w/hich is a thorough under- standing of the principal building block of semicon- ductor devices— the junction diode. Other important elements such as ohmic contacts and Schottky barriers are explored as well as the several ways that these may be generated in individual and integrated form. Finally as time permits, these elements are joined together to form BJT's and JFET's. ECE 1 41 8 Control System Theory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1 347) Control system concepts; goals and basic com- ponents. Review of time- and frequency-domain tech- niques. Classical control system theory; error analysis for different systems. Analysis of second- and third- order systems. Stability and relative stability using root locus and Nyquist diagrams. The Nichols chart. Compensation, application of computer technology to control systems analysis and design. State-variable description of dynamic systems. The state equations and the fundamental analog realization of the standard equations. Properties of the state-transition matrix. Optimal systems. Introduction to sampled data sys- tems. The Z-transform as an analog to the Laplace transform. ECE 1 420 Control Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1217, ECE 1350) Some of the topics included: classical control system theory error analysis, stability and relative stability using root locus and Nyquist diagrams, the Nichols chart, compensation, application of computer tech- nology to control system analysis and design. Also included as time permits: state variable description of dynamic systems, properties of the state-transition matrix, optimal systems, introduction to sampled data systems and the Z-transform as an analog to the Laplace transform. ECE 1 430 E.E. Power Laboratory A 1 Q.H.* ECE 1431 E.E. Power Laboratory I 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1333; Coreq. ECE 1471) Single-phase circuits; balanced and unbalanced poly- phase circuits; power measurement in polyphase circuits; transformer tests and equivalent circuits. ECE 1 434 E.E. Power Laboratory II 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. ECE 1431, ECE 1371; Coreq. ECE 1472) Experimental work with rotating machines and sys- tems; steady-state and dynamic models of synchron- ous induction, and d-c machines; power-system load- flow studies and fault analyses. ECE 1451 Communication Theory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1214) Topics include signal analysis, including signal classes, Fourier methods, correlation functions, amplitude density, and power spectra; amplitude modulation, Hilbert transform applications, analytic signal, and complex envelope. ECE 1452 Fundamentals of Communication Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1451) Topics include frequency modulation, signal-to-noise ratios in AM and FM, multiplexing, sampling theory, pulse modulation systems, data transmission, signal space. Correlation detection, probability, random var- iables and random processes, information theory and coding. ECE 1454 Communication Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1333, ECE 1217) Signal representations and characterization; char- acterization of thermal noise in electronic circuits; amplitude modulation and demodulation; frequency and phase modulation and demodulation; pulse mod- ulation; transmission of digital information. ECE 1461 Wave Transmission and Reception 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GE 1 1 00 and ECE 1 361 ) Topics include analysis of radiation, transmission, and reception of electromagnetic and acoustic waves using graphical and digital computer techniques. Design of distributed systems, antennas, microphones, loudspeakers, and sonar transducers. ECE 1462 Advanced Topics In Electromagnetic Field Theory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1362) This course is a continuation of the required courses in field theory. Topics covered include microwave and waveguide structures, careful development of elec- tromagnetic energy and force concepts, and an intro- duction to radiation and antenna theory ECE 1465 Wave Transmission and Reception 4Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1363, ECE 1364) This course discusses the transmission, radiation, and reception of electromagnetic waves at and above radio frequencies. Transmission-line theory is develop- ed using Maxwell's equations and the circuit theory approximations are presented. Matched lines, tuning stubs, and loaded transmission lines are discussed, together with the theory and applications of the Smith chart. The theory of guided waves in structures of rectangular and circular cross-section is presented, followed by the theory of the cavity resonator The linear antenna is discussed and the radiation fields, directivity, and gain are defined. Other topics include the aperture antenna and the insulated antenna. General Engineering / 75 ECE 1 471 Electrical Power Systems I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE1333) Basic introduction to electrical power systems, wherein three-phase circuits are analyzed under balanced steady-state operation. Topics include system ele- ments, their characteristics and interaction; system modeling and network calculations. ECE 1 472 Electrical Power Systems II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1471) A continuation of basic studies in electrical power systems. Topics include power system load-flow analysis; symmetrical components and fault cal- culations; system protection; economic operation of power systems; introduction to power system stability. ECE 1481 Machine Language and Assembly Language Programming 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1191) This course focuses on study of the machine and assembly languages of a selected digital computer. Machine representation of numbers, characters, and instructions. Machine language programming; flow of control, relocatability, input/output instructions, ad- dressing, and instruction modification. Symbolic assembly language; macros, literals, and pseudo- instructions. Several programming projects are an integral part of the course. ECE 1482 Programming Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1481) Continuation of ECE 1481. Assemblers, searching and sorting techniques, macro-processors loaders. High-level languages and an introduction to their compilation. Introduction to operating systems. Pro- gramming projects are an integral part of the course. ECE 1 484 Applied Discrete Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 225) The course offers an introduction to elementary number theory modern algebra, combinatorial math- ematics and discrete probability theory, including such topics as prime numbers, least common multiple, greatest common divisor, Euclid's algorithm, contin- ued fractions, congruences, groups, rings, fields. General Engineering Boolean algebra, combinations and permutations, generating functions, random variables, and Markov chains. The material in this course is widely applica- ble to the field of computer science. ECE 1485 Microcomputer-Based Design 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1192) Course material includes characteristics of micro- processor applications; external and internal archi- tecture of a specific microprocessor family; logic design of a simple microcomputer. Instruction set, timing cycles, I/O port selection and interrupt-han- dling; software design for keyboard monitor, break- point facility and multiplexed displays. Application design studies of real-time interfaces to electro- mechanical devices. Evolutionary trends in LSI micro- processors and memory systems. Integrated hardware and software design projects using laboratory micro- computers are an integral part of this course, which is designed primarily for electrical engineers. ECE 1486 Numerical Methods and Computer Applications 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GE 1 1 00 and ECE 1214) The course focuses on presentation of numerical techniques used in solving scientific and engineering problems with the aid of digital computers. Topics covered include modeling and simulating of deter- ministic and probabilistic systems, theory of interpo- lation, iteration methods, numerical solution of ordinary and partial differential equations, signal detection, and use libraries of scientific subroutines. Represent- ative problems are chosen for solution on a digital computer ECE 1 487 Digital Techniques 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECE 1 346 and ECE 1 1 91 ) This course attempts to supplement the topics cov- ered in the electronics sequences and the introduction to digital computer courses. Topics may vary from year to year and may include details of semicon- ductor integrated gate circuits, flip flops, clocks, counters, memory units, A/D and D/A conversions, coding, and the fundamental techniques of digital data transmissions. The course descriptions listed under General Engineering are intended to show the scope of the subject that will be covered. Since courses are continuously updated, specific topics or methods of approach may vary from term to term. GE 1 1 00 Computer for Engineers 4 Q.H. Introduction to use of computers in the solution of engineering problems; FORTRAN programming lan- guage. A survey of the organization and function of an elementary digital computer; the use of flowcharts in developing program logic; establishing and manipu- lating tables, arrays, and matrices in memory, using subprograms and subroutine packages, and graphical output on an X-Y plotter. GE 1110 Engineering Graphics and Design 4Q.H. Manual and computer methods for depiction of three- dimensional objects. The orthographic projection system using principal and auxiliary views is presented, as is reading and analysis of drawings, fundamentals of manufacturing processes, and dimensioning prac- tice. There is an emphasis on engineering design of components and systems, and computer graphics using software packages. Students are required to write programs as an introduction to computer-aided design and manufacturing, and preliminary to design engineering. 76 / Industrial Engineering Industrial Engineering The course descriptions listed under Industrial Engineering are intended to show the general scope of the subject that will be covered. Since courses are continuously updated, specific topics or methods of approach may vary from term to term. IIS 1 1 25 COBOL Programming I 4 Q.H. This course covers fundamentals of computer pro- gramming in COBOL. Topics include elementary computer functioning, program organization, input/ output operations, arithmetic and data-handling verbs, and program logic development through the use of flow charts. Storage and manipulation of large data files on magnetic tape are introduced. No prior computer experience is required. IIS 1 1 26 COBOL Programming II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1125) Higher-level aspects of the COBOL language are considered. Included are use of decision tables in developing program logic, improving program effi- ciency; error detection and minimization techniques; bulk data storage in magnetic tape and disc files; storing, merging, updating, sorting, and purging data files; generating reports. IIS 1 200 Work Design 4 Q.H. Topics include the engineering design process, prin- ciples of work physiology workplace design from the standpoint of employee safety and effectiveness. Also covered are work measurement techniques, which include direct measurement, synthetic standards, and work sampling. A project in which principles of work design must be applied is an integral part of the course. IIS 1300 Probabilistic Analysis for Engineers 4Q.H. (Prereq. Integral & Differential Calculus) Probability theory presented axiomatically with em- phasis on sample space representation of continuous and discrete random variables. Material will cover standard distributions. Topics include expectation, transform techniques, and change of variable. IIS 1310 Statistics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1300) The course examines the definition of a statistic; distributions of random variables, including normal, T chi-square, R Poisson, binomial; estimation of para- meters, point estimation by method of moments, max- imum likelihood, Bayes estimates, interval estimation, and hypothesis testing. IIS 1320 Statistics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1310) Topics include linear regression, analysis of variance, reliability and decision theory from Bayes rule. Appro- priate computer software is utilized to investigate example problems. IIS 1330 Principles of Computation and Programming I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FORTRAN) The course covers review of algorithms, computers. and programming. Machine language programming (instruction, execution, and addressing techniques). Coding and representation of data. Program debugging and verification. Survey of machines, devices, and languages. IIS 1340 Operations Research I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1224) Topics include deterministic models, including LP and duality; transportation and allocation; sensitivity and post-optimality analyses. Network analysis, includ- ing maximal flow, shortest route, and PERT IIS 1341 Operations Research II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1310) The course focuses on the stochastic models in OR; their analytical development and solution. Topics covered include queuing models, deterministic and stochastic inventory models, Markov chains, and sequencing. Dynamic programming and recursive functional expressions are also presented. IIS 1345 Management Information Systems 4 Q.H. This course covers design and implementation of computer-based information systems. Topics include: the value of information, tools of system analysis and design, impact of computer-based information systems on organizations and society, rudimentary computer architecture, input devices, data organization and storage, system configuration, communications, and output/display devices. IIS 1346 Basic Engineering Statistics 4 Q.H. (Not open to industrial engineering majors) The course covers introduction to basic probability distributions, including the binomial and hypergeo- metric, exponential, Poisson, and normal; laboratory data analysis. IIS 1350 Digital Simulation Techniques 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FORTRAN and IIS 1310 or IIS 1346) The course covers model development, validation and experimentation for discrete event simulation models. Specific topics include problem formulation, data collection and analysis, random variable gener- ation and statistical analysis of output. Experience with a major simulation language such as GPSS, SIMAN, or SIMSCRIPT is also acquired. IIS 1356 Engineering Economy 4 Q.H. (Prereq. B.E.T majors only) Topics include the formulation of analytical techniques, i.e., rate of return, present worth, and annual cost. The application of these techniques to solve business and engineering problems involving design, selection replacement, lease-buy decisions, and decisions between multiple alternatives. Sensitivity analysis and basic probability are introduced in cases where uncer- Industrial Engineering / 77 tainty exists. Brief survey of sources and costs of capital, debt-versus-equity financing, and leverage. IIS 1360 Engineering Economy and Statistical Decisions Theory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1300 or MTH 1387) The objective of the course is to familiarize the student with the theory and techniques of economic evalua- tion of an investment project. Introductory steps in the analysis of investment proposals, time value of money and cash flows; analysis of deterministic and stochas- tic cash flows in terms of present worth, annual cost, rate of return, and benefit/cost ratio. Decisioh tree for sequential decisions, criteria for decision making under uncertainty, utility theory, value of information, effect of accounting procedures and taxes on invest- ment analysis. IIS 1366 Engineering Economy 4 Q.H. (Not open to Industrial Engineering majors) Topics include the formulation of analytical techniques, I.E., rate of return, present worth, and annual cost. The application of these techniques to solve business and engineering problems involving design, selection, replacement, lease-buy decisions, and decisions between multiple alternatives. Sensitivity analysis and basic probability are introduced in cases where uncer- tainty exists. Brief survey of sources and costs of capital, debt-versus-equity financing, and leverage. IIS 1 370 industrial Cost Control 4 Q.H. Topics include fundamental concepts of accounting, with emphasis on using financial records to make engineering decisions. Study of financial statements of a firm. Contrast in usefulness of data from absorp- tion costing vs. direct costing. Interpretation of variance accounts. IIS 1400 Systems I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1224) Modeling, analysis, and control of linear feedback systems are examined through consideration of the following topics: differential equations as system models; transfer functions and block diagrams; system components and the method of analogies; accuracy and stability. Students will use appropriate computer software for applications. IIS 1401 Design Project 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1300, IIS 1350, and IIS 1340) The course examines analysis and design of major industrial engineering systems. Students are expected to undertake up to five projects drawn from line bal- ancing, job shop scheduling, stochastic network analysis, reliability in design, complex queuing system design, sequencing, or other areas of student and faculty interest. IIS 1405 Production and Inventory Control 4Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1 300 or equiv) Topics include basic inventory models and inventory management systems. Single-stage and multi-stage systems and their dynamics. Production control and aggregate planning. Mathematical and heuristic ap- proaches to aggregate scheduling. Cost structure and decision-oriented analyses. Consideration of job shop scheduling and dispatching problems. IIS 1 41 5 Facilities Design 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1 340) The course examines use of descriptive and opti- mizing models (e.g., simulation, queuing theory, and linear programming) to design facilities and asso- ciated materials-handling systems. Computer-assisted layout analysis techniques are applied to problems of real-world scope. IIS 1425 Material Handling System Design 4Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1340) The course covers design and analysis of large material-handling systems. Topics include computer control of handling systems, integration with produc- tion and inspection, automated storage/retrieval systems, automatic identification systems, and systems acquisitions. IIS 1 435 Reliability and Quality Control 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1310) Applied probability and statistical inference techniques are utilized in reliability analysis and quality control. Both theory and application are discussed in relation to the total quality assurance program. IIS 1455 Microcomputer Programming 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GE 1100 or FORTRAN programming lan- guage) A first course in microprocessor computing covers hex codes for assembly language. Basics of archi- tecture model, programming model, and addressing modes. Instruction set for a typical machine. Pro- gramming techniques and details for a 6502 proces- sor. Hands-on laboratory experimentation with typical interfacing problems. Case studies in the area of developing applications. Laboratory experimentation in staffed facility. IIS 1465 Microprocessor Applications 4 Q.H. (Prereq. IIS 1455, assembly language or permission of instructor) System architecture of several microcomputers, in- cluding microprocessors, bus design, multichip oper- ation, and current trends in processors (8-, 1 6-, and 32-bit). Interfacing problems and hardware include: sensors, actuators, D/A and A/D converters, data transmission, and parallel/serial I/O. Real-time pro- gramming with case studies; network and distributed processing. Also included are development techniques and current state-of-the-art trends. IIS 1470 Human Considerations in Engineering Design 4 Q.H. An introductory human factors course with emphasis on the physiological and anthropometric bases of equipment and workplace design. Topics include: (1 ) an overview of the field of human factors; (2) work, fatigue, and endurance; (3) thermal regulation and heat stress; (4) biomechanics; (5) effects of aging on work capacity; and (6) body response to vibration. 78 / Mechanical Engineering IIS 1475 Human Factors 4 Q.H. An introductory course with emphasis on human sensory/motor performance, information-processing capabilities, learning and skilled-task performance. Topics include: (1) an introduction to the experiment as a source of knowledge of human performance characteristics; (2) vision, visual performance, prin- ciples of display design; (3) audition, noise, and hearing damage, auditory signals; (4) information processing; (5) signal detection; (6) aging effects; and (7) system development. IIS 1480 People in Organizations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Seniors only) An overview course, using case studies and focusing on the influence of human behavioral factors on organizational performance. Students are provided with research evidence to aid in understanding and anticipating the response of organizational members to management practices. Topics include: (1) current theories of organization; (2) motivation; (3) group dynamics and the face-to-face work group; (4) leader- ship; (5) cognitive aspects of decision making; (6) work enrichment and job satisfaction; (7) job evaluation. IIS 1800 Independent Study in Industrial Engineering 4 Q.H. Independent study on advanced I.E. topics for stu- dents usually in the senior year and with high scholas- tic standing. Projects may be of an applied or theor- etical nature; formal report submitted to student's project supervisor at the end of quarter Mechanical Engineering The course descriptions listed under Mechanical Engineering are intended to show the general scope of the subject that will be covered. Since courses are continuously updated, specific topics or methods of approach may vary from term to term. bodies using impulse and momentum, and simple gyroscopic motion. ME 1311 Statics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PHY 1222) Topics include the concept of vector representation of force and moment; equivalent force systems; cen- troids and centers of gravity, distributed forces; equa- tions of equilibrium; free-body diagrams; applications to trusses, pin-connected frames and beams; and elementary concepts in friction. ME 1312 Dynamics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1311) Development of problem-solving ability in the fun- damentals of dynamics. Topics include kinematics of particles, kinematics of rigid bodies (nonrotating frames), mass moments of inertia, kinetics of particles and rigid bodies (plane motion only) using force, mass, and acceleration. ME 1 31 3 Strength of Materials I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1311) Topics include concept of stress and strain; principal stresses; Mohr's circle, stress-strain diagrams; moment of inertia of areas; stress and deformation of simple members under axial and torsional loads, and stresses in symmetrical beam bending. ME 1 31 4 Strength of Materials II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1313) Topics include asymmetrical bending; analysis of determinate and indeterminate beams by various methods; and buckling of columns. ME 1315 Dynamics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1312) Continued development of problem-solving ability in dynamics. Topics include kinematics of rigid bodies using rotating frames, kinetics of particles and rigid bodies using work and energy introduction of La- grange's equations, kinetics of particles and rigid ME 1 320 Dynamics for Civil Engineers 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CIV 1210) Topics include kinematics, translating reference frames, mass moments of inertia, plane motion of rigid bodies, and instantaneous equations of motion. ME 1321 Mechanics for Electrical Engineers 4Q.H. (Prereq. PHY 1222)) The course focuses on the study of kinematics and kinetics of rigid bodies, instantaneous equations of motion, work and energy and impulse and momentum. ME 1330 Mechanical Design 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1314) Applications of the basic concepts of mechanics, strength of materials, and mechanical behavior of materials to the design process are covered. Basic considerations in design and its open-ended nature are discussed. The course may include topics such as review of fundamentals of stress and deflection analysis as required, theories of failure, design for fatigue strength, product liability, numerical methods in design, modeling, simulation, and optimization of mechanical systems. ME 1331 Design Project 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1330) The design project is the application of the engi- neering sciences to the design of a system com- ponent or process. Students will choose the particular design project with the approval of appropriate faculty. Design teams will be organized. Each project will include open-ended problems, development and use of design methodology formulation of design problem statements and specifications, consideration of alter- Mechanical Engineering / 79 native solutions, feasibility considerations, and detailed system descriptions. It should include realistic con- straints (such as economic factors, safety, reliability, maintenance, asthetics, ethics, and social impact). ME 1332 Thermal Design 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME1345) The purpose of the course is to develop the ability of the students to synthesize their understanding and knowledge of the basic concepts of thermodynamics, fluid mechanics, and heat transfer to meet the specifi- cations of a design objective, which can be the thermal design of a system, component, and/or process. The course may include topics such as basic considera- tions in design, review of fundamentals of heat transfer and fluid mechanics, numerical methods in heat transfer, heat transfer analysis of heat exchanges, heat exchanger pressure drop analysis, analysis of fiydraulic systems, modeling, systems simulation, and topics in optimization. One or more design problems will be assigned. ME 1 340 Thermodynamics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1223) Thermodynamics is the study of systems in which energy and its flow across systems boundaries are important. In this first course energy heat, and work are defined and used in the Rrst Law of Thermody- namics. Other thermodynamic properties and equa- tions of state are introduced, with emphasis on tabular and graphical forms for simple compressible systems and on the ideal gas. Phases and phase transitions are briefly discussed, and energy analysis of both open and closed systems is examined. The Second Law of Thermodynamics and the property entropy are introduced, and their macro- and microscopic impli- cations discussed. Emphasis, however, is placed on the macroscopic consequences of irreversibility and the limitation this places, through the Second Law, on the behavior of engineering systems. This course concentrates on basic concepts and their proper application to representative engineering systems. ME 1341 Thermodynamics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1 340) Course includes study of vapor cycles for use with both fossil and nuclear fuels, consideration of various gas power cycles, including the Brayton and regener- ative gas turbine cycles, and the Otto and Diesel cycles for reciprocating internal combustion engines. The concept of availability is introduced, integrated with the study of the above cycles, and followed by the thermodynamics of nonreacting mixtures, particularly for air-water vapor mixtures. ME 1 345 Heat Transfer I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1340, ME 1370, and MTH 1226) The theories that describe conduction, convection, and thermal radiation heat transfer mechanisms are studied. Steady-state and transient conduction prob- lems are discussed in rectangular, cylindrical, and spherical coordinate systems. Convective heat transfer mechanisms are studied, and the concept of the Nusselt-Reynolds Number correlation is introduced. Description of thermal radiation heat transfer between surfaces is discussed. ME 1 370 Fluid Mechanics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1340, ME 1313, and MTH 1225) The course offers an introduction to the concepts of fluid mechanics: fluid statics, includirig pressure dis- tribution and forces on submerged surfaces; differen- tial and integral formulations of conservation of mass, momentum, and energy with emphasis on control- volume applications; pipe flow with consideration of head loss, use of the Moody diagram and analysis of pipe networks. ME 1 380 Materials Science 5 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1340 and CHM 1 132) An introduction to materials science for engineers, emphasizing the structure-property-function relation. Topics include crystallography structure of solids, imperfections in crystals, phase equilibrium, phase transformations, diffusion, and physical properties. A laboratory is included in this course. ME 1 386 Materials Science 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1 340 and CHM 1 1 32) An introduction to materials science for engineers, emphasizing the structure-property-function relation. Topics include crystallography structure of solids, imperfections in crystals, phase equilibrium, diffusion, and behavior of metals and semiconductors. ME 1390 Measurements and Analysis 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. ME 1 340 and ME 1 31 2) Lecture subjects include design of experiments, instrumentation, measurements, data analysis, and report writing. Students apply the principles developed in class to a variety of laboratory experiments. Written reports are required. ME 1395 Research Report 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Jr Standing) Students prepare a brief research paper on a tech- nical subject of importance in mechanical engineering. All students must, before the end of the second week of the quarter of their enrollment, obtain written accept- ance from a department faculty member for their research subject. Each student's work must show an ability to recognize the component parts of a subject and to organize them in a clear, logical, written pre- sentation that demonstrates a command of grammar and style. ME 1401 Advanced Strength and Applied Elasticity 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1314) Topics include asymmetrical bending; analysis of curved beams and rings; and an introduction to plane elasticity using rectangular and polar coordinate systems. ME 1402 Engineering Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1314) The course focuses on the numerical and experi- mental methods in stress analysis. Analytical tech- niques include an introduction to the finite element *l ah fpfi rpnulred. 80 / Mechanical Engineering method. Experimental methods include, among others, strain gauge techniques and photoelasticity. ME 1 405 Mechanical Vibrations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME1312) The course focuses on the study of one-, two-, and multi-degrees of freedom systems using classical, energy, Laplace, mobility, matrix, and computer tech- niques. A laboratory is included in this course. ME 1408 System Analysis and Control 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1312) This course provides students an opportunity to gain the theoretical background necessary to analyze and design simple linear control systems. System model- ing, linear approximations and their limitations, transfer functions, and block diagrams; transient and frequency response; stability. Frequency domain, and root locus techniques are discussed. ME 1 41 0 Design for Space Applications 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1312) The course includes an exploration of Keplerian motion and transfer dynamics using Baffin's solution. Optimi- zation of transfer dynamics with respect to our solar system, and mass optimization, boost, and reentry dynamics are studied. System design is used through- out the course. ME 1435 Computer Aided Design 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GE 1 1 00 and ME 1 31 4) The concepts of computational and numerical ge- ometry for design are introduced. The implementation of computer graphics in design and use of computer- aided design packages are included. Principles of numerical control techniques to design and manufac- ture are covered. A design project is required. ME 1439 Engineering Design 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1314) This course is intended for students who take only one course in design. Design projects vary from year to year, but in general expand and correlate previous courses in design of mechanical systems. ME 1440 Introduction to Combustion 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1341 and OHM 1132) An introduction to the science and technology of combustion. The fundamental principles of ther- mochemistry, chemical equilibrium, and rates of reaction are reviewed and related to combustion processes in heat engines. The principles of com- bustion waves are introduced, and the mechanisms of various physical and chemical processes in combus- tion are discussed. ME 1441 Direct Energy Conversion 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1341 and OHM 1132) This course is concerned with means for converting heat directly into electrical energy The operating principles of such devices, principally magnetohydro- dynamic power generators and fuel cells, are dis- cussed. Other topics, such as energy storage, therm- ionic converters, and irreversible thermodynamics as a basis for a unified theory of energy conversion may ba included. ME 1 470 Fluid Mechanics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1370) Topics include velocity potential and stream functions; circulation and Kelvin's theorem; two-dimensional, steady irrotational incompressible flow; Karman- Pohlhausen method applied to two-dimensional boundary layers. ME 1471 Fluid Machinery 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1 370) The course focuses on the general principles of turbomachinery: definitions of efficiency and a dis- cussion of the requirements for similitude; machine selection to suit particular applications. Both liquid- and gas-handling machines are examined, and per- formance limits imposed by cavitation and choking are considered. ME 1 473 Gas Dynamics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1370) Course focuses on application of the principles of fluid mechanics to compressible flows. Wave prop- agation and the concepts of sound speed and Mach number are discussed. The emphasis is on one- dimensional steady flows with an examination of the effects of area change, friction, and heat transfer, including a consideration of normal shock waves and the possibility of choking. ME 1480 Mechanical Behavior of Materials 4Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1380 and ME 1313) The study of the physical basis for the mechanical behavior of solid materials, including elasticity, plas- ticity, viscoelasticity, and fracture. Application is made to structural alloys and polymers. ME 1483 Materials Processing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1 380) The course offers a survey of the essential features and materials limitation of various methods for pro- cessing materials. Topics include heat treatment (ferrous and nonferrous alloys), casting, forming, joining, and machining. ME 1490 Special Topics 4 Q.H. (Permission of the department) When offered, topics will vary depending on the previously expressed interests of a group of students and/or of the department. ME 1495 Design and Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1331; cannot be taken simultaneously with ME 1496 or ME 1497) A design project. Each student must, before the end of the second week of the quarter of his/her enrollment, obtain written approval for a proposed project from a department faculty member under whom the student will work. It is suggested that approval be secured before registration. A formal report must be submitted to the faculty supervisor at the end of the quarter ME 1496 Mechanical Engineering Project I 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. ME 1390; cannot be taken simultaneously with ME 1495 or ME 1497) A project of an analytical or experimental nature. Lab fee required. Computer Science / 81 Each student must, before the end cf the second week of the quarter of his/her enrollment, obtain written approval for a proposed project from a depart- ment faculty member under whom the student will work. It is suggested that approval be secured before registration. A formal report must be submitted to the faculty supervisor at the end of the quarter ME 1497 Mechanical Engineering Project II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1496; cannot be taken simultaneously with ME 1495 or ME 1496) If a project initiated under course ME 1496 is large enough in scope, a second project course may be taken with the approval of the faculty supervisor A formal report must be submitted to the student's faculty supervisor at the end of the quarter. ME 1 540 Thermodynamics of Propulsion 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1341 and CHM 1132) The course focuses on application of the principles of thermodynamics and fluid mechanics to understand- ing the behavior of propulsion devices. Emphasis is on air-breathing engines such as the aircraft gas turbine and the ramjet. Various engine components, such as inlets, diffusers, compressors, combustors, turbines, and nozzles are discussed. ME 1 541 Nuclear Engineering I 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. ME 1341) The course offers a study of nuclear physics em- phasizing atomic and nuclear structure, radioactive decay andnuclear reactions, with particular attention to fusion and fission. The course also examines health physics, nuclear instrumentation, and the production and uses of radioactive isotopes. A general compari- son of thermal, fast, and breeder reactor types is made prior to a discussion of neutron interactions and their slowing down. The four-factor formula and diffusion equation are developed and applied to one- group theory for bare and reflected thermal reactors. Flux shaping as well as energy production and distri- bution within the core are discussed. ME 1542 Nuclear Engineering II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1541) The course focuses on development of two-group theory for thermal reactors and consideration of the physics and safety of fast reactors. Effect of reactivity change, either intentional or accidental, as well as changes due to temperature, fission product build- up, xenon build-up after shutdown, and fufel depletion are discussed. Reactor design considerations involv- ing the interrelation of reactor physics, reactor engi- neering control, distribution of power, and fuel cycle management are considered. ME 1545 Internal Combustion Engines 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1341) The concepts and theory of operation of internal combustion engines are presented based upon the fundamental engineering sciences of thermodynam- ics, gas dynamics, heat transfer, and mechanics. The design and operating characteristics of conventional spark-ignition, compression-ignition, Wankel, and stratified charge spark-ignition engines are discussed. Performance analysis using Newhall-Starkman charts and computer programs are included. ME 1 580 Engineering Materials 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ME 1380) This course is concerned with the utilization of mate- rials science in the application and selection of mate- rials. Topics include reactions with environment, i.e., oxidation and corrosion, materials selection criteria, and materials engineering case studies dealing with materials selection and failure analysis. Computer Science COM 1100 PASCAL! 4 Q.H. Introduction to computers and computer program- ming using the language PASCAL Brief overview of text editing and system commands. Basic concepts of PASCAL: built-in data types, variables, assignment, expressions, and input/output. Tools for structured programming: flow control constructs, procedures and functions, user-defined data types using arrays, records, and strings. Techniques for input/output to terminals and text files. Assignments will emphasize how to design programs systematically through the use of structured sub-units. COM 1101 PASCAL II 4 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1100) A continuation of the study of the programming language PASCAL and its applications. Recursion and stacks. Quicksort. Pointer data types. Singly and doubly linked lists. Introduction to trees. Files of some fixed data type. Use of procedures and functions as parameters. Sets. Variant records. Elementary graph- ics, if available on the computer being used. COM 1102 LISP 4Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1101) This course introduces the fundamental concepts and applications of LISP programming and their rela- tionship to computer science. Basic ideas underlying symbolic information processing and the role of LISP in this context. Practical examples of how LISP is used in computer science and industrial contexts. Discus- sion of how LISP relates to some important areas of computer science, namely: (1) LISP as the "systems language" of artificial intelligence, (2) LISP as an important example for the study of issues in pro- gramming language design and implementation, (3) LISP and functional languages, and (4) LISP as a tool for procedural and data abstraction and for the devel- opment of data-driven programs. Lab fee required. 82 / Computer Science COM 1110 FORTAN Lab 1 QH. (Prereq.COM 1100) The course offers an introduction to the elements of FORTRAN programming, including I/O, subprogram linkage, and methods of structured programming in FORTRAN. COM 1111 DCL Lab 1 QH. (Prereq.COM 1100) Course includes elements of command language; procedure files and parameter exchange; device handling for both tapes and disks; detailed coverage of the command language for the computer at the Academic Computer Center COM 1112 LISP Lab 1 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1100) The course focuses on elements of the list processing language LISP (Given prior to Fall 1984 and to be replaced by the more extensive course COM 1 102) COM 1113 COBOL Lab 1 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1100) An introduction to COBOL programming language for students who have already mastered another high level algorithmic language (such as PASCAL or FORTRAN). Topics include COBOL program struc- ture, arithmetic and flow control, subroutines and procedures, report writing, searching, sorting. COM 1114 C Lab 1 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1101) The course covers elements of the C programming language as well as an introduction to the UNIX oper- ating system. COM 1 1 30 Assembly Language I 4 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1101) An introduction to computer organization and pro- gramming at the assembly language level. Topics include arithmetic instructions, memory organization and data representation, addressing modes, flow control instructions, subroutines, procedures and linkage with higher level languages, run-time stack structure, implementation of recursion, floating point and bit instructions, terminal I/O using system services or higher level languages, use of the debugger COM 1 1 31 Assembly Language II 4 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1130) Continuation of COM 1130. User-defined macros, system macros; character string instructions and parsing; decimal instructions, conversion, and editing; queue instructions; exception handlers; record man- agement and file operations; low level queue I/O services; introduction to other system services. COM 1201 Data Structures 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1 101 and MTH 1409) Introduction to complex data structures and cor- responding algorithms for their manipulation. Arrays, lists, trees, sets, graphs, and queues. Quicksort, heapsort, and an introduction to algorithm analysis. Height-balanced (AVL) trees. B-trees, including 2-3 trees. Hashing. As time permits, union and find opera- tions on sets; depth-first search and shortest path algorithms on graphs; minimum cost spanning trees. COM 1205 Software Design and Development 4 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1201) This course will present the latest ideas and tech- niques in software methodology and provide a means for students to apply these techniques. Students will be presented with several large programming projects. It will be their task, working in groups, to organize, to manage, and to implement some of the projects. COM 1 31 0 Rle Structures 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1 201 and COM 1131) Access characteristics of secondary storage devices (tapes, disks and drums). External sorting and merging for heap files. Algorithms for common file operations on heap, hashed, ISAM, B-tree, dense indexes and TRIE file structures. Overflow techniques. Compari- son of operations by block access count. Files with variable length records. As time permits, data com- pression techniques; structures for secondary access: multilist and inverted files; retrieval for partially speci- fied records and ranges of records. COM 1315 Data Base Management I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1310 and MTH 1409) This course will emphasize the concepts and struc- tures necessary to design and implement a data base application and survey some existing systems. Intro- duction to data base concepts. Data base modeling and entity relationship diagrams. Review of physical data organization. The relational model, QUEL, and ISBL Design of a relational model and normal forms. Data definition and data manipulation languages for network and hierarchical models. Comparison of models, some languages and implementations for these models. COM 1316 Data Base Management II 4 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1315) This course will focus on data base systems that support relational model applications. Topics will include recovery, query optimization, integrity, security and concurrency with examples based on INGRES and SYSTEM R. Additional topics such as data base machines may be covered at the discretion of the instructor Students will implement a small relational DBMS. COM 1330 Systems Programming 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1 1 1 1 or COM 1 1 1 4 and COM 1131) The purpose of this course is to familiarize the student with organization of the components of a computer operating system, their functions and mutual interac- tions. Assemblers, the structure of an object file and an executable file, linkers. Multiprogramming, multi- processing, and time sharing. Memory management, device management, file management, libraries, I/O control, shared images. COM 1 335 Operating Systems I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1330) In-depth study of algorithms and problems encoun- Computer Science / 83 tered in operating system design. Asynchronous con- current processes, monitors, deadlocks, virtual per- formance measurement and evaluation, security. COM 1336 Operating Systems II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1335) Students will have the opportunity to gain hands-on experience working with a small operating system and writing programs to enhance its capabilities by implementing some of the algorithms studied in COM 1335. COM 1350 Automata and Formal Languages 4Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1201 and MTH 1409) Topics include finite-state machines and regular expressions; context-free grammars; parsing of deter- ministic context-free languages; pushdown automata; pumping theorems for regular and context-free lan- guages; Turing machines, Church's thesis and the halting problem. COM 1355 Compiler Design 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1 131 and COM 1350) This is a course on the front end of a compiler Quick review of FSA and language terminology. Topics include lexical analysis, recursive descent parsing, look-ahead parsing, precedence parsing, syntax- directed translation and syntatic error recovery. Par- ticular emphasis will be on LALR (1) parsing as it is used in compiler-compilers. Possible projects include writing a recursive descent parser for a small language and/or practice using a compiler-compiler COM 1356 Compiler Design II 4 Q.H. (Prereq.COM 1355) This is a course on the middle phase and back end of a compiler It includes static issues such as type checking, symbol table organization, scope rules, and aggregate types such as arrays and records. Run- time structure, code optimization techniques and error recovery Students will construct a compiler using a compiler-compiler for the front end and will write their own back end. COM 1358 Analysis of Programming Languages 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1 1 02, COM 1110, COM 1 355, and COM 1201) Language design criteria and the evaluation of pro- gramming language concepts in terms of their con- tribution to the software development process. Topics will include interpretations vs. translation; binding; variables: scope, lifetime, value, type; structure of ALGOL-like languages: activation records; accessing the global environment, static chain and display; data types: strong typing, implementation models; control structures: sequencing, selection, repetition, subpro- grams, exception handling, coroutines and concur- rent units; functional programming. The course ex- amines and compares existing languages such as FORTRAN, PASCAL, C, ALGOL 60, ALGOL 68, Ada, FL/1 , Concurrent PASCAL, Simula 67, LISR CLU, APL, and SNOBOL 4. COM 1370 Computer Graphics v 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1201 and MTH 1301) The course focuses on characteristics and program- ming of graphics output devices. Basics point and line drawing, two-dimensional displays, clipping and windowing. Pictures: data structures and display file organization. Interaction: graphical input and external events-operating system considerations. Some three- dimensional drawing will be included as time permits. COM 1 390 Analysis of Algorithms 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1201, MTH 1125, MTH 1409 and MTH 1301) This course introduces the basic principles and tech- niques of analyzing algorithms. Topics include algor- ithms on sorting, searching, graphs, and digraphs (such as minimal spanning tree, shortest path, depth- first search, components of a graph) ; methods involv- ing string matching, polynomials and matrices. If time permits, fast Fourier transform and the concept of N P-complete problems. COM 1410 Artificial Intelligence 4 Q.H. (Prereq. COM 1102, COM 1201 and MTH 1409) This course focuses on analysis of current computer algorithms dealing with problems such as theorem proving, chess playing, general problem solvers, robotics, symbolic computation, perceptions, self- reproducing automated parallel machines. COM 1420 Principles and Methods in Interactive Systems Design 4 Q.H. Introduction to principles of computer-human inter- face (software) design, and methodologies of imple- mentation, evaluation, and research in computer- human interaction. Topics include user psychology, dialog styles (menu interfaces, command languages, icons, windows etc.), screen layout and design, input and output devices (mouse, touchscreen, keyboard, voice technology, etc.), error handling/reporting and system response time, user documentation, and "intelligent" interfaces. Also techniques for imple- menting software-human interfaces, and method- ologies for testing and assessing the "usability" of interactive systems. COM 1 600 Computer Science Project 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of the instructor. May be repeated for credit.) A course for those who wish to develop a special software project with the assistance of a member of the faculty. COM 1620 Computer Science Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Computer science seniors only) (This course superseded by COM 1621 as of academic year 1988-89.) This course acts as a "capstone" course for com- puter science majors. Meetings are held once or twice per week and a current topic or problem in computer science is presented by an expert in the subject matter Students are assigned additional ques- tions and/or problems to research in the topic area as an aid to their developing a deeper appreciation and understanding of various aspects of computer science. 84 /Engineering Technology COM 1800 Directed Study in Computer Science 4Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of the instructor. May be repeated for credit.) Programs of directed study held one or more quar- ters, are available for highly motivated students who w/ish to explore special topics in computer science in depth. Directed study can be used as an opportunity to examine familiar material in fresh ways or to explore new material that is not offered in formal courses. It is hoped that directed study programs will provide students strong in computer science and related sciences a chance to develop the art and skill needed to work independently and creatively in computer science. Engineering Technology Chemical Engineering Technology CHT 1 381 Nuclear Technology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. MTH 1 1 95 and PHY 1 1 96) Atomic and nuclear structure, discovery and nature of radioactivity-clear reactions and energy-induced nuclear transformations, neutron properties, appli- cations of radio nuclides. Radiological safety nuclear instrumentation for particle detection, monitoring, and experimentation. The fission process and its applications; nuclear reactors-their classification, design, and application, nuclear fuel processing, radioactive waste disposal. Supplementary laboratory experiments. Computer Technology CT 1105 Introduction to Programming 4 Q.H. A high-level structured language (PASCAL) will be taught and used as a vehicle for implementing program. Students will write and run programs using North- eastern's computer. Topics: using the Northeastern University computer, flow charting program construc- tion, computations involving maxima and minima, arrays, simple recursion, subroutines. CT 1310 FORTRAN 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1 105 or equiv) This important scientific language will be taught with engineering applications. Students will write and run FORTRAN programs using the Northeastern Univer- sity computer Topics: arithmetic replacement, input, output, control and specification statements, looping, arrays, functions and subroutines. CT 1311 Programming with "C" Language 4Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1105 or CT 4105) Students will write programs in "C," a general pur- pose programming language useable for operating systems or numerical, text-processing and data-base programs. A basic knowledge of programming fun- damentals is assumed. Topics will cover basic data types, operators and expressions, control flow (if-else, while, etc.), functions and program structure, external variables, scope rules, pointers, address arithmetic, structure and union, and the C I/O Library. CT 1320 COBOL 4 Q,H. (Prereq. CT 1 105 or equiv) This important business language will be taught with general applications. Student will write and run COBOL programs using the Northeastern University computer. Topics: divisions names rules, picture clauses, verbs, input/output instructions, levels, working storage, arithmetic, corresponding accept, display compute, copy undate logic, table logic, redefines, search, inline and COBOL sorts. CT 1330 Nonnumerical Algorithms 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1105) Data, structures, storage, manipulation and retrieval methods. Students will write and run data manip- ulation programs using Northeastern's computer. Topics: stacks, queues, lists, trees, heaps, sets, graphs, searching, sorting, key processing, relational models. CT 1 335 Numerical Algorithms 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1310) Computer methods for solving mathematical prob- lems. Students will write and run application pro- grams using the Northeastern University computer. Topics: deterministic vs. stochastic methods, random- number generators, iterative vs. noniterative solutions, maxima and minima in two and three variables, curve fitting in two and three variables, integrals, trapezoidal and Simpson's rules, slopes, difference equations in two and three variables, vector and matrix algebra, simultaneous linear equations, nonlinear equations, permutations, and combinations. CT 1340 Modern Programming Techniques 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1105) Structured methods for developing complex computer programs. Students will develop and write sections of complex programs. Students will run programs on the Northeastern computer Topics: top down design, hier- archy diagrams, HlPO charts, composite design, structured analysis, team programming. CT 1341 Basic Computer Organization 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1105) Fundamental aspects of basic computer components. Topics: the functions and general operating charac- Lab fee required. Engineering Technology / 85 teristics of CPU's, primary/secondary and mass memory, controllers, printers, card readers, terminals. What an operating system does, scheduling, moni- toring, spooling, paging, system programs, virtual memory, multiprogramming, multiprocessing. CT 1342 Advanced Computer Organization 4Q.H. (Prereq. CT1105) The operating and performance characteristics of complex and special purpose components. Topics: how an operating system works, memory hierarchies, fiber optics, bubble memory, mass storage, computer networks, distributed processing, data flow, cache memory, associative memory, special purpose/parallel processors, system performance measures. CT 1 345 Assembly Language 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1105) A typical microprocessor assembly language will be taught. Students will write and run homework problems using a microprocessor simulator package imple- mented on the Northeastern University computer Topics: binary arithmetic, instruction sets, addressing modes, code conversion, subroutines, macros, I/O. CT 1355 Micro Peripheral Hardware 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1375) The elements of microprocessor peripheral hardware and its interfacing. Students will configure micropro- cessor systems using block diagrams showing relevant handshaking signals. Topics: serial and parallel I/O devices, DMA and interrupt control devices, bus arbi- tration, memory management units, counter timers as extensions of basic CPU functions. CT 1356 Complex Peripheral Hardware 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1 355) The interfacing and implementation of special pur- pose hardware. Students will configure systems, using block diagrams showing relevant handshaking signals. Topics: virtual memory, rotating media, printers, terminals, bus extension concepts, co-processors. CT 1 360 Industry Software 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1342, CT 1310) A survey of current commercial software packages and methods. Students will exercise commercial packages implemented on Northeastern's computer where applicable. Topics: specific packages and methods which vary from year to year to maintain currency They will be drawn from the following general categories: data base management, scientific and statistical analysis, security and privacy, software assurance, and documentation. CT 1 365 Industry Hardware 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1356) A survey of the latest industrial developments and trends in computer hardware. Conducted as a seminar CT 1368 Semiconductor Logic 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1 1 52) A detailed analysis of the bipolar and MOS transistors in saturated and cutoff condition and implementation of these concepts to form basic logic and decision- making circuits. Students will convert logical expres- sions into hardware configuration representations. Topics: Ebers-Moll modeling, PtvlOS, NMOS, CMOS construction, logic families. CT 1 369 Computer Logic 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1368) An introduction to the hardware building blocks of general computers. Students will specify configu- rations of lower level components to achieve com- posite logical functions, e.g., construct a register from NAND gates. Topics: gates, flipflops, registers, de- coders, ALUs, memory arrays. CT 1 374 Introduction to CPU Hardware 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1 345 or equiv) The internal operation of a microprocessor CPU. A black box approach is used. Students purchase and keep individual single board computers for doing homework and simulation. Topics: registers and timing control, programmable gate arrays, array processors as CPU models. CT 1 375 CPU Hardware Architecture 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1374) The performance characteristics of commercially available CPU's. Students will write code for 4-bit through 32-bit processors. Topics: the characteristics of 4004, 4008, 8080, Z80, Z800, 8086, 1802 F8 and 6800 processors, and how to use one processor in place of another Note: the list of processors examined may vary from year to year to maintain currency. CT 1380 Data Communication Methods 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1310) Functional and operational aspects of data com- munication devices and software. A black box ap- proach will be used. Topics: modems, control units, multiplexers, concentrators, front end processors, synchronous/asynchronous/half duplex/full duplex codes and procedures, Bisynch/SDLE/HDLC, BYTE and BIT protocols, protocols, error checking, point to point/muitidrop/STAR/MESH/CLUSTER networks. CT 1381 Operating Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1351) The basic principles of operating system implemen- tation. Students write and run programs to exercise elements of the University's operating system when applicable. Topics: resource, memory, processor and device management commands and strategies, I/O programming, swapping, overlays, jobs and process scheduling, and other operating systems. CT 1382 Computer Graphics Programming 4Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1310) Students are introduced to generalized techniques for the computer plotting of 2- and 3-dimensional shapes. Students write and run programs using the University's computer and digital plotter Topics: 2D transforms, 3D to 2D transforms, 3D transforms, 86 /Engineering Technology surface representation, shading, character, curve . fitting, graphic data structures. CT 1 383 Data Bases 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT1330) An introduction to data-base organization structure and management. Students write and run programs exemplifying techniques developed in class on the University's computer. Topics: access methods, attri- butes, indices, keys, querying, searching and match- ing, file sets, normal forms, random access. CT 1384 Large System Assembly Languages 4Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1345) Typical large computer system assembly languages. Students will write and run illustrative programs on the University's computer. Topics: edit and translate instructions, macro writing, program sectioning, link- ing, data representation, addressing, instruction formats in BAL and VAX-1 1 assembler languages. CT 1385 introduction to Simulation Programming 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1335) Computer methods for solving simulated phenom- ena. Students will write and run programs imple- menting simulations specified by instructor Students will not be responsible for the validity or evaluation of models except in simple cases. Topics: simple queues; multiserver queues; priorities, including first in first out, last in last out, and time aging of data; simple frequency distributions; use of SIMULA, GPSS, and standard Subroutine Library Routines. CT 1386 Development System Hardware 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1 375) A study of the principal hardware capabilities and current trends in micro computer level system. In- cluded are both single users and network-oriented system. CT 1 387 Bit Slice Micro Computers 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1355) The epitome of hardware flexibility is represented by the bit slice CPU. Demonstrates the basic design ground rules common to this style of hardware design. CT 1 388 Micro Controllers 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1374) The commercial segment of micro computers has been satisfied by a variety of single-chip 4-bit micro controllers. A detailed contrast/comparison will be done on several of these devices, including the IMS- 1000, S2000,COPS, and PPS-4. CT 1 389 Single-Chip Microprocessors 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CT 1374) When small 6-bit intelligent devices are rewired in high volume, the single-chip microprocessor in the form of the 3870, 8084 Z8, and others comes into play An understanding of the hardware limitations of single- chip system presents the basis for this subject material. CT 1390 Special Problems in Computer Technology 4 Q.H. Theoretical or experimental work under individual faculty supervision. Electrical Engineering Technology EET 1 1 51 Circuit Analysis I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 1 93 and PHY 1 1 93) Topics include Ohm's law, Kirchhoff's current and voltage laws, equivalent resistances and sources, mesh and modal analysis, network theorems, two- port networks and power relations-all with respect to direct currents; energy storage, singularity functions, response of R, L, and C elements to singularities. EET 1 1 52 Circuit Analysis II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1151) Topics include complex algebra, phasors, frequency domain, mutual inductance, transformers, steady- stage a-c theory, driving point and transfer imped- ances, power and energy in a-c circuits; Laplace transforms; partial fraction expansion; Laplace trans- form techniques applied to the solution of RLC networks. EET 1310 Electrical Measurements 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1353) The course covers standards of measurements; dimensional analysis; errors and measurement of dispersed data; discrete and continuous variables, binomial distribution, normal distribution; guaranteed error; methods of resistance measurements; digital voltmeters and analog-to-digital conversion; voltage references; potentiometers and a.c. bridges. EET 1 31 1 Electronics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1 1 52) Topics include semiconductor diodes and appli- cations, transistor-biasing techniques, graphical analysis of basic amplifiers, d.c. and a.c load lines. EET 1 31 2 Electronics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1311) Topics include small-signal, low-frequency transistor models; gains and impedances at midband; frequency effects in transistor circuits; multistage circuits; tran- sistors used as current sources. EET 1 31 3 Electronics III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1312) The course covers review of Bode plots, transistor circuits at low and high frequencies, feedback opera- tional amplifiers, differential amplifiers, applications. EET 1 31 4 Pulse & Digital I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1311) The course covers switching characteristics of semi- conductor devices; wave generation and shaping, using combinations of passive and integrated circuit components; comparators, hysteresis, and the dual ramp analog to digital converter-voltmeter circuits, voltage-to-frequency conversion. Engineering Technology / 87 EET 1 31 5 Pulse & Digital II 4 Q.H. (Pereq. EET1314) Topics include digital operations; logic statements and theorems; minimization of logic functions; logic gates and the characteristics of the integrated logic families; flip-flops, counters and registers; introduction to sequential circuit design; sample and hold circuits; analog-to-digital conversion. EET 1317 Principles of Communication Systems I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1313) Topics include signal analysis using Fourier methods; noise in communication systems; frequency selective amplifiers, including w/ideband; transistor power ampli- fiers AF and RF; oscillators; signal sources and applications. EET 1318 Principles of Communication Systems II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1317) The course covers basic theory of amplitude, fre- quency phase and pulse code modulated systems; analysis of modulating and demodulating circuits; carrier systems using SSB; system block and level diagrams; logic control circuits in communication systems; modems. EET 1319 Principles of Communication Systems III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1318) The course covers fundamentals of digital com- munications; sampling requirements; analog-to-digital conversion methods; system capacity and bandwidth; comparison of practical digital systems PAM, PCM, PFM, PWM; time and frequency division multiplexing; data decoding; selected examples from telemetry and computer links. EET 1 320 Electricity and Electronics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 193 and PHY 1 193) The course covers introduction to circuit analysis, resistive networks, periodic excitation function, steady- state ac circuits; the physical foundations of electron- ics and the physical operation of electronic devices. EET 1 321 Electricity and Electronics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1 320) The course covers single-stage electronic circuits, magnetic circuits and transformers, electro-mechan- ical energy conversion, dc machines, ac machines. EET 1323 Electronic Laboratory 2 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1312 or concurrently) The course covers experiments dealing with laboratory equipment (meters and oscilloscopes) techniques; junction and field-effect transistor characteristics; vacuum and semi-conductor diodes; power supplies, including the regulated type; silicon-controlled recti- fiers, resistance-coupled amplifiers using transistors, including feedback methods. EET 1 324 Circuits Laboratory I 2 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1151) The course covers experimentation in electronic cir- cuit theory utilizing various measurement techniques. Instrumentation verification of circuit theorems; re- sponse of circuits to steps and impulses, oscillo- scope theory and applications. EET 1 325 Circuits Laboratory II 2 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1324) The course offers further experimentation in electrical circuits and measurement techniques. Experiments include response of circuits to steps and impulses, nonlinear devices, terminal characteristics of active devices, log modulus plots, network parameters and synthesis. Fourier analysis and synthesis. EET 1327 Advanced Electronics Laboratory i 2Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1323) The course covers experiments dealing with the use of oscilloscopes, the examination of transistor audio amplifiers, push-pull amplifiers, drivers, pulse and video amplifiers, transients and wave-shaping circuits, audio frequency oscillators, and the study of opera- tional amplifiers. EET 1328 Advanced Electronics Laboratory II 2 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1327) The course covers experiments dealing with the modu- lation of a class C amplifier, the diode detector, basic timing circuits, RF and crystal oscillators, astable multivibrators, logic gates, flip-flops, binary adders, registers and counters; active filters, frequency modu- lation detectors, and analog-to-digital and digital-to- analog conversion. EET 1329 Advanced Electronics Laboratory III 2Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1328) Topics include spectral studies of FM and PM waves, amplitude limiters, the balanced modulators and single sideband generators; integrated circuit timers and monolithic random access memory; monolithic phase- locked loop as well as a series of microwave experi- ments and digital experiments. EET 1 330 Energy Conversion 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1 1 52 and MTH 1 1 95) Topics include generalized theory of rotating energy conversion devices; steady-state operation of the multiply-excited direct-current machine; control of speed; special machines; transformers; steady- state considerations of induction and synchronous machines; generalized machine and circuit model; Laplace transform techniques applied to the analysis of dynamic operating modes of rotating machines. EET 1 337 Distributed Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 1 95 and PHY 1 1 93) Topics include radiation, transmission, and reception of electromagnetic waves; distributed-line constants and traveling waves of transmission lines; differential equations of the uniform line. EET 1 353 Circuits Analysis III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1 1 52) The course covers application of differential equa- tions to the solutions of linear, time-invariant electrical 88 /Engineering Technology networks; introduction to singularity functions, con- volution, and time-domain transient analysis; network topology and duality; introduction to the methods of transformation calculus and complex frequency concepts. EET 1 354 Circuits Analysis IV 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET1353) Topics include signal analysis in the frequency domain; Fourier series: Fourier and Laplace transform methods; a varied selection of circuit problems using Laplace transforms and related theorems. EET 1 360 Engineering Analysis I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1195, EET 1152) The course covers linear algebra and its application to circuit equations; solution of linear differential equa- tions, including an introduction to Laplace transforms. EET 1362 Basic Power Systems I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1354) Topics include consideration of power transmission lines; line constants; current voltage and power rela- tions; introduction to electric-power distribution loads, feeders, and substations; application of matrices. EET 1363 Basic Power Systems II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1362) Topics include consideration of symmetrical and unsymmetrical faults; protective devices— application and coordination; power flow in electric circuits; steady-state power limitations of systems; voltage regulation theory and application. EET 1 364 Basic Power Systems III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1363) Topics include computer applications to power sys- tems with emphasis on load-flow studies, basic ideas of systems planning, short-circuit studies, and system stability EET 1370 Digital Computers 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1311) Introduction to digital computer design. Topics include general computer organization, number systems and number representations, design characteristics of major computer units. Boolean algebra applications to computer design. EET 1371 Digital Computers II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1370) Examination of microprocessor architecture and organization. Study of the machine language and assembly coding of an industry-accepted micro- processor A suitable topic from the current literature will be analyzed. Assembly language coding problems will be assigned. EET 1 377 Control Engineering I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1354 and MTH 1 195) Topics include analysis of linear servomechanisms under both transient and steady-state conditions; signal flow graphs; Laplace transforms used in the formulation of block diagrams and transfer function. EET 1378 Control Engineering II 4Q.H. (Prereq. EET 1377) Topics include system stability; root locus techniques; treatment of Nyquist criteria and Bode diagram methods for systems evaluation. EET 1 390 Optical Instrumentation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 192 and PHY 1 193) The course focuses on telescopes, microscopes, etc., as optical system components. Includes magnification, aberrations, resolution criteria, photometry. Compat- ibility of system components and optimization of systems. The basic nonimage-forming systems used for analysis control and metrology. EET 1399 Special Problems In Electrical Engineering Technology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Consent of department chairperson) The course offers theoretical or experimental work under individual faculty supervision. General Engineering Technology GET 1100 Computer Programming for Engineering Technology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. -or concurrently-MTH 1192) Introduction to the use of computers in the solution of problems using FORTRAN on interactive terminals. Students write and run programs to compute se- quences, averages, etc. Other capabilities of the FORTRAN language, including DO loops, subscripted variables and alphanumeric manipulation matrix algebra, and numerical methods. GET 1 1 70 Engineering Graphics I 4 Q.H. The study of concepts and the development of skills to present and to analyze objects and systems used in design through the principles of graphical geometric constructions, orthographic protections (multi-view, two-dimensional drawings), and the design process. Axonometric drawing. GET 1 1 71 Engineering Graphics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GET 11 70) Continuation of the study of concepts and the develop- ment of skills to present and to analyze objects and systems used in design including dimensioning, sectioning, threads, fasteners, assembly and detail drawings as well as the design process. A design project. GET 1 31 5 PASCAL (A Second Language) 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GET 1 100 or equiv) An introductory course in programming computers using the PASCAL language. Students will write and run programs using the University's computer facili- ties. This course may not be used as a technical elective in Computer Technology Program. GET 1 364 Kinematics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GET 1171, GET 1100, PHY 1191) Study of four-bar linkages, sliders, etc., using ortho- gonal components of vectors, instantaneous centers, equivalent linkages, effective cranks, etc., emphasiz- ing graphical solutions, including an introduction to Mechanical Engineering Technology / 89 the computer to enhance these concepts. Reverted and epicyclic gear trains are analyzed, as are cam displacement, velocity, and acceleration diagrams. Mechanical Engineering Technology The course descriptions listed under Mechanical Engineering Technology are intended to show the general scope of the subject that will be covered. Since courses are continuously updated, specific topics or methods of approach may vary from term to term. MET 1 301 Mechanics A 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 1 93; or MTH 41 20; PHY 11 91 or PHY 4117) Topics include forces, moments, couples, statics of particles and rigid bodies in two and three dimen- sions. Distributed forces: external and internal. First moments and centroids. Analysis of structures: trusses, frames, and machines. MET 1 302 Mechanics B 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1301 or MET 4301) Topics include friction, second moments, and virtual work. Kinematics of particles; rectilinear and curvilin- ear motion of dynamic particles. Force, mass, and acceleration; work and energy MET 1 303 Mechanics C 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1 302 or MET 4302) Topics include impulse and momentum of particles. Kinematics and dynamics of rigid bodies: force, mass, and acceleration. Dynamics of rigid bodies: work and energy, impulse and momentum. Introduction to mechanical vibration. MET 1 31 4 Stress Analysis A 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1 301 or MET 4301 ) Topics include axially loaded members; stress and strain, allowable stresses, factor of safety temper- ature effects, indeterminate members; thin-walled pressure vessels; centric loading of bolted and welded connection; shear and moment in beams; eccentri- cally loaded connections; flexural and transverse shearing stresses in beams. MET 1 31 5 Stress Analysis B 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1314 or MET 4314) Topics include determinate and indeterminate beam deflections and reactions by numerical and graphical integration and area moment methods; theorem of three moments. Torsional stresses and strains; power transmission; eccentric loads on struts, beams, riveted and welded joints; combined and principle stresses; Mohr's circle; theories of failure. MET 1319 Mechanics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1 1 93 and PHY 1191) Kinematics of particles: rectilinear and curvilinear motion of dynamic particles. Force, mass, and acceler- ation; work and energy. Impulse and momentum of particles. Kinematics and dynamics of rigid bodies: force, mass, and acceleration. Dynamics of rigid- bodies: work and energy impulse and momentum. MET 1 330 Mechanical Design A 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1315 or MET 4315; MET 1380 or MET 4380) The course covers introduction to mechanical design, the design process, design factors, creativity, optimi- zation, human factors, value engineering. These prin- ciples are discussed and developed through simple design projects. Principles of design, properties and selection of materials; stress concentrations; strength under combined stresses; theories of failure; impact and fluctuating and repeated loads. MET 1331 Mechanical Design B 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1330 or MET 4330) Topics include stresses; deformation and design of fasteners, screws, joints, springs, and bearings; lubri- cation and journal bearings. Stresses and power transmission of spur, bevel, and worm gear; shaft design; clutches and brakes. MET 1 340 Thermodynamics A 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PHY 1 1 92 or PHY 4118) Topics include general theory of heat and matter, laws of thermodynamics, energy-transformation principles; availability of energy; properties and processes for pure substances and ideal gases. Thermodynamic properties and processes of liquids and vapors; tables and charts; mixtures of fluids; vapor cycles. MET 1341 Thermodynamics B 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1340 or MET 4340) The course covers theory of vapor engines and analysis of actual engine types using gas and vapor compression; internal combustion engines; theory of gas and vapor flow through orifices and nozzles; principles of gas compression; analysis of vapor compression; refrigeration systems; low-temperature refrigeration cycles; and absorption refrigeration systems. MET 1342 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning 4Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1341 or MET 4341) The course focuses on air conditioning principles, including psychometrics and heat pumps. Course covers calculation of heating and cooling loads in accordance with A.S.H.R.A.E. practices; principles of gas compression; analysis of vapor compression; refrigeration systems; low-temperature refrigeration cycles; and absorption refrigeration systems. MET 1 343 Heat Transfer 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1341 or MET 4341) Topics include the primary modes of heat transfer; thermal conductivity; thermal conductance/resistance concept; thermal-electrical analogy; combined heat- transfer mechanisms; basic equations of conduction; analytical solutions of various steady-state conduc- 90 / Mechanical Engineering Technology tion problems. The course also covers dimensional analysis and similarity considerations; natural and forced convection; hydrodynamic and thermal bound- ary layers; black-body radiation; Kirchoff's law; emis- sivity and absorptivity; radiation between simple bodies; numerical methods; log mean temperature differences; overall heat-transfer coefficients; heat exchanger effectiveness; tubular exchanger design; regenerative and evaporative heat exchangers, and heat-transfer engineering problems. MET 1370 Fluid Mechanics A 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1302 or MET 4302) Topics include hydrostatics, principles governing fluids at rest, pressure measurement; hydrostatic forces on submerged areas and objects; simple dams, fluids in moving vessels; hoop tension fluid flow in pipes under pressure; fluid energy, power, and friction loss; Bernoulli's Theorem, flow measurement. MET 1 371 Fluid Mechanics B 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1 370 or MET 4370) The course covers pipe networks and reservoir systems; flow in open channels; uniform flow; energy, friction loss, minor losses, velocity distribution, alter- nate stages of flow, critical flow; nonuniform flow; accelerated and retarded flow; hydraulic jump and waves. MET 1 380 Materials A 4 Q.H. Lectures on fundamental metallic structures; general metallurgical information covering theoretical aspects of properties, testing, and failure of metals. Supple- mented by visual aids. Lectures on alloying and hard- ening of metals, refinement of metals, equilibrium diagrams, characteristics of engineering metals, prin- ciples of metal fabrication. MET 1 390 Measurement & Analysis Lab 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1314 or MET 4314; GET 1100 or GET 4100; MTH 1195 or MTH 4122; PHY 1193 or PHY 4119) The course includes experimental procedures for the collection and analysis of data by graphics and numer- ical methods including computer applications, report writing that draws conclusions relative to accuracy, precision, true values, and measured values as they relate to basic mechanical measuring instruments for length, area, volume, specific gravity, pressure, tem- perature, and time as these parameters are utilized in making mechanical measurements. MET 1 391 Technology Lab A 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1390 or MET 4390; MET 1315 or MET 4315; MET 1380 or MET 4380; or concurrently) The course includes experimental procedures to determine mechanical properties of materials under tensile, compressive, torsional, direct shear, flexural, impact, fatigue, and creep loading conditions as they are affected by normal and abnormal environmental conditions; also as they are affected by homogeneity, non-homogeneity, isotropy, and non-isotropy. MET 1 392 Technology Lab B 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1390 or MET 4390, MET 1370 or MET 4370; or concurrently) The course includes experimental procedures to determine the physical properties of incompressible fluids and to measure the flow rates and velocities utilizing pilot tubes, oriface plates, venturii and weirs flow meters, U-tube differential manometers, and pie- zometers as the fluid flows through open channels, partially filled conduits, conduits under pressure, pipe networks, turbines and pumps. MET 1 393 Technology Lab C 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1390 or MET 4390; MET 1341 or MET 4341 ; or concurrently) The course covers basic thermodynamic relations; experimental procedures to examine the flow of compressible fluids and steam and the energy con- version of a fuel into a working substance and the related heat-transfer mechanisms. Operating char- acteristics of thermal generators, engines, and compressors. MET 1 394 Technology Lab D 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1393 or MET 4393; MET 1341 or MET 4341 ; MET 1 343 or MET 4343; or concurrently) The course includes experimental procedures to examine the operating characteristics and efficien- cies of internal combustion engines, brake horse- power, indicated horsepower, friction horsepower, mean effective pressure, fuel consumption, torque, ignition timing, manifold pressure, and compression ratios and internal engines as energy conversion systems; energy conversion of fuels. MET 1 395 Technology Lab E 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1390 or MET 4390; MET 1342 or MET 4342; MET 1 343 or MET 4343) The course includes experimental, analytical, and design projects to examine refrigeration, air con- ditioning, and heating-pump cycles. MET 1 396 Machine Shop 4 Q.H. Introduction to study of machines for metal proc- essing, cutting tools, and fluids; machinability, auto- matic machinery MET 1 41 4 Mechanical Vibrations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1303, MET 4303) Elements of vibrating systems; one degree of freedom (undamped free and forced vibration from Newton's law of motion and energy methods), natural frequen- cies; damped free and forced vibration; impedance and mobility; systems with more than one degree of freedom; influence coefficients, Lagrange's equations, generalized coordinates, vibration absorber MET 1415 Experimental Stress Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1 31 5 or MET 431 5) Theory and experimentation showing the application of extensometers and electrical strain gauges as trans- ducers in the field of experimental stress and strain African-American Studies/ 91 analysis. Theory and laboratory practice on photo- elastic methods as applied to classical model analysis and modern coating analysis. MET 1 41 6 Stress Analysis C 4 Q.H (Prereq. MET 1 31 5 or MET 431 5) Topics include curved beam, asymmetrical bending of beams, shear-center and shear stresses on thin sections, composite beams; columns energy absorp- tion and resilience, inertial stresses, impact loading, deflection of beams by energy methods. MET 1444 Power Generation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1341 or MET 4341) Topics include basic power generation cycles; gas turbine cycles; effects of combustor temperature, intercooling, etc., on cycle performance; Rankine regenerative cycles, effects of steam temperature, pressure, number of feedwater heaters, etc., upon performance; steam generation equipment: boilers reactors. The course also covers fossil fuel char- acteristics and effects on boiler design; combustion analysis; draft calculations, axial and centrifugal fan performance characteristics; pump design and per- formance consideration; heat-exchanger design considerations. The course also includes appli- cations of principles of economics to cycle and performance considerations use of load curves; economic considerations of heat rate; economics of equipment selection; study of auxiliary equipment such as precipitators and flue-gas desulfurization systems. MET1 481 Materials B 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1380 or MET 4380) The course focuses on the study of inorganic materials (polymers, glasses, ceramics, cements, wood), and materials having important electrical and magnetic properties. A summary of the most recent applica- tions for the fabrication and uses of both metals and nonmetals. Structures of metals, imperfections, phase diagrams effect of temperature on structure and prop- erties of metals (annealing, recrystalization, recovery precipitation, diffusion) strengthening mechanisms, mechanical properties of nonferrous metals. Labora- tory: experiments in preparation of samples, selec- tion, polishing, and etching; examination of nonferrous metals, use of the microscope, linear analysis con- struction of cooling curves, and simple binary-phase diagrams. MET 1 482 Applied Metallurgy 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MET 1481 or MET 4481) Lectures include mechanical properties of ferrous metals; the iron-carbon diagram; high-temperature alloys, hardening methods, impact tests, effects of environment on metals. Manufacturing processes: methods of fabrication, limitations on the use of different materials and their processing, casting, welding, cutting, drawing, powder metallurgy. Lab- oratory: includes experiments on analysis of stress- strain diagrams of iron and steel, heat treatment of steels, surface corrosion, tempering and drawing, use of metallograph and analysis of the results. Experi- ments in cold rolling, swagging, drawing of nonfer- rous metals, and analysis of the results. Tension, shear, fatigue, and machinability tests on ferrous metals. MET 1499 Special Problems In Mechanical Engineering Technology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Consent of department chairperson) Theoretical or experimental work under individual faculty supervision. African-American Studies Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are duplicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. Roman numerals at the end of course descriptions refer to Core Curriculum categories listed on pages 1-2. AFR 1100 Introduction to African-American Studies 4 Q.H. The course touches on several of the possible histori- cal, sociological, cultural, and political avenues of study in the broad interdisciplinary spectrum of African-American Studies. It is intended to help provide an introductory overview of the field and will offer students the opportunity to identify areas for more specific focus. AFR 1115 Epidemiology of Black Diseases 4Q.H. Students are introduced to the science of epide- miology the study of the occurrence of disease in populations. The concepts, principles, and methods of epidemiological analysis are explored, with em- phasis on specific diseases occurring with greater frequency in urban and black populations, such as cardiovascular conditions, sickle cell disease, and certain occupational and environmental illnesses. 92 / African-American Studies AFR 1127 African-American Literature I 4 Q.H. The course offers a survey of African-American litera- ture from the period of slavery to the present, with an emphasis on literature concerning the relation between the rise of the black American and the development of African-American literature. The black experience as it is revealed in literature will be important in the discussion. AFR 1131 African-American History I 4 Q.H. This survey covers the development of black America from the period of slavery through Reconstruction, with emphasis on the historical links between Africa and America and their impact on black development in the United States. AFR 1 1 32 African-American History II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. AFR 1131 or permission of instructor) This course examines the development of black America from Reconstruction to the present, and the effects of events in the United States and world history on the development of black America. There is special emphasis on contemporary issues and how these issues can be seen through a historical perspective. AFC 1 133 History of Blacks in the Media and the Press 4 Q.H. The course offers a historical and visual examination of the development of the African-American experi- ence in the American mass media and press. Con- temporary and historical literature, films, and people are a part of the study and analysis with respect to history, racism, images, psychology and social move- ments. Newspapers, film, television, and radio are prime focal points, and they are used to help form strategies for the future of black Americans. AFR 1141 Education Issues and Minority Communities I 4 Q.H. This course focuses on some of the important issues in today's urban elementary and secondary educa- tion systems. The analysis will look at the historical development of these issues, and students will be encouraged to think about and discuss their future significance. AFR 1 150 Black Cultural Development in the United States 4 Q.H. The course focuses on the rise of a distinctive black culture in the United States, with emphasis on examin- ing the premise that the black population in America has developed a cultural system that operates as a subsystem of the American cultural norm. AFR 1151 Survey of African-American Art 4Q.H. Black art, like black literature, has always been an important aesthetic social statement by the African- American artist. This course offers a historical and critical examination of African-American art from the nineteenth century to the present, with special emphasis on the effects of European and African art styles on the black artist in America. AFR 1153 Survey of African-American Music 4Q.H. Black music has evolved in fascinating ways over the past hundred years. Topics include the impact of African rhythm on black music, the New Orleans coalescence, regional development, ragtime, the emergence of large bands, the harmonic revolution of the '40s, bebop, the 1960s avant-garde, and sub- sequent developments. Some analysis of specific jazz phenomena is included. This is the same as MUS 1104. AFR 1 1 56 Music of Africa 4 Q.H. The music of Africa is as varied as that continent's many linguistic and tribal identities. This course will provide a broad survey of the musical traditions of Africa with respect to their historical, social, and cultural backgrounds. Musical organization, musical practice, and aspects of style will all be discussed in light of possible contributions to contemporary African- American music. Same as MUS 1181. AFR 1161 Economic Issues in Minority Communities 4 Q.H. Minority lifestyles, perspectives, self-images and social position in the urban community are all affected by economic factors, especially those specific to the minority poor. Students have the opportunity to examine these issues, particularly in terms of the application of basic economic theories to the econ- omic realities of minority communities. AFR 1 171 Survey of Contemporary Black Political Movements 4 Q.H. The modern black political movements were inspired by a full-scale evolution of black political thought in America. Analysis of this evolution examines socio- political contests that have served as catalysts to these modern movements. AFR 1191 Early African Civilization 4 Q.H. This course deals with the ancient empires of Africa, especially Ghana, Songhai, Mali, Zimbabwe, the city states of East Africa, and also the Congo Kingdom. Included are Ethiopian as well as Egyptian history and the controversies surrounding their histories to 1 800. AFR 1 1 93 Africa Today 4 Q.H. With increasing numbers of nations striving for economic and political control in Africa, and with imperialist and colonial ideas remaining in the living memory of Africans, Africa presents a complex politi- cal and social picture to the rest of the world. This course examines some of the salient features of black art, politics, and identity in Africa. AFR 1195 Identity and Nationalism In Africa 4Q.H. How have centuries of imperialism, the struggle for national unity, and the continuing problems of racism and rivalry between factions affected the present identities and nationalist movements in Africa? This course explores problems peculiar to Africa and to any group of nations struggling against colonial ideas. Tribalism and the effects of European colonial parti- tion on African identity are discussed. African-American Studies / 93 AFR 1196 The Black Experience in the Caribbean 4Q.H. The course offers a descriptive and interpretive analysis of the growrth of tine modern black community in the Caribbean. Although the. focus will be on the contemporary period, the course will examine that period in the context of colonialism and slavery in the Americas. Important racial, social, political, economic, and religious issues will be addressed. AFR 1 1 97 Modern African Civilization 4 Q.H. This course will cover African history and culture from 1800 to the present era. Emphasis will be placed on the relationship between Europe and Africa, the cir- cumstances surrounding the imperialist partition of Africa, and the decolonization process. This course is the same as HST 1621. (IV) AFR 1211 African-Americans in Science, Technology, and Medicine 4 Q.H. The course studies the contributions that African- Americans have made to the development of science and technology in America. It examines the cultural and social factors that have encouraged blacks to work in the fields of science (biology, chemistry, physics) and technology (engineering and medicine). Certification of blacks within the American scientific community and the availability of science to the past and contemporary African-American communities are also explored. Readings, discussions, individual research topics, and interviews with black scientists, inventors/engineers, and doctors are used to develop the basic course material. AFR 1 21 4 Poverty and Health Care 4 Q.H. Why do the poor fail to get good health care? The course discusses problems of the poor and will examine the entire health care system, including Blue Cross and Blue Shield, Medicare and Medicaid, National Health Insurance, low-income barriers to health care, and future directions of medical health care. AFR 1 220 The Black Novel 4 Q.H. The black novelist belongs to a unique literary group in the history of American fiction. Special attention is given to Chesnutt, Toomer, Wright, Ellison, and coa- temporary novelists, and to their different perceptions of the black experience in America. AFR 1 223 Black Poetry 4 Q.H. Black poetry has been an important describer of the black experience in American thought through three centuries. This course will survey the black American poet from colonial times to the present. Special atten- tion will be given to major poets and the influences that shaped their works. AFR 1 235 Black History of Boston 4 Q.H. This course examines the social, economic, political, and educational history of Boston's black community in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. The develop- ment of the black community and its institutions is a major focus, and students are encouraged to study the past in an attempt to understand the present and interpret the future. Research data include participant observation, oral history interviews, and primary and secondary source materials. AFR 1240 Contemporary Issues in Black Society 4Q.H. This course offers an introduction to the various issues and problems that confront black Americans, including some of the realities of the social, political, and economic problems of contemporary black experience. Students are asked to assess the validity of specific social theories in relation to the black experience. AFR 1 241 The Black Family 4 Q.H. How does the black family function, both interper- sonally and as a social unit? Anthropological and sociological theories deal with variations in family structure and the function of the black family in black society. The effects of slavery and colonization on the black family structure and functions are also explored. A side issue is a discussion of some of the differences and similarities between African, African-American, and African-Caribbean families. AFR 1248 Race Relations in America 4 Q.H. The course offers an examination of the interrelations of ethnic, cultural, and minority groups in the United States. Focus is on the nature of racial conflicts, discrimination, reverse discrimination, personal and institutional racism, and racial and ethnic stereotyp- ing. Discussion considers avenues of improvement in attitude awareness and change. AFR 1251 Survey of Black Theatre and Drama 4Q.H. Theatre in America has been an important reflector of the national experience, and black theatre, especially in recent years, has served the same purpose for the black community. The course focuses on the devel- opment of black drama during the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, with emphasis on modern devel- opments and their political and cultural significance. AFR 1261 The Economics of Urban Poverty 4Q.H. Like most Americans and people from around the world, blacks migrated to central cities in America to better their economic conditions. However, unlike other migrants to urban centers, they were not assimilated into the social/economic mainstream, and there is evidence of flagrant job, housing, and educational discrimination against them even during periods of affluence. During recession or depression, their problems were compounded. Students have the opportunity to survey the above events from an economic framework. AFR 1 274 Black Political Behavior 4 Q.H. The course provides an introductory examination of the social and psychological dynamics of black polit- ical participation. Main issues of the course include identity and political socialization and their impact on black voter turnout and partisan choices. 94 / African-American Studies AFR 1280 Black Psychological Identity 4 Q.H. So much is said of stereotyping in news, on television programs, and in literature. The shaping of the black identity over three centuries in America is a compli- cated and perhaps even elusive problem. This course w^ill look at the impact of slavery racism, war, and poverty on the evolvement of the black identity in America. AFR 1 294 Third World Political Relations 4 Q.H. This course offers a comparative regional analysis of the political systems of third world nations of Africa, Asia, Latin America, and the Caribbean. Emphasis is on development strategies; problems of development, including national identity, political socialization and participation, national defense, and urbanization; and the positions of third world nations in the international community. AFR 1 297 Caribbean History 4 Q.H. A descriptive analysis of the development of the Car- ibbean from slavery to the present. The focus will be on the period 1918-1962 especially and emphasis will be on the historical analysis of the relationship of the Caribbean with the United States and black Americans. AFR 1 300-AFR 1311 Directed Study 4 Q. H. Directed study offers the ambitious student the oppor- tunity to pursue a special intellectual interest not covered by the department course offerings and to work on this interest with the department faculty member of his/her choice. The faculty member will closely supervise the project and act as adviser for the duration of the quarter AFR 1350 Research Seminar 4 Q.H. This course is divided into three parts, providing students the opportunity first, to identify a substantive area of their concern (e.g., welfare, political leader- ship, education) and to define a related problem in a research context; second, to be supervised in design- ing a research methodology most appropriate for examining the problem area; and third, to conduct extensive research, test the hypothesis, and draw conclusions based on data analysis techniques. AFR 1355 Directed Study for Senior Thesis 4Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The senior thesis is required of all African-American Studies majors; it offers students the opportunity to prepare a professional research paper under the close supervision of a scholar interested in students' particular research areas. AFR 1360 Field Research Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) Seniors have the opportunity to work with a faculty member on an individual basis, while carrying out a particular research project off-campus. Students are required to refine and polish a topic and outline for the senior thesis. AFR 1380 Junior-Senior Honors Program 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 1 83 Holmes. AFR 1 401 History of East Africa 4 Q.H. The first section of the course deals with the pre- colonial period and the problems of the partition of Africa. The second section focuses on the classical colonial period and the transformations of colonial policy after World War II, with particular emphasis on the ambiguity of decolonization and those features of the colonial system that seem to have become a part of the East African social and political environment. AFR 1 403 History of West Africa 4 Q.H. The history of West Africa has included the struggle for internal unity, economic development, and social justice. The Pan-Africanist ideology W.E.B. DuBois's writings, African socialism, and the consolidation of power and leadership are some of the topical objec- tives in this study of African liberation, particularly the rise of West Africa. AFR 1 405 History of South Africa 4 Q.H. (Prereq. AFR 1491 or permission of instructor) Initial attention is directed toward pre-colonial South Africa and the conflict between Africans and the Dutch and English settlers. The course then focuses on the formation and transformation of colonial policy after World War II, with particular emphasis on racism, neo-colonialism, liberation movements, and interna- tional involvement in the apartheid system. AFR 1421 African-American Literature II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. AFR 1 121 or permission of instructor) This course continues the survey of African-American literature; its primary focus, however, is on principal writers and their major themes. AFR 1431 Analysis of the Slavery System in America 4 Q.H. This course attempts a comprehensive survey of the realities of the slavery system in America, with focus on the impact of slavery on blacks as well as on the society that perpetrated the system. Examination of slave narratives and other historical documents will provide insights into the origin of the slavery system and the way it functioned until the Emancipation Proclamation. AFR 1432 Analysis of Comparative Slavery 4 Q.H. Slavery has had major psychological effects on the shaping of the black American experience, as well as on the experience of blacks throughout the world. An analysis of the sociological implications of slavery on group interrelations, social norms, and cultural aber- rations covers several national versions of the slave system in Africa, Europe, the Caribbean, and North and South America. AFR 1440 Racial Integration and Its Impact on Education 4 Q.H. This course offers an examination of the historical struggle for desegregation. This course analyzes current urban issues in racial integration and some of the projected effects of integration. African-American Studies / 95 APR 1446 The Black Elderly in America 4 Q.H. This course will survey the demographic charac- teristics of black elderly Americans compared with those characteristics of white elderly. These statistics include age, sex, educational levels, income levels, occupations, sources of income, as well as the study and comparison of certain social characteristics of black and white elderly These will include the use of their time relationships with primary and extended family groups, and their own view of the history of their lives as black people in America. They will also give students a perspective of what they envision the future of blacks will be in the social and economic life of America. Students will be expected to devise a questionnaire, interview senior citizens, and write a paper based on this information. APR 1 448 Religion in Black American Society 4 Q.H. Black life in America cannot be fully understood without a sense of the importance of religion in the community. This course looks at the impact of religion on social structures, group behaviors, moral codes, and belief patterns in black society. Topics include the church as a social organizer, the role of the black minister in the community, and the variety of black denominations in urban and rural areas. APR 1449 Junior-Senior Honors 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 183 Holmes. APR 1451 Seminar: Creative Expression in Blues and Jazz 4 Q.H. Bluesand jazz have been among the most far-reaching and original artistic expressions of blacks in America. The course touches on possible African sources of inspiration for the musical literature of blues and jazz; a more important focus, however, is on blues and jazz as a reflection of African-American life and on the impact these musical forms have had on black self- image and position in American culture. APR 1470 Black Political Thought 4 Q.H. How do the black people as a unit view the American political system and black people's chances of improv- ing their lot in this country? This course examines black opinions, from the radical to the ultra-conser- vative, of the United States political system. The focus is historical in context and will address notions of political socialization and the development of black political ideologies. APR 1471 Seminar: Black Political Leadership 4 Q.H. (Prereq. AFR 11 71 or consent of instructor) This course will focus on several prominent black political leaders in the twentieth century, with an exam- ination of the factors and social contexts which con- tributed to or thwarted their leadership. Students will be expected to conduct extensive research on a particular black political leader and present a critical analysis of the impact of that political leader on the black community. APR 1 475 Public Policy Analysis 4 Q.H. The course analyzes the dynamics of the public policy tional levels, with particular attention to the implica- tions of public policy for minority groups. Emphasis is placed on a critique of the policy maker's role and power in the socio-economic setting. APR 1 480 Black Man/Black Woman 4 Q.H. Sociological and anthropological methods are used to examine black male and female personality de- velopment as well as the development of black male and female behavior, self-image, sexual roles, and behavior within both the black and the white communities. APR 1491 African Civilization II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. AFR 1 191 or permission of instructor) This course on African civilization covers the period from 1 800 to the present era. Emphasis will be placed on the relation between Europe and Africa, the cir- cumstances surrounding the imperialist partition of Africa, and the decolonization process. INT 1201 An Analysis of American Racism 4 Q.H. This seminar in contemporary aspects of racism in America discusses the cycle by which racism in our institutions helps form our attitudes and the manner in which our attitudes, in turn, shape our institutions. Emphasis is on the practical, day-to-day aspects of racism, rather than the theoretical and historical. The following courses may be of interest to the student wishing to concentrate in African-American Studies. Descriptions for these courses may be found in the appropriate department listing. PHL 1100 Introduction to Philosophy PHL 1140 Social and Political Philosophy PHL 1243 Existentialism PHL 1 335 Moral Philosophy POL 1303 Political Behavior POL 1317 Law and Society POL 1320 Political Parties and Pressure Groups POL 1342 Government and Politics in Africa POL 1354 The Politics and Policies of Developing Nations POL 1360 The Politics of Revolution and Change POL 1362 Civil Liberties POL 1370 Political Theory POL 1378 Contemporary Political Thought POL 1386 International Law SOA 1345 Urban Anthropology SOA 1355 Political Anthropology SOA 1360 Economic Anthropology SOC 1147 Urban Society SOC 1 1 70 Race and Ethnic Relations SOC 1310 Class, Power, and Social Change 96 / American Sign Language American Sign Language Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are duplicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. American Sign Language courses are an integral part of two undergraduate degree programs: the human services specialization in deaf studies and the linguistics major For more information, contact the American Sign Language Program, 276 Holmes Hall. See also human services and linguistics majors. ASL courses do not satisfy the College of Arts and Sciences modern foreign language requirement for the BA, but they do satisfy humanities requirements of many major programs. Many students take them as free electives for personal or professional enrichment. ASL 1101 American Sign Language I 4 Q.H. An introduction to American Sign Language and Deaf culture, this course focuses on frequently used signs, basic rules of grammar, nonmanual aspects of ASL, and some cultural features of the Deaf Community. ASL 1 1 02 American Sign Language II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ASL 1 101 or permission of instructor) A continuation of basic language and culture study, this course offers an opportunity to build receptive and expressive sign vocabulary Study includes use of the signing space; further use of nonmanual com- ponents, including facial expression and body pos- tures. Introduction to finger spelling. ASL 1201 Intermediate American Sign Language I 4Q.H. (Prereq. ASL 1 102 or permission of instructor) This course emphasizes further development of receptive and expressive skills, finger spelling, vocab- ulary building, grammatical structures; encourages more creative use of expression, classifiers, body postures, and the signing space; introduces regional and ethnic sign variations and political and educational institutions of the Deaf Community. ASL 1202 Intermediate American Sign Language II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ASL 1201 or permission of instructor) The course consists of intensive practice involving expressive and receptive skills in story telling and dialogue; introduction to language forms used in ASL poetry and to the features of culture as they are displayed in art and the theatre. ASL 1211 Deaf Culture 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ASL 1101) Course focuses on the status of Deaf people as a linguistic and cultural minority group. Topics include the role of American Sign Language in the Deaf Community; educational and historical perspectives on deafness; and sociological and cultural make-up of the Deaf Community ASL 1212 Deaf History 4 Q.H. A survey of the history of Deaf people in the Western world, with emphasis on the American Deaf Commu- nity, their language, education, and relationship to hearing society. ASL 1301 Advanced American Sign Language Proficiency 4 Q.H. Emphasis is on further vocabulary building and mastery of fine points of grammar through rigorous receptive and expressive language activities. Included are student-led discussions, debates, and prepared reports on topics in Deaf culture, society, and current affairs. ASL 1401 American Sign Language Literature 4Q.H. Various genres of American Sign Language will be read and discussed in ASL. This course will concen- trate on the work of current, recognized narrators in both literary and face-to-face storytelling traditions, and will also include selected autobiographical sketches, lectures, stories, and letters from the early 1 900s by such historical figures as Clerc, Veditz, E.M. Gallaudet, and others. A videotaped research essay in ASL will be required at the end of the course. ASL 1501 Sign Language Interpreting I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. LNI 1401 or permission of instructor) This is the first of a three-course sequence involving the theoretical and practical aspects of simultaneous interpretation of English into sign language and vice versa. Through lectures, discussions, and role playing, students are introduced to ethics, definitions, client- interpreter relationships, linguistic considerations, mechanics, and special considerations for various interpreting situations. ASL 1502 Sign Language Interpreting II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ASL 1501 or consent of instructor) Lectures, discussions, and role playing emphasize topics that include ethics, roles, fees, and Registry of Interpreters for the Deaf (R.I.D.) certification procedure. Laboratory work focuses on increasing skills in simultaneously interpreting English to sign language and vice versa. ASL 1503 Sign Language Interpreting III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ASL 1 502 or consent of instructor) This course is designed for students who have com- pleted the equivalent of Sign Language Interpreting I and II and wish to upgrade their skills. Laboratory work focuses on interpreting ASL into English and vice versa, and transliterating spoken English into manual English. Art and Architecture / 97 ASL 1504 Methods and Materials in American Sign Language Instruction 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ASL 1202, PSY 1363) This course offers a study of the theories of second- language learning and teaching as applied to ASL, and existing approaches to ASL instruction, with focus on materials, activity selection, utilization and selec- tion of instructional media, and evaluation techniques. ASL 1801, ASL 1802, ASL 1803, ASL 1804, ASL 1 805 Directed Studies (each) 4 Q.H. Directed Studies offer students an opportunity to go beyond course work of the regular curriculum or to pursue an individual learning project. May take the form of research, practicum, or language development activity. Art and Architecture Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are duplicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. Roman numerals at the end of course descriptions refer to Core Curriculum categories listed on page 1-2. ART 11 00 History of Art to 1400 4 Q.H. The course provides a survey of Western art from prehistoric times to the Renaissance. ART 1 1 01 History of Art since 1 400 4 Q.H. The course provides a survey of Western art from the Renaissance to the twentieth century ART 1 1 06 Introduction to Art 4 Q.H. The course offers a basic introduction to the char- acteristics of the visual arts, including painting, sculp- ture, graphic arts, and architecture. Various examples of works of art are studied as an introduction to style and technique. Course includes visits to museum collections and contemporary art galleries. (II) ART 1111 Introduction to Architecture 4 Q.H. The course offers a survey of the stylistic char- acteristics of architecture from ancient times to the present. ART 1113 Architecture and the City 4 Q.H. This course provides a selective examination of Western architecture in the context of the urban envi- ronments that produced it. Special attention is paid to the cultural and social forces which shaped this archi- tecture of the cities. ART 1 1 1 5 Art and Society 4 Q.H. The course offers an examination of the way in which societal forces and political ideologies are expressed in the visual arts, especially in painting and architec- ture. The course combines a broad overview of a few significant historical periods with a more focused concentration on the past two hundred years. ART 1 1 24 Basic Drawing 4 Q.H. The focus of the course is on basic drawing in pen and ink, pencil, charcoal, brush, and related media. Course includes fundamentals of form, volume, and texture in drawing. ART 1 1 27 Basic Painting 4 Q.H. This is an introductory studio course in the fun- damental techniques of painting. Formal problems in the study of color, light, space systems, form, and composition establish the foundation for more indi- vidual creative expression. Critiques and slide lectures are used as needed. ART 1130 Foundations of Visual Design 4 Q.H. An introductory studio course clarifying basic prin- ciples, language, and concepts inherent in visual language systems. Utilizing both two- and three- dimensional media including photography, students will explore such fundamental concepts as com- position, dimensional relationships, effects of color, pictorial and literal space and form, repetition, struc- ture, figure/ground relationships, balance and unity. By working out abstract concepts in concrete hands- on studio projects, students will gain valuable insights into fundamental visual ideas that relate all visual art forms. ART 1 1 32 Graphic Design I 4 Q.H. An introductory studio course in the fundamental principles of graphic design. Assigned projects and lectures in design elements and their application include: the creative use of color, value, line, shape and form, layout, layout techniques and tools, ty- pography, design concepts and symbols, and the correlation of graphic expression and organization with copy content in communicating ideas. ART 1 1 38 Introduction to Printmaking 4 Q.H. A hands-on course dealing with the methods and techniques of etching, drypoint, and calligraphy. Students will experiment with the processes of line etching, aquatint, soft/hard ground and paper relief prints as they develop an image. Slide presentations of prints will be shown each week. ART 1150 Introduction to Architectural Design 4Q.H. An introduction to fundamental design principles and their application to the built environment. Lectures, two- and three-dimensional design projects, and field trips. 98 / Art and Architecture ART 1 1 60 Basic Photography I 4 Q.H.* The course is intended to acquaint the beginning student with the use of the camera, the negative, and the print. Weekly shooting assignments, demonstra- tions, and hands-on lab experience are part of this active, primary-level course. ART 1 1 70 Filmmaking Workshop 4 Q.H. An introductory course in the creative use of the film medium. Emphasis will be placed on weekly lab assignments designed to develop skills in the funda- mental techniques of filmmaking. A final film project expressing an original idea in film form will be required of each student. Rim screenings, lectures, and cri- tiques. Equipment will be provided by the department. ART 1200 Ancient Art and Architecture 4 Q.H. This course offers an overview of the painting, sculp- ture, and architecture of Ancient Egypt, Mesopotamia, Greece, and Rome, with special emphasis on the historical forces that shaped them. ART 1 203 Medieval Art and Architecture 4 Q.H. The course focuses on Romanesque and Gothic art and architecture from the tenth to the fifteenth centuries. ART 1204 Renaissance Art and Architecture 4Q.H. The course focuses on Italian painting, sculpture, and architecture of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, with special reference to the historical and social forces that shaped them. ART 1 21 0 French Painting 4 Q.H. The course examines French painting of the nine- teenth century, focusing on romanticism, realism, impressionism, and their cultural implications. ART 1 21 3 Modern Painting 4 Q.H. The course provides a survey of twentieth-century painting, including major schools such as impres- sionism, cubism, surrealism, and expressionism. Course includes visits to museum collections and contemporary art galleries. ART 1 21 7 History of Marine Painting 4 Q.H. A study of the image of the sea as used by various painters. The work of such artists as Turner, Delacroix, Monet, Rembrandt, and many others will be examined stylistically within a historical context. ART 1220 American Sculpture and Painting 4 Q.H. A survey of major developments in American sculp- ture and painting from colonial times to the present. This course emphasizes stylistic considerations and influences affecting the development of these art forms. ART 1 223 American Architecture 4 Q.H. This course provides a survey of major developments in American architecture from colonial times to the present, with emphasis on stylistic developments and influences affecting architectural directions in America. ART 1225 Technology, Architecture, and the City 4Q.H. The course examines the role technology and archi- tecture played in shaping the built environment of the American city, with special emphasis on Chicago, New York, and Boston. The course also investigates the effects of physical planning, especially urban renewal and the recycling of older buildings. ART 1228 Contemporary Architecture and the City 4 Q.H. The course is a study of the great figures and chief movements of American and European architecture and city planning of the twentieth century. ART 1 230 History of Photography 4 Q.H. The course offers a study of the development of photography from the early nineteenth century to the present. ART 1233 Contemporary Directions in Photography 4 Q.H. A slide/lecture course designed to acquaint the stu- dent with trends in twentieth-century photography. Photojournalism, documentary, commercial, and creative photography will be examined closely in rela- tion to other communication media. ART 1 235 History of Film 4 Q.H.* An introductory historical survey of the development of film as an art form from the late nineteenth-century handcolored silent films to the contemporary national movements. Lectures, screenings, and discussions. ART 1 236 The American Film 4 Q.H.* An historical survey of the unique rise of the American film and an exploration of its influence on a burgeoning new art form. Key films representing major aesthetic or technical developments from the late nineteenth century to the present will be screened weekly and discussed. Lectures, screenings, and discussions. ART 1237 Contemporary Directions in Cinema 4 Q.H.* A comparative study of major international film move- ments from World War II to the present. Selected films by representative contemporary directors. Lectures, screenings, and discussions. ART 1 238 Documentary Film 4 Q.H.* A study of the aesthetics and tradition of the doc- umentary film, with a rtiajor emphasis on contem- porary directions. ART 1 240 History of Graphic Design 4 Q.H. An historical survey of graphic design from the mid- nineteenth century to the present. The course will focus on the evolutionary development of graphic design, its special nature and function, major periods and trends, the historical influence of the fine arts, and contemporary directions in design evident today. Slide lectures and discussions. ART 1 243 Graphic Design II 4 Q.H. A continuation and reinforcement of the fundamental practices and principles of good design with a special emphasis on developing overall design concepts. Art and Architecture / 99 Students will explore the inherent problems in design- ing public graphic systems, exhibit graphics, corpo- rate and institutional graphics, promotional and tech- nical literature graphics, and develop skills in effective problem-solving techniques and concept development methodology. ART 1 250 Color Theory and Practice 4 Q.H. A project-oriented course exploring the nature and properties of color, major color theories, color har- monies, the spatial characteristics of color, color and light, the psychology of color, color symbolism, color orchestration, and the pragmatic creative application of color in image-making generally, and design specifically ART 1254 Intermediate Drawing 4 Q.H. The main focus of this course is to heighten the student's understanding of spatial awareness, scale movement, and expression. Students will be asked to create unusual environmental situations for their figurative compositions. A variety of media will be used, including wash, pen and ink, watercolor, chalk, charcoal, and pencil. ART 1 261 Basic Photography II 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. ART 1 1 60 or equiv) A continuation of ART 1 160 with more emphasis on combining personal aesthetic choices with refining darkroom skills. A final portfolio at the end of the course as well as weekly shooting assignments are required. ART 1263 Introduction to Color Photography 4 Q.H. This course will cover basic color theory as well as contemporary photographic processes and practices. Students will work with color negative materials and print from color slides and negatives. Color printing facilities provided for student use. Lectures and cri- tiques where appropriate. ART 1 271 Animation Workshop 4 Q.H. An introductory course in the creative possibilities of the animated film. Weekly lab assignments and a final project will acquaint students with various animation techniques and the creative advantages of each. Rim screenings, lectures, and critiques. Equipment sup- plied by the department. ART 1310 Seminar in Modern Art and Architecture 4 Q.H. (Prereq. One course in post-Renaissance art history or permission.) The course explores selected topics in modern art and/or architecture. ART 1320 Late Nineteenth-Century American Architecture 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ART 220 or ART 223, or permission.) The course offers a study of the "stick and shingle" architectural styles, as well as more general develop- ments. Introductory lectures are followed by student presentations on selected topics. ART 1363 Intermediate Photography Workshop 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. ART 1261 or equiv) Through close interaction with the teacher, students are asked to refine their technical skills and to make meaningful decisions about their relation to the world around them through the use of black and white photography Alternative processes and large formats as well as frequent slide presentations of contempo- rary photography will combine together to form a base for a course stressing individual direction and a quali- tative approach to substantive photography. ART 1800, ART 1801, ART 1802 Directed Study (each) 4 Q.H. These courses offer independent work under the direction of members of the Department on a chosen topic. Limited to qualified junior and senior students majoring in art, with approval of the department. ART 1810, ART 1811, ART 1812 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 1 83 Holmes. INT 1 1 00 Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music 4Q.H. This interdisciplinary course offers an integrated approach to three related disciplines: art, drama, and music. Basic vocabulary and analytical techniques are established for each discipline, emphasizing such common elements as color, line, rhythm, texture, and form. Representative works from various periods are examined in the context of the cultures that produced them, and lectures focus on parallels and contrasts among the three disciplines' manifestations of specific trends, principles, and ideals. Lectures, readings, and listening assignments are supplemented by visits to art galleries and attendance at concerts and theatri- cal performances. (II) *Lab fee required. 100 /Biology Biology For specific information about terms during which courses are offered, students should inquire at the main office of the Biology Department, 403 Richards Hall. This is especially the case for students wishing to carry a minor in biology, since some courses acceptable only for a minor do not appear in the quarterly Elective Course Selection booklets. Students should note that courses are presented by category and are not listed in a single numerical sequence. Students should be aware that two (or more) courses with substantially the same content may not be counted toward quantitative graduation requirements. Some instances of overlap between biology courses are noted in the individual course descriptions below. However, in addition, certain combinations of courses (e.g., BIO 1150-1151 and BIO 1253, -54, -55) may cover essentially the same material, and certain courses in other departments of the University may duplicate certain biology courses. If a student is not sure whether particular courses overlap, the student should seek advice from departmental advisers or the Arts and Sciences Dean's Office. The following courses are primarily for students with little or no background in college science and math- ematics. These courses are not open to biology majors. BIO 1110 Organic Evolution 4 Q.H. (Not open to biology majors) The course focuses on the major features of organic evolution, with emphasis on vertebrate evolution, genetics, and physical influences. BIO 1111 Environment and Man 4 Q.H. (Not open to biology majors) The course offers an ecological analysis of man's inter-reaction with other organisms. The necessary foundation of biological principles is presented. BIO 1150 Human Anatomy I and Physiology I 5Q.H. (Not open to biology majors) The course focuses on cellular and tissue structure and function, followed by anatomical terminology. Topics include histology anatomy, and physiology of bones, muscles, blood, and nervous systems. The laboratory includes a study of human bones, cat dissection, and related histology BIO 1151 Human Anatomy II and Physiology II 5 Q.H.* (Not open to biology majors) (Prereq. BIO 1 1 50) The course covers anatomy and physiology of the respiratory, digestive, urogenital, and circulatory systems; physiology of endocrine system; a brief exploration of the anatomy and physiology of eye and ear The laboratory includes studies of muscle and nerve physiology, blood physiology and histology, and physiology of respiration. BIO 1 1 70 Marine Biology 4 Q.H. (Not open to biology majors) The course provides an introduction to marine life with an emphasis on that of New England shores, and includes concepts of life cycles, adaptation of organ- isms, productivity, disturbance effects due to pollution and/or man and how they interrelate. BIO 1 1 81 The Human Organism 4 Q.H. (Not open to biology majors) This course, designed for nonscience majors, pro- vides an introduction to the structure and function of the human body. Emphasis is on the principles of biological and physical science as they relate to life processes in health and disease. Laboratory exper- iments explore the workings of the students' own biological systems rather than those of other animals. BIO 1187 Biology of Human Reproduction 4Q.H. (Not open to biology majors) The course covers structure and function of male and female reproductive systems; factors affecting sexual development, fertility, and reproductive behavior in the human species; physiology of coitus, fertilization, pregnancy birth, and lactation; methods of control- ling fertility. The following courses are primarily for students majoring in science- or health-related professions or other majors (nonbiology) with equivalent back- ground in college science and mathematics. These courses are not open to biology majors. BIO 1 1 1 2 Ecological Principles 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Nonbiology science majors or engineering majors) Identical to BIO 1211, but without lab. Not open to biology majors. (II) BIO 1 1 20 Basic Microbiology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1140, or permission of instructor; not open to biology majors) Microbial life, emphasizing morphological charac- teristics, physiological activities, and disease pro- duction. Laboratory (Overlaps BIO 1320, BIO 1121, and BIO 1221.) BIO 1 1 21 Introductory Microbiology 3 Q.H. (Not open to biology majors) Same as BIO 1 1 20, but without laboratory. BIO 1 1 40 Basic Animal Biology I 4 Q.H.* (Not open to biology majors) The course covers principles of biology; universal properties and processes of living organisms as exem- plified by the cell and its activities; inheritance evolu- tion; and environmental relationships. Laboratory (Overlaps BIO 11 06.) Lab fee requireb. Biology/ 101 BIO 1141 Basic Animal Biology II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 140; not open to biology majors) The course offers systematic, comparative study of the structure and functions of animals. Diversity of animals is considered from the standpoint of evo- lutionary adaptation. Laboratory. (Overlaps BIO 1 1 07.) BIO 1221 General Microbiology 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor; or CHf\/l 1265, BIO 1260, and BIO 1261 ; required courses may be taken concurrently) Same as BIO 1320, but without laboratory. Not appli- cable for the biology major or graduate credit. BIO 1255 Human Anatomy 4 Q.H.* (Not open to biology majors) The course focuses on the structure and development of the human body. Laboratory. Courses primarily for biology majors or for other students with equivalent background in college science and mathematics. Freshmen intending to major in biology should take the sequence BI0 1 1 03 to BIO 1105. BIO 1 1 03 Principles of Biology I 5 Q.H.* An introduction to the basic principles of biology the course endeavors to provide an information base for the remainder of the biology core. Topics include scientific method; growth; development; elementary genetics; nutrition; photosynthesis; and respiration. Special emphasis is placed on the role of plants in the biological world. Laboratory. BIO 1 1 04 Principles of Biology II 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1103) Topics include cellular metabolism, molecular mech- anisms of microbial life, structure and general physi- ology of animal cells, and evolution of adaptive diversity among invertebrate animals. Laboratory. BIO 1 1 05 Principles of Biology III 5 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 1 03 and BIO 1 1 04) The course covers discussion of the structure and function of vertebrate animals, including the human species; introduction to the various systems of the body illustrated with laboratory experiments and animal dissection. BIO 1 1 06 General Biology 4 Q.H.* The course focuses on universal properties and processes of living organisms. Topics include cellular composition and cellular control, the evolutionary process, environmental relationships. Laboratory. (Normally not for freshman biology majors. Overlaps BIO 1140.) BIO 1 1 07 Animal Biology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1106) The course offers a systematic comparative study of the structure and functions of animals. Diversity of animals is considered from the standpoint of evolu- tionary adaptation. Laboratory (Normally not for freshmen biology majors. Overlaps BIO 1141.) BIO 1 1 33 Plant Biology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 06-BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 03-BIO 1 1 05) The course offers an introduction to the structure of plant cells, structure and function of roots, stems, and leaves of flowering plants; survey of the major groups in the plant kingdom, including their morphology, reproductive biology and economic importance. Laboratory BIO 1211 Environmental and Population Biology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07-BIO 1 1 33 or BIO 1 1 03-BIO 1 1 05) The course offers detailed consideration of the physico-chemical factors influencing and influenced by organisms. The course covers interactions among individual organisms and among species; change of species by genetic natural selection; development of communities and function of ecosystems. Laboratory. (II) BIO 1 253 Human Physiology I 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 06 and BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 03-1 1 05) The course offers study of the physiology of excitable cells and tissues: nerve and muscle synapses, mus- cular contraction, neuromuscular reflexes, autonomic nervous system, endocrinology sensory physiology, and higher nervous function. BIO 1 254 Human Physiology II 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1253) The course offers study of respiration and circulation: fluids, the heart, cardiovascular regulatory mecha- nisms and metabolism, gastrointestinal function, renal function. Laboratory. BIO 1260 Genetics and Development Biology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07-BIO 1 1 33 or BIO 1 1 03-BIO 1 1 05 and OHM 1264) Course focuses on elaboration of the classic laws of heredity, cytogenetics, molecular basis of heredity, and selected examples of the development of form and function. Laboratory. BIO 1261 Cell Physiology and Biochemistry 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1107 or BIO 11 03-BIO 1105 and BIO 1260, CHM 1265, and CHM 1221) Topics include basic chemical and physical enzyme kinetics; processes of cells related to their fine struc- ture; oxidative and intermediary metabolism; photo- synthesis, membrane phenomena; chemical and physical processes of prokaryotic and eukaryotic cells. Laboratory. BIO 1311 Evolution 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1107 or BIO 11 03-BIO 1105 and BIO 1260) This is a basic evolutionary course for biology majors and graduate students offering a survey of evolution- ary history evidence, mechanisms, and theories. Topics of current interest in evolution are emphasized. BIO 1320 General Microbiology 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission of instructor; or CHM 1265, BIO 1260, or BIO 1261; required courses may be taken concurrently) Lab fee required. 102 /Biology The course provides morphological, ecological, and biochemical consideration of representative groups of bacteria; introduction to virology and microbial genetics; host-parasite relationships, including basic immunological considerations; prokaryotes of medical significance; physical and chemical controls of micro- bial growth. Laboratory. (Overlaps BIO 1 1 20 and BIO 1221.) BIO 1 328 The Microbial World 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 121 1 and CHM 1264) The course offers study of the position, structure, and function of microorganisms in the natural v\/orld, and their utilization by humans from the perspective of their major physiological properties. Laboratory BIO 1329 Marine and Fresh Water Microbiology I 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1320) The course examines methodological approaches to the study of the aquatic environment. Shipboard sampling and relevant field trips augment laboratory studies. BIO 1 330 Marine Botany 4 Q.H.* Subjects covered include taxonomy of the major groups of marine plants, primarily algae; their eco- logical and reproductive strategies and their economic importance; and their roles in diverse marine com- munities. Mandatory field trips in addition to labora- tory studies. BIO 1 341 Vertebrate Zoology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 05 and BIO 1211) Lectures emphasize the systematics, natural history, zoogeography and behavior of all classes of verte- brates. The laboratory consists of identification of preserved specimens and mandatory field and museum trips. BIO 1 347 Embryology 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 05 and BIO 1 260) Topics include gametogenesis, fertilization, cleavage, gastrulation, induction, organogenesis, and metamor- phosis in vertebrates. Emphasis is on frog, chick, and pig in the laboratory. BIO 1 348 Animal Histology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1131) The course offers microscopic study of fundamental types of animal tissues. Laboratory BIO 1351 Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 05) The course focuses on morphology and phylogeny of the vertebrates; laboratory studies on taxonomy of the group and specific morphology of the dogfish shark, the mud puppy, the alligator, and the cat. BIO 1370 Marine Invertebrate Zoology 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 107 or BIO 1 105) Topics include functional morphology systematics, ecology and phylogenetic relationships of the major invertebrate phyla. Emphasis in laboratory is on utili- zation of living marine forms, with dissection of repre- sentative organisms. BIO 1401 Histological Technique 3 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 05 and BIO 1 261 ) The course provides instruction in general methods of tissue preparation for purposes of microscopic study; preparation of solutions and stains; the microtome and its operation, together with specific directions for fixation, clearing, hardening, embedding, section- cutting, and staining tissues. Laboratory. BIO 141 1 Tropical Terrestrial Ecosystems 3 Q.H. (Prereq. two years of college biology) A field and lecture course to introduce students to the plants, animals, and ecosystems of terrestrial Jamaica. BIO 1 420 Microbial Physiology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1320 or equiv) The course focuses on structure and function of the bacterial cell, with emphasis on its general properties as well as on the physical and chemical factors that influence it. Laboratory BIO 1421 Medical Virology 4 O.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1320) The course examines fundamental characteristics of animal viruses with emphasis on pathogenesis, clinical pathology and epidemiology of the common viral diseases, including the tumor viruses and the slow viral diseases. Laboratory sessions focus on methods of working with animals, eggs, and cell cultures in isolating, cultivating, and identifying viruses. BIO 1 427 Medical Microbiology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1320 or equiv) Topics include host parasite interactions: virulence, toxins, natural flora, immunological responses; char- acteristics of the common bacterial, rickettsial, and protozoal infections in humans; epidemiology pathol- ogy vaccines, and chemotherapy. BIO 1429 Marine and Fresh Water Microbiology II 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1320) The course focuses on characterization and dif- ferentiation of aquatic micro-organisms. Topics include microbial associations in marine, estuerine, and fresh water habitats. Morphology physiology and ecology are stressed. BIO 1 430 Plant Physiology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 33 or BIO 1 1 05 and CHM 1 265) The course focuses on the physiology and biochem- istry of plants as a whole and at the cellular and organ levels. Considerations of mineral and nutrition, photo- synthesis, hormones, growth, and development are included. Attendance at a weekly four-hour lab, as well as preparation of a paper based on the research literature, is required. BIO 1 431 Lower Plants 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 133 or BIO 1 105) The course offers study of nonvascular plants (algae, fungi, lichens, mosses, and liverworts), including their morphology ultrastructure, ecology iife cycles, repro- ductive strategies, and economic uses. Laboratory *Lab fee required. Biology/ 103 BIO 1432 Higher Plants 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 1 33 or BIO 1 1 05)) The course offers study of vascular plants (club mosses, ferns, gymnosperms, and angiosperms). Origin, ecology development, structure, paleobo- tanical evidence, reproductive strategies, and eco- nomic uses. Held trips included. Laboratory BIO 1437 Structural Botany 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 133 or BIO 1105) The course focuses on comparative developmental anatomy of seed plants. Laboratory BIO 1 438 Flora of New England 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 11 33 or BIO 11 05) The course provides a study of local vascular flora (ferns, gymnosperms, and angiosperms), with em- phasis on recognition and appreciation of plant family characteristics. Preparation of herbarium specimens is presented. Field trip attendance is required. Laboratory BIO 1439 Economic Botany 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 33, or BIO 1 1 03-BIO 1 1 05) The course offers an in-depth study of the association of plants and men. Subjects include food, beverage, drug, fiber, and medicinal products and crops, both historically and in present-day usage. Laboratory includes making of several plant products (paper, dried fruit, beer, etc.) as well as tours of a brewery, wholesale grocers, ethnic markets, sugar factory and other places as time permits. BIO 1 440 Advanced Invertebrate Zoology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Two years of college biology) A lecture, field, and laboratory course that concentrates on one or two phyla. Subject varies from year to year, depending upon expertise of available faculty. An individual research project is required. BIO 1441 Parasitology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 05 and BIO 1 261 ) The course focuses on symbiotic relationships of protozoans, mesozoans, flatworms, nematodes, acan- thocephalans, and arthropodes. Laboratory. BIO 1 442 Vertebrate Paleontology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 05. BIO 1 21 1 , BIO 1 260; or permission of instructor) The course examines evolution of the vertebrates, including humans, as revealed through the fossil record. Laboratory, museum, and field studies. BIO 1 447 Herpetology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 05 and BIO 1 260) Lectures emphasize the natural history behavior, sys- tematics, and zoogeography of recent amphibians and reptiles. The laboratory consists of identification and preparation of preserved specimens, particularly local amphibians and reptiles. Mandatory field trips. BIO 1 448 Mammalogy 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 or BIO 1 1 05 and BIO 1 21 1 ) The course offers study of phylogeny anatomy physi- ology and natural history of mammals. Field collec- tion, laboratory preparation, and study of specimens are included. Laboratory. BIO 1 452 Comparative Neurobiology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1261) The course focuses on structure and function in simple invertebrate nervous systems. Topics include parallel conductance theory at endogenous and synaptic potentials, nerve networks, simple sensory and motor systems. BIO 1453 General Physiology of Invertebrates 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1261) Basic animal functions as manifested among the major groups of invertebrates, with comparisons to the ver- tebrates, especially aquatic vertebrates. The course considers the cellular and biochemical bases for the functions, their control, their adaptiveness to diverse environments, and their evolutionary implications. Topics usually include: respiration, circulation, nutri- tion, metabolism, excretion, salt and water balance, temperature responses, biological clocks, sensory organs, and various effector organs. BIO 1454 Comparative Vertebrate Physiology 4Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1261) This course considers physiological principles in the context of the phylogenetic diversity of the vertebrates, with emphasis on adaptations of animals to aspects of their life histories and environments. Comparisons with invertebrate systems will be made when appro- priate. Major themes to be considered include: ener- getics, temperature, circulation, respiration, skeletal muscle, and salt and water balance. Laboratory BIO 1 457 Neuroethology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1105) A lecture, field, and laboratory course concentrating on the mechanisms underlying behavior of model invertebrates and lower invertebrates. The overall goal will be to develop a framework to explain behavior in terms of properties and connectivity of neuronal circuits. Topics to be covered include: the cellular biology of neurons and neuronal circuits, the organi- zation of sensory and motor systems, and field and laboratory Analysis of simple behaviors. BIO 1460 Current Concepts in Cell Biology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1261 and physics) The course examines selected topics in cellular struc- ture and function of eukaryotes, e.g., their electrical and mechanical characteristics and the underlying physical and biochemical processes. Topics will vary depending upon the instructor Laboratory. BIO 1465 Introductory Immunology 3 Q.H. (Prereq. 1261) The course covers basic consideration of the physical and chemical attributes of antigens and antibodies. Antigens of biological significance as well as invivo antigen-antibody interactions are discussed. *Lab fee required. 104 /Biology BIO 1466 Immunology Laboratory 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1465 taken concurrently) The course provides laboratory exercises dealing with immunization, quantitative antigen-antibody reac- tions, electrophoretic studies (agar, acrylamide gel, and cellulose acetate), immuno-fluorescence. BIO 1467 Molecular Biology 4Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1261) The course emphasizes experimental design and proof in macro-molecular chemistry and genetics. Studies current theories of the detailed molecular mechanisms for the preservation, expression, and evolutionary development of biological information. Applications to general biological and health prob- lems Will be emphasized. A two-hour period each week will be devoted to problem solving, research "game playing," and model building. BIO 1470 Coastal Biology (Oregon Coast) 4 Q.H. The first of a series of three courses intended to introduce the student to a wide range of coastal environments. This course includes studies of the open ocean, rocky intertidal areas, sandy beaches, and estuarine environments of the Oregon Coast. Basic biological principles will be demonstrated through comparative studies. BIO 1471 Coastal Biology (Caribbean Coast) 4Q.H. The second of a series of three courses intended to introduce the student to a wide range of coastal environments. This course includes studies of the open ocean, rocky intertidal areas, sandy beaches, and estuarine environments of the Caribbean. Basic biological principles will be demonstrated through comparative studies. BIO 1472 Coastal Biology (New England Coast) 4 Q.H. The third of a series of three courses intended to introduce the student to a wide range of coastal environments. This course includes studies of the open ocean, rocky intertidal areas, sandy beaches, and estuarine environments of the New England Coast. Basic biological principles will be demonstrated through comparative studies. BIO 1 477 The Biology of Corals 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Two years of college biology) A field, lecture, and laboratory course which con- centrates on tropical cnidaria. The course will study the systematics, anatomy physiology and ecology of this group of animals which assume such an impor- tant role in tropical marine ecosystems. BIO 1 478 The Biology of Rshes 5 Q.H. (Prereq. Two years of college biology) A field, lecture, and laboratory course that examines the systematics, anatomy, behavior and ecology of fishes. Tropical forms are emphasized. BIO 1479 Adapatations of Aquatic Organisms 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Two years of college biology) An exploration of aquatic organisms through a study of their evolutionary responses to the aquatic habitat. The physical properties of water create physical con- straints that have affected form, function, and behavior of all aquatic organisms. Density, viscosity, diffusion rates, pressure effects, and elementary fluid mechan- ics will be used to explain such characteristics as the body shape of larvae, hearing and sound production, suspension feeding, and buoyancy Course includes lectures, laboratories, demonstrations, and individual research projects. BIO 1490 Senior Seminar 1 Q.H. (Prereq. Completion of "Biocore" BI0 1 1 03-BI0 1 261 ) The course examines recent developments in various topics of zoology microbiology physiology botany ecology genetics, and cell biology Student presen- tation end analysis are emphasized. Limited to quali- fied juniors and seniors in the B.A. program and required of seniors in the B.S. program. BIO 1491, BIO 1492 Directed Study (each) 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Completion of "Biocore" BI0 1 1 03-BI0 1 261 ) The course offers independent work on a chosen topic under the direction of members of the depart- ment. Limited to qualified juniors and seniors with approval of the department and special arrangements with the supervising faculty member The two quarters of this course together are counted as one elective course in the Biology Department. BIO 1495, BIO 1496, BIO 1497, BIO 1498 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 183 Holmes. INT 1580 Physical Chemistry with Biological Applications 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1261) This course examines physiochemical principles as they apply to biological processes. Topics include chemical equilibria, reaction kinetics, basic ther- modynamics, oxidation-reduction reactions, bioe- nergetics, macromolecules in solution, and transport. The approach is quantitative, and problem solving as a tool for learning is emphasized. Basic assumptions and limitations underlying principles are explained; for the most part, however, rigorous derivations are avoided. Applications to basic experimental tech- niques in biochemistry are made by way of relevant biochemical examples. Lab fee required. * Chemistry / 1 05 Chemistry Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are duplicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. Roman numerals at the end of course descriptions refer CHM 1 1 01 General Chemistry 4 Q.H. ^This course examines topics of interest in inorganic chemistry for students in health-related majors. Topics include: atomic structure; energy changes in physical and chemical processes; stoichiometry; chemical bonding; gases, liquids, and solids; solutions; acids and bases. The emphasis is on how such ideas are related to the chemistry of the body CHM 1 1 02 General Chemistry 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1101) This course provides an introduction to organic sub- stances of biological significance, and goes on to discuss the structure and reactions of proteins, car- bohydrates, lipids, and nucleic acids as well as the major pathways of metabolism. CHM 1 1 04 Composition of the Oceans 4 Q.H. Seawater, its nonliving components, and the changes they undergo during natural and technological activi- ties. Principles illustrated include the structures of sub- stances and solutions, dynamic equilibrium, nuclear and ionic reactions, and the dynamics of pollution, as they relate to the oceans. The course presupposes an exposure to chemistry in secondary school. The course is not recommended for students who have completed a college-level chemistry course and is not for students majoring in any science. CHM 1111 General Chemistry 5 Q.H.* This course, designed for nonchemistry majors, focuses on basic concepts and definitions; the mole concept and chemical stoichiometry states of matter, solutions, periodicity of elements, atomic structure, chemical bonding and reactions. (II) CHM 1112 General Chemistry 5 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1111) This course, for students who will not be taking further chemistry, covers chemical equilibria; acids, bases, and buffers; introduction to the organic chemistry of compounds of biological relevance; introductory bio- chemistry of proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, and nucleic acids. CHM 1 1 22 General Chemistry 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1111) For nonchemistry majors who will be taking CHM 1264, Organic Chemistry. Subjects covered include chemical kinetics and equilibria; acids and bases; elementary thermodynamics and kinetics; electroly- sis and electrochemistry (II) CHM 1 1 31 General Chemistry 4 Q.H. Primarily for engineering students. Introduction to the principles of chemistry focusing upon the states and structure of matter and chemical stoichiometry. to Core Curriculum categories listed on pages 1-2. CHM 1 1 32 General Chemistry 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1131) Primarily for engineering students, the course offers an introduction to the principles of chemistry, focusing upon chemical equilibria, the nature of some common materials, and energy considerations in chemical and nuclear transformations. CHM 1138 General Chemistry Laboratory 1 Q.H.* Optional laboratory for CHM 1 1 32, General Chemistry for engineering students. Experiments pertaining to lecture material. CHM 1 1 41 General Chemistry 4 Q.H. Similar to CHM 1151, but without laboratory (Not available to majors from chemistry biology or phar- macy/allied health sciences.) CHM 1 1 42 General Chemistry 4 Q.H. Similar to CHM 1152, but without laboratory (Not available to majors from chemistry, biology or phar- macy/allied health sciences.) CHM 1 1 51 General Chemistry 5 Q.H.* For chemistry majors and selected students in other majors, such as biology physics, etc. Course focuses on basic concepts and definitions, moles, gas laws, stoichiometry atomic structure, periodic properties, chemical bonding. CHM 1 1 52 General Chemistry 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1 1 51 or CHM 1141) Topics include solutions, chemical kinetics, chemical equilibrium, chemical thermodynamics, electrochem- istry, chemistry of the representative elements. CHM 1 1 53 The Chemical Elements 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1 1 32, CHM 1 1 22, CHM 1 1 52, or equiv.) For chemistry majors and selected students in other majors. The principal concepts of chemistry (ther- modynamics, chemical bonding, kinetics) are applied to a systematic survey of the characteristic behavior of the chemical elements and their compounds. CHM 1221 Analytical Chemistry 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1 1 22 or equiv.) For nonchemistry majors. The principles and applica- tions of chemical methods of analysis with an intro- duction to selected instrumental methods. CHM 1223 Chemical Oceanography 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1 1 32, CHM 1 1 22, CHM 1 1 52, or equiv.) Chemical reactions and interactions in the marine environment. Methods and techniques of marine chemical investigation. *Lab fee required. 106 /Chemistry CHM 1231 Analytical Chemistry 5 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 1 22, CHM 1 1 52, or equiv.) For chemistry majors. The principles and practice of chemical methods of analysis. Experimental planning and interpretation. Introduction to selected instrumen- tal methods. CHM 1261 Organic Chemistry 4Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1132) For chemical engineering majors. Course covers nomenclature, preparation, and reactivity of aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and of the more common functional groups; correlation between the structure of organic compounds and their physical and chemical properties; electronic interpretation of organic reac- tions with an emphasis on the development of a predictive capability. CHM 1 262 Organic Chemistry 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1261) Continuation of CHM 1261. CHM 1 264 Organic Chemistry 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1 1 22, CHM 1 1 52, or equiv) For nonchemistry majors. Course covers nomen- clature, preparation, properties, and reactions of common organic compounds. CHM 1 265 Organic Chemistry 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1264) Continuation of CHM 1264. CHM 1271 Organic Chemistry 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 1 53) For chemistry majors and selected students in other majors. Course covers synthesis and properties of aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and their func- tional derivatives; correlation between the structure of organic compounds and their physical and chemical properties; and electronic interpretation of organic reactions. CHM 1 272 Organic Chemistry 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1271) Continuation of CHM 1 271 . CHM 1 273 Organic Chemistry 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1 272) Continuation of CHM 1272. CHM 1381 Physical Chemistry 3 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1223 or MTH 1243. PHY 1233 or PHY 1223, or equiv) Similar to CHM 1 391 , but without laboratory CHM 1 382 Physical Chemistry 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1391 or CHM 1381) Similar to CHM 1381, but without laboratory. CHM 1 383 Physical Chemistry 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1392 or CHM 1382) Similar to CHM 1393, but without laboratory CHM 1391 Physical Chemistry 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. MTH 1223 or MTH 1243, PHY 1233 or PHY 1223, or equiv) Chemical thermodynamics. CHM 1 392 Physical Chemistry 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1391) Topics include phase equilibria, solutions, kinetic theory of gases, chemical kinetics. CHM 1393 Physical Chemistry 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. MTH 1223 or MTH 1243, PHY 1233 or PHY 1223, or equiv) Course covers quantum chemistry particles and waves, Schrodinger wave mechanics, the chemical bond. CHM 1421 Instrumental Analysis 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1221, CHM 1231, or equiv) For nonchemistry majors only Similar to CHM 1431, but without laboratory CHM 1431 Instrumental Analysis 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1392 and CHM 1231) Course focuses on principles, methods, and applica- tions of selected topics in electrometric, chromato- graphic, and spectroscopic analysis. CHM 1441 Inorganic Chemistry 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 393) Topics include atomic properties of free atoms and ions. Ionic bonding and the structure of the solid state. The Madelung calculation; the Born-Haber and other thermodynamic cycles. Valence-bond, molecular, orbital, and crystal field theories of bonding. Stereo- chemistry of compounds of representative elements. Electron-deficient compounds. Spectral and magnetic properties of transition metal compounds. CHM 1461 Identification of Organic Compounds 3 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1265 or CHM 1273) The course examines qualitative analysis of organic compounds and mixtures, using physical, chemical, and instrumental methods. CHM 1 501 Polymer Chemistry I 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1273 or equiv) The course provides an introduction to polymers. Major emphasis on synthesis. Step-reaction, chain- reaction, and ring-opening polymerizations. Copoly- merization. Three-dimensional polymers and cross- linking. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3501. CHM 1 502 Polymer Chemistry 11 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1392 or equiv) Topics include physical chemistry of polymers in solution and bulk. Molecular characterization. Me- chanical and physical properties in the glassy rub- bery, viscous, and semicrystalline states. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3502. CHM 1 503 Polymer Chemistry III 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1501 and CHM 1502) Topics include industrial practice, polymer processing, fibers, elastomers, coatings, adhesives, reinforced plastics. Relation of polymer structure to usage. Cor- responds to graduate course CHM 3503. Lab fee required. Chemistry / 1 07 CHM 1521 Advanced Analytical Chemistry III 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1431 or equiv.) The course examines analytical separations. Cor- responds to graduate course CHM 3521 . CHM 1523 Advanced Analytical Chemistry II 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1431) Electroanalytical. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3523. CHM 1 525 Advanced Analytical Chemistry I 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1431 or equiv.) The course covers optical methods of analysis. Cor- responds to graduate course CHM 3525. CHM 1541 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry I 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1441) The course covers application of quantum chemistry to inorganic systems. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3541. CHM 1542 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry 11 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1541) Continuation of CHM 1 541 . Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3542. CHM 1543 Advanced Inorganic Chemistry ill 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 542) Chemistry of the solid state. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3543. CHM 1 561 Advanced Organic Chemistry I 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1273 or CHM 1265) Course focuses on organic structure and reactions. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3561 . CHM 1 562 Advanced Organic Chemistry II 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1561) The course examines organic structure and reac- tions. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3562. CHM 1563 Advanced Organic Chemistry III 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 562) The course focuses on organic structure and prop- erties. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3563. CHM 1 564 Spectrophotometric identification of Organic Compounds 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1273 or equiv.) The course examines spectrophotometric identifi- cation of organic compounds. Corresponds to grad- uate course CHM 3564. CHM 1581 Advanced Physical Chemistry I 3Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1393) The course examines chemical thermodynamics. Cor- responds to graduate course CHM 3581 . CHM 1 591 Advanced Physical Chemistry 11 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1393) The course focuses on atomic and molecular struc- ture. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3591 . CHM 1594 Advanced Physical Chemistry IN 3 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1393) The course focuses on chemical kinetics. Corresponds to graduate course CHM 3594. CHM 1800, CHM 1801, CHM 1802, CHM 1803, CHM 1804, CHM 1805 Undergraduate Research (each) 4 Q.H. For chemistry majors. The course offers original exper- imental work under the direction of a staff member Participation may begin in the middler year and will normally continue through the senior year A minimum of a two-quarter commitment is required for participa- tion. Approval of the administrating committee is required. CHM 1810 Advanced Chemical Synthesis 3 Q.H.* Special projects in the synthesis of organic and/or inorganic compounds. CHM 1 820 Advanced Chemical Measurements 3 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1393 and CHM 1431) Laboratory problems in analytical and/or physical chemistry are examined. CHM 1 830 Special Topics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1381) CHM 1840, CHM 1841, CHM 1842, CHM 1843 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 183 Holmes. INT 1 580 Physical Chemistry with Biological Applications 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1236) This course examines physiochemical principles as they apply to biological processes. Topics include chemical equilibria, reaction kinetics, basic ther- modynamics, oxidation-reduction reactions, bioener- getics, macromolecules in solution, and transport. The approach is quantitative, and problem solving as a tool for learning is emphasized. Basic assumptions and limitations underlying principles are explained; for the most part, however, rigorous derivations are avoided. Applications to basic experimental tech- niques in biochemistry are made by way of relevant biochemical examples. Lab fee required. 108 /Earth Sciences Earth Sciences Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are duplicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. Roman numerals at the end of course descriptions refer GEO 1119 Marine Resources 4 Q.H. The course provides a qualitative and quantitative survey of renewable and nonrenewable resources from the sea. Aspects covered include offshore oil and gas utilization, marine minerals, and tidal power; coastal zone recreational resources, including pol- luted beaches and artificial fishing reefs. GEO 1 1 20 Physical Oceanography 4 Q.H. The course provides a description of the physical properties and composition of sea water, waves, tides, and ocean currents. The course discusses how these properties are measured by oceanographers and how they influence the earth's environment and climate. GEO 1121 Biological Oceanography 4 Q.H.* Topics include the productivity of animal and plant life in the various zones of the ocean; the growing economic importance of the oceans as a source of food for the expanding world population. GEO 1 1 28 Geological Oceanography 4 Q.H. In this course the form of the ocean basins and their margins is related to the major processes forming them. Emphasis is placed on local landforms, includ- ing New England beaches, spits, barrier islands, and the continental shelf. GEO 1 1 40 Environmental Geology 4 Q.H. The course discusses how geologic processes acting at the earth's surface interact with the human envi- ronment. Topics include river and ocean flooding, coastal erosion, landslides, land-use planning, and waste disposal. GE0 1141 Geological Hazards and Resources 4Q.H. The course discusses how geologic processes origi- nating deep inside the earth interact with the human environment. Topics include global crystal movements, volcanic and earthquake hazards, mineral resources, coal and oil, geothermal energy, resource manage- ment, and disposal of radioactive wastes. GEO 1 1 54 Planetary Astronomy 4 Q.H. This course focuses on astronomy of the solar system. Topics include description of the planets and other objects with discussion of how our understanding has evolved from the days of naked-eye observation to the present era of interplanetary probes. GEO 1 1 56 Observational Astronomy 5 Q.H. An introduction to systematic observation of the night sky, this course emphasizes observation and descrip- tion of the patterns and motions of celestial bodies as seen with the unaided eye. Nightly viewing sessions required; supplemented by training sessions in the planetarium. *Lab fee required. to Core Curriculum categories listed on pages 1 -2. GEO 1210 North America and the Ice Age 4Q.H. This course focuses on description and history of ice-sheets that have advanced and retreated across the northern U.S.A. and Canada during the last three million years. Topics include evidence of past climatic change and predictions of future change, fluctuating sea levels, and the impact of these changes on man and the environment. GEO 1212 Physical Geology 4 Q.H. The course offers a systematic study of the materials comprising the earth. Topics emphasized include the processes by which rock is formed, transported, altered, and destroyed, as well as the nature and development of landscape. (II) GEO 1213 Physical Geology Laboratory 1 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1212; may be taken concurrently) Optional laboratory for GEO 1212, Physical Geology. Laboratory exercises pertain to mineral and rock identification and topographic and geologic map inter- pretation. Required for geology majors. GEO 1 222 Historical Geology 4 Q.H. The physical and biological history of the earth is traced through geologic time. Major topics are the origin and evolution of life, mountain building, and continental drift. (II) GEO 1223 Historical Geology Laboratory 1 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1222; may be taken concurrently) Course offers a study of fossil representatives of major invertebrate phyla, application of fossils to studies of rock sequences, interpretation of geologic history from geologic maps and sedimentary rocks. GEO 1250 Advanced General Geology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1212 and GEO 1222) The course offers an introduction to new and advanced concepts, theories, and hypotheses in geology. Stu- dents participate actively in discussions, research papers, and individual projects. GEO 1305 Rock Identification Laboratory 1 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1310; may be taken concurrently) The course provides self-paced laboratory exercises in the identification and classification of common rocks. GEO 1310 Descriptive Mineralogy 5 Q.H. (Prereq. Two quarters of chemistry) The course provides a study of mineralogy, including crystallography and physical, chemical, and descriptive mineralogy of the common rock-forming minerals. GEO 1 31 1 Optical Crystallography 5 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1310) The theory and the practical methods of optical crys- Earth Sciences / 1 09 tallography are studied, including the basic techniques for determining the optical constants of crystals using the polarizing microscope and immersion media. GEO 1312 Petrography 5 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1311) Topics include description and identification of rocks and rock-forming minerals using thin-sections and the petrographic microscope; discussion of textural and mineralogic relationships. GEO 1 320 Field Geology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1212) The course focuses on field techniques as a working guide for the approach, pursuit, and solution of geologic problems. Among the techniques considered are geologic map construction, stratigraphic section measurement, and field rock description. The labora- tory consists of field research at a quarry, readout, or other geologic exposure. GEO 1 41 2 Geochemistry 4 Q.H. (Prereq. One year of chemistry) The course offers an evaluation of chemical proc- esses important in the various geologic environments and their effects on the development of the lithosphere. GEO 1414 Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology ♦ 5 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1312) The course covers the origin apd distribution of igneous and metamorphic rocks as interpreted from their chemistry, mineralogy, and field relationships. Laboratory includes field and petrographic analysis of rock suites. GEO 1416 Economic Geology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Dept. approval) The course focuses on the genesis, associations, and occurrence of the major ore minerals, illustrated by studies of selected ore bodies of various types throughout the world. GEO 1418 Structural Geology 5 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1212 and GEO 1213) Description and origin of large- and small-scale rock structures with emphasis on interpretation of the mechanics of deformation. Field and laboratory analyses of structural problems using maps, models, and rock specimens. GEO 1 420 Geophysics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PHY 1231) This course offers a study of basic techniques of reflection and refraction seismology, gravity, aero- magnetic, and heat-flow techniques and the informa- tion they provide on the structure, composition, and dynamics of the earth's interior Emphasis is placed on the application of these techniques to the search for economic minerals in the earth's crust. GEO 1 424 Stratigraphy 5 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1 222) Course offers study of paleoenvironments and sed- imentary-basin analysis based on sedimentary struc- tures, stratigraphic sequences, and fossils. Emphasis is on use of geologic sections, drill-cores, and well- logs. Laboratory interpretation of sedimentary rock suites, maps, and sections. GEO 1428 Invertebrate Paleontology 5 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1222) Survey of the major invertebrate phyla preserved in the fossil record. Micro- and macro-evolutionary prin- ciples are discussed with consideration of adaptive and functional morphology and the role of paleo- environments. Laboratory involves description and classification of fossil invertebrates. GEO 1430 Sedimentation and Sedimentary Environments 5 Q.H. The course offers a description of the physical processes of sedimentation and their role in the inter- pretation of modern and ancient sedimentary envi- ronments. Laboratory concentrates on the interpre- tation and description of the physical and textural properties of sediments and sedimentary rocks. GEO 1 432 Sedimentary Petrology 5 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1311) Topics include origin, classification, and petrography of the major groups of sedimentary rocks. Discussion of the environments of deposition of the nonclastic rocks. Laboratory concentrates on thin-section study of sedimentary rocks. GEO 1 434 Coastal Processes 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1212) The course examines the effect of coastal marine processes and the resultant coastal responses. Topics include the dynamics of waves and currents and the associated erosion, transportation, and deposition of sediment, forming beaches, barrier islands, and cliffed structures. GEO 1 436 Marine Geology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1212) The balance between major sedimentary and tectonic forces in ocean basins and margins is compared to resulting ocean form. Topics include origin of conti- nental shelves, shelf sedimentation and transport, deep-sea processes and sediments. Resource devel- opment of OCS oil, sand and gravel, and manganese nodules is evaluated. GEO 1 440 Geomorphology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1212) The course focuses on the origin and evolution of landscape features by processes operating at or near the earth's surface. GEO 1444 Glacial and Pleistocene Geology 4Q.H. (Prereq. GEO 1222) The course covers the processes of ice movement and the characteristics and distribution of erosional and depositional structures associated with past and present glaciers; introduction to Pleistocene chron- ology and correlations. GEO 1450 Geology Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Major in geology or senior status) 110 /Economics The course offers in-depth study, on an individual or small-group basis, of a selected geologic topic. Both oral and written presentations are required. GEO 1816, GEO 1817 Undergraduate Research (each) 4 Q.H. The course offers independent research on a selected topic under the direct supervision of a faculty member. Open only to juniors and seniors majoring in geology, with the recommendation of the supervising faculty member and of the department. GEO 1820, GEO 1821 Directed Study (each) 4 Q.H. The course offers independent study of a specific topic not normally contained in the regular course offerings, but within the area of competence of a faculty member Open to all students with the rec- ommendation of a faculty member and departmental approval. GEO 1824, GEO 1825 Special Studies (each) 1 Q.H. The course offers an independent study of a specific topic. Open to all students with the recommendation of a faculty member and departmental approval. GEO 1830, GEO 1831, GEO 1832, GEO 1833 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 183 Holmes. INT 1 21 5 Into the Ocean World 4 Q.H. This course isa comprehensive interdisciplinary intro- duction to the oceans. The seas' complexity and the far-reaching consequences of our interactions with them demand an awareness of the many facets of marine study The teaching team consists of specialists in the sciences, social sciences, humanities, and arts, each with an interest in marine issues and a commit- ment to bridging the gaps among disciplines. The course themes are as broad as the oceans, but when appropriate, we will focus on Boston harbor, a first step into the ocean world for those of us in this area. INT 1 21 6 A History of Seafaring 4 Q.H. This course surveys maritime transportation, trade, travel, exploration, and warfare from approximately 3500 B.C. to the end of the wooden boat era in the late nineteenth century. Prior to the widespread applica- tion of steam power on land and sea in the nineteenth century, ships were the fastest, safest, and most eco- nomical means of transporting large cargoes over long distances. Literary and art history sources are also introduced, along with several films on maritime archaeology INT 1 21 7 Water, Water 4 Q.H. This course is an interdisciplinary introduction to our most precious resource. Water has affected our bodies, our planet, our history and our culture. How we manage it will shape our future. Because of increasing demand, waste, and pollution, we are depleting - and risk destroying - the limited supply of usable fresh water This course will look at water through scientific, historical, and cultural viewpoints, and survey con- temporary water problems in all their dimensions - political, economic, and technological. (VI) Economics Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are du plicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. Roman numerals at the end of course descriptions refer to Core Curriculum categories listed on pages 1-2. Unless otherwise stated, there are no prerequisites for advanced economics courses. Where prerequisites are indicated, exceptions may be granted with the instructor's permission. ECN 1 1 05 Principles of Macroeconomics 4Q.H. This course introduces students to macroeconomic analysis, which deals with the functioning of the overall economy Topics include review of national income concepts; national income determination, fluctuation, and growth; role of the banking system and the Federal Reserve System; government expenditures and tax- ation; international trade; balance of international payments. (II) ECN 1 1 06 Principles of Microeconomics 4 Q.H. The course examines the role of the market pricing system of demand and supply in determining the allocation of resources to competing uses, and why this system may not function adequately in certain cases. Study includes the application of economic principles to private and public problems. ECN 1115 Principles of Macroeconomics 4 Q.H. The course offers an introduction to macroeconomic analysis. Topics include the flow of national income: economic growth and fluctuation; the role of money and banking; monetary and fiscal policies. Emphasis is on assisting students in developing conceptual tools for use in the analysis of economic problems facing modern society. (II) ECN 1116 Principles of Microeconomics 4 Q.H. The course focuses on development of basic theory of demand, supply and market price. Applications to selected microeconomic problems such as basic monopoly and competition, and other issues that Economics/ 111 relate to the role of the pricing system in resource allocation and income distribution. (II) ECN 1 1 30 Medical Economics 4 Q.H. Examination and discussion of health-care trends in the United States and selected foreign countries; causes of the rising costs of medical care; the particu- lar nature of the demand for health care services; the demand for paramedical personnel; Certificate of Need committees; health maintenance organizations; medical malpractice; increases in life expectancy and its impact on society; third party payers; and the true cost of medical education. ECN 11 40 Economics of Crime 4 Q.H. Economic analysis of crime and the criminal justice system. Topics include theoretical and empirical analysis of the economic causes of criminal behavior; the social costs of crime and its prevention, and design of enforcement policies. ECN 1150 Economics of World Energy and Primary Resources 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05/1 1 1 5 or 1 1 06/1 1 1 6) Investigation of economic, political, and historical backgrounds of the energy and other resources problems. Future impact of primary resources lim- itations on United States and world economics are analyzed. Also included are feasibility studies of resource substitution. ECN 1 1 55 Superpower Economics 4 Q.H. This course offers an analysis of the relative economic structure and strength of the United States, the Soviet Union, Japan, the Common Market, and China, as well as the economic relations among these powers. The course also examines the impact of these relations on the domestic economies of the superpowers and of the developing nations of the world. ECN 1 1 70 Economic Issues In Minority Communities 4 Q.H. Analysis of the economic conditions of non-white minorities within the U.S. economy Historical and cultural materials will be included, as well as specific theoretical and empirical analysis of the economic problems confronting minority communities. ECN 1215 Macroeconomic Theory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05, ECN 1 1 1 5, or equiv) Investigation of the conceptual and empirical prob- lems of creating and using national accounts; price index problems; conceptual and empirical evaluation of consumption and investment functions and their policy implications; multiplier and accelerator models; a brief history of recent cyclical fluctuations. Theories of inflation, unemployment and growth are analyzed in the light of recent economic history ECN 1216 Microeconomic Theory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 106, ECN 1 1 16, or equiv) Detailed study of supply-and-demand analysis, var- ious elasticity concepts and applications, theory of consumer demand, theory of production, and deriva- tion of cost curves. Detailed analyses of pricing and output behavior in the several market structures with their welfare implications; the pricing of resources. ECN 1 250 Statistics I 4 Q.H. Topics includeelementarysettheory, basic probability, measurement and presentation of economic statis- tics, descriptive statistics, basic estimation techniques, testing statistical hypotheses, and sampling problems. ECN 1 251 Statistics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1250) Topics include analysis of variance, correlation and linear regression analysis, multivariate regression analysis, and Bayesian decision making. ECN 1253 Accounting Data for Social Scientists 4Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 1 5 and ECN 1 11 6, or ECN 1 1 05 and ECN 1 106 or permission of instructor) A familiarization for non-accountants with the basic techniques and procedures of private and public accounting. Topics include developing and interpreting income statements and balance sheets, asset turnover, key accounting ratios, capital budgeting, cost flow analysis, and present-value determinations. The course also compares and contrasts the treatment of macro- and micro-accounting data. ECN 1310 Labor Economics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 06/1 1 1 6 or 1 1 05/1 115) Economic analysis of the labor market and the labor force. Topics include the supply, development and efficient use of human resources; wage determination; the changing occupational and industrial structure; causes, nature and incidence of unemployment; the economic impact of unions, related labor market insti- tutions and relevant public policies. ECN 1311 Employment and Training Programs and Policies 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1105/1115) Nature and objectives of employment and training programs; nature and causes of human resource problems; current and previous efforts to solve human resource problems in the U.S.; planning of human resource programs; economic evaluation of employ- ment and training programs. ECN 1312 Women in the Labor Market 4 Q.H. (Prereq. 1106/1116) Economic analysis of the labor market position of women in the context of the changing economic structure and labor market institutions. Analysis of female labor force participation differences; male- female differentials in earnings and unemployment; occupational concentration, occupational segregation, and theories and evidence of sex discrimination; new opportunities for women. ECN 1313 Local Labor Market Analysis and Human Resource Planning 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 1 5 and ECN 1 1 1 6, or ECN 1 1 05 and ECN 1106; ECN 1310 strongly recommended) Introduction to methods and data sources for ana- lyzing conditions in regional, state, and local labor 112 /Economics markets. The primary aim is to determine the extent, nature, and causes of human resource problems and to utilize that information in planning and designing appropriate employment and training strategies. ECN 1314 Economics of Education and Human Capital 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 1 5 and ECN 1 1 1 6, or ECN 1 1 05 and ECN 1 106; ECN 131 1 strongly recommended) Theoretical and empirical treatment of economic issues related to education and job training, including formal education (pre-school through post-second- ary), vocational education, on-the-job training, and government-sponsored employment and training programs. Emphasis is on follow-up studies, cost- effectiveness analysis, and benefit-cost analysis for determining the effectiveness of education and training investments from a private and social standpoint. ECN 1315 Income Inequalities and Discrimination 4Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 06/1 1 1 6 or 1 1 05/1 1 1 5) Economic analysis of income inequalities, poverty and discrimination. Examination of the causes of income inequality and the nature, causes and ef- fects of poverty; economics of racial discrimination; public welfare system and other income maintenance schemes. ECN 1320 Urban Economics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1106/1116) Study of urban grov\rth and development, intermetro- politan location of business firms, regional shifts in economic activity, intra-metropolitan location of firms and households, and land use patterns. ECN 1321 Urban Economic Problems and Policies 4Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1106/1116) SequaltoECN 1320. Economic analysis of selected urban problems such as housing, poverty, transportation, education, health, crime, and the urban environment. Discussion of public policies relating to such problems. ECN 1322 Economics of Transportation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1106/1116) Transportation and land-use patterns; externalities; social costs and social benefits of various modes of transportation, ownership, regulations, and financing of various modes of transportation; economics of new technology in transportation. ECN 1323 Economics of the Quality of Urban Environment and Control 4 Q.H. Economic analysis of air, water, thermal, and noise pollution. Evaluation of alternative public policies for dealing with environmental problems. ECN 1330 Development Economics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05/1 1 1 5 or 1 1 06/1 1 1 6) Prospects for economic growth and development in poor nations as indicated by economic analysis and historical experience; social, cultural, and institutional determinants of growth; analysis of agriculture and development, the role of technological change, popu- lati^on; and foreign trade. (V) ECN 1331 American Economic Development 4Q.H. Economic development of the United States from the colonial period to the present, historical changes in available factors, economic institutions and technolo- gies, special attention to preconditions of industrial- ism; the American Industrial Revolution, its spread and socio-economic consequences; the Great De- pression and the subsequent rise of mixed economy and welfare state; U.S. adjustments to postwar econ- omic changes. ECN 1332 Economic History of Less Developed Countries 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05/1 1 1 5 and 1 1 06/1 1 1 6) The problems of initiating and sustaining economic development in selected Third World countries during the last two hundred years. Country-specific case studies cover the role of traditional economic struc- tures, different development goals and strategies, state policies, and international economic relations. ECN 1333 European Economic Development 4Q.H. Economicinheritanceofthenineteenth-centurydevel- opment of capitalism and laissez-faire; the aftermath of the Industrial Revolution, European overseas expan- sion, the twentieth century the world wars, the disso- lution of empires, American economic conquest and European integration, the future of less developed areas in southern Europe; environmental impact of industrialism and the implications of technological society. (Ill) ECN 1334 Comparative Economics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05/1 1 1 5, 1 1 06/1 1 1 6) Competing types of theoretical economic systems; analysis of organization and operation of currently existing types of communist, socialist, and capitalist economies; comparison and evaluation of economic behavior and performance of different economic systems. ECN 1335 International Economics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1115, ECN 1 1 1 6 or equiv) Introduction to the theory of international trade and payments; analysis of tariffs and commercial policy; the international monetary system; trade and payment issues in developed and less-developed countries. ECN 1 337 History of Economic Thought 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05/1 115/11 06/1 1 1 6) The evolution of Western economic thought. By studying several important schools in economics, the course examines the questions raised and analytical methods used by economists to study human behavior ECN 1340 Government Expenditures: Structure and Evaluation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 106, ECN 1 1 16, or equiv) Fiscal functions of government, fiscal institutions and politics, theory of social goods, public expenditure growth and structure, the federal budget expenditure evaluation and cost-benefit case studies, fiscal fed- eralism in theory and practice; and issues of public debt and deficit. Economics/ 113 ECN 1341 Financing of Government: Taxation and Debt 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 06, ECN 1 1 1 6, or equiv.) Principles of taxation; problems of tax structure and reform, at federal, state, and local levels; tax inci- dence; effects of taxation on economic efficiency and growtfi; negative income tax and social security finance; issues of public debt and deficit. ECN 1342 l\^oney and Banking 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 11 05, ECN 1 1 15, or equiv) A study of the nature and the functions of money, credit, and the role of financial organizations in the U.S. economy. The basic theories of banking, the money supply, monetary theory, and monetary policy will be emphasized. ECN 1345 Business Cycles and Inflation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05 or ECN 1 1 1 5; ECN 1 1 06 or ECN 1116; ECN 1215) A study of the theories of business cycles and inflation and an empirical application of these theories to current business cycle, inflation, and stagflation problems. ECN 1350 Introduction to Econometrics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05 or ECN 1115; ECN 1 1 06 or ECN 1116; and ECN 1251) Introduction to the methods of econometric analysis and forecasting. Coverage includes: ordinary least squares, piecewise regression, tests and corrections for serial correlation and heteroskedasticity, specifi- cation analysis, simultaneous equations systems, errors in variables, dynamic models and elementary forecasting. ECN 1351 Problems in Economic Research 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 05 or ECN 1115; ECN 1 1 06 or ECN 1116; ECN 1251) Examination of research methods utilized by prac- ticing economists. A discussion, from applied areas of economics, of typical problems, including choice of modeling framework; problems of data collection; review of estimation techniques; interpretation of results and development of static and dynamic adap- tive policy models. ECN 1353 Introduction to Mathematics for Economists 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 1 5 or ECN 1 1 05; ECN 1 1 1 6 or ECN 1106) Basic tools of mathematics, matrix algebra, differ- ential and integral calculus and classical optimization are studied with special reference to their application in economics. ECN 1 354 Mathematics for Economists 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1353 or permission of instructor) For economics, mathematics, business, and engi- neering students interested in a broad coverage of economic analysis using mathematical techniques. Static and dynamic models of micro- and macroeco- nomics are studied using differential and difference equations, mathematical programming and game theory ECN 1360 Managerial Economics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 1 1 6 or ECN 1 1 06) Application of economic principles and theory, by the use of case studies, to the solution of decision-making problems in such areas as demand forecasting, price policies, estimation and control of costs, financing of capital investments, and responses to government taxation and regulation policies. ECN 1361 Social Control of Economic Activities 4Q.H. Development of the government's role in economic activities, examining the relation between the gov- ernment and industry labor, agriculture, public util- ities, and consumers. The course will trace the changing role of the government from a laissez-faire policy to one of direct intervention in the economy. Covers such topics as wage and price control, envi- ronment and antipollution policies, consumer protec- tion, and conglomerate mergers. ECN 1362 Industrial Organisation and Public Policy 4Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 21 6/1 1 06/1 1 1 6) An analytic framework and empirical study of how the structure of industrial organization and con- duct of sellers and buyers affects economic perfor- mance and welfare. Industrial examples and case studies included. An examination of antitrust as a public policy designed to promote better market performances. ECN 1401 Advanced Economic Theory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1216 and ECN 1215) Advanced theoretical treatment of selected topics in micro- and macroeconomics. Recommended for students planning to take graduate economics. ECN 1490, ECN 1491 Directed Study (each) 4 Q.H. Independent work under the direction of a faculty member of the department on a chosen topic. Limited to qualified seniors majoring in economics with approval of the department chairperson. These courses should not be substituted for any required Economics courses for a BA or a BS in Economics. Maximum of 8 QH of Directed Study per degree. May be taken only with the approval of the department chairperson. ECN 1492 Senior Economic Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1216 and ECN 1215) Coordinating and applying economic concepts, meth- odology and data to contemporary issues and prob- lems of broad social, economic, and philosophical importance. Senior economic majors only ECN 1495, ECN 1496, ECN 1497, ECN 1498 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 183 Holmes. INT 1 21 7 Water, Water 4 Q.H. This course is an interdisciplinary introduction to our most precious resource. Water has affected our bodies, our planet, our history, and our culture. How we 114 /English manage it will shape our future. Because of increasing demand, waste, and pollution, we are depleting — and risk destroying - the limited supply of usable fresh water This course will focus on water through scientif- ic, historical, and cultural viewpoints, and survey con- temporary water problems in all their dimensions - political, economic, and technological. (VI) English . Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are duplicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. Roman numerals at the end of course descriptions refer to Core Curriculum categories listed on pages 1-2. Unless otherwise .indicated, the prerequisite for upperclass courses is a Freshman English sequence. For students in the Basic Colleges this means ENG 1110 and ENG 1111; ENG 1013, ENG 1014, and ENG 1111; ENG 1110, ENG 1014 and ENG 1111. For the College of Engineering, ENG 1111, and ENG 1113. For Lincoln College, ENG 1110, ENG 1111, and ENG 1114; ENG 1110, ENG 1014, ENG 1111, and ENG 1114; or ENG 1013, ENG 1014, ENG 1111, and ENG 1114. And for international students, ENG 1005 and ENG 1006. ENG 1001 Intensive English as a Second Language Reviews English grammar to help non-native speakers to develop listening, speaking, reading, writing, and studying skills. Language laboratory and small-group tutorials. ENG 1004 Fundamentals of English for Non-native Speakers 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Special placement— For non-native speakers whose performance or scores indicate that their writing skills are not yet up to those required for ENG 1 005.) Provides intensive practice in composition with accent on accurate, intelligible writing and paragraphs organ- ized around single, well-supported ideas. Encourages sentence-combining and vocabulary development, and gives special attention to individual writing needs. Includes prose readings, class discussion, and selec- tive review of grammar ENG 1005 English for international Students I 4Q.H. (Prereq. ENG 1004 or special placement) Emphasizes the development of skills needed in writing clear, expository prose essays. Requires the regular writing and rewriting of essays of increasing length and complexity. Focuses on appropriate prose read- ings for discussion and analysis, and introduces tech- niques preparatory to research writing. ENG 1006 English for International Students II 4Q.H. (Prereq. ENG 1005 or equiv) Introduces the study of literature through close reading and discussion of fiction, nonfiction, and poetry Advances development of rhetorical techniques by requiring frequent essays written in relation to the readings and rewritten to improve content, organiza- tion, and diction. Provides guided experience with using outside sources and library materials for writing a term paper ENG 1 01 3 Fundamentals of English I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Special placement) Offers an introduction to principles of the writing process. Emphasizes individualized assistance in gen- erating and developing ideas, drafting, revising, and organizing; and the conventions of written English. ENG 1014 Fundamentals of English II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ENG 1 01 3 or ENG 1110) Continues instruction in writing, emphasizing expo- sition, argument, and academic essay writing, as well as the conventions of English usage, punctuation and syntax. Individualized assistance in invention, drafting, revision, and editing. ENG 1110 Freshman English I 4 Q.H. Focuses on the individual student's writing skills. Includes application of important principles of com- posing, logic and rhetoric to exposition and argumen- tation. Reviews of sentence structure, punctuation and paragraphing, analyzes essay forms and prob- lems. Students receiving a grade of S must take ENG 1014. ENG 1111 Freshman English II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ENG 1 1 1 0 or ENG 1014) Continues instruction in writing, with emphasis on expository methods of defining, describing, analyzing, persuading, and composing the research paper Students write lengthy critical essays based on con- sideration of primary and secondary materials. Selections of poems, stories, and plays provide an introduction to literature and are the subject matter for discussion of writing technique and written assign- ments. ENG 1111 follows ENG 1110 and is required of all freshmen in the University. ENG 1113 Great Themes in Literature 4 Q.H. Explores a theme in literature through a number of illustrative works from the past and the present. Develops techniques of research and documentation. English/ 115 ENG 1114 Freshman Technical Writing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ENG 1110, ENG 1111) Provides Bachelor of Engineering Technology students with the how-to's of writing technical description, graphics, instruction sets, proposals and reports. Includes oral presentations. ENG 1115 Poetry 4 Q.H. Involves exercise in close reading of selected poems, study of critical terms, and practice in different critical approaches to poetry; examines techniques for reading a variety of poetic texts. (II) ENG 1116 Rction 4 Q.H. Involves reading of selected novels and short stories, study of critical terms, practice in different critical approaches to fiction. (II) ENG 1117 Drama 4 Q.H. Involves extensive exercise in reading of selected plays, study of critical terms, practice in different critical approaches to drama. (II) ENG 1118 Introduction to Language and Linguistics 4 Q.H. Introduces students to a new way of thinking about language. Normally, using language is as unconscious an activity as walking or chewing gum. But if we ask the right questions, we can uncover much of our unconscious linguistic knowledge: about sentence structure (syntax), meaning (semantics), word forms (morphology), and speech sounds (phonology). Understanding these will lead us to examine other issues related to language: the Black English/Standard English debate, women's and men's language, "talk- ing" chimpanzees, "talking" computers, and the nature/nurture controversy. (II) ENG 1119 History of the English Language 4 Q.H. Studies the development of modern English from Anglo-Saxon beginnings; effects of Scandinavian and Norman invasions; dialect geography; evolutionary changes, word formation and borrowing; origins of writing and problems of spelling. Readings include both formal and informal writings, literary selections, wills, journals, and private and public letters. ENG 1 1 20 Survey of English Literature I 4 Q.H. Surveys the major British writers and major literary forms and works from the Middle Ages to the end of the eighteenth century. Works by such writers as Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton, Pope, and Swift. ENG 1121 Survey of English Literature II 4 Q.H. Surveys the major British writers and major literary movements from the romantic period through the Victorian and Modern periods to the present moment. Works by such writers as Wordsworth, Coleridge, Keats, Browning, Tennyson, Yeats, Lawrence, Lessing, and Beckett. ENG 1123 Survey of American Literature I 4 Q.H. Surveys the major American writers and major literary forms and works from the colonial period to the Civil War Works by such writers as Bradstreet, Taylor, Cooper, Poe, Havrthorne, Melville, and Emerson. ENG 1 124 Survey of American Literature II 4Q.H. Surveys the major American writers and major literary forms and works from the Civil War to the mid-twentieth century Works by such writers as Whitman, Dickinson, Twain, James, Hemingway Fitzgerald, Faulkner and Wright. ENG 1 1 25 Technical Writing I 4 Q.H. Trains writers in the clear, unambiguous style of tech- nical writing. Students practice these skills by writing technical proposals, process descriptions, feasibility and program reports, and operators' manuals. Includes oral presentations. ENG 1126 Backgrounds in English and American Literature 4 Q.H. Examines translation of Greek, Roman, and biblical literature as background for literary study. Emphasis on the development of myth, genre, and theme. Readings include, among others. Homer, Virgil, Ovid, the most influential parts of the Bible, and Dante. ENG 1 275 Grammar for Journalists 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Journalism majors only) Reviews the mechanics of newspaper and magazine prose. Emphasizes grammatical forms, punctuation, spelling, effective structures, and conventional usage. ENG 1276 Science Fiction 4 Q.H. Traces the development of various SF themes and approaches, from early man-machine love-hate rela- tionships to alien close encounters of all kinds. From Frankenstein to most recent titles. Major SF films. Lab fee. ENG 1 277 Topics in Science Fiction 4 Q.H. Focuses on a single writer or group of writers (Wells or writers of contemporary American science fiction); a theme (women in science fiction or the future city); or a unifying idea (time travel or utopia/dystopia). ENG 1 278 Modern Bestseller 4 Q.H. Exploresthefunction of quest, romance,andadventure in a selection of contemporary bestselling fiction. ENG 1 279 The Modern Novel 4 Q.H. Studies the major British and American novelists of the twentieth century. Considers theme and form in such authors as Lawrence, Woolf, Fitzgerald, Ellison, Doctorow, and Didion. ENG 1 280 Modern Drama 4 Q.H. Studies the development of drama from realism to surrealism, from Ibsen to Beckett. ENG 1 281 The Modern Short Story 4 Q.H. Studies t>ie shortstory from Poe to the present, includ- ing such writers as Joyce and Kafka, Hemingway and Flannery O'Connor. ENG 1283 Contemporary Rction 4 Q.H. Examines British and American writers from 1945 to the present, including such figures as Lessing, Burgess, Pynchon and Barth. Emphasizes experi- mental and modernist authors. 116 /English ENG 1284 Business Tradition in Literature 4Q.H. Examines the image of the business world as pre- sented in novels and plays, biographies and auto- biographies. Analyzes the cultural and historical contexts as well as the motives of the characters in society. ENG 1 285 Literature and the Law 4 Q.H. Investigates the problems of crime and justice as reflected in literature, from ancient to contemporary works. The secondary focus is the law itself as literature, including explorations of case files and other legal material. The readings encourage students to discover the changing nature of the criminals- heroes or victims or villains— and to deal with the social, psychological and political facts that define him or her ENG 1286 Literature and Politics 4 Q.H. Explores how authors from Sophocles to Mailer rep- resent the religious, moral, and ethical conflicts arising from the acquisition, use, and misuse of political power. The literature falls into several categories: Utopian, which establishes a conflict between the ideal and the real; satirical, which threatens a power structure by exposing it to scorn; analytic, which describes the rise to and fall from power of individu- als, parties, or states; and investigative, which takes the reader inside a power elite to observe its inner operations. Examines the difference between the ideal of government and its reality. ENG 1 287 The Literature of Science 4 Q.H. Examines historically the discovery methods and models of literature and science, exploring one or more of the following areas: the relationship of the methods and models of literature and science; the treatment of scientific methods and models in literature; the use of literary devices, techniques, and traditions in scientific texts. Readings will be drawn from histori- cally significant scientific texts, literary texts, or some combination of these. ENG 1 288 Rim and Text 4 Q.H.* Studies either the similarities and differences between literary texts and film versions of those texts or the interrelations between film and literature as means of cultural expression during a specific historical period. For example, the course might study Doctorow's Book of Daniel in relation to the film version, Daniel, or it might study books and movies of a period like the sixties that reflect the spirit of the era (Catch-22, The Graduate). Lab fee. ENG 1 289 Shakespeare on Rim 4 Q.H.* Examines the various treatments of Shakespeare's plays on film. Treats the technical aspects of film and how these are used by directors to transfer Shake- speare's plays from the stage to the screen. Lab fee. ENG 1 290 Topics in Rim 4 Q.H.* Studies a theme or problem (film and society, film and politics), a period in film history (American film from 1945 to the present), a film genre (the western, film noire), or a film director (Hitchcock, Coppola). Lab fee. ENG 1 291 Popular Culture 4 Q.H. Surveys the development of popular culture in the United States as the living culture that arose in response to the development of a leisure-time market and the technology to reach it. Focuses on the mass media, surveyed chronologically for evidence of trends arising from changes in popular taste and technology Among the media to be discussed are popular literature, radio, and television. ENG 1293 Topics in Popular Culture 4 Q.H. Focuses on such topics as the soap opera, the western, and the police story; on a popular culture activity; or on a popular culture perspective. ENG 1 300 Topics in Ration 4 Q.H. Studies a particular kind of fiction, such as the novella; a problem in fiction, such as the role of the narrator; a particular group of fiction writers; or a theme in fiction. ENG 1301 Topics in Drama 4 Q.H. Studies a particular kind of drama, a particular group of dramatists, or a theme in drama. ENG 1 302 Topics in Poetry 4 Q.H. Studies a sub-genre of poetry such as the sonnet or the dramatic monologue; a problem in poetry; a par- ticular group of poets; or a theme in poetry. ENG 1307 Approaches to Literature 4 Q.H. Examines ancient and modern theories of literature. Selections from the criticism of Plato, Aristotle and the Romantics, as well as from Marxist, Freudian, Jungian, and formalist theories. ENG 1308 Myth and Archetype in Literature 4Q.H. Studies twentieth-century theories of myth and ar- chetype as they have influenced our understanding and analysis of works of literature. ENG 1309 Topics in Literary Criticism 4 Q.H. Studies a specific problem method or school of criti- cism, such as structuralism, mythopoeic, or archetypal criticism. ENG 1350 Intermediate Writing 4 Q.H. Provides writing instruction for students who wish to improve their writing skills; opportunity for students to develop their particular interests in subject matter and form. ENG 1 351 Creative Writing 4 Q.H. Gives the developing writer an opportunity to practice various forms of writing both poetry ^nd prose. Features in-class discussion of student work. ENG 1 352 Advanced Writing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ENG 1350 or permission of instructor) Offers an opportunity for experienced writers to hone their skills, and develop their interests in different forms and subjects. Lab fee required. English/ 117 ENG 1 357 Poetry Workshop 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ENG 1351 or permission of instructor) Advanced worlasic behavioral research. After students master relevant basic research literature, they are expected to review and evaluate existing instructional programs in light of the underlying behavioral principles. Programs are selected from those useful in the normal and special education classrooms, i.e.. complex academic subject matter and individual problem areas. PSY 1351 Neuropsychology I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1112) This is an introduction to the relation between brain function and human behavior Topics include how nerve cells function individually and work together both in small networks and in the nervous system; the structure of the nervous system ; how our sense organs provide the nervous system with information about the outside world; how the brain controls movement; and how psychological concepts such as perception and learning may relate to brain activity PSY 1 352 Neuropsychology II 4 aH. (Prereq. PSY 1351) A continuation of PSY 1351 in which the relation between brain function and more complex behavior is examined. Topics include the multiple kinds of sensory information and the neuronal and hormonal control systems involved in eating, drinking, sexual and repro- ductive behavior; how brain activity is related to emotion, sleep, wakefulness, and memory; disorders of behavior and of the brain. PSY 1353 Comparative Psychology and Ethology 4Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1 1 1 2 or permission of instructor) This introductory- 1 eve I course in animal behavior surveys a wide range of species (reptiles, birds, fish, and mammals, including humans) to find similarities and differences in the behavioral processes and phys- iological mechanisms by which individual organisms and species adapt to their environments. The first section of the course focuses on adaptive specializa- tions exhibited by animals in learning about their environments during early development and as adults. The second section examines problems of social organizations at the individual level: how animals com- municate with each other and transmit "cultural" skills; mechanisms underlying cohesion and dispersal (e.g., reproduction and aggression) ; and the adaptive advan- tages of being social or asocial. The final section provides students with an unusual opportunity to apply concepts and exp>erimental methods they have learned by actually doing a short field study of animal behavior at The Boston Zoological Park. PSY 1354 Functional Neuroanatomy 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1 1 1 2) Aimed primarily at the study of the human nervous system, this course focuses on study of the cellular structure of the nervous system, including a cell's organelles, followed by a short study of the embryo- logical development of the nervous system. System- atic study of the nervous system beginning in the spinal cord and ending in the cerebral cortex with primary emphasis on fiber connections. A continuous attempt to correlate structure with behavioral activity. PSY 1361 Introduction to Phonetics 4 Q.H. The course offers an introduction to the nature of the speech signal from articulatory, perceptual, and acoustic points of view. Topics include sound meas- urement sound classes, and a survey and compari- son of speech sounds used in languages in the world. Stress, tone, and intonation. Phonetic classification and transcription of speech as practical tools for students of languages, linguistics, and speech and hearing science. PSY 1 362 Child Language 4 aH. (Prereq. PSY 1262, linguistics, or permission of instructor) The course provides a study of the manner in which language develops in children. PSY 1363 Linguistics of American Sign Language 4Q.H. (Prereq. ASL 1 101 or permission of instructor) Offers students an introduction to basic issues in linguistics through examination of the structural prop- erties of American Sign Language and its comparison with other languages having similar properties. Topics to be covered include phonology (formational proper- ties of signs), morphology (word formation rules, derivation, and inflection; complex verbs, classifiers, verb modulations), semantics (the meaning structure Psychology / 1 65 of signs), syntax (the structure of the ASL sentence), and discourse and narrative structure (the structure of ASL utterances in terms of old versus new informa- tion and the structure of ASL narratives). PSY 1364 Cognition 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1 262) Continuation of PSY 1 262, focusing on cognition. This course emphasizes the analysis of perception, mem- ory, and learning within an information-processing framework. Also considered are selected topics in cognitive development. PSY 1365 Language and the Brain 4 Q.H. Linguistic behavior from a neuropsychological view- point. Models of how the nervous system, and the brain in particular, controls the production, perception, and internal manipulation of language. Localization of cerebral functions and hemispheric lateralization. Experimental and clinical evidence for functional models. Aphasia and other language pathologies. Schizophrenic language. Evidence from "slips of the tongue." The bilingual brain. Comparisons of spjeech, sign language, and writing systems. Interpretation and translation. PSY 1 373 Abnormal Psychology I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1272 or PSY 1241) This course offers a study of the abnormal personality, including a historical survey and a discussion of such issues as anxiety, defense mechanisms, and the criteria of psychopathology Also examined are the symptomatology etiology and dynamics of neuroses (hysteria, phobia, obsession, and compulsion) and of psychosomatic disorders. Details of case histories will be discussed. PSY 1 374 Abnormal Psychology II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1373) The course offers a survey of psychological and somatic therapies. Symptomatology etiology dynam- ics, and therapy of psychoses (schizophrenia, para- noia, mania, depression). Sociopathic and organic disorders. PSY 1381 Sensation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1112; PSY 1 351 is highly recommended) The course provides an introduction to the study of our senses, wflth emphasis on hearing, touch, taste, and smell. Students have the opportunity to learn how we measure our sensory abilities. Rndings are closely related to the functioning of sensory organs-ears, skin, mouth, and nose-and of the sensory nervous system. PSY 1382 Perception 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1 1 1 2; PSY 1 351 is highly recommended) The course offers a study of our awareness of the world around us exemplified primarily by visual per- ception. Topics are explored in group discussions and include light, visual sensory mechanisms, color vision, illusions, consciousness, and dreams. PSY 1431 Behavior Therapies 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1 1 1 2) The course offers a study of successful projects that have provided effective remediation and rehabilitation in institutions for the mentally ill, the mentally retarded, and the developing human (schools). Directed Study- Honors Courses PSY 1890, PSY 1891, PSY 1892, PSY 1893, PSY 1 894 Directed Study (each) 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) This course offers independent work under the direction of the Psychology Department usually in a research project in one of the department laboratories. Faculty members normally require completion of advanced laboratory courses in the area of research interest, but this is a matter of individual discussion. Students interested in Directed Study should consult a departmental adviser PSY 1895, PSY 1896. PSY 1897. PSY 1898, PSY 1899 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 ah. For details contact the Honors Office, 183 Holmes. Laboratories PSY 1511 Experimental Design in Psychology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. PSY 1112 and PSY 1212) The course focuses on the experimental method in the design, execution, analysis, and reporting of psy- chological investigations of humans and animals. PSY 1531 Learning and Motivation Laboratory 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. PSY 1212 and PSY 1231) Through direct experience, students have the oppor- tunity to gain proficiency in laboratory analysis of behavior and in evaluating common generalizations about human behavior Students are expected to design and perform experiments in animal and human learning, memory, decision processes, concept for- mation, and other topics of individual interest PSY 1 532 Behavior Modification Laboratory 4 an.* (Prereq. PSY 1531 or PSY 1351. and permission of instructor) Students have the opportunity to participate in educa- tion and training of severely and profoundly retarded residents at the Walter E. Fernald State School. Learning theory principles are applied to teaching new skills and to treating inappropriate behavior. Students have the opportunity to wn-ite individual and group training programs, implement them in a class- room setting, and learn methods for evaluating pro- gram success. PSY 1551 Laboratory in Neuropsychology 4 an.* (Prereq. PSY 1651 or PSY 1351 or permission of instructor) Students will conduct three separate research projects of which the first two will use rats and the third will use *Lab fee required. 1 66 / Psychology humans as subjects. The three projects will investi- gate: 1 ) the effects of intracranial electrical stimulation of reward systems in the rat brain; 2) electroencepha- logram (EEG) records of different phases of sleep; and 3) lateralization of function between the left and right cerebral hemispheres. Students will carry out all the phases of experimentation including surgery, behavioral tests, frozen sections and staining of brain tissue in preparation for histological examination of electrode placements, and data analyses. This course will end with oral presentations by students of their research findings. PSY 1552 Sensory Physiology Laboratory 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. PSY1351) Experiments are performed to illustrate the physiolog- ical techniques in sensory psychology including elec- trical recordings of some activities that accompany visual, auditory, and cutaneous activity. PSY 1562 Laboratory in Psycholinguistics 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. PSY 121 1 and PSY 1262) The course provides students the opportunity to acquire first-hand experience in conducting research on problems in the psychology of language. Students are involved in all aspects of each experiment, includ- ing collecting and analyzing data and preparing reports. Classroom discussion focuses both on the particular experiments conducted and on the implica- tions of the experimental findings for broader issues in the psychology of language. PSY 1 564 Cognition Laboratory 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. PSY 1212 and PSY 1364) Experiments related to topics in PSY 1262 and PSY 1364. PSY 1 571 Laboratory in Social Psychology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. PSY 1212 and PSY 1271) The course provides an introduction to the methods of social-psychological research. The purpose of the course is to assist students in developing the ability to read published social research with a critical eye, to pose questions in a testable manner, to apply experi- mental methods to social research, and to express themselves in APA-journal style. PSY 1 572 Personality Laboratory 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. PSY 1212 end PSY 1272) The course provides an introduction to the methods and areas of personality research. Includes a discus- sion of problems of measurement, control, and inter- pretation. Representative published experiments will be examined critically Students are expected to design, collect data for, assess, and write up several experiments, including one original research project. PSY 1581 Sensation and Perception Laboratory 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. PSY 1212 and PSY 1381 or PSY 1382) Experiments involving precise measurements of both physical and psychophysical phenomena, including auditory function, color vision and after-effects. muscular sensation, tactile sensitivity, and adaptation to perceptual distortions. Seminars PSY 1631 Seminar in Behavior Theory 4 Q.H. Topics vary from term to term. For specific information, call ext. 3076. PSY 1 632 Seminar in Behavior Modification 4Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1531) Topics in behavior modification are discussed in a seminar format. PSY 1651 Seminar in Neuropsychology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1351) For students who desire intensive study, discussion, and practice in laboratory studies of physiological variables. Topics include evolution of the nervous system, sensory and motor mechanisms, motivation and emotion, sleep, attention and perception, learning, and memory. PSY 1 652 Sensory Physiology Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1351) The course concentrates on the psychophysiology of various sensory systems, vision and hearing in par- ticular Discussions are concerned with the problem of accounting for sensory phenomena in terms of physiological concepts. PSY 1 661 Seminar in Psycholinguistics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1262 or permission of instructor) The seminar focuses on the on-line processing of language. Recent research is discussed in light of such questions as: While listening to someone speak, how does the listener process the information carried by the acoustic signal? What is the role of linguistic rules, prediction strategies, and contextual informa- tion? And when speaking, what processing stages are involved from the moment the speaker decides to speak to the moment the articulators start functioning? These and other questions will be discussed, as will experimental techniques and current trends in psycholinguistics. PSY 1 662 Seminar in Cognition 4 Q.H. Topics very from term to term. For specific information, call ext. 3076. PSY 1 671 Seminar in Social Psychology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1271 and SOC 1135, or permission of instructor) Students are expected to examine and present in class their findings on a particular topic in social psychology, for example, attribution, aggression, con- formity, attitude-behavior relationship. PSY 1672 Seminar in Clinical Psychology and Personality 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1373 or permission of instructor) The course offers seminar presentations of topics relevant to understanding the normal and disturbed personality. Possible topics: specialized assessment Lab fee required. Anthropology/ 167 procedures, cognitive styles in personality, tempera- ment, hypnosis, anxiety, aggression, specialized clin- ical syndromes, and the development of conscience. PSY 1681 Seminar in Sensation and Perception 4Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) Topics in Psychology Series (TIPS) General interest, no-prerequisite courses in psy- chology PSY 1214 Psychological Testing: Science and Politics 4 Q.H. After an analysis of the basic principles of psy- chological test construction and the characteristics of various tests, the course focuses on the political and sociological problems associated w/ith psycho- logical assessment. Emphasis is on the uses and misuses of tests; social, cultural, and racial issues in intelligence testing; and the heredity-environment con- troversy in I.Q. testing. PSY 1 21 5 Sexual Behavior 4 Q.H. This course is concerned with the sexual activities of the human male and female from infancy to adult- hood. It considers the importance of sexual factors in the life history of the individual, statistical surveys of sexual behavior, and direct observational measures of sexual responding. Included are the nature of love, responses to pornography prostitution, bisexuality, male and female homosexuality, rape, child abuse, and sexual therapy PSY 1216 Marriage and the Family 4 Q.H. Problems typical in some marriages are discussed, including alcoholism, sexual inadequacy and dis- satisfaction, separation and divorce, death of a spouse, and child rearing. PSY 1 21 7 Man in Isolation 4 Q.H. Children raised in the wilds, children isolated in society, and adults placed in experimental isolation are the subjects of this course, designed to reveal what part of human nature actually requires interaction with other human beings, what part is programmed biolog- ically, and how these work together to make us human. PSY 1 263 Body Language 4 Q.H. This course examines the messages we send by posture, facial expression, gesture, gait, and inter- personal distance. It goes on to explore how power, status, and gender affect nonverbal communication. PSY 1264 Animal Communication 4 Q.H. How do animals communicate and how are we attempting to communicate with them? This course examines and compares the communication systems used by animals such as birds, bees, whales, dolphins, and the primates, including chimps and humans. From the four perspectives of biology linguistics, psychology and sociology, recent attempts to teach other primates some of our languages (sign language, speech, manipulation of tokens or computers) are revealing what it means to be a human in the animal kingdom. PSY 1 265 Your Memory: How It Works 4 Q.H. This course provides an analysis of the operation of memory in humans and animals, including factors from learning and physiology. Special attention is given to human verbal and conceptual memory, and classic and modern systems for memory extension and improvement. Practical exercises on methods of remembering are included. PSY 1 274 Psychology and the Law 4 Q.H. How does psychology enter into the various phases of the judicial process? The class traces the effects of psychological factors through the course of a trial, including such issues as accuracy of eyewitness identification, plea bargaining, jury selection, persua- sion tactics in the courtroom, presumption of inno- cence, jury size, jury decision rules, and sentencing and punishment. PSY 1281 Magic and illusion 4 Q.H. This course investigates visual, auditory, and kines- thetic illusions and constancies, demonstrating the manner in which we can be misled by our perceptions and how professionals, such as magicians (who will demonstrate certain topics), take advantage of this fact. Anthropology Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are duplicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. Roman numerals at the end of course descriptions refer to Core Curriculum categories listed on pages 1-2. 168/ Anthropology SOA 11 00 Introduction to Anthropology 4 Q.H. The course provides a survey of basic anthropol- ogical concepts, including human evolution, culture, and linguistics, with comparative analysis of such sociocultural institutions as kinship, economy, polity, and religion, especially in non-Western societies. SOA 1101 Cultural Meaning and Everyday Experience 4 Q.H. This course uses anthropological ideas to study the underlying patterns of meaning that lie below^ the surface of everyday thought and behavior Topics include study of daily routines, leisure activities, jok- ing and humor, speech patterns, current folklore and mythology nonmonetary economic transactions, kin- ship and friendship relations, and religion and ritual. SOA 1 102 Evolution and Society 4 Q.H. This course focuses on human social and cultural evolution and the theories that account for it. SOA 1 1 03 Culture in Transition 4 Q.H. The course offers analysis of the changing patterns in social, economic, and political institutions. Modern social trends are discussed. SOA 1120 Visual Anthropology: Camera on Culture 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOA 1100) This course explores the anthropologist's use of film to gather information and analyze cultural subsys- tems. In addition to reading about and viewing films on particular peoples, a "laboratory" aspect of the course involving the use of tape and video equipment intro- duces students to the field. SOA 1 1 25 introduction to Archaeology 4 Q.H. This course offers a survey of the history of devel- opment of archaeology focusing intensively on key sites in the new and old worlds. Film and slides of sites and artifacts are used extensively SOA 1135 Language and Culture 4 Q.H. Topics include the function of language in human society and an introduction to the relation between the patterns of language and the patterns of culture. SOA 1 1 45 Peoples Who Live by the Sea 4 Q.H. Course material includesexamination of fishing, trade, shipbuilding, recreation, smuggling, and other uses of the sea; the social ecology lifestyles, economics, and politics of seacoast perspectives of evolutionary and community systems theory. Research projects dealing with current issues, site visits, and field trips are required. SOA 1 1 46 Peasant Society and Culture 4 Q.H. Focuses on the dilemma of attempts by peasant soci- eties to preserve traditional cultural forms in the face of increasing external economic and political pres- sures. Covers the origins of the peasantry diversity and uniformity in peasant societies, the transformation of peasants into the modern urban and rural poor, and the politics of peasant protest and revolution. (IV) SOA 1 1 55 Individual and Culture 4 Q.H. This course explores the ways in which individuals are shaped by society and the ways in which they can effect change. SOA 1 1 60 Sex, Sex Roles, and Family 4 Q.H. The course analyzes popular and scientific notions about sex and family by examining the social pat- terning of interactions in our culture, other cultures, and other species. Emphasizes the changing rela- tions between men and women. (See also SOC 1 1 60.) SOA 1 1 85 Aggression 4 Q.H. Focuses on concepts of aggression and how they affect our understanding of human society. Draws on materials collected by anthropologists, psychologists, and ethnologists. SOA 1 220 Culture and Mental Illness 4 Q.H. This course offers discussions and analyses of the nature and meaning of culture, the role of culture in personality formation, culture and anxiety anthro- pological approaches to the "normal" and the "ab- normal," and the question "Is mental illness psy- chological fact or cultural fiction?" SOA 1 265 Primitive Religion 4 Q.H. The course focuses on nature and institutionalization of "primitive" religion. Topics include exploration of religious concepts and movements in relation to social, economic, and political organization. SOA 1266 Folklore 4 Q.H. This course focuses on cross-cultural comparisons of oral narrative traditions and literary sources. Var- ious methods of analysis of folklore and its place and function in society and culture are examined. Identifi- cation of and methods for collecting material from local currently active folklore traditions are given special attention. SOA 1267 The Anthropological Study of Myth 4 Q.H. The course focuses on theories concerning the nature and meaning of myth. Exploration of the function of myth in social and cultural change. The structural analysis of myth. SOA 1 275 The Anthropology of Music 4 Q.H. This course offers an examination of music in a pre- historic and cross-culture perspective, with emphasis on ethnomusicology and the comparison of Western and non-Western musical culture. Functions and social contexts of musical composition and performance; the ethnography of musical performance groups; the analysis of music as a form of communication. SOA 1 300 Cultural Ecology 4 Q.H. The course offers an introduction to questions of human adaptation to environment and the effect of different adaptations on natural systems. SOA 1301 Human Origins 4 Q.H. The course offers an intensive look at the data on fossil remains and contemporary primates, which are essential for an understanding of human physical and behavioral evolution. Efforts are made to bring the student into direct contact with primary materials. Anthropology/ 169 SOA 1310 Social Change and Economic Development 4 Q.H. Selected topics in the socioeconomic transformation of the world produced by the industrial revolution. Focuses on the impact of the modern world system on traditional cultures and contemporary Third World countries. SOA 1 320 Anthropology Methods 4 Q.H. The course examines theory and practice of methods of field research and data analysis. Students have the opportunity to take part in a field project. SOA 1335 Language and Communication 4 Q.H. The course focuses on human communication, in- cluding language, theories of the evolution of lan- guage; language and kinesics, semiotics, social class, linguistic nationalism; linguistic problems in modern- ization. SOA 1 345 Urban Anthropology 4 Q.H. The course explores selected problems in anthro- pological studies in urban societies. SOA 1355 Political Anthropology 4 Q.H. The course investigates the origin and growth of the institutions of civilization. Topics include specializa- tion and social stratification in the dynamics of tra- ditional civilizations. Some special topics of contact and change. SOA 1356 The Anthropology of Law and Conflict 4 Q.H. Topics include settling disputes in stateless societies; forms and mechanisms of social control; law as an indicator of cultural and social norms; the study of conflict resolution as an ethnographic tool. Some field research and analysis are required. SOA 1360 Economic Anthropology 4 Q.H. The course examines types of economic systems in simple societies: reciprocal, redistributive, market exchange; economic relations as part of social relations; land-tenure systems, credit systems, savings mechanisms. The transition from subsistence to cash economics. SOA 1 420 Kinship and Society 4 Q.H. This is a course for the advanced student only. A variety of kinship systems, their terminological and structural components, and the way in which they articulate with other social institutions are studied. SOA 1 425 Tribal Societies and Cultures 4 Q.H. The course focuses on the structures and institutions of bands, tribes, and chiefdoms; comparative and functional studies of tribal societies and the dynamics of change under contact situations. SOA 1430, SOA 1431, SOA 1433, SOA 1434, SOA 1435, etc. (each) 4 Q.H. These are ethnographic area courses (New World Indian, African, Chinese, Indian, Mediterranean, etc.) which will be offered as the department's resources permit. SOA 1 432 People and Culture of China 4 Q.H. This course introduces students to anthropological analysis in the context of Chinese ethnographic material. Topics covered may include kinship, markets, economics and social class, rituals, both folk reli- gions and elite beliefs. The cross-cultural approach used enables students to apply the analytical con- cepts of anthropology not only to China but also to their own culture, so that they may see that Chinese culture is different but the patterns in people's lives are dominated by themes that are shared by humans everywhere. (IV) SOA 1 470 Religion and Myth 4 Q.H. Nature and institutionalization of primitive, ancient, and contemporary religions. Exploration of religious concepts and movements in relation to social, reli- gious, and political organization. SOA 1 800, SOA 1 801 Directed Study 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Department approval) The course offers independent work on a chosen topic under the direction of members of the depart- ment. Limited to qualified seniors preparing in anthro- pology with approval of the department chairperson. SOA 1820, SOA 1821, SOA 1822, SOA 1823 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 1 83 Holmes. SOA 3100 Theory 4 Q.H. Qualified undergraduates may wish to take this grad- uate school course. Permission of the instructor is required for registration. INT 1340 Cultural Aspects of International Business 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) Using a managerial perspective, this course covers issues that arise when a firm moves from its home country to a host country that may have a different national culture. Although it will usually assume the perspective of the United States-based firm that operates abroad, it will spend some time on what happens to other national firms operating in the United States and in third-country environments. The way in which "corporate culture" evolves, in the context of national culture and the impact on managers, will be a central issue. 170 /Sociology Sociology SOC 1101 The Sociology of Everyday Life 4 Q.H. The course examines the development, application, and consequences of rules for everyday activities, (e.g., walking, talking, eating, drinking, sitting, smoking, laughing, crying, and sleeping); the effects of arti- facts, culture, space, and territory on these activities, on social life, and on the expression of emotions, issues, will be discussed and analyzed. SOC 1101 The Sociology of Everyday Life 4 Q.H. The course examines the development, application, and consequences of rules for everyday activities, (e.g., walking, talking, eating, drinking, sitting, smoking, laughing, crying, and sleeping); the effects of arti- facts, culture, space, and territory on these activities, on social life, and on the expression of emotions. SOC 1102 Social Inequality and Communication 4 Q.H. The course provides an analysis of the ways in which groups and institutions, in both their ritual and every- day activities, communicate the idea of hierarchy and an individual's place in it through face-to-face inter- action, formal communication, and the use of space and time. A dramaturgical approach to social orga- nization with special emphasis on status images in the media and the communication of social place by service organizations and professional groups. In- cludes some content analysis and observational fieldwork. SOC 1 1 03 American Society 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 1 00 or equiv) The course focuses on American society, culture, and major social institutions: economic, religious, governmental, familial, educational, welfare, and rec- reational; social classes and stratification, mobility and individualism. SOC 1 104 Contemporary Japanese Culture and Society 4 Q.H. Focus on contemporary Japanese urban society. Topics include: major values, family structure, sex roles, social control, the economy and the division of labor, mass media, religion, arts, and social problems. SOC 1 1 20 Sociology of Boston 4 Q.H. (Does not meet elective requirement for sociology/ anthropology major) The course examines the city of Boston from the perspectives of environmental development, neigh- borhood and intergroup relations, institutional serv- ices, and symbolic meanings. The city is a laboratory for exploring people's search for a lifestyle and the satisfaction of their needs. Field trips with workbook are required. Documentary and literary sources for term paper report are used. SOC 1121 Doing Sociology 4 Q.H. A research approach to sociology Focus on students' participation in their own learning about sociology as a body of knowledge and as a method of studying social life. Students will use the computer during the course. (II) SOC 1 1 25 Social Problems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 or permission of instructor) The course offers analysis of five major sociological perspectives on social problems (pathology disor- ganization, value conflict, deviance, and labeling); the conditions under which certain recurrent events, activities, and persons become redefined as social problems (e.g., mine disasters, marijuana smoking, and alcoholism); study of the typical responses to social problems and their consequences. SOC 1135 Social Psychology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 or permission of instructor) The course offers a sociopsychological approach to individual behavior in social contexts; introduction to basic concepts, such as socialization, identity, self- concept, role conflict, attitudes and attitude meas- urement, and groups and group processes as well as an overview of major theoretical orientations and important substantive topics. SOC 1 1 40 Sociology of Prejudice 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 or permission of instructor) This course examines factors in the development and maintenance of prejudice and discrimination. Topics include American race relations, anti-Semitism, sex roles, and stereotyping. SOC 1 1 45 Population and Society 4 Q.H. The course examines traditional and contemporary approaches to human population and its control. Topics include factors affecting birth and death rates; societal implications of population quantity and qual- ity in several situations, past and present; rural-urban migration and mobility; racial, genetic, stratificational components for population analysis. Public policies and responses to fertility control in several societies. International efforts to understand and generate action on population issues. (VI) SOC 1 1 46 Environment and Society 4 Q.H. This course examines the complex relations between human populations and their environments. Issues such as energy pollution, food supplies, resource availability, and conservation are treated as societal phenomena that involve human values and decision- making processes as well as technical information from a variety of scientific fields. The course will include practical experience in environmental problem solving. (VI) SOC 1 1 47 Cities and Society 4 Q.H. (Formerly Urban Society) Topics include the foundations of urban life in his- torical perspective; relation of city life to environment, population, social organization, technology and cul- tural values; growth trends, urbanization, urban plan- ning, and citizen action. Sociology/ 171 SOC 1155 Sociology of the Family 4 Q.H. Topics include the family as a social institution in several selected cultures; interrelations of the family and political, economic, and educational institutions; social nature of personality; role taking; individualism, mobility, and industrialism. SOC 1 1 56 Violence in the Family 4 Q.H. The course offers an examination of the physical, emotional, and sexual violence that occurs in families, with particular emphasis on child and spouse abuse. Definitions, prevalence, causes, prevention, and treat- ment of specific cases of domestic violence are analyzed. Social policy issues and problems of legal intervention are a primary focus. SOC 1160 Sex-Gender Roles in a Changing Society 4 Q.H. The course offers review and application of theories about the determinants of sex statuses and roles, from historical and cross-cultural perspectives. The focus of the course is on women's status in different institutional structures of American society. SOC 1 1 65 Students, Schools, and Society 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC1100) This course emphasizes the role of education in processes of socialization, social mobility, social control, and social change. Do social characteristics (sex, race, class, age, physical status) influence the school experience? Do schools provide opportunity and initiate change, or do they perpetuate the status quo in economic, political, and social life? Who goes to school, where, for how long, and with what result? How does educational advantage or disadvantage get translated into jobs and social status? Students are encouraged to draw on their own experiences to develop paper topics. SOC 1 1 70 Race and Ethnic Relations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 or equiv) The course focuses on racial and religious groups, particularly with reference to the United States; spe- cial emphasis on historical development, specific problems of adjustment and assimilation, and spe- cific present-day problems and trends. SOC 1 1 71 Race and Ethnic Relations: A World Perspective 4 Q.H. (Formerly Comparative Race/Ethnic Relations) This course offers a cross-cultural analysis of race and ethnic relations in Western and non-Western soci- eties. Explanations of race and ethnic relations in terms of contemporary developments, world problems, and ideological conflicts are included. SOC 1 1 75 Sociology of Work 4 Q.H. This course examines the varieties of work in Amer- ican society, from blue collar to managerial and pro- fessional occupations. Topics include job dissat- isfaction and professional burnout, changing shape of the labor market, women and work, participation and humanization of work, the impact of computers. SOC 1 1 76 Sociology of Business/Industry 4 Q.H. The course focuses on the role of industry in modern society; similarities and dissimilarities among indus- trial societies, bureaucracy and its alternatives, unions, supervision democracy and manipulation, the worker on the assembly line, sabotage of the organization, and the role of wages and alienation. SOC 1177 Social Roles in the Business World 4Q.H. The course offers an analysis of the social structure of corporate and business life in contemporary America. Case studies from major accounting and/or industrial firms are presented and discussed. The "career line" in the world of business and management will be examined with a special focus on age/sex, racial/ ethnic, and class/income barriers. SOC 1 1 78 Women Working 4 Q.H. Differences in the labor force experience of men and women workers generally go unrecognized, and the work experience most common to women— house- hold work— is rarely analyzed. This course will cover women's market and nonmarket activities, their re- wards, and their problems, in addition to empirical and theoretical analyses of the work roles of women. Overall, the course will underscore the differences between work experiences of men and women. SOC 1180 Sociological Perspectives on Consumerism and Consumer Behavior 4 Q.H. The course offers an analysis of consumer-oriented issues, including interest groups, needs, values, institutional networks, decision-making processes, and situational impacts. Exploration of systemic ben- efits and costs of consumer-relevant actions. SOC 1185 The Sociology of Deviance 4 Q.H. (Formerly Social Deviance) The course explores the conditions under which people categorize others as different; processes by which persons so defined are assigned deviant status and assume appropriate roles and self-images; devel- opment of deviant careers and their relation to deviant subcultures; situations in which people transform deviant identity. SOC 1 1 86 Social Control I 4 Q.H. The course examines formation of social bonds and the conditions under which they are ruptured; the emergence of deviance as an interactional problem; individual and societal reactions to the most prevalent forms of deviant behavior Analysis of agencies of social control, their definitions of problems, and responses to typical clients. SOC 1 1 90 Juvenile Delinquency 4 Q.H. The course examines the sociological and psycho- logical approaches to and their implications for a typology of delinquency; problems of prevention, treatment, and rehabilitation. SOC 1 1 95 Drugs and Society 4 Q.H. The course offers an introduction to the sociology of drugs. The course first examines social definitions of drugs, conditions of their use, and socialization into drug use. It then considers deviant drug use and effects of social control on definitions and use. A 1 72 / Sociology range of licit and illicit drugs will be considered, but major emphasis will be given to alcohol, marijuana, and heroin. SOC 1 200 Sociology of Alcoholism 4 Q.H. The course focuses on social responses to deviant alcohol use. The course examines, in sequence, drinking cultures and drinking practices in the United States; processes by which people are labeled "alco- holics"; and the role of agencies of social control, such as the criminal justice system and the health care system, in labeling and in rehabilitation. SOC 1201 Alcohol Use and Social Control 4 Q.H. All societies define and enforce rules on the use of alcohol. This course examines the conditions under which alcohol use disrupts social life; the processes through which alcohol controls, informal and formal, come into being; the development changes and con- sequences of these controls. Case studies of Pro- hibition, regulation of the alcohol beverage industry, legal drinking age, drinking and driving, and public drunkenness will be included. SOC 1 202 Sociology of Drinking 4 Q.H. In most of the societies in the world, people drink alcoholic beverages. This course examines how dif- ferent groups and societies organize drinking as a social act, and the consequences of that organization. It singles out for particular attention the cultural meaning assigned to drinking, the social elements found in all drinking situations, how members of social groups learn how to drink, and the social and psycho- logical functions of drinking. SOC 1 205 Law^ Crime, and Social Justice 4 Q.H. Analysis of the impact of the legal system on the creation and perpetuation of criminality in contem- porary American society. Particular attention is devoted to the study of the creation of criminal law, the judicial process, and the role of law in the gap between crime and social justice. Field trips will focus on criminal arrangements, trials, and sentencing in the Boston Municipal Court and Suffolk Superior Court. Suitable for students in prelaw, criminal justice, political science, and allied fields. SOC 1 206 Class, Crime, and the Police 4 Q.H. This course summarizes the major psychological, social, biological, economic, and political theories about the cause of crime. It then applies these the- ories to the day-to-day operations of the police, courts, and prison system in the United States. Various attempts to lower the crime rate through such policies as "scared straight" programs, the death penalty, stricter and looser prisons, increased police presence, and behavioral conditioning will be examined. SOC 1215 Medical Sociology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 or permission of instructor) The course provides an examination of the profes- sions, training, institutions, and problems in health care, with an emphasis on those in the United States. Practical issues in the improvement of health care systems are considered. SOC 1216 Health Care as a Social Issue 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 or permission of instructor) The course explores the social and political dynamics of health care: who benefits from the system and defends it, who works for change, who wins and why Topics include the social history of health care, occupational politics, community power structure and the health care setting, the planning and delivery of health services to "haves" and "have-nots," and the role of Citizens in determining the future of health care through activism, lobbying, legislation, and partici- pation in controlling the system. Case examples will be provided. SOC 1 220 Sociology of Mental Health 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 1 00 or equiv.) The course provides a survey of sociological per- spectives on mental health and mental disorder. Dis- cussions, readings, and presentations explore the social history of mental illness, epidemiology cross- cultural perspectives, patients' careers, social insti- tutions of treatment, and policy implications. Areas of convergence between sociological concepts and psy- chiatry are examined. SOC 1 225 Aging and Society 4 Q.H. The course offers a survey of issues and questions on aging, with special attention to social and economic consequences of the aging process, including retire- ment and productivity, health care problems, nursing home residences, widower- and widowhood, and the approach of death. Examples relating to aging in other cultures are presented in a search for new answers to social problems of aging in the United States. Students have the opportunity to learn to anticipate, cope with, and even prevent problems of aging that concern self, family and clients/patients. SOC 1235 Death and Dying 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 or permission of instructor) The course focuses on the treatment of death and dying, including problems faced by health care pro- fessionals, family members, institutions, the funeral industry and the dying themselves. The course will discuss cross-cultural perspectives, the social distri- bution of mortality, the changing nature of death, and the ethical problems in determining life and death with particular attention to such issues as abortion, suicide, and ceasing medical intervention. SOC 1240 Sociology of Human Service Organizations 4 Q.H. This course explores the contradiction between what human service organizations set out to do and what they actually accomplish. The course also explores how the goals of human service organizations are defined, how clients become labelled, and the societal constraints on clients, workers, and human service organizations. SOC 1 245 Sociology of Poverty 4 Q.H. The course offers an analysis of American poverty in historical perspective, drawing on comparisons with other countries. Critical evaluation of sociological Sociology / 1 73 research and theories relating to poverty. Consider- ation of causes and effects of poverty, as w/ell as societal responses to poverty and its consequences. Suitable for students in applied fields, such as nursing, criminal justice, education, allied health, premed, and prelaw. SOC 1 247 Food and Hunger 4 Q.H. Systematic examination of the social causes and con- sequences of hunger, and alternative approaches to solving world hunger SOC 1250 The Sociology of Private and Public Assistance 4 Q.H. The goal of this course is to help students understand why public and private assistance in the United States takes the form it does. Topics covered include the ideology behind the welfare system, the kinds of assumptions made about the poor, how other coun- tries deal with the problem, the effects of poverty in the United States, and some explanations for its continu- ing existence. SOC 1 255 Sport in Society 4 Q.H. The course provides an analysis of the social origins and functions of leisure activities, with special em- phasis on games and sports as forms of leisure. Con- siderable emphasis is given to cross-cultural and his- torical analysis as well as to the relation between leisure activities and various social institutions*— econ- omy, polity, family and religion. SOC 1 275 Sociology of the Arts 4 Q.H. The course offers an examination of the relation between the social organization of society and the forms of art produced— the social role of the artist, how the arts are "manufactured" and distributed, the art consumer's relation to art and the artist, social support for the arts. The course deals with a variety of art forms, with emphasis on the performing arts. SOC 1 276 Sociology of Popular Culture 4 Q.H. A sociological analysis of popular culture, focusing on the relationship between pop culture and social institutions such as religion, the law, education, the economy and the family; the organizations and artistic communities that produce pop culture such as the music industry, theatrical groups, advertising agencies; and the social roles and socialization processes associated with individual artists. Changes in popular culture are examined from the viewpoint of changes in the larger society. SOC 1 285 Technology and Society 4 Q.H. Does society control technology or is technology directing society? Has technology become dehu- manized? How valid is the doctrine of technological inevitability? Can the technological "fix" be viewed as a solution to social problems? Is technology itself a social problem? What can be expected of technology assessment? What of the back-to-nature and anti- technology movements today: are they the waves of the future? These are some of the questions and issues that are discussed and analyzed. Students are expected to do considerable independent study and research. SOC 1 286 Science and Society 4 Q.H. Science has had profound effects on our society, and scientists have seen the ways in which political, economic, and social forces have guided develop- ments in their fields. Issues such as "responsibility" and "autonomy" created by this interdependence will be explored. Emphasis is on the social structures within which science operates and is communicated, and on science as an occupation and profession, as well as a system of thought and set of tools for produc- ing knowledge. SOC 1290 Military and American Society in a Nuclear Age 4 Q.H. Keeping out of war, winning war, and keeping peace have been major concerns during the past forty-five years. In this course, we will investigate the relation- ship between military and society. Selected issues will include: 1 ) an analysis of the impact of the military on social institutions such as the family, polity, and economy; 2) an examination of the arms race and upheaval in social life; 3) the legitimation crisis of the U.S. military; 4) the role of women and minorities as reserve armies; and 5) military spending and domestic social problems. SOC 1 300 Classical Social Thought 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Three sociology/anthropology courses) The course examines the development of sociology from the history of social thought. The emergence of several schools, beginning with positivistic organicism and conflict theory SOC 1301 Current Social Thought 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Three sociology/anthropology courses) A seminar-lecture course in which formalism, social behaviorism, social action theory and functionalism are studied critically SOC 1302 Female Perspectives on Society 4 Q.H. (Formerly Feminist Perspectives on Society) This course examines a sampling of the burgeoning feminist literature in the social sciences and in theory, focusing on at least three major tendencies in this literature: radical feminism, socialist feminism, and neo-Freudian feminism. Specific topics include the origins and/or universality of women's oppression; women's work under capitalism; socialism and women's liberation; and family structure and the reproduction of gender SOC 1310 Class, Power, and Social Change 4Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 and junior or senior standing in sociology/anthropology or permission of instructor) The course focuses on theories of social equality and inequality as applied to the exercise of power and the growth and development of social movements and group conflict as seen from the point of view of large- scale social change. Required of majors. (V) SOC 1320 Introduction to Statistical Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 11 00 or permission of instructor) This course examines the application to social data of the principles of measurement, probability, measures 174 /Sociology of centrality, tests of significance, and techniques of association and correlation. SOC 1321 Research Methods I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 and SOC 1320, or permission of instructor) This course introduces students to the research process through an examination of the rules of evi- dence in empirical research and the place of values. Students have the opportunity to learn how to design and critique types of sociological research, how to collect qualitative and quantitative data, and how to sample populations. SOC 1 322 Research Methods II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1100, SOC 1320, and SOC 1321, or permission of instructor) Students are required to complete the research proj- ect begun in Research Methods I; practice coding, building indexes, scaling, table construction; intro- duction to use of the computer SOC 1323 Qualitative Research Methods 4 Q.H. The course offers an introduction to sociological fieldwork— methods of gathering data by extended observation of and interaction with people in natural settings. Students will take part in a series of obser- vations designed to teach the basic skills of open- ended interviewing, observing, recording, and ana- lyzing data. The theoretical base will be symbolic interaction. SOC 1324 Human Services Research and Evaluation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1320 or other statistics, SOC 1240, or permission of instructor) This course covers basic issues in applied research and the evaluation of services, including attention to the purposes of evaluation, ethics, formulating ques- tions and measuring answers, designing evaluations and planning oriented research, utilizing evaluation results, and the turbulent setting of action programs. Suitable for students majoring in human services, sociology, psychology, nursing, health education, and related fields. SOC 1335, SOC 1336 Group Behavior I and II 8Q.H. (Formerly Group Behavior— The Sociological Imagi- nation) The course explores how individuals interact in groups and how groups interact with each other The reflexive self, social aspects of language, situational learning, group perspectives, careers, institutions, and worlds. SOC 1337 Seminar in Social Psychology 4 Q.H. Focus is on the interaction of psychological and group processes. Students are required to read original the- oretical and research monographs in the field. Topics may include prejudice, reference groups, sex roles, conformity, leadership, aggression, communication, collective behavior, and achievement. SOC 1345 American Demographics 4 Q.H. This course is essentially an applied research exper- ience in which students have the opportunity to study the major areas of demography. The focus of the course is on the resources of the U.S. Census Bureau and, in particular, the data products available from recent census surveys. SOC 1346 Suburb and Metropolis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 100 or equiv) The course explores ecology of suburban and met- ropolitan growth, impact on center city and rural fringe, emergent lifestyles and institutional forms. Compares interdependence, issues of identity, autonomy and accessibility. Analysis of different types of metropoli- tan political, social, and economic institutions. Pros- pects for regional action. SOC 1347 Community Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor or three sociology/ anthropology courses) This course explores types of human settlements, focusing on the interaction between people and their political, economic, and social environments. Topics include power structure and citizen action to influ- ence institutions; skills in community analysis, includ- ing use of documents, survey observation, and eval- uation of needs and resources; strategies of conflict, cooperation, and negotiation to attain community and group ends. SOC 1348 Seminar in Urban Studies 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 147 or permission of instructor) Interdisciplinary approaches to urban studies are compared according to problem areas and research methods. Students have the opportunity to extend previous term paper projects after exposure to social action and social systemic theoretical perspectives. SOC 1355 Political Sociology: Who Gets What 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor or four sociology/ anthropology courses) This course offers an examination of formal political structures and informal quasi-political groups. Topics include sociological analysis of ideology class politics, mass movements, and the conflict of various social and economic groups as they vie for political power and influence. SOC 1360 Social Stratification: Class, Status, and Power 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor or four sociology/ anthropology courses) Topics include theories of social inequality, concepts of social class, aspects of status and role difference, criteria for social mobility. SOC 1 365 Collective Behavior 4 Q.H. Topics include the rise of new group forms in response to persistent social unrest; study of masses, crowds, and publics; analysis of specific instances of collec- tive behavior such as race riots, wildcat strikes, prison revolts, and campus disorders. SOC 1375 Sociology of Occupations and Professions 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor or four sociology/ anthropology courses) Sociology / 1 75 Topics include the meanings of work; division of labor and specialization; analysis of occupational structure and patterns of recruitment, training, and career pref- erences; tfie classic professions and new trends in professionalization. SOC 1376 Organization and Bureaucracy 4 Q.H. Sociological study of organizations. Case studies of private corporations, federal bureaucracies, social service agencies, military-industrial complex, high-risk technological systems, unions. Recent theories of innovation, participation, and opportunity in complex organizations. SOC 1 385 Social Deviance II 4 Q.H. The course offers an examination of the leading the- ories of deviance (anomie, subcultural deviance, labeling) and their principal variants; study of their assumptions, conceptions, propositions, and sup- portive evidence; analysis of empirical studies in each theoretical tradition. SOC 1405 Sociological Theories of Crime 4 Q.H. The course explores patterns and social forces in- volved in criminal behavior Analysis of sociological theories of criminality and comparison of these with other explanations of crime. SOC 1 470 Sociology of Religion 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1100) The course offers a comparative and analytic treat- ment of religion as a social institution, focusing on the relations between religious organizations and other social institutions, with particular emphasis on the American experience. Religion as an agent of social change and stability is included. SOC 1475 The Sociology of Mass Communication 4 Q.H. (Formerly Mass Communication and Public Opinion) Topics include factors in the formation and devel- opment of public opinion, the effect of television on children, mass communication as social organization, media-depicted images of society, the role of personal influence, the process of rumor, the use of mass media by the poor, propaganda analysis, and the latent and manifest functions of mass communication. SOC 1 485 Computers and Society 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Ability to program a computer) Examines the impact of the computer "revolution" on the conditions of work and life in contemporary society and on legal and theoretical conceptions of human society and consciousness. SOC 1500 Applied Sociology: Practice and Theory 4 Q.H. The course provides an analysis of the conditions under which sociological knowledge is applied to social problems, the kinds of problems, and the degree of effectiveness of this application. Particular atten- tion is paid to research and demonstration projects that derive from sociological theory. SOC 1501 Social Policy and Social Intervention 4Q.H. (Formerly Social Control II) The course focuses on study of the formation of social policies in response to social problems, analysis of policies and problems, supporters and opponents of policy change, conditions under which control agencies adopt new policies, and effects of policy change. Particular emphasis on case studies of social action and legal change. SOC 1525 Comparative Human Services I 6 Q.H. This course offers an intensive look at the American human services system. The course is designed to afford upper-level undergraduate and graduate stu- dents the opportunity to study the origins, develop- ment, and present state of human services in the United States. The course involves lectures as well as field visits in the Boston area. In addition to the normal classroom activities, independent study is provided. SOC 1526 Comparative Human Services II 6 Q.H. This course offers an intensive study of the British human services system. This course provides students the opportunity to immerse themselves in the social and cultural context of British human services and involves field trips in London designed to examine firsthand the planning, administration, and delivery of human services in Great Britain. SOC 1 535 Seminar in Social Welfare 4 Q.H. Discussion of problems in social welfare observed in the term between "Problems" and "Practicum." A research paper, based on directed fieldwork in the intervening term, is the major course requirement. SOC 1 600 Senior Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing in sociology/anthropology or permission of instructor) The course provides the opportunity to analyze, from sociological perspectives, student experience in work and voluntary .service and to develop and extend research interests related to that work or action experience. SOC 1601 Seminar in Current Emphases in Sociology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Junior or senior standing in sociology/an- thropology or permission of instructor) This course offers review and discussion of selected sociological topics. SOC 1602 Seminar in Current Emphases in Sociology: Writing and Talking in Sociology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Junior or senior standing in sociology/an- thropology or permission of instructor) The class considers prevailing modes of presentation in major journals and verbal presentation in teaching, consulting, etc. Class members are required to submit examples of their own writing for analysis. SOC 1800, SOC 1801, SOC 1802, SOC 1803 Directed Study (each) 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Junior or senior standing in sociology or permission of instructor) 1 76 / Speech Communication The course offers independent work on a chosen topic under the direction of members of the depart- ment. Limited to qualified students with approval of department chairperson. SOC 1819 Drinking in College (Honors Minicourse) 1 Q.H. This minicourse looks at drinking in college through the eyes of social scientists, humanists, college admin- istrators, and college students themselves. One of its goals is to help undergraduates arrive at a broader and more comprehensive understanding of the place of alcoholic beverages and controls on their use in campus society. The course surveys college drinking patterns in the United States from its beginnings to the present. SOC 1821, SOC 1822, SOC 1823, SOC 1824 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 Q.H. For details contact the Honors Office, 183 Holmes. INT 1 1 50 Introduction to Women's Studies: Image, Myth, and Reality 4 Q.H. This is an introductory survey of the issues and meth- odology involved in the interdisciplinary study of women. Such a survey encompasses the historical, political, economic, and social processes that have created both the image and the reality of women in society. Guest lecturers provide an overview of the many different disciplinary approaches to the study of women. This course is required for women's studies minors and may be used either as a general elective or, depending upon the discipline of the coordinator, to satisfy specific concentration requirements. (II) INT 1151, 1152 Women's Studies: Seminars in Research 4 Q.H. These Interdisciplinary Women's Studies Seminars allow students to address problems in depth by researching a topic of particular interest. Careful development of a research plan is encouraged and opportunities are provided for sharing work in prog- ress and for exchanging findings. These findings involve little in-class time, but much consultation with appropriate faculty. The final product of seminar work and research is a major paper Students in the Honors Program may substitute one quarter of honors regis- tration for each seminar, but are still expected to attend the formal sessions of the seminar These seminars are required for women's studies minors. INT 1201 An Analysis of American Racism 4 Q.H. This seminar in contemporary aspects of racism in America discusses the cycle by which racism in our institutions helps form our attitudes and the manner in which our attitudes, in turn, shape our institutions. Emphasis is on the practical, day-to-day aspects of racism, rather than the theoretical and historical. INT 1 21 5 Into the Ocean World 4 Q.H. This course is a comprehensive interdisciplinary introduction to the oceans. The seas' complexity and the far-reaching consequences of our interactions with them demand an awareness of the many facets of marine study The teaching team consists of specialists in the sciences, social sciences, humanities, and arts, each with an interest in marine issues and a commit- ment to bridging the gaps among disciplines. The course themes are as broad as the oceans, but, when appropriate, we will focus on Boston harbor, a first step into the ocean world for those of us in this area. INT 1 400 Professional Practices: Individual and Social Dimensions 4 Q.H. The course explores the dimensions and dilemmas of freedom and responsibility confronting professional people practicing within limits set by socioeconomic conditions, by clients, and by other professionals. Case histories are examined to illustrate the dilemmas professionals face, the choices that are typically made, and the consequences these have on the freedom of the practitioner, and on personal and professional integrity. INT 1401 Health Professions: Past, Present, and Future 4 Q.H. This course focuses on social history of the modern health professions. The course explores long-range patterns in the organization and regulation of the health professions, beginning with the Middle Ages and emphasizing the Jacksonian period, industrialization, modern professional organizations, the growing role of the state, responses of the health professions, and the future of health care in the United States under various corporate/government schemes for reorgani- zation and "accountability." Speech Communication Please note some courses in the College of Arts and Sciences are duplicated in different departments or colleges, or within a department. You may not receive credit for two such courses. If you have a question about whether one course does overlap with another, please consult the departments involved and the Dean's Office before taking the course. Roman numerals at the end of course descriptions refer to Core Curriculum categories listed on pages 1-2. SPC 1 1 02 Effective Speaking 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Industrial engineering students only; speech communication for specific purposes) Designed to help provide the student with a basic understanding of the communication process and its function as a means of relating to the world, ourselves, and other people, the course examines factors in intra- and interpersonal communication, group com- munication, and public speaking through lectures, discussions, structured learning experiences, and written assignments. Speech Communication / 177 SPC 1106 Speech Fundamentals 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Recreation majors only; speech communi- cation for specific purposes) This course is designed to give the student an op- portunity to develop a basic understanding of the communication process and its function as a means of relating to the world, ourselves, and other people. It examines factors in intra- and interpersonal com- munication, group communication, and public speak- ing through lectures, discussions, structured learning experiences, and written assignments. SPC 1 1 09 Effective Speaking Workshop 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Civil engineering students only) This course is designed to give the student an op- portunity to acquire a basic understanding of the communication process and its function as a means of relating to the world, ourselves, and other people. It examines factors in intra- and interpersonal com- munication, group communication, and public speak- ing through lectures, discussions, structured learning experiences, and written assignments. SPC 1110 Voice and Articulation 4 Q.H. The course includes the study of voice technique: emphasis on pitch, projection, articulation, and vocal variety. A combination of theory and practical application. SPC 1111 Oral Interpretation 4 Q.H. The course focuses on application of basic vocal techniques to the dramatic reading of prose, poetry, and drama. Through literary analysis the author's meaning is understood and, by means of oral reading skills, communicated to an audience. SPC 1115 Introduction to Communication Skills 4 Q.H. This course is designed to give the student an op- portunity to develop a basic understanding of the communication process and its function as a means of relating to the world, ourselves, and other people. It examines factors in intra- and interpersonal com- munication, group communication, and public speak- ing through lectures, discussions, structured learning experiences, and written assignments. SPC 1116 Business and Professional Speaking 4 Q.H. The course focuses on practice of oral presentations, group communication, conference and discussion techniques, interview methods, and occasion speak- ing. The course combines performance aspects with case study methods of communication on the profes- sional level. SPC 1210 Advanced Vocal Techniques 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1 1 10 or permission of instructor) Development and application of vocal techniques acquired in SPC 1110. Emphasis on vocal analysis, flexibility, and regional patterns of speech. SPC 1 21 1 Advanced Oral Interpretation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1111) Opportunity to develop further oral reading skills acquired in SPC 1 1 1 1 . In addition, the course includes work with accents and dialects, study of reader's theatre, and an investigation of classical and modern philosophies of the art. SPC 1232 Female/Male Communication 4 Q.H. The course surveys the various dimensions of female- male relations as they are created, sustained, or disin- tegrated through communication transactions. Em- phasis will be on the various images and stereotypes of male and female sexual identity as they affect and are affected by communication in the development of hostility, friendship, or intimacy Temporary, permanent, and destructive female-male relations will be examined as they lead to alternate lifestyles. SPC 1239 Argumentation and Debate 4 Q.H. An applied course designed to help develop skills in rational decision making through advocacy Attention is given to logical reasoning, psychological methods, and motivational techniques. SPC 1250 Introduction to Mass Communication 4Q.H. This is an introductory course designed to explore the many media through which people express them- selves: radio, television, film, print, music. Attention is paid to the role of the individual as a media consumer. SPC 1300 Introduction to Communication Theory 4Q.H. This course is designed to offer basic knowledge and understanding of the processes involved in the trans- ference of meanings. From the problems involved in defining communication, through a discussion of the nature of communication, various models of commu- nication are examined. The nature of theory and requirements of adequate theory are discussed, leading to an examination of various theories of human communication, including psychological, sociological, information, and system theories. SPC 1 31 0 Rhetorical Theory I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1 1 1 5, SPC 1 250) This course examines various theories of rhetoric, starting with the early Greeks (Plato's "Phaedrus" and "Gorgias," Aristotle's "The Rhetoric"), progressing through the rhetoric of Rome (Cicero's "de Brute" and Quintilian's "de Institutione"), and moving into a brief synopsis of medieval rhetoricians (Peter Ramus, Thomas Wilson, Thomas de Quincey Francis Bacon, George Campbell, Richard Whately). The focus will be the student's growing knowledge and appreciation of the history and principles of rhetoric, which is the foundation of oral discourse. SPC 1315 Theories of Persuasion 4 Q.H. The course surveys theoretical and conceptual ap- proaches and research pertaining to the effectiveness of communication that is intended deliberately to induce changes in attitudes, beliefs, values, and/or behavior. SPC 1317 Theories of Audience Behavior 4 Q.H. Surveying theoretical models, concepts, and research, the course focuses on the role of the receiver as an 1 78 / Speech Communication active participant in the communication process. Topics include individual information processing; listening as a learned behavior; intra-audience effects; relations between media and audience characteris- tics; dissemination, rumors, and information; and the development of societal norms and mores. SPC 1318 Negotiation Skills 4 Q.H. (Prereq. f^iddler standing or higher, or permission of instructor) The skills involved in bringing matters to mutually acceptable settlements will be investigated and applied through lectures, discussions, and especially through performance in case studies and role-playing simula- tions. Classroom activities will include such personal, professional, and governmental processes as conflict resolution, problem solving, and advocacy Particular emphasis will be placed on the collective bargaining process in the private and public sectors, including negotiation, mediation, and arbitration. SPC 1330 Interpersonal Communication I 4 Q.H. This is a conceptual, theoretical course designed to help increase awareness of the communication pro- cess. The course provides an examination of the ways in which we relate to other individuals and factors that influence these processes. SPC 1331 Interpersonal Communication II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1330 or permission of instructor) The course focuses on application of concepts de- veloped in interpersonal Communication I. It is an experiential course, exploring ways of becoming more aware of one's self and one's relationships with others and offering an examination of various options for communicating and increasing knowledge of the group process. Enrollment limited. SPC 1338 Group Discussion 4 Q.H. Working in task groups, students are expected to explore theory and research in the area of group dynamics and to apply their knowledge to the class- room experience as they work on developing skills in decision making, problem solving, membership, and leadership. SPC 1410 Contemporary Public Address 4 Q.H. The course offers a critical study of the public address of leading contemporary speakers representative of important political and social movements. This course seeks to help the student gain an appreciation of the dimensions and varieties of contemporary public address, broadly defined as symbolic discourse. From an understanding of various theories and approaches to public address, rhetorical situations are examined; the use of agitative and control strategies to accom- plish social change is critically evaluated. SPC 1 41 5 Persuasive Techniques 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1315 or permission of instructor) The course offers a critical, in-depth analysis of instances of persuasion as they occur in social inter- action, social movements, politics, and advertising; identification of practical strategies employed; and the factors that influence the effectiveness of those strategies when persuaders attempt to influence oth- ers. SPC 1430 Organizational Communication 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1250) Organizational Communication examines the nature of communication in the context of complex orga- nizations. The student will explore both internal and external organizational communication. Analysis of organizational communication will include: (a) com- munication networks, (b) communication technologies, (c) interpersonal communication modes, and (d) organizational interdependencies and their effect on information transfer and diffusion. Will include a section on organizational communication assessment and communication program implementation. SPC 1 437 Consultation Skills 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1300, SPC 1115, SPC 1330, and SPC 1338) The course gives students the opportunity to acquire the skills necessary for analyzing communication dif- ficulties in industry, organizations, and groups. Includes theory discussion, practice, and feedback, using case study method. SPC 1450 Broadcast Production 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1 250 or permission of instructor) The course introduces the student to the equipment of a broadcast studio, surveys broadcast production techniques, and provides opportunities in class for applied practice through the production of program- ming suitable for broadcast. SPC 1452 Producing and Directing for Radio 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The course centers around the role of the producer/ director in the creation, preproduction planning, and execution of local and network radio programs. Em- phasis is on live broadcasts and live assembly of partially prerecorded programs. A great deal of time will be spent on the written materials necessary for program planning. The class will spend some time in the studio working on model program production and, possibly actual live music performance broadcasts. SPC 1500 Special Topics in Speech Communication 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The course provides an in-depth examination of a subject of particular significance to the field. SPC 1554 Special Topics in Broadcasting 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1250 or permission of instructor) This course introduces the student to the variety of roles played by broadcast professionals and to the interplay of professional functions integral to the broadcast industry. The focus is on a different aspect of the broadcast industry each term. SPC 1600 Introduction to Communication Research 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC 1300 or permission of instructor) The course provides an introduction to scientific method and epistemology as it applies to the inves- Theatre and Dance / 1 79 tigation of communication phenomena. The course is structured to assist students in finding and critically evaluating literature dealing with factors that influence the effectiveness of communication and that may be pertinent to either academic projects or managerial decision making. SPC1 610 Rhetorical Criticism 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC1310) This course focuses on the principles of rhetorical analysis: theories, methods, and the application of these to discourses. Various types of discourse will be studied throughout the quarter Attention will be given to understanding various methods and problems in rhetorical analysis. Judgment criteria, as well as the role of rhetorical criticism in society, will be examined. SPC 1890; SPC 1891 Directed Study (each) 4 Q.H. SPC 1895 Internship in Speech Communication 4Q.H. This course provides a student with the opportunity to gain academic credit for on-the-job training in an allied career field. Enrollment requires prior approval by a department committee, demonstration that the job allows opportunities to apply theoretical under- standing to specific application in the work environ- ment, and faculty advisement as well as on-the-job supervision. INT 1400 Professional Practices: Individual and Social Dimensions 4 Q.H. The course explores the dimensions and dilemmas of freedom and responsibility confronting professional people practicing within limits set by socioeconomic conditions, by clients, and by other professionals. Case histories are examined to illustrate the dilemmas professionals face, the choices that are typically made, and the consequences these have on the freedom of the practitioner and on personal and professional integrity. INT 1 500 Introduction to Women Studies: Image, Myth, and Reality 4 Q.H. This introductory course in the study of women in society encompasses the historical, political, eco- nomic, and social processes that have created both the image and the reality of women in contemporary society. An overview of the many different disciplinary approaches to the study of women. (II) Theatre and Dance DRA 1 1 00 Introduction to Theatre Arts 4 Q.H. (For nontheatre majors) The course provides a brief view of the historical development of acting, directing, and production design. Emphasis is on appreciation of contemporary theatrical forms. DRA 1 1 06 Theatre History I 4 Q.H. (This course is the first in a three-course sequence, although each course is self-contained and may be taken independently) The history of world theatre and drama, including an examination of the characteristics of the drama and the nature of theatrical performance during each period, as well as the social and artistic contexts in which performance occurred. The periods examined this term are ancient Greece and Rome, medieval Europe, Elizabethan and Stuart England. DRA 1 1 07 Theatre History II 4 Q.H. (Thiscourseisthe second in athree-course sequence, although each course is self-contained and may be taken independently) A continuation of Theatre History I. The periods examined this term are the Spanish Golden Age, the Italian renaissance, the theatre of baroque and eighteenth-century Europe, the rise of romanticism and realism in European theatre, and the theatre of Asia from its beginnings. DRA 1 1 08 Theatre History III 4 Q.H. (This course is the third in a three-course sequence, although each course is self-contained and may be taken independently) A continuation of Theatre His- tory II. The course examines the rise of naturalism in the European theatre, the development of theatre in the United States, and the rise and development of modernism and post-modernism in American and European theatre. DRA 1112 Drama Theory/Criticism 4 Q.H. An examination of both the major historical statements of drama theory and contemporary drama criticism as evidenced in journalistic play reviews. Students are required to prepare reviews of local productions. DRA 1 1 1 6 The American Theatre 4 Q.H. The course focuses on the American theatre from the Revolutionary War to the present. DRA 1 1 1 7 The Theatre of Williams, Miller, and Albee 4Q.H. The course offers an intensive study of the works of three major post-World War II American playwrights. DRA 1118 Black Theatre in America 4 Q.H. The course surveys the history of black theatre artists in America from the time of Ira Aldridge to the present day Also examines the works of black playwrights from the Harlem Renaissance to the present, with an emphasis on the period beginning with Baraka's "Dutchman." DRA 1 1 20 The Restoration Theatre 4 Q.H. The philosophical, social, historical, and critical influences upon the Restoration theatre and its dramatists. DRA 1121 Contemporary Theatre 4 Q.H. The course examines the various forces that have shaped the major trends in Western theatre over the past two decades. The course includes a study and examination of contemporary theatre concerns cov- ering topics such as women's rights, politics, race, 1 80 / Theatre and Dance nudity, and homosexuality, as presented in theatres or performed by experimental and avant-garde groups. DRA 1122 Twentieth-Century European Theatre 4Q.H. An examination of major twentieth-century European attempts to break away from the nineteenth-century realistic tradition. Representative works of expres- sionistic, symbolistic, epic, and absurd theatre artists will be examined. DRA 1123 The Theatre of Ibsen, Strindberg, and Chekhov 4 Q.H. Intensive study of the theatre of the three great masters of the naturalistic movement in Europe whose works stand as the foundation of modern drama. DRA 1 1 24 The Irish Theatre 4 Q.H. The course focuses on theatre and drama in Irelanc' from their beginnings to the present, with the back grounds of Irish folklore and history. Particular em- phasis on developments in the twentieth century DRA 1 1 25 The Theatre of the Absurd 4 Q.H. The course focuses on the theatre of the absurd as an anti-literary reflection of and reaction to life; its effects upon Western drama. Major concern with selected works and ideas of Jarry Artaud, Camus, Sartre, Beckett, Genet, lonesco, Pinter, Kopit, Brown, and Arrabal. DRA 1 1 27 The Comic Theatre 4 Q.H. The course focuses on the comic theatre from its beginnings in the ancient Greek theatre to its per- formances in contemporary theatre; an examination of the comic playwright, the comic actor, the comic director-the synthesizing of the arts of the theatre to produce thoughtful as well as titillating laughter, kicluded are study of scripts by such playwrights as Aristophanes, Moliere, Shaw, Neil Simon; techniques of Charlie Chaplin, the Marx Brothers, stand-up com- ics. Directional devices will be examined through lecture, film, records, and attendance at live per- formances. DRA 1130 Eastern European Theatre and Drama 4 Q.H. A survey of the history of theatre and drama in Russia and Poland from the nineteenth century to the present. Emphasis will be placed upon the contributions of Polish romanticism, developments in the Soviet theatre of the 1920s, and on the work of major Polish and Russian dramatists and theatre artists who have influ- enced Western theatre profoundly (Course taught in English.) DRA 1 1 40 Playwriting I 4 Q.H. The principles and practices of modern dramatic com- position: characterization, plot, plot structure, dialogue, and other dramaturgical elements as seen in the one- act play Included are the writing of brief scenes, the dramatic composition, and the one-act play DRA 1 1 50 Introduction to Acting 4 Q.H. Fundamental techniques of stage use. The actor and the stage environment. Improvisations for strength- ening imagination and increasing freedom. Analysis of scripts for work on performed scenes. DRA 1 1 55 Speech for the Theatre 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SPC1110) The course focuses on special speech problems confronting actors performing in classical and con- temporary theatre. DRA 1 1 60 Body Movement I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Theatre major or permission of instructor) Students begin with simple Esalen physical aware- ness exercises, explore the warm-up process, and then try to find which exercises serve them best. Simple theatre games (i.e., machines, transformations, activity improvisations) are introduced, and students have the opportunity to learn how to relax through concentration on a specific mental task. DRA 1 1 70 Theatre Games 4 Q.H. This course offers a variety of basic dramatic, move- ment, and improvisational techniques that can be applied to theatrical, educational, and personal sit- uations. Previous theatrical experience is not nec- essary. DRA 1180 Concepts of Direction 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1 1 50 and DRA 1 21 2) Theories of dramatic presentation through analysis of selected historical developments. Purposes and tech- niques of theatrical direction as they relate to script analysis, production style, pictorial composition, rhythmic evolution, and empathic responses. DRA 1 200 Stagecraft 4 Q.H. Principlesthatunderliethecoordinationandexecution of scenery for the stage; examination of different kinds of scenery tools, equipment, construction materials, and techniques; handling of scenery and basic scene painting. Laboratory work: constructing and painting scenery for University productions. DRA 1 209 Theatrical Drafting 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1200) By working on supervised classroom projects, the student is exposed to the basic graphic language needed to translate a designer's ideas into technical drawings used for construction. These basic skills can be used for future course work in design, Uni- versity productions, and professional work. DRA 1210 Scenic Design for the Stage 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1200, DRA 1212 or permission) An introduction to the theory and practice of theatrical design and the role of the designer in the production process. Project work examines the use of the graphic tools-line, form, balance, colour, rhythm, etc.-in the development of the design idea. Emphasis is based on understanding and utilizing spatial relationships; visually expressing conceptual themes; and under- standing the various uses, problems, and practical considerations of proscenium, thrust, and arena staging. Historical analysis covers production styles from the Greco-Roman period through the nineteenth century Theatre and Dance / 1 81 DRA 1212 Introduction to Theatrical Design 4Q.H. An introduction to the visual effects of modern the- atrical production and the creative processes by which these come into being, through a basic survey of the three major design disciplines, their supporting tech- nology and their working interrelationship. The ques- tions of how artistic concepts are developed and related, how they are communicated to other artists and an audience, and how one develops the critical processes necessary to evaluate these concepts will be addressed by the design faculty as applicable to their respective areas of expertise. DRA 1213 Scene Design II: Principles 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1210) The development and expression of conceptual state- ments from specific dramatic texts through a series of exercises involving script analysis and introductory work in rendering and model construction. Texts to be examined are selected from works of distinct histori- cal and stylistic periods. The heritage of twentieth- century theatrical design will be studied through the work of artists such as Appia, Craig, Jones, Urban, and Oenslager. Emphasis is placed on the develop- ment of such stylistic treatments as realism, expres- sionism, symbolism, and constructivist and environ- mental design. DRA 1214 Scene Design III: Techniques 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1213) Advanced work focusing on the practical application of the theories, materials, and techniques of con- temporary design. Emphasis is placed on furthering the student's ability to research a project as well as executing perspective drawings, renderings, and painter's elevations. Assignments in critical analysis are based on various contemporary American and European production of dramatic and operatic works. The work of such influential designers as Aronson, Bay Mielziner, and Svoboda will be discussed as will the contributions of such nontheatre artists as Chagall, Dali, and Picasso. DRA 1225 Scene Painting 4 Q.H. The history of scene painting and ornament from classical to contemporary times. Studio organization, color, color theory equipment, tools, materials, and costs involved with painting stage scenery. Projects and exercises in the use of different media, matching colors, painting of textures, light and shade, and the use of stencils and physical textures. Laboratory sessions include painting stage scenery for Univer- sity productions. DRA 1 226 Lighting Design for the Stage 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1200, DRA 1212 or permission) Basic principles and practices of stage lighting, including the qualities and functions of light, lighting instruments and controls, basic electricity, color in light, and analysis of the script in terms of light require- ments. Students are expected to develop light plots and schedules for various kinds of stage productions. Classwork includes laboratory work on lighting crews for University productions. DRA 1 246 Sound for the Theatre 4 Q.H. Beginning with a basic introduction to both natural and electronically produced sound, the course will go on to discuss the component parts of sound systems, their theories and applications. Techniques of record- ing and editing will be discussed and demonstrated with particular reference to the creation of sound tracks and effects for theatrical productions. The concepts of sound reinforcement systems for musi- cals, concerts, and other current professional appli- cations will be investigated. DRA 1261 Costuming I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1212 or permission) The course presents the beginning designer with the opportunity to investigate costume design theory and to foster perceptual development. Through lectures and projects, the student will have the opportunity to explore both the abstract and historical aspects of costume design as weJI as textual analysis and its conceptual implications. Prior art or design educa- tion is not necessary DRA 1265 Pattern Drafting and Costume Construction 4 Q.H. The course will develop the skills and techniques necessary for the patterning, cutting, and construc- tion of costumes for the stage. Flat pattern drafting, draping, and finishing techniques will be covered. DRA 1279 Puppetry 4 Q.H. A theoretical and practical su rvey of the art of puppetry Utilizing a lecture/laboratory format, the history of puppetry is examined from prehistoric times through the present, and construction techniques for various styles of puppets are demonstrated and applied. The course covers shadow, hand, rod, hand-and-rod, bib, scarf, and marionette puppets. DRA 1280 Stage Makeup 4 Q.H. The principles of, the reasons for, and the materials used in makeup for the theatre, television, and films. The practical application of types and styles of make- up—straight, old-age, character, and corrective— is also included. DRA 1 282 Stage Management 4 Q.H. The course examines the fundamental techniques of stage management in educational, community, and professional theatres and the working relations between stage managers and directing, acting, and technical personnel. The course includes the study of practical concepts of organizing and running perform- ances, and a discussion of the philosophy of the stage manager as a collaborative artist and craftsperson. DRA 1 284 Theatre Management 4 Q.H. Theatre management, including problems of financ- ing, promoting, and programming for educational, community, profit, and nonprofit professional theatre. DRA 1 292 Children's Theatre 4 Q.H. Theories and methods of creative techniques related to children's programs in schools, churches, and recreational facilities. Analysis of literature in prepara- tion for production of children's plays. 1 82 / Theatre and Dance DRA 1300 Acting II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1 1 50) Fundamental analysis of the script, including physical- izations and vocal scoring; character analysis; scenes performed for classroom analysis. DRA 1301 Acting III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1300) Further development of the actor's tools, script and character scoring, exercises for physical and psycho- logical freedom. In-class scenes from works in pro- gress are included. DRA 1302 Acting IV 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1301) This course deals with the specific demands which verse plays place on actors. By working on scenes, textual analysis of individual speeches, and reading relevant criticism, students will become familiar with different aspects of text analysis and the problems inherent in acting verse. One paper will be required. The course will concentrate on the works of Moliere and Shakespeare. DRA 1350 Problems in Direction 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1180) Experimentation in theory related to the staging of classical and modern drama. Analysis of plays in actual production: casting, rehearsals, character interpreta- tions. Each student is responsible for the production of a one-act play. DRA 1 370 Rehearsal and Performance 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of the ingtructor) Oriented to allow the students to participate in public performance through preparation and rehearsals in areas of acting, directing, design, and stagemanaging. DRA 1 400 Costuming II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1261 or permission of instructor) Advanced study in textual interpretation and its appli- cation to costume design. Conceptual and stylistic development will be emphasized through assigned projects in the various genres of the performing arts. DRA 1410 Technical Production 4 Q.H. (Since thiscourse will be the culmination ofthe design student's background and experiences, the student must already have completed all courses stipulated in his/her chosen design concentration before taking this particular course.) An advanced course which allows the student the opportunity to further explore his or her capabilities through the practical application of acquired techni- cal and aesthetic skills in an area related to the student's desired specialization. Focusing on one sub- stantial production or project responsibility, this spe- cialized study will be designed and executed in close supervision with the faculty member responsible for the area of concentration. DRA 1420 Advanced Drafting and Construction 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1209) A specialized course in technical production tech- niques. Drafting procedures necessary for the con- version of designer's drawings into detailed rear elevation and construction layouts will be covered, as well as the development of section, isometric, and oblique views. Through a series of practical and project exercises, the various factors governing the construc- tion and rigging of two- and three-dimensional scenery, linear-motion, rotary-motion, and elevating systems will be analyzed. Emphasis is placed on theatrical problem solving with regard to safety, dependability, and economy DRA 1430 Lighting Design II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1226 and DRA 1209) An intensive course in lighting design theory and practice. Students are expected to design numerous lighting plots, sections, instrument schedules, and design concepts, for various types of productions and spaces. Current professional techniques and practices will be investigated and discussed. DRA 1 500 Playwriting II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. DRA 1140) Continuation of DRA 1 140. DRA 1800, DRA 1801, DRA 1802, DRA 1803 Practicum in Play Production (each) 1 Q.H. (Prereq. departmental permission) Laboratory practice in technical theatre: scene building and painting: performing backstage functions. To be repeated for credit, up to four credits. DRA 1810, DRA 1811, DRA 1812, DRA 1813 Junior-Senior Honors Program (each) 4 Q.H. For prerequisites and other details, see the section on the Junior-Senior Honors Program on page 1 . DRA 1820, DRA 1821, DRA 1822, DRA 1823 Directed Study (each) 4 Q.H. DRA 1 840 Special Topics in Acting and Directing 4 Q.H. An in-depth examination of a subject of particular significance to the field. DRA 1 860 Special Topics in Theatrical Design 4Q.H. An in-depth examination of a subject of particular significance to the field. DRA 1 890 Special Topics in Theatre History- Dramatic Criticism 4 Q.H. An in-depth examination of a subject of particular significance to the field. INT 1100 Introduction to Art, Drama, and Music 4Q.H. This interdisciplinary course offers an integrated approach to three related disciplines: art, drama, and music. Basic vocabulary and analytical techniques are established for each discipline, emphasizing such common elements as color, line, rhythm, texture, and form. Representative works from various periods are examined in the context of the cultures that produced them, and lectures focus on parallels and contrasts among the three disciplines' manifestations of specific trends, principles, and ideals. Lectures, readings, and Accounting / 1 83 listening assignments are supplemented by visits to art galleries and attendance of concerts and theatri- cal performances. (II) INT 1 1 1 0 American Musical Theatre 4 Q.H. This course traces the development of the American musical from works such as "The Black Crook" to the present. The role of musical theatre, both as enter- tainment and as serious art form, is considered through an examination of script, score, dance, and design. Works by composers and lyricists such as Bernstein, Rodgers and Hammerstein, the Gershwins, Weill, Lerner and Loewe, and Cole Porter are studied. Accounting ACC 1111 Accounting Principles I 4 Q.H. This first of a series of accounting courses assumes students do not possess knowledge of the subject. Both this course and ACC 1 1 1 2 are designed to help provide an understanding of accounting issues and objectives for proper interpretation and analysis of financial data. Specific topics covered in this first course are: 1) the nature, function, and environment of accounting; 2) the basic accounting model; 3) financial and analytical ratios; 4) the accounting cycle; 5) accounting for merchandising entities; and 6) the control of cash and receivables. ACC 1112 Accounting Principles II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1111) The second of a series of accounting courses. Students are introduced to financial and managerial accounting decisions through class discussions, short exercises, and demonstration problems. Specific topics covered include: 1) control of inventory; 2) acquisition, depreciation, and disposal of plant and equipment; 3) paid-in capital related to sole propri- etorships, partnerships, and corporations; 4) short- and long-term debt financing; 5) the analysis and interpretation of financial reporting; and 6) the state- ment of changes in financial position. ACC 1 1 48 Principles of Accounting 8 Q.H This course covers the content of courses ACC 1111 and ACC 1112 and is primarily intended for transfer students. ACC 1210 Introduction to Accounting for the Non-Business Major 4 Q.H. (Not open to College of Business Administration students) Specifically for non-business majors, this course is designed to help provide a fundamental knowledge of accounting to students who do not expect to become accountants but would like the opportunity to learn to understand, interpret, and make use of accounting data. The course surveys the foundations of account- ing and the role it plays in the management of the profit and nonprofit sectors of the American economy ACC 1330 Cost Accounting for Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1112) This course offers an examination of cost accounting from a managerial viewpoint. The impact of quantita- tive and behavioral aspects on budgets and cost control is stressed. This course is designed specifi- cally for management majors. ACC 1331 Intermediate Accounting I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1 1 1 2 or equiv) The principal foundation course for accountants begins with a comprehensive review of basic account- ing principles, operations, and financial statements. Development of accounting theory is stressed in the analysis of alternative treatments and procedures. Specific areas receiving intensive treatment are cash, accounts receivable, inventories, and current liabilities. ACC 1 332 Intermediate Accounting II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1331) This course is a continuation of the study of accounting principles, concepts, and procedures. Specific topics emphasized are long-term assets, depreciation, stock- holders equity, and EPS. ACC 1 339 Cost Accounting I 4 Q.H. (Prereq: ACC 1112) This course examines cost determination and use. Special consideration is given to manufacturing concerns. Specific coverage includes cost behavior, relevant costs, performance evaluation, budgets, and standard costs. ACC 1 340 Cost Accounting II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1339) This course is a continuation of ACC 1339 (Cost Accounting I) and gives special attention to the use of cost data in decision making, budget planning, and the control process. ACC 1 343 Intermediate Accounting III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1332) This course completes the study of basic accounting concepts and covers special areas of concern to modern accounting practice. Leases, pensions, accounting changes, income tax accounting, changes in financial position, price-level and current-value accounting are studied. ACC 1348 Accounting Theory and Practice 4Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1 343) Objectives are to examine: 1) the theory and practice of corporate financial reporting and some of the con- troversial areas in accounting; 2) the pronouncements and research studies of the authoritative institutions of the profession relating to the practice of account- ing; 3) the textual and periodical literature on account- ing theory. 184/ Accounting ACC 1349 Accounting Planning and Control 4Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1340) This course provides an examination of the role of management planning and control systems and problems inherent in their design and use, and defines the process of identifying factors in the design of these systems. ACC 1501 Auditing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1343) Designed for the student who plans to enter the public accounting profession, this course examines audit concepts, standards, and procedures, including the auditor's legal and ethical responsibilities. Emphasis is on concepts rather than procedures. Specific areas covered are auditing standards, auditor's reports, internal control, statistical sampling, EDR and legal liability. ACC 1 505 Internal Auditing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) This course is designed to aid students in under- standing how the internal auditor undertakes a review and appraisal of operations. Study will focus on the internal audit environment, preparation of long-range programs, the performance of preliminary surveys, flowcharting, the development of audit programs, sampling, audit techniques, and reporting. The course is case-study oriented. ACC 1 51 1 i=ederal Income Taxes I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1343 or permission of instructor) This course stresses basic understanding of the federal income tax structure relating to individuals rather than to corporations. Students are required to complete several research cases directed at solving various tax problems. Case studies introduce the student to the current Internal Revenue Code, income tax regulations, and cumulative bulletins. Tax court cases and various private company publications are discussed. ACC 1 51 2 Federal Income Taxes II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1511) This course is a continuation of ACC 151 1 (Federal Income Taxes I), focusing on taxpayers other than individuals and the treatment of those property trans- fers subject to federal, gift, estate, and trust taxes. Tax research is an important element of this course. A major emphasis is given to tax planning considera- tions, especially to gift and death tax consequences. ACC 1521 Advanced Accounting Problems 4Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1343) This course is an in-depth analysis of various ac- counting topics for the student planning a career as a professional accountant. Topics covered are govern- ment and not-for-profit accounting; partnerships; installment sales; consignments; segment and interim reporting; foreign currency accounting; troubled-debt restructurings; and liquidations, estates, and trusts. ACC 1 522 Advanced Accounting for Business Combinations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1 343 or permission of instructor) This course is a comprehensive analysis of the accounting theory and practice associated with cor- porate acquisitions and combinations. Topics include methods of consolidation-elimination of profits on intercompany transactions, purchase versus pooling of interests, and accounting for good will. The course is intended for the serious student preparing for a career as a professional accountant. ACC 1526 Management Accounting 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1349) This course examines the role of the management accountant. Topics include relation between financial and managerial accounting, design and use of ac- counting and control systems, measurement tech- niques and uses, the role of behavior in accounting, performance evaluation, and other topics of current interest. ACC 1 530 Accounting Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) This course examines the process of designing both financial and managerial accounting systems. The approach is conceptual, and the course considers the use of computer technology in designing new systems where computers are appropriate. The course assumes an understanding of accounting processes in both financial and managerial areas. ACC 1531 Contemporary Accounting Problems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1332) A seminar designed to survey some of the important problem areas currently facing the accounting pro- fession. These areas will incorporate asset valuation, price-level adjusted statements, environmental con- siderations, income measurement, and governmental intervention. ACC 1 535 Computers in Accounting and Auditing 4Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1501 or ACC 1505) This course examines the use of computers in ac- counting and auditing. Topics include systems design and applications in accounting, internal control of computer-based systems, computer audit and control guidelines, and EDP audit tools and techniques. Entrepreneurship/ 185 Entrepreneurship ENT 1330 Management of Smaller Enterprises 4Q.H. This is a general management course that focuses upon the strategies and operating problems of smaller, already established business enterprises. The course is designed for individuals who are considering entrepreneurial careers or careers in management, finance, or marketing within the smaller-company environment. Discussion will explore the characteris- tics and urgencies of problems that smaller compa- nies are likely to encounter at different stages in their evolving life cycle, from the postnatal period to the more mature stage. ENT 1344 Opportunity Analysis and Venture Capital 4 Q.H. This course is concerned with the essential tasks performed prior to establishing a new venture. These include finding a suitable business opportunity or developing an idea.for a product or service; analyzing the feasibility of the opportunity or idea; developing a business plan; structuring the venture team; seeking sources of seed capital; and forming a venture action plan for beginning operations. ENT 1352 New Venture Creation: A Career Choice 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing) This course is designed to assist students interested in small business in answering a number Qf important questions through a systematic analysis of their own potentials for entrepreneurial careers: What is involved in starting my own business? What is my own entrepreneurial orientation and commitment? What managerial and behavioral skills do I need for achievement? How can I plan for my personal and entrepreneurial goals? Case discussions, self-assess- ment, goal-setting exercises, guest speakers, and a student-selected project are used. ENT 1358 Small Business Institute Project 8 Q.H. (Prereq. Junior standing; one entrepreneurship course or permission of instructor) The Small Business Institute Reld Project was brought into existence with the cooperation of the Small Business Administration (SBA) and some of its client companies in Greater Boston. A student team is expected to interact with a smaller company helping management to analyze opportunities and problems facing the business, and to develop practical recom- mendations for the company's decision makers. Students are expected to allocate approximately one day per week to the project, including on-site work with the company owner-managers with whom they have been paired and to participate in related research, report preparation, and presentation of results. This real-world experience is blended with occasional class meetings and frequent team meetings with a faculty member to discuss the field work and to explore alternatives. Interim progress reports and a final report are presented to the client company SBA, and the class. ENT 1812 Honors: Risks and Rewards of Entrepreneurship 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participants or permission of instruc- tor) Anxiety and exhilaration run neck and neck through the small business experience. The degree to which these extremes of emotion occur has not been thoroughly studied. So far, research has concentrated on the backgrounds and attributes of entrepreneurs rather than on the psychological and physiological "fallout" from running their companies. The purpose of this honors seminar will be to identify situations and issues that can cause entrepreneurs stress, on the one hand, and satisfaction, on the other. Rnance and Insurance RN 1201 Personal Rnance 4 Q.H. (Not open to College of Business Administration students) * The course focuses on management of the total personal estate: budgeting, savings, insurance, invest- ments, borrowing, taxes. Social Security, pensions, annuities, securities markets, mutual funds, and their integration. RN 1333 Rnancial Institutions and Markets 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) The course aims to provide students an understand- ing of the financial environment faced by a firm as well as the financial institutions serving the economy The course discusses the forces that determine the changes in money and capital markets and explores the implications of changing financial environment for the management of funds in a firm and/or financial institution. RN 1335 Managerial Rnance 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) The objective of the course is to provide students the opportunity to gain knowledge of the advanced tools and concepts used in the management of funds. Topics include inventory and credit policies, risk, capital budgeting, financial structure, cost of capital, dividend policy and valuation of a firm. Overall financial strategy and timing of its implementation are also examined. Specialized topics-mergers and acquisi- tions, financial failure, and financial policy for multi- national firms— may be considered in the course. 1 86 / Finance and Insurance RN 1346 Investment Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438 and MSC 1201) This course offers a broad overview of the concepts, practices, and procedures of investment management. Areas covered include basic security types, security market operations, security analysis (both fundamen- tal and technical) and an introduction to portfolio management. FIN 1438 Introduction to Finance 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ACC 1112 and middler standing) The objective of this course is to acquaint students v\/ith basic processes, principles, tools, and concepts of finance. Topics include financial analysis, financial forecasting, profit planning, budgeting, working cap- ital management, and capital budgeting. The course also covers the basics of financial markets, institu- tions, and sources of supply of different types of funds available to a firm. FIN 1503 Taxes and Financial Decisions 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 105 and middler standing) In this course, the case method is used to discuss a number of financial decisions that are greatly influ- enced by tax considerations, the most important of which are concerned with capital structure, dividend policy acquisition terms, investment policies and liq- uidations. The federal income tax receives primary consideration, but state and foreign taxes are also discussed. FIN 1522 Seminar in Option Markets 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438 and FIN 1333) While puts and calls have been traded for many years, a market for listed options only appeared in 1973. Trading options on exchanges made such activity much easier and opened many more opportunities for both speculation and the protection of security posi- tions. The purpose of this seminar is to explain the basic mechanics of this market, the characteristics of puts and calls, the techniques that may be applied, and current developments in the field. Students will be required to do individual research related to current methodology and concepts. Some knowledge of money and capital markets, as well as corporate finance, is necessary for those taking the course. FIN 1 525 Seminar in Financial Futures 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) This is a seminar in commodity futures markets cen- tered in the area of financial futures, with special emphasis on interest rate futures. The course covers the methods of trading, margins, hedging, spreading futures contracts in treasury bills, commercial paper, treasury bonds, treasury notes, GNMAs, etc. Students prepare a seminar report on. some aspect of the futures market. FIN 1 526 Securities Markets 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) This course aims to analyze the operation of the securities market. Striking a balance between de- scriptions and analysis, the course provides students the opportunity to examine in detail the operation and function of investment bankers, broker-dealers, and securities exchanges. There is a thorough study of the mechanics of cash and margin accounts, trading options, and regulations affecting securities markets. FIN 1 528 Seminar in Finance Theory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438 and FIN 1385) The course involves a discussion of the different theories related to the financial policies of business organizations and an analysis of the contributions of various theorists in finance. It covers topics such as debt capacity, capital budgeting under uncertainty, cost of capital, dividend policy, and the capital asset pricing model. The policy implications, limitations, and underlying assumptions of various theories are incorporated into the course. RN 1531 Long-term Financial Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438 and FIN 1385) This course focuses on several phases of long-term finance. Particular attention is devoted to complex cases dealing with capital budgeting, new financing, and mechanisms (both public and private) used to raise long-term funds. FIN 1 540 Management of Financial Institutions 4Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) This course offers a broad study of the decision- making problems faced by financial institutions such as commercial banks, savings and investment insti- tutions, and finance companies when viewed as com- petitive, profit-seeking business entities. Topics include the nature and scope of the capital markets confronting institutions, specialized problems regarding the sources and uses of funds of financial institutions, the nature of competition, the regulation of financial insti- tutions, and strategic policy planning of financial institutions. FIN 1 544 Bank Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438 and FIN 1323) This course deals with the financial management of commercial banks and thrift institutions. The prob- lems of liquidity and investment management, loan portfolio and capital management, and pricing prob- lems associated with various sources and uses of funds are analyzed in the context of changing eco- nomic and regulatory environment for these institu- tions. The course is conducted through lectures, discussions, and cases. FIN 1 550 Real Estate Finance: Analysis and Investment 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) This course provides students with a comprehensive overview of real estate finance. Factors affecting real estate investment are emphasized. Specific topics covered include: valuation (appraisal) market anal- ysis development, ownership types, short-term finan- cing, mortgage markets, the impact of inflation on real estate investment, and finance and investment strate- gies. The course is designed for students interested in a general overview of real estate finance, as well as I Finance and Insurance / 1 87 those intending to pursue further studies in real estate. Instruction is primarily through readings, lectures, and case discussions. FIN 1552 Entrepreneurial Decision Making in Real Estate 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1 550) This course provides an overview of property acquisi- tion, development, and management from an entre- preneurial perspective. Topics include planning, financing, cost control, and management of con- struction, marketing, and joint ventures. All major land uses are considered. Instruction is primarily through lectures and case discussions. Some class sessions may be devoted to guest speakers from the real estate community. FIN 1 557 Real Estate Finance and Investment Strategies 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1 550) The objective of this course is to provide students the opportunity to acquire know^ledge and skills for decision making in the context of organizational real estate investment strategies. Five general topical areas are covered: 1 ) measurement of risk and yield on real estate debt and equity investments, 2) comparison of the risk and return in real estate investments with other types of investments, 3) traditional and innova- tive financing techniques, 4) management of a real estate portfolio, and 5) development and implemen- tation of real estate investment strategies. Instruction is primarily through lectures, readings, and case discussions. FIN 1562 A Risk Management Approach to Employee Benefit Programs 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) The concept of risk management is employed to develop a framework for a systematic treatment of employee benefit programs. The risks associated with the employee are defined, methods used by an employer to handle these risks are reviewed, and the concept of cost minimization of employee benefit programs is introduced. Private insurance. Blue Cross/Blue Shield, and government programs are viewed as alternative financing mechanisms of em- ployee benefit programs, and the benefits and costs of these institutional arrangements are discussed. FIN 1566 A Risk Management Approach to Property and Casualty Insurance 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) The concepts of risk, uncertainty, risk management, and insurance are introduced. A comprehensive analysis of property and casualty insurance markets and products is presented from a buyer's perspective. Principal emphasis is placed on defining and analyz- ing alternative methods of treating risk in a business enterprise. The course discusses different risk man- agement strategies and analyzes practical situations. FIN 1580 Personal Financial Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) The course places emphasis on the development of personal financial management expertise based on an integrated plan for personal choices in which alternative courses of action are judged by their con- tribution to the attainment of the decision maker's particular set of economic objectives. The overall personal economic plan is the consistent focus of the course and unites such diverse topics as inflation and investment selection, insurance, short- and long-run hedges againstthe purchasing power risk, purchasing assets, etc. The course is decision oriented and attempts to expose students to alternative courses of action and lead them toward a rational solution by developing techniques of estimating the success probabilities of alternative methods. FIN 1 760 International Rnancial Management 4Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) This course introduces students to the international financial environment. Subjects include balance of payments, exchange rates, Eurocurrencies, foreign capital markets, etc. The financial policies and prac- tices of companies involved in multinational opera- tions are considered. Specific topics include capital budgeting; capitalization policies, the use of Euro- currency and Eurobond markets, and foreign ex- change risk management by the international firm. FIN 1 770 Small Business Rnance 4 Q.H. (Prereq. FIN 1438) This course utilizes the basic processes, principles, tools, and concepts of finance within the parameters of a small business to develop a complete financial plan that projects the future circular flow of funds by analyzing and then integrating the impact of both investment decisions (use of funds) and financial decisions (source of funds). FIN 1802 Honors: Modern Portfolio Management 4Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participant or permission of instruc- tor) The course seeks to analyze the methods of selection, revision, and performance measurement of asset port- folios. The student will be exposed to the current and most modern methods of asset portfolio building used in business today The concept of an efficient frontier of assets in the risk-return space will be presented and evaluated. The efficient frontier theory is used to identify the gains available from diversifica- tion and to select those securities or assets that best contribute to the goals of the portfolio. Included in the course is a simulated equity fund management project. An efficient portfolio-building software package is available to the students to help them in their analysis. Each student must initially select a number of equity securities to satisfy the stated objectives of his or her fund. At the end of the course the student must prepare and present an annual report evaluating the portfolio's construction and performance, with rec- ommendations for revision. The course requires the student to bring a core knowledge in the areas of statistical analysis, accounting methods, and basic finance theories. 188 / Human Resources Management FIN 1803 Honors: Seminar in Rnance Theory (Prereq. Participant in Honors Program only) See Course Description for FIN 1528. 4Q.H. Human Resources Management HRM 1332 People and Productivity: Human Resources Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1432) This course is designed to help students develop understanding of contemporary issues in human resource management. Problems posed by changing work patterns, labor force characteristics, union activities, and government policies are examined. Organizational experiments such as worker participa- tion, job enlargement, and group incentives are discussed and evaluated from a managerial per- spective. HRM 1340 Personnel Administration 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course explores basic traditional personnel func- tions, with an emphasis on the role of the personnel specialist. Functions include recruitment, selection, placement, training, and development of employees, as well as reward systems such as money and promo- tions. The recent challenge of new regulatory systems, such as affirmative action and occupational safety and health, on employment planning will be covered. HRM 1345 Contemporary Labor Issues 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) The course provides a study of current issues dealing with labor in its broadest sense. Labor unions and manpower institutions as well as the emerging devel- opment and training problems motivated by un- employment, poverty, and changing work patterns are discussed. Recent legislation dealing with the employ- ment relationship is reviewed. HRM 1348 Reward Systems: Wage, Salary, and Benefits Administration 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course examines one of the major functions of personnel administration— compensation manage- ment—and its part in the overall personnel programs of the organization. The analysis of reward systems as supportive mechanisms of management and the for- mulation of compensation policy and implementation of compensation systems are developed through simulation exercises and group projects, as well as lectures and cases. HRM 1349 Selection and Assessment of Employees 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1432) The course examines three influences of employee selection and testing: first, the legal aspect of selection, where the greatest uncertainty is found; second, the influence of industrial psychology on selection and decision-making techniques; and third, the area of personnel practices itself, that is, the methods employ- ers find effective in coping with legal requirements. Basic issues and procedures such as EEO, decision strategies, and the utility and evaluation of selection and appraisal systems will be covered. HRM 1431 Complex Organizations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) The course examines the structure and dynamics of the complex organization. Focus is on the design of the organization and its basic subsystems (reward, control, selection, development). Students have the opportunity to explore how organizational structures help shape human behavior. Emphasis is on under- standing the interrelations among organizational struc- tures, tasks, and individual characteristics within the context of a changing environment HRM 1432 Organization Behavior 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) This course explores the effects of individual, inter- personal, group, and leadership factors on human behavior. Managerial applications of behavioral and social science concepts are also explored, including job design, job satisfaction, performance appraisal, supervision, career dynamics, and organizational change. Emphasis is placed on helping the student develop skills in dealing with the human side of enterprise. HRM 1 501 Organizational Structure and Process 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1432 and HRM 1431) An examination of various schools of management thought, including the classical, scientific manage- ment, human relations, and contingency approaches to management. This course also explores organi- zational concepts developed from research on organ- izations including: Interdependence, Uncertainty Coordination and Differentiation-Integration. Readings and research findings will be applied to case examples of complex organizations. HRM 1 504 Strategies of Organizational Changes 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course focuses on three basic areas: (1) organ- izations as stable systems that naturally resist both planned and unplanned change; (2) organizations as dynamic systems that continuously respond to both internal and external pressures for change; and (3) strategies and techniques for designing, implementing, and managing change. The role of the change agent will be discussed in this context. Human Resources Management/ 189 HRM 1512 Motivation and Control 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course provides an extensive analysis of various theories of motivation, including Herzberg's two-fac- tor theory, expectancy theory, learning theory, need theory (h/lcClelland), and competence motivation. This course also considers the behavioral implications of various organizational systems of measuring and con- trolling operations. HRM 1515 Strategic Planning and Reward Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1432) A study of the process of strategic planning with an emphasis on problems in planning system imple- mentation. The importance of developing reward sys- tems that recognize management performance in strategic planning will be explored. Corporate plan- ning and reward systems in both the United States and Japan will be studied. Cases, readings, and a term paper will be used. HRM 1 51 9 Leadership 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course offers a study of the leadership function in a variety of organizational settings. Using a contingency approach, this course explores a range of possible leadership behaviors, relating the appropriateness of a particular style to a number of situational factors. Readings provide an opportunity to explore several contingency theories of leadership; cases allow for the application of these models; and videotaped role playing and self-assessment techniques permit the student to evaluate his/her own leadership style. HRM 1 520 The Changing Workplace: An On-Site View of Industrialization 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) America, and New England in particular, is noted as the place where the genius of industrial innovators and managers brought the industrial revolution to its first real flowering. This course deals in depth with the interactions of technical, economic, social, and man- agerial factors as they evolved in forming industrial New England. Emphasis is on the nineteenth century although forces will be traced from colonial New England to the present. Focus is on the participants in this dynamic free enterprise process— the managers and workers— and the settings in which they worked and lived. The seminar format includes on-site studies of factory settings, mill reconstructions, museums, and the communities in which developments took place. The seminar also includes films, lectures, and individual tutorials. Each student is required to com- plete a research project. HRM 1 539 Managing Careers 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course examines the tools for both self-as- sessment (investigating one's skills, abilities, needs, values, and interests) and career exploration (deter- mining the nature of and requirements for entering and succeeding in various career fields). The goal of the course is to help students develop an individualized plan of action that summarizes a wide variety of data indicating an individual's present status and career goals, and the means by which to bridge the gap. HRM 1542 Women in Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) This course explores contemporary worklife problems for both men and women. Topics include: sex role stereotyping-its origins and impact in organizational settings; sexual harassment and affirmative action; dual career couples and their implications for organ- izational design; sex differences in leadership and power HRM 1 581 Managerial Skills Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course offers a study of the nature of managerial work focusing on three key managerial roles— inter- personal, informational, and decisional. Behavioral determinants of administrative effectiveness are ex- amined with an emphasis on the practical implica- tions of and personal orientations to those key man- agerial roles. HRM 1583 Seminar in Collective Bargaining 4Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) The course focuses on the organization, negotiation, and administration of collective-bargaining relations between management and unions in different indus- tries, services, and levels of government. Simulations of actual bargaining and an arbitration exercise are also a part of the course. HRM 1597 4Q.H (Prereq. HRM 1332 or HRM 1432) This course examines the methods that managers use to determine, evaluate, and improve performance. A key focus is on performance appraisals as a man- agement tool. Other topics covered include goal setting, performance planning, and management-by- objective (MBO). HRM 1 760 International Labor Relations Systems 4Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course analyzes the labor relations systems of selected countries in comparison with that of the United States. The political, cultural, and economic forces that shaped these systems are also studied. Special attention will be given to such international institutions as multinational companies and the EEC. There will be cases, readings, and projects assigned. HRM 1762 International Human Resources Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Junior standing) This course covers basic issues in human resources management relevant to managing in international and cross-cultural environments. Topics include selection and training of personnel for work in multi- cultural environments, managing the international employee in the United States and abroad, cross- cultural communication, international environments. 190 / International Business Administration special issues of concern to small business, and change in multinational companies. HRM 1811 Honors: Designing Innovative Organizations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participant or permission of instruc- tor) This course focuses on how high-technology firms must be designed and managed to perform effectively and to develop and bring new products to market. Students will be involved in: 1) the study of literature pertaining to these issues; 2) the collection of data on the above issues by interviewing members of high- technology firms and administering questionnaires; 3) analysis of the data in an attempt to discover how effective firms function; and 4) writing of a report based on their study Students will thus be exposed to the techniques and requirements of research, have an opportunity to deal with executives and managers in high-technology firms, and be asked to critically evaluate new, as well as existing, literature on the subject of organization design and theory HRM 1818 Women in Managerial Careers 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participants or permission of instruc- tor) This course offers an opportunity for both male and female students to explore the barriers that block women's advancement in management. Perspectives which emphasize the interaction of the individual with the organizational environment will be emphasized. Specific topics include: mentor-protege relationships; the fate of tokens; power through alliances; the trials of multicommitment; the impact of socialization; entrepreneurship and women. The course will culmi- nate in a team research project and oral presentation. HRM 1823 Human Resources Information Systems 4Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1332) This course explores the conversion of computer processing and data management systems methods to personnel applications such as manpower plan- ning, government report generation, report genera- tion, skills inventory and career development, payroll, and project planning. The basic techniques of using HRIS to provide timely economical information for managerial decision making are covered, including systems analysis (e.g. understanding user objectives and environment, data collection, data organization, system design, testing, system implementation, and evaluation). International Business Administration INB 1338 Introduction to International Business 4Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) This focuses on the cultural, economic, and political aspects of domestic and foreign environments and their effect on the international operations of busi- ness firms. Topics covered include 1) the principles; patterns, and potential of international trade and investments; 2) the development of management strat- egies for international businesses; and 3) the organ- ization and management of the firm's international operations. INB 1352 Seminar in International Business 4Q.H. (Prereq. INT 1338) This course applies the concepts and skills acquired in other international and domestic courses to the solution of managerial problems. It focuses on the task of solving significant managerial problems in international and foreign cultural contexts. Students' reports form a major part of this course and are expected to concentrate either on a functional busi- ness area related to international operations or on analyses of market opportunities and methods of entry in a foreign environment. Other instructional vehicles include case analyses and discussions of current issues. INB 1501 Comparative International Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) The objective of this course is to help to develop the student's conceptual and analytical abilities to: 1) identify and analyze management systems in various national settings and 2) understand the impact of economic, social, political, and cultural variables on management systems. INB 1652 London Business Seminar 4 Q.H. The special focus of this course is the development of multinational business in Europe and its effect on the economies of the EEC and the United States of America. Additionally the course will compare and contrast the marketing approaches of companies within two seemingly similar trading environments: the United Kingdom and the United States. Seminar topics include: impact of international integration on European business; effectiveness of multinational joint ventures; multinational marketing management; UK/ USA comparative marketing strategies; growth and power of the retailer; branding, own label, generics- the battle for supremacy. Case studies in this seminar are based on developing an international marketing program. INB 1731 Cultural Aspects of International Business 4 Q.H. Using a managerial perspective, this course will cover issues that arise when a firm moves from its home country to a host country that may have a different national culture. Although it will usually take the per- spective of the U.S.-based firm that operates abroad, it will spend some time on what happens to other national firms operating in the United States and in third country environments. The way in which "corpo- rate culture" evolves in the context of national culture and the impact on managers will be a central issue. Management/ 191 Management MGT 1115 Introduction to Business 4 Q.H. This course focuses on the business organization as a system of interrelated functions and operations, the interactions between the organization and its envi- ronment, and the role of management in business organizations. MGT 1 345 Legal Aspects of Business 4 Q.H. This course examines the legal aspects of business transactions and business relationships involving con- tracts; sales, bulk transfers, and secured transactions under the Uniform Commercial Code; principal and agency; and suretyship and guaranty. MGT 1 446 Business and Society 4 Q.H. {Prereq. HRtvl 1431 and junior standing) This course offers an analysis of environmental influences-economic, legal, technical, social, cultural, and ethical-affecting the corporation. The focus is on managerial decision making and relieving the tensions generated by these external factors. MGT 1 450 Business Policy 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRM 1431) This course focuses on corporate strategy and its elements, including an analysis of the company its resources, opportunities, environment, and decision makers. Emphasis is on decision making and imple- mentation of strategy while operating a company in the context of a business simulation. MGT 1571 The Law of Business Organizations and Commercial Paper 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MGT 1345) This course is an introduction to the legal aspects of the typical forms of business organizations, part- nerships, corporations, and the rights, responsibili- ties, and liabilities involved. The course also covers the law governing commercial paper under the Uni- form Commercial Code, and the Bankruptcy Reform Act of 1978. MGT 1 572 Law of Wills, Trusts, and Estates 4 Q.H. Topics include requirements of valid will, claims of and against estates; the administration of estates, both formal and informal; essential elements for the creation of a trust; kinds of trusts, including inter vivos and testamentary trusts; the rights, responsi- bilities, and liabilities of trustees; and the rights of beneficiaries. MGT 1 573 Bulk Sales and Bankruptcy 4 Q.H. In examining bulk transfers, a detailed study is made of the Uniform Commercial Code, Article 6; the need of the transferor to give to the transferee a sworn list of all his creditors; the giving of notice to the listed creditors; the contents of the notice, what creditors are protected; and the legal consequences of failure to comply with the Code. The bankruptcy aspects of the course deal with both voluntary and involuntary bankrupts; the appointment and duties of the trustee; provable and dischargeable debts; priority of debts; discharge and acts that bar a discharge. MGT 1 574 Law in Society 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) The course is designed to provide students the opportunity to acquire a broad view of their legal rights, obligations, and responsibilities in their rela- tions with others and with the state. Includes study of torts such as assault and battery trespass, negli- gence, slander, libel, and deceit; and crimes such as homicide, assault and battery, robbery arson, larceny, and burglary. MGT 1591 Independent Study 1 Q.H. For a student who has received approval of a proposal to undertake independent study in lieu of any course required in the various concentrations. Each teaching area considers proposals presented by students to its Independent Studies Committee for evaluation and approval. Every proposal requires a detailed outline of the objectives and plan of study and must be accompanied by a supporting statement from the supervising faculty member under whose direction the study will take place. A copy of the final report prepared by the student will be presented to the appropriate Independent Studies Committee. Further information about the Independent Studies Program can be obtained from area coordinators. MGT 1 592 Independent Study 2 Q.H. Same as MGT 1591 MGT 1 593 Independent Study 3 Q.H. Same as MGT 1591 MGT 1594, MGT 1595, MGT 1596, MGT 1597 Independent Study 4 Q.H. Same as MGT 1591 MGT 1 720 Labor Law 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) The purpose of this course is to help acquaint the student with the many constitutional and legal prob- lems involved in labor organizing, industrial relations, labor negotiations, labor contract enforcement, and dispute resolution. Cases are studied for the legal principles underlying the common law, state and fed- eral laws, and the constitutional questions of power and authority. The Sherman Act, Clayton Act, Norris- LaGuardia Act, and Labor Management Relations Act are considered. MGT 1 808 Honors: Seminar on the Management of Innovation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participant or permission of instruc- tor) The management of technological innovation is of critical importance to American companies as they face increasing worldwide competition. Knowledge in the area is advancing rapidly and incorporates work from several disciplines, including strategy market- ing, organizational behavior, and finance. This course 1 92 / Management will be run as a research seminar Students will be responsible for identifying relevant topics in tfie man- agement of innovation and completing a research study. Students can work either individually or in small groups on the research topic they define. Students will be required to submit a research pro- posal, a progress report at mid-quarter, and a final paper and presentation. MGT 1 809 Honors: Public Policy in Private Enterprise: An Evaluation of Government 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participant or permission of instruc- tor) The course will address the major forms of regulation from classic industry— specific regulation and anti- trust to socially motivated regulation such as equal employment opportunity and environmental protec- tion. The goal of the course is to increase students' understanding of the regulatory arena and to analyze the regulatory function. The course will culminate in an individual term research project and an oral pres- entation. MGT 1810 Honors: The Japanese Company: A Study in Comparative Management , 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participants or permission of instruc- tor) This course will compare the Japanese company with the American company Study includes the historical and political-social-economic contexts in which the Japanese company operates. A research project requiring library and field research is required. The course probes the management practices of U.S.- based companies owned and operated by Japanese corporations, the results of American firms that have tried to adopt a Japanese model for U.S. operations and the reality and myth of "Japan, Inc." MGT 1813 Honors: Regulation and Its Reform- An Evaluation of Government Regulation of Business Honors Course 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participants or permission of instruc- tor) Why are airline fares behaving so erratically? What are the potential effects on telephone prices and services since the ATT breakup? What is the "bubble policy" and how will it help the environment? These are just a few of the questions that will be addressed in this course through current readings and informal class discussions. What should a student take away from this course? Rrst, he or she should have an increased understanding of regulatory theory and structure, but more importantly he or she should begin to compre- hend how strong governmental influences have af- fected the present business environment and how the government business relationship may change in the future. MGT 1814 Honors: Corporate Strategy 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participants or permission of instruc- tor) This course will deal with establishing corporate strat- egies and policies at the top level. Each of several small teams of students will be expected to study a corporation, its competitors, and its industry; describe its strategic behavior; and suggest ways in which its strategy could be improved. Drawing on his experi- ence as a CEO, corporate director, and consultant, the instructor will discuss key strategic issues with the class and assist them in analyzing and meeting offi- cials of the firms they choose to study. One term paper and no examinations. Also see course ENG 1381, Writing for the Profes- sions: Business Administration. MGT 1815 Honors: Managerial Implications of and Research Opportunities in Business and Society 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honor participants or permission of instruc- tor) This seminar will explore the managerial implications of the shifting relationships between business, gov- ernment, and society. As students become familiar with these relationships through readings and infor- mation supplied by guest speakers, they will be required to develop their own group research project. These projects will allow the students to examine the relationships on a first-hand basis in a field setting. Grading will be based on the research proposal, an interim report, and the completed project. MGT 1816 Honors: Designing and Managing Effective Organization 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honor participants or permission of instruc- tor) This course is designed to give students hands-on experience in designing and managing an organi- zation. The course will focus on the relationships among the structure, tasks, and people in an orga- nization by having the students design and operate an organization. Students will also have an opportunity to compare the organization they have created with other business organizations. MGT 1819 Honors: Seminar in Research 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC1 201) This seminar focuses on the definition of research in the context of the business environment, research methodologies, and the student's attempt at research through a term project. f\/lethodological issues include the formulation of concepts, hypotheses, and theories; the design of research projects; data collection; data analysis; and report writing. The term project involves investigation of a subject of interest to the student. The projects are intended to serve as prototypes of honors thesis. MGT 1 820 Independent Study (Honors) 4 Q.H. Directed study toward fulfillment of Honors Program requirements. Open only to students who have been accepted into the Honors Program. Procedures for arranging the Honors Independent Study are the same as those for MGT 1 594. MGT 1821 Honors: The Computer Software Industry-Strategy and Management 4 Q.H. This course is designed to introduce participants to the evolving structure and strategy of the computer Marketing/ 193 software industry. Within the broad industry, the fast- est-growing segments are custom systems and pack- aged software. The course will begin by explaining how environmental factors have led to the importance of packaged software, and go on to provide cases and readings that help the student to understand and analyze management policies and problems in this industry. MGT 1 891 Honors Thesis in Progress 0 Q.H, MGT 1 892 Honors Thesis 8 Q.H. MGT 1 893 Honors Thesis in Progress 0 Q.H. MGT 1 894 Honors Thesis 1 2 Q.H. Marketing 4Q.H. MKT1331 Marketing Management (Prereq. MKT1435) This course is designed to provide training in mar- keting decision making. Case studies simulating actual business settings are used to help students develop analytical abilities and sharpen their communications skills. Topics covered range from techniques used to analyze a market to the development of a total market- ing strategy (product policy pricing policy promotion policy and distribution policy). MKT 1 341 Marketing Research 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1331) This course focuses on the survey research process and the analysis of data using "canned" computer programming routines. Among the topics covered are: 1) problem definition, 2) research design, 3) sampling techniques, 4) questionnaire development, 5) data collection methods, and 6) data analysis. Students are expected to work on group projects with participating firms. No previous computer exper- ience required. MKT 1 351 Competitive Strategy 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1331) A capstone marketing course, required of all students with a marketing concentration. The focus is on the formulation of marketing strategy at a policy level and its implementation in a dynamic environment. MKT 1 435 introduction to Marketing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) This course consists of lectures, readings and small- group discussions on the role of marketing in con- temporary society, in the business enterprises, and in the nonprofit organization. Consideration is given to the planning, operation, and evaluation of marketing and promotional efforts necessary to the effective marketing of consumer and industrial products and services in both profit and nonprofit organizations. MKT 1 501 Introduction to Retailing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) This course explores the range of retail firms that comprise the retailing industry, from large mass mer- chandisers to small specialty outlets. The functions, practices, and organizations of various store types are examined. Current issues, career opportunities, the environment of retailing and retailing's role in the economy are among topics considered. MKT 1503 Retail Merchandising and Control 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1 435 or permission of instructor) This course examines the concepts and techniques of store operations and merchandise management. Topics such as calculating and planning markups and markdowns, pricing, inventory control, stock turn, open-to-buy profitability analysis, and expense con- trol are considered. MKT 1 507 Retail Strategies and Problems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1435; junior or senior standing or per- mission of instructor) This course considers strategic and policy decisions of major retail enterprises engaged in food, apparel, and general merchandise distribution. The evolution of retail institutions is analyzed along with the char- acteristics of and prospects for new store types. MKT 1512 Marketing for Nonprofit Organizations 4Q.H. (Prereq. Middler standing) This course examines the unique characteristics of marketing in public and nonprofit enterprises. It aims to expand the scope of marketing management con- cepts beyond the traditional setting of business. Par- ticular attention is paid to the basic decision-making differences between public and private firms. The course involves case analysis, assigned readings, and a group project. MKT 1 51 5 Marketing in the Service Sector 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1435) The course provides a basic treatment of methods and techniques for marketing in the service sector, which includes sports, recreation, public service, banking, insurance, and hotels. In addition to the principles covered, a number of descriptive studies will be analyzed covering the application of such marketing principles in key service areas. MKT 1 523 Advertising Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1331) This course focuses on the management of the advertising function in relation to a firm's overall mar- keting objectives. The course approaches the subject from the perspective of the user of advertising (e.g., product manager, marketing manager). Case studies and text material are used to help the student develop decision-making skills. 194 / Management Science MKT 1 531 Sales Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT1331) This course is designed to help the student develop decision-making skills necessary for both building and maintaining an effective sales organization. Cases and readings are used to examine the strategic and operating problems of the sales manager Major topic areas include the selling function, sales management at the field level, and the sales executive. MKT 1 536 Brand Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1331) This course focuses upon the management and development of brand strategies as well as the man- agement of the product mix in the multi-product firm. Topics include evaluating and planning new consumer product introductions, identifying and screening new product opportunities, evaluating market performance, segmenting the product/market, and managing the product line. MKT 1 540 Marketing Channels 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1435 or permission of instructor and junior or senior standing) This course studies marketing structures and insti- tutions: their evolution, functions, interrelations, and the management of their role in the marketing process. MKT 1 542 industrial Marketing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1331) This course examines the marketing of products where business firms are the potential customers. Upper- class elective, open to juniors and seniors. MKT 1 545 New Product Development 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MGT 1450) For most firms, coping with the problems of envi- ronmental change through modification of the prod- uct line is both vital and difficult. This seminar is concerned primarily with the examination and anal- ysis of the problems firms face in directing and managing their new product development activities. MKT 1 553 Foundations of Consumer Behavior 4Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1331) This course is concerned with helping students develop an understanding of consumer attitudes and behavior processes as the basis of the design of marketing problems. Consideration is given to eco- nomic and behavioral models of consumer behavior and to underlying behavioral theories and concepts. MKT 1560 Marketing Information and Decision 4Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1331 or junior or senior standing or permission of instructor) This course considers state-of-the-art marketing information systems and computer-based business aids. Their applicability to various marketing man- agement situations is explored. "Hands-on" experi- ence is provided through the use of actual business case studies. MKT 1 573 Workshop in Negotiations 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Junior or senior standing) The objective of this course is to aid students in improving their understanding of the negotiations process and their ability to plan and conduct negotia- tions effectively Class activities involve readings, lectures, and discussions, as well as numerous case discussions and live and videotaped role-play negoti- ation exercises. MKT 1580 Quantitative Methods in Marketing 4Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1201) This course focuses on statistical methods and tech- niques commonly used in the analysis and interpre- tation of survey and experimental data. "Canned" computer programs will be used extensively to illus- trate the applicability of the methods discussed. No previous computer experience required. MKT 1 760 International Marketing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MKT 1435) This course is designed to help familiarize the student with those aspects of marketing that are unique to international business within the framework of tra- ditional functional areas of marketing. The focus is on the environment and the modifications of marketing concepts and practices necessitated by environmental differences. Topics include cultural dynamics in inter- national markets, political and legal environmental constraints, educational and economic constraints, international marketing research, international mar- keting institutions, and marketing practices abroad. MKT 1805 Honors: Marketing and Public Policy 4Q.H. This course consists of an examination of major public policy issues of concern to marketers. These issues include advertising substantiation, unfair and decep- tive advertising, product defects, advertising to child- ren, advertising of alcoholic beverages and tobacco products, and pricing practices. The course will draw heavily on the past and present activities of the Federal Trade Commission and will use staff reports, judges' reports, commission decisions, as well as the evidence provided by companies in response to FTC actions. Management Science MSC 1199 Introduction: Quantitative Methods in Business 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1114) A model is a simplified representation or abstraction of reality. The focus of this course is on the repre- sentation of systems or managerial problems in the form of mathematical models and their application to problem solving in business. Criteria for selecting an appropriate model description are discussed and specific techniques for development examined, in- Management Science / 1 95 eluding linear programming, differential calculus, and the use of descriptive statistics. MSC 1 200 Business Statistics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC1199) Statistics is a methodology concerned with data col- lection, analysis, and interpretation. Information gen- erated by statistical methods is used for analyzing decisions in the face of uncertainty. This course intro- duces fundamental concepts and methodology of probability, probability distribution, Bayesian revisions, estimation, and hypothesis testing. MSC 1 201 Business Statistics II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1 200) Continuation of MSC 1 200. Topics include chi-square tests, simple and multiple regression-correlation analysis, and elementary concepts of decision theory MSC 1226 Introduction to Data Processing 4 Q.H. This course is designed to introduce the business student to those aspects of modern data processing techniques vital to his/her future job performance. During the first part of the course the student will have the opportunity to learn to program in the BASIC language on the University's VAX 1 1 /780 time-sharing system. The second part of the course deals with the history of data processing, computer hardware and software, and an overview of the creation and opera- tion of management information systems. MSC 1433 Quantitative Models in Business 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1201) A model is a simplified representation or abstraction of reality. The focus of this course is on the con- struction of appropriate mathematical models for man- agerial decision-making problems. Criteria for select- ing various stochastic and deterministic models are discussed. Specific topics included are decision trees, decision analysis, linear programming, and simulation. MSC 1441 Operations Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1201) Operations Management is concerned with the pro- ductive system of an enterprise whereby inputs of technology materials, personnel, and information are transformed into useful goods and/or services. The principal objective of this course is to introduce the student to the types of problems and issues encoun- tered by the operations manager Various models and techniques will be discussed, but the emphasis is on problem formulation and managerial implications. MSC 1501 Purchasing and Materials Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1441) Concerned with decisions related to the flow of materials from supplier to point of use. Special emphasis on problems related to purchasing, includ- ing negotiation, value analysis, supplier selection, etc. While greater emphasis is placed on materials man- agement in manufacturing organizations, nonprofit and nonmanufacturing concerns are also included. Instructor applies latest research in field gleaned from projects sponsored by the National Association of Purchasing Management and the American Production and Inventory Control Society. MSC 1511 Operations Planning and Control 4Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1441) This course focuses on the planning and control necessary for an enterprise to respond to customer demand. Specific topics include the design of the planning and control system, inventory planning and control, forecasting for operations planning, and operations scheduling. MSC 1523 Production Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1441) A continuation of MSC 1 441 . MSC 1553 Decision Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1201) This course focuses on the analysis of decision mak- ing with particular emphasis on realistic problems under uncertainty. The course aims to help improve the student's ability to make better decisions through a careful consideration of alternative courses of action and their consequences, relevant objectives, and the element of risk. Topics include the basic components of decision problems, the concepts of risk and utility, decision trees, and value of information and multi- criteria decision making. MSC 1 562 End User Computing 4 Q.H. An overview of the large and rapidly growing collec- tion of software geared towards the needs of the nontechnical end user Topical coverage will include discussion of various software packages (such as spread sheets, data bases, and graphics) for use on both mainframe and personal computers. MSC 1 564 High-Technology Operations Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1441) High-technology industries are usually characterized by greater degrees of innovation and faster rates of obsolescence of products and capital equipment than other industries. In addition, they are supported by manufacturing operations that are at the early phases of the learning curve. This course deals with the importance of these factors, and the application of the tools and techniques of operations management to firms operating in a high-technology environment. It is recommended for students interested in careers in high-technology manufacturing industries and also for those who analyze the manufacturing potential of high-technology firms, such as analysts for venture capitalists, and consultants. MSC 1571 Management Information Systems 4Q.H. (Prereq. MSC 1427 and junior standing) This course will examine the design, implementation and operation of management information systems (MIS), and those characteristics of MIS that have the greatest impact on the effectiveness and efficiency of business organizations. Emphasis will be placed on computer-based systems that support managerial 1 96 / Transportation decision making, planning, and control. The course will include a computer project using a data base management system. MSC 1821 Honors: Business Data Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participant or permission of instruc- tor) One activity that every organization has to face is making decisions. Data analysis is a valuable input to such decision making. This course v^^ill examine various situations in decision making when data analysis can be helpful. This will involve both short- term and long-term forecasting problems. It will also examine the issue of causal modeling through a regression type of model. MSC 1822 Honors: Decision Analysis with Multiple Objectives 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Honors participant or permission of instruc- tor) This course examines normatively oriented ap- proaches to decision making with multiple conflicting objectives. Topics include the identification of deci- sion criteria, courses of action and their conse- quences, assessment of risk and uncertainty, mul- tiattribute preference models and utility assessment through tradeoff analysis, nondominated decision alternatives, "satisficing," and other approaches. Dis- cussions will include assigned case problems and a term project to be completed by each student. MSC 1823 Honors: Managerial Applications of Artificial intelligence 4 Q.H. Artificial intelligence is currently being brought into the commercial limelight after twenty-five years of basic research and application to proWems in the fields of medicine, engineering, and the basic sci- ences. This course focuses upon existing and ex- pected managerial applications in a variety of in- dustries. It will include readings from relevant litera- ture, guest lecturer presentations, and site visits. In addition, student teams will attempt to develop proto- typical expert systems for specific managerial decision making problems in actual field settings. MSC 1824 Honors: Micro-Computer Models for Operations Management 4 Q.H. The course will focus on the application of and experimentation with operations management models developed for use on microcomputers. The topics include: forecasting, inventory management, materials requirements planning, project scheduling, resource allocation in a capacity constrained operating system, and, if time permits, one or two additional OM models. The course will include an introduction to each model followed by practical application using a case study Each case is structured so as to require use of the microcomputer to evaluate alternative solutions. It is possible that, instead of case studies, student teams apply two or more of the models to specific, existing problems In industry. Transportation TRN 1333 Principles of Transportation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ECN 1 105 and middler standing) Topics include the political, social, and economic functions of transportation; development and struc- ture of the domestic transportation system; the nature of government regulation and promotion of the several modes. 4 Q.H. (Prereq. TRN 1333) This course provides an overview of the regulatory process and its impact on the domestic transpor- tation system; critical examination of topical policy issues that confront carriers, shippers, and the agen- cies of regulation. TRN 1344 Physical Distribution Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Junior standing) This course is concerned with movement, distribu- tion, and control of raw material and finished goods flows. Examination of the importance of inventory control, scheduling, warehousing, and transportation in the design and operation of distribution systems. TRN 1353 Seminar in Transportation and Distribution 4 Q.H. (Prereq. TRN 1353 and TRN 1337) This is a discussion- and research-oriented course that focuses on a limited number of advanced trans- portation and distribution topics. Included is inter- action with business and government through indi- vidual research on the topic chosen for presentation by the student. Also see course MGT 1594 for Independent Study TRN 1514 Carrier Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. TRN 1333) This course examines the transportation system from the carrier's viewpoint; managerial response to a heavily regulated and rapidly expanding environment; focus on carrier decision making involving routes, scheduling, financing, and pricing of services. TRN 1 528 Urban Transportation 4 Q.H. This course focuses on the movement of people and freight in and around metropolitan areas. Study includes a management approach to the planning, implementation, and operation of mass transit systems. Interrelations of transit with other urban programs, the atito mode, and the government/public sector will be discussed. TRN 1 545 Air Transportation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. TRN 1333) The course offers a managerial perspective on eco- nomics and regulation of aviation.The course probes aspects of commercial aviation, passenger and cargo, transportation, and key areas of general aviation. Counseling Psychology, Rehabilitation, and Special Education / 197 TRN 1 721 Transportation Labor 4 Q.H. (Prereq.TRN 1333) This course focuses on the significance of the labor component in the transportation industries. Attention is devoted to trends in empioyee compensation, pro- ductivity, and bargaining patterns. Also examined are the role of government in this area and the impact of transportation labor on shippers, carriers, and consumers. TRN 1 760 International Transportation and Distribution Management 4 Q.H. This course examines the present and future status of United States and world ocean and air transportation in international trade and development. The economic, regulatory, financial, and operating characteristics of these forms of carriage are examined w/ith primary emphasis given to their impact on international trade patterns. Other topics include government promotion, subsidy and technological innovation. Counseling Psychology, Rehabilitation, and Special Education CRS 1030 Introduction to Emotional Disturbances in Children 4 Q.H. Review of emotional processes that interfere with learning behavior and a study of approaches used to deal with behavioral disorders. Emphasis is on class- room management techniques, use of consultation, and parent-teacher interaction. CRS 1200 Introduction to Special Education 4Q.H. A survey of the characteristics and the social, emo- tional, and educational adjustment of special-needs individuals. The effects of society's attitudes, the individual's own attitude toward the handicap, and the effect of the handicap itself are evaluated. Current legislation will be reviewed. CRS 1300 Introduction to Learning Disabilities 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CRS 1 200) This course surveys behavioral characteristics of children who present specific deficits in perceptual, integrative, or expressive processes that impair learn- ing efficiency Students are expected to work to develop competencies in diagnosing curriculum mate- rials and teaching methods. CRS 1301 Diagnostics in Special Education 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CRS 1200 and CRS 1300) Students should work to develop competence in 1) observing, recording, and analyzing children's be- havior and learning environments, including contin- uous measurement and informal assessment of gen- eral, specific, and behavioral learning needs; and 2) techniques of formal assessment of general, specific, and behavioral learning needs. CRS 1302 Methods and Materials of Teaching in Special Education 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CRS 1200, CRS 1300, CRS 1301, or senior status) Course instruction will focus on the following areas: 1 ) development and implementation of individualized educational plans, including task analysis, adaptation and selection of materials, strategies in applied class- room management techniques; and 2) adaptation and selection of materials and strategies in language arts, mathematics, and perceptual-motor skills. CRS 1304 Socio-Psycho Dynamics of Family Life 4Q.H. An introduction to and survey of the internal and external dynamics of family life. The significance of such dynamics to the mental health of the special- needs child will be examined. The approaches to working with parents and the school-home relation- ships, as well as the effects of disability on the family are explored. CRS 1305 Psychology of the Mentally Retarded 4 Q.H. Analysis of the etiology, nature, and needs of the retarded individual, emphasizing cognitive and psy- chosocial development. Implications of these char- acteristics for life-span management are explored in conjunction with parental and community attitudes and involvement. CRS 1306 introduction to Rehabilitation 4 Q.H. Overview of and orientation to the field of rehabili- tation, including its historical development, psycho- logical implications, and sociological dimensions. Special attention is paid to rehabilitation of specific disability groups such as the physically disabled, emotionally disturbed, mentally retarded, alcoholic, drug dependent, and public offender CRS 1310 Intervention Strategies for the Human Services 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1 302; ED 1 1 02 and ED 1 1 03 or PSY 1 1 1 1 and PSY 1 1 1 2; SPC 1 338 or SPC 1 330; ED 1 301 or ED 1317; PSY 1272; PSY 1373) Introduction to the wide range of skills used in work- ing with clients in the various helping professions, e.g., counseling (individual and group), advocacy rehabilitation, community organizing, income main- tenance, etc. Taught primarily through role playing, simulations, and interviews with practicing profes- sionals; also readings, but no fieldwork requirement. Intended as preparation for more specialized courses. Required for Human Services majors but open to other students with appropriate backgrounds. CRS 1314 Introduction to Group Counseling 4Q.H. This course provides a foundational exposure to the theory and skills of group counseling as it is practiced in various human service settings. Topics cover devel- 198 / Department of Education opmental stages of counseling groups: approaches to leadership style, and strategies for starting, main- taining, and terminating the counseling group. The course includes an opportunity for students to practice rudimentary skills of leadership of counseling groups and to become involved in focused group process activities. CRS 1311 Case Management: Diagnosis and Treatment 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SOC 1 1 00 or ED 1 1 00; ED 1 1 02-ED 1 1 03 or PSY 1 1 1 1 -PSY 1112; SOC 1 240; ED 1 302) The course offers an introduction to the basic theory and skills of managing client's treatment programs in a variety of institutional settings. Students receive training to identify the components of a psychosocial assessment, examine commonly used techniques of planned service delivery and resource coordination, and review the diverse entitlements that are available to clients of diverse needs and backgrounds. Much of the instruction will occur in a seminar-like format. CRS 1312 Introduction to Family Systems Counseling 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CRS 1313) This course provides an introduction to the concepts and skills of family systems therapy a counseling orientation in which the family is the chosen social unit of assessment and intervention for the client's problem. The course covers major approaches within communications and structural frameworks, empha- sizing implications for normal family development and interventions in dysfunctional systems, and addresses theory and strategies for working with marital and parenting subsystems. Course offers stu- dents a beginning opportunity to experience the manner in which their family affects their functioning in various social systems with which they have pro- fessional contact. CRS 1313 Introduction to Counseling 4 Q.H. This course presents an exposure to major theoretical approaches to counseling. Students will receive training and practice in listening skills and are expected to develop facilitative responses. Classroom work will combine didactic presentations and exper- iential activities to assist students in understanding and implementing a variety of counseling approaches. CRS 1 800 Directed Study 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the Department. Preparation: Approval of the super- vising faculty member and of the Dean's Office of the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Pro- fessions. Approval forms must be submitted to the Dean's Office during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study Department of Education ED 1 003 Reading/Study Skills I 4 Q.H. Designed to provide instruction to students who dem- onstrate a need to be more efficient in comprehending and studying college textbooks and collateral reading assignments. This course will concentrate on tech- niques involved in understanding informative materi- als and introduce students to the evaluation of persuasive prose. In addition, suggestions will be presented on such topics as how to listen to and take summary notes on course lectures and how to set study goals and priorities consistent with course objectives. ED 1 004 Reading/Study Skills II 4 Q.H. This course is an extension of Reading/Study Skills I and will expand upon the analysis and interpretation of persuasive texts. Other topics emphasized include reading imaginative prose for meaning and pleasure, preparing for and taking examinations, and learning to adjust reading speed and method to various materials encountered in concurrent courses. ED 1005 Practicum in Reading and Study Skills 4 Q.H. This course is designed to give students in the academic program. Project Ujima, comprehensive tools to help them to master the "how to" of reading text- books, notetaking, outlining, introductory research skills, time management, studying skills, and other techniques necessary for success in college. The skill areas covered can be applied to other courses that students may be taking. ED 1 1 00 Education and Social Science 4 Q.H. An interdisciplinary coursethatdrawsonanthropology, psychology and sociology and exposes students to some of the concepts, methods, and terminology of these fields. Main themes are the evolution of human nature, the influence of previous experience and learning on the behavior of individuals and groups, difficulties in achieving a full degree of humanity in a technological society, and the potentially powerful roles that "professional socializers" (teachers, clini- cians, group leaders, etc.) can play in the lives of students and clients. ED 1 101 Education for the Future: A Creative and Humanistic Approach 4 Q.H. Students in this course will be given the opportunity to gain a perspective on the array of conflicting learning experiences that bombard their lives; to identify the factors that influence what people learn and from whom; to evaluate the potential effects of these learnings. As a consequence, the students will be encouraged to develop frames of reference through which to examine their own roles in the education Department of Education / 1 99 process. A creative and humanistic approach to teaching is the basis for all the^ work in this course. ED 1102 Human Development and Learning I 4Q.H. Developmental processes from prenatal life up to adolescence. Theories of learning and personality with research and case material covering major aspects of psychological development. ED 1103 Human Development and Learning II 4Q.H. Basic overview of the continuity of human develop- ment in contemporary society, from the pre-adolescent period through adolescence, adulthood, middle age, and old age. Significant areas of growth, development, and adjustment for each period are considered, includ- ing social, sexual, personality, motivational, and cog- nitive aspects. ED 1102 is not prerequisite for this course. ED 1104 Analysis of the Instructional Process 4Q.H. (Requires a minimum of fifteen hours of related prepracticum school experience in a school approved by the course instructor) Students examine conflicting theories about the nature of teaching and learning. The effects of traditional and innovative educational systems upon learners are evaluated. Educational tools for describing, analyzing and evaluating aspects of learning and teaching are identified and their use by students is refined during sequential field observations and class meetings. ED 1105 Day Care and Nursery Schools: Social and Cultural Origins 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1 100 or equiv) An exploration of the origins of the increased con- temporary use of out-of-the-family child care arrange- ments in the United States and in selected European and Third World nations. Course topics include the interrelation of industrialization, technology and family functioning; contrasting varieties of child care centers in operation today; and effects of the proliferation of child care centers on other aspects of society, such as neighborhood life, business, parents' lifestyles, elementary school curricula, government spending, and the job market in education and human services. Three to four hours per week of fieldwork in a child care setting are required of each student. ED 1 1 06 Creative Expression in Children 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1102) Designed to assist students who are interested in working with children in a variety of settings. Dis- cussion focuses on the potentials of creative expres- sion in interpersonal communication; the relation of children's creative experiences to their cognitive, emotional, and social development; and the oppor- tunity to acquire the hands on experience and con- fidence to work with various media available for cre- ative expression. ED 1 300 Education and Psychosocial Development 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1 100 or equiv.) Theories and research on the socialization functions of education. Topics covered include the relative influence of early vs. post-childhood socialization and the role of diverse educational experiences and institutions in personality development. ED 1301 Educational Applications of Social Psychology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 11 02 or ED 11 03) Focus is on theory and research in social psychology especially relevant to education. Areas covered are prejudice in the classroom; the school as a setting for manifestation of authoritarian personality, attitude organization and change in an educational environ- ment; the class and the clique as "small groups," the expression of need for achievement in various school structures; related topics. ED 1 302 The Human Services Professions 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1 100, SOC 1 100, or equiv.) Explores what a human service agency is, how it comes into being, how it grows and changes. Atti- tudes, values, skills, and knowledge of the human services worker are analyzed, as are reasons why people in modern society require human services assistance. Human services are viewed from the eyes of clients as well as society as a whole. Fieldwork in a human service agency is a major course component, as is a good deal of independent study Required for all human services majors; open to other students on space-available basis. ED 1 303 Mental Health in Teaching 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 11 02 or ED 11 03) Factors involved in the choice of teaching as a career and psychological and occupational factors that con- tribute to teacher happiness, dissatisfaction, adjust- ment, and maladjustment. Examination of these factors is a background against which to consider: 1) what teachers can do to foster healthy personalities, 2) how to deal with psychological forces in the classroom, and 3) steps to strengthen the emotional development of the normal child. ED 1304 Language and Cognition: Educational Implications 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 11 02 or ED 11 03) Development of language and thought in the child: concept learning, problem solving, and language acquisition. Particular consideration given to the impli- cations of current research and theory in these areas for educational practice. ED 1305 Cross-Cultural Studies of Child Rearing and Education 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1102 or ED 1103) Child rearing and child life in contrasting cultures around the world. Emphasis is on cognitive, emo- tional, and behavioral outcomes of concern to Amer- ican educators, human services workers, and parents. Consideration is given to alternative patterns of child 200 / Department of Education rearing possibly useful in modern society. Readings focus primarily on ethnographic descriptions of par- ticular cultures and psychological comparisons of children from contrasting backgrounds. ED 1306 Measurement and Evaluation 4 Q.H. Emphasis in this course is on evaluation techniques for use in the classroom and teaching-learning sit- uations at all levels. The importance of establishing behavioral objectives as a basis for evaluation also will be emphasized. Considerable emphasis will be placed on improving teacher-made (instructor-made) tests, especially objective-type tests. Students will be required to construct an objective test in their disci- pline for an instructional unit. Other evaluation tech- niques besides tests will be reviewed. Brief attention will be given to standardized measurement instru- ments of ability and achievement as they may be used in the evaluation of pupil progress. ED 1307 Introduction to Educational Statistics 4 Q.H. Emphasizes descriptive statistics useful in the eval- uation of educational and related professional activ- ities. Topics ordinarily covered include statistical notation, variability, probability, sampling techniques, linear regression, correlation, t-tests, and chi-square tests of significance. Examples of applications of these techniques will be drawn, so far as possible, from the fields for which students in the course are preparing, and may vary from quarter to quarter ED 1308 Education and Social Change 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1 100 or equiv) A sociological exploration of educational systems as independent and dependent variables in social change. Instances of planned educational change in various countries and their implications for contem- porary American society. ED 1309 Organization and Politics of School Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 11 00 or equiv) The political sociology of school systems in the United States. An analysis of the power and authority struc- tures in contemporary education. , Who decides what and how? Who controls the system? How are the various interest groups organized? What are the mech- anisms for conflict resolution? The relation between professional and nonprofessional interest groups. ED 1310 Class and Ethnic Relations in Education 4Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1 1 00 or equiv) The various ways in which the American class system and patterns of ethnic group relations have affected, and have been affected by, American education. The limitations and potential of educational institutions with respect to the resolution of intergroup conflicts and the establishment of equal educational oppor- tunities. ED 1 31 1 Schools as Social Systems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1 100 or equiv) Analysis of schools as sociocultural subsystems within the larger society. Functional interrelation between student and school subcultures, status and role systems, authority structures in American schools. ED 1 31 2 Comparative Education 4 Q.H. A comparison of the national school systems of selected foreign countries with the school system in the United States. Course content includes compar- ative data in the fields of teaching, speech and hear- ing, special education, and human services. ED 1313 Current issues in American Education 4 Q.H. An analysis of the variety of current issues confront- ing teachers, speech and hearing clinicians, special education practitioners, and human services spe- cialists. Attempts will be made to place these issues in a historical context. ED 1 31 4 Philosophy of Education 4 Q.H. Objective is to help participants examine their own purposes in relation to those of the school as an institution. Course reading material will consist pri- marily of philosophical writings on topics such as the ethics of educational intervention, the delineation of educational concepts, the educational messages of long-range speculations and Utopias, and normative assumptions underlying educational policies. ED 1315 Seminar in Human Learning and Motivation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 11 02 or ED 11 03) Survey and analysis of the literature on human learn- ing and motivation. Emphasis on interaction between human learning and motivation in the developmental process and the classroom. ED 1316 Seminar in Adolescent Psychology 4Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1103) In-depth examination of motivational, intellectual, social, and emotional development of adolescents, from end of pre-adolescence to beginning of young adulthood. Special attention is given to current issues such as drug use, sexual behavior, and vocational choice. Each student is expected to examine a topic of choice in some depth. ED 1317 Seminar in Group Process 4 Q.H. A study of the structure, dynamics, and function of face-to-face groups to learn about goal achievement and task orientation. The course operates mainly by committee or group instrumentation. The serious stu- dent should work to gain an understanding of the function of informal relationships within formal organ- izations, the various roles within groups, peer rela- tionships, superior-subordinate relationships, author- ity and intimacy, and the inclusion and exclusion processes. ED 1318 Seminar in Early Childhood Development 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1102) The theory and research regarding the cognitive, personality, and social development of children from birth to six years, with respect to the implications for Department of Education / 201 early childhood education. Various existing programs examined and new directions explored. ED 1400 Fundamentals of Reading I 4 Q.H. This is the introductory course in developmental reading for prospective Early Childhood and Ele- mentary teachers. Emphasis is on beginning reading as it relates to the clinical environment. Areas of skill development, such as word recognition and meaning comprehension, are studied in detail, as are some methods and techniques of testing and grouping. Also included are an introduction to some reading books and materials, methods of teaching, and the psychology of learning to read. ED 1401 Introduction to Reading 4 Q.H. This introductory course for noneducation majors examines reading as a psycholinguistic process. Pre- cursor skills and abilities, word recognition, and com- prehension are considered in light of the perceptual and language functions which inform them. Relevant research and theoretical models are presented. Atten- tion is given to diagnosis and instruction of deficited populations. Reading instruction as carried out in most elementary schools today is examined from the perspective of current knowledge about children's linguistic and cognitive development. Methodology is considered where appropriate. ED 1402 Fundamentals of Reading II 6 Q.H. (Prereq. ED1400) A continuation and extension of Fundamentals of Reading I. Study skills; speed and fluency develop- ment areas. The tutorial work is extended and the student is given further opportunity to achieve fa- miliarity with books, materials, and methods. ED 1403 Remedial Reading 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1402) For prospective teachers, this course may assist in familiarizing the student with some of the most com- monly known reading problems in the typical class- room as well as in the Reading Clinic; analysis and evaluation of the typical diagnoses of such problems and corrective programs. Tutorial work with a retarded reader, with each student keeping a log or journal of work with a particular reading problem. ED 1404 Linguistics and Reading 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1402) The course explores the nature of language and relevant English language systems to help students acquire a linguistic perspective on the reading proc- ess and reading instruction. Pedagogical implications are examined in light of current knowledge about children's language acquisition and use. Early struc- tural linguistic proposals for teaching reading are evaluated, considering recent psycholinguistic models of the reading process. Issues concerning the lan- guage-different child are discussed. ED 1405 Literature and Learning Materials for Children and Young Adults 4 Q.H. This course offers a comprehensive survey of the field of children's literature and literature for young adults. Although it is designed specifically for prospective teachers (and, in fact, is required of all Early Child- hood and Elementary Education majors), it may also be taken as an elective by all students. Students will survey and evaluate examples of contemporary chil- dren's literature and other learning materials used in preschool, elementary secondary and remedial pro- grams. Covered in this course are such recurring themes as: racism and sexism in children's books; controversial books for young children; contempo- rary illustrators; banned books, etc. ED 1406 Elementary Education Curriculum I 4Q.H. (Requires a minimum of twenty hours of related ex- perience in a school approved by the course instructor) Various patterns of organizing elementary school cur- riculum are analyzed on the basis of the general objectives of the public school system in the United States. Students are expected to evaluate and to organize units of work that can accommodate chil- dren at different developmental levels. The integrated approach to curriculum organization is emphasized with language arts, music, and arts as central focus. ED 1407 Elementary Education Curriculum II 4 Q.H. Social studies curricula in use in elementary school are described and evaluated. Criteria are developed to select appropriate social studies content, skills, and attitudinal objectives. Students are expected to use these criteria to develop social studies experi- ences that meet the developmental needs of learners and shed light on the lives of individuals and groups within different cultural settings. ED 1408 Fundamentals of Math and Science I (Emphasis/Math) 4 Q.H. (Requires a minimum of twenty hours of related experience in a school approved by the course instruc- tor) This is the first of two sequential courses in methods and materials of mathematics and science teaching for Early Childhood and Elementary Education majors. This course provides the opportunities for University students to explore various strategies and materials of teaching mathematics in a manner that takes in account the developmental stages of children. ED 1 409 Fundamentals of Math and Science II (Emphasis/Science) 4 Q.H. This is the second of two courses in methods and materials of mathematics and science teaching for Early Childhood and Elementary Education majors. This course offers the student the opportunity to explore some limited but varied content areas in science and to consider how these areas can be taught to children. ED 1410 Methods and Materials for Teaching Adolescents and Adults I 4 Q.H. Consideration of specific methods and materials appropriate to teaching adolescents and adults to develop in the students an understanding of the com- 202 / Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies plexities of the materials and methodology of the teaching-learning process, to encourage within stu- dents attitudes conducive to and identified with good tenets of teaching, to foster in the students acceptance of the need to grow constantly and to be aware of the continuing development of the learning-teaching process. ED 1411 Methods and Materials for Teaching Adolescents and Adults II 4 Q.H. This course is sectioned according to the various subject areas of teaching techniques of organizing and presenting lessons, developing teaching mate- rials, using audiovisual equipment, developing and implementing evaluation instruments, and selecting appropriate materials within the field of interest. ED 1412 Fundamentals of Curriculum Development 4 Q.H. An examination of how goals and objectives are selected and priorities are determined. Methods for designing educational programs to meet specified goals and methods of evaluating educational out- comes in terms of the goals of the program and techniques for modifying programs in the light of such performance. ED 1413 Writing and the Teaching of Writing 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED1104) A study of the logical and rhetorical bases of exposition and argumentative writing; relationships of assump- tions, assertions, and implications; the nature of proof in the sciences, social sciences, and the humanities; strategies of argumentation; the effective conse- quences of word choice and sentence structure. ED 1414 Current Issues in Teaching the Gifted and Talented 4 Q.H. Students will examine issues that affect the type and quality of education available to the gifted and tal- ented in the United States. Various approaches and programs will be described and evaluated, and con- clusions will be reached about their effectiveness. Research findings on the needs of this segment of the population of learners will be examined in order to provide some criteria for future curriculum de- velopment. ED 1415 Teaching Reading to Adolescents and Adults 4 Q.H. For secondary education majors in the Boston Bouve College of Human Development Professions who are preparing for teaching in the junior or senior high school. Emphasis is on language and symbolic proc- ess, word recognition, and meaning comprehension, and on methods and techniques of testing and grouping. ED 1416 Supervised Reld Placement: Early Childhood 2 Q.H. A University-arranged institutional placement to allow students the opportunity to provide educational, remedial, and/or custodial services to children gen- erally of ages two through five. Opportunity will be provided to analyze, develop, demonstrate, and eval- uate skills and techniques in guiding the activities of children in nursery schools, day care centers, and/or kindergartens. ED 1 41 7 Student Teaching and Seminar 8 Q.H. (Prereq. Formal acceptance into and completion of advanced professional sequence with minimum 2.0 q.p.a., both overall and in teaching major) Full-time participation in a University-arranged and -supervised school program designed to provide opportunity for the analysis of learning and teaching and for the demonstration, evaluation, and develop- ment of teaching skills. ED 1 800 Directed Study 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Preparation: Approval of the super- vising faculty member and the Dean's Office of the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Pro- fessions. Approval forms must be submitted to the Dean's Office during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study ED 1 801 Directed Study II 4 Q.H. For students who have completed ED 1800. INT 1330 Field Experience in Human Services I 4 Q.H. Human services students are required to fulfill two fieldwork placements during the last two years of their program. Each placement consists of 1 50 hours on site. The type of placement varies according to the student's interest. Field experiences are supervised by University staff to maximize the student's learning opportunity. INT 1331 Field Experiences in Human Services 11 4 Q.H. (Prereq. INT 1330 and junior or senior status, per- mission only) Continuation of INT 1330. Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies HSL 1 1 00 Beginning Swimming 1 Q.H. Instruction in basic swimming skills for non-swim- mers, with emphasis on personal water safety. 1 Q.H. HSL 1101 Intermediate Swimming (Prereq. HSL 1 100 or equiv) Instruction in basic and advanced swimming skills, with emphasis on form and efficiency Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies / 203 HSL 1 1 03 Water Polo 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 101 or equiv.) Instruction in beginning water polo, with emphasis on personal skill, offensive and defensive team play. HSL 1 1 04 Advanced Life Saving 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 101 or equiv) Instruction in Red Cross life-saving skills, techniques, and theory. Red Cross certification is possible. HSL 1 1 05 Water Safety Instructor 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1101, HSL 1104) Instruction in techniques, theory, and teaching meth- ods in swimming and life-saving courses. Red Cross certification is possible. HSL 11 06 Beginning Scuba 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 11 01 or equiv) Instruction in basic skin-diving and scuba-diving skills, with emphasis on personal safety HSL 1 1 07 Small Crafts 1 Q.H.* Introduction to basic skills in sailing. HSL 1 109 Beginning Gymnastics I 1 Q.H. A coeducational approach to knowledge of and basic skills in floor exercise, vaulting, balance beam, par- allel bars, uneven bars, high bar, and rings. HSL 1110 Women's Gymnastics 11 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 09) Focus is on knowledge and skill necessary in per- forming the beginning compulsory routines on the balance beam, floor exercise, uneven bars, and vaulting. HSL 1111 Women's Gymnastics III 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1110) Skill and knowledge related to the performance of optional routines in the four areas of competitive women's gymnastics. HSL 1 1 1 3 Men's Gymnastics III 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1122) Skill and knowledge related to performance in optional routines on the high bar, side horse, rings, floor exercise, parallel bars, and vaulting horse. HSL 1114 Badminton 1 Q.H. Instruction in basic badminton strokes, concepts, rules, strategies, and game play HSL 1115 Intermediate/ Advanced Badminton 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1114) Instruction in badminton, including intermediate and advanced skills, with emphasis on singles and dou- bles match play and strategy HSL 1116 Tennis 1 Q.H. Instruction in basic tennis strokes, concepts, rules, strategies, and game play HSL 1117 Intermediate/Advanced Tennis 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 1 6 or equiv) Instruction in tennis, including intermediate and advanced skills, with emphasis on singles and doubles match play and strategy HSL 1118 Beginning Archery 1 Q.H. Selected skills in target shooting and practical ex- perience in archery games, novelty events, and con- duct of tournaments. HSL 1119 Beginning Bowling 1 Q.H.* Focus is on development of knowledge and skill nec- essary for competent performance in bowling at the beginning level. Practice provided in nearby com- mercial alleys. HSL 1 1 20 Beginning Golf 1 Q.H. Instruction in fundamental golf skills, knowledge of clubs and their use, and golf etiquette. HSL 1 1 21 Beginning Self-Defense 1 Q.H. A survey of the principles and fundamental skills. Instruction is geared to the beginning and interme- diate levels. HSL 1 1 22 Men's Gymnastics il 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1109) Skill and knowledge related to the performance of beginning compulsory routines on the high bar, side horse, rings, floor exercise, parallel bars, and vaulting horse. HSL 1 1 23 Beginning Wrestling 1 Q.H.* Beginning level of instruction in basic wrestling maneuvers. Stress on fundamental breakdowns, escapes, takedowns, rides, and pinning combinations. Rules and scoring procedures discussed and mod- ified matches conducted. HSL 1124 Beginning Fencing 1 Q.H. Instruction in basic foil fencing, including introduction to competition. HSL 1125 intermediate/ Advanced Foil Fencing 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 124 or equiv) Instruction in intermediate/advanced techniques of foil fencing, with special emphasis on competition, judging, and the use of electrical equipment. HSL 1126 Karate 1 Q.H. Fundamental techniques of unarmed combat for self- defense using the punches, kicks, and blocks of Tae Kwan Do/Karate. HSL 1127 Karate II 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 26) Continuation of HSL 1126, with progression to more complex techniques and combinations of punches, kicks, and blocks related to Tae Kwan Do/Karate. HSL 1 1 28 Roller Skating 1 Q.H. Instruction for beginners in recreational roller-skating skills. HSL 1 1 29 Beginning Ice Skating 1 Q.H. Instruction for beginners in recreational ice-skating skills. HSL 1 1 30 Rgure Skating 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 129 or permission of instructor) Instruction in beginning and intermediate figure-skat- ing skills. Lab fee required. 204 / Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies HSL 1131 Yoga 1 Q.H. Introduction to yoga skills and techniques for men and women at the beginning level. HSL 1 1 32 Weight Training 1 Q.H. Introduction to the principles and use of resistive exercises: isotonic exercise (weights), isometric exercise, and the appropriateness of each. HSL 1133 Physical Conditioning 1 Q.H. Instruction in assessing one's personal physical fit- ness level with emphasis placed on establishing a per- sonal exercise regimen based upon scientific prin- ciples of training. Special sections will be designated which use different mediums of exercise, such as aerobic dance techniques, running, and circuit training. HSL 1 134 Aerobic Exercise and Dance 1 Q.H. An introduction to fitness through aerobic exercise and dancing. HSL 1135 Yoga II 1 Q.H. (Prereq. Yoga I or equiv) Refinement of poses learned in Yoga I (Iyengar style). Addition of more advanced standing and inverted poses, balances, and back bends. HSL 1 1 36 Beginning Handball 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skills appropriate to handball at the beginning level. HSL 1137 Beginning Cross-Country Skiing 1 Q.H. Instruction in the fundamental techniques of cross- country skiing. HSL 1138 Beginning Skiing 1 Q.H. The course offers instruction in fundamental tech- niques of downhill skiing. HSL 1 1 39 Intermediate Skiing 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1138) The course provides instruction in downhill skiing, including intermediate and advanced techniques with emphasis on skill development. HSL 1140 Basketball 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skills appropriate for performance in basketball at the beginning level. HSL 1141 Intermediate/Advanced Basketball 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 11 40) Knowledge and skills appropriate for performance in basketball at the intermediate to advanced levels. HSL 1142 Volleyball 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skills appropriate for playing volley- ball at the beginning level. HSL 1 1 44 Field Hockey 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skills appropriate for playing field hockey at the beginning level. HSL 1145 Football 1 Q.H. Fundamental skills and knowledge appropriate for beginning level performances in football. HSL 1146 Softball ^ 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skill appropriate for performing in Softball at the beginning level. HSL 1147 Baseball 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 146 or permission of instructor) Knowledge and skill appropriate for baseball at the intermediate and advanced levels. HSL 11 48 Women's Lacrosse 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skill appropriate for performance in lacrosse at the beginning level. HSL 1 149 Men's Lacrosse 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skill appropriate for performance in lacrosse at the beginning level. HSL 11 50 Soccer 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skill appropriate for performance in soccer at the beginning level. HSL 1151 Movement Education 1 Q.H. Concepts and techniques in movement education and exploration for elementary school educators. HSL 1 1 52 Folk and Square Dance 1 Q.H. Introduction to folk and square dance. HSL 1 1 53 Modern Dance I 1 Q.H. Introduction to modern dance technique and style. HSL 1 1 54 Modern Dance II 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 53 or equiv) A continuation of HSL 1 1 53 with progression to more complex modern dance techniques and combinations. HSL 1 1 55 Modern Dance III 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 54 or equiv) A continuation of HSL 1 1 54 with progression into the expressive and choreographic use of modern dance techniques. HSL 1156 Ballet I 1 Q.H. Introduction to ballet fundamentals with emphasis on alignment. HSL 1157 Ballet II 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 56 or equiv) A continuation of HSL 1156 with emphasis on de- veloping lyrical style. HSL 1158 Ballet III 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1165) A continuation of HSL 1 1 57 with emphasis on expand- ing the repertory of classical ballet movements. HSL 11 59 Jazz Dance I 1 Q.H. Introduction to the fundamentals of jazz dance with emphasis on alignment. HSL 1 1 60 Jazz Dance II 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 159 or equiv) A continuation of HSL 1159 with emphasis on de- veloping jazz dance style. HSL 1 1 61 Jazz Dance III 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 160 or equiv) A continuation of HSL 1160 with progression into more complex dance techniques and longer com- binations. HSL 1 1 62 Rhythmic Analysis 1 Q.H. (Prereq. Dance concentration or permission of in- structor) Analysis of rhythm a5 it applies to movement skills and dance. Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies / 205 HSL 1163 Ballroom Dance 1 Q.H. An introduction to traditional and contemporary part- ner dancing. HSL 1165 Dance Improvisation 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 53, HSL 1 1 56, or HSL 1 1 59) Practice in the use of dance as a medium for artistic expression. Emphasis on the development of skill in the use of improvisational techniques. HSL 1167 Beginning Racquetball 1 Q.H. Knowledge and skills appropriate for performance in racquetball at the beginning level. HSL 1 1 70 Adapted Physical Education I 1 Q.H. Physical activity skills modified to meet the special needs of students with conditions which prohibit participation in regularly scheduled activity classes. Content will be arranged by a faculty member assigned by the department chairperson of Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies. HSL 1171 Beginning Boxing 1 Q.H. Instrtiction in boxing at the beginning level; emphasis on offensive and defensive techniques, scoring, training, and officiating. HSL 1172 Games and Activities for Children 2 Q.H. Introduction to simple ball games, running and tag games, self-testing activities, movement exploration, and rhythms appropriate for children. Course content appropriate for future parents, teachers, and youth leaders. HSL 1 1 73 Beginning Track and Reld 1 Q.H. Instruction in the fundamental skills in the various track and field events. HSL 1174 Intermediate/ Advanced Track and Reld 1 Q.H. (Prereq. 62.1 6L or equiv) Instruction in intermediate/advanced techniques in track and field events. Emphasis is placed on im- provement of individual skills; techniques of offici- ating are discussed. HSL 1202 Recreational Sports Leadership 2 Q.H. The exploration of teaching techniques involved in team, dual, and individual sports. Methods, such as the part-whole and whole-part, are presented and investigated to establish relevance to each of the sports areas under study Students are given the opportunity to develop skills in planning units and individual lessons. In addition, students are expected to apply practical experience by teaching one lesson in each of the sports areas studied. HSL 1 205 Introduction to Winter Skills 1 Q.H. Course investigates several winter sports, their origins and history, current population demands, and future trends. Various types of equipment and their use, as well as special health and safety considerations for winter sports, are discussed. Sports to be studied include cross-country skiing, snowshoeing, skating, tobogganing, and snowmobiling. HSL 1209 Basic Rockclimbing and Rappelling 2 Q.H.* A training program designed to introduce potential rockclimbing leaders to all necessary facets of the sport. While successful completion of the program does not qualify a student to lead rockclimbing trips, it may help students to gain a better perspective of both the necessary skills and the leadership role in rock- craft. The program consists of a weekend of practical experience and two introductory discussion sessions at Bouv6. Program areas include activities and infor- mation regarding basic climbing and rapelling experi- ence, knots, safety, delaying, equipment usage and care, and leadership. The lab fee includes lodging, meals, equipment use, and instruction. HSL 1211 Analysis and Coaching of Softball 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 11 46) The basic techniques and responsibilities of coach- ing intramural, interscholastic, and intercollegiate Softball, including advanced skill analysis and man- agement. HSL 1212 Basic Canoeing 2 Q.H. Instruction leading to an opportunity to qualify for Red Cross basic canoeing certification. Classes are held at the Warren Center and include theory and practical experience. HSI, 1220 Foundation of Leadership in Leisure Service 4 Q.H. The course offers study of the basic principles of leadership relevant to the fundamentals of leadership in leisure services. Subjects include leadership styles, motivation, task sequencing, and evaluation. HSL 1221 Introduction to Recreation and Leisure 3Q.H. The course provides an overview of the recreation and leisure service field with emphasis on history, scope, rationale, setting, programs and services, basic trends and issues, and future considerations. The course explores the basic elements of the recreation and leisure service field as they relate to society, the leisure profession, and the individual. HSL 1222 Leisure Awareness and Leadership Camp 2 Q.H.** One-week resident camp experience at the Warren Center, which emphasizes experiential learning, skill development, group processes and personal reflection. The purpose of the Leisure Awareness and Leadership Camp is to maintain the tradition upon which a philosophical foundation of leisure awareness and education is constructed. To be effective in a chal- lenging recreation leadership role, one must first become aware of what these concepts mean person- ally and then concentrate on developing facilitation knowledge and skills. LALC enables students to become aware of their leadership potential in the profession. Course is required and scheduled to be taken at the conclusion of the freshman year *Lab fee required. **Resident fee required. 206 / Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies HSL 1 223 Life/Career Planning 4 Q.H. This course is designed to help students develop life/career planning skills for use in pursuit of a career in recreation and leisure studies. A variety of careers, co-op job opportunities, and lifestyles of profession- als in the field are explored. Students are given the opportunity to assess their own interests, values, needs, and skills, and to develop job-finding skills, including resume writing and interviewing techniques. HSL 1 250 Creative Dance I 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 54 or HSL 1 1 65) Theory and practice of methods and materials in teaching creative dance to elementary school chil- dren. Examination of children's performance and appropriate teaching techniques with off-campus observation and experience. Designed to partially satisfy pre-practicum requirements for teacher certi- fication at K-9 grade level. HSL 1251 Creative Dance II 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 11 54 or HSL 1 1 65) Theory and practice of methods and materials in teaching creative dance to secondary school youth. Examination of performance and teaching techniques with off-campus observation and experience. De- signed to partially satisfy pre-practicum requirements for teacher certification at 5-12 grade level. HSL 1 252 Dance Composition I 3 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 11 54 or permission of instructor) Analysis of the basic dance choreographic elements- space, force, and time. Student solution of choreo- graphic problems. HSL 1253 Group Dynamics I 3 Q.H.* An introduction to group dynamics through selected activities, discussion, and living and working together. A resident living experience for one week at the Warren Center is an integral part of the course. HSL 1254 First Aid 2 Q.H. Emergency care procedures recommended for the home, school, and community Emphasis on prac- tices endorsed by the American Red Cross. HSL 1255 Human Movement 3 Q.H. An introduction to the nature and role of human movement and the analysis of skillful movement per- formance through participation and observation. Introduction to the objectives, literature, and organi- zation of the profession of physical education. HSL 1 256 Life/Career Planning 3 Q.H. An examination and exploration of careers in physical education and related fields. The course provides an opportunity for students to assess personal skills and abilities, to research jobs of interest, and to practice specific career-planning skills. HSL 1257 History and Philosophy of Physical Education 3 Q.H. A survey of physical education from ancient times to the present. The influence of major philosophical positions upon the nature of physical education pro- grams is analyzed. *Lab fee required. HSL 1 258 Elementary School Activities 3 Q.H. Focus is on introductory knowledge and skills nec- essary for teaching physical education to elementary- school-aged children. Students are expected to learn about children's performance and appropriate teach- ing techniques through observation and actual expe- rience in off-campus schools and learning centers. Course is designed to satisfy partially the pre-prac- ticum requirements for teacher certification at the K-9 level.* *Teacher certification requirements available in 3 Dockser Hall. HSL 1259 Secondary School Activities 3 Q.H. Physical activity appropriate for secondary school youth is studied in relation to their level of develop- ment and interest. Students are expected to learn about pupils' performance and appropriate teaching techniques through observation and actual experi- ence in off-campus schools and learning centers. Course is designed to satisfy partially the pre-prac- ticum requirements for teacher certification at the grades 5-12 level.* *Teacher certification requirements available in 3 Dockser Hall. HSL 1260 Perceptual-Motor Development 4 Q.H. (Prereq. ED 1102 and ED 1103; may be taken con- currently) Course offers a study of the development of motor skills from birth through infancy early childhood, adolescence, and adulthood, including skilled per- formance of the aged. Age expectations for percep- tual-motor behavior are considered, with a focus on a functional adequacy in skilled performance. HSL 1261 Anatomy and Physiology I 4 Q.H. Gross anatomy and physiology of the human skeletal, joint, nervous, and muscular systems. HSL 1 264 Adapted Physical Education I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1606, HSL 1261) Survey of characteristics and attitudes pertaining to special-needs individuals, with particular emphasis on the effects of their presence on current physical activity programs. Observations of special-needs programs are included. Course is designed to satisfy partially pre-practicum requirements for teacher cer- tification at the grade level K-12. HSL 1 265 Early Childhood Development 4 Q.H. A study of the development of fundamental motor patterns (run, catch, kick, strike, jump, throw) from ages 0 to 5 years, including perceptual-motor relations operating in vision, audition, and proprioception. HSL 1266 Physical Conditioning Programming 2Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1133 and 1132) Students will learn how to design and deliver instruc- tion related to physical conditioning of the body HSL 1267 Methods and Materials in Teaching Folk, Square, and Ballroom Dance 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 52 and 1134) Theory and practice in the application of methods and Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies / 207 materials for teaching folk, square, and ballroom dance. HSL 1268 Basic Athletic Training Laboratory 1 Q.H. (Prereq. concurrent with HSL 1 605) The biomechanical and anatomical principles as well as indications and contraindications for application of the various wrapping and strapping techniques involved with athletic injuries will be discussed. The indications for use and types of protective devices (braces, splints, etc.) will also be presented. Labo- ratory time for practical application and development of skills will be utilized. HSL 1272 Dance Composition II 3 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 60) Analysis of the choreographic process including content, form, technique, and projection. Student solution of choreographic problems based upon literal and nonliteral themes. HSL 1 280 Foundations of Health Education 2 Q.H. Provides opportunities for learners to investigate the broad spectrum of career possibilities in community and school health education and to ascertain their potential roles in the field. Philosophy of health education, the conceptual approach, and trends in health education are considered. HSL 1281 Current Issues in Health 4 Q.H. Focus is on the development of high-level wellness. Topics may include emotional health, nutrition, fit- ness, sexuality, drug use, disease, consumer issues, and environmental impacts. Emphasis is placed on the needs of the participants. HSL 1 283 Introduction to Safety 2 Q.H. Introduces the principles and fundamentals of safety education as they relate to people in their environ- ment. Concerns safety as a social problem; considers major accident areas, accident causes, and liability; and analyzes possible solutions to accident problems. HSL 1284 Instructional Resources 2 Q.H. Introduction to the use of audiovisual media as educational tools. Production of slide presentations, transparencies, bulletin boards, displays, etc., is included. Opportunities are provided for experiences in operating selected equipment. HSL 1 285 Health Concerns for Youth 4 Q.H. Application of health concepts to assist youth in reaching a higher level of wellness through preventive measures. Significant health concerns are identified and dealt with as they relate to health professionals, teachers, and adults. Course is designed to satisfy partially the prepracticum requirements for teacher certification grade levels 5-12. HSL 1286 Nutrition 4 Q.H. This course offers the student the opportunity to learn and evaluate nutrition information both as a consumer and future educator The chemical, biological, and physiological bases of nutrition are explained. HSL 1 300 Swimming Analysis 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1101 or permission of instructor) Instruction in theory, analysis techniques, and teach- ing methods in swimming. HSL 1301 Analysis and Coaching of Men's Gymnastics 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1113) Skill analysis and coaching of men's gymnastics, with emphasis on appropriate teaching methods, new trends, and judging. HSL 1302 Analysis and Coaching of Badminton 2Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1115) Analysis of performance and methods of teaching and coaching in badminton. HSL 1 303 Analysis and Coaching of Tennis 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 1 7) Analysis of performance and methods of teaching in tennis. HSL 1304 Analysis and Coaching of Fencing 2Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 11 25) Advanced skill analysis and coaching of fencing. Special emphasis on current research and teaching methods. HSL 1 305 Analysis and Coaching of Golf 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. HSL 1 120 or equiv) Advanced skill analysis and coaching of golf. Special emphasis on course play and teaching methods. HSL 1306 Analysis and Coaching of Track/Field 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 135 or equiv) Advanced skill analysis and coaching techniques for selected track and field events. Special emphasis is placed on the analysis of common movement pat- terns, teaching methods, and coaching techniques. HSL 1307 AnaSysis and Coaching of Wrestling 2Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 23 or equiv) Analysis of performance and techniques of teaching selected wrestling skills are covered in detail. Ap- plication of research to methodology is st.essed. HSL 1308 Analysis and Coaching of Baseball 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 11 47) The basic techniques and responsibilities of coach- ing interscholastic and intercollegiate baseball, in- cluding advanced skill analysis, position and team play, conditioning, practice organization, and team management. HSL 1309 Analysis and Coaching of Basketball 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1140) The basic techniques and responsibilities of coach- ing interscholastic and intercollegiate basketball, including advanced skill analysis, position and team play conditioning, practice organization, and team management. Lab fee required. 208 / Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies HSL 1310 Analysis and Coaching of Field Hockey 2Q.H. (Prereq. HSL1144) The basic techniques and responsibilities of coach- ing intramural, interscholastic, and intercollegiate field hockey, including advanced skill analysis, position and team play conditioning, practice organization, and team management. HSL 1311 Analysis and Coaching of Football 2Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1145) The basic techniques and responsibilities of coach- ing interscholastic and intercollegiate football, in- cluding advanced skill analysis, team conditioning, offensive and defensive systems, practice organiza- tion, team management, and coaching staff organi- zation. HSL 1312 Analysis and Coaching of Lacrosse 2Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 48 or HSL 1 1 49) The basic techniques and responsibilities of coach- ing intramural, interscholastic, and intercollegiate lacrosse, including advanced skill analysis, position and team play conditioning, practice organization, and team management. HSL 1313 Analysis and Coaching of Soccer 2Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 11 50) The basic techniques and responsibilities of coach- ing intramural, interscholastic, and intercollegiate soccer, including advanced skill analysis, position and team play conditioning, practice organization, and team management. HSL 1314 Movement Fundamentals 1 Q.H. A course in posture and movement correctives. Focus is on both intellectual and experiential know^ledge of the body and its potential for change. HSL 1315 Analysis and Coaching of Volleyball (Men-Women) 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1142) The basic techniques and responsibilities of coach- ing intramural, interscholastic, and intercollegiate vol- leyball, including advanced skill analysis, position and team play conditioning, practice organization, and team management. HSL 1 31 6 Theory of Officiating 2 Q.H. Knowledge and skills in the basic concepts of offi- ciating individual and team sports. HSL 1317 Sports Officiating: Team Sports 2 Q.H. Theory practice, and techniques of officiating in team sports such as basketball and volleyball. HSL 1318 Sports Officiating: Individual Sports 2 Q.H. Theory practice, and techniques of officiating indi- vidual sports such as tennis and badminton. HSL 1319 Analysis and Coaching of Softball 1Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1146) Basic techniques and responsibilities of coaching intramural, interscholastic, and intercollegiate softball, including advanced skill analysis and management. HSL 1320 Analysis and Coaching of Women's Gymnastics 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1111) Skill analysis and coaching of women's gymnastics, with emphasis on appropriate teaching methods and new trends. HSL 1321 Modern Dance IV 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 1 55 or equiv) A continuation of HSL 1 1 55 with emphasis upon the application of modern dance technique and style in the performance of modern dance repertory. HSL 1322 Ballet IV 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 158 or equiv) A continuation of HSL 1 1 58 with in-depth study of the complicated variations derived from classical ballet. Emphasis on line and expressive interpretation. HSL 1 324 Jazz Dance IV 1 Q.H (Prereq. HSL 1 161 or equiv) A continuation of HSL 1161 with emphasis on style and expressive interpretation. Progression into the choreographic use of jazz dance. HSL 1325, 1326, 1327 Dance Rehearsal and Performance I, II, III • (each) 1 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) Designed in order that students may develop skill in performance. Students may choreograph, stage, and perform an original work or perform in the original work of a guest or faculty choreographer HSL 1 400 Group Dynamics 3 Q.H. The study of human behavior in groups is approached through lectures, reading, and structural group expe- riences. Major areas of concentration include com- munication, leadership, decision making, and eval- uation of the group process. HSL 1401 Program Planning in Recreation 4 Q.H. The course focuses on examination of program con- tent, leadership, administration, and facilities asso- ciated with the effective delivery of leisure services under the auspices of public, private, religious, industrial, and voluntary agencies. HSL 1 402 Leisure and Lifestyles 4 Q.H. The course focuses on aspects contributing to life- styles and the role of leisure. Specific lifestyles are examined through readings and video-taped movies. Students have the opportunity to examine the effect of leisure on their present lifestyles and future aspirations. HSL 1403 Concepts of Leisure: Sociopsychological Perspectives 4 Q.H. The course focuses on exploration of the various sociopsychological perspectives of leisure and the relations of mores, social structure, roles, values, and Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies / 209 personality to leisure expression. Investigation of other pertinent social and environmental factors that con- tribute to the phenomenon of leisure is included. HSL 1406 Internship Seminar 1 Q.H. Course offers preparation for professional field as- signment in a leisure service setting. Focus is on identification and assessment of student career goals, analysis of previous volunteer and/or employment experience, professional involvement, and facilitation of the internship placement process. HSL 1407 Internship in Recreation and Leisure Services 16 Q.H. Professional field assignment in leisure service set- tings designed to prepare students for professional career choices. Supervision by faculty, conferences with professional staff, and seminars. Ten-week in- ternship. HSL 1 40*8 Research Methods 4 Q.H. Study of basic statistics, the use of experimental and quasi-experimental design, sampling, instrumentation, data collection, and analysis as applied in recreation and leisure studies. HSL 1409 Research Applications 4 Q.H. The course examines the use of research methods in selected professional applications ranging from the ongoing research of departmental faculty to student- originated studies. HSL 1410 Senior Seminar in Contemporary Issues and Trends in Recreation and Leisure 4Q.H. The course offers examination and discussion of contemporary issues and trends in the field of rec- reation and leisure. Focus is on critical aspects of leisure services: legislation, consumer advocacy pro- fessional development, research, and innovations for the improvement of service delivery. HSL 1 420 Urban Recreation 4 Q.H. The course provides an examination of the different cultural and sociological patterns of various ethnic groups who live in an urban setting. Various recre- ational activities are suggested for each group. Other pertinent recreational issues common to the urban community are studied. HSL 1421 Administration of Recreation and Parks 4 Q.H. The course focuses on administration procedures of tax-supported recreation and park operations. Con- centration on legality commissions, area and facility design, personnel policies, and problem solving related to administration and management. HSL 1422 Program Evaluation in Recreation 4 Q.H. The course examines comprehensive systems for evaluating program effectiveness as it relates to the consumer of recreation services. Major emphasis placed on developing an evaluation system for an agency of the student choice. Case studies are drawn from the public, nonprofit, and commercial sectors. HSL 1423 Commercial Recreation Marketing 4Q.H. Course offers an examination of commercial and private sector recreation services. Case studies work- shops, and practical problems are related to man- aging leisure opportunities for resorts, country clubs, theme parks, tourism, sports clubs, manufacturing and merchandising, and industrial recreation. HSL 1425 Leisure and the Community School 4Q.H. The course provides exploration (through class lec- tures, discussions, readings, and on-site visitations) of the theoretical, operational, and motivating aspects of the community school concept. An opportunity to investigate the complex role played by leisure in the community school. HSL 1 426 Budget Analysis 4 Q.H. The course focuses on the study and use of analytical techniques that can improve budgeting decisions. Topics include cost-effectiveness and benefit-cost analysis, efficiency measures, pricing, forecasting, and present-value analysis for solution of capital and operating budget problems in the nonprofit and com- mercial recreation sectors. HSL 1 427 Survey of Recreation Facilities 3 Q.H. Study of fundamental management and administra- tion concepts for a wide variety of outdoor areas and facilities such as parks, beaches, ice rinks, marinas, camps, and community centers. HSL 1 440 School Camping 3 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1444 or permission of instructor) Investigation of outdoor education as it applies to school camp organization, administration, program planning, and educational significance. Each student is required to participate in a one-week supervised practical experience at a designated school camp. HSL 1441 Camp Administration 3 Q.H. The course offers investigation of camp management guidelines including site development, health and safety hiring and staff training, public relations, American Camping Association standards, legal reg- ulations, organization within camps, programs, and other selected administrative aspects. HSL 1442 Leadership and Organization of Wilderness Recreation 4 Q.H. The course offers in-depth investigation of the lead- ership, organization, planning, implementation, and evaluation of outdoor pursuits. Particular emphasis is placed on multiday experiences in remote or wil- derness setting. An extended outdoor practicum in a wilderness setting is required. HSL 1443 Interpretation of Ecological and Social History 4 Q.H. The course examines the employment of site visita- tions and problem-solving methods to investigate human interaction with and manipulation of the phys- ical, biological, and social environment. The course provides the opportunity to acquire knowledge of ecosystem aspects which can be applied to envi- 210 / Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies ronmental interpretation and decision-making sec- tors of ecosystem and recreation management. HSL 1444 Environmental Education 4 Q.H. The study of the philosophy and history of environ- mental education in political, social, and educational movements. Exploration of methods of developing, teaching, and evaluating environmental education cur- ricula applicable to schools, camps, parks, and envi- ronmental centers. HSL 1445 Seminar on Environmental Issues and Legislation 4 Q.H. The course offers study of the development of atti- tudes toward the environmental and critical investi- gation of the history of the environmental movement. Investigation of current environmental issues and laws affecting our ecosystem and lifestyles through inte- grating theories from sociology ecology economics, and politics. Exploration of degrees of ecological and social constraints on future growth and definition of alternative futures. HSL 1446 Elements of Outdoor Recreation Planning 4 Q.H. The course offers exploration of the nature and sig- nificance of the outdoor recreation experience and how our natural resources can optimally meet peo- ple's needs. Focus is on the elements of outdoor recreation planning; identification, evaluation, as- sessment, and implementation. Relation of social groups, natural resources, and environmental con- cerns to outdoor recreation planning are included. HSL 1 460 Process of Aging 3 Q.H. The course covers the study of phases of aging; discussion of the physical, social, and emotional changes and problems that face the aged; the study of types of services offered to senior citizens, and the sources of funds allocated to sponsor such services: The role of recreation and leisure programming are emphasized. HSL 1461 Camping and Outdoor Education for the Handicapped 3 Q.H. Innovations in outdoor learning with an emphasis on wellness, the American Indian, outdoor adventure activities, and a holistic perspective on the individual with a disability. Observations and practical appli- cations are included. HSL 1 462 Leisure Counseling 4 Q.H. This course provides students an opportunity to develop fundamental group counseling skills through the use of specialized strategies and traditional verbal counseling techniques. Major focus is on lifestyle awareness counseling. HSL 1463 Overview of Physical Disabilities 4Q.H. The course offers a holistic and humanistic approach to people with physical disabilities including ampu- tations, traumatic conditions, sensory impairments, neurological, orthopedic, and cardiovascular dis- orders. Rehabilitation procedures and treatment, adjunctive therapies, prosthetics, orthontics, assistive, devices and techniques, and reentry into the com- munity from the individual, familial, and societal per- spectives are discussed. HSL 1464 Program Planning in Therapeutic Recreation 4 Q.H. The course examines advanced planning of compre- hensive therapeutic recreation services. Focus is on systems approach to planning for individuals and groups. Included are an intensive examination of the philosophy of therapeutic recreation; the study of the functional elements of activities, current legislation, and standards for service delivery. HSL 1465 Therapeutic Recreation with Developmentally Disabled Persons 4 Q.H. Course offers a review of major phases of normal growth and development for the purpose of under- standing the causes and impact of developmental disabilities. Emphasizes role of play experiences in achieving sequentialized skills and concepts, prac- tices and procedures employed in program design. HSL 1466 Foundations of Psychiatric Services in Therapeutic Recreation 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of the instructor) The course focuses on orientation to the foundations of mental health and variables affecting mental ill- ness; examination of various psychiatric disorders and treatment modalities and the role of activity ther- apy in the treatment of mental illness; review of con- temporary trends in psychiatry that pertain to ther- apeutic recreation. HSL 1467 Social and Psychological impacts of Illness and Disabilities 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1463) Exploration of relevant issues related to disability such as societal understanding of disability, handi- capping conditions, adjustment, social networks, and the therapeutic use of self through a mixture of lectures, group discussion, guest speakers, and films. Exami- nation of self in the role of change agents and care providers. HSL 1 500 Mental Health 4 Q.H. An investigation of emotional health and well-being as they relate to total health with emphasis on factors that influence emotional behavior Various approaches to emotional health in public school programs are included. HSL 1502 Communicable and Degenerative Diseases 4 Q.H. The disease immunity process, with emphasis on prevalent communicable diseases in the United States today and their transmission; chronic diseases, car- diovascular diseases, cancer, diabetes, and other constitutional and degenerative diseases and disor- ders that affect the nation's health. Predominant themes are personal health attitudes and behaviors. Personal health responsibility is analyzed. HSL 1503 Human Sexuality and Family Dynamics 4Q.H. Sexuality from a physical, psychological, social, his- torical, and cultural perspective; needs and concerns about sexuality at various stages in life including a Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies / 21 1 variety of approaches to sex education within schools, community, and the family HSL 1 504 Longevity and Aging 4 Q.H. Study of the biological, psychological, and sociolog- ical aspects of human aging. Consideration is given to the importance of one's current lifestyle in relation to the phenomenon of longevity and the quality of life. HSL 1506 Evolving Patterns of Community Health Education 4 Q.H. Principles of community health, with emphasis on contemporary local, national, and international or- ganizations for meeting health problems; health care delivery consumer health issues, environmental health, community resources, and the role of health education in the community. HSL 1507 Seminar I 2 Q.H. (Prereq. ED1306) An introduction to research and scientific writing, culminating in a research project in an area of special interest, is included. HSL 1508 Seminar II 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 507) Discussion of current problems and new develop- ments as they relate to health education in school and in a variety of community settings. HSL 1509 Organization and Administration of Health Education Programs 4 Q.H. Principles and methods of organization and admin- istration of school and community health education programs; ethics, personnel, budget, facility man- agement, and priorities. HSL 1 51 0 Health Counseling 4 Q.H. The identification of physical, mental, emotional, and social health problems; remedial procedures; and counseling techniques to aid health educators to deal more effectively with various health problems. HSL 1 51 1 Independent Study I 1 Q.H. HSL 1 51 2 Independent Study II 2 Q.H. HSL 1 51 3 Independent Study III 3 Q.H. HSL 1 51 4 Independent Study IV 4 Q.H. Designed to provide the student with an opportunity for concentrated planning and research. In-depth study may be carried out in a topic area of health, sport, or leisure. Outline of proposed study must be submitted. HSL 1 51 5 Public Health Administration 4 Q.H. History and overview of public health agencies and the organization of services for meeting public health needs at the local, state, federal, and international levels. Focus is on today's major health problems and services. HSL 1 51 6 Drug Use and Abuse 4 Q.H. An exploration of the use and abuse of drugs in our society, including prescription and OTC drugs, alcohol, and smoking. Physiological, psychological, and socio- logical effects of drugs on humans are explored. HSL 1517 Death, Bereavement and Suicide 4 Q.H. An interdisciplinary approach to the contemporary issues involved in death and bereavement. Death is examined from a lifecycle approach, including the dynamics of grief and mourning. Suicide is examined as it relates to self-concept and stress. HSL 1 51 8 Community Health Assessment 4 Q.H. Focus is on today's major community health prob- lems, with an overview of the organization of services and assessment of health needs at the local, state, federal, and international levels. HSL 1 520 Student Teaching 1 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1585; HSL 1285; ED 1104) Observation and practical teaching experience in public school health education programs. Supervi- sion and evaluation by personnel, in cooperating schools and by Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions faculty; seminars. Course is designed to satisfy partially the prepracticum requirements for teacher certification at grade levels 5-12. HSL 1 521 Reld Experience 1 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1 585) Observation and practical field experience in selected community health education settings. Supervision and evaluation by personnel, in cooperating schools and by Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions faculty; seminars. HSL 1585 Teaching Procedures/Curriculum in Health Education in School and Community 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1285; ED 1104) The prospective health educator is introduced to health education curriculum, techniques of planning, and pertinent methods and materials in school and community health education. Course is designed to satisfy partially the prepracticum requirements for teacher certification at grade levels 5-12. HSL 1 600 Psychology of Sport 2 Q.H. (Prereq. PE. or permission of instructor) The psychological analysis of behavioral patterns and deviations of sports participants, including spectators and coaches. Emphasis on emotions, motivation, com- petition, and learning factors. Discussion of current sports highlights. HSL 1601 Sociology of Sport and Dance 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The study of sport and dance as social institutions, including theories explaining the role of each in con- temporary society and the part of each in evolving societies. HSL 1 602 Theory of Coaching 2 Q.H. An analysis of learning principles, sociology and psychology as applied to coaching individual, dual, and team sports. Techniques and standards of squad recruitment, organization, leadership, and coaching ethics are presented. HSL 1 603 Theory of Play 2 Q.H. The nature of play and a study of cross-cultural patterns of play An investigation of selected theories 212 / Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies of play, including Huizinga, Caillois, Sutton-Smith, and Lee. HSL 1 604 Group Dynamics II 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. HSL1253) Exposure to outdoor activities typical of outdoor adventure programs. Exposure to practices and phi- losophies of Project Adventure, Outv^^ard Bound, and national outdoor leadership schools, with an emphasis on skills teaching. Resident experience required. HSL 1 605 Basic Athletic Training 3 Q.H. The training and conditioning procedures in athletic programs; special emphasis on the prevention of athletic injuries; roles of the trainer, athlete, coach, and health service. HSL 1 606 Perceptual-Motor Learning 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PSY 1111 or equivalent) A focus on the way information processing is involved in perceptual-motor learning and performance. Basic research data are applied to learning and executing skills in a variety of sports settings. HSL 1 607 Measurement and Evaluation 4 Q.H. Construction, use, selection and interpretation of evaluative tools applicable to health, sport, and lei- sure studies; elementary statistical methods. HSL 1 608 Clinical Athletic Training 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1605) The student athletic trainer's introduction to clinical experience with an opportunity to practice the various skills for evaluation and treatment of the injured athlete. HSL 1 609 Advanced Athletic Training 4 Q.H (Prereq. HSL 1605) The advanced preparation and utilization of con- ditioning programs and their administration for pre- vention and care of injuries associated with competi- tive athletics. HSL 1 61 0 Anatomy and Physiology II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1261) Gross anatomy and physiology of the human cardio- vascular, respiratory, digestive, urinary, and endocrine systems. Metabolism, calorimetry, and other applied topics will also be covered. HSL 1 61 1 Kinesiology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1261) Science of human motion and anatomic and me- chanical principles as they relate to an understanding of skillful, efficient, and purposeful human motion. The internal and external forces acting upon a human body and the effects produced will be examined. HSL 1 61 2 Physiology of Exercise 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1610) Study of the immediate and long-range effects of exercise upon the human body with emphasis on the cardiovascular and respiratory systems, muscles, and metabolism; physical fitness, body composition. Lab fee required. and selected components of motor performance- assessment techniques and training principles. Introduction to indirect open-circuit calorimetry and EKG monitoring. HSL 1613 Laboratory in Exercise Testing and Prescription 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1612) Practicum in assessment of functional cardiovascu- lar, muscular strength, muscular endurance, flexibility and body composition; prescription of exercise programs used to improve the above functions: vol- unteer work as an exercise test technician and exercise leader in a fitness class. HSL 1 61 4 Electrocardiography 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1612) A study of basic and intermediate electrocardiog- raphy including cardiac function, lead systems, rate, rhythm, axis, infarction, ischemia, hypertrophy, effects of cardiovascular drugs, and effects of exercise. HSL 1 61 5 Critical Teaching Skills 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1258 or HSL 1259) Course offers analysis of direct and indirect, verbal and nonverbal teaching methods for classroom and activity teaching, using techniques such as micro- teaching, peer teaching, and simulation. Techniques for measuring teacher behavior, such as interaction analysis, are studied and analyzed. A laboratory experience in an education setting is an essential activity.! HSL 1616 Curriculum Development 3 Q.H. Course focuses on basic foundations of curriculum development stressing fundamental principles and guides to curriculum organization, format, and eval- uation. Course material includes experience using the taxonomies of education objectives and survey of existing curricula and current curriculum trends. HSL 1617 Administration of Physical Education 4Q.H. The organization and administration of programs in physical education, with emphasis on elementary and secondary school programs. HSL 1618 Exercise and Activities for the Older Adult 4 Q.H. Principles of physical activity and the organization of physical activity programs for the elderly in public and private agencies are studied. Research and practical applications of theory are required. • HSL 1 61 9 Adapted Physical Education II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1264) Assessment, diagnostic, and prescriptive procedures in special-needs physical education programs. Em- phasis is on modification techniques and integration of programming in accordance with legislative guide- lines. Practicum experiences in special-needs set- tings are included. tDesigned to satisfy partially pre-practicum require- ments for teacher certification. Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies / 213 HSL 1 620 Comparative Physical Education 3 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL1257orED1312) Analysis of systems of physical education and sport in selected countries and their interrelations with the larger cultural framework. HSL 1621 Dance in Cultural Perspective 4 Q.H. A survey of dance from ancient times to 1 900 with the focus on the evolution of dance as a theatre art. HSL 1622 Supervised Reld Experience 12 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior status in major or permission of instructor) Course offers assignment in a field setting related to the student's area of concentration within the physical education curriculum, including observation and per- formance of professionally related skills under the guidance of a cooperating field professional and a college supervisor To be taken by physical education majors who are not in a teacher certification program. HSL 1623 Supervised Student Teaching (Practicum) 12 Q.H. Course provides a minimum of at least 300 clock hours in an approved school, with clear instructional responsibilities for at least half of the time and full teaching responsibilities for a substantial period of time under the guidance of a certified cooperating teacher and college supervisor The assignment must be at the level of teacher certification sought (K-9 or 5-1 2) and include coaching and/or intramural organ- ization and supervision, evaluation conferences, and seminars. Students can prepare themselves for Certif- icate No. 30, Teacher of Physical Education, as granted by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.t HSL 1624 Student Athletic Training Internship 6Q.H. (Permission of instructor) This experience will give the senior student an opportunity to gain additional field experience and responsibility in athletic training at either a high school, college, or professional setting. It will fulfill the clinical internship requirement for graduation and will be in conjunction with any other senior year experience required by the specific majors. HSL 1 625 Senior Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) Designed for senior students to discuss pertinent new topics and concepts in sports medicine. HSL 1626 Therapeutic Reconditioning for Athletic Training 1 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1627) Principles and objectives inherent in the rehabilitation process of athletic injuries. Basic rehabilitation fun- damentals, as well as specific conditioning and reconditioning techniques utilized will be discussed. The student will be exposed to the different types of exercise, as well as the different rehabilitative equip- ment used in a rehabilitation program. Laboratory experiences in the application of exercise programs and use of equipment will be provided. HSL 1627 Therapeutic Modalities for Athletic Training 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1605) Physical agents used in athletic training are presented with regards to their physiological effects, where in the healing process they may be used, and all indications and contraindications for use. Laboratory experiences in application of those physical agents will be utilized. HSL 1 630 Aspects of Dance 3 Q.H. An introduction to dance forms, functions, and styles. Analysis of dance as an art and an overview of dance professions. Lectures, lab, and attendance at per- formances. HSL 1 632 Dance in the Twentieth Century 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HSL 1621) A survey of dance in the twentieth century. The focus of the course is on the emergence and development of modern dance and the impact of twentieth-century choreographers upon the classical ballet tradition. Slides and films will be used to illustrate the cho- reographic innovations of artists such as Martha Graham, Alwin Nikolais, Twyla Tharp, Fokine, Bal- anchine, Bejart. HSL 1 634 Laban Movement Analysis 2 Q.H. Introduction to Laban's qualitative system of move- ment description and behavior Emphasis is on the study of effort, shape, and space harmony HSL 1 863 TAC - Special Problems 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) Designed as directed study in analysis and coaching of a sport or activity not offered by the department or in special scheduling situations. HSL 1 866 Special Problems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The course focuses on independent investigation in an area of each student's interests. The investigation will be supervised by an appointed faculty member and will culminate in a formal written report. HSL 1 866 Special Problems 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The course focuses on independent investigation in an area of each student's interests. The investigation will be supervised by an appointed faculty member and will culminate in a formal written report.t tTeacher certification requirements available in 3 Dockser Hall. 214 /Physical Therapy Physical Therapy PTH 1114 Introduction to Physical Therapy 2 Q.H. The course provides orientation to the field of physical therapy and its role in the health professions; theory and practice in applied body mechanics and basic procedures related to patient management. PTH 1115 Introduction to Physical Therapy 2 Q.H. The course provides practice in the preparation of patients and equipment for various treatment pro- cedures. Theory demonstration and practice in heat, light, and hydrotherapy. PTH 1310 Clinical Gross Anatomy 6 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1254 and BIO 1255) The course covers the structure and function of the human body with particular emphasis on the skeletal, muscular, nervous, and cardiovascular systems. Clinical applications. Lecture and laboratory. PTH 1315 Physiology for Physical Therapists 5 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 254, BIO 1 255, and PTH 1 1 1 5) The course covers neuromuscular, cardiovascular, and respiratory physiology applied to physical ther- apy. PTH 1 320 Physical Therapy I 2 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 255, PTH 1 1 1 5, and BIO 1 254) Course offers theory, demonstrations, and practice in massage integrated with other treatment procedures. Case studies. PTH 1 325 Clinical Medicine I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1254 and BIO 1255) The course covers general medicine, laboratory medicine, and pathology as related to conditions commonly treated by physical therapists. PTH 1330 Clinical Kinesiology 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. PTH 1 31 0 and PTH 1 31 5) The course covers musculoskeletal function with emphasis on the mechanical and physiological factors involved. Clinical applications to normal and patho- logical movements. PTH 1 335 Physical Therapy II 3 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1310, PTH 1315, and PTH 1320) The course covers evaluation procedures: theory, demonstration, practice, and planning. PTH 1 340 Physical Therapy III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1 114, PTH 1115, PTH 1310, PTH 1315, PTH 1 320) This course covers basic therapeutic exercise: the- ory, demonstration practice, and planning. PTH 1345 Clinical Medicine II 3 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1310, PTH 1315, and PTH 1325) Orthopedic conditions and their medical, surgical, and physical therapy treatment. PTH 1352 Psychosocial Aspects of Illness 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) The course examines interpersonal relationships among patients, families, health professionals, and society, with reference to the impact of and reaction to illness. PTH 1355 Physical Therapy IV 3 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1315, PTH 1330, PTH 1335, PTH 1340, and PTH 1345) Course covers theory demonstration, and practice in prosthetics, orthotics, and advanced functional training of spinal-cord-injured patients. PTH 1 360 Physical Therapy V 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) Theoretical basis and clinical application of the neu- rophysiological approaches to treatment: Brunnstrom, Rood, and proprioceptive neuromuscular facilitation techniques. PTH 1 365 Neuroanatomy 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. PTH 1340) Morphology and function of the human nervous sys- tem. Abnormalities of structure and function of the nervous system. Lecture and laboratory. PTH 1370 Clinical Seminar 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) Selected topics related to clinical aspects in physical therapy Interpersonal relationships, ethics, teaching- learning process, communication, group dynamics, medical-legal issues, sociocultural/socioeconomic considerations, and clinical education information. PTH 1 375 Physical Therapy VII 2 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1335, PTH 1345, and PTH 1365) The course covers theory, demonstration, and prac- tice in electrical testing and treatment procedures. PTH 1380 Supervised Clinical Education I 5 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) An introduction to clinical experience providing the student with opportunities to practice various skills in the evaluation and treatment of patients under super- vision. Five weeks during Quarter 9 of the junior year in Massachusetts. PTH 1 385 Clinical Medicine III 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) The course focus is the pediatric and neurologic aspects of physical therapy practice, including re- view of symptoms and conditions and therapeutic intervention. PTH 1 390 Physical Therapy VI 3 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1315, PTH 1330, PTH 1335, and PTH 1340) Respiratory physical therapy; theory, demonstration, and practice in the management of medical and sur- gical chest conditions. Introduction to respiratory mechanical equipment and cardiopulmonary resus- citation. 'Including lab. I Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology / 21 5 PTH 1395 Physical Therapy V (PTH 1360 continued) 1 q.h. (Prereq. PTH 1330, PTH 1335, PTH 1340, and PTH 1345) Topics include neurodevelopmental treatment, neu- rophysiological theory and clinical application of facilitation and inhibition techniques to enhance motor control as advocated by the Bobaths. PTH 1 400 Administration 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1380) Concepts in administration and management applied to physical therapy (Seminar and discussion groups.) PTH 1405 Research for Physical Therapy 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) The course covers introduction to research design, basic statistics, analysis of scientific and medical literature, and preparation of an independent research proposal. PTH 1 41 1 Physical Therapy VIII 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) The course incorporates analysis and comparison of methods of physical therapy evaluation and treatment, with an emphasis on therapeutic exercise, and treat- ment planning for various problems with emphasis on rationale and selection of treatment alternatives. Case study format and case simulations are used. The course meets for three lecture hours. The third is in seminar format with small group discussions. PTH 1415 Supervised Clinical Education II OQ H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) Advanced clinical education providing the student with further opportunities to practice various phases of physical therapy under supervision in preparation for assuming the role of a qualified physical therapist. Assignments in Massachusetts and other states. Twelve weeks during senior year Required for gradua- tion from the physical therapy program. PTH 1420 Physical Therapy in the Health Care System 3 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1370 and PTH 1380) This course examines major issues impacting the delivery of health care. Emphasis in on the role of the physical therapist as a member of the health team. Class discussion and seminar PTH 1426 Psychological Issues of Elderly Populations 3 Q.H. (Prereq. PTH 1370 and PTH 1380) The interaction of psychological, social and phys- iological factors and their effect on the potential for function of the elderly client are discussed in this course. PTH 1450 Investigative Studies 6 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory attainment in all prior profes- sional courses) The course covers selected modules related to cur- rent practice in physical therapy; completion of research project on a volitional basis. Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology SLA 1100 Basic Manual Communication Systems 4Q.H. Course focuses on the use of manual communication systems in deaf education (Manual English, SEE, and Signed English). Discussions will cover the goals and assumptions underlying these systems, their relation to American Sign Language and English, and the application of these systems in educational and clin- ical settings. Instruction is provided in introductory level English Sign Language. SLA 1101 Introduction to Speech and Hearing 4 Q.H. Course offers an overview of disorders of speech and hearing and their treatment, and a review of normal speech and hearing development. Clinical observa- tions of persons with speech, language, and hearing disorders are required. SLA 1200 Hearing Science 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1101) Basic concepts related to the physics of sound are presented, followed by an in-depth study of the anatomy and physiology of the normal hearing mech- anism. In addition, basic principles of psychophysics of audition are discussed. SLA 1201 Anatomy and Physiology of Vocal Mechanisms 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1101) Course offers an in-depth study of the static structure^ musculature, and physiology of the speech mecha- nism. Current research in speech physiology is emphasized. SLA 1 300 Developmental Semantics and Syntax 4Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1101) Course provides an analysis of the emerging semantic and syntactical aspects of language in normal and atypical children, with emphasis on discussion of current theory and research in language acquisition. Clinical observations of children with normal and atypical language patterns are required. SLA 1301 Phonetics and Developmental Phonology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1 101 and SLA 1201) Course offers a basic training in auditory recognition and symbolization of phonemes and allophones in major American dialects. Static and dynamic artic- ulatory descriptions are stressed. Course also includes a review of the developmental sequence of phonemic acquisition. 216 / Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology SLA 1302 Phonemic Disorders 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1201, SLA 1300, and SLA 1301) Course provides a practical and theoretical exami- nation of the phonemic disorders and their etiology; diagnostic tools for evaluation and methods of treat- ment. Clinical observations of persons w/ith phonemic disorders are required. SLA 1 303 Introduction to Audiology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1 200) Course focuses on the basic techniques of audiometric testing and hearing conservation, including a review/ of basic hearing sciences and a pre-practicum and lab experience in hearing testing. SLA 1 400 Speech Science 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1 101 and SLA 1200) Course offers an examination of the basic sciences involved in speech and audition, including in-depth study of the analysis of sound and the acoustic com- position of speech. Emphasis is placed on a review of current theory and research in speech reception, perception, and production. SLA 1 401 Fluency Disorders 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1201) Course offers a comprehensive study of the various theories and symptomatologies of stuttering from the earliest historical references through the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Clinical observations are required. SLA 1 402 Diagnostic Techniques 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1300, SLA 1301, SLA 1302) Course offers a presentation and review of diagnostic tests and procedures in speech-language pathology Emphasis is on the parent interview; the oral exami- nation; and the appraisal of phonemic, phonatory, language, fluency and auditory disorders. Obser- vations of diagnostic evaluations are required. SLA 1 403 Orientation to Clinical Practices 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior status) This is a pre-practicum course designed to introduce students to the policies of ASHA; to offer exposure to related health professions; to discuss the influence of state and federal legislation upon the delivery of speech-language and hearing services; to examine the role of the clinical supervisor; and to practice writing clinical goals and lesson plans. SLA 1404 Introduction to Psychoacoustics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1 400 or SLA 1 200 or SLA 1 303) This course explores the physics of sound and the psychological aspects of hearing with an emphasis on clinical applications. Topics include threshold, loudness, pitch, adaption, and auditory localization. The prerequisite may be waived only with permission of the instructor SLA 1500 Psychoacoustics Laboratory 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1404) This course provides practical application of topics discussed in SLA 1404. Students are required to re-create some of the most interesting of the classical psychoacoustics experiments. The prerequisite may be waived only with permission of the instructor SLA 1501 Clinical Practice and Seminar 4 Q.H. (Prereq. SLA 1403) Course provides full-time participation in a University- arranged and supervised school program designed to provide the student with initial involvement in the clinician-client relationship and an opportunity to demonstrate, evaluate, and develop clinical skills. SLA 1 800 Directed Study 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) This course is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot adequately be satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Preparation: Approval of the supervising faculty member, chairperson, and the Dean's Office of the Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions. Approval forms must be submitted to the Dean's Office during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study Pharmacy Pharmacy/ 21 7 PAH 1135 Professional Dynamics in the Health Care Delivery System 4 Q.H. An examination of the evolution of the American health care delivery system with emphasis on current aspects of how health care is delivered, how it is financed, where it is delivered, and who delivers it. Present and future influences in health will be discussed. Introduc- tion to unique and collective health professional roles and responsibilities, humanistic/behavioral dimen- sions of health care, professional organizations, and professionalism. PAH 1 202 Anatomy-Physiology I 5 Q.H* (Prereq. CHM 1 1 22 and BIO 1 1 07) This course covers structure and function of cells, tissues, and organs, including the muscular, immune, and nervous systems. The laboratory includes human skeletal anatomy and cat dissection. Both the lecture and laboratory sections of this course are oriented to students in the health professions. PAH 1 204 Anatomy-Physiology II 5 Q.H* (Prereq. PAH 1202 or permission of instructor) The course covers structure and function of the various life-supportive systems not covered in the first quarter: cardiovascular, endocrine, gastrointestinal, pulmonary systems. Laboratory is devoted to basic principles involved in understanding the functioning life systems and cell function. PAH 1280 Biochemistry 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1264, CHM 1265) This introductory course in biochemistry deals with the structures, functions, and metabolism of amino acids, proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, and nucleic acids. Mechanisms of enzyme reactions, enzyme kinetics, vitamins, biological oxidation reduction reactions, and bioenergetics are discussed, as well as various inborn errors of metabolism. PCL 1 101 Drugs - Their Uses and Actions 4 Q.H. Topics include background, classification, dose re- sponses, untoward side effects, uses, and commer- cial preparations of a broad series of drugs. (Not open to pharmacy respiratory therapy or nursing majors). PCL 1102 Poisons 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Nonpharmacy majors) This course presents an organized classification of chemicals (natural and synthetic) capable of potential harm to humans and their environment. Included are the effects, uses, treatments, and designs of poisons. PCL 1301 Basic Pharmacology 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) This course provides students an opportunity to learn the classification, mechanisms of action, and uses of a broad spectrum of therapeutic agents. Dose response and untoward side effects are emphasized. PCL 1305 Pharmacodynamics 3 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1120, BIO 1255, CHM 1111, and CHM 1112) This course provides introductory expositions of pharmacologic principles, with the pharmacothera- peutics of drug groups and individual drug substances of particular importance in treatment and diagnosis of disease. PCL 1309 Pharmacology for the Respiratory Care Practitioner 4 Q.H. The course provides an orientation to pharmacology, including the scope of pharmacology; definitions; drug standards; drug legislation; names, sources, and active constituents; and pharmaceutical prep- arations of drugs relating to the respiratory-care practitioner PCL 1 41 0 Introduction to Pathology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PAH 1202 and PAH 1204) The course focuses on basic concepts of pathology for the pharmacy student, with emphasis on disease processes and alterations of normal biochemical mechanisms. PCL 1 420 Pharmacology/Medicinal Chemistry II 6Q.H. (Prereq. PMC 1418) Continuation of PMC 1418. An interdisciplinary ap- proach to the fundamental chemical and pharma- cological principles of drug action. A discussion of structure-activity relationship, absorption character- istics, metabolic fate, pharmacodynamics, and ther- apeutic application, principally of those drugs acting at sympathetic and neuroeffector junctional sites. PCL 1422 Pharmacology/Medicinal Chemistry III 6Q.H. (Prereq. PCL 1420) A continuation cf PCL 1 420 with special emphasis on drugs affecting the hematopoietic systems, the kid- neys, and the endocrine and reproductive systems. PCL 1450 Pharmacology Laboratory I 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. PMC 1418) Drug actions are observed in intact animals. The signs and symptoms are related to mechanisms of drug action and the integration of physiological systems. A major goal is the consolidation and inte- gration of material previously presented in texts and didactic courses. PCL 1452 Pharmacology Laboratory II 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. PCL 1450) Basic principles of pharmacology and pharmacoki- netics are observed, using diverse experimental model systems. Drug action in these model systems demon- strates how pharmacological knowledge is obtained. PCL 1505 Drug Interactions 4 Q.H. The basic chemical-physical, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetic, physiological, and pathological factors associated with drug interactions are studied. The roles of these factors in the efficacy and safety of Lab fee required. 21 8 /Pharmacy therapeutic drug regimens involving major phar- macological classes of drugs are discussed. PCL 1801 Special Research Project (Pharmacology) (each) 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission ofinstructorand program director) This is a course of directed study or research in pharmacology/toxicology wherein the student may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of special- ized interest. PCL 1802 Special Research Project (Pharmacology) 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission ofinstructorand program director) This is a course of directed study or research in pharmacology/toxicology wherein the student may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of special- ized interest. PCL 1803 Special Research Project (Pharmacology) 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission ofinstructorand program director) This is a course of directed study or research in pharmacology/toxicology wherein the student may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of special- ized interest. PCX 1230 Pharmaceutical Calculations 3 Q.H. The course provides an introduction to the general scope of pharmacy Emphasis is on systems of meas- urement and basic arithmetic calculations as they relate to the practice of pharmacy Additionally the student is introduced to statistical analysis and essen- tial mathematical concepts required for subsequent courses in pharmaceutics. PCT 1320 Pharmaceutics Laboratory 2 Q.H. (Prereq. PCT 1350 or concurrent enrollment) The course focuses on the application of the fun- damental principles and techniques of pharmaceu- tics to the laboratory preparation and use of various pharmaceutical drug products. PCT 1 340 Pharmaceutics I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MTH 1108, PHY 1203, OHM 1265, and PCT 1230) The course focuses on the study of physiochemical theories and principles and their application to phar- maceutical systems. Topics include thermodynamics, ionic equilibria, solubility, complexation, interfacial phenomena, rheology coarse dispersions, diffusion, membrane transport, and kinetics. PCT 1 350 Pharmaceutics II 5 Q.H. (Prereq. PCT 1340) The course focuses on the application of the fun- damental principles of physical pharmacy to the for- mulation of pharmaceutical preparations. Emphasis is on pharmaceutical dosage forms, including both industrial formulation and extemporaneous com- pounding. PCT 1 440 Biopharmaceutics/Pharmacokinetics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PAH 1204) A class designed to acquaint students with bio- pharmaceutics and basic pharmacokinetics. Topics include dissolution, disintegration, general concept of one-and two-compartment models; linear and non- linear pharmacokinetics; drug kinetics after intra- venous, intramuscular, or oral administration; practi- cal methods of one-compartment model utilizing urinary data; bioavailability; multiple-dosing kinetics; and general approaches to dosage adjustment in disease states. PCT 1441 Pharmacokinetic Principles in Drug Therapy 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PCT 1440) The course covers the monitoring, development, and modification of drug dosage regimens, and the phar- macokinetic factors influencing the selection of these regimens, for the various therapeutic categories of drugs. PCT 1801 Pharmaceutics Special Research Project 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission of instructor(s) and program director) A course of directed study or research in one of the pharmaceutical sciences, wherein the student may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of special- ized interest. PCT 1 802 Pharmaceutics Special Research Projects (each) 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission of instructor(s) and program director) A course of directed study or research in pharma- ceutics, wherein the student may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of specialized interest. PCT 1803 Pharmaceutics Special Research Project 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission of instructor(s) and program director) A course of directed study or research in pharmaceu- tics, wherein the student may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of specialized interest. PHP 1301 Pharmaceutical Jurisprudence 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The course offers a comprehensive analysis and inter- pretation of laws relating to the practice of pharmacy Federal and state food and drug laws, narcotics laws, Medicare and Medicaid regulations, and state phar- macy laws are discussed. PHP 1 302 Pharmacy Administration I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The course covers socioeconomic aspects of phar- macy: the government's relation to the pharmaceuti- cal industry trends in contemporary practice, third- party payment plans, macroeconomic impact on the industry and the interaction of current concepts in pharmacy ' Lab fee required. Pharmacy/ 21 9 PHP 1303 Interpersonal Skills for Health Professionals 4 Q.H. The course is designed to apply the skills of inter- personal communication to situations encountered in various health care settings. Students are provided with an opportunity to learn to integrate specific tech- nical competence with serious concern for personal, social, and cultural factors in illness and health care. Through the use of medical sociology literature, audio- visual materials, case analyses, and personal reflec- tion on actual patient encounters, the students are provided with an opportunity to improve interpersonal communication skills, and to help increase their under- standing of practitioner-patient relationships, patient's needs and responses in illness and treatment, and professional behavior in practice settings. PHP 1 304 Social Pharmacology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PHP 1303 or consent of instructor) An introductory study of drug-taking experiences and behaviors. The course provides an overview of theories and research findings which describe the relationships between personal, social, and cultural factors and drug taking, while comparing and con- trasting the social approach with the pharmacological paradigm of drug effects and the medical model of drug- use. Through the use of readings, audiovisual materials, and descriptions of personal experiences, the student will examine the varieties of drug experi- ences, patterns of and reasons for drug taking of all types, and strategies for preventing drug use problems. PHP 1305 Hospital Pharmacy Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing or permission of instructor) The factors involved in the operations and manage- ment of a hospital pharmacy within the context of the total hospital structure. PHP 1306 Community Pharmacy Management 4Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing or permission of instructor) The course focuses on the management requirements for establishing a community pharmacy A compara- tive analysis of the prevailing types of organizations, locations, leases, business organization, staffing, plant layout and design, and financial factors. PHP 1 307 Principles of Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The course covers the fundamentals of business organization with emphasis on the qualitative and legal aspects of management. This course includes an analysis of the marketing structure of the drug trade, forces of organizations, personnel management, and decision-making theory using nonqualitative data. PHP 1308 Rnancial Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) The course examines the fundamentals of accounting and finance with emphasis on their application to retailing and community pharmacy management. Accounting systems, analysis of financial statements, budgets, cash flow, taxation, and finance are covered in depth. PHP 1309 Seminar in Community Pharmacy Management 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) A discussion course on all phases of community pharmacy operations with extensive utilization of the case method of instruction. PHP 1 401 Drug information and Evaluation 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Fifth-year standing or permission of instruc- tor) An introduction to the principles and practice of drug information. Material covered includes the levels of practice, the availability of therapeutic reference sources, the use of abstracting and indexing systems, how to respond to drug information questions, and basic statistical data required to help understand the medical and pharmaceutical literature. PHP 1 402 Parapharmaceuticals 2 Q.H. Course focuses on the nature and application of various surgical devices, appliances, bandages, and hospital and sickroom supplies in patient care. PHP 1 501 Pharmacy Externship 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Fifth-year standing) A 520-hour (thirteen weeks x 40 hours/week) struc- tured practicum in community pharmacy. The ex- perience includes applied aspects of community pharmacy management; medication dispensing; and patient-oriented services such as prescription and nonprescription medication, consultation, and patient- profile monitoring. PHP 1 502 Clinical Pharmacy Clerkship 1 5 Q.H. (Prereq. PHP 1602) Students are assigned to a clinical site for five full days per week to observe patient response to med- ication and to evaluate and advise on all factors that may modify efficacy safety, and economy of therapy Campus seminar involves student presentations on current therapeutic topic. PHP 1 503 Professional Practice Laboratory 1 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior standing or permission of instructor) Compounding and dispensing medications. Empha- sis is on patient counseling techniques and moni- toring for appropriateness of therapy Prescription compounding involves screening for incompatibilities. Also includes an introduction to the preparation of intravenous solutions. PHP 1 601 Nonprescription Medication 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PCT 1440) A course designed to provide an overall view of the various types of "over-the-counter" medications. The directions and precautions for proper use of these preparations are discussed. PHP 1602 Pharmacotherapeutics 5 Q.H. (Prereq. PCL 1422 and PCL 1410) The course covers discussion of common clinical laboratory tests, major disease states, and drug therapy for these conditions. 220 / Pharmacy PHP 1603 Selected Topics in Clinical Pharmacy I 4Q.H. (Prereq. PHP 1602 and permission of instructor) Designed to help students increase their understand- ing of selected diseases. Pathophysiology and diag- nosis of the illness as well as drug therapy and its relation to patient compliance and education. Pro- vides greater depth than existing clinical pharmacy courses. PHP 1604 Selected Topics in Clinical Pharmacy II 4Q.H. (Prereq. PHP 1602 and permission of instructor) This is a course designed to help increase the stu- dent's knowledge of selected disease entities. Topics will include pathophysiology and diagnosis of the illness as well as drug therapy and its relation to patient compliance and education. It will be more in depth than existing clinical pharmacy courses. PHP 1801 Special Research Project 4 Q.H. (Clinical Pharmacy) (Prereq. Permission of instructor and program direc- tor) This is a course of directed study or research in clinical pharmacy, wherein the student may under- take in-depth investigation of an area of specialized interest. PHP 1802 Special Research Project 4 Q.H. (Clinical Pharmacy) (Prereq. Permission of instructor and program direc- tor) This is a course of directed study or research in clinical pharmacy wherein the student may under- take in-depth investigation of an area of specialized interest. PHP 1803 Special Research Project 4 Q.H. (Pharmacy Administration) (Prereq. Permission of instructor and program direc- tor) This is a course of directed study or research in pharmacy administration, wherein the student may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of special- ized interest. PHP 1804 Special Research Project 4 Q.H. (Pharmacy Administration) Prereq. Permission of instructor and program direc- tor) This is a course of directed study or research in pharmacy administration, wherein the student may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of special- ized interest. PMC 1418 Medicinal Chemistry/Pharmacology I 4Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 107, CHM 1265, PAH 1202, PAH 1204) Course offers an introduction to the principles of pharmacology and medicinal chemistry applied to the discovery of drugs and their therapeutic utility in man; a detailed discussion of drugs affecting the central nervous system, including therapeutic indi- cations, adverse reactions, and mechanisms of action. PMC 1 420 Antiinfectives 5 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1265, BIO 1106, BIO 1107, and PAH 1280) A discussion of modern chemotherapeutic agents used in the therapy of bacterial, viral, fungal, and parasitic infections; emphasis on the selective tox- icity, organic chemistry, and medicinal chemistry of these agents. The course also offers an introduction to microbiology and microbial disease and a series of lectures on the development and use of vaccines. PMC 1 440 Medicine Out of the Earth 4 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 265, BIO 1 1 06 and BIO 1 1 07) This course focuses on the historical use of plants as drugs and their role in the development of modern medicinal and pharmaceutical preparations. Intro- duction to a variety of modern approaches to the discovery of new drugs is included, with reference to current research programs employing them. Films, slides, and demonstrations illustrate the techniques involved. PMC 1450 Basics of Nuclear Pharmacy 4 Q.H. This course comprises the study of the physics, chem- istry, and pharmaceutical use of radiopharmaceuticals. Methods for preparing and handling these drugs will be discussed in a practical way as well as the ration- ale for their use in diagnosis and therapy. PMC 1801 Special Research Project (Medicinal Chemistry) 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission of instructor and program director) Courses offer directed study or research in one of the medicinal chemistry areas. Students may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of specialized interest including literature search and report. PMC 1 802 Special Research Project (Medicinal Chemistry) 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permissionofinstructorandprogramdirector) Course offers directed study or research in one of the medicinal chemistry areas. Students may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of specialized interest including literature search and report. PMC 1 803 Special Research Project (Medicinal Chemistry) 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. Permission of instructorandprogramdirector) Course offers directed study or research in one of the medicinal chemistry areas. Students may undertake in-depth investigation of an area of specialized interest including literature search and report. *Lab fee required. Toxicology/ 221 Toxicology TOX 11 00 Toxicology Orientation 1 Q.H. An introduction to toxicology as it relates to clinical, environmental, and regulatory concerns. Includes re- search principles, clinical toxicology of drugs, water and air pollution concerns. An overview of the field for toxicology and science majors. TOX 1131 Laboratory Animal Science 4 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 260, PAH 1 204, and/or permission of instructor) A comprehensive examination of the role of the lab- oratory animal in biomedical research. Includes his- torical and legislative aspects of animal research, basic anatomy and physiology, genetics and nutri- tion, physiological parameters, animal health and dis- ease, and experimental protocols. TOX 1300 Clinical Toxicology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PMC 1418) The course focuses on principles of toxicology, in- cluding FDA requirements relating to new drugs, en- vironmental and other factors affecting the toxicity of therapeutic agents, mechanisms of toxicity, and clinical applications. TOX 1301 Fundamental Principles of Systemic Toxicology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. PMC 1418) Course offers a presentation of the principles of toxicology with reference to mode of toxic damage at the cellular and systemic levels. The course in- cludes a discussion of the basic concepts used in evaluation of toxicity and the basic mechanisms through which toxic drug interactions are induced. TOX 1 302 Chemical and Analytical Toxicology 4Q.H. (Prereq. PMC 1418 and TOX 1301) Course offers a presentation of the structure activity approach to toxicology of chemical classes of com- pounds. The methodology employed to evaluate the safety of chemicals is presented. TOX 1320 Toxicology Laboratory 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. TOX 1301, TOX 1302, and a course in sta- tistics) Principles and experimental methods in toxicology are presented. Animal handling, biochemical tech- niques, and morphological demonstration of toxic injury are included. TOX 1321 Biochemical Toxicology 3 Q.H.* (Prereq. TOX 1 300, TOX 1 301 , or TOX 1 302) The objective of this course is 1) to introduce the student to investigational methods for assessing tox- icity, 2) to develop the student's ability to analyze and interpret data generated in the lab and in the literature, and 3) to develop technical report writing skills. Rodents are used as a model for toxic insult. Hep- atotoxicfty, neurotoxicity, teratogenicity, and other toxic manifestations are examined at the whole animal, whole tissue, and biochemical level. TOX 1 801 Special Topics 4 Q.H.* Selected areas of toxicology will be explored. These may include research, seminars, comparative anal- ysis of data, or faculty-guided programs. TOX 1 802 Special Topics 4 Q.H.* Selected areas of toxicology will be explored. These may include research, seminars, comparative anal- ysis of data, or faculty-guided programs. TOX 1 803 Special Topics 4 Q.H.* Selected areas of toxicology will be explored. These may include research, seminars, comparative anal- ysis of data, or faculty-guided programs. *Lab fee required. Health Professions General Courses HRA 1 31 0 Hospital Law 2 Q.H. This course offers an analysis of the legal principles relating to medical and paramedical practice within a hospital environment. The common law and statutory rights of the hospital, practitioner, and patient are discussed. HRA 1 320 Medical Terminology 4 Q.H. The course offers a study of the language of medicine, including prefixes, suffixes, roots, abbreviations, and disease, operative, and drug terms. Also included are terms related to all area specialties. The terms are studied as they relate to a specific system of the body HRA 1321 Basic Medical Terminology 2 Q.H. This course provides a study of the language of medicine and health care. Emphasis is on disease, procedures, and symptomatic terms and their defi- nitions, word construction, analysis, and application. The student is provided an opportunity to acquire working knowledge of medical terminology HRA 1330 Foundations of Medical Science I 3Q.H. The course covers major disease problems in our society and modes of treatment. Included are dis- cussion of organized care; diagnosis and treatment; consideration of reproduction, birth, and pediatrics. HRA 1340 Foundations of Medical Science II 3 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1330) A continuation of 1 330 covering heart, cancer, stroke, blood and lymphatic diseases, accidents, and mus- culoskeletal, respiratory, and gastro-intestinal dis- eases. 222 / Medical Laboratory Science Medical Laboratory Science The Medical Laboratory professional courses are taught by University faculty, together with supportive clinical faculty. MLS 1101 Medical Laboratory Science Orientation I 1 Q.H. The course focuses on the history and development of the medical laboratory science profession and includes an introduction to medical terminology MLS 1102 Medical Laboratory Science Orientation II 1 Q.H. Medical Laboratory Science Orientation II is a con- tinuation of Medical Laboratory Science Orientation I with the addition of a review of mathematics and metric unit calculations. MLS 1109 Foundations of Clinical Laboratory Science 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Admission to physician assistant program or permission by instructor) Basic laboratory methods employed in primary care, including urinalysis, gram staining, hematocrit, hemo- globin, sedimentation rate, white cell count, and dif- ferential. MLS 1111 Basic Medical Laboratory Science Urinalysis 3 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 and CHM 1 1 22) Introductory course in basic medical laboratory sci- ence covers principles and theories of renal physi- ology, with laboratory emphasis on techniques for chemical and microscopic detection of normal and abnormal constituents. MLS 1121 Basic MLS Hematology I 3 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 and CHM 1 1 22) This introductory course in basic hematology pro- cedures and principles covers hemoglobin, hema- tocrit, white and red blood cell counts, and white cell differentiation. MLS 1 1 22 Basic MLS Hematology II 3 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 1 21 or MLS 1 321 ) The course covers principles and procedures of hema- tology, with emphasis on hematologic cell maturation and morphology and basic hemostastis. MLS 1131 Basic MLS Immunohematology-Serology 6Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 11 07, CHM 1122) This course is a study of in vitro and in vivo inter- actions between antigens on red blood cells and corresponding antibodies and the proteins of the complement system. Didactic and laboratory exer- cises will emphasize immunohematology/blood bank- ing and diagnostic immuno-serological techniques currently used in clinical laboratory practice. MLS 1141 Basic MLS Clinical Microbiology 6 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1 1 22, and BIO 1 1 07) The course focuses on basic principles and tech- niques of organism isolation, cultivation, and iden- tification from clinical specimens. Elementary serologic procedures are discussed. MLS 1151 Basic MLS Clinical Chemistry and Instrumentation 5 Q.H.* (Prereq. MLS 1 1 1 1 or MLS 1311, CHM 1 221 ) The course covers principles of clinical chemistry with application to procedures and techniques. Lab- oratory emphasis on instrumental analysis of specific clinical chemical specimens. MLS 1 31 1 Basic MLS Urinalysis 2 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 122 and BIO 1 107) Introductory course in basic medical laboratory sci- ence. Principles and theories of renal physiology with laboratory emphasis on techniques for chemical and microscopic detection of normal and abnormal uri- nary tract constituents. MLS 1 321 Basic MLS Hematology I 2 Q.H. (Prereq. CHM 1 1 22 and BIO 1 1 07) Introductory course in basic hematology procedures and principles: hemoglobin, hematocrit, white and red blood cell counts, and white cell differentiation. MLS 1322 Basic Medical Laboratory Science Hematology II 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1121 or MLS 1321) Principles and procedures of basic medical laboratory hematology including basic hemostasis, are covered. MLS 1323 Advanced Hemostasis Techniques 2 Q.H* (Prereq. MLS 1122 or MLS 1322 or permission of instructor) Lecture/laboratory course in advanced hemostatic techniques. Theory and methodology will be stressed, along with interpretation of laboratory results. MLS 1 324 Histochemistry 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. MLS 1621 or MLS 4341 or permission of instructor) The histochemistry of hemic cells and techniques used in diagnosis of hematological disorders are covered. MLS 1330 Basic MLS Immunohematology 2 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1107) Basic principles in immunohematology and related, techniques, with particular emphasis on those pro- cedures used in blood banking, are covered. MLS 1331 Basic MLS Clinical Immunology 3 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 1 07 and CHM 1 1 22| Topics include basic principles of immunology with laboratory emphasis on immunodiagnostic techniques currently used in clinical laboratory practice. MLS 1332 Basic MLS Immunohematology 3 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1107) The course covers basic principles in immunohe- matology with specific application to the A, B, O, and Rh blood group systems, antibody detection, and crossmatch design. Basic blood bank techniques to include blood typing and crossmatching. *Lab fee required. Medical Laboratory Science / 223 MLS 1333 immunohematology 2 Q.H * (Prereq. MLS 1330 or MLS 1332) This course offers advanced studies in antigen-anti- body detection and problem solving through immuno- hematological tests. Discussion of related hematologic disorders and the medical/legal aspects of blood banking is included. MLS 1341 Basic MLS Clinical Microbiology 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. BIO 1 107 and CHM 1 122) Basic principles and techniques or organism isola- tion, cultivation, and identification from clinical spec- imens are covered. Elementary serologic procedures will be discussed. MLS 1351 Basic MLS Clinical Chemistry and Instrumentation 4 Q.H.* (Prereq. CHM 1221 and MLS 1111 or MLS 1311) Principles, procedures, and techniques of basic clin- ical chemistry and instrumentation. MLS 1412 MLT Special Topics - Applied Microscopy 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1101, MLS 1102, MLS 11 11, MLS 1121, MLS 1122, MLS 1131, MLS 1141, MLS 1151, and admission to AD-MLT Clinical Program) Clinical practicum in applied urinalysis, parasitology, and mycology at an affiliated hospital providing MLT(ASCP) and CLT(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1423 MLT Applied Study in Hematology 2Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1101, MLS 1102, MLS 11 11, MLS 1121, MLS 1122, MLS 1131, MLS 1141, MLS 1151, and admission to AD-MLT Clinical Program) Clinical practicum in hematology and coagulation at a Northeastern University-affiliated hospital providing MLT(ASCP) and CLT(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1432 MLT Applied Study in Blood Banking 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1101, MLS 1102, MLS 1111, MLS 1121, MLS 1122, MLS 1131, MLS 1141, MLS 1151, and admission to AD-MLT Clinical Program) Clinical practicum in blood banking at a Northeastern University-affiliated hospital providing MLT(ASCP) and CLT(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1442 MLT Applied Study in Clinical Microbiology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 101, MLS 1 102, MLS 1 1 1 1, MLS 1121, MLS 1122, MLS 1131, MLS 1141, MLS 1151, and admission to AD-MLT Clinical Program). Clinical practicum in microbiology at a Northeastern University-affiliated hospital providing MLT(ASCP) and CLT(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1452 MLT Applied Study in Clinical Chemistry 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 101, MLS 1 102, MLS 1 1 1 1, MLS 1 121, MLS 1122, MLS 1131, MLS 1141, MLS 1151, and admission to AD-MLT Clinical Program) Clinical practicum in clinical chemistry and urinalysis at a Northeastern University-affiliated hospital pro- viding MLT(ASCP) and CLT(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1 480 MLT Seminar I 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1101, MLS 1102, MLS 1111, MLS 1121, MLS 1122, MLS 1131, MLS 1141, MLS 1151, and admission to AD-MLT Clinical Program) The course offers a basic introduction to correlation of laboratory findings in hematology blood banking, microbiology, and clinical chemistry with appropriate referrals of laboratory information in working situa- tion. Basic use of quality control. MLS 1 523 Hematology MT Applied Study 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Acceptance of MT Clinical Program) Clinical practicum in applied hematology at an affil- iated hospital medical technology program, which provides for MT(ASCP), CLS(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1532 Immunohematology MT Applied Study 3 Q.H. (Prereq. Acceptance to MT Clinical Program) Clinical practicum in applied immunohematology at an affiliated hospital medical technology pro- gram, which provides for MT(ASCP), CLS(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1544 Clinical Microbiology MT Applied Study 7Q.H. (Prereq. Acceptance to MT Clinical Program) Clinical practicum in applied microbiology at an affiliated hospital medical technology program, which provides for MT(ASCP), CLS(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1552 Clinical Chemistry MT Applied Study 7Q.H. (Prereq. Acceptance to MT Clinical Program) Clinical practicum in applied clinical chemistry at an affiliated hospital medical technology program, which provides for MT(ASCP), CLS(NCA)-level instruction. MLS 1 621 Advanced Hematology I 3 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 122 or permission of instructor) Topics include physiology of blood cells and bone marrow with a review of physiology of blood hemo- poiesis; discussions of hematologic results as they relate to normal, anemic, and leukemic conditions. MLS 1622 Advanced Hematology II - Hemostastis 2Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 1 22 or permission of instructor) Advanced studies in hemostasis with emphasis on factor identification and problem solving of hemo- static problems. MLS 1631 Advanced Immunohematology 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1332) This course offers blood group systems, antibody identification, and advanced immunohematologic principles and procedures. Case studies will be pre- sented. MLS 1632 Immunology 5 Q.H. (Prereq. BIO 1260, BIO 1261 or permission of the instructor) Lecture: The lecture component will stress current concepts of immune function such as the structure and function of antigens and antibodies, the role of Lab fee required. 224 / Health Record Administration the major histocompatibility complex in cell-to-cell interactions, and the regulation of the immune re- sponse by suppressor cells. Topics discussed will be related to such clinical conditions as organ trans- plantation, cancer, and autoimmunity. Laboratory: Experiments will be designed to intro- duce students to 1) animal immunization and bleed- ing techniques, 2) in vitro antigen assay methods, 3) cell separation and characterization, and 4) the preparation of monoclonal antibodies. The laboratory section will also introduce students to various clinical laboratory assays utilized to detect certain immu- nodeficiencies. MLS 1 642 Medical Parasitology 3 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1141) Laboratory identification of significant human para- sites. Life cycles related to mode of infestation, effect on man, and diagnostic form. MLS 1 643 Medical Mycology 3 Q.H.* (Prereq. MLS 1341 or MLS 1141) Laboratory identification of clinically significant fungi with a discussion of modes and types of infections. MLS 1645 Advanced Clinical Microbiology I 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 141 or permission of instructor) Topics include host and microbial interactions in disease produced by viruses, rickettsia, chlamydia, mycoplasma, mycobacteria, and actinomyces, with discussion of disease states and laboratory diagnostic procedures. MLS 1646 Advanced Clinical Microbiology II 2Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 141 or permission of instructor) Course covers host and microbial interactions in gas- trointestinal, genitourinary, and respiratory tract infec- tions; discussion of disease states and laboratory diagnostic procedures. MLS 1647 Advanced Clinical Microbiology III 2Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1141 or permission of instructor) Topics include host and microbial interactions in closed-space infections and in disease produced by staphylococci and anaerobic organisms. Methods for antibiotic susceptibility testing and principles of infec- tious disease control are also included. MLS 1651 Advanced Clinical Chemistry I 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 151 or permission of instructor) Course includes current methodologies and instru- mentation used in clinical chemistry to evaluate hor- monal conditions and drug level monitoring. MLS 1 652 Advanced Clinical Chemistry II 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1 151 or permission of instructor) Course includes metabolism of and procedures for nucleic acids, amino acids, proteins, lipids, and car- bohydrates. MLS 1 653 Advanced Clinical Chemistry III 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1151 or MLS 1351 or permission of instructor) Course includes a discussion of laboratory proce- dures used to evaluate acid-base balance, hepatic, renal, and gastrointestinal systems as well as vitamin and trace-metal blood levels. MLS 1 661 Medical Laboratory Science Education 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Completion of clinical program) The course offers a survey of current topics in medical laboratory science education: developing objectives, methods of evaluation and certification, clinical in- struction and evaluation, medical laboratory science curricula, and use of media and other methods of instruction. MLS 1665 Medical Laboratory Management 2Q.H. (Prereq. Completion of clinical program) The course offers a survey of factors that relate to effective laboratory administration: hospital organi- zational structure, principles of management and supervision, cost accounting, purchasing, inspection guidelines, legal responsibilities, and personnel re- lations. MLS 1 680 MLS Special Topics 2 Q.H. (Prereq. MLS 1111 through MLS 1 151) Current topics in the clinical laboratory MLS 1 681 MLS Senior Seminar 2 Q.H. The course provides a review of current undergrad- uate medical laboratory science topics. MLS 1890 Undergraduate Research 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Special permission) The course examines special problems in laboratory medicine involving individual research under the direction of a faculty member. MLS 1 891 MLS Current Concepts 1 Q.H. Topics for this course are determined by recent advances in medical laboratory science. Lab fee required. Health Record Administration HRA 1100 Orientation to Medical Records I 1 Q.H. This introductory seminar focuses on the issues, activities, and opportunities in the medical record profession. HRA 1101 Orientation to Medical Records II 1 Q.H. Continuation of seminar that introduces the medical record profession. Focuses on the tools utilized by the medical record professional. Health Record Administration / 225 HRA 1410 Health Record Science I 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Two years of arts and sciences) The course offers introduction to health records; history of the medical record and medical record forms. Included are a study of professional medical record administrators and their relation to the health facility, medical staff, and committees in the hospital. Quantitative analysis of medical records. HRA 1 420 Health Record Science II 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1410) This course covers the numbering, filing, security, and preservation of medical records; principles of law related to patient care and medical records; emphasis on the rules of privileged communications and the release of information to agencies. HRA 1 430 Health Record Science III 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1420) The course examines basic principles of compiling statistics for hospital and other health institutions. Topics include the preparation of the daily census and discharge analysis; monthly annual, and special reports; birth and death certificates; principles of standardized nomenclature of diseases and opera- tions and ICD-9-CM; and study of other indexes used in medical record departments. HRA 1440 Advanced Health Record Science IV 4Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1430) This course covers advanced aspects of health/med- ical record science. Special focus is on the man- agement of record systems in ambulatory, long-term, home care, and psychiatric settings. HRA 1450 Applied Health Records Directed Practice I 3 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1 430) Clinical practicum in medical record science in the general hospital. HRA 1460 Applied Health Records Directed Practice II 2 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1450) Clinical practicum in medical record science in spe- cialized health settings. HRA 1470 Applied Health Records Science III 4Q.H. Clinical practicum in health/medical records man- agement in the health-care facility. HRA 1 480 Clinical Seminar 2 Q.H. Designed to integrate the didactic and the clinical experience at an early stage, the course provides a formal means by which students can share clinical developments with each other It is designed to give them an opportunity to improve their competency in specific areas of medical record practice. HRA 1510 Management of Health Record Services 1 4 Q.H. This course focuses on the medical record depart- ment within the health care setting. Lines of respon- sitnlity and authority, medical staff and administrative organization, hospital department functions and or- ganization are examined, as are fundamental prin- ciples and successful practices of office organization. An opportunity is provided for the student to develop the technical skills necessary to develop organization charts, policies, job descriptions, and job procedures. HRA 1 520 Management of Health Record Services 2 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1510) This course focuses on the medical record depart- ment within the health care setting. Budget and cost control mechanisms, organized labor and collective bargaining, office environment and layout, and the impact of state and federal regulations on medical record practices are examined. An opportunity is provided for the student to develop the technical skills necessary to plan and analyze budgets, to plan and design office layouts, and to evaluate the impact of regulations on particular medical record applications. HRA 1530 Management of Health Record Services 3 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1 520) This course focuses on the medical record depart- ment within the health care setting. Orientation pro- grams; training programs; in-service education; inter- viewing, hiring, counseling, motivating, and disciplining employees; and communication skills are examined. An opportunity is provided for the student to develop an orientation and training program, and in-service presentation. Role-playing sessions and case studies are used to develop skill in interviewing, hiring, coun- seling, disciplining, and motivating employees. Em- phasis is placed on verbal skills. HRA 1 540 Quality Assurance 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1430, HRA 1440; HRA 1320 or per- mission of instructor) This course is designed to provide the student with the opportunity to gain knowledge of the issues and problems involved in designing, implementing, and maintaining quality assurance programs for health- care facilities. An opportunity will also be provided for the student to gain the technical skills necessary to carry out all aspects of the audit process, emphasizing the professional's role as facilitator to physicians and other professional staff. HRA 1 560 Seminar in Health Records 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior status) Case study and discussion are used to integrate the discrete skills and knowledge of the professional curriculum into a meaningful whole by analysis of real and hypothetical problems. Coordination between the seminar and applied medical record science is emphasized. HRA 1570 The Health Record Professional: Issues and Problems 2 Q.H. (Prereq. Senior status) This course provides the senior health record student with information on a range of topics that are germane to his/her professional role but that may not have been included in other professional courses. 226 / Respiratory Therapy HRA 1610 Introduction to Data Processing for the Health Services 4 Q.H. This is an introductory course designed to introduce the student to the basic concepts of electronic data processing. Topics considered include input, output, storage, computation, and controls. The basic history of automation is reviewed and the concept of com- puter language is introduced, utilizing FORTRAN. Simple problems are completed on an individual and group basis. HRA 1 620 Systems Analysis 4 Q.H. (Prereq. HRA 1 550) This course is designed as an introduction to systems analysis, its concepts, and techniques. Special appli- cation to health record management is stressed throughout the course. HRA 1 630 Applied Health Statistics 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Basic statistics course) Designed to provide the health record student v\/ith the opportunity to learn to apply basic statistical tech- niques to the gathering, analysis, and interpretation of health care and medical record data, as w/ell as the effective use of these tools in such areas as depart- ment management and research studies. Agencies involved in collecting statistical data w^ill be reviev\/ed, with the types and sources of information they require; the relation of statistics, epidemiology and medical records will also be considered. HRA 1640 Medical Computer Applications 4 Q.H. (Prereq. EDP Course I) This course covers utilization of electronic data proc- essing in health care. Overview of current activities and their impact on future trends in health record management information will be discussed. The role of the RRA as an information specialist will be con- sidered. HRA 1650 Health Record Education This course is designed to prepare the health record administration student to function as an in-service educator Topics include needs assessment, teaching techniques, and evaluation methodology. HRA 1 800 Independent Study 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Permission of instructor) This independent study project is designed to give students an opportunity to explore in depth a subject relevant to their interests. It is designed to give them the opportunity to study a problem, present a pro- posal, carry out a study or a course of action, and prepare both written and oral presentation of their activities. HRA 1810 Special Topics i 2 Q.H. The course provides specialized study in medical records. HRA 1 820 Special Topics II 2 Q.H. The course provides specialized study in medical records. Respiratory Therapy RTH 1111 Respiratory Therapy Seminar I 1 Q.H. This is a survey course designed to introduce the beginning respiratory therapy student to the role of respiratory therapists in health-care delivery. RTH 1112 Respiratory Therapy Seminar II 1 Q.H. This is a survey course designed to introduce the beginning student to therapeutic modalities of res- piratory care. RTH 1 1 1 3 Respiratory Therapy Seminar III 1 Q.H. Continuation of RTH 1112, including introduction to life-support systems. RTH 1301 Professional Practice Laboratory I 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. RTH 1331 concurrently) This lab is designed to provide practice in basic care skills through laboratory exercises and simulation of patient-care situations. RTH 1302 Professional Practice Laboratory 11 1 Q.H.* (Prereq. RTH 1301, RTH 1332 concurrently) The lab is designed to provide students with hands-on experience in working with respiratory therapy equip- ment. Simulated patient-management problems will be set up in the lab to provide problem-solving experience. RTH 1320 Cardiopulmonary Physiology 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory completion of the first-year courses) The course is designed to provide a detailed intro- duction to the clinical diagnostic procedures employed in evaluating cardiopulmonary patients and descrip- tion of the etiology patho-physiology diagnosis, and treatment of major cardiopulmonary diseases. RTH 1321 Cardiopulmonary Disease 4 Q.H. (Prereq. Satisfactory completion of the first-year courses) This course is designed to provide a detailed intro- duction to the clinical diagnostic procedures employed in evaluating cardiopulmonary patients and descrip- tion of the etiology pathophysiology diagnosis, and treatment of major cardiopulmonary diseases. RTH 1331 Introduction to Patient Care 4 Q.H. This course is designed to provide an opportunity for the student to gain knowledge and understanding of basic patient-care skills, including moving and posi- tioning of patients, infection control, basic observation and assessment skills, and familiarity with the tech- niques of cardiopulmonary resuscitation. An oppor- Lab fee required. Respiratory Therapy / 227 tunity will also be provided for the development of the student's interpersonal and communication slr I The first half of this two-course sequence examines major concepts and findings of the behavioral sci- ences which have particular pertinence to business and administration. Systematic ways of understand- Business Administration / 49 ing behavior are developed. Specific topics include human development and motivation, interpersonal perception and communication, and small groups processes. The second half of the course sequence relates these basic concepts to specific aspects of behavior in formally constituted organizations. Su- pervisory behavior is examined in the behavioral context, as well as in relations between groups, in efforts to develop ways of achieving collaboration. Prereq.: none. HRM 3817 Organizational Behavior II The study of behavior in organizations is expanded in order to understand and deal systematically with the complex relationships found in larger organiza- tions. An opportunity is provided to apply knowledge about people in organizations to the improvement of organizational systems and to the process of achiev- ing changes in organizations. Prereq.: HRM 3816. HRM 3905 Selection and Assessment This course focuses on personnel recruitment, se- lection, and assessment. Basic issues and proce- dures such as realistic recruitment, the impact of the EEOC, decision strategies, and utility will be covered in detail. The basic tools examined will be testing, interviewing, and application blanks. Read- ings and outside projects will be used in a class discussion/lecture format. Prereq.: none. HRM 3913 Managing Power and Influence Explores through cases, readings, and videotape the complex issues involved in the use of power and influence in organizations and how to manage these issues in ways that are organizationally effective and socially responsible. Topics include: a) the dynamics of power within organizations; b) the methods by which effective managers acquire and maintain power to manage critical dependencies and uncertainties; c) the important interdependency between power, influence and trust in organizations; d) analysis and action planning around one's own style of influence and use of power; e) the effects of these issues upon one's own career. Prereq.: HRM 3815, HRM 3816, and 15 q.h. of grad. credit. HRM 3914 Management of Professionals This course is designed to meet the need for im- proving the managerial effectiveness of professionals who will have increasing responsibility over the func- tional activities within their organizations. Course ma- terial will cover both micro concerns (i.e., individuals and project groups) and macro issues (i.e., organi- zational structure, design, and interfunctional rela- tionships) including the following broad areas: su- pervising and motivating professional employees; dealing with professional obsolescence; career ori- entations; differences between scientific and engi- neering fields; effective conflict management; effec- tive leadership in professional settings; technical problem solving and decision making; managing project teams; improving group processes; technical conformity, critical roles in the innovation process; effective technology transfer; the role of interper- sonal, organizational, and architectural factors in ef- fecting intra- and inter-organizational communication and technical information flows; and organizational diagnosis and change. Prereq.: HRM 3815, HRM 2816. HRM 3923 Managing Careers This course will explore the dynamics through which the concerns, abilities, and experiences of individual employees are juxtaposed with the demands and requirements of various work environments. Students will address issues of individual differences in career orientation, entry and development problems of new employees, career progression patterns and the or- ganization's role in providing training, career support systems, the management succession guidelines. Prereq.: HRM 3816. HRM 3924 Organizational Behavior in a Nonprofit Environment Human service organizations involved in health care, welfare, and education are studied in reference to recent behavioral theories and concepts dealing with the internal and external complexities and interre- lationships of large-scale organizations. Term proj- ects are designd to conduct and analyze a problem situation and develop plans for implementing change. Readings, cases, and seminars. Prereq.: HRM 3816. HRM 3930 Managing Performance: Evaluating Employees at Work This course will focus on the critical issues of per- formance appraisal. Major attention will be given to the process of identifying performance criteria, to measurement techniques, and to the conduct of re- view sessions for administrative and development purposes. Students will be expected to acquire a thorough working knowledge of state-of-the-art ap- praisal techniques as well as ability to critically ana- lyze and redesign deficient appraisal review systems. Prereq.: HRM 3815 and HRM 3816 and 15 q.h. of grad. credit. HRM 3945 Training and Developing Human Services This course is aimed at those management gener- alists and human resource specialists who are con- cerned with maintaining organizational effectiveness through upgrading of the basic skills and abilities of a broad range of employees. The emphasis will be on diagnosis of the organization to assess whether training and development is needed, on techniques to decide who needs training; on developing an awareness of the many types of training methods and their relative strengths and weaknesses for var- ious groups of employees, and problem areas; and on the design, implementation, and evaluation of training programs. Prereq.: HRM 3815 and HRM 3816. HRM 3951 Executive Development An examination of the executive position in an or- ganization and the required personal characteristics and skills. The effects of cultural change and shifting mores on motivation and management control, with 50 / Business Administration their implications for developing appropriate orga- nizational relationships, are examined. Report writing, oral reports, and leading of group discussions are dominant techniques. Student evaluation is encour- aged. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. HRM 3952 Interpersonal Dynamics This course focuses on the human dilemmas which managers face in a wide variety of interpersonal relationships. The emphasis is upon interactions be- tween individuals. The approach is humanistic and pragmatic; interpersonal communication is the cen- tral concept; case analysis and experiential learning (role-play) are the key teaching methods. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. HRM 3955 Compensation Management Covers policies and techniques of wage and salary administration. The course is practitioner-oriented with students designing and implementing compen- sation plans using case data. The course covers the technical aspects of developing a successful com- pensation program such as determining, weighing, and measuring compensable factors; assigning a total value to a job; grade collapsing procedures; reviewing wage and salary surveys; synchronizing internal with external salary structure; setting up "within grade" rate ranges; developing individual and group incentive compensation plans; developing group membership rewards; estimating labor costs; controlling and utilizing the compensation systems and complying with government and union compen- sation policy. Cases and readings will be used in a lecture/class discussion format. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. HRM 3958 Human Development and the Work Place This course will explore the implications of recent theories about stages of adult development for man- aging people, careers, and organizations. Concepts of adult mental health, normalcy, and individual and organizational career planning. Techniques for deal- ing with human resource problems, such as em- ployee assistance programs, will be discussed. Prereq.: HRhA 3815 and HRM 3816. HRM 3962 Human Resources Planning This course focuses on the formulation and imple- mentation of human resources planning strategies for organizations. It is concerned with such issues as the changing demographics of the labor force, forecasting manpower needs, the development of managerial succession systems, career manage- ment, performance appraisal, and compensation. Or- ganizational needs assessment and job analysis will be linked to the changing role of government regu- lations and the human resource management func- tion in corporations. Prereq.: HRM 3816 and 12 q.h. of grad. credit. HRM 3971 Personnel Management Covers basic personnel functions: recruitment, se- lection, placement, rewards, compensation, training, and development of employees. Topics also include the implications of new government regulatory sys- tems such as equal opportunity, safety, and pen- sions; the implementation of behavioral theories at the workplace; and the partnership of specialists and generalists in the overall management of an orga- nization's human resources. Cases and readings will be used in a lecture/class discussion format. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. HRM 3972 Labor Relations Review of U.S. labor history and traditional labor policy, as well as implications of new regulatory sys- tems on labor-management relations such as equal opportunity and safety. Overview of collective bar- gaining processes applied to emerging sectors of union organization, including health care and edu- cation. Lectures, cases, and readings. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. HRM 3987 Leadership This course studies the processes and responsibil- ities of leadership in organizations. A contingency approach is used which focuses on identifying dif- ferent types of leadership behavior and on relating particular leadership styles to situational factors. Text, readings, and cases allow for application of the con- cepts discussed and self-assessment techniques follow the student to evaluate his or her own lead- ership qualities. Prereq.: HRM 3815 and HRM 3816. INB 3910 Managing the Multinational Enterprise Deals with international operations at the multina- tional enterprise; the interface between the firm and the international business environment; current is- sues in U.S. public policy affecting international busi- ness competition with Japan and with LDCs. Prereq.: MEC 3809. INB 3911 Cultural Aspects of International Business Using a managerial perspective, this course will cover issues that arise when a firm moves from its home country to a host country that may have a different national culture. Although it will usually take the per- spective of the U.S.-based firm that operates abroad, it will spend some time on what happens to other national firms operating in the U.S. and in third coun- try environments. The way in which "corporate cul- ture" evolves in the context of national culture and the impact on managers will be a central issue. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. MEC 3808 Managerial Economics I Macroeconomics for business managera Acquaints students with the general economic environment and its impact on the firm. Topics include income and employment theory; classical, Keynesian, and mon- etarist aggregate demand and supply systems; money and capital markets; fiscal and monetary policy. Prereq.: none. MEC 3809 Managerial Economics 11 Entails the application of microeconomic principles to the business firm and its competitive environment. Cases and readings are used to demonstrate the practical application of economic models in the de- Business Administration / 51 cision-making process. Specifically, the course cov- ers demand analysis, production and cost analysis, market structure, and pricing practices. Prereq.: MSC 3803. MGT 3750 Writing for the Professions This course examines the various forms of business communications and offers practical experience in writing business letters, memoranda, case studies, proposals, and reports. When possible, speakers from business and industry will be invited to address the class on various problems encountered in man- agement and executive level communications. Sev- eral short (500-word) papers as well as one or two longer reports will be required. Prereq.: none. MGT 3751 MBA Writing Workshop The workshop will focus on advanced, analytical business writing rather than on basic writing skills. It will not contain remedial work on basic English or grammar. This intensive workshop consists of four four-hour sessions and focuses on the writing nec- essary for the persuasive presentation of business decisions. Discussion of sample cases, lectures, ex- ercises and demonstrations reinforce the elements of writing necessary for effective communication. MGT 3834 Policy: Environmental Analysis This first of three policy courses focuses on the environment in which strategy must be formulated in profit and nonprofit organizations. Techniques of environmental analysis are included, with particular emphasis on the political-legal, economic, social, and technological environments as they relate to and influence the formulation of strategy. Prereq.: all other required courses with the exception of ACC 3813, HRM 3817, HRM 3835 and HRM 3836. MGT 3835 Policy: The Formulation of Strategy Building on the materials presented in MGT 3834, this course examines strategy formulation. Particular emphasis is on the process by which strategy is formulated in actual business settings, including the influence of personal values on strategy formulation, who actually makes strategic decisions, what envi- ronmental and internal information is required to make strategic decisions, and what criteria are used to make the decisions. The role of different management levels in the process is considered. Prereq.: MGT 3834. MGT 3836 Policy: The Implementation of Strategy The third required policy course compares and con- trasts the approaches to strategy implementation in profit and nonprofit organizations. Topics include or- ganizational structure and behavior, long-range plan- ning, control and motivation systems, information systems, and leadership. All topics are considered within the systems framework of organizational strat- egy. Prereq.: MGT 3835. MGT 3915 Business and Professional Speaking This course is designed to give the students an opportunity to develop and deliver oral presentations as they apply to various business settings — focus is on formal as well as informal speaking situations. Emphasis is placed on helping the student develop skills in dealing with a variety of communication sit- uations. Prereq.: 15 q.h. otgrad. credit. MGT 3940 The Chief Executive Officer Focuses upon the job perspective of the chief ex- ecutive officer of business organizations. The central element of the course is presentations by and dis- cussions with chief executives of major companies in the Greater Boston area. Additionally, there will be case studies and other literature addressing the job, problems, and opportunities of top managers. Enrollment will be limited. Prereq.: 30 q.h. of grad. credit. MGT 3942 Management Consulting This course focuses on the skills, knowledge, and attitudes necessary for competence in the "art of consulting." The analytical, human, organizational, and administrative elements of consulting are dis- cussed, as are the differences between internal and external consultants. In addition, the course exam- ines management consulting as an industry and as a potential profession. This course is intended both for future consultants and for managers who will be using the services of professional consultants. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. MGT 3956 Strategic Planning This course covers approaches to strategic planning. Guided by a practitioner orientation, it will focus on the techniques, the process, and the organization of strategic planning. Case analyses of actual experi- ences will give emphasis to strategic planning as an activity to support mainstream strategic decision making and control, although other purposes of stra- tegic planning also will be considered. The course is designed to be of very real and practical benefit to those wishing to develop skills in designing, im- plementing, evaluating, improving, and participating in strategic planning activities, as well as to those more generally desiring to develop further their "stra- tegic thinking" capability. MGT 3969 Government and Business Analysis of the role of government as a regulating force, as well as the nature and impact of govern- ment fiscal, economic, and socioeconomic policies on the conduct of business. The political and eco- nomic philosophies behind greater government par- ticipation in the economic structure of the nation as indicated by public-utility, antitrust, labor, and so- cioeconomic legislation. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. MGT 3970 Business and Society: Managing Social Issues An analysis of environmental influences — economic, legal, technical, social, cultural, and ethical - af- fecting the corporation. The focus is on reconciling the strains generated by these external factors and their impact on managerial decision making. Prereq.: HRM 3816 and 12 q.h. of grad. credit. 52 / Business Administration MGT 3982 Strategic Planning for Health Organizations This course examines the process of environmental and institutional analysis for strategic planning de- cisions in health institutions. The impact of these decisions on organizational design, competitive po- sition, and health organization performance is con- sidered through an examination of recent case stud- ies. Prereq.: MGT 3836. MGT 3983 Decision Making in a Hospital Setting: A Middle-Management Perspective Operational problem solving with hospital consti- tuencies (physicians, nurses, patients) is a demand- ing responsibility that encompasses legal, ethical, technological, and behavioral dimensions. The pri- mary aim of the course is to demonstrate how de- cisions are made in the hospital and how manage- ment may effectively participate and shape the structure and outcome of decision-making proc- esses. Case examples will cover such areas as "do not resuscitate orders," clinical decision making, physician and nursing power and authority, consen- sus development, and the like. The pragmatic prac- titioner orientation of the course will also incorporate experiential exercises and guest speakers. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. MGT 3990 Business, Law, and Society I An introduction to the theory and practice of the Anglo-American legal systems, with emphasis on the ways in which law, law/yers, and legal institutions interact with the business environment in order to promote and regulate commercial activities. After exploring some of the major social theories con- cerning the role of "law" in a market economy, we examine leading judicial decisions involving such key legal doctrines as freedom of contract, scope of property rights, and strict tort liability with the ob- jective of determining to what extent the Anglo- American legal system can accommodate the needs of a modern commercial society and predicting likely directions of legal regulation of business. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. MGT 3997 Special Studies in Business 1 Q.H. Administration A special tutorial arrangement between a student and a faculty member for a guided reading, research, laboratory, fieldwork, report, or teaching experience. Recommended for graduate students who desire to do advanced work or carry out special investigation of a problem in business administration not specif- ically covered in the curriculum. Students must pe- tition the Committee on Graduate Study in Business Administration for permission to register for this course. Prereq.: 15 q.t). of grad. credit. MGT 3998 Special Studies in Business 2 Q.H. Administration See MGT 3997 for course description. MGT 3999 Special Studies in Business 3 Q.H. Administration See MGT 3997 for course description. MKT 3760 international Marketing The purpose of this course is to help students de- velop understanding of: (1) the opportunities and challenges facing the international marketing exec- utive; (2) the decision making process in marketing goods abroad; and (3) the environmental forces — economic, cultural and political — affecting the mar- keting process in the international marketplace. Lec- tures, discussions, reports, and cases. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 38 11 Marketing Management I The objectives of Marketing Management I and II are twofold: (1) to present the student with a compre- hensive examination of basic marketing functions, institutions, and concepts; and (2) to help develop the student's ability to analyze and make recom- mendations about business problems that involve the creation, distribution, and sale of goods and serv- ices. Marketing Management I emphasizes the defi- nition of marketing problems, demand analysis, con- sumer analysis, and marketing research. Prereq.: none. MKT 3812 Marketing Management II A continuation of Marketing Management I, with em- phasis on the formulation and implementation of marketing strategy. Emphasis is placed on product policy, channels of distribution, pricing, advertising, personal selling, and the development of integrated marketing programs of action. Prereq.: MKT 3811. MKT 3914 Consumer Behavior Offers development of an understanding of consumer attitudes and behavior processes. Various economic and behavioral models of consumer behavior are examined and evaluated as bases for the planning and evaluation of marketing strategies. The methods of instruction include text, readings, and project. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3916 Workshop in Negotiating Objective is to help improve the students' under- standing of the negotiations process and their ability to plan and conduct negotiations effectively. Class activities involve readings, lectures, and discussions as well as numerous case discussions and live and videotaped role-play negotiation exercises. Prereq.: MKT 3812 and HRM 3816. MKT 3920 Public Policy and Marketing The purpose of this course is to acquaint students with the public policy environment in which market- ing managers operate and to develop the skills nec- essary to function in that environment. More specif- ically, the course will address some of the regulatory and policy-making issues that confront managers in marketing. To that end, students vyill analyze current issues facing policy makers usin^ the same mate- rials the policy makers rely upon. Students will ad- vocate various positions on these issues, both in Business Administration / 53 class discussions and written assignments. Prereq.: MKT 3811. MKT 3922 Brand Management Emphasizes the process of new consumer product development, the management and development of product strategies, and management of the product mix in the multiproduct firm. Topics include identi- fication and screening of new product opportunities, evaluation of product performance, segmenting the product market, diversification and simplification of the product line, and the management of innovation. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3926 Advertising Management Management of the advertising function from the perspective of users such as product managers. Case studies and text materials explore the role of advertising, target market identification, creative strategies, media planning, and advertising evalua- tion. Emphasis is placed upon the coordination of advertising with other elements of the marketing mix and overall corporate strategy. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3931 Marketing Research I Major methods of marketing research are discussed. Emphasis is placed on research design issues — sampling, data collection procedures, and question- naire construction — rather than on data-analysis procedures. Sources of error in surveys are also examined in detail, along with the appropriate meth- odological techniques designed to reduce their mag- nitude. Surveys are evaluated in terms of their ability to provide quality information. The course comple- ments material presented in HRM 3963. Prereq.: MKT 3811 and MSC 3802. MKT 3932 Marketing Research li This course focuses on various statistical methods of design and analysis in marketing research. Among the topics discussed are nonparametric statistics, experimental design, correlation and regression analysis, multiple discriminant analysis, and factor analysis. Canned statistical programming routines will be used with actual survey data to illustrate the application of the methods discussed. This course may be taken independently of MKT 3931. Prereq.: MKT 3811 and MSC 3802. MKT 3934 New Product Development The importance of new products to the survival and prosperity of firms increases as product life cycles become shorter; as technology, competition, and consumer tastes change; and as operating costs increase. For most firms, coping with the problems of environmental change through modification of the product line is vital and difficult. This course will have as a primary concern the examination and anal- ysis of some of the problems firms face in directing and managing their new product development activ- ities. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3936 Retail Management This course analyzes the evolution of retail institu- tions and examines selected major strategy and pol- icy problems of food, apparel, and general mer- chandise retailers. Cases and issues are explored from the viewpoint of the managements of super- market, department store, specialty store, and dis- count enterprises. Designed primarily for students interested in retailing and those concerned about the role of mass distributors and the marketing of consumer goods. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3940 Defense Marketing This course will be conducted in a seminar format. Emphasis will be placed upon defense marketing in its totality, including analysis of participant roles, contractual foundations, contractor performance, and marketing activities. Topics include the overall de- fense acquisitions process, market characteristics, program management, procurement methods, sales and negotiation techniques, and related marketing management factors. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3941 Industrial Marketing The problems of industrial concerns in marketing products and services to industrial, business, and organizational customers. Emphasis is placed on de- termining customers' needs and on developing pro- grams to satisfy these needs. Topics include the roles and responsibilities of the marketing executive engaged in industrial distribution, advertising, and research, as well as roles and responsibilities of industrial salespeople, sales supervisors, and selling agents. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3945 Sales Management Designed to help develop the decision-making skills necessary to build and maintain an effective sales organization. Cases and readings are used to ex- amine the strategic and operating problems of the sales manager. Major topics are: (1) the selling func- tion, (2) sales management at the field level, (3) the sales executive, and (4) sales and marketing man- agement. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3966 Marketing in the Service Sector Deals with public and private profit and nonprofit institutions which market services. Types of organi- zations covered include insurance, transportation, utilities, entertainment, health care, education, reli- gious, sports, banking, artistic, and protective. Case discussions, textbooks, and outside readings are combined for a balanced approach for the devel- opment of marketing skills. Service characteristics are defined, classified, and analyzed from the per- spective of their effect on marketing methods and institutions. Prereq.: MKT 3812. MKT 3978 Competitive Strategy This course is the capstone course for graduate students emphasizing the marketing area in their studies. The course pulls together into a cohesive whole the various functional, institutional, and stra- tegic elements which comprise marketing and to which the student has been exposed in his previous course work. Prereq.: MKT 3812. 54 / Business Administration MKT 3980 Marketing Information and Decision Support Systems This course is structured around the use of state- of-the-art information systems and computer-based decision aids in all areas of marketing management. It does not cover the traditional areas of marketing research. Hands-on experience with information sys- tems and decision aids in the context of case studies is emphasized. Prereq.: MKT 3811. MSC 3531 Advanced Concepts in Information Systems This course considers a number of significant de- velopments in information systems, and examines their impact on present and future management. Top- ical coverage may vary from quarter to quarter, but will come from the following list: office automation, software project management, fourth generation lan- guages, expert systems, information centers, micro computers, and data communications. Prereq.: MSC 3932. MSC 3750 Competitive Decision Making The objective of this course is to acquaint the stu- dent with problems of decision making in competitive and conflict situations - situations where the be- havior of competitors or adversaries should effect decisions, in addition to studying the basic theoret- ical results in the relevant fields, students will par- ticipate in numerous out-of-class negotiation exer- cises in which real competitive business situations are simulated. Through these exercises, students will have the opportunity to gain experience in making rapid, but calculated decisions in situations char- acterized by high degree of uncertainty and sophis- ticated competitors. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. MSC 3780 Operations Management in the Health Care System Recommended for students whose career goals are positions of responsibility in the management of the health care system. Objectives are: (1) to help pro- vide a basic understanding of operations manage- ment problems existing in the health care system; and (2) to develop decision-making ability to deal effectively with these problems. Topics include the fundamentals of management in the health care sys- tem, organizational planning, operations planning and control, utilization of resources, and policy consid- erations in effective and efficient operation of the health care system. Cases, readings, and field proj- ect. Prereq.: MSC 3806. MSC 3802 Quantitative Analysis I Examines the process of statistical inference, whereby the analyst is enabled to infer or draw con- clusions about the parameters of a large data set on a basis of sample statistics. Other topics include the generation of subjective probabilities, the revision of probabilities to incorporate new information, and the incorporation of probabilities into the decision- making framework. Prereq.: none. MSC 3803 Quantitative Analysis II Introduction to the theory and practice of manage- ment science. Regression analysis, linear program- ming, and simulation are discussed in text and case material. Emphasis is on practical application of the techniques. Issues of problem definition, model building, relevant cost determination, solution gen- eration, and implementation of results are consid- ered. Prereq.: MSC 3802. MSC 3805, Operations Management MSC 3806 I, II The objectives of this two-course sequence are (1) to help develop an understanding pf the management of operating systems, design, operation, control, eval- uation, and modification; (2) to help increase the student's decision-making capabilities in technical areas; and (3) to help develop an appreciation for the operations manager's job. Topics include design of product and process, capacity planning, line bal- ancing, work measurement, job evaluation, network scheduling, production planning, inventory manage- ment, production scheduling and control, and quality -control. Operations Management I concentrates on the design of the operating system; Operations Man- agement II focuses on its operation and control. Prereq.: (for MSC 3806) MSC 3803. MSC 3909 Quality Planning and Analysis Quality decisions take on strategic importance that must be addressed at all stages in the design and delivery of a product or service. This course ana- lyzes the decisions that affect quality as a product passes through four distinct but interrelated stages: product design, process design, manufacturing, and sales-service. Course material emphasizes how de- cisions concerning quality influence the competitive position of an organization. Recommended for stu- dents who are interested in any phase of product (service) delivery, such as new product design, mar- keting, sales, manufacturing/operations, and stra- tegic planning. Both text and case material will be used. Prereq.: MSC 3806. MSC 3911 Manufacturing Policy Focuses on strategic operating decisions typically addressed by the vice president of manufacturing operations, such as capacity expansion, the impact of new products and/or processes, product alloca- tion to plants, and vertical integration. The emphasis will be on how these decisions impact the compet- itive position of a firm both now and in the future. This emphasis helps the students understand the totality of a top management situation where the interactions between corporate and manufacturing strategies are most evident. Learning materials in- clude case studies, reference notes, and articles. Recommended for students who currently are in, or expect to be in, positions of major responsibility in manufacturing/operations, and also for students who must possess the qualifications to analyze the man- Business Administration / 55 ufacturing capabilities of companies, such as those in investment banking, finance, and consulting. Prereq.: MSC 3806. MSC 3913 Operations Management in the Service Sector Traditional courses in operations management usu- ally deal with manufacturing, because the concepts and techniques of operations management were originally developed in manufacturing settings. How- ever, as the service and nonprofit sectors of the economy gain in importance, they have greater need for the types of tools and techniques which manu- facturing uses. This course explores the applicability of operations management techniques in non-man- ufacturing environments. Industries covered include food service, health care, recreation, equipment rental, retailing, banking, insurance, government services, and airlines. Prereq.: MSC 3806. MSC 3923 Ck)mputer Models for Management Decision Making This course is designed to assist students in learning the use of the computer as a decision aid, rather than simply for data processing. The objectives are to enable students to recognize the features of var- ious decision problems which make them candidates for computer modeling, to specify the design of ap- propriate management science models, and to real- istically interpret the output from these models. De- cision problems will be drawn primarily from the production, finance, and marketing areas. Topical coverage will be determined by the instructor and will be drawn from areas such as the following: sim- ulation, linear programming, queuins theory, risk analysis, inventory models, portfolio theory, and Mar- kov processes. Course material will include readings, cases, and lectures. Students will use the computer extensively in their case preparations. In some in- stances, "canned" computer programs will be pro- vided; at other times students may be required to write their own models in languages such as BASIC or IFPS. Prereq.: MSC 3932 and MSC 3803. MSC 3928 Decision Support Systems As the electronic data processing/management in- formation systems field enters its second quarter century, a number of important changes are rapidly taking place: hardware prices are decreasing as power is increasing, software for decision support is finally maturing, and managers expjerienced in data processing techniques are rising higher in many organizations. This course is designed to acquaint the MBA candidate with current and future trends in decision support systems. Topical coverage will in- clude: developments in hardware and software, de- cision support systems, high-level planning lan- guages, and the politics and problems of systems implementation. Because this course is heavily di- rected toward issues of man-machine interaction and decision making, it is significantly narrower in scope than either MSC 3932 or MSC 3933. This course is usually conducted as a seminar, and registratic is limited. Extensive classroom participation is re- quired. Several years of full-time work experience is high desirable, but not an absolute requirement. Prereq.: MSC 3932 or MSC 3933. MSC 3929 Business Forecasting This course addresses forecasting problems of con- cern to decision makers with the firm. Specifically, the course entails short-run (weekly, monthly) fore- casting using time-sharing methods such as regres- sion, exponential smoothing, and other related tech- niques. In addition, the course includes aggregate industry and national economic forecasting with longer time horizons. Prereq.: MSC 3802 arid MSC 3803. MSC 3930 Models in Operations Research This course focuses on modeling for selected busi- ness applications using operations research/man- agement science methodology. Emphasis will be on proper modeling and problem solving using readily available computer software. A few selected model- ing techniques will be discussed in detail. Prereq.: MSC 3802 arid MSC 3803. MSC 3932 Introduction to Computer Applications A business-oriented introduction to data processing functions and systems. Introduction to the history, terminology, technology, and economics of data processing hardware and software. Management is- sues in the design, selection, evaluation, and use of computers and computer services. Individual famil- iarization with elementary computer programming by using time-shared computer facilities to solve simple business-oriented exercise. Prereq.: none. MSC 3933 Management Information Systems This course deals in depth with the analysis, design, implementation, and operation of modern manage- ment information systems. Case studies are utilized as the primary vehicle to illustrate all phases in the creation and management of computer-based sys- tems. The emphasis of the course is on management issues rather than on computer technology or pro- gramming. This course is designed to follow MSC 3932. Thus, it is the logical second computer course that an MBA candidate might take. Prereq.: MSC 3932. MSC 3934 High Technology Operations Management High technology industries are usually characterized by greater degrees of innovation, faster rates of ob- solescence of both products and capital equipment, and manufacturing operations at the early phases of the learning curve. These factors must be kept con- stantly in focus for efficient operations. This course discusses the importance of these factors, and the application of the tools and techniques of operations management to firms operating in a high technology environment. Recommended for students interested in careers in manufacturing in high technology in- dustries, and also for those who would analyze the manufacturing capabilities of firms vis-a-vis tech- 56 / Business Administration nology, market and environment such as analysts for venture capitalists and consultants. Prereq.: MSC 3806. MSC 3936 Data Base Management Systems This course provides a management-oriented intro- duction to data base management systems (DBMS). Topical coverage will include: rationale for the DBMS approach, data base design, data models, DBMS software tools, conversion to a data base environ- ment, and the role of the data base administrator. Students will be given the opportunity to use a DBMS package, gain experience in data base design, use a query language, and develop DBMS applications. Prereq.: MSC 3932 MSC 3937 Simulation and Modeling This course presents the technique of computer sim- ulation from a management perspective. The stu- dents will be given the opportunity to learn the fun- damentals of programming and modeling discrete- event digital simulations. Methodological issues such as types of simulation languages (including GPSS and SIMSCRIPT), random number generation, ex- perimental design, and validation and verification will be considered. A survey of common simulation stud- ies will be presented. The student will work on proj- ects designed to provide experience in performing and evaluating various aspects of modern simulation studies. Prereq.: MSC 3932 and MSC 3902. MSC 3938 Systems Analysis and Design This course covers the systems analysis and design process from the point of view of both end user and systems analyst. Topical coverage will include the- systems life cycle, the "traditional" systems analysis and design process, alternate strategies in imple- menting systems, the iterative nature of systems analysis and design, hardware and software evalu- ation and selection, and control of backlog. Prereq.: MSC 3932. MSC 3939 Manufacturing Systems Software The objective of this course is to preside the MBA student with an understanding of available manufac- turing software. Upon completion of this course, the student should be prepared to participate in deci- sion-making processes concerning manufacturing systems software. Topical coverage will include overview of manufacturing software, interfaces to other applications, micro/mini/mainframe trade- offs, cost of operations, and control of system maintenance. Prereq.: MSC 3932. MSC 3940 Data Communications for Managers A non-technical introduction to data telecommuni- cations to improve management knowledge in the many ways of handling data, both locally and re- motely . Areas to be covered will include fiber optics, microwave, infrared, networking, and switching. Stu- dents will be given an opportunity to design a cen- tralized computing system, a personal computer cluster, and, finally, the ability for the personal com- puters and the centralized computer to talk to each other. Prereq.: MSC 3932. MSC 3941 Contemporary Issues in Manufacturing Management This course considers recent significant develop- ments in manufacturing technology and their man- agerial implications. The course objectives are to provide an understanding of modern manufacturing systems and their associated operations manage- ment problems, and to develop decision-making abil- ity necessary for the effective management of such systems. The topics covered include: automation, group technology, just-in-time production and com- puter integrated manufacturing. The course involves lectures, readings, cases, and a field project. Prereq.: MSC 3806. MSC 3960 Operations Planning and Control This course examines the scheduling and control of resource allocations in operating systems. The sys- tems range from high-volume assembly lines, to in- termittent production systems to one-of-a-kind proj- ects. Topics include: inventory planning and control, aggregate planning and master scheduling, mate- rials requirements planning and network analyses. Both test and case materials are used. This course would be valuable to anyone interested in a career in operations management, industrial sales, pur- chasing, and consulting. Prereq.: MSC 3806. TRN 3903 Corporate Transportation and Distribution Management This course focuses on the design and management of corporate transportation and distribution systems. Emphasis is given to the analytical framework which is employed in making complex distribution tradeoffs. Attention is devoted to topics such as inventory con- trol, location analysis, transportation planning, and the integration of logistics planning with other func- tional aspects of the organization. Prereq.: 15 q.h. of grad. credit. Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions 58 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions Graduate School of Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions All courses carry four quarter-hours of credit unless otherwise indicated. Please see the current schedule for summer, fall, winter, and spring quarter listings. Counseling Psychology, Rehabilitation, and Special Education Special Education CRS 3429 Development and Implementation of Programs for the Severely Handicapped Course work includes observation of severely hand- icapped persons in the classroom and community; demonstration of evaluation and assessment tech- niques; and analysis of developmental, educational, and rehabilitation plans for severely handicapped persons. Prereq.: CRS 3412 Psychology of Individ- uals with Special Needs. CRS 3428 The Severely Handicapped A review of handicapping conditions and consider- ation of the implications of severe multiple handi- caps. Students will develop a case study of a se- verely handicapped person in conjunction with a review of relevant literature. Prereq.: Permission of the instructor CRS 3801 Thesis A research activity that may be selected by the student in lieu of two courses (8 quarter hours), with the approval and recommendation of the adviser. CRS 3805 Institute in Special Education (See general institute description on page 86.) CRS 3808 Workshop in Special Education (See general workshop description on page 86.) CRS 3400 Alternatives for Mainstreaming individuals with Special Needs This course is for administrators, teachers, and spe- cialists who are involved with mainstreaming individ- uals with special needs. Alternatives in decision making and program development, implementation, and evaluation may be explored with members of various disciplines who provide services for special needs children. CRS 3401 Educating Individuals with Learning Disabilities This course surveys behavioral and social-emotional characteristics of individuals who manifest specific defects in perceptual, integrative, or expressive processes that impair learning. Current service de- livery programs, individual learning styles, and re- lated curriculum materials for elementary through high school-aged, learning-disabled students are also analyzed. CRS 3404 Education of Individuals with Behavioral Disorders A study of the various theories, programs, and ap- proaches dealing with emotional disturbance. Em- phasis on the role of the educator as it relates to the therapeutic management of individuals and groups displaying problems in socio-emotional de- velopment. Parent-teacher interaction is also discussed. CRS 3405 Group Dynamics Emphasis on understanding group growth, behavior, and action fundamental to developing solutions to the complex developing of group life. Students are given the opportunity to learn to-rexamine their strengths and weaknesses, to examine group leadership styles, to become alert to new ideas and actions, to discover the pulse of a group, and to analyze reasons for one group's productivity and another's nonproductivity. CRS 3406 Mental Health Study of conditions leading to optimal social ad- justment. Consideration of the relationship between the maturation process and mental health, possible predeterminants of maladjustment, and factors which encourage the attainment of emotional maturity. Spe- cial emphasis is on the role of the school. Contri- butions from the fields of psychiatry, psychology, sociology, physiology, and medicine may be synthe- sized and evaluation. CRS 3407 Case Conferences: Individuals with Special Needs This course is conducted as a seminar in connection with the student's practicum. Case presentations by outstanding resource persons are thoroughly examined and discussed. Students will also be ex- pected to make their own case presentations to the seminar. Prereq.: ED 3306 Abnormal Psychology and CRS 3404 Education of Individuals with Behavior Disorders. CRS 3408 Socio- and Psychodynamics of Family Life Consideration is given to the internal and external dynamics of family life and the significance of such dynamics to the mental health of handicapped in- dividuals and their families. Emphasis is on the im- pact of disability on family functioning and Integra- Counseling Psychology, Rehabilitation and Special Education / 59 tion. Approaches to working with parents of special needs groups may be explored from psychodynamic, social learning, and systems viewpoints. CRS 3409 Seminar: Problems of the Behaviorally Disordered This course provides an intensive study of the spe- cial problems of the behaviorally disordered child. It gives seminar students the opportunity to proceed in depth in areas of special interest. Special attention focuses on problems presented by the autistic child, the neurotic child, the child with character disorders, the child with psychosomatic disorders, and the mul- tihandicapped child. Prereq.: CRS 3424-CRS 3425 Etiology and Development of Special Needs. CRS 3410 Review of Current Methodology and Research in Learning Disorders This advanced course is designed to help develop the following competencies in relation to educating learning-disordered individuals (early childhood through adulthood): use of task analysis and learn- ing style to develop comprehensive individual edu- cation plans (refinement of skills developed in CRS 3409); use of current research to evaluate techniques of intervention (e.g., behavior modification and drug therapy for hyperactive children); review of current research to evaluate assessment techniques (e.g., effectiveness of available tests for learning disorders; ability to administer, score, and interpret tests useful in identifying learning disabilities; use of prescriptive techniques and materials for learning disabilities). Selection of topics within competency areas may be individualized for students, based on previous course work and experience. Prereq.: CRS 3401 Educating Individuals with Learning Disorders and ED 3342 Research Design in Education. CRS 341 1 Development and Implementation of Programs for Learning Disorders This advanced course helps to develop required skills for resource room and diagnostic-prescriptive teachers and special needs consultants to the regular classroom. Projects for the course include needs assessment for various special needs programs, de- velopment of a screening and diagnostic test battery development of a diagnostic-prescriptive procedure for a specific population, development of in-service programs, development of a plan for educational group management. Projects may be selected by students according to their particular needs. Students in this course should be experienced in working with indivi- duals with special needs. Prereq.: CRS 3401 Educating Individuals with Learning Disorders and CRS 3415 Assessment in Special Education, and CRS 3416 Diagnostic-Prescriptive Teaching. CRS 3412 Psychology of individuals with Special A study of the social and emotional adjustment of the handicapped and of the psychological signifi- cance of mental, sensory, and motor variations. The effects of limitations imposed by attitudes of society, the attitudes of individuals toward their handicaps. and the effect of the handicap itself are evaluated. Implications for educational programs are analyzed. (This course should be among the first taken in the Special Education sequence.) CRS 3413 Evaluation and Education of the Vocationally Handicapped Designed to develop fundamentals skills in the eval- uation and teaching of activities related to the vo- cational development of disabled individuals. Work sample and other techniques are used to assess levels of skills. Focus is on activities such as home management, use of tools, household repairs, basic sewing, essentials of food preparation, and activities of daily living (ADL). Visits may be made to sheltered workshops and vocational adjustment centers. CRS 3414 Rehabilitation and the Special Education Teacher This course is designed to deal with effective working relationships between rehabilitation professionals and special education teachers. Elementary and second- ary school personnel concerned with children with special needs will also find the course pertinent. Consideration is given to current legislation (Mas- sachusetts Chapter 766) and its implementation, the teacher's role in rehabilitation, understanding of the total rehabilitation process, and rehabilitation re- sources available to school personnel. CRS 3415 Assessment in Special Education This field-based course offers students the oppor- tunity to learn to administer selected norm-refer- enced tests for special needs populations, determine which tests will yield the most information in a variety of case studies, and interpret data obtained from a minimum of four norm-referenced test batteries. CRS 3416 Diagnostic Prescriptive Teaching Course instruction in this field-based course focuses on the following broad areas: development and im- plementation of individualized educational plans, in- cluding tasks analysis, annual goals, and short-range objectives; educational strategies and their appli- cation in classroom management; adaptation and selection of materials and strategies in various ac- ademic areas; perceptual-motor skills; and social- emotional interventions. CRS 3417 Early Childhood Learning Problems: Identification and Program Development Informal and formal screening and assessment pro- cedures suitable for an early childhood population are evaluated. Students will be required to work with young children in order to acquire experience with screening and assessment techniques. The resulting information may then be used to develop programs to meet the needs of individual children. Prereq.: CRS 34 1 5 Assessment in Special Education. CRS 3418 Special Education for Gifted Children Identification, characteristics, and problems of gifted, creative, and talented children and youth. Emphasis on administrative and instructional adjustments needed to provide for this group of exceptional children. 60 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions CRS 3419 Fieldwork and Seminar with Special Needs Children CRS 3420 Student Teaching and (4 Q.H. each) Seminar with Special Needs Children The courses are scheduled to extend over a full year in a series of experiences as observer, tutor, and teacher. Students must make available approximately 250 hours or two days per week for two quarters for fieldwork, then approximately another 250 hours or four days per week for one quarter for student teaching. Students who are employed and who can- not devote full days to satisfy these requirements must arrange to be available evenings, weekends, and summers. Provision for attendance at biweekly seminars must also be made. Seminars are for the purpose of discussing with other students and pro- fessors the relevant issues confronted by teachers of special needs children. Outside speakers and pro- grams may be arranged to extend this dialogue. The adviser's written approval will be required before the student can do field placement or student teaching. The adviser's written approval is also required before students can obtain a waiver of student teaching. All students, regardless of past experience, cert- ifications, or letters of approval, are expected to do approximately 250 hours of fieldwork, set up and supervised by the University. CRS 3421 Fieldwork and Seminar CRS 3422 Practicum in Special (4 Q.H. each) Educatk>n The practicum is designed to satisfy department requirements for field experience and extended practicum for SECP or other students who do not need certification. It extends over a full year and covers a series of experiences. Students must make available a minimum of two days per week for the first two quarters and five full days per week for the third quarter. Application for field placement is made two quarters prior to that for which fieldwork is planned. Part-time students who are employed will need to make provision for a full quarter of fieldwork, five days per week, and for evening, weekend, or summer assignments to satisfy the requirement for field experience. Provision for attendance at semi- nars must also be made. CRS 3424, 3425 Etiotogy and (8 Q.H.) Development of Special Needs The first quarter (CRS 3424) concentrates on factors which primarily affect deviations in cognitive, motoric, and physical development. Understanding of these factors will be used to discuss multi-disciplinary life- management issues relating to Down's Syndrome, cerebral palsy, and other common conditions. The second quarter (CRS 3425) concentrates on factors which primarily affect emotional development. Psychobiological, psychodynamic, and learning the- ory approaches may be discussed and related to problems of lifespan management. Community pro- grams in addition to the more traditional intervention techniques are analyzed. CRS 3426 Seminar in Mental Retardatkm A study of research in the field and its implications for teaching. Intervention strategies are studied and evaluated. CRS 3427 Seminar: Neuropsychology of Learning and Behavk}r Disorders Through critical review of the literature, varied neuro- psychological interpretations of the nature of learning and behavior disorders are analyzed and discussed. Topics related to the function of the brain and its relationship to behavior include biochemical and physiological correlates, cognitive and perceptual factors, genetic and maturational variables, hemi- spheric specialization, and implications of drug studies. Implications of the above for educating and serving special needs individuals are useful to ad- ministrators, teachers, counselors, reading special- ists, school psychologists, and those in allied health fields. Students will be expected to give a presen- tation in an area of interest related to the seminar topic. Prereq.: CRS 3401 Educating Individuals with Learning Disorders, CRS 3424 Etiology and Devel- opment of Special Needs, SLA 3604 Language Dis- turbances in Children, and/or permission of instructor. CRS 3800 Directed Study This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Not available to special students. Prereq.: Approval of the chairperson of the department and of the director of the graduate school. (Approval forms must be submitted during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study.) Rehabilitation Administration CRS 3437 Community Planning in Rehabiitation What administrators need to know about community planning to develop programs in their areas. Basic principles of community planning, organization, and dynamics, as well as interdisciplinary relations in rehabilitation. Examples of community planning from different rehabilitation agencies and the referral process among these agencies will be studied. CRS 3438 Federal-State Relatkms in Rehabilitatk>n The complex network of federal-state relations and their implications for rehabilitation. Grant proce- dures, matching formulas, public relations and RSA directives, state and federal legislation pertinent to rehabilitation. CRS 3439 Social Welfare and Rehabilitatton This course attempts to acquaint administrators, counselors, and other human services personnel with the broad field of social welfare. The course reviews the historical background of the relationship between vocational rehabilitation and social welfare and the more recent developments in the relationship of these fields. Counseling Psychology, Rehabilitation and Special Education/ 61 CRS 3440 Program Evaluation in Rehabilitation The emphasis in this course will be on administrative research, program evaluation, grantsmanship, etc. In addition, students will have the opportunity to develop a research design on some aspect of rehabilitation administration and carry out the necessary research operations involved. CRS 3442 Rscal Policy and Management I An introduction to the concept of fiscal and mana- gerial control. Areas to be covered may include ac- counting and budgetary procedures, need surveys, goal-setting practices, recruitment, staffing, training, professional development, caseload management, program planning, utilization of research, leadership patterns, performance appraisal, and external rela- tionships. Case method approach may be used in classroom exercises. CRS 3443 Administration of a Sheltered Wbrkshop Special problems of administering a sheltered work- shop, such as community planning, work evaluation, job training, labor relations, contracting, production, and occupational placement. CRS 3477 Evaluation of Deaf Rehabilitation Clients Methods and techniques of psychological and vo- cational evaluation for deaf rehabilitation clients, in- cluding evaluation of client biographical character- istics, evaluation interview, and psychometric assessment. Required of all students in Deafness specialization of Rehabilitation Counseling program. Prereq.: CRS 3501 Psychological Testing and SLA 3644 Foundations of Deaf Education. CRS 3449 Psychological Problems of Disability An advanced course in psychopathology as it relates to the impact of disability on personality. In-depth study of the moderately and severely handicapped from the viewpoint of psychosocial factors, interper- sonal relationships, and cognitive versus noncogni- tive functioning in those with motor and sensory disabilities, problems of dependency and motivation; role of psychosomatic factors. Some discussion of the role of treatment and rehabilitation. CRS 3454 Rehabilitation of the Geriatric This course presents a comprehensive treatment of the problems, dimensions, and parameters involved in the administration of the various services and facilities for the rehabilitation of the geriatric. Special emphasis is on the philosophy of rehabilitation ver- sus disengagement. CRS 3455 Critical Issues in Rehabilitation Administration This course is built around the exploration and in- depth discussion of current issues which are highly problematical to the field. Among these issues are the breadth of the concept of disability, appropriate training sequences for the various rehabilitation dis- ciplines, resolution of conflict over role overlap among disciplines, appropriate models for service delivery systems. The most current and relevant research may be brought to bear upon these areas, as well as knowledge from the reservoir of experience of instructors, visiting experts, and the student partic- ipants themselves. Students will be exposed to the issues as they exist in the profession and in the community. A theoretically oriented frame of refer- ence will be brought to bear upon problems when feasible. CRS 3801 Thesis A research activity that may be selected by the student in lieu of two courses (8 quarter hours), with the approval and recommendation of the adviser. CRS 3809 Doctoral Dissertation Prereq.: Admission to candidacy in the Doctor of Ed- ucation degree program. CRS 3804 Institute in Rehabilitation Administration (See general institute description on page 86.) CRS 3807 Workshop in Rehabilitation Administration (See general workshop description on page 86.) CRS 3800 Directed Study This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Not available to special students. Prereq.: Approval of the chairperson of the department and of the director of the graduate school. (Approval forms must be submitted during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study) CRS 3433 Introduction to Rehabilitation An overview of an orientation to the field of rehabil- itation, including its historical development, legisla- tive involvement, psychological implications, and so- ciological dimensions. Emphasis is placed on co- ordinating and integrating services as they related to the field of rehabilitation as a community process. CRS 3434 Principles of Medical Rehabilitation The wide spectrum of disabilities that could profit from rehabilitation, including orthopedic, neurologi- cal, medical, surgical, and mental disabilities. The course may also present basic principles of medical rehabilitation that administrators should know. Psy- chological aspects of disability also discussed. CRS 3435 Program Development in Rehabilitation This course deals with the use of the rehabilitation model in program development for the physically handicapped, mentally retarded, emotionally dis- turbed, aging, welfare populations, youthful offenders, culturally disadvantaged, and other special com- munity groups. Emphasizes the administrative in- volvement in developing and supporting the diag- nostic, evaluative, counseling, and placement pro- cedures used in such rehabilitative programs. Issues involving clinical program planning may be explored. 62 / Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions CRS 3436 Organization and Administrative Theory The body of conceptual knowledge regarding or- ganizational and administrative theory \n\\\ be ex- amined. Formal and informal organizations, organi- zations as social systems, status and role concepts, leadership in organizations, power structure, rela- tionships to authority, decision making, and com- munication in and between organizations. An orga- nizational analysis will be made of all the different types of rehabilitation settings currently in use. CRS 3441 Practtcum in Rehabilitation (8 Q.H.) Students are usually assigned to a variety of reha- bilitation agencies for their practicum experience. Problem solving relevant to experiences encountered in internship. A seminar may be regularly conducted by a senior faculty member in conjunction with the practicum experience. This seminar offers students an opportunity to share their field-work experiences and resolve problems in rehabilitation which are con- nected with their field- placements. (Two sections of this practicum are offered-one for those majoring in Rehabilitation Administration and one for those majoring in Rehabilitation Counseling.) CRS 3444 Fiscal Policy and Management II Understanding the fiscal management of the typical rehabilitation setting, including basic rehabilitation agency accounting, planned program budgeting, dis- bursements, cost analysis, contracting, taxation, forecasting, and funding. The implication of data processing for fiscal management is covered in the course. Special problems will be assigned during the course. CRS 3445 Legal Aspects of Rehabilitation and Special Education This course is designed to sensitize rehabilitation administrators, special educators, rehabilitation counselors, and other personnel to the impact of legislative developments upon the field of rehabili- tation and sfjecial education. Special emphasis is placed on understanding the legal implications for rehabilitation of the latest Vocational Rehabilitation Administrative Amendments, workmen's compensa- tion laws, eligibility determination criteria, and Social Security Amendments. Latest federal and state spe- cial education legislation is covered. CRS 3446 Occupational Placement A study of the dynamics of moving the rehabilitation client into the world of work within the framework of the specific community structure. Development of facility in use of resource materials in occupational information, job description and analysis, perform- ance appraisal, training, and vocational assessment. The personnel point of view of the handicapped in- dividual is discussed and analyzed, and more effec- tive placement practices developed. CRS 3448 CAGS Rehabilitation Practicum Students are usually assigned to rehabilitation agen- cies, where they are expected to spend 250 clock hours under appropriate supervision. A seminar with regular faculty members is conducted twice each quarter. CRS 3450 Administrative Problems in Rehabilitation Seminar designed to analyze, in depth, critical issues and selected rehabilitation problems. Operations and systems research as applied to rehabilitation will be highlighted. Students are offered the use of institute research studies and studies available through social and rehabilitation services, completed research, and demonstrative projects. CRS 3451 Essentials of Case Management and Supervision The relationship between case management and case- work supervision. Topics are the dynamics of the communication process, decision making, conflict, resolution and compliance, management of resources externa! to the organization, structural and functional analysis of supervisory process, and caseload management. CRS 3452 Rehabilitation of the Alcoholic and Drug Dependent A study of comprehensive factors, including the na- ture of etiology dynamics involved in alcohol and drug dependency; techniques for evaluation; reha- bilitation administration, planning, and treatment. CRS 3453 Rehabilitation of the Penal Offender The rehabilitation of the penal offender is examined from an eclectic point of view. Psychodynamic ele- ments are stressed, as well as social factors in the etiology, evaluation, and treatment and rehabilitation seminar planning and administration. Counselor Education CRS 3500 Foundations in Professional Psychology and Human Services The purpose of this course is to provide a philosophical and theoretical background for beginning graduate students in counseling. The course has three objec- tives: 1) to sharpen the "self as instrument" through study and discussion of established theories of helping related to one's personal value system and through self-exploration and increased self-understanding in heretofore unexplored personal areas; 2) to introduce students to the broad spectrum of professional helping service areas with the intent of clarifying the students' professional roles; and 3) to begin to promote the development of a professional identity as a psycho- logical helping professional. CRS 3501 Psychological Testing The principles and problems of psychological testing as applied to the work of the counselor are discussed. Consideration is given to technical concepts applica- ble to the use, understanding, and interpretation of test scores. Students have the opportunity to become familiar with the most frequently used tests of intelli- gence, aptitude, achievement, interest, and personali- ty. Tests are evaluated for use in diagnosis and in understanding human behavior, with emphasis on their interpretation. Counseling Psychology, Rehabilitation and Special Education / 63 CRS 3502 Vocational Development and Occupational information A dual-emphasis course dealing, first, with theories about the ways in which individuals make decisions concerning their choice of vocation; and second, with the kind of data which are needed to assist people with these decisions. These requisite data deal with the relationship of social and economic change to occupational trends, the classification and descrip- tion of occupational fields, methods of collecting, eval- uating, filing, and disseminating vocational informa- tion, and the role of the counselor in fulfilling these functions. CRS 3503 Counseling Theory and Process A course which normally is taken in the fall quarter, concurrently with the beginning of Practicum. The course will provide the student with a basic cognitive understanding of several major theoretical approaches to counseling. Classroom content will help students to become familiar with a wide range of individual counseling strategies, to develop listening, under- standing, and communications skills, and to further probe their own self-understanding as counselors. These skills and understandings will be discussed and simulated in the context of a variety of settings with a variety of clients. Role playing, case material, and audio and video materials will be utilized in the instruction. This course may be selected by degree candidates in other departments in any quarter except the fall quarter CRS 3504, 3505 Counseling Practicum I and II The counseling practicum is a supervised counseling experience extended over the academic year Regis- tration for this course occurs only during the fall and spring quarters. Emphasis in the fall will be on small- group seminars dealing with counseling and other related matters. The winter and spring quarters will concentrate on the supervised counseling assignment. Assignment to practicum settings will be made accord- ing to the student's major area of concentration. Students must make themselves available a minimum of two days per week during the academic year (October to June) for placement in a field setting. Seminars will stress material germane to the student's major and will meet a total of twenty-four times during the year CRS 3504 must be successfully completed prior to commencing CRS 3505. (For administrative purposes, these practicum course numbers will apply to each of the following specific practicum place- ments: School Practicum (N-9, 5-12), Counseling Psychology Career/Industrial, Student Personnel/ College Practicums.) Part-time students must submit an application for practicum (available from the department) by April 1 , for approval to enroll in the practicum the following fall quarter Prereq.: CRS 3500 Foundations in Professional Psychology and Human Services and CRS 3503 Coun- seling Theory and Process, both of which maybe taken concurrently with the beginning of practicum. CRS 3507 Group Counseling An introduction to theory, principles, and techniques of counseling with groups of individuals at different levels of development and for varying purposes. A basic mode of approach may be to involve students in a genuine group counseling experience in order to understand the phenomenon of group experience. Prereq.: CRS 3503 Counseling Theory and Process. CRS 3508 The College Student and the Campus The relationship between college students' behavior and their environment is examined, with focus on students' rights, their social-emotional developmen- tal concerns, and their search for identity. The impact of societal forces and nontraditiohal patterns of learning on college curriculum options is examined, and varying concerns of personnel services in dif- ferent types of college climates, including the com- munity college, are discussed. Current issues in higher education are examined as they relate to services offered to students. CRS 351 3, 351 4 School Psychology (8 Q.H.) Reldwork I and II The first phase of a two-year sequence of supervised fieldwork required for school psychologist certification. Students are assigned a placement in an N-1 2 school system working under the supervision of a certified school psychologist. The activity of the fieldwork will extend for two days a week across the academic year from September to June. Students perform psycho- logical evaluations and participate in other appropri- ate activities. Seminars meet for twenty-four sessions during the year to provide skill training and discuss role functions. Students receive one hour of supervi- sion per week from the field site supervisor Students must submit an application for a fieldwork placement by April 1 for approval for the cdurse which begins in the following fall quarter CRS 351 5, 351 6 School Psychology (8 Q.H.) Fieldwork III, IV The second phase of a two-year sequence leading to eligibility for application for school psychologist certi- fication. The student will be assigned typically to a different N-1 2 grade placement than the first experi- ence to provide a diversified experience. The place- ment is for two days per week from September to June. Seminars meet twenty-four times across the academic year and consist of case presentations, skill and strategy training, and discussions of case management. Students work under and receive one hour of supervision from their certified school psy- chologist site supervisor Students must submit an application for fieldwork by April 1 for approval to enroll in the fieldwork course the following fall quarter Prereq.: CRS 3513, 3514, School Psychology Field- work I and II. CRS 3517 Consultation Seminar Offers a review of various consultation models, in- cluding behavioral consultation, process consultation, and systems consultation. Study also examines current 64 / Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions research in the field of counseling consultation. Par- ticular emphasis is placed on the development of a personal consultation style and enhancement of con- sultation skills. CRS 3518 Career Counseling Seminar Study focuses on three types of counseling expe- riences: career-education program planning, lead- ership of career-development groups, and vocational counseling. Learning activities include case studies and audiotapes of career counseling sessions, class discussions of local problems and their solutions, didactic instruction, and the implementation of an actual career-education program relative to the stu- dent's area of interest. CRS 3525 Family and Parent Counseling The focus of this course is on a conceptual under- standing of family systems theory and its application to and implications for family counseling. Structural, communicative, and strategic approaches to marital, parent, and family counseling are presented as the family is studied as an interactional system, as a seedbed of distress and health. Students have the opportunity to become familiar with family assess- ment, counseling skills, and strategies. Prereq.: CRS 3503 Counseling Theory and Process. CRS 3526 Seminar in Student Personnel Work Relevant topics and cases for personnel workers and administrators in higher education will be discussed and studied in depth. Particular emphasis is placed upon the development of student personnel programs, budget planning and development, and staff relation- ships. The expertise of appropriate specialists is utilized. CRS 3527 Counseling Strategies for Children and Adolescents Intended primarily for students who will counsel in school settings or other settings emphasizing work with children and adolescents. A broad range of approaches will be considered, including, but not limited to, behavior modification, Gestalt, and Adler- ian strategies. Special emphasis will be placed on the development of strategies designed to help alleviate typical school-related and developmental problems such as nonachievement, decision making, negative self-identity, and disruptive behavior Consideration will also be given to the counselor's role as a consult- ant to teachers, parents, and administrators in effecting positive behavior change. Prereq.: CRS 3503 Counsel- ing Theory and Process. CRS 3528 Vocational Counseling Strategies The individual's role expectations in the world ofwork will be examined from a human development perspec- tive, and a systematic program to foster self-awareness will be set forth. Vocational counseling is viewed as dealing with the entire individual, including his or her values, underlying psychological needs and drives, and the influence of the environment on his or her level of development and career awareness. Other topics to be developed in this course will include counseling with females and nonachievers, the decline of the work ethic, community resource development, job placement, and information giving as a perceptual process. The course is intended for a variety of client populations from adolescence through adulthood. Prereq.: CRS 3503 Counseling Theory and Process. CRS 3529 Rehabilitation Counseling Strategies Primary emphasis will beon the roles and functions of the rehabilitation counselor, relevant issues in the field, and an overview of the rehabilitation process. Special problems and techniques of counseling with the disabled (physical, mental, and behavioral dis- orders) will be examined through case studies and role playing. Discussion will also cover disability in the context of social deviance and psychosocial approaches to understanding human behavior, includ- ing self-concept, social role theories, and rational- behavioral approaches. Prereq.: CRS 3503 Counseling Theory and Process. (This prerequisite is waived for Rehabilitation Administration majors.) CRS 3530 Psychobgical Counseling Strategies Focuses on a variety of strategies designed toalleviate problems of older adolescents and adults. Develop- mental and perceptual Gestalt insight approaches and behavioral approaches to counseling will be analyzed for their effectiveness with a variety of psy- chological problems. This course is primarily intended for the student working with client populations in mental health settings and college counseling centers. Prereq.: CRS 3503 Counseling Theory and Process. CRS 3531 Case Studies in Marriage and Family Counseling An advanced-level course for students with previous experience or preparation in marriage and family counseling. Skills to be emphasized may include 1) the preparation of case studies of family and marriage histories and current functioning; 2) the design of service, counseling, and referral programs based upon comprehensive studies of needs and resources; and 3) the practice of counseling strategies through role playing, taped interviews, and progress reports of current counseling activities. Prereq.: CRS 3525 Family and Parent Counseling. CRS 3532 Seminar in School Ps^hology This course provides an intensive analysis of philo- sophical, technical, and school administrative issues contributing to the professional identity and con- sultative function of the psychologist in an educa- tional milieu. Simulations, case studies, and research projects will be used to study these issues. Prereq.: Permission of instructor CRS 3533 Psychoeducational Prescriptions Recommended for all school counseling majors and required of all school psychology majors, this course will provide training and supervision in synthesizing data on a student's cognitive, affective, and inter- personal needs with educational plans which 1) are based directly on that data, 2) may be implemented in the school setting, and 3) meet the 766, PL 94-142 criteria for such plans. Prereq.: Permission of Instructor. Counseling Psychology, Rehabilitation and Special Education / 65 CRS 3534 Individual Intelligence Testing (6 Q.H.) Preparation to administer, score, and interpret the Stanford-Binet Intelligence Test, the Wechsler Adult Intelligence Test, and the Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children. Consideration will be given to the the- ories of intelligence upon which the tests are based and the use of the tests in educational and clinic settings. Students will be required to administer and score thirty tests, including some from each of the three tests included in the course. Prereq.: CRS 3501 Psychological Testing. CRS 3535 Seminar in Contemporary Issues in Counseling Intensive study of a selected topic in counseling such as counseling minorities, current research, sex coun- seling, transactional analysis theory and practice, and behavioral counseling. Course objectives will vary according to the topic but may include a review of the literature, skill building workshop, and action projects. Prereq.: CRS 3538 Advanced Theories of Behavior Change and/or permission of instructor CRS 3536 Advanced Group Counseling This course will be a continuation of the content presented in Group Counseling, placing greater em- phasis on developing skill in conducting group coun- seling at a variety of age levels. Greater attention will be given to relevant readings and research on group process and methods for behavior modification. Prereq.: CRS 3507 Group Counseling. CRS 3537 Seminar in Counseling Supervision and In-Service Education Theory and practice of the supervisory process as it applies to the evaluation of counselor effectiveness and professional development. Theory readings, dis- cussions, role playing, and a written plan for in-service staff development are course requirements, but the major activity of the course involves the use of audio and videotapes of actual supervisory sessions con- ducted by class members. Prereq.: Master's degree in guidance or permission of the instructor CRS 3538 Advanced Theories of Behavior Change I An advanced-level counseling course required of all CAGS students and designed to provide greater depth of cognitive understanding of three major approaches to therapeutic practice, i.e., the behavioral, depth psy- chological, and general systems viewpoints. Original readings from selected principal theorists will be required. The course will compare assumptions, goals, and strategies of the theorists studied in order to build a strong conceptual basis for a counseling eclecti- cism from these analyses. Some of the theorists studied may include Skinner, Wolpe, Bandura, von Bertalauffy, Adier, Jung, and Rank. Prereq.: At least two counseling courses emphasizing both theory and process. CRS 3539 Advanced Theories of Behavior Change II This course addresses the fundamental methods for constructively improving human behavior, as implicit within the three generic approaches to psychological theory construction, and provides an overview of Ludwig von Bertalanffy's general systems concept of psychology and its relations to allied sciences. The course is based on a format of selected readings, lectures, and student discussion. Prereq.: CRS 3538 Advanced Theories of Behavior Change I. CRS 3540 Advanced Psychodiagnostics This is an advanced-level course providing intensive supervision in the clinical assessment of ego func- tioning in children and adolescents. A rudimentary knowledge of the theory and practice of psychodi- agnosis is assumed. This course will enable students to receive supervision on clinical evaluations on which they are working. A heavy emphasis will be placed on integrating data from a variety of sources and making in-depth interpretations and appropriate recommen- dations. Prereq.: CRS 3839 Psychodiagnosis with Children and Adolescents. CRS 3541 Psychodiagnostic Measures This is an advanced-level course in the clinical assess- ment of adults. The course places heavy emphasis on differential diagnosis and personality description using data from a variety of sources— interviewing, case histories, and objective and projective testing. Some of the tests typically studied in this course may include the California Psychological Inventory, Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory, Bender-Gestalt and Sentence Completion Tests, Wechsler Adult Intelli- gence Scale, and Draw-A-Person Test. Students will be required to administer and interpret psychological test data and to report their findings in a psychologi- cal report. Prereq.: CRS 3501 Psychological Testing. CRS 3542, 3510 Advanced Field work (8 Q.H.) Required of all CAGS students. Students may be assigned a fieldwork placement consistent with their major professional goals and/or the settings in which they intend to work. The activity of the fieldwork may extend across the academic year from September to June and require a minimum of one and a half days per week, or the equivalent, in the fieldwork setting. Seminars will meet, subject to change, on alternate weeks with additional individual supervision on cam- pus. Supervision will also be provided in the field setting. Both quarters must be completed before credit will be given for the course. Prereq.: Counseling Prac- ticum or the equivalent in experience. CRS 3550 Philosophy of the Behavioral Sciences Addresses such fundamental questions as 'What is science? What are its essential methods of inquiry, particularly as they pertain to the behavioral sciences? What is the nature of knowledge gained through sci- entific investigation, and are there limits to its useful- ness?" Participants have the opportunity to examine the natural and empirical sciences through exploring theory fact propositions, hypothetical deductive/ inductive knowledge, laws, evidence, verification, reductionism, and allied ideas. Prereq.: ED 3342 Research Design in Education and CRS 3539 Advanced Theories of Behavior Change II. 66 / Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions CRS 3801 Thesis A research activity tfiat may be selected by the student in lieu of two courses (8 quarter hours), with the approval and recommendation of the adviser CRS 3808 Doctoral Dissertation Prereq.: Admission to candidacy in the Doctor of Education degree program. CRS 3800 Directed Study This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Not available to special students. Prereq. : Approval of tfie ctiairperson of the department and of the director of the graduate school. (Approval forms must be submitted during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study.) CRS 3803 Institute in Counselor Education (See general institute description on page 86.) CRS 3806 Workshop in Counselor Education (See general workshop description on page 86.) CRS 3808 Doctoral Dissertation Prereq.: Admission to candidacy in the Doctor of Education degree program. CRS 3839 Psychodiagnosis with Children and Adolescents This is an advanced-level course in the theory and practice of ego functioning in children and adoles- cents. Heavy emphasis is placed on the case-study method. A major goal of the course will be to conduct a psychological assessment and report the findings of this assessment in terms of cognitive, perceptual- motor, affective, cognitive, and- social functioning. Students will become familiar with several methods of gathering assessment data. Prereq.: CRS 3501 Psy- chological Testing and CRS 3534 Individual Intelligence Testing. Education Foundations of Education ED 3300 Psychology of Learning The basic principles and conditions of acquisition, retention, and transfer of learning. Suggested prereq.: A course in psychology ED 3301 Psychology of Thinking A consideration of the processes involved in cog- nitive organization and functioning. Topics will in- clude language, concept formation, and problem solving. Suggested prereq.: A course in psychology. ED 3302 Psychobgy of Personality A systematic consideration of the personality theo- ries of Freud, Jung, Adier, Sullivan, Horney, Cattell, Allport, Rogers, and other approaches, including the psychosomatic of Alexander and the work of Reich. Theories are considered in depth and examined for ways that contribute to an understanding of dynamic factors in personality formation. Theories and theo- rists are compared for a greater understanding of strengths and weaknesses. Social, cultural and phil- osophic questions are discussed. Implications of some of the ideas and theories for the therapeutic process will also be considered. Suggested prereq.: At least one and preferably more courses in psychology ED 3303 Theories of Developmental Psychotogy The major developmental theories and related re- search of Havighurst, Erickson, Piaget, and others. Permission of instructor required. ED 3304 Chiki Psychotogy A review of the principles of child development from birth to preadolescence. Particular emphasis will be placed on intellectual, social, and emotional devel- opment. The theoretical formulations of psychoanal- ysis, social learning theory, and Piaget will be dis- cussed in the context of relevant research in these areas, as well as their educational implications. ED 3305 Adolescent Psychotogy Social, emotional, and intellectual development in the adolescent years. Problems in family relationships and in the adolescent's social environment as well as his adjustment in school. Case history material. ED 3306 Abnormal Psychotogy An historical overview leads to contemporary views on how human personality becomes disordered and maladaptive. Principal emphasis is on the develop- ment of psychopathology during the course of de- velopment, including a perspective for viewing the economy of psychological deviations. Neuroses, transient states, character disorders, sexual devia- tions, psychophysiological reactions, drug and al- cohol addictions, and psychotic reactions, each with a clinical picture, typical course, and outcomes are considered. Some consideration is devoted to cur- rent methods of diagnosis and treatment. ED 3307 Adult Psychotogy A comprehensive view of the three major areas of adulthood (young adulthood, middle age, and old age) in a context of research findings, academic knowledge, and clinical needs. ED 3308 Seminar in Child Devetopment A seminar course with emphasis on discussion of child development theories with special reference to personality and cognitive development. Critical eval- uation of research related to child development the- ories with particular emphasis on recent trends, new approaches, and relevance to educational theories Education / 67 and practices. Prereq.: A course in child psychology or human development. ED 3309 Seminar in Adolescent Development A seminar course with emphasis on discussion of major problem areas facing the adolescent in our society. Particular emphasis will be given to social and emotional development. Included will be a survey of research in such areas as psychoanalysis, social learning, morality, and delinquency. Prereq.: A course in adolescent psychology or human development. ED 3310 Personality and Social Structure Human behavior from a combined psychodynamic and sociological point of view, with special emphasis on socialization and the relations between the indi- vidual and the collectivity. The integration of relevant theories from psychology, sociology, and anthropol- ogy. Suggested prereq.: A course in sociology, cul- tural anthropology, or social psychology ED 331 1 Sex Roles in Education This course identifies and examines some of the major issues related to sex roles in both the formal and informal educational systems of our society. Top- ics that will come under special scrutiny include development of sex role patterns in the home and preschool and through children's books, games, and television programs; life for boys and girls in the elementary and high school classroom; sex bias in counseling and in vocational guidance and training; changes in traditional family roles and occupation hierarchies; assets and liabilities of coeducational and single-sex education. The course may also allow students, in small groups, to explore their own sex role attitudes and the strategies they use to socialize young people. ED 3312 Communications Theory An introduction to communications theory, covering models of the communication process, attitude changes, information, innovation, dissemination and flow, communication modalities, and language processing. ED 3320 Sociology of Education The functioning of educational institutions in their social and cultural milieu will be examined from an- thropological and sociological perspectives: the school as a social system; influence of the stratifi- cation system, youth cultures, and racial antago- nisms upon the educational enterprise. ED 3321 Educational Anthropology Examination of schooling as a particular variety of socialization, with special attention to characteristics of societies that rely heavily on formal instruction, contrasted with less deliberately patterned tech- niques of child rearing. Readings will be mainly cross- cultural, ethnographic, and historical. ED 3324 Comparative Education Introduction to education in other nations and ex- ploration of its relationships with the political, eco- nomic, social, and cultural milieu. Selected countries in Western and Eastern Europe, South America, and Africa will be considered. ED 3325 History of Education An opportunity to explore some of the historical roots of contemporary educational theory and prac- tice with a focus on selected aspects of educational history from antiquity to the present. Also an op- portunity to utilize knowledge gained for the devel- opment of a personal educational position. ED 3326 Topics in the Philosophy of Education A study of the basic assumptions underlying state- ments of educational content, process, and aims. Materials to be subjected to philosophical analysis are selected from educational and philosophic writ- ings according to themes (e.g., authority and free- dom, "growth" as an educational objective, the na- ture of educational relationships). The themes dealt with vary from quarter to quarter, depending on the concerns and interests of students and instructor. Brief lectures, mostly discussion. ED 3327 Seminar in Contemporary Issues in American Education Discussion of selected issues in contemporary American education such as school desegregation, compensatory education, learning problems of the disadvantaged, professionalization of teachers, etc. Review of relevant research and opinions. The topic or topics of the seminar for a particular quarter will be announced in the registration materials distrib- uted in advance of that quarter. ED 3328 Education and Equality An investigation into the reciprocal relationship be- tween American educational institutions and the equality-inequality dimension of American social structure. Both the traditional view, which celebrates the American public school as a triumph of equal- itarianism, and the revisionist view, which emphasizes inequalitarian consequences of American educa- tional practice, will be discussed. ED 3340 Introduction to Educational Statistics Basic descriptive statistics for measurement and re- search. Topics include use of statistical notation, measures of central tendency and variability, prob- ability and sampling techniques, theoretical distri- butions, linear regression and correlation, and an introduction to statistical inference. (This course, or completion of a statistics proficiency examination, is required for admission to ED 3342 Research Design in Education.) ED 3341 Intermediate Educational Statistics Statistical inference of normal populations and dis- crete data; estimation; testing of hypotheses; mul- tiple correlation; analysis of variance and covariance; contingency; the chi-square test and other nonpar- ametric tests. Emphasis is given to application in educational research. Prereq.: Successful completion of the statistics proficiency examination; satisfactory completion of ED 3340 Introduction to Educational Statistics; or permission of instructor This course must be completed prior to doctoral candidacy. ED 3342 Research Design in Education An introduction to scientific methods of research in education and related fields. Stress will be placed 68 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions on critical reading and understanding of research literature, formulating research hypothese,s, con- structing a research proposal, and carrying out an individual or group project. This course must be included among the first six courses taken by each student. Prep.: ED 3340 Introduction to Educational Statistics or successful completion of the statistics proficiency examination. (Students wishing to make arrangements to take the proficiency examination should call 437-3305.) ED 3343 Advanced Research Design This course focuses on methodologies for collecting, interpreting, and evaluating data and deals with biases encountered in the data-collection process. Topics such as data collection and interpretation, use of sampling, analysis of variance, covariance, multiple regression, multivariate procedures, and ad- vanced topics in scaling, semantic differential meth- odology, questionnaire design, interview methodol- ogy, and evaluative criteria will be featured. Students enrolling for this course will design and complete a proposal on this design for the conduct of a re- search project. This project may be carried out as part of research on either the master's or doctoral level. Prereq.: ED 3341 Intermediate Educational Sta- tistics or equivalent, or permission of instructor ED 3344 Nonquantitatiwe Research Methods in Education Nonquantitative research methods in the human de- velopment professions. Among the topics considered are problem formulation, location and selection of data, authenticity of sources, and analysis of data by synthesis. Case-study approaches and style of writing for research proposals are also discussed. Prereq.: ED 3341 Intermediate Educational Statistics. ED 3345 Nature and Theory of Psychological and Educational Measurement An examination of the logic of measurement and the nature of human capacities, aptitudes, and abilities. Characteristics of tests, ratings, questionnaires, and similar instruments are reviewed with emphasis on their reliability, validity, and utility. Item analysis pro- cedures and test standardization are covered. ED 3346, 3347 Independent (4 Q.H. each) Research Seminars I and II Focus is on the design, conduct, analysis, and re- porting of data from an individual research project. This project may be original or secondary, applied, theoretical, or action research and must be sub- stantially larger in scope than that accommodated by Directed Study. Evaluation will be based on oral and written interim reports in Seminar I and oral and written final reports in Seminar II. This course will serve as an option to the thesis requirement only for students enrolled in the master's degree program in Educational Research. ED 3348 Research and Statistical Methods for Administrators A study of the application of the methods of research and statistical techniques to problem solving, with specific focus on the role of research in the admin- istrative decision-making process. The course of study may also focus on the various research de- signs administrators may use in their positions, such as the development of a program proposal for local, state, or federal agencies. A specific topic of prac- tical significance in administration is to be selected by the student and a design for studying the topical problem developed. Research relevant to the topic is evaluated. Recommended prep.: Rudimentary knowl- edge of research designs and techniques and an elementary knowledge of basic statistical methods. ED 3800 Directed Study This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Not available to special students. Prereq.: Approval of the chairperson of the department and of the director of the graduate school. (Approval forms must be submitted during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study) ED 3801 Thesis A research activity that may be selected by the student in lieu of two courses (8 quarter hours), with the approval and recommendation of the adviser. ED 3820 Workshop in Foundations of Education (See general workshop description on page 86.) ED 3828 Institute in Foundations of Education (See general institute description on page 86.) Curriculum and Instruction ED 3400 Analysis of the instructional Process A consideration of the rational basis for effective teaching and the nature of the educational process. Learning theory is related to the various strategies and activities that can be implemented with a learn- ing situation to meet the needs of the learners, in- cluding those with special needs. Alternative ap- proaches, research results, and theoretical constructs are employed to help extend the pro- spective teacher's concepts of the educational proc- ess and the role of the teacher in it. ED 3401 Fundamentals of Curriculum Development An examination of how goals and objectives are selected and how priorities are determined. Methods of designing educational programs to meet specified goals and methods of evaluating educational out- comes in terms of the goals of the program and techniques for modifying programs in the light of such performance. ED 3402 Methods and Materials for Teaching Children I Teaching methods and learning materials used in teaching children in a number of educational set- tings. This course will help students establish ob- jectives, plan and execute appropriate learning ex- periences, and evaluate outcomes. Education / 69 ED 3403 Methods and Materials for Teaching Children II A continuation of ED 3402. Prereq.: ED 3402 Meth- ods and Materials for Teaching Children i. ED 3404 Methods and Materials for Teaching Adolescents and Adults I Consideration of specific methods and materials ap- propriate to teaching adolescents and adults to de- velop in the students an understanding of the com- plexities of the materials and methodology of the teaching-learning process, to encourage within stu- dents attitudes conducive to and identified with good tenets of teaching, and to foster in the students acceptance of the need to grow constantly and to be aware of the continuing development of our knowledge of the learning-teaching process. ED 3405 Methods and Materials for Teaching Adolescents and Adults II This course provides for the specific subject areas to be attended to. Topics covered include techniques of organizing and presenting lessons, developing teaching materials, using audiovisual equipment, de- veloping and implementing evaluation instruments, and selecting appropriate materials within each field of interest. (15 hours of field work required.) ED 3406 Procedures of Evaluation Consideration is given to evaluation as a process for the improvement of learning and instruction. The course concerning itself with such topics as how to measure and evaluate effective, psychomotor, and cognitive dimensions of student growth; test con- struction; collecting and administering standardized tests; various bases of grading; and methods of re- porting student progress. ED 3407 Student Teaching with Related 8 Q.H. Seminar A University-arranged practicum of observation and teaching in schools offering comprehensive pro- grams within reasonable commuting distance of the University. Participating on a full-time basis, the stu- dent is expected to develop planning and commu- nication abilities within his major field. Biweekly sem- inars at the University provide additional opportunity to analyze theory-practice relationships and to ex- amine generic problems of teaching. Prereq.: Course in child or adolescent psychology; successful com- pletion of all course work in the nondegree program. (Open only to students in the nondegree Curriculum and Instruction program.) ED 3408 The Evolution of Curriculum Theory and Practice Examination from a historical perspective of the cur- riculum of the American school as an evolutionary process resulting in part from conflict between sub- ject-oriented and student-oriented curricula, tradi- tionalists and revisionists, behaviorism and psycho- dynamism, and the interplay of forces generated by students, teachers, administrators, and other inter- ested groups. Present curricula will be analyzed as the outcomes of such influences and trends for fu- ture developments will be hypothesized. Hence, the course will also focus on the process of curriculum development and the product of that development. ED 3409 Seminar in Curriculum: Alternative Designs Identification and analysis of problems in curriculum and instruction in light of the forces affecting the curriculum with the student's area of specialization; design and implementation of solutions to such problems; evaluation and field testing, where feasi- ble, of these solutions. Prereq.: ED 3408 The Evo- lution of Curriculum Theory and Practice. ED 3411 Seminar in Instruction: Alternative Designs Methods of inventing or adapting methods of teach- ing to make them appropriate to the demands of the curriculum, the needs of the students, the capabili- ties of the teachers, the expectations of the com- munity, and the resources of the school or college. This course will help the student identify the criteria by which instructional practices may be selected, by which they may be evaluated, and by which they may be developed. Instructional practices include meth- ods of teaching, designing learning materials, group- ing students, pacing, scheduling, and evaluating. Students will have the opportunity to revise existing resources and to create new resources for instruc- tion in order to make the implementation of a specific curriculum more effective. Prereq.: (except for stu- dents in joint programs with a department in another college): ED 3409 Seminar in Curriculum: Alternative Designs (may be taken concurrently); Prep, for stu- dents in joint programs with a department in another college is ED 3400 Analysis of the Instructional Proc- ess or equivalent. ED 341 2, 341 3 Seminar in the State 8 Q.H. of the Art and Field Project Students will examine the current curricular and in- structional issues in specific teaching areas or lev- els, hypothesizing and projecting possible future di- rections in curriculum and instruction in these areas; integration of the results of these inquiries into co- herent understandings of the state of the art in these areas and the development of a special project to be implemented by the students within the context of their own teaching experiences. Seminars will be held over a period of two quarters every other week. Prereq.: Teaching experience. ED 3414 Seminar in Supervision of Instruction/Reading This seminar examines the role of the supervisor and consultant in organizing and implementing programs. Aspects include organizational plans, staff supervi- sion and development, working with parents, and accommodating special needs children. ED 3415 Seminar in Supervision of (8 Q.H.) Instruction Practicum Students apply the skills learned in the seminar to a field setting. Student field work is supervised by 70 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions an on-site person and a professor. At periodic sem- inars, projects are selected and discussed. Students plan the projects and implement these in the field. Students also plan and carry out a project evaluation. ED 3420 The English- Language Arts Curriculum The design and function of the English-language arts curriculum; selected current issues as they impinge upon the English language arts curriculum; the de- sign and function of research in the English lan- guage arts curriculum. Open to certified or experi- enced teachers. Prereq.: Permission of instructor. ED 3421 Literature in the English-Language Arts Curriculum The historical-social, psychological, personal, arche- typal, textual, biographical, and philosophical-moral aspects of literary study and their relation to the chronological, thematic, and generic demands of the literature program; the sources of interest in litera- ture as they related to the young reader and their implications for the English-language arts curricu- lum; the interrelatedness of literature and other com- ponents of the English-language arts curriculum. Each student will identify and investigate an area of individual interest. Prereq.: ED 3420 The Englisti- language arts curriculum or permission of instructor ED 3422 Writing in the English-Language Arts Curriculum The cognitive and effective bases of imaginative and nonimaginative w/riting; the role of w/riting in the re- lationship between self and object; modes of imag- inative and nonimaginative writing appropriate to the young writer; the impulse to expression in the young writer and its implications for the English-language arts curriculum; the interrelatedness of writing and other components of the English-language arts cur- riculum. Each student will identify and investigate an area of individual interest. Prereq.: ED 3420 The English-language arts curriculum or permission of instructor ED 3423 Language in the English-Language Arts Curriculum An examination of the multiple dimensions of lan- guage study in the English-language arts curricu- lum; the role of inquiry in the study of language and its implications for the English-language arts curric- ulum; theories of grammar and their relation to the study of language in the English-language arts cur- riculum; the interrelatedness of language and the other components of the English-language arts cur- riculum. Each student will identify and investigate an area of individual interest. Prereq.: ED 3420 The English-Language Arts Curriculum or permission of instructor ED 3424 Topics in English-Language Arts Education An investigation of a matter of immediate concern to English-language arts education, but for which no organized study is ordinarily available. Typical topics include media in the English-language arts program, behavioral objectives in the English-language arts program, the English-language arts program for the disadvantaged. Each year the seminar topic for that year is announced prior to registration. ED 3425 English as a Second Language I First course in teaching ESL, introducing the basic linguistic, cultural, and psychological concepts. Anal- ysis of current approaches to teaching ESL locally and internationally from the standpoint of diagnosis, grouping, use of particular methods, and materials. Observations of local ongoing ESL programs will be included. Prereq.: ED 3453 Diagnosis and Remedia- tion of Reading and Language Disabilities I or per- mission of instructor ED 3426 English as a Second Language II Second course in the ESL sequence v/hich empha- sizes innovative means in teaching ESL. Specific projects according to student need and interest will be developed; supervised clinical work. Prereq.: ED 3425 English as a Second Language I. ED 3427 Literature and Materials Seminar Literature for children, adolescents, and adults; the sources of interest in literature as they relate to the reader; the interrelatedness of literature and other components of the language arts program; investi- gation of materials available. Students will develop projects related to their needs and interests. ED 3430 History and the Social Studies in the School Curriculum Permits the student to explore some of the funda- mental concepts of anthropology, sociology, eco- nomics, political science, and history. Emphasis will be given to the interrelatedness of disciplines and to the extraction of operating principles from those that aid in the analyses of social problems. As a consequence of such analyses, the student should ~ be equipped to find a greater variety of conceptual relationships with the historical social science field. From there a framework for evolving courses of study may be generated. Prereq.: Teaching experience or certification. ED 3431 Social Science Materials Seminar A curriculum course wherein the knowledge previ- ously acquired will be used to establish criteria for the selection and development of curriculum mate- rials. All materials of instruction will be viewed as means of implementation of objectives relating to specific social science concepts and skills. An effort will be made to personalize and concretize abstract phenomena and to demonstrate their impact on the quality of human lives. Students will examine and analyze prepared curricula and will be asked to de- velop original materials that include provision for the integration of a variety of thinking, reading, and social skills. Prereq.: Teaching experience or certification. ED 3432 Seminar in Current issues in the Social Studies A content approach to problems of political, eco- nomic, and social significance which have contem- porary relevance for teachers of the social sciences. Education / 71 ED 3440 Remediation in Mathematics An effective approach to the teaching of mathemat- ics; diagnosis and remediation of difficulties, alter- native teaching methods, techniques for the im- provement of student skills and of student attitudes tov^^ard mathematics. ED 3442 Seminar in Mathematics Education Students are expected to analyze a mathematics learning problem, to investigate relevant research, and to prepare materials embodying their own pro- posed solutions. Prereq.: Permission of instructor. ED 3444 Implementing Change in Science and Mathematics Education The planning, organization, and execution of in-serv- ice experiences for teachers, related to all phases of science and mathematics education from subject mat- ter courses to curriculum planning to materials work- shops. Prereq.: Teaching experience or certification. ED 3450 Foundations of Developmental Reading Reading and writing as the receiving and generating of language; current developmental reading, writing, and related language skills; selected research find- ings bearing on relevant topics. (This course includes ten hours of observation or other field experience.) ED 3451 Language and Reading Introductory course in linguistics with emphasis on implications for reading and language instruction. Topics include the nature of language, introduction to the development of syntax, phonology and se- mantics, English orthography, the grammar of child language, and dialectology. Prereq.: ED 0450 Foun- dations of Developmental Reading or consent of instructor. ED 3452 Current Issues in Reading and Language Three or four topics of current interest in reading and language education are investigated in depth over a three- or four-week period each during the quarter. Typical topics might include lectures and reading on sexism in reading materials. Chapter 766 and its implications for reading and language edu- cation, "back to basics," reading and language in the open and alternative education program, prob- lems of illiteracy, bilingual and bicultural education and reading/language instruction. ED 3453 Diagnosis and Remediation 6f Reading and Language Disabilities I Reading and language disabilities; causes and cor- relates of disability; language differences; aspects of measurement; diagnostic and corrective proce- dures in reading, writing, and related language skills; selected research findings bearing on relevant top- ics. Prereq.: ED 3450 foundations of Developmental Reading. ED 3454 Diagnosis and Remediation of Reading and Language Disabilities II Second course in Fteading and Language Disabili- ties, including an examination of selected models of language processes; cognitive and effective dimen- sions; problems in language pathology; and other learning disabilities, including academic, perceptual- motor, and neurological areas. Prereq.: ED 3453 Di- agnosis and Remediation of Reading and Language Disabilities I and ED 3457 Clinical Practicum in Reading. ED 3455 Teaching Reading in Junior and Senior High School Developmental or corrective reading programs at the secondary level. Development of reading rate, com- prehension, interpretation, and study skills in the content areas. ED 3456 Teaching Reading to the Deaf Modern methods in use, such as the Rtzgerald Key and the Natural Language Approach. Emphasis is on using language in natural situations through lip reading and writing, with later emphasis on the for- mal presentation of language principles. Methods used to develop reading experiences that focus on content rather than mechanics are also covered as well as considerations appropriate to the develop- ment of a balanced reading program that provides adequate motivation, a wide variety of rich materials, a well-organized sequence of reading experiences, and provisions for evaluation. ED 3457 Clinical Practicum in Reading Practicum in clinical experience, tutoring children and adults with severe reading disabilities in the Reading Clinic for a total of seventy hours under close staff supervision. A one-hour seminar follows each tutoring session for purposes of discussion and case presentation. Diagnosis, lesson plans, daily logs, complete case history, and final progress eval- ution are required of each student. Prereq.: ED 3450 foundations of Developmental Reading. ED 3458 Reld Practicum in Reading Eighty-hour field practicum offers students the op- portunity to apply consulting and remediation skills in a school setting. Students may consult with teach- ers on the implementation of developmental and cor- rective reading and on reading in the content areas and also may provide diagnostic and remediation to pupils having special needs in reading. Prereq.: ED 3453 Diagnosis and Remediation of Reading and Language Disabilities I and ED 3457 Clinical Practi- cum in Reading. ED 3461 Bilingual Education, Methods, and Materials An introductory course in the problems, programs, and principles of bilingual/bicultural education. Em- phasis will be on the current methods and materials used in programs nationally and internationally. Cur- ricular aspects of bilingual/bicultural programs will be studied, as well as available research. Prereq.: SOA 3135 Language and Communication, ENG 1118 Introduction to Linguistics, ENG 3404 Language and Its Structure, ED 3451 Language and Reading, or SLA 3650 Social Dialectology. 72 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions ED 3462 Seminar: Ethnicity and Today's School Curriculum Students will briefly review aspects of the history and culture of some ethnic groups to explore the unique manner in which certain universal needs are mani- fested. Prepared curricular materials, as well as au- thentic literary, visual, and artifact materials, will be analyzed, evaluated, and related to developed cri- teria, goals, and potential curricular impact in pro- jecting the aforementioned cross-cultural needs or themes. Students will be asked to select, organize, and, as necessary, develop independent materials and strategies appropriate for classroom use. Efforts will be made to categorize developed units of work on various ethnic groups which appear to have sig- nificant parallel dimensions according to predeter- mined categories. ED 3463 Urban Education: An Introduction to Teaching in City Schools An introductory course offering students an overview of urban education, especially in the public schools. The demography of city schools is studied as a basis for identifying diverse special education needs of the multicultural population, such as ESL, bilingual ed- ucation, and BSD. Study includes an overview and investigation of current curricular patterns related to this area of education. Readings, guest speakers, and first-hand observations of selected schools and programs are included in the course content. ED 3470 Teaching Adults: Methods and Materials Designed to help prepare participants to instruct adults in a variety of academic and nonacademic settings, the course emphasizes the skills and knowl- edge necessary to identify objectives, plan and ex- ecute appropriate lesson plans in keeping with stu- dents' requirements, develop curricula in a variety of settings, and evaluate students' performance. Class activities include the presentation of both theory and application through selected case studies that ex- emplify adult teaching in different environments. Par- ticipants also have the opportunity to acquire the necessary skills for developing individual models of adult teaching behavior to suit various circumstances. ED 3471 Methods and Materials in Adult Literacy This course will introduce students to some current diagnostic and instructional approaches to the func- tionally and totally illiterate adult. Current methods and materials will be analyzed and evaluated. Special projects may include the development of informal diagnostic instruments and/or instructional materials for particular adult learners. An overview of national and world literacy problems and programs will also be offered. ED 3482 Principles of Programmed Instruction The development and current status of self-instruc- tional devices. A survey of available programs and teaching machines, including audiovisual machines, with emphasis on the details of the construction and evaluation of programs. ED 3484 Selection and Utilization of Instructional Material This course deals with all aspects of instructional media, surveying types, techniques, advantages, lim- itations, sources, and methods of using materials and equipment in specified areas. Emphasis is on the selection of appropriate media (print and non- print) to suit given learning objectives. Laboratory experience in operation of equipment and the pro- duction of instructional materials is provided. ED 3486 Developing Multimedia Learning Packages During this course each student will produce a mul- timedia (print and nonprint) instructional package for individualized learning. ED 3800 Directed Study This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Not available to special students. Prereq.: Approval of the chairperson of the department and of the director of the graduate school. (Approval forms must be submitted during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study.) ED 3801 Thesis A research activity that may be elected by the stu- dent in lieu of two courses (8 quarter hours), with the approval and recommendation of the adviser. ED 3821 Workshop in Elementary Education (See general workshop description on page 86.) ED 3822 Workshop in Secondary Education (See general workshop description on page 86.) ED 3825 Institute in Elementary Education (See general institute description on page 86.) ED 3826 Institute in Secondary Education (See general institute description on page 86.) Educational Administration ED 3500 Leadership in Educatk>n, Part I Part I of a two-term core course designed to intro- duce the student to concepts of formal organization. This core, consisting of a two-part sequence, is prerequisite to further study in the Department of Educational Administration. Part I may provide the student with an overview of formal organizations as social systems, with emphasis given to the leader- ship function. Relationships between individuals and organizations are considered. Communications and decision-making functions I are analyzed and examined. Education / 73 ED 3501 Leadership in Education, Part 11 Part II continues an emphasis on the leadership function in organizations. It examines selected infor- mal organization elements such as motivation, nor- mative order, social power, conflict, conformity, and creativity. Attention is given to processes of change and innovation in organizations. Prereq.: ED 3500 must be completed before enrollment in ED 3501. ED 3502 Instructional Leadership: Curriculum Development and Supervision This course views the responsibilities of administra- tive personnel relating to the improvement of curric- ular and instructional practices. Evaluative tech- niques, inservice education, supervisory procedures, and innovative programs are among the areas' of consideration. Students may have the opportunity to become engaged in supervisory projects individually or in small teams. Prereq.: ED 3500 and ED 3501, or permission of instructor Certain of the following courses in Educational Admin- istration may be open only to CAGS and doctoral degree candidates or by special permission of the department chairperson, granted prior to registration. ED 3503 Current Issues in Educational Administration A seminar required of all students pursuing the CAGS. Critical and contemporary issues which face admin- istrators will be examined. The status of the admin- istrator; federal, state, and local revenue sources; accountability; teacher militancy; equal educational opportunity; controls of schools; and urban educa- tion problems are examples of topics that will be analyzed. ED 3504 Human Relations Skills for Administrators This course offers students the opportunity to ex- amine methods of diagnosing problems and re- sponding in management contexts; analyzing the norms, influence patterns, roles, and control systems of organizations; performing some of the critical skills required in the leadership of human organizations; and managing an intervention for the purpose of solving an organizational problem. Prereq.: CRS 3405 Group Dynamics or equivalent. ED 3505 The Process of Administration A course required of all students pursuing the CAGS. Case analysis and group activity will be utilized to gain insight into such areas as the improvement of organizational morale, professional job satisfaction, and current issues of involvement and conflict. Stu- dents will also examine alternative courses of action to cope with problematical events confronting edu- cational administrators. ED 3506 Administration of Early Childhood Education This course will include the study of significant ele- ments of administration unique to the planning, im- plementation, and operation of an early childhood education center. Areas of concern are funding sources, intra-institutional relationships, patterns for designing early childhood programs, onsite visita- tions, modes of private governance, use of plant, student and teacher placement, role of volunteers, and related topics. Prereq.: ED 3500 and ED 3501. ED 3507 Administration of the Elementary School A survey of the operational tasks performed by the elementary school administrator. Included will be school-community relations, student personnel, staff personnel, curriculum and instruction, physical fa- cilities, finance and business management, and or- ganizational structure. Prereq.: ED 3500, ED 3501, or permission of instructor ED 3508 Administration of the Secondary School A survey of the operational tasks performed by the secondary school administrator Included will be school-community relations, student personnel, staff personnel, curriculum and instruction, physical fa- cilities, finance and business management, and or- ganizational structure. Prereq.: ED 3500, ED 3501, or permission of instructor ED 3509 Administration of Two-Year Colleges Emergence of the community college movement in the United States, administrative structures and gov- ernance, the role of faculty in planning, the student population and related student personnel services will be examined. Particular emphasis is placed upon the identification and utilization of community re- sources in curriculum development and the college's total relationships with the community in which it exists. The two-year technical institute and both publicly and privately supported junior colleges will be studied. Reld visits are an integral part of course requirements. ED 3510 Academic Administration in Higher Education Recruitment of properly qualified faculty and staff is only one problem of the academic administrator. This course will also consider the problems of pupil serv- ices, admissions, athletics, curriculum development, accreditation, instructional resources, registration and scheduling, faculty organization, continuing educa- tion, faculty rights and responsibilities, and personnel policies. ED 351 1 Administration of Cooperative Education An examination of significant elements in the plan- ning, implementation, and operation of a cooperative education program. Areas of concern include agents for institutional change, intrainstitutional relation- ships, program costs and funding sources, cooper- ative education calendars, development of cooper- ative work assignments, relationships with cooperative employers, and operational policies. ED 3512 Administration of Adult and Continuing Education The historical development of adult and part-time education, with attention to the present status and trends for the future, will be studied, with emphasis on the administration of these programs. A variety of adult educational programs in schools, colleges, junior colleges, religious agencies, social service or- ganizations, business and industry, and professional 74 / Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions organizations will be included, focusing on planning, implementing, administering, financing, and evaluat- ing such programs. ED 351 3 Problems in Urban School Administration Tfiis course examines the problems of educational administration in the complex city school system with emphasis on solutions to educational problems caused t>y the unique demographic characteristics of the city. ED 3514 Administration of Experiential Education Programs This course will focus on the planning, organizing, budgeting, implementing, and evaluating of exper- iential education programs, with particular emphasis on work-related programs in a variety of countries. An examination of the development and operation of such programs as cooperative education, coopera- tive work experience, external degree, "sandwich courses," "enseignement en alternance," study serv- ice, and other work/school arrangements wilt lead to discussion of the administrative problems involved. Additional topics may include off-campus learning, administrative involvement in assessment, appropri- ate supervision techniques, and the development of a rationale for work in the curriculum. ED 3515 The Administrator's Role in Supervision and Evaluation The course examines the leadership role as it relates to supervision and evaluation. Through role playing, case analysis, and the use of videotapes, students have the opportunity to engage in activities typically required of building or unit administrators. A variety of supjervisory and evaluation techniques and for- mats appropriate to both formative and summative evaluations are presented for examination. ED 3516 Administration and Supervision of Special Education Designed for advanced graduate students preparing for administrative or supervisory positions in special education programs. Facilities and curriculum ad- justments, staff roles, methods and content for in- service training, and the use of the team approach are studied. Reld trips to observe and evaluate pro- grams may be required. ED 3517 Simulated Problems: Elementary School Administration The course is designed to place each student in a simulated decision-making situation as a principal or administrator of an elementary school. Back- ground materials have been prepared which de- scribe all aspects of a school system, including its publics, its policies, its certified and noncertified staff members, and its geographical and socioeconomic makeup. These background data may be dissemi- nated through motion pictures, film strips, and taped interviews with influential people in the community, as well as through written materials. Prereq.: ED 3500, ED 3501, or permission of instructor. ED 351 8 Simulated Problems: Secondary School Administration The course is designed to place each student in a simulated decision-making situation as a principal or administrator of a secondary school. Background materials have been prepared which describe ail aspects of a school system, including its publics, its policies, its certified and noncertified staff members, and its geographical and socioeconomic makeup. These background data may be disseminated through motion pictures, film strips, and taped interviews with influential people in the community, as well as through written materials. Prereq.: ED 3500, ED 3501, or permission of instructor ED 3521 Problems in College Administration: A Simulated Experience This seminar is designed to place each student in simulated decision-making situations as an admin- istrator of a college or junior college. Background materials have been prepared which describe many aspects of a college, including its policies, the makeup of its faculty and student body, its financial situation, the community it serves, and its board of control. Prereq.: ED 3528 Financial Management in Higher Education or permission of instructor ED 3522 Simulated Problems: Administration of Occupational and Career Education Each student is confronted with a series of simulated decision-making situations such as those which are usually faced by administrators of programs in the area of occupational and career education. Read- ings, audiovisual material, and class interactions con- stitute the design of this course. ED 3523 Seminar in Educational Administration A culminating experience for students majoring in school administration at the master's level. The stu- dent is confronted with major issues facing the school and its administrators. Emphasis is placed upon ap- plying knowledge gained in previous administrative courses to an understanding of contemporary edu- cation problems. Prereq.: ED 3500, ED 3501, or permission of instructor ED 3524 Seminar in Occupational and Career Education Students will be confronted with a sampling of the major issues facing administrators and supervisors of occupational and career education programs in their efforts to organize, promote, and operate such programs. Emphasis will be placed on applying the knowledge acquired in previous courses and other program experiences to arrive at an understanding of contemporary occupational and career education problems and their solutions. ED 3525 Personnel Administration The purposes, patterns, and issues in personnel administration are the major considerations of the course. Study will include the skills, attitudes, and knowledge which an institutional staff needs to have and which are essential to the accomplishments of organizational goals. Personnel administration pro- Education/ 75 grams and problems will serve as the focus for the course. ED 3526 Educational Rnance The study of school finance deals with the principles and problems of financing education, and also con- siders the basic concepts of economics relative to the place of school finance in the field of public finance. The sources and rationale for public support of schools are examined. Selected state and federal aid programs, capital outlay programs, current prac- tices and issues of local support, and bond issue campaigns are included in this study. ED 3527 School Business Management Practices and issues in the administration of school business affairs are the major concerns of the course. The role of the school business administrator and the educational budget will be examined. Attention will be paid to principles of budget preparation and development, purchasing, supply management and distribution, school accounting and data-processing systems, auditing, financial reporting and manage- ment of payroll, transportation programs, and school food services, and the operation and maintenance programs for the physical plants. In addition, each student will be placed in a simulated decision-mak- ing situation. Background materials have been pre- pared describing aspects of a fictitious school sys- tem, including its publics, policies, and other relevant information. Each student may have the opportunity to deal with matters typically faced by the school business administrator. ED 3528 Financial Management in Higher Education This course seeks to combine a knowledge of fund- raising activities with the study of proper financial management in higher educational institutions. The problems of fund raising for both public and private, two- and four-year institutions will be considered. Modern techniques of budget preparation and con- trol may include purchasing, school accounting, data processing, providing benefits for faculty, financial reporting, food services, housing, and operation and maintenance of the physical plant. ED 3529 School Plant Planning, Operation, and Maintenance This course seeks to have the student develop a basic understanding of the processes involved in the planning, maintenance, and operation of school plants. Such items as educational specifications, the process of school construction, techniques for pro- viding clean, safe, and healthy environments for the teaching-learning process, along with the selection, assignment, and supervision of custodial and main- tenance staff will be involved. Statutes or regulations pertaining to these processes used by state and local regulatory bodies will also be reviewed. Con- sideration will be given to issues related to declining enrollments and school closings. ED 3530 Institutional Planning and Facilities This course will consider the planning of new col- leges as well as the expansion and maintenance of existing ones. Systems analysis, needs surveys, and development of educational specifications for college facilities will constitute half of the course. The other half will involve studying the operation and mainte- nance of the physical plant, including provisions for housing, safety, parking, communications, and health service. ED 3531 Systems Theory in Education This course is required of all students pursuing the CAGS. The course provides the student with an in- troduction to general systems concepts and termi- nology as well as the implications of systems theory to leadership and administration. Topics include sys- tems applications such as input/output analysis, PERT, feedback monitoring and response, flowchart logic, and the computer as a system. Consideration is given to systems study as a method of planning and evaluation. ED 3532 Organizationa! Analysis Open only to advanced graduate students, this course will include examination of different ap- proaches used to define traits or characteristics of formal organization. Special emphasis will be placed on the application of models, typologies, and schemes to identify structural or procedural defi- ciencies in bureaucratic social systems. Prereq.: Per- mission of instructor. ED 3534 School-Community Relations This course includes the study and design of school- community relations programs based on the princi- ples and practices of the intercommunications be- tween the school and its several publics. Selected research findings relative to public relations pro- grams in business, industry, and governmental agen- cies will be reviewed in addition to those involving educational systems. Stress will be placed on the role of the administrator in the development of a comprehensive program of school community rela- tions to the administrative unit. ED 3535 School Law The student will be expected to develop a basic understanding of federal and state laws that apply to school systems, educational programs, and per- sonnel, as well as of the legal prerogatives available to the practicing administrator and the local boards of education. This study will include consideration of the constitutional, statutory, and common-law foundations of educational systems and the school administrator's role with respect to them. ED 3536 Collective Negotiations in Education This course is designed to provide prosp»ective ad- ministrators and those already engaged in admin- istration with knowledge of the collective negotiation process and collective negotiation strategies and tactics* Designed as a systems approach to collec- tive negotiations, simulation exercises and cases will be used to provide practical exercises for students. When arrangements can be made, guest lecturers experienced in collective negotiations will be invited to the seminar. E 3537 Program Planning and Workshop Design Administrators who wish to be effective must know the techniques for directing client-needs assess- 76 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions ment. This course presents a variety of strategies designed to help students develop skill at assessing client needs, followed by discussions regarding ways in which these needs are translated into program/ workshop objectives. The administrator's role in pro- gram and workshop design, with emphasis on man- aging the learning activities, is demonstrated through student involvement in administrative activities. At- tention is devoted to the variety of settings in which adult-education administrators work, including ed- ucational institutions, business and industry, govern- mental agencies, and human-service organizations. ED 3538 Securing and Administering Grants in Education This course is designed to provide school adminis- trators with knowledge of fund raising for educational purposes and supervisory techniques for funded programs. Designed as a systems approach to grantsmanship, the course will emphasize the meth- ods and techniques of fund raising, program plan- ning, and proposal writing. ED 3540 Typologies of Higher Education A study of the types of higher educational institu- tions, with emphasis on organizational structure, modes of governance, and administration. The his- tory of higher education, particularly the develop- ment of colleges, universities, and junior colleges in the United States, will be considered to provide per- spective for the modern college administrator. Im- portant issues and the problems they present for administrators will provide the major focus of this course. ED 3541 Innovation and Change A course required of all students pursuing the CAGS. Major emphasis is upon administrative strategies in effecting structural alterations, curricular organiza- tion, and instructional techniques. The nature of these alterations varies with the particular problems rele- vant to the issues that receive consideration. ED 3542 Politics and Educational Decision Making This course examines federal, state, and local gov- ernmental arrangements and political processes which influence educational policies of school sys- tems. Emphasis is given to the application of political science concepts and research methods to educa- tional policy-making processes and to the political environment surrounding the educational administrator. ED 3543 Directed Reld Experiences in the Administration of the Elementary School Required of all master's candidates who major in school administration. Study and discussion of ad- ministrative functions may be coordinated with se- lected field trips to administrative settings and with guest lectures by practicing elementary school ad- ministrators. These experiences usually involve visits to such settings as an elementary school, a middle school, a superintendent's office, a school committee meeting, and appropriate federal and state agencies. In addition, each student will be expected to partic- ipate in an administrative field experience in an el- ementary setting for a minimum of four hours per week. Prereq.: ED 3500 or permission of instructor ED 3544 Directed Field Experiences in the Administration of the Secondary School A companion course to ED 3543, required of all master's candidates in school administration. Study and discussion of administrative functions may be coordinated with selected field trips to administrative settings and with guest lectures by practicing sec- ondary school administrators. These experiences are aimed at educational agencies at the secondary level and may include visits to a comprehensive high school, a junior high school, a regional vocational- technical school, a superintendent's office, a school committee meeting, and appropriate federal and state agencies. In addition, each student will be required to participate in an administrative field experience in a secondary school for a minimum of four hours each week. Prereq.: ED 3500 or permission of in- structor (ED 3544 may be a continuation of ED 3543 or may precede it.) ED 3545 Administrative internship This is an individualized offering involving supervised observations, internships, externships, and seminars in educational administration. It is designed to pro- vide further practical experience in the student's area of administrative preparation. The administrative internship program must be worked out with the adviser not later than the end of the second week of the quarter preceding the quarter during which the internship will take place. ED 3546 Special Education Administrative Internship An individualized offering for students preparing for administrative roles in areas of special education. The course offers experiences in supervised obser- vations, internships, externships, and seminars in special education administration. The administrative internship program must be worked out with the student's adviser not later than the end of the second week of the quarter preceding that in which the internship is to take place. ED 3800 Directed Study This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Not available to special students. Prereq.: Approval of the chairperson of the department and of the director of the graduate school. (Approval forms must be submitted during the quarter prior to registration for the Directed Study.) ED 3801 Thesis A research activity that may be selected by the student in lieu of two courses (8 quarter hours), with the approval and recommendation of the adviser. Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies / 77 ED 3806, 3807, 3808 Doctoral Seminar in Leadership; Administration and Supervision I, II, III A series of three seminars required of all students pursuing the Ed.D. degree. The dialogues in these courses will used an interdisciplinary approach to explore complex behavioral and structural interac- tions found in formal organizations. Major emphasis will be placed upon integrating theoretical concerns with practical administrative functioning. This sequence of seminars is viewed primarily as a pooling of the results of extensive individual stu- dent research and activities and is aimed at giving the student an overview of all aspects of the insti- tution he or she will be leading. (These seminars open only to students who have been accepted to a doctoral program.) ED 3809 Doctoral Dissertation Prereq.: Admission to candidacy in the Doctor of Ed- ucation degree program. ED 3823 Workshop in Administration (See general workshop description on page 86.) ED 3827 Institute in Educational Administration (See general institute description on page 86.) Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies HSL 3500 Health Issues: Implications for Education An analysis of selected major health issues in health education. Emphasis is on the importance of current research findings to health education programs in a variety of settings. HSL 3501 School Health Education Curriculum A study of selected curricula for school health pro- grams, emphasizing the organization of curriculum components into an effective approach to health pro- motion and disease prevention in the school setting. An attempt is made to relate course activities to the needs of Massachusetts schools. HSL 3502 Educational Strategies in Health Education An analysis of contemporary educational techniques, concepts, and approaches of importance to the health educator in a school, community health agency, or medical setting, the use of educational diagnosis in determining appropriate educational strategies is emphasized as the major means of preventing health problems and improving health status. Health behavior models are presented as a basis for educational diagnosis. HSL 3503 Contemporary World Health A survey of the state of the world's health, the prog- ress which has been made in improving global health status, and the difficulties yet to be overcome. The importance of "partners in health," as opposed to the solitary research worker, in reaching the current health needs is emphasized. Study includes an ex- amination of the contributions of WHO, UNESCO, UNICEF, and FAO. HSL 3504 Environmental Health A review of the regional, national, and international status of the environment and its impact upon indi- vidual and community health. Major focus is on de- veloping an understanding of the etiology of envi- ronmental problems such as overpopulation, pollution of air and water, radiation exposure, noise, and waste disposal. HSL 3505 Consumer Health Analysis and evaluation of the concepts involved in the careful selection of health products and services. Areas for student exploration and study projects in- clude decision making relative to the selection of health products and services, evaluating advertising, quackery, and protection against useless or dan- gerous products through consumer organizations. HSL 3506 Nutrition A study of dietary nutrients and their influence on the health status of individuals at various stages of the life cycle. Prereq.: Anatomy and Physiology or permission of instructor HSL 3600 Administration of Physical Education and Athletics Physical education and athletics discussed as an entity consistent with the current emphasis on unity, economy, and equal opportunity. Modern practices and principles of general administration applied to problems of staffing, scheduling, budgeting, collec- tive bargaining, personnel welfare, program devel- opment, and public relations. All levels of education and the broad spectrum of programs common to physical education and athletics are considered. HSL 3605 Problems in Contemporary Athletics for Men and Women Current problems, practices, and national issues pertinent to the conduct of athletic competition. Na- tional, state, and conference organizations are studied. 78 / Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions HSL 3606 Applied Evaluation in Curriculum and Instruction Application of current educational evaluation theory to concepts of instruction and curriculum develop- ment in physical education. Includes formative and summative measures applied to the improvement of instruction, assessment of process and product in the educational program, interaction analysis. Prereq.: HSL 3501 or HSL 3644. HSL 3608 Advances in Instructbnal Concepts Current practices in, and a search for new ap- proaches to instruction in physical education. In- cludes analysis of teaching and learning styles, avail- able instructional technology and the implementa- tion of instructional designs in physical education classes. HSL 3609 Physical Education for Students with Special Needs Study of the movement problems and characteristics of special-needs populations. Assessment, planning, instruction, and evaluation practices recommended for work with special-needs students in physical ed- ucation classes. Prereq.: Adapted Physical Educatior) or permission of instructor HSL 3610 Management of Adapted Movement Performance Programs Analysis of legal, behavioral, and environmental con- cepts related to specialized physical education/mo- tor development programs and investigation of na- tional management systems. Prereq.: HSL 3609 or HSL 3442 or equivalent graduate course. HSL 3615 Anatomic Kinesiology A study of the human musculoskeletal system and its relationship to human movement patterns. Elec- tromyography is used in assessing muscle-move- ment relationships. Current electromyographic re- search and techniques are investigated. Prereq.: Kinesiology or permission of instructor HSL 3616 Mechanical Analysis of Sport Application of mechanics of motion to the analysis of human motion. Emphasis is placed on cinematog- raphy and film analysis procedures in teaching and research. Prereq.: HSL 3615 Anatomic Kinesiology or permission of instructor HSL 361 7 Physical Fitness Appraisal and Guidance Physical fitness screening tests and procedures, de- velopmental programs, fitness-producing activities, and current trends in testing and research. Prereq.: Exercise Physiology and tJleasurement and Evaluation or permission of instructor HSL 361 8 Exercise in Cardiovascular Health and Disease Acute and chronic effects of exercise upon the car- diovascular, respiratory, metabolic, and muscular systems. Principles of human performance assess- ment and exercise prescription applied to adults in exercise-based prevention, intervention, and post- coronary programs. Prereq.: Exercise Physiology or Advanced Physiology HSL 3619 Electrocardiography A study of basic and intermediate electrocardiog- raphy, including cardiac function, lead systems, rate, rhythm, axis, infarction, ischemia, hypertrophy, ef- fects of cardiovascular drugs, and purposes and principles of exercise testing. Prereq.: HSL 3618. HSL 3620 Laboratory in Exercise Testing and Prescription Practicum in graded exercise testing, including de- termination of EKG, blood pressure, pulmonary, and metabolic response to exercise; pulmonary function testing; assessment of body composition; and tests of muscular strength, endurance, and flexibility; pre- scription of exercise for persons in cardiopulmonary prevention, intervention, and rehabilitation programs. Students are expected to do fieldwork as exercise technicians and leaders in prevention and/or reha- bilitation programs. As part of the course require- ments, each student must conduct a laboratory proj- ect. Prereq.: HSL 3618 and HSL 3607 (HSL 3607 may be taken concurrently). HSL 3621 Advanced Cardiovascular Physiology A review of the current knowledge of cardiovascular function relating the physiology of the circulatory system in its normal, diseased, and stressed states. The interaction between the components of the sys- tem will be emphasized. Current research topics will be covered. Prereq.: HSL 3618 Exercise in Cardio- vascular Health and Disease. HSL 3622 Cardiovascular Pharmacodynamics in Exercise Physiology A study of the current medications used in the treat- ment of congestive heart failure, coronary artery dis- ease, arrhythmias, angina, and hypertension; the ef- fects of these medications during acute and chronic exercise; and cardiac emergency medications. Prereq.: HSL 3619 Electrocardiography and PTH 3500 Cardiopulmonary Pathophysiology HSL 3625 Trauma Assessment and Treatment in Sport An investigation of injury pathology evaluative test- ing, diagnosis, and appropriate treatment modalities. Prereq.: Undergraduate Athletic Training or experience. HSL 3626 Reconditioning in Sports Injury Rehabilitation procedures and techniques appropriate to the post-injury retraining of athletes. Prereq.: Adapted Physical Education or permission of instructor HSL 3630 Perceptual-Motor Development A survey of the development of movement control from birth to maturity. Changes in motor performance due to age, motor development expected at various stages, and the interrelations of such factors as grov\rth, social context, cultural expectation, motor abilities, and sequential changes in motor control are examined. HSL 3631 Movement and the Learning Process An examination of the scientific method as applied to the learning and performance of motor skills. The course surveys a range of theoretical positions and Health, Sport, and Leisure Studies / 79 includes laboratory experiences as well as the inter- pretation of motor-learning studies. Major variables affecting motor learning and performance are ex- amined from several theoretical standpoints. Prereq.: HSL 3630 Perceptual-Motor Deyelopment or permis- sion of instructor HSL 3632 Early Childhood Motor Patterns An examination of observational and experimental aspects of developmental motor learning. The se- quential development of motor skills and various fac- tors contributing to motor control development, as well as current issues in movement development, are studied. Prereq.: l-iSL 3631 Movement and ttie Learn- ing Process or permission of instructor HSL 3640 Comparative Physical Education Both past and present philosophies and practices of national and international programs in physical education are compared. Historical analysis is intro- duced as a research technique. HSL 3641 Philosophies in Physical Education and Sport An exploration of major philosophies, past and pres- ent, and their influence on modern physical edu- cation and sport. Students are expected to delineate their personal philosophies, explore philosophical analysis as a research technique, and review phil- osophical research. Prereq.: Philosoptiy, Piiilosopliy of Education, or permission of instructor HSL 3642 Sociobgy of Sport An analysis of the sociological principles and factors operative in the interaction between sport and so- ciety. Pertinent literature and research are reviewed. Topics of discussion include the pervasiveness of sport, social stratification, politics, economics, sport and the mass media, race, women, violence, com- petition, deviance, subcultures, and sport in the fu- ture. Prereq.: General Psychology or permission of instructor HSL 3643 Psychology of Coaching and Sport The psychodynamics of the athlete and the coach, with particular reference to personality, maturation, motivation, learning, emotions, and perception. Indi- vidualized projects are required. Prereq.: General Psychology or permission of instructor HSL 3650 Planning and Developing Facilities for Physical Education and Recreation The principles, terminology, and standards for plan- ning, constructing, and using indoor and outdoor facilities for physical education and recreation. In- tegrated planning among all municipal departments is stressed. HSL 3651 Supervision of Professional Personnel Study of ways of effectively matching the needs of individuals with those of the organization. Emphasis on leadership, conflict resolution, and evaluation from an organizational development perspective. HSL 3652 Critical Thinking and Evaluation in Physical Education and Recreation and Leisure Studies Investigation of the acquisition of knowledge in two disciplines. Examination includes evaluating knowl- edge and practice through experiences in decision making, logical analysis, and critical thinking. HSL 3653 Legal issues in Recreation (3 Q.H.) and Sport Analysis of recreation and sport from legal, social, and economic standpoints. Emphasis on the impact of law and legal principles on recreation and sport. HSL 3655 Facilities and Operations (3 Q.H.) Management Study of the day-to-day work required of operating managers in selected leisure industry settings. Par- ticular emphasis is placed on how computer tech- nology and human relations can best be used to carry out the operations of an organization. HSL 3894 Independent Study Under the guidance and direction of a program ad- viser, students have the opportunity to develop and conduct projects related to their professional inter- ests. Prereq.: written proposal and permission of pro- gram adviser HSL 3898, 3899 Seminar/Workshop Special seminars or workshops in physical education on topics of timely interest. Graduate credit may be granted for successful completion of a workshop, but credit may not be applied toward a degree pro- gram without the program adviser's approval. A max- imum of eight quarter hours earned in seminars or workshops may be applied toward the degree. HSL 3822, 3823 Seminar/Workshop Special seminars or workshops in recreation and leisure studies on topics of timely interest. Graduate credit may be granted for successful completion of a workshop, but credit may not be applied toward a degree program without the program adviser's ap- proval. A maximum of eight quarter hours earned in seminars or workshops may be applied toward the degree. HSL 3410 Contemporary Theories of Recreation and Sport Historical and philosophical perspectives of recre- ation, sport, and leisure. Special emphasis on change over time and its implications for the leisure industry. HSL 341 1 Program Evaluation in Recreation and Leisure Services Focuses on comprehensive systems for evaluating program effectiveness as they relate to the consumer of recreation and leisure services. Major emphasis is placed on developing an evaluation system for an agency of the student's choice. Case studies are drawn from the public, nonprofit, and commercial sectors. Required of all students in Recreation and Leisure Studies. 80 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions HSL 3412 Seminar in Contemporary Issues and Problems in Recreation and Leisure Services Discussion of national and international issues, cur- rent trends, and contemporary problems as they af- fect recreation services. Required of all students in Recreation and Leisure Studies. Prereq.: HSL 3410. HSL 3420 Grantsmanship A seminar in which the student has the opportunity to develop a grant proposal for submission to a funding source chosen by the student. Government and foundation grant programs are explored. HSL 3421 Budget Analysis Capital and operating budgets are analyzed using such techniques as cost-effectiveness and benefit- cost analysis, forecasting, and present value analy- sis. The concepts of depreciation, direct and indirect costs, and service volume are studied as they relate to pricing decisions. Focus is on improving manage- ment decisions. HSL 3422 Administration of Resident Camp Programs An in-depth study of staffing, sanitation, and health; purchasing and storage of food, materials, equip- ment, and supplies; kitchen management; insurance, construction, and maintenance of buildings; and pro- gram areas as they affect resident camping pro- grams. A study of nationwide goals and trends in the camping movement is included. HSL 3423 Advanced Organization and Administration of Recreation and Leisure Services Patterns for the implementation of recreation and leisure services by school systems, voluntary agen- cies, national service organizations, municipal gov- ernments, and state and federal agencies investi- gated in depth. HSL 3424 Programs in Recreation and Leisure Services An examination and evaluation of program content, leadership, administration, and facilities in recreation and leisure services sponsored under public, pri- vate, religious, industrial, and voluntary auspices. HSL 3425 Public Relations for Recreation and Leisure Service Agencies The central purpose of public relations is to influ- ence public opinion. This course focuses on prac- tical and ethical aspects of public relations for rec- reation and leisure service agencies. Case studies are drawn from the public, nonprofit, and commercial sectors. HSL 3426 Politics and Bureaucracy in Recreation and Leisure Services Practical problems faced by recreation professionals in public service are investigated. Students study relationships between elected officials, bureaucrats, peers, subordinates, and supervisors in state and local governments. HSL 3427 Recreation and the Community School: Concepts and Practices The role of recreation studies as an integral part of programming for the community school. An analysis of the community school concept with regard to philosophy, physical plant requirements, personnel, finance, and community involvement. HSL 3428 Leisure and Delinquent Behavior Recreation studied as an intervention strategy to prevent and rehabilitate delinquent behavior. HSL 3441 Seminar on Programming in Therapeutic Recreation An overview of systems analysis and design tech- niques and their application. Emphasis is on thera- peutic recreation planning at the administrative level. Prereq.: An undergraduate program planning course in therapeutic recreation. HSL 3442 Therapeutic Recreation Services for Individuals with Disabilities An introduction to the nature and scope of thera- peutic recreation, including a review of its history and recent advances in professionalization. The role of service delivery in various settings and the major issues confronting this professional specialization are examined. HSL 3443 Observations of Therapeutic Recreation in Treatment Settings Guided observation sessions under professional su- pervision in various clinical settings. Group seminars are held to familiarize students as to the role of the rehabilitation team. Prereq.: HSL 3442 or permission of the instructor HSL 3450 European Mountaineering An intense six-day course that covers the basic skills of technical climbing. The course is conducted by the International School of Mountaineering. English- speaking guides extend all students to the utmost of their abilities in various climbing situations: free climbing;, ice climbing near Chamonix, France; arti- ficial climbing; or mountain rescue. Climbing is done in a voluntary, relaxed manner with the purpose of learning to enjoy the mountains creatively and safely. HSL 3451 European Backpacking and Orienteering A practical course in the basics of safe mountain living and travel on foot. Subjects covered include group leadership, fauna and flora of the Alpine en- vironment, mountain geology, mountain first aid, and orienteering. Students have the opportunity to par- ticipate in several day hikes in the vicinity of Leysin, where scenic walking paths abound, and two ex- tended back-packing trips in contrasting areas of Switzerland. The European style of back-packing dif- fers greatly from the traditional American practice of tenting, employing Alpine huts and refuges. HSL 3452 Comparative European Recreation A presentation of recreation, European-style. Guest lecturers, movies, group discussion, and field trips Physical Therapy / 81 help to present the Western European approach to recreation and sport. The critical contemporary is- sues of facility construction, program structure and development, government support, and treatment of special populations are viewed through the European perspective and compared to the American scene. Among the topics included are recreation and tour- ism in a mountain society, the European club system, Swiss park construction, therapeutic recreation in Switzerland, mountain rescue, and tourism as a part of recreation. The outstanding recreation facilities of Geneva are visited during the course. A written test and paper are required. HSL 3820 Practicum in Clinical Recreation A minimum of seventy-five clock hours of supervised professional experience, required of those students who do not have a degree in Recreation and Leisure Studies or sufficient professional work experience. Students are assigned as interns to agencies or institutions that offer services in the area of thera- peutic recreation and rehabilitation, community and municipal recreation, or commercial recreation. Credit not applicable toward degree. Physical Therapy (2 Q.H.) PTH 3510 Cardiac Rehabilitation Programs Phases I and II Survey of various cardiac rehabilitation programs, their objectives, relevant medical considerations, indications, and contraindications. Topics for exami- nation include referrals, organizational structure, pro- posal writing, liabilities, and insurance plans available for these two phases of rehabilitation. Prereq.: PTH 3560 or permission of instructor. PTH 3515 Pulmonary Rehabilitation Programs (2 Q.H.) Theory and practice of pulmonary therapy. Analysis of treatment procedures utilized with medical and surgical respiratory patients. Prereq.: PTH 3560 or permission of instructor PTH 3500 Cardiopulmonary Pathophysiology Lecture and laboratory study of anatomy, physiology, and pathophysiology for the cardiac and pulmonary systems as applied to the dysfunction and rehabili- tation of the cardiopulmonary patient. Prereq.: HSL 3618. PTH 3505 Cardiopulmonary Diagnostic Techniques An overview of the various noninvasive and invasive techniques for diagnostic purposes, including ex- amination of these techniques as guidelines useful in determining the extent of cardiopulmonary dam- age, work capacity, and residual function. Tech- niques studied include electrocardiography, systolic time intervals, pulmonary function, laboratory test findings, and gas analysis. Prereq.: PTH 3560, HSL 3618, or permission of instructor PTH 3527 Medical and Surgical Conditions of Cardiac and Pulmonary Patients This course is designed to examine current medical and surgical treatment of cardiac and pulmonary anomalies and dysfunction. The acute and chronic disorders which cause these dysfunctions, as well as their etiologies, symptomatology, and treatment will be investigated. The techniques of various sur- gical procedures will be identified as well as the preoperative, intraoperative, and postoperative man- agement of the patient. The role of the physical therapist will also be extensively investigated. Prereq.: h/linimum of one year in cardiopulmonary tlierapy, PTH 3560 Practicum in Physical Ttierapy I, or permission of instructor PTH 3530 Basic Applied Neuroanatomy Study of the human nervous system from a functional perspective, including analysis of components of the nervous system as they related to common clinical problems. Emphasis is placed upon the therapist's role in recognizing and treating these problems. Prereq.: Gross Human Anatomy or permission of instructor PTH 3535 Advanced Functional Neuroanatomy Anatomy of the nervous system is studied from a functional perspective. The course focuses on the role of the cortex, basal ganglia, thalamus, and cer- ebellum in regulation of tone control, sensation, and posture. Current and classic literature will be used. Prereq.: PTH 3530 Basic Applied Neuroanatomy. PTH 3540 Advanced Topics in Neurodevelopment Examination and interpretation of both classic and current nonhuman and human research studies. Seminar format. Prereq.: One year of clinical experi- ence in neurology or PTH 3560 Practicum in Physical Therapy I or permission of instructor PTH 3545 Neuromuscular Physiology Classic concepts of normal muscle and nerve struc- ture and function. Clinical impacts of disease and injury on neuromuscular morphology and physiology are emphasized where appropriate. The course also gives the student the opportunity to become familiar with current theory that may be relevant to evaluation and management courses offered in the program. PTH 3550 Evaluation of the Neurologically Impaired Adult The course provides a framework for analyzing motor dysfunction, based on the fundamental properties underlying movement disorders. This framework is then used to critique current evaluations of neuro- logic disabilities and to develop a rationale for a logical and comprehensive evaluation of the neuro- logically impaired adult. Prereq.: PTH 3560 Practicum in Physical Therapy I or equivalent or permission of instructor. 82 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions PTH 3555 Treatment of the Neurologically Impaired Adult Treatment of the neurologically impaired adult is dis- cussed from a historical perspective and from cur- rent neurological and neurophysiologic knowledge. Current techniques are critiqued from a clinical and theoretical point of view. Topics include specific treatment techniques as well as specific neurologic disabilities. Prereq.: One year clinical experience in physical therapy with background in treatment of neu- rologic patient and PTH 3550. PTH 3560 Practicum in Physical Therapy I Practicum in supervised clinical practice within the specified specialty area. Students are expected to complete 240 hours of clinical experience in a health- care setting. Required as a prerequisite in selected courses for those students who do not have a mini- mum of one year of clinical experience at the time of registration for these courses. PTH 3570 Evaluation of the Neurologically Impaired Infant and Child Clinical test and measurement background infor- mation applied to advanced assessment and treat- ment approach for the pediatric neurological patient classically seen by the clinical specialist in neuro- logical physical therapy. Prereq.: PTH 3540 Advanced Topics in Neurodevelopment. PTH 3575 Treatment of the Neurologically Impaired Infant and Child Advanced treatments for the pediatric patient with neurological disorders are discussed and demon- strated. Experimental learning for clinical practice is included. Prereq.: PTH 3570 Evaluation of the Neu- rologically Impaired Infant and Child. PTH 3800 Independent Study Under the guidance and direction of a program ad- viser, students have the opportunity to develop and conduct projects related to their professional inter- ests. Prereq.: Written proposal and permission of pro- gram adviser Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology SLA 3600 Neurological Bases of Communication This course will provide the student the opportunity to acquire a basic understanding of neuroanatomy and neurophysiology as they relate to normal as- pects of spjeech, hearing, and language. SLA 3601 Advanced Study in Articulation Disorders An exploration into advanced theories of normal and abnormal phonological development with emphasis on distinctive theory and on phonetic theories of speech production; direct application of theories to diagnosis and treatment of various phonological dis- orders. Prereq.: Undergraduate course in articulation disorders and permission of instructor SLA 3602 Differential Diagnosis in Speech and Language Pathology This course is designed to offer students the op- portunity to learn formal and informal test proce- dures. Prereq.: SLA 3603 Test Procedures in Speech and Language or permission of instructor SLA 3603 Test Procedures in Speech and Language Pathology The course is designed to offer students the oppor- tunity to develop competence in administering and interpreting a variety of tests used in diagnosing communication disorders. Information relative to the case history and interview, as well as to formal test procedures and report writing, will be included. Prereq.: Permission of instructor SLA 3604 Language Disturbances in Children This course will emphasize current theories in lan- guage behavior and their practical application to the assessment and remediation of language disturb- ances in children. Lectures, discussions, and case presentations may focus on the following issues: what constitutes a language problem, what assessment tools and therapeutic techniques are currently avail- able, and what underlying principles are involved in selecting and organizing the content of a remediation program. Prereq.: SLA 3602 Differential Diagnosis in Speech and Language Pathology, SLA 3603 Test Pro- cedures in Speech^ and Language Pathology, or per- mission of instructor SLA 3605 Aphasia Rehabilitation Emphasis on current attitudes toward therapy and new methods, clinical methods of evaluation which are preparatory to therapy, and observation of ther- apeutic methods. Prereq.: SLA 3600 Neurological Bases of Communication and permission of instructor SLA 3606 Clinical Management in Stuttering This course will emphasize diagnostic techniques, a review of the current therapeutic approaches, con- sideration of the individual's need in therapy, and the process of behavioral and attitudinal change from within a psychodynamic framework. Also to be con- sidered are termination, referral, and group therapy. Prereq.: Permission of instructor SLA 3607 Seminar: Speech Science Study focuses on current physiological, acoustical, and perceptual data used to describe both normal and disordered speaking populations. Research techniques and instrumentation in the field of speech science are also examined. The application of the- oretical information from speech science to the di- agnosis and treatment of communicative disorders is discussed. Prereq.: SLA 3875 and SLA 3876 Ad- vanced Clinical Practice I and IL Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology / 83 SLA 3608 Seminar: Voice Disorders Etiology, symptomatology, and disorder complexes related to phonation. Special emphasis is placed on the philosophy and methods used in the assessment and treatment of voice disorders. Prereq.: SLA 3602 Differential Diagnosis in Speech and Language Pa- thology and SLA 3603, Test Procedures in Speech and Language Pathology. SLA 3610 Audiology for Speech-Language Pathologists This course provides speech-language pathology majors a review of standard procedures and an up- date of contemporary issues in audiology. Study fo- cuses on pathological disruption of the auditory sys- tem and on assessment procedures currently applied and their relationship to patient management and treatment plans. SLA 3620 Clinical Audiometry I The use of pure tone and spjeech reception instru- mentation in hearing evaluation; the interpretation of results in the diagnosis of functional and organic disorders. Lectures, demonstrations, observations, and practicum. Prereq.: Introduction to Audiology and consent of instructor SLA 3621 Medical Perspective to Anatomical Correlates in Audiology This course provides the student with the opportunity for hands-on experience with dissection of human temporal bones as an approach to learning temporal bone anatomy; physiology and neurology are stressed. Students may become familiar with dissec- tion techniques, use of dissecting microscope, and will be required to observe actual surgical proce- dures in a hospital. Prereq.: Permission of department chairperson. SLA 3622 Pathologies of the Ear Lectures and observations in the organic and neu- rological pathologies of the ear, e.g., otitis media, Meniere's disease, and otosclerosis. Consideration of approaches to treatment (medical setting). Prep.: Permission of instructor SLA 3623 Clinical Audiometry 11 Specialized techniques (Bekesy, EEG, site of lesion battery, BSR, ENG); the results and interpretation in the diagnosis of functional and organic hearing dis- orders. Lectures, demonstrations, and observations. Prereq.: Introduction to Audiology and Audiometry I and permission of instructor SLA 3624 Clinical Audiology Physical characteristics of hearing aids and their performance. Theoretical approach to selection and fitting of hearing aids, and analysis of hearing aid dispensing systems. Prereq.: Introduction to Audiol- ogy and permission of instructor SLA 3625 Psychosocial Aspects of Communication Disorders This course is concerned with the psychological, educational, and social aspects of communication disorders, particularly auditory impairment. Prereq.: Permission of instructor SLA 3626 Seminar in Audiology Advanced study of the development of principles and theories associated with modern procedures and methods used in audiology. Prereq.: Permissbn of instructor SLA 3628 Psychoacoustics This course offers the student the opportunity to explore the relationship between acoustic stimuli and psychological responses to sounds. Particular em- phasis is placed on the similarities and differences in the perception of normal hearing and among dif- ferent types of impaired hearing. Major topics of study include a general review of the physics of sound, detection, discrimination, masking, binaural hearing, and speech perception. Prereq.: Permission of instructor SLA 3629 Aural Rehabilitation Various speechreading methods, auditory training techniques, and materials. An integrated approach to the treatment of the hearing handicapped. SLA 3640 Cerebral Palsy Neuromuscular involvements and concomitant lan- guage and speech disorders; intellectual deficits, psychological aspects, communicative disorders of a cerebral palsied population; testing, placement, and management of the cerebral palsied child with emphasis on a multidisciplinary approach. Prereq.: Permission of instructor SLA 3641 Physiological Acoustics Particular emphasis is placed on the biophysics of the hearing mechanism, especially in terms of actual clinical utility. Comparative anatomy and physiologi- cal analysis are stressed. Prereq.: Introductory courses in Speech and Hearing, and permission of instructor SLA 3642 Seminar: Orofacial Anomalies Etiology, symptomatology, and problems associated with orofacial anomalies. Emphasis will be placed on the speech, language, and hearing characteristics and the assessment and treatment of persons with orofacial anomalies. Psychological and social con- siderations and analysis of the team habilitative effort will be presented. SLA 3643 Seminar in Speech Pathology Individual research and/or critical review of the lit- erature in some area of basic science, speech sound learning, language, voice, fluency, or multiple dis- orders, with special emphasis on the impact of deaf- ness on psychosocial development. Class presenta- tion of material and class discussion may be included. Prereq.: Open to graduate students who have com- pleted the equivalent of two quarters of graduate work in Speech Pathology and have the instructor's permission. SLA 3645 Neuropathology Application of functional neuroanatomy in compre- hending the various disease processes involving the nervous system; cerebrovascular disease tumors or malformations, Parkinson's disease, multiple scle- rosis, and others. Prereq.: Permission of instructor 84 / Boston-Bouve College of Human Development Professions SLA 3647 Hearing Science Seminar Individual research and/or critical review of the lit- erature in the area of bone conduction of auditory signals, evoked response and audiometry, imped- ance and audiometry, cortical processing of auditory input, and other related topics. Students w^ill be re- sponsible for class presentations of researched ma- terial. Prereq.: Permission of instructor. SLA 3650 Medical Perspective to Anatomical Correlates in Speech Pathology This course vj\\\ provide the opportunity for hands- on experience with dissection of human larynxes as an approach to learning voice tract anatomy. Stu- dents may become familiar with dissection tech- niques, use of dissecting microscope, and may have an opportunity to observe actual surgical proce- dures in a hospital. Prereq.: Permission of department chairperson. SLA 3651 Social Dialectology: Theoretical and Educational This course focuses on the social and cultural influ- ences on the language behavior and communication needs of the culturally "different" child. It emphasizes the interrelationship between linguistic structure and social structure and its implications for clinical in- tervention. Prereq.: Permission of instructor SLA 3652 Behavior Modification: Operant Procedures in Speech and Language Training This course reviews principles and procedures of the functional analysis of behavior and focuses upon the application of behavioral theory and research to speech, language, and hearing training. It empha- sizes clinical investigation in the experimental anal- ysis of behavior of communication disorders and experiences in the application of experimental pro- cedures in assessment and treatment programs. Prereq.: Permission of instructor SLA 3653 Seminar: Communication Disorders This course provides an exploration into the devel- opment of communication and communication dis- orders, with focus on early conversational interac- tion, children's discourse, and pragmatic intents. Emphasis is placed on deficient social bases and their effect on language performance as well as trends for clinical procedures and intervention strat- egies for language-disordered children. Communi- cation is viewed as the ultimate goal of therapy. Course participants are expected to complete a re- search project on the development of communication and child discourse and its application to clinical assessment and intervention. SLA 3690 Seminar in Normal Language Acquisition This seminar will assess current theories and de- signs of studies of language acquisition and proc- essing from infancy through adolescence. Special problems in data collection and analysis in the var- ious areas of child language will be discussed through lectures, student presentations, and discus- sions of current research. Methodology, data, and results of current research and their significance to theories of language acquisition will be critiqued using video-taped and audio-taped data samples. Each student will be expected to write a research proposal to investigate a specific topic in language acquisition. SLA 3691 Sociolinguistics This course will consist of basic sociolinguistic con- cepts including dialectal variation and other forms of language variation, attitudes toward language use and the speech community; language needs of mul- ticultural children in educational settings, consider- ing cultural attitudes of teachers and types of learn- ing situations available; and social and cultural diversity and its effects on the individual's commu- nicative competence. Also included will be methods of sociolinguistic research that will lead to the stu- dent designing a language study for application in: discourse analysis; language in the classroom; so- ciolinguistic effects on reading, writing, oral lan- guage, and role relationships. SLA 3698 Workshop in Speech Pathology and Audiology (See general workshop description on page 86.) SLA 3699 Institute in Speech Pathology and Audiology (See general institute description on page 86.) SLA 3800 Directed Study This experience is provided for the student whose unique academic needs or interests cannot be ad- equately satisfied in any of the scheduled courses of the department. Not available to special students. Prereq.: Approval of tfie cfiairperson of tfie department and of the director of the graduate school. (Approval forms must be submitted during the quarter prior to registration of the Directed Study.) SLA 3801 Thesis A research activity that may be selected by the student in lieu of two courses (8 quarter hours), with the approval and recommendation of the adviser. SLA 3875 Advanced Clinical Practice I (2 Q.H.) A two-quarter sequence of supervised clinical ex- perience in speech pathology and audiology de- signed for beginning graduate students. Practicum sites include the Northeastern University Hearing, Language, and Speech Clinic; satellite clinics; and/ or educational settings. Students must be available a minimum of two days per week during the aca- demic year. This course also requires attendance at on-campus seminar meetings held twice a month. Prereq.: Permission of clinical staff. SLA 3876 Advanced Cliiical Practice II (3 Q.H.) A two-quarter sequence of supervised clinical prac- ticum in speech pathology and audiology at the Northeastern University Hearing, Language, and Interdepartmental Courses / 85 Speech Clinic; medical settings; educational set- tings; and rehabilitation centers. Practicum experi- ence emphasizes advanced diagnostic and manage- ment techniques stressing the application of theory to practice. Students must be available a minimum of two days per week during the academic year. Prereq.: SLA 3875 Advanced Clinical Practice I and permission of clinical staff. SLA 3877 Advanced Clinical Practice ill (3 Q.H.) A two-quarter sequence of supervised clinical prac- ticum in speech pathology and audiology designed for advanced graduate students. Practicum experi- ence emphasizes problem-solving techniques rele- vant to case management. Students must be avail- able a minimum of two days per week during the academic year. Prereq.: SLA 3876 Advanced Clinical Practice II and permission of clinical staff. Interdepartmental Courses _ INT 3500 Research Design and Methodology Research methods and designs used in health ed- ucation, physical education, physical therapy and recreation education. Emphasis is placed on the de- velopment of research techniques, including the ability to define research problems; write hypotheses; review and interpret literature; apply research designs; organize, analyze, and present data; and draw rele- vant conclusions. Prereq.: Statistics or permission of instructor INT 3540 Computer Applications for Nonprofit Organizations An introductory course which presents ways in which generic software packages (database management, spreadsheets, business graphics, and word proc- essing) may be used to improve efficiency and ef- fectiveness of individuals and organizations. Hard- ware and software configurations are discussed. INT 3549 Introduction to Computer Programming: FORTRAN A laboratory course designed to develop facility in the use of a wide range of data-processing equip- ment in educational research. Students will be intro- duced to the basic principles of computer program- ming, but emphasis will be placed on the applicability and use of existing statistical programs. INT 3550 Instruction in LOGO Philosophy and programming in the LOGO language form the primary emphases. Curriculum materials are demonstrated showing the use of the LOGO language in areas such as computer programming, mathematics, and language arts. Current research and applications of LOGO in the school curriculum are presented. Creation of individual LOGO projects in laboratory settings are required. INT 3551 Instructional Programming in PASCAL An introduction to computers and computer pro- gramming using the language PASCAL. Tools such as text editors are also discussed. Instructional ap- plications are made where possible. INT 3552 Computer Use for Educators (2 Q.H.) Designed for educators with minimal computer ex- perience, this course provides an introduction to word processing, data processing and file manage- ment. Functions of the operating system and the physical hardware are discussed. The BASIC pro- gramming language will be introduced. Students will have extensive hands-on experience in class and through accompanying supervised laboratories. INT 3553 Word Processing for (2 Q.H.) Educators A variety of word processing software programs are taught. Applications of word processing ranging from simple one-page letters to documents and mail- merge are considered in this course. Students will have extensive hands-on experience with computers in class and through accompanying supervised laboratories. INT 3554 Computers in Education This course will focus on the use of computers both as a teaching methodology and as an administrative tool in education. The use of Computer Assisted Instruction (CAI) will be introduced through the BASIC programming language. A variety of microcomputer software packages suitable for classroom and ad- ministrative use will be tested in a laboratory setting. Extensive hands-on experience with a number of commercially available educational software pack- ages is required. Strategies and methods for inte- grating computing within the elementary and sec- ondary curriculum are highlighted. INT 3555 Introduction to Computer Use for Professionals Introduction to computer capabilities and limitations; selection of hardware/software; use of a line editor; introduction to system command language; and in- troduction to data processing through a packaged library program such as SPSS, BDMP, MINITAB or IMSL Boston-Bouv6 College of Human Development Professions INT 3556 Educational Applications of DBMS Several general purpose softw^are packages (data- base, spreadsheet, and data analysis) and simula- tions are used for working through such problems as scheduling/facilities usage, recordkeeping and general ledger/accounting, and survey/market research. INT 3557 Instruction in LOGO II This course represents a second course in the LOGO environment, emphasizing advanced concepts in LOGO, including the use of list-processing in lan- guage, music, physics, and mathematics. Prereq.: INT 3550. INT 3501 Thesis/Project I Initiation of a scholarly investigation. Students are required to submit a v\/ritten research proposal for approval by a thesis/project committee and to pres- ent an oral proposal at a college seminar. Prereq.: ED 3340, INT 3500, completion of two courses in area of concentration, and permission of program adviser INT 3502 Thesis/Project II The investigation proposed in Thesis/Project I im- plemented w/ith, and culminating in, an approved written report in thesis form. Prereq.: INT 3501 The- sisProject I. INT 3503, 3504 Seminar/Workshop Special seminars or workshops on interdepartmental topics of timely interest. Graduate credit may be granted for successful completion of a workshop, but credit may not be applied toward a degree pro- gram without the program adviser's approval. A max- imum of eight quarter hours earned in seminars or workshops may be applied toward the degree. Institutes ED 3828, ED 3825, ED 3826, ED 3827, CRS 3803, SLA 3699, CRS 3805, CRS 3804, HSL 3898, HSL 3822, PTH 3801 A department may offer a special institute in a spe- cific field of interest from time to time. The institute may be collaborative, offered by the several depart- ments in the Boston-Bouve College of Human De- velopment Professions, and will usually include a special institute faculty drawn from resources out- side the University, as well as from the Boston-Bouv6 faculty. The institute focuses on a specific area of academic study and may be interdisciplinary in na- ture; it involves total time commitments on the part of participants in morning, afternoon, and evening sessions, five or six days per week, for one to eight weeks, depending upon the nature and scope of the institute. Institutes are customarily designed for par- ticipants who are currently employed in a common field of work and wish to receive additional prepa- ration in new methods, new materials, and new con- tent areas. Graduate credit may be granted for suc- cessful completion of an institute but may not be applied toward a degree program at the University without the approval of the departments in which students are doing their major field of specialization degree work. All institute participants must be de- gree candidates in the graduate school or must qualify, prior to registration, as special graduate stu- dents. Prereq.: Permission of institute instructor Workshops ED 3820, ED 3821, ED 3822, ED 3823, CRS 3806, SLA 3698, CRS 3808, CRS 3807, HSL 3899, HSL 3823, PTH 3802 A department may offer a special workshop in a specific field of interest from time to time. Emphasis in the workshop is focused on the development of instructional materials or the resolution of practical problems with a single school or institutional setting. Workshops may also be held for a group of potential participants who are currently employed in a com- mon field of work. Graduate credit may be granted for successful completion of a workshop but may not be applied toward a degree program at the Uni- versity without the approval of the departments in which students are doing their major field of spe- cialization degree work. All workshop participants must be degree candidates in the graduate school or must qualify, prior to registration, as special grad- uate students. Prereq.: Permission of wori^shop instructor. Professional Accounting 88 / Professional Accounting Graduate School of Professional Accounting ACC 3401 Accounting Problems I 5 Q.H. An accelerated introduction to the basic accounting process and the preparation of general-purpose fi- nancial statement. Specific topics covered include cash, investment, receivables, inventories, current li- abilities, and present value concepts. Completion of a self-instructed, programmed text on the basic ac- counting concepts. ACC 3402 Cost Accounting Theory and Problems 5 Q.H. Specialized problems of cost accumulation and cost behavior are analyzed. Specific topics covered in- clude: cost-volume-profit analysis, standard costs and budgeting, overhead analysis, and capital budg- eting. Costs involved in managerial decision-making are given special attention. ACC 3404 Accounting Problems II 5 Q.H. A continuation of ACC 3401 including coverage of the following topics: plant, property and equipment, depreciation, long-term liabilities, stockholders, eq- uity, earnings per share, and accounting for income taxes. ACC 3405 Accounting Problems III 3 Q.H. An examination of specialized accounting topics in- cluding pensions, leases, accounting changes, state- ment of changes in financial position, partnerships, and government accounting. ACC 3406 Advanced Accounting Problems 3 Q.H. An examination of business combinations including the purchase and pooling methods. Specific topics covered include: intercompany profits, indirect and reciprocal holdings, and foreign currency translations. ACC 3407 Auditing Theory and Practice 5 Q.H. An examination of auditing concepts, standards, and procedures. Topics covered include: the legal and ethical responsibilities of the auditor, statistical sam- pling, auditing and EDP, audit reports, and audit procedures. Emphasis is given to concepts and to understanding the nature and objectives of the audit process. ACC 3408 Federal Income Tax Accounting 6 Q.H. A comprehensive study of the Internal Revenue Code, regulations, revenue rulings, and relevant cases. Em- phasis is placed on taxation of individuals, corpo- rations, partnerships, estates and trusts, tax-plan- ning considerations, and tax research. ACC 341 3 Contemporary Accounting 5 Q.H. Theory An examination of current issues and trends in ac- counting that are of greatest concern to the accounting profession. The concepts and developments of the accounting profession. The concepts and develop- ments of the theoretical aspects of accounting are explored. Authoritative pronouncements of various accounting organizations are examined. FIN 3414 Management of Financial 5 Q.H. Resources The financial management of corporations and the principles governing the effective management of capital. The various sources of funds— short-, inter- mediate-, and long-term— are discussed in detail, us- ing selected cases for illustrative purposes. Rnancial institutions such as the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), and the securities markets are also studied. HRM 3403 Organizational Behavior 5 Q.H. An examination of behavior in business organiza- tions. Hov^rever, this knowledge is also applicable to nonprofit organizations such as schools, government agencies, and hospitals, including community groups, and social clubs. Students are given an opportunity to acquire knowledge of behavior and develop skill in dealing with it, and as they hope to affect and change it. MEC 3412 Managerial Economics 5 Q.H. Quantitative Approach) Decision-making under conditions of uncertainty: allocation of scarce resources, utilizing linear pro- gramming models, determination of the value of a marginal unit of a scarce resource (concept of shadow price), sensitivity analysis, examination of the most frequently encountered sampling distributions, deter- mination of optimal decision rules, and economic models for estimating demand-and-cost relationship. MGT 3415 Business Law 5 Q.H. Contracts, partnerships, corporations, agency, com- mercial paper, sales, and other topics essential for professional development in the business and legal environment. MGT 341 6 Business Policy in a Societal 5 Q.H. Setting Cases focus on business decisions confronting man- agement. Examines policy decisions and their impact on various sectors of society, such as stockholders, customers, suppliers, the public and government. MKT 341 0 Marketing 5 Q.H. Introdution to managing the marketing activities of an organization. Examination of the basic marketing management systems: marketing research, the mar- keting organizational system, and the marketing plan- ning and control system. Topics include customer/ client analysis, market research, product/service planning, pricing, communications, advertising and sales promotion, distribution management, and the development of strategies. Course relies mainly on case study discussions of actual marketing decisions, supplemented by lectures and readings. MSC 3409 Operations Management 4 Q.H. An introductory, graduate-level course emphasizing the organization and management of productive sys- Professional Accounting / 89 tems. The goal is to provide an introduction to the nature and types of organizations and management techniques used to control operations. The three major types of productive systems, which are flow, job, and project, are offered, focusing on standards, capacity, scheduling, inventory, and control. MSC 341 1 Information Systems 4 Q.H. A nontechnical introduction to computers and infor- mation systems, focusing on issues relevant to audit and control. The first portion of the course delves into basic computer .and information-systems con- cepts, including computer hardware, software, and systems development. Following this aspect, empha- sis is placed on managing, planning, and controlling the computer resource, security and privacy issues, and computer auditing. Students will be expected to have become familiar with elementary computer pro- gramming and the use of Northeastern's time-shar- ing terminals. MSC 3420 Computer Programming: An Introduction 0 Q.H. The information systems course (MSC 341 1), sched- uled for the spring quarter, presumes that students will have acquired an understanding of the art of computer programming, which uses the language referred to as BASIC. This noncredit course is de- signed to provide the necessary background for stu- dents having inadequate preparation. Offered on a pass-fail basis, the course may be waived by per- mission of the instructor. Computer Science 92 / Computer Science Graduate School of Computer Science COM 3200 Computer Architecture 4 Q.H. Organization of machines and computations. Com- puter System capacity. Processors. Control units. Memories and memory hierarchies. Interconnection networks. Different computer architectures are stud- ied by examining the corresponding languages and assemblers. COM 3205 Software Design and 4 Q.H. Development Students work in groups to organize, manage and implement a large scale programming project. Topics considered are: software planning; software metho- dologies, e.g., functional decomposition, data flow design, data structure design, programming calcu- lus; several large examples of program design; soft- ware testing and reliability. Prereq.: COM 1201 or equivalent. COM 3315 Database Management 4 Q.H. Systems i Concepts and structures necessary to design and implement a DBMS application. Introduction to da- tabase concepts. Database modeling. Hierarchical, network and relational models. Data definition and manipulation languages. Design theory for relational models. Query optimization. Integrity, security, re- covery and concurrency in database systems. Prereq.: MTH 3510, COM 1310. COM 1315 or equivalent. COM 3316 Database Management 4 Q.H. Systems II Specification, design and implementation of a simple DMBS. Practical database design issues and meth- odology. Discussion of conceptual implementation and physical design. Techniques to evaluate design alternatives and tradeoffs. Analysis of primary and secondary access methods for performance of da- tabase operations and for storage space. Prereq.: COM 3315. COM 3336 Operating Systems 4 Q.H. Design and implementation of an operating system. Algorithms for concurrent processes, deadlock res- olution, process management, performance evalua- tion and monitoring. Students work on a project im- plementing a small operating system or extending an existing one. Prereq.: An undergraduate operating systems or systems programming course. COM 3350 Ttieory of Computation 4 Q.H. Formal models of computation including Turing ma- chines and partial recursive functions; Turing-decid- ability and unsolvable problems. Computational complexity, the class P and NP, some NP-complete problems. Prereq.: COM 1350 or equivalent. COM 3355 Compiler Construction I 4 Q.H. Advanced concepts and principles of compiler de- sign including an overview of compiler structures. Topics also cover: syntax-directed compilation, translation and interpretation, the relation betweeri syntax and semantics, the relation between high level programming languages and compilers, between fi- nite state machines and lexical analysis, between context-free languages, parsing trees and the syn- tactic specification of programming languages and some parsing techniques such as shift-reduce pars- ing, operator-precedencer parsing, top-down parsing and predictive parsers. Selected current research papers and articles are used as references. COM 3356 Compiler Construction II 4 Q.H. Further investigations of compiler construction in- cluding principles of syntax-directed translation, simple SDTS and top-down transducers, simple post- fix SDTS and bottom-up transducers. Topics like bot- tom-up parsing, LR(k), LALR parsing, code genera- tion, symbol table structures, error detection and recovery and code optimization are also discussed. Selected current papers and articles are used for discussion. COM 3370 Advanced Computer Graphics 4 Q.H. Selected advanced topics in computer graphics chosen from the following list: area fill algorithms, the aliasing problem in line drawing, 3 dimensional graphics, geometric transforms, hidden surface algor- ithms, curve and surface approximation techniques, solid primitives, color and shading, approaches to obtaining realistic images. Prereq.: An introductory course in computer graphics. COM 3390 Analysis of Algorithms 4 Q.H. Design and analysis of fast algorithms. Topics are chosen from: 1) Advanced data structures: repre- senting partitions, union-find algorithms, priority queues; 2) Graph algorithms: biconnectivity, maxi- mum flow, shortest path, matching, minimum span- ning tree; 3) Algebraic problems: Matrix multiplica- tion, polynomial multiplication, string matching, linear programming; 4) Probabilistic algorithms: tests for primality, factoring polynomials and integers. Prereq.: COM 1201, COM 1390, MTH 1409 or MTH 1410, MTH 1301 or MTH 3102 or equivalent. COM 3420 Knowledge Representation 4 Q.H. and Inferencing Knowledge representation, acquisition and utiliza- tion. Frames, scripts, conceptual dependency. For- ward and backward chaining, unification and reso- lution, non-monotonic reasoning. Rote learning, learning by analogy, consistency checking. Prereq.: COM 1410 or equivalent. COM 3430 Expert Systems 4 Q.H. Architectures used in the design of expert systems. Survey of current systems. Use of system building tools such as ROSE. Nature of expertise in a do- main. Symbols, search, reasoning. Production sys- tems. Prereq.: COM 1410 or equivalent. COM 3440 Natural Language Processing 4 Q.K Essentials of natural language understanding and production. Focus is on semantic and pragmatic Computer Science / 93 issues rather than syntactic or phonological. Ele- ments in the design of NL human-computer inter- faces. Dialog control. Lexical-semantic relations, se- mantic primitives, and the structure of text. Prereq.: COM 3420 COM 3450 Syntactic Pattern Recognition 4 Q.H. Introduction to syntactic pattern recognition and comparison with the classical discriminant ap- proach. A survey of various syntactic pattern rec- ognition techniques, such as picture descriptive lan- guages (PDL), formal grammars, array grammars, tessellation structures, sequential/parallel matrix grammars, and histogram approaches. Syntax anal- ysis as a recognition procedure. Grammatical infer- ence for syntactic pattern recognition. Applications of syntactic pattern recognition to selected problems in industry, the military, and business, including ro- botics. Prereq.: COM 1350 or equivalent. CX)M 3460 Intelligent Computer-Assisted 4 Q.H. Instruction The notion of course material independent of teach- ing procedures. Problems and comments individual- ized for each student. System tutor w^ith reactive learning environments. Examples for SCHOLAR and GUIDON. Group development of intelligent instrtjc- tional systems. Prereq.: COM 3420. COM 3510 Computer Communication Networks: Design & Performance 4 Q.H. A study of interacting computers. Topics include: elementary queueing theory, connectivity theory, data link and transport protocols, slot rings, token rings and CSMA, routing algorithms, performance analysis of networks. Additional topics may be chosen from models of networks or of network protocols, error detection and correction, applications protocols such as virtual terminal or file transfer protocols. Prereq.: COM 1201, MTH 1387, MTH 1409 or MTH 1410 COM 3520 Cryptography and Computer 4 Q.H. Security Design and use of cryptographic systems and cryp- tanalytic attacks; a history of cryptographic systems and the mathematics behind them; shift register se- quences; random number generators; DES; public key systems and their applications. Prereq.: COM 1350, MTH 1387, MTH 1409 or MTH 1410, MTH 1390 or equivalent. COM 3560 Distributed Database Systems 4 Q.H. A consideration of the problems and opportunities inherent in distributed data bases on a network of computer systems. Includes file allocation, directory systems, deadlock detection and prevention syn- chronization, query optimization, and fault tolerance. Prereq.: COM 3316, COM 3510 COM 3570 Office Automation 4 Q.H. The structure and impact of telecommunications and distributed processing on management information systems and decision support systems. Electronic mail systems, teleconferencing, and videotex. Micro- computer networks, network software, and operating systems. Prereq.: COM 3510. COM 3580 Principles of Interactive 4 Q.H. Systems Design Principles for optimal design of interactive systems such as text editors, programming environments, au- tomated banking systems and commercial products for nontechnical users such as decision support systems, word processors, piersonal computers, etc. User characteristics which impact systems design. Impact of current technologies such as touch screens, mice and other pointing devices, sophisti- cated graphics, data integration, etc., on interaction style. Survey of styles of interaction including menus, command languages, forms fill-in. Object-oriented vs. application-oriented interfaces. Optimizing de- sign tradeoffs. COM 3585 Methods in Interactive 4 Q.H. Systems Design Survey of the research and methodology in the de- sign of interactive systems. Introduction to experi- mental methodologies applied in the study of styles of interaction: field studies, controlled laboratory ex- periments, protocol analysis. Survey and critique of research on various aspects of interaction such as dialogue style, filing and retrieval mechanisms, com- mand languages, menu design, input devices, mes- sage and error handling and screen layout. Prereq.: COM 3580. COM 3630 Concurrent Programming 4 QH. The logical problems that arise in concurrency and their machine implementations. Mutual exclusion, message passing, deadlock, monitors, kernels, and applications to operating systems. Prereq.: COM 3336. COM 3640 Pardlel Computation 4 Q.H. Algorithms and theories for parallel computation on fixed-connection networks and on concurrent sys- tems having a fixed number of processors. Included are algorithms for sorting, priority queues, graph algorithms, matrix multiplication, and FFT. Students use a network of micros to implement some of these algorithms. Applications to VLSI design may be in- cluded. Prereqf..- COM 3336, COM 3390. COM 3800 Readings in Computer Science 4 Q.H. Selected readings under the supervision of a faculty member. Prereq.: Core courses and permission of instructor COM 3810 Special Topics in Computer Science Faculty will lecture on current topics in computer science. Topics will vary from quarter to quarter. May be taken up to three times for credit, with changes in topics. Prereq.: Core courses or penvission of instructor COM 3820 Computer Science Master's Thesis May be repeated for credit Prereq.: Agreement of a thesis advisor COM 3830 Computer Science Master's Project May be repeated for credit. Prereq.: Agreement of a project supervisor 94 / Computer Science COM 3840 Seminar in Computer Science Students will read and present various survey and research papers in Computer Science. Faculty su- pervisor and topics will vary from quarter to quarter. May be repeated for credit. Prereq.: Core courses or permission of instructor Criminal Justice 96 / Criminal Justice Graduate School of Criminal Justice The following course descriptions, listed numerically by area of concentration, are representative of the courses offered in the graduate Criminal Justice program. As it is not possible to offer all courses each year, students are urged to consult the most current announcement of course offerings for specific information regarding available courses in any given quarter. All courses described here carry three quarter-hours of credit. CJ 3201 The Criminal Justice Process An analysis of the criminal justice process from crime prevention and arrest to release after incarceration, emphasizing a legal, sociological, and policy ap- proach to criminal justice. The philosophies, prac- tices, procedures, and issues of agencies involved in criminal justice are reviewed. Critical attention is also given to different approaches to crime control. CJ 3202 Theories of Criminology Focuses on the use of scientific methods in the study and analysis of regularities, uniformities, patterns, and causal factors related to crime, the criminal, and social reactions to both. Critical contributions to the study of crime, criminals, and the treatment of of- fenders are analyzed as they emerge from writings in such disciplines as biology, psychology, psychia- try, endocrinology, law, sociology, and anthropology. CJ 3203 Criminal Law The fundamental principles and concepts of criminal law in the United States. This course focuses on the relationship of the individual to the state and includes an examination of the general framework of criminal law. CJ 3204 Statistical Analysis I Introduction to probability and statistics. Topics to be covered include measures of central tendency and dispersion; probability and the binomial, Poisson, exponential, and normal distributions; sampling dis- tributions and hypothesis testing; and correlation and regression. CJ 3205 Evaluation Methods in Criminal Justice Focuses on some of the nontechnical, yet crucial, research issues including ethical problems, the de- sign, procedures, and politics of evaluation research in criminal justice, as well as funding sources and the generation and administration of grants and con- tracts. Students are expected to participate in eval- uation exercises and to prepare proposal narratives and budgets. CJ 3251 Criminal Justice Planning and Development An examination of planning techniques and their im- pact on criminal justice program development, cur- rently and for the future. An analysis of policy and decision making pertaining to criminal justice or- ganizations and agencies is developed as is the ex- tent of planning for crime control at local, state, regional, and national levels. The peculiar nature of urban problems in relation to planning is also re- viewed, involving identifying problem areas in the field of criminal justice, diagnosing their causes, and formulating solutions. In addition, the course exam- ines alternative strategies and mobilization of re- sources necessary to effect change in the system. CJ 3252 Criminal Justice Management Examines the theory of management and applied skills in the field of management. Strong emphasis will be put upon the development of systems skills in getting people to work together to achieve a com- mon objective. Students will be given the opportunity to develop their skills in applying the concepts of planning, managing, motivating, and controlling in a management environment. The major emphasis in the course will be upon the development of knowledge and skills in the area of situational analysis and problem solving in applying both systems theory and functional theory. CJ 3253 Personnel and Labor Relations in Criminal Justice This course helps to provide the student with basic skills in personnel management, selection, and placement. It is also intended to help students de- velop an understanding of the social psychology of organizations concerned with law enforcement, the courts, or corrections, and to help them develop familiarity with critical issues in labor relations and collective bargaining. CJ 3254 Budget and Financing in Criminal Justice The principles and practices of budgeting in the various functional areas of criminal justice. Rnancial operations are dealt with in depth, including such matters as obtaining resources through budget de- velopment and presentation. Distinctions between capital budgets and expense budgets and among zero budgeting, line-item budgeting, and program budgeting are drawn. Important financial concerns such as cost effectiveness, management by objec- tives, and critical path method (CPM) are discussed. Special attention is given to budget projections as planning tools for obtaining grants, as well as a means of facilitating needed change within the pres- ent structures of criminal justice agencies. The utility of budgets as evaluative mechanisms is stressed; and the role of budgeting in the financial control of organizations is discussed. CJ 3301 Administration of Private Security A comprehensive overview of private security theo- ries, operations, and practices, with special empha- sis on the administration and management of se- curity. The philosophical background, history, and current role of private security are explored, as well as the role and status of the security manager in threat assessment, risk prevention, and the protec- Criminal Justice / 97 tion of assets. Functional-area security systems, law, science and technology for security, and issues, standards, goals, and challenges for the future are dealt with in the course. Security systems are con- sidered, particularly as these "open" systems related to criminal justice and the environment. The security manager is conceived of as the prime mover toward professionalization and improved management and administration of security operations, and as the ad- vocate of contemporary organizational theories em- bracing research and the systems approach. CJ 3302 Law and Private Security The legal factors that affect security operations and administration and the value of legal counsel on such factors. These factors include the pertinent aspects of torts, agency, civil rights, contracts, trade secrets, patents and copyrights, insurance, and regulatory issues. CJ 3303 Technological Security Systems Considers security applications of the latest scien- tific and technological advances and the impact of new product developments on prevention and pro- tection, detection, and prosecution. Students will ex- amine the state of the art of security products and are invited to plan, implement, maintain, and evaluate highly sophisticated security systems. CJ 3304 Human Factors in Security An analysis of topics and strategies for security administration. Executive development, ethical is- sues, stress management, conflict management, cri- sis management, intra-organizational relations, com- munity agency relations, promoting security awareness, staff development, and effective security personnel and product interface are addressed. CJ 3351 Theories of Law and Society An introduction to theories, issues, and research related to law and legal institutions, placing law in the context of social control systems, raising basic issues about the nature of law, and focusing on the relationship between law and social values. The course also considers the nature of law, law and social change, the sociology of the legal profession, and criminal law in action. Attention is given to the formulation of criminal law and discrimination in the formulation and practice of criminal law. CJ 3352 Statistical Analysis II A continuation of Statistical Analysis I. Multiple regression and its extensions, discriminant analysis, factor analysis, analysis of variance, and the analysis of contingency tables are discussed. Prereq.: HCJ '204. CJ 3353 Research Methods in Criminal Justice A survey of methodological approaches to criminal justice research. Various research strategies, includ- ing sample surveys, observation, historical research, experiments, and evaluation, are discussed and high- lighted with examples from the literature. Also re- viewed are various sources of criminal justice data with assessments of their reliability and validity. Var- ious data analytic strategies, including tabular anal- ysis and nonparametric methods, are emphasized within the context of computer assignments. CJ 3354 Criminal Behavior Systems This course examines offender and offense patterns within nine general crime categories: (1) violent per- sonal, (2) conventional property, (3) public order, (4) political, against the government, (5) political, tiy the government, (6) occupational, (7) "organized," (8) professional, and (9) sexual. The course is intended to serve as a detailed introductory survey to help familiarize graduate students with a broad range of crime types and criminal behavior systems as well as some of their classic and contemporary analyses. CJ 3511 Theories of Delinquency Examines critically the major theoretical explana- tions of juvenile delinquency. Theoretical approaches include social disorganization, subcultural theory, strain, control theory, labeling and conflict theory. In addition, current data on the nature and distribution of delinquency are discussed, and findings from em- pirical research are highlighted. CJ 3512 Penology and Corrections The meaning and efficacy of punishment, the history of imprisonment, the structure of prisons, the effec- tiveness of treatment, the rights of prisoners, and sentencing policy are discussed. CJ 3513 Victimology Critically examines theories and research regarding victims of crime. Special attention is devoted to an analysis of National Crime Survey victimization data. Also concepts such as fear of crime, victim vulner- ability, and victim culpability are discussed. In ad- dition, implications of victim-oriented research for the administration of justice are assessed, as are current programs offering victim services such as restitution and compensation. Future trends in theory, research, and public policy are analyzed. CJ 3514 Police Functions in Democratic Society An examination of the sociopolitical context within which American police departments developed in the nineteenth century as well as the changing forces that shape modern departments. Considers the im- plications of democratic institutions and traditions for policing in America. The organization of several different kinds of departments are contrasted, and the implications of these different types of depart- ments for police performance are examined. The rigors of police work, together with the social-psy- chological adjustments that officers at different ranks make, is also considered. CJ 3515 Women and the Criminal Justice System An examination of the roles of women in the criminal justice system. The course focuses on women as offenders, as victims, and as agents of social control; on both theory and practice, and on both historical and contemporary issues. 98 / Criminal Justice CJ 351 6 Court Management and Administration The organization and structure of the courts, includ- ing the problems, policies, and practices of the crim- inal court system. Particular emphasis is placed on the lower criminal court. Issues in court management, including personnel problems, scheduling, role of juries and witnesses, use of planning and manage- ment techniques, and court reform, are reviewed. CJ 351 7 Terrorism Divided into two sections, the first part of which examines the sociology of terrorism, including fund- ing, intelligence gathering, weapons and tactics, in- formers, and countermeasures. Special attention is also given to the media which report the news, yet seem often perilously close to inciting further terror. The "terrorist personality," the literary depiction of terrorism, and the doctrine of systematic terrorism, as well as its current interpretations and common patterns, motives, and aims, are also examined. The second part concentrates on identifying tech- nologies of counterterrorism, discussing incident management needs, and recommending ways to lessen the risk of nationally disruptive acts. The course attempts to challenge accepted assumptions and to forecast changes in terrorist activities that may affect tomorrow's headlines. CJ 351 8 Issues in Juvenile Justice A critical analysis of the policies and practices of agencies involved in processing young people through the juvenile justice system. Specific attention is devoted to police practices, detention, intake, di- version, adjudication, and disposition of juveniles within the justice system. In addition, the course focuses on the historical development of the juvenile justice system and assesses current trends and pro- posals for reform. CJ 3519 Organized Crime The course approaches organized crime from a law enforcement perspective, stressing, however, the general criminal justice implications. The corruptive influences of organized crime are dealt with, as well as aspects of overzealous enforcement that may lead to violations of constitutional safeguards. The scope of intelligence activities and the role of computerized information concerning organized crime are explored with special attention given to sensitive privacy is- sues involved. Problems of definition, organizational structure, operating methods, participant identifica- tion, and legal limitations are discussed. The effect of so called "victimless crime" status in enhancing the economic viability and public tolerance of or- ganized crime is also considered, and present strat- egies suggested for the control or elimination of this pervasive phenomenon. Finally, the relationship of organized crime to the continuing increase of both "street" and "white collar" crime is assessed. CJ 3520 Conflict Management An examination of problems in conflict management, including concepts and definitions of social conflict and comparisons between functional and dysfunc- tional conflict. Inquiries into representative conflict management strategies and techniques are made, affording the opportunity to relate general theory and research results to practical situations of criminal conflict management. The course generally relies on a variety of heuristic techniques, including scenarios, role playing, and the use of audiovisual media. CJ 3521 Probation and Parole An examination of the nature, objectives, means, and problems of probation and parole administration and management. CJ 3523 Law Enforcement and the Community This course examines the nature, problems, and present procedures associated with police-com- munity relations in order to develop more efficient and effective policing. The course utilizes the lecture- forum technique with assigned readings, group dis- cussions, and project development and critiquing. CJ 3524 Theories of Punishment An overview of theories and issues in punishment with a focus on topics of contemporary interest as well as the historical roots of current approaches. Trends and fashions in both the theory and the form of punishment are considered. Reading materials are drawn from a variety of fields, including philosophy, politics, literature, law, and empirical criminal justice. CJ 3503 Criminal Evidence An introduction to the field of criminal evidence. Stu- dents are expected to read and brief cases and must be prepared to discuss them in class. The readings, class lectures, and discussions help familiarize stu- dents with the various procedures and rules related to the trial of a criminal case. CJ 3505 Juvenile Law and Children's Rights An examination of the legal relationship between the juvenile offender and the state. The course covers case and statutory law, as well as constitutional due- process standards in juvenile proceedings. Areas covered include jurisdiction, prejudicial process, waiver of jurisdiction adjudication, disposition, and postdispositional issues, including right to treatment. CJ 3506 Criminal Procedures Constitutional issues of the administration of criminal justice. Topics to be considered include selected provisions of the United States Constitution, with particular emphasis on Amendments 4, 5, 6, and 1 4, and on questions of electronic surveillance, right to counsel, line-up, bails, and right to speedy trial. CJ 3508 Quantitative Models in Criminal Justice Quantitative frontiers in the field of criminal justice as well as the methodological contributions of allied fields are examined: in particular, such approaches as reliability models of recidivism, stochastic models of criminal behavior, econometric models of the crim- inal justice system, and deterrence models are ad- dressed. An extensive coverage of published and unpublished literature is central to the course. Criminal Justice / 99 CJ 3509 Crime Measurement The amount, distribution, and pattern of criminal be- havior in the United States are examined via official crime statistics including the Uniform Crime Reports, victimization surveys, and self-report studies. Alter- native measures including indices of seriousness of various offenses are review/ed. Attention is also de- voted to historical studies of the nature and extent of criminal behavior. Finally, problems and prospects regarding accurate measures of crime and crime correlates are discussed. CJ 3510 Computer Applications in Criminal Justice An introduction to the computer and its applicability to criminal justice, research, and operations. Topics covered include command language, file creation and editing, data storage modes, introductory FOFTTRAN, simulation, graphics, and word processing. Course requirements include a series of computer assign- ments concerning criminal data and problems. CJ 3525 Correctional Administration An intensive coverage of the many problems and dilemmas which confront the correctional organiza- tion. Topics for discussion include such issues as basic problems of correctional organization, orga- nizational development and analysis, management by objectives, planning and budgeting systems, man- agement style and personnel development, special problems of jails and houses of corrections, insti- tutional programs, classifications, correctional policy, and the future of imprisonment. CJ 3527 Community Corrections This course examines the concepts of community corrections, utilizing historical, philosophical, and pragmatic perspectives and including an analysis of the alternatives to imprisonment or institutionaliza- tion. For course purposes, community-based pro- grams are defined as programs aimed at reducing the occurrence of criminal and delinquent behavior through prevention, rehabilitation, reintegration, and/ or diversionary services in noninstitutional settings which make maximum use of existing and potential community resources. CJ 3529 Comparative Criminology Crime and its control from the comparative perspec- tive, viewed both historically and contemporaneously. The development of Roman legal institutions, the emergence of common law and other legal systems (the civil law and the socialist legal system), and the emergence of American legal institutions in the nine- teenth century are all examined. The crime problems in developing societies (India, nineteenth-century Eu- rope and America) are contrasted with those in de- veloped societies (modern Europe and America), and the impact of a world economic system on the two is explored. The advantages of comparative analysis are developed. CJ 3531 White Collar Crime This course is designed to examine critically the cur- rent theoretical, research, and public policy issues regarding white collar crime. The first part examines definitions of white collar crime as well as various typologies of white collar crime activity. The nature, extent and consequences of white collar crime in the United States will also be assessed. Finally explan- ations for the commission of these offenses will be discussed. The second part uses case studies to explore in more detail white collar crime. For example, cases of employee theft, corporate crime, governmen- tal deviance, industrial espionage, and computer crime will be presented and discussed. The third part focuses on controlling white collar crime. The problems of traditional criminal justice systems in controlling white collar crime will be examined and the prospects of alternative systems of control-civic law, private security, public opinion-will be assessed. CJ 3801, CJ 3802 Directed Study I and II An independent study offers the student the oppor- tunity to bring individual, concentrated attention to a particular topic as arranged and agreed upon in advance by a faculty member and the student. This option is generally recommended when the student desires a more intensive analysis of a particular subject. The independent study has the advantage of allowing students flexibility in learning and devel- oping their own academic programs. CJ 3803, CJ 3804 Internship I and II Field instruction in a criminal justice agency where instruction may be offered through administrative, research, teaching and/or related activites. Students have the opportunity to apply theoretical concepts in a practical, applied fashion by observing and con- tributing to the daily activities of operating agencies and organizations. CJ 3805 Master's Thesis Students electing to write a Master's thesis must select a thesis topic with the advice of a faculty member and receive approval of the thesis topic from the graduate director. Engineering 102 /Engineering Graduate School of Engineering Chemical Engineering Each course description includes information on the expected quarter in which classes are usually offered. The quarters listed are presented here for planning purposes; however, the Graduate School of Engineering cannot guarantee that all courses will be offered. Students must refer to the Graduate School of Engineering Quarterly Course Offering sheets to determine what courses are actually offered in any given quarter and at what day and time. CHE 3300 Chemical Engineering 4 Q.H. Mathematics (formerly 04.802) Fall Quarter, Alternating Years Formulation and solution of problems involving ad- vanced calculus as they arise in chemical engineering situations. Methods covered will de ordinary differen- tial equations, series solutions, complex variables. Laplace transforms, partial differential equations, and matrix operations. Emphasis will be placed on methods for formulating the problems. It will be assumed that the student has been exposed to some of these topics in appropriate mathematics courses. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering including mathema- tical analysis. CHE 3301 Chemical Engineering 2 aH. Mathematics Fall Quarter, As Announced CHE 3301 and CHE 3302 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3300, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3302 Chemical Engineering 2 Q.H. Mathematics II Winter Quarter Continuation of CHE 3301. Prereq.: CHE 3301. CHE 331 0 Chemical Engineering 4 Q.H. Thermodynamics I (formerly 04.81 1 ) Winter Quarter, Alternating Years Classical thermodynamics as a method of approach to the analysis of processes of interest to chemical engineers. A study of phase equilibria involving the various states of matter; prediction and correlation of physical, chemical, and transport properties of gases and liquids; elementary concepts of quantum and statistical mechanics to interpret the empirical properties of classical thermodynamics. Fundamen- tal principles are reviewed to the extent needed. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3311 Chemical Engineering 2 Q.H. Thermodynamics i Winter Quarter CHE 331 1 and CHE 3312 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3310, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3312 Chemical Engineering 2 Q.H. Thermodynamics II Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 331 1 . Prereq.: CHE 3311. CHE 3320 Separation Process 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.978) Spring Quarter, Alternating Years Calculation and design methods used in processes involving mass transfer Topics covered include vapor liquid equilibria for binary and multicomponent sys- tems, multicomponent distillation, absorption and extraction. Emphasis is placed on methods and tech- niques which are common to many separation pro- cesses. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3321 Separation Processes I 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter CHE 3321 and CHE 3322 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3320, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3322 Separation Processes 2 Q.H. Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 3321. Prereq.: CHE 3321. CHE 3330 Chemical Process Control 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.829) Fall Quarter, Alternating Years Review of classical control techniques; state variable representation and analysis of continuous control systems in chemical engineering, including controll- ability, observability, and stability. Multivariable con- trol problems in chemical engineering; introduction to optimal control. Digital simulation included where appropriate. Prereq.: Graduate standing in Chemical Engineering or permission. CHE 3331 Chemical Process Control I 2 Q.H. Fall Quarter, As Announced CHE 3331 and CHE 3332 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3330, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3332 Chemical Process Control II 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter Continuation of CHE 3331. Prereq.: CHE 3331. CHE 3340 Heterogeneous Catalysis 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.890) Winter Quarter, Alternating Years Experimental methods required for determining the surface area and pore structure of catalyst carriers are discussed. These structural characteristics are utilized to estimate mass and heat transport rates within porous catalyst in order to determine their effectiveness with respect to chemical reaction. Chemical Engineering / 103 Mechanisms for chemical poisoning of catalysts are also analyzed. Reactions of practical interest are used to illustrate the applications of heterogeneous catalysis to modern chemical processing problems. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3341 Heterogeneous Catalysis I 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter CHE 3341 and CHE 3342 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3340, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3342 Heterogeneous Catalysis II 2 Q.H. Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 3341. Prereq.: CHE 3341. CHE 3350 Chemical Process Heat Transfer 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.973) Spring Quarter, Alternating Years Empirical methods and calculations used to design heat transfer equipment for the chemical process industries. Review of basic heat transfer principles. Shell-and-tube calculations for liquid and/or vapor phase heat transfer. Direct contact and other special heat exchanger applications. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3351 Chemical Process Heat 2 QH. Transfer I Winter Quarter CHE 3351 and CHE 3352 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3350, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3352 Chemical Process Heat 2 Q.H. Transfer II Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 3351. Prereq.: CHE 3351. CHE 3400 Advance Chemical Engineering 4 Q.H. Calculations (formerly 04.801) As Announced Fundamental process principles leading to an un- derstanding of the stoichiometric principles of chem- ical process plants. The study of complex material and energy balances is undertaken with the view to apply these principles to actual large chemical plant conditions. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering including differential equations. CHE 3401 Advanced Chemical 2 Q.H. Engineering Calculations I As Announced CHE 3401 and CHE 3402 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3400, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3402 Advanced Chemical 2 Q.H. Engineering Calculations II As Announced Continuation of CHE 3401. Prereq.: CHE 3401. CHE 3410 Numerical Techniques in 4 Q.H. Chemical Engineering(formerly 04.803) Fall Quarter, As Announced Digital computer applications to chemical engineer- ing problems. Topics covered include location of roots of linear and nonlinear equations, numerical integra- tion, and curve-fitting techniques with emphasis on the numerical solution of ordinary and partial differ- ential equations and to the subject of linear algebra. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 341 1 Numerical Techniques in 2 Q.H. Chemical Engineering I Fall Quarter, As Announced CHE 3411 and CHE 3412 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as- CHE 3410, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3412 Numerical Techniques in 2 Q.H. Chemical Engineering Winter Quarter Continuation of CHE 3411. Prereq.: CHE 3411. CHE 3430 Chemical Data Estimation 2 Q.H. (formerly 04.832) As Announced Methods of obtaining physical and thermodynamic properties of chemical compounds and systems without resorting to laboratory investigation. Latest empirical relationships and physical and thermody- namics laws are introduced to obtain data for plant design and other chemical and engineering uses. Prereq.: BS degree. CHE 3450 Analytical and Numerical 4 Q.H. Techniques (formerly 04.835) As Announced For students interested in solving comprehensive problems using computer methods. Problems solved in the course will be based on the interest of the students and staff and will be individual. Prereq.: BS degree and knowledge of digital computer programming. CHE 3500 Transport Phenomena 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.823) Winter Quarter, As Announced Momentum rate conservation equations for steady- state fluid flow in two-dimensional boundary layers are presented and solved to obtain the fluid velocity profiles. These results are utilized in the consider- ation of heat and mass transfer phenomena at a fluid-solid interface. The development of surface re- newal theory is presented and applied to the de- scription of heat and mass transfer phenomena. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3501 Transport Phenomena I 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter CHE 3501 and CHE 3502 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3500, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3502 Transport Phenomena II 2 Q.H. Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 3501. Prereq.: CHE 3501. 104 / Engineering CHE 3510 Modeling and Simulation of 4 Q.H. Chemical Process (formerly 04.837) Winter Quarter, Alternating Years Use of special purpose and general purpose com- puter programs in solving the steady-state material and energy balances of chemical processes. Course includes related background material which may be applied to these computer programs such as con- vergence acceleration for calculations involving re- cycle streams, tearing recycle streams for iteration on minimum number of streams and minimum num- ber of parameters, and algorithms for design variable selection. Prereq.: Graduate standing in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3511 Modeling and Simulation of 2 Q.H. Chemical Process I Winter Quarter CHE 351 1 and CHE 351 2 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3510, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3512 Modeling and Simulation of 2 Q.H. Chemical Process II Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 351 1. Prereq.: CHE 3511. CHE 3520 Computer Process Control 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.830) Winter Quarter, Alternating Years Computer control hardware and software. Z-trans- form, pulse transfer functions, and data holds. Open and closed-loop response and design of sampled- data systems. Computer control algorithms. Digital simulation of sampled data systems. Prereq.: Grad- uate standing in Chemical Engineering or permission. CHE 3521 Computer Process Control I 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter CHE 3521 and CHE 3522 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3520, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3522 Computer Process Control II 2 Q.H. Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 3521. Prereq.: CHE 3521. CHE 3530 Advanced Management 4 Q.H. Techniques in the Chemical Industry (formerly 04.840) Fall Quarter, Alternating Years fvlanagement techniques applied to the chemical in- dustry. Special attention to management of research organizations and to management of engineering services, such as design, computer, and related ac- tivities. Prereq.: Graduate standing. CHE 3531 Advanced Management 2 O.H. Techniques in the Chemical Industry I Fall Quarter, As Announced CHE 3531 and CHE 3532 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3530, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3532 Advanced Management 2 ah. Techniques in the Chemical Industry II Winter Quarter Continuation of CHE 3531. Prereq.: CHE 3531. CHE 3540 Advanced Process Design 4 Q.H. Concepts (formerly 04.845) Spring Quarter, Alternating Years This course stresses techniques and approaches used in the development of new or improved proc- esses. Topics include establishment of process bases, use of process simulators in design, optimi- zation and evaluation of alternatives, and preliminary equipment design and cost estimating techniques. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3541 Advanced Process Design 2 Q.H. Concepts I Fall Quarter, As Announced CHE 3541 and CHE 3542 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3540, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3542 Advanced Process Design 2 Q.H. Concepts II Winter Quarter Continuation of CHE 3541. Prereq.: CHE 3541. CHE 3543 Advanced Rant Design 2 Q.H. Concepts II Spring Quarter f\/lodern approaches to plant design: computer-ori- ented design, analysis and simulation of chemical processes, use of strategy decision making in de- sign, advanced scheduling and planning techniques. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3560 Fluid Mechanics 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.974) Fall Quarter, Alternating Years Discussion of statics, kinematics, and stress con- cepts associated with fluids. Formation of the gen- eral equations of motion with application to laminar and turbulent flow. Topics on boundary layer theory and compressible flow are included. Prereq.: BS de- gree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3561 Fluid Mechanics I 2 Q.H. Fall Quarter, As Announced CHE 3561 and CHE 3562 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3560, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3562 Fluid Mechanics II 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter Continuation of CHE 3561. Prereq.: CHE 3561. CHE 3600 Polymer Science 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.870) Fall Quarter, Alternating Years Basic concepts of polymers, thermodynamics of pol- ymer solutions and measurement of molecular weight. Physical and chemical testing of polymers. Crystal- linity in polymers and rheology of polymers. Physical Chemical Engineering / 105 and chemical properties of polymers. Mechanisms and conditions for polymerization of polymers in- cluding step-reaction, addition and copolymeriza- tion. Discussion of carbon-chain polymers, fibers and fiber technology. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering or Chemistry. CHE 3601 Polymer Science I 2 Q.H. Fall Quarter, As Announced CHE 3601 and CHE 3602 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3600, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3602 Polymer Science II 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter Continuation of CHE 3601. Prereq.: CIHE 3601. CHE 3620 Principles of Polymerization 4 Q.H. (formerly 04.872) Fall Quarter, Alternating Years Introduction to polymers and polymer properties. Mechanisms of polymerization including step poly- merization, radical-chain polymerization, emulsion polymerization, ionic-chain polymerization, chain co- polymerization and ring-opening polymerization. Stereo chemistry of polymerization and synthetic re- actions of polymers. Applications to reactor design of industrially important polymers. Prereq.: Graduate standing in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3621 Principles of Polymerization I 2 Q.H. Fall Quarter CHE 3621 and CHE 3622 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3620, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3622 Principles of Polymerizations II 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter, As Announced Continuation of CHE 3621. Prereq.: CHE 3621. CHE 3630 Chemical Process Pollution 4 Q.H. Control (formerly 04.850) Spring Quarter, Alternating Years Provides chemical engineering students with basic fundamentals for handling environmental problems in the chemical process industries. Water quality requirements and industrial waste characteristics; wastewater treatment processes applicable to en- vironmental engineering; biological treatment proc- esses and equipment; comprehensive design prob- lems involving biological and tertiary treatment; the economics of water treatment and reuse. Prereq.: Graduate standing in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3631 Chemical Process Pollution 2 Q.H. Control I Winter Quarter CHE 3631 and CHE 3632 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3630, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3632 Chemical Process Pollution 2 Q.H. Control II Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 3631. Prereq.: CHE 3631. CHE 3660 Solar Energy Thermal 2 Q.H. Processes (formerly 04.862) Fall Quarter Covers fundamental thermal processes involved in obtaining useful heat from flat-plate solar collectors. The components required in an active solar energy collection system are analyzed, and the economics of the system are considered. Prereq.: BS degree. CHE 3663 Fundamentals of Polymer 4 Q.H. Processing (formerly 04.871) Winter Quarter, Alternating Years Transport properties of polymer solutions and pol- ymer melts. Modeling and design of polymer proc- essing equipment. Flow models for processes in- volving heat, mass, and/or momentum transfer. Analysis of flow stability and elastic phenomena. Ap- plications to the design of equipment for extrusion, calendering, coating, fiber spinning, tubular film blowing, injection molding and mixing. Prereq.: Grad- uate standing in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3664 Fundamentals of Polymer 2 Q.H. Processing I Winter Quarter CHE 3664 and CHE 3665 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3663, but in two 2QH courses. CHE 3665 Fundamentals of Polymer 2 Q.H. Processing II Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 3664. Prereq.: CHE 3664. CHE 3670 Special Topics in Chemical 4 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 04.899) As Announced Topics of interest to the staff member conducting this class are presented for advanced study A stu- dent may not take more than one Special Topics course with any one instructor Prereq.: Permission of department staff. CHE 3671 Kinetics of Chemical Processes 2 Q.H. (formerly 04.891) Spring Quarter, Alternating Years The theoretical foundations for the analysis of ele- mentary chemical reaction rates, such as collision theory, particle dynamics, and transition state theory are presented. Consideration is given to the theory of monomolecular reactions and the effect of solvent and electrostatic forces on liquid phase reaction rates. Homogeneous catalysis and selected free-en- ergy correlations are covered. Prereq.: BS degree in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3672 Kinetics of Chemical 2 Q.H. Processes I Winter Quarter CHE 3672 and CHE 3673 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as CHE 3671, but in two 2QH courses. 106 /Engineering CHE 3673 Kinetics of Chemical 2 Q.H. Processes II Spring Quarter Continuation of CHE 3672. Prereq.: CHE 3672. CHE 3680 Corrosion Fundamentals 2 Q.H. (formerly 04.821) As Announced Economic factors, basic theories, types, behaviors of specific systems, and protection against corrosion are studied. Wherever possible, engineering appli- cations of the principles are emphasized. Prereq.: BS degree. CHE 3690 Seminar (formerly 04.990) 2 Q.H. Any Quarter Topics of an advanced nature are presented by staff, outside speakers, and students in the graduate pro- gram. This course must be attended by all master's degree candidates. Prereq.: Graduate standing in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3796 DEng Continuation 0 Q.H. Any Quarter CHE 3798 Masters Thesis Continuation 0 Q.H. (formerly 04.9X1) Any Quarter CHE 3799 PhD Continuation 0 Q.H. (formerly 04.9X4) Any Quarter CHE 3860 Thesis (Master's Degree) 10 Q.H. (formerly 04.991) Any Quarter ^ Analytical and/or experimental work conducted un- der the supervision of the department. Prereq.: Grad- uate Standing in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3861 Thesis (Master's Degree) 4 Q.H. Any Quarter CHE 3862 Thesis (Master's Degree) 2 Q.H. Any Quarter CHE 3880 Thesis (PhD Degree) 0 Q.H. (formerly 04.995) Any Quarter Theoretical and experimental work conducted under the supervision of the department. Prereq.: Admis- sion to doctoral program in Chemical Engineering. CHE 3885 Thesis (DEng Degree) 0 Q.H. (formerly 04.996) Any Quarter Theoretical and experimental work conducted under the supervision of the department. Prereq.: Admis- sion to program in Chemical Engineering. Civil Engineering Each course description includes information on the expected quarter in which classes are usually offered. The quarters listed are presented here for planning purposes; however, the Graduate School of Engineering cannot guarantee that all courses will be offered. Students must refer to the Graduate School of Engineering Quarterly Course Offering sheet to determine what courses are actually offered in any given quarter and at what day and time. problems. Examples are drawn from structural me- chanics. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3131 Engineering Statistics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01 .91 6) Fall Quarter The basic elements of probability theory and Statis- tics and their use via the solution of various civil engineering problems encountered in fluid mechan- ics, construction management, structures, transpor- tation. Probability of events, random variables and distributions, derived distributions, expectation, com- mon probability models. Prereq.: Undergraduate calculus. CIV 3132 Engineering Statistics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.917) Winter Quarter Continuation of CIV 3131. Includes parameter esti- mation, confidence intervals, hypothesis testing, and linear statistical models. Prereq.: CIV 3131. CIV 3141 Numerical Methods in Qvil 2 Q.H. Engineering I (formerly 01.888) Fall Quarter Introduction, errors in numerical analysis. Solution of nonlinear algebraic equations by direct and iter- ative methods. Introduction to matrix eigenvalue CIV 3142 Numerical Methods in Civil 2 Q.H. Engineering II (formerly 01.889) Winter Quarter Continuation of CIV 3141. Approximation of func- tions: interpolation, and least squares curve fitting; orthogonal polynomials. Numerical differentiation and integration. Solution of ordinary and partial differ- ential equations, and integral equations; discrete methods of solution of initial and boundary-value problems. Examples are drawn from structural me- chanics, geotechnical engineering, hydrology and hydraulics. Prereq.: CIV 31 41. CIV 3151 Environmental Impact 2 Q.H. Statement Process I (formerly 01.865) Fall Quarter This course provides a pragmatic introduction to the legal/regulatory framework that determines the con- tent and format of environmental documents and presents an overview of the techniques used to iden- tify and evaluate environmental impacts. Prereq.: Ad- mission to Graduate School of Engineering. Civil Engineering / 107 CIV 3152 Environmental Impact 2 Q.H. Statement Process II (formerly 01.866) Winter Quarter This course supplements the information on proce- dures and analysis encompassed in CIV 3151 by setting forth state-of-the-art techniques for quanti- fication of environmental effects and development of measures to mitigate identified adverse impacts. Prereq.: CIV 3151. CIV 31 55 Technology Assessment 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.988) Winter Quarter Classical views of technology. History and definition of technology assessment. Individual, environmental and societal impacts of technologies. Technological externalities. Risks and the determination of safety. Policy options for dealing v\/ith technological prob- lems. Case studies. Prereq.: Admission to the Grad- uate School of Engineering and consent of instructor CIV 31 61 System Analysis I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.807) Fall Quarter Application of linear optimization models to various civil engineering problems: the simplex method, sen- sitivity analysis, transportation problem, tranship- ment problem, shortest path problem. Prereq.: Ad- mission to Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3162 Systems Analysis II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.808) Winter Quarter Further application of systems analysis techniques to civil engineering problems: dynamic programming, linear regression, model estimation, queuing theory, project evaluation. Prereq.: CIV 3162 and CIV 3131; to be taken concurrently with CIV 3 1 32. CIV 3163 Systems Analysis III 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.809) Spring Quarter Further application of techniques and approaches presented in CIV 3161 and CIV 3162. New topics to be presented include integer programming, non- linear programming, simulation, decision analysis. Other topics may be added according to interest, as time allows. Aim will be to help prepare students to complete a term project employing numerous tech- niques of systems analysis. Prereq.: CIV 3163. CIV 3231 Construction Management I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.821) Fall Quarter This course treats cost estimating, including a de- scription of computerized cost estimating systems; duration estimating, considering work analysis tech- niques; value engineering as a concept and its effect on the construction industry; and specifications, in- cluding the use and importance of computerized Specification Writing Systems. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3232 Construction Management II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.822) Winter Quarter This course contains treatment of the application of scheduling methods to the control of construction activities including resource allocation, quality con- trol, cash flow progress reporting, and the effects of change orders. Prereq.: CIV 3231. CIV 3237 Construction Mettiods and 2 Q.H. Equipment I (formerly 01 .830) ^11 Quarter This course treats typical approaches to construc- tion in a selection of application areas such as steel and concrete structures, hydraulic and port facilities, horizontal construction and the like. Prereq.: Admis- sion to Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3238 Construction Methods and 2 Q.H. Equipment II (formerly 01.831) Winter Quarter This course is a continuation of CIV 3237, treating additional areas of construction. Prereq.: CIV 3237. av 3241 Legal Aspects of Gvil 2 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 01.832) Fall Quarter A presentation of United States and international legal systems and theories necessary for the com- prehension of business and contractual liabilities, rights and obligations in the engineering field. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3242 Legal Aspects of Civil 2 Q.H. Engineering II (formerly 01.833) Winter Quarter This course deals with the description and evaluation of various types of construction contracts, proce- dures and formats for submitting bids, filing claims, and legal steps to avoid liabilities, utilizing the prin- ciples learned in CIV 3241. Prereq.: CIV 3241. CIV 3245 Construction Seminar 2 QH. ' (formerly 01 .827) Spring Quarter This course is a reading and discussion course cen- tering on recent research publications in Construc- tion Engineering. Prereq.: Limited to Construction Management Program majors; to be taken in final spring quarter CIV 3310 Environmental Chemistry I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.920) Fall Quarter A review of basic chemistry is followed by a discus- sion of the equilibrium chemistry of homogeneous and heterogeneous systems with applications in en- vironmental engineering. The physical and chemical properties of water are studied, as are acidity, al- kalinity, hardness, and water softening. Topics in re- ceiving water quality and disinfection are included. Prereq.: Two quarters of general chemistry. 108 / Engineering CIV 3311 Environmental Chemistry II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.921) Winter Quarter Continuation of CIV 3310, including the basic prin- ciples of chemical thermodynamics, electrochemis- try, kinetics, organic chemistry, biochemistry, and nuclear chemistry as they relate to environmental engineering. Colloidal chemistry and coagulation are discussed as are fun lamental water quality param- eters such as BOD, COD, and TOC. Prereq.: CIV 3310; to be taken concurrently with CIV 3325. CIV 3312 Environmental Chemistry I 4 Q.H. and II (formerly 01.923) Fall Quarter This course embodies the material in CIV 3310 and CIV 3311 . Prereq.: Two quarters of general chemistry. CIV 3315 Water and Wastewater 2 Q.H. Treatment I (formerly 01.910) Fall Quarter Water quality water impurities and effects, the theory and practice of water treatment, and the elements of design of water treatment works including intake facilities, wells, coagulation, sedimentation, filtration, softening, iron and manganese removal, disinfection and fluoridation. Prereq.: Undergraduate fluid me- chanics and CIV 3311. CIV 3316 Water and Wastewater 2 Q.H. Treatment II (formerly 01.911) Winter Quarter Waste characteristics, the theory and practice of wastewater treatment and disposal, and the elements of design of primary and secondary treatment works, including screening, grit removal, sedimentation, bi- ological treatment processes, sludge digestion and disposal, stabilization ponds, and disinfection. Prereq.: CIV 3315. CIV 3317 Water and Wastewater 2 Q.H. Treatment III (formerly 01.912) Winter and Spring Quarters Desalination, advanced wastewater treatment, land treatment, effluent disposal and reuse, small alter- native wastewater systems, and other special prob- lems in water and wastewater characteristics and treatment, including corrosion control, and applica- tion and storage of chemicals. Prereq.: CIV 3316 or CIV 3318. CIV 3318 Water and Wastewater 4 Q.H. Treatment I and II (formerly 01.914) Fall Quarter This course embodies the material in CIV 3315 and CIV 331 6. Prereq.: Undergraduate fluid mechanics; to be taken concurrently with CIV 3312. CIV 3320 Environmental Microbiology 2 aH. (formerly 01.922) Winter and Spring Quarters A study of microbiology with emphasis on environ- mental engineering applications. The course in- cludes cell structure, nutrition, morphology growth, reproduction, and metabolism of microorganisms of environmental significance. Effects of environmental factors including inhibition, killing, and natural hab- itats are discussed. In addition, anaerobic digestion and eutrophication are covered. Prereq.: CIV 3311; to be taken concurrently with CIV 3326. CIV 3325 Environmental Analysis I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.930) Winter Quarter A laboratory course for the analytical evaluation of environmental conditions. Included are coagulation studies, chlorine demand determination, and the use of colorimetric spectroscopy. Interpretation of ana- lytical results for practical applications is also stressed. Prereq.: CIV 3310; to be taken concurrently with CVI 3311. CIV 3326 Environmental Analysis II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.931) Spring Quarter Laboratory analyses are continued with emphasis on the chemical and biological analyses associated with wastewater treatment methods. Nitrogen determi- nations are included. Gas chromatography and atomic absorption spectroscopy are used for trace analyses of organics and metals. Prereq.: to be taken concurrently with CIV 3312. CIV 3327 Environmental Analysis I and II 4 QM. (formerly 01.933) Fall Quarter This course embodies the material in CIV 3325 and CIV 3326. Prereq.: to be taken concurrently with CIV 3312. CIV 3341 Industrial Waste Disposal 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.913) Fall and Spring Quarter Evaluation of industrial waste problems and devel- opment of process design for the required treatment facilities; study of various manufacturing processes and their wastewater problems; industrial waste sur- vey techniques; characteristics of industrial wastes; evaluation of hazardous materials; waste reduction methods; physical, chemical, biological and ad- vanced treatment methods; industrial wastewaters and disposal and treatment of industrial solids and liquids. Prereq.: CIV 3311 and CIV 3317. CIV 3343 Unit Operations in 2 Q.H. Environmental Engineering I (formerly 01.935) Winter Quarter Laboratory scale unit operations illustrating the physical, chemical and biological principles involved in water and wastewater treatment. The aim is to obtain criteria for system design. Topics include dis- infection, water softening, sedimentation, chemical coagulation, and ion exchange. Prereq.: CIV 3317 and CIV 3326. CIV 3344 Unit Operations in 2 Q.H. Environmental Engineering II (formerly 01 .936) Spring Quarter Continuation of CIV 3343. Topics include biode- gradability studies using activated sludge, fixed-film Civil Engineering / 109 reactors, anaerobic digestion, vacuum filtration, and chemical-physical processes involved in wastewater treatment. A comprehensive evaluation of each unit process is required in a report from each student. Prereq.: CIV 3343. CIV 3345 Unit Operations in 4 Q.H. Environmental Engineering I and II (formerly 01.938) Spring Quarter This course embodies the material in CIV 3343 and CIV 3344. Prereq.: CIV 3317 and CIV 3326 or CIV 3327. CIV 3348 Stream Sanitation 2 aH. (formerly 01.954) Winter Quarter Analysis of the fate and effects of discharge of con- servative and nonconservative pollutants in surface receiving waters and groundwaters. Topics include BOD and oxygen relationships in streams, eutrophi- cation and general water quality improvement tech- niques. Prereq.: CIV 3310. CIV 3351 Open Channel Flow I 2 QH. (formerly 01.902) Fall Quarter Open channel flow classification; energy and mo- mentum principles; uniform flow calculations; design of channels for uniform flow; channel transitions; gradually varied flow; surface profile computations; spatially varied flow. Prereq.: Undergraduate fluid me- chanics and hydraulic engineering. CIV 3352 Open Channel Flow II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.903) Winter Quarter Rapidly varied flow, hydraulic jump and its applica- tions; flow through nonprismatic channel sections; flow in channels of nonlinear alignment, wave action; unsteady flow, dynamic equations; wave propaga- tion; flood routing in rivers. Prereq.: CIV 3351. CIV 3355 Hydrology I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.908) Winter Quarter Elements of the hydrologic cycle, precipitation, evap- oration, streamflow, groundwater; water balance equation for watersheds; streamflow hydrographs, unit hydrographs, hydrographs of overland flow; relation between precipitation and runoff; hydrologic and hydraulic routings, linear reservoirs routing. Prereq.: CIV 3131 and undergraduate fluid mechanics and hydraulic engineering. CIV 3356 Hydrology II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.909) Spring Quarter Deterministic hydrologic models; probability in hy- drology; stochastic hydrology, generation of data, Markov chain series; flobd forecasting; applications of hydrology and design considerations. Prereq.: CIV 3132 and CIV 3355. CIV 3358 Flow Through Porous Media 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.924) Fall Quarter, Alternate Years Groundwater uses; properties of porous media; in- filtration, saturated and unsaturated zones, soil water interactions; types of aquifers; Darcy's law, Dupuit- Forchemier's assumption, groundwater flow equa- tions, steady and unsteady cases; steady state see- page problems, method of flow nets; dispersion of groundwater, quality and contamination of ground- water. Prereq.: Undergraduate fluid mechanics and hydraulic engineering. CIV 3360 Groundwater and Seepage 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.925) Winter Quarter, Alternate Years Hydraulics of wells, steady and transient flow equa- tions, pumping tests, multiple well systems, methods of images; superposition, leaky aquifers, salt-water intrusion, static equilibrium and hydrodynamic equi- librium, control of saline water intrusion; numerical and experimental methods, physical models, analog models, finite difference solution, introduction to the method of finite elements. Prereq.: CIV 3358. CIV 3363 Hydraulic Structures I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.963) Fall Quarter, Alternate Years Fteservoirs, characteristics, capacity, sedimentation, waves and floods; forces on dams; types of dams; gravity dams; earth dams; arch dams; cofferdams; turbines. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3364 Hydraulic Structures II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.964) Winter Quarter, Alternate Years Intake structures; outlet structures, spillways; tun- nels; canals; offshore protection. Prereq.: CIV 3363. CIV 3367 Water Resources Planning 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.965) Spring Quarter, Alternate Years The nature of water resources projects (sociopoliti- cal, legal); water resources planning objectives (eco- nomic, cost, benefit); problems in water resources engineering (development, design, operational, re- capitulation); introduction to linear and dynamic pro- gramming; simulation methods; case studies. Prereq.: CIV 3141 and CIV 3355. CIV 3370 Air Pollution Engineering 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.950) Winter Quarter Theory and practice related to engineering manage- ment of air resources; applications of models for the atmospheric dispersion of pollutants; analysis of control systems for gaseous and particulate emis- sions utilizing dry collection, wet collection, absorp- tion, and catalytic processes. Discussion of source control evaluation and air quality standards. Course CIV 3374 is recommended. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. 110 /Engineering CIV 3372 Air Sampling and Analysis 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.955) Spring Quarter A laboratory course in air pollution measurements utilizing physical, chemical and instrumental meth- ods and calibration and use of sampling equipment for gaseous and particulate pollutants. Identification and quantitive measurements of pollutants are per- formed utilizing microscopy, spectrophotometer/, gas chromatography, and atomic absorption spectros- copy. Prereq.: CIV 3370. CIV 3374 Air Pollution Science 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.957) Fall Quarter Biological and chemical aspects of air pollution with emphasis on the toxicological aspects of the envi- ronment, physiological effects of aerosols, analysis of organic and inorganic constituents of the atmos- phere and rationale for establishment of air quality criteria and standards. Note; This course is open to non-engineering as well as to engineering graduate students. Prereq.: Consent of the department and instructor. CIV 3376 Industrial Hygiene 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.952) Winter Quarter Characterization and control of industrial problems associated with noise, heat and ventilation. Physical and biological aspects of environmental stress are discussed. Emphasis is placed on the application of engineering principles to the design of control sys- tems. Evaluation procedures for control effectiveness are reviewed. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School ■ of Engineering. CIV 3378 Environmental Planning and 2 Q.H. Management (formerly 01.980) Fall Quarter Planning and operation, and management of specific environmental systems, such as collection systems; solids separators, combined systems control, sewer flushing, deposition loadings with least-squared ap- plications, and case studies in optimal design of treatment plants with variable input. Prereq.: Admis- sion to Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3380 Environmental Protection 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.985) Spring Quarter Environmental quality and its effects on health, com- fort, aesthetics, balance of ecosystems and renew- able resources; interaction of the water-land-air com- plex, vector control, food protection, ionizing radiation, other radiation, and the energies of heat and sound. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3384 Solid Waste Management 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.945) Fall Quarter Basic solid waste management for engineering and science students covering storage, collection prac- tices, sanitary landfill principles, incineration prac- tices and reclamation possibilities. Prereq.: Admis- sion to Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3386 Hazardous Waste Practices 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.946) , Spring Quarter An investigation of hazardous waste management practices including: identification, storage, transport, treatment processes, incineration, recycling, reuse, chemical landfills and groundwater contamination. Prereq.: CIV 3311 or CIV 3312. av 3388 Design of Environmental 2 Q.H. Systems I (formerly 01.971) Winter Quarter Examination of analysis and design of environmental control systems using computer-based models as a tool. Development of components of a treatment sys- tem model applicable to simulate process using ac- cepted mathematical relationships. Optimization of various combinations of systems on the basis of econ- omics and/or performance. Development of sensitivity tests for fluctuation in such items as labor or power units costs. Prereq.: CIV 3317 and general knowledge of a computer language (BASIC or FORTRAN). CIV 3389 Design of Environmental 2 Q.H. Systems II (formerly 01.972) Spring Quarter Fundamental design concepts of complete systems for environmental control, including water treatment; wastewater disposal, air quality control, and solid waste disposal; evaluation of economic alternatives for environmental quality control; discussion of ac- tual engineering reports and designs will include considerations of the logic and conclusions. Prereq.: CIV 3388. CIV 3392 Seminar-Environmental 2 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 01 .994) Fall Quarter Discussion by professional engineers and scientists, faculty, and graduate students on subjects in the area of environmental engineering and science. Open to alt students actively working on either a Master's Report or Thesis. Prereq:: Consent of the instructor. CIV 3410 Soil Mechanics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.871) Fall Quarter Phase relationships and index properties, permea- bility, capillarity, effective stress concept, porous me- dia flow, stress distribution, stress path concept, 1 - D settlement analysis. Prereq.: Undergraduate course in soil mechanics. CIV 3411 Soil Mechanics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.872) Winter Quarter Continuation of CIV 3410. Consolidation theory, 3- D settlement analysis, shear strength properties of soils, stress path analysis. Prereq.: CIV 3410. Civil Engineering / 11 1 CIV 3412 Soil Mechanics III 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.873) Spring Quarter Continuation of CIV 341 1. Stability of open cuts and natural slopes; numerical analysis and computer ap- plications to stability, seepage, consolidation, and deformation problems, laboratory testing; field in- strumentation; special topics. Prereq.: CIV 3411 or CIV 3413. CIV 3413 Soil Mechanics I and II 4 Q.H. (formerly 01.877) Fall Quarter Embodies the material in CIV 3410 and CIV 3411. Prereq.: Undergraduate course in soil mechanics. CIV 3420 Foundation Engineering I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.874) Fall Quarter, Alternate Years Lateral earth pressure theory; retaining wall design; anchored bulkheads; braced cofferdams, dewater- ing, observational approach to design. Prereq.: CIV 3411. CIV 3421 Foundation Engineering II 2 QH. (formerly 01.875) Winter Quarter, Alternate Years Bearing capacity, design of shallow foundations, site improvement (preloading, deep densification), case studies of foundation performance. Prereq.: CIV 3420. CIV 3422 Foundation Engineering III 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.876) Spring Quarter, Alternate Years Pile foundations, caissons, selection of foundation scheme; case studies. Prereq.: CIV 3421. CIV 3423 Foundation Engineering I and II 4 Q.H. (formerly 01.878) Spring Quarter Embodies the course content offered in CIV 3420 and CIV 3421. Prereq.: CIV 3411 or CIV 3413. CIV 3430 Soil-Structure Interaction 4QH (formerly 01.870) Winter Quarter Introduction to pile foundations; t)eam on elastic foun- dations; deformations of axially and laterally loaded single piles and pile groups using available computer software; pile load tests; case histories. Prereq.: CIV 3411 or CIV 341 3. CIV 3440 Experimental Soi Mechanics 4 Q.H. (formerly 01.879) Spring Quarter Laboratory evaluation of engineering properties of soils with emphasis on permeability, compressibility and strength. Introduction to model analysis of static and dynamic behavior of soils. Prereq.: CIV 3411 or CIV 3413. CIV 3450 Engineering Geology 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.882) Fall Quarter, Alternate Years Review of minerals, selected topics in historical and structural geology related to engineering geology; origin and occurrence of various rock types, geo- logic structures, faulting and joint systems; weath- ering of rock and weathering products, glaciation, geologic mapping and environmental aspects. Prereq.: Undergraduate course in geology. CIV 3460 Rock Mechanics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.884) Winter Quarter, Alternate Years Interrelationship with other disciplines; index prop- erties; classification systems; laboratory tests; state of stress and stress distribution. Prereq.: CIV 3450. CIV 3461 Rock Mechanics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.885) Spring Quarter, Alternate Years Behavior of rock under combined stresses; pore pressure effects; failure theories; in-situ deformation modulus and shear strength characteristics; field testing. Prereq.: CIV 3460. CIV 3470 Soil Dynamtes I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.886) Fall Quarter Dynamic response analysis of one-degree-of-free- dom systems, characteristics of earthquakes and resulting ground motions, response spectra, stress- strain behavior of soils during dynamic and repeated loading, laboratory and field determinations, wave propagation through elastic media, effect of local soil condition upon earthquake ground motions. Prereq.: Admission to the Geotechnical Engineering Program. CIV 3471 Soil Dynamics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.887) Winter Quarter Dynamic response analysis of a single mass, multi- degree-of-freedom systems; machine foundation de- sign and analysis; soil-structure interaction, ground vibrations, sources and control; shear strength dur- ing repeated loading, liquefication; dynamic analysis of retaining structures and slopes. Prereq.: CIV 3470. CIV 3480 Seismic Design 2 QH. (formerly 01.850) Spring Quarter Earthquake considerations in building design proc- ess, dynamic analysis of multidegree-of-freedom elastic systems subjected to earthquake motions and cyclically applied forces, inelastic dynamic response analysis. Seismic provisions of building codes; soil- structure interaction. Prereq.: CIV 3470. CIV 3485 Selected Topk:s in Earthquake 2 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 01.851) Spring Quarter Seismic hazard and seismic risk analysis; seismic design decision analysis; lifeline earthquake engi- neering; pipelines, liquid storage tanks, water distri- bution systems; earthquake analysis of earth dams and slop)es; dynamic analysis of retaining walls and offshore facilities; dynamically loaded piles. Prereq.: CIV 3470. CIV 3510 Advaiced Structural 2 Q.H, Mechanics I (formerly 01.841) Fall Quarter Analysis of force equilibrium (stress), deformation deplacement (strain), and forcedeformation (Hooke's 112 /Engineering Law) for an elastic solid; compatibility; governing equations for complete and approximate elasticity solution. Plane stress solution for narrow rectangular beams. Torsion, Saint Venant's theory, membrane analogy, rectangular sections, thin open and closed sections. Introduction to bending of thin plates. Prereq.: Undergraduate structural mechanics and structural analysis. CIV 351 1 Advanced Structural 2 Q.H. Mechanics II (formerly 01.842) Winter Quarter Consistent models for the mechanics of simple structural elements: axial, bending, plane stress, and the like. Equilibrium, geometry of deformation, and force/deformation as the governing relations of all structural elements. Work and energy principles: vir- tual displacement, virtual forces, minimum potential energy minimum complementary energy, introduc- tion to variational ideas, Rayleigh-Ritz method. Prereq.: CIV 3510. CIV 3512 Advanced Structural 4 Q.H. Mechanics I and II (formerly 01.847) Fall Quarter This course embodies the material in CIV 3510 and CIV 3511. However, more emphasis will be placed on variational principles. Prereq.: Undergraduate structural mechanics and structural analysis. CIV 3520 Engineering Materials I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.824) Winter Quarter Mechanical, microstructural, physical and chemical properties of cements and concretes and their roles in structures, pavements, bridge decks, repair and rehabilitation will be covered. Different concretes such as expansive cement concrete, sulfate-resist- ant concrete, sulfur concrete and fiber-reinforced concrete will be introduced. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. CIV 3521 Engineering Materials II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.825) Spring Quarter Topics include the elastic, plastic and viscoelastic properties of solids and composites; introduction to fracture mechanics and fatigue. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. CIV 3525 Stability (formerly 01.859) 2 Q.H. Spring Quarter Prediction of the buckling loads in columns, behavior of beam columns, use of numerical methods to com- pute the buckling loads of nonprismatic members, buckling of plates. Prereq.: CIV 3510 and CIV 3511. CIV 3530 Rnite-Element Analysis of 2 Q.H. Structures I (formerly 01.843) Spring Quarter Introduction to finite-element method for structural analysis. Overview of direct stiffness method. For- mulation of element stiffness matrices by direct use of elasticity relations and by energy methods for simple elements; axial, bending, plane stress, and plane strain; transformation of coordinate systems; lumping work equivalent loads; bounds on the error solution. Plate bending. Use of finite-element com- puter programs. Prereq.: CIV 3511. CIV 3531 Finite-Element Analysis of 2 Q.H. Structures II (formerly 01.844) Fall Quarter Additional applications of the finite-element method. Prereq.: CIV 3530. CIV 3532 Finite-Element Analysis of 4 Q.H. Structures I and II (formerly 01 .856) Winter Quarter Embodies the course content offered in CIV 3530 and CIV 3531. Prereq.: CIV 3512 or CIV 3511. CIV 3535 Advanced Structural Analysis 4 Q.H. (formerly 01.845) Fall Quarter Offered days. Formulation and solution of structural problems with primary application to member sys- tems (trusses, frames, curved members), matrix for- mulation of flexibility and stiffness methods: geo- metrically nonlinear behavior. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. CIV 3540 Optimization in Structural 4 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 01.852) Spring Quarter Unconstrained and constrained optimization; Kuhn- Tucker condition: Sequential Unconstrained Minimi- zation Technique (SUMT); design sensitivity analysis; Gradient Projection Method (GRP). Although problem formulation is quite general, emphasis will be on the practical structural application where the displace- ment (stiffness) method is used as part of the struc- tural-synthesis^ algorithm. Knowledge of FORTRAN assumed. Prereq.: CIV 3535. CIV 3545 Structural Dynamics 4 Q.H. (formerly 01.857) Fall Quarter Single degree of freedom structural systems, free vibration, forced vibration, Duhmel integral, time step integration, multidegree-of-freedom structural sys- tems, model analysis, damping, response spectra, nonlinear systems, earthquake ground motions. Prereq.: concurrently with CIV 3535. CIV 3550 Numerical Methods in 4 an. Engineering Analysis (formerly 01.890) Winter Quarter Finite elements and finite differences methods for analysis of linear and nonlinear problems in solid, structural, and fluid mechanics. Computer-based nu- merical solutions in statics and dynamics (model analysis and direct integration). Eigensolution algo- rithms. Applications: forced vibration analysis, earth- quakes, offshore, structural analysis. Prereq.: CIV 3535 and CIV 3545. Civil Engineering / 113 CIV 3560 Concrete Structures I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.853) Fall Quarter Fundamentals of prestressing; design of prestressed concrete beams for flexure and shear; design of end blocks; load balancing method for the analysis of indeterminate prestressed structures; column de- sign. Prereq.: Undergraduate Reinforced Concrete Design and Structural Analysis. CIV 3561 Concrete Structures II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.854) Winter Quarter Design of two-way slabs by the equivalent frame method; yield line theory; prestressing of slabs; the strip method; and introduction to folded plate design. Prereq.: Undergraduate Reinforced Concrete Design and Structural Analysis. CIV 3562 Concrete Structures III 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.855) Spring Quarter Additional topics of folded plate design, design of thin shelled structures including hyperbolic para- boloids and shells of revolution. Prereq.: CIV 3561. CIV 3570 Advanced Steel Design I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.861) Fall Quarter An advanced course in elastic design in structural steel. Design problems involving braced and rigid frame structures subject to gravity, wind and seismic loads are considered. Prereq.: Undergraduate Steel Design and Structural Analysis. CIV 3571 Advanced Steel Design II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.862) Winter Quarter An advanced course in analysis and design in struc- tural steel with emphasis on plastic behavior includ- ing rigid frame buildings and braced multistory frame buildings. Prereq.: Undergraduate Steel Design and Structural Analysis. CIV 3572 Advanced Steel Design III 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.863) Spring Quarter Advanced problems in elastic and plastic design of structural steel. Topics include curved girders, cable supported structures, fatigue considerations, and composite sections with steel deck. Prereq.: Under- graduate Steel Design and Structural Analysis. CIV 3580 Computer-Aided Structural 4 Q.H. Design (formerly 01.848) Winter Quarter General characteristics of computer aided design software, development of software for the solution of typical structural steel and reinforced concrete de- sign problems. Prereq.: CIV 3535. CIV 3585 Marine Structures 4 Q.H. (formerly 01.846) Spring Quarter This course covers the behavior of marine structures from the materials and structural analysis/design considerations. The first part covers the behaviors and properties of different materials in the marine environment. The second part covers the analysis/ design aspects of these structures subjected to dif- ferent environmental forces such as ice and ship impacts, wind and earthquakes. Prereq.: CIV 3550 and CIV 3520. CIV 3610 Urban Public Transportation 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.811) Fall Quarter Analysis and planning of public transportation sys- tems, including bus, subway, commuter rail, and par- atransit; performance prediction; service evaluation and efficiency control measure; demand prediction; institutional and economic issues. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate Scfiool. CIV 3620 Traffic Flow Theory I 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.813) Winter Quarter Statistical methods in traffic flow theory, probability models, hypothesis testing and its use, queuing the- ory, and simulation techniques. Prereq.: Appropriate courses in calculus and statistics and permission of instructor CIV 3621 Traffic Flow Theory II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.814) Spring Quarter Continuation of CIV 3620. Deterministic methods in traffic flow theory, car following models, various methods of determination of capacity and level of service, computer applications. Prereq.: CIV 3620. CIV 3630 Traffic Engineering 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.817) Spring Quarter Measurement of traffic characteristics and system performance; theory of traffic flow and analytical techniques; systems hardware design and evalua- tion; current concerns of energy, environmental, and urban amenity impacts; computer applications and institutional characteristics. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. CIV 3635 Transportation Engineering 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.820) Winter Quarter Description and evaluation of different modes of transportation existing and proposed; their perform- ance and cost characteristics; design, performance, and selection criteria for vehicles and roadbeds. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. CIV 3640 Theory and Practice of 2 Q.H. Transportation Planning I (formerly 01 .835) Fall Quarter Establishments of goals, objectives and criteria; the current planning framework; examination of perform- ance characteristics of transportation systems, in- cluding public and private modes on land, water, and airways. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. 114 /Engineering CIV 3641 Theory and Practice of 2 Q.H. Transportation Planning 11 (formerly 01.836) Fall Quarter Continuation of CIV 3640. Transportation demand modeling from regional economic analysis to traffic and public transportation network assignment; tech- nical and economic evaluation; current issues, in- cluding environmental assessment, transportation systems management, citizen participation, and plan- ning in developing countries. Prereq.: CIV 3640 to ' be taken previously or concurrently. CIV 3650 Urban Transportation Analysis i 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.815) Winter Quarter Principles of analysis of urban transportation sys- tems including travel demand equilibrium, perform- ance and evaluation techniques using aggregate and disaggregate methods. Prereq.: CIV 3641 and ap- propriate graduate statistics courses. CIV 3651 Urban Transportation Analysis II 2 Q.H. (formerly 01.816) Spring Quarter Continuation of CIV 3650. Conceptualization, for- mulation, application, and evaluation of mathematical models utilized in urban transportation systems anal- ysis; case studies of representative analyses. The objective of this course is to help prepare students to conceptualize, formulate, apply and evaluate ap- propriate mathematical modeling techniques in transportation. Prereq.: CIV 3650. CIV 3798 Master's Thesis Continuation 0 Q.H. (formerly 01.9X1) Any Quarter CIV 3799 PhD Continuation (formerly 01.9X4) Any Quarter 0Q.H. 2Q.H. CIV 3830 Special Topic in Civil Engineering (formerly 01.992) Fall, Winter, Spring Quarter Topics of interest to the staff member conducting this course are presented for advanced study. The course is initiated by the appropriate discipline com- mittee and approved by the department. Prereq.: Consent of the instructor CIV 3835 Special Project in CivH 2 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 01.995) Any Quarter An individual effort in an area selected by student and adviser and approved by the Departmental Dis- cipline Committee resulting in a definitive report. Prereq.: Permission of the department. CIV 3850 Master's Report 4 Q.H. (formerly 01.993) Any Quarter An individual effort consisting of laboratory and/or literature investigation and analysis or advanced de- sign of a project in an area of civil engineering selected by student and adviser resulting in a defin- itive report. Prereq.: Permission of the Civil Engi- neering Department. CIV 3851 Master's Report Any Quarter 2Q.H. 8 Q.H. CIV 3860 Master's Thesis (formerly 01.991) Any Quarter Analytical and/or experimental research conducted by arrangement w/ith and under the supervision of the department. Prereq.: Permissbn of the Civil En- gineering Department. CIV 3861 Master's Thesis Any Quarter 4Q.H. 2Q.H. CIV 3862 Master's Thesis Any Quarter CIV 3870 PhD Thesis (formerly 01.997) 2 Q.H. Any Quarter Open to full-time doctoral students only. Prereq.: Ad- mission to doctoral program in Civil Engineering. Interdisciplinary Transportation OINT 3798 Master's Thesis Continuation Any Quarter 0 Q.H. 2Q.H. OINT 3835 Special Project in Transportation (formerly 93.818) Any Quarter An individual effort in an area selected by student and adviser resulting in a definite report. Prereq.: Permission of the Civil Engineering Department. OINT 3850 Master's Report in 4 Q.H. Transportation (formerly 93.819) Any Quarter An individual effort consisting of laboratory and/or literature investigation and analysis or advanced de- sign of a project in an area of transportation selected by student and adviser resulting in a definitive report. Prereq.: Permission of the Civil Engineering Department. OINT 3860 Master's Thesis in 8 Q.H. Transportation (formerly 93.820) Any Quarter Analytical and/or experimental work conducted by arrangement with and under the supervision of the department. Prereq.: Permission of the Civil Engi- neering Department. Electrical and Computer Engineering / 1 15 Electrical and Computer Engineering Each course description includes information on the expected quarter in which classes are usually offered. The quarters listed are presented here for planning purposes; however, the Graduate School of Engineering cannot guarantee that all courses will be offered. Students must refer to the Graduate School of Engineering Quarterly Course Offering sheets to determine what courses are actually offered in any given quarter and at what day and time. ECE 3100 Introduction to Circuits and 4 Q.H. Systems (formerly 03.846) Fall Quarter The circuit elements (R, L and C) are introduced. Kirchoff's laws, Tellegan and Thevenin's theorem. Mesh and nodal analysis. Development of system function approach, Laplace and Fourier transform theory applied to circuit analysis. Sinusoidal steady- state, n-port network theory, and power and energy concepts. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School ECE 3101 Introduction to Electronics 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.847) Winter Quarter Characteristics of the theoretical physical junction. The Ebers-Moll model for bipolar junction transistors, characteristics of bipolar and field-effect devices, basic digital inverters and logic gates and various logic families. Use of transistors in the design of analog circuits. Biasing, linearized incremental models, load lines, signal flowgraphs, frequency re- sponse and gain calculation for single and cascaded stages. Prereq.: ECE 3100 or equivalent. ECE 31 02 Introduction to Electromagnetic 4 Q.H. Field Theory (formerly 03.848) Spring Quarter Definition of scalar and vector fields; vector calculus; concepts of gradient, divergence, curl and the "del" ofjerator; free-space electrostatics; the generaliza- tion of the Maxwell equations to the case of time- varying fields; Faraday induction law, wave equations and the place wave solution. Prereq.: ECE 3100 or equivalent. ECE 3103 Introduction to Digital 4 Q.H. Computers (formerly 03.849) Fall Quarter Basic components of digital systems and methods for their analysis and design, combinational and se- quential circuits, integrated circuit logic families and functional building blocks, registers, counters, de- coders, multiplexers and memories. Data represen- tation and coding techniques. Central processor al- ternatives; instruction formats, addressing modes, bus structures, arithmetic units, timing analysis and stacks. Algorithms for arithmetic operations with var- ious data representations. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. ECE 3104 introduction to Communications 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.850) Spring Quarter Review of system theory, convolution, Fourier series, Fourier integral, signal analysis, Fourier methods, correlation functions, density functions, power spec- tra, amplitude modulation, frequency modulation, phase modulation, sampling theory and digital mod- ulation techniques. Prereq.: ECE 3108 or equivalent. ECE 3105 Introduction to System 2 Q.H. Software I Fall Quarter A knowledge of PASCAL is helpful but not required for this course. Programming style considerations, software testing and software reliability. Data struc- tures, including stacks, queues, linked lists, trees and graphs. The course emphasizes the use of PASCAL to implement typical system software routines that use the above data structures. Miscellaneous topics also discussed are modern system software consid- erations for multiprocessor, array processor and graphic processor systems. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. ECE 31 06 Introduction to Systems 2 Q.H. Software II Winter Quarter An analysis of absolute and relocatable program translators. The topics covered are assemblers, dis- assemblers, macroassemblers, linkers, an overview of compilers, interpreters, simulators and emulators. For a typical lab assignment, the student will design and implement an absolute assembler for a very simplified instruction set. Prereq.: ECE 3105. ECE 3107 Introduction to System 2 Q.H. Software III Spring Quarter An analysis of operating system structure and con- cepts. Memory management, fragmentation, paging, virtual memory, job and process scheduling, I/O management, file management. Operating system concepts for multiuser systems. Critical variables, race conditions, Dekkeer's algorithm, some sample multiuser routines. For a typical lab assignment, the student will write simulated paged memory manage- ment and process scheduling routines. Prereq.: ECE 3106. ECE 3108 Introduction to Signals and 4 Q.H. Systems Winter Quarter Description and analysis of continuous and discrete signals and systems. Properties of systems. The in- put-output relationship of linear time-invariant sys- tems. Discrete and continuous Fourier series and Fourier transforms. Laplace and z-transforms. Ele- ments of filtering and sampling. Prereq.: ECE 3100 or equivalent. 116 / Engineering ECE 3120 Power Circuit Analysis I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.925) Fall Quarter Fundamental concepts of single-phase and poly- phase power systems; definitions of terms; use of per unit quantities; equivalent circuits of symmetrical 3-phase systems; introduction of symmetrical com- ponents; short circuits on systems with a single power source. Prereq.: BSEE or ECE 3100 and ECE 3102. ECE 3130 Electrical Machinery Theory i 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.940) Fall Quarter Review of magnetic circuit concepts and electro- mechanical energy-conversion principles; steady- state analysis of transformers, synchronous ma- chines, and induction machines. Prereq.: BSEE or ECE 3100 and ECE 3102. ECE 3200 Mathematical Methods in 2 Q.H. Computer Science (formerly 03.8A1 ) Fall Quarter Algebraic concepts relevant to computer science; sets, relations, mapping, orderings, algebraic systems. Boolean algebras, groups, rings, finite fields, intro- duction to vector spaces and linear algebras over finite fields. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. ECE 321 1 Mathematical Methods in 4 Q.H. Electrical Engineering I (formerly 03.823) Fall and Winter Quarters Linear algebraic equations; Gauss algorithm; linear operators in an n-dimensional vector space over in- finite and finite fields; characteristic value problem, minimal polynomial; functions of a matrix; equiva- lence, congruence, and similarity transformation, canonical forms; polynomial matrices; Smith normal form; determinantal divisors; invariant polynomials, elementary divisors; companion and Jordan canon- ical matrices; decomposition of a vector space into invariant subspaces with respect to a linear operator. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School. ECE 321 2 Mathematical Methods in 2 Q.H. Electrical Engineering l-A Fall and Winter Quarters ECE 3212 and ECE 3213 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3211, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3213 Mathematical Methods in 2 Q.H. Electrical Engineering l-B Winter and Spring Quarters Continuation of ECE 3212. Prereq.: ECE 3212. ECE 3221 Linear Systems Analysis 4 Q.H (formerly 03.827) Fall and Winter Quarters Introduction to the state variable theory of continu- ous and discrete linear systems. Standard canonical representations. The concept of state and the rep- resentation of interconnected systems. Linear spaces. The state equations and their solution. Stability. In- troduction to the general control problem in terms of controllability and observability. Prereq.: ECE 3211, ECE 3108 or equivalent. ECE 3222 Linear Systems Analysis A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.825) Fall and Winter Quarters ECE 3222 and ECE 3223 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3221, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3223 Linear Systems Analysis B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.826) Winter and Spring Quarters Continuation of ECE 3222. Prereq.: ECE 3222. ECE 3231 Mathematical Methods in 4 Q.H. Electrical Engineering II Summer Quarter Complex variable theory; mapping by functions, def- inite and indefinite integrals, Cauchy integral formula, Laurent series, the residue theorem and branch points. Application of complex variable theory to Fourier theory, Hilbert transforms, and conformal transformations in the analysis of linear systems and in electrostatics; the Schwarz-Christoffel transfor- mation, Ftoisson's integral formula and concept of analytical continuation. Prereq.: Admission to Grad- uate School. ECE 3232 Mathematical Methods in 2 Q.H. Electrical Engineering ll-A (formerly 03.8C1) Summer Quarter ECE 3232 and ECE 3233 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3231, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3233 Mathematical Methods in 2 Q.H. Electrical Engineering ll-B (formerly 03.8C2) Summer Quarter Continuation of ECE 3232. Prereq.: ECE 3232 ECE 3241 Applied Probability and 4 Q.H. Stochastic Processes (formerly 03.902) Fall and Winter Quarters Introductory probability, sample space and random variables, examples of discrete and continuous prob- ability distribution functions, averages, moments and characteristic function, multivariate distributions, change of variables and functions of variables, cen- tral limit theorem, description of stochastic vectors. General concepts of stochastic processes, station- arity and ergodicity, stochastic continuity and differ- entiation, the Gaussian process, linear systems with stochastic inputs, correlation functions and power spectra, matched filtering, stochastic orthogonality and linear mean-square estimation filtering and pre- diction. Prereq.: ECE 3108 or equivalent. ECE 3242 Applied Probability and 2 Q.H. Stochastic Processes A (formerly 03.900) Fall and Winter Quarters ECE 3242 and ECE 3243 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3241, but in two 2QH courses. Electrical and Computer Engineering / 1 17 ECE 3243 Applied Probability and 2 Q.H. Stochastic Processes B (formerly 03.901) Winter and Spring Quarters Continuation of ECE 3242. Prereq.: ECE 3242. ECE 3302 Power Circuit Analysis II 2 QH. (formerly 03.926) Winter Quarter This course is a continuation of ECE 3120 Power Circuit Analysis I. Sequence impedances of various power-system elements are considered from an ap- plication point of view; unsymmetrical faults on oth- erwise symmetrical 3-phase systems; open conduc- tors and asymmetrical connections and loadings; analysis of simultaneous faults on 3-phase systems. Prereq.: ECE 3120. ECE 3303 Power Circuit Analysis III 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.927) Spring Quarter This course is a continuation of ECE 3302, Power Circuit Analysis II. Introduction of Clarke components and applications in analysis of asymmetrical systems and faults; application of Clarke components to the solution of surge phenomena problems; transmission line theory; fundamentals of systems stability. Prereq.: ECE 3302. ECE 3304 Solid State AC and DC Motor 2 Q.H. Control Systems (formerly 03.929) Winter Quarter The application of solid-state devices to the control of AC and DC electrical machinery including recti- fiers, inverters, choppers and cyclo-converters, as applied to drive systems in industry and transpor- tation. The course will emphasize a case method approach. Prereq.: BSEE or ECE 3100 and ECE 3101. ECE 3305 Computers in Power Systems I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.935) Fall Quarter Techniques used in solving power system problems with the digital computer. Matrix formulations are examined, followed by a detailed treatment of the short-circuit problem, including balanced and un- balanced faults. Various iterative techniques are studied for the solution of the power-flow problem. Prereq.: BSEE or ECE 3120. ECE 3306 Computers in Power Systems II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.936) Winter Quarter Practical considerations of solving large scale net- works are discussed. Network reductions, distribu- tion factors and contingency analysis techniques are developed. Digital models for regulated generators, fixed and load tap changing transformers and HVDC transmission lines are examined. Computer methods for economic dispatch, loss coefficients and appli- cation of pumped hydro are developed. Prereq.: ECE 3305. ECE 3308 Electrical Machinery Theory II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.941) Winter Quarter Mathematical description of a synchronous machine; per-unit representation; steady-state theory and transient performance; flux distribution and satura- tion in synchronous machines. Prereq.: ECE 3130. ECE 3309 Electrical Machinery Theory III 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.942) Spring Quarter Review of transient behavior of synchronous ma- chines; stability studies and excitation systems; syn- chronous machine modeling; generator protection; trends in development of large generators. Prereq.: ECE 3308. ECE 3311 Software Engineering I 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.896) Fall Quarter An introduction to basic concepts in software en- gineering principles is given. Techniques of struc- tured software design and testing are discussed along with issues of program reliability and com- plexibility. Management techniques are touched upon and a case study of a typical large software problem is undertaken. Prereq.: ECE 3105, 3106, 3107 or equivalent, and a knowledge of a high-level program- ming language. ECE 3312 Software Engineering l-A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.893) Fall and Winter Quarters ECE 3312 and ECE 3313 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3311, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3313 Software Engineering l-B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.894) Winter and Spring Quarters Continuation of ECE 3312. Prereq.: ECE 3312. ECE 3314 Software Engineering II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.895) Spring Quarter Focus turns away from the general issues of the first two courses in this sequence and toward a very specific issue, modular design of software. Issues of stepwise refinement and top-down design are ex- plored in depth, and organizational/data-flow issues are considered. Prereq.: ECE 3311. ECE 3321 Digital Signal Processing 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.8T9) Winter Quarter Theory and practice of modern signal processing techniques. Characteristics of discrete signals and systems; sampling and A/D conversion; difference equations; convolution; the z-transform, the Fourier transform and the discrete Fourier transform; fast Fourier transform algorithms; chirp z-transform al- gorithm; digital filter realizations; design techniques for IIP and FIR digital filters; computer programs for filter design; quantization effects in digital signal processing. Prereq.: ECE 3221. 118 /Engineering ECE 3322 Digital Signal Processing A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8T7) Fall and Winter Quarters ECE 3322 and ECE 3323 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3321, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3323 Digital Signal Processing B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8T8) Winter and Spring Quarters Continuation of ECE 3322. Prereq.: ECE 3322. ECE 3325 Numerical Methods and 4 Q.H. Computer Applications I (formerly 03.8T0) Winter Quarter Survey of numerical methods applied to engineering and scientific problems with emphasis on machine implementation and problem solving; roundoff errors and cumulative errors; difference and summation calculus; roots of polynomials and nonlinear func- tions; orthogonal functions including polynomical, least squares, and Chebyshev approximation of func- tions; systems of algebraic equations, matrix nota- tion, and machine implementation; inversion of mat- rices including iterative methods; sparse matrix techniques. Interpolation; numeric quadrature; nu- meric integration of ordinary differential equations including predictor-corrector methods; stiff dynamic equations, partial differential equations, approxima- tions, boundary value problems. Prereq.: Admission to Graduate School and a working knowledge of FORTRAN. ECE 3326 Numerical Methods and 2 Q.H. Computer Applications l-A (formerly 03.8T1) Fall and Winter Quarters ECE 3326 and ECE 3327 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3325, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3327 Numerical Methods and 2 Q.H. Computers Applications l-B (formerly 03.8T2) Winter and Spring Quarters Continuation of ECE 3326. Prereq.: ECE 3326. ECE 3328 Numerical Methods and 4 Q.H. Computer Applications II (formerly 03.8T3) Spring Quarter Spectral analysis, including fast Fourier transforms, Hilbert transforms, convolution, and correlation tech- niques. Optimization, including dynamic program- ming and steepest descent techniques. PERT and linear programming. Other selected topics. Prereq.: ECE 3325 or ECE 3327. ECE 3331 Linear Active Circuits 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.842) Winter Quarter Active compound circuits with emphasis on IC circuit topologies are developed as an extension of known discrete active device characteristics. Use is made of modern circuit theory techniques, including flow- graphs, matrices, Blackman's formulation for feed- back and frequency response in terms of natural frequencies to determine compound circuit limita- tions. Models of IC operational amplifiers, instrumen- tation amplifiers, voltage comparators, and the like are developed and analyzed. Advantages and limi- tations of these IC active circuits are investigated. IC operational amplifiers, advantages and limitations including dynamic range, overload characteristics, and slow rate. Gain-bandwidth and speed charac- teristics are investigated for large and small signal conditions. Feedback, stability, and compensation in closed-loop systems and effects of feedback on impedance levels are explored. Applications for an- alog signal processing and conditioning, i.e., active filter design, summing, integration and coefficient amplifiers are investigated. Limitations caused by shot and thermal noise, definition of noise figure, and noise models are taken up. Prereq.: ECE 3101 or equivalent. ECE 3332 Linear Active Circuits A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.840) Fall Quarter ECE 3332 and ECE 3333 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3331, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3333 Linear Active Circuits B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.841) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3332. Prereq.: ECE 3332. ECE 3341 Electromagnetic Theory 4 QH. (formerly 03.877) Fall Quarter Maxwell's equations and related electromagnetic laws and relations; basic properties of matter; electro- magnetic potentials; the scalar and vector Poisson, D'Alembert, and Helmholtz equations; Green's func- tions; both mathematical and physical aspects of the theory and their relation to engineering applications. Basic radiation phenomenon including retarded po- tentials, radiation from moving charges, electromag- netic energy, and energy-related theorems. Prereq.: ECE 3102 or equivalent. ECE 3342 Electromagnetic Theory A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.875) Fall Quarter ECE 3342 and ECE 3343 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3341, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3343 Electromagnetic Theory B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.876) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3342. Prereq.: ECE 3342. ECE 3344 Advanced Electromagnetic 4 Q.H. Theory (formerly 03.87G) Winter Quarter More advanced topics in electromagnetic theory in- cluding: waveguides, antennas, diffraction, and scat- tering; approximation techniques for obtaining useful solutions of field theory problems including integral equation, perturbation, and variational techniques. Special relativity and relativistic electrodynamics. I Electrical and Computer Engineering / 1 19 Radiation from moving charges. Statistical concepts and propagation in random media. Prereq.:ECE3341. ECE 3345 Advanced Electromagnetic 2 Q.H. Theory A (formerly 03.878) Winter Quarter ECE 3345 and ECE 3346 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3344, but in two 2QH courses. 2 Q.H. ECE 3346 Advanced Electromagnetic Theory B (formerly 03.879) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3345. Prereq.: ECE 3345. ECE 3347 Computational Methods in 4 Q.H. Electromagnetics (formerly 03.8H7) Spring Quarter Modern numerical methods are presented for solving problems in transmission, radiation, and scattering of electromagnetic waves. Individual topics will be discussed from both the viewpoint of understanding the relevant theory and the associated numerical technique. Integral equations will be introduced along with solutions by the method of moments. Applica- tions will be given related to wire structures. Clas- sical scattering from two-dimensional structures will be considered from the viewpoint of basic functions and edge effects. Scattering from more general shapes will proceed from the geometrical theory of diffraction. As time permits, computational methods in inverse scattering, target recognition, and transient radiation problems will be considered. Prereq.: ECE 3341. ECE 3348 Computational Methods in 2 Q.H. Electromagnetics A (formerly 03.8H5) Fall Quarter ECE 3348 and ECE 3349 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3347, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3349 Computational Methods in 2 Q.H. Electromagnetics B (formerly 03.8H6) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3348. Prereq.: ECE 3348. ECE 3351 Digital Communications 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.9C3) Winter Quarter Deals with the theoretical and practical aspects of digital communications in the presence of channel distortion and additive noise. Topics covered include the basic binary and M-ary modulation techniques, namely, PSK, PAM, FSK, orthogonal and biorthogonal signals, and their performance in an additive Gaus- sian noise channel; signal waveforms constructed from binary block and convolutional codes; hard- decision decoding and soft-decision decoding of coded signal waveforms; performance of coded wav- eforms in an additive white Gaussian noise channel. Signal design techniques for band-limited channels; Nyquist criteria; effect of channel amplitude and de- lay distortion on digital signals; discussion of several adaptive equalization algorithms for combating inter- symbol interference; maximum likelihood sequence estimation and the Viterbi algorithm; the character- ization of fading multipath channels; diversity reception techniques; coding for fading channels. Prereq.: ECE 3241 and ECE 3104 or equivalent. ECE 3352 Digital Communications A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.9C1) Fall Quarter ECE 3352 and ECE 3353 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3351, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3353 Digital Communications B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.9C2) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3352. Prereq.: ECE 3352. ECE 3361 Detection and Estimation 4 Q.H. Theory (formerly 03.909) Winter Quarter This course presents the classical theory of detec- tion and estimation of signals in noise with emphasis on computer implementation of the theory Particular topics include: hypothesis testing criteria; coherent detection of M-ary signals; diversity receiver; cal- culation of error probabilities. Detection in colored noise; parameter estimation using Bayes, maximum- likelihood, a maximum land posteriori criteria; ap- plications in pattern recognition and radar. Prereq.: ECE 3241. ECE 3362 Detection and Estimation 2 Q.H. Theory A (formerly 03.906) Winter Quarter ECE 3362 and ECE 3363 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3361, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3363 Detection and Estimation 2 Q.H. Theory B (formerly 03.907) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3362. Prereq.: ECE 3362. ECE 3371 Linear Optimal Control Theory 4 Q.H, (formerly 03.9A8) Spring Quarter Introduction to linear optimal control systems. The optimal linear regulator and matrix ricatti equation, tracking problems, steady state and transient anal- ysis, sensitivity, effects of uncertainty. Optimal linear state reconstruction, optimal linear output feedback, computer implementation of linear optimal control. Prereq.: ECE 3221. ECE 3372 Linear Optimal Control 2 Q.H. Theory A (formerly 03.9A6) Winter Quarter ECE 3372 and ECE 3373 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3371, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3373 Linear Optimal Control 2 Q.H. Theory B (formerly 03.9A7) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3372. Prereq.: ECE 3372. 120/ Engineering ECE 3381 Classical Control Theory 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.959) Fall Quarter Classical analysis techniques for continuous and sampled-data control systems. Discussion of stabil- ity criteria; application of root-locus and Bode meth- ods for complementary time and frequency-domain analysis. Computer simulation of typical control sys- tems will be emphasized. A review of cascade and feedback compensation techniques with the use of classical criteria for design of continuous and sam- pled-data control systems. Consideration of the mul- tiple-input problem. A survey of pole-zero synthesis methods, and comparison with other techniques. Computer simulation of design examples. Prereq.: ECE 3221. ECE 3382 Classical Control Theory A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.957) Fall Quarter ECE 3382 and ECE 3383 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3381, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3383 Classical Control Theory B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.958) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3382. Prereq.: ECE 3382. ECE 3384 Characteristics and l\Aodels of 4 aH. Solid State Devices I (formerly 03.8G0) Winter Quarter This course is designed to develop insight into the operation of a broad range of semiconductor de- vices. Important topics in the physics of semicon- ductors to provide the background necessary for device analysis are discussed. Analysis of funda- mental building-block units of which devices are made including PN junction, the Ohmic contact and the Schottky barrier Each is examined under rea- sonable extremes of bias and temperature to estab- lish the electrical behavior expected from such el- ementary units. Detailed analysis of bipolar transistor, metal-oxide-semiconductor interface, its influence on the behavior of real junctions, and the various real- izations of the field-effect transistor Prereq.: BSEE or ECE 3101 and ECE 3102. ECE 3385 Characteristics and Models of 2 Q.H. Solid State Devices l-A (formerly 03.8G1) Fall Quarter ECE 3385 and ECE 3386 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3384, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3386 Characteristics and Models of 2 Q.H. Solid State Devices l-B (formerly 03.8G2) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3385. Prereq.: ECE 3385. ECE 3387 Characteristics and Models of 2 Q.H. Solid State Devices II (formerly 03.8G3) Spring Quarter A detailed analysis of the performance of FETs will permit a critical comparison of field effect and bi- polar transistors. Solid state microwave devices; de- vices that are both unique to microwave applications and the relevant low-frequency elements which re- quire somewhat different analysis at microwave fre- quencies. An examination of noise in semiconductor devices. Prereq.: ECE 3384. ECE 3391 Digital Computer Architecture 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.979) Fall Quarter This course is directed toward the design of a com- plete computer in register transfer language. Anal- ysis and synthesis of combinational and sequential circuits. Organization and detailed logic design of an elementary digital computer. Other topics may in- clude buss organization, interfacing with asynchron- ous peripherals, digital logic families, hardware/soft- ware tradeoffs, address modes, and memory hierarchies. Prereq.: ECE 3103 or equivalent. ECE 3392 Digital Computer Architecture A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.972) Fall and Winter Quarters ECE 3392 and ECE 3393 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3391, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3393 Digital Computer Architecture B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.973) Winter and Spring Quarters Continuation of ECE 3392. Prereq.: ECE 3392 ECE 3394 Micropro^amming 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.974) Spring Quarter Topics in microprogramming and emulation including microprogramming concepts and techniques; micro- programming design approach using register trans- fer notation and precedence graphs; micropro- grammed computers, bit-slice microprogramming, microprogramming a specific machine for emulation using a microprogramming language and its simu- lator; current trends in microprogramming languages and support tools. Prereq.: ECE 3391 ECE 3395 Elements of VLSI Design 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.8E6) Spring Quarter MOS devices and circuits, fabrication of integrated systems, design rules, subsystems design examples, implementation of integrated systems designs. Prereq.: ECE 3331. ECE 3396 Elements of VLSI Design A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8E4) Fall Quarter ECE 3396 and ECE 3397 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3395, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3397 Elements of VLSI Design B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8E5) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3396. Prereq.: ECE 3396. Electrical and Computer Engineering / 121 ECE 3412 Power System Planning 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.931) Spring Quarter Engineering and economic considerations underly- ing the planning and development of modern inter- connected power systems. Consideration of overall planning strategies involved in economic comparison of alternative development schemes. Prereq.: ECE 3120. ECE 3415 Power Systems Protection 2 QH. (formerly 03.932) Winter Quarter Consideration of protection Applied to generation, transmission, and distribution. Investigation of the characteristics and operating principles of various methods of protective relaying; analysis of current techniques pertaining to system protection. Prereq.: ECE 3303. ECE 3416 Power System Transients 2 aH. (formerly 03.933) Fall Quarter Transients in power systems due to system switching, lightning, or faults. Traveling-wave phenomena; in- sulation coordination; overvoltages due to disturb- ances on the system; surge protection. Prereq.: ECE 3303. ECE 3423 Special Topics in Power 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.944) Spring Quarter Directed reading and discussion of topics of special interest in the power field. Series of lectures by guest speakers from industry on topics of particular interest to the power student. Prereq.: Permission of Instructor ECE 3424 Power System Dynamics 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.945) Spring Quarter Transient system models; small and large scale os- cillations; solution of swing equation for single and multigenerator cases; load frequency and voltage controllers and transient stability. Prereq.: ECE 3303. ECE 3430 Studies in Electric Power 2 Q.H. Transmission II (formerly 03.955) Fall Quarter Elements in the design of AC overhead transmission lines; thermal limitation, series and shunt compen- sation, environmental effects; consideration of trans- position, induced effects, and insulation level. Un- derground alternatives to overhead lines. Elements of distribution. Prereq.: ECE 3303. ECE 3431 Studies in Electric Power 2 Q.H. Transmission II (formerly 03.956) Winter Quarter Fundamental concepts of high voltage DC power transmission; rectifier and inverter performance; reg- ulation; protection; reactive power and filter require- ments; practical arrangement of DC lines; the impact of a DC line on overall power system operation. Prereq.: ECE 3303. ECE 3440 Microprocessor-Based Design 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.8F3) Spring Quarter The role of the microcomputer in integrated/firm- ware/software/systems is explored. Techniques such as interfacing and regulation by microcomputer are examined, relative to both architectural and firmware requirements. Special purpose modular hardwafe is examined, and techniques of top-down modular soft- ware design are introduced. Prereq.: ECE 3391. ECE 3441 Microprocessor-Based Design A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8F1) Fall Quarter ECE 3441 and ECE 3442 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3440, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3442 Microprocessor-Based Design B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8F2) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3441. Prereq.: ECE 3441. ECE 3443 Theory of Computation 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.8F0) Spring Quarter This course deals with basic abstract models of computation. Topics include Turing machines, pri- mitive recursive functions, recursive systems of equations and abstract families of algorithms. Un- solvable problems are examined, along with the Re- cursion Theorem. Prereq.: ECE 3200. ECE 3444 Theory of Computation A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.985) Fall Quarter ECE 3444 and ECE 3445 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3443, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3445 Theory of Computation B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.986) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3444. Prereq.: ECE 3444. ECE 3447 Switching Theory I 4 QH. (formerly 03.966) Spring Quarter Logical design of combinational switching circuits, including minimization and decomposition of switch- ing functions; multiple output networks; symmetric networks; threshold logic, fault detection. Logic de- sign of sequential switching circuits including finite- state machine model; iterative networks; capabilities and limitations of finite-state machines; state equiv- alence; synthesis of asynchronous sequential cir- cuits; state assignment problem and partition theory; machine decomposition. Logical design of sequential switching circuits, including the finite-state machine model; iterative networks; capabilities and limitations of finite-state machines; state equivalence; synthesis of asynchronous sequential circuits; state assign- ment problem and partition theory; machine decom- position. Prereq.: ECE 3200. 122 / Engineering ECE 3448 Switching Theory l-A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.967) Fall Quarter ECE 3448 and ECE 3449 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3447, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3449 Switching Theory l-B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.968) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3448. Prereq.: ECE 3448. ECE 3450 Switching Theory II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.969) Spring Quarter Selected topics from the theory of finite automata, including such topics as machine experiments; in- formation lossless machines; linear sequential ma- chines; finite-state recognizers. Prereq.: ECE 3447. ECE 3451 Combinatorial Methods and 4 Q.H. Optimization Techniques (formerly 03.888) Winter Quarter An introductory course in applied combinatorial mathematics which treats selected topics in enu- merative analysis. Particular subjects include per- mutations, combinations, generating functions, re- currence relations, and the principle of inclusion and exclusion. Polya's theory of counting; selected topics in optimization techniques, which include transport networks, matching theory, linear programming, and an introduction to dynamic programming. Prereq.: ECE 3200. ECE 3452 Combinatorial Methods and 2 Q.H. Optimization Techniques A (formerly 03.898) Winter Quarter ECE 3452 and ECE 3453 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3451, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3453 Combinatorial Methods and 2 Q.H. Optimization Techniques B (formerly 03.899) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3452. Prereq.: ECE 3452. ECE 3454 Graph Theory 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.837) Spring Quarter Fundamentals of graph theory, including blocks, trees, connectivity, partitions, traversability, line graphs, factorization, coverings, planarity, matrices, digraphs, and enumeration problems. Selected ap- plications of graph theory in such fields as network theory, switching theory, and computer science. Prereq.: ECE 3211. ECE 3460 Special Topics in Computer 2 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 03.988) Spring Quarter Aspects of computer engineering not covered in other courses. The subject matter may change from year to year. ECE 3463 Robotic Sensors 4 Q.H. Winter Quarter The main theme of this course is acquisition and processing of information for robot control. The sub- ject is divided into two parts along the functional use of sensory information. Internal sensors, which monitor the state of the robot system (joint load, balance, kinesthesis, temperature, etc.) are analyzed first. The external sensors, which allow the system to interact with the environment are the second major topic of the course. These include proximity, ran- gefinding and vision. Topics for study will be chosen from the following areas: low level vision, 3-D vision, real time image understanding, theory of shape, the- ory of motion, etc. The objective of the course is to analyze the pertinence of different sensory modali- ties to endow the next generation of robots with "intelligent" behavior. Students will be required to participate in the w/eekly research reviews. Each stu- dent will have to complete a design project by. sim- ulating relevent problems in LISP environment. Prereq.: Permission of Instructor ECE 3464 Robotic Sensors A 2 Q.H. Fall Quarter ECE 3464 and ECE 3465 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3463, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3465 Robotic Sensors B 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3464. Prereq.: ECE 3464. ECE 3466 Intelligent Robots 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.874) Spring Quarter The course focuses on studies of intelligent inter- actions between robots and their environments. An important issue is the implementation of a goal di- rected behavior with emphasis on sensory driven locomotion and manipulation. "Robot as an Intelli- gent Agent" is the general topic under which these concepts are introduced during the first three weeks of the course. The second major topic deals with attempts to constrain the problem of machine per- ception from an engineering point of view. Finally, the high level concepts such as learning, knowledge representation, adaptation and self-organization are discussed in the context of artificial intelligence. Prereq.: ECE 3463. ECE 3467 Intelligent Robots A 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter ECE 3467 and ECE 3468 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3466, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3468 Intelligent Robots B 2 Q.H. Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3467. Prereq.: ECE 3467. Electrical and Computer Engineering / 123 ECE 3469 Fault-Tolerant Computers 4 Q.H. Winter Quarter Concepts of computer systems structures and spec- ifications; software and hardware interactions; failure and reliability; errors and faults. Study of different types of faults; fault prevention and fault tolerance; redundancy management; reliability and availability. Comparisons of existing fault-tolerant computer ar- chitectures such as SIFT, FTMP, Tandem 16, and Stratus/32. Techniques of error detection and error recovery. Mechanisms for damage confinement and damage assessment. Study of software fault toler- ance techniques such as recovery block scheme, deadline mechanism, and N-version programming scheme. Prereq.: ECE 3391. ECE 3470 Fault-Tolerant Computers A 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter ECE 3470 and ECE 3471 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3469, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3471 Fault-Tolerant Computers B 2 Q.H. Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3470. Prereq.: ECE 3470. ECE 3501 Spectral Estimation Techniques 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8U1) Spring Quarter Estimation of power spectra; the periodogram; mod- ified periodogram; parametric methods for estimation of the power spectrum; autoregressive models; the Levinson algorithm; maximum entropy method and the Burg algorithm; moving average and autoregres- sive-moving average models; maximum likelihood methods; applications of methods in communica- tions; speech processing and seismic signal proc- essing. Prereq.: ECE 3321 ECE 3502 Special Topics in Digital 2 Q.H. Signal Processing-Fast Algorithms (formerly 03.8U4) Spring Quarter Fast algorithms for implementation of digital filters and discrete Fourier transforms: FFT, convolution al- gorithm, Number Theoretic Transforms (NTT), filter- ing computation, and polynominal transforms. Prereq.: ECE 3321. ECE 3503 Two-Dimensional Digital 2 Q.H. Signal Processing (formerly 03.8U7) Winter Quarter This course is concerned with two-dimensional dig- ital signal processing which is finding wide appli- cations in many diversified areas. Covers 2-D shift invariant systems along with their stability, the 2-D Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and its FFT imple- mentation, and 2-D digital filter design and imple- mentation. Prereq.: ECE 3321. ECE 3504 Digital Processing of Speech 2 Q.H. Signals (formerly 03.9B1) ^11 Quarter Models of spjeech production, waveform coding of speech, transform coding of speech and speaker recognition systems. Prereq.: ECE 3321. ECE 3505 Digital Image Processing 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.9D3) Spring Quarter An introduction to the generation and processing of digital images. The course emphasizes the random- vector nature of digital images and uses linear sys- tem theory, matrices, and probability theory to de- velop the various topics. These include the genera- tion of a digital image from the source, through the optical system, to the detector; sampling and quan- tization of the optical signal; and the enhancement techniques such as histogram mapping, contrast boosting, and edge sharpening. Image restoration by Weiner filtering, maximum entropy estimation, sin- gular value decomposition, and spatially varying fil- ters, image coding with Huffman codes, DPCM, Transform (Walsh, KL, discrete cosine) coding, run- length encoding, adaptive optics, feature analysis, and hardware for a typical digital image processing system. Prereq.: ECE 3321. ECE 3506 Digital Image Processing A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.9D1) Fall Quarter ECE 3506 and ECE 3507 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3505, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3507 Digital Image Processing B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.9D2) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3506. Prereq.: ECE 3506. ECE 3511 Data Communications Networks 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.8F6) Spring Quarter Elements of computer-communication networks; net- work topology and design; elements of protocols, routing and network control; queuing and congestion control; description and comparison of several ex- isting computer networks. Prereq.: ECE 3241. ECE 3512 Data Communications Network A2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8F4) Winter Quarter ECE 3512 and ECE 3513 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3511, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3513 Data Communications Network B2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8F5) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3512. Prereq.: ECE 3512. ECE 3514 Error Correcting Codes 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.9A0) Spring Quarter Error correcting codes and their decoding tech- niques which show promise for applications in digital communication, control and computer systems. Em- phasis in placed on the linear block codes based on algebraic structures; cyclic codes for random error correction (B-C-H codes) and burst error cor- rection. Convolutional codes and decoding including the Viterbi algorithm, arithmetic codes. Combination 124 / Engineering of codes. Coding for ranging and synchronization. Prereq.: ECE 3211. ECE 3515 Error Correcting Codes A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.9A1) Winter Quarter ECE 3515 and ECE 3516 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3514, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 351 6 Error Correcting Codes B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.9A2) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3515. Prereq.: ECE 3515. ECE 351 7 Inltormation Theory 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.903) Spring Quarter Deals principally with three aspects of information theory; the statistical description of sources and probabilitstic measure of their information contents, the determination of channel capacity; and the fun- damental coding theorems. Prereq.: ECE 3211 and ECE 3351. ECE 3520 Special Topics in 2 Q.H. Communication Theory (formerly 03.908) Spring Quarter Current aspects of communication theory not cov- ered in previous courses. Subject matter may change from year to year. ECE 3523 Communication Systems 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.870) Fall Quarter Primarily concerned with radio communication sys- tems as used in terrestrial and space communication applications. Antenna gain, space loss, cosmic and atmospheric noise, and receiver noise are consid- ered as factors influencing the signal-to-noise ratio in space and satellite repeater systems. Contem- porary systems are discussed from the standpoint of signal spectrum, noise power and message am- biguity as exhibited at the output of the intermediate frequency receiver. The theoretical aspects of am- plitude and angle modulation systems are introduced and extended to cover multiplex systems; signal-to- noise ratio analysis of frequency multiplex systems; time division multiplex systems. Coverage of digital systems will include sampling, aliasing, and PCM/ FM. Bit stream organization for transmission will be considered. A PCM encoder will be discussed as a means of matching the bit stream to the bandwidth. Illustrative examples will be drawn from contempo- rary communications systems used on balloons, rockets, and satellite repeaters. Prereq.: ECE 3241 and ECE 3104 or equivalent. ECE 3524 Communication Systems A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.871) Fall Quarter ECE 3524 and ECE 3525 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3523, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3525 Communication Systems B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.872) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3524. Prereq.: ECE 3524. ECE 3527 Nonlinear Systems I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.910) Fall Quarter, As Announced Operators and functionals. Functional power series representation of nonlinear systems. Functional rep- resentation of the response of a nonlinear system when its input is either a constant, a sinusoid, or a transient. System transforms. Applications to the analysis and synthesis of nonlinear systems in terms of functional power series. Prereq.: ECE 3241 and ECE 3221. ECE 3528 Nonlinear Systems II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.911) Winter Quarter, As Announced Nonlinear systems with random inputs. Functional representation of the response of a nonlinear system when its input is a random process. Orthogonal sys- tems of functionals. Representation and analysis of nonlinear systems in terms of orthogonal systems of functionals. The optimum nonlinear filter, predictor, and general operator. Special classes of nonlinear systems. Determination of optimum nonlinear sys- tems for generalized error criteria. Prereq.: ECE 3527. ECE 3529 Nonlinear Systems III 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.912) Spring Quarter, As Announced Functional analysis of systems characterized by non- linear differential equations. Operator approach to system theory and its relationship to differential equation representations. The methods of iteration in nonlinear theory and its application to feedback systems. Prereq.: ECE 3528. ECE 3530 Three-Dimensional Picture 2 Q.H. Processing (formerly 03.887) Spring Quarter The application of computer, optical, and analytic methods in abstracting geometrical information from pictures. Pictorial presentation of data trains into multidimensional pictures. Methods will be studied for reconstructing three-dimensional objects from two-dimensional pictures. Applications will be in the areas of X-ray analysis, radar target identification, microscopy, and sensory perception. Students will have the chance to pursue individual projects during the term. Prereq.: ECE 3321. ECE 3540 Digital Control Systems 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.8D6) Spring Quarter Analysis of linear discrete-time dynamic systems; discretization of continuous systems; sampling and aliasing. Design of digital control systems using transform techniques by discrete equivalent and di- rect design methods; root locus. Bode and Nyquist diagrams and Nichols charts. Multivariant digital con- trol using state-space methods; pole placement, ob- Electrical and Computer Engineering / 125 server, and regulator design. Controller implemen- tation issues: digital filter realizations, nonlinear effects due to quantization, roundoff, deadband, limit cycles. Selection of the sampling rate. Prereq.: ECE 3221. ECE 3541 Digital Control Systems A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8D4) Fall Quarter ECE 3541 and ECE 3542 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3540, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3542 Digital Control Systems B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.8D5) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3541. Prereq.: ECE 3541. ECE 3543 Stochastic Control Theory 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.965) Fall Quarter Statistical models for random signals; representation of dynamic systems excited by stochastic inputs. Optimal filtering, prediction and smoothing for dis- crete and continuous systems. Observer theory and feedback of estimated states for effective closed- loop control in a noisy environment. Estimation the- ory for dynamic systems based on Bayesian and maximum likelihood methods. The system identifi- cation problem. Implementation of numerical algo- rithms for parameter identification and adaptive con- trol. Prereq.: ECE 3241 arid ECE 3371. ECE 3544 Stochastic Control Theory A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.963) Winter Quarter ECE 3544 and ECE 3545 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3543, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3545 Stochastic Control Theory B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.964) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3544. Prereq.: ECE 3544. ECE 3560 Acoustics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.817) Fall Quarter The wave theory of sound. Radiation, reflection, and transmission phenomena. Distributed system analo- gies, and sound measurements. Prereq.: ECE 3341. ECE 3561 Acoustics II ' 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.818) Winter Quarter Speech and hearing, microphones and loudspeak- ers, guided waves, room acoustics. Environmental acoustics. Prereq.: ECE 3560. ECE 3562 Acoustics III 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.819) Winter Quarter Scattering and diffraction. Effects of viscosity and heat conduction. Finite amplitude and shock waves. Introduction to underwater sound. Prereq.: ECE 3561. ECE 3564 Radar Systems I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.865) Fall Quarter Emphasis on the systems aspects of radar engi- neering. Topics covered include basic theory of ra- dar detection, measurement of range, angle, and Doppler shift; classes of radar systems; types of radar noise; components of a radar system; matched filters and correlation receivers as applied to radar systems; fundamental ideas of radar system analysis. Prereq.: ECE 3241. ECE 3565 Radar Systems II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.866) Winter Quarter In-depth study of search radar theory; maximum likelihood estimation approach to measurement of radar target parameters; resolution and ambiguity functions applied to radar; radar parameter uncer- tainty principles. Prereq.: ECE 3564. ECE 3566 Radar Systems III 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.867) Spring Quarter Advanced topics in radar systems engineering. Top- ics to be covered include; design considerations for multistatic radar systems, synthetic aperture radars; tracking systems; radar waveform synthesis; multi- function array radar techniques and selected topics in radar sensing techniques and devices. Prereq.: ECE 3565. ECE 3568 Microwave Engineering 2 Q.H. Principles I (formerly 03.880) Fall Quarter Review of electromagnetic theory concepts directly applicable to analysis of microwave devices and sys- tems. Theory of transmission lines and waveguides. Prereq.: ECE 3341. ECE 3569 Microwave Engineering 2 Q.H. Principles II (formerly 03.881) Winter Quarter Circuit theory for waveguide systems. Impedance matching and transformation. Passive microwave de- vices. Cavity resonators. Prereq.: ECE 3568. ECE 3570 Microwave Engineering 2 Q.H. Principles III (formerly 03.882) Spring Quarter Advanced topics in microwave theory. Topics to be covered include: propagation in anisotropic media; nonreciprocol and ferrite devices; beam-wave inter- actions; coupled mode theory; traveling wave de- vices; periodically loaded lines; couplers; polarizers; phase shifters; attenuators; microwave filter synthe- sis; microwave systems considerations. Prereq.: ECE 3569. ECE 3572 Fourier Optics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.916) Winter Quarter This two-quarter sequence covers: optical diffraction and imaging problems as linear systems; necessary 126 / Engineering tools of Fourier analysis and linear systems analysis which occur when solving the scalar wave equation; waves and their properties; reflection, refraction, po- larization, and propagation of waves; foundations of scalar diffraction theory-including Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction, interferometry, division of am- plitude, division of wavefront, interferometric instru- mentation, Fourier transforming, image properties of lenses, coherent and incoherent imaging; and ad- vanced topics in the application of communication theory to optical problems, transfer and spread func- tions, spatial filtering, and holography. Prereq.: ECE 3581. ECE 3573 Fourier Optics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.917) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3572. Prereq.: ECE 3572. ECE 3574 Fourier Optics III 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.983) Fall Quarter This course covers current topics of interest in Four- ier optics and optical instrumentation. Application of coherence phenomena to optical instrumentation such as microdensitometers, microscopes, viewers, cameras, spectraphotometric and interferometric in- struments; applications of holography optical data processing and computing, holographic memories, optical modulation, noise and its effects on data collection, synthetic aperture optics and medical ap- plication of laser optics. Prereq.: ECE 3573. ECE 3576 Lasers I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.806) Fall Quarter Review of basic optical principles and atomic phys- ics; introduction to optical coherence; models for the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with mat- ter; a general description of lasers is given. Prereq.: ECE 3341. ECE 3577 Lasers II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.807) Winter Quarter Laser threshold and rate equations; elementary re- sonator theory and fabrication; giant pulse operation; specific solid-state, liquid, and gas lasers; and laser systems. Prereq.: ECE 3576. ECE 3578 Lasers III 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.808) Spring Quarter Applications of lasers and laser systems for a variety of engineering and basic science disciplines; spe- cific laser optoelectronic devices. Prereq.: ECE 3577. ECE 3580 Electro-Optics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.914) Spring Quarter Survey of the basic concepts necessary for under- standing and evaluating the optics involved in elec- tro-optical systems. The optical system as a linear system; matrix methods; diffraction and interference; imaging and aberrations. Prereq.: Bachelor of Sci- ence Degree in Engineering or P/jys/cs. ECE 3581 Electro-Optics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.91 5) Fall Quarter Survey of the basic concepts necessary for under- standing electro-optical devices. Wave propagation in isotropic and non-isotropic media; optics of crys- tals; polarization; optical resonators; guided waves; modulators and detectors; thin-film optics. Prereq.: ECE 3580. ECE 3583 Optical Properties of Matter I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.921) Fall Quarter Optics of crystals; classification and effects of crys- tal symmetry on optical properties; classical de- scription of wave propagation in crystals; applica- tions of the theory to modulation, pulse generation, nonlinear optics. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science Degree in Engineering or Physics. ECE 3584 Optical Properties of Matter II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.922) Winter Quarter Introduction to electro-optical and magneto-optical effects in material media; linear and nonlinear optical materials; elasto-optic and acousto-optical mate- rials; polarization and propagation effects; modula- tion. Prereq.: ECE 3583. ECE 3585 Optical Properties of Matter III 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.923) Spring Quarter Thin films and optical fibers; multilayer filters; di- chroics; integrated optics. Prereq.: ECE 3584. ECE 3587 Principles of Optical Detection I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.981) Winter Quarter Laws governing radiation and radiometry; properties of real radiation sources; detailed description of de- tection devices (image forming and signal generat- ing); noise; contrast and MTF; detection systems (imaging devices and ranging devices); electro-op- tical detector systems analysis. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science Degree in Engineering or Physics. ECE 3588 Principles of Optical Detection II 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.982) Spring Quarter Review of detector parameters; statistics of detector noise; practical considerations in real detectors; de- tection, resolution and recognition of signals; het- erodyne detection and parametric amplification; sub- nanosecond pulse detection calibration of electro- optical detectors; detectors as system components. Prereq.: ECE 3587. ECE 3589 Optical Storage and Display 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.913) Spring Quarter Survey of materials and methods for the storage and display of information. Topics included are: photo- graphic film, holograms, storage tubes, magneto-op- tical films, photochromic materials, electro-optical crystals, evaporated thin films and liquid crystals. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science in Engineering or Physics. Electrical and Computer Engineering / 127 ECE 3590 Optical Instrumentation Design 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.980) Fall Quarter An introduction to the design of optical instrumen- tation. Principles and basic concepts of optical sys- tems. In sequence the topics are: introduction, me- chanical shock and vibration, kinematic designs; application of third-order aberrations, simple optical ray tracing, optical testing, tolerances, optical instru- mentation, philosophy, functional design, design for quantity production, quality assurance, "special or- der" design, industrial design, examples and exer- cises. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science in Engineering or Ptiysics. ECE 3591 Spectroscopic Instrumentation 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.984) Winter Quarter Survey of optical instrumentation employed in anal- ysis and control situations; modern methods of spectrometry and interferometry; optimization of an- alytical systems; topics in electron spectroscopy, X- ray spectroscopy, microw/ave spectroscopy, and re- lated fields. Prereq.: ECE 3581. ECE 3592 Remote Sensing 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.886) Spring Quarter, As Announced The application of electromagnetic radiating for sen- sing the environment, subsurface geophysical explo- ration, and identifying remote objects. Basic goals are concerned with understanding the relevant elec- tromagnetics in relation to the particular sensing system. Both time and frequency-domain sensing systems will be covered. As time permits, the appli- cation of pattern recognition methods to electro- magnetic sensing will be discussed. Prereq.: ECE 3341 or ECE 3343. ECE 3593 Plasma Engineering • 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.800) Fall Quarter, As Announced Behavior, diagnostics, and generation of plasma and gas discharges; emphasis on the engineering and experimental point of view rather than on a rigorous theoretical treatment. Current literature on a variety of plasma engineering applications will be introduced throughout the course. First-quarter topics include: dynamics of charged particles in static electric and magnetic fields, E and M wave-plasma interactions, infinite and finite media, elastic and inelastic collisions. Prereq.: ECE 3341. ECE 3594 Plasma Theory 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.803) Winter Quarter, As Announced Plasma electrodynamics and linear response theory Fluid and Vlasov descriptions of plasmas with and without magnetic fields. Despersion and damping of collective modes. Beam-plasma linear instabilities and application to shock-wave structures. Plasma electrodynamics and nonlinear response theory. Fluctuation-Dissipation theorems. Sum rules. New approaches to strongly correlated plasmas: equation of state, liquid-solid phase transitions, dispersion and damping of collective modes. Role of strongly correlated plasmas in laser- and heavy-particle beam-inertial confinement schemes in thermonu- clear fusion. Prereq.: ECE 3341. ECE 3595 Plasma Theory A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.801) Winter Quarter, As Announced ECE 3595 and ECE 3596 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3594, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3596 Plasma Theory B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.802) Spring Quarter, As Announced Continuation of ECE 3595. Prereq.: ECE 3595. ECE 3597 Thermonuclear Fusion 2 Q.H. Energetics I (formerly 03.810) Fall Quarter, As Announced Application of the concepts developed in ECE 3593 and ECE 3595 to the problem of thermonuclear plasmas. Emphasis will be on magnetic confinement schemes. Both open (mirror machines) and closed (torroidal confinement machines) systems will be discussed. ECE 3598 Thermonuclear Fusion 2 Q.H. Energetics I (formerly 03.811) Winter Quarter, As Announced Continuation of magnetic confinement schemes. Trapped particle instabilities and anomolous trans- port effects will be discussed. Introduction to interfial confinement (laser fusion). ECE 3599 Thermonuclear Fusion 2 Q.H. Energetics III (formerly 03.812) Spring Quarter, As Announced Introduction to microinstabilities associated with laser fusion devices. Introduction to computer modeling of plasmas. Discussion of recent advances in thermo- nuclear plasma generation by relativistic electron beams. Prereq.: ECE 3598. ECE 3610 Electronics of Analog Signal 4 Q.H. Processing (formerly 03.8E3) Spring Quarter, As Announced Analog signal acquisition and processing utilizing state of the art devices and circuit techniques such as adaptive filters in sampled data systems, CZTs for spectral analysis, correlated double sampling for improved S/N ratios and solid-state imaging systems. Linear and nonlinear processing with MOS, bipolar and CTDs such as CCDs and SAWs. Attention given to analog vs. digital approaches for implementation of similar applications, i.e., bandwidth requirements, throughput, accuracy, cost, etc. Prereq.: ECE 3331 and ECE 3384. ECE 361 1 Electronics of Analog Signal 2 Q.H. Processing A (formerly 03.8E1) Fall Quarter, As Announced ECE 3611 and ECE 3612 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3610, but in two 2QH courses. 128/ Engineering ECE 3612 Electronics of Analog Signal 2 Q.H. Processing B (formerly 03.8E2) Winter Quarter, As Announced Continuation of ECE 3611. Prereq.: ECE 3611. ECE 3613 UHF and Microwave Circuits 4 Q.H. and Systems (formerly 03.8H3) Spring Quarter, As Announced Brief review of waveguides, cavities, and striplines and their common descriptors. Some practical com- ponents of the microwave circuit including couplers, circulators, isolators, bends and tees. Scattering pa- rameter descriptors. Microwave and UHF sources and amplifiers including both vacuurrf and solid-state devices. Frequency multiplication. Mixers. Parametric oscillators and amplifiers. Hybrid and monolithic mi- crowave integrated circuits. Prereq.: ECE 3341 and ECE 3384. ECE 3614 UHF and Microwave Circuits 2 Q.H. and Systems A (formerly 03.8H1) Fall Quarter ECE 3614 and ECE 3615 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3613, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 361 5 UHF and Microwave Circuits 2 Q.H. and Systems B (formerly 03.8H3) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3614. Prereq.: ECE 3614. ECE 3616 Modern Active Circuit 4 Q.H. Synthesis and Design (formerly 03.845) Fall Quarter Feedback systems, including multiloop amplifier de- sign; techniques will be applied to integrated circuit realizations of basic active networks. Basic methods of active network synthesis are introduced through three commonly used approaches: feedback ampli- fier, negative impedance converter, and gyrator; structures of Sallen and Key, Kuh, Linvill, Yanagisawa, Rohrer, Kinariwals, Sepress, and Calahan; consid- eration of the practical realization of NICs ,and gy- rators, standard decomposition methods and sen- sitivity; work of Sandberg, Larky, Newcomb, Daniels, Horowitz, and Thomas. Prereq.: ECE 3331. ECE 3617 Modern Active Circuits 2 Q.H. Synthesis and Design A (formerly 03.843) Fall Quarter ECE 3617 and ECE 3618 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3616, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3618 Modern Active Circuits 2 Q.H. Synthesis and Design B (formerly 03.845) Winter Quarter Continuation of ECE 3617. Prereq.: ECE 3617. ECE 3619 Network Synthesis 4 Q.H. (formerly 03.832) Fall Quarter Matrix circuit analysis including m-port parameter systems. Positive-real functions. Energy functions. Driving-point synthesis techniques for LC, RC, and RL networks. Driving-point synthesis of RLC net- works. Properties of two-port networks. Two-port synthesis, including the parallel ladder realization. Lattice synthesis. Prereq.: BSEE or ECE 3100 and ECE 3101. ECE 3620 Network Synthesis A 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.831) Winter Quarter ECE 3620 and ECE 3621 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3619, but in two 2QH courses. ECE 3621 Network Synthesis B 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.832) Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3620. Prereq.: ECE 3620. ECE 3622 Special Topics in Electronics- 2 Q.H. Analog MOS LSI Circuits (formerly 03.862) Spring Quarter This course covers selected topics of practical im- portance in the design of analog MOS integrated circuits. Principal topics are: NMOS & CMOS tech- nology and devices; MOS transistor analog switch; digital-analog converters; comparators; analog - digital converters; sampled analog filtering concepts; switched— capacitor filters. Prereq.: ECE 3331 and ECE 3384. ECE 3623 Gate Array Design 4 Q.H. Fall Quarter This course covers the design, simulation, verifica- tion, and implementation of a CMOS gate array. It begins with a description of the VAX-based gate array design and logic simulator tools. The students will be given design examples of digital logic circuits which will be entered, verified, and simulated. A de- scription of the GE CMOS Macrocell Circuit Library and an introduction to TEGAS Logic Simulator will be included. After the completion of this course, the GE Microelectronics Center, at Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, will fabricate the chosen stu- dent gate array design projects which can then be tested and evaluated. Prereq.: ECE 3331. ECE 3624 Gate Array Design-A 2 Q.H. Winter Quarter ECE 3624 and ECE 3625 cover the same material with the same prerequisites as ECE 3623, but in two 2 OH courses. ECE 3625 Gate Array Design-B 2 Q.H. Spring Quarter Continuation of ECE 3624. Prereq.: ECE 3624. ECE 3797 Engineer Degree Continuatnn 0 Q.H. (formerly 03.9Z3) Any Quarter Candidates to sign up for thesis continuation if their thesis is not completed after they have registered for 3 consecutive quarters or 10 QH of EE degree thesis. Continuous registration is required until the candidate graduates. ECE 3798 Master's Thesis Continuation (formerly 03.9X1) Any Quarter OQ.H. Biomedical / 129 ECE 3799 PhD Continuation 0 Q.H. (formerly 03.9X4) Any Quarter ECE 3860 Master's Thesis 8 Q.H. (formerly 03.995) Any Quarter Analytical and/or experimental work conducted un- der the auspices of the department. Prereq.: Bach- elor of Science degree in Engineering or Science. ECE 3861 Master's Thesis 4 Q.H. Any Quarter ECE 3862 Master's Thesis 2 Q.H. Any Quarter ECE 3870 Engineer Degree Thesis 4 or 8 Q.H. (formerly 03.9Z2) Any Quarter Analytical and/or experimental work conducted un- der the auspices of the department. Minimum of 4 QH, maximum of 8 QH allowed per quarter. Prereq.: Admission to Engineer Degree Program. ECE 3871 Engineer Degree Thesis 4 Q.H. Any Quarter ECE 3872 Engineer Degree Thesis 2 Q.H. Any Quarter ECE 3880 Doctoral Thesis 0 Q.H. (formerly 03.996) Any Quarter Theoretical and/or experimental work conducted un- der the auspices of the department. Prereq.: Passing of PhD Qualifying Exam. ECE 3887 Master's Seminar I 2 Q.H. (formerly 03.990) Any Quarter A library survey of a selected topic in the general field of electrical engineering with an oral presen- tation based on this survey. Participation in the de- partmental seminar program of guest lectures. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science degree in Engineering or Science. ECE 3888 Master's Seminar 11 2 QH. (formerly 03.991) Any Quarter The preparation of a research paper suitable for publication in a professional journal, plus an oral presentation of this report. Prereq.: ECE 3887. ECE 3889 Doctoral Seminar 0 Q.H. (formerly 03.993) Any Quarter This requirement will be satisfied by the student pre- senting a seminar to the Electrical Engineering De- partment on a subject related to his/her PhD thesis. The thesis supervisor will coordinate the seminar. Prereq.: Passing of PhD Qualifying Exam. ECE 3892 Doctoral Reading 0 Q.H. (formerly 03.997) Any Quarter Material approved by the candidate's adviser. (Only S or F grades will be assigned for this course.) Prereq.: Passing of PhD Qualifying Exam. ECE 3893 Special Problems in 2 or 4 Q.H. Electrical Engineering (formerly 03.998) Any Quarter Theoretical or experimental work under individual faculty supervision. Prereq.: Consent of Department Chairman. ECE 3894 Engineer's Degree Reading (formerly 03.9Z1) To be taken upon completion of 30 QH of satisfac- tory course work. No credits toward course require- ments are given. Minimum of 4 QH, maximum of 8 QH allowed per quarter. ECE 3895 Engineer's Degree Reading 8 Q.H. Any Quarter ECE 3896 Special Problems in Electrical Engineering Any Quarter 4Q.H. Biomedical OINT 3250 Engineering and Medicine I 2 Q.H. (formerly 93.901) Fall Quarter The intersection of technology with medicine; his- torical development of bioengineering profession; its impact on society; study of activities embraced by the profession today; educational, training, and ca- reer opportunities in clinical, biomedical, and medical engineering for individuals at the BS, MS, and PhD levels; future goals of engineering in biology and medicine; and issues basic to the relationship be- tween new medical technology and the efficiency and effectiveness of the health care system. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science in Engineering or allied field. OINT 3251 Biomedical Applications of 2 Q.H. Heat and Mass Transfer (formerly 93.911) Winter Quarter Bioheat equation; thermal transport in living systems, thermal properties; thermal techniques in the meas- urement of blood flow; applications of heat transfer in medicine including hyperthermia for cancer ther- apy, hypothermia for tissue and organ preservation and cryosurgery, thermal sources for implantable artificial heart; and thermography in cancer detec- tion. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science in Engineering or allied field. 130 / Engineering OINT 3252 Selected Topics in 2 Q.H. Bioengineering (formerly 93.912) Spring Quarter Study of biomedical engineering appropriate to top- ics selected from fields of biomaterials, nuclear med- icine, radiation diagnosis and therapy, biological transport processes, artificial organs, rehabilitation engineering, and microprocessor based clinical in- struments. Introduction to medical technology as- sessment. Prereq.: OINT 3250 or permission of instructor Industrial Engineering Each course description includes information on the expected quarter in which classes are usually offered. The quarters listed are presented here for planning purposes; however, the Graduate School of Engineering cannot guarantee that all courses will be offered. Students must refer to the Graduate School of Engineering Quarterly Course Offering sheets to determine what courses are actually offered in any given quarter and at what day and time. IIS 3101 Industrial Accounting for 2 Q.H. Engineers Introduction of basic accounting principles and pro- cedures; use of accounting data as a management tool; a practical covering of basic cost accounting procedures related to materials, labor, and manu- facturing expense cost control; job order, process, and standard cost systems. IIS 3102 Introduction to Human Factors 2 Q.H. Engineering A survey of the principal topics and areas of con- centration in the field. Includes introductory concepts of sensory physiology and sensory performance; basic motor capabilities and limitations; concepts of the human as a processor of information; and methods of gathering human performance data. Normally the first course in the human factors areas for students without behavioral science background. Prereq.: IIS 3113 or permission of instructor IIS 3103 Basic Operations Research 4 Q.H. An introduction to the theory and use of determin- istic and stochastic models to represent industrial operations. Models included are those of linear pro- gramming, dynamic programming, inventory control, waiting lines, and Markov Chains. Prereq.: IIS 3113. IIS 31 06 Elements of Structured 2 Q.H. Programming An introductory course to the principles and tech- niques of top down structured programming. The host language is PASCAL and topics covered include as- signment statements, logical expressions, control statements, data structures, recursion and pointers. IIS 31 1 1 Principles of COBOL 2 Q.H. Fundamentals of computer programming in COBOL. Topics include elementary computer functioning, pro- gram organization, input/output operations, arithmetic and data-handling verbs, and program logic develop- ment through the use of flow charts. Storage and manipulation of large data files on magnetic tape are introduced. No prior computer experience is required. IIS 3112 Quantitative Methods for 4 Q.H. Information Systems An introduction to the theory and use of determin- istic and stochastic models in the context of com- puter and information systems. Models included are linear programming, dynamic programming, Monte Carlo simulation, Gant and Pert charts, multicriteria decision analysis and waiting lines. Class examples will emphasize applications in a computer and in- formation systems environment. IIS 3113 Basic Probability and Statistics 4 Q.H. Fundamental concepts of probability. Events, sample space, discrete and continuous random variables. Density functions, mass functions, cumulative prob- ability distributions, and moments generating func- tions. Expectation of random variables. Common discrete and continuous probability distributions including binomial, poisson, geometric, uniform, ex- ponential, and normal. Multivariate probability distri- butions, covariance and independence of random variables. Sampling and descriptive statistics. Para- meter estimation, confidence intervals, and hypothesis testing. IIS 3114 Industrial Engineering Economy 4 Q.H. Introduction of basic accounting principles and pro- cedures; use of accounting data as a management tool; a practical covering of basic cost accounting procedures related to materials, labor, and manu- facturing expense cost control; job order, process, and standard cost systems. Economic analysis in formulating business policies and selecting alter- natives from possible engineering solutions to in- dustrial problems, present worth, annual cost, and rate-of-return techniques using discrete compound interest calculations. IIS 3115 Modula-2 for Engineers 4 Q.H. Syntax and basic data structures of the Modula-2 language. Modules, procedures, and visibility control. Data structures, including enumerations, arrays, rec- ords, sets, and pointers. Sequential and screen-ori- ented input/output, recursion, concurrency and low- level facilities. Industrial Engineering / 131 IIS 3116 Assembly Language 4 Q.H. The study of microcomputer programming in assem- bly language with emphasis on structured program- ming techniques, interrupts, and input/output devices. Microprocessor programming model, instruction set, and addressing modes. Microcomputer system archi- tecture, system resources, interrupt processing, input/ output interfaces. Prereq.: Higher level language. IIS 3117 Intensive Modula-2 2 Q.H. Syntax and basic data structures of the Modula-2 language are covered. Modules and visibility control; overview of records, sets and pointers; sequential and screen oriented input/output, recursion, con- currency and low level facilities are included. Prereq.: Structured programming language. IIS 3200 Organizational Perspectives and 4 Q.H. Project Management A survey of business organization, management and operation, including business responsibility to its employees, its product, the customer and the envi- ronment in which it operates. Planning, forecasting, and budgeting; the financial markets; investing and speculating will be covered, as well as the interaction of politics, government and government controls on the industrial enterprise. IIS 3201 Analysis of the Industrial 2 Q.H. Enterprise I Same material as IIS 3200 offered as two 2 QH courses. Prereq.: IIS 3201. IIS 3202 Analysis of the Industrial 2 Q.H. Enterprise II Same material as IIS 3200 offered as two 2 QH courses. Prereq.: IIS 3201. IIS 3204 Engineering/Organizational 4 Q.H. Psychology An analysis of the purpose and functioning of or- ganizations as the basic networks for achieving goals through coordination of effort, communication, and responsibility. The approach will emphasize the role and function of engineering organizations and will be based on modern behavioral science concepts. The course covers the application of psychology to industry relative to human relations, group dynamics, tests and measurements, personnel practices, train- ing, and motivation. IIS 3205 Industrial Organizations 2 Q.H. IIS 3206 Industrial Psychology for 2 Q.H. Engineers Same material as IIS 3204 offered as two 2 QH courses. Prereq.: IIS 3205. IIS 3207 Rnancial Management 4 QH. Study of the issues and processes of short-term financing on industrial firms; financial analysis of cases, supplemented by readings to develop famil- iarity with sources and uses of working capital as well as the goals and problems involved in its man- agement. Also covered is the analysis necessary for such long-term financial decisions as issuance of Stock or bonds; contracting of leases or loans, and financing of a new enterprise; mergers, capital budg- eting, the cost of capital, and the valuation of a business. Prereq.: IIS 3101 or IIS 3114 and IIS 3201 or equivalent. IIS 3208 Financial Management I 2 Q.H. Prereq.: IIS 3101 or IIS 3114 and IIS 3201 or equivalent. IIS 3209 Rnancial Management II 2 Q.H. Same material as IIS 3207 offered as two 2 QH courses. Prereq.: IIS 3208. IIS 3214 Engineering Communications 2 Q.H. Exploration of practice in the preparation and pres- entation, both written and oral, of the results of en- gineering projects and programs as a basis for busi- ness decisions; including formal reports, progress summaries, memoranda, and technical papers. The effective use of various media and audiovisual aids based on both audience and material. IIS 3216 Advanced Engineering Economy 2 Q.H. Principal emphasis on the practical application of the techniques studied in basic engineering econ- omy; problems of implementation through class dis- cussion of cases and student projects; recent ad- vances in the techniques of engineering economy, especially those relating to the consideration of un- certainties.Prereq.; IIS 3114. IIS 3217 Engineering Project Management 4 Q.H. The optimization of schedules utilizing pertinent soft- ware tools such as the linear programming and proj- ect management packages will be undertaken. Other graphics software used to draw project diagrams such as Gantt charts, PERT diagrams, manpower loading charts, and funding charts will be included. Determination of the critical path and comparison of actual performance with the planned schedule will be covered. The systems life cycle will be consid- ered. Needs analysis, requirements definition, prelim- inary design, detailed design, and implementation will be addressed in the context of project management. IIS 3218 Planning and Managing 4 Q.H. Information Systems Development The computer system developmental life cycle. In- teractions between the system and the organization. Design parameters and tradeoffs. Planning for ex- ternalities. Individual and organizational aspects of human decision making. Systems approach to plan- ning, management, and control of effective informa- tion systems development. The course will be based on extensive use of case studies and will include some guest speakers. Prereq.: IIS 3615. IIS 321 9 Cost Accounting and Industrial 4 Q.H. Budgeting Cost accounting procedures are studied and eval- uated in terms of being considered by the engineer for cost determination of alternative engineering pro- posals and for input into various budgeting plans which the engineer may become involved with. An introduction to the essentials of fixed and variable 132 /Engineering budgeting for production, inventory, sales, cash, capital, and cost-volume profit analysis will be pro- vided. Prereq.: IIS 3114. IIS 3220 Development of Engineering 4 Q.H. Personnel The science and art of managing creative people employed in research, developmental, and engineer- ing activities are considered with a view to under- standing the problems encountered by such people and their managers in the course of their profes- sional work. Attention is devoted to such behavioral theories and their applications in the practice of management. Emphasis is placed on each student's experiences as professionals or managers in diverse industrial settings. IIS 3302 Advanced Work Design 2 Q.H. Basic philosophies of work design; implementation of work design concepts with case studies; study and analysis of models such as work sampling, se- quence or flow of work models; repetitive and nonre- petitive work models, and work measurement models such as standard data; human factors in measuring operator performance; regression analysis ap- proaches; emphasis on development of professional, analytical, and managerial skills and abilities at a systems level. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science degree in Engineering or Science. IIS 3303 Product Design and Value 2 Q.H. Analysis Study of design parameters and their effect on de- velopment, manufacturing and procurement; func- tional analysis of components and systems; complete projects and case studies are integrated in the course. IIS 3304 Production Analysis 4 Q.H. Study of advanced problem-solving techniques in the areas of method and measurement, layout and facilities planning, material handling and manufac- turing process. Case studies and a course project in a local concern illustrate the concepts presented. IIS 3305 Case Studies in Industrial 2 Q.H. Engineering Formulation of problems and analysis of situations on topics such as work measurement, line balancing, plant layout, regression analysis, wage and salary administration, management information systems and network analysis. Class discussion and written anal- ysis of a variety of cases are included. Prereq.: IIS 3304. IIS 3306 Network Planning and Control 2 Q.H. Applications of stochastic networks to project man- agement, scheduling, inventory, reliability, quality control and other industrial applications; review of PEFiT and its inadequacies, to the development of stochastic flow-graphs and networks; solving for the mean task times and variances using moment-gen- erating functions; setting up the model for computer simulation using GERT. Prereq.: IIS 3506 or IIS 3523. IIS 3307 Introduction to Microprocessors 2 Q.H. A first course in microprocessor computing, covers hex codes for assembly language. Basics of archi- tecture model, programming model and addressing modes. Instruction set for a typical machine. Pro- gramming techniques and details for a 6502 pro- cessor Hands-on laboratory experimentation with typical interfacing problems. Case studies in the area of developing applications. Laboratory experimen- tation in a staffed facility Prereq.: Compiler level language. IIS 3308 Microcomputer Applications 2 Q.H. System architecture of several microcomputers in- cluding: microprocessor, bus design, multichip op- erations and current trends in processors (8, 16, and 32 BIT). Interfacing problems and hardware to include: sensors, actuators, A/D, D/A converters, data transmission and parallel/serial I/O. Real time pro- gramming with case studies. Network and distributed processing. Also included are development tech- niques and current state-of-the-art trends. Prereq.: IIS 3307 or permission. IIS 3309 Computer Mettiods in 2 Q.H. Manufacturing In-depth coverage of the use of computers in se- lected areas of manufacturing systems design is presented. Possible topic areas are numerical con- trol, MRP, process planning and control, and other important applications of computers to manufactur- ing systems. Prereq.: IIS 3311 or permission. IIS 3310 Manufacturing Methods and 4 Q.H. Processes Material covered includes the structures of polymers (thermoplastic, thermosetting and glasses). Manu- facturing processes for polymers including thermo- forming are included. Structure of metals, the man- ufacturing processes for metal forming are presented. Alloys and welding and brazing are also included. IIS 3311 Computer-Aided Manufacturing 4 Q.H. A first course (overview) of computer aided-manu- facturing. Covers the areas that encompass the term CAM: group technology, material requirements plan- ning, part coding and classification, numerical con- trol, part programming and management systems. Broad coverage of each of the areas is given to allow the student to gain an appreciation of the automated factory. Prereq.: Compiler level language. IIS 3312 Forecasting and Inventory 4 Q.H. Control Econometric methods of forecasting the demand for industrial products; emphasis on techniques appli- cable to individual companies and the total demand. The principal tool used is the mathematical model of the causal factors with special attention to deter- mining the reliability of the model. The design and operation of inventory systems from a scientific man- agement point of view, including both required theory and practical aspects. Subjects include inventory control models and techniques, production planning, and control models and methods. Prereq.: IIS 3523. Industrial Engineering / 133 IIS 3400 Human Factors Engineers 4 Q.H. The course covers sensory motor and work environ- ment considerations. Topics include the design of equipment and systems for human use, with the application of engineering psychology; visual and auditory presentation of information; human infor- mation processing and skilled task performance. The course examines the human as a work-performing, heat-generating physiological engine, and the im- plied restrictions on the equipment and workplace to provide occupational safety and effective man/ machine performance. Prereq.: IIS 3102. IIS 3401 Human Factors-Sensory Motor 2 Q.H. Prereq.: IIS 3102 IIS 3402 Human Factors-Work 2 Q.H. Environment Same material as IIS 3400 offered as two 2 QH courses. Prereq.: IIS 3102. IIS 3403 Occupational Health and Safety 4 Q.H. Winter Quarter Topics include safety responsibilities of management and employees; recognition of chemical, electrical, and mechanical hazards; principles of machine guarding; accident investigation and cost aniaysis; record keeping requirements under OSHA Act of 1 970; safety programs and inspections; safety training; toxology first aid and medical services; fire prevention and control methods; occupational diseases and per- sonnel protective equipment. IIS 3404 Introduction to Occupational 2 Q.H. each Health and Safety and IIS 3405 Technical Aspects of Health and Safety Same material as IIS 3403 offered as two 2 QH courses. Prereq.: IIS 3404. IIS 3406 Man-Computer Interaction 2 Q.H. Design and evaluation of the man-computer interface in on-line information systems; formatting of visual displays and auditory outputs, techniques to facilitate operator inputs, pacing and control of the interactive sequence, operator training, task analysis and per- formance testing. Student projects in areas of novel application. Prereq.: IIS 3401. IIS 3407 Human Factors Engineering- 2 Q.H. Data Base Prereq.: IIS 3509. IIS 3408 Human Factors Engineering- 2 Q.H. Application Methods Same material as IIS 3410 offered as two 2 QH courses. Prereq.: IIS 3102. IIS 3409 Topics in Physiology and 2 Q.H. Biomedical Engineering Introduction to specific areas relating to human structure and function, and to the use of engineering techniques for medical diagnosis and therapy Areas considered include blood and blood components, the cardiovascular system, the kidney and urinary systems and respiratory systems. The course will be taught on a seminar basis. Students will be required to do literature research under the guidance of the instructor Prereq.: Permission of instructor IIS 3410 Advanced Human Factors 4 Q.H. Engineering The study of methods and techniques used to obtain and interpret human performance data. Includes ex- amination of experimental methods and problems peculiar to experimentation with human subjects; unobtrusive measures, and nonreactive techniques; survey design and implementation; systematic ob- servation techniques. Also covered are systems analysis and man/machine systems; function and task analysis; task allocation; support equipment and training design; error analysis; occupational safety; preconstruction; periodic and accident/critical inci- dent analytic techniques. Prereq.: IIS 3509 and IIS 3400. IIS 3500 Principles of Dynamic Systems 4 aH. Introduction to modeling of social systems, empha- sizing the study of feedback structures and their behavior; mechanisms underlying growth, stagnation and cyclical fluctuation; formulation of models of industrial, economic, social, and ecological systems; study of the effects of delays, multiple feedback loops, and nonlinearities. The aim is to build an intuitive foundation for simulation studies of complex systems and obtain exercise in model conceptualization. IIS 3501 Principles of Dynamic 2 Q.H. each Systems I and IIS 3502 Principles of DynamicSystems II Same material as IIS 3500 offered as two 2 QH courses. Prereq.: IIS 3501. IIS 3503 Simulation Methodology and 4 Q.H. Applications Course covers when, where, and how to use discrete event simulation techniques. Topics include model design, development, and validation; tactical and strategic planning considerations in the use of the model; input data reduction; alternative programming languages for implementing models; efficiency in running simulations, and statistical reliability in the design and analysis of simulation experiments. Sev- eral special purpose simulation languages are dis- cussed, e.g., SIMSCRIPT GPSS, and SIM AN. Prereq.: IIS 3506 or IIS 3523 and compiler-level language. HS 3506 Statistics 4 Q.H. Basic tools of statistical inference are covered. These include limit theorems; point and interval estimators and properties of estimators; Bayes Hypothesis and hypothesis testing; one- and two-sided tests; power curve; nonparametric tests; statistical models for predication and analysis of random phenomena; mul- tiple regression analysis; correlation; design and analysis of simple experiments. Prereq.: IIS 3113. IIS 3509 Design of Experiments 4 Q.H. Theory and application of experimental design tech- niques such as modeling and statistics which can optimize resources and improve decision making risks. This course will cover experiments with single and 134 / Engineering multiple factors of interest and consider experiments with high order experimental restrictions. Some addi- tional analyses techniques will also be covered. Prereq.: IIS 3506. IIS 351 2 Queuing Theory and Its 2 Q.H. Applications A development of the theory of queues with empha- sis on-practical applications, using the latest tech- niques of Markovian state-transition diagrams to sim- plify the mathematic model; study of models based on random arrivals and departures including expo- nential and Eriang service distributions, single and multiple services, series and parallel systems, finite and infinite queues; applications to staffing, inventory control, reliability, maintenance and scheduling. Prereq.: IIS 3103. IIS 351 4 Advanced Operations Research 4 Q.H. Important families of mathematical programming problems and optimization methods will be covered: The revised simplex algorithm and the decomposi- tion principle for large size multidivisional problems. Generalized networks, including the transshipment, shortest route, maximal flow and the minimal span- ning tree problems. The cutting plane and the branch and bound algorithm for binary and mixed integer programming problems. Introduction to nonlinear programming including unconstrained optimization and the Kuhn-Tucker conditions. Prereq.: IIS 3103. IIS 3517 Statistical Decision Theory 2 Q.H. Use of Bayesian statistical inference to arrive at de- cisions when stochastic variables are interacting; relationship to game theory; decision making over time in a sequence; important expected values and distributions; relationship of Bayesian decision the- ory to classical statistical inference. Prereq.: IIS 3506 or IIS 3523. IIS 3518 Advanced Quality Control 2 Q.H. Mathematical methods of quality control; develop- ment of the process control charts for sampling by variables and by attributes; development of accept- ance test procedures; development of life-testing plans; cost aspects of quality-control decisions. Prereq.: IIS 3506 or IIS 3523. IIS 3519 Reliability Theory in Design 2 Q.H. An introduction to the mathematical theory of the reliability of non-maintained systems and their ap- plication in the design of hardware and equipments in general; application of active and standby redun- dancy in systems; reliability predictions; stress-de- noting techniques; availability concepts; design re- views and managerial control. Prereq.: IIS 3506 or IIS 3523. IIS 3521 Reliability Analysis of Complex 2 an. Systems A f\^arkovian-chain state-transition diagram approach to reliability modeling of non-maintained and main- tained systems which permits analytic steady-state and dynamic solutions of both the stationary and non-stationary models; setting up the matrix-equations for solution by computer; controlling the numerical oscillations and accuracy of the results. Prereq.: IIS 3519. IIS 3522 Systems Engineering Design 4 Q.H. and Analysis The course covers principles of systems modeling and analysis using continuous simulation techniques. Topics include differential equations as system mo- dels; Laplace transformations; numerical approxima- tion techniques; stability; steady-state error; control actions; alternative modeling scheme; and validation of system models via continuous simulation tech- niques. Emphasis is placed on concepts from the production and service-oriented industries. Prereq.: Compiler-level language. IIS 3523 Applied Statistics 4 Q.H. Development of complete statistical models for the predication and analysis of random phenomena. Top- ics include goodness of fit and nonparametric tests; analysis of variance; simple and multiple regression. Introduction to the design of experiments, quality control, decision analysis, reliability, and risk as- sessment. Prereq.: IIS 3113. IIS 3524 Advanced Operations Research 4 Q.H. Topics Nonlinear programming including gradient methods, separable, quadratic and geometric programming. Introduction to multicriteria decision analysis includ- ing the generation of nondominated solution set, goal programming, and continuous and discrete solution methods. Prereq.: IIS 3103. IIS 3525 Introduction to Reliability 4 Q.H. Analysis and Risk Assessment Introduction to probability theory, classical and Bayesian statistics useful for reliability analysis of large, complex systems. The course covers Bayesian probability encoding of experience data; principles of the methods or risk assessment and reliability analyses including fault trees, decision trees, and reliability block diagrams. Practical applications to industrial operations— e.g., nuclear and chemical plants, military systems, large processing plants-are treated. IIS 3526 Advanced Reliability Analysis, 4 Q.H. Risk Assessment, and Maintenance Extended application and use of reliability and prob- abilistic risk analysis methods. Methods for common cause/dependent failure analysis, human reliability analysis, and treatment of uncertainties. Bayesian statistics applied to data analysis and discrete prob- ability distribution (DPD) arithmetic for propagation of uncertainty. Time-dependent reliability analysis, Markov models, availability, and maintenance theory. Replacement and maintenance strategy development. The role of maintenance in improving systems reli- ability, performance, and productivity. The Deming method of quality control. Case studies in industrial system. Prereq.: IIS 3525. Industrial Engineering / 135 IIS 3600 Basic Computer Systems 2 Q.H. Technology Introduction to computer systems and assembly lan- guage programming using a language such as VAX MACRO. Topics include: machine language, and as- semblers. Input/output device control. Students are required to prepare and test several programs. Prereq.: Compiler level language. IIS 3601 Compiler Design 4 Q.H. An introduction to data structures, including stacks and trees. The nature of compiling and interpreting, string manipulation, and code generation. The writing of a compiler in assembly language of a BASIC-like source language will be started. The compiler design work is completed as a term project. Prereq.: IIS 3600 or IIS 3116. IIS 3604 Data Structures and 4 Q.H. Introduction to Data Base Management Treats the topics of computer files, file organization and processing, list and tree organization, and main- tenance controls, for quality, protection, and security. Introduction to data base systems and their rise in corporations. Review of basic data storage concepts. Evolution and grov\rth of data bases. Data organi- zation, file creation, and management, using hashing, threaded lists, tree structures. Distributed data bases. Data base software, directory maintenance, types of data base languages, query languages. Data base management systems. Data base administration. Prereq.: IIS 3615 or equivalent. lis 3607 Operating Systems and 4 Q.H. Systems Software A study of the components of operating systems, including resource allocation management, multi- tasking, scheduling, and I/O. Major software ele- ments of a computer system are considered, includ- ing loaders, linkers, assemblers, compilers, and interpreters. Prereq.: IIS 3604 or IIS 3600. IIS 3610 Computer Architecture 4 Q.H. This course embodies how modern computers are designed and organized from a number of levels including the fundamental circuits memory control, and I/O, as well as how alternative designs and archi- tecture affect and are affected by software. Topics to be covered include: elementary digital circuits, including registers, multiplexers, and circuits used in arithmetic operations, control, and I/O; memory organization; microprogramming; busses and I/O channels; example architectures, including PDP 11, IBM 360/370, and a typical microprocessor; multi- tasking; virtual systems. Prereq.: IIS 3600. IIS 3613 Principles of Software Design 2 Q.H. Techniques for solving complex computer program- ming tasks include run-time structures in program- ming languages; communication, linking, and sharing of programs and data; interface design; program documentation; maintenance modification; testing and debugging. Current topics in program design such as readability, data abstraction, step-wise re- finement and structured programming are also cov- ered. Prereq.: IIS 3607. IIS 3614 Basic Information System 2 Q.H. Technology ' Introduction to the hardware and software which sup- port computer-based management information sys- tems, design, development, and operation. Topics include CPU instruction cycle; data conversion and data entry devices; secondary memory types; output and display devices; machine-oriented and high-level computer languages. Objective of the course is to develop capability in specifying software and equip- ment configuration appropriate to support a given set of management informational needs. IIS 361 5 Analysis and Design of 4 Q.H. Computer Information Systems Introduction to computer information systems anal- ysis and design techniques and the hardware and software which support such systems. Topics cov- ered include: techniques for determining information requirements for MIS/DSSs; development of the functional systems design; computer system design considerations such as the CPU, main memory op- erating systems functions, computer languages, in- put devices, secondary memory file organization, data-base management systems, data communica- tions, data security, and output and display devices. The main objective of the course is to develop ca- pability in the skeletal design of a computer system to support a given set of management needs. IIS 3616 MIS: Planning and Managing 4 Q.H. the Contributions to the Decision Process Phases of MIS design and development are exam- ined from a planning and control viewpoint. Tech- niques are presented for conceptual identification of a continuing stream of information system candidate projects, for achieving a user-oriented assessment of cost/benefit potential, and for control of the design and implementation effort. Case study discussions are used extensively to apply principles to realistic situations. IIS 3617 Management Information 2 Q.H. Systems The development of a conceptual framework which emphasizes support to management decision mak- ing. Relevant cognitive and organizational character- istics of human decision making are integrated into a systems analysis approach to development of ef- fective information systems. Case study discussions are used extensively to apply principles to realistic situations. Prereq.: IIS 3614 or IIS 3615. IIS 3618 MIS: Planning, Control and 2 Q.H. Development Phases of MIS design and development are exam- ined from a planning and control viewpoint. Tech- niques are presented for conceptual identification of a continuing stream of information system candidate projects, for achieving a user-oriented assessment of cost/benefit potential, and for control of the design and implementation effort. Case study discussions are used extensively to apply principles to realistic situations. Prereq.: IIS 3614 or IIS 3615. 136 /Engineering IIS 3620 Computerized Financial 2 Q.H. Control Systems Considers on-line systems for financial and inventory control from the technological, legal, and social point of view. The focus of the course is on electronic funds transfer (EFT) and point of sale (POS) termi- nals and associated computing equipment for inter- bank and consumer banking transactions, debit card transactions, and retail management information sys- tems to control cash and inventory. The current tech- nological status and societal implications of EFT and POS terminals are discussed. Prereq.: IIS 3614 or IIS 3615. IIS 3621 Information Systems and Society 2 Q.H. Discussion of the role computer systems play in modern society. The beneficial use of computers in commercial and industrial enterprises is considered and contrasted w/ith the potential for infringement of individual privacy rights. Sufficient technical material on computer hardware, software, and data commu- nications is discussed to permit assessment of sys- tem feasibility. Relevant major legislation is related to current practice in use of computer systems. IIS 3622 Information Systems in a 4 Q.H. Microcomputer Environment Explores the role of microcomputers, networks of microcomputers, and larger machines in providing decision-aiding information. Topics include elements of office automation, local area networks, data com- munications, and micro- and minicomputer-based decision-support software. Emphasis is placed on the application of software packages to case prob- lems. Specific IBM software includes Knowledgeman, Superwriter, Lotus 1-2-3, dBase II, and Number Cruncher On the VAX1 1/780, exposure to Runoff, INGRES, and DATATRIEVE will be provided. Prereq. IIS 361 4 or equivalent. IIS 3623 File Processing 2 Q.H. Processing of -sequential, indexed-sequential, and direct/relative data files on tape and disk; record blocking, searching, sorting, and merging opera- tions; random access techniques; introduction to data base management concepts, and if time permits an introduction to RPG. Prereq.: Knowledge of COBOL programming. IIS 3624 Software Engineering I 4 Q.H. An introduction to software design techniques (soft- ware design methodology, programming methodol- ogy, software maintenance, software testing). Special emphasis on modular design. Modular design using Modula-2. Prereq.: IIS 3115 or IIS 3117. IIS 3625 Software Engineering II 4 Q.H. An examination of software engineering principles through case studies of large software projects. The case studies serve as testbeds for software testing tools such as file comparators, program debuggers, and interactive debuggers. Prereq.: IIS 3624. IIS 3626 Networks and 4 Q.H. Telecommunications Network goals and applications; architecture, topol- ogies, and protocols; layered communications pro- tocol design; layer functions, interlayer interfaces, and peer processes; performance measures; data communication techniques; wide area and local net- works; channel interfaces and access schemes; workstations and server nodes; distributed systems; internetworking. IIS 3627 Software Economics 4 Q.H. An examination of the COCOMO model (Constructive Cost Model) in the software life cycle will be in- cluded. Cost effectiveness analysis, multiple-goal de- cision analysis, figures of merit and marginal analysis techinques will be covered. Prereq.: IIS 3624. IIS 3650 Engineering Analysis Utilizing 2 Q.H. Data Processing Application of computers and major high-level com- puter languages to the solution of engineering prob- lems. FORTRAN and GPSS are employed in appli- cations drawn from production and service-oriented industries to illustrate topics such as generation of random numbers, inventory simulation models, file search and sorting techniques, and root-finding al- gorithms. The software packages SPSS and MPOS are introduced. Prereq.: Compiler level language. IIS 3651 Software Engineering Project 8 Q.H. Individual work under faculty supervision. Prereq.: IIS 3624, IIS 3625, and permission of instructor. IIS 3797 Engineer Degree Continuation 0 Q.H. IIS 3798 Master's Thesis Continuation 0 Q.H. IIS 3799 PhD Continuation 0 Q.H. IIS 3801 Special Project in Industrial 2 Q.H. Engineering Individual work under faculty supervision. Prereq.: Permission of instructor. IIS 3802 Special Project in Industrial Engineering Same as IIS 3801. 4 Q.H. 2 Q.H. IIS 3803 Independent Study in Operations Research Any Quarter Special topics in Operations Research by arrange- ment with a faculty member. IIS 3804 Special Topics 4 Q.H. Special topics in IE and IS. Prereq.: Permission of instructor IIS 3805 Special Topics 2 Q.H. Special topics in IE and IS. Prereq.: Permission of instructor IIS 3806 Seminar in Industrial 2 Q.H. Engineering Discussion and presentations of thesis-related top- ics by students, presentations and discussions by Mechanical Engineering / 137 faculty and eminent people in the field on timely industrial engineering topics. Field trips and visita- tions included where appropriate. Prereq.: Permis- sion of instructor. IIS 3863 Thesis (Master's Degree) 8 Q.H. Analytical and/or experimental work conducted un- der the auspices of the Department. Prereq.: Consent of adviser. IIS 3861 Thesis (l\^aster's Degree) 4 Q.H. Same as IIS 3863. IIS 3862 Thesis (Master's Degree) 2 Q.H. Same as IIS 3863. IIS 3870 Industrial Engineer Degree 10 Q.H. Project Undertaken with the approval of the candidate's ad- viser and the Department Graduate Committee. IIS 3871 Industrial Engineer Degree 4 Q.H. Project Same as IIS 3870. IIS 3872 Industrial Engineer Degree Same as IIS 3870. IIS 3873 Industrial Engineer Degree Project Same as IIS 3870. 2 Q.H. 8 Q.H. 10 Q.H. IIS 3880 Doctoral Thesis Doctoral thesis research conducted under adviser- ship of the doctoral student's dissertation committee. IIS 3881 Doctoral Thesis Same as IIS 3880. IIS 3882 Doctoral Thesis Same as IIS 3880. IIS 3883 Doctoral Thesis Same as IIS 3880. 4 Q.H. 2 Q.H. 8 Q.H. Mechanical Engineering Each course description includes information on the expected quarter in which classes are usually offered. The quarters listed are presented here for planning purposes; however, the Graduate School of Engineering cannot guarantee that all courses will be offered. Students must refer to the Graduate School of Engineering Quarterly Course Offering sheets to determine what courses are actually offered in any given quarter and at what day and time. 'Odd' and 'Even' years refer to the fall quarter of the academic year, i.e.. Spring '85 which is in the 84-85 academic year, would be an 'Even' year. ME 3100 Mathematical Methods for 4 Q.H. Mechanical Engineers (formerly 02.825) Fall Quarter Embodies the material in ME 3101 and ME 3102. Prereq.: Admission to ttie Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3101 Mathematical Methods for 2 Q.H. Mechanical Engineers I (formerly 02.826) Fall Quarter Bessel and Legendre functions: boundary-value problems and series of orthogonal functions. Partial differential equations and applications to heat trans- fer, fluid flow, vibrations and wave propagation. Prereq.: Admission to tlie Graduate School of Engineering. ME 31 02 Mathematical Methods for 2 Q.H. Mechanical Engineers II (formerly 02.827) Winter Quarter Vector analysis; divergence theorem; functions of a complex variable; Laurent series and singular points; residues and contour integration; applications. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 31 20 Theory of Elasticity 4 Q.H. (formerly 02.807) Fall Quarter Embodies the material in ME 3121 and ME 3122. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3121 Theory to Elasticity I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.804) Fall Quarter Analysis of Cartesian tensors using indicial notation. Stress and strain concepts; point stress and strain; relation to tensor concepts. Governing equations for the determination of stress and displacement distri- butions in a solid body. Exact solutions of the gov- erning equations for elastic solids. Prereq.: Admis- sion to the Graduate School of Engineeering. ME 3122 Theory of Elasticity II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.805) Winter Quarter Plane stress and strain problems in rectangular and polar coordinates including thermal stress. Relation of elasticity theory to strength of materials. Torsion of prismatic and axially symmetric bars. Bending of thin flat rectangular and circular plates. Prereq.: ME 3121. ME 3140 Advanced Dynamics 4 Q.H. Fall Quarter Embodies the material in ME 3141 and ME 3142. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3141 Advanced Dynamics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.847) Fall Quarter Kinematics of particles and rigid bodies. Modeling and application of fundamental laws of motion. Dy- 138 /Engineering namic response of lumped parameter systems. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate Scliool of Engineering. ME 3142 Advanced Dynamics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.848) Winter Quarter Continuation of ME 3141. Lagrange's equations. Ap- plications in two and three dimensions. Prereq.: ME 3141. ME 3200 General Thermodynamics 4 Q.H. (formerly 02.903) Winter Quarter Fundamentals of equilibrium thermodynamics will be examined. Topics include: work, energy, heat, tem- perature, available energy, entropy, first and second laws of thermodynamics, simple systems, closed and open systems, availability loss and irreversibility, heat engines, multicomponent systems, mixtures of gases, chemical reactions and chemical equilibrium. Equiv- alent to courses ME 3201 and ME 3202. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3201 General Thermodynamics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.901) Fall Quarter ME 3201 and ME 3202 present the same material contained in ME 3200 but in two 2QH courses. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3202 General Thermodynamics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.902) Winter Quarter Continuation of ME 3201. Prereq.: (JIE 3201. ME 321 0 Essentials of Fluid Dynamics 4 Q.H. (formerly 02.821) Fall Quarter This is a fundamental course in fluid dynamics de- signed to prepare the student for more advanced courses in the thermofluids curriculum while provid- ing a strong background in fluid mechanics. Topics to be covered may include: Cartesian tensors; dif- ferential and integral formulation of the equations of conservation of mass, momentum and energy; mo- lecular and continuum transport phenomena; The Navier-Stokes equations; Vorticity; inviscid, incom- pressible flow, the velocity potential and Bernoulli's equation; viscous incompressible flow; the stream function; some exact solutions; energy equation in- cluding heat conduction and viscous dissipation. This material is also covered in the two 2QH courses ME 321 1 and ME 3212. Prereq.: Admission to the Grad- uate School of Engineering. ME 3211 Essentials of Ruid Dynamics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.819) Fall Quarter ME 3211 and ME 3212 present the same material with the same prerequisites as ME 3210, but in two 2QH courses. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. i ME 3212 Essentials of Fluid Dynamics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.820) Winter Quarter Continuation ME 321 1. Prereq.: ME 3211. ME 3250 Advanced Physical Metallurgy I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.953) Fall Quarter, Odd Years The kinetics of phase transformations in metals. Top- ics include kinetic theory, empirical kinetics, diffusion in metals, nucleation, diffusional growth, martensitic transformations. Prereq.: A recent introductory ma- terial science course. ME 3251 Advanced Physical Metallurgy II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.954) Winter Quarter, Odd Years Dislocation theory; including such topics as dislo- cation stress fields, self-energy, velocity, interactions mechanisms, image forces, and theories of yielding. Prereq.: A recent introductory material science course. ME 3260 Thermodynamics of Materials I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.960) Fall Quarter, Odd Years Basic metallurgical thermodynamics encompassing first, second, and third laws, entropy, enthalpy, and free energy. Prereq.: Engineering materials. ME 3261 Thermodynamics of Materials II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.961) Winter Quarter, Odd Years Continuation of ME 3260 with emphasis on solu- tions, activity, activity coefficients, the phase rule and applications to some metallurgical problems. Prereq.: ME 3260. ME 3270 Material Science and 2 Q.H. Engineering I (formerly 02.970) Fall Quarter, Even Years Principles underlying the structure and properties of solid materials. The relationships of these principles to the properties and to applications in structures and devices. Both macroscopic-phenomenological and electronic-molecular approaches will be used. Materials will include metals and alloys, semicon- ductors, and dielectrics. Typical subjects are atomic and electronic structures, ordering, nucleation, crys- tal growth, and thermal properties. Prereq.: A recent introductory material science course. ME 3271 Material Science and 2 Q.H. Engineering II (formerly 02.971) Winter Quarter, Even Years Continuation of ME 3270 into additional topics such as electric, magnetic, and optical properties; appli- cations of solid-state phenomena to achieve func- tions embodied in transducers, filters, amplifiers, en- ergy converters, and so forth. Prereq.: ME 3270. ME 3341 Power Generating Systems I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.935) Fall Quarter Power generating systems that employ fossil, nuclear, and heat recovery boilers operating in conjunction Mechanical Engineering / 139 with steam and organic Rankine cycles are exam- ined. The steady-state and transient operation of each power-generating system is studied from both an analytical and conceptual point of view. The effect that site conditions, fuel quality, plant loading sched- ule and environmental regulations have on system design, performance and operation is presented. Prereq.: ME 3200 or equivalent, or may be taken con- currently with permission of instructor ME 3342 Power Generating Systems II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.936) Winter Quarter An extension of ME 3341. The same type of ex- amination is conducted of systems incorporating gas, hydraulic, and wind turbines, solar and fuel cells, energy storage, combined cycles, and cogenerating systems. The objective of Power Generating Systems I and II is to develop the skills needed to conduct sound technical evaluations of the power generating systems being built today. Prereq.: ME 3341. ME 3343 Power Generation Economics 2 Q.H. and Planning (formerly 02.938) Spring Quarter Current and constant-dollar power generation costs are examined. Life-cycle economic analysis, such as revenue requirements, discounted cash flow, internal rate of return, and payback analyses are presented. The planning methodologies used by electric utilities and private industry to evaluate and select power generating systems are presented. Prereq.: ME 3342. ME 3351 Solar Thermal Engineering I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.855) Fall Quarter, Odd Years A model is developed for the hourly direct and diffuse radiation under a cover of scattered clouds and the transmission and absorption of this radiation by pas- sive and active systems. The design of air heating systems and the storage of the collected energy by a pebble-bed are considered, as well as elements of heat exchanger design. A study of the economics of a domestic water and/or space heating system is made using f-chart analysis. Prereq.: CHE 3659, Solar Energy Thermal Processes or equivalent background. ME 3352 Solar Thermal Engineering II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.856) Winter Quarter, Odd Years The design and analysis of several solar thermal systems are considered, such as: LiBr-l-l20 absorp- tion cooling units, heat pumps, compound parabolic collectors, and the heat pipe type of solar collector. Prereq.: ME 3351. ME 3361 Turbomachinery Design I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.930) Fall Quarter Preliminary design methods and analytical tools ap- plicable to turbomachinery in general, including ve- locity diagram selection and limitations of diffusion, are presented. Design criteria and performance characteristics at design and off-design operating conditions are discussed for several important types of turbomachinery Axial flow compressors and tur- bines (gas and steam) are studied in some depth, including topics such as compressor surge, turbine blade cooling, and steam wetness effects. Centrifu- gal compressors, radial inflow turbines, pumps, fans, and water turbines are also studied. Turbomachinery mechanical design limitations are discussed. The use of empirical data on blade cascade performance in blade selection is examined. Numerical methods of analyzing two-and three-dimensional flows in turbo- machinery (e.g., conformal transformation and stream- line curvature) are presented. Two in-depth design projects (one per quarter) are assigned. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering, and undergraduate preparation in fluid mechanics and thermodynamics. ME 3362 Turbomachinery Design II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.931) Winter Quarter Continuation of ME 3361. Prereq. :ME 3361. ME 3380 Fundamentals of Instrumentation 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.853) Fall Quarter Theoretical principles underlying the design and operation of instruments for measurement and/or control. Analysis of stimulus-response relations. In- dustrial instruments for measurement and control, including those based on pneumatic and electrical systems. Prereq.: Bachelor of Science degree. ME 3381 Industrial Process Control 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.854) Winter Quarter Fundamental principles involved in automatic control of industrial processes. Economic considerations. Application of control instruments to obtain auto- matic control of temperature, pressure, fluid flow, liquid level, humidity, PH. Prereq.: ME 3380. ME 3386 Nuclear Engineering I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.942) Fall Quarter, Even Years Topics include: growth of nuclear power industry; study of nuclear physics emphasizing atomic and nuclear structure, radioactive decay and nuclear re- actions with particular attention to fission and fusion; radiation health physics; principles of shielding; nu- clear instrumentation; production and application of radioisotopes; neutron interactions and slowing down theory; neutron activation analysis. (Not open to stu- dents who have completed ME 1541 and ME 1542). Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of- Engineering. ME 3387 Nuclear Engineering II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.943) Winter Quarter, Even Years Comparison of thermal, fast, and breeder reactors; four factor formula and the neutron diffusion equa- tion; one-group, modified one-group, two-group and multi-group theory; bare and reflected thermal re- actors; energy production and distribution within 140 /Engineering core; flux shaping; transient reactor behavior and control; factors affecting reactivity including temper- ature, pressure, void formation, fission product ac- cumulation, fuel depletion and fuel breeding; Xenon buildup after shutdown. (Not open to students who have completed ME 1541 and ME 1542). Prereq.: ME 3386. ME 3388 Nuclear Engineering III 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.944) Spring Quarter, Even Years Reactor design considerations; interrelationship of reactor physics, control, engineering, materials, safety, and fuel cycle management; reactor types; radiation damage and reactor materials; nuclear fuels; reactor heat transfer; economics of nuclear power; environ- mental effects. (Not open to students who have com- pleted ME 1541 and ME 1542). Prereq.: ME 3387. ME 3401 Advanced Math Methods for 2 Q.H. Mechanical Engineers I (formerly 02.828) Spring Quarter, Even Years Matrices and linear equations. Variational calculus and applications. Approximate methods of engi- neering analysis. Selected topics of current interest. Prereq.: ME 3101 and ME 3102. ME 3402 Advanced Math Methods for 2 Q.H. Mechanical Engineers II Spring Quarter Integral transforms; asymptotic expansion; regular and singular perturbation methods. Examples drawn from solid mechanics, vibration, and fluid mechanics. Prereq.: ME 3101 and ME 3102. ME 3410 Numerical Methods in 4 Q.H. Mechanical Engineering All Winter Quarters, Fall Quarter, Even Years Numerical methods applied to problems in mechan- ical engineering. Solution of linear and nonlinear sys- tems of equations, interpolation, numerical differen- tiation and integration, numerical solution of ordinary differential equations; explicit and implicit methods, multistep methods, predictor-corrector methods. Numerical solution of partial differential equations with emphasis on parabolic and elliptic problems occurring in mechanical engineering. This material is also covered in the two 2QH courses ME 3411 and ME 341 2. Prereq.: ME 3100. ME 3411 Numerical Methods in 2 Q.H. Mechanical Engineering I As Announced ME 3411 and ME 3412 present the same material with the same prerequisites as ME 3410, but in two 2QH courses. ME 3412 Numerical Methods in Mechanical Engineering II As Announced Continuation of ME 341 1. Prereq.: ME 3411. 2 Q.H. ME 3420 Mechanics of Inelastic Solids 4 Q.H. Spring Quarter Constitutive relations governing inelastic solids. Yield surface; plastic stress-strain relations; Prandtl-Reuss equations. Viscoelastic stress-strain relations in- cluding the Maxwell and Voigt models. Viscoplastic- ity. Prereq. :ME 3122. Not available to students who have taken ME 3421. ME 3421 Introduction to Plasticity 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.809) Winter Quarter, Even Years Basic experimental information. Review of stress and strain tensors. Elastic stress-strain relations. Yield surface. Plastic stress-strain relations. Prandtl-Reuss equations. Simple applications. Prereq.: ME 3121. ME 3423 Advanced Theory of Elasticity 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.806) Spring Quarter Approximate solutions for stress and displacement distributions in elastic solids; discrete solutions us- ing finite difference and finite element methods; en- ergy principles and the calculus of variations; use of energy principles to obtain approximate contin- uous solutions. Prereq.: ME 3122, Theory of Elasticity II. ME 3432 Engineering Fracture 2 Q.H. Mechanics (formerly 02.838) Fall Quarter, Odd Years Fundamentals of brittle fracture; theoretical strength, micro/macro fracture characteristic, Inglis-Griffith theory, applicability of same. Linear elastic fracture mechanics; Orewan/lrwin extension to metals, effec- tive surface tension and relation to fracture tough- ness, plastic zone size correction; geometry effects on fracture toughness; plane strain/plane stress fracture toughness, thickness effects. Prereq.: ME 3122. ME 3433 Engineering Fracture 2 Q.H. Mechanics (formerly 02.839) Winter Quarter, Odd Years Experimental determination of fracture toughness; slow crack growrth "pop in," arrest, R-G curves, com- pliance techniques for determining elastic energy release note. Alternate fracture toughness concepts; resistance curve, crack opening displacement, the J integral. Application of fracture mechanics to fatigue. Design methods to minimize risks of catastrophic failure will be emphasized. Prereq.: ME 3432. ME 3434 Engineering Fracture 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.829) Spring Quarter, Odd Years Application of fracture mechanics to fatigue, strain energy density criteria for fracture, arrest criteria. "Work of Fracture" specimen. Application of fracture mechanics to structural analysis. Effect of anisotropy in fracture mechanics. Fracture dynamics, dynamic fracture toughness, strain rate effects. Microsecond Mechanical Engineering / 141 fracture phenomenon and criteria, spall, Butcher- Tuler criterion, NAG model. Residual strength, design approaches will be emphasized. Prereq.: ME 3433. ME 3440 Advanced Mechanics of 4 Q.H. Materials (formerly 02.812) Winter Quarter Embodies the material in ME 3441 and ME 3442. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3441 Advanced Mechanics of 2 Q.H. Materials I (formerly 02.810) Fall Quarter Review of fundamental stress and deformation con- cepts; strain energy density; introduction to energy methods with application to beams, frames and rings; Ritz method. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3442 Advanced Mechanics of 2 Q.H. Materials II (formerly 02.811) Winter Quarter Beams on elastic foundations. Concept of stability as applied to one and two degree-of-freedom sys- tems. Buckling of bars, frames and rings. Prereq.: ME 3441. ME 3443 Advanced Mechanics of 2 Q.H. Materials III (formerly 02.813) Spring Quarter, Even Years Selected topics in advanced mechanics; will vary with current interest. Prereq.: ME 3442, Advanced Mechanics of Materials II or consent of the instructor ME 3446 Theory of Shells 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.815) Spring Quarter, Odd Years Membrane theory of shells. Analysis of cylindrical shells. General theory of thin elastic shells. Shells of revolution. Prereq.: ME 3122. ME 3455 Mechanics of Composite 2 Q.H. Materials (formerly 02.816) Winter Quarter, Odd Years Constitutive equations for anisotropic laminated com- posite materials, and application to the structural response of beams and plates. Bending and bucKnrig of symmetric and nonsymmetric laminates. Prereq.: ME 3121. ME 3465 Automatic Control Engineering A 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.849) Fall Quarter, Even Years Concepts of feedback control; formulation of equa- tions, transfer functions, and block diagrams repre- senting components and systems; linearization; La- place transformation; stability. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3466 Automatic Control Engineering I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.850) Winter Quarter, Even Years Study of control action; analysis and design by use of root-locus and frequency-domain techniques. Prereq.: ME 3465 or permission of instructor ME 3467 Automatic Control Engineering II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.851) Spring Quarter, Even Years Further consideration of linear systems including com- pensation methods and multiple-input. Techniques for the treatment of nonlinear systems. Prereq.: ME 3466. ME 3468 Robot Mechanics and Control 4 Q.H. Spring Quarter Kinematics and dynamics of robot manipulators are the focus of the first part of the course. Kinematics cover the development of kinematic equations of ma- nipulators, the inverse kinematic problems, and mo- tion trajectories. Dynamics of manipulators for the purpose of control are covered employing Lagran- gian mechanics. The second part of the course fo- cuses on the control and programming of robot ma- nipulators. Steady state errors and calculations of servo parameters are covered. High level program- ming languages are discussed. Prereq.: ME 3142. ME 3470 Vibration Theory and 4 Q.H. Applications (formerly 02.844) Winter Quarter Embodies the material in ME 3472 and ME 3473. Prereqf.; ME 3142 or ME 3471. ME 3471 Vibration Theory and 2 Q.H. Applications A (formerly 02.841) As Announced Modeling of vibratory systems; one-degree-of-free- dom systems (determination of equations of motion using free-body and energy methods); forced and free vibrations through two degrees of freedom. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3472 Vibration Theory and 2 Q.H. Applications I (formerly 02.842) Fall Quarter, Odd Years Laplace transformation techniques; phase-plane diagrams; multiple-degree-of-freedom systems; free and forced vibrations with and without damping. Prereq.: ME 3471 or ME 3142. ME 3473 Vibration Theory and 2 Q.H. Applications II (formerly 02.843) Winter Quarter, Odd Years Systems with distributed mass and stiffness. Exten- sional, torsional and flexural vibrations of bars. Prereq.: ME 3472. ME 3474 Vibration Theory and 2 Q.H. Applications III (formerly 02.846) As Announced Selected topics of current interest in vibrations. Prereq.: ME 3473. ME 3475 Random Vibration 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.845) Spring Quarter, Odd Years Description of stochastic processes. Impulse re- sponse and frequency response of linear time-in- variant dynamic systems. Correlations and spectra of stationary response. Crossing rates, peaks and 142 / Engineering envelopes. Failure under random loading. Poisson pulse processes. Measurement, identification, and response problems. Coherence. Space-time corre- lations and cross-spectra. Digital data processing. Application to vehicles and structures subjected to wide-band excitation. Prereq.: ME 3473. ME 3480 The Finite Element Method 4 Q.H. (formerly 02.949) Spring Quarter Embodies the material in ME 3481 and ME 3482. Prereq.: ME 3101 arid ME 3102 or corisent of the instructor ME 3481 Finite Element Analysis 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.840) Fall Quarter Introduction to the finite element method. Variational formulations; simple interpolation functions and ele- ment stiffness matrices. Triangular and rectangular elements. Assembly technique and constraining of resulting equations. Elementary applications. Prereq.: ME 3101 and ME 3102 or consent of the instructor ME 3482 Advanced Finite Element 2 Q.H. Method I (formerly 02.947) Winter Quarter Isoparametric element formulation of higher-order and three-dimensional elements. Rayleigh-Ritz and Galerkin formulations. Applications of finite element theory to mechanical engineering problems in the areas of solid mechanics, heat transfer, and fluid mechanics. The use of a finite element general pur- pose commercial package is included. Prereq.: ME 3481. ME 3483 Advanced Finite Element 2 Q.H. Method II (formerly 02.948) Spring Quarter, Even Years The dynamic finite element formulation with explicit and implicit time integration schemes for transient analysis. Solution methods for finite element equilib- rium equations, including material and geometrical nonlinearities. The general structure of computer procedures and codes. Influence of computer-aided design technology. Use of an in-house general pur- pose commercial code is included. Prereq.: ME 3482. ME 3500 Computer-Aided Graphics and 4 Q.H. Design Winter Quarter Basic aspects of interactive computer graphics are covered. Topics include hardware and software con- cepts, design principles for the user-computer in- terface, geometrical transformation, display architec- ture, and data structures. Algorithms for removing hidden edges and surfaces, shading models, and intensity and colors are also covered. The second part of the course deals with the concepts of com- putational and numerical geometry and design of curves and surfaces. Solid modeling techniques are presented. Discussions of in-house computer-aided graphics and design packages are included. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering and programming experience. ME 3540 Heat Conduction and Thermal 4 Q.H. Radiation (formerly 02.910 and 02.913) Winter Quarter Formulation of steady and unsteady state one- and multidimensional heat conduction problems. Solution techniques for linear problems including the method of separation of variables, caplace transforms and integral transforms. Approximate analytical methods. Phase change problems. Nonlinear problems. Nature cf thermal radiation. Blackbody and radiation from a blackbody Radiation from a nonblack surface ele- ment. Radiative exchange among surfaces separated bya nonparticipating medium. Interaction of radiation with other modes of heat transfer in nonparticipating media. Numerical techniques in heat transfer are covered in ME 3410. Engineering. This material is also covered in the two 2QH courses ME 3541 and ME 3542. Prereq. :ME31 00 and undergraduate course in heat transfer ME 3541 Heat Conduction and Thermal 2 Q.H. Radiation I (formerly 02.910) Fall Quarter ME 3541 and ME 3542 present the same material with same prerequisites as ME 3540, but in two 2QH courses. ME 3542 Heat Conduction and Thermal 2 Q.H. Radiation II (formerly 02.913) Winter Quarter Continuation of ME 3541. Prereq.: ME 3541. ME 3544 Convective Heat Transfer 4 QH. (formerly 02.911) Winter Quarter, Even Years; Fall Quarter, Odd Years Fundamental equations of convective heat transfer. Heat transfer in incompressible external laminar boundary layers. Integral boundary layer equations. Laminar forced convection in internal flows. Turbulent forced convection in internal and external flows. Analogies between heat and momentum transfer; the Reynolds, Taylor and Martinelli analogies. Natural convection. Heat transfer in high-speed flow. Tran- sient forced convection. Convection and radiation in nonparticipating media. This material is also covered in the two 2QH courses ME 3545 and ME 3546. Prereq.: ME 3100, ME 3210 and an undergraduate course in Heat Transfer ME 3545 Convective Heat Transfer I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.911) As Announced ME 3545 and ME 3546 present the same material with the same prerequisites as ME 3544, but in two 2QH courses. ME 3546 Convective Heat Transfer II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.911) As Announced Continuation of ME 3545. Prereq.: ME 3545. ME 3548 Radiative Transfer 4 aH. Spring Quarter Electromagnetic background. Fundamentals of ra- diation in absorbing, emitting and scattering media. Mechanical Engineering / 143 Equation of radiative transfer. Approximate methods in the solution of the equation of radiative transfer. Singular-eigenfunction expansion technique. Pure radiative transfer in participating media. Interaction of radiation with conduction and/or convection. The Monte Carlo technique. This material is also covered in the two 2QH courses ME 3549 and ME 3550. Prereq.: ME 3540. ME 3549 Radiative Transfer I 2 Q.H. As Announced ME 3549 and ME 3550 present the same material with the same prerequisites as ME 3548, but in two 2QH courses. ME 3550 Radiative Transfer II 2 Q.H. As Announced Continuation of ME 3549. Prereq.: ME 3549. ME 3552 Two Phase Flow 4 Q.H. Winter, Odd Years This course is aimed at the understanding of the basic concepts of heat and mass transfer associated with phase change and multiphase flows. Some of the specific subjects to be discussed are: boiling heat transfer (nucleate boiling, film boiling and bub- ble dynamics); evaporation and condensation; liquid- gas two phase flow and gas-solid and liquid-solid two phase flows. This material is also covered in the two 2QH course ME 3553 and ME 3554. Prereq.: ME 3100 (or equivalent) and undergraduate heat transfer ME 3553 Two Phase Flow I 2 Q.H. As Announced ME 3553 and ME 3554 present the same material as ME 3552 with the same prerequisites but in two 2QH courses. ME 3554 Two Phase Flow II 2 Q.H. As Announced Continuation of ME 3553. Prereq.: ME 3553. ME 3556 Heat Transfer Processes in 4 Q.H. Microelectronic Devices Spring Quarter The course will discuss and develop state-of-the art methods used to predict the heat transfer rates from microelectronic devices and packages and to sim- ulate transport phenomena in manufacturing proc- esses associated with microelectronic devices. Top- ics will be selected from the current literature and may include use of latent heat reservoirs, boiling jet impingement cooling, control volume approaches to extended surfaces, calculation of thermal contact conductances and natural convection in enclosures. Simulation of laser-assisted thermophoretic depo- sition and laser cladding processes will also be de- veloped. This material is also contained in the two 2QH courses ME 3557 and ME 3558. Prereq.: ME 3100 (or equivalent) and undergraduate heat transfer or consent of instructor ME 3557 Heat Transfer Processes in 2 Q.H. Microelectronic Devices I As Announced ME 3557 and ME 3558 provide the same material as ME 3556 with the same prerequisites, but in two 2QH course. ME 3558 Heat Transfer Processes in 2 Q.H. Microelectronic Devices 11 As Announced Continuation of ME 3557. Prereq.: ME 3557. ME 3560 Viscous Flow 4 Q.H. Spring Quarter Review of conservation of mass, momentum, and en- ergy for compressible viscous flow. Discussion of the mathematical character of the basic equations and analysis of some exact solutions. Investigation of low Reynolds number flow. Exact and approximate ap- proaches to laminar boundary layers in high Rey- nolds number flows. Stability of laminar flows and the transition to turbulence. Treatment of incom- pressible turbulent mean flow; internal and external flows. Extensions to compressible boundary layers. This material is also covered in the two 2QH courses ME 3561 and ME 3562. Prereq.: ME 3100 and ME 3210. ME 3561 Viscous Flow I 2 Q.H. As Announced ME 3561 and ME 3562 present the same material with the same prerequisites as ME 3560, but in two 2QH courses. 2 Q.H. ME 3562 Viscous Flow II As Announced Continuation of ME 3561. Prereq.: ME 3561. ME 3564 Gas Dynamics 4 Q.H. (formerly 02.823 and 02.824) Spring Quarter, Even Years The consequences of fluid compressibility are stud- ied. Shock waves and the theory of characteristics are discussed with specific consideration given to two-dimensional steady flows and one-dimensional unsteady flows. Additional topics may include axially symmetric steady flow, small perturbation theory, similiarity rules, the hodograph method, or some aspects of physical acoustics. This material is also contained in the two 2QH courses ME 3565 and ME 3566. Prereq.: ME 3210. ME 3565 Gas Dynamics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.823) As Announced ME 3565 and ME 3566 present the same material with the same prerequisites as ME 3564, but in two 2QH courses. Prereq.: ME 3210. ME 3566 Gas Dynamics II (formerly 02.824) As Announced Continuation of ME 3565. Prereq.: ME 3565. 2 Q.H. 144 / Engineering ME 3568 Computational Fluid Dynamics 4 Q.H. with Heat Transfer All Spring Quarters, Fall Quarter, Odd Years Rnite difference methods for solving partial differ- ential equations with particular emphasis on the equations of fluid dynamics and convective heat trans- fer. Integral methods for boundary layers and their coupling to potential flow solutions. Use of coordinate transformations and body-oriented coordinate sys- tems. Application of superposition techniques in con- vective heat transfer problems. This material is also covered in the two 2QH courses ME 3569 and ME 3570. Prereq.: ME 3210 and ME 3410. ME 3569 Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 Q.H. with Heat Transfer I 2 Q.H. As Announced ME 3569 and ME 3570 present the same material with the same prerequisites as ME 3568, but in two 2QH courses. ME 3570 Computational Fluid Dynamics 2 Q.H. with Heat Transfer II As Announced Continuation of ME 3569. Prereq.: ME 3569. ME 3580 Statistical Thermodynamics 4 Q.H. (formerly 02.904) Spring Quarter, Odd Years This is an introductory course in statistical ther- modynamics for mechanical engineers designed to provide insight into the laws of classical thermody- namics and the behavior of substances. Topics to be covered include: introduction to probability; el- ementary kinetic theory of an ideal gas, including the distribution of molecular velocities and the mean free path treatment of transport properties; classical statistics of independent particles, equipartition of energy, the partition function and laws of thermo- dynamics; some results from quantum mechanics, quantum statistics of independent particles; appli- cations to gases; introduction to ensembles and sys- tems of interacting particles. This material is also contained in the two 2QH courses ME 3581 and ME 3582. Prereq.: ME 3100 and ME 3200 or equivalent. ME 3581 Statistical Themodynamics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.904) As Announced ME 3581 and ME 3582 present the same material with the same prerequisites as ME 3580, but in two 2QH courses. ME 3582 Statistical Thermodynamics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.904) As Announced Continuation of ME 3581. Prereq.: ME 3581. ME 3584 Fundamentals of Combustion 4 Q.H. (formerly 02.927) Spring Quarter, Even Years Comprehensive treatment of the problems involved in the combustion of liquid, gaseous, and solid fuels in both laminar and turbulent flow. The fundamentals of chemical kinetics will be discussed. The equations for the transport of mass, momentum, and energy with chemically reacting gases will be examined. Topics will include diffusion and premixed flames, combustion of droplets and sprays, and gasification and combustion of coal. This material is also pre- sented in the two 2QH courses ME 3585 and ME 3586. Prereq.: ME 3200. ME 3585 Fundamentals of Combustion I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.927) As Announced ME 3585 and ME 3586 present the same material as ME 3584, with same prerequisites, but in two 2QH courses. ME 3586 Fundamentals of Combustion II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.927) As Announced Continuation of ME 3585. Prereq.: ME 3585. ME 3600 Advanced Physical Metallurgy III 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.956) Spring Quarter, Odd Years Mechanical behavior of metals. Application of dis- location theory to micro-plasticity, strain hardening, strengthening mechanisms and creep. Prereq.: ME 3251. ME 3601 Thermodynamics of Materials III 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.963) Spring Quarter, Odd Years The application of metallurgical thermodynamics to various process metallurgical problems, i.e., gas-solid systems, etc., plus kinetics of reactions and dynamic systems analysis. Prereq.: ME 3260 or ME 3261. ME 3602 Materials Science and 2 Q.H. Engineering ill (formerly 02.972) Spring Quarter, Even Years Continuation of ME 3271 plus a discussion of var- ious special topics that will vary from year to year. Examples are: metastable phases and thin films. Prereq.: ME 3271. ME 3603 Corrosion 2 Q.H. As Announced This course will commence with the study of the thermodynamics of corrosion and corrosion reac- tions both in aqueous and non-aqueous environ- ments. Topics will include thermodynamics, kinetics, and the effects of environment and physical metal- lurgy. Applications will be made to automotive de- sign, and exterior and interior structures. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3604 Oxidation 2 Q.H. As Announced This course will begin with the study of the ther- modynamics of oxidation and the effect of environ- ment on rates of oxidation. Topics will include ther- modynamics, kinetics, mechanisms, and effect of environment. Ferrous and nonferrous metals as well as polymers will be assessed. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. Mechanical Engineering / 145 ME 3605 Electronic Materials I 2 Q.H. Fall Quarter, Odd Years Generic techniques for fabrication and processing, and the resulting structure-property relationships, are presented for materials utilized in electronics. Typically included are: bulk single crystals, thin films, metals, semiconductors, and insulators. Prereq.: ME 3271. ME 3606 Electronic Material II 2 Q.H. Winter, Odd Years Continuation of ME 3605. Prereq.: ME 3605. ME 3610 introduction to Diffraction 2 Q.H. Methods in Material Science (formerly 02.975) Fall Quarter General principles of the diffraction by materials of short wave length radiations; (such as x-ray, elec- trons, and thermal neutrons) are studied with em- phasis on the understanding of the similarities and differences of the different radiations when applied to the study of the structures of crystalline and non- crystalline materials. Prereq.: A recent introductory material science course. ME 361 1 Diffraction Methods in Material 2 Q.H. Science (formerly 02.976) Winter Quarter Continuation of ME 3610 with emphasis on the ex- perimental methods and applications. This includes: choice of radiation, introduction to instrumentation, sample preparation, methods of detection and re- cording of the diffracted radiation, analysis, interpre- tation and use of the results. Prereq.: ME 3610. ME 3612 Microstructure Analysis I 2 Q.H. Fall Quarter, Even Years Discussion of the principles of scanning and trans- mission electron microscopy Image interpretation in transmission electron microscopy with emphasis on the study of the relationships between microstruc- ture and properties of materials. Application of ki- nematical and dynamical theories of electron dif- fraction to quantitative analysis of point defects, dislocations, precipitates and grain boundaries etc. Laboratory demonstration of TEM and SEM opera- tion. Prereq.: Admission to ttie Graduate Scliool of Engineering. ME 3613 Microstructure Analysis II 2 Q.H. Winter, Even Years Continuation of ME 3612. Prereq.: ME 3612. ME 3620 Powder Metallurgy 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.985) Spring Quarter, Even Years Powder characteristics and methods of manufacture. Powder pressing: packing, interparticle bonding, ef- fects of pressure. Principles of sintering. Character- istics and properties of products made from pow- dered materials. Prereq.: A recent introductory material science course. ME 3625 Physical Ceramics I 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.965) Fall Quarter, Even Years Introduction to ceramic fabrication processes. Char- acteristics of vitreous and crystalline solids, struc- tural imperfections, and atomic mobility. Phase equi- libria, nucleation, crystal grov\rth, solid-state reactions, non-equilibrium phases, and effects on the resulting microstructure of ceramics. Prereq.: A recent intro- ductory material science course, physical chemistry, or solid state physics. ME 3626 Physical Ceramics II 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.966) Winter Quarter, Even Years Discussion of effects of composition and microstruc- ture on the thermal, mechanical, optical, electrical, and magnetic properties of ceramic materials. Prereq.: ME 3625. ME 3630 The Structure and Properties 2 Q.H. of Polymeric Materials I (formerly 02.958) Fall Quarter, Even Years Introduction to the organic chemistry of polymers, effect of chemical composition on structure, melting point and glass transition temperature, polymer char- acterization and degradation, thermodynamics of polymers. Prereq.: Undergraduate material science course. ME 3631 The Structure and Properties 2 Q.H. of Polymeric Materials II (formerly 02.959) Winter Quarter, Even Years Rheology and mechanical behavior of polymers, analysis and testing, effects of processing on struc- ture and physical properties, industrial polymers, resin base composites. Prereq.: ME 3630. ME 3640 Computer Modeling of Materials 2 Q.H. Processing Fall Quarter, Even Years This course focuses on the use of numerical meth- ods for modeling a variety of materials processes, e.g. melting, oxidation, reduction, the blast furnace, the cupola, rolling, extrusion. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3641 Computer Modeling of Materials 2 Q.H. Properties Winter Quarter, Even Years Various mathematical techniques and computer methods will be used to develop models that de- scribe the changes in a material's chemical, me- chanical, and physical properties as the chemical composition and metallurgical variables are changed. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3797 Engineer Degree ContinuationO Q.H. Any Quarter ME 3798 Master's Degree Continuation 0 Q.H. (formerly 02.9X1) Any Quarter 146 /Engineering ME 3799 PhD Continuation 0 Q.H. Any Quarter IME 3850 Special Problems in Mechanical 2 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 02.992) Any Quarter Theoretical or experimental work under individual faculty supervision. Prereq.: Consent of department faculty. ME 3853 Special Topics in Mechanical 2 Q.H. Engineering (formerly 02.993) Any Quarter Topics of interest to the staff member conducting this class are presented for advanced study. Prereq.: Permission of department faculty. ME 3856 Doctoral Reading 2 Q.H. (formerly 02.994) Any Quarter Material approved by the candidate's adviser (only S or F grades will be assigned for this course). Prereq.: Passing of PhD qualifying exam. ME 3860 Thesis and Seminar (Master of 8 Q.H. Science Degree) (formerly 02.990, 02.991, and 02.998) Any Quarter Analytical and/or experimental work conducted un- der the direction of the faculty in fulfillment of the requirements for the degree. First-year students must attend a graduate seminar which will introduce the student to the methods of choosing a research topic, conducting research, and preparing a research re- port. Successful completion of the seminar is re- quired. Prereq.: Admission to ttie Graduate School of Engineering. ME 3861 Thesis (Master of Science 4 Q.H. Degree) Any Quarter ME 3862 Thesis (Master of Science 2 Q.H. Degree) Any Quarter ME 3863 Seminar (Master of Science 0 Q.H. Degree) (formerly 02.990, 02.998) Any Quarter First year students must attend a graduate seminar which will introduce the student to the methods of choosing a research topic, conducting research, and preparing a research report. Successful completion of the seminar is required. Prereq.: Admission to the Graduate School. ME 3870 Thesis (Mechanical Engineer 1 0 Q.H. Degree) (formerly 02.996) Any Quarter Analytical and/or experimental work conducted un- der the auspices of the department. Open to day students only. Prereq.: Admission to the Mechanical Engineer Degree Program. ME 3871 Thesis (Mechanical Engineer 4 Q.H. Degree) Any Quarter ME 3872 Thesis (Mechanical Engineer 2 Q.H. Degree) Any Quarter ME 3880 Dissertation (PhD Degree) 0 Q.H. (formerly 02.995) Any Quarter Theoretical and experimental work conducted under the supervision of the department. Open to day stu- dents only. Prereq.: Admission to the Doctoral Pro- gram in t^echanical Engineering. Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions 148 / Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions Graduate School of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions HRM 3815, HRM 3816 Behavioral 6 Q.H. Concepts and Organizational Behavior I Major concepts and findings of the behavioral sci- ences with particular pertinence to business and administration, including systematic ways of under- standing behavior. Specific topics include human de- velopment and motivation, interpersonal perception and communication, and small groups processes. The second half of the course sequence relates these basic concepts to specific aspects of behavior in formally constituted organizations. Supervisory behavior is examined in the behavioral context, as well as in relations between groups, in efforts to develop ways of achieving collaboration. Prereq.: Per- mission from the Graduate School of Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions. INT 31 01 Biochemistry I 2 Q.H. Description of the biochemical components of the cell including carbohydrates, lipids, prostaglandins, steroid hormones, amino acids, polypeptides, pro- teins, purines, pyrimidines, nucleosides, nucleic acids, and vitamins. Consideration of Henderson-Hassel- balch equation, buffers, and importance of pKa. Prereq.: Two quarters of organic chemistry. INT 3102 Biochemistry II 2 Q.H. Discussion of enzymes, enzyme kinetics, and mech- anisms of enzyme reactions. An introduction to the methods used for intermediary metabolism, bioe- nergetics, biological oxidation-reduction reactions, and the electron transport chain. A consideration is made of carbohydrate metabolism, including the cit- ric acid cycle, the Embden-Meyerhoff pathway, and the pentose phosphate pathway. Use of isotopes in biochemistry and the role of high-energy phosphate compounds are outlined. Prereq.: INT 3101. INT 31 03 Biochemistry III 2 Q.H. Lipid metabolism is presented, including the fatty acid cycle, the biosynthesis of fatty acids, and the bio- logical formation of the prostaglandins, cholesterol, and steroid hormones. The metabolism of the various amino acids is considered, including the area cycle, one-carbon fragments, transamination reactions, and aromatic hydroxylations. Metabolism of nucleic acids and their building blocks are discussed, as well as the genetic basis of protein synthesis, the genetic code, and the mechanisms of control. Prereq.: INT 3102. INT 3201 Applications of Mass 2 Q.H. Spectrometry A comprehensive examination of the principles gov- erning the fragmentation and ionization of organic molecules, the interpretation of mass spectra, and discussion of applications of mass spectrometry to the solution of selected problems in the fields of chemistry, biochemistry, and forensic sciences. Pre- req.: 1 year of organic chemistry, basic physics, physical organic chemistry desirable but not essential. MLS 3301 Functions of the Human 2 Q.H. Systems Physiology of the nervous, endocrine, muscular, car- diovascular, respiratory, urogenital and digestive sys- tems. Prereq.: Chemistry, biology. MLS 3302 Pathophysiology I 2 Q.H. Disease processes as appropriate and inappropriate variants of normal physiological functions. A detailed examination of certain important and illustrative dis- eases rather than a survey or catalogue of diseases in general. Prereq.: hAammalian physiology; knowledge of biochemistry is helpful. MLS 3303 Pathophysiology II 2 Q.H. A continuation of MLS 3302 Pathophysiology I. Prereq.: MLS 3302. MLS 3304 Cellular Pathology 3 Q.H. Topics include cell aging and cell death mechanisms; reactions of cells to injury; the effects of ischemia, oxides of nitrogen, ozone, carbon tetrachloride, mer- cury, cadmium and polyhalogenated aromatic com- pounds; storage diseases; immune injury and theories of carcinogenesis. Lectures are based on recent review and current research articles. Prereq.: Chem- istry, biology; biochemistry and cell biology helpful. MLS 3306 Biometrics 2 Q.H. Statistical methods applied to biomedical samples and analysis of biomedical research data. Prereq.: None. MLS 3310 Principles of Medical 2 Q.H. Endocrinology Endocrine-related clinical abnormalities with empha- sis placed on the relationship of clinical laboratory measurement to biochemical dysfunctions of the en- docrine system. Prereq.: Biochemistry. MLS 3321 Hematology l-Disorders of 2 Q.H. the Erythrocytes A detailed examination of the physiology and pa- thology of red blood cells and hemoglobin. Prereq.: Some knowledge of basic hematology is essential, and familiarity with general mammalian biochemistry is strongly recommended. MLS 3322 Hematology ll-Disorders of 2 Q.H. the Leukocytes The pathophysiology of white cell disorders. Clinical and laboratory correlations of leukemias, myelopro- liferative and lymphoproliferative disorders, infec- tions, and inherited leukocyte anomalies. Prereq.: Un- dergraduate biochemistry MLS 3323 Hematology Ill-Coagulation 2 Q.H. Clinical and laboratory correlations of coagulation disorders. The use of factor analysis in diagnosis of coagulation disorders. Prereq.: Undergraduate bio- chemistry, hematology course, or experience. Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions / 149 MLS 3331 Genetic and Immunologic 1 Q.H. Aspects of Blood Group Identification Lectures dealing with immune response, physical chemistry of immunohematological tests, immunolog- ical diseases, tests for detection and identification of antibodies and antigens, principles of human ge- netics, blood group genetics, and population and family studies. Conducted at the New England Dea- coness Hospital Blood Bank Training Center. Prereq.: MLS 1631 and permission of instructor. MLS 3332 Principles and Foundations 2 Q.H. of the Blood Group Systems Lectures and experience with the human blood group systems, their antigens and antibodies, genetic in- heritance and interactions, frequencies, mutants and alterations by disease states, and blood group test- ing. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hos- pital Blood Bank Training Center. Prereq.: MLS 3331, MLS 3531 and permission of the instructor MLS 3333 The Design and Problems of 1 Q.H. Compatibility Testing Lectures and experience with the design and pur- pose of compatibility testing; factors complicating compatibility procedure; techniques employed in compatibility testing; leukocyte, platelet, and tissue compatibility; and special crossmatch and transfu- sion procedures. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hospital Blood Bank Training Center. Prereq.: MLS 3331, MLS 3531, MLS 3332, MLS 3532 and permission of the instructor MLS 3334 Principles of Hematology and 3 Q.H. Coagulation Related to Transfusion Lectures and laboratory experience dealing with: hemoglobins; iron metabolism; blood formation; blood volume functions of circulating cells; anemias; leu- kemias and lymphomas; coagulation theories, factors, and disorders. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hospital Blood Bank Training Center. Prereq.: Permission of the instructor MLS 3335 Transfusion Therapy 2 Q.H. Lectures dealing with selection of blood donors, phlebotomy and pheresis procedures, processing requirements, donor reaction, blood components, physical characteristics of stored blood, indications for transfusion, transfusion reaction, therapeutic phlebotomy and pheresis, autologous transfusions, pediatric transfusions, massive blood replacement, extracorporeal perfusion, cardiopulmonary bypass, and dialysis. Conducted at the New England Dea- coness Hospital Blood Bank Training Center Prereq.: MLS 1631 and permission of instructor MLS 3336 Immunohematology 2 Q.H. Administration Lectures and experience dealing with standards for blood banks and transfusion services (federal, state, AABB); requirements for state, FDA, and NIH (BOB) licensing; the American Blood Commission; inspec- tion and accreditation donor procurement; interbank blood exchange; organization of blood bank and transfusion service; medical and legal aspects of transfusion practice; design of physical facilities; evaluation, selection and maintenance of equipment; evaluation and selection of supplies and reagents; preparation; labeling requirements; quality control systems; proficiency testing programs; record keep- ing; computer principles, use of computer facilities; operations of donor facilities and blood bank labo- ratories. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hospital Blood Bank Training Center. Prereq.: MLS 1631 and permission of instructor MLS 3338 Immunobiology 2 Q.H. Topics of current interest in immunobiology, such as organ transplantation, immune tolerance, auto-immune diseases, and the immunology of cancer. Prereq.: Consent of instructor MLS 3339 Immunopathdogy 2 Q.H. The course presents the basic elements for the un- derstanding of clinical immunology and immunopath- ology. Following a brief review of the components and function of the immune system, the material covered will take into account the current literature relating to the disorders of the complement system, the biologic mechanisms of immunologically induced tissue injury (hypersensitivity reactions), the classi- fication and characterization of immunodeficiency states, (including acquired immunodeficiency syn- drome-AIDS), the modes of induction and diagnos- tic categorization of autoimmune disorders and the immunological features of cancer. Prereq.: MLS 3338. MLS 3341 Advanced Clinical 3 Q.H. Microbiology I This course focuses on those aspects of clinical microbiology that are of significance in the under- standing of the infectious process, its diagnosis and chemotherapy. It emphasizes the mechanisms of dis- ease production, host defenses, and characteristics of infectious agents that contribute to the diagnosis. Specific topics include infections of the upper res- piratory tract, bacterial endocarditis, infectious diar- rhea and anaerobic infections, sexually transmitted diseases, nosocomial infections, and basic princi- ples of antimicrobial susceptibility testing. MLS 3342 Advanced Clinical 3 Q.H. Microbiology II Major emphasis of this course is on current topics in infectious diseases. Specific discussions include autoimmune disease syndrome, antibiotic-induced diarrhea, toxic shock syndrome, legionellosis, rapid methods of diagnosis and problems associated with antimicrobial susceptibility testing (tolerance syn- ergism, antagonism, and determination of drug levels in body fluids). Prereq.: MLS 3341. MLS 3345 Epidemiology 2 Q.H. Basic concepts of epidemiology, causes of disease, factors contributed by agents, the human host, and the environment. Acquisition and evaluation of data. Relationship of person, time, and place. Case studies and problems. Prereq.: Consent of instructor 150 / Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions MLS 3351 Interpretive Clinical Chemistry 2 Q.H. Discussions of variables affecting results to be con- sidered when interpreting patient chemistry values. This knowledge is pertinent to the iaboratorian in determining the validity of performing a particular assay on a specimen collected or stored under cer- tain conditions as well as determining the feasibility of obtained results for particular patient conditions. The course also includes the typical value patterns seen in various pathological conditions to provide background material on frequently encountered pathological variation. Prereq.: Biochemistry and clin- ical laboratory experience. MLS 3361 Health Science Education I 3 Q.H. An overview of various aspects of education in the health-related professions to include: design and use of behavioral objectives; evaluation tools (both clinical and didactic); and a survey of various teach- ing methods. Current journal literature will supple- ment lecture material. Prereq.: Health Professions major MLS 3362 Health Science Education II 3 Q.H. Various types of learning packages or self-instruc- tional aids are examined. With the aid of lecture material and independent assignment, each student will design and produce a 1 5-minute autotutorial and will present it to the class for critique. Current journal literature will also be used. Prereq.: MLS 3361. MLS 3365 Medical Laboratory 3 Q.H. Management I This course was developed to provide an opportunity for medical technologists to prepare themselves for managerial responsibilities. Participants are intro- duced to basic skills and knowledge appropriate to the administration of a medical laboratory rather than specialized functional techniques. The basic objec- tives of the concentration are: to confront the student with appropriate learning experiences; to increase skills and knowledge in basic disciplines underlying administrative practice; and to develop judgment and skills in problem analysis and decision making in organizations, tvlajor topics to be discussed include supervision; operations; organizatioris; productivity; human behavior; communications; personnel man- agement. Prereq.: Medical laboratory experience or consent of instructor MLS 3531 Genetic and Immunologic^ 1 Q.H. Aspects of Blood Group Identification Laboratory Laboratory experience dealing with immune response, physical chemistry of immunohematological tests, immunological diseases, tests for detection and iden- tification of antibodies and antigens, principles of human genetics, blood group genetics, and population and family studies. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hospital Blood Bank Training Center Prereq.: MLS 1631 and permission of instructor MLS 3532 Principles and Foundations of 2 Q.H. the Blood Group Systems Laboratory Laboratory experiences with the human blood sys- tems, their antigens and antibodies, genetic inherit- ance and interactions, frequencies, mutants and al- terations by disease states, and blood group testing. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hospital Blood Bank Training Center. Prereq.: MLS 3331. MLS 3531 and permission of the instructor MLS 3533 The Design and Problems 2 Q.H. of Compatibility Testing Laboratory Laboratory experience with the design and purpose of compatibility testing; factors complicating compatibil- ity procedures; techniques employed in compatibility testing; leukocyte, platelet and tissue compatibility; and special crossmatch and transfusion procedures. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hospital Blood Bank Training Center Prereq.: MLS 3331, MLS 3531, MLS 3332, MLS 3532 and permission of the instructor MLS 3535 Transfusion Therapy 2 Q.H. Laboratory Laboratory experience with selection of blood donors, phlebotomy and pheresis procedures, processing requirements, donor reaction, blood components, physical characteristics of stored blood, indications for transfusion, transfusion reactions, therapeutic phlebotomy and pheresis, autologous transfusions, cardiopulmonary bypass, and dialysis. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hospital Blood Bank Training Center Prereq.: MLS 1631 and permission of instructor MLS 3536 Immunohematology 2 Q.H. Administration Laboratory Laboratory experience dealing with standards for blood banks and transfusion services (federal, state, AABB); requirements for state, FDA, and NIH (BOB) licensing; the American Blood Commission; inspec- tion and accreditation donor procurement; interbank blood exchange; organization of blood bank and transfusion service; medical and legal aspects of transfusion practice; design and physical facilities; evaluation, selection, and maintenance of equipment; evaluation and selection of supplies and reagents; preparation; labeling requirements; quality control systems; proficiency testing programs; record keep- ing; computer principles, use of computer facilities; operations of donor facilities; and blood bank lab- oratories. Conducted at the New England Deaconess Hospital Blood Bank Training Center. Prereq.: MLS 1631 and permission of instructor MLS 3538 Immunobiology Laboratory 2 Q.H. Students are required to undertake individual re- search projects relating to topics covered in lecture. Prereq.: None. Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions / 151 MLS 3601 Seminar 1 Q.H. Topics to be announced quarterly. Staff. MLS 3801 Graduate Research Report I 2 Q.H. Research of a special topic in medical laboratory science, involving individual research, is undertaken and reported under the direction of a faculty mem- ber. Prereq.: Written permission of instructor MLS 3802 Graduate Research Report II 2 Q.H. Students should register twice (4 Q.H.). Continuation of MLS 3801. Prereq.: M/.S 3801. MLS 3821 MLS Thesis 2 Q.H. Students should register three times (6 Q.H.). Prereq.: Written permission of instructor MSC 3932 Introduction to Computer 3 Q.H. Applications A business-oriented introduction to data processing functions and systems. Introduction to the history, terminology technology and economics of data man- agement issues in the design, selection, evaluation, and use of computers and computer services. Indivi- dual familiarization w/ith elementary computer pro- gramming by using either batch or time-shared com- puter facilities to solve simple business-oriented exercises. When feasible, a visit to a data processing center is conducted. Prereq.: Permission from the Graduate Scfiool of Pfiarmacy and Allied Health Professions. MTH 3221 Biostatistics 2 Q.H. Methods of statistical inference with applications to biology and the medical sciences. PA 31 01 Clinical Neurology 4 Q.H. Clinical application of neuroanatomy and neuro- physiology Students will have the opportunity to de- velop an understanding of the normal functioning of the nervous system as well as to develop a clinical approach to the assessment management of a va- riety of nervous system disorders and disease states. Prereq.: PA 1125. PA 1139. PA 3102 Principles of 4 Q.H. Electrocardiography Principles of electrophysiology and its application to electrocardiographic tracing. Students receive in- struction in recognizing arrhythmias, rate and axis determination, conduction abnormalities, character- istic changes seen in myocardial infarction, and is- chemia, as well as drug and metabolic effect mani- fested on the electrocardiogram. Prereq.: PA 1136, PA 1337, PA 1125, PA 1139. PA 3103 Rehabilitation Medicine 4 Q.H. Techniques of effective planning and decision mak- ing for patients with multiple chronic problems. The purposes, techniques, and potential of rehabilitation medicine are also discussed. Prereq.: PA 1336, PA 1337, PA 1338, PA 1358. PAH 3201 Drug Literature Evaluation 2 Q.H. Principles and practice of drug information, literature retrieval, and evaluation of the pharmacy and medical literature. Prereq.: Admission to Pharm.D. program. PAH 3211, PAH 3212, and 2 Q.H. each PAH 3213 Pharmacotherapeutics I, II, III A three-quarter sequence in advanced contempo- rary therapeutics of disease. Topics parallel material presented in Principles of Medicine sequence. Prereq.: Admission to Pharm.D. program. PAH 3221 Psychosocial Aspects of 1 Q.H. Health Care— Seminar ' Psychological and social concerns that determine patient behavior and impact on health care. Prereq.: Admission to Pharm.D. program. PAH 3231 Pharmacokinetics in Drug 3 Q.H. Therapy The application of basic and practical clinical phar- macokinetic techniques to patient care. Topics par- allel material presented in Principles of Medicine sequence. Prereq.: Admission to Pharm.D. program. PAH 3301 Introductory Clerkship I 1 Q.H. Initial assignment to clinical site. Student rotates through the various clinical laboratories to obtain working knowledge of the role of the clinical labo- ratory and the data it generates in the management of disease. Emphasis in microbiology, clinical chem- istry and hematology areas. Meets approximately four hours/week. Prereq.: Admission to Pharm.D. program. PAH 3311, PAH 3312, PAH 3313, PAH 3314 Clerkship I, II, III, IV 4 Q.H., 5 Q.H., 5 Q.H., 5 Q.H. A four-quarter sequence of advanced clinical clerk- ship rotations in patient care at various affiliated clinical sites. Students participate in "rounding" ac- tivities with medical and other health professionals and have the opportunity to provide drug information in the therapeutic decision-making process. The em- phasis in these rotations is on helping students de- velop skills and familiarity with the application of drugs in the clinical setting as well as the usual progression of disease. Rotations include internal medicine, ambulatory care, and elective experiences. Involves approximately 40 hrs/week. Prereq.: Admis- sion to Pharm.D. program. PAH 3321 Patient Assessment 2 Q.H. General principles of history taking and physical examination. Emphasis is on organ systems of par- ticular importance to the clinical pharmacist in mon- itoring drug response. Prereq.: Admission to Pharm.D. program. PAH 401 Health Policy Analysis and 3 Q.H. Evaluation Principles of policy analysis applied to health care issues and institutions. Mechanisms of regulatory and economic incentives and constraints will be ex- amined. Applications of benefit-cost and cost-effec- tiveness analysis to the evaluation of health programs. PAH 402 Health Policy Seminar I 1 Q.H. Analysis of recent health policy literature. Students will be expected to evaluate and critique published articles and lead a seminar session. Prereq.: PAH 401. 152 / Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions PAH 403 Health Policy Seminar II 1 Q.H. Continuation of Health Policy Seminar I. Prereq.: PAH 3402. PAH 404 Health Policy Seminar III 1 Q.H. Continuation of Health Policy Seminar II. Prereq.: PAH 3403. PAH 501 Health Care Delivery 3 Q.H. Principal components of the health care delivery sys- tem with emphasis on its social, political, and eco- nomic evolution and development. Future trends and their implications w/ill be discussed. PAH 502 Professional Dynamics in 3 Q.H. Health Care Skills and techniques used in developing leadership attributes and in working effectively with individuals and groups in the health care environment. Emphasis is placed on presenting differing, successful ap- proaches for both leadership and interaction in the ambulatory, institutional, professional, legislative, and regulatory health care setting. PAH 503 Health Research Methodology 3 Q.H. Interpretation, analysis, and evaluation of research methods used in the literature of health care. Intro- duction to experimental designs and hypothesis test- ing. Projects in developing research methodology for prototype research studies in health care. PAH 3601, PAH 3602 Seminar I, II 1 Q.H. each A two-quarter sequence covering topics of relevance to the clinical pharmacy practitioner. Principles of effective communication and teaching are discussed. Students are expected to make oral presentations covering various therapeutic and related subjects as well as the progress of their investigational projects. Prereq.: Admission to the Pharm.D. program. PAH 3801, PAH 3802 2 Q.H. each Investigational Project I, II Students have the opportunity to demonstrate their ability to identify a problem within the domain of clinical pharmacy, formulate a hypothesis, develop methods to collect and interpret the data in order to test the hypothesis, and report the investigation in writing using a thesis format. (Note "Investigational Component of Pharm.D. Program.") Prereq.: Admis- sion to Pharm.D. program. PCL 3101 Concepts in Pharmacology 2 Q.H. In-depth coverage of the fundamental principles of pharmacology The course covers pharmacodynam- ics, including dose-effect relationships and drug- receptor interactions. Pharmacokinetic concepts, in- cluding absorption, distribution, and elimination will be presented as well as common pathways of drug metabolism. Other topics to be discussed include pharmacogenetics, drug resistance, tolerance, and physical dependence. An overview of experimental and clinical drug evaluation in humans will be pre- sented. The course is intended as a necessary pre- requisite for succeeding courses in pharmacology and toxicology Prereq.: Admission to a graduate de- partment or approval of the instructor PCL 3121 Experimental Pharmacology 2 Q.H. Prereq.: PCL 3101 or consent of instructor PCL 3131 Receptor Pharmacology 2 Q.H. Receptors for drug substances and for endogenous ligands are reviewed in a format that combines lec- ture presentations and discussion. Considerable em- phasis is placed on the evaluation of current liter- ature. The course covers: techniques available to study receptors; various models for receptor-ligand interaction; stereochemical aspects of receptor in- teractions; receptor-mediated coupling mechanisms; evaluation of several specific receptor systems. Prereq.: f^LS 3301, PCL 3101. INT 3101, INT 3102, INT 3103 or permission of the instructor PCL 3141 Pharmacology of Drug 2 Q.H. Dependence An intensive survey of the major drug classes sub- ject to misuse and addiction. Lectures emphasize general concepts of tolerance and dependence, the general pharmacology of prototypes of abused drugs, patterns and consequences of abuse in humans, and recent research advances. Selected research papers are critically examined to stimulate quantitative phar- macologic thinking. Prereq.: PCL 3101. PCL 3151 Pharmacological Basis of 3 Q.H. Therapeutics I A detailed survey of the chemical and pharmacolo- gical basis of the major classes and the following characteristics of a prototype agent from each class: indication; adverse reactions; contraindications; structure-activity relationship; metabolism; mechan- ics of action; clinically significant. Reading assign- ments cover animal models relevant to therapeutic screening and/or testing and the appropriate design of clinical trials. Prereq.: PCL 3101. PCL 3152 Pharmacological Basis of 3 Q.H. Therapeutics II Continuation of PCL 3151. Prereq.: PCL 3151. PCL 3161 Drug Metabolism 2 Q.H. Presentation of the current principles and methods for studying the metabolic transformation and phys- iological disposition of drug& and other chemicals of pharmacological and toxicological interest. The chemistry of Phase I and Phase II reactions from a mechanistic and empirical viewpoint is covered. The role of structure, bonding, molecular configuration, substitution, and related physiochemical factors in the enzymatic reaction is assessed. The effects of enzyme induction and other factors such as species, sex, and age on the extent of metabolism are ex- plored. Prereq.: PCL 3101 or permission of instructor PCL 3301 Pathology 2 Q.H. The student is introduced to the study of the nature of disease, emphasizing the general mechanisms and pathogenesis. Of paramount importance is the effect of disease on the human body. The language of disease is stressed. Basic principles of disease processes and more common special diseases are Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions / 1 53 extensively covered. A research paper may be as- signed at the discretion of the instructor. Prereq.: anatomy and physiology. PCL 3601 Pharmacology Seminar 1 Q.H. Prereq.: PCL 3101. PCL 3801 Pharmacologic Methods I 3 Q.H. Students carry out experiments in the laboratory of a pharmacology or toxicology faculty member. The experiments serve to demonstrate the techniques utilized in that lab to study a pharmacologic question. Prereq.: Ph.D. students only PCL 3802 Pharmacologic Methods II 3 Q.H. Continuation of PCL 3801. Prereq.: PCL 3801. PCL 3811 Research Report in 2 Q.H. Pharmacology I A selected research project is undertaken by the student under the direction of a faculty member. Prereq.: PCL 3101. PCL 3812 Research Report in 2 Q.H. Pharmacology II A continuation of PCL 3811. Prereq.: PCL 3811. PCL 3821 Pharmacology Thesis 2 Q.H. Students should register three times (6 Q.H.). Prereq. Written permission from Program Director PCT 3101 Introduction to 3 Q.H. Biopharmaceutics and Pharmacokinetics A course designed primarily to allow students to remedy deficiencies in biopharmaceutics and phar- macokinetics. Topics include general concepts of one and two compartment models; linear and nonlinear pharmacokinetics; drug kinetics after intravenous, intramuscular, or oral administration; practical me- thods of compartmental models utilizing plasma and/ or urinary data; multiple dosing kinetics; bioavail- ability and bioequivalence of drug products; and effect of renal impairment on drug kinetics. Prereq.: Per- mission of instructor PCT 3111 Clinical Pharmacokinetics 2 Q.H. Emphasis is placed upon applying various pharma- cokinetic techniques to estimating dosage regi- ments, evaluating drug therapy, consulting on drug selection, and assessing bioavailability and bioequi- valence data. Prereq.: A background in biopharma- ceutics or consent of instructor PCT 3112 Pharmacokinetics 3 Q.H. A class designed to acquaint graduate students with the theoretical compartmental analysis in pharma- cokinetics. Topics include derivation and treatment of general equations for linear and nonlinear mam- millary models. Use of Laplace transform, transfer functions, general partial fraction theorem, and input- disposition functions in pharmacokinetics. Practical methods used to kinetically analyze the absorption, distribution, and elimination of drugs are empha- sized. Computer methods, physiological models, and stochastic compartmental systems are explored. Prereq.: MTH 1245, MJH 1246, graduate standing and permission of instructor PHP 3101 Hospital Pharmacy 3 Q.H. Administration I An overview of hospital pharmacy services and an introduction to areas of the hospital that either re- quire or relate to pharmacy services. Inven tory, purchasing, and pricing are analyzed both qualita- tively and quantitatively. The administrative aspects of materials management, ambulatory care, phar- macy and therapeutics committee, investigational drugs, and pharmacy laws are explored. Prereq.: HRM3815, HRM 3816. PHP 3102 Hospital Pharmacy 3 Q.H. Administration II Management of a department's personnel and finan- cial resources. Management skills, development of new departmental program, personnel administration and organization are covered, as well as budget preparation, analysis and control, and hospital reim- bursement. Prereq.: PHP 3101. PHP 31 21 Health Care Administration I 3 Q.H. The socioeconomics and statistics of health care, including governmental programs, legislative trends, third-party insurance and welfare programs, and other areas that may affect the management of the modern institutional pharmacy Prereq.: Admission to the hos- pital pharmacy program or consent of instructor PHP 3131 Computer Applications in 3 Q.H. Hospital Pharmacy An extensive review of past, present, and future ap- plications of data-processing systems to institutional pharmacy. Systems design, evaluation, and proposal development to administrators are discussed with emphasis on the interface between the pharmacy staff, computer systems, and the hospital drug dis- tribution process. Prereq.: 49.932. PHP 3141 Legal Aspects/Federal 2 Q.H. Legislation in Pharmacy An analysis of the federal and state laws relating to the distribution of drugs in the institution. Included are common-law liabilities such as malpractice and other frequently encountered problems. Prereq.: Ad- mission to hospital pharmacy program. PHP 31 61 Human Relations in 2 Q.H. Health Care A study of personnel psychology, organizational structure, wage and performance incentives, employee evaluations, and policy in relation to accepted per- sonnel concepts and procedures. Prereq.: Admission to hospital pharmacy program or consent of instructor PHP 3165 Special Topics in Hospital 2 Q.H. Pharmacy Selected topics of interest to pharmacy or the health community in general. PHP 3201 Clinical Pharmacy 3 Q.H. The patient-oriented aspects of the application of therapeutic agents to hospital patients. An in-depth study of the relation of therapeutic regimens to lab- 1 54 / Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions oratory tests and drug interactions. The role of the hospital pharmacist as an active member of the health- care team dealing directly with inpatients and out- patients. Prereq.: Admission to hospital pharmacy program or consent of instructor PHP 321 1 Contemporary Therapeutics I 3 Q.H. Recent developments in current therapeutic ap- proaches and their rationale in the treatment of car- diovascular, neurological, gastrointestinal, musculos- keletal, and metabolic diseases of a noninfectious nature. Therapy related to aging and selected genetic diseases. Prereq.: PHP 3201. PHP 3212 Contemporary Therapeutics II 3 Q.H. Current concepts of infectious diseases and the ra- tionale for the chemotherapeutic treatment of these conditions. Diseases of the blood and blood-forming organs, neoplastic disease, and diseases related to deficiency states. Prereq.: PHP 3201. PHP 3231 Drug Monitoring 3 Q.H. The process by which drugs are monitored to de- termine their effectiveness, safety, prevention of ia- trogenic factors, drug-drug interactions, and matters affecting patient compliance with a therapeutic reg- imen. The utilization of this information in improving patient care. Prereq.: PHP 3201. PHP 3241 Sterile Products 3 Q.H. Theory principles, methods, and techniques in pre- paring sterile, pyrogen- and particu late-free prod- ucts. Equipment and laboratory design required for manufacturing different types of sterile products and the practical considerations essential for their pro- duction. Prereq.: Permission of instructor PHP 3601 Seminar on Hospital Pharmacy 2 Q.H. Seminar on current developments or specific prob- lems in hospital pharmacy that have been studied in-depth by students with guidance from the grad- uate faculty. The student presentations may be al- ternated with guest speakers on topics of current interest. Student participation in the discussions is an essential objective of the course. Prereq.: Admis- sion to hospital pharmacy program. PHP 3801 Hospital Pharmacy Thesis 2 Q.H. Students should register three times (6 Q.H.). Prereq.: Written permission of instructor PHY 3401 Radiation Physics 2 Q.H. An introduction to the nucleus and modes of spon- taneous radioactive transformation. The isotopic abundance of the elements, naturally occurring ra- dioelements and decay series, the kinetics of decay and the relationship between mass and energy The nature of the emitted radiation and its interaction with matter. Prereq.: Undergraduate physics. PHY 3402 Radioblology 2 Q.H. The biological effects of ionizing radiation. Included are a discussion of elementary target theory, radia- tion chemistry, effects on macro-molecules, cellular and chromosomal effects, recovery processes, and the acute and long-term effects of radiation with emphasis on humans, as well as a discussion of environmental sources of radiation and the charac- teristics of internal and external human exposure. Prereq.: PHY 3401. PMC 3101 Chemistry of CNS 3 Q.H. Depressants Presentation and discussion of the chemistry, struc- ture-activity relationships, and mechanism of action of general anesthetics, hypnotics and sedatives, an- tiepileptics, analgesics, tranquilizers, and muscle re- laxants. A consideration of the mechanics of drug design and methods of modification is undertaken. Prereq.: PMC 3105 or permission of inst ructor PMC 3102 Chemistry of Autonomic 3 Q.H. Drugs A discussion of drugs acting on the central nervous system, with special emphasis on the action mech- anism of the chemical mediators of the peripheral nervous system. The role of the agents affecting this system-adrenergic and cholinergic and reversible and irreversible inhibitors of these systems-is dis- cussed in relation to their chemical structure and biological activity. Prereq.: PMC 3105 or permission of instructor PMC 3103 Chemistry of Anti-infectives 3 Q.H. A study of various chemotherapeutic agents em- ployed in the treatment of infectious diseases. In- cluded are: the sulfonamides, antibiotics, antivirals; antitubercular, antifungal, and antimalarial agents. Special emphasis is on structure-activity relation- ships, mechanisms of action, and modern research in each area. Prereq.: PMC 3105 or permission of instructor PMC 3104 Chemistry of Cancer 3 Q.H. Chemotherapy Recent developments in new approaches to both carcinogenesis and to the treatment of cancer are emphasized, including alkylating agents, anti-metab- olites, hormones, miscellaneous compounds, and combinations of the above with radiation and im- munology. Possible mechanisms of carcinogenesis and chemotherapeutic action explored. Prereq.: PMC 3105 or permission of instructor PMC 31 05 Principles of Medicinal 3 Q.H. Chemistry This course presents basic underlying chemical principles which account for the properties of drugs and an understanding of drug action. Among the principles relating biologic activity to molecular structure that will be discussed are stereochemical properties of the molecules, the ionization constants, the aqueous and lipid solubility, the ability of the molecules to provide bond, and the ability of mole- cules to assume different structural conformations on forming these bonds. Prereq.: Biochemistry and organic chemistry. PMC 3161 Phytochemistry 3 Q.H. The important classes of chemical compounds pro- duced by plants from the standpoint of their bio- genetic origin, detection, isolation, and characteri- zation. Application of these techniques to research Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions / 1 55 in pharmacy, medicine, economics, botany, taxon- omy. Introduction to the literature of plant chemistry. Prereq.: Two quarters of organic chemistry and two quarters of biology. PMC 3171 Heterocyclic Drugs in 3 Q.H. Medicinal Chemistry The application of the combined principles of me- dicinal and heterocyclic chemistry to the synthesis of pharmaceutically useful compounds. The empha- sis of the material presented will be upon a critical evaluation of the literature methods and rationale. Prereq.: Advanced Organic Chemistry I or permission of instructor PMC 3301 Clinical Chemistry and 3 Q.H. Biochemistry Analysis The broad range of analytes, reagents, and tech- niques in clinical chemistry and biochemistry are presented. Examples of analytes are: proteins (e.g., plasma proteins, receptors), DNA (e.g., prenatal di- agnosis), hormones, neurotransmitters, drugs, car- cinogen-DNA adducts, and viruses; of reagents are monoclonal antibodies, enzymes, DNA probes, avi- din-biotin, and radioisotopes; and of techniques are immunoassays, antibody kinetics and specificity, lu- minescence assays, blotting assays, chemical mod- ification of biomolecules, and methods for biomole- cule purification. Prereq.: INT 3101 or permission of instructor PMC 3501 Identification and Isolation of 4 Q.H. Natural Products and Organic Medicinals A laboratory course in the identification of various types of plant constitutents that have medicinal/phar- maceutical use, and the isolation and characteriza- tion of known and/or unknown chemical compounds from selected plant samples. Prereq.: At least one year of organic chemistry and some background in plant chemistry, e.g., PI\AC 1440 or PMC 3161, or by permission of instructor PMC 351 1 Advanced Drug Synthesis 4 Q.H Application of synthetic and analytical techniques to the formation of new drugs. Prereq.: Two quarters of organic chemistry with laboratory. PMC 3601 Medicinal Chemistry Seminar 2 Q.H. Reports and discussions involving current journal articles and research in medicinal chemistry. Prereq.: PI^C 3101-PhJIC 3141. PMC 3641 Biomedical Science 2 Q.H. Colloquium Presentations on current research in biomedical sci- ence and related areas. Included will be the theo- retical basis of the problem as well as experimental results obtained. Prereq.: Ph.D. candidate. PMC 3642 Biomedical Science 0 Q.H. Colloquium Continuation Prereq.: PhAC 3641 PMC 3651, PMC 3652 Seminar 2 Q.H. each and Report in Clinical Chemistry I, II Reports and discussions of current journal articles in clinical chemistry. Prereq.: PI^C 3301. PMC 3799 Doctoral Dissertation 0 Q.H. Continuation Continuation of PMC 381 1 Doctoral Dissertation which must be taken three times before registering for this course. Prereq.: PMC 381 1. PMC 3801 Medicinal Chemistry Thesis 2-6 Q.H. Prereq.: Written permission of instructor PMC 381 1 Ph.D. Dissertation 0 Q.H. Prereq.: Written permission of instructor RSC 31 01 Nuclear Medicine I: 3 Q.H. Instrumentation An introduction to nuclear detection techniques by both lecture and laboratory demonstration. Various systems are considered, including scintillation, ioni- zation, gas, and solid-state detectors. Basic principles of spectrometry with an emphasis on sodium iodide detectors will be studied. Prereq.: PHY 3401. RSC 31 02 Nuclear Medicine II: 3 Q.H. Instrumentation A study of the application of nuclear detection tech- niques in the physical aspects of nuclear medicine. Current clinical instrumentation including gamma cameras and scanners, probes, and whole body counters, as well as future developments such as the solid-state and the multiwire proportional cam- eras, and postron and tomographic imaging devices. Principles of collimation are studied with each sys- tem. The application of computers in nuclear medi- cine. This course includes both lecture and labora- tory demonstration and is a companion course to RSC 31 01. Prereq.. PHV 3407 and RSC 3707. RSC 3104 Nuclear Medicine: 2 Q.H. Radiopharmaceutical Laboratory Demonstrations and discussions of the preparation and quality control of radiopharmaceuticals derived from reactor, accelerator, and generator-produced radionuclides. Assay techniques for radiochemical, radionuclide, and chemical purity. Regulatory impli- cations in the handling and dispensing of radioactive drugs. Prereq.: RSC 3102. RSC 3131 Clinical Aspects of Nuclear 2 Q.H. Medicine The current practice of diagnostic nuclear medicine in large medical centers and small community hos- pitals. The effect of pathology in the distribution of radiopharmaceuticals will be considered on an organ and disease basis and illustrated with actual patient findings. The techniques employed in imaging the various organs and body compartments will be pre- sented. Factors influencing the decision to perform a diagnostic nuclear medicine procedure and the choice of the agent to be employed will be dis- cussed. Prereq.: RSC 3102. RSC 3201 Radiopharmaceutical 3 Q.H. Chemistry This course discusses the application of chemistry to the design and synthesis of radiodiagnostic agents. The properties of the radionuclides and their biolog- ical carriers as they relate to their uses in nuclear 156 / Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions medicine will be presented. Prereq.: PMC 3105 or permission of instructor. RSC 3301 Radioisotopes in Biological 2 Q.H. Systems Methodology of radioactive nuclides and application of these isotopes to biology and medicine, with spe- cial emphasis on their use in clinical analysis. Prereq.: Permission of instructor RSC 3601 Seminar and Research 3 Q.H. Report in Radiopharmaceutical Science This course provides an opportunity for the students to familiarize themselves with literature sources and the latest developments in radiopharmaceutical sci- ence. A written and oral presentation will be required in a particular area as evidence of an ability to organize and evaluate published material. Prereq.: RSC 3102. RSC 3801 Radiopharmacy Internship 2 Q.H. Designed as a practical on-site introduction to the use of radiopharmaceutics in the clinical environ- ment, this course offers students an opportunity to participate in various functions of a radiopharmacy, including ordering, preparing, dispensing, and dis- persing radiodiagnostics; manufacturing non-routine agents; maintaining quality control procedures; and keeping records. This course is considered a labo- ratory course, and arrangements for enrollment are usually made on an individual basis with the site of the radiopharmacy subject to approval by the in- structor. Offered during all quarters, registration takes place during the fall quarter only. Prereq.: RSC 3104. RSC 3811 Radiopharmaceutical 2 Q.H. Research Report I A selected research project is undertaken by the student under the direction of a faculty member. Prereq.: Written permission of instructor TOX 3101 Concepts in Toxicology I 3 Q.H. An overview of toxicology describing the elements of method and approach that identify the science. Special emphasis is placed on the systemic site of action of toxicants. The intent of this part of the course is to help provide answers to two questions: 1) What kinds of injury are produced in specific organs or systems by toxic agents? 2) What are the agents that produce these effects? Prereq.: PCL 3101. TOX 3102 Concepts in Toxicology II 3 Q.H. Continuation of Concepts in Toxicology I. Prereq.: TOX 3101. TOX 3121 Environmental Toxicology 3 Q.H. The problems of toxic disturbances and distortions of our biosphere are discussed. When appropriate, the mechanism of action of toxic agents and the basis of their selectivity will be examined. Toxic agents are grouped by chemical or use characteristics such as pesticides, food additives, metals, social poisons, chemical carcinogens, teratogens, and mutagens. This course will attempt to provide perspective for the nontoxicologist to the application of the results of toxicologic investigation and a better understanding of those chemicals which, in ever-increasing amounts, threaten health, comfort, or quality of life. Prereq.: Admission to a graduate department or approval of the instructor TOX 3501 Toxicology Lab 4 Q.H. Companion to the undergraduate course TOX 1 320 Toxicology Lab. In addition to the lab work for TOX 1320, graduate students are expected to complete special projects assigned by their adviser. Prereq.: Permission of instructor Physician Assistants The Physician Assistants is a post-baccalaureate certificate program. Those interested in enrolling must get the permission of the director of the Physician Assistant Program. MLS 1109 Foundations of Medical Laboratory Science 3 q.h. Basic laboratory methods employed in primary care, including urinalysis, gram staining, hematocrit, hemo- globin, sedimentation rate, white-cell count, and dif- ferential. Laboratory practice is included. Prereq.: PA students only. PA 1 1 20 Roles, Rules, and Resources for Physician Assistants 2 Q.H. The role of physician assistants, including the man- ner in which they interact with other health profes- sionals, as well as the way in which their role is perceived by others. This course is also organized to help students gain an understanding of the law as it relates to physician assistants' actions and to help them develop the ability to make referrals to common community resources. PA 1125 Human Anatomy 2 Q.H. The basic structure of the human body, highlighting those features which are of clinical importance. Em- phasis is on the gastrointestinal, cardiovascular, res- piratory, neurological, and musculoskeletal systems. PA 1 1 34 Physical Diagnosis 5 Q.H. Techniques of obtaining and presenting an accurate history; performing a competent and thorough phys- ical examination; and synthesizing the results of the history, physical, and laboratory findings to arrive at an accurate evaluation of the patient. Discussion, demonstrations, and patient workups are used to assist students in building these skills. PA 1139 Medical Physiology 6 Q.H. A systematic approach to human physiology, offering in-depth study of gastrointestinal function, respira- Physician Assistants / 1 57 tory mechanics, endocrine function, cardiovascular dynamics, and renal and electrolyte function. PA 1321 Patient Education and 2 Q.H. Counseling An opportunity to acquire the knowledge necessary for educating and counseling patients. Course ma- terials include a demonstration of ways in which to evaluate patients' needs and readiness to learn, as well as the use of common teaching techniques for issues such as chronic disease management, os- tomies, diabetes, heart disease, nutrition counseling, and sex education. Prereq.: PA 1335. PA 1322 Medical Care and Current 2 Q.H. Social Problems The principal components of the health care delivery system, with emphasis on services, organization, and funding. Selected social problems are used to dem- onstrate the operation of the medical care system. PA 1 323 Principles and Concepts of 3 Q.H. Emergency Medicine An introduction to the principles of life-support tech- niques. Emphasis is placed on the initial manage- ment of acute medical and traumatic conditions in hospital and prehospital situations. Students are in- structed in basic cardiopulmonary resuscitation techniques. Prereq. : Successful completion of Quarter I of ttie physician assistant program. PA 1324 Clinical Nutrition 3 Q.H. The physiological function of essential nutrients; the need for individual nutrients and their food sources; food fads and food additives; the role of nutrition in heart disease, diabetes, common gastrointestinal disorders, obesity, and hypertension. PA 1 335 Principles of Interviewing 2 Q.H Various methods of interviewing patients. Emphasis is placed on establishing a relationship and under- standing the effects of cultural background and psy- chosocial problems on the patient's response to ill- ness, goal setting, personality types, and death and dying. PA 1336 Pathophysiok>gy and Medicine I 3 Q.H. A systems approach to the principles of disease pro- cesses in people. Topics include physiology, patho- physiology the natural history of disease, diagnostic procedure, and therapeutic measures. Hematology and cardiology problems are usually covered in this portion of the course. PA 1 337 Pathophysiology and Medicine II 3 Q.H. Continuation of course from previous quarter. Pul- monary, gastroenterology, immunology, and rheu- matology problems are usually covered in this por- tion of the course. Prereq.: PA 1336, PA 1125, PA 1139. PA 1338 Pathophysiology and Medicine III 3 Q.H. Continuation of course from previous quarter. Renal, endocrine, oncology, infectious disease, and sexually transmitted disease problems are usually covered in this portion of the course. Prereq.: PA 1336, PA 1337. PA 1125, PA 1139. PA 1340 Introduction to Clinical 4 Q.H. Rotations Clinical rotations, expectations, and requirements for students about to enter their clinical year. Some review of history taking and physical examination skills is conducted, and students are instructed in various clinical procedures. PA 1341 Applied Study in Emergency 4 Q.H. Medicine During this rotation, the student has the opportunity to become familiar with the problems encountered in an emergency room. The student is responsible for taking medical histories and performing physical examinations on acute as well as nonemergent pa- tients and presenting these to the medical preceptor. When appropriate, the necessary diagnostic and therapeutic measures are taken. Through didactic sessions at the clinical site as well as clinical train- ing, the student may also be exposed to the emer- gency management and treatment of conditions such as trauma, shock, burns, asthma, poisoning, allergic reactions, seizures, and respiratory failure. Prereq.: Successful completion of first year of Pfiysician As- sistant Program. PA 1342 Applied Study in Medicine 4 Q.H. During this in-hospital rotation, the student is given the opportunity to take and record histories and perform physical examinations. Attending medical rounds and conferences, performing diagnostic pro- cedures, presenting case write-ups, recording prog- ress notes, and working under the supervision of a doctor of medicine provide the opportunity to be- come versed in the assessment and management of a variety of medical problems. Emphasis is placed on the skills of collecting, assessing, and presenting patient data for physician review; ordering appro- priate laboratory and diagnostic studies; counseling patients in therapeutic procedures; and helping to coordinate the contributions of other health profes- sionals in the management of the patient. Prereq.: Successful completion of first year of Physician As- sistant Program. PA 1343 Applied Study in Pediatrics 4 Q.H. During the pediatric rotation, the student may de- velop familiarity with outpatient pediatric problems through training in clinics and private pediatric of- fices. Emphasis during this training is on caring for the child from birth through adolescence. Students are given the opportunity to take histories and per- form pediatric physical examinations. Diagnosis and management of common childhood illnesses and evaluation of the variations of growrth and develop- ment are also stressed. Students have the oppor- tunity to develop skills with which to counsel parents on immunizations, child visits, parameters of growth and development, common psychosocial problems, nutrition, and accident and poisoning prevention. Students may also have the chance to learn how to administer immunizations and, when possible, to do audio and visual screening. Prereq.: Successful com- pletion of first year of Physician Assistant Program. 158 / Pharmacy and Allied Health Professions PA 1344 Applied Study in Psychiatry 4 Q.H. The student is offered exposure to a wide variety of psychiatric problems. Clinical settings include wards, clinics, and multiservice centers. Students are ex- pected to perform mental status exams and to do cognitive testing. Emphasis is on recognizing various types of psychiatric problems that require referral to a specialist and managing those problems that can be handled by the nonspecialist. Rotations may also assist students in furthering their understanding of effective patient interactions and the psychiatric components of health, disease, and disability. Prereq.: Successful completion of first year of Ptiysician As- sistant Program. PA 1345 Applied Study in Obstetrics 4 Q.H. and Gynecology This rotation provides students the opportunity to become involved with obstetric and gynecological services provided by teaching hospitals in the Bos- ton area. The emphasis in obstetrics is on pre- and post-natal care, monitoring a woman in labor, as- sisting in deliveries, and developing the skill nec- essary to deliver a child in an emergency situation. Students have the opportunity to take obstetrical histories and perform obstetrical examinations. While rotating through gynecology, the student is expected to learn how to assess and manage a variety of common gynecological problems and to counsel pa- tients on family planning. Prereq.: Successful com- pletion of first year of Physician Assistant Program. PA 1346 Applied Study in Primary Care 4 Q.H. Students on primary care rotations are offered ex- posure to aspects of general medical and family practice with emphasis placed on personalized care of well and sick patients. Patient education, coun- seling, and integration of community services, as well as medical diagnosis and management, are consid- ered a major part of this rotation. Prereq.: Successful completion of first year of Ptiysician Assistant Program. PA 1347 Principles of Obstetrics and 3 Q.H. Gynecology The anatomy and physiology of human reproduction; normal conception, pregnancy, and delivery; prob- lems in conception; the management of pre- and post-natal periods; and the care and resuscitation of the newborn. Emphasis is on the causes, signs, and treatment of common gynecological problems, including the significance of early cancer detection. Different methods of contraception, the effectiveness of each method, and the contraindication, if any, are covered. The course also covers the medical indi- cations for abortion and the appropriateness of the various methods of pregnancy termination. Prereq.: PA 1125, PA 1336, PA 1139. PA 1 348 Principles of Orthopedics 3 Q.H. Common orthopedic problems, including those of the hand, knee, shoulder, and back. Special problems of acute trauma and the management of uncompli- cated orthopedic cases are examined. Instruction also focuses on the techniques of completing an adequate patient history and physical examination of the orthopedic patient. Prereq.: PA 1125, PA 1336, PA 1337, PA 1139. PA 1349 Principles of Pediatrics It 3 Q.H. Continuation of course from previous quarter. Prereq.: PA 1353. PA 1350 Principles of Primary Care 3 Q.H. Management The approach to and management of the patient in a primary care setting. Specific diseases and med- ical conditions common to primary care practice will be discussed, including low back pain, anxiety, fa- tigue and weight loss, chest pain, gastrointestinal problems, upper respiratory infections, obesity, and dermatologic complaints. Attention is given to psy- chosocial aspects of disease as well as aspects of prevention. Students are expected to have a sound basis in pathophysiology and medicine. Prereq.: PA 1336, PA 1337, PA 1338. PA 3102 Principles of 4 Q.H. Electrocardiography Principles of electrophysiology and its application to electrocardiographic tracing. Students receive in- struction in recognizing arrhythmias, rate and axis determination, conduction abnormalities, character- istic changes seen in myocardial infarction and is- chemia, as well as drug and metabolic effect mani- fested on the electrocardiogram. PA 3103 Rehabilitation Medicine 4 Q.H. Techniques of effective planning and decision mak- ing for patients with multiple chronic problems. The purposes, techniques, and potential of rehabilitation medicine are also discussed. Prereq.: PA 1336, PA 1337, PA 1338, PA 1134, PA 1139. PA 1353 Principles of Pediatrics i 3 Q.H. Physiological and psychological fundamentals of child development. Emphasis is on the major common pe- diatric illnesses, their signs, symptoms, and treat- ment regimens; various types of medications used in pediatrics, their indication and dosage in relation to specific disorders; and the management of pedia- tric emergencies such as cardiac arrest, anaphy- laxis, convulsions, coma, and high fevers. Prereq.: PA 1125, PA 1134, PA 1136, PA 1139. PA 1354 Principles of Psychiatry 3 Q.H. An opportunity to understand how to work with pa- tients and families exhibiting psychiatric problems. Topics include psychological growth and develop- ment, the effect of social milieu on behavior, the psychological bases of drug and alcohol abuse, and the dynamics of psychosomatic problems. PA 1355 Principles and Concepts of 3 Q.H. Surgical Intervention in Disease Processes Major and minor surgical conditions, with emphasis on indications for surgical intervention and pre- and post-operative management in both the ambulatory and inpatient settings. Prereq.: PA 1336, PA 1337, PA 1125. Physician Assistants / 1 59 PA 1356 Basic Diagnostic Radiology 2 Q.H. An introduction to the underlying principles, use, and interpretation of radiographs pertinent to primary care medicine. PA 1357 Cancer Prevention 3 Q.H. Principles of primary and secondary prevention of cancer. Included in the course is information on biostatistics, cancer as a public health problem, and cancer epidemiology. Prereq.: PA 1336, PA 1337, PA 1338, PA 1139. PLA 1358 Medical Therapeutics 3 Q.H. A case-study format that involves students in plan- ning the management of common disease states. Used to help students understand the clinical use of common therapeutic agents. Prereq.: PA 1336, PA 1337, PA 1338, PA 1139. PA 1 359 Applied Study in Surgery 4 Q.H. During this rotation students participate in a variety of surgical patient care responsibilities under the supervision of a surgical resident and/or staff sur- geon. The emphasis of the rotation is on general surgery, but the students have an opportunity for varying exposure to other surgical specialties and sub-specialties. Students assist in the initial assess- ment of the surgical patient, including obtaining an accurate medical history and performing a physical examination. As members of the surgical team, the students are involved in pre-operative management, including patient education and any procedures nec- essary to prepare the patient for surgery. Students assist the surgeon in the operating room when ap- propriate and have the opportunity to become fa- miliar with operating room procedures and equip- ment. Students are also involved in the post-operative evaluation and management of the patient. Students will have the opportunity to attend surgical grand rounds and other surgically oriented educational meetings when available at their rotation sites. Prereq.: Successful completion of first year of Physician Assistant Program. PA 1 360 Applied Study in Outpatient 4 QH. Medicine During this rotation the students participate in pro- viding health care to the outpatient adult patient under the supervision of a physician specialist in internal medicine. The students will have the oppor- tunity to become involved in the initial assessment and management of adults with a medical complaint as well as the ongoing assessment and management of patients with established diagnoses. It is antici- pated that the student will be exposed to many of the common problems encountered in medical prac- tice, such as hypertension, diabetes, and heart dis- ease. The emphasis is on the assessment and man- agement of both acute and chronic medical problems. Prereq. : Successful completion of first year of Physician Assistant Program. PA 1 361 Applied Study Elective 4 Q.H. This full time clinical rotation provides the student with an opportunity to obtain additional exposure to an area of clinical medicine in which the student has a special interest. Students may choose additional experience in an area covered by required rotations or select a subspecialty such as dermatology, or- thopedics, cardiology geriatrics, etc. All elective ro- tations are reviewed and must be approved by the clinical coordinator Prereq.: Successful completion of first year of Physician Assistant Program. PA 31 01 Clinical Neurology 4 Q.H. The clinical application of neuroanatomy and neu- rophysiology. Students wiji have the opportunity to develop an understanding of the normal functioning of the nervous system as well as to develop a clinical approach to the assessment and management of a variety of nervous system disorders and disease states. PCL 1301 Basic Pharmacology 3 Q.H. The classification, mechanisms of action, and uses of a broad spectrum of therapeutic agents. Dose response, side effects, and adverse reactions are emphasized. Prereq.: PA students only PHL 3265 Issues in Medical Ethics 4 Q.H. Designed to help familiarize students with various philosophical perspectives in medical ethics, includ- ing historical, classical, ethical, and contemporary philosophies related to issues such as abortion, truth telling, genetic control, and the allocation of scarce medical resources. Euthanasia and paternalism are among topics discussed during the course. SOC 3226 The Aging Process 3 Q.H. Socioeconomic and social-psychological conse- quences of aging from the perspective of health care providers. A major part of the course focuses directly on the biological changes entailed in aging and the appropriate medical management of geriatric patients. Open to students expected to provide health care services to geriatric patients. Academic Calendar 1 985- September 1985 Monday Tuesday- Friday Tuesday- Wednesday Thursday Monday- Saturday Monday 2 3-6 10-11 12 9-14 16 16-19 23 October 1985 14 November 1985 11 26 28-December 1 December 1985 2-5 9-13 16-January 1 January 1986 1 2 15 February 1986 17 March 1986 4 10-13 24-28 31 -April 5 April 1986 7 21 May 1986 26 Monday- Thursday Monday Monday Monday Tuesday Thursday- Sunday Monday- Thursday Monday- Friday Monday- Wednesday Wednesday Thursday Wednesday Monday Tuesday Monday- Thursday Monday- Friday Monday- Saturday Monday Monday 86 Labor Day. University closed. Final examinations for Graduate Schools! Fall 1985 registration-Burlington 1:00-3:00, 5:30- 8:00 Fall commencement. Vacation period. Beginning of 1 985-86 academic year. Fall 1985 registration-Boston 1:00-8:00 Graduate classes begin. Columbus Day. University closed. Veterans Day observed. University closed. Winter 1986 registration-Burlington 1:00-3:00, 5:30-8:00 Thanksgiving Day recess. Winter 1986 registration-Boston 1:00-3:00,5:30-8:00 Final examinations for Graduate Schools. Christmas vacation. New Year's Day. University closed. Graduate classes begin. Martin Luther King, Jr.'s birthday. University closed. Presidents' Day. University closed. Spring 1986 registration-Burlington 1:00-3:00, 5:30-8:00 Spring 1986 registration-Boston 1:00-3:00, 5:30- 6:00 Final examinations for Graduate Sphools. Vacation period. Graduate classes begin. Patriots' Day. University closed. Monday Memorial Day. University closed. June 1986 9-10 11-12 16-20 22 23-28 Monday- Tuesday Wednesday- Thursday Monday- Friday Sunday Monday- Saturday Monday 30 July 1986 4 Thursday September 1986 I Monday I I Thursday 15-27 Monday- Saturday 29 Monday Summer 1986 registration-Burlington 1:00-3:00, 5:30-8:00 Summer 1986 registration-Boston 5:30-8:00 Final examinations for Graduate Schools. Commencement. Vacation period. Graduate classes begin. Independence Day. University closed. Labor Day. University closed. Fall commencement Vacation period. Beginning of 1 986-87 academic year. Calendar dates are subject to ctiange. The University community will be notified if such changes necessary. NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES DUPL Ul:i!:lilliilliilli I 3 9358 01114448 9